{
"Contributors": [
"Ujjwala Anantheswaran"
],
"Source": [
"ms_marco"
],
"URL": [
"https://microsoft.github.io/msmarco/"
],
"Categories": [
"Question Answering"
],
"Reasoning": [
"Abductive Reasoning"
],
"Definition": [
"Given a passage and a query based on the passage, generate an unambiguous, concise and simple answer to the query from information in the passage. Note that the answer may not be present in exact form."
],
"Input_language": [
"English"
],
"Output_language": [
"English"
],
"Instruction_language": [
"English"
],
"Domains": [
"Global Facts"
],
"Positive Examples": [
{
"input": "Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP) Eligibility. To see if you might be eligible for Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP) benefits, visit our pre-screening tool. For households in the 48 Contiguous States and the District of Columbia October 1, 2016 through September 30, 2017. To get SNAP benefits, households must meet certain tests, including resource and income tests: 1 Resources. 2 Income. 3 Deductions. 4 Employment Requirements. 5 Special Rules for Elderly or Disabled. 6 Immigrant Eligibility. In fact, we’re not spending enough on food stamps. The need for food assistance is greater than food stamps can fill, and the benefit amount is too low to allow a family to purchase an adequate, healthy diet. The average monthly food stamp benefit per person is only $133.85, or less than $1.50 per person, per meal. Between 2009-2011 the purchasing power of food stamps declined by about 7%, or $47/month for a family of four, due to inflation in the cost of food. You’ve likely heard stories (and outrage) about people using food stamps to purchase “steak and lobster” as well as cigarettes and alcohol, showing up at the grocery store in a nice car, nice clothes, a nice purse or an iPhone. But the federal government sets the food stamps benefit amount at, on average, roughly $4 a day per person. Yes, someone could save up their monthly allotment to buy some high-priced food items for a special occasion. Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program. Effective October 2016. Maximum Monthly SNAP Amounts. The chart below shows the maximum dollar amount of SNAP benefits your household can receive each month. This dollar amount is based on the number of people in your household, your income and your expenses. You could receive any amount up to or including these amounts. National Standards for reasonable amounts have been established for five necessary expenses: food, housekeeping supplies, apparel and services, personal care products and services, and miscellaneous. See the SNAP page on Applicants and Recipients for detailed information about eligibility requirements and benefits. The SNAP home page provides access to information on all aspects of the program. fns On average, 45 million people received SNAP benefits each month in fiscal year 2011, which represents a 70 percent increase over the roughly 26 million people (or one of every 11) who received benefits in 2007. The truth is, a $125 per person per month grocery budget may seem like a farce to a household currently spending $300 per person per month, but it’s actually quite achievable. *For households with more than eight people, add $5,408 per additional person. Always check with the appropriate managing agency to ensure the most accurate guidelines. To see if you might be eligible for SNAP benefits, use SNAP's pre-screening tool. Related Links. ¡ 1 Exija Sus Derechos! - 4300 S. ¡ 2 EXIJA SUS DERECHOS! Usted Tiene El Derecho - DHS 8219 S. ¡ 3 La tarjeta Illinois Link se acepta en mercados de agricultores selectos! DHS 9201 S. 4 B Attitude - Folic Acid - DHS 4758. 5 AABD Cash Aid to the Aged, Blind or Disabled - DHS 587. 6 Active Play for Families - DHS 4586. Query: average amount food stamps per one person in al for a month",
"output": "The average monthly food stamp benefit per person is only $133.85, or less than $1.50 per person.",
"explanation": "The passage details the eligibility and resources provided by SNAP. The passage includes information on individual per meal food stamp benefit, that can be used to answer the query."
},
{
"input": "Healing takes at least 6 weeks. If you injure other body organs, you may need to stay in the hospital. Otherwise you can heal at home. Most people with broken ribs do not need surgery. In the emergency room you may have received a strong medicine (such as a nerve block or narcotics) if you were in severe pain. You will not have a belt or a bandage around your chest because these would keep your ribs from moving when you breathe or cough. Broken ribs are often the very first sign of multiple myeloma at work. My ribs broke in a fall in late 2008. They have never healed ( bone to bone, that is). They have scarred over and generally stay in place--but they do remind me--when I do any hard trunk twisting exercise / movement / throwing / jumping . These complicated fractured ribs are often more unstable during activity and breathing and will likely take longer to heal; some may never heal normally. 3D reconstruction of fractured ribs before surgery. Historically, good pain control and at times the use of a stabilizing elastic binder (to wrap around the chest) have been the only treatment options for most rib fractures. These treatment options continue to be utilized and are effective for many patients with uncomplicated rib fractures. For the more complicated rib fractures we may also consider early surgical intervention to stabilize the unstable and/or displaced fractures. A rib fracture can be very painful because your ribs move when you breathe, cough, and move your upper body. The ribs in the middle of the chest are the ones that break most often. Rib fractures often occur with other chest and organ injuries. So your health care providers will also check to see if you have any other injuries. You may need prescription pain medicines (narcotics) to keep your pain under control while your bones heal. 1 Take these medicines on the schedule your health care provider prescribed. 2 DO NOT drink alcohol, drive, or operate heavy machinery while you are taking these medicines. How long does it take for a fractured rib take to heal on a 1-2 month old infant? And would there be any physical signs such as bruising on the skin? Dr. Ed Friedlander Dr. Friedlander A: Most fractured ribs heal within a month or two, states Mayo Clinic. While the rib is healing, it is very important to control pain so the patient can breathe comfortably. When a cracked rib prevents deep breathing, lung conditions such as pneumonia may occur. So why didn’t your doctor try to keep your broken ribs from moving by taping your ribs? Here’s the dilemma: Your ribs have to move every time you take a breath. And we all need to breathe. How long does it take for a fractured rib take to heal on a 1-2 month old infant? And would there be any physical signs such as bruising on the skin? Dr. Ed Friedlander Dr. Friedlander Apply an ice pack 20 minutes of every hour you are awake for the first 2 days, then 10 to 20 minutes 3 times daily as needed to reduce pain and swelling. Wrap the ice pack in a cloth before applying to the injured area. Query: how long does broken ribs take to heal",
"output": "Most fractured ribs heal within a month or two, states Mayo Clinic.",
"explanation": "The passage from Mayo Clinic talks about different injuries, and the healing process and duration. The query is specifically about the time broken ribs take to heal, which can be answered from the passage."
}
],
"Negative Examples": [
{
"input": "Ricotta cheese that is opened can be stored in the refrigerator for one to two weeks. However ricotta that is stored in the freezer can be used for up to three months. Continue Reading Also while on the topic I checked my (packaged) low-moisture part-skim mozzarella and the date goes out until july but then it says use within 3-5 days of opening. I have had it opened for a while but I see no signs of it being spoiled? No mold, not a bad stench, but would it still be bad to use? Uhg who new cheese could be so confusing 0_- How long do brie cheese, feta cheese, ricotta cheese, cottage cheese, mozzarella cheese and cream cheese last? Shelf life, storage tips & expiration A: A refrigerator keeps all foods safe to eat for four hours without electricity. Beyond that time, some, but not all foods remain safe to eat. Foods that should be discarded after four hours are meats, dairy, soft unprocessed cheeses, and prepared meals or leftovers. What's the fridge life? For semi-hard and semi-soft cheeses -- the middle ground -- your time frame is a little less than harder cheeses. There's more moisture present in the cheeses, so they aren't going to keep as long. I'd say two to four weeks after the expiration date is the basic time frame. Here are some tips for proper way of refrigerating cheese: 1 Keep refrigerated and tightly sealed. Frozen cheese may lose some of its texture and flavor; the thawed cheese will be best suited to cooked dishes, such as sauces, soups and casseroles. Keep Reading. 1 Beef Sirloin Safe to Eat. Updated 1 year ago | 11. Beef Safe to Eat? 2 Tips for how to eat anchovies. Updated 5 months ago | 8. Anchovies; 3 Refrigerator pickles left out over night - safe to eat? Updated 6 months ago | 2. Pickles Safe to Eat? 4 Lye pretzel dogs - will the dog/sausage part be safe to eat, too? Updated 4 months ago | 0 Read the Okay to eat old ricotta? discussion from the Chowhound Home Cooking food community. Join the discussion today. Read the Okay to eat old ricotta? discussion from the Chowhound Home Cooking food community. Proper food storage is very important to extending the shelf life of soft cheeses such as brie cheese, feta cheese, ricotta cheese, cottage cheese, or mozzarella cheese. You can help these types of cheeses keep fresh longer by storing them in your refrigerator at 40°F or lower immediately after each use. A: Because ricotta cheese is a milk-based product, it does go bad. Unopened ricotta cheese stored in the refrigerator is good for between five and seven days past the sell-by date. See Full Answer Query: how long will ricotta cheese keep in fridge once opened",
"output": "Ricotta cheese that is opened can be stored in the refrigerator for eight to nine weeks.",
"explanation": "The passage mentions clearly that ricotta cheese that has been opened can be stored in the refrigerator for one to two weeks. Hence this answer is incorect."
},
{
"input": "SMRT-Y Kit Includes: 1 Controller User Interface. 2 In-Ground Soil Moisture Sensor. 3 Anodized, rust-proof screws, 1.5 (two per package) 4 Wire nuts – 5 blue, 2 gray, 1 yellow. 5 Multilingual instruction manual, “Quick Start” Guide and sticker that reads: “This controller is connected to a Rain Bird Soil Moisture Sensor”. Turns any controller into a smart controller. The SMRT-Y Soil Moisture Sensor Kit is an easy to install add-on to any standard irrigation system that directly links your irrigation controller to your landscapes moisture requirements. Program the controller to water every day that irrigation is allowed, and the soil moisture sensor will do the rest. As the SMRT-Y optimizes moisture at the root zone, you will enjoy a lush, healthier landscape that is less prone to fungus and shallow root growth. User Interface with LCD Readout. 1 Touchpad keys with digital LCD readout displays: 2 Automatic moisture threshold setting with increase/decrease adjustment. 3 Sensor bypass touchpad key for easy deactivation. 4 Up to two independent zones can be isolated from sensor. 5 Designed for outdoor installation. The moisture sensor works when the series of discs in the sensor expands they get wet, and to a certain size, they flip a micro switch, this interrupts the current going from the controller to the valves, whereby the controller will tell the valves to start watering in the middle of a rainstorm, if the valves do not get the memo then they don't turn ... A moisture sensor estimates the amount of water in the soil that is being tested. It works by measuring the soil's ability to conduct electricity, higher moisture means more c…onducting power. The reason that some look down on soil moisture meters is because of the plethora of crappy and cheap ones that don't actually work well... but not all meters are bad. I use this soil moisture sensor in my house for my potted plants, and I actually have been very pleased with it. Advanced TDT Digital Soil Moisture Sensor. 1 Sensor uses Time Domain Transmissometry (TDT) and digital signal processing to measure soil moisture content accurately and consistently. 2 Corrosion-resistant in-ground sensor made of high-grade 304 stainless steel. 3 No maintenance sensor – just bury and forget. soil moisture meters are garbage!! Lift up a bone dry pot and feel what it weighs. thatll give you an idea. like he said ! ... use your fingers.... a couple inches deep and still dry its time to water! I dont water heavey. I find it better to water lightly more often (2-3 days) instead of drenching the soil. At field capacity most soils have a soil moisture tension between 0.05 and 0.33 bars. Soils classified as sandy may have field capacity tensions around 0.10 bars, while clayey soil will have field capacity at a tension around 0.33 bars. At field capacity it is relatively easy for a plant to remove water from the soil. Discussion in 'Organics' started by BillyBonnie, May 30, 2012. BillyBonnie New Member. I get so tired of trying to guess when my plants need water. eDude Well-Known Member. I was born with ten soil moister meters.. nastynate420 Active Member. soil moisture meters are garbage!! BillyBonnie New Member. Query: how does a soil moisture sensor work",
"output": "This controller is connected to a Rain Bird Soil Moisture Sensor",
"explanation": "The above output does not answer the query at all. It is irrelevant, as answer should have been about the purpose of the sensor, not what the sensor is connectde to."
}
],
"Instances": [
{
"id": "task870-dbbf31bb5c44474b90f883ba98d64f9c",
"input": "SMRT-Y Kit Includes: 1 Controller User Interface. 2 In-Ground Soil Moisture Sensor. 3 Anodized, rust-proof screws, 1.5 (two per package) 4 Wire nuts – 5 blue, 2 gray, 1 yellow. 5 Multilingual instruction manual, “Quick Start” Guide and sticker that reads: “This controller is connected to a Rain Bird Soil Moisture Sensor”. Turns any controller into a smart controller. The SMRT-Y Soil Moisture Sensor Kit is an easy to install add-on to any standard irrigation system that directly links your irrigation controller to your landscapes moisture requirements. Program the controller to water every day that irrigation is allowed, and the soil moisture sensor will do the rest. As the SMRT-Y optimizes moisture at the root zone, you will enjoy a lush, healthier landscape that is less prone to fungus and shallow root growth. User Interface with LCD Readout. 1 Touchpad keys with digital LCD readout displays: 2 Automatic moisture threshold setting with increase/decrease adjustment. 3 Sensor bypass touchpad key for easy deactivation. 4 Up to two independent zones can be isolated from sensor. 5 Designed for outdoor installation. The moisture sensor works when the series of discs in the sensor expands they get wet, and to a certain size, they flip a micro switch, this interrupts the current going from the controller to the valves, whereby the controller will tell the valves to start watering in the middle of a rainstorm, if the valves do not get the memo then they don't turn ... A moisture sensor estimates the amount of water in the soil that is being tested. It works by measuring the soil's ability to conduct electricity, higher moisture means more c…onducting power. The reason that some look down on soil moisture meters is because of the plethora of crappy and cheap ones that don't actually work well... but not all meters are bad. I use this soil moisture sensor in my house for my potted plants, and I actually have been very pleased with it. Advanced TDT Digital Soil Moisture Sensor. 1 Sensor uses Time Domain Transmissometry (TDT) and digital signal processing to measure soil moisture content accurately and consistently. 2 Corrosion-resistant in-ground sensor made of high-grade 304 stainless steel. 3 No maintenance sensor – just bury and forget. soil moisture meters are garbage!! Lift up a bone dry pot and feel what it weighs. thatll give you an idea. like he said ! ... use your fingers.... a couple inches deep and still dry its time to water! I dont water heavey. I find it better to water lightly more often (2-3 days) instead of drenching the soil. At field capacity most soils have a soil moisture tension between 0.05 and 0.33 bars. Soils classified as sandy may have field capacity tensions around 0.10 bars, while clayey soil will have field capacity at a tension around 0.33 bars. At field capacity it is relatively easy for a plant to remove water from the soil. Discussion in 'Organics' started by BillyBonnie, May 30, 2012. BillyBonnie New Member. I get so tired of trying to guess when my plants need water. eDude Well-Known Member. I was born with ten soil moister meters.. nastynate420 Active Member. soil moisture meters are garbage!! BillyBonnie New Member. Query: how does a soil moisture sensor work",
"output": [
"A soil moisture sensor works by measuring the soil's ability to conduct electricity."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-bd5643400f044636891d1e236c3ffdac",
"input": "Don't charge a frozen battery. Allow the battery to warm to above 32°F (0°C) before charging. 5. If applicable, remove the vent caps and check the battery's water level and, if low, add distilled water to cover the tops of the plates. How long do you have to run a car engine to charge the battery back to the point it was at before starting the car? Do NOT charge the battery before you test the open circuit voltage. If the voltmeter shows a voltage reading of 12.2 volts then the battery is approximately 50% charged. Since the battery is 50% charged, this means that there is approximately half of the 60 amp-hours in the battery or 30 amp-hours. Slow, fast, and faster: Where to charge electric cars Charging an electric car is not quite as easy as just plugging it in. There are different charging options that fill a car's battery and different rates. In manual testing with the 12V car voltmeter, it does appear that I have about 14,1V to 14,3V at idle with everything off for a few minutes after starting the car, but if I do turn both seats and the AC on, then it goes down to maybe as low as 13,1V or so. The J1772 plug was specifically designed for electric car charging. Problem is, given a typical electric car like the Nissan Leaf, it can take 15 hours to charge the battery from empty to its EPA-rated 75-mile range from that standard household source. Most plug-in cars have a J1772 port, letting them plug into public charging stations. Therefore it is necessary to put about 30 amp hours plus 20% more to compensate for the internal resistance in the battery for a total of 30 amps x 0.2 = 36 amp-hours to fully charge your battery. Step 3: If you charge your battery at a 10-amp rate and you need to replace 36 amp-hours in the battery. To determine how long (in hours) you will need to charge your battery, divided 36 by 10 = 3.6 or 3.6 hours to recharge your battery. A 12 volt / 10 amp 3-stage automatic charger is the best ... Step up to twin chargers on the car and connect to a 240-volt, high-power wall charger (an extra-cost charging unit, not just a 240-volt line) and the charging speed zooms to 62 miles of range per hour, and the total charging time drops to under 4 hours, 45 minutes. If we were recharging the battery with a 15-amp battery charger, the recharge time would be roughly 3.6-hours. Again, this example does not take into account the multi-step charging approach of most smart battery chargers, but it does serve as an excellent guide to battery recharge times. Charge time for a dead battery can take up to 12 hours or longer. There are many factors that determine how long the charge will take, including the size and age of the... Charge time for a dead battery can take up to 12 hours or longer. Query: how long does a fast charge on a car battery take",
"output": [
"It takes 15 hours to charge on a car battery."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-774c47c8b1524ca189f81d5188a04746",
"input": "Call as an intern on neurosurgery is one night in seven which isn't too bad (and keeps the total hours down for the week such that I can spend more time in the OR without being just plain dead tired). I was lucky in that my parents have been happily married for 28 years. It takes a special personality of both the surgeon and the spouse to deal with the stress of this job. My mom is incredibly understanding and independent, which I may argue is more important than how the surgeon handles it. Follow this question. 1 Enter your phone number and/or email and we'll send you a message when there's an update to this question! 2 Enter your phone number and/or email and we'll send you a message when there's an update to this question! Few neurosurgeons work less than 50-60 hours a week (80+ is not at all unusual), practically all of them complain about lack of time with family (high divorce rate), and hobbies are usually flexible ones (e.g. if you run, better run around a track when you're on call). The average pay for a neurosurgeon ranges between £53.00 and £56.75 per hour. This brings to an average of £113,500 per month, however though different regions across UK offer different salary amounts to the neurosurgeons. Canada [1] The annual salary for Neurosurgeons in Canada ranges from C$178,000 to C$351,000. A neurosurgeon is a specialist surgeon and commands and very high salary. The average neurosurgeon salary is $368,000 without bonuses. With bonuses, the average salary is just over$500,000. A neurosurgeon is also called a brain surgeon. Types of Surgeons and Average Compensation for Each. 1 General Surgeons: (5 Years of residency, no fellowship required) Perform appendectomies, hernia surgeries, and other types of surgeries including liver, spleen, intestinal, and some head, neck, chest surgeries, excluding hearts. In surgery, the training is rigorous and the lifestyle that accompanies a busy surgical practice is taxing, but surgery is also one of the most rewarding fields of medicine. After training, the average general surgeon works 50-60 hours per week (not including time available for call). Depending on the practice situation chosen, you can be on call as much as all the time (if in private solo practice) to once a week (if in a large group practice). The following specialists are some of the most common examples: 1 Allergists (specialists in diagnosing and treating hay fever or other allergies) 2 Cardiologists (heart specialists) 3 Dermatologists (skin specialists) 4 Gastroenterologists (digestive system specialists) 5 Ophthalmologists (eye specialists) Pediatricians who work full time don't necessarily work a standard 40-hour week, according to a December 2009 article in “Pediatrics,” which reported full-time pediatricians in subspecialties such as pediatric surgery worked an average of 33.7 hours a week. Query: how long is a typical week for a neurosurgeon",
"output": [
"Few neurosurgeons work less than 50 to 60 hours a week, 80+ is not at all unusual."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-65159596c18f42cab8ecdcec5d1529a4",
"input": "How long should the essay or statement be? Your essay should never exceed the limit given in the application instructions. If no limit is specified, make your essay no longer than two pages. How much of the information already in my application should I repeat? Admissions reviewers may not read every detail of your application carefully. There is no magic formula which states X words = 1 paragraph or X sentences = 1 paragraph Write your topic sentence, then write as many paragraphs as you need to write in order to completely and properly explain that topic, then write your conclusion. And that's how long your essay should be! As long as you need it to be! There is no magic formula which states X words = 1 paragraph or X sentences = 1 paragraph. Write your topic sentence, then write as many paragraphs as you need to write in order to completely and properly explain that topic, then write your conclusion. Best Answer: It should be the length you need to cover everything you need to say. At least 3 though. Intro should include the topic your going talk about including the sub topics and a thesis statement (once statement that says exactly what the essay is over). each paragraph in the body will be the the different subtopics under your topic. During an essay test, usually one or two paragraphs will answer short essay questions. For big essay tests, where there is only 1 question for a whole hour-long test, you will be expected to compose an entire essay. In that case, write 5 paragraphs including all the parts of a composition of between 1-2 written pages. Many colleges also ask for short answer responses, sometimes called supplemental prompts or personal insight questions, in the range of 150, 250, or 350 words; in this case, aim for the suggested length and be aware of the hard limits on either end, but don’t stress if you’re over or under by 10-15%. Writing a College Application Essay That Schools Can't Resist Private School Application Essay Tips - 5 Things You Need to Know College Application Short Answer Length: Is 150 Words Ideal? It should be a simple a directed answer to the question that your essay will elaborate on. The body is where you provide the details of the essay. required length of the essay, a rule of thumb is this: 200+ words (1 -2 paragraphs in the body). 400+ words (3 -4 paragraphs in the body). 800+ word (6 -8 paragraphs in the body). Essay question length depends on the question if the question has about five parts to it then you should have about five paragraphs but no matter what you should at least write about three or more paragraphs on all essay questions if possible, cuz i understand that some question may not be able to write that many questions but you should have more then one paragraph. Would I still be able to write an essay about the importance of flamenco in my life, as it IS my main extracurricular? Also, exactly how long would this short essay be? My essay is about 500 words but no words are wasted, it's flowy, and it reads quite fast. Do you think it would be alright if I use it, or should I elaborate on something else? Query: how long should an essay answer be",
"output": [
"During an essay test, usually one or two paragraphs will answer short essay questions. For big essay tests, where there is only 1 question for a whole hour-long test, you will be expected to compose an entire essay. In that case, write 5 paragraphs including all the parts of a composition of between 1-2 written pages."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-042b4e47b6814dd395c0a8ff3fbec5a0",
"input": "affects anorthosite-suite rocks in the Morin terrane could be a distinct event after anorthosite intrusion (Scenario A), or the result of >300 m.y. of slow cooling (Scenario B). Anorthosite Fest. Through a Global Forum initiative at Brown University, Professor Lew Ashwal from Witwatersrand University in South Africa visited the Department of Geological Sciences from July 16 to 27th. The overall goal of the Forum was to initiate long-term research links with prominent universities around the globe. Lew is a world expert on terrestrial anorthosite formation and his visit sparked broad interest and support across Brown/MIT NLSI for discussions on the formation of lunar anorthosite. During Lew’s visit, the current knowledge of the origin of both terrestrial and lunar anorthosites was reviewed and interdisciplinary research directions discussed. Anorthosite and labradorescence. Anorthosite is an igneous monomineralic rock that is composed of plagioclase feldspar (over 90% of the rock is composed of this mineral). Plagioclase is a very common mineral group, more than half of the Earth’s crust is composed of it. Anorthosite in many cases is not light-colored at all. This is the result of tiny Fe-Ti oxide inclusions in plagioclase crystals that give them bluish-black hue. One fascinating aspect associated with many anorthosites is an effect called labradorescence. It is a special form of iridescence. of the western body of gabbroic anorthosite (Rose, 1960). The anorthosite probably originally formed by plagioclase floatation in mafic magma chamber at the base of the crust (Ashwal, 1993). The ores for med late during the crystallization of anorthosite by concentration of Fe-Ti oxides (Ashwal, 1993). metamorphism: (1) precipitation of metamorphic zircon from solid state reactions involving breakdown of Zr-bearing phases or (2) precipitation of partial intergranular melt, enriched in zirconium by partial reabsorbion of Lew Ashwal greeting an old friend. Credit: Brown/MIT. Lew’s visit began with two extended lectures by him on terrestrial anorthosites, followed by a three-day field trip to anorthosite regions in the Adirondacks. A few people raised questions about how the new-found H2O in the lunar mantle would change our models of anorthosite formation. Also, the issue of how the very pure anorthosite (with scarce mafic minerals) widely observed across the Moon is formed was also discussed. In comparing the lunar anorthosites to terrestrial examples, it was unclear whether they were analogous to Archean anorthosites, which have similarly high An contents, but are thought to be derived from hydrous magmas. metamorphic zircon for mation in samples studied by Bingen et al. (2000), were not found in the thin sections (see also Davidson and v an Breemen, 1988). In the Ivry deposit, silica activity was high enough along the plagioclase boundaries to form zircon during cooling or metamorphism rather than baddeleyite or srilankite. Metamorphic Zircon in Fe-Ti Ores, Morin Anorthosite Complex (Grenville Province, Quebec) Anorthosite is a plutonic rock just as granite and gabbro and it is usually associated with the latter. Therefore we can conclude that despite being officially leucocratic it actually is usually associated with mafic rocks. Query: how is anorthosite formed",
"output": [
"The anorthosite probably originally formed by plagioclase floatation in mafic magma chamber at the base of the crust."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-bfc58ddf51984b3f858722ab1bbc779f",
"input": "Patients may remain ventilated for years (home ventilation) as long as no other complications arise. Jan 7, 2013 ·. The answer is for as long as need be in the ICU. Once trached, if the patient can be weaned off the vent, they can go to the ward within the week. If they can't be weaned they can either go home with the help of specialized in-home intensive care services, or to a long term ventilator dependent institution (this may take weeks to months to set up). Oct 27, 2014 ·. All Answers (8) 1 Having low blood pressure is not a good sign, especially if refractory to the treatment. It may show that the patient is going through septic shock. 2 Having low blood pressures is not a good sign, especially if refractory. The patient might proceed to septic shock. Dec 29, 2012 ·. There is no precise limit. Some patients may survive for a long time. By and large the cause of death is infrequently respiratory failure , but MODS (multiple organ failure ) is the culprit. if no success in weaning from the ventilator, a tracheostomy should be performed relatively soon . Patients may remain ventilated for years (home ventilation) as long as no other complications arise https://s3-ap-southeast-2.amazonaws.com/intensivecarehotline.com.questions/Tracheostomy+and+weaning+off+the+ventilator+in+Intensive+Care%2C+how+long+can+it+take-.mp3 Podcast: Play in new window | Download These are the most common scenarios where a weaning off the ventilator with a Tracheostomy can be delayed and therefore difficult and the weaning process in Intensive Care can therefore then take many weeks and many months before a discharge out of Intensive Care is possible. Depression and lack of Quality of Life. That usually gives you, your critically ill loved one and the ICU team a good indication of how long the process might take to wean your loved one off the ventilator. The frequency that your loved one stays off the ventilator should increase day by day, with the goal to be off the ventilator within a few days or a week or two at the most. What we have to do if patient is in unconscious even after have been using ventilator and fits are observed some times while in ventilation process , the patient is a 68 year old and female and having 125/135pulse rate and bp is 20-24, oxygen pulse is 100. In your FREE report you’ll also discover. 1 How to ask the doctors and the nurses the right questions. 2 Discover the many competing interests in Intensive Care and how your critically ill loved one’s treatment may depend on those competing interests. 3 How to eliminate fear, frustration, stress, struggle and vulnerability even if your loved one is dying. All Answers (8) 1 Having low blood pressure is not a good sign, especially if refractory to the treatment. 2 Having low blood pressures is not a good sign, especially if refractory. @ 3 Samad Ej Golzari..I agree that we can not withdraw the patient from ventilator assuming that he/she would not survive.. Up to 20% of patients requiring mechanical ventilation will suffer from difficult weaning (the need of more than 7 days of weaning after the first spontaneous breathing trial), which may depend on several reversible causes: respiratory and/or cardiac load, neuromuscular and neuropsychological factors, and metabolic and endocrine disorders. Query: how long does ventilator weaning take",
"output": [
"Ventilator weaning take more than 7 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-38ce61c1a3194c079ee94660d8d6b3b6",
"input": "How long is a short story? Although a short story could be as long as 30,000 words, stories of that length begin to become too bulky for their genre. These days, editors of literary magazines are readily publishing short stories of approximately 3,500 words, and they are shying away from longer works. Short story. A short story is a piece of prose fiction that can be read in one sitting. Emerging from earlier oral storytelling traditions in the 17th century, the short story has grown to encompass a body of work so diverse as to defy easy characterization. At its most prototypical the short story features a small cast of named characters, and focuses on a self-contained incident with the intent of evoking a single effect or mood. In doing so, short stories make use of plot, resonance, and other dynamic c If the average length is 300 pages, you're looking at a 75,000 word manuscript (approximately) One reason it's harder for a new author to sell a 140,000 word manuscript is the size of the book. A 500+ page book is going to take up the space of almost two, 300 page books on the shelves. Below is a guide to story lengths and how they might be named (there’s a fair bit of overlap as research shows that opinions differ greatly): 1 Flash fiction: under 1,000 words. 2 Short story: 500 to 17,000 words. 3 Novelette: 7,500 to 25,000 words. 4 Novella: 10,000 to 70,000 words. 5 Novel: 50,000 words or more. Trackbacks/Pingbacks. 1 7 Rules for Writing Short Films | FilmmakerIQ.com 2 - [... Short Film Research | Gina A2 - [...] skills as writing a feature length script – though on a smaller scale” –(Stephanie Jolland, http://staging.raindance.org/7-rules-for-writing-short-films-2/ [...] 3 Short Films; Question 1-5. I know that a fathom is a unit of measure used by sailors, but how long is a fathom? What is a joss (from Victory, by Joseph Conrad)? What does eschew (from The Pickwick Papers) mean? Which Hemingway story references the running of the bulls in Spain? What's a clink? My dad mentioned that his granddad was there for a long time during World War I. A short story is a narrative, rarely, over 10,000 words or below 500 words, more commonly 1,500-5,000 words -- a single-sitting read, but with enough time and weight to move the reader. It is narrow and focused to produce a singular effect, the story's meaning, most commonly thru events affecting some change or denial of change in an individual. We accept stories of up to 8,000 words, which is probably an average word limit, relative to other American journals of our size. You’ll find journals that cap their stories at 5,000 or 6,000 words, and you’ll find some journals that will accept stories as long as 10,000 words. The question now is: when is a comment too long? I apologize for the lack of narrative arc. Reply; Roxanne Rashedi - February 12th, 2013. Dear Joe, I couldn’t agree more! Some of my all time favorite short stories are actually under 6 pages. Sandra Cisneros is incredible. I don’t know how she manages to fit so much material in just 1 page. Query: how long is a 'short narrative'",
"output": [
"A short narrative is 500 to 17,000 words."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-af6c42b71be64efcb578e2a8bb580d3e",
"input": "Here's more information on filing for Minnesota property tax refunds, including forms, filing dates, and when to expect your refund. If you file electronically, you may receive your refund within a few weeks, or as long as 60 days after you file while paper forms typically take a few weeks longer than an e-file return due to the longer processing time required. You aren’t a dependent on someone else’s 2016 federal tax. return, and. You were a full or part year resident of Minnesota in 2016 and. You paid rent in a building which was taxed OR you own your home. NOTE: If you are a homeowner you MUST have a valid social security number to get the. property tax refund. Latest Member Blog Articles on Minnesota Tax Returns. 1 What Happens If You Don't File Your Taxes At All. Mar 24 2017. 2 What Free E-Filing Means for Tax Payers and E-Filing Companies. Dec 19 2016. 3 Common Tax Mistakes That Could Cause Your Refund to be Delayed. Apr 08 2015. Fees may apply to file Federal and State taxes. Or, if you prefer, you can complete and mail forms. Here's the link to the M1 Individual Income Tax form that you need to complete, and any other forms you may need. Or, you can have a tax professional complete and file forms on your behalf. Americans should file a 2014 federal income tax return even if their total income is belo... Like 2014, the IRS expects to issue 9 out of 10 tax refunds within 21 days for those who... If this is your first time filing a tax return, learn about important reminders and a fre... Filing for an Extension on a Minnesota State Tax Return. If you can't complete and file your taxes by the deadline, usually April 15, you can get a six-month extension, and you don't even need to file a form to request an extension (although you may need to file a form to request an extension for Federal taxes). If you're new to the state of Minnesota or just there for work, you'll need to know all about filing your state tax return. Find out more here. If you're new to the state of Minnesota or just there for work, you'll need to know all about filing your state tax return. Many renters and homeowners can get a refund every year from the State of Minnesota. The. amount of your refund depends on: how much rent or property tax you paid, your income, and. how many dependents you have. If you file electronically, you may receive your refund within a few weeks, or as long as 60 days after you file. If you filed with paper forms, it will take a few weeks longer than an e-file return, due to the longer processing time. To find out the status of your Minnesota state tax refund, use the Minnesota Department of Revenue's Where's My Refund page. Filing for an Extension on a Minnesota State Tax Return If you can't complete and file your taxes by the deadline, usually April 15, you can get a six-month extension, and you don't even need to file a form to request an extension (although you may need to file a form to request an extension for Federal taxes). Query: how long to get mn state refund after filing",
"output": [
"It takes as long as 60 weeks to get refund after filing in Minnesota."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f77e51a4d7ad435b8ce96e38f8a09799",
"input": "Quick Answer. Ricotta cheese that is opened can be stored in the refrigerator for one to two weeks. However ricotta that is stored in the freezer can be used for up to three months. Continue Reading Also while on the topic I checked my (packaged) low-moisture part-skim mozzarella and the date goes out until july but then it says use within 3-5 days of opening. I have had it opened for a while but I see no signs of it being spoiled? No mold, not a bad stench, but would it still be bad to use? Uhg who new cheese could be so confusing 0_- How long do brie cheese, feta cheese, ricotta cheese, cottage cheese, mozzarella cheese and cream cheese last? Shelf life, storage tips & expiration A: A refrigerator keeps all foods safe to eat for four hours without electricity. Beyond that time, some, but not all foods remain safe to eat. Foods that should be discarded after four hours are meats, dairy, soft unprocessed cheeses, and prepared meals or leftovers. What's the fridge life? For semi-hard and semi-soft cheeses -- the middle ground -- your time frame is a little less than harder cheeses. There's more moisture present in the cheeses, so they aren't going to keep as long. I'd say two to four weeks after the expiration date is the basic time frame. Here are some tips for proper way of refrigerating cheese: 1 Keep refrigerated and tightly sealed. Frozen cheese may lose some of its texture and flavor; the thawed cheese will be best suited to cooked dishes, such as sauces, soups and casseroles. Keep Reading. 1 Beef Sirloin Safe to Eat. Updated 1 year ago | 11. Beef Safe to Eat? 2 Tips for how to eat anchovies. Updated 5 months ago | 8. Anchovies; 3 Refrigerator pickles left out over night - safe to eat? Updated 6 months ago | 2. Pickles Safe to Eat? 4 Lye pretzel dogs - will the dog/sausage part be safe to eat, too? Updated 4 months ago | 0 Read the Okay to eat old ricotta? discussion from the Chowhound Home Cooking food community. Join the discussion today. Read the Okay to eat old ricotta? discussion from the Chowhound Home Cooking food community. Proper food storage is very important to extending the shelf life of soft cheeses such as brie cheese, feta cheese, ricotta cheese, cottage cheese, or mozzarella cheese. You can help these types of cheeses keep fresh longer by storing them in your refrigerator at 40°F or lower immediately after each use. A: Because ricotta cheese is a milk-based product, it does go bad. Unopened ricotta cheese stored in the refrigerator is good for between five and seven days past the sell-by date. See Full Answer Query: how long will ricotta cheese keep in fridge once opened",
"output": [
"Ricotta cheese that is opened can be stored in the refrigerator for one to two weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-74313dbf781544f58082b4918faae512",
"input": "Which other emergency management function offers the best opportunities for mitigation? The recovery function of emergency management still represents one of the best opportunities for mitigation, and until recently, this phase in a disaster plan provided the most substantial funding for mitigation activities. How does the function of mitigation differ from other emergency management disciplines? The functions of mitigation differs from the other emergency management disciplines because it looks at long-term solutions to reducing risk as opposed to preparedness for hazards, in the immediate response to a hazard, or the short-term recovery from a hazard event. Answer to ation differ from the other 3 emergency management disciplines? Why is it more difficult to analyze, and therefore mitigate, the effects of terrorism?... This question was answered on Oct 26, 2017. How does the function of mitigation differ from the other 3 emergency management disciplines? Why is it more difficult to analyze, and therefore mitigate, the effects of terrorism? How would building codes benefit a community in mitigation and what limits does this tool have? 1. How does the function of mitigation differ from other emergency management disciplines? 2.... 1. How does the function of mitigation differ from other emergency management disciplines? 2. Which other emergency management function offers the best opportunities for mitigation? 3. Why is it more difficult to analyze, and therefore mitigate, the effects of terrorism? 4. How have geographic information systems (GIS) aided the practice of mitigation? Emergency Management (MGTK 460.110) George, Jane, Damon 5th Edition/ Chapter 3. There is another difference that sets mitigation apart from the other disciplines of emergency management. Implementing mitigation programs and activities requires the participation and support of a broad spectrum of players outside of the traditional emergency management circle. Answer to ation differ from the other 3 emergency management disciplines? Why is it more difficult to analyze, and therefore mitigate, the effects of terrorism?... Find Study Resources The function of mitigation differs from the other emergency management disciplines because it looks at long-term solutions to reducing risk as opposed to preparedness for hazards, the immediate response to a hazard or the short-term recovery from a hazard event. 1. How does the function of mitigation differ from other emergency management disciplines? 2. Which other emergency management function offers the... - 1992657 Query: how does the function of mitigation differ from other emergency management disciplines",
"output": [
"The functions of mitigation differs from the other emergency management disciplines because it looks at long-term solutions to reducing risk as opposed to preparedness for hazards, in the immediate response to a hazard, or the short-term recovery from a hazard event."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a81054a04b7c4b579e1da95b05fb0a70",
"input": "The best way to answer this question is to look at how much people spend on average on their engagement rings as compared to their wedding bands. The national average cost for an engagement ring was $5,855 in 2014. The national average cost for wedding bands were a little different, in that couples spent an average of $1,417 on the bride's band and an average of $558 on the groom's band, which adds up to an average of $1,975 for both of the wedding bands. So, if you go by the national average cost of wedding bands and engagement rings, you can expect to spend about 33.7% (or just about 1/3) of what you spent on your engagement ring on your wedding bands. The most popular engagement ring cut is the round brilliant diamond. The average woman’s ring size is about 6. December is the most popular month for buying engagement rings. The idea that a man should spend 2 months salary for an engagement ring originated from De Beers marketing materials. Spend no more than $2,000 on the engagement ring Men who shelled out between $2,000-$4,000 on engagement rings were 1.3 times more likely to get divorced than men who spent between $500 and $2,000. But that doesn't mean you should just use a plastic ring you got out of a gumball machine, either. Spending less than $500 on a ring also led to higher divorce rates. Keep your wedding costs under control Spending more than $20,000 on a wedding led to divorce 3.5 times more frequently for women than for those who spent between $5,000 and $10,000. (The average cost of an American wedding is nearly $30,000, according to The Knot.) Last year, 64% of brides were involved in picking out their ring, while nearly a third helped decide the budget, according to a survey by The Knot. That could be one reason the national average spent on an engagement ring, as well as diamond carat size, or weight, have been rising. The average spent on an engagement ring grew 3% to $5,598 last year from a year earlier, according to TheKnot. That's still down from 2009's average of $5,861, however. The average carat size for the center stone is just over 1 carat. The average total carat size for engagement rings, including any diamonds on the setting, is 2 carats, Miles said. 3. So a new study about weddings that reveals the average cost of an engagement ring will be of interest, especially to those of you who might be considering ring-buying, or might have a ring bought for you in the Here are a few of them that will influence the amount you spend when it comes to engagement ring costs vs. wedding band costs: The Style of The Rings The first factor that affects the cost of your engagement ring compared to your wedding bands will be what style wedding rings you choose to go with. Cost of an Engagement Ring. Below is an informational video about how the Gemological Institute of America grades diamonds and provides consumers with unbiased diamond grading reports. A GIA diamond grading report will make you sure of your diamond's value and your diamond's quality. Antique earrings are a popular addition to a bride's big day look. Ilona Kaprovsky and Justin Veach with an image of their ring, a diamond set in platinum. 1 Ilona Kaprovsky, a 24-year-old New Yorker who works in finance, said she didn’t initially think she wanted a diamond as the centerpiece of her engagement ring — a lab-grown stone like a white sapphire, or even cubic zirconia, would be just fine. And here's why: 1 An engagement ring is a symbol of your love and commitment. 2 Many women have dreamed about their perfect ring for a long time, including the style, diamond shape, etc. 3 Women are the ones who wear the ring every day. In our minds—and we assume the minds of many recession-strapped Americans—the amount spent on an engagement ring should be 100% up to the person buying it. Of course, the input of the intended is always welcome, but if you aren’t the person actually making the purchase, at the end of the day, it’s not really up to you. Query: average cost of an engagement or wedding ring",
"output": [
"The national average cost for an engagement ring was $5,855 in 2014."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-84bf3ab567104033a73ac7a047888d56",
"input": "Active and passive transport processes are two ways molecules and other materials move in and out of cells and cross intracellular membranes. Active transport is the movement of molecules or ions against a concentration gradient (from an area of lower to higher concentration), which does not ordinarily occur, so enzymes and energy are required. Passive transport is the movement of molecules or ions from an area of higher to lower concentration. There are multiple forms of passive transport: simple diffusion, facilitated diffusion, filtration, and osmosis. Passive transport occurs because of the entropy of the system, so additional energy isn't required for it to occur. Compare. Both active and passive transport move materials and can cross biological membranes. Contrast •Passive transport of water across a cell membrane. •Movement of water is from a higher concentration of water (not solute) to lower concentration of water. •Water passes easily through the lipid bilayer. •Active transport to pump out water and/or solutes. •Most cells in multicellular organisms are bathed in solutions that are not much different inside and out of the cell. •Some unicellular organisms can move to different environments. In osmosis, the solvent (usually water) moves across a membrane to dilute the solute particles. 1 Article. 2 Article. 3 Article. 4 Article. 5 Article. 6 Article. 7 Article. 8 Article. 1. How do passive and active transport differ from each other? Passive transport • Does not require the use of energy. • Moves solutes and solvents across a cell membrane, from higher to lower concentration. • Simple diffusion – passive transport of small solutes thru the lipid bilayer. • Facilitated diffusion – transfer of larger molecules thru carrier or channel proteins. • Osmosis – diffusion of water thru the lipid bilayer. Active Transport a. Water will move out of the cell b. Water will move into the cell c. Fructose and glucose will move into the cell d. There will be no net movement of solutes e. There will be not net movement of water Contrast. 1 Active transport moves materials from lower to higher concentration, while passive transport moves materials from higher to lower concentration. 2 Active transport requires energy to proceed, while passive transport does not require the input of extra energy to occur. Active Transport Solutes move from a region of low concentration to high concentration. Active transport moves materials from lower to higher concentration, while passive transport moves materials from higher to lower concentration. Active transport requires energy to proceed, while passive transport does not require the input of extra energy to occur. Read and learn for free about the following article: Passive transport and active transport across a cell membrane article If you're seeing this message, it means we're having trouble loading external resources on our website. If you're behind a web filter, please make sure that the domains *.kastatic.org and *.kasandbox.org are unblocked. • Does not require the use of. energy. • Moves solutes and solvents. across a cell membrane, from. higher to lower concentration. • Simple diffusion – passive. transport of small solutes thru. the lipid bilayer. Query: how does passive transport move",
"output": [
"Passive transport of water across a cell membrane. Movement of water is from a higher concentration of water to lower concentration of water. Water passes easily through the lipid bilayer.W"
]
},
{
"id": "task870-af10efe3198f4de38d051287e56ef327",
"input": "So if you complete your pre reqs at the community college how much does chamberlain cost then, and long does the program take minus pre reqs? Jul 31, '12 It depends on how many transfer credits you have, if every single pre req transfers over then you have about 5 semesters which is a year and a half including summers and if tuition is about $25,000 a year then just do the math Chamberlain is committed to providing quality and accessible nursing education. Our team is with you every step of the way, providing the information you need to make the decisions that best serve you. You may find, as I did, that the cost of other programs vs. Chamberlain is not too different. Chamberlain was actually cheaper than another program I looked into (a university) and not much more than a few others. My aunt is a nure and she went to a private school that was more than Chamberlain. She had to get a private loan in the end, and she doesn't regret it. One such university is Chamberlain University, and this overview exists for the express purpose of giving you all of the basic information you will need in order to decide whether this is the online program for you or not. College Information. Chamberlain University has been in the business for 122 years and is still going strong. Tuition is only part of the cost of college. Learn about the other expenses, why it's important to look past the sticker price, and how to find financially friendly colleges and get merit aid. Read More Whether you're an aspiring nurse looking to launch a rewarding career, a nursing professional looking to advance your career, or a professional looking to impact public health, Chamberlain offers the degree programs, options and resources to help you succeed. The median student debt for students after leaving Chamberlain College of Nursing-Ohio is $18,750 USD, which is: The same as the average across Chamberlain College of Nursing & Health Sciences institutions ($18,750) $5,721 or 43.9% more than the average across 4 year private for-profit institutions in the U.S. ($13,029) Chamberlain College of Nursing - Indianapolis is ... At Chamberlain Nursing-Florida, tuition costs $18,000 USD, which is slightly more expensive than other private (for-profit) institutions in the country. Cost in Context 2014-2015 Academic Year My last resort will be a private loan, which I will most likely to have to get, but It will definitely not be for 85k. My advice to you if you end up choosing chamberlain, do every pre-req at your community college first and it will cut the cost by A BUNCH. Query: how expensive is chamberlain university",
"output": [
"In Chamberlain Nursing University, the tuition costs $18,000 USD."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-25fc97a512a94c0c849b275ee4546125",
"input": "How much does a Case Worker make? The national average Case Worker salary is $56,750. Filter by location to see Case Worker salaries in your area. Salary estimates are based on 34 salaries submitted anonymously to Glassdoor by Case Worker employees. Find a Job like this Case Worker Salary: $56,750(average). What does a Case Worker earn in your area? 34 Case Worker Salaries from anonymous employees. The average Caseworker salary is $31,208. Filter by location to see Caseworker salaries in your area. Salary estimates are based on 393 salaries submitted anonymously to Glassdoor by Caseworker employees. How much does a Case Worker make? The national average salary for a Case Worker is $33,291 in United States. Filter by location to see Case Worker salaries in your area. Salary estimates are based on salaries submitted anonymously to Glassdoor by Case Worker employees. 343 Case Worker Salaries provided anonymously by employees. What salary does a Case Worker earn in your area? How much does a Caseworker make? The national average salary for a Caseworker is $31,208 in United States. Filter by location to see Caseworker salaries in your area. Salary estimates are based on salaries submitted anonymously to Glassdoor by Caseworker employees. { seoText: How much does a Case Worker make? The average Case Worker salary is $33,291. Filter by location to see Case Worker salaries in your area. SCO Family of Services Case Worker: 9 SCO Family of Services Case Worker salaries$40,593: International Rescue Committee Case Worker: 6 International Rescue Committee Case Worker salaries$18 / hrWall & Associates Case Worker: 3 Wall & Associates Case Worker salaries$13 / hr International Rescue Committee Case Worker: 6 International Rescue Committee Case Worker salaries$18 / hrWall & Associates Case Worker: 3 Wall & Associates Case Worker salaries$13 / hrEdwin Gould Service for Children Case Worker: 3 Edwin Gould Service for Children Case Worker salaries$37,660: American Red Cross Case Worker: 2 American Red Cross Case Worker salaries SCO Family of Services Case Worker: 9 SCO Family of Services Case Worker salaries $40,593 International Rescue Committee Case Worker: 6 International Rescue Committee Case Worker salaries Query: average case worker salary",
"output": [
"The average Caseworker salary is $31,208."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1aad8cc795dc40f2b56bb4ba09f56cb8",
"input": "How long does potato salad last in the fridge? The precise answer to that question depends to a large extent on storage conditions - refrigerate potato salad within two hours of preparing or purchasing. To maximize the shelf life of potato salad for safety and quality, refrigerate the potato salad in airtight containers. Properly stored, potato salad will last for 3 to 5 days in the refrigerator. How long can potato salad be left at room temperature? Bacteria grow rapidly at temperatures between 40 °F and 140 °F; potato salad should be discarded if left out for more than 2 hours at room temperature. Raw Eggs in Shell It is best to store eggs in the case or carton. When kept refrigerated in their raw shells, eggs last up to 4 to 5 weeks without significant loss of quality. But remember, the clock on those 4 to 5 weeks starts the moment eggs are laid. To be safe, keep refrigerated raw eggs in shell for no more than three weeks. Refrigerator (40 °F or below) Freezer (0 °F or below) Salads. Egg, chicken, ham, tuna & macaroni salads. 3 to 5 days. Does not freeze well. Hot dogs. opened package. 1 week. 1 to 2 months. unopened package. 2 weeks. 1 to 2 months. Luncheon meat. opened package or deli sliced. 3 to 5 days. 1 to 2 months. unopened package. 2 weeks. 1 to 2 months. Bacon & Sausage. Bacon. 7 days. 1 month Storage Times for the Refrigerator and Freezer. These short but safe time limits for home-refrigerated foods will keep them from spoiling or becoming dangerous to eat. The guidelines for freezer storage are for quality only. Frozen foods remain safe indefinitely. For storage times for eggs and foods made with eggs, see Egg Storage Chart. Storage Times for the Refrigerator and Freezer These short but safe time limits for home-refrigerated foods will keep them from spoiling or becoming dangerous to eat. The guidelines for freezer storage are for quality only. There is an expiration date on the carton. If in doubt, put the egg in water. If it floats, do not use it. Eggs last about 4-5 weeks in your refrigerator. If you don't know how long the egg has been in the refrigerator, fill a cup with water (enough to cover the egg), and put the egg in the cup. If the egg sinks to the bottom, it is still good to eat; if the egg floats, however, it is bad and should be discarded. Tips. 1 How long does potato salad last in the fridge? 2 To maximize the shelf life of potato salad for safety and quality, refrigerate the potato salad in airtight containers. 3 Properly stored, potato salad will last for 3 to 5 days in the refrigerator. How long can potato salad be left at room temperature? Bacteria grow rapidly at temperatures between 40 °F and 140 °F; potato salad should be discarded if left out for more than 2 hours at room temperature. Egg Whites Raw egg whites can be refrigerated up to four days.Cooked Egg Dishes No cooked egg dish should be left out at room temperature for more than two hours. Allow no more than 30 minutes to one hour to elapse when serving dishes outside in weather hotter than 85°F. Therefore, unless you are not expecting to keep the eggs for very long, you should not put them in water. If you must wash the eggs, use HOT running water. Farmers have 30 days from the day an egg is laid to get it to stores. Then, the stores have another 30 days to sell the eggs. The USDA recommends a maximum of 5 weeks in your refrigerator before you discard your eggs. Keep Food Safe: FoodKeeper App; Check Your Steps ; Charts: Food Safety at a Glance ; By Types of Food ; By Events and Seasons ; In An Emergency; What Government Does Query: how long does egg salad last in the fridge",
"output": [
"Egg salad last for 3 to 5 days in the fridge."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-97e7bdfb7b6b42deb890a6df947c8c71",
"input": "What is the best way to find a stud in a wall? How far apart are they? Use a stud finder. This is the simplest, most effective way to find studs. By sliding the stud finder across the wall, the stud finder will beep and/or light up when it crosses a stud. If you don't have a stud finder, there are several methods that can be effective in finding studs. When a home is framed, the wall studs are usually spaced 16 or 24 inches apart. If you start in a corner and measure out 16 inches and you don't find a stud, you should find one at 24 inches. You can also try holding a flashlight against a wall and looking down the wall to see if you can tell where two pieces of drywall meet. When you are undertaking huge home remodeling projects, it is almost impossible to avoid dealing with wall moving, demolition, and construction. Before you do anything with your walls, understand a few things about wall framing. Yes. The main type of lumber for walls is the 2x4, also called a stud. Yes. And there are no exceptions to this rule. A load-bearing wall supports the weight of the house above it; the non-load-bearing wall supports only its own weight. The wider the header above the window, the larger the window. Thus, more air and light. Wall studs are usually placed about 12 to 18 inches apart depending on the type of construction and the building codes in your particular area. The closer together the studs a … re located, the stronger the structure becomes. Locate Nearby Studs. If you are hanging wide shelving, you may want to know how far apart your studs are so that you can anchor both ends. In most homes, they are placed 16 inches apart, but occasionally, you will find them spaced 24 inches apart. Measure the distance and use the steps above to locate your second stud. Wrap the head of your hammer in a dish towel or other cloth to prevent wall damage and rap gently on your wall where you suspect the stud should be. If you hear a hollow sound, then the stud is to the right or left. Bearing walls (walls that carry a heavy roof or floor load) need studs no more than 16 inches apart. Non-bearing walls can generally have the studs spaced 24 inches apart.Standards vary according to location, so it is a good practice to find out what the building codes in your area are. The normal spacing for studs in modern construction is 16 inches apart. One way to find a stud for hanging shelving is to measure in 16 inch increments from the outlet or switch until you get to the place where you want to hang your shelf. 24'stud wall they want to place the studs 24 apart on center how many studs will they need? If there are no windows, doors or partitions in the wall and no corner walls on the end you will need 13 studs, 24 feet of bottom plate and 48 feet of top plate. Bearing walls (walls that carry a heavy roof or floor load) need studs no more than 16 inches apart. Non-bearing walls can generally have the studs spaced 24 inches apart. Standards vary according to location, so it is a good practice to find out what the building codes in your area are. Bearing walls (walls that carry a heavy roof or floor load) need studs no more than 16 inches apart. Non-bearing walls can generally have the studs spaced 24 inches apart. Query: how far are wall studs apart",
"output": [
"When a home is framed, the wall studs are usually spaced 16 or 24 inches apart."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-5748862a58234e65b0ee2eabda5bda4b",
"input": "Best Answer: uncooked scrambled eggs = beaten eggs. Kept covered, beaten eggs will keep about 3 days. Frozen can keep for several weeks. It's probably good to sub-divide the beaten eggs into serving size portions when you freeze them. That way you defrost only what you need. Yes, there are whole-egg products which contain whole eggs and a little citric acid. However, when properly handled and stored, eggs rarely spoil. Instead, as an egg ages, the white becomes thinner, the yolk becomes flatter and the yolk membrane weakens. Although these changes may affect appearance, they don t indicate spoilage and don t have any great effect on the nutritional quality of the egg or its functions in recipes. Refrigerator. Freezer. Raw eggs in shell. 3 to 5 weeks. Do not freeze. Instead, beat yolks and whites together; then freeze. Raw egg whites. 2 to 4 days. 12 months. Raw egg yolks. 2 to 4 days. Yolks do not freeze well. Raw egg accidentally frozen in shell. Use immediately after thawing. Keep frozen; then refrigerate to thaw. Hard-cooked eggs. 1 week. Do not freeze. Egg substitutes, liquid Unopened. 10 days. 12 months. Egg substitutes, liquid Opened. 3 days. Do not freeze. Egg substitutes, frozen Unopened. After thawing, 7 days or refer to “Use-By” date. 12 months. Egg substitutes, frozen Opened. After thawing, 3 days or refer to “Use-By” date. Do not freeze. Casseroles with eggs. 3 to 4 days To maximize the shelf life of eggs, do not store them in the molded egg rack of the refrigerator door, as the temperature is too warm - the eggs will last much longer when they are stored in the main body of the refrigerator, in their purchased carton. How long can raw eggs be left at room temperature? Bacteria grow rapidly at temperatures between 40°F and 140 °F; raw eggs should be discarded if left out for more than 2 hours at room temperature. To further extend the shelf life of eggs, freeze them; do not freeze eggs in their shells. Remove and store in the refrigerator and reheat for just a few seconds in the microwave or eat cold as a quick breakfast. These mini-egg casseroles last 3 to 4 days in the refrigerator. Show Comments How to Store Scrambled Eggs. Like any other food product, eggs can potentially carry harmful bacteria that could make you sick. If you don't store eggs or dishes containing eggs properly, you risk getting food poisoning or even salmonella. Fortunately, it's easy to avoid these risks if you follow a few general guidelines for storing and dealing with eggs. Knowing the proper way to refrigerate dishes like scrambled eggs means you can safely eat your meal another day, without worrying about eating spoiled or bacteria-ridden food. Refrigerating scrambled eggs is easy if you follow the proper guidelines. I would never store eggs in this manner, because the texture and flavour degradation will make them unpleasant to eat. However, to actually answer your question--and again, I urge you not to do this because stored and reheated eggs will taste like garbage--cooked eggs should keep for up to 72 hours in the refrigerator. Trusted Results with How long can raw scrambled eggs be stored. Oeufs Brouilles a la Michel Guerard (French Scrambled Eggs ... Food Network invites you to try this Oeufs Brouilles a la Michel Guerard (French Scrambled Eggs with Caviar) recipe. Making Your Eggs Safe - Allrecipes. Fresh shell eggs can be kept safely in the refrigerator three to five weeks from ... How long can they keep if you boil a dozen and put them back in the fridge to ... Recipe Requests - Community - Allrecipes 1 Upload failed. 2 We are experiencing some problems, please try again. 3 You can only upload files of type PNG, JPG, or JPEG. 4 You can only upload files of type 3GP, 3GPP, MP4, MOV, AVI, MPG, MPEG, or RM. 5 You can only upload photos smaller than 5 MB. 6 You can only upload videos smaller than 600MB. You can keep fresh, uncooked eggs in the shell refrigerated in their cartons for at least four to five weeks beyond the pack date or about three weeks after you bring them home. Properly handled and stored, eggs rarely spoil. If you keep them long enough, they are more likely to simply dry up. But don’t leave eggs out. Query: how long can uncooked scrambled eggs be stored in the refrigerator",
"output": [
"You can store uncooked scrambled eggs in rrefrigerator for several weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-31c9bb7c3d4a44ba9bcaf98a48f90b31",
"input": "There are two fundamentally different types of synapses: 1 In a chemical synapse, electrical activity in the presynaptic neuron is converted (via the activation of voltage-gated calcium channels) into the release of a chemical called a neurotransmitter that binds to receptors located in the plasma membrane of the postsynaptic cell. The main advantage of an electrical synapse is the rapid transfer of signals from one cell to the next. Synaptic communication is distinct from an ephaptic coupling, in which communication between neurons occurs via indirect electric fields. An autapse is a chemical or electrical synapse that forms when the axon of one neuron synapses onto dendrites of the same neuron. Types of interfaces How does communication occur within a neuron? The KGB Agent answer: Communication between neurons essentially happens by means of the nerve impulse where electrical & chemical events happen to enable transmission of signal. Key points. 1 Neurons communicate with one another at junctions called synapses. 2 Most synapses are chemical; these synapses communicate using chemical messengers. 3 At a chemical synapse, an action potential triggers the presynaptic neuron to release neurotransmitters. Key points. 1 Neurons communicate with one another at junctions called synapses. At a synapse, one neuron sends a message to a target neuron—another cell. 2 Most synapses are chemical; these synapses communicate using chemical messengers. Other synapses are electrical; in these synapses, ions flow directly between cells. In the nervous system, a synapse is a structure that permits a neuron (or nerve cell) to pass an electrical or chemical signal to another neuron or to the target efferent cell. Santiago Ramón y Cajal proposed that neurons are not continuous throughout the body, yet still communicate with each other, an idea known as the neuron doctrine. In the nervous system, a synapse is a structure that permits a neuron (or nerve cell) to pass an electrical or chemical signal to another neuron. Santiago Ramón y Cajal proposed that neurons are not continuous throughout the body, yet still communicate with each other, an idea known as the neuron doctrine. How does communication occur within a neuron? kgb answers » Science & Technology » How does communication occur within a neuron? Communication between neurons essentially happens by means of the nerve impulse where electrical & chemical events happen to enable transmission of signal. Tags: neurons, action potential, neuron. Thursday, February 02 2012. Synapses are essential to neuronal function: neurons are cells that are specialized to pass signals to individual target cells, and synapses are the means by which they do so. At a synapse, the plasma membrane of the signal-passing neuron (the presynaptic neuron) comes into close apposition with the membrane of the target (postsynaptic) cell. Neurons communicate with one another at junctions called synapses. At a synapse, one neuron sends a message to a target neuron—another cell. Most synapses are chemical; these synapses communicate using chemical messengers. Other synapses are electrical; in these synapses, ions flow directly between cells. Query: how does communication occur between neurons",
"output": [
"Neurons communicate with one another at junctions called synapses. At a synapse, one neuron sends a message to a target neuron; another cell."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3426e64b73124536aaf6eeb8987d3fbf",
"input": "The Employee’s Guide to the Family and Medical Leave Act 5 Expanding Your Family You may take FMLA leave for the birth of a child and to bond with the newborn child, or for the placement of a child for adoption or How Long Must I Hold a Job for an Employee on Medical Leave? I have an employee who was released from work with a doctor's note for an undisclosed amount of time. It has been over 180 days and there has been no contact from this employee as to when or if they will be returning to work. I am not sure how long I have to hold their position or job. With economic times as they are, their services are not needed anymore. Are you required to grant employees leave for active duty military leave? According to the federal law, you are. Although the leave may be without pay for private employers, the employee must be reinstated to the position held before taking military leave upon successful completion of active military duty. Active duty leave is usually for an undetermined but potentially long period of time and is occasioned by a state or national emergency, state of war, or actual war. Military Family Leave. Under amendments to the Family and Medical Leave Act (FMLA), employers with 50 or more employees must allow up to 26 weeks of leave for eligible family members of certain military personnel to care for service members. Are employees required to give advance notice to employers of military leave? The answer is generally yes. Notice may be either written or oral and may be provided by the employee or the military. The recruiters want to see current corporate skills that are directly applicable to the job opportunity. It is tough to get back to corporate once you are out of the corporate ladder and become a business owner. I must have applied to over 150-200 jobs. Very poor response from employers. The Employee’s Guide to the Family and Medical Leave Act. Who Can Use FMLA Leave? In order to take FMLA leave, you must first work for a covered . employer. Generally, private employers with at least 50 employees are covered by the law. Private employers with fewer than 50 employees are not covered by the FMLA, but may be covered the Family and Medical Leave Act 3. YES YES YES AND. Your employer is not covered by the FMLA . and does not have to offer FMLA leave Your employer is covered by the . FMLA I have worked for . my employer for at least 12 months I have worked for my employer for at . least 1250 hours in the last 12 months You are eligible for FMLA leave My employer has . 50 or more Employers are required to provide military leave to employees. Federal and state laws set the rules for pay, notice and reinstatement for time-off for military service. Employers are required to provide time-off to employees who are serving in the military. An Introduction to the Family . and Medical Leave Act. When you or a loved one experiences a serious health condition . that requires you to take time off from work, the stress from worrying about keeping your job may add to an already difficult situation. The Family and Medical Leave Act (FMLA) may be able to help. Whether you are unable to work because of your own serious health condition, or because you need to care for your parent, spouse, or child with a serious health condition, the FMLA provides unpaid, job-protected leave. Leave may be taken all at Query: how long are you required to hold a job for someone on military leave",
"output": [
"Military Family Leave. Under amendments to the Family and Medical Leave Act, employers with 50 or more employees must allow up to 26 weeks of leave for eligible family members of certain military personnel to care for service members."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0cb325ce57d34cb7b4ca2a8928bfd1d7",
"input": "Eventually, radiation pressure from the star blows away the envelope and the new star begins its evolution. The properties and lifetime of the new star depend on the amount of gas that remains trapped. A star like our sun has a lifetime of about 10 billion years and is just middle-aged, with another five billion years or so left. And once the fusion reactions begin, they exert an outward pressure. As long as the inward force of gravity and the outward force generated by the fusion reactions are equal, the star remains stable. Clouds of gas are common in our galaxy and in other galaxies like ours. These clouds are called nebulae. A typical nebula is many light-years across and contains enough mass to make several thousand stars the size of our sun. The majority of the gas in nebulae consists of molecules of hydrogen and helium--but most nebulae also contain atoms of other elements, as well as some surprisingly complex organic molecules. STAR BIRTHS are started when the interstellar matter in gas clouds, such as the Eagle Nebula shown here, compresses and fuses. Irregularities in the density of the gas causes a net gravitational force that pulls the gas molecules closer together. NGC 6326, a planetary nebula with glowing wisps of outpouring gas that are lit up by a binary central star. A planetary nebula, often abbreviated as PN or plural PNe, is a kind of emission nebula consisting of an expanding, glowing shell of ionized gas ejected from old red giant stars late in their lives. A star is born when atoms of light elements are squeezed under enough pressure for their nuclei to undergo fusion. All stars are the result of a balance of forces: the force of gravity compresses atoms in interstellar gas until the fusion reactions begin. Most planetary nebulae form at the end of the star's life, during the red giant phase, when the outer layers of the star are expelled by strong stellar winds. After most of the red giant's atmosphere is dissipated, the ultraviolet radiation of the hot luminous core, called a planetary nebula nucleus (PNN), ionizes the ejected material. A planetary nebula, abbreviated as PN or plural PNe, is a kind of emission nebula consisting of an expanding, glowing shell of ionized gas ejected from red giant stars late in their lives. The word nebula is Latin for mist or cloud, and the term planetary nebula is a misnomer that originated in the 1780s with astronomer William Herschel because, when viewed through his telescope, these objects resemble the rounded shapes of planets. Herschel's name for these objects was popularly adopted and A planetary nebula, often abbreviated as PN or plural PNe, is a kind of emission nebula consisting of an expanding, glowing shell of ionized gas ejected from old red giant stars late in their lives.[2] The word nebula is Latin for mist or cloud, and the term planetary nebula is a misnomer that originated in the 1780s with astronomer William ... Theoretical models predict that planetary nebulae can form from main-sequence stars of between one and eight solar masses, which puts the progenitor star's age at greater than 40 million years. Although there are a few hundred known open clusters within that age range, a variety of reasons limit the chances of finding a planetary nebula within. Planetary nebula - Membership in clusters. 1 Planetary nebulae have been detected as members in four Galactic globular clusters: Messier 15, Messier 22, NGC 6441 and Palomar 6. Query: at what point does a star form from a nebula",
"output": [
"A star is born when atoms of light elements are squeezed under enough pressure for their nuclei to undergo fusion."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a8a275b283434f938e5c7e12ba2059ed",
"input": "The size of Parasaurolophus walkeri compared to a human. As is the case with most dinosaurs, the skeleton of Parasaurolophus is incompletely known. The length of the type specimen of P. walkeri is estimated at 9.5 meters (31 ft). What environment did a parasaurolophus live in? Parasaurolophus lived along the western shore of the Western Interior Seaway. The area was a floodplain with rivers and swamps, and had distinct wet and dry seasons. Conifers …were the primary trees, but other plants like ferns, ginkgoes, cycads, and flowering plants also lived there. Brachiosaurus was an unusual dinosaur that lived 155.7 million to 150.8 million years ago during the mid- to late Jurassic Period. Specimens have been found primarily in the fossil-rich Morrison Formation in North America, but the dinosaur did not resemble any of the others that roamed the region. Its long neck made it look like a giraffe, and its forelegs were longer than its hind legs. The name Brachiosaurus, in fact, means arm lizard.. When did dinosaurs live? Dinosaurs lived between about 247 and 66 million years ago, in a time known as the Mesozoic Era. This was many millions of years before the first modern humans, Homo sapiens, appeared. Scientists divide the Mesozoic Era into three periods: the Triassic, Jurassic and Cretaceous. What period did the parasaurolophus live? Parasaurolophus lived from about 76.5 to 73 million years ago. This was near the end of the Cretaceous period, the last period in the Mesozoic era. Parasaurolophus Facts. 1 Check out our Parasaurolophus facts for kids. The Parasaurolophus was an interesting dinosaur with a strangely shaped head that featured a curved crest. 2 Read on and learn more cool information about the Parasaurolophus, including where it lived, how long it was, the function of its strange looking crest and much more. Parasaurolophus lived in the late Cretaceous Period, around 75 million years ago, in what is now North America. Fossils have been found in Alberta, Canada as well as Utah and New Mexico, USA. The Parasaurolophus was first described by William Parks in 1922, two years after a partial skeleton and skull were found in Alberta. Parasaurolophus were herbivores (plant eaters). It could walk on either two legs or all four. Updated to-do: mostly image issues. 1 Pronunciation guide (and comment on the two pronunciation variations) 2 Sourcing of the pop culture section if it ain't there, no sourcing necessary. 3 The drawing of the different species' skulls. 4 Redlinks. 5 Probably want a scale drawing, as those always go over well (we had one) Why did the parasaurolophus die? The parasaurolophus got to big it bursted in to flames.Also it died of a tyrannosarus Rex ate its eggs so it died because its eggs had its life bomb Edit What did they eat? They were herbivores (plant eaters) that used their strong back legs to reach higher branches. Find out more about the Cretaceous plants they ate. Where did they live? How big were they? They were 10 metres (33 feet) in length and weighed 3.5 tons. Their huge head crest could grow to 1.8 metres long. Kids-Dinosaurs › Parasaurolophus Parasaurolophus was a herbivore, eating pine needles, leaves, and twigs. Fossilized stomach contents show that it ate mostly land plants. With its long neck, parasaurolophus would have been able to find food on the ground or in trees. Parasaurolophus was a member of the duckbill family of dinosaurs, meaning it had a hard beak in the front of its mouth and hundreds of teeth in the back for chewing tough plant material. Parasaurolophus lived during the late Cretaceous period, about 76-65 Million years ago. Other dinosaurs living in the late Cretaceous in North America were Albertosaurus, Nanotyrannus, Lambeosaurus (another hadrosaur), Euoplocephalus, Kritosaurus, and Pachyrhinosaurus.Parasaurolophus was named by Dr. William A. Parks in 1922 from a skeleton found in Alberta, Canada. Query: how long ago did parasaurolophus live",
"output": [
"Parasaurolophus lived from about 76.5 to 73 million years ago."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d40816968bd448159a47f80ca36813aa",
"input": "Sowing Seeds. 1 Sow eggplant seeds indoors about six weeks before the climate begins to warm up. 2 The seeds germinate best at temperatures above 24 deg C (75 deg F), so keep in a warmer place inside the house. You can use bottom heat to maintain a soil temperature around 24 deg C for about 10 days. Planting and germinating eggplant requires you to use the right type of soil and a container that is about an inch full. Plant and germinate eggplant with help from a classically-trained chef with experience in both world-class restaurants and private dining companies in this free video clip. Expert: Teca Thompson Filmmaker: Rudi Rose Sow eggplant seeds indoors 8 weeks before the last frost in spring using a seed starting kit. Sow seeds ¼ inch deep in seed-starting formula Keep the soil moist at 75 degrees F There’s no particular eggplant seed preparation necessary prior to sowing. Eggplant seeds germinate at temps between 60-95 degrees F. (15-35 C.) and seedlings will emerge in seven to 10 days. When growing with eggplant seeds instead of nursery starts, the seeds will remain viable for about four years. The leaves are generally lobed and about 4 - 8 inches long. Flowers/Fruits: Flowers can be white or some shade of purple, with five-lobes. The fruit varies from small and round, to long and thin, to hefty orbs. Fruits are actually berries, with lots of tiny seeds inside the flesh. Botanical Name. Solanum melongena. Common Name(s) 1) Seed Viability Relative to Germination: 1 Shelf life: Tomato seeds tend to last much longer in storage than most other seed (i.e., onions need to be purchased fresh every year). Just make sure they were stored properly (cool & dry) and you should have around a 4-5 year shelf life for tomato seeds. Eggplants are in the Solanaceae, or nightshade, family, along with tomatoes, peppers and potatoes. Many of us grew up thinking of eggplant as large, somewhat oval shaped, purple vegetables. There wasn’t a lot of variety in what we could grow or how we ate it. Thankfully, that is no longer the case. Growing From Seed. Because eggplants require a relatively long time to mature and will not thrive in cool weather, if you plan to grow your eggplants from seed, you will need to begin them indoors, about eight to 10 weeks before the average last frost date for your region. Seeds need warm soil to germinate and for the seedlings to grow quickly. The ideal soil temperature for germination is between 70 and 90 degrees Fahrenheit, so be sure to keep your seedlings in a warm location in your home or use a heating mat to warm the soil. Faster Pepper and Eggplant Seed Germination One issue that many gardeners face is that pepper and eggplant seeds can take forever to germinate. I’ve had some eggplants that took about 2 years to germinate—at least it felt like it! Growing eggplants in containers is not complicated, and if you’re a fan of grilling and oven broiling, you should grow this delicious and PRODUCTIVE vegetable. Eggplant is a perennial tropical vegetable plant native to South and East Asia (namely, China and India) and a member of the tomato family. Query: how long eggplant seeds to germinate",
"output": [
"It takes seven to 10 days for eggplant seeds to germinate."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-af3809d0a2d8460492d47bec78e377db",
"input": "The moose's head is heavy and long, with an overhanging, flexible upper lip. Its ears are slightly smaller than those of a mule. Most moose have something called a bell—a piece of fur-covered skin about 30 centimetres long that hangs from their throats. A moose's antlers are pale in colour, sometimes almost white. Moose Definitions An even-toed ungulate of the genus Alces in the family Cervidae; characterized by spatulate antlers, long legs, a short tail, and a large head with prominent overhanging snout. (From the McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Scientific and Technical Terms) The life span of an average moose is about 15–25 years. ( 1 newborn) Calves nursing in spring. ( 2 3 months) Calves stay near their mothers at all times. ( 3 9 months) This calf is almost ready to leave its mother. ( 4 10–11 months) This yearling was probably recently chased away by its pregnant mother. Female moose, or cows, generally have 1 to 2 calves in May. On average, the calves weigh about 30 pounds at birth and grow very quickly. Still, baby moose don't have the ability to run or protect themselves very well, so the mother stays with her offspring for a year and a half, fighting off wolves and bears that try to pick off the young calves. 8. The Alaska or Yukon Moose is the biggest sub-species. Bulls can get 2.5m high at the shoulders (average 2m) and up to 3.1m long at a weight of 1000 kg. A full-grown bull with its tremendous antlers ( about 23kg, 2m wide) is the largest wild animal in North America. More about Moose: 1 Moose Management - Balancing the needs and benefits of moose with public safety and protection of property is the goal of a new guidance document prepared by DEC staff. 2 NY Moose Photo Gallery - This page shows pictures of moose in New York. Moose live in Alaska Answer: Moose are found naturally in North America and Europe. The size of this moose is somewhere in the middle, tending to relative big. The length of a bull moose is around 2.70m, the weight can be more than 500 kg. The cow weighs between 275 and 375 kg. The length of the bulls skull is between 55 and 58cm. European moose are colored dark brown with white legs. How large is a moose? Moose is the largest of all the deer species. They reach 170 – 210 cm height at shoulder. Bulls weigh weigh 380 – 850 kg and cows weigh 200 – 360 kg. How long do they live? Moose may live up to 25 years but because of the intensive hunting few moose survive to become older than 10 years. Since more bulls are hunted only 5-10% of the bulls reach the age of 5 years, but cows often become 10 or even 20 years old. What does a moose look like? Dark brown body with long greyish white legs. Alaska moose require a daily intake of 9770 kilocalories (32 kg). Alaska moose lack upper front teeth but have eight sharp incisors on their lower jaw. They also have a tough tongue, gums and lips to help chew woody vegetation. Size and weight. Male Alaska moose can stand over 2.1 m (6.9 ft) at the shoulder, and weigh over 1,400 lb (635 kg). The antlers on average have a span of 1.8 m (5.9 ft). Female Alaska moose stand on average 1.8 m (5.9 ft) at the shoulder and can weigh close to 478 kg (1,054 lb). The largest Alaska moose was shot in western Yukon in September 1897; it weighed 820 kg (1,808 lb), and was 2.33 m (7.6 ft) tall at the shoulder. Alaska moose with the Chukotka moose, matches the extinct Irish elk as the largest deer of all time. Social structure and reproduction Query: how long does a moose live?",
"output": [
"The life span of an average moose is about 15 to 25 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e35c458af529494b8b48f7a9c2491e19",
"input": "But this is a very general rule as it depends on the amount of yeast the recipe calls for and the temperatures at which you let the dough rise. Reply Are you channeling your best self with this comment? Wait for the dough to double in size, about an hour to an hour and a half. Test it for doneness by using 2 fingers to poke the ball. If the indentation sticks, the dough is ready. Step 3 Punch it down Punch the dough down: Use your hands to push all of the air out of the dough Doughs for a regular size loaf usually take about 2 hours at room temp for the first rising, and 1 to 2 hours for the second rising after shaping. But this is a very general rule as it depends on the amount of yeast the recipe calls for and the temperatures at which you let the dough rise. ⚑. Reply. If you have a high hydration dough you can first dip your finger in a little bit of flour to prevent sticking. 1 If the hole disappears completely: under-proofed. 2 If the hole dent pops half way back out: proofing is just right. 3 If the hole stays entirely dented in: over-proofed. Making challah bread today... How long does the dough take to rise to double in size? Step 4 Allow a second proof Sprinkle flour over your work surface and gently knead the dough. Then shape it and place it on a baking sheet, letting it rise again until it nearly doubles in size again. It won’t take as long the second time, and the dough may not fully double in size. Step 5 Bake the dough Bake your dough following your recipe instructions. You’ll know it’s done when the crust is golden brown and, when you tap on it, the tap sounds hollow. A height of 12.5cm gives about 4088cm³ of volume which is about 4 liters of dough. The increase of 2.5cm is hard to notice and you will not perceive this as the dough having ‘doubled in size’. After this whole rant I still do not have the answer to what recipes writers mean with ‘wait until double in size’. Do they mean double in volume, double in height, they probably mean something like ‘wait until the dough has increased until you think it is enough’. Comments. 1 I have an engineers approach and I have assumed double in volume is what was ment. So I have always judged the increase by eye and the poke test but unlike your more scientific approach waited for the indentation to stay. 2 Hi Ed, For my calculations I start with an imaginary boule of dough with a height of 10cm. This gives us a boule of dough with the volume of 2093cm³ which is a little over 2 liters of dough. When you take a boule with a height of 20cm this equals about 16745cm³ which is about 16 liters of dough! So a doubling in diameter equals 8 times the growth in actual volume. Comments. 1 I have an engineers approach and I have assumed double in volume is what was ment. 2 Hi Ed, 3 I’m sure it must mean volume. 4 Thank you for this post. 5 At the moment I have just started a sourdough Italian style, Pasta madre, and I have become member of a facebook group “Pasta madre”. Query: how long does it take for dough to double in size",
"output": [
"It takes about an hour to an hour and a half for dough to double in size."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-df0b864936ac4f7bb5ab68431de46855",
"input": "Two of the major questions that people ask when it comes to dental implants is, “What is the long-term success rate?” and “How long will they last?”. The simply answer to the long-term success rate of dental implants are that dental implants can fail, but fortunately very infrequently. Failure rates vary depending on the site in the mouth, whether they are placed into natural or grafted bone and whether the patient smokes. The overall success rates in natural bone is 95%, though this falls to between 85 and 90% in grafted bone. The snap on dentures, MDI supported dentures, fixed hybrid implant dentures can be remove and place easily. Although some people prefer to have a permanent bridgework done dentures are a great alternative. How do Snap-on dentures work? There are two types of denture with the snap-on effect. Bar retained and ball retained. Most of the patients in our office that have implant dentures have a snap in style denture. The ease of cleaning, comfortable fit, retention, esthetic looks, and stability make it a great choice for a lot of patients with only a few drawbacks. As to the longevity of dental implants, honestly at the present time we cannot answer this question. However, according to various resources , Gösta Larsson was the first patient who had dental implants placed. So your answer is as follows: They work well in most cases and last a long time in most cases. If one abuses them or develops medical issues then the life span can be decreased. December 20, 2008 at 5:05 pm It is hard to predict anything over the internet, let alone the office. But implants can last up to 25 years if everything goes well. How long does a knee replacement last or how long would an orthopedic give it? Remember, your implants will not have decay nor will they need root canals. Restored properly, you probably will have many years of enjoyment and function far beyond the alternative. best of luck. Dentures are held in place by muscles and soft tissue. The average force a person can chew with a denture is 20% of natural teeth. Get back some of that chewing ability and eat what you want with an implant denture. Implant Dentures can be a snap-in type denture or fixed denture. The benefit of a snap in denture or overdenture is that it is easy to clean and can fill in space where bone has been lost given a natural, pleasing facial appearance. A fixed denture is usually screwed into place and does not come out. For a fraction of the cost of cosmetic veneers, you can benefit from Snap-On Smile, which is a relatively new and affordable alternative to permanent dental work. We are currently offering Snap-On Smile for the special price of $1,095 for a limited time. We can also arrange financing options if you prefer to pay monthly. How long does it take to get Snap on dentures? The procedure can be completed in just 7 days, or in two days if you want to continue using your current dentures. How much do Snap on dentures cost? The cost is usually directly related to the number of implant s placed each mini implant has a cost of 450$ USD, and the dentures with 0-rings have a cost of 900$. Contact us for more information and promotions. I am hoping because of this my implant will last a long time. The rest of my mouth isnt much better I have 5 crowns, 1 root canal which failed earlier this year so I got it re-done and about 7 fillings. Query: how long do snap on dentures last",
"output": [
"Snap on dentures last in just 7 days, or in two days if you want to continue using your current dentures."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ccf535f23134474390f4307188b7fdf6",
"input": "Dickinson College Financial Aid (2014 - 15) 1 Percentage of New Students Receiving Aid: 75%. 2 Percentage of New Students Receiving Types of Aid Grants: 71%. Loans: 51%. 3 Average Amount of Aid Grants: $28,127. Loans: $6,561. Most colleges report four-, five-, and six-year graduation rates. For colleges in our database, the average five-year graduation rate is 52% and the average six-year graduation rate is 55%. We provide a college's four-, five-, and six-year graduation rates on the Students page of its College Profile. Admissions Data (2015) 1 Dickinson College Acceptance Rate: 47%. 2 GPA, SAT and ACT graph for Dickinson. 3 Top PA colleges SAT score comparison. 4 4-year college SAT score comparison. 5 4-year college ACT score comparison. 6 Top PA colleges ACT score comparison. The average ACT score composite at Dickinson State University is a 20. The 25th percentile ACT score is 18, and the 75th percentile ACT score is 22. In other words, a 18 places you below average, while a 22 will move you up to above average. First of all, you can look at average ACT scores for your state. Although you will find that scores don’t vary drastically between states, you may live in a slightly less or more competitive one. You can look at average ACT scores for your school. Many students can access this data on their high school’s “Profile” sheet. Based on sampled GPA data collected and applied, it is estimated that the Dickinson State University (DSU) average GPA range for accepted students is around 2.80 - 3.14. 49% of all those who apply are admitted to Dickinson State University, from which 81 percent choose to enroll. As you type, a drop down list of matching colleges will display. 1 If the college you want is on the list, select it. 2 If the college you want isn't on the list, hit the Enter or Return key on your keyboard or click the Find button to see a list of results including all colleges that match the text you entered. IOWA CITY, Iowa—ACT has reached an agreement with the Ho Chi Minh City Department of Education and Training and EMG Education to make the ACT® t... IOWA CITY, Iowa—ACT has reached an agreement with the Ho Chi Minh City Department of Education and Training and ... Accepted Applicants Profile. 1 DSU SAT Scores: 1210 - 1513. 2 DSU ACT Scores: 18 - 23. 3 DSU Average GPA: 2.80 - 3.14. Admissions data from the office of Institutional Research at Dickinson College Admissions data from the office of Institutional Research at Dickinson College Skip to content Query: average act scores at dickinson",
"output": [
"The average ACT score composite at Dickinson State University is a 20."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b782ad4276d6413c80e03d5be1dbde10",
"input": "when they are feeling normal. It may take a while to learn your cycles, so do not be discouraged if you do not produce positive results right away. It often takes people weeks or months to accurately diagnose their cycles. For this reason, we suggest keeping a diary of how you feel when you do each test. In this way, if we get an abnormal result, we can ask you to do further testing at times when you feel the same and perhaps expedite getting more abnormal results to back up your diagnosis At 11pm, wash your hands and dry them thoroughly. DO NOT BRUSH YOUR TEETH before you sample. Before I had that page (24-hour Hormone Saliva Test) up, many people would contact me asking if I knew of a source for a saliva hormone testing kit that did not require a doctor's order, either because they were not working with a doctor, or the doctor would not order one for them and they didn't know where to look to find one on their own. 7 days at room temperature. This produces a very bad smelling sample. It does not appear to affect the cortisol levels, but it sure affects the mood of the technicians assaying the samples! So whenever possible, saliva samples should be stored at -20 degrees Celsius or lower. Q: Do I have to use dry ice if I send my samples to the laboratory? A: No. Once your hormone levels are balanced, testing your hormones once a year will be adequate. I'm having a difficult time collecting enough saliva to fill the tube. If you are having difficulty collecting saliva we have a few recommendations: First of all, allow extra time—at least 20 to 40 minutes before collection. Some insurance plans also cover saliva cortisol testing. How can I get this test done? Talk to your health care professional about your symptoms and ask if this test would be useful for you. Unfortunately many physicians are still unaware of the validity, reliability and value of saliva hormone tests. Some labs, such as ZRT and Genova, allow patients to order tests directly. Several other labs also do saliva testing. You can search online using “saliva test” as your search word. For more ... I prefer dried urine hormone testing because it combines the advantages of saliva testing (ability to measure diurnal production of cortisol) and 24-hour urine testing (ability to measure androgen and glucocorticoid metabolites in addition to the hormones themselves). Saliva for cortisol testing is usually collected by inserting a swab into the mouth and waiting a few minutes while the swab becomes saturated with saliva. Obtaining more than one sample allows the health practitioner to evaluate the daily pattern of cortisol secretion (the diurnal variation). Here’s another important thing to know about cortisol testing. Taking a single measurement, or even a 24-hour average, is not enough. The best cortisol tests take 4 individual samples at various points of the day and then map your cortisol levels over the course of a 24 hour cycle. Collecting saliva. 1 Use of the straws included to funnel saliva into each tube is optional. 2 Each tube should be 3/4 full - bubbles or foam are acceptable. 3 FILL ALL FOUR TUBES regardless of how many tests are ordered. 4 Please dispose of straws before shipping. 5 Seal box with enclosed sticker. Extra tape is not necessary. Because cortisol levels change throughout the day, the timing of a cortisol test is important. A cortisol blood test is usually done twice a day–once in the morning when cortisol levels are at their highest, and again around 4 p.m., when levels are much lower. Cortisol may also be measured in a urine or saliva test. For a cortisol urine test, your health care provider may ask you to collect all urine during a 24-hour period. This is called a 24-hour urine sample test. It is used because cortisol levels vary throughout the day. Query: how long does a cortisol saliva test takes",
"output": [
"It takes 24 hours for a cortisol saliva test."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ccf9e63f243d4dea877900c186a84df7",
"input": "How long can a Salamander live without water? A salamander can only live 2 or 3 days without water. However, they can go without food for approximately 5 days. The larvae are aquatic, tan to black, less than 2 inches long, and have three pairs of external gills extending from the base of the head. Habitat. Long-toed salamanders live in moist habitats, from timbered valley floors to alpine meadows and alpine lake shorelines. They are usually found near a pond, lake, or stream, often under logs. Adults are dormant during winter and emerge from ground or log burrows in early spring. In the wild, the average life span of a barred tiger salamander is around 3 years. In captivity, however, it is very common for a barred tiger salamander to live for aro…und 20 years. Of course this is dependent upon their diet, habitat, and upkeep. The colors and patterns on tiger salamanders vary between individuals and change throughout their life cycle. Adults are usually black with yellow spots or stripes all over their body. How long does a spotted salamander live? National Geographic reports that they can live for up to 20 years in the wild. Opinions differ about its lifespan in captivity, ranging between 5-30 years. Adults mature at age two to three and can live up to seven years or more. Ecology and status Like all amphibians, the long-toed salamander absorbs water and oxygen through its skin and lives on land and water at various stages of its life. Once they have bred, these amphibians move to upland areas. Food. Adult long-toed salamanders eat a variety of invertebrates, including slugs, worms, and insects. Smaller larvae eat tiny water crustaceans (zooplankton), but as they grow they eat invertebrates, frog tadpoles, and often other smaller salamander larvae. In captivity, however, it is very common for a barred tiger salamander to live for aro … und 20 years. Of course this is dependent upon their diet, habitat, and upkeep. For more information regaurding any species of salamander or newt, you may want to check out this website... How big do tiger salamanders get? Tiger salamanders are the largest land-dwelling salamanders. They can grow up to a foot long, though most are between 6-8 inches. How long do tiger salamanders live? Tiger salamanders can live up to 25 years, though most do not reach that age in the wild due to predation and other hazards. Where do tiger salamanders live? Tiger salamanders can be found throughout the state of Minnesota. They live in or near wetlands like marshes, lakes, and ponds. They spend most of their time burrowing under the leaf litter or underground looking for food. In human populated areas, tiger salamanders can sometimes be found in window-wells and waterlines. Confidence votes 23.8K. That all depends on the type of salamander, most live 8-10 years, some live for approx 20 years, the Chinese giant salamander can live for 50 years. Query: how long salamanders live",
"output": [
"Salamanders live up to 20 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-72d85af071554cdbbbbee6233300cecf",
"input": "Teenage Brains Are Different. She learned that that it's not so much what teens are thinking — it's how. Jensen says scientists used to think human brain development was pretty complete by age 10. Or as she puts it, that a teenage brain is just an adult brain with fewer miles on it. But it's not. To begin with, she says, a crucial part of the brain — the frontal lobes — are not fully connected. Really. It's the part of the brain that says: 'Is this a good idea? Brains of Young Adults Not Fully Mature. 1 Why Teens are Lousy at Chores. 2 Study: Your Brain Works Like the Internet. 3 Children Beat Adults in Memory Contest. 4 Mental Exercise Nearly Halves Risk of Dementia. 5 Higher Education Fuels Stronger Belief in Ghosts. Understanding the Teen Brain . It doesn’t matter how smart teens are or how well they scored on the SAT or ACT. Good judgment isn’t something they can excel in, at least not yet. The rational part of a teen’s brain isn’t fully developed and won’t be until age 25 or so. In fact, recent research has found that adult and teen brains work differently. Adults think with the prefrontal cortex, the brain’s rational part. This is the part of the brain that responds to situations with good judgment and an awareness of long-term consequences. Teens process information with the amygdala. This is the emotional part. At what age is the brain fully developed? Although brain development is subject to significant individual variation, most experts suggest that the brain is fully developed by age 25. For some people, brain development may be complete prior to age 25, while for others it may end after age 25. The mid-20s or “25” is just an average age given as checkpoint for when the brain has likely become mature. A control group of 17 older students, ranging in age from 25 to 35, were also studied for comparison. The results indicate that significant changes took place in the brains of these individuals. The changes were localized to regions of the brain known to integrate emotion and cognition. We used to think that the brain was fully developed by very early teenagerhood and we now realise that the brain doesn't stop developing until mid-20s or even early 30s. There's a lot more information and evidence to suggest that actually brain development in various forms goes on throughout the life span. When your brain processes the same signals over and over, those networks will get stronger, like working out a muscle. So even if male and female brains start out similar, they may become different over time as boys and girls are treated differently with different expectations. They are all adult brain functions. 1 Organize information. 2 Make plans. 3 Make judgments. 4 Follow through. 5 Solve problems. However, female brains typically develop... The human brain does not stop developing until around age 25. Parts of the brain that are involved in decision making do not fully develop until that age. However, female brains typically develop... The human brain does not stop developing until around age 25. Promoting Healthy Brain Development. If you are under the age of 25 and your brain is not yet fully developed, you may want to take advantage of this critical period. This means that you can effectively be a co-creator in how your brain decides to mold itself. Query: at what age do our brains fully develop",
"output": [
"Brain is fully developed by age 25."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f53af753ad3040989459898e9b1b7530",
"input": "Disability Insurance (DI) versus Paid Family Leave (PFL)? Your DI benefits are not reportable for tax purposes with one exception. If you are receiving Unemployment Insurance (UI) benefits, become unable to work due to a disability, and begin receiving DI benefits, your DI benefits are considered a substitution for your UI benefits and will then be reportable for tax purposes. Editor's Picks. 1 Cyberweapons are now in play: From US sabotage of a North Korean missile test to hacked emergency sirens in Dallas. 2 Elon Musk and the cult of Tesla: How a tech startup rattled the auto industry to its core. 3 The truth about MooCs and bootcamps: Their biggest benefit isn't creating more coders. Although some companies offer paid time off for expecting mothers and their partners, most working women must rely on a combination of short-term disability, sick leave, vacation, personal days, and the Family and Medical Leave Act to get the time they need for their new child. Moms need to know that they can take their FMLA leave for up to 1 year after their child's birth. I'm so glad I did this. A 9 and 11 month old knows who's mommy more than at 3 months old. For my second baby I may not be able to take this time off due to my work responsibilities. In fact, most American women receive no pay during their maternity leave and instead rely on federal parental leave law (called the Family and Medical Leave Act, or FMLA) to protect their job for up to 12 weeks after childbirth or adoption. Many women technically aren't even eligible for unpaid time off under family leave laws, either because they haven't been at a job long enough (FMLA stipulates that you've been working at your current job at least 12 months and 1,250 hours) or because their company is too small (the law only applies to companies with more than 50 employees within a 75-mile radius). Parental leave has been available as a legal right and/or governmental program for many years, in one form or another. In 2014, the International Labour Organization reviewed parental leave policies in 185 countries and territories, and found that all countries except Papua New Guinea have laws mandating some form of parental leave. How long your maternity leave can last. Your maternity leave will last for a year unless you tell your employer you want to return earlier. It can’t last longer than a year. The shortest maternity leave you can take is 2 weeks. This goes up to 4 weeks if you work in a factory. If you want to take more than a year off A few to keep in mind: 1 The FMLA only covers one person in a couple per company: If you and your partner are employed by the same company, you’re entitled to 12 weeks total time combined — not 12 weeks each. 2 You’ll likely need to use it as a last resort. 3 Give notice. Building up holiday on maternity leave. You build up holiday as normal while you’re on maternity leave. If you can’t take your holiday because you’re on maternity leave, your employer should let you carry over up to 5.6 weeks of unused days (28 days if you work 5 days a week) into your next holiday year. Query: how long is maternity leave ?",
"output": [
"The shortest maternity leave you can take is 2 weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4d054a1cf33f428bbd833f8c88803b1f",
"input": "Less serious side effects may include: 1 warmth, pain, stiffness, swelling, or puffiness where the medicine was injected; 2 nausea, stomach pain; 3 headache; 4 back pain; 5 numbness or tingly feeling; 6 cold symptoms such as stuffy nose, sneezing, sore throat; 7 tired feeling; or. 8 itching or skin irritation around the knee. Supartz Fx Side Effects Get emergency medical help if you have any of these signs of an allergic reaction: hives; difficult breathing; swelling of your face, lips, tongue, or throat. Call your doctor at once if you have a serious side effect such as: 1 severe pain or swelling around the knee after the injection; 2 fast heart rate, sweating, chills or shaking; or. 3 heavy feeling, anxiety, confusion. This fluid acts as a lubricant and shock absorber for the joints. Sodium hyaluronate is used to treat knee pain caused by osteoarthritis. Sodium hyaluronate is usually given after other arthritis medications have been tried without successful treatment of symptoms. Sodium hyaluronate may also be used for purposes not listed in this medication guide. Pregnancy injections: usually specialty medications for injection or infusion in women. These drugs can be given for many reasons including to prevent pregnancy, pre-term labor, or autoimmune reactions. Most of these medications are given in a health care setting such as your doctor’s office or hospital. Examples: Depo-Provera, Makena, RhoGAM; There are also a handful of drugs where your first dose must be given under supervision at your doctor’s office, but you can then fill a prescription to self-administer maintenance doses. Intravitreal injections: specialty medications for the eye. These drugs are given by intravitreal injection, meaning they are injected into the jelly-like substance of the eye. Examples: Lucentis, Macugen, Eylea. Chemotherapy: usually intravenous, specialty medication used to treat various forms of cancer. These drugs are given as an intra-articular injection, meaning they are injected directly into the joint space, either as a one-time injection or at weekly intervals depending on the medication. Examples: Synvisc, Synvisc One, Euflexxa, Kenalog, dexamethasone Supartz (Sodium Hyaluronate) Supartz - is a solution of hyaluronate, a natural substance that acts like oil to cushion and lubricate your knee joint. Supartz is injected directly into the knee. Just a single course of treatment (five injections given weekly) can provide long-lasting pain relief. SUPARTZ has been in use since 1987 and approximately 143 million injections given. SUPARTZ is the most prescribed Joint Fluid Therapy in the world. Supartz is a natural chemical of highly purified Sodium Hyaluronate that comes from rooster combs. It is in the classification of medications that are referred to as visco supplements. In osteoarthritis there is usually a reduction in hyaluronate in the tissues and the joint. and there may be a change in the quality of the hyaluronate itself. Supartz is used to relieve the pain due to osteoarthritis in the knee joint. Like other visco supplements, it is only used if the patient has not obtained adequate relief from simple pain medication, exercise, or possibly physical therapy. Supartz contains natural Sodium Hyaluronate and is not chemically modified in any way. Acute inflammatory Since this medication is given by a healthcare professional in a medical setting, an overdose is unlikely to occur. Call your doctor for instructions if you miss an appointment for your sodium hyaluronate injection. Page 1 of 8. Supartz (Sodium Hyaluronate) Supartz -. is a solution of hyaluronate, a natural substance that acts like oil to cushion. and lubricate your knee joint. Supartz is injected directly into the knee. Just a single course of treatment (five. injections given weekly) can provide long-lasting pain relief. SUPARTZ has been in use since 1987 and approximately 143 million injections given. SUPARTZ is the most prescribed Joint Fluid Therapy in the world. Supartz is a natural chemical of highly purified Sodium Hyaluronate that comes from rooster combs. Query: how is supartz medication given",
"output": [
"Supartz medication is directly injected into the knee."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d0563bdf9b8b4db199c5830e528e8fff",
"input": "If you want to know how long your food poisoning will last, then you need to figure out which type of food poisoning you likely have. If you are feeling ill, take a look at the following food poisoning duration chart. These symptoms typically last for a few days or longer. Symptoms that last for more than 2 weeks, however, are a sign of chronic diarrhea. Call your doctor if you think that you have chronic diarrhea or if you see blood in your stool. When Will Symptoms Appear? When you were a kid, did you like to chant diarrhea, diarrhea to make your friends laugh? Now you probably associate the word with discomfort and embarrassment because having diarrhea is no fun. But nearly everybody gets it once in a while, usually due to gastrointestinal infections. There are three general classifications of diarrhea defined by how long the condition persists: 2 • Acute Diarrhea. This is when the illness only lasts between several hours to two weeks. According to Medical News Today, acute diarrhea is defined by world guidelines as the presence of three or more abnormally loose or watery stools in the preceding 24 hours. 3 It is usually caused by infection — bacterial, viral or parasitic. 4 Medications, especially antibiotics, are another common cause of acute diarrhea, because they upset the balance of good and bad bacteria in your gut. 5,6 • Persistent Diarrhea. It is when you suffer from diarrhea for two to four weeks. The most common causes of persistent diarrhea are listed below: 7,8 Diarrhea that lasts for more than two days in an adult or one day in a child, or which occurs with an infant. Severe diarrhea. Frequent vomiting. Blood in either stool or vomit. Extreme cramping or abdominal pain. Dehydration, which can include excessive thirst, little urination, sunken eyes, and dizziness. Black or tarry stool. The incubation period for a gastrointestinal infection depends on the particular germ causing it. For example, the Shigella incubation period is usually 2 to 4 days, but the period for viral infections ranges from 4 to 48 hours. Parasitic infections generally have longer incubation periods; for instance, in a Giardia infection, symptoms can take from 1 to 4 weeks to appear. Then, depending on the type of germ and the person's overall health, a diarrheal infection can last for a few days or a few weeks. The word diarrhea with its odd spelling is a near steal from the Greek diarrhoia meaning a flowing through. Diarrhea can be acute, that is, sudden in onset and short-lived, or it may be prolonged. Most acute episodes of diarrhea are due to viral infections and last three to five days. Prolonged diarrhea -- lasting more than four to six weeks -- usually is due to an underlying gastrointestinal disease, the most common of which are diseases that cause inflammation and malabsorption of food. If your sickness does not seem to match one of the five most common types, you may have a rare form of food poisoning. While some of these can last for as little as a day, others (i.e. hepatitis and cyclosporiasis) can last for as long as several months. By narrowing down the foods you ate and your symptoms, you can determine just how long you have to wait to be healthy again. In most cases, you can expect to be feeling better within 10 days. Evaluation by a physician generally is needed if diarrhea is severe, results in dehydration, persists for more than a couple of weeks (chronic diarrhea), or if there is a high fever or blood in the stools. Here are a few types of GI infections that you may have heard about: 1 Salmonella bacteria lead to between 1 and 5 million cases of diarrheal illness in the United States each year. These bacteria, a major cause of food poisoning, are frequently found in raw chicken or eggs. Query: how long does diarrhea last when sick",
"output": [
"Most acute episodes of diarrhea are due to viral infections and last three to five days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e437215e328043f5ab9500753c712abe",
"input": "Huck sells the money to Judge Thatcher for a dollar. Huck gives it to the Widow Douglas to hide. Huck takes the money back to the cave where he found it in the first place. The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn begins where the The Adventures of Tom Sawyer leaves off. At the end of the previous novel, Huck and Tom find a treasure of twelve thousand dollars, which they divide. Judge Thatcher takes their money and invests it in the bank at six percent interest, so that each boy earns a dollar a day on their money. In The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, how does Huck feel about Mary Jane? 2 educator answers How is Huck Finn hardworking in The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn? Get an answer for 'How does Huck feel about being civilized in The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn?' and find homework help for other The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn questions at eNotes eNotes Home Homework Help How does Huck feel about the killing of Boggs in The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn? 1 educator answer In The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, how does Huck feel about Mary Jane? 2 educator answers; How is Huck Finn hardworking in The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn? 1 educator answer; What is the sivilising of Huck Finn in The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn? 1 educator answer; More The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn Questions » Pap forces Huck to become a boy soldier in the Civil War. Pap gets drunk and beats Huck to death, then dumps his body in the Mississippi River. Pap locks Huck up in a cabin just outside of town. Pap sells Huck into slavery. How does Huck feel about the killing of Boggs in The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn? 1 educator answer; In The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, how does Huck feel about Mary Jane? 2 educator answers; How is Huck Finn hardworking in The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn? 1 educator answer Huckleberry Finn is the narrator of this story, and he starts off by describing his life to the reader. After moving in with the Widow Douglas, who buys him new clothes and begins teaching him the Bible. Huck is uncomfortable with all of these restrictions on his life, and soon runs away to avoid being civilized. Huck strongly dislikes the idea of being sivilized. It is the main reason why he does not like living with Widow Douglass. He wants to be free and not have to live by a certain set of rules. He wants to be in charge of himself and not have a care in the world. like 0 dislike 0. list Cite. Huck has become rich because of treasure he found hidden in a cave. Huck is impoverished and living on the streets. Huck has become rich because the Widow Douglas has legally adopted him. Huck is being trained to become a lawyer by Judge Thatcher. Question 7 7. In The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, when Pap returns to St. Petersburg and kidnaps Huck . . . Query: how does huck become rich?",
"output": [
"Huck has become rich because of treasure he found hidden in a cave."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-fb77833e0ab04245b82dd5329f248c55",
"input": "An IRS tax lien, which may occur at the state, local or federal level, significantly impacts your credit score, affecting your ability to get loans, credit cards and even a cell phone. Unless you know about IRS Form 12277. January 30, 2014 • 9 min read by 36 Comments. A tax lien can be one of the worst items to appear on your credit report. It’s considered very negative and can cause your credit scores to drop significantly. Even worse, under federal law, unpaid tax liens can remain on credit reports indefinitely, though in practice credit bureaus may remove them after a decade or so. (Once paid and released, a tax lien must be removed seven years from the date it was filed.) There is a way to make tax liens disappear from your credit reports completely, and quickly, though. Unfortunately, not all taxpayers who are dealing with this problem know about it. You can qualify to request your lien be withdrawn, if: 1 Your tax liability has been satisfied (you’ve paid what you owe) and your lien has been released; 2 You are in compliance for the past three years in filing your individual and business returns, and information returns (as applicable) and; If you have more than one tax lien on your report that is eligible for removal, you will need a Form 12277 for each lien you want withdrawn. Boxes 1 through 8 on the form ask for your name and basic identification information. Tax tips for your 2014 return 3:22 PM ET Fri, 17 April 2015 | 03:02. If you think IRS tax liens are required to stay on your credit report for seven years, even if you've paid your tax debt in full, then it's time we let the genie out of the bottle. A tax lien—the government's claim against all or some of your assets based on your failure to pay a tax debt on time—is one of the worst things that can appear on your credit report. It's a public record viewed by the credit bureaus, equal to a judgment or bankruptcy. Not long ago, I reviewed the credit report of a friend who had two tax liens on his credit reports. Though he had paid them off a couple years prior, he had no idea he could request they be removed from his reports. Thanks for your patience. 1 I went through the process and have a signed 10916 form (the lien was paid over 6 years ago). I have sent it to all 3 of the credit reporting agencies and Transunion responded as ‘release of tax lien verified, no change’. 2 http://www.Credit.com/. Within 30 days you should receive updated credit reports from each of the three credit bureaus. 5. Check each report to ensure that the tax lien(s) were expunged. If any of the three bureaus did not remove the lien(s), you will need to contact the bureau and be tenacious until it is removed. Step 4: Dispute the lien with the Credit Reporting Agencies. When you dispute a tax lien with Equifax, Experian or TransUnion, they contact the courthouse where the lien was filed to determine if the information is still accurate. The rest of my credit is good and my bills, credit cards, auto loans are all paid on time each and every time every month, but with these 3 federal tax liens on my credit reports I can not get my credit score above 600 and any time I need or want any financing the bank wants 40-50% down before they will approve it. Query: how long does a federal tax lien stay on credit report",
"output": [
"Federal tax lien stay on credit report for decades or so."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7915627d9f8e4e048f5d8e576fc2b222",
"input": "There are a few good ways to get your PayPal funds released, but the most effective ways of doing so are: 1 Print your labels directly from eBay. By doing this, you (and your customer) will receive the tracking information ASAP. Because PayPal won’t release the payment hold until the buyer rates and reviews you, this may be the best way to ensure you get your money in a timely manner. If, however, the package is lost in the mail (or the buyer is unresponsive) PayPal will automatically release your payment hold after 21 days. Unless, of course, the buyer is disputing your store and claiming you sold them junk. This will result in a loss of money, as well as endless amounts of stress. I sold several items with a new ebay and paypal account, all for less than $5. each, and paypal put the 21 day hold on me. I stopped using ebay about 5 years ago after my divorce, and i needed a new account and a new payupal account to sell on ebay. The Keys to Surviving the PayPal 21-Day Hold Policy. The “21 Day Hold Paypal Policy” has created a great deal of frustration for many eBay sellers. Below I have some recommendations for eBay sellers who are looking to ease the pain of this new policy: While everyone is at risk of a PayPal payment hold, there are ways to ensure that it doesn’t happen to you. Or, if it does, it won’t be often enough to bother you (or your business). Let’s talk about some of the ways you can avoid payment holds in the future. eBay sellers who are relatively new (less than 100 feedback or member less than 6 months) or who have had little activity in the last year (fewer than 20 DSRs in the last 12 months) are, therefore, automatically subjected to the PayPal 21-Day hold even if their buyer satisfaction rating is greater than 95%. Keep in mind these few tips to ensure you’ll be free of payment holds after a while: 1 Stay consistent with your customers. 2 Keep your DSRs around 4-5. 3 Don’t change up your store too fast. 4 Print your labels directly from eBay (if you’re selling there) and always enter your tracking number. Still not sure why PayPal has placed your payment on hold? Here are a few reasons to be on the lookout for: You’re new to eBay. If you’re not a valid seller and haven’t sold more than a few items, PayPal will put your payment on hold to make sure you’re delivering the item(s) in a timely manner. Whether you’re new to eBay or not, PayPal holds will affect you all the same. While this may send you into a pit of despair at first, these holds won’t last longer than 21 days. In fact, your payment may not even be on hold for that long! Payment holds can be lifted as the status of the shipped item is updated. Meaning: when your package is marked “shipped” and a tracking number is provided, the hold will be taken away. (If anything, the payment hold will be lifted when the buyer leaves feedback for you). Being a top-rated seller on eBay will come in handy in more ways than one. 1 A few ways to get to the top of eBay’s seller list include: 2 Being an eBay seller for more than 6-12 months. 3 Above 95% feedback score. 4 Less than 20 DSRs (Detailed seller ratings) within 12 months. Query: how long does paypal hold payment for",
"output": [
"PayPal holds payment for 21 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-29402fca6713429db6d5802488061124",
"input": "It usually only takes a few minutes to find out if you've got strep throat. If the first test doesn't prove anything, then your doctor might do a longer test called a throat culture. The doctor will rub a swab of fluid from your throat on a special dish and the dish will be left to sit for 2 nights. If you have strep throat, streptococci bacteria will usually grow in the dish within 1-2 days. If you have strep throat, your doctor will give you a prescription to take antibiotics for 10 days. These will probably be pills that you swallow. You will begin to feel better about 24 hours after starting treatment. Even if you don't feel sick anymore, it's important to take the antibiotics for the full 10 days. When one is sick what the body wants and needs is rest. Plus, going to work puts you in danger of many more bacteria that could get you worse and cause you to miss out on more days. Just stay home and relax...you have two good reasons for not going to work so don't worry much about it. Hope you get better hun! ^_^ Some people suffering from strep throat will also get swollen lymph glands in their neck. Others experience vomiting or a red skin rash. How Long Does Strep Throat Last? Strep throat will only last 3 to 7 days with or without treatment. Doctors usually treat strep throat with antibiotics even though they will not make you well any faster. Strep throat contagiousness will continue for 24 hours once antibiotics are started. With no treatment, strep throat continues to be contagious until symptoms resolve. Strep throat is a common type of sore throat in children, but it’s not very common in adults. Healthcare professionals can do a quick test to determine if a sore throat is strep throat. If so, antibiotics can help you feel better faster and prevent spreading it to others. Many things can cause that unpleasant, scratchy, and sometimes painful condition known as a sore throat. Within 3 days after exposure to the germ that causes strep's painful sore throat, you may get sick. Once infected with strep, you are contagious for up to 2 to 3 weeks, …even without symptoms. Up to 24 hours after it has been treated with antibiotics. You should stay home from work or school at least 24 hour after receiving an antibiotic shot or starting an oral ant … ibiotic treatment even if you feel better. A rapid strep test is an easy and accurate test performed to diagnose strep bacteria, causing strep throat. A rapid strep test is performed in the health care practitioner's office. A rapid strep test can assist in ruling out other causes of sore throat such as: Best Answer: 3 days on antibiotics, just to be safe. some say 24 hrs ... As long as the signs and symptoms of the infection occur, or as long as fever occurs. I ... In most cases, antibiotics will quickly wipe out the bacteria causing the infection. In the meantime, try these tips to relieve symptoms of strep throat: Get plenty of rest. Sleep helps your body fight infection. If you have strep throat, stay home from work if you can. If your child is ill, keep him or her at home until there's no sign of fever, and he or she feels better and has taken an antibiotic for at least 24 hours. If your child has strep throat, he may have some or all of these symptoms: Picture 1 - Have your child take all the medicine for 10 days, even after he feels better. The illness comes on suddenly. Strawberry appearance to the tongue. If you select Keep me signed in on this computer, you can stay signed in to WebMD.com on this computer for up to 2 weeks or until you sign out. This means that a cookie will stay on your computer even when you exit or close your browser which may reduce your levels of privacy and security. Query: how long do you stay out of work with strep throat",
"output": [
"You should stay home from work or school at least 24 hour after receiving an antibiotic shot or starting an oral antibiotic treatment."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7795dd5e568b49a99a176782ee07d560",
"input": "In animal cells cytokinesis occurs when a cleavage furrow (a groove in the cell surface) forms around the cell. This furrow narrows the cell across the centre and eventually p … inches it into two new cells. In plant cells a cleavage furrow does not form. Instead a cell plate forms across the equator of the cell. The main difference between cytokinesis in animal cells and cytokinesis in plant cells is how the division occurs. In animal cells there is a formation of a cleavage furro … w which gradually squeezes the cell in half. In plants cells they form a cell plate that gradually divides the cell in half. However, in all other cells, irrespective of whether they are plant cells or animal cells, cytokinesis is the method by which the cell divides into two. Advertisement Share This Plant vs Animal Cytokinesis Cell cycle involves events that occur from one cell division to the next cell division. This mainly involves in cell growth and cell division. In animal cells, division involves myosin and a contractile ring made of actin filaments. During cytokinesis, the role of the string is played by the contractile ring. Now, the contractile ring is composed of actin filaments that are assembled just below the cell membrane. Mitosis is followed by cytokinesis, the splitting of the cytoplasm . In cell division, a parent cell splits, producing two daughter cells that are identical to the parent. Eukaryotic unicellular organisms like the protist Amoeba use cell division in the production of new individuals, propagating their species. The cleavage furrow that divides an animal cell is also called a contractile ring. It is believed that the course taken by the narrowing contractile ring during cytokinesis is determined by the microtubules of the cell's mitotic spindle or positioned by a spatial cue taken from the cell's medial nucleus. How does cytokinesis differ in animal and plant cells? In animal cells cytokinesis occurs when a cleavage furrow (a groove in the cell surface) forms around the cell. This furrow narrows the cell across the centre and eventually p … inches it into two new cells. In plant cells a cleavage furrow does not form. Instead a cell plate forms across the equator of the cell. Best Answer: plants have a cell wall that divides the cell into two new cells animal cells are split with protine strands to form two new cells Answers. 1 well from my knowledge, cytokinesis in an animal cell- in an animal cell the cell membrane is drawn inward until the cytoplasm is pinched into 2 nearly equal parts. each part that has been divided has a nucleus and organelles. Query: how does cytokinesis differ in plants and animals",
"output": [
"The main difference between cytokinesis in animal cells and cytokinesis in plant cells is how the division occurs."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c343196812374d138c4ed969419e7996",
"input": "Just asked! See more. 1 A rectangle that is 4 m long and has an area ... Answer. 2 Lim x-->infinity(Sin n+cos n)^n Find the ... Answer. 3 What is f(x)=∫sec2x−cotxdx if ... Answer. 4 How do you describe the end behavior for ... Answer. In March 2014, Lellouch, de Bergh et al. published findings regarding methane mixing ratios in Pluto's atmosphere consistent with a Plutonian diameter greater than 2360 km, with a best guess of 2368 km. On July 13, 2015, images from NASA's New Horizons mission Long Range Reconnaissance Imager (LORRI), along with data from the other instruments, determined Pluto's diameter to be 2,370 km (1,470 mi), which was later revised to be 2,372 km (1,474 mi) on July 24, and later to 2374 ± 8 km. Play dozens of EA's best titles on Xbox One, try new games before launch and get 10% off EA digital purchases with EA Access. Electronic Arts Home tear up paradise city first At its July 2014 opposition, Pluto is closest to us for the year at just over 4 light-hours away. As seen from across Earth, this mysterious world is now highest in the sky when the sun is below our feet at midnight. These images show the difference between two sets of 48 combined 10-second exposures with the Long Range Reconnaissance Imager (LORRI), taken June 26, 2015, from a range of 21.5 million kilometers (approximately 13 million miles) to Pluto. 5 Responses. 1 Member Cassini/Huygens may be a good example for making long duration science…. Next spacecraft, “unique to Pluto”, may be planned, and, may even drop a science lab on it… (I mean “non-zipping type lab”…!) 2 Enormous distances keep the human mind in Perihelion and Aphelion: we get near then we go far. Pluto (minor-planet designation: 134340 Pluto) is a dwarf planet in the Kuiper belt, a ring of bodies beyond Neptune. It was the first Kuiper belt object to be discovered. Pluto was discovered by Clyde Tombaugh in 1930 and was originally considered to be the ninth planet from the Sun. A: It takes the planet Neptune about 165 Earth years or 60,190 Earth days to fully orbit the sun, which is equal in time to 1 year on Neptune. Neptune is the ... Full Answer > In short, a single day on Pluto lasts the equivalent of about six and a half Earth days. A year on Pluto, meanwhile, lasts the equivalent of 248 Earth years, or 90,560 Earth days! And for the entire year, the moon is hanging overhead and looming large in the sky. But factor in Pluto’s axial tilt, and you will come to see just how odd an average year on Pluto is. So, if it's a week to cross the country, how long would it take to drive to Pluto? Doing the simplest calculation possible assumes a straight-line trip from Earth to the dwarf planet, ignoring each planet's motion as well as the need to stop and pee. Query: how long is a year on pluto i ea",
"output": [
"A year on Pluto is the equivalent of 248 Earth years, or 90,560 Earth days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-5b5c937cf40d4755b1e8b401230c4d97",
"input": "Arterial embolization. This technique is used to block the artery that feeds the kidney that has the tumor. A small catheter (tube) is placed in an artery in the inner thigh and is moved up until it reaches the renal artery going from the aorta to the kidney. Catheter Embolization. 1 Catheter embolization places medications or synthetic materials called embolic agents through a catheter into a blood vessel to block blood flow to an area of the body. 2 Your doctor will instruct you on how to prepare, including any changes to your medication schedule. Sounds fine: Water isn't a burden on your kidneys. Only late in the course of kidney failure will there be a need to restrict, for the sake of the rest of your body. Hopefully that won't happen. Do look for a cause of your renal insufficiency other than your TS / lipomas. Implications for Patient Care. ■ 1 In symptomatic patients with enlarged polycystic kidneys, TAE may provide a minimally invasive and effective alternative to surgery. ■ 2 Worsening of anemia may occur, so increased doses of erythropoietin or darbepoetin at dialysis is essential to maintain adequate blood counts after TAE. Chemoembolization is not recommended in cases of severe liver or kidney dysfunction, abnormal blood clotting, prior surgery or stenting of the bile duct, or a blockage of the bile ducts. In some cases—despite liver dysfunction—chemoembolization may be done in small amounts and in several procedures to try and minimize the effect on the normal liver. Embolization is a procedure that injects substances to try to block or reduce the blood flow to cancer cells in the liver. The liver is unusual in that it has 2 blood supplies. Most normal liver cells are fed by branches of the portal vein, whereas cancer cells in the liver are usually fed by branches of the hepatic artery. Transarterial embolization for renal arterial bleeding Ertuğrul Mavili, Halil Dönmez, Nevzat Özcan, Murat Sipahioğlu, Abdullah Demirtaş R enal vascular lesions may be secondary to blunt or penetrating trau-ma, iatrogenic injuries during a procedure or spontaneously with or without underlying pathology (1). In most cases renal injuries are Embolization or embolisation refers to the passage and lodging of an embolus within the bloodstream. It may be pathological, for example a pulmonary embolism, or therapeutic, as a hemostatic treatment for bleeding or as a treatment for some types of cancer by deliberately blocking blood vessels to starve the tumor cells. In the cancer management application, the embolus, besides blocking the blood supply to the tumor, also often includes an ingredient to attack the tumor chemically or with irrad Arterial embolization is done in the x-ray department of a hospital. The doctor places a thin tube (called a catheter) into the large blood vessel in the groin. The catheter is then moved up through the blood vessel, toward the abdomen, until it reaches the renal artery that supplies the kidney with blood. Introduced decades ago, percutaneous renal artery embolization (RAE) has become an alternative to surgery for the treatment of uncontrolled iatrogenic arterial kidney injuries because the procedure is minimally invasive, with a shorter duration of hospitalization required (1, 2, 3, 4, 5). Query: how is arterial embolization done on your kidney",
"output": [
"Arterial embolization is done in the x-ray department of a hospital. The doctor places a thin tube into the large blood vessel in the groin. The catheter is then moved up through the blood vessel, toward the abdomen, until it reaches the renal artery that supplies the kidney with blood."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-27e64820d30e4abebb61b15bf1ab8ba4",
"input": "When buying a spiny lobster, look for a lively one and never buy a dead lobster that has not been frozen! Enzymes in the lobster rot the meat very quickly. When buying frozen tails, look for ones that have been vacuum-sealed—they will last up to a year that way. Cooking Spiny Lobster. If you are lucky enough to find a whole lobster, you can use the meat in a variety of recipes—from lobster Thermidor and lobster salad to lobster sauce for pasta. Since the meat isn't as sweet and rich as a Maine lobster, recipes that have added flavors and ingredients work well. Four-ounce tails, then, should boil for four minutes, while 10-ounce tails will require 10 minutes. The Single-Tail Guideline. As always, the details are important. First, as with whole lobster, you'll need 2 to 3 quarts of boiling water per pound of tails. That way, your water will return to the boil quickly after the tails are added. Don't begin timing your tails until the water boils again, otherwise your timing will be off and the tails will be undercooked. Spiny lobster tails are traditionally grilled, basted with butter. They are also excellent steamed and roasted. Be sure to get the thin little strips of meat from the tail flippers! If you get the whole lobster, make lobster stock out of the body and legs -- once you've picked the body meat out. Grilling the Lobster Tails. 1 Once the grill is hot, at least 15 minutes, give the lobster tails one last baste, add a bit of salt and pepper and place them flesh side down on the hot grill. Be careful of flare-ups from the dripping butter. Cook flesh side down for 4 to 5 minutes until light grill marks show. Flip the lobster tails to shell side down. A similar and larger species, the California spiny lobster is a rare treat, gathered in traps or by hand by divers and sold live in tanks. This makes the U.S. spiny lobster fishery a best choice if you are eager to eat only sustainable seafood. The same can be said for lobsters taken in Baja, Mexico, and Australia. How to Grill Lobster Tails July 8, 2008 Update for 2017 - Since first writing about how to grill lobster tails, my kids have gotten older and now into travel basketball and soccer. Needless to say, we spend a lot more time in restaurants with claw machines and very little time eating lobster tails. However, updating this recipe because I no longer oil the grill prior to grilling anything. Once you've picked out the body meat, you can make lobster stock out of the body and legs. Spiny lobster tails are traditionally grilled and basted with butter. They are also excellent steamed and roasted. Eating Spiny Lobster. From an eating standpoint, most of the meat in a spiny lobster is in its tail. Thaw the Lobster Tails. 1 If the lobster tails are frozen, start by thawing them to room temperature by placing them in a plastic bag and then submerge them in a warm bowl of water. Prepare Basting Sauce. 1 Next create a basting sauce. Melt the butter in a small dish in the microwave, or warm in a small pan and remove from heat. These can be as small as 2 to 3 ounces or as large as a pound in weight, depending on the species and origin of the lobster itself. If you're working from a recipe and purchased the specified size of tails, you can simply follow the recipe's instructions. Otherwise, the usual rule of thumb for lobster tails is one minute of boiling time for every ounce. Four-ounce tails, then, should boil for four minutes, while 10-ounce tails will require 10 minutes. The Single-Tail Guideline When buying frozen tails, look for ones that have been vacuum-sealed: They will last up to a year that way. 1 Main Dishes. 2 Cooking Techniques & Tips. 3 Cooking Techniques & Tips. 4 Seafood Basics. 5 Regional Food Tips. 6 Main Dishes. 7 Seafood Basics. 8 Main Dishes. Query: how long to boil small florida lobster tails",
"output": [
"The usual rule of thumb for lobster tails is one minute of boiling time for every ounce."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-aa7748dc866a42d98db5fea1ba949b9e",
"input": "We used to shop at the Kroger in Jackson, and it ended up being cheaper than the Union City Superwalmart, even when you figured in gas costs. We used to call Martin the armpit of the universe. The thing is that we were actually very excited to move there after spouse got the job offer. Union City, Tennessee. Union City is a city located in Obion County, Tennessee, United States. The 2010 census reported the population of the town as 10,895. Union City is the principal city of the surrounding micropolitan area, which includes Obion County and Fulton County, Kentucky. Union City is recognized for the following: It was the site of a minor American Civil War battle in March 1864, and it was the site of a Goodyear Tire and Rubber Company/Goodyear Tire plant, which generated a large amount of the city's e Get the price guarantee available for your trip. No Expedia cancellation fee to change or cancel almost any hotel reservation. Top 10 Hotels in Union City. Situated in Martin, this hotel is within 16 mi (25 km) of Graham Park, Wilson Park, and Union City Masquerade Theatre. How far is it? Currency Converter; Send a link to a friend. Your Local Weather. Set Your Local Weather (The page that shows up when you click the Your Local Weather link) Forecast Maps; Weather On Your Site; Tell A Friend A car with an MPG of will need 0.68 gallons of gas to cover the route between Union City, TN and Martin, TN. The estimated cost of gas to go from Union City to Martin is $1.75. During the route, an average car will release 13.39 pounds of CO 2 to the atmosphere. Your carbon footprint is 0.91 pounds of CO 2 per mile. Union City is a city located in Obion County, Tennessee, United States.[6] The 2010 census reported the population of the town as 10,895. Union City is the principal city of the surrounding micropolitan area, which includes Obion County and Fulton County, Kentucky. Union City is recognized for the following: It was the site of a minor American Civil War battle in March 1864, and it was the site of a Goodyear Tire and Rubber Company/Goodyear Tire plant, which generated a large amount of the city's economy. Distance Calculator - How far is it from Nashville TN to.... Fill in the question, get your answer in seconds! 31 mins. Distance from Union City, TN to Martin, TN is 16Miles or 26 Km. You can get this distance about 20 mins. If you want to planning travel with plane for 13 Miles or 21 Km, You can get this distance about 31 mins . Driving time from Martin, TN to Union City, TN. How long is the drive from Martin, TN to Union City, TN? The total driving time is 21 minutes. Your trip begins in Martin, Tennessee. It ends in Union City, Tennessee. If you're planning a road trip, you might be interested in seeing the total driving distance from Martin, TN to Union City, TN. You can also calculate the cost to drive from Martin, TN to Union City, TN based on current local gas prices and an estimate of your car's best gas mileage. If you're meeting a friend, you might be interested in finding the city that is halfway between Martin, TN and Union City, TN. Wise Staffing Group-Union City TN, Union City, Tennessee. 92 likes. Wise Staffing Group, headquartered in Mississippi, is a full service human resource... Jump to Query: how far is it between union city tn and martin tn",
"output": [
"The distance between Union City, Tennessee and Martin, Tennessee is 16 Miles or 26 Kilometer."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0fb41fca0a4a49c9bc8baefa594492a9",
"input": "She took throne after her father's death at fifty six. Maria Theresa took over the territories when she was twenty six. Maria Theresa was the only woman to take the leadership position in over 600 years. Before Charles IV's death, he was the last remaining male of the Hapsburg dynasty. The last woman as a leader was during the Hapsburg family's dynasty. Maria Theresa (1717-1780). Habsburg Empress, Co-Regent of the Empire. Without male heirs, Charles IV altered Habsburg family law by the Pragmatic Sanction of 1713, which proclaimed the indivisibility of his lands and designated his eldest daughter, Maria Theresa, as his successor. Maria Theresa did so many good things for Austria and that is what made her such a great ruler. When Fredrick the Great heard about the death of her, he stated, This woman’s achievements were those of a great man. In 1741, another claimant to the Austrian throne appeared, one Charles Albert, Elector of Bavaria, who was elected Charles VII in Frankfurt the following year. Maria Theresa was forced to cede Lower Silesia to Prussia in 1741, then the entire province in 1742. With the Peace of Aix-la-Chapelle in 1748, the Habsburgs lost Parma, Piacenza, Guastalla, and the Milanese territories west of the Ticino. Maria Theresa Walburga Amalia Christina[1] (German: Maria Theresia [maˈʁiːa teˈʁeːzi̯a]; 13 May 1717 – 29 November 1780) was the only female ruler of the Habsburg dominions and the last of the House of Habsburg. Maria Theresa took over the territories when she was twenty six. Maria Theresa was the only woman to take the leadership position in over 600 years. Before Charles IV's death, he was the last remaining male of the Hapsburg dy nasty. The last woman as a leader was during the Hapsburg family's dynasty. Maria Theresa Walburga Amalia Christina (German: Maria Theresia; 13 May 1717 – 29 November 1780) was the only female ruler of the Habsburg dominions and the last of the House of Habsburg. She was the sovereign of Austria, Hungary, Croatia, Bohemia, Transylvania, Mantua, Milan, Lodomeria and Galicia, the Austrian Netherlands and Parma. rming laws as an enlightened monarchy. In 1774, they introduced mandatory education. In 1780, Maria Theresa passed away in Vienna. She was the only woman who ruled in the 650-year-long Hapsburg dynasty. Her son, Joseph II, took rule after her death. Maria Theresa ruled for forty years the wide empire of Austria. Maria Theresa's first challenge was Prussia. They tried to occupy Silesia after the death of her father. Maria Theresa was born on May 13, 1717 in Vienna, Austria. She was the oldest child of Charles IV and Elizabeth of Brunswick-Wolfenbttl. She married her cousin, Francis of Lorraine. He later became duke of Tuscany and then emperor. Query: how long did maria theresa rule",
"output": [
"Maria Theresa ruled for forty years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-fb7588d6d3e64a089d76ef69a6e223f1",
"input": "The 2004-2005 crop year yielded 13.4 million U.S. tons (12.2 million metric tons) of stalks and 1.56 million U.S. tons (1.42 million metric tons) of raw sugar. Putting Florida's cane crop into perspective, prior to the Cuban embargo in 1961 Florida had only 50,000 acres (20,234 hectares) of sugarcane. What is the value of Florida's sugar crop? Recoverable sugar, by weight, has increased from below 10 percent in 1984 to 11.6 percent in 2000-01. In 2004-05, Florida contributed an estimated 51.3% of the cane sugar and 21.4% of the total (from sugarcane and beets combined) sugar produced in the United States. Where does the rest of the sugar produced in the U.S. come from? In the sugar-production process, raw sugar is moved from warehouse to refinery, where the sugar is re-dissolved and refined to obtain the purity required for white sugar crystals. Credits: Sugar Cane Growers Cooperative of Florida In 2007-08, Florida contributed an estimated 48 percent of the cane sugar and 24.3 percent of the total (from sugarcane and beets, combined) sugar produced in the United States. In comparison, Florida's 2007-2008 sugarcane crop year yielded 13.3 million U.S. tons (12.1 million metric tons) of stalks and 1.55 million U.S. tons (1.41 million metric tons) of raw sugar. Placing the current size of Florida's sugarcane crop into perspective historically, prior to the Cuban embargo in 1961, Florida had only 50,000 acres (20,234 hectares) of sugarcane. All Florida sugarcane is destined for one of the five sugarcane mills in south Florida. Corporations that grow their own cane and extract the sugar in their own mills produce over 65% of the cane. Independent growers for grower-owned cooperative mills produce another large portion, 25-30%. In 2004, Florida's raw sugar crop was valued at roughly $550 million (http://www.ers.usda.gov/StateFacts/FL.htm ). Most of the fibrous portion of the cane stalks (bagasse) was burned as fuel for the mills and saved an estimated 113 million gallons of fuel oil or 2.1 billion kilowatt hours of electricity. How much sugarcane is grown in Florida? In recent years there has been a slight decline in commercial sugarcane production in Florida. Sugarcane acreage has decreased from a high of 454,400 acres (183,727 hectares) in the 2000-2001crop year to approximately 400,000 acres (161,874 hectares) for the 2004-2005 crop year. The number of farms growing sugar beets declined slightly from 4,022 to 3,913, while average area harvested per farm also rose slightly from 312 to 319 acres. The number of sugarcane farms dropped from 692 to 666, but have fallen from 953 sugarcane farms in the United States in 2002. Sugarcane production. Sugarcane is a crop that can be grown throughout Florida. In many areas of the state, sugarcane is grown only as a hobby crop for syrup production or as a source of chewing cane. However, in South Florida, near Lake Okeechobee, sugarcane is grown commercially for the production of crystal or white sugar. An average stalk, therefore, has about 2.6 pounds (1.2 kilograms) of juice, which is roughly 11 percent sugar by weight. Thus, an average stalk contains about 0.3 pounds (0.14 kilograms) of sugar. Cane sugar and beet sugar are identical in chemistry and quality. Query: how many acres of sugar cane in florida",
"output": [
"In 1961 Florida had only 50,000 acres of sugarcane."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-55739a16274340dcabe32371a0655fb5",
"input": "Average charitable donations by income. The short answer is that the average itemized tax return includes $4,790 in charitable deductions, but that doesn't tell the entire story. First, not everyone who donates to charity can use the charitable deduction. To get the tax break, you need to itemize deductions on your tax return. The IRS has long required taxpayers to subtract the value of anything they receive in return for a charitable contribution before taking a deduction, so someone who gets a $5 tote bag for a $50 donation to a public TV station, for example, can only deduct $45. The national average in 2015 for deductions for state and local taxes, or SALT, was $12,471, and sponsors of the new tax law said the $10,000 cap combined with lower rates should protect most Americans from facing a higher tax bill. As a result, nonprofits are pushing Republicans to include something else in their tax plan that they say would increase charitable donations, but keep taxes simple: They want something called a universal charitable deduction, which taxpayers would get on top of the standard deduction. De Leon is proposing that California provide a credit on its state income tax for amounts given to a state charitable fund as a way to get around the part of the new federal tax law that limits deductions for state income taxes but not for charitable contributions. You may deduct charitable contributions of money or property made to qualified organizations if you itemize your deductions. Generally, you may deduct up to 50 percent of your adjusted gross income, but 20 percent and 30 percent limitations apply in some cases. Nonprofits Fear House Republican Tax Bill Would Hurt Charitable Giving Even though Republicans promise to preserve the deduction for charitable donations, nonprofits say other proposed changes in the bill could discourage as much as $13 billion in annual giving. Accessibility links Charitable Contribution Deductions. This article generally explains the rules covering income tax deductions for charitable contributions by individuals. You can find a more comprehensive discussion of these rules in Publication 526, Charitable Contributions, and Publication 561, Determining the Value of Donated Property. For information about the substantiation and disclosure requirements for charitable contributions, see Publication 1771. “The tax benefit of a federal or state charitable contribution is not regarded as a return benefit that negates the charitable intent,” the IRS memo said, citing federal tax court rulings in 1985, 1989, and 1991. Deductions for charitable gifts do not face the same limit as deductions for state and local taxes, a fact California and New Jersey want to exploit. Query: average charitable deduction",
"output": [
"The average itemized tax return includes $4,790 in charitable deductions"
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0afb0aba21934a6795c9febdacc7a077",
"input": "An antibiotic can also be classified according to the range of pathogens against which it is effective. Penicillin G will destroy only a few species of bacteria and is known as a narrow spectrum antibiotic. Tetracycline is effective against a wide range of organisms and is known as a broad spectrum antibiotic. Antibiotic resistance Antibiotic resistance. Bacteria are termed drug-resistant when they are no longer inhibited by an antibiotic to which they were previously sensitive. The emergence and spread of antibacterial-resistant bacteria has continued to grow due to both the over-use and misuse of antibiotics. Gram+ cells are only part of the bacterial world. There are many types of harmful bacteria that are Gram-negative. Penicillin does not work against Gram-negative bacteria, since the Gram- cell wall has an extra layer of protection that interferes with the drug reaching the peptidoglydan in Gram-negative bacterial cell walls. Therefore other antibiotics have been developed to work against Gram- cells. Since the introduction of penicillin, a variety of other classes of antibiotics have been discovered and put to use in fighting bacterial infections. Each class of antibiotics has its own mode of action or MOA. The mode of action is specifically how the drug works to disable or kill bacteria. Friendly bacteria help keep you healthy in many ways, so when antibiotics kill friendly bacteria, your health can suffer because you lose these benefits. Additionally, losing friendly bacteria can give other types of bacteria room to multiply, leading to opportunistic infection. Antibiotics are medications used specifically to kill or disable bacteria. All bacteria are prokaryotic. organisms, meaning that their cells are different than cells of the human body. These differences can be exploited, so that antibiotic drugs can kill bacteria without harming us. Most of the bacterial world falls into one of two categories, Gram+ and Gram-, based on Article Summary: Antibiotics are drugs used to fight bacterial infections. Although there are similarities between bacteria and human cells, there are many differences as well. Antibiotics work by affecting things that bacterial cells have but human cells don’t. For example, human cells do not have cell walls, while many types of bacteria do. The antibiotic penicillin works by keeping a bacterium from building a cell wall. Bacteria and human cells also differ in the structure of their cell membranes and the machinery they use to build proteins or copy DNA. Antibiotics kill bacteria, not archaea, fungi, or protists. The discovery of the antibiotic penicillin in the 1920s made a big impact on human history. Not only did it lead to a cure for bacterial infections that were once deadly, but it also led a big interest in finding new antibiotics. The effects of the antibiotic drug ceftazidine on Staphylococcus aureus bacteria. The antibiotic kills the bacteria (red) by causing the cell wall to disintegrate (yellow remnants). Antibiotics are chemicals that kill or inhibit the growth of bacteria and are used to treat bacterial infections. They are produced in nature by soil bacteria and fungi. This gives the microbe an advantage when competing for food and water and other limited resources in a particular habitat, as the antibiotic kills off their competition. How do antibiotics work Antibiotics take advantage of the difference between the structure of the bacterial cell and the host’s cell. They either prevent the bacterial cells from multiplying so that the bacterial population remains the same, allowing the host’s defence mechanism to fight the infection or kill the bacteria, for example stopping the mechanism responsible for building their cell walls. Query: how does penicillin destroy bacteria",
"output": [
"The antibiotic penicillin works by keeping a bacterium from building a cell wall."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-45be71752fb443fa9d2f5f3a34f7f067",
"input": "A gas doesn't have a definite shape or volume iits molecules are very loose A liquid doesn't have a definite shape, but it does have a definite volume. A solid has both a def … inite shape and volume. molecules in solid are closely bound together. In other words, the application of a pressure of 72.9 atmospheres on a sample of carbon dioxide gas at 88°F will cause the gas to liquefy. (An atmosphere is a unit of pressure equal to the pressure of the air at sea level, or approximately 14.7 pounds per square inch.) The incoming pressure of natural gas in the UK is somewhere between 19-23 mbar. Answer The density of LNG is roughly 0.41 to 0.5 kg/L, depending on temperature, pressure and composition. (In comparison water has a density of 1.0 kg/L) A gas doesn't have a definite shape or volume iits molecules are very loose A liquid doesn't have a definite shape, but it does have a definite volume. A solid has both a def…inite shape and volume. molecules in solid are closely bound together. Generally speaking, the closer natural gas gets to a customer, the smaller the pipe diameter is and the lower the pressure is. The gas utility's central control center continuously monitors flow rates and pressures at various points in its system. The critical temperature of a gas is the temperature at or above which no amount of pressure, however great, will cause the gas to liquefy. The minimum pressure required to liquefy the gas at the critical temperature is called the critical pressure. For example, the critical temperature for carbon dioxide is 88°F (31°C). That means that no amount of pressure applied to a sample of carbon dioxide gas at or above 88°F will cause the gas to liquefy. Aside from the machinery used to compress the gas and the energy used to drive that machinery, essentially no CO2 is produced. Natural gas at the well head is at high pressure …, in order to liquefy it it needs to be compressed to about 50 atmospheres and cooled by running it through condensers to release the heat of compression. What is the typical burner pressure for natural gas? This is the pressure supplied from the gas meter to a appliance this should be 20mb at the inlet of the gas valve before the appliance is working ie taking gas from the main p … ipe. Gases, liquefaction of. Liquefaction of gases is the process by which a gas is converted to a liquid. For example, oxygen normally occurs as a gas. However, by applying sufficient amounts of pressure and by reducing the temperature by a sufficient amount, oxygen can be converted to a liquid. How Does the Natural Gas Delivery System Work? How Does the Natural Gas Delivery System Work? Gas flowing from higher to lower pressure is the fundamental principle of the natural gas delivery system. The amount of pressure in a pipeline is measured in pounds per square inch. From the well, the natural gas goes into gathering lines, which are like branches on a tree, getting larger as they get closer to the central collection point. Query: at what pressure does natural gas liquify",
"output": [
"In order to liquefy natural gas it needs to be compressed to about 50 atmospheres and cooled by running it through condensers to release the heat of compression."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7469321adeba4942905953d53bdca479",
"input": "Broiled Short Ribs - Directions. 1 Trim fat from rib meat. Sprinkle with salt and pepper to taste. 2 In a small bowl, combine the molasses, ketchup, lemon juice, dry mustard, chili powder and garlic powder. Mix thoroughly. 3 Place the drained meat on a broiler rack. Brush molasses mixture over ribs. When you're ready to cook the ribs, get the pan ready. Choose a large pan with 2-inch sides that can comfortably hold all of the ribs in a single layer. Stacking the ribs will result in unevenly cooked meat. I like to boil my ribs before slathering them in BBQ sauce and then toss them on the grill. :d How many people boil their ribs before tossing them on the grill? Yes, we love and eat beef short ribs as much and often as the next guy does. But, this plate is wildly different. On the outside, the ribs look as enticing as you’d expect any good short rib dishes to. Bafflement begins when you cut into the rib. Suddenly, you start questioning your senses: You feel as though your knife is running through some very tender cut, not unlike prime ribs. Place the short ribs in the pan and add 2 cups of water. The water should almost completely cover the meat. Add the thyme and bay leaves, cover the pan, and cook in the preheated oven for 3 hours. Check on the meat periodically, adding more water if necessary. Turn the ribs over halfway through. Cook's notes: Recipe calls for 6 to 8 hours in a low oven (250 degrees). Call ahead to your butcher two days or more in advance if you want boneless short ribs. If you prefer, select bone-in variety, but when you order, take into account waste (bone, excess fat). Preliminaries: Heat oven to 250 degrees. In a stockpot, bring 6 quarts water to a boil. Stir in 1 cup each sugar and coarse salt until dissolved. Add smashed unpeeled cloves from 1 head garlic and meat; boil until cooked through and tender at bone, 20 minutes for chicken, 30 minutes for pork ribs, and 40 minutes for beef ribs. You don't need to boil spareribs before grilling because you can make tender, juicy, delicious ribs without boiling them. Many grilling and barbecue enthusiasts will tell you the length of time you should boil ribs before cooking is zero minutes. Some cooks prefer to boil ribs before cooking and a typical time, with the ribs fully submerged in salted water, is around 45 minutes to an hour on a medium-low simmer. While boiling does have some advantages over straight grilling, it has a significant downside. But as an avid cook, my challenge is to streamline a professional recipe to something simple and convenient enough to make at home whenever I have a craving for those delicious short ribs. I’ve found that cooking them in the oven at a low temperature of 190 degrees Fahrenheit for just eight hours yields some very tender and juicy meat that somewhat resembles what I tasted at Julienne. How to Cook Ribs in the Oven. When cooking ribs in the oven, place ribs on rack of a broiler pan. Brush with KRAFT or BULL’S-EYE Barbecue Sauce, then bake at 350°F for 1 hour 15 min. or until ribs are done, turning and brushing occasionally with additional barbecue sauce. Query: how long to boil short ribs",
"output": [
"It takes 3 hours to boil short ribs in the preheated oven."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-455a23fa5db64c3aaac8b741f5089b6a",
"input": "The installation cost will vary greatly depending on which kind of electric fence you are purchasing. The average cost of installing an electric fence is $1,150. However, homeowners can typically expect to pay between $964 and $1,433. There are a few key considerations that all homeowners should factor into their budget. Fence Repair Cost: National & Local Price Guide Pro Referral. and aluminum fence systems, and like wood, . labor costs may be affected by the height of your fence . and the cleaning and removal of old finishes . Read More [....] HomeAdvisor's Wood Fence Cost Guide lists prices associated with installing a wooden fence including labor and materials, as reported by HomeAdvisor customers. Read More [....] Cost to Install a Wood Fence - Estimates and Prices at Fixr What is the average cost for installation/replacement of . Ask Your Question. Angie's List Answers . the materials on a wood fence job typically run about . though reusing materials will also increase your labor cost over . Read More [....] Physical Fence Strands. One of the primary cost considerations is the number and type of electric fence strands that will be in use. Physical fences commonly have between one and 11 strands that can feature a wide range of materials, such as steel and high-tensile wire. The average cost to enclose an acre of land is between $200 and $2,500. Size of Your Property If you decide to build a real electric fence, then a major factor influencing price will be the size of your property. Nationally, the cost to install a fence averages around $2,667, with most homeowners spending between $1,640 and $3,855. This data is based on actual project costs as reported by HomeAdvisor members. Are you thinking about installing a fence or paying a professional to do it for you? If so, there are a few things you need to understand about the process to make an informed decision. Building a fence costs approximately $2,667 for the average installation. Some owners can save as much as $1,000 off that price while the upper price boundary is $4,000. These calculations come from project reports by HomeAdvisor members. When deciding to install a fence, keep in mind that there are many options, including aluminum, chain link, vinyl, wood and wrought iron. While a wooden fence offers more privacy and security, the costs of labor and materials will be more. According to our fence installation cost estimator, the average price to install a fence is $2,388. No matter your preferred type, most homeowners choose a six-foot privacy fence. The average minimum cost to install a six-foot privacy fence is $3 per linear foot, with the maximum coming in at $13 per linear foot. Security gates, for those looking for extra protection, on average, cost around $5,000. Those of you looking to keep your pets in the yard should look into electric or invisible fences, which come in at $1,070. What Goes Into the Price of Fence Installation? Undoubtedly, the biggest cost that comes with fence installation is materials. An electric fence is more cost-effective than a physical fence. In fact, an electric fence that includes six high-tensile strands costs 10 to 15% less than a barbed wire fence with five strands. Cons Along with material costs, labor costs for fencing . breakdown for my home to remove and install a new wooden fence. Read More [....] Cost of a Fence Post - Estimates and Prices Paid . Fence Price Guides - Compare Fences Types, Costs & Prices . Fence Price Guides. Fence Costs . For the purposes of this fence price comparison we＊ve allowed for an average labor cost for the . Wood Fence $7.98 $14.78 . Read More [....] Query: average cost of fence homeadvisor",
"output": [
"The average cost of Fence homeadvisor is between $1,640 and $3,855."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b97355a2a3954793869e58d1184ede48",
"input": "They mostly stay underwater for 3 to 8 minutes. However, longer periods of up to 30 minutes 50 to 80 minutes A:a whale can stay under water for more than a hour. it can stay i…n water for about 50-80 minutes. Up to 30 min. The Sperm whale can hold its breath for up to 90 minutes. Human beings can hold their breath under water for an average of one minute. A hippopotamus can stay underwater for 15 minutes. The sperm whale and bottlenose whale can stay underwater the longest: some have been recorded on dives that lasted nearly two hours. a blue whale can reportedly hold it breath for up to 20 minutes. How long whales stay under water during normal feeding dives and how long. they can stay under water if they have to is quite different. Blue whales can. a blue whale can reportedly hold it breath for up to 20 minutes.How long whales stay under water during normal feeding dives and how longthey can stay. · just now. 1 My whale can stay underwater indefinitely, it's just a toy. 2 My whale stays in the shower until the hot water runs out. 3 The average length of a killer whales' dive is about 10 minutes with a max dive time of about 15 minutes. 4 a whale can stay under water for 1-2.5 hours. 5 1-2 hours. 6 I have never timed my whale when it is underwater. a blue whale can reportedly hold it breath for up to 20 minutes. How long whales stay under water during normal feeding dives and how long they can stay under water if they have to is quite different. Blue whales can stay submerged for about 40 min but their dive lengths are more on the order of 10-15 min. Hope this helped! Best Answer: It depends on the type of whale. Killer whales can hold their breath for about 20 minutes while Sperm whales can hold their breath for over an hour! If the whale is a deep-diving whale, it can typically hold it's breath longer than more shallow diving whales. Also, dolphins (a killer whale is the largest in the dolphin family) can't hold their breath as long as true whales. They mostly stay underwater for 3 to 8 minutes. However, longer periods of up to 30 minutes 50 to 80 minutes A:a whale can stay under water for more than a hour. it can stay i … n water for about 50-80 minutes. Up to 30 min. The Sperm whale can hold its breath for up to 90 minutes. My whale can stay underwater indefinitely, it's just a toy. live whales on the other hand can stay under until they need to take a breath, or until they drown, after which they'll float back to the surface temporarily. I don't know if you realized but there are many different species of whale. My whale stays in the shower until the hot water runs out. The average length of a killer whales' dive is about 10 minutes with a max dive time of about 15 minutes. a whale can stay under water for 1-2.5 hours I can only stay underwater for 1 minute. 1-2 hours. I have never timed my whale when it is underwater. Query: how long can a blue whale stay underwater",
"output": [
"A blue whale can stay for up to 20 minutes in underwater."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9f4fe73920884843921ae3e591eb50fa",
"input": "One of the main concerns patients have is how long LASIK recovery will take. Our blog post covers the most frequently asked questions. LASIK surgery is an extremely effective procedure with very little recovery time. While there is no set time for how long it will take your vision to fully stabilize, results are seen almost immediately. If you are interested in LASIK surgery, contact your doctor to see if you are a candidate. Read on as Lakewood Ophthalmologist Dr. Edward Hedaya of InVision EyeCare explains how long LASIK/PRK surgery takes. A Quick (and Comfortable) Surgery. LASIK and PRK are outpatient procedures, so patients can have surgery and go home on the same day. From start to finish, the LASIK and PRK procedures take about 10 to 15 minutes. But the actual laser needs mere seconds to reshape the cornea to correct vision. What to Expect on the Day of Your Surgery. What to expect on the day of your surgery primarily depends on your choice in surgeon and surgery center. Before Surgery. If you decide to go ahead with LASIK surgery, you will need an initial or baseline evaluation by your eye doctor to determine if you are a good candidate. This is what you need to know to prepare for the exam and what you should expect: You should see your doctor within the first 24 to 48 hours after surgery and at regular intervals after that for at least the first six months. At the first postoperative visit, your doctor will remove the eye shield, test your vision, and examine your eye. One of the main concerns about any surgery is how long it will take to recover. With LASIK, the recovery is simple and relatively easy. We’ll walk you through the recovery process so you can see exactly what to expect after. Immediately After Surgery. Following the surgery, your doctor will likely give you protective eye shields or sunglasses to wear to protect your eyes as they heal. LASIK surgery takes very little time. The entire procedure for both eyes is usually completed within 15 minutes. The first step of LASIK – creating the corneal flap – may take longer that the laser reshaping of the eye (step two). If the flap is created with a microkeratome, this step takes only a few seconds. But if it's created with a femtosecond laser (in an all-laser LASIK procedure), it may a minute or two. In most cases, the laser reshaping of the eye takes less than a minute. The time for LASIK versus PRK procedures are similar. During the first few months after surgery, your vision may fluctuate. 1 It may take up to three to six months for your vision to stabilize after surgery. 2 Glare, haloes, difficulty driving at night, and other visual symptoms may also persist during this stabilization period. If you wear contact lenses, it is a good idea to stop wearing them before your baseline evaluation and switch to wearing your glasses full-time. 1 Contact lenses change the shape of your cornea for up to several weeks after you have stopped using them depending on the type of contact lenses you wear. Your doctor should perform a thorough eye exam and discuss: 1 whether you are a good candidate. 2 what the risks, benefits, and alternatives of the surgery are. 3 what you should expect before, during, and after surgery. 4 what your responsibilities will be before, during, and after surgery. Query: how long does lasik surgery take",
"output": [
"LASIK surgery takes very little time. The entire procedure for both eyes is usually completed within 15 minutes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c3f04f1996e84ae8ab6d23214a2b6594",
"input": "Know Your Rights » Moving Out » Deposits Deposits FAQ. How long does the landlord have to return my deposit? If my landlord didn’t get a statement to me in 21 days, can I still be charged for damages? Can the landlord require me to have the carpets professionally cleaned before I move out? How long does my landlord have to give me my deposit back. 1 Bismarck, ND | 1 attorney answer. 2 Atlanta, GA | 1 attorney answer. 3 Chicopee, MA | 3 attorney answers. 4 Taylor, MI | 2 attorney answers. 5 Escondido, CA | 1 attorney answer. Remember, too, your security deposit isn’t the limit of your liability. While you’re entitled to get some or all of your security deposit back—if you've done little or no damage—if the amount of damage exceeds the amount of your deposit, the landlord can bill—or even sue—you to recover the remaining damages. Does my landlord have to show me receipts for damage repairs deducted from my deposit or charged to me? What is “normal wear and tear”? If the landlord gave me a written lease, a complete move-in checklist, and a specific written statement within 21 days, does this prevent me from requesting my deposit back or disputing the charges? Are you ever going to see it again? Does it mean you don’t have to pay your last month’s rent? What is a security deposit? A security deposit is a fixed amount of money you pay your landlord, or management company, to cover any damage you might cause to the property. The landlord can’t spend that money while you live in the apartment. The new law, which goes into effect January 15, 2017, requires landlords to charge no more than 1 month’s rent for security deposit and nonrefundable fees. Additionally, tenants are allowed up to a 6 month payment plan for the security deposit, any nonrefundable fees, and last month’s rent. How long does the landlord have to return my deposit? RCW 59.18.280 states that the landlord has 21 days from the time the rental agreement ends and the tenant vacates the unit to postmark the return of the deposit or a written statement detailing why portions of the deposit were withheld. The correspondence must be postmarked by the 21st day. The landlord sends you an itemized list of damages and repair costs, along with any remaining balance on your security deposit; When you move out, be sure to give your landlord your new address. They are legally required to send you an itemized list of damages and the balance of your security deposit within a certain time period, but they can’t do that if they don't know where to find you. Information landlords must give tenants. Once your landlord has received your deposit, they have 30 days to tell you: the address of the rented property. how much deposit you’ve paid. how the deposit is protected. the name and contact details of the tenancy deposit protection (TDP) scheme and its dispute resolution service. Get Involved. 1 Join the Tenants Union action alert list Get occasional updates on issues and actions affecting Washington State tenants. 2 Become a Member TU members are the heart and strength of the Tenants Union’s work for housing justice. 3 Volunteer at the TU We need your talents! Query: how long does the landlord have to give back the deposit",
"output": [
"It takes 30 days the landlord have to give back the deposit."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9270f7f7cec347c0b0670ea34f63aa69",
"input": "The way you breastfeed changes as your baby grows. Exclusively breastfed newborns should be put to the breast on demand, at least every two to three hours throughout the day and night. At two months, your child may be able to go a little longer between feedings, and he may even sleep for a longer stretch at night. Exclusive breastfeeding Ten things you may not know about exclusive breastfeeding Every mother who chooses to exclusively breastfeed her baby in the first 6 months is doing the best thing she can to help her baby grow and stay healthy Not all breastfeeding is equal and the differences are important: Exclusive breastfeeding: breastmilk only - nothing else. 1 Mixed feeding: adding anything else - water, juice, tea, formula, cereals, baby foods or other foods. Mixed feeding can increase the chances of a child getting infections. WHO recommends that infants start receiving complementary foods at six months (180 days) of age in addition to breast milk. Foods should be adequate, meaning that they provide sufficient energy, protein and micronutrients to meet a growing child's nutritional needs. Women have been breastfeeding for as long as they have been having babies. For thousands of years, breastfeeding (also known as lactation, nursing, and suckling) was the only way for a mother to feed her baby, and it was necessary for a child's survival. Then, in the early 1900s, an alternative to breastfeeding was developed. Q: Up to what age can a baby stay well nourished by just being breastfed? A:Infants should be exclusively breastfed – i.e. receive only breast milk – for the first six months of life to achieve optimal growth, development and health. Exclusive breastfeeding is defined as giving no other food or drink – not even water – except breast milk. 1 Breastfeeding Along With Complementary Foods: Breastfeeding along with the addition of solid foods is called complementary feeding. Complementary foods are often added to a child's diet between four and six months of age. 2 Comfort Nursing: Breastfeeding is about so much more than just nutrition. As infant formula became safer, more women began to choose bottle feeding formula over breastfeeding. 1 Over the next few decades, breastfeeding became less and less popular, and by the 1960s breastfeeding rates were at an all-time low. But in the 1970s, breastfeeding rates began to rise slowly. Breastfeeding Recommendations. Breastfeeding is the recommended way to feed newborns and infants. The American Academy of Pediatrics (AAP) advises mothers to breastfeed exclusively for the first six months of life and then to breastfeed along with adding solid foods to a baby's diet for at least one year. After one year, the AAP states that a mother and her child can continue with breastfeeding for as long as they both wish to do so. The World Health Organization (WHO) urges exclusive breastfeeding for the first six months, with the continuation of breastfeeding along with solid foods for two years or longer. Working mothers can continue exclusive breastfeeding by expressing breastmilk at work and at home. Expressed milk should be left covered in a clean container in a cool place, to be fed from a cup while the mother is away. Expressed breastmilk will last 8-10 hours out of the fridge, and 3 days in a fridge. When the mother returns home, she should breastfeed the baby often through the night. Depending on the child's appetite, 1–2 snacks may be offered ¾ to full 250 ml cup/bowl a Note: If baby is not breastfed, give in addition: 1–2 cups of milk per day, and 1–2 extra meals per day. Query: how long should a mother exclusively breastfeed her child for? (in ideal circumstances)",
"output": [
"A mother should exclusively breastfeed her baby in the first 6 months."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f437b9200d9d4ebc9b66cb220a69e6b7",
"input": "How does it work? The Senate generally operates by unanimous consent. If any senators refuse to consent to holding an up-or-down vote on Judge Gorsuch’s nomination, the Senate has to decide whether to overrule them. It would do so by holding a “cloture” vote on whether to end debate and proceed to a final vote. WASHINGTON — The Supreme Court nomination of Judge Neil M. Gorsuch is now going to the Senate floor. The Senate minority leader, Chuck Schumer of New York, has pledged to lead Democrats in a filibuster of the nomination. If he does, the majority leader, Mitch McConnell of Kentucky, has vowed to change Senate rules to clear the way for Judge Gorsuch. The potential showdown has raised interest in the peculiar Senate filibuster rule. But because a cloture process is often required to end debate on a bill, then the bill first must garner the support of a three-fifths supermajority. All told, this process of reaching a final vote on a bill can require about a week of Senate floor time to complete. Senate Rule XXII, often called the cloture rule, does allow a supermajority to limit debate on a bill, amendment, or motion; in addition, in the case of a bill, cloture limits the amendments that can be offered. Supporters of, for instance, a bill under floor consideration can file a cloture motion, signed by at least 16 Senators. What is cloture? Cloture — a process for limiting debate on a measure — is the Senate’s only weapon against the filibuster. The details have changed several times since its creation a century ago, but here’s the rule as it stands today: cloture is invoked when three-fifths of all sworn-in senators vote for the cloture motion. The Senate nearly always has 100 members, putting the magic number at 60. In other words, the cloture vote is the stand-off between a filibustering minority and an annoyed majority. If at least 60 senators vote Yea, the filibuster ends. If fewer than 60 vote Yea, the filibuster continues. In both cases, the side that “loses” has no further weapons to fight with. Left-leaning political blogger Matthew Yglesias has argued for eliminating the filibuster in two articles: “ 1 Failure Buster,” The American Prospect, April 2005. “ 2 The Silenced Majority,” The Atlantic, December 2008. How many members of the Senate does it take to end cloture? Cloture is a limited debate, and must be voted in motion by at least 60 members (3/5ths) of the Senate, after a petition calling for the action is submitted by at least 16 members. What are the qualifications to be in the House of Representatives? Hold up action on a bill by refusing to yield the floor, gives individual senators a degree of influence over legislation that is not available to the members of the House, whose debate is governed by a more restrictive set of rules. 60 votes in the Senate are required to invoke cloture and end a filibuster. Serve as a link between the majority party's leadership and its rank and party members. They check with party members and tell the floor leader which members, and how many votes , can be counted on in any particular matter. They also see that all members of the party are present for important votes and that they vote with the party leadership. They report to the floor leaders. But rather than relying on the formal rules like cloture, frequently the Senate can more effectively act using unanimous consent agreements. Such an agreement is a structured plan for limiting debate and amending – a plan that can be tailored to each bill that comes to the floor (somewhat akin to a special rule in the House). Query: how does the senate come to cloture",
"output": [
"Cloture is invoked when three-fifths of all sworn-in senators vote for the cloture motion."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-90963f71d1374dc2af0e7af30ea80a7a",
"input": "A ganglion cyst removal does not guarantee that ganglion cysts will not return, and you may experience new cysts a few years after surgery. But the chance of recurrence is low, and you may never have another cyst again after your initial surgery. Injections for Synovial Cysts. There are two types of injections that can be helpful to alleviate the pain: facet injections or epidural injections. Facet injection. The facet joint can be entered with a small needle, and occasionally the cyst can be drained by aspirating it through the joint. What advances are there in surgery to treat ovarian cysts and what are the benefits over other procedures? Laparoscopic surgery is very effective for removing masses, such as ovarian cysts. Benign (non-cancerous) cysts can usually be removed, while preserving the ovary. Self-removal of facial cysts at home is not recommended, because the cyst will grow back if not completely removed. Chances of infection, bleeding, and other complications increase for people who remove dermoid cysts themselves, especially because the person may not be able to differentiate between a harmless growth and other, more serious skin growths. Sebaceous cysts generally do not require medical treatment. However, if they continue to grow, they may become unsightly, painful, infected, or all of the above. Surgical. Surgical excision of a sebaceous cyst is a simple procedure to completely remove the sac and its contents. A healthcare professional can determine whether a lump is a cyst or tumor. A simple ultrasound scan placed against the skin will allow the healthcare professional to see whether the lump appears solid or hollow and filled with fluid. If the lump is fluid-filled, it may require no treatment at all. The doctor performs the surgery by guiding endoscopic instruments through the sleeve into the kidney. Under X-ray control, the cyst is opened, and a large portion of the wall is removed. This procedure usually requires an overnight stay in the hospital. Laparoscopy and Cyst Removal Laparoscopy and cyst removal is the treatment of choice for most patients with numerous or very large cysts. The laparoscopic approach is best for removing a large number of cysts and for those with a condition called adult polycystic kidney disease (APCKD). Hence, it is a cluster of cells that has grouped together to form a sac (not unlike the manner in which water molecules group together, forming a bubble); however, the distinguishing aspect of a cyst is that the cells forming the shell of such a sac are distinctly abnormal (in both appearance and behaviour) when compared with all surrounding cells ... Ovarian cysts can be small or grow very large. They can cause intense pain, especially if they twist or rupture. Some ovarian masses can be cancerous, so it's important to see a GYN specialist for a full evaluation. Symptoms of ovarian cysts can also include: 1 Bloating or swelling in the abdomen. 2 Pain during bowel movements. 3 Pain in the pelvis shortly before or after beginning a menstrual period. 4 Pain with intercourse or pelvic pain during movement. 5 Pelvic pain -- constant, dull aching. Query: how is a cyst removed?",
"output": [
"The laparoscopic approach is best for removing a large number of cysts."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-25ec2d57953744f8b6293d3359bd1944",
"input": "Dark, cold and whipped by supersonic winds, Neptune is the last of the hydrogen and helium gas giants in our solar system. (In fact, Neptune is currently the farthest planet from the Sun‹since the early 1970s, Pluto has been closer to the Sun than Neptune has, and it will remain so until the end of this century.) * At this distance, Neptune receives nearly 1,000 times less sunlight than Earth, and about two and one-half times less than Uranus, but its overall temperature is about the same as that of Uranus. 1,500-M.P.H. Winds Found on Neptune THE ASSOCIATED PRESS AN FRANCISCO -- Neptune is swept by 1,500 mile-an-hour winds, the fastest yet discovered in the solar system, scientists have determined from analyzing photographs taken by Voyager 2. It is estimated that the wind speed on Neptune could exceed 2,000 mph. Also, It's estimated to 1,000 miles to 2,000 miles. It is estimated that the wind speed on Neptune could exceed 2,000 mph. Also, It's estimated to 1,000 miles to 2,000 miles. The scientists discovered the winds blow in relatively thin weather layers no more than 600 miles (1,000 kilometers) deep on both planets. For comparison, Neptune is about 30,600 miles (49,250 km) in diameter, while Uranus is approximately 31,500 miles (50,700 km) wide. These findings help reveal how these winds originate, researchers said. Quick Answer. Neptune takes 19 hours to complete its spin. It takes 165 Earth years to make one orbit around the sun, which equates to one year on Neptune. Neptune is the eighth planet in the solar system, and it is at an average distance of 2.8 billion miles from the sun. Nothing on Jupiter remains the same. In terms of size growth, it can't really grow in latitude, as it is bound by Jupiter's zonal winds. That can change slightly, and it could expand in longitude, though we haven't seen them ever really do that (both the GRS and predecessor ovals have shrunk in longitudinal extent over the years). Started wondering about the speed of sound on Neptune when I heard winds there can reach in excess of 1500+ mph, well above Earth's speed of sound. According to this report, the speed of sound could range from 600-740 m/s or 1350-1650 mph on Neptune. What happens when wind speed break the sound barrier? Would these storms create a sonic boom effect? May 17, 2013. This image of Neptune was taken during the August 16-17, 1989, period as Voyager 2 photographed the planet almost continuously, but had no way to measure the winds or how deep they reach into the atmosphere. Now, scientists have turned to subtle changes in the planet's gravity for clues. Best Answer: Neptune also has 2,500 km/h winds of hydrogen, helium, and methane that gives the planet its blue appearance. Neptune weather is characterized by extremely violent hurricanes, whose winds reach 1,000 mph. winds on neptune blow 10 times than the earth's (or 700 m/second), in fact, neptune has the great dark spot in which storms whirls like swirling clouds. hadouken07 · 1 decade ago 0 Query: how fast can the winds on neptune",
"output": [
"Neptune has 2,500 km/h of winds."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-70ffe99b8f084299a74db1877e2d829c",
"input": "We’re confident you’ll be completely enamored by Jojoba Oil because our love for it runs deep. lt was our first product back in 1978, and it’s still our #1 selling product today. Over the decades, we’ve sourced our Jojoba from a select few farms in the Sonoran desert and Peru. Jojoba is a shrub that is grows in dry regions of northern Mexico and the southwestern US. Jojoba oil and wax are produced from the seeds and used for medicine. Jojoba is applied directly to the skin for acne, psoriasis, sunburn, and chapped skin. It is also used topically to encourage the regrowth of hair in people who are balding. For example, a 2012 study titled “Clay jojoba oil facial mask for lesioned skin and mild acne” found that applying a clay mask and jojoba oil mix applied to the face daily for six weeks could noticeably improve the skin tone and reduce acne. jojoba is brilliant, the oil that most closely resembles our skin's sebum, so perfect for any type!!! is also a brilliant eye make up remover too! and coconut oil is fab as a cleanser and also for making flapjacks!!!! Those who have acne prone skin can reap the advantages of jojoba oil benefits for skin, and prevent acne from occurring. With jojoba oil application on face, you can flaunt a smooth and flawless skin, even during the dry winter months. So, keep a bottle of organic jojoba oil in your cabinet, and use it on your face regularly. Since oil naturally attracts other oils, using jojoba oil as a facial cleanser can help you extract the dirts and oils from under your skin. Just put a few drops of jojoba oil on your face for a couple minutes and then rinse it off with water. 2. Jojoba oil locks in your moisturizer. If you have a moisturizer that effectively controls oil while still being able to hydrate your skin, such as a chia seed serum, then you can lock in that hydration with jojoba oil. (iii) Alternatively, if you like you can place a few drops of oil on your palm and apply onto your dry hair with the help of your fingers to make it manageable. 3. Jojoba Oil For Scalp: Jojoba oil on scalp works to clean the residues of blocked and encrusted sebum leading to reduced hair loss and diminished hair damage. Combine jojoba oil with aromatic essential oils to treat oily or acne-prone skin. Add 2 ounces of jojoba oil to a small bottle, then add 10 drops of rosemary essential oil and 15 drops of tea tree essential oil. Put a lid on the bottle and shake it gently. Smooth a few drops of the oil mixture over your forehead, nose, cheeks and chin. Let the oil soak in for a minute, then moisten a cotton pad with witch hazel. Wipe your face with the pad. Step 4. Combine oils with Vitamin E for a nourishing skin treatment. Mix 1 ounce of jojoba oil and 1 ounce of grapeseed oil in a small bowl. How To Use Jojoba Oil On Your Skin And Face There have always been natural solutions and remedies to help with the different ways that the skin on our body and face is affected by the struggles of daily life. Rub 1 tsp. pure jojoba oil on the skin affected with acne, using more pressure on areas that have the most breakouts. The jojoba oil will stick to the impurities and sebum. Continue to rub in the oil for one to two minutes. In order to pull the oils back out, the pores must be opened by applying hot water to the skin. Apply a hot, steaming cloth to the face until it cools, then wipe away the rest of the oil. Query: how do you use jojoba oil on your face?",
"output": [
"Put a few drops of jojoba oil on your face for a couple minutes and then rinse it off with water."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-6224f477beb7486eb54efc12ec179712",
"input": "When I use fresh onions, we store the unused parts for up to a week in our fridge in either a ziploc or a sealable rubbermaid-style container. For particularly pungent onions they go in the crisper drawer to keep the smell from being too strong in the rest of the fridge, but usually they're just on one of the shelves. Stilltasty says 2-3 days but my personal experience says otherwise. For cooked onions, you can find one answer here: http://www.stilltasty.com/fooditems/index/17825. 1 3-5 days in the refrigerator. 2 refrigerate withing 2 hours of cooking. 3 refrigerate in covered container or wrap tightly with heavy-duty aluminum foil or plastic wrap. Cooked or caramalized onions in the refrigerator. For cooked onions, you can find one answer here: http://www.stilltasty.com/fooditems/index/17825 3-5 days in the refrigerator. refrigerate withing 2 hours of cooking. refrigerate in covered container or wrap tightly with heavy-duty aluminum foil or plastic wrap. I agree compeltely with Glauber Rocha; @Shirley, although you asked about storing in the refrigerator, it is worth noting also that caramelized onions store very well in the freezer, up to six months. – Bruce Goldstein Dec 12 '11 at 16:01 Q: Are cut onions or leftover onions poisonous? A: When handled properly, cut onions are not poisonous. After being cut, onions can be stored in the refrigerator in a sealed container for up to 7 days. A widely circulated claim states uncooked, leftover onions are 'poisonous' because they're 'a huge magnet for bacteria,' thus likely to spoilage. This claim stems from a blog post that dates back to March 2008. Another option is to caramelize one or two onions in a frying pan, and then freeze the pre-cooked onions in smaller portions. (I tend not to like cooking with frozen onions, since the extra water will steam the onions rather than allow them to cook at the higher temperature you could achieve without the extra water. I've had good luck with sealed glass containers ... including when storing sliced or diced onions. I find that plastic containers can start to pick up the onion smell if you leave onion in there for too long. I've kept a halved, but otherwise in one piece, onion for over a week. For cooked onions, you can find one answer here: http://www.stilltasty.com/fooditems/index/17825. 3-5 days in the refrigerator. refrigerate withing 2 hours of cooking. refrigerate in covered container or wrap tightly with heavy-duty aluminum foil or plastic wrap. Cut onion can be stored 7-10 days in a sealed container in the refrigerator. I've not experimented specifically with glass or plastic, but I can understand how glass would be better. I'll have to give that a try. Sharp knives are key, that was a spot on tip! A wives tale that dates back as far as the 1500's claims that placing a cut raw onion in rooms throughout a residence could protect its occupants from getting the bubonic plague. Long before germs were discovered, the dominate belief was contagious diseases were spread by miasma, or noxious air.. Query: how long are onions good in the fridge",
"output": [
"After being cut, onions can be stored in the refrigerator in a sealed container for up to 7 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-2a0c1d7615b6440d8d6b3d75fb62f20a",
"input": "Keep all employment records for at least 4 years after the tax is due or paid Some business records should be kept permanently: Audit reports and charts of accounts The Internal Revenue Service requires companies to keep business tax returns and supporting documents for a minimum of three years from the time of filing. During this time, the return can be amended or audited. If you failed to report income, however, the IRS can come after your business for up to six years. If the business took a deduction for a worthless security or bad debt, the IRS can pursue the issue for seven years. To be safe, a business should keep tax records in its permanent files. If that's not possible, tax records should be kept for seven years to account for most scenarios where the records might be needed. Some business records should be kept permanently: 1 Audit reports and charts of accounts. 2 Canceled checks for important payments. 3 Records of capital stocks and bonds. 4 Cash books. 5 Contracts and leases still in effect. 6 Legal correspondence. 7 Deeds, mortgages, bills of sale. 8 End of year financial statements. 9 Insurance records. Here are some of the standard limitation periods on tax-related documents, according to the IRS: 1 If you owe additional taxes, keep records for 3 years. 2 If you do not report income that should have been reported, and it exceeds 25% of the gross income on your return, keep records for 6 years. The Internal Revenue Service requires companies to keep business tax returns and supporting documents for a minimum of three years from the time of filing. During this time, the return can be amended or audited. If you failed to report income, however, the IRS can come after your business for up to six years. If the business took a deduction for a worthless security or bad debt, the IRS can pursue the issue for seven years. To be safe, a business should keep tax records in its permanent files. If you owe additional taxes, keep records for 3 years. If you do not report income that should have been reported, and it exceeds 25% of the gross income on your return, keep records for 6 years. If you file a fraudulent return, keep records indefinitely. If you do not file a return, keep records indefinitely. Even if you no longer need records for tax purposes, you may still decide to keep them, as other organizations may require them. 1 Get started Ask a Lawyer a Question You'll hear back in one business day. 2 Get started Ask a Lawyer a Question You'll hear back in one business day. Conventional business wisdom says to keep these records for a minimum of seven years, particularly if the records relate to a business obligation in your jurisdiction. For example, if your city requires businesses to collect sales tax, the company's sales records should be retained in case the company's sales tax report is audited. Answers > Small Business > Business Compliance > How Long to Keep Records for Business Taxes The length of time you need to keep records depends on the action or expense each document records. You may need to hold on to some records permanently, but typically for business taxes, you only need to keep records supporting income or deductions on a return until the period of limitations for that return is up. If you file a claim for credit or refund after filing your return, keep records for 3 years from the filing of the original return. If you file a claim for a loss due to bad debt deduction or worthless securities, keep records for 7 years. Keep all employment records for at least 4 years after the tax is due or paid. Some business records should be kept permanently: Audit reports and charts of accounts. Canceled checks for important payments. Records of capital stocks and bonds Query: how long do i keep business accounts",
"output": [
"You should keep business accounts for 7 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-960d717c3b0d4c6ba1b4f0ad16558497",
"input": "No reward of any kind was offered as an incentive for repeating the behavior. Subjects chose actions like running 15 minutes before dinner, eating a piece of fruit with lunch, or meditating. The median length of time it took for a habit to become automatic was 66 days. The range, however, was 18 to 254 days for the habit to be established. In fact, about half of the subjects did not perform their chosen action consistently enough to create a habit. Interestingly, increased repetition of an action does not always yield stronger habits. To successfully break a habit, you need to think of your strongest motivation, which will drive you along. Think of a 'replacement behaviour' for the habit, but make sure it’s a positive one - replacing smoking with snacking is a common trap, for example. And be patient. The longer you’ve had a habit, the longer it will take to get rid of it. For some, habits formed in as little as 18 days and for others it took as long as 254 days. There are of course obvious flaws in the study; the numbers are self-reported and it was only 96 participants in the study. Missing a single day did not reduce the chance of forming a habit. A sub-group took much longer than the others to form their habits, perhaps suggesting some people are ‘habit-resistant’. Other types of habits may well take much longer. No small change But for the rest of your life, you will have developed the habit of not putting your hand on hot stoves, or touching live electrical wires. The habit will have been formed instantly, and endure permanently. 21 Days to Break a Habit or Make a Habit. According to the experts, it takes about 21 days to break or form a habit pattern of medium complexity. It wasn’t based on any real study. It was anecdotal. Based more on his personal observations with his patients and self-image than anything related to habit formation and behavior. One example included how long amputees sensed phantom limbs. However, there are a few reasons why the myth persists. People still believe it’s true. Bookshops are filled with titles like Millionaire Habits in 21 Days, 21 Days to a Thrifty Lifestyle, 21 Days to Eating Better, and finally, the most optimistic of all: 21-Day Challenge: Change Almost Anything in 21 Days (at least it acknowledges that it might be a challenge!). It’s not just me saying this either; there is science to support it too. 1 In 2006, Verplanken (6) gave students one of two writing tasks. The first group simply had to underline ‘She/she’ every time they came across it in a piece of text. So how long does it take to change your life – or at least, to adopt a new habit? There is a myth that has lingered since the 1960s that it takes 21 days to change a habit or to adopt a new one. And just like that, we have the 21 day rule of habit development. When you dig into the science, it paints a different picture though, and in reality just like I’ve pointed in the loopholes above, there’s much more to it than the 21 day rule suggests. Query: how long does it take for a behavior to become a habit",
"output": [
"It takes 66 days for a behavior to become a habit."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-2336cdfd3a3c4ef68db4c09abf43c297",
"input": "Highlights of Human brain development from conception through adulthood. Studies report that three primary structures are formed in the sixth gestational week. These are the forebrain, the midbrain, and the hindbrain, also known as the prosencephalon, mesencephalon, and the rhombencephalon respectively. Five secondary structures from these in the seventh gestational week. Worse, teens' brains make them much more vulnerable to becoming addicted than a fully developed adult brain. The part of the teen brain not yet fully developed is the frontal lobe, which is the part of the brain that manages impulse control, judgment, insight, and emotional control. So when teens engage in risky and/or foolish behavior, it's not just that they don't have life experience to know better, but that their brains have difficulty assessing consequences. Brain diagram. Credit: dwp.gov.uk. (PhysOrg.com) -- New research from the UK shows the brain continues to develop after childhood and puberty, and is not fully developed until people are well into their 30s and 40s. The findings contradict current theories that the brain matures much earlier. When we think about brain development and plasticity, most of us think about the birth and death of neurons or changes in the number or strength of synapses. Yet, no part of the brain works in isolation. Brain maturation and plasticity also depends upon the large nerve fiber tracts that connect different brain regions together. The limitations of the teen brain has been well publicized in the mass media, helping parents, teachers, and others understand why it may be difficult for teens to meet our expectations and demands for managing emotions, handling risks, responding to relationships, and engaging in complex school work or employment. The results are consistent with other research suggesting that the human brain continues to grow and mature right up to the point when we become adults and even beyond. In another study, researchers found that humans don't really develop the ability to handle multiple pieces of information at once until about the ages of 16 or 17. In a recent paper in the Journal of Neuroscience (link is external), investigators described a study in which they monitored white matter changes in 103 healthy human subjects, ages 5 to 32 years. For each subject, they imaged the brain at least twice with an average period of four years between scans. Some tracts, such as sections of the corpus callosum, appeared to reach maturity during adolescence, but, in about 50 % of the older subjects, the association fiber tracts continued to mature. Brain changes significantly after age 18, says Dartmouth research. Dartmouth College Office of Public Affairs • Press Release. Posted 02/06/06 • Contact Susan Knapp (603) 646-3661. Two Dartmouth researchers are one step closer to defining exactly when human maturity sets in. In a study aimed at identifying how and when a person's brain reaches adulthood, the scientists have learned that, anatomically, significant changes in brain structure continue after age 18. A fetus is a stage in the prenatal development of viviparous organisms. In human development, a fetus or foetus (/ˈfiːtəs/; plural fetuses or foetuses) is a prenatal human between the embryonic state and birth. The fetal stage of development tends to be taken as beginning at the gestational age of eleven weeks, i.e. nine weeks after fertilization. A control group of 17 older students, ranging in age from 25 to 35, were also studied for comparison. The results indicate that significant changes took place in the brains of these individuals. The changes were localized to regions of the brain known to integrate emotion and cognition. Query: at what age is the human brain fully formed",
"output": [
"Brain is not fully developed until people are well into their 30s and 40s."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-63fea60865514fd2867bdd5852efc381",
"input": "What cause if you suspect a broken how long to keep ace bandage on sprained ankle bones and typically advised to watch television. In specific type of fracture issues are healing due to the ankle. The first is available that you should seek out medical practicing yoga eating fast or sliding intricately like it’s hot hikers wear hiking. You’ll probably need to keep your ankle wrapped for 1 or 2 days after the injury and perhaps for up to a week or more. Elevation: Raising your ankle to or above the level of your heart will help prevent the swelling from getting worse and will help reduce bruising. Try to keep your ankle elevated for about 2 to 3 hours a day if possible. About Ankle Sprain: How Long To Keep Ace Bandage On Sprained Ankle. Ankle Sprain Recovery, Information and tips to recover from your ankle sprain. Ice will involve having an ice pack or maybe a bag of frozen peas. This helps lower the swelling and also slight bruising. You should use ice for as long as 72 hours following on from the sprain. Compression is usually taken care of simply by having to wrap or perhaps donning an ankle brace. Elevation is merely exactly that, holding your own foot above the level of your own heart. This will help to slow up the amount of swelling too. It is advisable to keep your ankle raised for around two or three hours each day. These are facilities around your habits that mild ankle brace that you will how long to keep ace bandage on sprained ankle need to avoid the severity of pain as a how long to keep ace bandage on sprained ankle result in repeated orthotic devices are commonly causes an injury places many of the essential to prevent diabetes can lead to stresses that were able to handle any podiatric care from the inside the nostrils. How Long To Keep Ace Bandage On Sprained Ankle. In chronic over-use injuries or some jerk running to carry too much of the Achilles tear muscles. By inserting a thin piece of bone or cartilage to break in a positions. This can have you a trip to the body in the night sky. Cats and. Ankle sprains are common injuries that can result in lifelong problems. Some people with repeated or severe sprains can develop long - term joint pain and weakness. Treating a sprained ankle can help prevent ongoing ankle problems. Key pointsIf an ankle sprain does not heal correctly, the joint may become unstable, resulting in a weakened and easily reinjured ankle. Proper initial care of your ... You may need to wear a brace or padded plaster, plastic or fiberglass splint for 10 days to 6 weeks. A brace or splint keeps the bones and injured ligaments from moving, which provides protection, reduces pain and speeds healing. How long before I can use my ankle? This depends on how serious your sprain is. If your sprain is mild, your doctor may suggest that you start trying to use your ankle again fairly soon–from 1 to 3 days after your injury. Ligaments connect one bone to another bone at a joint and help keep the bones from moving out of place. The most common site of sprains is the ankle. If swelling is kept to a minimum, it may help your ankle feel better. Applying a compression wrap is easy and can be done at home. Elastic bandages are inexpensive and available at most drugstores. You can wear a protective brace, such as a splint or a device to keep your ankle from moving (immobilizer), over a compression wrap. Query: how long to keep the brace for ankle",
"output": [
"You may need to wear a brace or padded plaster, plastic or fiberglass splint for 10 days to 6 weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-74ac39b2c173461db10909cbd8e57980",
"input": "So in warm weather it doesn’t take long for food to harbor enough bacteria to make you really sick. How Quickly Does Food Poisoning Start and How Long Does it Last? Food poisoning symptoms can begin as quickly as four hours or as long as 24 hours after eating contaminated food. People who eat the same contaminated food, say at a picnic or barbecue, will usually get sick about the same time. Symptoms can last three to four days or longer if you unknowingly continue to eat contaminated food. How Do You Treat Food Poisoning? The main treatment for food poisoning is to take in enough fluids to prevent dehydration. So, when your stomach settles down ... How long after you eat something will it take to affect you? Dr. Madsen: So food poisoning's going to take about six hours to hit you. And when I tell you this, I'm speaking from personal experience because I had some really bad potato salad once, that I knew was bad, and I still ate it and six hours later, I was as sick as I've ever been. Feb 3, 2017. Sometimes we eat something we wish we hadn't. Emergency room physician Dr. Troy Madsen says food poisoning generally takes about six hours to take effect, but most people get through it all right. Learn about the symptoms of food poisoning and things you can do to help yourself get through it. Dr. Troy Madsen says food poisoning generally takes about six hours to take effect, but most people get through it all right. Learn about the symptoms of food poisoning and things you can do to help yourself get through it.> Depends. There are many different causes of food poisoning, e.g., chemicals, bacterial toxins, live micro-organisms etc. However, once the poisoning has abated, it is okay to take a healthy diet rich in fresh vegetables, fruits, whole grains, nuts, beans, legumes, lentils; and low in saturated fats. It is important to avoid dehydation so liquids are a must. After the diarrhea stops, go back slowly over a 24 hour time span using toast, fruits.Avoid vegetables, nuts and legumes for a few days after food poisoning since their high-fiber content makes them difficult to digest, and they can cause gas. Spicy foods and sauces can also aggravate. ... The foregoing information is based on recommendations from the United States Food and Drug Administration (the FDA), the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (the CDC), and the U.S. Department of Agriculture (the USDA), working with the Partnership for Food Safety Education. Food : Food poisoning is a common condition that results in more than 75 million episodes occur annually in the United States. Close to one in five episodes of diarrhea is likely to be due to a food-borne disease. Harmful bacteria can be transferred from food to people, from people to food, or from one food to another. Bacteria can grow rapidly at room temperature: As temperature rises, growth rate increases. Growth of most harmful bacteria in food can be slowed or stopped by refrigeration or freezing. So if some sort of food poisoning, or something I believe to be food poisoning, hits, you know, it's the six hours later after I ate something, maybe it was even at a restaurant, should I automatically be worried, or will my body kind of take care of it? How soon after eating contaminated food do symptoms occur? There are many forms of food-related illness. Food-related illness can produce symptoms (cramps, diarrhea, vomiting, fever) from mild to very serious, with illness occurring from 30 minutes to 2 weeks after eating food containing harmful bacteria. Query: how long does it take for food poisoning to start after u eat",
"output": [
"Food poisoning symptoms can begin as quickly as four hours or as long as 24 hours after eating contaminated food."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-107ae1b939554b1a83f73a811ecb5781",
"input": "05-07 Mustang GT - 13.8 @ 103, Car and Driver - These cars run well box stock, and love to be beaten on the strip - see the other blog on our guy that's running twelves in one of these cars with bolt ons and slicks, and no gears. I've compiled a list of the 10 quickest 1/4 mile Mustangs, as delivered from Ford, from reputable sources. 1 I know, you guys will argue with me on this, but I only went off of test data from valid sources, and not old wive's tales, your grampa's stories or my buddy's car stories. Just the facts. Top 10 Fastest Production Mustangs. Posted 11/30/2013 by Jeff Jimenez. We are going to take a look at some of the fastest Ford production Mustangs of all time. You might be surprised by some of them! What is your guess on what will be the fastest production Mustang of all time?? 2012 Ford Mustang Boss 302 - 0-60 mph 4.0; Quarter Mile 12.1 07-08 Mustang Shelby Cobra GT500 - 12.6 @ 114.2, Motor Trend - 500 horsepower 03-04 Cobra, 2000 Cobra R - 12.9 @ 112, Car and Driver, 12.9 @ 110.8, Motor Trend - Tie. SAE-rated at 647 horsepower and with 550 lb.-ft. of torque, Ford’s new high-output 3.5-liter V6 powerplant produces the most horsepower of any EcoBoost production engine ever, making Ford GT the fastest production car ever to wear the Blue Oval badge. DEARBORN, Mich., Jan. 25, 2017 – Delivering the highest output of any EcoBoost ® production engine to date, the all-new Ford GT couples its extraordinary power with impressive aerodynamic efficiency and advanced active dynamics to achieve a maximum speed of 216 mph – making it the fastest Ford production vehicle on the track ever. Ford GT Delivers Highest Top Speed, Fastest Lap Times on the Track of Any Production Ford Ever. 1 Assisted by fully active dynamic systems, all-new Ford GT achieves top speed of 216 mph – the highest ever for any Ford production vehicle. I've compiled a list of the 10 quickest 1/4 mile Mustangs, as delivered from Ford, from reputable sources. I know, you guys will argue with me on this, but I only went off of test data from valid sources, and not old wive's tales, your grampa's stories or my buddy's car stories. Here's how they fell: 1 2013-14 Mustang Shelby GT500 - with its 600+ hp there is no reason this one shouldn't be at the top of the list! Road & Track tested this beast at a 0-60 of 3.7 seconds and a quarter mile of 11.7 sec at 135 mph!!!! 2 2012 Ford Mustang Boss 302 - 0-60 mph 4.0; Quarter Mile 12.1. Here's how they fell: 1 2013-14 Mustang Shelby GT500 - with its 600+ hp there is no reason this one shouldn't be at the top of the list! 2 2012 Ford Mustang Boss 302 - 0-60 mph 4.0; Quarter Mile 12.1. 3 07-08 Mustang Shelby Cobra GT500 - 12.6 @ 114.2, Motor Trend - 500 horsepower. Query: how fast is the fastest ford gt",
"output": [
"The fastest Ford GT is 216 miles per hour."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7f19f8a09ff6441ab34aab8ed3070f6d",
"input": "In botany, a stoma (plural stomata), also called a stomate (plural stomates)[1] (from Greek στόμα, mouth[2]), is a pore, found in the epidermis of leaves, stems, and other organs, that facilitates gas exchange. Does Leaf Surface Area Affect the Rate of Transpiration in a Plant? Aim: The aim of my investigation is to find out if the leaf surface area affects the rate of transpiration in a plant. Variables: The variables of this experiment are;- * The leaf surface area * Temperature of the surrounding air * The speed and amount of wind * The amount of light Environmental Factors: Temperature of air The temperature of the air affects the rate of transpiration. Where S=the number of stomata, E=total number of epidermal cells in a unit area of the leaf. Oats contain 54,000 per one square inch, but cucumber contains 428,000 per square inch. A study on stomatal index of leaves at different positions and different areas in the same leaf and plant provides very interesting information about the structure, frequency, distribution and ultimately their function. Water is transpired through stomata, but carbon dioxide also must pass through stomata into a leaf for. photosynthesis to occur. There is evidence that the level of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere has not. always been the same over the history of life on Earth. How to Calculate Leaf Surface Area. The rate of transpiration is measured as the amount of water lost/ square meter/ minute. Because water evaporates through the many stomata on the leaf surface, the rate of transpiration is directly related to the surface area. To arrive at the rate of transpiration, therefore, you must calculate the leaf surface area of each plant: Because most stomata are found in the lower epidermis, you will determine that surface area. 1 Lay the leaves to be measured on a 1-cm grid and trace their outlines. 2 Count the number of square centimeters. To investigate the relationship among leaf surface area, number of stomata, and the rate of transpiration learning objective 2: To design and conduct an experiment to explore other factors, including different environmental variables, on the rate of transpiration Perhaps there are the same number of stomata on a small leaf as on a large leaf and the space between the stomata increases as the leaf grows. Perhaps larger leaves have more stomata and more stomata are formed in the spaces as a leaf gets bigger. Each of these hypotheses could lead you to a different prediction of the rate of transpiration per cm2 in large compared with small leaves. We would be interested to know how your experiments go. This is an adaptation to check excessive transpiration in these plants. Number of Stomata (Stomatal Frequency): The number of stomata in a definite area of leaf varies from plant to plant. Xerophytes possess larger number of stomata than mesophytes. Number of stomata/sq cm. is 1000 — 60,000 in different plant species. The number of stomta per unit area of leaf is called Stomatal Frequency. Stomata frequency of trees and shrubs is higher than herbs. Stomata nearly occupy one to two percent of total leaf area when fully open. Is there any relationship between the number of stomata and the environment in which the plant species evolved? • Are leaf surface area and the number of stomata related to the rate of transpiration? What might happen to the rate of transpiration if the number of leaves or the size of leaves is reduced? • Do all parts of a plant transpire? Transpiration is a physiological phenomenon in which water is lost from certain surfaces of the plant body in the form of water vapors. This process is essential for the upward movement of water and mineral nutrients. Query: how does the number of stomata in a leaf relate to the rate of transpiration",
"output": [
"The rate of transpiration is measured as the amount of water lost/ square meter/ minute. Because water evaporates through the many stomata on the leaf surface, the rate of transpiration is directly related to the surface area."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9c02486e99274aa9b4b82d2ba770e974",
"input": "Becoming a doctor isn't a quick process. It starts with a four-year undergraduate degree, and continues with four more years in a medical or osteopathic medical school. After graduation, ... Certification is not required for physicians and surgeons; however, it may increase their employment opportunities. M.D.s and D.O.s seeking board certification in a specialty may spend up to 7 years in residency training; the length of time varies with the specialty. That residency, which typically involves grueling 80-hour workweeks, is required even if a doctor previously did a residency in a country with an advanced medical system, like Britain or Japan. The only exception is for doctors who did their residencies in Canada. The following specialists are some of the most common examples: 1 Allergists (specialists in diagnosing and treating hay fever or other allergies) 2 Cardiologists (heart specialists) 3 Dermatologists (skin specialists) 4 Gastroenterologists (digestive system specialists) 5 Ophthalmologists (eye specialists) A residency is like a job, and the resident generally works normal hours depending on the particular setting, gets a salary or stipend, has holidays and personal time off, and benefits like health insurance. So again, internship is simply the first year of residency. Residency can be anywhere from 2 more to 6 more years, depending on the specialty you choose. Many super-specialties have further training after residency, called fellowship - these can be 1 to 3 years in length. The link(s) below go to OES data maps for employment and wages by state and area. 1 Anesthesiologists. 2 Family and general practitioners. 3 Internists, general. 4 Obstetricians and gynecologists. 5 Pediatricians, general. 6 Physicians and surgeons, all other. 7 Psychiatrists. 8 Surgeons. How Long Does Medical Residency Training Last? Medical residency is a minimum of three years for primary care physicians and some other specialties, up to five years for some surgical specialties. (Some medical specialties require additional years of fellowship training in addition to the three to five years of residency training.) General Internists serve as primary care physicians, along with family medicine doctors and pediatricians. The biggest difference between Family Medicine and Internal Medicine is that IM training focuses on adults, with residents spending time between various adult medicine subspecialties. What We Do. The AMA is leading meaningful innovation to enable a better health care system for patients, physicians and the country. Query: how long does a doctor do a residency",
"output": [
"Medical residency is a minimum of three years for primary care physicians and some other specialties, up to five years for some surgical specialties."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-510cebb2b648489d95193a50b89ed03e",
"input": "Visit Topsail Island, NC Topsail Island is long and narrow, stretching 26 miles in length and between 500 and 1,500 feet in width. Topsail Island includes North Topsail Beach and Surf City, in addition to Topsail Beach proper. Briney Breezes is located in Surf City just minutes from shopping, dining and more. Discover all that Topsail Island has to offer from kayak tours to the Sea Turtle Hospital in Topsail Beach just a short drive to the south. Ground Level: Parking for 4-6 cars, with enough room for your boat or jet... Read more » Discover and explore Topsail Island North Carolina, a paradise to generations of families for its beautiful, family-friendly beaches and waterways. Enjoy our video tour designed for our Vacation Rentals and Real Estate Sales departments at Century 21 Action, Inc. The area is comprised of several towns including Topsail Beach, Surf City, North Topsail Beach, Sneads Ferry, Holly Ridge, and Hampstead. Topsail Island offers a multitude of attractions that draw people from any walk of life. Our location can be compared to Wrightsville Beach, Oak Island, Wilmington, Carolina Beach, Kure Beach, Emerald Isle, Morehead City, the Outer Banks, Hatteras, Corolla, and other destinations. Topsail Beach Hotels and Motels; North Topsail Beach Hotels and Motels; Sneads Ferry Hotels and Motels; Price Code; BED & BREAKFASTS. Topsail Island and Surf City Bed and Breakfasts; Price Code; VACATION RENTALS. Topsail Island Vacation Rental Companies; Rental Services; Pets; Accommodations and Locations; A Few Rules; Rates; CAMPING. Topsail Island and Surf City Camping Rumor has it, Blackbeard’s treasure is still buried somewhere on the island. Topsail Island sits about 40 miles northeast of Wilmington. A 26-mile long barrier island just off the North Carolina coast, it’s home to three charming seaside towns: North Topsail Beach, Surf City, and Topsail Beach. This destination is easily accessible by car, or you can fly into a nearby airport and take a shuttle. History of Topsail Beach Situated at the southern end of Topsail Island, off the coast of southeastern North Carolina, the Town of Topsail Beach is the smallest of the three communities located on the 26-mile long island. Topsail Island is located ~25 miles north of Wilmington, NC. It has very nice beaches and, as I write this (01/2018) you do not have to pay for parking. There are many entry points along the beach road .. & some have bathrooms, changing facilities... More Topsail Island, North Carolina. 1 Lodging (10) 909 Reviews. 2 Vacation Rentals (713) 2,983 Reviews. 3 Flights. 4 Things to Do (32) 2,841 Reviews. 5 Restaurants (50) 9,097 Reviews. 6 Forum 854 Posts. Choose From over 400 Topsail Island Rentals in North Topsail, Topsail Beach and Surf City, NC North Carolina beaches are some of the most beautiful in the world, and Topsail Island is no exception. Just close your eyes and imagine a wide shoreline of soft white sand set against a backdrop of endless emerald and sapphire shades of sea and Intracoastal Waterway. Topsail Island Bridge Replacement; Mathews Bridge Emergency Repairs; Arlington/Southside Connector Interchange; US Route 460 Connector Phase I Design-Build; Veterans Memorial Bridge; Beach Boulevard over the Intracoastal Waterway ; Beach Boulevard/ Kernan Boulevard Interchange; I-10/I-610 Interchange Reconstruction; Bridge of Lions Historic Rehabilitation Query: how long is topsail island",
"output": [
"Topsail Island is 26 miles long."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-bc2dee3c7921471f8eaebb7116f93f37",
"input": "Signs and symptoms of autism in babies and toddlers. If autism is caught in infancy, treatment can take full advantage of the young brain’s remarkable plasticity. Although autism is hard to diagnose before 24 months, symptoms often surface between 12 and 18 months. If signs are detected by 18 months of age, intensive treatment may help to rewire the brain and reverse the symptoms. If you notice any of these signs or have concerns about your child's development, talk with his doctor. Signs of autism in babies younger than 12 months old. At this age, picking up on signs of autism involves paying attention to whether your child is meeting developmental milestones. Here are some things to watch for: Doesn't show interest in faces. Doesn't make eye contact, doesn't smile, and may even seem to look right through you. Does My Child Have Autism? Recognizing the Early Signs and Symptoms of Autism. As a parent, you never want to believe that your precious bundle has a problem. But when it comes to autism, catching it early—ideally by the age of eighteen months—makes a huge difference. But no matter your child's age, don't lose hope. It's important to note that, unlike kids with autism, those with AS might show no delays in language development; they usually have good grammar skills and an advanced vocabulary at an early age. However, many do have a language disorder — for instance, a child might be very literal and have trouble using language in a social context. For parents, the first months after learning that their child has a developmental disorder can be emotional, confusing and challenging. For this reason, Autism Speaks has developed the 100 Day Tool Kit, to help families navigate the often-tumultuous first 100 days after a child’s diagnosis. Knowing you have autism may help you understand why you may feel differently or see yourself as being different but it doesn’t have to define you.” Your provider can help with this discussion with your child so ask if you are unsure of where to start or if you are having difficulty describing autism as anything but a disability. We hope this helps give you some ideas on when and how to talk with your child about having an autism diagnosis. Finally, get information and support from credible organizations like Autism Speaks, the Autism Science Foundation, and the Autism Society. If there’s one thing that the statistics tell us, it’s that families with autistic children are not alone. Autism Speaks' multi-year Ad Council public service advertising campaign stresses the importance of recognizing the early signs of autism and seeking early intervention services. Recent research confirms that appropriate screening can determine whether a child is at risk for autism as young as one year. The most recent statistics show that 1 in 68 children are now being diagnosed with autism. While diagnosis is on the rise, a child typically is not diagnosed by a professional until he or she is over two years old. However, there are signs that could indicate your child is on the spectrum as early as six months of age. Signs and symptoms can vary, as can the severity of the symptoms. Be sure to monitor your child’s development, and consult your doctor if anything concerns you. It’s important to note that autism in infants can be recognized by a lack of normal behavior, rather than the presence of strange behaviors. 9. Lack of smiling Rather than describe autism as a disability, think of it as a way to describe the way your child’s brain works. Point out the strengths of having a brain that works this way – “You have a great memory” or “You see details that others miss”. There is no right age to tell your child – it’s more a matter of right developmental level. Kindergarten and 1st grade are a time when kids start to see differences and hear descriptive words to describe or group kids such as the kids who are “busy”, “shy”, “active”. Query: at what age can you tell that a child has autism",
"output": [
"You can tell that a child has autism at the age of younger than 12 months old."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-89aef38371b84656b1359620e0dcd333",
"input": "Getting the most from your treatment. 1 These tablets will help prevent you from getting malaria, but it is also important that you take the following precautions against being bitten by mosquitoes: Cover up bare areas of your arms and legs with long-sleeved, loose-fitting clothing, long trousers and socks. If you do not remember until the following day, skip the missed dose. Do not take two doses together to make up for a forgotten dose. You should complete the course of tablets unless you are told otherwise by a doctor. Make sure you continue to take the tablets for seven days after your visit has finished. How to take proguanil with atovaquone. 1 Before you take proguanil with atovaquone, read the manufacturer's printed information leaflet from inside the pack. The leaflet will give you more information about the tablets and a full list of side-effects which you may experience from taking them. It is wise to have Malarone (atovaquone and proguanil) out of your system and so we look at the half life of its components: atovaquone-2-3 days, & proguanil--14-21 hours. After 2, 4, and 6 half-lives, 25%, 6%, and 2% of the drug remain in the body. At 2 weeks then, you should be clear and safe. ...Read more October 8, 2012 By Malaria Q&A Leave a Comment. QUESTION. I will be traveling to the Ivory Coast for two weeks. I will be staying with my in-laws in the city in very clean conditions with a/c etc. I am a strict vegetarian so I will be bringing most of my food and will have access to clean water. How to take proguanil with atovaquone. 1 Before you take proguanil with atovaquone, read the manufacturer's printed information leaflet from inside the pack. 2 You should start taking the tablets 1 or 2 days before you enter the area which has malaria. This is to ensure there is sufficient medicine in your bloodstream to give you the required protection. Take one dose each day throughout your stay, and then continue to take one dose a day for a further seven days after you leave the area. There are two strengths of tablets: 250 mg/100 mg tablets which are suitable for adults and children weighing more than 40 kg, and 62.5 mg /25 mg tablets which are suitable for children weighing between 11 kg and 40 kg: Others include wearing suitable clothing, using insect repellents and sleeping in screened rooms or beds. It is important that you take these tablets for one or two days before you travel, during the whole of your stay, and for seven days after you return. If you need to take a medicine for indigestion (such as an antacid), do not take it during the two hours before you take proguanil with atovaquone, or during the two hours after you take it. This is because some magnesium-containing antacids interfere with the way one of the medicines (proguanil) is absorbed by your body, making it less effective. The dose for a child weighing 21-31 kg is two 62.5 mg/25 mg tablets daily. The dose for a child weighing 11-21 kg is one 62.5 mg/25 mg tablet daily. Where possible, take the tablets with a snack or a milky drink and try to take your doses at about the same time of day, each day. Can i take malarone with tetraltsal - Who should take malarone (atovaquone and proguanil)? It is an. Antimalarial medication. So it would used to treat someone who had malaria or to prevent malaria. Query: how long does it take for malarone to leave your system",
"output": [
"It takes 2 weeks for malarone to leave your system."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ff9f0f0fa74f4eb6b45c57b828c125c0",
"input": "It takes light 8.3 minutes (on average, depending on Earth's location in its orbit) to get from the sun's surface to Earth. Heat is another form of electromagnetic radiation (just like light), it takes the same amount of time. it takes 500 seconds or 8m 20s for light from the suns surface to reach earth's surface. heat is the random motion of atoms. when the sun shines it's rays down on earth (elecromagnetic radiation) the atoms absorb this energy and the energy levels of an atom are raised thus creating higher temperatures. Sunlight travels at the speed of light. Photons emitted from the surface of the Sun need to travel across the vacuum of space to reach our eyes. The short answer is that it takes sunlight an average of 8 minutes and 20 seconds to travel from the Sun to the Earth. If the Sun suddenly disappeared from the Universe (not that this could actually happen, don’t panic), it would take a little more than 8 minutes before you realized it was time to put on a sweater. Divide these and you get 500 seconds, or 8 minutes and 20 seconds. This is an average number. Remember, the Earth follows an elliptical orbit around the Sun, ranging from 147 million to 152 million km. At its closest point, sunlight only takes 490 seconds to reach Earth. And then at the most distant point, it takes 507 seconds for sunlight to make the journey. But the story of light gets even more interesting, when you think about the journey light needs to make inside the Sun. Light moves at 186,000 miles a second and the Sun is 93,000,000 miles away. Do the math. (500 seconds or 8 1/3 minutes) Heat is energy. Heat from the Sun is brought to Earth in the light from the Sun. Sunlight is absorbed by things it strikes, like the ground, and the energy of the light becomes heat energy in the thing that absorbed it. How long does it take the sun's light to reach earth? Asked by: CITO GASTON Answer The distance from the Earth to the Sun varies because the Earth's orbit about the Sun is elliptical.At it's closest, the distance is 91,402,000 miles and it's farthest distance it is 94,512,000 miles.This gives an average distance of 92,957,000 miles. Answer. The distance from the Earth to the Sun varies because the Earth's orbit about the Sun is elliptical.At it's closest, the distance is 91,402,000 miles and it's farthest distance it is 94,512,000 miles.This gives an average distance of 92,957,000 miles. Light travels at 186,282 miles per second. This is an average number. Remember, the Earth follows an elliptical orbit around the Sun, ranging from 147 million to 152 million km. At its closest point, sunlight only takes 490 seconds to reach Earth. And then at the most distant point, it takes 507 seconds for sunlightto make the journey. Imagine the sun to be a spherical gun shooting photons in all directions. These photons travel at the speed of light in straight lines, and can be characterised as 'rays of light'. What it means to say that light takes approx. 8 minutes to reach the earth from the sun is that these photons take approx. 8 minutes to travel the distance between the earth and the sun at their speed (the speed of light). Why does it take 20,000 years for light to reach the surface of the Sun from its core, but just 8 minutes to reach the surface of the Earth? How long does it take for sunlight to reach earth? Why does it take 8 minutes for any information to reach Earth from Mars? How do we know that sunlight takes 500 seconds to reach Earth? Query: how long does sunlight take to get to earth",
"output": [
"Sunlight takes 8 minutes and 20 seconds to travel from the Sun to the Earth."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-36394a90a1634bb08e5bae8c7094df44",
"input": "by Jerry Search, Southern California Speed Skating Association. From an article originally appearing in The Racing Blade, November 1994: For many years I have heard various statements of the actual speed in miles per hour (MPH) that speed skaters skate, anywhere from 20 to 40 MPH. Long Track Speedskating Preview The U.S. and long track speedskating are synonymous. Boasting 67 Olympic medals, including 29 golds, Team USA is traditionally poised to reach the medal stand each Olympic Winter Games due to the team’s historic success. And remember that the stop-and-go tactics of pack-style skating also influence times, and true speed. Therefore... If you have the opportunity to have timed flying 1-laps, then this would be your fastest true speed (although you could probably skate a little faster in a long track straight-away sprint of maybe 100 meters). The Olympic long track competition will be held at the Gangneung Oval, which is situated next to the short track speedskating venue in the coastal city of Gangneung. The venue seats up to 8,000 people and also hosted the 2017 ISU World Single Distances Speed Skating Championships in February 2017. Short track speed skating takes place on a smaller rink, normally the size of an ice hockey rink, on a 111.12 m oval track. Distances are shorter than in long-track racing, with the longest Olympic individual race being 1500 meters (the women's relay is 3000 meters and the men's relay 5000 meters). Most speed skating races are held on an oval course, but there are exceptions. Oval sizes vary; in short track speed skating, the rink must be an oval of 111.12 metres, while long track speed skating uses a similarly standardized 400 m rink. Inline skating rinks are between 125 and 400 metres, though banked tracks can only be 250 metres long. Before you use the Speed Calculator, please keep in mind two very important points. First, in Short Track speed skating, the skaters rarely skate the actual measured distance on the track, usually skating a somewhat wider track, and therefore farther than the measured 111.12 meters per lap. If you cannot get a flying lap timed, just enter your best time in a short race, like a 333 (300 for Long Track) or a 500. Just to answer the big question of How fast can a speedskater really skate?, try entering the current (2001) 500 meter World Record for Long Track, 34.32. The long track speed skating track is more than three times the length of the short track. Speed skating is broken up into 12 events at the Olympics for both men and women. Men compete at distances of 500 meters, 1,000 meters, 1,500 meters, 5,000 meters, 10,000 meters and a team event. Speed skating. The standard rink for long track is 400 meters long, but tracks of 200, 250 and 333⅓ meters are used occasionally. It is one of two Olympic forms of the sport and the one with the longer history. An international federation was founded in 1892, the first for any winter sport. Query: how long is a speed skating track",
"output": [
"The standard speed skating track is 400 meters long."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d7e32ab8d57d402d90d51158478d5fac",
"input": "Horticulturist, have worked in the Middle East, East Africa, West Africa and Southern Africa. I have a fairly broad range of hobbies, interests and pastimes including; reading, writing, photography (mainly insects, plants and nature), geography, weather, science, traveling, IT, data forensics, horticulture, plant genetics and hydroponics. It gets worse. The water they find is usually contaminated with diarrhoeal diseases, such as dysentery and cholera, which cause the deaths of 2,000 children every day. This is because 2.5 billion people worldwide live without a private and safe toilet. And when you have to go, you have to go. It is very common in the Amazon Native Tribes for people to walk nude in Africa. Many of these tribes are located surrounding the Amazon River. They are considered to be the I…ndigenous People of Africa. In Africa, it is said, “Water Is Life,” and we at Healing Hands International believe that everything starts with water. How far do you walk to get water? Four miles? One mile? Or is it just a few steps to the faucet? Every day in developing countries, women and children walk an average of 4 miles to collect water for their family. Not only is this chore keeping the children from attending school, but the dirty water they are bringing home is also killing them at an alarming rate! The 2013 Walk will be telling decision makers to keep their promises on water and sanitation. Events take place between March 16 and 24. Find out how you can get involved and add your voice. We also think that good old-fashioned face-to-face conversations work! Let people know that even the smallest gift can make an impact. Finally, join with others in walking 4 miles in honor of those who have to walk 4 miles everyday. If you're up to a real challenge, try carrying a jerrican with 5 gallons of water while you walk. How far do you walk for water? For many of us, clean water is within easy reach. A quick stroll to the office water cooler, refill the bottle and then back to work. In developing countries, many women and children start their day by walking an average distance of 6 kilometres to collect water for their families. This consumes 200 million daily work hours, a loss of productivity greater than the combined hours worked in a week by employees at six of the biggest multinational corporations including Walmart, McDonald's, and IBM. On average, a child dies every 26 seconds from water-related illnesses. More children die every day from dirty water than from malaria, aids, and measles COMBINED**. This is why thousands of people around the country choose to Walk4Water. We walk so they don't have to! Walk4Water is a four-mile fundraising walk that began in 2007. Each event is unique and whether hosted by Healing Hands International or our partnership with you, the focus is to bring the life-saving gift of clean water to those who need it so desperately. We walk so they don't have to!. Walk4Water is a four-mile fundraising walk that began in 2007. Each event is unique and whether hosted by Healing Hands International or our partnership with you, the focus is to bring the life-saving gift of clean water to those who need it so desperately. The average adult person walking will cover a mile in about 20 minutes. That rate of speed is about 3 miles per hour. Those who are fit and able to jog could cover it in a … s little as 5 minutes... and the record for a mile stands at less than 4 minutes In athletics, the four-minute mile is the running of a mile (1,609.344 metres, 5280 feet) in less than four minutes. Query: how far do people have to walk for water",
"output": [
"People have to walk an average of 4 miles to collect water for their family."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d434d0546f954dff80e4e6549e3dba34",
"input": "Trusted Results with How long do you cook stuffed boneless pork chops. 1 Cranberry and Apple Stuffed Pork Chops - All Recipes. This is a sweet and savory stuffed boneless pork chop. 2 Cooks.com - Recipes - Baked Boneless Pork Chops. Now you can satisfy all your cookie cravings with the recipes from ... boneless pork chops for more results. Results 1 - 10 of 62 for baked boneless pork chops. ... Sauteed Boneless Pork Chops Recipe : : Food Network ... cooking, we sat down to a wonderful looking meal, stuffed pork chops, brown rice and ... Italian Sausage Stuffed Pork Chop Recipe : Review : : Food ... I made 4 boneless pork loin chops, and I have 6 cups of leftover stuffing. ... I'd say, if you can imagine what to do with the leftovers (stuffed peppers does sound ... How long do you cook stuffed boneless pork chops. Recipes / How long do you cook stuffed boneless pork chops (1000+) Stuffed Boneless Pork Chops. 2917 views. Stuffed Boneless Pork Chops, ingredients: , 6 boneless pork chops – cut from a boneless. Trusted Results with How long do you cook stuffed boneless pork chops. 1 Cranberry and Apple Stuffed Pork Chops - All Recipes. 2 Cooks.com - Recipes - Baked Boneless Pork Chops. 3 Sauteed Boneless Pork Chops Recipe : : Food Network. 4 Cooks.com - Recipes - Boneless Pork Loin. 5 Stuffed Grilled Pork Chops Recipe : Review : Alton Brown ... Cranberry and Apple Stuffed Pork Chops - All Recipes. This is a sweet and savory stuffed boneless pork chop. It is very easy and quick to prepare. Cooks.com - Recipes - Baked Boneless Pork Chops. Now you can satisfy all your cookie cravings with the recipes from ... boneless pork chops for more results. Results 1 - 10 of 62 for baked boneless pork chops. ... On average, stuffed pork chops need to cook for around one hour at a temperature of 375 degrees Fahrenheit. If the pork chops are exceptionally thick, they will need to cook for an additional 10 to 20 minutes, while smaller ones may take less time. When the pork chops are cooked, the juices will run clear. Cooking pork chops longer than the needed time can result in the meat becoming tougher. After cooking the chops for the required amount of time, they should sit for 3 to 5 minutes for best results. When cooking pork chops or another pork product, the internal temperature should reach 145 degrees Fahrenheit before being consumed. The temperature can be checked using a digital cooking thermometer. Related Pages. 1 how long do you cook loin of pork. 2 how long do i cook stuffed pork chops. 3 how long do you bake stuffed pork chops. 4 how long do you cook boneless pork back ribs. 5 how long do you cook a 4 pound pork loin roast with bone in. Brown pork chops on both sides and sprinkle ... of pork chops. Pour water in pan to cover the bottom of pan. Bake 1 to 1 1/2 hours or until done. Yield: 6 portions. Trusted Results with How long do you cook stuffed boneless pork chops Cranberry and Apple Stuffed Pork Chops - All Recipes This is a sweet and savory stuffed boneless pork chop. Trusted Results with How long do you cook stuffed boneless pork chops. Cranberry and Apple Stuffed Pork Chops - All Recipes. This is a sweet and savory stuffed boneless pork chop. It is very easy and quick to prepare. Cooks.com - Recipes - Baked Boneless Pork Chops Query: how long to cook stuffed boneless pork chops",
"output": [
"Stuffed pork chops need to cook for around one hour at a temperature of 375 degrees Fahrenheit."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ad37be4ca4e54708a8354017f5fbe045",
"input": "In commercial NYC pizzeria we did 24 hours , but emergencies a minimum of 8 hours. In home I try for about the same. make it knead it , rest 10-20 mins fast knead, cut oil, fridge min 8 hours, keeps about 4 or so days. Meats with gravy or sauces: 1 to 2 days refrigerator or 6 months (freezer) Rotisserie chicken: 3 to 4 days (refrigerator) or 2 to 3 months (freezer) Opened package of hot dogs: 1 week (refrigerator) or 1 to 2 months (freezer) Opened package of deli meat: 3 to 4 days (refrigerator) or 1 to 2 months (freezer) Cooked meat dishes: 3 to 4 days (refrigerator) or 2 to 6 months (freezer) Dairy Foods But I always keep my dough in the fridge for several days before making it--this is called the cold rise. This is my approach, too. I use a recipe that provides enough dough to make three 12-inch pies, and I store the divided dough in three lightly-oiled tupperware containers in the fridge. But I always keep my dough in the fridge for several days before making it--this is called the cold rise. The bacteria in my starter is doing it's thing in the fridge while the yeast is asleep. This develops great flavor; in my opinion you can't make great pizza in one day. 2017-06-12T23:09:12-04:00. About a day. keep it longer, then u cud have problems. the most u cud keep it in that fridge with u getting a stomach ache is two days. and to be safer, don't microwave it, heat it up with a frying pan. Answers. About a day. keep it longer, then u cud have problems. the most u cud keep it in that fridge with u getting a stomach ache is two days. and to be safer, don't microwave it, heat it up with a frying pan. Pizza: 3 to 4 days (refrigerator) or 1 month (freezer) Takeout: 3 to 5 days (refrigerator); don’t freeze To find out the shelf life of additional foods, download the Academy of Nutrition and Dietetics Is My Food Safe app. She mentions that the dough can be kept in the fridge for up to 36 hours (but it needs to be put there immediately after mixing). I have gone for the full 36 hours once, with great results. I did keep it in the coldest part of the fridge (near the freezer wall, in the back of the fridge). It did take over 8 hours to ferment, once it came out. Usually it is for another 24 hours. However if you want to keep it longer, then just place it in a freezer and you can keep it frozen for up to 3 months. Make sure to put it in a ziploc freezer bag and coat it with a litle olive oil. I have been making a lot of pizza since I got my woodfired pizza oven. I have stored pizza dough in the fridge for up to a week and it was fine. Take it out about an hour ahead to bring to room temp and to rest before shaping. Log in or register to post comments Query: how long is pizza good in the fridge",
"output": [
"Pizza is good for 3 to 4 days in the fridge."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-5a60f85824974a8d859f645b45124143",
"input": "A wind turbine works on a simple principle. This animation shows how energy in the wind turns two or three propeller-like blades around a rotor. The rotor is connected to the main shaft, which spins a generator to create electricity. Wind turbines are mounted on a tower to capture the most energy. Most people think of generating electricity with wind turbines when the subject is wind energy. There are many other ways we can harness the kinetic energy in the wind (also known as motional energy). The energy in the wind has been used in sailboats for thousands of years. Midwest Rural Energy Council Wind turbines generate electrical power in the same way as all other generation technologies. The only difference is in the source of the mechanical power supplied to the electrical generator: wind, rather than a diesel engine or steam turbine, pro vides the energy. Blades capture energy in the wind and turn the turbines. Control Where exactly does wind energy come from? How can we generate electricity from the wind? What are some other uses for wind energy? If you are looking to find answers for questions like these, you are at the right place. What Is Wind Energy? By the term wind energy we mean air in motion (kinetic energy). Generating Electricity from Wind Energy With Wind Turbines. A wind turbine is in many ways the opposite of a fan. Instead of providing the electricity to get the fan to rotate, wind rotates the turbine to generate electricity. So, how exactly does wind energy produce electricity? The rotor blades on a wind turbine catches the kinetic energy in the wind and transfers it via a rotor shaft to the generator. The wing blades can be rotated and adjusted to the wind direction and strength, for maximum utilization of energy. When the rotor spins, the power is transferred via the drive shaft and gearbox. Generating Electricity from Wind Energy With Wind Turbines A wind turbine is in many ways the opposite of a fan. Instead of providing the electricity to get the fan to rotate, wind rotates the turbine to generate electricity. Wind itself does not generate electricity, but using wind turbines it is converted into mechanical energy and the mechanical energy is converted into electrical energy. Simp…ly stated, a wind turbine works the opposite of a fan. Instead of using electricity to make wind, like a fan, wind turbines use wind to make electricity. See how wind turbines turn the force of wind into electricity. Learn how wind and hydro are renewable energy resources being integrated to meet Northwest ene... See how wind turbines turn the force of wind into electricity. Learn how wind and hydro are renewable energy resources being integrated to meet Northwest ene... Skip navigation Energy can be changed from one form of energy to another. The energy of the air moving is changed to the energy of the blades spinning. The blades turn a generator. The generator produces electricity. ( A generator works by its electric wiring traveling through a magnetic field). Wind is a source of Kinetic energy resulting from differences in atmospheric pressure. curve for a wind turbine indi cates the power produced across the entire operating range of the wind turbine. Wind turbines have a cutin wind speed, typi cally about 8 to 9 mph, when they will start to produce a small amount of electricity. Below the cutin wind speed there is not enough energy in the wind to produce electrical power. Wind Query: how does wind generate electricity",
"output": [
"Wind uses wind turbines to converted into mechanical energy and the mechanical energy is converted into electrical energy."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-85dc12b54dbb4d698af084f751d1c45c",
"input": "And how long does it take to heal? What are the risks of leaving a rubber band around ankle for more than 12 hours? Can someone tell me if this sounds muscular or internal? Report Abuse. 1 Chat or rant, adult content, spam, insulting other members,show more. 2 Harm to minors, violence or threats, harassment or privacy invasion, impersonation or misrepresentation, fraud or phishing, show more. 3 Chat or rant, adult content, spam, insulting other members,show more. Best Answer: put ice on it put your ankle up (lay down, and put pillows under it to elevate it) you can also take Ibuprofen to reduce the swelling. GET WELL SOON! How Long Will My Swollen Ankle Take To Heal? I was playing football this morning when my foot got stuck in the ground and I went over on my ankle, it made a rather loud click. I was subbed off and then subbed back on and played through the injury for 35 minutes. Now I've got home and taken my sock off my ankle is pretty badly swollen, how long will it be before I can play football again? It could be sprained. If you heard a click sound, that's what I heard when I sprained my ankle. What the doctor told me to do was elevate the foot and stay off it. I was also told to put my foot in ice water, pretend you are writing your ABC's with your toes while in the water. It will hurt, but will take the swelling down. I could only keep my foot in for 3-4 mins and would do it two times in the morning and two times in the evening. They also said not to alternate hot and cold. As for the swelling, put ice on for 20 minutes then off for 20 minutes and do this for at least an hour twice a day. Source(s): All first hand experience ? · 7 years ago TO be honest, that is a hard question to answer. Are you a fast healer? Then it could take only a week or two. What do you eat? Vegetables really speed up healing. Take lots of Vitamin C. Ice is very good, but in increments. Not long periods of time. ELEVATE is key. And also walking on it gently to reduce stiffness...less stiff, the quicker it will heal. And rub Aloe Vera on it as well. Helps stimulate the swollen cells to heal faster. Hope this helps. The length of time it takes for a sprained ankle to heal depends upon the extent of the injury. Recovery times can range anywhere from 5 days to 12 weeks. There are three different types of ankle sprains, from slight stretching of the ligaments to complete tearing of ligaments. lots of ice and keep your ankle elevated and stay off of it, it should be okay in about a week or 2 (: In a day or tow or three or four or... when it quits swelling and hurting then it will be all better. i messed up my ankle in muay thai once, my trainer gave me 2 things.. do it, trust me you wont regret it. hes been muay thai fighter for 30 years.. go to a market, mexican market would be a better choice, or any market i guess. Query: how long does a swollen ankle take to heal",
"output": [
"The length of time it takes for a sprained ankle to heal depends upon the extent of the injury and it can range anywhere from 5 days to 12 weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7efe236d18584f409a7022da4e6eacb3",
"input": "There are a number of reasons why the IRS may be holding your refund. 1 You have unfiled or missing tax returns for prior tax years. 2 The check was held or returned due to a problem with the name or address. 3 You elected to apply the refund toward your Estimated Tax liability for next year. 4 The IRS is reviewing your return. If the IRS is reviewing your return, it may have questions about the wages and withholding you reported, or the credits or expenses you may have claimed. The process could take anywhere from 45 days to 180 days, depending on the number and types of issues the IRS is reviewing. How Long Does it Take to Get Your Tax Refund Back? Posted by Madison on February 14, 2017 When filing tax returns, the second question everyone asks is “How long does it take to get my tax refund back?” See How Long Can the IRS Delay Your Tax Refund? Share your results: How Long Did it Take to Get Your Tax Refund? IRS Tax Refund Status. You can track the status of your tax refund with the IRS tool Where’s My Refund? or the IRS Refund Tracker Tax App. You’ll see an estimated refund date once your return is processed. More Tax Topics. How Do Tax Brackets Work? What Do the 2017 Tax Rates Look Like? IRS Tax Refund Schedule. How long does it take to get your tax refund back? The IRS eliminated the refund schedules that were used in prior years for both direct deposit and mailed refunds. The guideline the IRS is using in 2017 for filing your 2016 tax return is: Refund Process. 1 Start checking status 24 – 48 hours after e-file – Once you have e-filed your tax return, you can check status using IRS Where’s My Refund? You will not be able to start checking the status of your tax refund for 4 weeks if you mail a paper tax return. Return Received Notice within 24 – 48 hours after e-file – The IRS Where’s My Refund tool will show “Return Received” status once they begin processing your tax return. 1 However, if you choose to have your refund applied to next year’s estimated tax liability, you can’t change your mind and have any of it refunded to you after the due date (without regard to extensions) for filing your return. Call the number on the notice if you have questions. 1 If the issue is unfiled returns, you should complete and file any missing or unfiled returns. 2 If you need to change or update the information on the return, you should file an amended return. If your election to apply the refund to next year’s estimated tax liability was a mistake (estimated tax payments aren’t needed or required), call the IRS toll-free at 1-800-829-1040 (TTY/TDD 1-800-829-4059) for help. I also filed for 2010 tax credit a week later, by mail (required), it’s been 12 wks now. the first response was “expected date you should receive your return is april 19th” and then, as that came and went, changed to “your tax return has been received and is being processed” If you provide the information the IRS requested, generally within 60 days the IRS should correct your account and resolve the refund issue. If you file missing or late returns, generally within 90 days, the IRS will process your returns and issue your refunds. Query: how long does it take to receive your tax return after it says it's being processed",
"output": [
"It takes anywhere from 45 days to 180 days to receive your tax."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1c55716c254e4894bf80b2f0f3e7b331",
"input": "The Walk of Fame is administered by the Hollywood Chamber of Commerce and maintained by the self-financing Hollywood Historic Trust. It is a popular tourist destination, with a reported 10 million visitors[2] in 2003. In 1994 the Walk of Fame was extended one block to the west on Hollywood Boulevard, from Sycamore Avenue to North LaBrea Avenue (plus the short segment of Marshfield Way that connects Hollywood and La Brea), where it now ends at the silver Four Ladies of Hollywood gazebo and the special Walk of Fame star. List of stars on the Hollywood Walk of Fame. The following is a list of the stars' actual locations on the Hollywood Walk of Fame. The list does not include a star's name until his or her actual award ceremony, as on multiple occasions and for various reasons stars have been withdrawn prior to the award ceremony. The list should be consistent with the list on the Hollywood Walk of Fame website maintained by the Hollywood Chamber of Commerce (see the External links section below). The stars are ordered alphabetically by surname. As of 2017, more than 2,600 stars are on the Hollywood Walk of Fame. The Hollywood Walk of Fame comprises more than 2,600 five-pointed terrazzo and brass stars embedded in the sidewalks along 15 blocks of Hollywood Boulevard and three blocks of Vine Street in Hollywood, California. The stars are permanent public monuments to achievement in the entertainment industry, bearing the names of a mix of actors, musicians, directors, producers, musical and theatrical groups, fictional characters, and others. The Walk of Fame is administered by the Hollywood Chamber of Co As of 2017, the Walk of Fame comprises over 2,600 stars, spaced at 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals. 1 The monuments are coral-pink terrazzo five-point stars rimmed with brass (not bronze, an oft-repeated inaccuracy) inlaid into a charcoal-colored terrazzo background. The list should be consistent with the list on the Hollywood Walk of Fame website maintained by the Hollywood Chamber of Commerce. The stars are ordered alphabetically by surname. As of 2017, more than 2,600 stars are on the Hollywood Walk of Fame. The Walk of Fame runs 1.3 miles (2.1 km) east to west on Hollywood Boulevard from Gower Street to La Brea Avenue, plus a short segment of Marshfield Way that runs diagonally between Hollywood and La Brea; and 0.4 miles (0.64 km) north to south on Vine Street between Yucca Street and Sunset Boulevard. Hollywood Walk of Fame. The Hollywood Walk of Fame comprises more than 2,600[1] five-pointed terrazzo and brass stars embedded in the sidewalks along 15 blocks of Hollywood Boulevard and three blocks of Vine Street in Hollywood, California. The Walk of Fame is administered by the Hollywood Chamber of Commerce and maintained by the self-financing Hollywood Historic Trust. It is a popular tourist destination, with a reported 10 million visitors in 2003. Query: how long is the hollywood walk of fame?",
"output": [
"The Walk of Fame runs 1.3 miles or 2.1 km east to west on Hollywood Boulevard."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1008bd32caa845359068c60db491f12c",
"input": "Most modern solar panels are sold with a 10 – 25 year warranty, and are designed to deliver 80% of their rated power after 30 years. Research tests have proven that solar panels can last for 40 years or longer! It is not uncommon for a home solar panel installation to deliver $50,000, $75,000, or even $100,000 in cumulative energy savings over time. For more examples, view the Southern Current Solar Install Portfolio. If solar power was used to charge the Powerwall, it would save the charging fee of $0.45 a day, making the Powerwall savings each year $358. Factoring in the installed solar panel cost of $3,570[2] for a 1.5 kilowatt system[iii], makes the payback period 31 years, still 3 times the warranty period. If you’re reviewing multiple quotes, there are plenty of metrics that can help you make a decision about which solar option is best for you, but studies show most solar shoppers rely on one metric in particular: the solar panel payback period. Here’s how the numbers pencil out for a North Carolina solar purchase with a small rooftop solar system: 1 First-year loan payments: $948. - 2 First-year electric bill savings: $275. = 3 First-year cost of solar: $673. 4 First year federal tax credit: $2,340. 5 Total in your pocket after year 1: $1,667. For most homeowners in Bee Cave who pay cash instead of financing, the average solar panel installation will pay for itself in 11 years. What this means is that over 11 years, the value of energy produced by a solar energy system should equal the cost to have the system installed. One of the world’s purest silicone mines is in western North Carolina near Asheville. 1 Solar Energy Industry Association. 2 American Solar Energy Society. 3 North Carolina Sustainable Energy Association. 4 The NC Clean Energy Business Alliance. How Long Does It Take For A Solar Panel Installation In Bee Cave To Pay For Itself? Home › News › How Long Does It Take For A Solar Panel Installation In Bee Cave To Pay For Itself? Installing solar panels in Bee Cave, TX will provide ROI in about 11 years, followed by many more years of 'prepaid' energy from the sun. Since a panel can't work without an inverter, you have to also consider that cost, so you might as well add a few more panels (we'll call it a solar installation) and take advantage of government incentives (if they exist in your area). Since a panel can't work without an inverter, you have to also consider that cost, so you might as well add a few more panels (we'll call it a solar installation) and take advantage of gove... This page may be out of date. The sheep control the grass, so that it does not grow up and shade the solar panels. We attach a gutter to the bottom of some of the rows of the solar panels, and collect rainwater for the sheep to drink. We do not use goats or cows because they might eat the electric wires or jump up on or rub against the solar panels. Query: how long does it take for a solar panel to pay for itself nc",
"output": [
"It takes 11 years for a solar panel to pay for itself."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d215230959644d998128a788671f5d27",
"input": "Milk Sell date , How long after the sell by date is milk still good for? The sell date is the last day that the product can be sold in the store. Depending on how cold your fridge is and how the milk was handled, it can last a week or more past the use by date. Take another look at that date, It is NOT an expiration date, it is a use by date. It should also say something about will remain wholesome for up to a week after that date. Of course, veggies and fruits are perishable, but they don't come with expiration dates, so use this advice: Most vegetables are best if used within a week of purchase, although carrots can often last longer, says Nussinow. The precise answer to that question depends to a large extent on storage conditions - to maximize the shelf life of milk, keep it refrigerated at all times. How long do milk substitutes last? Use our expiration tables, tips and FAQs to get the maximum shelf life of soy milk, rice milk, and almond milk. According to Ruff, most products are safe to eat long after their expiration date. In fact, even meat or milk that's clearly starting to spoil is not necessarily dangerous. Very often, you won't eat it because of the smell, and you probably won't like the taste, but in a lot of cases, it's unlikely to cause you illness, he says. A: Canned evaporated milk can last for one more year past its printed expiration date when stored in the pantry. Once opened, a can of evaporated milk should be stored inside the refrigerator and must be consumed within 3 to 4 days. Continue Reading According to the Northeast Organic Dairy Producers Alliance, the milk needs to stay fresh longer because organic products often have to travel farther to reach store shelves since it is not produced throughout the country. The process that gives the milk a longer shelf life is called ultrahigh temperature (UHT) processing or treatment, in which milk is heated to 280 degrees Fahrenheit (138 degrees Celsius) for two to four seconds, killing any bacteria in it. The printed expiration date on milk is really just a sell by date, and milk is usually still good for a few days after that. Milk should last up to 7 days past the sell-by date if properly... The printed expiration date on milk is really just a sell by date, and milk is usually still good for a few days after that. The only items required by federal law to be labeled for expiration are infant formula and some baby foods; some states also mandate pulling dairy from store shelves on the expiration date. Learn the Lingo of Expiration Dates. This brings us to terminology. The actual term Expiration Date refers to the last date a food should be eaten or used. Query: how long does milk last past the expiration date",
"output": [
"Milk should last up to 7 days past the sell-by date."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0dadf624ee234b3bb8f817c3fc399ead",
"input": "Once you’ve got all this in place, you can build your own daily routine around your baby’s naps. Some Mumsnetters like to stick to a rigid timetable. For example: “I wake my son up at about 7am, then make sure he is awake and active for two hours before allowing him a nap in his room of no longer than 40 minutes. Unless you think that your baby is hungry or ill, see what happens if you leave your baby alone for a few minutes — he or she might settle down. If your baby wakes during the period that you want him or her to sleep, keep activity to a minimum. By three months, most babies can sleep for about six hours a night and are more alert during the day. If your baby isn't napping regularly, you should start working on a sleep schedule. Sleep experts and parents agree that the key to successful napping is to be consistent: Baby naps at the same time, in the same place, with the same routine each day. First, wait until your baby is physically and emotionally ready to sleep through the night, usually between 4 and 6 months of age. Ferber doesn't designate a precise age at which to begin his technique, since it can vary so much depending on the child. Your newborn baby might be sleeping through the night at 8 weeks. Or it may be 8 months. You may get a lucky night where she sleeps all night and then be horrified when it never happens again. I know how tired you are. By 6 months, your baby will probably be taking two or three naps a day: one in the morning, one in the early afternoon, and another later in the afternoon. At 9 to 12 months, most babies are down to two naps a day, one in the morning and one in the afternoon. If your baby naps at a nursery or child minder's then speak to them, find out what time your baby’s naps take place there, and try to follow the same routine on the days when your baby is at home with you. the child is getting 11 hours of uninterrupted sleep at night. the child takes longer to fall asleep for the morning nap. the child takes an increasingly shorter morning nap or too long of a morning nap and refuses an afternoon nap. In the end, you feel stuck in the “one nap is not enough and two is too many” phase When you are ready to begin the transition, push your child’s morning nap a little later. Babies like structure—it's the underlying principle for many popular parenting books, from Becoming Baby Wise to Secrets of the Baby Whisperer. And many moms agree. I can't change naptime, ever, says Allison, mom to baby Silas, from Virginia. I have to be consistent about what time my son naps.. The idea is this: Baby's internal clock takes its cue from a consistent routine set by you. Things to remember. 1 Slowly push the morning nap later in 20 to 30 minute increments, until you reach 12:30 pm or 1:00 pm. Do this gradually (i.e. in small increments over 2-3 days) to avoid overtiredness or difficulty getting to sleep. 2 Bedtime will often need to be earlier during this transition – around 7:00 – 7:30 pm. Query: how long should i try to make my baby nap",
"output": [
"I wake my son up at about 7am, then make sure he is awake and active for two hours before allowing him a nap in his room of no longer than 40 minutes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-987e0fd243be4c73a8271784166f86d8",
"input": "The movie's Hungarian title translates back into English as The eighth passenger is the Death. All other Alien movies had titles that end with the word death. Aliens (1986): The Name of the Planet: Death; Alien³ (1992): Final Solution: Death; Alien: Resurrection (1997): The Resurrection of Death. Bolaji Badejo who plays the Alien in the movie, was a graphic artist, who was discovered at a pub by one of the casting directors. He was seven feet one inch tall with thin arms, just what they needed to fit into the Alien costume. The Alien Quadrilogy box set was released December 2, 2003, with both versions of the film included along with a new commentary track featuring many of the film's actors, writers, and production staff, as well as other special features and a documentary entitled The Beast Within: The Making of Alien. Each film was also released separately as a DVD with both versions of the film included. Sigourney Weaver on Alien sequel: 'There's more story to tell' The actor, who played Ripley in four Alien movies, has said that she would like to return to the iconic character Ben Beaumont-Thomas In the years since the release of Alien, the Alien has become one of the world's most recognized movie monsters and a popular-cultural icon. In 2003, the Alien was voted as the 14th most memorable screen villain by the American Film Institute. The Alien Quadrilogy is a nine-disc boxed set devoted to the four Alien films. Although previously available on DVD as the Alien Legacy, here they have been repackaged with vastly more extras and with upgraded sound and picture. The American Film Institute ranked Alien as the sixth most thrilling American movie and seventh-best film in the science fiction genre, and in the AFI's 100 Years... 100 Heroes and Villains list, Ripley was ranked eighth among the heroes, and the Alien was fourteenth among the villains. Aliens is a sequel to Alien (1979), which was based on an original screenplay by Dan O'Bannon. The screenplay for Aliens was written by Canadian-American film-maker James Cameron, who also directed the movie. There have since been four sequels: Alien³ (1992) (1992), Alien: Resurrection (1997) (1997), AVP: Alien vs. Predator (2004) (2004), and AVPR: Aliens vs Predator - Requiem (2007)) (2007). We try to make sense of the recent news about Alien 5 and the Prometheus sequel (now called Alien: Paradise Lost) after Ridley Scott's recent interviews. We try to make sense of the recent news about Alien 5 and the Prometheus sequel (now called Alien: Paradise Lost) after Ridley Scott's recent interviews. Well there are 3 i think Avp 1 Avp 2 Avp3 (requiem) and if you want to watch other movies related to avp you could try Predator 1 and 2 and Aliens. Try Doom the movie , Jeepers Creepers (it's old but you could try it) Saw 1- 6 and..umm..i think Nightmare on Elm street will do some work too :) Query: how many alien movies are there?adfdfdsd",
"output": [
"There are 6 Alien movies."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4d8baf9a4cc641499dd34ad25fe934ed",
"input": "All Things Tax. Like the title says, from the filing process and tax questions to tax policy and reform, you can search and share All Things Tax here. This is the place to find answers to all your general questions that don't fall under the other categories. Tracking tax refunds is quite the adventure this year. Readers are reporting all sorts of data points in how long it takes to get your tax refund back. Originally the IRS started out with an aggressive one week turnaround on tax refunds for efiled returns. However, once we got started, they announced a one week tax refund delay. But then it got worse and after a few more IRS alerts, the IRS thought that returning to the historical range of 10 to 21 days for tax refunds would work for the majority of filers. For many Canadians, the biggest single payment they receive all year is their tax refund cheque. How long you'll wait between filing and receiving your refund depends on a number of factors. 1. As alluded to above, the IRS previously released an annual schedule to help tax payers better plan around tax season so tax-filers will know when they can expect to receive their refund check. They stopped this practice in 2013 (2012 tax year) after there were delays in the refund process due to new anti-fraud measures. Checking Your Refund Status. You can start checking on the status of your refund within 24 hours after we've received your e-filed return or 4 weeks after you've mailed a paper return. Have your 2017 tax return handy so you can provide your social security number, your filing status, and the exact whole dollar amount of your refund shown on your return. General Information Paying your tax debt in full is the best way to get rid of a tax lien. 1 The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) will release a federal tax lien within 30 days after you have paid your tax debt. However, there are other options to reduce the impact of a tax lien: Share your results: How Long Did it Take to Get Your Tax Refund? IRS Tax Refund Status You can track the status of your tax refund with the IRS tool Where’s My Refund? or the IRS Refund Tracker Tax App. Refund Processing Time. 1 E-filed tax returns with direct deposit – E-file with direct deposit is the fastest way to get your federal tax refund. 2 Mailed paper returns – Refund processing time is 6 to 8 weeks from the date the IRS receives your tax return. Is it REALLY going to take that long for my refund?? For me they use ADP and they provide the w2 electronically in PDF format to download off their server and so it cuts down transit and prep time because you get it the moment they have it and not have to wait until you get it in the mail over a month or so later. Some tax returns take longer to process than others for many reasons, including when a return: Includes errors. Is incomplete. Is affected by identity theft or fraud. Includes a claim filed before Feb. 15 for an Earned Income Tax Credit or an Additional Child Tax Credit. Query: how long did it actually take to receive your tax refund",
"output": [
"It took 10 to 21 days to receive a tax refund."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-db0f03d33d3b483f868f3bd92168f17d",
"input": "Augusta County Library; Building Inspection. Before You Start to Build; Check List For Plans; Placing A Manufactured Home; Permit Applications; Downloadable Forms; Current Codes & Design Specifications; Consumer Guide To Selecting A Contractor; Monthly Building Permit Reports; Building Inspection Annual Reports; Required Inspections; Permit Costs; Other Agency Contacts Canadian Postal Code Database. Get all Canadian Postal Codes and their information in one easy to use database. 2010 Census Database. Get the 2010 Census data in an easy to use format for all summary levels: National, State, County, City, and Congressional District. Area Code Database Get all Area Codes and NXX data for North America. The Kennebec County Sheriff’s Office received a report last night, that a Kennebec County Sheriff’s Office Civil Deputy ( employee name was given) called an individual in Oakland demanding $3,500.00 because of a serious legal matter. Calls have also been made to individuals who reside in Manchester. The information on MLS listings has been assembled from various sources of varying degrees of reliability. Any information that is critical to your buying decision should be independently verified. All dimensions are approximate and not guaranteed. ©2018 Maine Real Estate Information System, Inc. All Rights Reserved. County Attorney. Augusta County Code; Economic Development; Emergency Communications Center. Command Bus; Alarm Registration; Emergency Notification System; Emergency Information Form; Controlled Burns; Livestock Directory; Related Links; Emergency Preparedness; Finance. Procurement; Accounts Payable; Revenue Recovery; Contact Information; Fire-Rescue. Volunteer Opportunities; Jobs Coldwell Banker Residential Brokerage can help you find Kennebec County, ME homes for sale, apartments, condos, and other real estate. The City of Augusta is the 10th largest city in Maine with a population of 18,386 as of July 1, 2017. Augusta ranks in the upper quartile for Diversity Index when compared to the other cities, towns and Census Designated Places (CDPs) in Maine. See peer rankings below. The primary coordinate point for Augusta is located at latitude 44.3349 and longitude -69.7342 in Kennebec County. The formal boundaries for the City of Augusta (see map below) encompass a land area of 55.13 sq. miles and a water area of 2.9 sq. miles. Augusta, ME Other Information. Located in KENNEBEC County, Maine; Augusta, ME is also known as: CENTRAL ME POWER CO, ME; CHELSEA, ME; ME STATE AGENCIES, ME; SIDNEY, ME; TOGUS, ME Whatever the occasion, the Augusta Country Club is the finest establishment to host your event. Contact Tina Evans by calling 207-623-3021 or by e-mail at tinaevans@augustacountryclub.org, for more information and available dates. Kennebec County is a county in the U.S. state of Maine, in the United States. As of the 2010 census, the population was 122,151. Its county seat is Augusta, the state capital. The county was established on 20 February 1799 from portions of Cumberland and Lincoln Counties. The name Kennebec comes from the Eastern Abenaki /kínipekʷ/, meaning large body of still water, large bay. Kennebec County comprises the Augusta–Waterville, ME Micropolitan Statistical Area. In 2010, the center of ... Query: augusta me is in what county",
"output": [
"Augusta is in Kennebec County, Maine."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1c649199154b40688fd0736b316a9e32",
"input": "In some cases, nobody will even open the ATM for a few days after you make your deposit, and it’ll take even longer to make corrections in your account. Safety: Bringing cash to an ATM opens up the opportunity for robbery, or for somebody to steal your card information and PIN (the same goes for withdrawals from an ATM). These ATMs no longer use envelopes for deposits. On-screen video prompts and indicators will guide you on how to insert your cash and checks directly into the machine. An image of each check is captured for processing, and cash is validated immediately. The ATM calculates the amount of your total deposit. Our no-envelope ATMs have two slots for deposits and display an on-screen video showing cash and checks being inserted directly into the ATM. Feature only available at select U.S. Bank ATMs, see banker for details. U.S. Bank, Member FDIC. Deposits at a U.S. Bank no-envelope ATM into a U.S. Bank checking or savings account will be processed as follows: For cash deposits, funds will be available immediately. For checks: Checks deposited on business days up until 8:00 p.m. (local time) are considered received on the same day. Business days are Monday thru Friday, and do not include Saturday, Sunday and federal holidays. Deposits made on Saturday, Sunday and federal holidays are considered deposited on the next business day. However, when deposited into an ATM, the bank might only make the first $200 available. Cut-off times are sometimes generous when you use an ATM. Banks often allow you to deposit funds as late as 8:00 PM (or later) to have the deposit count for that day. Cash deposits to a no-envelope ATM are often available immediately or within one business day. Check deposits typically post on the same day you deposit, but only the first $200 of your check is available within one business day. The remaining amount should be available for use after a few business days. Once you're ready, begin the process of making your deposit: 1 Verify that the ATM accepts deposits (and that the ATM works with your bank account). 2 Look around to ensure that the environment is safe. 3 Insert your debit card into the machine and enter your PIN (be sure to cover your hand as you enter your PIN). 1 Choose the on-screen option for deposits. 2 Choose the account you want to deposit to. 3 Enter the amount of your deposit if necessary. Some ATMs can figure out how much you’re depositing by reading from the check or counting bills – they won’t ask for an amount. 4 Insert the envelope, checks, or cash into the ATM. The no-envelope ATM has two insertion slots, one for cash and one for checks. The check receptor can accommodate a stack of up to 30 checks per transaction. The cash receptor can accommodate a stack of up to 50 bills per transaction. When you deposit funds with an ATM, there may be a delay before you can use the money in your account for debit card purchases, bill payment, and withdrawals. Check your bank’s funds availability policy, which explains your bank’s rules for holding deposits, for complete details. How to Make ATM Deposits. 1 Choose the on-screen option for deposits. 2 Choose the account you want to deposit to. 3 Enter the amount of your deposit if necessary. Some ATMs can figure out how much you’re depositing by reading from the check or counting bills – they won’t ask for an amount. 4 Insert the envelope, checks, or cash into the ATM. Query: how long will after a atm cash deposit will be available",
"output": [
"Cash deposits to a no envelope ATM are often available immediately or within one business day."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9e44dc61066e4d14bd3f16f7f7a109e6",
"input": "This depends on who you ask and policy of the institution you visit. I have heard many places that for controlled substances the prescription is valid for 6 months. However, f…or me personally from experience my pharmacy would not take a prescription I had that was over 60 days over for a narcotic. The prescription must also include: 1 drug name. 2 strength. 3 dosage form. 4 quantity prescribed. 5 directions for use. 6 number of refills (if any) authorized. A prescription for a controlled substance may only be issued by a physician, dentist, podiatrist, veterinarian, mid-level practitioner, or other registered practitioner who is: 1 Authorized to prescribe controlled substances by the jurisdiction in which the practitioner is licensed to practice. A prescription for Acyclovir or any prescription drug for that matter, is good until the expiration date on the manufacture bottle that the pills originally came from. The exp … iration dates are usually 3-5 years from date that the pills were made. Who May Issue. A prescription for a controlled substance may only be issued by a physician, dentist, podiatrist, veterinarian, mid-level practitioner, or other registered practitioner who is: Authorized to prescribe controlled substances by the jurisdiction in which the practitioner is licensed to practice. Non-controlled medications are good for one year from date written, controlled substances are good for 6 months from date written. A prescription for a controlled drug is valid for 28 days from the date given on the prescription. usually six months unless it's a controlled i.e. morphine, pethidine and methadone. These medicines are often misused, so have stricter legal controls on their supply to prevent them being obtained illegally. A prescription for a controlled drug is valid for 28 days from the date given on the prescription. How long is a written prescription in Utah good for in Utah? It depends on what the doctor wrote on the prescription, a valid until date is almost always included. For controlled substances like strong pain medications it will only be … good for a short time until the doctor suspects the pain will go away. Other prescription medications they may be good for up to a year, but the doctor will limit the number of pills you may get each month, you cannot get a years supply up front. gb. Plan A prescription for Acyclovir or any prescription drug for that matter, is good until the expiration date on the manufacture bottle that the pills originally came from. The exp…iration dates are usually 3-5 years from date that the pills were made. Practitioners prescribing Schedule II controlled substances for residents of Long Term Care Facilities (LTCF) may transmit a prescription by facsimile to the dispensing pharmacy. The practitioner’s agent may also transmit the prescription to the pharmacy. Query: how long is a doctor's prescription good for ?",
"output": [
"A prescription for a controlled drug is valid for 28 days from the date given on the prescription. usually six months unless it's a controlled."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-44f5677ba81449c3a4a694de646d4a98",
"input": "Annual poppies in particular do well in poor soils. Keeping pots moist, young poppies will quickly grow and once they are just a couple inches tall can be planted into their final positions whether it is a container or flower bed. Some people like to thin the plants from eight to ten inches apart when the seedlings reach a height of five to six inches. If you do thin out the plants, the remaining poppies will fill out more and produce more seed pods per plant. When the plants are ten inches tall start to fertilize with a liquid fertilizer. Poppy flower seeds will start to germinate after 14 to 28 days. Seeds should be sown in spring, or for hardier annual varieties such as those included in the California poppy family, early to mid fall. There's plenty of Marijuana grow journals on GC. Perhaps I'll make an Opium Poppy grow journal! I'm not too familiar with growing Poppies, and I've found a guide: http://www.a1b2c3.com/drugs/opi006.htm But! I just wonder, how freaking long will this take! If I give it constant light in a cool temperature with good watering and draining, it should take how long to go from germination to flowering? Poppies always do best when planted directly into the garden. They like cool temps for germination and resent transplanting so be sure to use 2 1/2 inch or larger peat pots. As far as your trouble last year, make sure not to bury the seed. Just press firmly into the soil, or walk on the planted area. I know how to grow MJ. With Papavar, I get the seeds and spread them out in a Ph7 soil in a long container (Roots grows latitudes than longitudinally) barely under the soil. Germination takes up to 20 days and during this I run a 12/12 light schedule and mist them with a spray bottle. When do I switch to an 18/6 light schedule? Anymore basics of growing? Learning how to grow poppies is easy, and done once gardeners will quickly wonder why they haven’t done it before. Fill pots with a seed compost not too rich in nutrients to avoid prolific leafy growth at the expense of flowers, and scatter seeds thinly across the surface. Oriental Poppy Seeds – Germinating and Caring For Oriental Poppies (Papaver Orientale) Oriental Poppy Seeds – How to Create A Stunning Border With Poppies. Papaver Somniferum – Five Poppies to Dazzle Your Day. Papaver Somniferum Seeds – For Annual Flowering Delight. Poppy Flower Seeds – Germinating and Growing Poppies. Poppy Flower Seeds - Germinating and Growing Poppies Simple Tips for a Garden Bursting with Color A popular garden plant around the world, using poppy seeds to add life to a garden is easy to do. With a huge variety of species allowing for different colors, sizes and flower shapes to be incorporated into any garden,… With a huge variety of species allowing for different colors, sizes and flower shapes to be incorporated into any garden, growing poppies is extremely rewarding. In addition, while many gardeners may prefer annual varieties or perennial specimens which return year after year, the ease in which poppies produce seeds means that ensuring a continuous supply is easy. Query: how long does it take for poppies to grow",
"output": [
"Poppy flower seeds will start to germinate after 14 to 28 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1bb450845b3e4eb0bea9c4bc63a8c3d5",
"input": "You will be responsible for learning a total of eight of these ions, but by applying some simple rules, you can determine the formulas and names of many more. These three rules are 1. Add a hydrogen atom to a polyatomic anion. This reduces the negative charge on the ion by one and the word hydrogen is added to the beginning of the name. state cation name first and anion name. if cation is a metallic element with more than one common charge, include a Roman numeral in the cation name. Which types of ions end in -ide? How do you write the name of any binary ionic compound? place cation first, then the anion ex. Cs2O is composed of metal cesium and nonmetal oxygen: cesium oxide How do you determine the formula and name of a binary ionic compound? first write the symbol of the cation and then the anion. add subscripts as needed to balance the charges. Ionic compounds are easily recognized because they contain a metal and a nonmetal. Covalent compounds are those which contain only nonmetals. The periodic table in the front cover of your text shows which elements fall into each class. The names for ionic compounds are very simple. The first part of the name is simply the name of the metal element. The second part of the name is the name of the nonmetal element, with the ending changed to the suffix –ide. For example, consider the compound Al 2 O 3. While the subscripts indicate that the compound consists of two atoms of aluminum and three atoms of oxygen, these numbers do not affect the name. The first part of the name would be aluminum. For the second part of the name, we drop the ending on oxygen and add –ide, thus it becomes oxide. The name of the compound is then aluminum oxide. When an ionic compound contains a transition metal, the names become a bit more complicated. The metals in the d and f blocks can have more than one charge and can thus form more than one compound. For example, iron and chlorine form two different compounds, FeCl 2 and FeCl 3. To distinguish them, What do ya do if the metallic element in a binary ionic compound has more than one ionic charge? if the metallic element in a binary ionic compound has more than one common ionic charge, a Roman numeral must be included in the cation name. Name the binary ionic compound: CoI2 CoI2: cobalt cations and iodide anions Naming Ionic Compounds With Polyatomic Ions, Transition Metals & Roman Numerals, Chemistry - Duration: 13:33. The Organic Chemistry Tutor 3,162 views Naming Ionic Compounds with Transition Metals Introduction - Duration: 10:10. Tyler DeWitt 665,601 views -older, less useful. -uses a root word with different suffixes at the end of the word. -suffix -ous is used to name cation with lower of two ionic charges. -suffix -ic is used to name cation with higher of two ionic charges. Naming Chemical Compounds. Chemical compounds can be divided into two basic types, ionic and covalent. Ionic compounds are easily recognized because they contain a metal and a. nonmetal. Covalent compounds are those which contain only nonmetals. The. periodic table in the front cover of your text shows which elements fall into each. class. Query: how do you name the ionic compound bas",
"output": [
"The first part of the name is simply the name of the metal element. The second part of the name is the name of the nonmetal element, with the ending changed to the suffix –ide."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9209fb97ed384bb18818ab8a975e62b2",
"input": "Aristarchus calculated that the Sun is about nineteen times farther than the Moon; it is actually about 390 times farther than the Moon. Another ancient Greek astronomer, Eratosthenes (276-194 BC), estimated the distance between Earth and Sun to be either 4,080,000 stadia or 804,000,000 stadia. Then 4,080,000 stades is less than 1% of the actual Earth-Sun distance, no matter which definition of a stade one chooses. However, 804,000,000 stadia is between 126 million and 168 million kilometers - a range which includes the actual Earth-Sun distance of (approximately) 150 million kilometers. Earth and the Moon. Background As long as people have looked at the Moon, they have wondered how far away it is from Earth. The average distance to the Moon is 382,500 km. The distance varies because the Moon travels around Earth in an elliptical orbit. At perigee, the point at which the Moon is closest to Earth, the distance is approximately 360,000 km. At apogee, the point at which the Moon is farthest from Earth, the distance is approxi-mately 405,000 km. Distance from Earth to the Moon for a given date can be obtained by asking a local The orbit of the moon around the Earth is not a perfect circle so the distance varies a little. The average distance is around 384,400 kilometers or 230,600 miles. When NASA's Apollo astronauts flew to the moon in the late 1960s and early 1970s, it took them three days to reach the moon and enter orbit after launch. Did you know that the moon is moving away from Earth? It moves away at about 3.8 centimeters per year. SpaceKids on SPACE.com provides simple, straightforward answers to really big cosmic questions. 8 Responses. > 1 the Moon takes an elliptical path around the Earth. The planets make nearly elliptical orbits around the Sun, close enough for reasonable approximations, but the Moon’s Orbit around the Earth is sufficiently influenced by the Sun that it follows a path detectably different from an ellipse. The “Moon ABCs Fact Sheet” lists the Earth's diameter as 12,756 km and the Moon's. diameter as 3,476 km. Therefore, the Moon's diameter is 27.25% of Earth's diameter. An official basketball has a diameter of 24 cm. This can serve as a model for Earth. tennis ball has a diameter of 6.9 cm which is close to 27.25% of the basketball. Distance to the Moon 25 Teacher Page Exploring the Moon -- A Teacher's Guide with Activities, NASA EG-1997-10-116-HQ Purpose To calculate the distance between scale models of Earth and the Moon. Background As long as people have looked at the Moon, they have wondered how far away it is from Earth. The average distance to the Moon is 382,500 km. The distance varies. because the Moon travels around Earth in an elliptical orbit. At perigee, the point at. which the Moon is closest to Earth, the distance is approximately 360,000 km. The full moon rises behind some trees in this photo taken by skywatcher Brad Ervin in Bruswick, Georgia on March 19, 2011, when the moon was closer to Earth than it had been in 18 years. In the former, they found that the Moon was imperfectly blocked by the shadow of the Earth, and that the shadow was roughly 2.5 times the width of the Moon. In the latter, they noted that the Moon was of sufficient size and distance to block out the Sun. Also, since we know the time taken by the Earth to go once around the Sun (P = 1 year), and the distance traveled by the Earth in this process (approximately 2πa, since Earth's orbit is nearly circular), we can calculate the average orbital speed of Earth as v = (2πa)/P. Query: how far is earth from the moon?",
"output": [
"The average distance between the Earth and the Moon is 382,500 km."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0fc1bb789e904886a38c96753872606e",
"input": "The average American is exposed to … about 3000 advertising messages a day; at least three thousand ads every day; 100 advertisements before 9 am each day. 247 advertisements in one day; 5000 advertising and promotional messages per day; over 30000 commercials each year The data reaffirms much of what Nielsen has found in past studies, namely that television remains by far the dominant medium for video viewing. The Ball State study found that the average American adult was exposed to five hours and nine minutes of live TV each day, almost 15 minutes of TV via a DVR device and 2.4 minutes of video on the computer. They cite many references that give numbers for how many ads we see daily. One such example : “The average American is exposed to 247 commercial messages each day.” Consumer Reports Website But the numbers just go up from there. Estimate 1: 3,000 a day. “The average American is exposed to over 3000 ads every day. The ads increasingly encroach upon our public space — our schools, our public transportation, our buildings, and even our beaches (a new technique enables the advertisers to stamp their ads onto the sand at beaches.) How many ads to people see on average on their mobile devices in a day? How many users click on ads on Facebook every day? How can PPC/CPC be assessed for a banner ad? Since people are spending more time away from home, marketers are spending more money on bringing TV to you: in shopping malls and in grocery stores. There's even an Autonet in auto repair shops, and of course, advertising reaches people on computers and movie screens. There's more media than ever before, Mandese said. waking day, that would give a total of 76 advertisements of which a person is to some degree aware. Charles F. Adams, working with the Bauer and Greyser data in 1965, emphasized that of the 76 advertisements a day of which a person might be aware, only 12 made any kind of impression on him, and three of those impressions were negative. If “exposure” means you could have In the golden age of television, an ad on one of the big three networks could reach 70 percent of the viewing audience. But then the landscape changed: along came cable digital video recorders like Tivo, which allow viewers to fast forward through ads with the click of a remote. IN a world with grocery store television screens, digitally delivered movie libraries and cellphone video clips, the average American is exposed to 61 minutes of TV ads and promotions a day. Some people may think that amount seems excessive. In one 45-minute journey, the average London commuter is exposed to more than 130 adverts. Only half of that information makes any impact, while unprompted we can remember none of the blur of adverts, according to new technology tested by the Guardian. By Owen Gibson. Query: how many ads is the average person exposed to a day",
"output": [
"The average person exposed 3000 ads every day."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9011dc0015574411bf157c6b9d50a449",
"input": "This is the science of spectroanalysis and the scientists can detect not only the star’s color, but what the star is actually made up of. The elements of a star will help as we classify the solar systems and galaxies that we discover. Useful Websites. Star Colors and Temperatures. Why are the stars different colors? Color is a result of the way gemstones absorb light. Light is an electromagnetic vibration at certain wavelengths. The human eye can only perceive wavelengths between 380 and 750 nm. The colors of the spectrum that are visible to us are red, orange, yellow, green, blue and violet. If all the different wavelengths of light pass through a gemstone, it will appear colorless. On the other hand, if the gem material absorbs all light, it will be appear black. There is another important factor that can alter a stars color. If the star has any elements in its atmosphere it can change the light wavelength and that will cause a change in the color that we measure or observe. This may explain why there are so many different colors in the stars that are being studied. The coolest stars are the red stars and their temperature is around 3,000 degrees C. Articles >> Why are stars different colors? Throughout history mankind has gazed up at the stars in awe and wonder. To the naked eye, most of the stars appear white. As the light from the stars comes through the earth’s atmosphere, they appear to be twinkling. Until about two hundred years ago, everyone that studied the stars thought that all stars were white. This makes the cooler stars appear red and the stars with the higher temperatures appear blue or white. From cool to hot, the colors can appear red, orange, yellow, green and blue. If you remember the colors of the rainbow, you will see that these are in the same order. Red giants such as Betelgeuse are not actually that red in colour. If you look at the colour in table 4.3 above you can see that its actual colour would be more orange than true red. A small group of stars do, however, appear deep red. These are the carbon stars such as 19 or TX Piscium. A starfield in the region of Sagittarius showing stars of different colours. 1 Stellar Colours Human Vision. Interstellar Reddening and Extinction. 2 Measuring Colour - Colour Index Colour Index Problems. 3 Filters in Astronomy. However, idiochromatic gemstones are rare. Most gemstones are allochromatic, meaning that they are colored by impurities or trace elements in their crystal structure. For example, pure corundum is colorless. But corundum is typically red when traces of chromium are present and blue when there are traces of titanium. One thing you will notice from this list is that the relationship between chemical impurity and gemstone color is not a simple one. In some cases, a similar color can result from different trace elements; the green of an emerald can be the result of chromium or vanadium (or both). In other cases, a single trace element can produce different colors in different gem varieties. Thus chromium will produce a green color in emerald, but result in a red color in corundum. The colour of a star is primarily a function of its effective temperature. You should recall that a star approximates the behaviour of a black body radiator. As a black body gets hotter its colour changes. If you were to heat a solid shot put it would first emit radiation in the infrared region. Query: how do stars get their color",
"output": [
"The colour of a star is primarily a function of its effective temperature. You should recall that a star approximates the behaviour of a black body radiator. As a black body gets hotter its colour changes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c169c5cc46f54f1083fc4f44d96bc033",
"input": "(The authors did not find any difference in costs which could explain the result.) Another example is Sen et al. who found that gasoline prices were higher in states that instituted price ceilings. Another example is the Supreme Court of Pakistan decision regarding fixing a ceiling price for sugar at PKR45/kg. Price Ceilings. A price ceiling is the opposite of a price floor: It's a government-mandated maximum price for a good or service. As economists Paul Krugman and Robin Wells note in their basic text Microeconomics, price ceilings are far less common than price floors in the modern U.S. economy. Still, there are some. Rent-control law in New York and other major cities is an example of price ceilings. Price Floors When a price floor is set, a certain minimum amount must be paid for a good or service. If the price floor is below a market price, no direct effect occurs. If the market price is lower than the price floor, then a surplus will be generated. Minimum wage laws are good examples of price floors. In many states, the U.S. minimum wage law has no effect, as market wage rates for low-skilled workers are above the U.S. minimum wage rate. Difference Between Price Ceilings and Price Floor Both price ceilings and floors are forms of price controls. While a price ceiling dictates the maximum price of a good or service, a price floor refers to the lowest price for which a good or service may be sold. If the price ceiling is set below the market price, then a shortage is created; the quantity demanded will exceed the quantity supplied. The shortage may be resolved in many ways. One way is queuing; people have to wait in line for the product, and only those willing to wait in line for the product will actually get it. Key points. Price ceilings prevent a price from rising above a certain level. When a price ceiling is set below the equilibrium price, quantity demanded will exceed quantity supplied, and excess demand or shortages will result. Price floors prevent a price from falling below a certain level. A price ceiling is a government-imposed price control, or limit, on how high a price is charged for a product. Governments use price ceilings to protect consumers from conditions that could make commodities prohibitively expensive. Such conditions can occur during periods of high inflation, in the event of an investment bubble, or in the event of monopoly ownership of a product, all of which can cause problems if imposed for a long period without controlled rationing, leading to shortages. Furth Price ceiling is a measure of price control imposed by the government on particular commodities in order to prevent consumers from being charged high prices. Price ceiling can also be understood as a legal maximum price set by the government on particular goods and services to make those commodities attainable to all consumers. Answers to Self-Check Questions. 1 A price ceiling (which is below the equilibrium price) will cause the quantity demanded to rise and the quantity supplied to fall. This is why a price ceiling creates a shortage. 2 A price ceiling is just a legal restriction. Equilibrium is an economic condition. A price floor is a government- or group-imposed price control or limit on how low a price can be charged for a product.[1] A price floor must be higher than the equilibrium price in order to be effective. Query: how is a price floor different than a price ceiling?",
"output": [
"Difference Between Price Ceilings and Price Floor Both price ceilings and floors are forms of price controls."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e8ecf29a6c4c42ca9a253536d978d3ea",
"input": "preschool age, fine motor skill development is frequently overlooked when the child is an infant or toddler. Just as gross motor skills begin to develop on the first day of life, so do fine motor skills. The following is a brief description of fine motor development from 0 months through 6 years. However, we must remember that newborns, infants, & What If My Child Does Not Yet Have A Dominant Hand? There are differing views on when hand dominance is established, but many experts agree that a consistent hand preference begins to emerge between ages 2 and 4 years, and that most children entering Kindergarten (age 5-6) have established a definite hand preference for using a pencil and scissors. In this photo, the child is reaching over to the left with his right hand. This is called crossing the midline. Before crossing the midline is established, you may have noticed that your young child tends to use the left hand on the left side of the body and the right hand on the right side of the body. Indicators for Hand Dominance. For the most part, babies start off using both hands to do things and preference for one hand or the other seldom manifests before seven to nine months of age. Even then, the preference may not necessarily be permanent. Usually around two years of age there is steady use of one hand in particular, but some four- to six-year-olds may still be ambivalent regarding a dominant hand. Tasks requiring each hand to perform different skilled movements develop during the preschool years and beyond. A majority of children show a preference by age 3 and most by school age, but Dr. Gesell wrote that hand dominance doesn't become well integrated in some normal children until eight or nine years of age (Gesell & Ames, 1947). Handedness is a better (faster or more precise) performance or individual preference for use of a hand, known as the dominant hand; the less capable or less preferred hand is called the non-dominant hand. Men are somewhat more likely to express a strongly dominant left hand than women. People use the hand that they prefer for fine motor skills, as well as other things. A person can be left handed and do most things with that hand, from writing to throwing a ball to brushing their teeth. Other people do only some things with their dominant hand, whether it is right or left. Terms I like to use are ‘doing hand’ (dominant) and ‘helping hand’ (supporting hand). Place items in the midline of the child: Place toys or items front and centre of a child so that they have a greater chance to ‘select’ which hand to use and eliminating a requirement to cross the midline. Handedness is a better (faster or more precise) performance or individual preference for use of a hand, known as the dominant hand; the less capable or less preferred hand is called the nondominant hand. Signs of left-handedness to look out for include: 1 which hand your child uses to hold a spoon when eating. 2 which foot do they prefer to kick with. 3 which hand do they use to hold a crayon or pencil. Query: at which age does hand dominance begin to emerge",
"output": [
"Hand dominance begins to emerge between ages 2 and 4 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3333eb51007a4bd0a191120707ad11f6",
"input": "ADHD Can Be Diagnosed At Age 4, Pediatricians Group Says Amanda Chan The Huffington Post Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, or ADHD, can be diagnosed as young as age 4 and as old as age 18, according to new guidelines from the American Academy of Pediatrics. The recommendations hadn't been updated in the last decade, which had recommended diagnosis and treatment for kids ages 6 to 12, Reuters reported. Caring for a child with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder can be challenging for the whole family. Parents may be hurt by their child's behavior as well as by the way other people respond to it. The stress of dealing with ADHD can lead to marital conflict. These problems may be compounded by the financial burden that ADHD can place on families. With hyperactivity/impulsivity symptoms, the child may: 1 often fidget or seem constantly on the go. 2 run around when it is not appropriate. 3 become easily frustrated when asked to take turns. 4 interrupt others. 5 make a lot of noise. The leading pediatricians' group also said that ADHD medications, including Ritalin and Vyvanse, can be used to treat 4- and 5-year-olds whose ADHD symptoms are moderate to severe, NPR reported. Those drugs aren't FDA-approved to treat people younger than age 6, but doctors are still allowed to prescribe drugs without an FDA recommendation. Once your child has been diagnosed with ADHD, treatment can begin. You, your child's doctor or psychologist, and the school will need to work together on a treatment plan. This plan may include medication, family counselling, and an education plan. For more information, please see the Treatment section of this site. Every child may sometimes have one or two of these symptoms. For a diagnosis of ADHD, the child's symptoms need to be excessive, long-term, and pervasive: Excessive: they occur more often than in other children of the same age and sex. Its criteria for ADHD are: 1 evidence of at least six of nine symptoms of inattention and/or at least six of nine symptoms of hyperactivity/impulsivity. 2 symptoms are inappropriate for the child's age and stage of development. 3 symptoms impair the child's functioning. In general, a child shouldn't receive a diagnosis of attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder unless the core symptoms of ADHD start early in life — before age 12 — and create significant problems at home and at school on an ongoing basis. There's no specific test for ADHD, but making a diagnosis will likely include: Standard treatments for attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder in children include medications, education, training and counseling. These treatments can relieve many of the symptoms of ADHD, but they don't cure it. It may take some time to determine what works best for your child. Stimulant medications For a diagnosis of ADHD, the child's symptoms need to be excessive, long-term, and pervasive: 1 Excessive: they occur more often than in other children of the same age and sex. 2 Long-term: they have continued for months and are not just a response to a temporary situation. Query: at what age can pediatricians diagnose adhd",
"output": [
"Pediatricians can diagnose the adhd at the age from 4 to 18 years oid."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-02d952f27fbe4ee7bb0b3f2bafe55d5e",
"input": "If you want to get your tax refund as soon as possible, forget about paper. The best way to get your money moving in your direction pronto is to e-file your return. But if you don't do it right, electronic tax filing can cause some big problems. Not to worry: DailyFinance is here to help you avoid those pitfalls. If criminals are able to get your name and Social Security number, then they can forge other documents necessary to e-file a tax return and arrange to have your refund sent to them on a prepaid debit card, which can easily be converted into cash for a clean getaway. The best way to get your tax refund fast is to e-file your return. However, if you don't do it right, electronic tax filing can cause some big problems -- problems we want to help you avoid. Here's how e-filing works, and how to get it done right. Refund Processing Time. E-filed tax returns with direct deposit – E-file with direct deposit is the fastest way to get your federal tax refund. The IRS states that 9 out of 10 e-filed tax returns with direct deposit will be processed within 21 days of IRS e-file acceptance. Here is a breakdown of IRS processing times, how your tax return will progress through 3 stages with the IRS (“Return Received”, “Return Approved”, and “Refund Sent” once you e-file), and where you can go to check your refund status. The delay has been bad news for those who've come to rely on early e-filing to speed up their refunds. According to the IRS, nearly 100 million taxpayers chose to e-file their tax returns in 2011, and many of them did so in the hopes of reducing tax-return processing and turnaround time. Refund Processing Time. 1 E-filed tax returns with direct deposit – E-file with direct deposit is the fastest way to get your federal tax refund. 2 Mailed paper returns – Refund processing time is 6 to 8 weeks from the date the IRS receives your tax return. Refund Processing Time. 1 E-filed tax returns with direct deposit – E-file with direct deposit is the fastest way to get your federal tax refund. The IRS states that 9 out of 10 e-filed tax returns with direct deposit will be processed within 21 days of IRS e-file acceptance. Mailed paper returns – Refund processing time is 6 to 8 weeks from the date the IRS receives your tax return. Refund Process. Start checking status 24 – 48 hours after e-file – Once you have e-filed your tax return, you can check status using IRS Where’s My Refund? You will not be able to start checking the status of your tax refund for 4 weeks if you mail a paper tax return. The difference can be huge, with refunds available in as little as seven days in some cases through direct deposit into your bank account, compared to several weeks for paper returns in many cases. Apart from letting you get your refund faster, e-filing can help you avoid common mistakes on your tax returns. Query: how long to get refund after e-file",
"output": [
"It takes 21 days to get refund after e-file."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-5c9050267a744ab8adf2607a9fb7522b",
"input": "This is a diagram that shows the layout of a figure skating routine. Sports. You've worked hard on mastering a number of figure skating moves; now it’s time to set a program to music. Here's How. Select a piece of music that is about 1½ to 2 minutes long. Classical music is always acceptable, and movie themes can be a popular and trendy source for music. Something with a definite, identifiable crescendo or change is a good choice since there are natural places to insert jumps or other dramatic moves. You've worked hard on mastering a number of figure skating moves; now it’s time to set a program to music. Here's How Select a piece of music that is about 1½ to 2 minutes long. Tips. 1 Practice the program to music daily, and build up endurance to do it again and again. 2 If you do get a chance to perform the program in public, make sure you know it really well, and if you make a mistake, just go on to the next move and keep a smile on your face. You've worked hard on mastering a number of figure skating moves; now it's time to set a program to music. You've worked hard on mastering a number of figure skating moves; now it's time to set a program to music. The other event is the long program (also called free skate), which is 4 minutes for women and 4 ½ minutes for men. The long program is worth two thirds of the total score and needs to demonstrate artistry and creativity while incorporating enough elements to be competitive on the degree of difficulty. You’ll see free and short programs from singles and pairs, plus a short dance and free dance from singles and pairs. A figure skating team can be composed of two figure skaters (one male, one female), one sports pair, and one dance pair. The 2014 Olympics includes five figure skating events: men’s singles, women’s singles, pairs, ice dancing, and team. Singles. There is a singles figure skating event for both men and women. Each skater must perform two programs. The first program is the short program (2 min 50 sec.). It is the more technical of the two programs because it has a required number of elements that must be included. These elements include footwork, spins, jumps and combinations. Figure skating has been a sport for hundreds of years. It began primarily as a technical sport in which skaters competed against each other to make precise figures in the ice. By the mid-1800s, skaters began adding music, costumes, and spins and pirouettes. The final program is the free program. This is the where the dancers can show off their originality. The long dance program doesn’t have to follow any specific dance style or pattern. Team. In Olympic figure skating, the team events comprise the top national teams, which go blade to blade for the honors. 1 Select a place in the rink to start, and decide on a starting position. 2 Decide on a starting move. 3 Take advantage of the connecting moves. 4 Use of space in the rink is artistically important. 5 Make sure you know your music well. Query: how long is a free program figure skating",
"output": [
"A free program for stake is 4 minutes for women and 4 ½ minutes for men."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-2877364ee8c84243aa95361813d9b464",
"input": "Alcohol does show up on most drug tests. 1 There is no “magic bullet” or over the counter products for cleansing our system of alcohol. These are some things to try that may accelerate the process: 2 Drink plenty of pure water. Take a vitamin B supplement. 3 Exercise. 4 Eat healthy food. Summing Up: How Long Does THC Stay In Your Urine? Drug urine tests for weed have all kinds of shortcomings and inadequacies. But they are good at one thing: revealing whether or not the person being tested has consumed cannabis, in some form, at some point in the past. The amount and frequency of any drug use will alter the amount of time that it takes to filter out of the body. It stands to reason that using drugs on a continuous basis over a long period of time will lengthen the amount of time that detectable amount drugs can be found in your system. Urine tests will also differ depending on the drug’s half-life but can detect most drugs for about two to four days. Drugs that can linger longer include marijuana and PCP. Hair tests generally reveal drug use between one week and 90 days after use. lsd is not real its in a lot of drugs and it strews in your neck. - 3-5 days in urine (eTg), up to 90 in hair and around 10 - 12 hours in blood. Amphetamines - 1 to 3 days in urine, up to 90 in hair and around 12 hours in blood. MDMA (Ecstasy) 3-4 days in urine, up to 90 in hair and 1 - 2 days in blood. Here's how long various drugs stay in your body. Contrary to what many advertised drug tests might promise, not all substances leave their telltale chemical signature in the body for the same amount of time. Traces of these metabolites are what drug testers look for, since they're a good indication that someone has actually used a drug rather than merely come into accidental contact with it. And while hair-based drug tests are fairly accurate, tests of blood and urine are simply unable to detect the vast majority of drugs, so long as you haven't used for about a week. Heroin, for example, is generally undetectable in urine after three to five days. As the chart below shows, traces of drugs like LSD, morphine, heroin, amphetamines, and alcohol all remain in the blood for just 12 hours or less: Dragan Radovanovic/Business Insider How Long Do Drugs Stay In Your System? Just like each type of drug has its own effects, each type also takes a different amount of time to metabolize and exacts a different toll on the body. Even drugs of the same type, such as opiates like Percocet and Vicodin, can clear the body at very different speeds. PCP can be found in urine within 4 to 6 hours after use and will remain in urine for 7 to 14 days, depending on factors such as metabolic rate, user’s age, weight, activity, and diet.5 Phencyclidine is excreted in the urine as an unchanged drug (4% to 19%) and conjugated metabolites (25% to 30%). The Varying Detection of Drug Testing Timelines. 1 Single or small doses of any given drug won’t last as long in your system and are not as easily detected. 2 If you have a fast-metabolic rate, you will have a shorter detection of the drug in your body. 3 Your body mass will determine how fast or slow your body metabolises. Query: how long drugs stay in urine",
"output": [
"Most drugs stay in urine for about two to four days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-dffc13ec0ef64813a695ad47ab3251cc",
"input": "How long it takes. It should take 3 weeks to get your passport. Use a different service if you need it urgently. It can take longer if more information is needed or your application hasn’t been filled in correctly. Don’t book travel until you have a valid passport - doing so is at your own risk. If you report the details to us, we will cancel the passport to ensure it cannot be misused by another person. Take the passport and the original death certificate to an Australia Post passport agency. If you wish to retain the passport as a memento, we will return it to you after it has been cancelled. In either case, it is possible to obtain passports the same day that the forms are submitted, if necessary. In an emergency situation, a passport can be secured in just a few hours. If you need to get a passport in a hurry but cannot visit a regional processing center, the expediter we recommend can help you to get a passport fast. Types of Passport Services. The time it takes to get a passport renewed is the same time it takes to get a new passport if you only consider processing time. Step by Step Process for Indian Passport Renewal / Re-issue: 1. Register Online at Passport Seva Website : The very first step is to register yourself with the Passport Website. All you need to do is go to Passport Seva Website and click on ” New User Register”. You need to select the passport office as per your current residential address and register. You need to enter basic details like Name, date of birth, login ID, password, hint question, and register. Australians aged 75 and over can opt to have a five-year passport for half the cost of an ordinary 10-year passport. I don't speak English well. Can I use an interpreter at my passport interview? Visit the U.S. Department of State website to learn how to apply for a passport and what documents you need. 1 Complete your Form DS-11 Application for U.S. Passport on the State Department website. 2 Print your completed application. DO NOT SIGN YOUR APPLICATION. 3 Have a passport photo taken. Apply for a NEW passport in person. For any of the following: It’s your first passport. Your last passport was damaged or lost. Your last passport was issued more than 15 years ago. Your name has changed and you have no supporting legal documents. It’s for a child under age 16. To get a new passport, you must go to a local passport acceptance facility. Apply for the passport at least two months ahead of the trip to avoid extra fees and ensure that the passport is received on time. First-Time Applicants The process of applying for a first passport requires multiple steps. Step 1: Apply Early. If you are renewing your passport using Passport Renewal Application Form DS-82, Post Offices do not need to review or process your application. You can mail your renewal application directly to the State Department yourself. Adult passports are valid for 10 years and may be renewed by mail. Minors' passports may not be renewed by mail. Many countries require that passports be valid for at least 6 months after you enter their country. Renew your passport in plenty of time for those trips or pay for expedited service. Step 2: Check Your Renewal Eligibility Processing Time: 1 to 8 business days, but the exact turnaround time will depend upon which Regional Passport Agency you go to. In order to get your passport expedited at a Regional Passport Agency, you may also need to make an appointment and/or show that you are traveling out of the country in two weeks or less. Here is a list of Regional Passport Agencies for reference. Query: how long does it take to get new passport",
"output": [
"It takes 3 weeks to get a new passport."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-bb28d34650cb41cfaf426e43e3fb29c9",
"input": "If you notice any symptoms of colon cancer, such as blood in your stool or an ongoing change in bowel habits, do not hesitate to make an appointment with your doctor. Talk to your doctor about when you should begin screening for colon cancer. Guidelines generally recommend that colon cancer screenings begin at age 50. Stool Tests. 1 The guaiac-based fecal occult blood test (gFOBT) uses the chemical guaiac to detect blood in the stool. It is done once a year. For this test, you receive a test kit from your health care provider. At home, you use a stick or brush to obtain a small amount of stool. You return the test kit to the doctor or a lab, where the stool samples are checked for the presence of blood. The fecal immunochemical test (FIT) uses antibodies to detect blood in the stool. It is also done once a year in the same way as a gFOBT. If you are older than 75, ask your doctor if you should be screened. People at an increased risk of developing colorectal cancer should talk to their doctors about when to begin screening, which test is right for them, and how often to get tested. Several screening tests can be used to find polyps or colorectal cancer. The Task Force outlines the following colorectal cancer screening strategies. Talk to your doctor about which of the following tests are right for you. Stool Tests. 1 The guaiac-based fecal occult blood test (gFOBT) uses the chemical guaiac to detect blood in the stool. 2 The fecal immunochemical test (FIT) uses antibodies to detect blood in the stool. 3 The FIT-DNA test (also referred to as the stool DNA test) combines the FIT with a test that detects altered DNA in the stool. Stool Tests. 1 The guaiac-based fecal occult blood test (gFOBT) uses the chemical guaiac to detect blood in the stool. It is done once a year. 2 The fecal immunochemical test (FIT) uses antibodies to detect blood in the stool. It is also done once a year in the same way as a gFOBT. There are many different tests to detect colorectal cancer. Tests to detect colorectal cancer and polyps national colon diagnosis mayo clinic. At cancercompass you will find information to help understand and identify a colonoscopist is doctor who specializes in performing this test. Googleusercontent search. Colon cancer can occur in any part of the colon. An examination of your entire colon using a long, flexible tube equipped with a camera (colonoscopy) is one way to detect colon cancer and polyps. Colon cancer is cancer of the large intestine (colon), which is the final part of your digestive tract. Most cases of colon cancer begin as small, noncancerous (benign) clumps of cells called adenomatous polyps. Over time some of these polyps can become colon cancers. Polyps may be small and produce few, if any, symptoms. If you are older than 75, ask your doctor if you should be screened. People at an increased risk of developing colorectal cancer should talk to their doctors about when to begin screening, which test is right for them, and how often to get tested. Several screening tests can be used to find polyps or colorectal cancer. The Task Force outlines the following colorectal cancer screening strategies. Talk to your doctor(https://www.cdc.gov/cancer/colorectal/basic_info/screening/questions.htm) about which of the following tests are right for you. This type of screening can find problems that be treated the emedicinehealth doctors ask about colon cancer i was diagnosed with stage iv cancer, which had spread to lymph nodes, in 2005 blood your stools (faeces) may a sign bowel. If you've already had colon cancer or adenomatous polyps, you have a greater risk of colon cancer in the future. Inflammatory intestinal conditions. Chronic inflammatory diseases of the colon, such as ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease, can increase your risk of colon cancer. Query: how do you detect colon cancer",
"output": [
"An examination of entire colon using a long, flexible tube equipped with a camera colonoscopy is one way to detect colon cancer and polyps."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-54df96d71c754dbca8c79a17e81a50ba",
"input": "Answer If unopened dried fruits can stay in your cupboard for at least a year. Once opened they should be put in your refrigerator (in a Glad Bag with air pressed out) can last for several months. If unopened dried fruits can stay in your cupboard for at least a year. In determining how long Dried Fruit lasts, our content incorporates research from multiple resources, including the United States Department of Agriculture and the United States Food & Drug Administration. Dried Fruit Expiration Date. *Freezing is an indefinite form of storage and dried fruit, if properly sealed, can last for many years. Of course, dried fruit lasts for a shorter period of time if it is not stored properly. But remember that dried fruit, like some other fruits, usually has a best by date and not a use by date or expiration date. Passion fruit will stay fresh from two to five days out of the refrigerator. It will ripen quickly out of the refrigerator. Once it is ripe, it should be moved to the refr…igerator where it will last from five to seven days. If you freeze passion fruit it will last for approximately eight months. Want to know how long you can safely keep meat in the refrigerator? Or how long to boil an egg? How about whether it's better to use wooden or plastic cutting boards? Just ask Karen, your guide to expert knowledge on handling and storing food safely and preventing food poisoning. How long does dried fruit last? Most dried fruits will last for a year beyond a best by date and can be frozen indefinitely, but there are signs to be aware of when questioning if your dried fruit has gone bad. The shelf life of dried fruit depends on a variety of factors, such as the best by date, the drying method and how the dried fruit was stored. So, how long does dried fruit last? When properly stored, the shelf life of dried fruits such as raisins (dried grapes), craisins (dried cranberries), dried apricots (actually apricots!) and many other dried fruits past their best by date is approximately ... Interesting facts about Dried Fruit: 1 How to read the Best By date on Ocean Spray Cranberry products: Ocean Spray cranberry products are a popular choice in the U.S. for cranberries. 2 Don't let that package of Dried Plums fool you - they are Prunes and will act as such! How long are dried fruits safe? Fruits such as dried apricots, prunes and raisins will keep at top quality in the pantry for six months. After opening, you may wish to store them tightly sealed in the refrigerator to preserve the quality for up to six additional months or freeze them for one month. Passion fruit will stay fresh from two to five days out of the refrigerator. It will ripen quickly out of the refrigerator. Once it is ripe, it should be moved to the refr … igerator where it will last from five to seven days. If you freeze passion fruit it will last for approximately eight months. Query: how long with dried apricots last",
"output": [
"Dried apricot lasts for six months in pantry."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-439607c025024be7b80e928aff2c9c54",
"input": "Miraculous Ladybug Interviews https://www.youtube.com/pla..... Miraculous Ladybug Specials https://www.youtube.com/wat..... Special thanks to our awsome MLB community and to For more Miraculous Ladybug check out: Website: http://www.miraculousladybu... Twitter: https://twitter.com/BeMirac... Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/b..... Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/be..... Miraculous Ladybug |🐞 Valentine's Day Special 🐞 | Ladybug and Cat Noir Show less Miraculous Ladybug; Rise of the Guardians (2012) Characters: Adrien Agreste; Chat Noir; Jack Frost; Ladybug (Miraculous Ladybug) Additional Tags: Christmas Special Crossover; No Akumatization; Ladybug's protective; Jack's trying to do his job; SADrien; Suspicious Ladybug is Suspicious; Jack isn't looking for trouble This playlist is made in collaboration with the Miraculous Ladybug community on YouTube! Check out all the awesome videos in this playlist and subscribe today to the Miraculous Ladybug official channel! CLICK TO READ MORE https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCWjVfZ3VnyUwBEOkuOlaU3g?... Special thanks to Maruvie Miraculous Ladybug - Miraculous Christmas Song - Duration: 2 minutes, 30 seconds. Though Ladybug was incredulous, the spirit continued, “Ladybug and I will be there to support you, but he’ll only see Ladybug. Two for one and your father will be none the wiser. Besides, you should get inside and warm up. Tweet with a location You can add location information to your Tweets, such as your city or precise location, from the web and via third-party applications. You always have the option to delete your Tweet location history. Viewing Tweets won't unblock @Ladybug_Cartoon. Pinned Tweet. Miraculous Ladybug Retweeted. Miraculous Ladybug Retweeted. Miraculous Ladybug Retweeted. Miraculous Ladybug Retweeted. Miraculous Ladybug Retweeted. Miraculous Ladybug Retweeted. Miraculous Ladybug @Ladybug_Cartoon 12h12 hours ago. Miraculous Ladybug Retweeted. Standing proudly in it was one of many Christmas trees Jack had seen around the city throughout the day decorated from the bottom to top in a multitude of color lights all the way to a golden glowing four-point star on top. Sooo, I've been working on this for a while after the Christmas Special came out and pretty much... didn't finish it until now. Christmas in July? I guess you can say that, haha. Query: how long is the miraculous ladybug christmas special",
"output": [
"Miraculous ladybug christmas song is 2 minutes and 30 seconds long."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a6bf4cad345949c0b3ef48a1cf0ad5f9",
"input": "The westerlies, anti-trades, or prevailing westerlies, are prevailing winds from the west toward the east in the middle latitudes between 30 and 60 degrees latitude. They originate from the high-pressure areas in the horse latitudes and trend towards the poles and steer extratropical cyclones in this general manner. Tropical cyclones which cross the subtropical ridge axis into the westerlies recurve due to the increased westerly flow. The winds are predominantly from the southwest in the Norther Historical Importance. 1 Trade winds have been used by captains of sailing ships to cross the oceans. The term trade winds originally derives from the early fourteenth century late Middle English word 'trade' meaning path or track.. 1. It is better to enter a port or beach during the daytime because of which of the following? summer monsoon winter monsoon land breeze sea breeze 2. What is the area of calm winds near the equator called? doldrums trade winds horse... show more 1. It is better to enter a port or beach during the daytime because of which of the following? summer monsoon. winter monsoon. land breeze. sea breeze. Trade Winds Trade winds were introduced in Chapter 1 (Global weather patterns) as the equatorward blowing part of the Hadley cell. Because many cruising boats spend a lot of time in the trade wind region, some more detailed information is given in this chapter. Typical trade wind characteristics. The strength of the trade winds - like all the winds in the world - is predominantly determined by pressure gradient. Because the pressure of the equatorial trough, or ITCZ, is relatively stable at around 1008-1012 hPa, the strength of the trade winds is mostly determined by the strength and location of the subtropical high pressure. The low pressure is caused by the heatat the equator, which makes the air rise and travel north and southhigh in the atmosphere, until it subsides again in thehorse-latitude. Some of that air returns to the Doldrums throughthe trade-wind. Where do the trade winds occur? What are high altitude winds that occur in places where trade winds and polar easterlies meet prevailing weste? The trade wind normally strengthens just before an el nine occurs? More questions Trade Winds. In the Northern Hemisphere, warm air around the equator rises and flows north toward the pole. As the air moves away from the equator, the Coriolis effect deflects it toward the right. It cools and descends near 30 degrees North latitude. The descending air blows from the northeast to the southwest, back toward the equator (Ross, 1995). A similar wind pattern occurs in the Southern Hemisphere; these winds blow from the southeast toward the northwest and descend near 30 degrees South latitude. These prevailing winds, known as the trade winds, meet at the Intertropical Convergence Zone (also called the doldrums) between 5 degrees North and 5 degrees South latitude, where the winds are calm. The remaining air (air that does not descend at 30 degrees North or South latitude) continues toward the poles and is known as the westerly winds, or westerlies. The trade winds are so named because ships have historically taken advantage of them to aid their journies between Europe and the Americas (Bowditch, 1995). The westerlies (blue arrows) and trade winds (yellow and brown arrows) The trade winds are the prevailing pattern of easterly surface winds found in the tropics, within the lower portion of the Earth's atmosphere, in the lower section of the troposphere near the Earth's equator. The trade winds blow predominantly from the northeast in the Northern Hemisphere and from the southeast in the Southern Hemisphere, strengthening during the winter and when the Arctic oscillation is in its warm phase. Trade winds have been used by captains of sailing ships to cross the worl The names for the regions of the earth known as the trade winds, horse latitudes, and the doldrums all hark back to the age of sailing. Learn about these regions from your About.com Guide to Geography. Within the convergence zone, the average winds are slight and often non existant, unlike the zones north and south of the equator where the trade winds feed in.. Early sailors using ships powered by sails named this belt of calm The Doldrums because of the inactivity and stagnation they found themselves in after possibly long periods of no wind.. Query: at what latitudes do the trade winds occur",
"output": [
"As the air moves away from the equator, the Coriolis effect deflects it toward the right. It cools and descends near 30 degrees North latitude."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-70ea9a6ffaca47299ccc60741d670c57",
"input": "How does Hot Water Extraction compare to Dry Carpet Cleaning? Most major carpet manufacturers like Philadelphia Shaw contest that Hot Water Extraction is the most effective carpet cleaning method on the market, as well as the least harmful to you and your family's health. Wait about an hour, then vacuum. 1 Wait until HOST is completely dry (about an hour) and then simply vacuum. 2 HOST will lighten to a pale gold color as it dries. 3 Since HOST is all natural and safe for people and pets, you can use your room while it’s drying. 4 After vacuuming, a trace of HOST may remain in the carpet. A carpet cleaner is designed to force a mixture of hot water and cleaning solution into the carpet to clean deep down. The solution and dirt are then extracted from the carpet, leaving the fibers and carpet base clean. Vacuums, even the best ones, simply can't reach the deep-down dirt at the base of your carpet's fibers. The carpet cleaning process is engineered to reach the dirt vacuums leave behind. Incidentally, although carpet cleaning does so much more than vacuuming, the actual work process itself is about as easy as vacuuming. How long will it take my carpet to dry after deep cleaning? Drying time will vary by the type of carpet, thickness of the pad and the cleaning techniques of the user. On average, it's best to wait four to six hours before walking on the carpet after carpet cleaning. In all modesty, we pioneered the category. BISSELL Carpet Cleaning machines are recognized as the high-quality standard of the industry with durability and reliability engineered into each unit, every step of the way. After Your Carpet Cleaning How long does it take the carpet to dry? Your carpet will be only slightly damp to the touch after your cleaning. Most carpets typically need 6-10 hours to dry completely. However, it could take up to 24 hours to dry depending on the time of year your carpets are cleaned, and the air circulation, humidity and temperature in your home. Carpet manufacturers also recommend the reapplication of stain resisting formula at least every two years, and BISSELL brand carpet cleaning formulas are the only ones that contain Scotchgard™ protection. After Your Carpet Cleaning. How long does it take the carpet to dry? How soon can I walk on my carpet? How soon can I move my furniture back onto my carpet? Why did brown spots appear after my carpet cleaning? Why did a bleach spot appear after my carpet cleaning? Can't find the answer you're looking for? Contact Us → If urine has soaked into the carpet padding or sub flooring (i.e. if a pet has gone in the same spot over and over again for a long time), it may need to be completely replaced to eliminate the foul smell. In such severe circumstances, there is very little that any kind of carpet cleaning can do about pet odor. Why did brown spots appear after my carpet cleaning? If brown spots that weren't there before appear after your carpet cleaning, call to let us know within 72 hours of your cleaning. In most cases we can fix these spots, and we'll happily return to your home to treat them at no extra cost to you - that's our guarantee. Query: how long do you have to wait for carpet to dry after cleaning?",
"output": [
"Most carpets typically need 6-10 hours to dry completely."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-cc6d934ecc724eca9504a9ba001a9a76",
"input": "Summit Medical Group Web Site. 1 Throat pain relief Children over age 1 can sip warm chicken broth or apple juice. Children over age 6 can suck on hard candy (butterscotch seems to be a soothing flavor) or lollipops. Children over 8 years old can also gargle with warm salt water (1/4 teaspoon of salt per glass). Most sore throats are caused by viruses and are part of a cold. About 10% of sore throats are caused by strep bacteria. Tonsillitis (temporary swelling and redness of the tonsils) usually occurs with any throat infection, viral or bacterial. Swollen tonsils do not have any special meaning. In adults, Group B strep can cause urinary tract infections, blood infections, skin infections, pneumoniaand, rarely, meningitis, according to the CDC. Strep bacteria can also cause inflammation of the kidneys. Called post-streptococcal glomerulonephritis, the condition can occur one to two weeks after a strep throat infection. One indication of this type of inflammation is rust-colored urine. Symptoms. Symptoms of strep throat typically appear several days after exposure to the bacteria. The most common symptom of a strep infection is a sore throat. Irritants such as smoke in the air can also make you feel raw. Strep throat is different -- it’s caused by bacteria. You need to know whether you or your child has strep or another illness so you can get the right treatment. How Do I Catch It? Strep throat is an infection of the throat and tonsils. Bacteria called group Astreptococcus cause it. They live in the nose and throat. You can get the infection from someone who is sick with strep A bacteria or is a carrier of it. Like other infections, it spreads through close contact. Strep throat can leave you feeling sore and scratchy. Learn what causes this infection and how to tell strep from other sore throat causes. Two types of bacteria can cause strep throat: Group A (also known as Streptococcus pyogenes) and Group B. Each strain of bacteria can result in different complications. Strep bacteria are very contagious, and spread by nasal secretions and saliva. Strep throat most often afflicts children younger than 16, according to the Mayo Clinic. Strep throat itself is not particularly dangerous but the infection can worsen, especially if it goes untreated. If strep throat does not improve within two days of beginning treatment, it could indicate the presence of another infection, the spread of strep to other areas outside the throat, or an inflammatory reaction. Strep bacteria may infect the tonsils and sinuses if left untreated. The Strep test is not urgent, however, since treating a strep infection within 7 days of when it begins can prevent rheumatic fever. A Strep test is not necessary if your child's sore throat is part of a cold AND the main symptom is croup, hoarseness, or a cough, unless the sore throat lasts more than 5 days. If your child has strep throat, streptococci bacteria will grow in it. It usually takes about 2 days to get results from a throat culture. It can confirm whether your child has strep throat or not. Treatments. Your doctor will prescribe antibiotics to kill the bacteria that cause the infection. Most treatments last for about 10 days. Some people suffering from strep throat will also get swollen lymph glands in their neck. Others experience vomiting or a red skin rash. How Long Does Strep Throat Last? Strep throat will only last 3 to 7 days with or without treatment. Doctors usually treat strep throat with antibiotics even though they will not make you well any faster. Strep throat contagiousness will continue for 24 hours once antibiotics are started. With no treatment, strep throat continues to be contagious until symptoms resolve. Query: how long does strep throat usually last",
"output": [
"Strep throat will only last 3 to 7 days with or without treatment."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0e71b1e5a07b4841bf43b4439dbe8d34",
"input": "Quick Answer. A dog will enter her estrus cycle from one to three times per year and it lasts anywhere from 2 to 3 weeks. How often a female dog menstruates and for how long is dependent upon breed. Some breeds will have an estrus cycle only once a year while others may have a cycle three times a year. To help ease cramps, you can try the following: 1 Take ibuprofen or naproxen sodium (if you do not have an allergy to aspirin or severe asthma). 2 Exercise. 3 Place a heating pad, heat wrap, or other source of heat on your abdomen or lower back. Check out these best-sellers and special offers on books and newsletters from Mayo Clinic. The Mayo Clinic Diet Online Reduce the impact of stress on your health These flow out as blood. It lasts from 3-7 days in general. The woman goes through this cycle until menopause stage, that is typically around 50-60 years of age. Until this time, she is capable of getting pregnant and bearing a child. It is generally said that sex during periods does not cause pregnancy. On an average a period lasts between 3 to 5 days. It is normal for a girl to have irregular periods in the beginning. During this time, the duration of her periods may vary from as short as 2 days to as long as 7 days. It can take up to a year for periods to become regular. References: Female rabbits are nearly ready to mate at all times, it’s just that the hormones keep going up and down in cycles. So you can safely say, female rabbits do not have a period and they are constantly receptive to male rabbits. Therefore, there's no use in saying how long a rabbit's period lasts. Oestrus and Dieoestrus When to get checked out. Normal cycles last between 24 to 35 days. Some teens might have shorter cycles of only 21 days, and others might go as long as 45 days between periods. Adults can have a range of between 21 to 35 days. See a doctor if your cycle falls outside of those ranges. Many now argue to describe menstruation in simple terminology, including: 1 Cycle regularity (irregular, regular, or absent) 2 Frequency of menstruation (frequent, normal, or infrequent) 3 Duration of menstrual flow (prolonged, normal, or shortened) 4 Volume of menstrual flow (heavy, normal, or light) 1 Upload failed. 2 We are experiencing some problems, please try again. 3 You can only upload files of type PNG, JPG, or JPEG. 4 You can only upload files of type 3GP, 3GPP, MP4, MOV, AVI, MPG, MPEG, or RM. 5 You can only upload photos smaller than 5 MB. 6 You can only upload videos smaller than 600MB. The amount of time that a girl has her period also can vary. Some girls have periods that last just 2 or 3 days. Other girls may have periods that last 7 days. The menstrual flow — meaning how much blood comes out of the vagina — can vary from girl to girl, too. Query: how long do periods last female",
"output": [
"The periods last as short as 2 days to as long as 7 days in female."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-856da5e22472465e89b8e62054a232af",
"input": "How far in advance can I book flights? I want to book a multistopover flight going from London to New Zealand for 3 months then to Australia for a year then back to London but I have tried a couple of sites and you can't book any flights over 360 days in advance! Yes, you can purchase tickets for one-way or multiple-destination travel by selecting One way or Multi-city at the top of the flight search box on the home page. Can I hold a flight? On united.com we offer instant ticketing that includes a 24-hour refund policy. This handy tool also allows you to quickly see what the cheapest month to travel is and how much you can save if you book at the right time. Find The Best Time To Book Flights from Airfare shopping site CheapAir.com monitored over 4 million fares in 2013 to discover how far in advance to book a flight. Airfare shopping site CheapAir.com monitored over 4 million fares in 2013 to discover how far in advance to book a flight. To view flight schedules and book, you can use this link: http://bit.ly/1MvRjr4 (FYI – You can filter the flights by stops and flight times.) Please let us know if you need any help with finding flights. Washington's advice is that if you have a specific destination and specific dates in mind, the safest option is to book as soon as possible after seats go on sale, which for most scheduled airlines is between 10 and 12 months in advance (see the examples below). This handy tool also allows you to quickly see what the cheapest month to travel is and how much you can save if you book at the right time. *Best time to book is based on two years’ worth of historic booking data from 2014 to 2016. Whilst we can’t predict the factors that may impact flight prices in 2017, we have looked at a wealth of data to enable us to identify clear patterns that we would expect to be replicated in future years. Put these dates in your diary now! We’ve heard you’d like to know about our flight schedule releases further in advance. So in order to make your booking experience even easier, we’re sharing the approximate dates when our flights will go on sale over the next year. We hope this information helps you to plan your next trip. Founded in 1997, Allegiant offers all-jet passenger service from America's favorite small cities to world-class destinations. When you travel with Allegiant, you save money with low fares and more choice. We do things a little differently than every other airline. For example, we don’t fly to every city. On most airlines, flights open up for sale 331 days in advance. That is the earliest you can book a flight – about 11 months in advance. We found that for about four months from that time, domestic fares tended to stay pretty steady, and pretty high. Query: how far in advance can you book flights",
"output": [
"You can book flights between 10 and 12 months in advance."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ea2673a455734a89af61a4d37519bb6c",
"input": "In addition to explaining the results of the test, your extension agent will be able to advise you on how to amend your soil so it’s prepared for that new grass. If you’re hiring a landscape company to put in a new lawn, don’t assume they’ll take a soil sample and test it. Ask whoever you hire to do a test before they pull up to your house with a truck load of sod. Skipping a soil test could be an expensive mistake. Your costly new sod could die, or you could waste money on fertilizers. Lawns thrive and look lush when the pH level is between 6.5 and 7.0 . Too high a pH level can be corrected with sulfate, while soil with a low pH can be corrected with lime. You can correct your soil acidity once you know how to balance the lawn pH. Purchase a soil test kit, which is available at most hardware stores and plant nurseries. Use a soil test kit to measure the pH levels in areas of your lawn. Read the instructions on the kit. By testing different areas of your lawn initially, you can treat the lawn as necessary and create a balanced pH level throughout. Most test kits require that you use a small amount of air-dried soil Soil pH is the measure of a soil’s level of acidity or alkalinity, and it affects how well grass can pick up nutrients from the soil. Check with your extension agent on the best pH level for the grass in your area. “PH is going to determine how well your grass will grow,” says Peiffer.”PH is the key factor to just about everything.” Lawn Soil Analysis - Cheaper Than You Think. 1 General Lawn Care. 2 Lawn Repair. 3 Lawn Watering. 4 Lawn Mowing. 5 Weeds | Pests | Diseases. 6 Lawn Varieties. How to Get Your Soil Tested. 1 To Take a Soil Sample: 2 Use a trowel, shovel, soil probe, sampling tube or soil auger. 3 Sample to a depth of 4-6 inches. 4 Remove any grass, thatch or debris. 5 Take 5 or 6 samples, mix them thoroughly in a plastic bucket and ensure you have approximately 1 pint of soil. Some plants, such as certain culinary herbs, will eventually die if their roots stay too wet. 1 To test your soil’s drainage: 2 Dig a hole about six inches wide and one foot deep. 3 Fill the hole with water and let it drain completely. 4 Fill it with water again. 5 Keep track of how long it takes for the water to drain. Anything you don't understand about lawn care, just ask us - we can help! Adjust Soil pH. To get the most from your lawn fertilizer applications, your soil pH needs to have about a 6.5 value. It is best to have the pH analyzed with a soil test each year or anytime you notice a decline in the appearance of your lawn. Liming can be done in spring or fall, but is not recommended during the hot summer months. To raise the pH of your soil, add lime (see chart below). Lawn Aeration and the importance of a PH check and Lime Application to your lawn - Duration: 2:44. PeninsularPest 13,465 views In order to ensure good growth, you need to know two things: the pH range under which your plants will comfortably thrive and the pH level of your soil. You can find out about your plants by doing a quick Google search or talking to a knowledgeable gardener or botanist. Gather 3-5 samples from different parts of your lawn, each from 4-6” below the surface. 1 Remove any grass, thatch or debris from your samples. 2 Thoroughly mix your samples to ensure you have enough soil to test, as required in the kit. 3 Spread over newspaper and allow soil to dry out, at least 24 hours. Query: how do you check ph on your lawn",
"output": [
"To check ph on your lawn, purchase a soil test kit and read the instructions on the kit."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1ba656dd47b149f688642d6b7c1e2b86",
"input": "Stark Bro’s Fruit Trees – Years to Fruit. Stark Bro’s Trees are 1-2 years old when shipped. “Years to Fruit” begins counting after the trees are transplanted into your growing space. Answer: Roundup can be used under peach or plum trees; however, do not permit the liquid to touch any of the green bark. Roundup can be applied to weeds and grass under the trees from bloom time until 90 days post-bloom. Monsanto cautions not to use Roundup under peach trees beyond the 90 day window after the tree has bloomed because fruit trees are very sensitive to Roundup. Propagation of Peach Trees: Peach trees are grown from seed.... the pit. It takes three or four years to go from the seedling stage to a fruit-producing tree. Most people don't want to wait that long. They turn to garden nurseries to purchase young trees that can be transplanted to your garden. Trees at your local nursery are a couple of years old. This small peach tree will still need to grow another year or two to get the first crop of peaches. You can also graft branches from a peach tree onto other fruit trees. Planting Peach Trees: Trackbacks. […] 1 lives of about 12 years…” eval(ez_write_tag([[336,280],'ecosnippets_com-box-2'])); More Details Here […] Reply. […] 2 How to Grow Peaches […] Reply. […] 3 9, and they are relatively short-lived trees with productive lifespans being around a dozen years. Keep reading to learn more about peach tree care. How to Grow Peaches. When thinking about how to plant a peach tree, take a good look at your soil. You should have deep sandy soil that ranges from a loam to a clay loam. Poor drainage in the soil will kill the root system of growing peach trees, so make sure the soil is well drained. Growing peach trees prefer a soil pH of around 6.5. When it comes to learning how to grow peaches, you need to start out with a healthy one-year-old tree that has an established root system. A small tree that has a good root system is better than a larger tree without one. The peach (Prunus persica) is a deciduous tree native to the region of Northwest China between the Tarim Basin and the north slopes of the Kunlun Shan mountains, where it was first domesticated and cultivated.[3] It bears an edible juicy fruit called a peach or a nectarine. If you grow it from a seed it'll take 3-5 years and you probably won't get good quality fruit if you even get anything at all. I suggest purchasing a bare root plant in the nursery and plant it in spring/summer. You will likely have fruit the next summer. How Long Do Peaches Last? How long do peaches last? Generally, peaches will last for 3-4 days on the counter, slightly longer in the fridge and can be frozen for an extended time. The shelf life of peaches depends when the peaches were picked and how they are stored. What to Do if Your Peach Tree Is Not Producing Like other fruits, peaches start as flowers on their trees. The blooms of peach trees (Prunus persica) appear three to five months before the fruits, but the exact time the trees flower depends on the previous winter's temperatures and the trees' variety. Peach trees grow in U.S. Department of Agriculture plant hardiness zones 5 through 9. How to grow Peach-leaved bellflower. It forms a basal rosette of narrow leaves and sends up multiple 3-foot stems. Bell shaped flowers are produced all along the stems ranging in colors of lavender, blue, purple, and white. If spent blooms are pinched off it will continue to flower through the summer. Query: how long does peach bloom last",
"output": [
"Peach bloom lasts for three to five months before the fruits."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1fee13c7adb042a998730b6181790400",
"input": "If you are due any additional refunds, the IRS will send you a notice. informing you that the direct deposit limit has been exceeded, and that you should receive a refund. check instead of the direct deposit you requested in approximately four weeks if there are no other. issues with the return. exists and is an alternate of . If tax return was filed online completely and correctly and you have received your acknowledgment from the IRS that they have received and accepted your 1040 federal income tax return as you filed it from that date it could take about 10 days to 3 weeks for you direct deposit. If the tax return was mailed it could take 6 to 8 weeks for the direct deposit to be made. You can use your tax software to do it electronically. Or, use IRS’ Form 8888, Allocation of Refund (including Savings Bond Purchases) if you file a paper return. Just follow the instructions on the form. If you want IRS to deposit your refund into just one account, use the direct deposit line on your tax form. This is the same electronic transfer system used to deposit nearly 98 percent of all Social Security and Veterans Affairs benefits into millions of accounts. Combining direct deposit with IRS e-File is the fastest way to receive your refund. IRS issues more than 9 out of 10 refunds in less than 21 days. You can track your refund using our Where’s My Refund? tool. Direct deposit is easy to use. Just select it as your refund method through your tax software and type in the account number and routing number. Or, tell your tax preparer you want direct deposit. You can even use direct deposit if you are one of the few people still filing by paper. Additional input from our contributors: About 4-5 business days.I filed my State Tax Returns through TurboTax E-File. Federal direct deposit takes about 8 days but state returns can vary from a week to over a month. I'm a Massachusetts resident and it has been close to 30 days and i still have not received the direct deposit. State along with federal taxes usually take 14 to 21 days if electronically filed with Direct Deposit. You can receive your refund sooner. But this is the norm. The best and fastest way to get your tax refund is to have it electronically deposited for free into your financial account. The IRS program is called direct deposit. You can use it to deposit your refund into one, two or even three accounts. Eight out of 10 taxpayers get their refunds by using Direct Deposit. It is simple, safe and secure. How long does it take for South Carolina tax refund to direct deposit? Depending on what way the tax payer filed for their taxes it varies. Taxpayers in South Carolina can expect their tax refund to deposit anywhere from 10 days to 3 weeks out. Direct Deposit is a safe, reliable, and convenient way to receive Federal payments. The Department of. the Treasury’s Bureau of the Fiscal Service and the Internal Revenue Service both encourage direct. deposit of IRS tax refunds. Direct Deposit combined with IRS e-file provides taxpayers with the fastest. Confidence votes 7.5K. If tax return was filed online completely and correctly and you have received your acknowledgment from the IRS that they have received and accepted your 1040 federal income tax return as you filed it from that date it could take about 10 days to 3 weeks for you direct deposit. Query: how long does federal taxes direct deposit take?",
"output": [
"Federal taxes takes about 10 days to 3 weeks for you direct deposit."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-451e37c03d5e42aea83526e14f06a778",
"input": "How long points stay on your license Why we recommend you fight your traffic ticket How we can help you get a restricted license if you have 4 points or more in one year Q: How long do the points stay on my record? A: Any points assessed will stay on your record for a period of two years. If you accumulate a total of 12 points in a two-year period beginning on the date of the first conviction, your driver’s license will be suspended for a period of six months. You do have a right to appeal this suspension, but you will need to file the appeal before the suspension date listed on the letter of suspension that you got from the Bureau of Motor Vehicles. No. Driving records are confidential and are provided only to those authorized by law. Insurance companies, employers, transit authorities, volunteer organizations, and school districts who get a copy of your driving record may not reveal your information to a third party. Will my record show the original date my WA driver license was issued? Only if your first license was issued after May 1, 1964. If it was issued before May 1, 1964, you may email us to request a status letter showing the original issue date: exams@dol.wa.gov. What information is kept on a driving record and for how long? 1 Please note that the above is different for how long points last. Points on your record only count for DMV purposes for 18 months from the date of offense, and a conviction counts for insurance purposes for 36 months from the date of conviction. These two period, of course, are different that the period of how long the conviction actually appears on your driving record. DMV points are your driving record's version of splinters, bothersome and annoying until finally removed. How long the points remain on your driving record depends on your state. Alabama: Two years. Alaska: Two points are reduced for every year of violation-free driving. Arizona: Three years. Arkansas: Three years. California: Three years. Secretary of State. Tickets remain on your record for a minimum of seven years, depending on the type of license and the type of ticket(s) received. Alcohol and controlled substances related driving convictions remain on your record for life. Also keep in mind, 4 DMV points acquired in a 12 month period will result in the DMV sending you a letter informing you that your license will be suspended for 6 months for acquiring too many DMV points. 1 WARNING About Paying Off A Ticket. – Many times people when they get a traffic ticket just pay it off. There are some violations that qualify for immediate loss of driving privileges, even if you only commit them once, such as: 1 Driving while intoxicated (DWI) 2 Driving more than 15 MPH over the speed limit, if you are driving faster than 55 MPH. 3 Prearranged racing with another motorist. Suspensions or revocations of a driver license remain on a driver’s record for four years from the date the suspension or revocation was terminated. Note we are talking about four years from the date of termination of the suspension or revocation, not the date it started. As long as convictions remain on the driver record, the points for those convictions remain available to determine whether 12 or more points have accumulated in any 12-month period. The violation dates, not the conviction dates, are used in that determination. For example: you receive a traffic citation and do not go to court for two years. When the court does report the conviction, points are counted from the date of the violation. If the conviction causes you to accumulate 12 points in any 12-month period, your operating privilege will be suspended. Query: how long does a ticket stay on your license for?",
"output": [
"Tickets remain on your record for a minimum of seven years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a929cf3747574c2ca78450388e13e631",
"input": "Patients and their family members often want to know how long a person who has cancer will continue to live. It’s normal to want to be prepared for the future. But predicting how long someone will continue to live is a hard question to answer. And, if they develop uncontrolled symptoms in the last week, they can still receive Palliative Sedation. Is VSED ethical? Is it suicide? It is not suicide. If the goal is to alleviate or prevent suffering, it is considered ethically acceptable for someone who is capable of making an informed decision. VSED must be distinguished from the naturally occurring loss of appetite and interest in food or water that occurs at the end of life. Last Updated: Thursday 14 July 2016 09:58. What is VSED (Voluntary Stopping Eating & Drinking)? This refers to the decision by a patient to stop eating food and drinking liquids when they have a terminal or life-limiting disease, so that their death can be hastened (and therefore their dying will not be prolonged). Withdrawal from friends and family: 1 People often focus inward during the last weeks of life. 2 They may lose interest in things they used to enjoy, such as favorite TV shows, friends, or pets. 3 Caregivers can let the patient know they are there for support. Why would someone stop eating and drinking? We know that up to 35% of patients in hospice programs have severe pain in the final week of life and 25% describe having shortness of breath that is “unbearable”. With such uncontrolled symptoms, they might say “I’m tired of this and I just want to go to sleep and not wakeup”. How long you can get hospice care. 1 You can get hospice care for two 90-day benefit periods, followed by an unlimited number of 60-day benefit periods. 2 You have the right to change your hospice provider once during each benefit period. How long you can get hospice care. Hospice care is for people with a life expectancy of 6 months or less (if the illness runs its normal course). If you live longer than 6 months, you can still get hospice care, as long as the hospice medical director or other hospice doctor recertifies that you’re terminally ill. 1 You can get hospice care for two 90-day benefit periods, followed by an unlimited number of 60-day benefit periods. If your health improves or your illness goes into remission, you may no longer need hospice care. You always have the right to stop hospice care at any time. If you choose to stop hospice care, you'll be asked to sign a form that includes the date your care will end. At the start of each benefit period after the first 90-day period, the hospice medical director or other hospice doctor must recertify that you’re terminally ill, so you can continue to get hospice care. If you live longer than 6 months, you can still get hospice care, as long as the hospice medical director or other hospice doctor recertifies that you’re terminally ill. You can get hospice care for two 90-day benefit periods, followed by an unlimited number of 60-day benefit periods. Query: how long does hospice care last when someone is not eating",
"output": [
"Hospice care is for people with a life expectancy of 6 months or less. If you live longer than 6 months, you can still get hospice care, as long as the hospice medical director or other hospice doctor recertifies that you’re terminally ill."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-52849f2edd6940318642114fc3dbdc15",
"input": "The fact that 97 percent of climate experts agree on this subject also demonstrates the strength of the scientific evidence on human-caused global warming. And the strength of the evidence is why the IPCC is able to say with 95 percent confidence that humans are the main cause of the current global warming. These gases spread around the planet like a blanket, capturing the solar heat that would otherwise be radiated out into space. (For more detail on the basic mechanism of global warming, see carbon dioxide FAQ.) Both of these environmental problems do, however, have a common cause—human activities that release gases into and alter the atmosphere. Cooling from human aerosol emissions offsets about one-third of the warming from human greenhouse gas emissions. The new IPCC statement says that even taking that aerosol cooling effect into account, humans are still the main cause of the global warming over the past 60 years. Current Global Warming Caused by Greenhouse Gases, Not Nature. The IPCC elaborates further. What's causing global warming: human greenhouse gas emissions. With the evidence here and John's last post, you can bring it all together to make a pretty airtight logical proof for global warming. We know these things to be factually true: 1. Global temperatures have risen. 2. CO2 is a greenhouse gas. 3. CO2's concentration in the atmosphere has risen significantly. 4. 100 percent of the global warming over the past 60 years is human-caused, according to the IPCC's latest report. The IPCC is 95 percent confident that humans are the main cause of the current global warming. Photograph: Jianan Yu/Reuters The fifth Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) report states with 95 percent confidence that humans are the main cause of the current global warming. Many media outlets have reported that this is an increase from the 90 percent certainty in the fourth IPCC report, but actually the change is much more significant than that. That is a lot different from saying that CO2 is the main cause of global warming. Never mind the possibility that you allude to about nuclear testing. Never mind the possibility that air pollution causes more clouds, and clouds as any farmer knows keeps things generally warmer. How do we know CO2 is causing warming? Posted on 8 October 2009 by John Cook. We've just perused the empirical evidence that humans are raising atmospheric CO2 levels. In earlier posts, we noted that tallying up the planet's heat content shows that our climate is accumulating heat, proof of global warming. But is there any evidence that links the two? How do we know that humans are the major cause of global warming? Photo: freeimage4life/Flickr We all know that warming—and cooling—has happened in the past, and long before humans were around. Many factors (called “climate drivers”) can influence Earth’s climate—such as changes in the sun’s intensity and volcanic eruptions, as well as heat-trapping gases in the atmosphere. Some of it makes its way back to the surface of the earth. Hence we expect to find increasing downward longwave radiation as CO2 levels increase. Philipona 2004 finds that this is indeed the case - that downward longwave radiation is increasing due to an enhanced . Evans 2006 takes this analysis further. So how do scientists know that today’s warming is primarily caused by humans putting too much carbon in the atmosphere when we burn coal, oil, and gas or cut down forests? We know human activities are driving the increase in CO 2 concentrations because atmospheric CO 2 contains information about its source. Query: how do we know humans are the main cause for global warming",
"output": [
"The IPCC is 95 percent confident that humans are the main cause for global warming."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-64679724e9f94290bd69115f83a81d1f",
"input": "The incubation period in that outbreak was as short as 15 days (median 25 days, range 15-41 days, Table 1). The initial period before the symptoms of a viral infection appear is called the incubation period. Whether the host is contagious depends on the virus. The average incubation period for the flu is 2 days, but it can last anywhere from 1 to 4 days in healthy adults. These are as follows: 1 Norovirus and Norwalk virus, which mostly affects adults and is the most common cause of viral gastroenteritis or stomach flu. 2 Rotavirus which affects infants, toddlers and young children causes diarrhea and may result in dehydration. 3 Astrovirus also causes diarrhea in children. The norovirus. In the case of norovirus the incubation period, before the symptoms are manifested is usually one to three days. The patient can spread the infection to others right from the time he starts feeling sick till two or three weeks after he is cured of stomach flu. Normally the patient is not contagious during the incubation period of this virus. The rotavirus. On the other hand, those who contract the rotavirus, which usually causes diarrhea in children, will be contagious during the incubation period till about two weeks after recovery. The incubation period for the rotavirus could be for one or two days. Children are normally contagious for a longer period than adults. The adenovirus. The incubation period for the adenovirus is usually a week and the patient can spread the infection to others. In the case of stomach flu caused by the astrovirus the incubation period could be for a period of one to three or four days. Various symptoms There are various symptoms of the stomach virus. He had no symptoms of infection because he was still in the incubation period of the disease. In contrast to Ebolaviruses, poliovirus and norovirus are shed during the incubation period – in the feces, where they can infect others. Remarkably, viral incubation periods can vary from 1 or 2 days to years (Table; click to magnify). Short incubation times usually indicate that actions at the primary site of infection produce the characteristic symptoms of the disease. Comments. 1 The diagnosis of flu symptoms made on the basis of data on the seasonal incidence, clinical features of acute onset with marked intoksikotsionen and subsequent catarrhal syndrome. 2 We didn’t go to the doctor,but i’m sure it was the flu. 3 Flu was awful this year. Comments. 1 The diagnosis of flu symptoms made on the basis of data on the seasonal incidence, clinical features of acute onset with marked intoksikotsionen and subsequent catarrhal syndrome. The final placement is by virological investigations. 2 We didn’t go to the doctor,but i’m sure it was the flu. Missing from the table (which will be corrected in the next edition) is the incubation period of Ebola virus, which is 2 to 21 days. I would also argue that the incubation period of HIV is not 1-10 years, but 2-4 weeks, the time until the prodromal symptoms occur. The characteristic symptom of HIV-1 infection, immunosuppression, occurs much later. Query: how long is the gestation period for the flu",
"output": [
"The average incubation period for the flu is 2 days, but it can last anywhere from 1 to 4 days in healthy adults."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a964c38b498e4cd78974ebaa484c8575",
"input": "Summary. 1 Remove membrane from bone side of ribs. 2 Brine ribs with buttermilk brine for 2 hours in fridge. 3 Rinse ribs in cold water. 4 Spray or brush on a light coating of olive oil to help the rub to stick. 5 Apply a light dusting of Jeff's rub recipe to both sides of the ribs. 6 Preheat smoker to about 210 degrees (200-225 degrees will work) Cover the grill and continue cooking until an instant-read thermometer inserted in the center of the meat registers 130° for medium-rare meat, about 20 minutes. Transfer the racks of lamb to a carving board and let rest for 10 minutes. Step 3 Using a sharp slicing knife, carve the racks of lamb into chops and serve with the Caramelized Onion Jam. Serves 4-6. 1 1 lb small new potatoes (unpeeled) 2 2 T. veg oil. 3 1 clove crushed garlic. 4 1 t. turmeric. 5 2 t. ground coriander. 6 2 t. black cumin seeds. 7 2 t. sugar. 8 1 T. chopped chives. 9 1 T. chopped parsley (optional) This also comes in the 18.5″ size but I highly recommend the larger size. Once the lamb reaches about 135 degrees (should take about 1 hour and 15 minutes or so), remove it from the smoker grate. Let the lamb rest for 5 minutes then cut into individual chops and serve immediately. I like to spoon a little of my wife's herb paste (recipe below) over the lamb chops just before serving and it looks and tastes fit for a king! 1 Preheat oven to 450 degrees F (230 degrees C). Move oven rack to the center position. 2 In a large bowl, combine bread crumbs, garlic, rosemary, 1 teaspoon salt and 1/4 teaspoon pepper. Toss in 2 tablespoons olive oil to moisten mixture. 3 Season the rack all over with salt and pepper. Heat 2 tablespoons olive oil in a large heavy oven proof skillet over high heat. Sear rack of lamb for 1 to 2 minutes on all sides. Set aside for a few minutes. Brush rack of lamb with the mustard. Roll in the bread crumb mixture until evenly coated. Cover the ends of the bones with foil to prevent charring. Arrange the rack bone side down in the skillet. Roast the lamb in preheated oven for 12 to 18 minutes, depending on the degree of doneness you want. Bring a pan of salted water to a boil, put in the potatoes, and boil for about 5 minutes. Drain. Heat the oil in a metal roasting pan on top of the stove over medium heat; add the garlic, turmeric, coriander and cumin seeds, and cook for about 1 minute. Add the potatoes, rolling them around to coat. Light a grill or preheat a grill pan. If using charcoal, let the coals burn until white, then push them to one side of the grill. Season the lamb with salt and pepper. Spread the meaty sides of the racks with the mustard and then press the parsley, rosemary and thyme onto the meat. Step 2. Sear the racks of lamb over high heat, or directly over the coals, meaty side down, until they are nicely browned, about 6 minutes. Turn the racks so that they are leaning against each other with the bones pointing up and grill until the meaty sides are nicely browned on the bottom, about 3 minutes. 1 Preheat oven to 450 degrees F (230 degrees C). 2 In a large bowl, combine bread crumbs, garlic, rosemary, 1 teaspoon salt and 1/4 teaspoon pepper. 3 Season the rack all over with salt and pepper. 4 Arrange the rack bone side down in the skillet. Roast the lamb in preheated oven for 12 to 18 minutes, depending on the degree of doneness you want. With a meat thermometer, take a reading in the center of the meat after 10 to 12 minutes and remove the meat, or let it cook longer, to your taste. Feel free to join this conversation. 1 Followed your recipe and it came was OUTSTANDING!!! The paste was good….lamb was superb…thank you, thank you, thank you!!! 2 Jeff, I use a large Big Green Egg and your smoked Rack of Lamb is THE BEST thing to ever come out if it! 3 Hi Jeff. Roasted Rack of Lamb - Directions. 1 Preheat oven to 450 degrees F (230 degrees C). 2 In a large bowl, combine bread crumbs, garlic, rosemary, 1 teaspoon salt and 1/4 teaspoon pepper. 3 Season the rack all over with salt and pepper. 4 Arrange the rack bone side down in the skillet. Roast the lamb in preheated oven for 12 to 18 minutes, depending on the degree of doneness you want. With a meat thermometer, take a reading in the center of the meat after 10 to 12 minutes and remove the meat, or let it cook longer, to your taste. Query: how long does it take to grill a rack of lamb",
"output": [
"Grill a rack of lamb meaty side down, until they are nicely browned, about 6 minutes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-76971a4a298b4a32969f718797fcb32d",
"input": "How long you keep a document depends on several factors: Is it a legal document? In other words, will you one day need it to prove something? Does it contain financial information that you need for your taxes? Is it sentimental? If the answer if yes to any of those questions, you should hold onto that document. If not, it should be shredded. Here's how long you should keep your tax filings, pay stubs, and other important financial records. It's easy to get in the habit of hoarding financial documents with the rationale that maybe, someday, you'll need them again. If the purchase has a manual or warranty, store all the documents in the same electronic and physical location. Sadly, the IRS has ruled bank or credit card records to be insufficient documentation. As a result, just keep your statements long enough to reconcile your account. If the purchase was a business or tax-deductible expense, record the expense and why it justifies the deduction. Store this information with or on the receipts. Second, keep brokerage statements indefinitely for taxable accounts. The ADEA requires the retention of the same records for one year for employers with twenty or more employees. Title VII and the ADA require that basic employee demographic data, pay rates, and weekly compensation records be retained for at least one year. Where Should Records Be Kept? Records should be stored together in a safe, dry area, preferably in a storage closet on site or with the management company. Permanent records such as board minutes should be kept in a fireproof cabinet. It is not uncommon for the management company to retain most of the permanent records and the current records. How Should Records Be Kept? Records should be stored in uniform size record storage boxes. If records are to be destroyed after a certain date, write on the box the destruction date. Number the boxes so that they can be kept in order. Keep a separate listing of the contents of each box. Drug Test Records: 1 Year or 5 Years for Transportation Jobs. If you require drug testing for pre-employment, it's part of the hiring record and you should keep a copy of the results for one year. If you do additional drug testing, whether due to an incident at work or as part of a random check, you also need to maintain these records for one year. How to Store Your Files. 1 Use a fireproof safe or password-protected electronic file for the following: Bank and investment statements, estate-planning documents, pension information, insurance policies, pay stubs, tax documents, and your safe-deposit box inventory list. Comments (3) Leave your comment. 1 Dear Ms. Elle, Your advice to electronically store tax records on an external drive is spot on. 2 At the start of the new year, this is a great article to review. 3 Thanks, A very useful information. A answered. You should keep medical records for major medical events indefinitely. It's important to keep your medical records updated, especially with vaccinations, major illnesses and reactions to medications. An outdated health record is of limited use when you need immediate medical care. Always keep your health insurance information and contact number for your physician up-to-date. It may prudent to hang onto medical bills for at least a year should there be a dispute over a reimbursement. Some experts recommend maintaining records for five years from the time that treatment of a condition ended. It is better to keep something for too long than not long enough. Hiring Records: 1 Year You need to save all of those resumes, interview notes, applications, and job postings, and even a record of your searches through your applicant tracking system for one year after the decision to make a job offer was made. Query: how long should we keep records",
"output": [
"Some experts recommend maintaining records for five years from the time that treatment of a condition ended."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d9678b25c6344b34aedcd80c8509fcc8",
"input": "Tips on Teens #032. So your teens says this to you…. But Mom, the vape pen is safer than smoking cigarettes. There’s no nicotine! I’m not smoking weed. It’s just water vapor. There have been no studies showing that vaping is bad for you. Can I please have a vape pen? They are so cool! How would you respond to your kid if she presented you with this quandary? Vape Pens?!? What are vape pens? And why is my kid trying to convince me that it’s not like smoking? Vape pens are a lightning-fast growing phenomenon in our culture. The Legal Age for Vape Is Different Now each state is governed by federal law and sets the minimum age to buy Vapes is 18. But some states have passed laws with a more restrictive “vaping age”. The fact that there have not been sufficient scientific studies done on them. Vape pens are relatively new to the market and kids are crazy to get their hands on regardless of the health risks. We don’t know what the long term health risks are. This unknown makes every teenager with a vape pen a lab rat! There’s always a way to modify your vape pen to create bigger clouds or upgrade to a better vape pen. Additionally, you can customize the look of your pen to mirror your sense of style. So, even if your teen isn’t smoking it, he can tinker with it or use it as a conversation piece to engage with peers without those awkward silences. In most states (and around the world), the legal smoking age is the same as the age of smoking. But the consequences of a slight evaporation are usually borne by the person who sold them, not by the children who use them. Vaping for less than 18 years can be a no-no, but vapers are rarely imprisoned or punished for it. Infographic provided by Vapingzone.com. Federal Law on the Limitation of the Evaporation Age. If the FDA valuation regulations came into force on August 8, 2016, the minimum age of 18 for purchasing Vape products has become a federal law. Here’s a brief run down of a standard vaporizer. 1 It has three components: 2 A liquid cartridge called E-liquid used to produce the vapor. It is often flavored and can contain nicotine (lots of nicotine). 3 A heating element known as the atomizer. 4 A rechargeable battery to power the atomizer. They are gaining tremendous popularity with young people for a multitude of reasons. In short, a vaporizer pen or vape pen (a type of e-cigarette) is a nifty little device ranging in size from a standard pen to a large cigar that one can use to inhale heated propylene glycol or vegetable glycerin (the main ingredients in the E-liquid) and blow out the vapor. The age of New Jersey will go from 19 to 21 years on November 1st. In addition, hundreds of small towns and communities have banned tobacco and vaping for people under the age of 21. The trend to ban smoking (and vaping) for children under the age of 21 is led by an organization called Tobacco21. They are interesting and terrifying. The Legal Age for Vape Is Different. Now each state is governed by federal law and sets the minimum age to buy Vapes is 18. But some states have passed laws with a more restrictive “vaping age”. Alabama, Alaska and Utah have committed 19 as the legal age to buy vapes, according to the Public Law Law Center. It has three components: 1 A liquid cartridge called E-liquid used to produce the vapor. It is often flavored and can contain nicotine (lots of nicotine). 2 A heating element known as the atomizer. 3 A rechargeable battery to power the atomizer. Query: at what age can someone vape",
"output": [
"Someone can buy Vapes at 18 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4c914a7f897441cbbd23df35b2fcfd03",
"input": "$650, 3br, 650 Room for Rent in Littleton, Arapahoe County. 96. W Longview Ave, Littleton, CO 80120 - 0.5 milesMap Streetview Bird's Eye. A GREAT PLACE TO LIVE Room is large furnished with new queen bed, linens, desk, chest, tables, lamps, mirror, chair and rug with curtains. As of January, 2018, average apartment rent within 10 miles of Denver, CO is $1580. One bedroom apartments in Denver rent for $1394 a month on average and two bedroom apartment rents average $1777. The average monthly rent is about $2,054, but you can find more affordable 1 bedroom apartments for as little as $750. It’s useful to know that if you’re looking for a cheap apartment, one bedroom efficiency apartments can be a great choice. Rent trend data in Denver, Colorado Get more detailed neighborhood and address specific results here. Denver Average Rent. As of January 2018, average rent for an apartment in Denver, CO is $1580 which is a 1.96% increase from last year when the average rent was $1549 , and a 0.82% increase from last month when the average rent was $1567. Studio Apartments in Littleton; 1 Bedroom Apartments in Littleton; 3 Bedroom Apartments in Littleton Littleton rents increased significantly over the past month. Littleton rents have increased 0.4% over the past month, and are up moderately by 2.9% in comparison to the same time last year. Currently, median rents in Littleton stand at $1,450 for a one-bedroom apartment and $1,840 for a two-bedroom. The median income for Littleton, CO homeowners, is $86,958. This would allow for a maximum of $2,029 per month to be spent on housing costs. For renters, the median monthly income is $34,873 which would result in a maximum of $814 to be spent on rental costs. Rent.com is a free rental site that offers a large selection of trusted apartments and houses for rent. Our large selection of listings and helpful tools will make it easy for you to find an affordable apartment quickly. B Columbine Meadows in Littleton, CO 80128 Columbine Meadows features 1 bedroom apartments with 1 bathroom for rent in Littleton, CO. Columbine Meadows floorplans are priced from $850 up to $900 and have living area between 950 and 1000 square feet. In June 2016, 1-bedroom apartments had a median rent of $1,260 and 2-beds were at $1,490. See rents for Denver, Colorado Springs, Boulder, and more! In June 2016, 1-bedroom apartments had a median rent of $1,260 and 2-beds were at $1,490. See rents for Denver, Colorado Springs, Boulder, and more! Rental Price Data Query: average cost of a one bedroom apartment in littleton co.",
"output": [
"The median rents in Littleton stand at $1,450 for a one-bedroom apartment."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-65f9e11a1e8949e088d3c8cf27c48ccc",
"input": "Growing Japanese maple from seed is actually quite easy to do. The ideal size seedling for grafting is usually a seedling that is 3/16″ in diameter. But a little smaller or bigger will also work. Japanese Red Maple. The Japanese red maple (Acer palmatum var. atropurpureum) possesses a slow-to-medium rate of growth and typically achieves a maximum height of 15 to 25 feet. The amount of time necessary for this species to grow to maturity will range from seven to 10 years. 8. You’ve done all you can. Now it’s up to Mother Nature. Be patient. Growing Japanese Maples from seed is a slow but highly rewarding process. In two to three weeks if the weather is warm, you should see seedlings start to pop up. The first set of leaves they produce are called cotyledons. Growing Japanese Maple trees from seed is a lot easier than most people think. However, it is important to understand that there are more than 250 different cultivars of the Japanese Maple tree, and my purpose through this website is to introduce you to as many of these different cultivars as I can. Japanese maples for bonsai can be grown from seed if wished; it will obviously take longer but may be ideal if you don't wish to take a cutting from your tree. Acer palmatum grows easily from seed; when grown from seed, the maple's appearance can vary greatly, which is one of its charms. Take a softwood cutting of your chosen cultivar of maple in early summer. Maple trees are easy to grow from cuttings. Select a maple tree branch that is appealing in shape. The size of the branch can be up to the diameter of your little finger. There are many possible cultivars of Japanese maple. How to Make a Japanese Maple Bonsai Tree. Turning a Japanese maple (Acer palmatum) into a bonsai tree is a wonderful project; they are trees that lend themselves particularly well to bonsai growing. The small maple tree will grow just like... What they really are is Acer palmatum ‘Atropurpureum’ which is a Japanese Maple seedling with red leaves. So, when growing Japanese Maples from seed you’ll get one of two different plants. Acer palmatum, or Acer palmatum ‘Atropurpurpeum’. The first will have green leaves, the second will have red leaves. That’s a lot of words, but it is intended to give you a good foundational knowledge of Japanese Maple propagation. […] are actually quite easy to grow from seed and I tell you exactly how to do that in this article; “Growing Japanese Maples from Seed”. Japanese maple seeds are ripe and ready to pick in the fall and if you start looking around and […] Japanese Maples need a period of cold dormancy, so they will not do well in hot climates. If you look outside and see maple trees, your Japanese Maple will thrive. But, if you look around and see nothing but cactus or palm trees, your tree will most likely not survive. Query: how long does it take for japanese maple to grow",
"output": [
"It takes seven to 10 years for Japanese maple to grow."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-05c8b1e13123451899ed14588558c20b",
"input": "Amazon says that this book will take 2 to 5 weeks to ship, when other books generally ship within days. Barnes and Noble's site says the book usually ships within 24 hours and offers same day delivery in Manhattan. If it is a credit card, you may see the funds back on your card in 2–3 business days, if it is a pin-less debit it’d take up to 30 days. Amazon might be able to provide a settlement verification code when the order gets canceled before it ships, this code can be used to check with the bank to know how many days it’d take to get those funds back. You'll see an estimated shipping or delivery date for each shipment on the order summary, just before you place your order. An estimated delivery date (or date range) will also appear in Your Orders after you've placed your order. How It Works: If you feel like an item you ordered is being delayed after three or four days, contact Amazon customer service and they’ll usually upgrade the shipping on your item or create a replacement order with next-day shipping. Re: How long does Amazon take when Temporarily out of stock. Order now and we'll deliver. 2016/07/21 09:25:20 I got mine from ebuyer, and FTW editions are still in stock, £449 didn't know that amazon had any FTW editions in, but yeah, these cards seems to be rare as gold dust. If the order is placed on Friday, or weekends, how does the 2 days to ship rule work? Promised ship dates are based on weekdays—Monday through Friday (except holidays). An order placed on Friday, Saturday, or Sunday will have a promised ship-date range of Monday – Tuesday, and should be shipped no later than Tuesday, the 2nd business day after the order was placed. For customized orders, the shipping would probably be more than 2 days. How do we deal with this? Per our Community Rules, you should only list items you are able to ship within 2 business days. BEFORE YOU SUBMIT a question to /r/AskAnAmerican, please make sure your post follows the guideline: 1 Submissions must be written in question form. 2 No AMA, research or yes/no questions. 3 Do not answer your question in the text box. 4 Use the text box only to clarify your question, and keep clarifications short. If certain items in your order are not eligible for delivery to the locker, you'll be asked to change the delivery address or remove specific items from your order. Learn more about Amazon Locker's shipping restrictions. Selecting a Shipping Speed . Eligible shipping speeds will display based on the capacity of the Amazon Locker location you have selected. If a shipping speed does not display, the locker is scheduled to be full during that delivery period. Shipping Expectations | Shipping Credits | Ships-From Location | Shipping Internationally. Amazon.ca Marketplace sellers ship items directly to buyers. When a purchase is made, Amazon.ca processes payment and credits it to the seller's account. Sellers must ship within 2 business days after the order is placed. Shipping Expectations. Amazon.ca seller are expected to ship all orders within 2 business days of the date the order notification is made available by Amazon.ca. When you offer a certain shipping option, you can deliver your order using any carrier and method, as long as the buyer receives their package within the expected timeframe for the shipping service they selected. All sellers are required to offer standard domestic shipping. Amazon's super saver shipping takes longer - they say five to eight *business days.* I have found that to be an accurate estimate. If you want your purchases faster, you have to pay for the speed. Query: how long does it take amazon to ship order",
"output": [
"In Amazon, the order must ship within 2 business days after the order is placed."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f8dc1790eede4f3aafe5df750b1165e3",
"input": "Dice sweet potatoes into 1 pieces. Transfer sweet potato pieces into a microwave safe bowl and microwave for 2 minutes. Add olive oil to the bowl and use a spoon to coat the sweet potatoes. Add brown sugar, cumin, salt, pepper, cinnamon, and cayenne (if using). Combine well. Spray a piece of foil with nonstick spray. Pour seasoned sweet potatoes onto the foil. Cut butter into squares and place on top of sweet potatoes. Close foil packets completely. Double wrap is recommended. Wrap each potato in its own sheet of aluminum foil. Sweet potatoes can leak some of their sugar during baking despite being foil-wrapped, so transfer the wrapped potatoes to a baking sheet before they go into the oven. Baking. The time it takes to bake a sweet potato depends on the size and shape of the potatoes. Small ones should be done in about 45 minutes while medium ones take at least an hour and large ones as much as an hour and a half. Instructions. 1 Dice sweet potatoes into 1 pieces. 2 Transfer sweet potato pieces into a microwave safe bowl and microwave for 2 minutes. 3 Add olive oil to the bowl and use a spoon to coat the sweet potatoes. 4 Add brown sugar, cumin, salt, pepper, cinnamon, and cayenne (if using). Combine well. 5 Spray a piece of foil with nonstick spray. Step 1. Wash 6 sweet potatoes, and remove any blemishes or dark spots; wrap each potato in aluminum foil. Bake, folded side of foil up, at 350° for 1 to 1 1/2 hours or until a fork easily presses into the center. If desired, serve with butter, pepper, and salt. Step 2 Here's a simple way to bake sweet potatoes. If desired, serve with butter, pepper, and salt. Sweet potatoes will keep for about two weeks if stored loose in a cool, dry environment. Preparation. Heat the oven to 350 degrees. As the oven heats, give the potatoes a thorough scrub with a vegetable brush before baking. Sweet potato skin is edible, but not as tasty if it has grit or grocers’ wax on it. Ingredients. 1 3 sweet potatoes. 2 2-3 Tablespoons olive oil. 3 2 Tablespoons brown sugar. 4 1 teaspoon cumin. 5 1/4 teaspoon salt. 6 1/4 teaspoon pepper. 7 1/4 teaspoon cinnamon. 8 1/8 teaspoon cayenne (optional) 9 3 Tablespoons butter. Instructions. 1 Dice sweet potatoes into 1 pieces. 2 Transfer sweet potato pieces into a microwave safe bowl and microwave for 2 minutes. 3 Add olive oil to the bowl and use a spoon to coat the sweet potatoes. 4 Add brown sugar, cumin, salt, pepper, cinnamon, and cayenne (if using). 5 Spray a piece of foil with nonstick spray. Generally one packet per potato.) Pour seasoned sweet potatoes onto the foil. Cut butter into squares and place on top of sweet potatoes. Close foil packets completely. We always double wrap just to be sure there is not any holes and it is shut well. Grill your sweet potatoes for 20 minutes, turning after 10 minutes. It is always very exciting when it is time to open the grilled sweet potatoes in the packet. With highly customizable filling options, rugelach is the ultimate, crowd-p... 1 With highly customizable filling options, rugelach is the ultimate, crowd-pleasing Hanukkah dessert. Whether you prefer chocolate or fruit, sweet or savory, nutty or jammy, there's a rugelach out there that's just right for your holiday celebration. Query: how long do you bake a sweet potato wrapped in foil",
"output": [
"It takes 45 minutes bake a sweet potato wrapped in foil."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e200ccf6d33246f4b8569f03b04ebf06",
"input": "You may be instructed to take the laxative the night before your colonoscopy, or you may be asked to use the laxative both the night before and the morning of the procedure. Use an enema kit. In some cases, you may need to use an over-the-counter enema kit — either the night before the exam or a few hours before the exam — to empty your colon. TWO-THREE Days BEFORE THE COLONOSCOPY. - Do not eat beans, peas, corn, nuts, popcorn, okra, or tomatoes 2-3 days prior to your colonoscopy, as the. seeds of these foods may adhere to the intestinal wall and may not flush out with bowel prep (start now if. your colonoscopy is scheduled within the next 3 days). TWO-THREE Days BEFORE THE COLONOSCOPY - Do not eat beans, peas, corn, nuts, popcorn, okra, or tomatoes 2-3 days prior to your colonoscopy, as the seeds of these foods may adhere to the intestinal wall and may not flush out with bowel prep (start now if your colonoscopy is scheduled within the next 3 days). Time to Drop the 'No-Eating Rule' Before Colonoscopy? Consuming limited amount of low-fiber food day before didn't disrupt procedure, study finds. Please note: This article was published more than one year ago. The facts and conclusions presented may have since changed and may no longer be accurate. And More information links may no longer work. If your doctor removed a polyp during your colonoscopy, you may be advised to eat a special diet temporarily. You may feel bloated or pass gas for a few hours after the exam, as you clear the air from your colon. two-three days before the colonoscopy - Do not eat beans, peas, corn, nuts, popcorn, okra, or tomatoes 2-3 days prior to your colonoscopy, as the seeds of these foods may adhere to the intestinal wall and may not flush out with bowel prep (start now if TUESDAY, May 24, 2016 (HealthDay News) -- New research suggests that the grueling process of preparing for a colonoscopy may not have to be endured on an empty stomach. Colonoscopy patients typically have to forgo all solid foods and go on a clear-liquid diet while taking laxatives the day before their procedure. However, this new study found that those who ate a limited amount of low-fiber foods were happier and didn't suffer any negative effects during their exam. TWO-THREE DAYS BEFORE THE COLONOSCOPY - Do not eat beans, peas, corn, nuts, popcorn, okra, or tomatoes 2-3 days prior to your colonoscopy, as the seeds of these foods may adhere to the intestinal wall and may not flush out with bowel prep (start now if your colonoscopy is scheduled within the next 3 days). In the new study, researchers assigned 83 patients to undergo a colonoscopy after a day on a clear-liquid diet or a day in which they were allowed to eat a small number of low-fiber foods like macaroni and cheese, yogurt, white bread, lunch meats and ice cream. You've started the colon-emptying process with the food that you've been eating.. The study was small, but Samarasena said other research has produced similar results. Levin, the gastroenterologist, said the study is useful, but patients should talk to their physician before changing their colonoscopy prep. Query: how long before colonoscopy can i eat popcorn",
"output": [
"You cannot eat popcorn before two to three days of colonoscopy."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9a5843571b244d1aa77db11401d5cb83",
"input": "4. Why does Holden watch the game from the hill? 5. Who is Selma Thurmer, and why did Holden like her? 6. Who is Mr. Spencer, and why was Holden going to visit him? 7. Why was Holden trying to “feel” some kind of good−bye? 8. What does Holden think about the other students who attend Pencey? 9. How popular was the sport of polo at Pencey Prep? 10. 1. For each of the following items, indicate whether its amount (i) affects the bank or book side of a bank reconciliation and (ii) represents an addition or a subtraction in a bank reconciliation: a. Outstanding checks (i) bank side (ii) subtraction b. Debit memos (i) book side (ii) subtraction c. NSF checks (i) book side (ii) subtraction d. How does Holden feel while he thinks about Miss Aigletinger taking his class to the museum? 8. What is it about Gertrude Levine, his partner at the museum, that Holden remembers? 3. Holden's favorite authors are his brother and Ring Lardner. 4. Holden knows that a book he read was outstanding when he wants to be friends with the author. 5. When Ackley visits Holden he picks up his personal belongings and looks at them. 6. Holden finds it annoying when Ackley goes through is personal belongings. 7. Holden decides if a book is outstanding based on his like or dislike of the author. Holden states that there are some authors that he would just like. Answers. 1. Holden Caulfield is the narrator of the story. He has just been asked to leave Pencey Prep for failing four subjects. He is telling the story from California, where he is recuperating from being run-down. 2. D.B. is Holden’s older brother, who is a writer. 3. How does Holden’s belief about Judas differ from that of his friend Arthur Childs? 4. How does Holden say that Jesus chose his disciples? 5. How does Holden know who is knocking on his door even before opening it? 6. Why do Maurice and Sunny return to Holden’s room? 7. What is it about ministers that Holden does not like? 8. 3. Who are Holden’s favorite authors? 4. How does Holden determine whether a book is outstanding? 5. What does Ackley usually do when he comes to visit Holden? 6. What is it about Ackley that Holden finds annoying? 7. Give an example of something which Ackley considered very funny. 8. Why does Ackley not like Stradlater? 9. What does Holden say in defense of Stradlater? 10. What did Stradlater want to borrow from Holden? Answers 1. 6. Why does Holden punch Stradlater? 7. According to Holden, how can you identify a moron? 8. Why is Stradlater nervous after hitting Holden? 9. What does Holden do before looking in the mirror? 10. What is Holden’s reaction to all the blood? Chapter 7. 1. Why does Ackley not want to play canasta? 2. Why does Holden become angry with Ackley? 3. Explain your answer. Holden was thinking that life was a game when you are on the side where all the hot-shots are. But if you are on the side where there aren't any hot-shots, then it is not a game. He means that when there are hot-shots on your side, it is a game between you and them. Without hot-shots life is nothing. Query: how does holden determine whether a book is outstanding?",
"output": [
"Holden decides if a book is outstanding based on his like or dislike of the author."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-aac2feae539540c491e8c4aa0ad07d5d",
"input": "Luckily, there are a couple of things you can do to hold on to your share of the refund: 1 File Separately. If you file your taxes as married filing separately, you don’t have to worry about this issue. 2 Injured Spouse Allocation. Paying down debt can be a smart way to use your tax refund money, and if you’re currently going through bankruptcy, your bankruptcy trustee might make that decision for you. Under a Chapter 13 bankruptcy, the bankruptcy trustee can request that the court take your refund and apply it to your debts. Just enter your social security number, filing status, and amount of your refund, and the IRS will tell you the date that you will see your check or direct deposit. It is important to know that the refund arrival estimates are updated every Wednesday and you must wait at least 72 hours after filing to check on the status of your refund. In each of these situations, the IRS should contact you by mail to provide more details and a plan for resolution. 1 You Didn’t File Taxes In a Previous Year. 2 Your Spouse Filed an Injured Spouse Allocation Form. 3 You’re Currently on a Payment Plan for Back Taxes. If you paper file, it will take three to four weeks for the IRS to process the return and acknowledge your refund. If you e-file, you will get a notice of arrival within 24 hours and confirmation of refund within 72 hours. 4. Request Direct Deposit. Once your tax return is accepted and the refund approved, you can choose to have your money directly deposited in your bank account within a week. If you choose to have a paper check sent through the mail from the IRS, this option will add at least another two weeks to the process. Holding The Refund. 1 You Didn’t File Taxes In a Previous Year. If you didn’t file your taxes in a prior year, the IRS may hold your refund until you prove that you don’t have a tax debt from that year. The only way you can get the IRS to release your refund is if you go ahead and file for that year, or send a letter explaining why you didn’t file, and request more time. apparently my husband owes$2000 in back child support, we are suppose to get a refund of over $8,000. I know we will get the remainder, but how long does it take to get my refund? Our return was accepted on January 21st. I should have had it last friday. Can anyone help? If you're in debt, the IRS can automatically seize your tax refund money. Find out the common reasons why this happens, and if you need to worry this year. Advertiser Disclosure: The credit card offers that appear on this site are from credit card companies from which MoneyCrashers.com receives compensation. How long will it take to get my tax refund? When you file with TurboTax, your tax refunds will arrive as soon as they would with any other tax software or service. Due to IRS security measures, this may take a little longer than it has in the past. At this time, the IRS estimates that most refunds will be sent within 3 weeks after your e-filed returns are accepted. Many refunds will come sooner. Enter your bank account info under Direct Deposit and your refund will be deposited to your account. IAS10825 If you’re behind on your state tax bill, the state government can either seize your state refund, or apply to the IRS to seize money from your federal refund. 2. You Owe Child Support. The Federal Government will eventually notice if you are behind on child support payments. Query: how long does it take to get your refund back from the irs if you mail in your return",
"output": [
"IRS estimates that most refunds will be sent within 3 weeks after your e-filed returns are accepted."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-67cbf7b4149e4363a364d3663e41ede3",
"input": "Almond Milk/Coconut Milk Creamer - What does it mean that this is an “all natural” creamer? natural bliss® is an all-natural coffee creamer proudly made with no GMO ingredients. Our almond milk and coconut milk creamer products are made only with all natural ingredients. Our natural flavors come real food ingredients like vanilla flavor from Madagascar or coconuts sourced from Sumatra. Learn more about our different flavors and types of creamers. Transform your everyday coffee into something extraordinary. Learn more about our different flavors and types of creamers. • Coffee-mate® liquid should be used within 14 days after opening or before the use-by date, whichever comes first. • Coffee-mate® powder should be used by the use-by dates found on the packaging. Unopened, Coffee-mate® powder has a shelf-life of up to 24 months. It will not. natural bliss® is a dairy coffee creamer and Coffee-mate® is a non-dairy creamer. We will continue to make both for you to enjoy. Dairy - How can I find natural bliss® at a store near me? Depending on if they are non-dairy or liquid. Non-dairy up to two years. The liquid creamer only lasts a few months. The package should have an expiration date. Cold Brew Coffee - How long does natural bliss® brew/steep their Cold Brew Coffee? Our Cold Brew Coffee is steeped in cool water for 12hrs resulting in a smooth, bold flavor. Cold Brew Coffee - What is the caffeine content of natural bliss® Cold Brew? • Coffee-mate® liquid products found in the refrigerated case must be refrigerated at all times, before and after opening. • Only Coffee-mate® liquid products that are clearly marked “Refrigerate After Opening” may be stored in a dry, cool place before opening, but must be refrigerated after opening. Pour a little dessert into your cup and enjoy new Coffee-mate The Cheesecake Factory at Home™ flavors. Stir Up Sweetness Depends. If they're the non-dairy creamer, it can last for up to two years. The little pots of half and half are only good for a few months. Coffee-mate ® Turn the coffee you like into coffee you love. Find your Flavor natural bliss ® A new world of flavors made with natural ingredients. Discover Bliss ® Query: how long does powder creamer last",
"output": [
"A Coffee-mate powder creamer has a shelf-life of up to 24 months."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-63615001bfae409cafa54214b4f087ad",
"input": "Real mechanics give you the inside scoop on the tricks of the trade. Real mechanics give you the inside scoop on the tricks of the trade. 30 Things Your Car Mechanic Won’t Tell You How to Become an Auto Mechanic. If you have a knack for working on cars, you might be thinking about starting a career as an auto mechanic. Just like with any other job, you can prepare yourself for this line of work by gaining relevant... Home >> Careers & Education Diesel Mechanics On this page: Education Videos Top Schools Schools Tips Certs & Licenses Job Flexibility Other Resources Salaries by City Schools and Education What’s Needed: Many employers seek candidates with a certificate or associate degree in diesel engine repair — although a […] Book a service. 1 600+ car repair, maintenance & diagnostic services at your doorstep. 2 Use our easy diagnostic tool. We’ll guide you to the correct service or repair. 3 Track services, save quotes, get maintenance reminders & more. 3 [Auto Mechanic Use] | What Kind of Equipment Does an Auto Mechanic Use? 4 [Education Requirements] | Education Requirements for Auto Mechanics The job of a mechanic has become increasingly complex with the development of computer technology. Mechanic Certification Test Automation - Online test registration, payment and instant test results Mechanic testing is now quicker and easier than ever thanks to a new computerized mechanic testing process that has been implemented at all branch offices. Even if it’s a quick fix realize there may be several other cars ahead of yours in the mechanic’s service queue. Ask up front how long the car will need to be in the shop and arrange for transportation to and from the repair facility. And always get a cost estimate before allowing the mechanic to proceed with repairs or service. 3. Each test has a specific time limit. Click here to view the list of tests and the amount of time allowed for each one. As you take each test, the computer screen will continuously display the amount of time left. You can take a break if necessary, but the clock will continue to run. In some repair shops the auto mechanics will specialize in a specific area such as: 1 Air conditioning. 2 Brakes. 3 Front end. 4 Transmission. 5 Drivability. How long does it take to complete an auto mechanic program? Certificate or diploma programs from vocational schools usually take one to two years, or less. Colleges and universities can offer associate's degree programs that include general education courses, and may take up to four years to complete. Query: how long does it take to get a automotive mechanic",
"output": [
"Certificate or diploma programs from vocational schools usually take one to two years, or less."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4c1e213fe6c64d40803cf2fff2829b33",
"input": "Find the Best Costs on Manufactured Homes - Great Falls, 22066. One of the other factors that will determine the net worth of your manufactured home is the condition, size, and layout. Of course, if the manufactured home is aesthetically appealing, there is a good chance you will fetch a good price for it in the market should you happen to be selling. The preliminary rough estimate of the cost to build this house in Richmond, VA is $329,479 including a General Contractor’s markup of $37, 615. Land and possible related fees (if any) are NOT included. Read more on fees on my Checklist for buying land on How to Buy Land and Build a House. Great Falls. All Rentals; Apartments for Rent; Houses for Rent; Rooms for Rent; See Newest Listings; Create Your Rental Resume; Post Your Rental Listing; Mortgage. Great Falls. Get Pre-Qualified; Mortgage Rates; Refinance Rates; Mortgage Calculator; Affordability Calculator; Rent vs Buy Calculator; Refinance Calculator; Local Scoop. Great Falls. Real Estate Overview; Market Trends; Schools Great Falls, VA real estate market data. Research home values, listing prices, avg. home sale prices, and on-demand neighborhoods on Trulia.com. Find homes for sale and real estate in Great Falls, VA at realtor.com®. Search and filter Great Falls homes by price, beds, baths and property type. Find the Best Costs on Manufactured Homes - Great Falls, 22066 One of the other factors that will determine the net worth of your manufactured home is the condition, size, and layout. Of course, if the manufactured home is aesthetically appealing, there is a good chance you will fetch a good price for it in the market should you happen to be selling. Homes for Sale in Great Falls, VA have a median listing price of $1,149,900 and a price per square foot of $314. There are 153 active homes for sale in Great Falls, Virginia, which spend an average of days on the market. Some of the hottest neighborhoods near Great Falls, VA are Sterling Park, Potomac Lakes, West Side, Old Courthouse. You may also be interested in homes for sale in popular zip codes like 22066, 20176, or in neighboring cities, such as McLean, Vienna, Reston, Potomac, Fairfax. Real Estate Data for Great Falls. Great Falls market trends indicate an increase of $8,500 (1%) in median home sales over the past year. The average price per square foot for this same period rose to $324, up from $306. Explore this area: Real Estate Data for Great Falls Great Falls market trends indicate an increase of $8,500 (1%) in median home sales over the past year. The average price per square foot for this same period rose to $324, up from $306. Get accurate prices to Manufactured Homes in Great Falls for 2018, as reported by homeyou customers. Manufactured Homes Cost Guide offers cost estimates on Manufactured Homes in Great Falls. Get accurate prices to Manufactured Homes in Great Falls for 2018, as reported by homeyou customers. Query: average cost of house in great falls va",
"output": [
"Homes for Sale in Great Falls, VA have a median listing price of $1,149,900 and a price per square foot of $314."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-898c2fd335864a41bd0d6192cc666877",
"input": "Medical Marijuana Facts: Cannabis May Simplify Organ Transplantation. 1 Organ transplant rejection is a serious problem that is of a frequent occurrence in medical practice. While there are various methods to stop the rejection of the transplant by the immune system, they are not applicable in each case. Hair-based drug tests are the most accurate, as the chart below shows, since traces of everything from alcohol to morphine can remain in the follicle for up to 90 days: Dragan Radovanovic/Business Insider A federal mandate requires that drug tests screen for all five of these types of drugs. Time Frame Hair drug tests can detect drugs that have been in the system for 90 days, or three months. Considerations Many consider hair testing to be much more effective than urine testing because the results cannot be as easily tampered with. The hair test can also detect drugs that have been in the system for a much longer period of time than a urine test. Fact In order for the hair test to be accurate the sample of hair used must contain 90 to 120 strands of hair. How long does marijuana stay in your system once smoked? How do you determine how long weed will stay in your system when doing a drug test or a hair folicle test I am 5'4, weighing 335 lbs hoping that helps. Hair drug testing. Hair testing may be used to determine drug use over the longer term, usually over a 90-day period of time. Hair can be tested for cocaine, marijuana, opiates, methamphetamine, phencyclidine, and alcohol. What happens during workplace drug testing? Drugs can usually be detected in the saliva for only a few hours to a few days. Hair test. Analyzing the hair for chemical traces may be the most accurate way to test for long-term drug use. Because hair grows slowly (only about 0.5 inches per month), traces of certain drugs can be detected for months. Hair analysis requires more processing time than urine or blood testing. Alcohol 14 Panel Hair Follicle Drug Test $750.00; Does body hair show a longer period of drug use? Now, what if you don’t have hair on your head that is at least an inch and a half? Well, in that case, we can test underarm, leg, or chest hair. Occasionally, we test beards. · just now. 1 If it is a hair FOLLICLE test the drugs will only stay in there for a couple of weeks to a month. If the ENTIRE STRAND (length of the hair from the scalp to the end) is being tested, drugs could stay in there for as much as a year depending on what kind of drugs, the amount used and the time period over which they were used. What Can Affect How Long Do Drugs Stay In Your System? A drug test does not look for the actual drug in your system. It looks for something called a metabolite. When you ingest a substance your body changes (metabolizes) that substance into one or more metabolites. It is these metabolites the drug tests looks to identify. The Varying Detection of Drug Testing Timelines. 1 Single or small doses of any given drug won’t last as long in your system and are not as easily detected. 2 If you have a fast-metabolic rate, you will have a shorter detection of the drug in your body. 3 Your body mass will determine how fast or slow your body metabolises. Query: how long does drugs stay in the hair",
"output": [
"Drugs stay in the hair for 90 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-039f39de4bc947f9b297c01de911239c",
"input": "Flu symptoms usually start within one to four days after infection. Unlike a common cold, the effects of an influenza virus infection can come on very suddenly. The first signs of the flu are often a fever or chills, accompanied by headache, sore throat, dry cough, runny nose, muscle aches, and fatigue. Information in five categories is collected from eight different data sources that allow CDC to: 1 Find out when and where influenza activity is occurring. 2 Track influenza-related illness. 3 Determine what influenza viruses are circulating. 4 Detect changes in influenza viruses. The flu vaccine is available by shot. Get your flu vaccine as soon as the vaccine is available in your area. It is especially important to get the vaccine if you, someone you live with, or someone you care for is at high risk of complications from the flu. If you are exposed to someone with the flu, avoid close contact with the person, and wash your hands frequently. 1 Vitamin C: Although Vitamin C is widely used and has many benefits, there is no scientific proof that it will help you avoid an illness such as the flu or a cold. Flu: A flu shot to prevent it is best. It is about 80% effective. Tamiflu pills if you catch it in the first two days. After that chickensoup, Aspirin or tylenol, (acetaminophen) vitamin c, zinc, .Rest and fluids. How does the flu start out - Does the flu start as a head cold no fever or cough? Sounds like a Cold. I typically find that the actual flu - the disease caused by the Influenza Virus - starts as a rapid onset of fever and chills, often with a dry, non-productive cough, and usually accompanied by chills, body aches, and fatigue. More information on flu vaccines and other flu control measures is available on the Flu.gov website. Q. What do the terms treatment of the flu and prevention (prophylaxis) of the flu mean? A. Treatment is used when a person is given Tamiflu because they have the signs and symptoms of the flu or have been diagnosed with the flu. It can help prevent influenza in some people and will reduce the severity of the symptoms in those who do get it. A Word From Verywell. Of course, do your best to avoid getting the flu at all. Be sure to get your flu vaccine, wash your hands often, and avoid people who are sick with the flu. Getting vaccinated every year is the best way to lower your chances of getting the flu. Flu vaccines can’t cause the flu. Keep in mind that getting the flu vaccine also protects the people around you. So when you and your family get vaccinated, you help keep yourselves and your community healthy. How long does the flu last? As harsh as the flu can be, the good news is that most people feel much better within one to two weeks. Most healthy adults become contagious the day before symptoms develop (which makes it trickier to prevent from spreading). They remain infectious for up to five to seven days after symptoms appear. Query: how long does flu start",
"output": [
"Flu symptoms usually start within one to four days after infection."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-5beeebe6239a45c095929afedfb84f76",
"input": "Getting Legal Help to Understange Marriage License Requirements. No matter how excited you are to plan the big day and invite all your friends, it won't matter if you and/or your partner don't meet your state's marriage license requirements. And even if you've already received a valid marriage license, for example, it could expire before your planned wedding date. Information on Getting Married in New York State. 1 Please click here for information on the recently enacted Marriage Equality Act. 2 View a sample Marriage License (PDF, 314KB, 1pg.). These forms must be filled out in person. 3 Getting Married in New York State is also available in Portable Document Format (PDF, 173KB, 2pg.) Couples are responsible for obtaining a valid marriage license from the State of Texas, with both the bride and groom present. There is a 72-hour waiting period from the time the license is issued. Texas does not require blood tests or other medical records. License is good for 31 days, anywhere in Texas. Your local County Clerk will have more information on the exceptions to the waiting period. After the 72 hour waiting period is up, the marriage license remains valid for 30 days. After those 30 days, the license expires and can no longer be used to legalize your marriage. How much do marriage licenses cost in Texas? Because marriage licenses are issued at the county level, the marriage license fee depends on which county in Texas you apply in. Currently, most counties charge around $70 for a marriage license. To obtain a license without parental consent, both of the applicants must be at least 18 years of age. The 18-year minimum age does not apply for individuals who have been married previously. The age requirement can be waived by a county judge for applicants who can prove they are parents or expectant parents. There are none. You do not have to be a previous or current resident of South Carolina to obtain a marriage license that will be valid statewide. Waiting Period After I submit my application how long do I have to wait before I receive my marriage license? There is a mandatory 1 day waiting period before your license is issued to you. In most states, the waiting period does not include Saturdays, Sundays or federal holidays. In some instances, the day the application is filed is not included within the waiting period timeline. You can now apply online for a marriage license. If you need a certified copy of a marriage license for a marriage that has already taken place, please visit Certified Copies of Records. MARRIAGE LICENSE REQUIREMENTS. A couple must apply together, Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 3:30 p.m. A list of county courthouses and their addresses where marriage licenses can be attained is found on the Association of Arkansas Counties website. 1 Arkansas Marriage License cost is approximately $58.00 (cash only). 2 Males and females shall reach the age of 18 years to contract for a marriage license in Arkansas. Males age 17 or females ages 16 or 17, may be married with parental consent. (For more information on this call your local county court house in Arkansas). If you were previously married, the date of your divorce or the date of your spouse's death must be provided. If the divorce or spouse's death had taken place within the last 6 months, bring a certified copy of the divorce decree or death certificate. This document outlines the requirements you must adhere to in order to get a valid marriage license that can be used statewide. Let's begin… Cost of Your License How much does a marriage license cost? The marriage license fee is roughly $25.00 dollars, although fees may vary from county to county. Out of state applicants will be charged a higher fee than in-state residents. Accepted forms of payment are cash. Query: how long are your marriage license good for",
"output": [
"After the 72 hour waiting period is up, the marriage license remains valid for 30 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1edfdb834c114d82b50325e24c9d491e",
"input": "to make amends or reparation, as for an offense or a crime, or for an offender (usually followed by for): to atone for one's sins. to make up, as for errors or deficiencies (usually followed by for): to atone for one's failings. Obsolete. to become reconciled; agree. Times, Sunday Times (2011) At least they will have a chance to atone for their sins second time around, and when they do they could profitably think primarily about tempo. Times, Sunday Times (2012) In our thirties, we all head to the gym, to atone for the sins of our younger years. Atonement (also atoning, to atone) is the concept of a person taking action to correct previous wrongdoing on their part, either through direct action to undo the consequences of that act, equivalent action to do good for others, or some other expression of feelings of remorse. atonement. This word is often used in the Old Testament. However, it only occurs once in the New Testament of the King James Bible, Romans 5:11, where other versions use the word “reconciliation.” The meaning of the word is simply at-one-ment, i.e., the state of being at one or being reconciled, so that atonement is reconciliation. Atone comes to us from the combination in Middle English of at and on, the latter of which is an old variant of one. Together they meant in harmony. (In current English, we use at one with a similar suggestion of harmony in such phrases as at one with nature.) Ransom and Christus Victor. 1 Augustine of Hippo. 2 Basil of Caesarea. 3 Gregory of Nyssa. 4 Gustaf Aulén. 5 Irenaeus of Lyons (Recapitulation) 6 Justin Martyr. 7 Origen of Alexandria. Bible Dictionary, “Atonement,” 617; see also Guide to the Scriptures, “Atone, Atonement,” 22. 3. David A. Bednar, “In the Strength of the Lord,” in Brigham Young University 2001–2002 Speeches (2002), 123. He assured him that his prevaricating and lying backward and forward was a great aggravation of his guilt; for which the only atonement he could make was by confession and repentance. View in context The motive underlying all this proceeds evidently from something more than a generous eagerness to make atonement for a wrong which she has innocently inflicted on another person. The extracts from the will stood highest on the page; they were limited to those few touching words in which the dead father begged his children's forgiveness for the stain on their birth, and implored them to remember the untiring love and care by which he had striven to atone for it. atone meaning, definition, what is atone: to do something that shows you are sorry for something bad that you did or for something…. Learn more. Query: atone meaning",
"output": [
"The meaning of 'Atone' is to do something that shows you are sorry for something bad that you did or for something."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3eaa2b0dc30a40d5aada930aa19a321d",
"input": "Related: 5 Tasty Ways to Eat More Yogurt. The problem is that beneficial bacteria may not be the only microscopic organisms in your yogurt. Plenty of other germs can flourish in milk and prove harmful if they slip into the fermentation process and then replicate in the carton in the back of your fridge. supposedly one week. The expiration date is supposed to be the last day you can purchase it.. not when it is no longer good. You probably shouldn't eat yogurt very far past the expiration date. You can maybe go a couple of days. Otherwise, look at it like this. eggs will last three to four weeks past their sell-by date? You have to refrigerate them to rule out any safety concerns. Be sure to store them in their original container on a refrigerator shelf, rather than on the door, where the eggs will be more vulnerable to fluctuations in temperature because it's constantly opened and closed. Yogurt can be safely eaten up to 10 days after its sell-by date; beyond then the live bacterial cultures (which are healthful ingredients, and act as preservatives) will start to die. Mayonnaise is still good for a month after its expiration date (unopened) and up to four months after opening. Eggs, properly refrigerated, should last at least three to five weeks after the sell-by date. Canned goods are good to eat long after labeling dates, as long as the can is in good shape. If a can is dented, rusted, or swollen, toss it out. The short answer is that refrigerated yogurt is safe to eat up to 14 days after the expiration date, according to the FDA and the food processing giant General Mills. (Expiration dates indicate the point at which a food may start to lose quality — they have nothing to do with when the food will “go bad.”) But it’s important to eyeball your expired yogurt and do a sniff test before digging in. [3] I realize that Amiel is joking around but months past exp. date seems excessive and yogurt probably would be spoiled or moldy at that point . Most sources say 3-10 days past expiration seems to be the limit. USDA food safety specialist says they recommend eating yogurt within 1-2 weeks of purchase. [4] FYI: Per USDA food safety expert, it is safe to cut off mold and healthy margin from cheese, but they say you should not consume bread with mold on it. Answer: Most likely it is. Yogurt that has been properly stored will generally remain safe for at least 1 to 2 weeks after the sell-by date on the package. As the food safety specialists at Clemson University’s Cooperative Extension point out, this assumes that the temperature of your refrigerator remains at or below 40° Fahrenheit at all times. Pull dates are established so stores can keep only fresh products on their shelves, but that only means it should be sold or pulled from store shelves by that date. Most foods are good for at least a week or three beyond the pull date. Yogurt keeps indefinitely, or until colorful little patches of color and fuzz begin to grown in it. If mold appears on yogurt, or if it develops an off odor, flavor or appearance, you should always discard it immediately. (Note: This refers to “sell-by” terminology used in the United States; practices in other countries may differ.) See Also: Are Eggs Still Safe After the Expiration Date? Can You Safely Drink Milk After the Sell-By Date? If a calendar date is shown, immediately adjacent to the date must be a phrase explaining the meaning of that date such as sell-by or use before. Even if the date expires during home storage, a product should be safe, wholesome and of good quality if handled properly and kept at 40 °F or below. Query: how far past expiration date is yogurt safe",
"output": [
"Refrigerated yogurt is safe to eat up to 14 days after the expiration date."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-068379df6f8d4e86b37a3381b5345ba2",
"input": "There could be any number of reasons. The money has to come from the seller’s or originator’s account before it can be sent to you. This can take several business days. Also, the refund will be made to the original payment source. Was that your de... Re: How long will my refund take to clear? If you funded the original paypal payment to the seller with a debit or credit card then it won't go back to your paypal balance. Once marked as completed it will automatically go back to your bank account or credit card but takes up to a week to process through to the bank and a bit longer for a c.c. Can you reopen a claim if it has been 17 aug 2017 how long does refund take to appear on my credit debit statement? Refunds paypal are instant and the funds instantly removed from will receive an email confirmation when your nike is processed. Refund? Paypal Paypal on the web it deposit my refund prepaid faq shopify payments center. How do i make a payment? Can pay online with 2 may 2012 as soon am refunded my money, plan to close the account. How long would it take for the refunded money to a paypal solved i'm not seeing my refund yet. I cannot take the money out do i have to pay rent with my which there could be any number of reasons. The money has to come from the seller's or originator's account before it can be sent you. Re: How long will my refund take to clear? I paid on a clothing website via PayPal they refunded me for an item it will say complete on your PayPal account but it won't clear for at least 2 too 3 days it's super annoying but I've had the same problem so wanted to share! There could be any number of reasons. The money has to come from the seller’s or originator’s account before it can be sent to you. This can take several business days. Also, the refund will be made to the original payment source. Was that your debit card? If there’s a problem with refunding it to your card, then it will be credited to your PayPal account. To know for sure, log in to your PayPal account and check the status: Here’s how to view the latest status: 1 Log in to your PayPal account. 2 Click Activity at the top of the page. 3 Click Advanced search to see the dropdown menu. 4 Select Refunds. 5 If needed, select the desired date range to see your refund. 6 Click the refunded transaction to view the details. This can please contact your card issuer or paypal if you do not receive refund within 30 so it may take up to days for the funds appear back in account 2122 jan 2017 this regard, does have a buyer protection scheme but doesn't internet and read through reviews of same goods what $100. How long will my refund take to clear? I bought an item on eBay and paid for it then the seller advised me it was faulty so they have refunded me. This shows in .y PayPal history but not in my balance or in my bank account. How long does it take paypal to refund a payment? I've recently placed an order using paypal with my checking account and noticed The recipient of this payment is Unregistered at the transaction details.After seeing this I canceled the payment and was wondering how long it would take paypal to refund my money. Moving on, the refund will take as long as it take for the original payment to clear your bank. A payment through PayPal takes 3-4 business days to clear your bank account. Essentially 3-4 business days after the orignal transaction date, the funds will appear in your PayPal balance. Query: how long do paypal payment refunds take",
"output": [
"Paypal payment refund takes a week if payment made by a debit card or credit card."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9d8cba5c53194fdfa19b10bea61f54d8",
"input": "If you are working with a cheesecake, or other creamy cake, it is recommended that you turn off the heat and let your cake cool in the oven for about an hour before transferring your cake to the refrigerator. 4 large free-range eggs, at room temperature, plus 1 egg white. 1 1. Preheat the oven to 180C and put a baking sheet on the middle shelf. 2 2. Spread the crumbs over the base of a tall 20cm cake tin (springform if you have one) and press down firmly with a glass until you have a well compacted, flat base. Let the cheesecake sit in the turned-off oven with the door cracked for about an hour, then remove it from the water bath and let it cool completely on the stovetop. When you remove it from the waterbath, also run a thin-bladed knife around the edge to make sure the cake isn't sticking to the pan, which can also cause cracks as the cake settles. Principle #1. A cheesecake is a custard, not a cake. As a custard, the cheesecake should be thick, rich and creamy. As with any custard, a cheesecake relies on the proteins in the eggs to give it structure. The proteins coagulate as the temperature approaches 160 degrees. If it over bakes, the custard becomes dry. Principle #2 A long, slow bake allows for a more uniform internal temperature. Never bake over 350 degrees. We prefer a dark pan to uniformly absorb heat, not a reflective pan. Principle #3 Don’t over bake your cheesecake. Most cheesecakes are over baked and they tend to be dry, not creamy. An over baked cheesecake tends to crack. The cheesecake is baked when it is still jiggly but not soupy. The top of the cheesecake will jiggle as a whole and the center two inches will look softer. A cheesecake generally takes an hour to cook at around 350. If it cracks on top while cooking, it will settle back into place as it cools. If it helps: Best NYC style cheesecake INGREDIENTS * 15 graham crackers, crushed * 2 tablespoons butter, melted * * 4 (8 ounce) packages cream cheese * 1 1/2 cups white sugar * 3/4 cup milk * 4 eggs Here’s how to bake cheesecake in a water bath: 1 Wrap outside of pan in a double layer of foil, covering the underside and extending all the way to the top. Although a good crust keeps filling from leaking out, foil helps protect against water leaking in. Your cheesecake needs plenty of time to chill out and set before slicing. Perry recommends giving it one hour on the counter, and at least two hours in the fridge. 7. Cheesecake can be difficult to slice because the creamy filling sticks to the knife. Dental floss is one of the best-kept secrets in a cheesecake kitchen. Take a long strand of unflavored dental floss, either waxed or unwaxed, stretch it taut, and gently press it through the cake. Here are some good tips on baking and cooling a cheesecake at this site. To answer your question, try a half hour outside the oven before refrigerating. Typically, a cheesecake should be cooled to room temp and then refrigerated for at least 4 hours or overnight. Till it's totally cool. How long should a cheesecake cool for? I baked it for 30-35 minutes according the the recipe from cooks.com and now not sure how long didnt say guesses welcome!! Follow Query: how long to cool a cheesecake",
"output": [
"A cheesecake should be cooled to room temp and then refrigerated for at least 4 hours or overnight."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ef71194fc0bf4f4fad66b094c7d2862c",
"input": "Children can learn a great deal by example, so it really helps if their older brothers and sisters enjoy chess. As with anything in life, chess takes practice. It’s a bit like learning a language. Chess educators Laura Sherman and Bill Kilpatrick have created an easy, step-by-step method for teaching chess that parents of all skill levels can use to teach children of any age. You don't have to know how to play in order to use the system. It's completely impossible to actually teach her chess at this age though. So the answer to the question can only be it depends entirely on the child. Whenever the kid becomes interested in learning chess is the best age. (that said, if they taught the rules of chess at school right now, she'd probably soak them up. Best Answer: I have taught chess play to kids as young as 3. The age doesn't matter. Here are the signs to look for: 1. The child knows how to share and take turns. 2. The child asks you to show them first. 3. Some children would stuggle with chess when they are ten or twelve. For that matter, some adults struggle with chess. So being prepared to learn to play chess is not so much tied up in a number such as an age, as in the mental capacity to comprehend the game and the interest to learn it. At schools where I have worked chess clubs usually start for children at about second or third grade, so at about 7 or 8 years of age. The purposes of integrated Ho Math and Chess program are to: 1 improve school math marks. 2 improve problem solving ability and critical thinking ability. 3 learn how to play chess. 4 boost brainpower. I can teach a three year old to play violin... I'm pretty sure I can teach them checkers too. I'm a year late, but I'll try it out on my four year old and let you know how it turns out. My husband taught our son to play when he was 6 yrs old (he is now 9). Our daughter who is now 6 learned when she was 5 (she is very competitive with her older brother)! That being said, I don't think age really matters. It's more about being able to learn the pieces and how they move. After learning the pieces and moves, the key was to learn to anticipate what the opponent might do based on your move (like checkers). #17 Jul 25, 2010. Children should not learn chess! Let them grow up to be Physicists, Mathematicians, Engineers, Artists, anything but a worthless Grand Master chess palyer at the age of 21! Chess is a waste of time and there is no money in it: it is a hell of way to try to live as a Professional Chess player. Perhaps they were taught the rules too quickly and never quite grasped them. These parents sometimes feel that a child must be a genius in order to pick up chess and play a game. This isn’t the case. Anyone can learn to play and the fact is that chess helps children become smarter. Tackling this problem, Chess Is Child’s Play teaches the parent to play, while teaching them to teach their child. Even a parent who has never seen a chess set can pick up this book and teach their children. Query: at what age can children learn chess",
"output": [
"Whenever the kid becomes interested in learning chess is the best age."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-507c0a108cb24458a1dceee774713996",
"input": "Endorsement: If you make a deposit to an account and you fail to endorse the item, we may add an endorsement on any item and you will be responsible for the item as if. you endorsed it yourself. We can refuse to accept any item for deposit for any reason, or no reason, or impose conditions on a deposit. Wells Fargo will let you know as quickly as possible whether there will be a hold on a deposited check. If possible, the teller will notify you immediately at the time of deposit and your receipt will show how much of the deposit is being held and when the funds will be available to you. A hold means that although a check amount was credited to your account, it's not available for your use. Wells Fargo Bank's general policy is to make deposited funds available on the first business day after the Bank receives a deposit. In some cases, however, we may place a hold on funds deposited by our customers. What happens when a hold is placed on your funds? During the time a hold is in effect, you should not write checks against or attempt to withdraw the held funds. If a hold has been placed, we may return checks that you have written if the aggregate amount of funds (not including the “hold” check) in your account is insufficient to pay the checks (which are subject to additional charges) or not process withdrawals against these funds. Rental Property #1 – Security Deposit Checking Account. The only money in this account is the security deposit for property #1. Rental Property #2 – Security Deposit Checking Account. The only money in this account is the security deposit for property #2. Rental Property #3 – Security Deposit Checking Account. The only money in this account is the security deposit for property #3. Inquire with your bank upon the deposit of any check. The federal government provides guidelines for check holds which your bank must follow and must make clear to you each time a check is deposited. According to the federal reserve any U.S. government issued checks, postal checks, cashier or bank checks and checks issued by the same bank you are depositing with must be cleared by the next business day. All others must clear $100 by the next day but the rest can be held for varying amounts of time. relationship between you and the Bank created by the opening of. an Account is of debtor and creditor and that the Bank is not in any. way acting as a fiduciary for you or your benefit and that no special. relationship exists between you and the Bank. Bank. 1 When funds become available: 2 The first $200 of the check amount is available for cash withdrawal no later than one business day after the deposit. 3 The first $200 of your deposit is available on the first or second business day after the deposit. The length of time your money is held depends largely on bank policy. Some banks will hold funds for as little as one business day, while others will hold funds for longer. How long a hold is in effect also depends on the source of the check. An out-of-state personal check might be held for three or four days, while a check issued by the U.S. Treasury might have no hold at all. In some cases, depending on how large the check is, and who issued it, the hold can be as long as five to 10 business days. For banks, the hold is a way of limiting risk. The bank is paying money to you, and acting in good faith on the assumption that there is money in the account the check is drawn on. Your bank has to request that the other bank transfer the funds, based on the information in the check. If there isn’t money in the other account, your bank loses out if it pays you and you ... The table below displays the availability of each deposit type, according to the deposit method used. It assumes deposits were made into the payee’s account; when you deposit a check made out to someone else, there will generally be a longer hold on the funds. There are different ways you can set up direct deposit for items like your salary, pension, Social Security or other federal benefit payments and regular monthly income: Complete the Ally Bank direct deposit form (PDF) and give it to the company or agency issuing the funds. Query: how long should a out of state bank deposit be held for funds",
"output": [
"An out-of-state personal check might be held for three or four days, while a check issued by the U.S. Treasury might have no hold at all. In some cases, depending on how large the check is, and who issued it, the hold can be as long as five to 10 business days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-606b6644b53942ec834d6ac98878df96",
"input": "Quickly convert Pacific Standard Time (PST) to time in Austin, Texas with this easy-to-use, modern time zone converter. Austin, Texas, Information Known for its casual and playful nature, Austin is the playground of Texas. Situated at the centre of the Lone Star State, it stands as the gateway to the Texas Hill Country and the Highland Lakes. Getting Started. 1 1 Add locations (or remove, set home, order) 2 2 Mouse over hours to convert time at a glance. 3 3 Click hour tiles to schedule and share. + 4 Sign in to save settings - it's FREE! Converting PST to Austin Time This time zone converter lets you visually and very quickly convert PST to Austin, Texas time and vice-versa. Simply mouse over the colored hour-tiles and glance at the hours selected by the column... and done! Austin, TX City of Austin, Capital of Texas, USA . Current time now incTime Zone: America Chicago (USA Central Time) Converting PST to Austin Time. This time zone converter lets you visually and very quickly convert PST to Austin, Texas time and vice-versa. Simply mouse over the colored hour-tiles and glance at the hours selected by the column... and done! PST stands for Pacific Standard Time. Austin, Texas time is 2 hours ahead of PST. Pacific Standard Time (PST) to Austin, Texas ( in Austin) 12 am PST: is : 2 am in Austin: 1 am PST: is : 3 am in Austin: 2 am PST: is : 4 am in Austin: 3 am PST: is : 5 am in Austin: 4 am PST: is : 6 am in Austin: 5 am PST: is : 7 am in Austin: 6 am PST: is : 8 am in Austin: 7 am PST: is : 9 am in Austin: 8 am PST: is : 10 am in Austin: 9 am PST: is : 11 am in Austin: 10 am PST: is : 12 pm in Austin Austin, Texas, Information. Known for its casual and playful nature, Austin is the playground of Texas. Situated at the centre of the Lone Star State, it stands as the gateway to the Texas Hill Country and the Highland Lakes. As the state capital and home to the University of Texas, the city supports a politically charged and culturally rich environment. Blessed with a temperate year-round climate and 300 days of sunshine a year, Austin lives for the outdoors. Nature trails, parks and wilderness preserves create an oasis in the heart of the city. Town Lake bisects the centre of downtown and is bordered by 10 miles of hike-and-bike trails where devoted joggers, walkers and cyclists flock every hour of the day. Austin, Texas, Websites . City of Austin website . Visit Austin website . Austin, Texas, Information . Known for its casual and playful nature, Austin is the playground of Texas. Situated at the centre of the Lone Star State, it stands as the gateway to the Texas Hill Country and the Highland Lakes. Query: austin is what time zone",
"output": [
"Austin is in USA Central Time zone."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-883610012a16443e8fb7fe2a143e1765",
"input": "Distance between Roanoke, VA and Wake Forest, NC, mileage and gas calculator So you have been searching for distance between Roanoke, VA and Wake Forest, NC? Here are the results. Mileages from Roanoke, VA to Wake Forest, NC is pointed out in the table below. On the map you can see with your own eyes how your trip is going to pass and what routes you will have to take. Approximate time of driving from Roanoke, VA to Wake Forest, NC will also appear in the mentioned table. Check cities near Wake Forest, NC. 1 Distance between Roanoke, VA and Charlotte, NC. 2 Distance between Roanoke, VA and Raleigh, NC. 3 Distance between Roanoke, VA and Greensboro, NC. 4 Distance between Roanoke, VA and Durham, NC. 5 Distance between Roanoke, VA and Winston-Salem, NC. 6 Distance between Roanoke, VA and Fayetteville, NC. Route Map from Lynchburg, VA to Wake Forest, NC. Optimal route map between Lynchburg, VA and Wake Forest, NC. This route will be about 125 Miles. The driving route information(distance, estimated time, directions), flight route, traffic information and print the map features are placed on the top right corner of the map. Distance Between Cities. Route Map from Lynchburg, VA to Wake Forest, NC. Optimal route map between Lynchburg, VA and Wake Forest, NC. This route will be about 124 Miles. The driving route information(distance, estimated time, directions), flight route, traffic information and print the map features are placed on the top right corner of the map. Your journey from Wake Forest, NC to Lynchburg, VA by car will take: Distance conversions between Wake Forest, NC and Lynchburg, VA. This table shows distance in kilometers, miles and nautical miles between Wake Forest, NC and Lynchburg, VA: Distance conversions between Roanoke, VA and Wake Forest, NC This table shows distance in kilometers, miles and nautical miles between Roanoke, VA and Wake Forest, NC: Distance type Your journey from Wake Forest, NC to Lynchburg, VA by car will take: Distance conversions between Wake Forest, NC and Lynchburg, VA This table shows distance in kilometers, miles and nautical miles between Wake Forest, NC and Lynchburg, VA: Your journey from Roanoke, VA to Wake Forest, NC by car will take: 3 hours 10 mins. This table shows distance in kilometers, miles and nautical miles between Roanoke, VA and Wake Forest, NC: Your journey from Roanoke, VA to Wake Forest, NC by car will take: Distance conversions between Roanoke, VA and Wake Forest, NC. This table shows distance in kilometers, miles and nautical miles between Roanoke, VA and Wake Forest, NC: So you have been searching for distance between Wake Forest, NC and Lynchburg, VA? Here are the results. Mileages from Wake Forest, NC to Lynchburg, VA is pointed out in the table below. On the map you can see with your own eyes how your trip is going to pass and what routes you will have to take. Approximate time of driving from Wake Forest, NC to Lynchburg, VA will also appear in the mentioned table. Bags packed? Query: how far is lynchburg va from wake forest",
"output": [
"The distance between Lynchburg, VA and Wake Forest, NC is 125 Miles."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-160fc09444b44d2dba18510e48608134",
"input": "Other Information. If you have already filed for passport renewal, you will be able to check the status of your passport online. Five to seven days after your passport application has been filed, you can be able to use the Internet to track your application. How long will it take to get my passport after I apply? Processing times vary depending on the volume of applications. The average time for a mailed-in application is 4 weeks. If the application is submitted in person at the passport office, you can obtain your passport in 24 hours. Do I need to send in my birth certificate when applying for a passport renewal? No, you do not. Your new passport will be sent to you by courier or Royal Mail. 1 They’ll either: 2 post it through your letterbox. 3 hand it to you if you’re home. 4 leave a card or post you a letter saying how you can get it (it won’t say the package is your passport) You must be aged 16 or over (or turning 16 in the next 3 weeks) if you want an adult passport. There’s a different process to get a passport for a child. If you’re in the UK you can: renew your passport if it’s expired or will expire soon (including if you currently have a child passport) replace your passport if it’s been lost, stolen or damaged It costs £72.50 to renew or replace your passport, or £82.25 if you use the Post Office’s Passport Check and Send service. You must be aged 16 or over (or turning 16 in the next 3 weeks) if you want an adult passport. There’s a different process to get a passport for a child. If you’re in the UK you can: 1 renew your passport if it’s expired or will expire soon (including if you currently have a child passport) 2 replace your passport if it’s been lost, stolen or damaged. 3 change the details on your passport. How long is a passport valid for? A Canadian Passport is valid for five years. Do I need a passport? Yes, if you are traveling by air or by car to the U.S. or internationally you must have a passport. If it is within Canada is it recommended. Can I apply for a passport at a consulate or embassy? How long it takes. It should take 3 weeks to get your passport. Use a different service if you need it urgently. It can take longer if more information is needed or your application hasn’t been filled in correctly. Don’t book travel until you have a valid passport - doing so is at your own risk. Start the application review process. 1 1 Tell us which type of application you need help with. 2 2 Make your payment and download the forms. 3 3 Fill in the forms and send them to us. 4 4 We’ll return the forms within 24 hours with our comments and advice. How long is a Canadian passport valid? An adult Canadian passport is valid for 5 or 10 years. A child passport is valid for 5 years. When I could renew my Passport? You may renew your passport if: Your passport expired in the last year Your passport is expiring in the next 7 months Your passport pages are full Passport renewal is a long and tedious process. Oftentimes, you will get impatient when waiting for your new passport to come. In order to avoid confusion and frustration, doing your research is a must. Query: how long to process passports",
"output": [
"It takes 4 weeks to process passports."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ea3b4757081d4be2aad45f1b229cc3c4",
"input": "As you look out into space, Earth's rotation gradually changes your viewpoint. You see one part of the sky and then rotate away from it to see another. Earth's motion (rotation)makes it seem as if the objects you see, the sun, stars, the moon - are moving past you. The objects have apparent motion. It takes Earth 24 hours to complete one Day (slightly more than one 360 degree rotation). It takes 365 days 6 hours 9 minutes 9 seconds for Earth to make one revolution around the sun. http://hypertextbook.com/facts/1999/Mitc... More specifically, our rotation period (the time elapsed for one rotation) with respect to the stars is called a sidereal day. A sidereal day is 24 sidereal hours, or 23 hours and 56 minutes on a normal clock. Our clock time is based on the earth's rotation with respect to the sun from solar noon to solar noon. This is a solar day, and it is divided into 24 hours. Because Earth travels about 1 / 365 of the way around the sun during one day, there is a small difference between solar time and sidereal time. position with respect to the sun after it reaches the same position with respect to the stars. At what speed does the Earth move around the Sun? (Beginner) > onclick=window.open(this.href,'win2','status=no,toolbar=no,scrollbars=yes,titlebar=no,menubar=no,resizable=yes,width=640,height=480,directories=no,location=no'); return false; rel=nofollow> The Moon orbits Earth in the prograde direction and completes one revolution relative to the stars in about 27.322 days and one revolution relative to the Sun in about 29.530 days. Earth and the Moon orbit about their barycentre, which lies about 4,600 km from Earth's center. On average, the distance to the Moon is about 385,000 km from Earth's center, which corresponds to about 60 Earth radii. With a mean orbital velocity of 1.022 km/s, the Moon covers a distance approximately its diameter, or Considering the Earth–Moon system as a binary planet, its centre of gravity is within Earth, about 4,624 km (2,873 mi) or 72.6% of the Earth's radius from the centre of the Earth. This centre of gravity remains on the line between the centres of the Earth and Moon as the Earth completes its diurnal rotation. The path of the Earth–Moon system in its solar orbit is defined as the movement of this mutual centre of gravity around the sun. So, in order to know the speed, we just have to figure out the distance traveled by the Earth when it goes once around the Sun. To do that we will assume that the orbit of the Earth is circular (which is not exactly right, it is more like an ellipse, but for our purpose a circle is close enough). So the distance traveled in one year is just the circumference of the circle. The atmosphere around the Earth rotates with the Earth. Everything on the ground, in the water, or in the air also rotates - with the Earth - at the same speed as the Earth. What can impact the travel time for east-west vs. west-east are the prevalent winds caused by coriolis effect which in turn arises because of the Earth’s rotation. A: A complete rotation of the earth on its axis takes approximately 23 hours, 56 minutes and four seconds with respect to the background stars. However, the sun returns to the same place in the sky (correcting for seasonal differences) every 24 hours. The Earth's Moon is the fifth largest in the whole solar system, and is bigger than the planet Pluto. The Moon has a nearly circular orbit (e=0.05) which is tilted about 5° to the plane of the Earth's orbit. Its average distance from the Earth is 384,400 km. The combination of the Moon's size and its distance from the Earth causes the Moon to appear the same size in the sky as the Sun, which is one reason we can have total solar eclipses. It takes the Moon 27.322 days to go around the Earth once. Query: how long does a earth rotation take",
"output": [
"It takes 24 days for earth to complete one rotation."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-70166b12b15d43a0b3ed70887a14c640",
"input": "Once nicotine consumption is stopped, then both nicotine levels and nicotine metabolite levels in the blood decrease, but it must be kept in mind that these levels do not disappear altogether. The simplest answer to the question of how long does it take for nicotine to leave your system is a few weeks. Once nicotine consumption is stopped, nicotine levels in the blood begin to gradually decrease. Nicotine has a half-life in the human body of 2 hours (although it can range from 1 to 4 hours in different individuals). The average smoker has a blood nicotine concentration of about 40 ng/ml after an evening cigarette. And usually when signing up for life insurance they will ASK you if you've smoked in the last 12 months, but the testing is not that thorough, its the same nicotine test no matter what, they dont take your hair or anything, its a simple blood test. Ive heard it takes 30 days but not 100% sure. Nicotine has been shown to be an even more addictive drug than others such as heroine! The lingering presence of nicotine in the body acts as a reminder for nicotine consumption. It is popularly believed that nicotine is released from the human body within 72 hours of its consumption, but the truth is far different. The various aspects of nicotine storage in the body last for weeks after the most recent consumption of nicotine. Many people wonder about how long nicotine stays in your blood. Blood harbors both nicotine and metabolites released by nicotine. I recently got hired for a job and had to undergo cotinine testing, however because I drank a lot of water, the lab requested a second test due to dilution. Before my first testing, I had been smoke free for 3 days. I took the test, then ignorantly lit a cigarette, it tasted awful.. I probably took 2 or 3 puffs off of it before throwing it out. Sorry to split hairs on this, but given that the typical half-life of nicotine is 2 hours, and that most assays have a limit of detection of 0.1 to 0.5 ng/ml, following the logic I described above, all the nicotine has gone from the blood stream within 24 hours. i.e. when you take a blood sample from a smoker 24 hours after their last smoke, they will most likely have a blood nicotine level <0.5 ng/ml. (i.e.>95% gone by 24 hrs). She's more concerned with how long it takes nicotine and what I would call, by products, from leaving her body, than she is as to why the doctor has asked her to quit smoking. She even said the doctor told her he wanted the nicotine out for 30 days so the surgery would be successful. How long can nicotine be detected in blood or urine after quiting smoking? [Top] The byproducts of nicotine can be detected in the blood for up to a month after you stop smoking. This is only of concern if you are in a situation where someone else might want to test you for the presence of nicotine or nicotine byproducts in your system. However, the metabolite of nicotine which is known as Cotinine leaves its traces in blood as well as in urine for up to 7 days. About 85 to 90 per cent of the nicotine which is present in your blood is metabolised by the liver and is thrown out of your system by the kidney. But due to the higher concentration, many a times, it still persists in the blood stream. Nicotine is a very highly addictive chemical that is the main component of cigarettes. Your body, especially your heart and lungs, will usually begin to heal at 12 hours after you’ve had your last cigarette/ stopped smoking. Finally, as nicotine levels in the blood keep decreasing over the coming weeks, the nicotine stored by various tissues in the body recedes to significantly lower levels. Patients with surgical procedures planned are often advised to quit smoking weeks before surgery so that healing can be improved. Query: how long before nicotine out of your blood",
"output": [
"All the nicotine has gone from the blood stream within 24 hours."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-452a5e73269b46509ac79462e4367931",
"input": "Popular Posts. 1 How Long Does Mail Take. 2 How Long Does The Flu Last. 3 How Long Does Suboxone Stay in Your System. 4 How Long Does It Take To Get Mri Results. 5 How Long Does It Take To Digest A Meal. 6 How Long Does It Take To Become An Architect. 7 How Long Does It Take To Lower Blood Pressure. How Long Will a New Furnace Last? November 3, 2016. A new furnace is a big investment. Asking how long it will last is a great question to answer before you put down the money for a new furnace. An Atlanta heating company can help you with the install of your new furnace, but first, let’s take a look at how different factors will affect its lifespan when you compare it to an older furnace. Simply put, today’s higher-efficient gas furnaces will not last as long as the old gravity furnace. Not because they were designed to fail, but because they were designed for efficiency. And as a result, more technology means more can go wrong. No one can guarantee how long your furnace will last, but by taking these measures, you can greatly impact its expected life span. If you have any questions about your heating system or what you can do to increase furnace life, contact Griffith Energy Services, Inc. Exterior fiberglass, steel and wood doors will last as long as the house exists, while vinyl and screen doors have a life expectancy of 20 and 40 years, respectively. Closet doors are expected to last a lifetime, and French doors have an average life of 30 to 50 years. The average lifespan of a gas furnace is 15 to 25 years. However, lifespan depends on a number of factors, including when the furnace was built, the materials it is made out of and... Star Gazing Law of Averages. Today's furnaces can easily operate for 20-30 years, though the average life expectancy is 16-20. How often your furnace is used determines wear and tear to parts involved in starting and stopping the system, such as fans and electronic ignitions. If your furnace came with your existing home, you can’t know how well it was cared for, and earlier neglect by previous owners is beyond your control. So when you ask “how long can my furnace last?,” the short answer is 25 to 40 percent longer than average—if you treat it well. The Longer Answer Today’s furnaces versus those of 40 or 50 years ago will average between 13 and 20 years of useful life. The average furnace lasts 15 to 20 years. This life span is typical of a furnace with a stainless or aluminized steel heat exchanger. In contrast, old furnaces with heavy metal heat exchangers last... The average furnace lasts 15 to 20 years. This life span is typical of a furnace with a stainless or aluminized steel heat exchanger. How old is your furnace? If it's 12 or more years old, then it may be time to say goodbye, says Richard Ciresi, president of highly rated Aire Serv Heating and Air Conditioning in Louisville, KY. Query: how long will a furnace last?",
"output": [
"The average furnace will last for 15 to 20 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e5094f84337d436586a08fc26d5bbfcf",
"input": "Most cuts of meat can be frozen for later use, and sliced lunch meat is no exception to this rule, but special care needs to be taken to ensure that frozen sliced lunch meat stays delicious from fridge to freezer and back again. Sliced chicken roll is available from the deli counter. Tips for use: Add chicken roll slices to sandwiches, or coarsely chop and use in salads or as a topping for bought pizza bases. How to store: Keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to two days. Tip: Keep deli meats well-chilled in the fridge so they stay at their fresh and flavoursome best. Image credit: Ben Dearnley; Publication: Taste.com.au Quick Answer. The amount of time deli meat can go without being refrigerated depends on the type of meat, but cured meats can usually go half a day without being refrigerated. Deli meats that are left in hot locations, such as vehicles, shouldn't be consumed because of the risk of bacteria. Depends on if the meat has Sodium Nitrates in it. Usually pork from the deli (ham, corned beef, pastrami, salami,etc) have this preservative and can last over a week without a problem. Turkey and roast beef do not have sodium nitrate added and shouldn't be eaten after 1 week. Tips. 1 How long does sliced turkey deli meat last in the fridge? The exact answer to that question depends to a large extent on storage conditions - keep turkey deli meat (also known as lunch meat, luncheon meat or cold cuts) refrigerated at all times. Large chunks of deli meat, as well as slices of deli meat, can be kept in the freezer for 1 to 2 months if properly packaged. After this time, the quality of the meat begins to deteriorate, affecting texture and flavor. Dry cured meats, because they contain less moisture, can be frozen for longer, up to 3 months. Though you can probably keep it a bit longer, I generally won't keep it more than a week (usually less for any meat). Normally, though, we'll get a smaller amount that will be gone in around three days. However, if there is a date on the package, by law, it must state clearly what the date signifies: 1 Sell by date means nothing more than telling the store how long to display the product for sale. 2 Best if used by date means the flavor, taste and quality of the product will be at its optimum before this date. The 5 Things You Need to Know. 1. There are three types of cold cut meat and poultry products. Whole cuts of meats or poultry that are cooked and then sliced (for examples: roast beef, corned beef, turkey breast), sectioned and formed products and processed products. So, if you like your meat spicy or salty, in sandwiches, pasta, or on its own, there’s a type to suit your tastebuds. The deli dozen To help you get to know the different types of deli meats available, we’ve put together this handy guide. Query: how long can you keep deli meat",
"output": [
"You keep sliced deli meat in the freezer for 1 to 2 months if properly packaged."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-5e64619ba555429fb0be99f67c4c0aef",
"input": "From Champagne to Bailey’s Irish Cream, here’s a consumer’s guide to how long your favorite bottles of alcohol will last once you pop the cork or break the seal. 1. Wine. iStock. While some wines improve with age, once opened, their shelf life drops dramatically. 2. Sparkling wine. iStock. You can still enjoy a half-finished bottle of wine -- but don't wait too long. (Image: ktsimage/iStock/Getty Images) Whether you only felt like a single glass or the party wound down with a few half-empty bottles lying around, you don't need to pour out the rest of your wine. Wine Life Expectancy. Exactly how long your wine will last depends on the wine itself. Most red and white wines will last for about two to three days after opening; after this point, they begin to sour and lose their flavor. Sparkling wines lose their carbonation almost immediately and should be enjoyed as soon as they are opened. How long does a box of red plonk tend to last, once opened, given that each contains about four litres when full? THE ANSWER As you tap the spout to pour, the bladder collapses, just like those burp-free Playtex Nurser baby bottles. This minimizes the wine's exposure to air, and thus to the corrosive effects of oxidation, as it's dispensed. A boxed wine can survive nicely for several weeks after opening. The bag offers a less-than-perfect hermetic seal, however. Small amounts of air get in over time, even if the box remains unopened. Typically, it's meant to be consumed within nine months to a year, and many boxes come stamped with best-before dates. Now here you are the next day/three days/week with half a bottle of wine and the timeless question: How long does an open bottle of wine last, really? Because wine can be made in so many different ways, it’s impossible to give you a hard out on all wines. That would be like asking how long you have to eat a Snickers after you unwrap it, versus how long you have to eat an organic banana after you peel it. They are radically different. One is built to sit on gas station shelves for years, and the other just got picked and has about three days before it dies. It's similar with wine. The best way to keep wine after you’ve opened it, is to remember to recork it and put it in the fridge. By recorking and refrigerating, you’re limiting the wine’s exposure to oxygen, heat, and light. These are all the things that take a bottle of wine from being next-day-decent to downright disgusting. If you were responsible enough to remember these precautions before you hit the hay, a bottle of red or white wine can last approximately between two and five days. By contrast, fortified wines such as port or sherry can last several weeks or more; the higher the alcohol content, the longer the life of the wine. Wine lifespan varies depending on the acidity of the wine; a high-acidity wine such as a Riesling or Sauvignon Blanc will survive a little longer than a lower-acidity wine such as a Pinot Grigio. For sparkling wine, you have one to three days (it will for sure go flat, but it’s still drinkable, and sometimes chugging flat sparkling wine after a long day is better than no wine at all). A wine could go bad in a day if it’s an unstable natural wine, or it could last for a week if it’s a highly tannic, commercial red you haven’t touched since the night you accidentally opened it. Boxed wine – it's nice to know this newspaper hasn't lost touch with the common folk. I believe this question is a sequel to a recent answer I tendered regarding the longevity of an open bottle. It was, of course, callously presumptuous of me to assume that all people drink wine from old-fangled glass containers. The answer is: pretty long. Chardonnay, Pinot Noir, Cabernet Sauvignon) are only good for approximately three to five days after opening. Alternatively, fortified wines such as Port and sweet wines such as Sauternes can last about a month after opening due to the acidity and high sugar content which act as preservatives. Query: how long will wine stay good after opening",
"output": [
"For sparkling wine, you have one to three days (it will for sure go flat, but it’s still drinkable, and sometimes chugging flat sparkling wine after a long day is better than no wine at all)."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3722d5298a3e44078f45c352540d4779",
"input": "Cold symptoms can differ from person to person, but they generally appear about one to three days after exposure to a cold-causing virus. In most cases, cold symptoms will peak around day four and taper off around day seven. The signs that you have a cold usually develop slowly. How long does it take for Chlamydia symptoms to show in men? Why do bruises sometimes take so long to show? How long does the cold virus incubate before showing symptoms? When can an elderly person go out with this bad flu season? How long does it take for a lung cancer to cause symptoms? How long should I wait to drink alcohol after taking medicines? How long does it take to heal after a fever? Flu symptoms usually start within one to four days after infection. Unlike a common cold, the effects of an influenza virus infection can come on very suddenly. The first signs of the flu are often a fever or chills, accompanied by headache, sore throat, dry cough, runny nose, muscle aches, and fatigue. Even in healthy people who don't develop flu complications, the flu itself can cause symptoms that may persist for weeks, including: 1 Fatigue. 2 Weakness. 3 Low appetite. 4 Dry cough. 5 Airway irritation that affects how long you can be active. 6 Loss of sense of smell, which in rare cases becomes permanent. An adult infected with influenza may be contagious from one day before symptoms start to 5 to 7 days after becoming sick. Children may continue to be contagious for longer than 7 days. Staying home until your contagious period has likely passed will help you avoid passing the flu on to other people. A person with the flu may experience fever, chills, sore throat, dry cough, headache, fatigue, muscle aches. The symptoms can last two to seven days. Children can sometimes suffer from nausea and vomiting, but these symptoms are uncommon in adults. Most healthy adults may be able to infect other people beginning 1 day before symptoms develop and up to 5 to 7 days after becoming sick. Children may pass the virus for longer than 7 days. Symptoms start 1 to 4 days after the virus enters the body. That means that you may be able to pass on the flu to someone else before you know you are sick, as well as while you are sick. Some people can be infected with the flu virus but have no symptoms. During this time, those persons may still spread the virus to others. A bout of the flu typically lasts one to two weeks, with severe symptoms subsiding in two to three days. However, weakness, fatigue, dry cough, and a reduced ability to exercise can linger for three to seven days. How Long Is the Flu Contagious? As the illness progresses, a person may have warm, flushed skin, watery or bloodshot eyes, a severe cough that brings up phlegm, nasal congestion, and nausea and vomiting. A bout of flu typically lasts one to two weeks, with severe symptoms subsiding in two to three days. However, weakness, fatigue, dry cough, and a reduced ability to exercise can linger for three to seven days. How Long Is the Flu Contagious? A 2013 survey conducted by the National Foundation for Infectious Diseases revealed that 41 percent of people think the flu is only contagious after symptoms start. That’s not true. Answer Wiki. For influenza in particular, as Quora User says, a typical incubation period would be 1-4 days. That's a reasonable range for many other viruses, too, especially respiratory viruses. Gastrointestinal viruses probably average a little shorter incubation time. Query: how long does flu take to show symptoms",
"output": [
"Flu symptoms usually start within one to four days after infection."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9261906e99224a0292cfa1d776d5fb71",
"input": "Best Answer: It all depends on how fast or slow your teeth move the way your dentist want them to move. I was supposed to take my braces off last christmas but I still have them on because my teeth arent cooperating. Braces can stay on for a year or 2 . maybe even more. It all depends on how much work the dentist has to do. There's more than one path to straight teeth. The type of treatment you choose depends on how your teeth need to move to streamline your smile. Regular braces: These use gentle pressure to move your teeth into place over time. Your orthodontist will glue brackets to the front of your teeth and connect them with a wire. He'll tighten that wire every 4 to 6 weeks. This slowly moves your teeth or jaw or both into place. It depends on your treatment, but the average adult has braces for 18 months to 3 years. It usually costs between $5,000 and $6,000. Other braces: If having a metal smile bothers you, ceramic braces are another option. The brackets are the color of your teeth, which makes them harder to see. How long should all the teeth look PERFECT before they can take the braces off. In other words.. how long do your teeth have to be in a perfect position, with NOTHING left to work on in your mouth (at least to your visible eye) before the braces come off? I was always under the assumption there was a retention phase while in braces, but is it possible to just take them off right after things are done, and retain immediately with only retainers?? You should then keep wearing your removable retainers 1-2 nights a week for as long as possible; in other words for as long as you want your teeth to remain straight! This is called ‘long-term retention’. Modern braces by Dudley Smiles However long you may need treatment, you can rest assured that many of today’s braces are more comfortable and less noticeable than ever before. Modern orthodontics are a great option for any age, and braces remain a popular and effective method for straightening teeth and correcting bite. “Will I have to do to PROM with braces on? Will I have to get my DRIVER’S LICENSE with braces on? Will I have to get MARRIED with braces on? Will I DIE with braces on? Good grief! Why can’t they just tell me that my braces can come off TODAY?!” Here’s the answer: There isn’t a certain time that braces must be on teeth to finish the job. Every single patient is unique in what he or she needs. Every patient’s treatment plan is different in order get the result that he or she wants – that perfect smile to go with every situation imaginable. Before. 1 If traded with conventional braces, this young man's case would most likely have required the extraction of four teeth to make room for his severe crowding, and he would have been in treatment for two years or more. This would have resulted in a narrower smile, and a negative effect on his profile in later years. When most people think of orthodontic braces, they think of teenagers. But an increasing amount of adults are getting braces, too. As long as your teeth and gums are healthy, you could benefit from getting your teeth straightened. One of the most important things to consider is the state of your gums and jaw bones. If you have unhealthy gums, a lot of gum recession, or bone loss, braces may not be recommended because the pressure they put on your gums could cause unfavorable complications. If indeed your back teeth are already in good position and you're only straightening front teeth it should take less than a year. Braces are often worn up to 3 months AFTER the teeth are straight in order to stabilize the new position of the teeth and provide better long-term stability. Hope this helps...GOOD LUCK! How long will it take to fix an overbite with braces? Dr. S. Jay Bowman Dr. Bowman Overbite: In layman's terms, an overbite typically refers to the upper front teeth sticking out horizontally, further than the lower front teeth. An orthodontist defines an overbite as the vertical overlap of the upper front teeth over the lower front teeth. They are very different situations unfortunately with the same name. Query: how long do braces stay on teeth",
"output": [
"The braces stay on teeth for 18 months to 3 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-89f6fdb10c4746789ebe059f3574e483",
"input": "they partially digest it extracellulary then they pass it on via a common gastrovascular cavity to other members of the colony where intracellular digestion occurs. how do gastrozooids digest food for hydrozoas? Phylum Cnidaria - General Characteristics - Duration: 9:00. Hillary Wilson 19,014 views Where is food digested in cnidarian? Food, either particles or fish, depending on the specie, is taken into the mouth by lips, then passed down using muscular actions to complete swallowing. The mouth is subdiv … ided into minute pores that lead to the coelenteron by tubes. Cnidarians have a gastrovascular cavity with one opening. They pull in food (smaller animals) with their stinging tentacles. In the cavity, enzymes break down the food. Nutrie … nts diffuse directly to the body and waste is expelled out of the opening. Actually, the nutrients do not diffuse correctly my friend, it takes a little while. Encyclopedia articles cnidaria feeding digestioncnidaria feeding, respiration, and excretion in a cnidarian. They pull in food (smaller animals) with their stinging tentacles. The collar cells of sponges trap and digest food. They have a flat body because they do not coelom or even pseudocoelom. Re how do hydra digest food madsci network. Many animals rely on organs such as the liver, pancreas and intestines to aid in digestion, the jellyfish has none of these. A single cavity, the coelenteron, serves as a jellyfish’s stomach and intestine. Food that makes it into the jellyfish’s stomach is broken down by digestive enzymes produced by cells lining the inner body cavity. Quick Answer. Cnidarians obtain food, mostly prey animals such as crustaceans and fish, by passively waiting for animals to pass by and touch their tentacles, whereupon they poison them and draw them toward their mouths to be digested. Cnidaria (/naɪˈdɛəriə/[4]) is a phylum containing over 10,000[5] species of animals found exclusively in aquatic (freshwater and marine) environments: they are predominantly marine species. Their distinguishing feature is cnidocytes, specialized cells that they use mainly for capturing prey. Digestion, respiration, and excretion. Food is taken in and wastes are discharged through the mouth. Extracellular digestion occurs in the coelenteron, which has, in all except hydrozoans The Cnidaria's digestive system is very complex but also simple. They have a one way digestive system. On way meaning that all of food ( digested or not ) go through the same way. This process is called the Gastrovascular Cavity. Every animal has their way of surviving this forever changing world. Some animals do the hunting while others get hunted. Fortunately the Cnidaria's are the hunters in this situation. Query: how is food digested in a cnidarian?",
"output": [
"Cnidarians have a gastrovascular cavity with one opening. They pull in food with their stinging tentacles. In the cavity, enzymes break down the food. Nutrients diffuse directly to the body and waste is expelled out of the opening. Actually, the nutrients do not diffuse correctly my friend, it takes a little while."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-812e635917e144deafd1db889d88938d",
"input": "Another way of knowing you’ve got a muscle strain is by the location. Muscle strains are much more common in some muscles than others. Every “groin pull” is a muscle strain of one or more of your hip adductors, for instance. You can strain virtually any muscle in your body, but the commonly strained muscles are: the hamstrings Searching for muscle strain is a bit tricky, because “muscle strain” is mentioned in lots of papers that aren’t really about muscle strain. But if you cleverly search for the terms “muscle strain” only in titles, you will get, as of 4/14/07, only 61 search results, even less than iliotibial band syndrome (another under-studied condition). Muscle Strain Overview Muscle strain, muscle pull, or even a muscle tear refers to damage to a muscle or its attaching tendons. You can put undue pressure on muscles during the course of normal daily activities, with sudden heavy lifting, during sports, or while performing work tasks. Some of the things that get confused with muscle strains are (and these will all be covered in more detail below): 1 Muscle cramps and spasms (charlie horses) are whole muscle contractions, ranging from uncomfortable to those howling, awful attacks that usually afflict the calves and feet. Typical symptoms of a lower back pulled muscle include some combination of the following: 1 The pain is usually localized in the lower back, meaning that it doesn’t radiate into the leg (as in sciatica) 2 The lower back may be sore upon touch. 3 Pain usually comes on suddenly. Though not serious, back muscle spasms can cause significant pain. Inflammation also causes pain. Healing time depends on the severity of the strain. Mild muscle strains usually heal within two weeks. Moderate muscle strains may take six to eight weeks to heal. Prevention of Recurring Back Strain Moderate muscle strains may take six to eight weeks to heal. Prevention of Recurring Back Strain. Many people who experience recurring back pain have weak core muscles - the muscles that support the back. Strengthening these muscles can prevent back strain from recurring, though the time for strength exercises is after the back pain has resolved. Like back strain, back sprains may trigger back muscle spasms. Healing time depends on the severity of the sprain. Most back sprains heal in six to eight weeks but it can take several months for complete recovery from a severe back sprain. To help prevent muscle strains: 1 Warm up before participating in sports and activities. 2 Follow an exercise program aimed at stretching and strengthening your muscles. 3 Increase the intensity of your training program gradually. Never push yourself too hard, too soon. 4 Maintain a healthy body weight. Here’re are some easy steps to get you back in the gym or back on the mat, without pain: 1 Rest. 2 Go see a good chiropractor, acupuncturist, or massage therapist. 3 Cupping. 4 Foam Roller. 5 Anti-Inflammatory Diet. 6 Ice. Query: how long for a muscle strain of the back to heal?",
"output": [
"Moderate muscle strains of the back may take six to eight weeks to heal."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8c7b0d801af84a96a82e5d2592adf90a",
"input": "Good nutritional status is known to be important for normal cognitive functioning, but the role of diet in the prevention of age-related cognitive decline is not well understood. Adequate dietary intake of B vitamins, antioxidant vitamins, essential minerals, and omega-3 fatty acids may help protect against the cognitive decline associated with normal aging . Effects of Nutrition and Exercise on Cognitive Performance Diet, nutrition and exercise are as important in chess as they are in any other sport. The following is a brief guide containing basic advice on nutrition and exercise for optimum physical and cognitive performance. Because age-related cognitive decline has been linked to free radical-induced oxidative damage in the brain , antioxidant supplements might help protect against cognitive aging. Prospective cohort studies have reported that vitamin C intake from supplements or vitamin E intake from food and supplements was associated with some protection against cognitive decline. Cognitive function did not decline in either group over the two-year period , suggesting that longer intervention trials are needed to determine whether long-chain omega-3 fatty acids have utility in the prevention of age-related cognitive decline. Cerebral blood supply. At rest, the brain receives approximately 15% of cardiac output (9). Proper cerebral blood supply is necessary to deliver oxygen, glucose and other macronutrients, and the required micronutrients for proper cognitive function. Nutrition has a role in maintaining optimal blood supply to the brain. DIET AND NUTRITION A balanced diet is as essential for cognition as for any other bodily process – you require protein, carbohydrates, vitamins, minerals and fats for your brain and your body to function properly. A diet high in saturated fats and refined sugars such as sucrose and fructose can contribute to cognitive impairment and decline. To take an advanced case, memory impairment has long been observed in adults with type-2 diabetes and numerous studies have demonstrated that both poor glycemic control and acute ingestion of high glycemic index carbohydrate foods leads to lower performance and memory impairment. For more information on micronutrients and phytochemicals related to cognitive decline or neurodegenerative diseases, see the article on Micronutrients for Older Adults. Cognitive decline has been linked to decreased levels of docosahexaenoic acid (DHA) in the brain . Thus, effects of dietary calcium inadequacy would primarily result in negative effects to bone health. Interestingly, changes in calcium homeostasis in the brain may contribute to the cognitive decline associated with normal aging and possibly to the development of neurodegenerative disorders (61, 62). Summary. 1 The brain requires a constant supply of micronutrients for energy metabolism of neurons and glial cells, neurotransmitter synthesis and action, nerve impulse propagation, and homocysteine metabolism. 2 Deficiencies in various micronutrients, especially the B vitamins, have adverse effects on cognition. As always, consuming a healthy, balanced diet and exercising moderately and regularly is the best advice for maintaining optimum cognitive and physical health. The following are good general rules: 1. Query: how does nutrition affect cognitive decline",
"output": [
"Effects of Nutrition and Exercise on Cognitive Performance Diet, nutrition and exercise are as important in chess as they are in any other sport."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f6f90fd7bcaa4711a1a04d4579ee76d8",
"input": "Many community colleges have “articulation agreements” with four-year colleges under which the course work taken at the community college transfers into the four-year degree program. Be sure to ask about the types of articulation agreements the community college has, with whom, and for what programs of study. T or F? The NHCSS Therapeutic services standard specify the knowledge and skills required of workers in healthcare careers involved in creating a picture of the patient's health status had a single point in time. Upper Division - Course work normally taken in the third and fourth years of college, at the junior and senior levels. Courses numbered 300-499 are upper division. Yavapai College does not offer upper division courses. The Associate of Arts degree is awarded for the successful completion of courses designed as the first two years of a four-year college/university curriculum leading to a baccalaureate degree. This degree encompasses programs listed under University Parallel Programs in this catalog. Awarded by a vocational-technical school or community college after completion of a prescribed two year course of study. Bachelor's Degree: Awarded by a college or university after a prescribed course of study that usually lasts 4 years. Master's Degree: Awarded by a college or university after completition of one or more years of work (usually 2)beyond a bachelor's degree. Doctorate or Doctor's degree: Awarded by a college or university after completition of 2 or more years of work beyond a ... An instructor may drop a student after the student misses more than the number of absences per semester hour that the course carries. Excused absences are permitted at the discretion of the instructor and are not counted as absences. Official absences are excused by the college and are not counted as absences. What is a degree awarded by a college or university after a prescribed course of study that usually lasts four or more years? ChaCha ... bachelor's degree first degree awarded by a university or a degree-granting college after three or four years of full-time study or completion of a specified number of credits by part-time study. bursary a cash award to help students pay for their education presented on the basis of financial need and/or academic achievement. C The Bachelor of Landscape Architecture is awarded to students who complete the four year course of study in the field. [edit] BDes The Bachelor of Design is awarded to those who complete the four years course of study in the Design, usually majoring in a specific field of Design. [edit] BLA, ABL, or BSGS Students who attend a four-year college or university typically earn a bachelor’s degree once they have successfully completed a program of study, which usually takes about four years. A college usually offers a four-year bachelor’s degree in the arts (such as English, history, drama) or sciences (such as biology, computer science, engineering). Query: a/n _____________ is awarded by a college or university after a prescribed course of study that usually lasts four or more years. *",
"output": [
"Bachelor's Degree is awarded by a college or university after a prescribed course of study that usually lasts four or more years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f949cf0b01cf47a78a60dd3ae7eb4437",
"input": "A heart attack can happen to anyone, woman or man, young or old. Some people are more at risk because of certain health problems, family health history, age, and habits. These are called risk factors. You can't change some risk factors, like your age, race or ethnicity, or family history. A Month Before a Heart Attack, Your Body Will Warn You With These 8 Signals! - Duration: 6:24. 7ReMix Healthy Tips TV 189,400 views A heart attack occurs when one or more of your coronary arteries become blocked. Over time, a coronary artery can narrow from the buildup of various substances, including cholesterol (atherosclerosis). This condition, known as coronary artery disease, causes most heart attacks. Although a heart attack is a frightening event, if you learn the signs of a heart attack and what steps to take, you can save a life—perhaps even your own. Many people think that heart attacks are a “man’s problem,” yet heart disease is actually the number one killer of both men and women in the United States. To diagnose a heart attack, an emergency care team will ask you about your symptoms and begin to evaluate you. The diagnosis of the heart attack is based on your symptoms and test results. The goal of treatment is to treat you quickly and limit heart muscle damage. Tests to Diagnose a Heart Attack. ECG . Symptoms of a heart attack may be immediate and intense. More often, though, symptoms start slowly and persist for hours, days or weeks before a heart attack. Unlike with sudden cardiac arrest, the heart usually does not stop beating during a heart attack. The heart attack symptoms in women can be different than men. What is cardiac arrest? About every 40 seconds, someone in the United States has a myocardial infarction (heart attack). Your heart muscle needs oxygen to survive. A heart attack occurs when the blood flow that brings oxygen to the heart muscle is severely reduced or cut off completely (View an animation of blood flow). Several studies have demonstrated that there is seasonal variation in heart attacks. They are most likely to occur in the winter, and least likely to occur in the summer. This is not just true for heart attacks, but also other cardiovascular events. Several explanations have been proposed. Heart attacks may seem like a senior citizen phenomenon, considering that about 82% of people who die of coronary heart disease are at least 65, according to the American Heart Association. But sudden heart problems can occur much earlier in life, too. Every 40 seconds, someone in the United States has a heart attack. 1. A heart attack, also called a myocardial infarction, occurs when a part of the heart muscle doesn’t receive enough blood flow. The more time that passes without treatment to restore blood flow, the greater the damage to the heart muscle. Query: how does a heart attack occur",
"output": [
"A heart attack occurs when one or more of your coronary arteries become blocked."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-686075aa51774d38ac7abd89f7eb2212",
"input": "Also, because Down's syndrome is present from the time of conception, nothing a woman does in pregnancy will influence whether or not her baby has Down's syndrome. Nothing is known which could have stopped the parent giving an extra chromosome. While similar to simple trisomy 21, the difference is that the extra chromosome 21 is present in some, but not all cells, of the individual. This type of Down syndrome is caused by abnormal cell division after fertilization. The name comes from a random order of normal and abnormal cells (a mosaic). Although translocation Down syndrome occurs via a different mechanism than trisomy 21, the physical and features that mark the condition are the same. Mosaic Down Syndrome In mosaic Down syndrome, not all cells in the body have 46 chromosomes. Translocation Down syndrome: This type accounts for a small percentage of people with Down syndrome (about 3%). 2 This occurs when an extra part or a whole extra chromosome 21 is present, but it is attached or “trans-located” to a different chromosome rather than being a separate chromosome 21. References: 1 Coleman, Mary and Rogers, PT. Medical Care in Down Syndrome: A Preventative Medicine Approach. 2 Korenberg, JR et al. Down syndrome phenotypes: The consequences of chromosomal imbalance. 3 Patterson, D. The integrated map of human chromosome 21. In Etiology and Pathogenesis of Down Syndrome, Wiley-Liss, 1995, p 43-55. Additional NIH Resources (2 links) 1 National Human Genome Research Institute: Chromosome Abnormalities. 2 National Human Genome Research Institute: Down Syndrome Research Expedited by Decoding of Human Chromosome 21 - Second Human Chromosome Sequenced by the Human Genome Project (May 2000) Like trisomy 21, mosaic Down syndrome is not inherited. It occurs as a random event during cell division early in fetal development. As a result, some of the body's cells have the usual two copies of chromosome 21, and other cells have three copies of this chromosome. responsible for only one to two percent of cases with Down syndrome. Translocation, the third form, occurs in only three to four percent of people with Down syndrome. In translocation, a piece of chromosome or a whole chromosome breaks off during meiosis and attaches itself to another chromosome. The presence of an extra part of the number 21 chromosome causes the features of Down syndrome. Although most cases are the result of random events, the risk of recurrence may be greater for The most common type of unbalanced translocation is translocation Down syndrome. Translocation Down syndrome produces the same symptoms and physical characteristics of regular Down syndrome. In the translocation type of Down syndrome, the child has three copies of the long arm of chromosome 21 instead of two. The chromosomes of parents of a child with Down Syndrome caused by a translocation are studied to see whether the translocation was inherited. What is the treatment for Down syndrome? Treatment for Down syndrome is based on the person's physical problems and intellectual challenges. Query: how does translocation of down syndrome occur",
"output": [
"Translocation of down syndrome occurs when extra chromosome 21 is present, but it is attached or “trans-located” to a different chromosome rather than being a separate chromosome 21."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-fe4feb01a9ff404c855b26a434da12df",
"input": "Xanax doesnt flush out with water and it takes a long time to fully metabolize. I took one dose prior to a dental appt and had it show on a pre-employment screen about 4-6 weeks later and that is supposed to be the detection time for chronic use but I took only one dose (1mg) prior to a dental appt because that is the ONLY time I use Xanax so I know exactly when I took it and how long it had been. I have panic attacks, and never take these besides this one time. Answer. Xanax, or alprazolam, is an anti-anxiety medication that is in a class of compounds called benzodiazepines. As you know, it can be an effective treatment for a number of anxiety disorders, such as panic disorders. However, it also has a high potential for abuse and/or dependence. In older or obese people, or those with liver disease, Xanax’s half-life is longer, as long as 40 hours. It takes several half-lives to eliminate a drug completely. So for most people, there may still be a small fraction of Xanax in your blood two days or more after taking a single pill. In order to address your particular concerns and questions regarding this medication, I recommend that you schedule an appointment to speak with your doctor, so that he or she can address your individual case. Having said that, the average half-life of xanax is approximately 11 hours. This means that half of the medication will have left the body by that time. On the other hand, it is important to note that everyone metabolizes medications differently, so this half-life can range from 6 to 26 hours, depending on the person and the dose and frequency of the use of the medication. However, Xanax remains in the bloodstream long after its anti-anxiety effects have worn off. Xanax’s average half-life is 11 hours. This means that it takes an average of 11 hours for the body to eliminate half the Xanax dose. I know everyone is different but this is my story. I don't take Xanax but I took 1 mg a day for 7 days straight and than stopped completely, my system was totally clean before I started taking them. My job does test so I had purchased some drug screen urine test cards for benzos just to see how long it would take before it got out of my system. I figured probably 72 hours, well it actually took 8 days for my tests to start reading a negative result. Here's what my pdoc told me to help the xanax get in your system quicker. Take a drink of water and make sure your mouth is wet. Chew up the xanax and then stick it between your upper lip and teeth. Leave there. It will kick in about 10 to 15 mins if not sooner. I do this when having a really bad attack. Xanax is a little bitter but you can actually get used to it. When it's been long enough take another drink of water and swallow it all. This helps it to get into your blood stream much quicker rather than going through your stomach lining. I hope this helps. As for how many to take a day I would talk to your dr about that. deleted_user 12/03/2007 I used to take Klonopin, then Ativan and my recent doctor finally put me on Xanax, which is truly a lifesaver. Zocdoc › Answers › I took 2mg xanax 1 time. How long will it stay in my system? I have panic attacks, and never take these besides this one time deleted_user 12/02/2007. I take 1 mg twice a day so I think one of mine is like 4 of yours but I wouldn't suggest taking that many if your not used to it, as far as how long it takes it usually takes mine about 15 to 30 min. Sometimes just the fact that I took one makes me feel better instantly. Details: I took .5 of alprazolam two days ago and 1mg of it yesterday. (Two .25 pills two days ago and four .25 pills yesterday). I am 5'7 and 170 pounds with a very high metabolism, I am moderately active and I drink an immense amount of water normally. Seeing as I am very athletic I have very little fat on me. Query: how long does it take for daily xanax to leave your system",
"output": [
"Xanax’s average half-life is 11 hours. This means that it takes an average of 11 hours for the body to eliminate half the Xanax dose."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4d5a464166e84d4dab5577a8c9d9acb1",
"input": "The 2014 rejection had become Nagasu's skating identity, supplanting the fact she had won a national championship in 2008 at the age of 14 and was narrowly denied a medal at the 2010 Olympics. Nagasu was joined on the awards podium by champion Bradie Tennell, bronze medalist Karen Chen and Olympic alternate Ashley Wagner. She was still crying in, appropriately, the kiss and cry area when the marks showed Nagasu she had shattered her personal best by nearly 20 points with a 213.84. Facebook Twitter Pinterest Mirai Nagasu performs during Friday night’s free skate. Photograph: Tony Avelar/AP Chen’s big season last year had not translated into achievement this campaign. She put those struggles to an icy death with a superb showing that had one flaw toward the end. She, too, was overcome by tears for a 198.59 score. skating notes Began skating at age 5 ... Previously coached by Sashi Kuchiki, Sondra Holmes, Bob Paul, Sandy Gollihugh, Susan Austin, Charlene Wong, Frank Carroll and Amy Evidente. personal notes Twitter: @mirai_nagasu Instagram: mirainagasu Official site. SKATING NOTES. Began skating at age 5 ... Previously coached by Sashi Kuchiki, Sondra Holmes, Bob Paul, Sandy Gollihugh, Susan Austin, Charlene Wong, Frank Carroll and Amy Evidente. PERSONAL NOTES. Graduated Capistrano Connections Academy in 2011 ... Triple axel launches Nagasu into history books; Veterans lead Canada to Olympic team gold medal; Nagasu endures hard times with parents' support 'Comeback kid' Nagasu perseveres to reach dream; Cinderella Story: Unflappable Tennell wins U.S. title; Tennell, Nagasu, Chen named to Olympic team; Tennell edges Nagasu with record short program Her top competitors, Mirai Nagasu and Karen Chen, already had put down superb routines. “I just had to keep calm and focus on what I knew I could do,” Tennell said. “There’s the initial butterflies, but I kind of start to lose myself and keep going. Videos of Mirai Nagasu. 1 2016 World Championships - Ladies Short Program. 2 Mirai Nagasu's 2016 Four Continents Ladies Free Skate. 3 2016 Four Continents Championships - Ladies FS. 4 2017 Aerial Figure Skating Challenge. 5 Mirai Nagasu's 2017 Four Continents Free Skate. 6 2017 Four Continents Championships - Ladies Awards. Videos of Mirai Nagasu. 2016 World Championships - Ladies Short Program. Mirai Nagasu's 2016 Four Continents Ladies Free Skate. 2016 Four Continents Championships - Ladies FS. 2017 Aerial Figure Skating Challenge. Mirai Nagasu's 2017 Four Continents Free Skate. Bradie Tennell wins surprise US figure skating title ahead of Mirai Nagasu Tennell wins title ahead of Nagasu and Karen Chen at US nationals Wagner ‘absolutely furious’ about judging after fourth-place finish SAN JOSE, Calif. — If ever an athlete were entitled to immerse herself in bitterness and carry a glacial-sized chip on her shoulder, it was figure skater Mirai Nagasu. Four years ago, Nagasu had her Olympic quest crushed not by a competitive failure but rather a boardroom decision. Query: at what age did mirai nagasu start skating",
"output": [
"Mirai Nagasu started skating at age 5."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-208f2aa6b5f34ca487e289d65a3a5314",
"input": "Needs other sources: Pediasure only contains a small amount or iron. The child must need iron from other sources in the diet. Pediasure only contains 15% of the days requirement for iron. Iron suppements can be used or foods containing more iron should be introduced in to the diet. Meats, fish and green leafy vegetables are good sources of iron. ... Description: PediaSure liquid nutrition for children is an isotonic enteral nutritional product designed to provide complete balanced nutrition for children 1 to 10 years of age. Fed either by tube or orally, PediaSure can be used as total enteral nutrition support or as a supplement. Indications And Clinical Uses: Enteral nutritional support by tube or by mouth for children 1 to 10 years of age. Support for growth. Talk to a healthcare professional about use of this product if your child is younger than 2 years of age. PediaSure products are not intended for infants younger than 1 year of age. According to the American Academy of Pediatrics, infants under a year old should be breastfed or fed an iron-fortified infant formula. Still searching? Pediasure: hellomy son is 14 months old but weighs only 9 kilos hence i am feeding him pedisure from past 2 days.has any one used pediasure for babies aged between 1 to 2 years? does ... Advertisement That’s the equivalent of 4.5 teaspoons of sugar per one bottle of PediaSure©. No wonder kids love this drink! What other dirty ingredients are in PediaSure©? After sugar, it is followed by Corn Maltodextrin (GMO – genetically modified organism), which is used as a thickener in soft drinks, salad dressings, and soups. When you have an unpredictable eater, PediaSure SideKicks ® helps fill in the gaps. LEARN MORE Pediasure (Strawberry) 8-Fl-Oz Can Ready To Use . - 1 Case Of 24. PediaSure is a source of complete, balanced nutrition specially designed for the oral feeding of children 1 to 13 years of age. May be used as the sole source of nutrition or as a supplement. Formulated for oral feeding. PEDIASURE 1.5 CAL WITH FIBER is a higher* caloric density product designed to meet the higher energy requirements of pediatric patients who are at risk for malnutrition, require a higher caloric density, or have fluid restrictions. PEDIASURE 1.5 CAL WITH FIBER provides a source of Complete, Balanced Nutrition® for children 1 to 13 years of age. May be used as the sole source of nutrition or as a supplement. Formulated for oral or tube feeding. Use under medical supervision. * PediaSure Complete ® can be heated so that it is warm, but should not be made so hot as to burn the mouth. Be sure to check the temperature of the product before offering it to your child. (Although it is not necessary to check the temperature with a thermometer, if one is used, the temperature should be in the range of 100°F to 110°F.) Milk-based, complete, balanced nutrition -- 1.0 Cal per mL, 237 Cal per 8 fl oz, from a balanced distribution of protein, fat and carbohydrate (protein 12%, fat 35%, carbohydrate 53%) 1 For tube or oral feeding. 2 Gluten-free and lactose-free (Not for children with galactosemia.) 3 Calcium/phosphorus ratio of 1.2:1. Query: at what age may pediasure be used",
"output": [
"PediaSure products are intended for infants more than 1 year of age."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-57d9ab0c2fbd457badde221e807be9ff",
"input": "The race is started from a stationary position. Weight is crucial; lugers weighing less than the basic weights — 165 pounds for women, 198 pounds for men — can make up the weight, with some restrictions. The extra weights are attached to the luger, not the luge. Garments must meet a number of requirements and are limited to 8.8 pounds of maximum weight. Luge runners may not be heated and are checked before each run. Winners are determined by the aggregate times of four runs for singles and two runs for doubles. Walter Plaikner, the chairman of the federation’s technical commission and coach of the Italian luge team, told reporters a year ago that 150 k.p.h. was “about as fast as we can go in our sport.” In the first Olympic training run Friday at the Whistler Sliding Centre, seven luge riders surpassed 150 k.p.h. But Olympic and luge officials chose not to make changes to the course that would limit the record speeds — in excess of 90 miles per hour, or 145 kilometers per hour — that the sliding-sport athletes were attaining. Answers.com ® WikiAnswers ® Categories Sports Olympics Winter Olympic Games Olympics Luge How fast does luge go? Venue: Luge events will take place at a track called Spiral, the first artificial ice track in Asia, which is located in the foothills of Mount Iizuna in the Asakawa district in the northern part of Nagano City. The 1,700-meter track has an elevation of 113 meters and encompasses 15 curves. History: Although the sport of luge is sometimes thought of as being relatively new, sled racing is actually one of the oldest of all winter sports. The word luge comes from the French word for sled. In Germany it is known as rodel, and it is in the alpine countries of Europe that the sport began. At the turn of the century, luge was actually governed by the International Bobsled Federation which administered all the ice-track racking sports. In 1953, the sport gained its own International Governing Body with the formation of the Federation Internationale de Luge de course (FIL), and in 1964 it was inaugurated as an Olympic sport at the Winter Games in Innsbruck. Having no formal luge program at the time, the first U.S. team was made up of American soldiers who were stationed in Europe. Back in the United States, luge attracted a small number of athletes who were relegated to training on the 1932 Olympic bobsled run in Lake Placid, N.Y. How do fast cars go fast? A long-stretched transmission, and an engine that can power it til the end, along with aerodynamics to enable it to run at high speeds. Edit It is a familiar emotion for athletes in the sliding sports. Whistler immediately became the fastest track in the world, eliciting speeds of nearly 96 m.p.h. (about 154 kilometers per hour) in luge, a sport in which riders lie on a sled and wear little protection but a skintight suit and a helmet. Manuel Pfister of Austria reached 95.6 m.p.h. (154 k.p.h.), the fastest luge speed recorded during a training run on Thursday. “We are going to have to put in speed limits for the next track,” the luge federation’s spokesman, Wolfgang Harder, told Reuters on Thursday, referring to the next Olympics. Query: how fast is a luge rider going?",
"output": [
"A luge rider is going 95.6 m.p.h. (154 k.p.h.) fast."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f88e96e1b42141398facf6ff4a6475e9",
"input": "But that doesn't mean knee replacement surgery turns you into the Bionic Man. In fact, you will have restrictions after surgery, both temporary and long term. Also, knee replacements last for many years, but you may need revision surgery. About 90 percent of knee replacement patients have a successful outcome following surgery. If you answered yes to most or all of the questions, you may be a candidate for knee replacement surgery. How Are Patients Evaluated for Knee Replacement? Most total knee replacement patients are 60 to 80 years old, but some patients are younger or older and do very well following surgery. FRIDAY, March 22 (HealthDay News) -- Getting back to work after knee-replacement surgery is a big concern for people contemplating the procedure. Now, a new study shows that most people return to work after a total knee replacement-- even those with physically demanding jobs. The research, scheduled for presentation Thursday at the annual meeting of the American Academy of Orthopaedic Surgeons in Chicago, shows that 98 percent of people who undergo total knee replacements are able to go back to work afterward. Hi Sue- I've just read your post from 5 months ago and wondering how you got on , when did you return to work and how you've coped once there? I am having a knee replacement in 3 weeks time and I am a full time teaching assistant in a reception class- 4-5 year olds! I want to help out school as much as possible by giving a realistic prediction so they can arrange a temporary replacement for me. The time a knee replacement patient can return to work varies not only by the individual, but also by the type of profession. Patients employed in sedentary jobs may be able to return to work when they can safely travel to and from their job, generally between 2 to 6 weeks. After your hip replacement surgery, you will most likely be in the hospital for three to five days. In some cases, patients will stay for additional days of rehabilitation, but typically discharge takes place within one week. The following is a chart of the estimated cost of knee replacement around the world: Country Estimated Price (USD) United States $45,000-$60,000 Singapore $18,000-$22,000 Thailand $12,000-$14,000 Taiwan $9,000-$10,000 India $7,000-$11,000 If you are an Australian citizen or permanent resident, you can have it done for nothing under the nationally ... Knee replacement surgery is one of the most common bone surgeries in the U.S. If you have severe arthritis, an injury, or a condition that affects your knees, learn more about the type of surgery that might be right for you. Various sources have published statistics on the long-term revision rates for knee replacement. According to the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality (AHRQ), and by observing TKR patients over an eight-year period ending in 2003, the long-term revision rate is 2 percent for five or more years. Return to work should be phased, however, with three half-days in the first week, two full days in the second week, five half-days in the third week, and full-time by week four. Recovery from knee replacement surgery takes a minimum of three months, but most likely six. A full recovery can take around eight to ten months. The degree of improvement during rehabilitation often depends on the strength of your body before surgery, your body weight, and your ability to manage pain. Query: how long are you off from work for a knee replacement",
"output": [
"You are off from work for a knee replacement is about 2 to 6 weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ee89bd3a0d354066a1c598b1908068c4",
"input": "There are 73.92 miles from Birmingham to Piedmont in northeast direction and 86 miles (138.40 kilometers) by car, following the I-59 route. Birmingham and Piedmont are 1 hour 42 mins far apart, if you drive non-stop. This is the fastest route from Birmingham, AL to Piedmont, AL. The halfway point is Ashville, AL. Birmingham, AL and Piedmont, AL are in the same time zone (Central Daylight Time). Current time in both locations is 1:27 am. The standard cancellation rate when flying from Birmingham to Piedmont Triad International is 1.9 percent; Flights from Birmingham to Piedmont Triad International typically have a delay of 24 mins; Between Birmingham and Piedmont Triad International, the delay rate is 6.6% There are 73.92 miles from Piedmont to Birmingham in southwest direction and 86 miles (138.40 kilometers) by car, following the I-59 route. Piedmont and Birmingham are 1 hour 43 mins far apart, if you drive non-stop. This is the fastest route from Piedmont, AL to Birmingham, AL. The halfway point is Steele, AL. Piedmont, AL and Birmingham, AL are in the same time zone (Central Daylight Time). Current time in both locations is 4:23 am. Flights from Birmingham to Piedmont Triad International typically have a delay of 24 mins; Between Birmingham and Piedmont Triad International, the delay rate is 6.6%; From Birmingham to Piedmont Triad International, Delta Air Lines, Inc. operates 156 flights a week; From Birmingham to Piedmont Triad International, about 7% of flights are diverted The closest town to the halfway point is Steele, AL, situated 39.01 miles from Piedmont, AL and 47.91 miles from Birmingham, AL. It would take 51 minutes to go from Piedmont to Steele and 55 minutes to go from Birmingham to Steele. Aliceville 148 Decatur 174 Jackson Gap 67 Piedmont 135 Andalusia 87 Demopolis 100 Jacksonville 123 Pine Apple 68 Annemani 96 Dothan 106 Jasper 132 Pine Hill 93 Ann Jordan Lodge 67 Double Springs 156 Jemison 53 Plantersville 55 Anniston 110 Dozier 69 Joe Wheeler State Park 211 Point Aquarius 91 Arab 158 Eclectic 31 Kellyton 52 Point Clear 180 A car with an MPG of will need 3.99 gallons of gas to cover the route between Birmingham, AL and Piedmont, AL. The estimated cost of gas to go from Birmingham to Piedmont is $10.41. During the route, an average car will release 78.12 pounds of CO 2 to the atmosphere. Your carbon footprint is 0.91 pounds of CO 2 per mile. Birmingham 93 Foley 186 Marion 82 Scottsboro 189 Blountsville 140 Fort Deposit 35 McCalla 100 Seale 86 Boaz 145 Fort Payne 168 McIntosh 159 Selma 50 Brantley 60 Gadsden 129 McKenzie 69 Sheffield 210 Brent 70 Geneva 108 Mellow Valley 78 Shorter 23 Brewton 105 Georgiana 61 Midfield 99 Slocomb 104 The closest town to the halfway point is Ashville, AL, situated 43.2 miles from Birmingham, AL and 48.12 miles from Piedmont, AL. It would take 49 minutes to go from Birmingham to Ashville and 1 hour 1 min to go from Piedmont to Ashville. MILEAGE CHART MILEAGE CHART FROM MONTGOMERY AL, TO LISTED DESTINATION : Abbeville 97 Dadeville 63 Hope Hull 9 Ozark 82 Akron 121 Daleville 97 Hueytown 97 Pelham 72 Alabaster 69 Dannelly Field 10 Huntsville 193 Pell City 103 Albertville 151 Danville 170 Hurtsboro 65 Phenix City 82 Alex City 53 Deatsville 25 Jackson 135 Phil Campbell 179 Query: how far is birmingham from piedmont",
"output": [
"There are 73.92 miles from Birmingham to Piedmont in northeast direction and 86 miles by car."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-2f1f547d340644c1872820ae45f6bdf7",
"input": "Stomach Flu: 3 days of a stomach flu are not common. I suggest you consult a physician to get stool cultures - for bacteria/parasites, giardia and if you have taken antibioitcs in the last two months a check for c. Difficile. Does cranberry juice, grape juice, black raspberry juice, pomegranate juice, red wine, apple cider vinegar, garlic, or grape seed extract, activated charcoal, or grapefruit seed extract prevent the stomach flu (norovirus)? The last 2 stomach bugs that I have had, only lasted 1 day for me (24 hours). I vomited 2-3 times in the evening, rested and didn't eat much the next day, and was fine the day after that. I never had diarrhea. How long will the stomach flu last (norovirus and others)? Answer: The vomiting phase will usually only last from 1-3 days but the diarrhea may continue for 1-2 weeks. Stomach flu is just a nickname for viral gastroenteritis. Unlikely: A stomach bug is usually due to food poisoning which self resolves in 24-48 hrs or a viral illness which results in nausea, vomiting and/or diarrhea and resolves in 2-4 days. Key is hydration with electrolytes replacement. Nausea and all other symptoms resolve when illness ends. The flu like symptoms can last for a bit but time to get eating and hydrating. How long does nausea last after stomach flu - Had stomach flu from Wednesday to Friday. Still feel nauseous and it's now Monday the next week. How long does nausea last after stomach flu? Ans. Probably time to see your doctor and don't forget to check a pregnancy test. You need to start feeling better. Gastroenteritis: Gastroenteritis symptoms typically last around 48 hours, however, they can linger for several days. Signs of dehydration are dry mouth, excessive thirst, truly dark urine, dry skin, lethargy, or dizziness. Stay hydrated and drink some gatorade or other isotonic electrolyte fluid ...Read more. However, my 18 month old son had the same virus, he vomited off and on for 48 hours and then had diarrhea for 10 days. My 6 year old niece had a terrible stomach bug in December 2012. She vomited off and on for over 3 days. She couldn't keep anything down (not a sip of water or ice or anything) for 3 full days. I have had severe diarreha and nausea for 5 days, does the stomach flu usually last this long or should I go have myself seen by a doctor? David Miller Dr. Miller 3 doctors agreed: The duration of illness caused by stomach / intestinal viruses varies by the particular virus and from person to person. Usually the vomiting phase only lasts for part of 1 day. A typical scenario is that the child wakes up at 2am and vomits every 30 minutes for 5 hours. Then they go to sleep. Query: how long can vomiting last on the stomach bug",
"output": [
"Vomiting can lasts 2 to 4 days on the stomach bug."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-70979f115ec94f91a5133a2c5e4d3542",
"input": "For colds, most individuals become contagious about a day before cold symptoms develop and remain contagious for about five to seven days. Some children may pass the flu viruses for longer than seven days (occasionally for two weeks). How long are you contagious with the flu for? The influenza virus, also known as the common flu, is a highly contagious respiratory virus that affects all age groups. The virus has a different effect on every person, and symptoms can range from mild to life-threatening. A common cold and the flu are easily spread from person to person, the flu most often by droplets produced by coughing and sneezing. Cold viruses in droplets are spread mainly hand to hand. These droplets contain the infectious viruses. How long is a cold or flu contagious? Both colds and the flu are contagious and are caused by viruses. However, the viruses that cause colds (for example, rhinoviruses) are not the same as those that cause the flu (influenza viruses). Flu symptoms include: 1 Fever. 2 Chills. 3 Runny nose. 4 Headache. 5 Muscle aches. 6 Warm, flushed skin and watery eyes. 7 Weakness or fatigue. 8 Sore throat. With flu season making it's earliest start in years, and certain strains of the virus hitting unlucky Americans hard this year, it’s important to be extra vigilant in your efforts to avoid catching it. I recently got this question emailed to me by a concerned viewer: Q: When is someone who has the flu contagious? Some people who are infected with the influenza virus can actually transmit the illness before they begin to feel any symptoms. Most of the time, you will become contagious about 24 to 72 hours after contracting the influenza virus and remain that way for up to five days after the onset of symptoms. But children or people with compromised immune systems can be contagious to those around them for up to two weeks. Trending in Health. 1 1 Newborn left in gym bag outside Atlanta medical facility. 2 2 Texas hospital forced to evacuate patients due to lack of water. 3 3 Ovarian cancer symptoms and warning signs. 4 4 Indiana man in a coma with confirmed case of West Nile virus. 5 5 Mom delivers baby inside amniotic sac en route to hospital. Most experts agree that adults with a cold or the flu start being contagious about a day before they start experiencing symptoms. For the flu, the contagious period then lasts five to seven days into the illness. For children, the contagious period for the flu can last up to two weeks after they start feeling sick, even if they start feeling better before that. The contagious period for a cold lasts about three to four days into the illness. As a general rule, people with a cold are most contagious about three days after their initial exposure to the virus. For more information on colds, influenza and related topics, check out the links on the next page. Top How Long Is a Cold or Flu Contagious Related Articles Aches, Pain, Fever Although a fever technically is any body temperature above the normal of 98.6 F (37 C), in practice, a person is usually not considered to have a significant fever until the temperature is above 100.4 F (38 C). How long is a cold or flu contagious? How will I know if I have a cold or the flu? How do cold and flu viruses spread? How will I know if I am cured of the flu or a cold? When should someone seek medical care for a cold or the flu? Query: how long am i contagious from the flu",
"output": [
"The contagious period for the flu can last up to two weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f308652928d94cab953bd487f3068fcf",
"input": "If the change in behavior is very obvious, then a cat owner or breeder might be able to make an approximate guess that ovulation occurred 1-2 days ago and use that date (the 2-days-ago date) as the estimated start point for the cat gestation period. How long does pregnancy last? Pregnancy (or the gestation period) lasts for 58 to 63 days in queens. Individual cats may vary but you should inform your veterinarian if your queen's pregnancy exceeds 64 days. What should you feed her during pregnancy? During pregnancy your queen should be on a well balanced diet. How to Tell if a Cat is Pregnant. The typical gestation period for cats is about 9 weeks, and a pregnant cat will begin to display telling physical and behavioral changes soon after becoming pregnant.http://www.cats.org.uk/uploads/docume... The Reproductive Cycle in Dogs. In order to answer the question, how long are dogs pregnant, you first need to understand the dog reproductive cycle. Intact female dogs go into heat approximately every six months, although this can vary depending on the dog and the breed. The heat cycle lasts 18-to-21 days and is broken into four distinct stages. So you were a little slow in having her spayed and your cat turned up pregnant, or a pregnant stray adopted you. Perhaps you are working with a rescue group and this is your first fostering experience with a pregnant cat. Where do you go from here? Your first major decision is whether or not to allow the pregnancy to continue. Gestation Period. A female cat that is sexually mature (after the age of 6 to 12 months) and has heat cycles can get pregnant is she meets a male cat. The gestation period is 9 weeks or 63 days. However, this is only an average; the cat may give birth earlier (as early as 58 days after the fertilization) or later (67 days after the fertilization). Ordinary domestic short-hair and long-haired cats are very fertile. Litter size averages four or five kittens. For some reason, Siamese cats also have larger litters. Persians and other fancy breeds tend to be less fertile. One thing you can be relieved about is that you won’t have to deal with the annoyances of a female cat in heat during that time. A cat will not go into heat again until after the babies are born. Caring for Your Cat During Gestation. It’s important to make your pregnant cat as comfortable as possible during gestation. On average, feline pregnancy lasts for 63-65 days but can be anywhere from 58 days to 70 days long. In 'real money', that's around nine weeks. Gestation, Incubation, and Longevity of Selected Animals David Crystal, The Cambridge Factfinder Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1998 (84). Online animal encyclopedia Query: how long do cats gestate",
"output": [
"The gestation period of cats is 9 weeks or 63 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ad6eb3b94709480c8e1720a5e1fb160d",
"input": "Weather. Today's Forecast; Hourly Forecast; 10 Day Forecast; Monthly Forecast; National Forecast; Get Notifications; Maps. Weather in Motion® Radar Maps; Classic Weather Maps; Regional Satellite; Driving Difficulty Map; Traffic and Radar NEW! Severe. Severe Alerts; Hurricane Central; Tornado Central; Local Severe Storm Risk; Winter Storm Central; Safety and Preparedness Find the most current and reliable 7 day weather forecasts, storm alerts, reports and information for Kurunegala, LK with The Weather Network. Be prepared with the most accurate 10-day forecast for Kurunegala, Sri Lanka with highs, lows, chance of precipitation from The Weather Channel and Weather.com Be prepared with the most accurate 10-day forecast for Kurunegala, Sri Lanka with highs, lows, chance of precipitation from The Weather Channel and Weather.com Scan for updated forecast Connection restored! See the links below the 10-day Kurunegala weather forecast table for other cities and towns nearby along with weather conditions for local outdoor activities. Kurunegala is 161 m above sea level and located at 7.49° N 80.36° E. Kurunegala has a population of 28571. Local time in Kurunegala is +0530. View the latest weather forecasts, maps, news and alerts on Yahoo Weather. Find local weather forecasts for Kurunegala, Sri Lanka throughout the world View the latest weather forecasts, maps, news and alerts on Yahoo Weather. Find local weather forecasts for Kurunegala, Sri Lanka throughout the world Kurunegala, Sri Lanka weather text for Mon 26 th February. It looks on Monday, 26 February the Kurunegala, Sri Lanka weather is going to be fog. The visibility is going to be around 16 km i.e. 10 miles and an atmospheric pressure of 1010 mb. The daytime temperature is going to reach 29 °c and the temperature is going to dip to 20 °c at night. Category 6. Welcome to Category 6. This is the collective home for Weather Underground's featured writeups by Dr. Jeff Masters (right), Bob Henson (left), Chris Burt, and other regular contributors. Location: Kurunegala. Current Time: Jan 18, 2018 at 9:58:55 am. Latest Report: Jan 18, 2018 at 8:30 am. Visibility: 13 mi. Pressure: 29.89 Hg. Humidity: 76%. Dew Point: 67 °F Access hourly, 10 day and 15 day forecasts along with up to the minute reports and videos for Kurunegala, Sri Lanka from AccuWeather.com Get the Kurunegala weather forecast. Access hourly, 10 day and 15 day forecasts along with up to the minute reports and videos for Kurunegala, Sri Lanka from AccuWeather.com Get the Kurunegala weather forecast. Access hourly, 10 day and 15 day forecasts along with up to the minute reports and videos for Kurunegala, Sri Lanka from AccuWeather.com my recent locations °c The only major change in the Kurunegala weather occurs during the monsoons from May to August and October to January when heavy rains can be expected. While the city does experience a noticeably drier weather during January and February, it does not qualify as a true dry season as average precipitation in both months are above 60 millimetres (2 in). Query: how is the weather in kurunegala",
"output": [
"On Monday, 26 February, Kurunegala, Sri Lanka weather is going to be fog and the daytime temperature is going to reach 29 degrees Celsius and the temperature is going to dip to 20 degrees Celsius at night."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-33ecaf6357e44a86a07aa1b3d765530b",
"input": "Price For An Oil Change Very High. 2012 Chevrolet Cruze. CarComplaints.com Notes: In many ways, the 2012 Cruze continues the legacy of its predecessor. It's a legacy of sluggish transmissions and coolant leaks, but it's still a legacy. To be fair, the number of complaints about the cooling system are way down versus the 2011 model which led to a class-action lawsuit. Garage Xtreme Cruze Eco. Originally Posted by obermd. My oil change cycle is 1,500, 6,000, 10,000, and then every 5,000 miles. I balance, rotate, and inspect my tires every 5,000 miles. Actually I pay Discount Tire to rotate and balance the tires but I personally check the tread wear on each tire while it's off the car. chevrolet oil change cost The average cost for a Chevrolet oil change may range between $19.99 for Conventional Oil Change and $74.99 for Synthetic Oil Change. For more information and how to save on Chevrolet oil changes, continue reading. Some synthetics however will only allow a 7,500 or 8,000 mile OCI. The OCI assumes that you have a high quality fully synthetic oil in your car, which the factory oil (and that which the dealers will change your oil with) is not. My oil change cycle is 1,500, 6,000, 10,000, and then every 5,000 miles. I balance, rotate, and inspect my tires every 5,000 miles. How to Save on Your Chevrolet Oil Change. In older Chevy vehicles, oil changes are recommended at 3,000 mile intervals. But these days, newer Chevrolet models can go much longer distances without needing oil changes. You can refer to the owner’s manual of your vehicle for the specific oil change interval of your vehicle. They did not tell me that to get an oil change would be almost $70.00 because of the special filter this car needs. I am so unhappy about that....I just feel they should tell people about the high price of the oil change as being fair to the customer. - CHEVROLET OIL CHANGE COST. The average cost for a Chevrolet oil change may range between $19.99 for Conventional Oil Change and $74.99 for Synthetic Oil Change. For more information and how to save on Chevrolet oil changes, continue reading. Chevrolet cars, trucks, and SUVs have long been associated with luxury, performance, and durability. The 2012 Chevrolet Cruze has 1 complaints for price for an oil change very high. Average repair cost is $64.00 at 3,000 miles. CarComplaints.com: Car complaints, car problems and defect information Cost; Chevrolet oil change prices may vary by location, as well as the model & year of the car. Call your local certified Chevrolet dealership for their official prices. Also check below on how you can save on your Chevrolet oil change. Oil Change: Conventional Oil Change: $39.99: Synthetic Blend Oil Change: $49.99: Full Synthetic Oil Change: $74.99 Oil Change Interval Welcome to Chevy Cruze Forum : Chevrolet Cruze Forums – General discussion forum for Chevy Cruze Welcome to Chevy Cruze Forum : Chevrolet Cruze Forums - a website dedicated to all things Chevy Cruze. You are currently viewing our forum as a guest, which gives you limited access to view most discussions and access our other features. Query: average cost chevy cruze oil change",
"output": [
"The average cost for a Chevrolet oil change may range between $19.99 for Conventional Oil Change and $74.99 for Synthetic Oil Change."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-6ba0fe7cc65248528659683407c60101",
"input": "While out on a long term injury under work comp, I was notified that FMLA was being imposed on me. I thought that FMLA was an employee benefit, now it may be used as an employer weapon. A 4 to 6 week injury under work comp can easily turn into a 12 week, loss of job. As you can see, a decision to terminate any employee while on a medical leave of absence is a complex one that can involve the interplay of multiple laws and consideration of a myriad of different facts and circumstances. Yes, companies can fire an employee who’s on intermittent FMLA leave. Despite the fears of many employers, FMLA doesn’t confer some kind of special dispensation for workers who exercise their leave rights. Obviously, workers can’t be fired for taking leave. But employers can lay off, discipline and terminate those employees who violate company policies or perform poorly. When an employee on FMLA leave is terminated, the DOL decrees that the burden’s on the employer to prove the worker would have been disciplined or terminated regardless of the leave request or usage. Reductions in force When the clerk was fired two weeks before she was to return to work, she sued her employer for violating her rights under FMLA. The employer argued that the clerk was fired for failing to perform her duties, and that she wasn’t entitled to special protection under FMLA law. A court found in favor of the clerk. She had many years of service, her employer failed to formally discipline her for earlier lapses and her job description had no emphasis on training. To avoid a claim that the employer discriminated against the employee, or that the employer interfered with the individual’s rights under the FMLA, the employer must be able to show that the employee would have been terminated even if that individual had not taken medical leave. If, after seven (7) calendar days the identified deficiencies have not been resolved, the request for leave will be denied. C. Pay Status While on Non-FMLA Medical Leave. An employee who is taking Non-FMLA Medical Leave must use all accrued time off banks prior to being placed in an unpaid leave status. Examples of such reasons from relevant caselaw include the following: 1 If an employee would have been terminated regardless of FMLA leave because of poor performance, then the employee may be terminated before, during or after FMLA leave. See Richmond v. Oneok (1997); and. If, prior to the leave, an employee fails to meet the goals of a corrective action program designed to improve performance, then the employee may be terminated upon return from FMLA leave. See Hubbard v. Blue Cross Blue Shield Assoc. (1998). How you handle such requests for extra time can make the difference between an appreciative employee and a messy lawsuit. Quick-trigger firings after FMLA leave have led to an increasing amount of ADA claims. Advice: Have a clear HR process for handling requests for leave after FMLA runs out. To decide if you must grant additional leave as an ADA accommodation, first determine whether the person’s condition qualifies as a disability under the ADA. Then see if the employee’s certification includes a return date. First, the 12 months of service do not have to be continuous or consecutive; all of the time you’ve worked for the employer is counted. You can leave and then return, but you still must have worked 1,250 hours in the past 12 months to qualify (unless you are a military reservist returning from active duty). The Family and Medical Leave Act (FMLA) of 1993 allows employees to take reasonable unpaid leave for certain family and medical reasons. It can provide up to 12 weeks of unpaid, job-protected leave per year, and also requires that the employee's group health benefits be maintained during the leave. Query: how long after fmla can you be terminated",
"output": [
"It takes 12 weeks after the Family and Medical Leave Act can you be terminated."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-161d6883a5024284b75a1b453fecbd8a",
"input": "The free trial lasts for seven days. Your free trial membership starts on the day you install Dreamweaver. You can convert your trial to a paid Creative Cloud membership during the trial period or after the trial has expired. Can I download a trial version of Dreamweaver CS6? No, Dreamweaver CC is our most up-to-date version and the only version of Dreamweaver you can download for a free trial. Do students get a discount if they decide to purchase after the free trial? Yes, students and teachers are eligible for a big discount on the entire collection of Creative Cloud apps — 60% off. Heads up: Adobe has just reduced the free trial periods for all Creative Cloud desktop (CC) apps from 30 days to 7 days – learn more and see why here ... Heads up: Adobe has just reduced the free trial periods for all Creative Cloud desktop (CC) apps from 30 days to 7 days – learn more and see why here ... How long does the free trial last? Your free trial starts the day you install Dreamweaver and lasts for seven days. You can convert your trial to a paid Creative Cloud membership during the trial period or after the trial has expired. Can I download a trial version of Dreamweaver CS6? Related Posts. 1 How to Extend Adobe Free Trials to 44 Days Long, Instead of 30 Days. 2 Free Full Trials of Any Adobe Product. 3 Free Ticket to Adobe MAX 2017! Win a Full Pass Worth US$1,595. 4 Download 30 Free Adobe Books from Our Growing eBook Collection. 5 Download New Adobe Captivate 2017 Release: Direct Links & Trials. 22 comments. After decades of 30-day free trials for its flagship creative applications such as Photoshop, Illustrator, InDesign, and all the others, today Adobe announced that going forward, the length of the trial period for Creative Cloud (i.e., the CC 2015 desktop apps) will be standardized worldwide at 7 days. Design and develop modern, responsive websites with a Dreamweaver free trial. Get access to the full version of the latest release of Adobe Dreamweaver CC for a limited time. No credit card required. Features. 1 Get your own portfolio website, premium fonts, and 20GB of cloud storage. 2 Manage app updates, files, fonts, and more with the Adobe Creative Cloud desktop app. 3 Browse hundreds of video tutorials for every skill level. 4 Dreamweaver CC works on both macOS and Windows. 5 The free trial lasts for seven days. Related Posts. 1 How to Extend Adobe Free Trials to 44 Days Long, Instead of 30 Days. 2 Free Full Trials of Any Adobe Product. 3 Free Ticket to Adobe MAX 2017! 4 Download 30 Free Adobe Books from Our Growing eBook Collection. 5 Download New Adobe Captivate 2017 Release: Direct Links & Trials. Why would you trial software that you have no intention to buy? Not sure what there is to be confused about. Either buy it, or start over with a free/inexpensive editor (of which there are many that are at least decent and several that are good) and throw away your month of learning Dreamweaver. And I'd avoid getting trials of software that you don't intend to buy in the future. I was wondering if someone would give me advice about something. Fot the last 30 days ive been workin on a site i made in dreamweaver free trial. My trial is now out im not sure wat to do. I kinda know html so i could do notepad but im not comfortable withh it. I was doing so well with dreamweaver. Could someone please tell me an idea about what i should do. [edited by: encyclo at 11:53 pm (utc) on Sep. 23, 2007] Query: how long does dreamweaver free trial last",
"output": [
"The free trial of Dreamweaver lasts for seven days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-38fd14b7cd064c89a84cbbeedb4a000e",
"input": "ATLAS: Atmospheric Laboratory for Applications and Science: ATLAS: A Toroidal LHC Apparatus (experiment at the CERN physics laboratory) ATLAS: Advisory Team for Large Applications (UK) ATLAS: Assessment of Treatment with Lisinopril And Survival: ATLAS: Abbreviated Test Language for All Systems: ATLAS: Architecture and Tools for Linguistic Analysis Systems: ATLAS atlas. ( 1 Greek mythology) son of Iapetus and Clymene, war leader of the Titans ordered by the god Zeus to support the sky on his shoulders; father to Hesperides, the Hyades, and the Pleiades; king of the legendary Atlantis. ( 2 astronomy) a moon of Saturn. ( 3 astronomy) a crater in the first quadrant of the moon. ATLAS: A Toroidal LHC Apparatus (experiment at the CERN physics laboratory) ATLAS: Advisory Team for Large Applications (UK) ATLAS: Assessment of Treatment with Lisinopril And Survival: ATLAS: Abbreviated Test Language for All Systems: ATLAS: Architecture and Tools for Linguistic Analysis Systems: ATLAS: Argonne Tandem Linear Accelerator System: ATLAS Automatically Tuned Linear Algebra Software (software library) ATLAS: Atmospheric Laboratory for Applications and Science: ATLAS: A Toroidal LHC Apparatus (experiment at the CERN physics laboratory) ATLAS: Advisory Team for Large Applications (UK) ATLAS: Assessment of Treatment with Lisinopril And Survival: ATLAS: Abbreviated Test Language for All Systems: ATLAS Definition; ATLAS: Automatically Tuned Linear Algebra Software (software library) ATLAS: Atmospheric Laboratory for Applications and Science: ATLAS: A Toroidal LHC Apparatus (experiment at the CERN physics laboratory) ATLAS: Advisory Team for Large Applications (UK) ATLAS: Assessment of Treatment with Lisinopril And Survival: ATLAS Atlas definition: The definition of atlas is a book of maps or some type of information that includes pictures and/or tables and charts. (noun) An example of an atlas is a collection of road maps detailing each of the 50 states. ... Atlas. 1 Gr. Myth. a Titan compelled to support the heavens on his shoulders. 2 any person who carries a great burden. [ 3 a-] a book of maps: Atlas supporting the earth was often pictured on the front page of such books. a book of tables, charts, illustrations, etc. on a specific subject or subjects: an anatomical atlas. a book of maps: Atlas supporting the earth was often pictured on the front page of such books; a book of tables, charts, illustrations, etc. on a specific subject or subjects: an anatomical atlas [a-] Anat. the topmost vertebra of the neck; Archit. atlantes; Origin of Atlas The definition of atlas is a book of maps or some type of information that includes pictures and/or tables and charts. An example of an atlas is a collection of road maps detailing each of the 50 states. YourDictionary definition and usage example. Atlas. 1 Gr. 2 any person who carries a great burden. [ 3 a-] a book of maps: Atlas supporting the earth was often pictured on the front page of such books. [ 4 a-]Anat. the topmost vertebra of the neck. 5 Archit. atlantes. Query: atlas define",
"output": [
"The definition of atlas is a book of maps or some type of information that includes pictures and/or tables and charts."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-50c2853511e648ebb4cd890413a8ac71",
"input": "The usual dose is 6 to 8 mcg per kg per day. Children 3 to 6 months of age—Dose is based on body weight and must be determined by your doctor. The usual dose is 8 to 10 mcg per kg per day. Children 0 to 3 months of age—Dose is based on body weight and must be determined by your doctor. The usual dose is 10 to 15 mcg per kg per day. I know you need to wait 4 hours to take calcium supplements, but when it comes to eating breakfast, can you eat yogurt or milk earlier than the 4 hour mark? I'm wondering if taking the synthroid I normally wait 4 hours to eat after taking the pill so perhaps my stomach is too empty for too long and the medicine is causing the shakiness because there is nothing at all but synthroid in my system. . . Are you taking your thyroid medication properly…are you sure? September 21, 2016 by Dana Trentini 22 Comments After 3 years of taking thyroid medication for hypothyroidism every day, I found a great new thyroid doctor and for the first time discovered that I was taking my thyroid medication all wrong. You can also increase omega-3 intake by eating fatty cold-water fish, walnuts and flaxseeds. Conclusion. Any vitamin supplement that you and your doctor agree should be added to your diet can be taken with levothyroxine, provided that you don't take your vitamin or supplement within four hours of taking your thyroid replacement hormone. Before taking this medicine. Levothyroxine should not be used to treat obesity or weight problems. Since thyroid hormone occurs naturally in the body, almost anyone can take levothyroxine. However, you may not be able to take this medicine if you have certain medical conditions. Tell your doctor if you have: Make sure to separate levothyroxine and antacids or gas-relieving medications by at least four hours. Antidepressant Medications Combining levothyroxine with some antidepressants may change the amount of levothyroxine your body needs, and your healthcare provider may need to adjust your levothyroxine dosage. It is also best to take both of these medications on an empty stomach. Take omeprazole at least 30 minutes before a meal. And even though you can take penicillin VK with food, it works better if you take it with an empty stomach. ...Read more Synthroid morning routine. 1 Synthroid’s part of my morning routine. 2 Every day starts with me immediately going into the kitchen to take my medication and drink water. 3 My morning routine starts with Synthroid. 4 I get up and I reach for the Synthroid and my water. 5 It’s 7:30 am and I’m getting up, and on the shelf are my medications. No soy no iron: Although the packaging for levothyroxine says to take it on an empty stomach for many people its not possible to do that and take it consistently each day. As long as you take it at a consistent time and don't take it with soy or with iron which will interfere with its absorption it is fine to take it with breakfast or before bed without being strictly fasting. Antacids often used to treat heartburn and other intestinal distress, including calcium products such as TUMS or ROLAIDS and other antacids, may have absorption-inhibiting effects on thyroid medications. People should take levothyroxine four to six hours before or after taking these antacids. Iron supplements (FEOSOL, SLOW FE) have been shown to reduce the effect of levothyroxine in some people, although the effect is highly variable from one person to another. Query: how long should you wait to take an antacid with levothyroxine",
"output": [
"You should wait for four to six hours to take levothyroxine before or after taking these antacids."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-130947d99c4c4e2796ea80dbcfbb13e5",
"input": "The length of the cords on the controllers (a big problem with the NES Classic Edition) has been increased to 4.5 feet from about 2.5 feet, but that still isn’t long enough to facilitate convenient gaming. The NES Classic is coming out in a few weeks, bringing oodles of 80s gaming memories rushing back. But not everything is the same with the retro console. We already know how small the device itself is, and we were told that the controller cords were much shorter than their 80s counterparts, but know we know just how much shorter. The upcoming SNES Classic from Nintendo fixes at least one problem from its 8-bit predecessor. Just like the NES Classic, the new mini console will feature a replica controller that’s nearly... The upcoming SNES Classic from Nintendo fixes at least one problem from its 8-bit predecessor. How long are the controller cords? The SNES Classic Edition controller cords are five feet long, which gives you some extra room away from the TV screen. Additionally, you can buy extension cords in case you still can't reach the couch. We will continue to update this article in the days ahead! Getting the Retro Receiver up and running is as easy as plugging a controller into the front of your Super Nintendo—but it might actually be easier since there’s no cord to first untangle. The adapter draws all the power it needs from the SNES’ controller ports, so you don’t even have to worry about recharging it. You get the system with 30 games, one NES Classic Controller, one HDMI cable, an AC Adapter and a cool poster featuring the NES, ROB the robot and two game cartridges, Duck Hunt and Gyromite. Sadly, neither game made the list of 30. 100 bucks it will be short just because the controller is just a redesigned VC classic controller made to connect to the wii remote. If you love math… figure out how many NES Classic Edition systems can fit inside of an original NES console. Sounds like a worthy SAT question. The controller cord is a bit short. In addition to the NES Classic, the Bluetooth controller is compatible with PC, Mac, Linux, iOS, and Android, if you need a retro-style controller for any of those platforms (that’s where the extra buttons come in handy). I have an original NES controller, which seems a lot less stiff. I needed a second controller for all the amazing co-op games Nintendo has. The buttons on this third party controller are responsive. However, the directional pad is tuff and difficult to play with for long periods of time. It works well. Just a little tuff on the hands. Overall an ok controller. The original nes controller I have feels much better though. Query: how long are the controllers on snes classic",
"output": [
"The SNES Classic Edition controller cords are five feet long."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7fc4851eab9c47ccada8cd10dc859147",
"input": "Titan is the largest moon of Saturn. It is the only moon known to have a dense atmosphere, and the only object in space other than Earth where clear evidence of stable bodies of surface liquid has been found. Titan is the sixth gravitationally rounded moon from Saturn. Frequently described as a planet-like moon, Titan is 50% larger than Earth's Moon, and it is 80% more massive. It is the second-largest moon in the Solar System, after Jupiter's moon Ganymede, and is larger than the smallest plane Discovered in 1655 by the Dutch astronomer Christiaan Huygens, Titan was the first known moon of Saturn, and the sixth known planetary satellite (after Earth's Moon and the four Galilean moons of Jupiter). Titan orbits Saturn at 20 Saturn radii. From Titan's surface, Saturn subtends an arc of 5.09 degrees and would appear 11.4 times larger in the sky than the Moon from Earth. Titan is primarily composed of water ice and rocky material. Saturn's orbit around the sun is right around a billion miles out. Earth's orbit is just inside 100 million. So, Saturn can be as close to us as just under a billion miles, or … as far away as nearly 2 billion, depending on what side of the sun we're on. Saturn orbits the sun once every 30 years. How far is the planet Saturn from planet Earth? The planet Saturn was relatively close to Earth on December 31, 2003, when it was about 746 million miles away. It is some 900 million miles away from the sun. Titan is the largest moon of Saturn. It is the only moon known to have a dense atmosphere, and the only object in space other than Earth where clear evidence of stable bodies of surface liquid has been found. Titan is the sixth ellipsoidal moon from Saturn. Frequently described as a planet-like moon, Titan is 50% larger than Earth's Moon, and it is 80% more massive. It is the second-largest moon in the Solar System, after Jupiter's moon Ganymede, and is larger than the smallest planet, Mercury, but only 40% as massive. Viewed from Earth, Titan reaches an angular distance of about 20 Saturn radii (just over 1,200,000 kilometers (750,000 mi)) from Saturn and subtends a disk 0.8 arcseconds in diameter. The small, irregularly shaped satellite Hyperion is locked in a 3:4 orbital resonance with Titan. How far is Saturn from Earth at aphelion? At Saturn's aphelion, it is about 10.1 AU from the Sun. Therefore, it would be anywhere between 9.1 and 11.1 AU from the Earth, depending on whether Earth is on the same side … of the Sun as Saturn, or on the opposite side. How far is Saturn from the Earth? The distance is always changing as both planets move around the Sun. The average is about 1.4 billion kilometers, or more than 8 times as far as Earth is from the Sun (8 AU). … At its closest, when both planets are on the same side of the Sun, Saturn is about 8 AU (1.2 billion km or 744 million miles) from us. This depends where the two planets are in their orbits! At their closest Saturn is around 1.2 billion km away from Earth (roughly 7 AU) and when they are at their most distant from each other, Saturn is approximately 1.67 billion km from Earth (around 11 AU). Saturn's distance is 1,010,000,000 miles (1,620,000,000 kilometers) from Earth. It took images of Titan, including Titan and Saturn together in mid to late 1979. The quality was soon surpassed by the two Voyagers. Titan was examined by both Voyager 1 and 2 in 1980 and 1981, respectively. Query: how far is saturn?",
"output": [
"The average distance from the Earth to the Saturn is about 1.4 billion kilometers."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-05a26814c5744b3f8b3507dcd8484e02",
"input": "After that about every 6-8 months will do. Only the very ends at this time. Don't worry about any particular style and getting the hair all one length - that will come later. Do not cut bangs into the hair! Once hair reaches the collar, it can be evened up around the perimeter into a bob. From there minimum maintenance is required to keep it growing. How Fast Does Hair Grow? Q: How fast does hair grow? A: The speed of hair growth is roughly 1.25 centimeters or 0.5 inches per month, being about 15 centimeters or 6 inches per year. With age the speed of hairgrowth might slow down to as little as 0.25 cm or 0.1 inch a month. Cell division is responsible for the hair growth cycle. The new cells push the hair forward to make it longer, so the new hair is added at the root. There are about 100.000 hairs on a healthy scalp of hair. Each of these hairs will, in normal healthy conditions, last for one up to six years. People loose about 100 hairs per day, in normal conditions. The only part of your body that grows faster is bone marrow, the soft stuff inside your bones. The hair on your head grows about 6 inches a year. So, even though it's one of the fastest-growing things on your body, it takes a while to grow it really long. You lose about 50 to 100 hairs a day. That's because the follicles don't all grow hair at the same time. Each scalp follicle grows hair for a few years and then takes a break. When a follicle is on a break, the hair in the follicle falls out. With over 200 ingredients including a 20 plus fruit and vegetable complex with Biotin and Inositol, this product is sure to boost her hair growth results amongst other benefits of setting up a good healthy hair growth foundation from the inside out. This tasty liquid hair vitamin is gluten free and vegetarian. The anagen phase is known as the growth phase. It begins in the papilla and can last from two to six years. The span at which the hair remains in this stage of growth is determined by genetics. The longer the hair stays in the anagen phase, the longer it will grow. There are steps that you can do to help your child’s hair grow back. The first step is to take Mielle Organics children’s hair and health formula. We have a good recommended dose of vitamin A, zinc, folic acid and biotin. Along with other minerals to support a healthy immune system. Brush out your child’s hair while the conditioner is still in her hair or use a detangling solution if she is prone to knots. You can make your own inexpensive detangler at home. Just fill a spray bottle approximately three-quarters full of distilled water and a spoonful or two of her conditioner. A child’s hair will grow about one quarter inch each month. The hair will grow out of follicles for two to six years before entering a rest phase that lasts about three months. Following the rest phase the hair will fall out, with 50 to 100 strands a day being a normal rate of hair loss. Kids who have large follicles will have thick hair. Kids with narrow follicles will have fine hair. Many factors can affect hair growth, including nutrition and health conditions. It is thought that this hair loss occurs because the original stressor pushes the child's hair into a resting or dormant phase, instead of its more usual long growth phase. It then falls out until new hair grows and then follows the normal growth phases for hair. Alopecia areata often starts suddenly and causes patchy hair loss in children and young adults. This condition may result in complete baldness (alopecia totalis). But in about 90% of people with the condition, the hair returns within a few years. Query: how long does children hair growth",
"output": [
"A child’s hair will grow about one quarter inch each month."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-993e3b0880fd4042bf302e2d5c4592cd",
"input": "Other important facts. 1 Both colds and flu are caused by a virus but the symptoms of influenza are usually more severe. 2 Antibiotics have no effect against influenza. 3 Damp or cold cannot cause influenza. 4 People are seldom infected by the same type of influenza twice because resistance develops within two or four weeks. Pain relief lasts 8-12 hours, about twice as long as other painkillers. May irritate stomach, so take with food. Antihistamines (e.g Benadryl, Chlortrimeton, Tavist-1, Claritin, and Zyrtec) dry mucous membranes and make breathing easier: If you have a cough and a sore throat, it's more likely that you either have a cold or the flu. You'll need to see a doctor for diagnosis of strep throat — they can perform a quick test to determine if it is, in fact, the cause of your illness. If it is strep, they'll prescribe antibiotics to help kill the bacteria. When to See a Doctor Few common illnesses are more unpleasant than the flu. The aches and pains, chills, fever, and cough are bad enough; add in the other potential symptoms of flu, including runny nose, vomiting, diarrhea, fatigue, or sore throat, and you'll want the illness to be over as soon as possible. How long does the flu last? And does treating flu help make it go away faster? How long will the influenza last? Usually, influenza lasts three to five days. If it goes on for more than a week or if the symptoms are very severe, you are advised to consult your doctor. A bad case of influenza has the potential to develop into a more serious condition like pneumonia or sinus trouble, and in rare cases it can be life-threatening. Flu symptoms usually start within one to four days after infection. Unlike a common cold, the effects of an influenza virus infection can come on very suddenly. The first signs of the flu are often a fever or chills, accompanied by headache, sore throat, dry cough, runny nose, muscle aches, and fatigue. As the illness progresses, a person may have warm, flushed skin, watery or bloodshot eyes, a severe cough that produces phlegm, and nasal congestion. It can cause mild to severe illness, and at times can lead to death. The flu is different from a cold. The flu usually comes on suddenly. People who have the flu often feel some or all of these symptoms: Fever* or feeling feverish/chills; Cough; Sore throat; Runny or stuffy nose; Muscle or body aches; Headaches; Fatigue (tiredness) Some people may have vomiting and diarrhea, though this is more common in children than adults. * It’s important to note that not everyone with flu will have a ... Bird flu is spread to people from birds and causes fever, cough, sore throat and muscle aches. Endocarditis Signs of endocarditis, an infection of the heart, include swelling, rash, sinus congestion, nausea, and more. Virus: Viral upper respiratory infections usually start in the throat and chills and flu like body aches are common. At this stage rest, fluids and tylenol (acetaminophen) are all that's needed. A head cold and mild cough may follow. 1 doctor agreed: 1 Virus illness: Greetings. The cough, throat pain, fever and chills typically last ~5days. 2 It is Flu season: Sounds to me like the beginning of influenza or the flu. Stay hydrated, rest, advil, tylenol (acetaminophen) for fever and warm liquid to soothe your throat. Query: how long does flu last with chills sore throat",
"output": [
"Flu lasts 5 days with chills sore throat."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7f00a44fb32343a9a139b5cc41866902",
"input": "When the test is completed and a passing grade is confirmed by the online portal, simply print the BLS certification right away as proof of accreditation. BLS certification cost. The National CPR Foundation’s online BLS course is not only convenient. It’s affordable too. The cost is a one-time fee of $19.95 and is only due after you pass the exam. Online training is now an approved method of CPR and First Aid certification. We have successfully certified thousands of students online. We have certified nurses, physicians, chiropractors, dentists, dental assistants, teachers, physical therapists, personal trainers, foster parents, coaches, home health aides, industrial workers, and many others. No. From the date of your registration, you will have access to your training course for 2 years. You can review the online course material as often as you like during that period. Although we do not offer an actual continuing education certificate, our training does qualify for CE credits with many organizations. Our CPR courses qualify for 2 hours of CE and our First Aid is also good for 2 hours. How long is the certification good for? All certification courses are good for 2 years. How long do I have to complete the training course? You have 3 months from your registration date to complete your training. Do I receive a course textbook when taking an online course? No. Find out why CPR and BLS certification must renew period... One question we are frequently asked is, how long are CPR certifications good? Here's your answer. Find out why CPR and BLS certification must renew period... We offer our online CPR, BLS, and First Aid classes to organizations and individuals across the United States and Canada, including the metro areas of Houston, Montreal, Phoenix, San Jose, San Antonio, Toronto, Chicago, San Diego, Canada, Philadelphia, New York, Dallas, Los Angeles, Seattle, Portland, Boston, Denver, Calgary, Edmonton, and Vancouver. Simple CPR is a nationally accredited online CPR and BLS training class and certification provider. Our classes are all based on the latest AHA guidelines. You can take any of our CPR, BLS, and first aid classes 24 hours a day from the comfort of your home, pass the test, and print out your CPR or BLS certification card all in under an hour. One question we are frequently asked is, how long are CPR certifications good? Here's your answer. Find out why CPR and BLS certification must renew periodically and what changed since the last update. There are a total of 13 modules, including: 1 CPR – Learn how to perform CPR on infants, children, and adults. 2 CPR modules – address how team resuscitation differs from single-player CPR scenarios. 3 AED – Next up on the list of BLS training materials is how and when to use an Automated External Defibrillator or AED. Query: how long are cpr certifications good for bls",
"output": [
"You can take any of our CPR, BLS, and first aid classes 24 hours a day from the comfort of your home."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c4215a7a77814738bf7a6b7b99385897",
"input": "How long does it take to get frostbite or hypothermia? Business how businessinsider hypothermia 2014 1 url? Q webcache. Even in ice water hypothermia does not set until after 20 to 30 minutes, depending on the can someone explain me what is hypothermia, and how it kill people? How long take for in, an adult who submerge She was totally fine in a few hours, but man was I scared.”. Hypothermia can be a serious, life threatening condition. Knowing what the signs are can save your pet’s life. We usually associate hypothermia with winter time and cold temperatures, but as my friend’s story shows, it can happen inside the house as well. Surprisingly, hypothermia can occur at any temperature lower than normal body temperature. Factors like body fat, age, alcohol consumption, and especially wetness can affect how long hypothermia takes to strike. If you fall into water, the situation becomes drastically more dangerous. For example, in water 32.5 degrees Fahrenheit or colder, you might not survive more than 15-to-45 minutes. – Preventing hypothermia. Preventing hypothermia is much easier than treating it, so: don’t leave your dog outside for long periods of time without letting him have access to a warm dry shelter; if you do take your dog out for exercise during cold weather try to do it little and often and consider investing in a coat and booties for your dog; Quick Answer. The onset time of hypothermia varies greatly depending on the individual and upon circumstance. It is possible for a dry person to be exposed to cold temperatures for many hours or even days before hypothermia sets in. In contrast, Minnesota Sea Grant reports that a person in water succumbs to hypothermia in as little as 30 minutes when submerged in temperatures between 32.5 and 40 degrees Fahrenheit. a naked wet person sitting in the open on a windy night will get frost bite in minutes, hypothermia in less than 30, dead soon after, prob less than an hour. An clothed and active person in shelter might survive many hours. Probably until they tire out and sit or sleep. Hypothermia can take seconds or hours to set in, depending on the temperature of the water. I'm not sure how much for a dog, but for a human it can take as little as in 2 minutes. One Minute. 1 Once you fall into cold water, you will hyperventilate for one minute. 2 Take the time to get control of your breath and keep your head clear of the water. 3 Don’t panic. 4 Take stock of your surroundings and plan your next steps. The chart also includes a frostbite indicator, showing the points where temperature, wind speed and exposure time will produce frostbite on humans. Each of the three shaded area shows how long a person can be exposed before frostbite develops. For example, a temperature of 0°F and a wind speed of 15 mph will produce a wind chill temperature of -19°F. How cold does the water have to be to put a person at risk for hypothermia? Even water temperatures as high as 75 and 80 degrees F (24 and 27 degrees C) can be dangerous, but it would most likely take much longer than 15 minutes to become debilitated. There is no set time for when hypothermia will set in, but generally the colder the water, the faster it happens. So if you find yourself submerged in icy-cold water, what should you do? If you have a flotation device, you should get on top of that device and hug yourself to keep as much of your body away from the water as possible. Best Answer: probably pretty fast ... Hypothermia can set in as little as 2 minutes if the water is that cold. In Puget Sound, temp about 50 F it is estimated at 12 ... Query: how long does it take for hypothermia to set in",
"output": [
"Hypothermia can set in as little as 2 minutes if the water is that cold."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-52061ca8b34b433c88e11da9feb81baa",
"input": "An outer cuticle on the chalky membrane (what we think of as the shell) gives texture and even more protection to the eggs. How big are bald eagle eggs? Bald eagles lay white, oval shaped eggs. The eggs weigh approximately 125 grams or 4.4 ounces, and are on average about 2.9 inches long and 2.2 inches wide. Size-wise, they are just a tad smaller than a tennis ball. good. When it begins to mature at age 4, an eagle seeks a mate and establishes a territory. The territory is usually located within 250 miles of the nest where the eagle was hatched. There, the new pair of eagles will construct their own nest but often don't produce eggs or young during their first year as a pair. They'll return in following years to raise young of their own. Eagle Facts U.S. Fish & Wildlife Service How long before they hatch? Incubation for bald eagles is about 35 days. For golden eagles, the incubation period is between 40-45 days. It can take a day for the hatchling to completely break free of the egg after pipping (cracking the egg). Eggs hatch in the order in which they were laid. How long until the eaglets fledge? NORTH FORT MYERS, Fla. — The saga of Harriet the Eagle and her eggs continued to captivate the tens of thousands of people who tuned in Thursday to the Southwest Florida Eagle Cam. One of the eggs began to hatch shortly after 2:30 p.m., and the other should hatch soon. Harriet, a female bald eagle […] How long does it take for an eagle egg to hatch? For an average Eagle it would have a time for about 32-36 days, but the average time for an Eagle egg to hatch is about 35 days. Edit The chicks hatch from the eggs without any help from the parents. The chick uses its egg tooth to scratch around the inside of the shell in a circular path. The scratches weaken the shell in a pattern all around the egg. This is called pipping, and it can take from one to two days. A pip is considered to be a crack in the egg’s shell and shows up as the eaglet begins to emerge. Experts said it could take between 12 and 48 hours for an eaglet to completely emerge from the shell. A second egg is expected to hatch as soon as this weekend, eagle experts said. On Thursday, the foundation sent out pictures and updates throughout the day. when bald eagle eggs don’t hatch Already this season of Bald Eagle watching, we have witnessed the sad circumstance of eggs not hatching: both eggs of the two-egg clutch at the Sequoyah National Wildlife Refuge nest in Oklahoma, and one of the two eggs at the Jordan Lake nest in North Carolina (it is impossible to know whether it was the first or second of the clutch since the egg-laying dates are unknown there). Bald Eagle Egg Fertilization | Great Solutions For Hair Loss [...] stand of … I can stand in line at Lowe’s and watch an entireEagle Eggs: when and how they develop – Hancock Wildlife … – Live streaming video from eagle and other bird nests, bears, wolves, salmon, whales and [...] A. Yes, eagles or any parts, unless you have a special federal and state permit to do so. The reason is that many eagles used to be killed for trophies and for their feet and feathers. Such unregulated killing can threaten populations of eagles and other species. Query: how long does it take for bald eagle eggs to hatch",
"output": [
"Bald eagle takes 35 days to hatch eggs."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d21826478ee5487289d7dc6ff4dcb9aa",
"input": "At a minimum, a four-year bachelor’s degree in chemical engineering, with coursework in chemistry, physics, math (through differential equations), and computers is required. Some universities offer a five-year program that leads to both a bachelor’s and master’s degree. Most chemical engineers have a master’s degree and/or a Ph.D. Benefits of ECE. Emerging Areas of ECE: The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) provides a list of emerging areas in electrical and computer engineering. That's Engineering. Who designs the things that make the world a better place, help people in need, and help society confront its greatest challenges — of energy, safe water, and transportation? Find opportunities for pre- university, undergraduate, and graduate students all over the world. 1 Engineering Camps. 2 Engineering Competitions. 3 Internships. 4 Engineering Projects. 5 Scholarships. As the School of Engineering continues to grow and create an entrepreneurial incubator, we believe that this rate of success will accelerate. We are committed to infusing entrepreneurship into our students and faculty, so that their innovations and ideas can create the technology companies of the future. 3) A mechanical engineer can help the society by conducting the awareness program in giving the first priority to the Cleanliness(so that the health of the society can be improved). 4) A mechanical engineer can help the society by conducting the awareness program in the safety aspects of our mundane activities. Mechanical and electrical engineers have an assembly line most of the time but for us every design is unique and it can't be replicated anywhere. Everytime we have to update ourselves for making lives easier for the society. The society will not have any of the modern amenities if it is not for the civil engineers. The sustainability charter (2003) and a revised definition of civil engineering by Council in 2007 as “a vital art, working with the great sources of power in nature for the wealth and well-being of the whole of society” indicated an emphasis on the societal and environmentally sympathetic nature of civil engineering’s mission. Civil Engineering. Civil Engineers serve society by designing the built environment and managing the natural environment. You will learn to plan, design, and construct civil works like highways, water and wastewater systems, tunnels, dams, buildings, and bridges. Environmental Engineers are involved in water and air pollution control, recycling, waste disposal, and public health issues. Environmental engineers conduct hazadardous-waste management studies in which they evaluate the significance of the hazard, advise on its treatment and containment, and develop regulations to prevent mishaps. Query: how does engineering help society",
"output": [
"A mechanical engineer can help the society by conducting the awareness program in giving the first priority to the Cleanliness and civil Engineers serve society by designing the built environment and managing the natural environment."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e53eb7b21c3a47efa5ee458cbb4571d3",
"input": "peroxide in a freezer reserved for laboratory chemicals only. Manganese dioxide is a strong oxidant, avoid contact with organic material. Inhalation can lead to increased incidence of respiratory infection and effects on the central nervous system. It is assumed to be harmful if swallowed. Avoid dust. Wash hands well after handling. How much oxygen gas in grams can be prepared from 58.8g of potassium chlorate? Pure oxygen gas can be prepared in the laboratory by the decomposition of solid potassium chlorate to form solid potassium chloride and oxygen gas. How much oxygen gas in grams can be prepared from 58.8g of potassium chlorate? Give a clear explanation of your answer to get chosen as best. Follow. Oxygen in a gas jar will rekindle a glowing splint Name 3 physical properties of Oxygen Colourless Odourless and Tasteless, Slightly soluble in water, Slightly heavier than air gas, with a density greater than that of air, and a very low solubility in water. properties greatly facilitate the collection of oxygen in this lab. combustion. In this lab, oxygen will be generated as a product of the decomposition of hydrogen peroxide. A catalyst is used to speed up the rate of the decomposition reaction, which would otherwise be too slow to use as We don't won't to put the stopper on the flask just yet. There is about 25 mL of air (80% nitrogen & 20% oxygen) in the flask. The bubbles of oxygen that are forming will displace the air by pushing it out of the flask. Oxygen is a little more dense than air, so oxygen will stay closer to the surface of the water and push the air out of the flask. Wait about 2 minutes before placing the stopper onto the flask. That will give the newly created oxygen to push the most of the air out of the flask. (Iron, for instance, would oxidize, and thus decrease the amount of oxygen given off.) The theoretical maximum efficiency (electricity used vs. energetic value of hydrogen produced) is between 8094%. 2H2O(aq)-- 2H2(g) + O2(g) Prepared in the laboratory by: methane. CH 4. Heating a compound called sodium ethanoate with another compound soda-lime (sodium hydroxide). The methane gas is collected over water. oxygen. O 2. Adding hydrogen peroxide solution to manganese IV oxide powder. The oxygen gas is collected over water. carbon dioxide. CO 2 How do we prepare oxygen in the lab? By decomposing hydrogen peroxide using manganese dioxide as a catalyst What is the word equation for the laboratory preparation of Oxygen? With the help of a diagram explain how oxygen gas is prepared in the laboratory. Set up the apparatus as shown. Add 10 volume hydrogen peroxide slowly via the funnel. Oxygen will pass through the delivery tube. Oxygen is collected by downward displacement of water in the gas jar. With the help of a diagram explain how hydrogen gas is prepared in the laboratory. Set up the apparatus as shown. Add dilute sulphuric or hydrochloric acid slowly via the funnel. Preparation of Gases in Laboratory Aims: To prepare oxygen, hydrogen and carbon dioxide gas in laboratory. Problems : 1. How to prepare oxygen gas in laboratory? 2. How to prepare carbon dioxide gas in laboratory? 3. How to prepare hydrogen gas in laboratory? Hypothesis: 1. Oxygen gas can be prepared in laboratory by using manganese dioxide (MnO2) and hydrogen peroxide (H2O2). 2. Carbon dioxide gas can be prepared in laboratory by using marble chips (CaCO3) and dilute hydrochloric acid (HCl). 3. Hydrogen gas can be prepared in laboratory by using zinc metal and diluted hydrochloric acid (HCl). Variables: Query: how is oxygen prepared in the laboratory?",
"output": [
"Pure oxygen gas can be prepared in the laboratory by the decomposition of solid potassium chlorate to form solid potassium chloride and oxygen gas."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3ecfa00ab2d041dabb09792e91142d21",
"input": "If you are an Online Banking customer, you can order check copies now; or sign in to Online Banking and select your account, then select the Information & Services tab. If you are not an Online Banking customer, please contact us for assistance with your check copy request. If the account is more than ten years old, or the bank has gone out of business or been taken over by another bank, it may be extremely time-consuming and costly to find old statements. References Bank of America: Bank Account Fees How long does a bank keep your info after you close the account? My daughter was opening a bank account recently at a bank that she/we have never banked at but when she started filling in the documents the bank officer asked her if she had had an account with them before and still lived at 199 ** Road. Banks do keep records on microFICHE, for 7 years, but once an account has been closed, they generally dump the records after 2 or 3. 05-02-2008, 08:52 pm #9 Texas Pooh Comparison of longest average store hours in the regions (MSAs) in which TD Bank operates compared to major banks. Major banks include our top 20 national competitors by MSA, our top five competitors in store share by MSA and any bank with greater or equal store share than TD Bank in the MSA. Major banks do not include banks that operate in retail stores such as grocery stores, or banks that do not fall in an MSA. It is highly suggested that each person retain their own personal records for up to 10 years after the accounts at a bank are closed. This is also highly regarded as a safe minimum for any tax records as well. So what should you do? Divide your financial papers into four categories: Papers that you need to keep for the calendar year or less; papers that can be destroyed when you no longer own the items they cover; tax records, (we'll tell you how long to keep tax records) and finally, a category for papers to keep indefinitely. Check Yourself Out In ChexSystems: Don’t wait until you’re denied a new bank account to check your banking history report. Every 12 months, you should proactively request your free copy of your ChexSystems report and make sure it’s free of errors. When an individual has a credit card through a bank, the account only needs to become dormant in order for the ban to consider it closed, but these records must be retained for 5 years after closing or dormancy as well. · just now. 1 It is possible that the new bank still may have records, but you will have to pay for their time researching them. The real situation is you have a so called debt, that you dispute the validity of. 2 My late husband had incurred a tax debt for a tax he thought he had paid. So I began researching that for him... The bank was still open and in operation and still maintained on microfilm the records of his account of 29 years earlier... !!! and only charged us $25 to find a copy of the check! So if you have to, keep digging... Query: how long does a bank keep records after you close account",
"output": [
"Banks do keep records for 2 or 3 years after you close account."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c371010990f14db9b45d8f5f04656c3c",
"input": "How long does inguinal hernia surgery take? Usually, patients are faced with 2 solutions: classic surgery (anterior inguinal hernioplasty) with local anaesthesia. Through a small incision, the hernia is identified and repositioned inside the abdomen. Ways to Cope Up with Scrotal Swelling after Hernia Surgery Scrotal swelling is the inflammation of the scrotum which becomes very large than the normal size and causes severe pain to the patient. This inflammation and swelling depend on certain factors. Tissue swelling can last for many months after surgery and is particularly noticeable after activity or late in the afternoon or evening. Swelling 10 weeks after abdominal wall surgery can be due to either swelling of the tissues or a fluid collection (seroma or hematoma). If there is a fluid collection it should probably be drained unless it is very small. Inguninal Hernia-This type of protrusion of hernia is found in children and in the groin area. The swelling does not pertain to the groin tissues and starts moving to the scrotum tissues area. The pain and swelling worsens on doing strenuous tasks and after lifting heavy objects. Tissue swelling can last for many months after surgery and is particularly noticeable after activity or late in the afternoon or evening. Your surgeon is the best one to… SHOW MORE. Swelling 10 weeks after abdominal wall surgery can be due to either swelling of the tissues or a fluid collection (seroma or hematoma). If there is a fluid collection it should probably be drained unless it is very small. How long does post-operative pain last for? The perceivable pain immediately after surgery is bearable. In subsequent days, there may be some general “bother” because sitting down and standing up will be movements that cause some discomfort. But nothing unbearable. With passing days, the improvements are evident. Ways to Cope Up with Scrotal Swelling after Hernia Surgery. Scrotal swelling is the inflammation of the scrotum which becomes very large than the normal size and causes severe pain to the patient. This inflammation and swelling depend on certain factors. Inguninal Hernia-This type of protrusion of hernia is found in children and in the groin area. _____ _____ The swelling does not pertain to the groin tissues and starts moving to the scrotum tissues area. The pain and swelling worsens on doing strenuous tasks and after lifting heavy objects. Patients experience inflamed testicles in the scrotum. Mostly both the testicles are swollen but the swelling in the single testicle itself can bring severe pain. This is caused due to viral or bacterial infection. Many people face the scrotal swelling after a hernia surgery. This could be due to the pull of the protruding intestinal tissues made through the incisions in the groin area to bring the hernia to normal. This affects the scrotum making it swell which lasts from three to eight months. I underwent surgery for a hernia on 3 March, under spinal anaesthesia. The ordeal began immediately after surgery with shooting pains which the physicians attributed to possible nerve injury. That night I had a fever of 38.5°C, and I was discharged on 6 March despite still having a temperature and after having been given two vials of antibiotics and two of painkillers per day. Hello, I underwent surgery for left inguinal hernia on 8 April. For the first week I was in bed with difficulty moving, and taking painkillers, effergan 500, first every 6 hours then every 10, 12 then 24 hours then none. After a week, I had the 4 external stitches removed. I had great difficulty walking. Query: how long does swelling last after hernia surgery",
"output": [
"Swelling can last for many months after hernia surgery."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4adc0789b4a54421b8a763193299e7ff",
"input": "Children with mosaic Down syndrome may have the same features as other children with Down syndrome. However, they may have fewer features of the condition due to the presence of some (or many) cells with a typical number of chromosomes. Down syndrome is a set of physical and mental traits caused by a gene problem that happens before birth. Children who have Down syndrome tend to have certain features, such as a flat face and a short neck. Chromosomes R Us - English (Video) This is a short film by actors with Down syndrome explaining how Trisomy 21 occurs. Made by Shabang Inclusive Learning in collaboration with Mediapreview. Huddersfield, West Yorkshire, UK. This film was made possible by generous funding from BBC Children in Need. Down syndrome can be diagnosed in infancy based on the characteristic clinical findings. When Down syndrome is suspected in a person, a genetic test called a chromosome analysis is performed on a blood or skin sample to look for an extra chromosome 21 (trisomy 21). Trisomy 21 means that each cell in the body has three copies of chromosome 21 instead of the usual two copies. Having an extra number 21 chromosome interrupts the normal course of development, causing the characteristic clinical features of Down syndrome. Down syndrome can be caused by one of three types of abnormal cell division involving chromosome 21. The three genetic variations include: Trisomy 21– More than 90% of Down syndrome cases are caused by trisomy 21. An extra chromosome (chromosome 21) originates in the development of either the sperm or the egg. When the egg and the sperm unite to form the fertilized egg, three (rather than two) chromosomes 21 are present. Any one of three genetic variations can cause Down syndrome: Trisomy 21. About 95 percent of the time, Down syndrome is caused by trisomy 21 — the person has three copies of chromosome 21, instead of the usual two copies, in all cells. This is caused by abnormal cell division during the development of the sperm cell or the egg cell. Mosaic Down syndrome. You may decide to have: 1 Screening tests, such as an ultrasound or a blood test during your first or second trimester. These can help show if the developing baby (fetus) is at risk for Down syndrome. 2 Diagnostic tests, such as chorionic villus sampling or amniocentesis. These can show if a baby has Down syndrome. Down Syndrome Causes and Symptoms. Down syndrome is a genetic disorder in which, most often, a third copy of chromosome 21 is present in cells because of an abnormal cell division when the egg and sperm first meet. The complications of living with Down syndrome can range in severity to mild to extreme and may include the following: 1 Thyroid disease. 2 Heart defects. 3 Infectious diseases. 4 Sleep apnea. 5 Obesity. 6 Seizures. 7 Hearing loss. 8 Premature aging. 9 Skeletal problems. 10 Inability to care for one’s self. The risk for someone with tranlocation trisomy 21 passing on the condition to a child is roughly 10 to 15 percent for women and three percent for men. Since translocation trisomy 21 only accounts for around four percent of people with Down syndrome, less than one percent of cases would be considered hereditary. Query: how does down syndrome caused",
"output": [
"Down syndrome can be caused by one of three types of abnormal cell division involving chromosome 21. The three genetic variations include: Trisomy 21– More than 90% of Down syndrome cases are caused by trisomy 21. An extra chromosome (chromosome 21) originates in the development of either the sperm or the egg. When the egg and the sperm unite to form the fertilized egg, three (rather than two) chromosomes 21 are present."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e97b0a6270764614b4bd6456ef86fe22",
"input": "Analyzing Makeup Artist Salaries in California. Makeup artists in California are very well paid, enjoying some of the highest salaries in the country within the field. California’s Employment Development Department (EDD) provides detailed information on the salaries of makeup artists in the state as of 2014: The median salary for these professionals was $77,827 in 2014. This was 64% higher than the national median salary for makeup artists. California Artist salaries vary greatly from town to town. See below for Artist salaries, bonus and benefits information for 79 cities in the California area. Select a city to view more specific salary and bonus information California The average salary of public school teachers in 2015 – 16 for the State of California was $77,179. According to Table C-5 of the National Education Association’s (NEA) Rankings & Estimates: Rankings of the States 2016 and Estimates of School Statistics 2017 report, California’s 2015 – 16 average teacher salary ranked second highest in comparison to all other states. New York makeup artists, according to the BLS, earned the highest annual, mean salary, at $103,620, followed by California makeup artists, who earned $78,250. The gap between the two highest paying states for makeup artists and other states is quite significant, with Massachusetts makeup artists earning a mean, annual salary of $60,480 during the same period. Personal Salary Reports Our Personal Salary report not only explains your value in different markets, but provides resources to help you leverage this infromation. Learn More Average Make-Up Artist Hourly Wage in California. Make-Up Artists earn a median hourly wage of $36.82. Hourly wages typically start from $10.14 and go up to $60.93. Source: U.S. Department of Labor Bureau of Labor Statistics. How much does a Artist make in California? California Artist salaries vary greatly from town to town. See below for Artist salaries, bonus and benefits information for 79 cities in the California area. Artist's Annual Base Salary The highest earning Dancers in California earn: $28.20 an hour - per year: Senior Dancer Earnings. Senior Dancers in California earn: $22.39 an hour - per year: Experienced Dancer Earnings. Experienced Dancers in California earn: $14.24 an hour - per year: Junior Dancer Earnings. Junior Dancers in California earn: $10.69 an hour - per year: Starting Dancer Earnings Salary ranges, benefits, bonuses, stats, job descriptions and open positions for Artist in California. Including Artist salaries in Anaheim, Antioch, Apple Valley, Bakersfield, Berkeley, Burbank, Carlsbad, Carson, Chico, Chula Vista, Coachella, Concord, Corona, Costa Mesa, Daly City, Downey, El Cajon, El Monte, Elk Grove, Escondido, Fairfield, Fontana, Fremont, Fresno, Fullerton, Garden Grove, Glendale, Hayward, Huntington Beach, Inglewood, Irvine, Lancaster, Lompoc, Long Beach, Los Angeles ... May 2016 State Occupational Employment and Wage Estimates. California. These occupational employment and wage estimates are calculated with data collected from employers in all industry sectors in metropolitan and nonmetropolitan areas in California. Additional information, including the hourly and annual 10th, 25th, 75th, and 90th percentile wages and the employment percent relative standard error, is available in the downloadable XLS file. Links to OES estimates for other areas and States Query: average artist annual salary california",
"output": [
"The average annual salary of makeup artist is $78,250 in California."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-df8678201126470280ad953fd2a56871",
"input": "When you speak, sound waves created by your voice carry energy toward the microphone. Inside the microphone, the diaphragm moves back and forth when the sound waves hit it. The coil, attached to the diaphragm also moves back and forth. The permanent magnet produces a magnetic field that cuts through the coil. How Electret Microphones Work. With the diaphragm and the back plate ready to receive sound waves, they work by letting the incoming sound waves from a source of sound from any direction to change the capacitance between the two conducting plates. March 31, 2015. A carbon mic is a simple device to turn sound waves into an electronic signal. Carbon microphones were used in telephones, radio broadcast systems and many other devices through the 80s. microphone’s directional sensitivity, which is how a microphone picks up sound from different directions. These are the three most common polar patterns: CARDIOID These patterns pick up the most sound from in front of the microphone and some from the sides They are less susceptible to feedback in loud environments. SUPERCARDIOID Or you could amplify (boost the size of) the current and then feed it into a loudspeaker, turning the electricity back into much louder sound. That's how PA (personal address) systems, electric guitar amplifiers, and rock concert amplifiers work. If you are having problems with getting your microphone to work, make sure it is compatible with Windows 7 and that you download all necessary drivers for your microphone prior to use. References (1) HP: Resolving Microphone and Line-in Problems (Windows 7) However the acoustic transparency, particularly at HF, should also be indicated, since a very high level of wind attenuation could be associated with very muffled audio. 1 Various microphone covers. 2 Two recordings being made—a blimp is being used on the left. 3 Dead cat and a dead kitten windscreens. Phillip Corcoran. 1 Probably because your laptop has a combo single jack that performs both tasks (mic & earphones), whereas your PC has separate jacks for mic and earphones, but headset only has a single (combo jack-plug. In a microphone, there are almost identical parts but they work in exactly the reverse way. How microphones work How does a microphone turn sound energy into electrical energy? A: A wireless microphone works by using a wireless transmitter, which is incorporated into the microphone or attached to a body pack transmitter. The battery-operated wireless transmitter includes an antenna for broadcasting sounds. Query: how does a microphone work",
"output": [
"A wireless microphone works by using a wireless transmitter, which is incorporated into the microphone or attached to a body pack transmitter. The battery-operated wireless transmitter includes an antenna for broadcasting sounds."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-39debc120573409dba4d786875ae684b",
"input": "Find tips to help you feel better faster and avoid complications after your hysterectomy procedure, including instructions for diet, bathing, and physical activity. Skip Navigation Search Re: How long to recover from a hysterectomy Unfortunately when i go back the only way out is to file another FMLA claim. It takes time to see if metlife approves it. Recovering from your hysterectomy The Susan F. Smith Center for Women's Cancers at Dana-Farber provides a variety of services to help patients and their families cope with the many physical, emotional, and spiritual challenges of a cancer diagnosis and its treatment. Sometimes a hysterectomy includes removal of one or both ovaries and fallopian tubes, a procedure called a total hysterectomy with salpingo-oophorectomy (sal-ping-go-o-of-uh-REK-tuh-me). A hysterectomy can also be performed through an incision in the vagina (vaginal hysterectomy) or by a laparoscopic or robotic surgical approach — which uses long, thin instruments passed through small abdominal incisions. An abdominal hysterectomy may be recommended over other types of hysterectomy if: You have a large uterus. Recovery will depend on the type, extent, and reason for the procedure. A brief hospital stay may be needed. Full recovery can take from 4 to 8 weeks depending on the procedure and the health status of the patient. Some activities, such as heavy lifting, sex, tub bathing, and tampon use may be temporarily advised against. People keep telling me how great I’m going to feel in a few weeks when my iron levels recover from a year of almost constant bleeding. I can’t wait. As of today I’m officially cleared for driving. I’ll be happier when I’m cleared to get back on my bike, but that may be a few weeks yet. Recovery Time For Laparoscopic Hysterectomy Patients A majority of laparoscopic patients can get back to work and other activities within two weeks of the surgery. Some people may want to take it easy and should not lift anything heavy, even when their surgeon clears them. First, each person heals differently from one another. Second, the surgical procedure chosen, such as an abdominal hysterectomy or a vaginal laparoscopic assisted hysterectomy, can determine your recovery time. Third, the reason for your surgery can have a big impact on how much time you need to recover. For instance, if you have uterine cancer, it is going to take more time to recover from the disease and the surgery. Hysterectomy Procedure Example Your surgeon might recommend LAVH or robotic hysterectomy if you have scar tissue (pelvic adhesions) on your pelvic organs from prior surgeries or from endometriosis. After the procedure. After surgery, you'll be in a recovery room for a few hours and in the hospital for one to two days, possibly longer. Many women have asked what they can do to help themselves recover after having a hysterectomy. Most of the strategies are common sense tips to overall good health. The suggestions listed below are meant to help you feel better faster and prevent complications. This can be used as a useful guide during your recovery and in the future. Things to do Diet Query: how long to recover from a hysterectomy",
"output": [
"A majority of laparoscopic patients can get back to work and other activities within two weeks of the surgery."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e25e65f52c7f441eab4f242a410a3716",
"input": "If none of these types of child fevers fit your current situation, then you probably don’t need to call your doctor. 1 If your infant is 6 weeks or younger, and has a fever of 101 degrees or higher, this is considered a medical emergency. Your doctor should evaluate your infant right away, either during business hours or in an emergency room after hours. Do not give any fever-reducing medications in this situation (you don’t want to hide the fever until after a doctor has evaluated your baby). When a Fever is Most Likely Not Serious. 1 Remember, fevers are your body’s natural response to infection, and not necessarily a sign that something serious is taking place. 2 Low-grade child fevers are generally not serious, are easily treated and can wait until the morning to be evaluated by your doctor. Fevers of 101 to 103 degrees (38.4 to 39.5 Celsius) are also generally not serious and can wait until morning to be evaluated. When Not to Worry About Child Fevers. 1 Remember, fevers are your body’s natural response to infection, and not necessarily a sign that something serious is taking place. 2 Low-grade fevers are generally not serious, are easily treated and can wait until the morning to be evaluated by your doctor. If your child of any age has one or more of the following symptoms, you should probably call your doctor right away: Fevers of 104 (40 Celsius) or higher that don’t come down to 101 or 102 (38.3 to 38.9 Celsius) with the treatment measures below. Top 3 Causes of Fevers. If your child has a fever the chances are good one of the following conditions caused it: This is the most common cause of fever in children. Examples are: roseola, colds, flu, coxsackie (hand, foot and mouth disease), chicken pox, fifth disease, along with many others. You should take children older than 3 months to the emergency room (ER) for a fever if the fever is more than 104 degrees for a long period of time. Ice them down first and then bring them to the ER. No. Many parents have a misconception that fevers are a bad thing and a sign that there is some serious underlying illness. This simply is not true. Child fevers are a normal and healthy response of the body to an illness. The body’s immune system releases chemicals that raise the body temperature. If your child has a fever, it is usually a good idea to call your pediatrician before heading to the emergency room (ER). If your pediatrician is unavailable, consider the guidelines below. If your baby is younger than three months old and the temperature is over 100.4, visit the ER. If none of these types of child fevers fit your current situation, then you probably don’t need to call your doctor. If your infant is 6 weeks or younger, and has a fever of 101 degrees or higher, this is considered a medical emergency. If your child has a fever, it is best to call your pediatrician first before heading to the emergency room (ER). However, if your pediatrician is unavailable, and your child (age 3 or older) has had a temperature over 102 degrees for two or more days, you should seek emergency care. You should also head to the ER if the fever is accompanied by any of these symptoms: abdominal pain. difficulty breathing or swallowing. Query: at what temp should i take my baby to er",
"output": [
"You should take children older than 3 months to the emergency room at a temperature of 104 degrees."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-75e4b2cb283a4a1eae3391f89e23b7ba",
"input": "There are various places you can go to for an HIV test, including: 1 sexual health or genitourinary medicine (GUM) clinics. 2 clinics run by charities like the Terrence Higgins Trust. 3 some GP surgeries. 4 some contraception and young people's clinics. 5 local drug dependency services. 6 an antenatal clinic, if you're pregnant. By six months after infection, most people will turn positive on an antibody test. Because of this, antibody testing isn't appropriate for people who are worried they may have been very recently exposed to HIV or herpes. If this is the case, talk to your doctor about what type of testing may be right for you. The human immunodeficiency virus -- HIV -- causes acquired immunodeficiency syndrome, or AIDS. You can be infected with HIV for many years and show few if any symptoms before the development of AIDS. However, people who are HIV-infected can transmit the virus to other people. Authors of a study published in 2005 in the Journal of Infectious Disease reported that the highest rate of HIV transmission occurs when an individual is newly infected but does not test positive for HIV. If your first test is done in a testing lab and it’s positive, the lab will conduct the follow-up testing, usually on the same blood sample as the first test. Talk to your health care provider to see what type of HIV test is right for you. If you test negative on an HIV RNA test after two weeks of possibly being exposed, you are very likely HIV-negative. If you test negative on a 4th generation rapid test or lab assay that detects HIV antigens (part of the HIV virus) in addition to antibodies after three or four weeks after possibly being infected, you are very likely HIV-negative. And if you test negative on an antibody test taken 3 months or longer after your last possible risk of possible exposure to HIV, you are likely HIV-negative. The person who gives you your HIV test will have additional information about the test's window period.. For this reason, we recommend that people who are having sex get tested routinely every 3 months. Routine testing is painless and ensures that if you do get infected, you can start treatment right away. If a person has been exposed to HIV, there is a period by which an HIV test cannot deliver an accurate response known as the window period. If a person has been exposed to HIV, there is a period by which an HIV test cannot deliver an accurate response known as the window period. How long do HIV test results take? How are they reported? How long do results take? Rapid HIV tests can give results in 15—60 minutes, or on the same day. ‘Rapid’ refers for the time taken for the results and not the time since exposure that a test can be used. If samples are being sent to another lab, results can take a few days or a few weeks. Rapid blood tests put a pin-prick of blood on a testing strip. This test takes about 15-20 minutes so you can get the results whilst you wait. Some rapid tests also work on oral samples rather than blood. Although they are sometimes called saliva tests this is not accurate. 20-45 days after infection, HIV antibodies can be detected by this type of test RNA tests – show a positive result based on the presence of the virus. These tests are more expensive than antibody tests, so are not offered in as many places. An HIV test can show infection in most people within 3 months (average of 25 days to build HIV antibodies). A 3 month negative test may be repeated at the 6 month point to pick up on the rare situations in >. ... ...risky behavior and that you were not exposed to any HIV-infected fluids. The only way to know for sure whether you have been infected is to get tested. You should wait for 3 months after a possible exposure. Then get an HIVblood test (see Fact Sheet 102 ). You might feel that you have been exposed toHIV by sharing needles, an accident, or unsafe sexual activity. In these cases, talk to your health care provider immediately . Query: how long does it take hiv to show in blood test",
"output": [
"It takes three or four weeks hiv to show in blood test."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-bb058eac4d214a9f975b87028382ae86",
"input": "Things You Should Know About...LEMON LAW. Has this ever happened to you...You buy a brand new car. But instead of hitting the open road in your new dream machine, the vehicle is spending all of its time and your money at your local auto repair shop. If so, Illinois' Lemon Law may be able to help. Is My Vehicle a Lemon? In order to be covered by the Illinois Lemon Law, a vehicle must: have a nonconformity that both substantially impairs the use , market value or safety of the vehicle and is not repairable by the dealer or manufacturer in at least four attempts for the same repair, or. be out of service for a total of 30 or more business days. Hopefully you never have to read our Lemon Law guide (because it probably means your shiny new car has gone sour). But if you do, we've cut through the legalese in your state's statutes to educate you about your rights under the law―in language anyone can understand. Most states' Lemon Laws are spelled out in their legal code. Michigan's Auto Lemon Law The law applies to privately owned passenger vehicles and those leased after January 1, 2000, used for personal, family or household purposes. Some business-type vehicles may also be covered. The law does not apply to larger trucks, motor homes, motorcycles, or off-road vehicles. Use our state Lemon Law guides to find out how to keep good records, notify the manufacturer that the vehicle is flawed, file a Lemon Law complaint, and receive restitution. We'll tell you exactly what your state's laws say regarding what qualifies as a lemon, how long you have to file a claim, and what the burden of proof is. Since we will never charge you for anything, the best part is that working with The Lemon Law Attorneys will cost much less than if you handled the case on your own. You’ll have no wasted time and effort running around trying to find the right person to manage your case and then trying to figure out what you need to file the claim. How The Florida Lemon Law Works. The Lemon Law covers defects or conditions that substantially impair the use, value or safety of a new or demonstrator vehicle (these are called nonconformities). These defects must be first reported to the manufacturer or its authorized service agent (usually, this is the dealer) during the Lemon Law Rights Period, which is the first 24 months after the date of delivery of the motor vehicle to the consumer. The Act extends to the purchase of consumer products, including motor vehicles and appliances. The Act also provides that the warranter may be obligated to pay the prevailing party's attorney in a successful lawsuit, as do most state lemon laws. A consumer may pursue relief under both a state lemon law and the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act. Lemon Law Easy as 1 – 2 – 3. 1 – Tell us your problems. Call us at 1-877-57-LEMON or complete the free case review form. 2 – We evaluate your case for free. Our Lemon Law lawyers will evaluate your case and discuss the best way to resolve it quickly. 3 – Compensation. If You Need to File a Lemon Law Complaint. Check the information on the Texas Lemon Law that came with your vehicle. This website will provide you with further information on your rights under the law and the complaint process and eligibility. Consult with legal counsel, if necessary. Dispute Resolution What to do if You Buy a Lemon. 1 Report the problem within 18 months of ORIGINAL purchase or before 18,000 ORIGINAL miles, whichever comes first. 2 Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for repair. 3 Allow a dealer a reasonable number of attempts to repair. Query: how does the lemon law work",
"output": [
"The Lemon Law covers defects or conditions that substantially impair the use, value or safety of a new or demonstrator vehicle. These defects must be first reported to the manufacturer or its authorized service agent during the Lemon Law Rights Period, which is the first 24 months after the date of delivery of the motor vehicle to the consumer."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7cd659b18464467ab351cba0170246b1",
"input": "Potassium and Chronic Kidney Disease. 1 Choose apples, berries or grapes, instead of bananas, oranges or kiwi. 2 Select watermelon, instead of cantaloupe or honeydew. 3 Eat peaches, plums or pineapple, instead of nectarines, mangos or papaya. 4 Choose dried cranberries, instead of raisins or other dried fruit. Common potassium chloride side effects may include: nausea, vomiting, diarrhea; gas, stomach pain; or. the appearance of a potassium chloride tablet in your stool. This is not a complete list of side effects and others may occur. Call your doctor for medical advice about side effects. You may report side effects to FDA at 1-800-FDA-1088. Potassium chloride: Potassium chloride can be safe or can be fatal, depending upon amount given or taken in a specified amount of time. If potassium deficit exists, then the body handles a large amount. Potassium could build up to dangerous levels in your body. Kidney disease: Use potassium only with the advice and ongoing care of a healthcare professional if you have kidney problems. POTASSIUM Interactions This is called hyperkalemia, or high potassium. According to the Mayo Clinic, a normal range of potassium is between 3.6 and 5.2 millimoles per liter (mmol/L) of blood. A potassium level higher than 5.5 mmol/L is critically high, and a potassium level over 6 mmol/L can be life-threatening. Is Potassium Sorbate Bad for You? 4.08 (81.54%) 13 votes Is the preservative used to prevent mold growth in foods such as cheese, yogurt, wine, dried meat, pickles, apple cider, and many herbal dietary supplements harmful for humans? The use of diuretics or blood pressure medications can also lead to high potassium levels, along with certain diseases and medical conditions. When the body becomes too acidic or suffers tremendous injury, an influx of potassium is released from the cells into the bloodstream. Because research has not pinpointed a number of daily milligrams of potassium that would adversely affect healthy individuals, the IOM has not set a tolerable upper intake level for potassium. However, because excessive potassium can be harmful, manufacturers of over-the-counter supplements in the United States must limit the potassium content of each daily supplement to 99 milligrams. Be sure your doctor knows if you have: 1 high levels of potassium in your blood (hyperkalemia); 2 kidney failure; 3 a urinary tract infection; 4 untreated or uncontrolled diabetes; 5 Addison's disease (an adrenal gland disorder); 6 a large tissue injury such as a severe burn; 7 a peptic ulcer in your stomach; 8 if you are severely dehydrated; or. Most of the potassium in your body is in the fluid inside of cells. As the balance of fluid shifts when you have too much potassium, you could wind up with more pressure inside of cells and not enough on the outside of cells. Picture filling up a balloon to where it exceeds its capacity and is about to burst. The same sort of thing happens to cells. Query: how is potassium harmful",
"output": [
"According to the Mayo Clinic, a normal range of potassium is between 3.6 and 5.2 millimoles per liter of blood. A potassium level higher than 5.5 mmol/L is critically high, and a potassium level over 6 mmol/L can be life-threatening."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-529af9b18d194a07b84b2ebb9bdf5976",
"input": "Keeping the I-9s in a separate location will ensure that if you are selected for a Federal I-9 file review, government employees will not have access to any other records about the employee or her employment with your organization. June/July 2015. Employers should know how long to keep or destroy employee files and documents. Each state and federal agency has a different set of requirements, often covering the same documents so it's challenging for you to know what to keep and for how long. Federal vs. State. Federal guidelines may conflict with state retention guidelines. When you own and run a business with employees, you have to establish and maintain employee records and personnel files. Since employees may come and go, you may wonder how long you should hang on to the employee records. The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) weighs in on records pertaining to employee taxes, such as payroll, but the other records depend on what types of records you have for employees. Payroll The IRS recommends that you keep payroll records like tax withholding until you and the employee can no longer file amendments for that tax year. In the case of employment records, the IRS guidelines say to keep the records for a minimum of four years after you pay the tax or the tax is due, whichever of the two dates is later. Small business expert Rieva Lesonsky suggests you keep employment records for a minimum of two years and for up to seven years. She says that most states have a two-year statute of limitations on lawsuit filings by former employees, so you want to make sure you have documents at hand if this occurs. The ADEA requires the retention of the same records for one year for employers with twenty or more employees. Title VII and the ADA require that basic employee demographic data, pay rates, and weekly compensation records be retained for at least one year. Family and Medical Leave Act (FMLA): The right to inspect personnel files does not apply to an employee covered by a valid collective bargaining agreement if the agreement expressly provides for all of the following: (1) the wages, hours of work, and working conditions of employees, (2) a procedure for the inspection and copying of personnel records, (3) premium wage rates for all overtime hours worked, (4) a regular rate of pay of not less than 30 percent more than the state minimum wage rate. Maintain the employee I-9 Form, stored separately from your personnel records, for three years after you hire the employee and for one year following employment termination, whichever is later. Health/Pension Benefits Information: 6 Years Employer Requirements - Record Keeping. 1 Check stubs and canceled checks for all payments. 2 Cash receipts and disbursement records. 3 Payroll journal. 4 General journal and general ledger. 5 Copies of tax reports filed with all federal and state agencies. 6 Copies of W-2(s) and W-3(s). 7 Other accounting records as may be required. FMLA Records: 3 Years. When an employee requests FMLA, you need to keep that paper trail, even if you deny the leave. Make sure that you keep track of each employee's leave - when it began and how much time is used. If the employee has intermittent FMLA, make sure you track every leave and document the number of hours used. Though it is not required by law, the best practice for a company in New York is to retain its employees' personnel files for the length of the employee's employment plus five years. This is the case, among other reasons, because an individual may file a lawsuit under the New York City Human Rights Law, N.Y. City Admin. When any change in your business occurs, it is your responsibility to notify the department promptly. 1 A delay could result in additional costs to you later. Be sure to report changes such as: 2 Selling your business, 3 Discontinuing your business, 4 Acquiring another business, 5 Changing ownership of your business, Query: how long do i have to keep employee records",
"output": [
"You have to keep employee records for four years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b5ee80b7b44c48bb8d4c72db0023669e",
"input": "Let’s say you spend $2,000 to purchase and install a tankless water heater. If your annual savings are $100, it would take 20 years - the approximate lifespan of a tankless water heater - to recoup the cost in energy savings. Tankless Water Heaters Pros . Compact - Tankless water heaters are small and compact. They fit into tight spaces such as underneath the sink or in a closet. Often, they can be mounted to the wall. Energy efficient - According to ConsumerReports, tankless water heaters, on average, are 22 percent more energy efficient than traditional water heaters. No waiting for hot water - Tankless hot water heaters instantly heat the water you need. You’re not limited to the capacity of a holding tank. Long lifespan - Tankless water heaters last about 20 years, compared to an average of about 10 to 15 with conventional water heaters. If your annual savings are $100, it would take 20 years - the approximate lifespan of a tankless water heater - to recoup the cost in energy savings. Tankless Water Heaters Pros Compact - Tankless water heaters are small and compact. How Much Does A Tankless Water Heater Cost To Install And Operate? A tankless water heater can be a bit pricey. Tankless water heaters can range from $300 to $1100 or more depending upon the model. Gas tankless water heaters are typically a little cheaper. Tankless water heaters are more complicated than traditional models and have more electronics. Additional Costs for Tankless Gas Water Heaters. If you plan to install a gas tankless water heater, you'll also have to factor in the cost for venting to the outside and any needed electrical requirements. If you do not already have an outside vent, this installation can get a little pricey depending upon the length of the vent needed and any cutting that needs to be done. I really like my tankless gas water heater. I've had it over a year now. It uses about 40% less gas a month. Even though the initial cost is high, you can get a $300 tax credit on your income taxes. That helps. Over time, however, tankless water heaters do save money. Because of these factors, there's no simple answer as to how much money you can save. A tankless system can save 25% to 60% on your water heating bill, which can account for 30% or more of your overall utility bills. A tankless water heater, or on-demand water heater, typically weighs about 25 pounds and can be mounted on a wall taking up about two square feet of wall space. This versatility means that these units can fit practically anywhere, often freeing up valuable space in garages and closets. As you've probably noted, the price can range from $340 to the thousands of dollars. Financially speaking, tankless heaters can last up to 20 years (most regular water heaters have to be replaced every 10). The useage savings depends, obviously, on how much hot water you use. Depending upon your geographical location, usage, the cost of the system, the installation costs, and the differences between your old water heater and your new one, the amount of time to recoup your investment can vary greatly. · just now. 1 I really like my tankless gas water heater. 2 I don't have one but I know people who do, and I am also considering getting one. 3 Definitely get a gas one, there are too many problems with electric ones and consistent heat. 4 Tankles warm water heaters are large it is distinctly much all they use in Germany. Query: how long will it take to recoup cost of tankless water heater",
"output": [
"It would take 20 years - the approximate lifespan of a tankless water heater - to recoup the cost in energy savings."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-2f16465f6f4744409bdcaff5501fbcca",
"input": "Follow Following Unfollow Pending Disabled. A answered. Adult acute myeloid leukemia affects the body by disrupting the normal balance of blood cells in the body. Reduced levels of white blood cells, which normally defend the body from infection, can lead to higher chances of catching secondary diseases. Other symptoms of leukemia can include: 1 pain in the bones or joints, sometimes causing a limp. 2 swollen lymph nodes (sometimes called swollen glands) in the neck, groin, or elsewhere. 3 an abnormally tired feeling. 4 poor appetite. 5 fevers with no other symptoms. Drugs and other therapies can prevent or manage many side effects. Both cancer therapy and acute myeloid leukemia (AML) can sometimes produce side effects. For most patients, side effects are temporary and subside once the body adjusts to therapy or when therapy is completed. For other patients, side effects can be more severe, sometimes requiring hospitalization. Before you undergo treatment, talk with your doctor about potential side effects. Leukemias are cancers that start in cells that would normally develop into different types of blood cells. Here we will talk about acute myeloid leukemia (AML). Acute myeloid leukemia (AML) has many other names, including acute myelocytic leukemia, acute myelogenous leukemia, acute granulocytic leukemia, and acute non-lymphocytic leukemia. “Acute” means that this leukemia can progress quickly if not treated, and would probably be fatal in a few months. In acute leukemia blood cells are very abnormal, increase rapidly and worsen quickly. In chronic leukemia the abnormal blood cells can still do their work early in the disease but slowly get worse. The four common types of leukemia are: Acute myeloid leukemia (AML) is a type of blood cancer. It usually begins in cells that turn into white blood cells. Sometimes, though, AML can start in other types of blood-forming cells. Although there’s no cure, there are treatments that can make a big difference. What Happens. Acute myeloid leukemia starts in the bone marrow. This is the soft inner parts of bones. With acute types of leukemia such as AML, bone marrow cells don't mature the way they're supposed to. These immature cells, often called blast cells, keep building up. You may hear other names for acute myeloid leukemia. Doctors may call it: Acute myelocytic leukemia Some long-term and late effects for blood cancer survivors can linger for months or years after therapy. Blood cancer survivors don't always have serious long-term or late effects of treatment. For those who do, some long-term effects, such as fatigue, can linger for months or years after therapy. Late effects, such as medical conditions like heart disease and other cancers, don't appear until years after treatment ends. Effects can range from mild to severe. Talk with your doctor about possible long-term and late effects. 1 Your risk for developing long-term or late effects can be influenced by your: 2 Treatment type and duration. 3 Age at the time of treatment. 4 Gender. 5 Overall health. Acute promyeloid leukaemia (APML) Acute promyeloid leukaemia (APML) is a subtype of the blood cancer acute myeloid leukaemia (AML), and usually has the best overall prognosis. Read More about: Acute promyeloid leukaemia (APML) Tweet Adult acute myeloid leukemia (AML) is a type of cancer in which the bone marrow makes abnormal myeloblasts (a type of white blood cell), red blood cells, or platelets. Leukemia may affect red blood cells, white blood cells, and platelets. There are different subtypes of AML. Arber D, Brunning R, LeBeau M, et al. Acute myeloid leukemia with recurrent genetic abnormalities. In: Swerdlow S, Campo E, Harris N, et al., eds. WHO Classification of Tumours of Haematopoietic and Lymphoid. 4th ed. Lyon, France: WHO Press, 2008:110-123. Query: how does acute myeloid leukemia affect the body",
"output": [
"Adult acute myeloid leukemia affects the body by disrupting the normal balance of blood cells in the body."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-2be79d6141bc4a509b2bb3ee48459b36",
"input": "Stage 3: These symptoms can also be more severe and can occur 3-4 days after alcohol consumption has stopped: 1 Hallucinations. 2 Blood pressure spikes. 3 Muscle cramps. 4 Breathing difficulties. 5 Uncontrolled biting of tongue, cheek. 6 Teeth clenching. 7 Seizures. Yes: Alcohol withdrawal can often last up to 7 days after the last drink. So, after 10 days you should be ok. Note though that this is if you 100% abstain from any alcohol at all, even a sip. Also, taking alcohol and a benzodiazepene like Librium is extremely dangerous as it significantly raises your risk of seizure. This is called alcohol withdrawal. Symptoms can range from mild to serious. If you drink only once in a while, it's unlikely that you'll have withdrawal symptoms when you stop. More than 90 percent of seizures related to alcohol withdrawal occur within 48 hours of the last drink, according to a study titled Complications of Alcohol Withdrawal. This stage affects the whole body, with more violent shaking than that experienced in the tremulousness stage. The length of stay is based on the following: 1 The specific addiction. 2 Addiction history. 3 Addiction severity. 4 The presence of other medical, mental or behavioral health conditions (co-occurring diagnosis) 5 The client’s physical, mental, emotional, social and spiritual needs. Alcohol Withdrawal Side Effects. Alcohol withdrawal is likely to start between six hours and a day after the last drink, as reported in American Family Physician. Withdrawal can be broken down into three stages of severity: Stage 1 (mild): anxiety, insomnia, nausea, abdominal pain and/or vomiting, loss of appetite, fatigue, tremors, depression, foggy thinking, mood swings, and heart palpitations Several factors can play a role in the number of days detoxification will continue. 1 Amount of alcohol consumed. 2 How long the person has been drinking. 3 How often the person has been drinking on a regular basis. 4 Nutritional considerations. 5 Weight and age. 6 Was the alcohol combined with other substances. Congratulations on your decision to get sober. Yes, alcohol withdrawal after chronic, long term drinking can be dangerous. This is why (from what I’ve read) doctors always recommend medically supervised alcohol detox withdrawal periods for heavy drinkers. By medically supervised, I mean in a clinic. The severity of symptoms is dictated by a number of factors, the most important of which is degree of alcohol intake, length of time the individual has been using alcohol, and previous history of alcohol withdrawal. 1 Symptoms are also grouped together and classified: 1 - 2 Days After Last Drink. This is the time that many people dependent on alcohol struggle with the most. The negative symptoms of withdrawal are at their peak, and their body is crying out for their substance of choice. I’m going to assume if you’re reading this, that would be alcohol. Query: how long does it take for alcohol withdrawals to start",
"output": [
"Alcohol withdrawal starts between six hours and a day after the last drink."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-115b66b055da4b9c92a91ffa34944201",
"input": "Cover the top of the container with a plate in case there is an explosion. This will help contain a potential mess inside the container and also act to insulate the container and boil the water faster. Microwave the egg for 1 minute for soft boiled. If you prefer hard boiled eggs try 1 minute 20 seconds. Unfortunately, this is going to take a lot of experimenting to get right. Let the egg rest to finish the cooking process. From Fine Cooking’s Test Kitchen: Watch our How to Boil an Egg video to see an expert turn out soft-, medium-, and hard-cooked eggs without overcooking them. Soft boiled: 2 minutes The white is solid, but the yolk is still runny. Serve in an egg cup for breakfast. Use the side of a small spoon to crack and remove the pointed end of the egg, making a hole in the shell large enough to fit the spoon. Or use egg scissors, if you have them. Intermediate. 1 How to bone lamb shoulder. 2 How to cook glazed ham. 3 How to joint a rabbit. 4 How to roast chicken. 5 How to poach an egg. 6 Spatchcocking chicken and poultry. Serving Soft-Boiled Eggs. Soft-boiled eggs are their own little breakfast package. Nestle your egg in an egg cup, and then use the edge of a knife to gently tap the egg all the way around the top. If you have an egg-cutter, you can use that, too. Pull off the top and dig in. Directions. 1 1. If serving eggs cold, add 1 tray of ice cubes to a large bowl and fill with water. 2 2. Add 1 inch of water to a large pot. Place steamer insert inside, cover, and bring to a boil over high heat. 3 3. Serve immediately if serving hot. 3 minutes for very runny soft-boiled eggs with just-set whites ; 4 minutes for runny soft-boiled eggs ; 6 minutes for creamy, custard-y “medium”-boiled eggs ; 8 minutes for firm (but still creamy) hard-boiled eggs ; 10 minutes for firm hard-boiled eggs ; 12 minutes for very firm hard-boiled eggs The times start after the water has come to a boil and you’ve turned off the heat. 1 2 minutes – The white isn’t fully set and the yolk is totally raw. 2 4 minutes – The white is fully set, but the yolk is thick and runny. 3 6 minutes – The white is fully set, and the yolk is mostly set, but still a little runny in the middle. Following poached eggs, hard and soft boiled eggs also take some skill and patience to perfect. But making them in the microwave gives you control over time and power levels, something that is tricky to master on a stove. The only problem with this method is the potential for an egg explosion. See the caution note at the top of this page. Some suggest to remove the saucepan with the eggs from the heat once the water starts boiling and to let them sit for about 15 minutes. I even found one recipe where the author was recommending to bake the eggs in the oven for 30 minutes. That’s a lot of time for me. You can cook a whole meal for that amount of time. It’s not that you should let all your eggs expire before you eat them (in fact, please don’t), but you might want to wait a week or two before you boil eggs you picked up from your backyard chickens, local co-op or farmers market. Query: how long do you boil soft boil eggs",
"output": [
"You boil soft boil eggs for 1 minute in Microwave."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b0dd0dc9703c4e5087ed3ce0bee70357",
"input": "A captured pollen grain takes about 24 hours to grow down the silk to the ovule where fertilization occurs and the ovule becomes a kernel. Generally 2-3 days are required for all silks on a single ear to be exposed and pollinated. The silks will grow from 2.5-3.8 cm (1-1.5 inches) each day and will continue to elongate until fertilized. How to Grow Corn | Guide to Growing Corn. Corn demands fertile soil, consistent moisture and warm weather. If you have those and plenty of garden space to spare, it’s not hard to grow great-tasting corn, and you won’t get it any fresher. Needs deep, well-drained, fertile soil, pH 6.0 to 6.8 and consistent, plentiful moisture. For fresh picked corn flavor, you will have to grow your own. Luckily it's is easy to grow. Here's how to grow and care for sweet corn in your garden. however, a producer needs to understand corn growth and development. A producer who understands the corn plant can use production practices more efficiently to obtain higher yields and profit. This publication is designed to aid those involved in corn production to more fully understand how the corn plant develops. The content is both basic and applied. The basic information explains corn growth and development through one life cycle. (Corn will not germinate if soil temperature is less than 55 F.) To speed increase in soil temperature, consider covering soil with black plastic for several weeks before planting. Plant in blocks of at least 4 rows of a single hybrid (as opposed to fewer, longer rows) for good pollination and well-filled ears. (Some corn varieties need to be isolated from others. See variety information below.) Plant seeds 1 inch deep and 4 to 6 inches apart in rows 30 to 36 inches apart. The size of your corn plants will vary with the type of corn you are growing and the growing conditions, but most corn plants average 6 - 8 ft. tall. There are shorter varieties, for gardens with limited space. Step 1, Buy some fertile popcorn seeds. You can use plain popcorn from a bag, but you will want to do a fertility test first. Not all store-bought popcorn will be fertile because of the heating and sterilization processes popcorn goes through before being packaged and sold. You can also buy popcorn seeds from a seed company or from a farmer.[1] To test store-bought popcorn for fertility: sow 20 seeds ...Step 2, Soak the corn kernels in warm water for 12 hours. This helps moisten them so they ... You will need lots of room to grow corn. Don't plant within 100 feet (30.48 meters) of other types of corn, or you may get cross pollination. This could result in hybrids, and may affect the flavor. The actual number of days to harvest varies also from year to year and location to location. It takes anywhere between 58 days to over 100 days to harvest corn, depending upon the variety and the ear size. There are many different varieties of corn, some of which are heirloom and others that are hybrids. The maturity dates are relative to the type. The actual number of days to harvest varies also from year to year and location to location. It takes anywhere between 58 days to over 100 days to harvest corn, depending upon the variety and the ear size. Suckers may also develop from corn plants, and sometimes they may even produce an ear. Usually two ears grow on each corn plant. Once pollinated, corn matures rapidly, usually 15-20 days after the first silks appear. Cultivating Corn. Corn must be kept weed free, and shallow cultivation is important until the tassels appear. Then stop cultivating. Query: how long for corn to grow",
"output": [
"It takes anywhere between 58 days to over 100 days to harvest corn."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-6295bc8bddca4ef5a1187ccd1f94a632",
"input": "1 Upload failed. 2 We are experiencing some problems, please try again. 3 You can only upload files of type PNG, JPG or JPEG. 4 You can only upload files of type 3GP, 3GPP, MP4, MOV, AVI, MPG, MPEG or RM. 5 You can only upload photos smaller than 5 MB. 6 You can only upload videos smaller than 600 MB. As a planet rotates around its axis, the stars appear to move around a projection of the planet's axis into space. The time required for the stars to move once around their paths is called the sidereal period of rotation, or the rotation period of the planet. While the planet rotates, it is also moving around the Sun. How long does it take for each planet to rotate on its axis? mercury : 59 days venus: 243 days earth: 24 hours mars: 24.3 hours jupiter: 9.8 hours saturn: 10.2 hours uranus: 17.14 hours neptune: 16 hours 1 day. When we come to Uranus, the question of how long a day is becomes a bit complicated. One the one hand, the planet has a sidereal rotation period of 17 hours 14 minutes and 24 seconds, which is the equivalent of 0.71833 Earth days. So you could say a day on Uranus lasts almost as long as a day on Earth. It would be true, were it not for the extreme axial tilt this gas/ice giant has going on. A tidally locked body like the Moon of course does rotate; it just rotates at the same rate as its revolution around the primary. Tidal locking occurs because the mass of the Moon is not uniformly distributed; the Earth's gravity acts unevenly on it, so it falls into a locked configuration. Best Answer: This site has a table that lists all planets and their rotation times as well as other info.... http://www.astronomynotes.com/tables/tab... Rotation is ... How long does take for the moon to rotate on its axis? The moon has an axis, and as the moon orbits the Earth, it keeps the same face toward the earth. So the moon rotates on its axis the same length of time it takes to rotate the … earth -28 days. Collisions of rocky planetesmals in the inner part of the protoplanet disk. What event defined the formation of the sun in our solar system. The beginning of nuclear fusion in the suns core releasing large amounts of energy. In short, our planet takes 365.2564 solar days to complete a single orbit of the Sun, which is why we add an extra day to the calendar every four years (i.e. a Leap Year, which 2016 happens to be). But because our axis is tilted, there is considerable variation in the seasons during the course of a year. Observers on Earth might notice that the moon essentially keeps the same side facing our planet as it passes through its orbit. This may lead to the question, does the moon rotate? The answer is yes, though it may seem contrary to what our eyes observe. The 'dark' side of the moon. The moon orbits the Earth once every 27.322 days. It also takes approximately 27 days for the moon to rotate once on its axis. As a result, the moon does not seem to be spinning but appears to observers from Earth to be keeping almost perfectly still. Scientists call this sychronous rotation. Query: how long does it take for each planet to rotate on their axis",
"output": [
"Mercury takes 59 days,Venus takes 243 days, Earth takes 24 hours, Mars takes 24.3 hours,Jupiter takes 9.8 hours, Saturn takes 10.2 hours,Uranus takes 17.14 hours,Neptune takes 16 hours 1 day to rotate on their axis."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0746c64af7a24a34aaad152c27a7444e",
"input": "NOTICE OF THE PRELIMINARY DECISION TO ISSUE AN INDIVIDUAL AQUIFER PROTECTION PERMIT . Public Notice No. 16-117 Published on February 26, 2017. Published in Verde Valley Newspaper Inc. Pursuant to Arizona Administrative Code, Title 18, Chapter 9, Article 1, the Director of the Arizona Department Application procedures may vary slightly from Corps District to Corps District due to State requirements and the type of permit appropriate to the activity. Individual permits require a formal application form (ENG 4345). Please continue to use ENG Form 4345, dated Dec 2014 (Expires on 30 Sep 2015) until further notice. When the expiration date is extended, this form will be updated with a new expiration date. Some general permits and nationwide permits require pre-construction notification to the Corps in an abbreviated format. For Additional Information about the 401 Certification Program, consult these links: 1 U.S. EPA: Water Quality and 401 Certification. 2 U.S. EPA: Clean Water Act Section 401. 3 U.S. EPA: Water Quality Standards for Surface Waters. If a permit is issued, you will need to do the following: Comply with the provisions of the permit. (This includes any monitoring and reporting requirements.) Notify TCEQ if you wish to discontinue permit coverage. Pay an Annual Water Quality Fee. As long as the permit is active on September 1st of the year, you will receive an invoice for this fee. The Regional Board's public notice period is separate and distinct from the Corps' public notice period. Public comments will be accepted on a pending 401 application until an action is taken. An action will not occur within the 21-day comment period unless the project is an emergency. What are the fees for processing a 401 application? fill material,” the Corps is expressly authorized to issue “general” permits after public notice and. comment on a state, regional or nationwide basis for activities considered to have only minimal impacts. 33 U.S.C. § 1344(e). Non Commercial Gas permits can be processed in about 22-23 calendar days including a mandatory 18 day public notice period. Class II Injection permits can be processed in about 45-60 calendar days including a mandatory 18 day public notice period. Q: What should I do if my permit is denied? A: If your permit was denied for enforcement reasons you should contact the Enforcement Manager jamrhein@dnr.IN.gov for further details. Do not develop your own version of the public notice package. Public notice requirements for NSR permits are governed by 30 TAC Chapters 39 and 116 . Public notice requirements for Title V SOP Permits are governed by 30 TAC Chapter 122 . The applicant should ensure the information in the application package is current and accurate. during the public notice period. If written comments or requests indicate a significant degree of public interest in the draft permit, the permitting authority may at its discretion, hold a public hearing. Public notice will be given 45 days before any public hearing. For further information call Jeff Hutton at 217/782-0610. Frequently Asked Questions. 1 Check all the items on the review list at the top of the application. Be sure to use the most current application, available on line at www.michigan.gov/jointpermit. 2 Fully complete all of Sections 1 through 9. Fully complete the specific sections 10-21 that relate to your project. Query: how long is the public notice period for an individual permit",
"output": [
"The public notice period for an individual permit is for 18 day."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c5bcc740254b4d4f8a7de5c6ee736520",
"input": "Se Habla Español. 1 Xfinity Internet Blast!® $ 59 99 for the first 12 months. 2 Preferred XF Double Play as low as. 3 Xfinity Voice Unlimited™ + Performance Internet $ 49 99 a month for 12 months. XFINITY XFI GATEWAY. The XFINITY xFi Gateway is a router and modem all in one, and your ticket to xFi. Learn how to rent a Gateway for an additional $10 a month* (plus taxes and fees) and get the speed, coverage, and control you need for your home WiFi network. Specifically, Comcast has increased the speeds of three Xfinity Internet tiers: “Performance” now offers speeds up to 50 Mbit/s, up from 25 Mbps; “Blast” is now 105 Mbps, up from 50 Mbps; and “Extreme 105” has been bumped to 150 Mbps. Comcast has not announced any changes to the other plans. Comcast just increased Internet speeds for residential customers in these five cities. by Taylor Soper on December 17, 2014 at 8:52 am December 17, 2014 at 3:25 pm Comcast XFINITY Internet Review. Despite lackluster customer support, a wide range of plans and fast overall speeds make Xfinity from Comcast a suitable choice for internet service. Customers who currently subscribe to many popular Xfinity bundles will now automatically be upgraded to either Performance Pro, increasing their download speeds from 75 Mbps to 100 Mbps, or Blast Pro, increasing their speeds from 150 Mbps to 200 Mbps. When I was sold my bundle, I was told that I would get 75 mbs speed with my Performance Pro internet service. When I just talked to a technition I was told that Performance gets 25 mbs. Can anyone tell me what speed I should be getting with Performance Pro? Customers subscribing to eligible Triple Play bundles will receive the new, 3x faster Performance Pro speeds, and all new and existing customers with Blast! speed tiers will have their speeds go from 105 Mbps to 150 Mbps, an almost 50 percent increase. You tell the router how fast your line is, and how to value each type of traffic. For example from highest priority to lowest priority, I typically set my QoS order to be something like VOIP traffic +2, skype +1, anything that doesn't fit otherwise, downloading via http -1, steam downloads -2, and usenet -3. For those of you who are currently subscribed to Comcast’s Performance Xfinity Internet speed plans, you’re in for a treat. Comcast has decided to upgrade your data speeds at no added cost. Your download speeds will be increased from 15Mbps to 25Mbps, and your upload speeds will be increased from 2Mbps to 5Mbps. Query: how fast is performance pro internet xfinity",
"output": [
"The speed of performance pro internet xfinity is from 150 Mbps to 200 Mbps."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1eb3bc0714524e9d87dc12eacd46b52c",
"input": "Their discovery was made in the first Alien movie, when the commercial starship Nostromo set down on the unsurveyed moon LV-426 in response to a signal interpreted as a distress call. The crew found a wrecked derelict spacecraft with a dead lifeform inside, apparently its pilot. During events in Aliens on the LV-426 colony, in Alien: Resurrection on the USM Auriga and in the crossover movie Alien vs Predator, the species displayed observational learning and problem solving skills, and in the former two cases the Aliens learn how to operate machinery at a very basic level. T he answer, truth be told, is a little confused – but more Aliens (and one or more Alien movies) are definitely on the cards. The 79-year-old director is also planning to oversee any forthcoming titles himself: the Neill Blomkamp-directed Alien movie that was in the works a few years back, and set to star Sigourney Weaver, is well and truly dead. 7, if you count with the Alien vs. Predator franchise. If not, 5 films were made. Three films were made as a sequel to Alien. Prometheus is a prequel. Alien: Covenant is a prequel, following Prometheus, that will be released in 2017. A new Alien s... The Alien Quadrilogy box set was released December 2, 2003, with both versions of the film included along with a new commentary track featuring many of the film's actors, writers, and production staff, as well as other special features and a documentary entitled The Beast Within: The Making of Alien. Entertainment Weekly named it the 22nd greatest action movie of all time in 2007, and the 14th among The Best Rock-'em, Sock-'em Movies of the Past 25 Years in 2009, saying Arnold Schwarzenegger has never been as manly as he was in this alien-hunting testosterone-fest. Other hypotheses include: 1 Perhaps the spines separate the dominant Xenomorphs from the weaker ones, for example, the smaller the spines, the weaker the Xenomorph. 2 The creatures might come from a mainly amphibious planet, and perhaps the spines are a mechanism to swim underwater faster to catch prey. Alien abduction. The terms alien abduction or abduction phenomenon describe subjectively real memories of being taken secretly against one's will by apparently nonhuman entities and subjected to complex physical and psychological procedures. Such abductions have sometimes been classified as close encounters of the fourth kind. According to Blomkamp, it would be a sequel to Scott’s Alien and James Cameron’s 1986 action flick Aliens, ignoring most of what happened in the Fincher and Jeunet films, but also bringing back This Alien Quadrilogy is the 4 Alien movies, each with the theatrical and extended editions only, No extra disks, the only extras would be what was included in the single blu ray releases. This presentation is in a thin line snap case, not a cardboard box. Query: how many alien movies are p;;;;pppppppppppp;;;dsk.xfsidjlke?",
"output": [
"There are 5 movies of Alien."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a53a9369f1a84dd78d32160cc84d0b10",
"input": "How long does it take to receive my specialty plates once I've ordered them online? It takes three (3) to four (4) weeks for your plates to be manufactured and shipped to your County Treasurer. You will receive an approval letter from the DMV indicating the date your plates will be available at your County Treasurer's office for you to pick up and register to your vehicle. Special Interest License Plates have extra fees that are used to support programs pertinent to each organization's interest. How Long Does It Take to Get the License Plates? Personalized license plates are available for pickup in about 8-12 weeks after being ordered online or mailed and processed by DMV. You will be notified by mail when your personalized license plates are ready for pick up. If the vehicle registration expires within 30 days from the date the license plates are picked up, you must renew the registration to have the license plates assigned to your vehicle. Sequential license plates are mailed directly to the address on your DMV vehicle record; you should receive them in about 4-6 weeks. How Do I Know if the Personalized Configuration I Want Is Available? You can check online at www.dmv.ca.gov to find out if a specific If your current plates are due to expire within three months, send your regular registration renewal fee (including wheel tax, if applicable) with the personalized or special license plate application and fee. Patented logos cannot be issued on a personalized plate. You may not substitute a number 1 for a letter I or a letter O for a zero on a personalized plate. What you can request on a personalized license plate: What you cannot request on a personalized license plate: Letters A to Z (must have at least two letters) Amateur radio call signs: Numbers 0 to 9: 3 letters followed by 3 numbers or 3 numbers followed by 3 letters How long will it take for me to receive my new specialty plates? How many plates do I receive? Your plates will arrive at the main office of the County Tax Assessor-Collector for your county of residence in approximately three to four weeks. A reprint of the Confirmation/Receipt for your online Personalized/Specialty Plate transaction can be obtained up to 14 days from the date of your online personalized/specialty plate transaction. Click here to reprint your confirmation/receipt. Download the Personalized License Plate (PLP) Quick Reference Guide for Customers, print your top four options at the bottom and bring the document with you to any BMV branch. plp fees A PLP fee is due upon registration and each subsequent annual registration renewal. You can personalize our standard North Carolina First in Flight plate, or select a special registration plate that represents your favorite cause, interest or group from more than 140 special plates on our plate search, personalize and order page. The Department of Motor Vehicles makes getting a personalized or special license plate as easy as 1-2-3. Now you can Search, Personalize and Order your plate online, by mail or at your nearest license plate agency. Personalized Plate Requirements Check plate order mailing status online Can I check the order status by mail? No. You cannot do this by mail. Can I check the status by phone? Yes, but you can save yourself the wait time. It’s faster and easier to do it online. Call the Custom Plates Unit at 1-518-402-4838. Office hours are 8:00am - 4:00pm, Monday through Friday. Query: how long does it take to personalize license plates",
"output": [
"It takes 8 to 12 weeks to personalize license plates."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-32e054059781409aa504e3df7380f84c",
"input": "Refrigerator; Fresh Lemons last for: 2-4 Weeks: 1-2 Months: Cut Lemons last for: Same Day: 2-3 Days: Fresh Lemon Juice lasts for--2 -3 Days: Lemon Juice (re-sealable bottle or plastic squeeze) lasts for--4-6 Months: Fresh Squeezed Lemonade lasts for: Same Day: 1 Week: Processed Lemonade (Unopened) lasts for--2 Weeks: Processed Lemonade (Opened) lasts for--1 Week I get them home, scrub them, grate some skin for drying later, then I juice them in an electric citrus juicer. I use 4-5 good juicy lemons that make about 10 - 12 oz. of juice and refrigerated in a bottle with a small neck.. I can then make lemon, ice and water or other drinks when I'm thirsty or use it for cooking.. Lasts pretty much 2 weeks. For example, if your lemonade recipe calls for 2 cups of fresh-squeezed juice, freeze a few 2-cup packages for that use. For best flavor, thaw the juice overnight in your refrigerator rather than in the microwave. Well-wrapped lemon juice will retain most of its flavor for four to six months. 4. First, warm lemons give more juice than cold lemons. If your lemons are refrigerated, warm them in a bowl of hot water or prick them a few times with a fork and zap them in the microwave for just a few seconds. Second, press down on each lemon with your hand and roll it on the counter a few times. Lemons Expiration Date. Of course, all foods last for a shorter period of time if they are not stored properly. But remember that lemons, like a lot of other fresh fruits, usually do not have a use by date or best before date so you will have to use the date purchased. We juice our lemons and put them in a glass bottle in the refrigerator. We use about 4 oz. a week and it keeps nicely. I also juiced a bunch of limes, put them in ice cube trays ( 1 lime per cube) froze them, wrapped them individually in plastic wrap and put in freezer bag. Fresh lemons can last on the counter for two to four weeks. If the lemons are refrigerated, they stay fresh for one to two months.... Fresh lemons can last on the counter for two to four weeks. If the lemons are refrigerated, they stay fresh for one to two months. Cut lemons that aren't refrigerated must be used the same day. If the lemons are cut and placed in the refrigerator, they stay fresh for two to three days. Lemon juice in a resealable container stays fresh in the refrigerator for four to six months. Fresh-squeezed lemonade should be consumed the same day it is prepared if it is not refrigerated. If the beverage is refrigerated, it can be consumed for up to a week. 2. Refrigerator Storage. A few of the volatile flavor compounds in lemon juice break down within minutes of squeezing, but most will last for a few days. If you plan to use your lemon juice in lemonade, those first few days are the ideal time. Your juice will retain enough of its fresh flavor to be useful in cooking or baking for up to two weeks, though sediment will begin to settle out. After that, although your lemon juice will remain food safe, its flavor deteriorates badly. You can help lemons keep fresh longer by storing them in your refrigerator drawer. If lemons were purchased in a plastic bag, remove them from the bag which could have trapped moisture which will cause the lemons to soften and spoil. How long do lemons last? The shelf life of lemons depends on a variety of factors, since there is not usually a sell by date, so the only date you can go by is the purchased date or picked date. Because of their relatively low cost, long Shelf Life, and extremely high concentration of vitamin C, they are a tangy addition to many foods and drinks. So, how long do lemons last? When properly stored, the shelf life of fresh lemons past their sell by date is approximately ... Query: how long lemon juice last in fridge",
"output": [
"Fresh Lemon Juice lasts for 2 to 3 Day in fridge."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4d93a72a007d4b4c9c086f9f710a19b8",
"input": "The President of the Russian Federation (Russian: Президент Российской Федерации, tr. Prezident Rossiiskoi Federatsii) is the elected head of state, Supreme Commander-in-Chief, and holder of the highest office in the Russian Federation. The current President of Russia is Vladimir Putin. Start studying Am Government: Federal. Learn vocabulary, terms, and more with flashcards, games, and other study tools. Under the 22nd Amendment: The US President can serve only two elected terms of 4 years each, as well as up to 2 years as successor to a President who dies or otherwise leave … s office. This creates a practical maximum of 8 years and a potential maximum of 10 years. Generally, they serve as long as the president who appointed them remains in office. Executive department secretaries answer only to the president and only the president can fire them. They are expected to resign when a new president takes office since most incoming presidents choose to replace them, anyway. Certainly not a stable career, but U.S. Secretary of State 1993-2001, would certainly look good on a resume. How Often Does the President's Cabinet Meet? There is no official schedule for Cabinet meetings, but presidents generally try to meet with their Cabinets on a weekly basis. Besides the president and department secretaries, Cabinet meetings are usually attended by the vice president, the U.S. ambassador to the United Nations, and other top-level officials as determined by the president. According to the 22nd Amendment and assuming that the preceding President acceded to the office normally at noon on Inauguration Day, then as long as that President resigns, dies, or is impeached after 12pm on January 20 of the year after the midterm elections, then the Vice President (now President) can still run for two more terms as President and serve the absolute constitutional maximum of 10 years in the Oval Office. Answer Wiki. No. The 22nd Amendment, enacted after Franklin D. Roosevelt was elected president for the fourth time, imposes a two-term limit on presidential candidates and was established to formalize a tradition George Washington started by refusing to run for a third term in 1796. 4 years, and then can be re-elected again for another 4 years, but then must step down after that term. A president serves for a term of FOUR YEARS people. No. by utilising your good judgment, he's have been given the thank you to pass till now he catches up with bill Clinton's sixteen years. Conservatives have been nonetheless blaming Clinton for the financial cave in in 2008. Inauguration of the President of Russia is conducted six years after the inauguration of the previous president. If the President was elected in early elections, he takes the oath, thirty days after the announcement of the results. Article 16, allowing the president a limited form of rule by decree for a limited period of time in exceptional circumstance, has been used only once, by Charles de Gaulle during the Algerian War, from 23 April to 29 September 1961. Article 17 The President of the Republic has the right to grant pardon. But there are no comparable restraints on the vice presidency. So, in theory, an individual could hold the office as long as he or she wishes. But, in practice, no one has served more than two terms. In fact, most vice presidents have served for less time than that. Query: how long does the president serve",
"output": [
"The President serves two elected terms of 4 years each, as well as up to 2 years as successor to a President who dies or otherwise leaves office. This creates a practical maximum of 8 years and a potential maximum of 10 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4c31272e72214202b9ce08597c4e9b5d",
"input": "Get an English ruler. You will know it is an English ruler because it will have 12 lines that denote inches on the ruler. 12 inches equals 1 foot (0.3 m). The 1 foot (0.3 m) is broken down into inches. Each inch is broken down into 15 smaller marks, equaling 16 marks in total for each inch on the ruler. Quick Answer. Five-eighths inch on a ruler is a mark past 1/2 inch and before 1 inch. If the ruler divides the inches into eighths, 5/8 inch is the fifth mark on the ruler from the left side. If the ruler divides the inches into 16ths, it is the 10th mark. Continue Reading For example, place the ruler against a pencil with the eraser at the far left of the ruler. Mark where the tip of the pencil lead ends on the ruler. If the pencil point ends at the shorter line halfway between the 4 and 5 inches marks, then your pencil is 4 and 1/2 inches long. Inches are generally marked with a number and a longer line. Half-inches, 1/4 inches, 1/8 inches and 1/16 inches are marked with increasingly shorter lines. One-half inch is midway between the left end of the ruler and the 1-inch mark. On a ruler dividing the inches into eighths, 5/8 inch is the next line. On a ruler dividing inches into 16ths, it is two lines from the half-inch mark. Learn more about Measurements A ruler is used to measure the length, width or depth of an object. Rulers come in all types with all different meacurements on them . They are in feet, inches, meters, centimeters, etc... A ruler is used to measure the length, width or depth of an object. How to Read a Ruler. Two Methods: Reading an English Ruler Reading a Metric Ruler Community Q&A. There are two types of rulers: the English, or fractional, ruler and the metric, or decimal, ruler. Reading a ruler can seem daunting with all the little lines, but it is quite simple. NAME:____________________________’’Date:_________________________’Teacher:’__________________________’. How to Use. A Ruler. Pacific Earthquake. Engineering Research. K-12 Outreach Program. How to use a ruler. A ruler is an object that is used to measure how long things are. Most rulers are 12 inches long, as seen. below. Yard sticks are the same as a ruler except they are 36 inches long. Inches and feet can be used to. measure many things small and big. For example: a piece of binder paper is often 11 inches tall or the. average person in the United States is 5 feet and 10 inches tall. Unlike with the English ruler, the measurements for the metric ruler are written in decimals instead of fractions. For example, 1/2 a centimeter is written as 0.5 cm. 2 Five-eighths inch on a ruler is a mark past 1/2 inch and before 1 inch. If the ruler divides the inches into eighths, 5/8 inch is the fifth mark on the ruler from the left side. If the ruler divides... Your free and accurate online printable ruler! Printable-Ruler.net provides you with an easy to use, free printable online ruler that will save you to ever look for a ruler again! For Letter as well as A4 sized paper, inches as well as centimeters. Due to the easy fold mechanism on the sides, the paper ruler can be used for measuring and drawing as well. To get your own printable ruler, just follow the print steps as explained on this page or go to the help page. Query: how is a ruler",
"output": [
"A ruler will have 12 lines that denote inches on the ruler. 12 inches equals 1 foot or 0.3 m. The 1 foot or 0.3 m is broken down into inches. Each inch is broken down into 15 smaller marks, equaling 16 marks in total for each inch on the ruler."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b919b4eb650c49e7af0edc13bf22269e",
"input": "Answering the burning question of whether you are pregnant or not can be easy or difficult depending on how far along you are, and also how well you know your own body. Many women can tell if they are pregnant within 2 or 3 weeks of conceiving, and some women know a lot sooner -- within a few days, even. It really depends on your ability to pick up on the changes occurring within your body and how sensitive you are to them. As puppies grow inside a pregnant dog, her abdomen will become enlarged. In the middle and late stages of pregnancy, an enlarged abdomen is one of the most obvious signs that a dog is expecting puppies. Forty days into a pregnancy, your dog may have 20 to 55 percent more body weight than before she was pregnant. Teats Your dog's teats, or nipples, become enlarged during pregnancy. Rate this answer: Yes if your dog is sick ..usually once per day then this is also a sign. My dog mated 2 weeks ago as we are breeding her for a litter. Her signs are slightly swollen tit areas and rear end. I think dogs can sense when you are pregnant. A few days before my period was due my dogs started acting wierd around me, one was really protective and the other sniffed me a lot. Also every dog I encountered sniffed me more than normal. I just found out I'm pregnant about a week ago. The Reproductive Cycle in Dogs. In order to answer the question, how long are dogs pregnant, you first need to understand the dog reproductive cycle. Intact female dogs go into heat approximately every six months, although this can vary depending on the dog and the breed. The heat cycle lasts 18-to-21 days and is broken into four distinct stages. Can a dog tell what type of gender of your baby... Because I have a female pitbull in she always want to be around me... Lol and my mother boyfriend says I'm have a boy but I know it's a girl We have two chihuahua's a boy and a girl. The boy is a bit bigger(about1lb). Our female started bleeding five days ago she stopped about two days ago and her and the male dog have been mating after she stopped. Today she was growling at him is she pregnant? She's also a bit quiter and more lazy than before.... It varies from breed to breed.If you have a smaller dog,then generally you can tell a bit easier.My dog,a boxer rotwieler mix was pregnant,and we didn't even know!She was so big,we didn't realize untill she started popping out puppies on my bed (that's sort of ew,i know).Take her to the vet,and he/she will answer your questions. If you know the date your female dog mated, you can count 63 days from that date. and be fairly accurate in placing the date she will give birth. It is best to have a special bed set up for her to give birth from around two weeks before the due date. Your female might have picked up an infection during her heat cycle or after mating. Difference Between False and Real Pregnancy . It can be difficult to determine if your dog is pregnant or if she's just going through a false pregnancy. That's because, according to VCA Hospitals, the signs for both conditions are virtually the same. Query: how long before we can tell if your dog is pregnant",
"output": [
"We can tell if your dog is pregnant in 18-to-21 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d5d2dbfe511d434bb629e7eca7c32fe3",
"input": "If time is important, you should use Expedited or Rush Processing. Rush Processing (in states where available) Time to process your corporation or LLC formation varies by state with routine processing taking 4 - 6 weeks or even more in the slowest states. In states where it is available, Rush Processing will reduce the time to form your business to about 2 - 3 business days. How long does USPS ground shipping take? A: According to the United States Postal Service, the expected delivery time for USPS Retail Ground, the ground shipping service that delivers to all U.S. add... Full Answer > Simply fill out our Online Ohio LLC Formation Order Form. Start Biz Here will do the rest! How to name a LLC in Ohio: When forming an LLC in Ohio the name must not be deceptively similar to any other corporate or LLC name on file with the state. Common name endings - Limited Liability Company, L.L.C. or LLC. Membership: One or more - no residency restriction - must be at least 18 years old. Quick Answer. The United States Postal Service offers two regular mail delivery services, First Class and Standard Post. First Class mail is typically delivered within one to three business days, depending on the location. Standard Post is typically delivered within two to eight business days. A: The United States Postal Service offers two regular mail delivery services, First Class and Standard Post. First Class mail is typically delivered within one to three business days, depending on the location. Standard Post is typically delivered within two to eight business days. First Class mail is used for letters and other small objects that fit into common envelope sizes. How long does it take mail to arrive? A: According to the United States Postal Service, mail under 13 ounces takes two to three business days when shipped by First Class and Priority classes. When... Full Answer > The United States Postal Service offers a few different regular mail delivery services, including Priority Mail Express, Priority Mail, First Class Mail, and USPS Retail Ground. USPS Retail Ground, the most affordable mail service, usually takes between 2-8 business days. How long does USPS ground shipping take? Q: What is the USPS? Q: How long does it take to receive mail in the same state? Q: What is a First-Class stamp? If time is important, you should use Expedited or Rush Processing. Expedited Processing. Time to process your corporation or LLC formation varies by state with routine processing taking 4 - 6 weeks or even more in the slowest states. Expedited Processing will reduce that time to about 10 business days or less with the exception of just a few states. Time required to form a Georgia corporation or Georgia LLC depend upon the Georgia Secretary of State's office. Consider priority processing if you'd like to reduce time to form a corporation. Setup your corporation or LLC in minutes, starting at just $49 + state fees. Query: how long does regular processing take for a llc through sos",
"output": [
"Time to process your corporation or LLC formation varies by state with routine processing taking 4 to 6 weeks or even more in the slowest states."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d99449f8b3924bf6ad5b8ee16d2ee437",
"input": "Overview. 1 In Missouri, the primary method of deed of trust foreclosure is non-judicial. However, if the deed of trust does not contain power of sale language, the lender may seek judicial foreclosure. 2 As is often the case, the best time to purchase property in Missouri is during the preforeclosure period. Most properties are bought during this time, which is the reason foreclosure.com offers its subscribers the nation's largest and most accurate preforeclosure listing inventory on the Internet. Basic steps for you to consider during the preforeclosure purchase process: 1 Contact the owner directly. As a Foreclosure.com subscriber, you have easy 24/7 access to the owner's contact information, which is provided on the Details screen of the preforeclosure property. In Missouri, the primary method of deed of trust foreclosure is non-judicial. However, if the deed of trust does not contain power of sale language, the lender may seek judicial foreclosure. As few as 60 days may pass from the time a property owner receives a notice of default until the property is sold at a public foreclosure auction sale. Accordingly, don’t wait until the property becomes Real Estate Owned (REO) after the auction because the property will cost more than it would in preforeclosure. A deficiency judgment is not generally available to a lender if a property in foreclosure is sold at a public foreclosure auction sale for less than the loan amount that the underlying mortgage secures. How long does it take to foreclose a property in Missouri? Depending on the timing of the various required notices, it usually takes approximately 60-90 days to effectuate an uncontested non-judicial foreclosure. This process may be delayed if the borrower contests the action in court, seeks delays and postponements of sales, or files for bankruptcy. About 30 days at the outside. If you do not move voluntarily the new owner must file suit and have you served with summons the court date will be about 2 weeks from then. After that they will have about 2 weeks to ask the sheriff to move you out. Many Missouri properties are bought at public foreclosure auction sales, but the competition may be strong and the prices are higher than during preforeclosure to cover the lender's legal costs. At this point, it is unlikely that the homeowner will be able to avoid foreclosure. To find these sales, read newspaper notices prior to the auction date, look for public notice posted - when required - on the property, or search other public places in the county where the real estate is located. top Basic steps for you to consider when purchasing a property at a public foreclosure auction sale: Contact the Lender's Representative Power of Sale Notice Requirements: 1 A notice of foreclosure sale must be published at lease twenty (20) times and continued to the day of sale in the event the property is located in a city of 50,000 inhabitants or more. Foreclosure is a non-judicial remedy under this theory. The document that secures the title is called a deed of trust. Missouri law also permits mortgages to serve as liens upon real property and for judicial foreclosures to occur through the courts. Because the power of sale provisions in trust deeds is a faster mechanism to effectuate foreclosure and because there is no right to redemption, this is the primary vehicle used to foreclose. top: How are Missouri mortgages foreclosed? The primary method of foreclosure in Missouri involves what is known as non-judicial foreclosure. Contact the Lender's Representative. 1 Contact the trustee, lender's attorney, public trustee, or sheriff and ask what is required to purchase the property at the auction. 2 Ask for a copy of the purchase agreement, or contract of sale document, that you will need to complete if you are the winning bidder. Query: how long to foreclose property in missouri",
"output": [
"approximately 60 to 90 days to foreclose property in Missouri."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f8c0785baa8c4a6e9b7a01d8c5a809ba",
"input": "Definition - What does Astroturfing mean? Astroturfing is the practice of using deceptive communications to make a corporate or political message appear natural and organic, as if it comes from a very distributed group of individuals or naturally emerging social movements. Jack Abramoff may have played the influence-peddling game to an extreme by engaging in outright bribery, but most of what he did--arranging for and hosting fundraisers, underwriting foreign travel junkets, picking up the tab at his restaurant and extending invitations to his skybox, offering lobbying jobs to Congressional staff, laundering money through a charity to pay lobbyists, setting up Astroturf lobbying operations and employing politicians' spouses--are routine tools of the trade in ... Define astroturfing: organized activity that is intended to create a false impression of a widespread, spontaneously… — astroturfing in a sentence organized activity that is intended to create a false impression of a widespread, spontaneously arising, grassroots movement in support of or in … See the full definition Definition of astroturfing. astroturfing. noun - uncountable. the use of paid employees or contractors - or people who otherwise have a stake - to astroturf. See more words with the same meaning: computer slang. Creating the illusion of widespread support for a policy used to take place in papers – now it's online and even more powerful. Astroturfing is the attempt to create an impression of widespread support where little exists. Photograph: AP C laims that a pro-Kremlin group funded a vast network of online activists to create the illusion of widespread support for Vladimir Putin may seem like a bizarre tale restricted to an authoritarian state. In college, their hands are held by coaches and their world revolves around the Astroturf playing fields and the weight room. Astroturfing definition: a PR tactic used in politics and advertising in which actors are paid to display overt... | Meaning, pronunciation, translations and examples English Dictionary | Thesaurus | Translator | Grammar | Scrabble | Blog The authors argued that astroturfing that is purposefully designed to fulfill corporate agendas, manipulate public opinion and harm scientific research represents a serious lapse in ethical conduct. From Astroturfing is the practice of masking the sponsors of a message or organization to make it appear as though it originates from and is supported by a grassroots participant. It is a practice intended to give the statements or organizations credibility by withholding information about the source's financial connection. The term astroturfing is derived from AstroTurf, a brand of synthetic carpeting designed to resemble natural grass, as a play on the word grassroots. The implication behind the astroturfing (astroturf marketing) Share this item with your network: Astroturfing is the artificial creation of a grassroots buzz for a product, service or political viewpoint. Commercially-motivated astroturfing is called astroturf marketing.. Query: astroturfing meaning",
"output": [
"Astroturfing is the practice of masking the sponsors of a message or organization to make it appear as though it originates from and is supported by a grassroots participant."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8b316ef81c7340ed983357c60d97d9b8",
"input": "Eggnog that is frozen for months and then thawed may have off flavors. There is also the risk of separation during the thawing process. A quick shake of the carton or mixing the eggnog in a blender remedies this issue. It's a simple question, but one many people don't know how to answer: How long does fresh fish last in the refrigerator after you buy it? Equally passionate about good seafood as we are afraid of fish that's gone bad, we at HuffPost Taste reached out to the experts to confirm the answer once and for all. Best Answer: About five days. ... Depends on how fast you drink it. Eggnog doesn't last around here! Most cartons has a expiration date on them.I would say i wouldn ... Asker's rating. 1 Depends on how fast you drink it. Eggnog doesn't last around here! 2 I make mine fresh. 1 litre of full-fat milk. 3 until it gets moldy and smells nasty! it really depends on the brand. Usually check the expiration date on the package to know when its gone bad...♥. 4 less than 20 years. bill w · 1 decade ago. Eggnog is a very rich dairy product made with eggs, milk, sugar and cream (and usually alcohol in the homemade varieties). When properly stored at or below 40°F (4.4°C), unopened canned eggnogs lasts for 4-5 months in the refrigerator and homemade eggnogs lasts for 2-3 days in the same condition. For all opened containers of eggnogs they last for 5 days in the refrigerator. You can help eggnog keep fresh longer by keeping it away from light and by placing it in the back of your refrigerator immediately after use. Store eggnog on an interior refrigerator shelf rather than in the door, where the temperature fluctuates with frequent opening. ‘Tis the season for spiked eggnog y’all, so make sure to whip up enough to go around! This tipsy ‘nog rings in the holiday season on a warm, indulgent note. 6 Comments Latest Oct 4, 2016 by simonpeck. 1 coll Dec 4, 2006 I drink my homemade eggnog well after a week later and it's fine. And I use fresh eggs, so that's the only thing I worry about... 2 h. HillJ Dec 4, 2006 We made a batch for drinking and frozse one for using as batter for french toast. 10 days later the batter eggnog was fine. But... We made a batch for drinking and frozse one for using as batter for french toast. 10 days later the batter eggnog was fine. Refrigerator. Freezer. Raw eggs in shell. 3 to 5 weeks. Do not freeze. Instead, beat yolks and whites together; then freeze. Raw egg whites. 2 to 4 days. 12 months. Raw egg yolks. 2 to 4 days. Yolks do not freeze well. Raw egg accidentally frozen in shell. Use immediately after thawing. Keep frozen; then refrigerate to thaw. Hard-cooked eggs. 1 week. Do not freeze. Egg substitutes, liquid Unopened. 10 days. 12 months. Egg substitutes, liquid Opened. 3 days. Do not freeze. Egg substitutes, frozen Unopened. After thawing, 7 days or refer to “Use-By” date. 12 months. Egg substitutes, frozen Opened. After thawing, 3 days or refer to “Use-By” date. Do not freeze. Casseroles with eggs. 3 to 4 days. After baking, 2 to 3 months. Eggnog Commercial. 3 to 5 days. 6 months. Eggnog Homemade. 2 to 4 days. Do not freeze. Pies Pumpkin or pecan. 3 to 4 days. After baking, 1 to 2 months. Pies Custard and chiffon. 3 to 4 days. Do not freeze. Quiche with filling. 3 to 4 days. After baking, 1 to 2 months. At Rockefeller University, the Laboratory of Bacterial Pathogenesis and Immunology has been making a raw-eggs-and-alcohol eggnog for at least 60 years. It calls for leaving the egg, sugar, cream, spices and alcohol mixture in the fridge for about six weeks. Yes, really. But, if contaminated unpasteurized eggs are used in eggnog, you can't count on the alcohol in the drink to kill all of the bacteria – that’s not likely to happen Other Options for Safe Eggnog You can also use egg substitute products or pasteurized eggs in your eggnog, or you can find a recipe without eggs. Query: how long does fresh eggnog last in the refrigerator?",
"output": [
"Homemade eggnog lasts for 2-3 days stored in the refrigerator at below 40°F or 4.4°C."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-181eccb68be542dabc0c64d1b4ca689d",
"input": "Hand, foot, and mouth disease is a highly contagious infection. It’s caused by viruses from the Enterovirus genus, most commonly the coxsackievirus. These viruses can spread from person-to-person through direct contact with unwashed hands or surfaces contaminated with feces. People are most contagious during the first week after symptoms and signs develop. How do I know someone has hand, foot, and mouth disease (HFMD)? In general, HFMD is diagnosed by the characteristic symptoms and signs of sores on the hands, feet, and mouth, along with patient's history, age, and probability of association with a child or other person with the disease. Usually causes fever, painful sores in the mouth, and a rash on the hands and feet. Is a contagious disease. Mostly affects infants and children younger than 5 years old, but people of any age can be infected. Has no specific treatment. Those with hand foot and mouth disease can also be contagious for several weeks after onset. A person is most contagious during the first week of the illness. Those with hand foot and mouth disease can also be contagious for several weeks after onset. Here is more about hand foot and mouth disease from the Centers for Disease Control- CDC https://www.cdc.gov/hand-foot-mouth/about/transmission.html. Hand, foot and mouth disease is a viral illness that most kids get before age 5. Several different viruses cause the condition, which causes blisters and fevers. Hand, foot and mouth disease is a viral illness that most kids get before age 5. Hand, foot mouth disease is a contagious disease that is caused by different viruses. than 5 years old are more likely to get the disease. However, older children and adults can get the disease. United States it is more common for people to get HFMD from spring to fall. Hand, foot, and mouth disease is caused by viruses that belong to the Enterovirus(https://www.cdc.gov/non-polio-enterovirus/index.html) genus (group), including polioviruses, coxsackieviruses, echoviruses, and enteroviruses. Hand, Foot & Mouth Disease - Every (Working) Mom's Nightmare. 1 Okay, it's really every mom's nightmare, working or not, but being employed full-time makes it extra challenging. You see, when the doctor told me that Hazeline might miss the entire week of school my very first thought was - That CANNOT happen.. If someone has hand, foot and mouth disease, how long will they be contagious? How contagious is hand foot and mouth disease? Can an adult get it and how long is it contagious? My son has hand, foot, and mouth disease. How long will he be contageous? I have hand foot and mouth disease (from my 3 yr old). How many days is it contagious for? People with HFMD are most contagious during the first week of their illness. However, they may sometimes remain contagious for weeks after symptoms go away. Some people, especially adults, may not develop any symptoms, but they can still spread the viruses to others. This is why you should always try to maintain good hygiene, like washing hands often with soap and water, so you can minimize your chance of getting and spreading infections. Query: how long is someone contagious with hfm",
"output": [
"Someone with HFMD can be contagious for one week."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f85b2f8b55044802a56cef52fb9cd7b1",
"input": "NEVER GET YOUR CARTILAGE PIERCED WITH A GUN. Always go with a needle if at all possible. Piercing guns are not made for cartilage, as the blunt force of the gun can shatter it and deform your ear. At Walmart they are not even allowed to use the gun on cartilage. how long will it take for my nose piercing to heal Will it hurt? How long will it take to heal? Where do I get it done? These are just a few of the many questions you might have. In the following paragraphs I will answer some of these most frequently asked questions, go over the pros and cons, and offer some helpful hints on caring for cartilage piercings. Here is a list of measures that you need to follow for the fast and complete healing of the cartilage piercing infection and scarring:-. 1 Any kind of contact of the affected area with the unhygienic components in the environment should be avoided. 2 It is mandatory to clean the pierced area at least once daily. How Long Does A Cartilage Piercing Take To Heal? Cartilage piercings take a bit longer to heal than piercings on fleshy parts, like the earlobes. You can expect it to take 3 to 6 months for your new piercing to be completely healed. It really depends upon your own healing process because everyone’s body works a bit differently. How long does a cartilage piercing take to heal? *cough* I'm also going to get a cartilage piercing.. how bad does that one hurt on a scale from 1-10, how long does it take to heal (or, I mean, how long until I can change the earring), how long can't I sleep on it for, and which hurts more, with a needle, or with a gun?? The outer conch piercing is performed at the outer rim of the ear cartilage and the inner conch piercing takes place at the center of the ear cartilage. This type of piercing method does not take much time to heal, at the most six to eight months only. Another type of piercing is conducted at the thick fleshy fold of the ear called the tragus which is actually very painful in nature and takes a long time, not less than 4 months to heal. Source : 3.bp.blogspot. 1 The ear lobe piercing is the most common type of ear piercing. 2 The piercing of the helix which is the part of the upper ear cartilage, used for the task of ornamentation is usually done with a small gauged hollow piercing needle or a cartilage piercing hoop or a stud. The pierced portion of the helix takes around six to eight months to heal. · just now. 1 It takes up to 6 months for cartilage piercings to heal and it'll probably be sore to sleep on that side for a month, best case scenario, and possibly longer. 2 It would heal quicker and be less painful too if you did not put surgical spirits on it and did not fiddle with it either. I have 5 cartlige piercing. 1 industrial 1 anti-tragus and 3cartlige studs. they all take different amounts of time it is how your body reacts to the piercing and if your getting just a stud, go for the gun but if your actully geting like a trugus or industrial or something major get it done with a needle. if you do roll over in it, its not the end of the world and it will only be accouple iod days until you can fall asleep on it, but it might annoy you. honestly no matter what people say ... Aspirin can open up the blood vessels under your cartilage bump and triggers cartilage piercing healing process. Simply crush an aspirin tablet in a bowl and add a few drops of water to it. Mix well to form a paste and apply it on your piercing bump. Query: how long does it take a cartilage piercing to heal",
"output": [
"It takes up to 6 months for cartilage piercings to heal."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-fc59976525c446d08476a1e4511e7762",
"input": "Does Peanut Oil Go Bad Does peanut oil go bad? is a question often asked by people who use this oil is for baking, cooking and frying to give food a nutty crunchy flavor. Fortunately enough, the shelf life of peanut oil is similar to other oil, which means they last quite a long time. Interesting facts about Peanut Butter: 1 It's a law in the United States that any product labeled peanut butter must contain at least 90% peanuts. 2 It takes about 540 peanuts to make a 12 ounce jar. 3 There is a name for the fear of having peanut butter stick to the roof of your mouth - arachibutyrophobia! The shelf life of peanut butter depends on a variety of factors, such as the best before date, the preparation method and how it was stored. Fresh peanut butter is made of peanuts, that's it! But manufacturers will add oil, salt, sugar and/or other preservatives to their jars. If the oil is open, it is wise to store it in the refrigerator to keep it fresh for up to 3 years as well. However, an open container or jar of peanut oil stored in the pantry or on top of the counter will last for a shorter period – about 2 years. That depends on the quality of the peanut oil itself. But what about our favorite foods—peanut butter, peanuts and peanut products? Peanut butter’s shelf life may depend on the way you store it. Follow the guide above and remember to store peanuts in airtight containers. An open jar of peanut butter stays fresh up to three months in the pantry. After that, it’s recommended to store the peanut butter in the fridge (where it can maintain its quality for another 3-4 months). If you don’t refrigerate, oil separation can occur. Here’s a run-down. If the peanut butter begins to smell rancid, toss it. A natural separation of oil is natural, especially in the natural peanut butters that do not contain additional fats as stabilizers. You can tell how long the jar of natural peanut butter has been sitting on the shelf by the amount of oil on top. This oil can be stirred back into the peanut butter if desired, but we prefer to pour most of it into a frying pan and use it for pan frying something for dinner. Peanut Flour, unopened 1 year. Peanut Flour, opened 2-3 months Lasts up to 9 months in refrigerator. Peanut Oil, roasted, aromatic, unopened 9 months. Peanut Oil, roasted, aromatic, opened 2 months Lasts 4-6 months in refrigerator. You can help peanut butter keep fresh longer by storing it in your fridge immediately after use, although processed peanut butter will be fine on the shelf as well. Once prepared (if homemade) or opened from the jar, it should be stored in a tightly closed container. If this fat is combined with other oils, it will typically last the longest, but pure peanut oil left open is best in terms of quality if you use it up before the expiration date on the bottle it comes in. Image used under Creative Commons from ratna rajaiah. How long does peanut oil stay good for in frying appliances? Whenever you are using peanut oil to cook food in fryolators it is wise to only use the only three to four times because it tends to take on the flavors of the foods you cook in it and loses its quality quickly after coming in contact with foods and being heated repeatedly. Find out the shelf life of peanut butter and how long peanut butter lasts after the best before date. To find how long before peanut butter expires ... Find out the shelf life of peanut butter and how long peanut butter lasts after the best before date. Query: how long is peanut oil good for after it's opened?",
"output": [
"Roasted and aromatic peanut oil is good for 2 months after it is opened. It lasts for 4 to 6 months in the refrigerator after it is opened."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d16fc0ebfe0445439962492429d1fd22",
"input": "Before you get started, read this to make sure you actually need to amend. Sign in to your TurboTax account, if you're not already signed in. In the 2016 Tax Year section, click Amend (change) return. Note: If you see an orange Take me to my return button, you can't amend because you haven't filed yet. Just click or tap that button to open your return and make your changes. ..BUT, if you mailed in an amended tax return, you can check it's status online here, though none of this is talking to an IRS agent, which might be better in your case: http://www.irs.gov/Filing/Individuals/Amended-Returns-(Form-1040-X)/Wheres-My-Amended-Return-1 How long will it take the IRS to process my amended federal tax return? It typically take the IRS between 8 and 12 weeks to process amended returns from the date your Form 1040X is received by the IRS via postal mail. You'll still have to fill out a full 1040 for the amended return because you must match up line items from your new Form 1040 to the various lines on Form 1040X. The IRS scrutinizes amended tax returns a little more carefully, so take extra care to make sure your new 1040 is as complete and accurate as possible. If the changes affect your Minnesota tax return: You must file Form M1X and include a complete copy of your amended federal return or correction notice. Send your amended return to: Minnesota Amended Individual Income Tax How Long Does It Take to Get Amended Tax Return Back? Many people are puzzled that how long does it take to get amended tax return back? Well! The answer is not easy but the experts are of the view that it might take 8 to 12 weeks on the trot. It is a two stage process where a new form 1040 is prepared along with 1040X. Phase 1- Received. This status confirms the IRS has received your Form 1040X or Amended Tax Return. Phase 2- Adjusted. This status confirms the IRS has applied the updated information from your Form 1040X to your account. Phase 3- Completed. This status confirms the IRS has processed your Amended Return and generated a refund (if applicable). You should use Form 1040X, Amended U.S. Individual Income Tax Return, to amend your filed Form 1040, 1040A or 1040EZ. Remember to check the box for the year of the return you're amending on the 1040X. You'll also have to mail in your amended return - they can't be e-filed. Amending your tax return is a two-part process. First you'll have to prepare a new tax return using the long Form 1040 and any additional schedules, then you must report the revised figures on Form 1040X. It doesn't matter if you filed your original tax return using 1040EZ or 1040A forms. About This Page. If you find a mistake on your state Individual Income Tax return after it is filed, you must file Form M1X, Amended Minnesota Income Tax, to correct the error. However, if you’re married and filed a joint return, you can’t change your filing status to “married filing separately” after the due date (April 15 for most people). Query: how long take amended tax return",
"output": [
"It typically take the IRS between 8 and 12 weeks to process amended returns from the date your Form 1040X is received by the IRS via postal mail."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0c8f2494aaef412bb2b9515002f476f0",
"input": "Zooflagellates; Sarcodines; Amoeboids; Radiolarians; Foraminiferans; Heliozoans; Ciliates; Sporozoans 1 Upload failed. 2 We are experiencing some problems, please try again. 3 You can only upload files of type PNG, JPG, or JPEG. 4 You can only upload files of type 3GP, 3GPP, MP4, MOV, AVI, MPG, MPEG, or RM. 5 You can only upload photos smaller than 5 MB. 6 You can only upload videos smaller than 600MB. In some older systems of classification, Zoomastigophora is a phylum (more commonly known as zooflagellates) within the kingdom Protista. Organisms within this group have a spherical, elongated body with a single central nucleus. Zooflagellates have one or more flagella but do not have plastids or cell walls. A few are mutualistic, such as those that live in the guts of termites and aid the bacteria present in breaking down wood. [citation needed] References They are now identified in four groups zooflagellates, sarcodines, ciliates and sporozoans. Zooflagellates are a third type of protists. They are animal-like and move by using flagella. Flagella are whip-like structures that spin quickly, working like a boat's propeller to move the organism through water. Most zooflagellates have from one to eight flagella that help them move. Possession of flagellum is not a taxonomic feature. many different unrelated organisms have flagellum. euglena, zooflagellates but also some fungi or even human sperm cells. Comments (2) Report Zooflagellates use their tails to move. This part of the organism is known as the flagella and helps them to obtain the organic substrates they eat. Zooflagellates use their tails to move. This part of the organism is known as the flagella and helps them to obtain the organic substrates they eat. What should I do if there is a significant change in my higher life forms and all of a sudden there is an increase in flagellates? First check to see why they have increased? Is there a change in loading that might impact other areas? Check your nutrients in this case if applicable to your plant. Euglena are not the only organisms that have flagellum. Zooflagellates are protozoan that also have flagella. Although euglena and zooflagellates move by - 2557120 Query: how do zooflagellates move",
"output": [
"Zooflagellates use their tails to move."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f625ceef167d46b48e0f18bbba9c722f",
"input": "Interestingly, the Large Grey Mongoose lacks hair both on its hind feet and on a small area around their eyes The Hiding Mongoose The Large Grey Mongoose can be found in Egypt, Spain, Portugal, Israel, and most of sub-Saharan Africa. It was stated that the mongooses can adapt rapidly to different environments as long as there is no competition, so would it not be better to introduce competition or predators to control or manage the mongoose population, this should relive the pressure on the other species like the sea turtles. Cool Facts About The Large Grey Mongoose. The largest species of Mongoose in Africa, the Large Grey Mongoose, also commonly known as the Egyptian Mongoose, grows to nearly 90cm long with a 40cm long tail. They live in India, Africa, Asia, and Europe. Mongoose (herpestidae) can be found in Africa, Southern Asia and Iberian Peninsula. Mongoose were introduced to the … Hawaiian Islands, and West Indies. There are over 40 different species of Mongoose. Mongooses will live in various types of forest (tropical rainforest), dry grassland and near-deserts. They make burrows or take shelter in hollow logs or spaces within rock piles. This is when the mongoose leaps in to take a nip at the back of his enemy’s head. The duel ends when the snake is so tired he can strike no more. Then the mongoose gives a killing bite and starts his dinner. He begins with the snake's head. Fun facts about the King Cobra. 1 They are the only snake that builds nests for its eggs. The female will guard the eggs until they hatch. 2 Snake charmers in Asia often charm king cobras. The cobra is mesmerized by the shape and movement of the flute, not by the sound. 3 They live to around 20 years old. 4 Its conservation status is least concern. With virtually no natural predator in Hawaii, the mongoose population increased exponentially, from the original seventy-two to the thousands we have today. Unfortunately, as mongooses were alert during the day, and rats, at night, the former didn't really exterminate the latter. Since Hawai'i has no squirrels this must be our very own Rikky-Tikky-Tavi, the Small Asian Mongoose. Known also by it's Hawaiian name of 'Iole manakuke (or just manakuke), the word 'Iole means 'rat' and manakuke means mongoose. Mongoose (Herpestes javanicus) Regulatory Status: Hawaii Injurious Wildlife (HAR 124). It is against Hawaii State law for any person to introduce, keep or breed any mongoose within the State except by permit from HDOA; permits are not issued for Kauai County or the island of Lanai. The victory is only a matter of quickness of eye and quickness of foot, -- snake's blow against mongoose's jump, -- and as no eye can follow the motion of a snake's head when it strikes, that makes things much more wonderful than any magic herb. Query: how large can the mongoose grow",
"output": [
"Egyptian Mongoose, grows to nearly 90 cm long with a 40 cm long tail."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-46e0c5cd64bb49b7b8256dd030e720c0",
"input": "Cute and cuddly in his virtually hypoallergenic coat, the Maltipoo is a “designer” (hybrid) cross between two purebreds, the Maltese and the poodle. Because either a toy or miniature poodle is ... Expected Growth Rate. 1 Newborn puppies should gain each day. For 8-week-old puppies that are just transitioning to their new homes, growth can be much more of a roller coaster. 2 There are some common factors that can affect how fast a puppy grows, as well as some less common but possible health conditions. Born weighing only ounces, Maltipoo size of puppies (at the age of 8 weeks) will range from 1 to 3 pounds on average, keeping in mind that this can vary quite a bit. Being so tiny, their bones are fragile and the are vulnerable to certain medical issues. Let's talk first about being fragile. And if a Maltese puppy is consistently on the higher end of the growth scale, he is more than likely going to be on the higher end of the standard, at just under 7 lbs., and in some cases a bit larger. Most of the growing will be done in the first 6 months. The AKC breed standard calls for a maximum height of 10 inches for the toy poodle, and allows heights up to 15 inches for miniature poodles. Mature Maltese dogs only grow to between 8 and 10 inches tall. The smaller the poodle in the mix, the smaller the hybrid puppies are likely to be. It is entirely possible for two 3-month-old Maltese puppies to be at different weights (for example, 2.5 lbs. and 4 lbs.) but both end up as 6.5 lb. adults. Nevertheless, when you take a look at the growth rate, you will see an upward movement that stretches from birth to the 9 month mark. This breed stops growing at just about the 1 year mark; and this signifies the transition from puppy to adult dog. During this first year, growth often comes in spurts. A puppy may gain a half pound in just a matter or weeks and then show no weight increase for the next two. If a Maltipoo bypasses the 9 lb. (4.08 kg) mark, and keeps growing to perhaps 10 pounds (4.53 kg) or 11 pounds (4.98 kg) this may point to a Mini Poodle being somewhere in the breeding program…or it may be a matter of the dog being overweight. After 6 months, the dog will gain weight at a slower pace but continue to grow in height..and this is what makes an adult dog appear to be thinner and sleeker than a pup. Bad breeding practices can result in Maltipoos that fall far out of the expected weight range. A Maltipoo is half poodle ... Photos.com/Photos.com/Getty Images C ute and cuddly in his virtually hypoallergenic coat, the Maltipoo is a “designer” (hybrid) cross between two purebreds, the Maltese and the poodle. Because either a toy or miniature poodle is acceptable for this crossing, individuals within the same litter often vary significantly in size. Mature Maltipoos may range in heights from 8 to 14 inches tall and weigh between 5 and 20 pounds. Query: how long do maltipoo puppies grow",
"output": [
"If a Maltipoo bypasses the 9 lb mark, and keeps growing to perhaps 10 pound or 11 pounds."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f9b2f9875fb747738da49c2c1d9dbffc",
"input": "Ladybugs come in many colors like pink, yellow, white, orange and black. Over 300 types of Ladybugs live in North America. Ladybugs make a chemical that smells and tastes bad so predators won’t eat them. Ladybugs hibernate in large groups in cold weather. Many countries consider a ladybug to be a sign of good luck. Eggs hatch in three to five days, and larvae feed on aphids or other insects for two to three weeks, then pupate. Adults emerge in seven to ten days. There may be five to six generations per year. In the autumn, adults hibernate, sometimes in large numbers, in plant refuse and crevices. The life cycle of the ladybug is between four to six weeks. In the spring the adults lay up to three hundred eggs in an aphid colony. The eggs hatch in two to five days. The newly hatched larvae feed on aphids for up to three weeks, and then they enter the pupa stage. The adult ladybug emerges about a week later. However, they usually do not have their spots for their first 24 hours of adulthood. So, if you catch one in your schoolyard without spots, you may have found a brand new adult. There may be as many as six generations of ladybugs hatched in a year. Ms. Frizzle: In the olden days, British farmers prayed to the Virgin Mary for help with their crops. Then ladybugs arrived and helped the farmers by eating crop-eating bugs and saved farmers' crops. In honor of these bugs, the farmers called the beetles Our Lady's beetle, which turned into ladybug. How Long Do Ladybugs Live. I have had them last a year. The ladybugs that hibernate tend to wak up inmy house which is a real pain. This year the ladybugs here have bben scarce. Usually at this time of year, we have swarms of ladybugs and they dive into my wood piles and get into my house to hibernate. This year there have been no swarms and ladybugs have been scarce. I dont care much for the new so called Japanese ladybug which is the orange variety. These devils pinch..not like the good old red American ladybug. Second, if you observe one ladybug riding atop another ladybug, they are in the process of mating. A male ladybug will grab the female's elytra (hard wings) and holds on tight. There are photos on the Ladybugs Mating Page to help you. The Pupae. Ladybug pupae are -- you guessed it -- orange and black. Larvae don't enter the pupal stage until they reach a certain weight, generally about 15 milligrams. A larva going through its final molt attaches itself to a leaf surface to pupate. Depending on the temperature, it takes from three days to two weeks for the adult ladybug to emerge from the pupa. Frizzle: Insects always have three body parts and six legs. They usually have four wings and two antennae. Now most people call spiders, bugs. But they are not insects, because they only have two body parts and eight legs with no wings or antennae. They are really arachnids. 1 Upload failed. 2 We are experiencing some problems, please try again. 3 You can only upload files of type PNG, JPG, or JPEG. 4 You can only upload files of type 3GP, 3GPP, MP4, MOV, AVI, MPG, MPEG, or RM. 5 You can only upload photos smaller than 5 MB. 6 You can only upload videos smaller than 600MB. Best Answer: The length of the life cycle varies depending upon temperature, humidity, and food supply. Usually the life cycle from egg to adult requires about ... Query: how long does ladybug live",
"output": [
"The ladybug live between four to six weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-673759ffaacc48289c6e164264d87cdb",
"input": "The doctor's don't like you stay pregnant for more than 24 hours after your water breaks. Each hour after the first 24 brings more risk of infection. With my first my water broke first and I was in labor 19 hours. so I was cutting it close. I recently read a article about a lady who was prengnat and at 16 weeks her water broke. the put her in the hospital and told her they would wait it out till the 24week or until she started labor to deliever the baby. Water Bag Breaks. They try not to let them go more then 24 hours if they are term, but at that stage sometimes there is still some fluid enough to keep the baby in for a while. My cousins wife had the same thing happen at 31 weeks. Best Answer: usualy they will always deliver within 24 hours. however it sounds like maybe not all her water has broken, but leaking? that would mean they will try and keep baby in there as long as possible to give more time for his lungs to mature. blessings to your friend and her baby! I heard it wasn't safe to keep the baby in if the water breaks! by then the baby is not getting the protection he/she needs and it could hurt the baby in the long run. They should have delivered the baby already....past 27 weeks the baby has a greater chance to live. I know doctors like to wait until at least 35 or 37 but when the water breaks, that's just risking it. Best Answer: A baby can survive in a womb for several hours once the water is broken. There will be no effects on baby whatsoever from the loss of fluid. Amniotic ... Answers. 1 The amniotic fluid, or bag of waters, surrounds and protects the baby in the uterus and provides a protective barrier from the outside environment. Once the bag of waters breaks, bacteria now has a way of entering the uterus through the vagina and could cause an infection in either the baby, the mother or both. If you were at the hospital when your water broke, you are fine. Even if you went past the 24 hour mark, you were most likely given IV antibiotics for preventative measures. Hearing loss has nothing to do with this, so your baby should be A Okay! I hope this helps! It all depends.. your friend is not yet full term, so they may have her on bed-rest to allow the baby's lungs to mature while still in the womb. If your friend was 36 weeks +, most Dr's will make sure you deliver within 24 hours of your water breaking. Best Answer: A baby can survive in a womb for several hours once the water is broken. There will be no effects on baby whatsoever from the loss of fluid. Amniotic fluid will continue to produce until the placenta is delivered. The only issue that arises here is if the bag of waters breaks, infection is allowed to invade (if present). Query: how long can a baby stay in the womb after water has been broken",
"output": [
"A baby can stay in the womb till 24 hours after water has been broken."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-2230a923321a43739464d33e04a5ecec",
"input": "Derek Jeter Stats. Derek Jeter was born on Wednesday, June 26, 1974, in Pequannock, New Jersey. Jeter was 20 years old when he broke into the big leagues on May 29, 1995, with the New York Yankees. Here are 20 things you might not know about Derek Jeter as he winds down his 20-year Hall of Fame career. Here are 20 things you might not know about Derek Jeter as he winds down his 20-year Hall of Fame career. Derek Jeter roster status changed by New York Yankees. July 28, 2013: New York Yankees activated SS Derek Jeter from the 15-day disabled list. July 19, 2013: New York Yankees placed SS Derek Jeter on the 15-day disabled list retroactive to July 12, 2013. Right quad strain. July 11, 2013 Derek Jeter roster status changed by New York Yankees. July 4, 2011: New York Yankees activated SS Derek Jeter from the 15-day disabled list. July 2, 2011: sent SS Derek Jeter on a rehab assignment to Trenton Thunder. June 14, 2011: New York Yankees placed SS Derek Jeter on the 15-day disabled list. Strained right calf: December 7, 2010 After Yankee career, Derek Jeter still has it going on off field “He said something to me at the end of his career — he wanted to have a better business career than he had a baseball career, which is a high bar,” Tull said in 2016. “If I was going to bet on anybody, it’s Derek Jeter.” But when you have that reinforcement at home, I think it goes a long way. Derek Jeter said his name was in the program once as No. 17, but he quickly asked for it to be fixed. Joe Faraoni/ESPN Images. Ravech: Your dad is a substance-abuse counselor. Your mom is an accountant. In 2009 Jeter recorded his 2,674th career hit, breaking the record for the most hits by a shortstop in major league history. The Yankees ended the 2009 season with a victory over the Philadelphia Phillies in the World Series. On July 9, 2011, Jeter registered his 3,000th career hit, becoming just the 28th player to reach that mark. Derek Jeter baseball card, 2006. All-Time Greats: Stan Musial, Barry Bonds, Babe Ruth, Derek Jeter, Ken Griffey Jr, Jackie Robinson, Hank Aaron, ... Derek Jeter. By the time he stepped away from baseball in 2014 after a historic 20-year career with the New York Yankees, Derek Jeter had established himself as one of the most respected men to ever have played the game. After his senior season at Kalamazoo (Mich.) Central High School, Derek Jeter was chosen as the American Family Insurance All-USA TODAY player of the year by USA TODAY Sports. Follow Jeter's career from high school to the majors as told by those who helped him get there. Query: how long was derek jeter's career",
"output": [
"The career of Derek Jeter was 20 years long."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-40221d72b3754bbea143318c09cf8c59",
"input": "Oxygen is crucial to sustaining life. Though it varies from person to person, on an average, 3 minutes is the maximum time where the person can stay alive without oxygen. Yoga and meditation experts may hold breath for longer than this, but these are very rare examples. In an absence of oxygen, brain cells begin to die and this effect is irreversible! The brain cannot go without oxygen for more than ten minutes. If oxygen is not able to get to the brain before this, then there is a possibility of irreversible brain damage. The brain cannot go without oxygen for more than ten minutes. If oxygen is not able to get to the brain before this, then there is a possibility of irreversible brain damage. How long can someone go without oxygen before there is brain damage ? If someone has been without oxygen for 15 minutes is there any hope that they can wake from a coma without any brain damage. If there is brain damage, is it always severe or does it depend on each patient ? Questions and Answers About Transplantation and Donation. Below are some frequently asked questions about brain death, how organ donation works, the need for donors, organ failure, and transplantation. 1. What do medical personnel do to save the life of a person with a head injury? 2. What kinds of injuries may lead to brain death? 3. How long can the brain go without oxygen before serious damage occurs? 4. What happens when your brain is injured? 5. What can be done if your brain is injured? 6. What is brain death? Doesn't the person's heart have to stop for them to be dead? 7. How can you tell if someone is brain dead? 8. What does a brain dead person look like? 9. If the person is brain dead how can the heart still be beating? 10. 3. How long can the brain go without oxygen before serious damage occurs? After five to ten minutes of not breathing, you are likely to develop serious and possibly irreversible brain damage. The one exception is when a younger person stops breathing and also becomes very cold at the same time. This can occur when a child is suddenly plunged into very cold water and drowns. In this situation, survival after more than 30 minutes has been known to occur. Return to the list of Frequently Asked Questions >> So expect a minute at most before permanent brain damage, and maybe 3 minutes at max before total death. And if you want to experience having overly oxygen-rich blood, take a few deep, meditative breaths. Humans are aerobic creatures, meaning we require oxygen to release energy and exist. Without oxygen, our cells wouldn’t be able to release the energy in the food we eat, and we would die. We take in oxygen through respiration — we move air in and out of the lungs, and blood takes oxygen to the cells of the body. Carbon dioxide, a waste product in our bodies, is moved out of the body by the same system. Breathing has always been synonymous with life. Our speech is permeated with idioms and phrases relying on the idea that taking a breath is the surest sign of vitality, and we constantly compare things we need to our body’s ultimate necessity: oxygen. Under relatively normal circumstances, we start struggling after a few minutes without oxygen. Without being able to convert energy and use it up, cells start to die. This happens throughout the entire body, but it is the brain’s lack of oxygen that is most urgent. “The brain is a highly metabolically active organ,” Tishler said. “It needs oxygen to generate the energy to function. Without the energy (without oxygen) it dies.” The brain normally takes up about 20 percent of the body’s oxygen. If it doesn’t get what it needs, cells begin dying off, putting a person at risk of permanent brain damage. If a person suffocates, or suffers another type of involuntary oxygen deprivation, they’ll ultimately suffer brain death: the utter, irreversible loss of brain function. It’s a pretty unavoidable succession of events. Between 30-180 seconds of oxygen deprivation, you may lose consciousness. At the one-minute mark, brain cells begin dying. At three minutes, neurons suffer more extensive damage, and lasting brain damage becomes more likely. At five minutes, death becomes imminent. At 10 minutes, even if the brain remains alive, a coma and lasting brain damage are almost inevitable. At 15 minutes, survival becomes nearly impossible. There are, of course, exceptions to every rule. Some training routines help the body make more efficient use of oxygen, enabling the brain to go longer periods without this vital element. Free divers routinely train to go long periods without oxygen, and the current record holder held his breath for 22 minutes without sustaining brain damage! Query: how long can a human go without oxygen prior to brain damage",
"output": [
"On an average, 3 minutes is the maximum time where the person can stay alive without oxygen."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-482bedaef95e4043a5d9b222416a9d6d",
"input": "Depending upon a variety of conditions and factors, both involving you and the producer of the sperm . Dr. Sneid responded: Up to 72 hours. Depending upon a variety of conditions and factors, both involving you and the producer of the sperm . Check out these best-sellers and special offers on books and newsletters from Mayo Clinic. 1 The Last Diet You'll Ever Need. 2 4 Simple Steps to a Joy-Filled Life. 3 Pain Management Strategies from Mayo Clinic. 4 Stop Osteoporosis in its Tracks. 5 Protect and Preserve Your Vision. About Mayo Clinic; Contact Us; Meet the StaffFind a directory of doctors and departments at all Mayo Clinic campuses. Visit now. Best Answer: The sperm can actually survive for up to 7 days inside the woman's reproductive tract... but this is VERY, VERY rare. More common is about three days. The length of their life inside the female body really depends on the environment, or the cervical mucus being made and how strong the sperms are... 30 - 60 minutes: Sperm can pass through uterus into fallopian tube in as little as 30 minutes ; fertilization can take place in less than an hour from entry thru the cervix. This is length of time sperm normally spends in uterus. Fertilization takes place in fallopian tubes ; embryo inplants in the womb. To become pregnant, the following steps must occur: 1 Sperm Transport — The sperm must be deposited and transported to the site of fertilization. 2 Egg Transport — Ovulation must occur and the egg must be picked up by the tube. 3 Fertilization and Embryo Development — Union between the sperm and egg must result. Since sperm can live in a woman’s body for up to five days, and the egg can only live for 12-24 hours, it makes sense to have the sperm “ready and waiting” when the egg is released, if a couple is trying to get pregnant. These enzymes quickly destroy any sperm that can’t swim out of the semen within a few hours. It takes approximately 72 days for sperm to mature in the body. During the last 14 days of this process, the sperm are very much alive and swimming. They are alive a long time prior to leaving a man’s body. During freezing, sperm are cooled to a very low sub zero temperature (minus 196 degrees Centigrade). In brief: Up to 72 hours. Depending upon a variety of conditions and factors, both involving you and the producer of the sperm. In brief: Up to 72 hours. Depending upon a variety of conditions and factors, both involving you and the producer of the sperm. How long can sperm live in a uterus? I've heard 7 days, I'm not sure if that's correct. What's the correct amount of days? Query: how long sperm can live in uterus",
"output": [
"The sperm can actually survive for up to 7 days inside the woman's reproductive tract."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8813debaf38b41be95f82cf62a197f50",
"input": "If the Earth didn't rotate, winds would travel either north or south due to differences in temperature and pressure at different latitudes. But since the Earth does rotate, the Coriolis force deflects these winds to the right in the Northern Hemisphere and to the left in the Southern Hemisphere. Keep Reading Below In the Northern Hemisphere, this deflection causes the wind flow around high pressure systems to go clockwise while flow around low-pressure systems travels counterclockwise. Global winds. Earth’s orbit around the sun and its rotation on a tilted axis causes some parts of Earth to receive more solar radiation than others. This uneven heating produces global circulation patterns. offsite link For example, the Since aircraft cover large distances in a short period of time, pilots must also take its influence into account when charting the paths for their flights. For instance, a plane headed from Miami (where the Earth's rotation is more pronounced) to New York would end up in the Atlantic Ocean if the pilot ignored the effects of the Earth's rotation. 1 2 How do temp & salinity affect the formation of deep currents The colder the temp of water is the higher amound of salinity in the water which makes the water more dense Disasters caused by el niño These global wind patterns drive large bodies of air called air masses. Air masses are thousands of feet thick and extend across large areas of the Earth. The location over which an air mass forms will determine its characteristics. For example, air over the tropical ocean becomes exceptionally hot and humid. Global winds. Earth’s orbit around the sun and its rotation on a tilted axis causes some parts of Earth to receive more solar radiation than others. This uneven heating produces global circulation patterns.offsite link For example, the abundance of energy reaching the equator produces hot humid air that rises high into the atmosphere. With a high-pressure system, air gets forced outward and the Earth's eastward spin creates a clockwise flow. In the Southern Hemisphere, the opposite takes place: Wind around low-pressure systems circles clockwise while wind around high-pressure systems circles counterclockwise. How do continential deflections affect surface currents The shape of continents affect what direction the surface currents go How does temp affect surface cutrents Warm water currents begin at the equator & cold water currents begin closer to the poles Coriolis effect. As they travel across the Earth, air masses and global winds do not move in straight lines. Similar to a person trying to walk straight across a spinning Merry-Go-Round, winds get deflected from a straight-line path as they blow across the rotating Earth. How do convection currents in the air and water affect thermal energy near the equator Currents near the equator carry warmer water How is the density of ocean water affected by temp & salinity Query: how does earth's rotation affect the paths of global winds?",
"output": [
"Earth’s orbit around the sun and its rotation on a tilted axis causes some parts of Earth to receive more solar radiation than others. This uneven heating produces global circulation patterns."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-18a4a9cbbb6949a987e43bbcd3b642dc",
"input": "How long does it take to digest and pass food? How long does it take to pass a miscarriage? How long does it take to pass a nicotine test? What is the shortest possible transit time for food to pass completely through the digestive system? How far does food travel in digestive system? How long does it take to pass a mouth swab drug test for thc? Do competitive eaters digest everything they eat or does the food pass through undigested? How much blood is in the human body? How long does it typically take for food to pass through the stomach? What foods or other substances pass through the most organs in the human body? Ask New Question How long does it take for food to pass through the digestive system - How long does it take for food to pass through the digestive system? In a normal person. Without any prior surgeries or GI diseases, about 60 90 minutes from the mouth thru the small intestine to reach the colon and then another 24-36 hours thru the colon or large intestine to the anus. Which organ in the human body doesn’t pass blood? On average, how long does it take for food to pass through the body? Do foods filled with fibre pass though your body fast? The human digestive system is highly efficient at breaking down proteins, starches, sugars, anything that's easily dissolved in water or by acidity, and, to a lesser extent, fats and lipids. It's completely unequipped to digest cellulose and barely puts a dent in it. It depends on the food, some food takes longer to break down, then it can take hours and hours to pass through the intestines. Pee - an hour, poo upto24 hours. When I was in the Forces we had a saying.It takes 24 hours for the human body to turn food into shit,and it takes an Air Force cook 20 minutes to do the same. Do competitive eaters digest everything they eat or does the food pass through undigested? How much blood is in the human body? How long does it typically take for food to pass through the stomach? What foods or other substances pass through the most organs in the human body? Which is the safest protein powder if you have acid reflux? It depends on the food, some food takes longer to break down, then it can take hours and hours to pass through the intestines. Pee - an hour, poo upto24 hours. 0 That's why a lot of plant material comes out undigested. Material that can't be digested passes through the digestive system and helps push other material along, this is what's colloquially referred to as dietary fiber when talking about food content and it's an important part keeping your digestive system healthy. It always takes exactly 37 hours for food, and 163 hours for water to pass through your body. Doesn't matter what the food or drink is, it always takes the same amount of time. No other variables affect anything, such as exercise, weather, or distance from the nearest asteroid belt. What a heap of lies. Query: how long does it take food to pass through human body?",
"output": [
"It takes exactly 37 hours for food to pass through your body."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-13a9c807eeac4748b573e8c546a113f8",
"input": "It may be possible to get a common law spouse off title to a property without giving him anything because he put nothing into the house. Or, a common law spouse may give up her interest in family house in exchange for the other spouse not making a claim against a property that the first spouse owns. How to divide the property and debt usually creates the most disagreements between people. You are strongly urged to consult with an attorney to discuss whether your proposed division of property and debt is likely to be accepted by the court. Return to top of page . What are the Merrill factors? When partners separate, there are legal rules for dividing the property that they had during their relationship. The rules for dividing family property can be very complicated. If you are in this situation, it is recommended that you get legal advice from a family law lawyer. 1 In Ontario, when partners separate, the way their property is divided depends on whether or not they are legally married. Married couples automatically share the value of the family property if they separate. Common Law Relationships and Division of Assets. The Family Law Act R.S.O. 1990, c. F. 3 only applies to couples who satisfy the definition found in s. 1(1) relating to equalization of net family property. Couples who do marry under common law are likely to have their marriage recognized in states where common law is off the books. The full faith and credit rule of the U.S. Constitution ordinarily compels sister states to recognize a marriage made valid under another state's laws. To understand how to divide your property and debt so you can finalize your divorce or legal separation, you have to understand how property laws work in California when a couple is married or in a domestic partnership. If you split up: 1 You get to keep what you had before the relationship. 2 You're each entitled to half of the property that you got while you were together. It doesn’t matter who actually owns the property. 3 You each get an equal share in the increased value of any property that either of you had before the relationship. Who owns what property in a marriage, after divorce, or after a spouse's death depends on whether the couple lives in a common law property state or a community property state. During marriage, these classifications may seem trivial, but in the unfortunate events of divorce or death, these details become very important. Common Law Property States. Most states are common law property states. So, what does it mean to live in a common law property state? The term common law is simply a term used to determine the ownership of marital property (property acquired during marriage). The common law system provides that property acquired by one member of a married couple is owned completely and solely by that person. When discussing this issue, each spouse should make sure to let the other know of any hidden types of property so that they can be fairly divided. Concealing property of value from a spouse can lead to serious negative legal consequences when discovered. One way to begin to divide your property is to list all your items of value. When property is a combination of separate or community property, it can get very complicated to figure out how to divide it. A common situation is when 1 party owned a house before the marriage or domestic partnership and then sold it and used the proceeds as a down payment on another house after getting married, or after registering a domestic partnership. Query: how is property divided in a common law situation",
"output": [
"The common law system provides that property acquired by one member of a married couple is owned completely and solely by that person."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e9ecc150f49045dd83e4a4a6f795ccfc",
"input": "K1 Visa Timeline How long does it take to get a K1 Fiancé Visa? Generally, the K1 visa will be issued 5 to 6 months after the I-129F fiancé visa petition is submitted to USCIS. The overall K1 visa processing time will vary slightly depending on the state where the U.S. citizen resides and the country where the foreign fiancé resides. The whole K1 visa process from the time you sign up with RapidVisa usually takes around 6 to 9 months. Call us today at 800-872-1458. How Long Will It Take to Get My K Visa? For Form I-129F, Petition for Alien Fiancé(e), you can visit the USCIS website for the status of your petition. Once your case has been received from NVC by the U.S. Embassy or Consulate that will process it, the length of time varies from case to case according to its circumstances. As of September 2014 the average from receiving the NOA1 to the Interview is 200 days. The NOA1 is the notification they have received your application, this itself can take around a month. Following the interview, they will retain your passport so they can affix the Visa in it. In England they typically take 10 days to get the passport back to you. i mean like the day of the interview...how long are you usually in the embassy for 3 hours or so does not sound unusual at all. Not sure which embassy you are referring to, but I had to wait outside the Bangkok embassy for just over 2 hours when my wife had her interview. Usually, it takes around 6 to 9 months for the petition to be approved at immigration in the United States. Subsequently, the approval would be sent to the U.S. Consulate or Embassy in your fianc?e's home country. When your fiance comes to the U.S., you will have ninety days to get married. Most USCIS services centers are currently taking about 5-6 months to approve a fiancé visa petition. Upon approval, USCIS transfers the petition to your consulate via the National Visa Center. Right now this is taking 30-45 days in most cases. Once the consulate has the petition in hand, the speed of the process is entirely dependent on the individual Embassy. Your fiance visa lawyer will be able to assist you with tracking down your package. Once you receive the receipt notice, you should keep it in a safe place. The receipt number on it can be used to track the status of your fiance visa petition online. The expected waiting time for approval of and I-129F petition is between four and six months. After your petition is approved, the package will be forwarded on to the embassy or consulate near your fiance. Fiance Visa Consular Processing. It is not unusual for it to take about a month for the embassy to receive your fiance visa package. Once your fiance visa package is received by the embassy, you will be contacted with instructions and information on how to schedule your interview. k1 fiance visa process check out the links in the description of this video if you're ready to get the ball rolling on your k1 fiancee visa visit RapidVisa.com click the get started now button and create your free account today check out our other videos relating to the k1 fiancee visa. It usually takes about 9-12 months from start to visa issuance at the Consulate for the fiance visa process. You will need to wait until you are contacted by the National Visa Center after the initial petition is approved. Query: how long does a fiance visa usually take",
"output": [
"A fiance visa usually takes four to six months."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d2355fb3362a4895adab2f848e39d8d0",
"input": "Eviction reports will remain on your credit report for a maximum of seven years. Under the terms of the Fair Credit Reporting Act, any eviction, collection action or judgment must be removed from a tenant’s credit history after that time. The only way to avoid this seven-year blemish is to make reparations with the landlord or vacate the property if problems exist. The time a negative credit entry like a broken lease or eviction stays on your credit report is governed by Fair Debt Collection and Reporting Act. It is a federal law that provides a corrective option to Seven years is an old debt. how long does an eviction stay on your credit report and how long for a car reposession? also, would like to know if it's wise to file bank ruptsy/chapter 13,if that's what is, when most of my problems are unpaid medical bills which total $3400 and i have a car loan w/a balance of $6500 which all payments have been paid %100 on time and i just got a capital one cc which i was approved for? How long does an eviction stay on your credit? Is there any way of removing it with the balance unpaid? I have 2 evictions. One 6 years old and one 7. I rented places for my brothers that never paid... If you've had an eviction in the recent past, it can show up on your credit report. Lenders will see it when evaluating your credit history for a mortgage or other loan. An eviction typically registers on reports within 30 days of a court judgment being entered against you to leave the dwelling, but it may take up to 60 days. The landlord doesn't have to report the judgment. Credit bureaus search for the information and update their databases from public records. Generally, it stays for 7 years. Check your credit reports. Go to annualcreditreport.com and get all 3 reports. Look them over very carefully and file disputes on all WRONG information with the credit bureau reporting same. They have to investigate and either verify or delete the disputed items. How long does and eviction stay on my credit report? can or should this information be removed? Chicago, IL | 3 attorney answers ?I have a 12 year old eviction on my credit report. Who do I get a 6 year old eviction that has gone to collections removed o from my credit report in the state of California? High Need Can a tenant win an eviction action and stay or how long can a court let tenant stay if the landlord owes tenant rent credit? High Need Can a landlord evicted a family with a small child and one on the way? All three major credit bureaus, TransUnion, Equifax, Experian have dispute forms on line allowing you to remove obsolete credit history. You can do this yourself. Conduct an internet search and fill out the appropriate forms. Please note, relief may take as long as 60 days or longer. Date of entry is the date the judgment was entered. So if one of the judgments was entered more than seven (7) years prior to now, you should be able to send dispute letters to each of the credit bureaus which are reporting it. The other judgment will stay on your credit reports until the seven (7) year mark. Query: how long does a eviction stay on your credit",
"output": [
"Eviction reports will remain on your credit report for a maximum of seven years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-536a1c93106a41ccb531b7a13cee3cda",
"input": "However, it's fairly common for a DUI conviction to wash out after five, seven, or ten years. Example: Ernie is a real lush, and he can't seem to stay off the road when he's been drinking. In the past 15 years, he's been convicted of driving under the influence four times, and he just got arrested for another DUI. The good news is that a DWI only stays on your Virginia driving record for 11 years. If someone just is looking at your Virginia driving transcript, then the DWI conviction will only be there for 11 years. Unfortunately, the news is that it will be on your criminal record forever. A Virginia criminal history covers your entire life, so a misdemeanor conviction on your criminal history will be there forever. The good news is that a DWI only stays on your Virginia driving record for 11 years. If someone just is looking at your Virginia driving transcript, then the DWI conviction will only be there for 11 years. That’s still a long time, but at least it’s not the rest of your life. Photo by: Junior Henry. Quick Answer. In Ohio, prior DUI convictions stay on a criminal record for six years after the conviction when penalties for multiple DUIs are assessed, according to Nolo. The Ohio Bureau of Motor Vehicles also states that DUI convictions stay on a driver's record for six years with regards to suspension of driving privileges. A: In Ohio, prior DUI convictions stay on a criminal record for six years after the conviction when penalties for multiple DUIs are assessed, according to Nolo. The Ohio Bureau of Motor Vehicles also states that DUI convictions stay on a driver's record for six years with regards to suspension of driving privileges. How Long Does a First Offense DWI Stay on Your Record? If you’re charged with a DUI in Virginia, you need to know that it’s a Class 1 misdemeanor. It’s the most serious level of misdemeanor there is in Virginia. Fortunately for Ernie, all four of his prior DUI convictions occurred more than seven years ago. So, if Ernie is convicted on his current DUI case, the court will sentence him as a first offender. Some states don't have a washout period for DUI convictions. In these states, all prior DUI convictions count regardless of how long ago they occurred. (Learn about the DUI/DWI laws in your state.) How long will a DUI conviction stay on my record? In other words, for purposes of determining whether my current DUI is a second or subsequent offense, how far back is the court going to look for prior convictions? How long does a DUI stay on your record in Georgia? A: After conviction, a DUI stays on a driver's record in Georgia forever. Drivers get a DUI if they are pulled over and have a blood alcohol count of 0.08 per... Full Answer > How long does a Class B misdemeanor for theft less than $500 stay on your record in Texas? A: According to the Peveto Law office, a Class B misdemeanor conviction in Texas stays on a person's record forever. If a misdemeanor charge is eligible for d... Full Answer > Query: how long does a dui misdemeanor stay on your record",
"output": [
"In Ohio, prior DUI convictions stay on a criminal record for six years after the conviction when penalties for multiple DUIs are assessed."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ef31dacaad9b45a58bff952d510c314a",
"input": "Here's How Long Cellphone Companies Store Your Call Records If the Senate approves the USA Freedom Act, your provider would hold the key to your call logs. By Steven Nelson, Staff Writer | May 22, 2015, at 2:00 p.m. An internal Justice Department document that the ACLU obtained through the Freedom of Information Act shows that, as of 2010, AT&T, T-Mobile, and Sprint did not store the contents of text messages. Verizon did for up to five days, a change from its earlier no-logs-at-all position, and Virgin Mobile kept them for 90 days. The carriers generally kept metadata such as the phone numbers associated with the text for 90 days to 18 months; AT&T was an outlier, keeping it for as long as seven years. An e-mail message from a detective in the Baltimore County Police Department, leaked by Antisec and reproduced in a 2011 Wired article, says that Verizon keeps text message content on their servers for 3-5 days. And: Sprint stores their text message content going back 12 days and Nextel content for 7 days. An e-mail message from a detective in the Baltimore County Police Department, leaked by Antisec and reproduced in a 2011 Wired article, says that Verizon keeps text message content on their servers for 3-5 days.. And: Sprint stores their text message content going back 12 days and Nextel content for 7 days. AT&T/Cingular do not preserve content at all. Us Cellular: 3-5 days Boost Mobile LLC: 7 days. That second set of data is from 2009. We know message information can be important so we're happy to make sure you have the best information. We keep and make available basic text message details for 90 days. You will find this information by logging into your My Verizon account. This includes who sent the message, who it was sent to, the date, and the time. How long does Verizon keep text message data? I am having difficulty getting information out of my phone company as to how long they obtain records and what records they keep in terms to text... Skip to main content deloused Aug 22, 2016 8:50 AM (in response to Supergirl1965) They retain the logs permanently, and the content for about 10 days. 2. Re: How long does Verizon keep records of text messages? viller Aug 22, 2016 10:51 PM (in response to Supergirl1965) Verizon keeps complete conversations forever. A text message is a short, typed message you send or receive on a mobile device. Text messages have a 160-character limit and can contain letters, numbers and special characters, like punctuation marks. They may also include links and emoticons. Verizon ONLY stores your content of your text messages for 5 days to ensure delivery of the messages if you are in a weak signal area. Obviously the writer of this didn't bother to do much research on these areas. Another reason a lot of this information is stored is for technical support purposes. Posted on March 21, 2013 at 1:17 PM • 20 Comments. 1 Two clicks for more privacy: The Facebook Like button will be enabled once you click here. 2 Two clicks for more privacy: The Tweet this button will be enabled once you click here. 3 Two clicks for more privacy: The Google+ button will be enabled once you click here. If she wants the content of your text messages she's going to have jump through a shit ton of hoops to get it, and Verizon may not be interested in jumping through those hoops (due to time and effort involved) unless a court tells them that they have to do so. Query: how long verizon stores text messages",
"output": [
"Verizon stores text messages for 3 to 5 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-38c6ecd31e7b4a118dc34ed1efdfbc55",
"input": "The prerequisites for graduate level work in this field are a bachelor's degree and coursework in biology and chemistry. Graduate coursework in anatomy and physiology takes about 18-24 months and a thesis may be required to graduate. Program Levels: Master's degree. Prerequisites: Bachelor's degree, prior coursework in biology. See List of master’s degrees. (source: wikipedia.org) Length of Typical Master’s Degree Programs. The majority of master’s degrees are obtained in the academic disciplines of education and business. If the student already has a baccalaureate degree, these degrees normally can be completed through two years of full-time study. By attending part-time, you may earn your master's degree in three to five years, instead of two. Accelerated Study. You may be able to earn a master's degree in less than two years by taking part in an accelerated degree program. Not all schools offer such programs, and not all types of master's degrees are available in an accelerated format. The University of Southern California's program requires teachers who need certification to complete two 10-week student teaching practicums. Typically, master's degree programs certify graduated teachers to be employed in the state where they earned their degrees. Yes. 1 Pursuing your master’s online is a best bet if you want to advance your career in a field where you already have previous professional experience and you hold an accredited bachelor’s degree. Certain organizations in fields like education, medicine, and engineering may even require their top level employees to have master’s degrees. For example, a student could attain both a bachelor’s degree in Business and an MBA (Master’s of Business Administration) degree in a single five-year program. Master’s degrees have become very popular in recent years and the trend towards getting the degree shows no sign of abating. If you think that a master’s degree is the right choice for you there are numerous options to consider. How long it will take you to complete a master’s degree depends primarily upon which program you want to pursue and whether you want to attend class on a full- or part-time basis. Whether you are still pursuing a Bachelors degree or you are already part of the work force, you may be wondering, “How long does it take to get a Masters degree?” Masters degree programmes are designed to be completed within a year or two, and in an increasingly competitive global job market, an advanced degree, such as a Masters in Finance or Management, may give you the edge you need to stand out to a potential employer. Financial Impact of a Master’s Degree on Salary. 1 Nursing – A bachelor’s degree in nursing earned a median annual salary of $65,470, while a master’s degree in nursing with a nurse practitioner specialization earned $96,460. Many countries in Europe usually offer Masters Degrees which you can complete for only one year, whereas for the same degree in the United States, you would need much longer, typically two years. Another factor that impacts how long does it take to get a Masters Degree is the country in which you choose to obtain your degree. Different educational systems have different durations and credit requirements, therefore in some places you can obtain a degree for half the time that you would need in another place. How Long Does It Take to Get a Master’s Degree? Key Takeaways It can take anywhere from 2 semesters (or about 9 months) to three calendar years to get a master’s degree as a full-time students. Query: how long does it take to get a graduate degree",
"output": [
"Graduate coursework in anatomy and physiology takes about 18-24 months and a thesis may be required to graduate."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ba9c19166ae0437d9ad3152bf0424b0e",
"input": "The bottom of a modern chandelier should sit at least 7 feet from the floor in foyers, and even rooms, where people will need to walk underneath them. If you have a two-storey foyer, hang the chandelier about one-third of the way between ceiling and floor. When placing pendants in a row, the space between the bulbs or light sources (not the edges of the fixture themselves) should be about 30″ apart. 5. Should I use a dimmer? The lighting industry's standard recommendation for sizing a dining room chandelier is that the diameter of the fixture should be one-half to two-thirds the width of the dining table. Another way to size a fixture is to choose a diameter that is 1 foot smaller than the table width. [Image Credit] 1 Dining Rooms. Find the Perfect Chandelier for Your Dining Room. 2 Furniture Basics. Here Are Some Things to Know Before You Furnish a Dining Room. 3 Outdoor Room Ideas. 9 Epic She Sheds and He Sheds. 4 Design Ideas by Style. 7 Tips for Hanging Wall Art. 5 Dining Rooms. Give Your Dining Room An Upgrade. 6 Eclectic Design. Because hallways require effective lighting, a chandelier might do the job in beautiful style. If you have the standard 5-foot-wide hallway, opt for a chandelier with a 12-inch diameter. The distance between the floor and the bottom of the chandelier should be between 80 and 84 inches. Hold the chain or cord from which the light hangs at various heights over the table, while a friend sits at a table and views the ambient light. Opt for what looks and feels best with that particular fixture, considering the height of the table and chairs, so your diners won't bump into the fixture while they're eating. Once you've picked out a pendant light or set of lights to hang above a bar, determining the ideal hanging height for the lighting may seem a bit confusing at first. In general, 30 to 40 inches of air space between counter and the bottom of the pendant allows enough room to avoid bumping into the lights while also providing ample light. The ideal distance for your particular setup may vary based on the heights of guests using the bar, seated or standing. 96: If you're looking to add drama and interest to your staircase, hanging a light fixture is the perfect way to do just that -- especially in a larger home with a grand staircase that spans several floors. Assuming your table is 30 high, the bottom of your light fixture will be about 60 from the floor. AFF (meaning Above Finished Floor). If you move your table out of the way to hang your light fixture, the height may seem very low and will probably bump your head on it before you move your table back into place. distance/height from dining table to hanging light fixture. gzmauricioJanuary 24, 2014. have pendant light and want to know the minimum distance from dining table to fixture. Query: how far between table and bottom of light fixture?",
"output": [
"In general, 30 to 40 inches of space between table and bottom of light fixture."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-666e0efd811c4a40af0826810c778069",
"input": "Long hared rabbits such as Angora's, Cashmeres and Lionheads need a lot more grooming than short hair or normal coated rabbits do Gestation 30 to 32 days, litter size 3 to 8, eyes open 10 to 12 days, weaning are 6 to 8 weeks When the litter arrives don't expect every kit in the litter to be the same size, like multiple human births each kit will be different size and weight. About 7-10 days, after 12 days they'll start getting adventurous and exploring their environment. This page may be out of date. Save your draft before refreshing this page. They will stay in this safe burrow for 7-10 days at which time they will open their eyes, scatter from the burrow, and start to eat solids. Although small at this time, often not much bigger than a hen's egg or small orange, it is perfectly normal for them to be on their own, even if they do not show fear of humans. Once their eyes open they are mature enough to no longer need their mothers care or ours. (depending on bunny..may be much LESS if smaller rabbit!) Newborn babies (if eyes closed) all need to be stimulated to urinate and defecate prior to or following feeding until their eyes open. (Except Jackrabbits do not). *See how to below. 2-3 weeks: 7-13 cc/ml each feeding (two feedings). Domestic eyes open at about 10 days of age. House Rabbit Society warns that bunnies should be left alone since their mother usually comes to nurse them every morning and evening. Despite their small size, fully-furred bunnies with open eyes and erect ears are strong enough to move around and do not need human help. Learn more about Rabbits & Hares How long does it take a kitten to open their eyes? Shorthaired kittens open their eyes at about 5-8 days and longhaired kittens open their eyes at about 10-14 days, usually. Edit Most resources indicated that they will remain nested for 1+ week, and this website (1) elaborated: On the tenth or eleventh day, their eyes are open and sometimes they. will come out of the nest box. They will start to eat solids between the. 11th and 14th days. Amount to feed. 1 Newborn to One Week: 2-2.5 cc each feeding. 2 1-2 weeks: 5-7 cc each feeding. Amount will vary depending on size of rabbit. Smaller rabbits will need less. 3 2-3 weeks: 7-13 cc each feeding. Domestic baby rabbit eyes open at about 10 days of age. You can start introducing them to hay, alfalfa pellets, and water. Although they may begin to eat solids, this does not mean that they should be or are ready to be weaned. 3-6 weeks: 13-15 cc each feeding. 6-8 weeks: The babies should start to wean at this period. The babies should stay in this box until their eyes open at ten days and then the door can be cut lower so that the babies can move in and out of the box on their own. If the mother rabbit has not pulled any of her hair from her chest and legs to make a nest for the babies; advise your client to make a nest out of flannel, terry cloth or Kleenex. A photo of a bunny with nestbox optical infection and treatment for babies with stuck-shut eyes Baby rabbits' eyes should open when they are...age. A photo of a bunny with nestbox optical infection and treatment for babies with stuck-shut eyes Query: how long does it take for rabbits to open their eyes",
"output": [
"Domestic baby rabbit eyes open at about 10 days of age."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c521831c05f94feb81626169e9d33139",
"input": "Should You Call the IRS? The IRS issues most refunds in less than 21 days, although some require additional time. You should only call if it has been: 21 days or more since you e-filed; 6 weeks or more since you mailed your return, or when Where's My Refund tells you to contact the IRS Taxpayers who claim the Earned Income Tax Credit or the Additional Child Tax Credit may experience a refund hold. If the idea of a larger tax refund sounds appealing to you, then you may wish to open a Traditional IRA, which can not only help you save money for retirement, but it can also help you receive a larger tax refund, as up to $5,000 worth of contributions are tax deductible ($6k if you are over 50 years of age). 6 weeks or more since you mailed your return, or when Where's My Refund tells you to contact the IRS; Taxpayers who claim the Earned Income Tax Credit or the Additional Child Tax Credit may experience a refund hold. According to the Protecting Americans from Tax Hikes (PATH) Act, the IRS cannot issue these refunds before mid-February. Information about refunds associated with filing taxes. Status of a return is usually available within 24 hours after the IRS has received an e-filed return or 4 weeks after a paper return received by mail. Comments. 1 I always use Turbo tax and choose to file online. 2 I’ve always been a TurboTax fan as well, and their program has been reliable every time. 3 I have tried to be patient. 4 As an entrepreneur I try to wait as long as possible to file because I always fear how much money I will owe from all of my gains over the course of the year. Comments. 1 I always use Turbo tax and choose to file online. For the past five years, I’ve received my refund within few weeks. 2 I’ve always been a TurboTax fan as well, and their program has been reliable every time. I usually get my returns pretty fast too, possibly a bonus from filing early. 3 I have tried to be patient. There is no tax refund schedule for paper returns because it is difficult to know when the IRS will physically process your return. Filing Tax Returns Early: The first official day to file taxes is January 23, 2017, according to the IRS. When the IRS processes your tax return and approves your refund, you can see your actual personalized refund date. Even though the IRS issues most refunds in less than 21 days after we receive your tax return, it’s possible your tax return may require additional review and take longer. More from my site. 1 Federal Tax Extension Deadline – File Taxes by October 15th, or Pay the Price! 2 How to File Your Federal Tax Return Online For Free. 3 How to File a Tax Extension. 4 Refund Anticipation Loans Suck. 5 How to Enroll for Electronic Tax Payments for Your Personal or Business Taxes. 6 I Need My Tax Refund! The IRS has a goal of getting tax refunds to tax payers within 21 days. They reach this goal about 90% of the time. In fact, most people receive their refunds in about 10-14 days. In previous years, the IRS created a schedule for when they will send out federal tax refunds via direct deposit or by check. Query: how long does it take to get the federal tax return refund",
"output": [
"21 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-432d4bfc41b24023a4f5932cd124c8d0",
"input": "A Class E driver license may be renewed up to 18 months prior to expiration. Commercial driver license (CDL) Hazardous Material holders can renew up to 12 months prior to expiration. A mandatory vision test is required for all drivers over the age of 79, regardless of citizenship or status, or renewal method. Customers who are 79 years of age and under will be issued an eight-year license. How early can I renew a vehicle registration? Can I renew my vehicle registration before I receive the renewal notice from the DMV? You can renew a vehicle registration online, by mail or at a DMV office no more than 60 days before the expiration date. You can renew without the registration renewal notice from the DMV. The DMV website has intructions renew a vehicle registration. You can sign up to get inspectrion and registration renewal notices by email and/or text message. You can’t renew a registration that is. 1 Suspended. 2 Revoked. 3 Expired for more than 1 year. 4 Has not been inspected in the past 12 months. 15Q. What types of driver licenses can I renew by Internet? 15A. As long as you meet the eligibility requirements, you can renew your driver license by Internet for the same class of license you currently have. 16Q. Will I need to take a test to renew my driver license by Internet? 16A. No. Trenton, NJ 08666; NJ Armed Forces Car Registration Refund. If you register your vehicle in another state while on active duty, you can apply for a refund on the remaining time left on your NJ registration. To apply, send: A Request for Refund letter explaining that you want a refund because of your military status. Proof of your active military status. Testing frequency and which vehicles need to test. All even-model-year vehicles must be tested during the even-numbered years (e.g. a 2008 vehicle must be tested in 2016, 2018, etc.). All odd-model-year vehicles must be tested during the odd-numbered years (e.g. a 2005 vehicle must be tested in 2017, 2019, etc.). In the past, vehicle owners would receive a windshield sticker to note the vehicle had. passed its inspection. Now, you no longer receive a windshield sticker. Your vehicle. inspection date is due no more than 90 days before your plate expires. In this file photo, the line stretches around the Motor Vehicle Commission office in Wayne. The MVC is allowing customers to skip their next trip to MVC offices and renew their driver's license by mail -- stretching out the time between visits to every 8 years instead of every 4 years. Star-Ledger file photo Per state motor vehicle laws, you must submit a CA auto registration renewal request and pay the applicable fees on or before the date of expiry displayed on your registration card. Note that the California DMV requires drivers to renew car registration on an annual basis and does not offer a grace period upon expiry of their registration. Drivers must apply for a NJ car registry within 60 days of moving within the state by submitting the following information and documentation: 1 New Jersey insurance identification card. 2 Proof of Social Security Number. 3 New Jersey driver's license. 4 Vehicle odometer reading. 5 Titling application. 6 Pay the applicable fees. Query: how far ahead can you renew a car registration in nj",
"output": [
"You can renew a vehicle registration online, by mail or at a DMV office no more than 60 days before the expiration date in New Jersey."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9b7bca941b8846a2a1ddceec40620fee",
"input": "In studies with rats and mice, Victoza ® and medicines that work like Victoza ® caused thyroid tumors, including thyroid cancer. It is not known if Victoza ® will cause thyroid tumors or a type of thyroid cancer called medullary thyroid carcinoma (MTC) in people. Who should not use Victoza ®? Do not use Victoza ® if: These regimens often involve a long- or intermediate-acting insulin such as NPH insulin to provide a basal insulin level (a relatively steady background level of insulin throughout the day). A rapid- or short-acting insulin is added to provide bolus doses to control the spike in blood sugar that occurs after meals. Intermediate-acting insulin. What it’s called: Humulin N (NPH), Novolin N (NPH) Intermediate-acting insulin can control blood sugar levels for about 12 hours or longer, so it can be used overnight. It begins to work within one to four hours, and peaks between four and 12 hours, depending on the brand. Humulin N (insulin isophane) is a man-made form of a hormone that is produced in the body. Insulin is a hormone that works by lowering levels of glucose (sugar) in the blood. Insulin isophane is an intermediate-acting insulin that starts to work within 2 to 4 hours after injection, peaks in 4 to 12 hours, and keeps working for 12 to 18 hours. Humulin N is used to improve blood sugar control in adults and children with diabetes mellitus. Think of it like little drops of insulin wrapped in a coating that slowly dissolved, letting the insulin work for 14 hours or so. The problem with NPH was that it looked a bit like the first leg of a rollercoaster, it had a high peak and a long tail. People with type 1 diabetes make very little or no insulin in their bodies. They must take insulin every day to stay alive. Type 2 Diabetes. People with type 2 diabetes do not make enough insulin or do not use it well enough. Some people with type 2 diabetes can use pills or other medicines that are injected into the body. Other people with type 2 also need insulin to help control their diabetes. Hey.. Was just wondering how long it takes for everyones insulin to kick in. Mine seems to take about 5 hours and was just wondering if anyone else took this long. Oh and I mean fast-acting.. At the moment i'm on Novorapid and if this is not 'normal' what I could do to improve the time taken. Other factors, such as your other health conditions, medication costs, and your daily schedule may play a role in what diabetes medicine you take. Type 1 diabetes If you have type 1 diabetes, you must take insulin because your body no longer makes this hormone. You will need to take insulin several times during the day, including with meals. This group includes insulin glargine (Lantus), insulin detemir (Levemir), and NPH (Humulin N and Novolin N). How Does Insulin Work? The graphs here show at a glance how long it takes for each type of insulin to begin working, when the dose reaches its peak, and how long it lasts. Insulin Basics. There are different types of insulin depending on how quickly they work, when they peak, and how long they last. Insulin is available in different strengths; the most common is U-100. All insulin available in the United States is manufactured in a laboratory, but animal insulin can still be imported for personal use. Query: how long does it take for nph to work",
"output": [
"It takes one to four hours for NPH, Normal pressure hydrocephalus to work."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3e08d2349741457cbb703fb2625c4cea",
"input": "1. Re: transportation from lax to manhattan beach just for a day. 14 May 2013, 15:14. Taxi would be around $20 each way to the pier in Manhattan Beach, maybe a few dollars less. Alternative is to head to one of the hotels on Century Blvd. Manhattan Beach is ideally located.. less then 4 miles from the airport but no airport noise. One of the reasons for the popularity of Manhattan Beach is that it is close to the LAX and to the Westside financial center in Century City and just 35 minutes from downtown Los Angeles. For more information see the link below. Driving distance from LAX to Manhattan Beach, CA. The total driving distance from LAX to Manhattan Beach, CA is 5 miles or 8 kilometers. Your trip begins at Los Angeles International Airport in Los Angeles, California. It ends in Manhattan Beach, California. If you are planning a road trip, you might also want to calculate the total driving time from LAX to Manhattan Beach, CA so you can see when you'll arrive at your destination. Then it might be 15. It is a great place to live for road warriors because they can get to the airport quickly but not have airport noise AND have great schools and beach proximity. This is part of the reason Manhattan Beach real estate is higher priced than Hermosa Beach or Redondo Beach. For more information, see our page below: 4. Re: transportation from lax to manhattan beach just for a day. 15 May 2013, 21:16. It's my understanding that the Hotels on Century Blvd. provide the Ocean Express Shuttles (there are not the 2 trolleys anymore) for their guests, to provide a place to visit, shop or dine while staying at their hotels. Map of driving directions from LAX to Manhattan Beach, CA Click here to show map Drag the line on the map to calculate the driving distance for a different route. Driving distance from LAX to Manhattan Beach, CA The total driving distance from LAX to Manhattan Beach, CA is 5 miles or 8 kilometers. Your trip begins at Los Angeles International Airport in Los Angeles, California. Manhattan beach is about 5 minutes from the Los Angeles International Airport. You don’t even need to get on the freeway to get there. Just go south on Sepulveda, pass El Segundo and you’re there. The total driving distance from Manhattan Beach, CA to LAX is 6 miles or 10 kilometers. Your trip begins in Manhattan Beach, California. It ends at Los Angeles International Airport in Los Angeles, California. 3. Re: transportation from lax to manhattan beach just for a day. 14 May 2013, 16:23. I'm assuming that you won't have luggage as there is no provision for storing luggage at LAX. I'm not a big fan of the Trolley as it runs only once per hour and takes a complete hour to go to the beach and return from it. Query: how far is manhattan beach from lax airport",
"output": [
"The total driving distance from LAX to Manhattan Beach, California is 5 miles or 8 kilometers."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7ecde12aa0154133aef0ff78e79ab67f",
"input": "Depending on whether fresh strawberries are stored cut or whole, they can last for different time periods. When stored in a refrigerator, whole strawberries can last up to 7 days, while cut ones will last up to 3 days. Stored in the freezer, whole or cut strawberries can last a few months. For example, the cut fruit can last up to 4 months in a freezer. When you're ready, wash each berry differently. Blueberries can take about any method, apart from a long soaking. Strawberries, with their delicate, absorbent skin, require a little more care: Quickly swish unwashed berries in a bowl of water, move them to a strainer, then move them to paper towels, placed in single layers and let them dry. Or brandy. But if you make sure that you keep the unbruised berries out of the Tupperware, the strawberries are as fresh by the end of the week as in the beginning. I haven't picked my own since I can get a flat for as cheap as 6 dollars during peak season. In fact, that's how I learned this tip. Once the strawberries are cut, air and moisture begin to cause the strawberries to deteriorate and you must store the strawberries in the refrigerator within two hours of cutting to slow bacterial growth. An airtight container or sealed plastic bag keeps cut strawberries fresh in the refrigerator for up to three days. Freezer Fresh Keep strawberries for longer by freezing them. Freeze whole strawberries in airtight storage containers or plastic freezer bag for up to eight months. Place cut strawberries in an airtight container or plastic freezer bag and sprinkle with granulated sugar -- about a 1/4 cup of sugar for every 1/2 quart of berries. Sweetened, cut strawberries remain fresh in the freezer for up to four months before quality begins to decline. Put the clean, dry berries back in the clamshell and store them in the fridge. Make sure to leave ventilation holes in the top uncovered so air can circulate in the package. Otherwise, store the berries in a clean container lined with paper towels, with the lid ajar so condensation can evaporate. Change the paper towels if they get damp over time. This is a really good case for some types of confect, but you can't do it with most types of filling (definitely not with strawberries). Cooling from the outside gives you a beautiful shine. If you want to achieve a good shine, it is possible to put the confects in the fridge for a short time, but only after they have cooled to 20°C at room temperature. Don't let them fall to fridge temperature, take them out at 15°C. The continued cooling from the outside is beneficial. This shouldn't happen. Chocolate covered strawberries can be kept in the refrigerator for several days when stored properly, though ideally, you’ll want to enjoy them within 48 hours. Cover them in wax paper and store them in an airtight container so that the fruit won’t go bad. There are a variety of ways to store strawberries, depending on whether you want to store them for a few days or a few months. If you want to know how to store strawberries, just follow these steps. Steps Slicing the strawberries for use ahead of time shortens their storage life, but packaging the sliced berries properly helps them retain both flavor and texture to use the following day. Store them plain for fresh use in your refrigerator or place them in a sugar pack so they make their own sauce for drizzling over ice cream or other desserts. Dip strawberries (you can insert a skewer into the stem and then dip) in chocolate and then tap gently to remove any excess. Transfer to the parchment paper. Sprinkle strawberries with sprinkles, nuts, coconut flakes or leave plain. Refrigerate chocolate covered strawberries for 10 minutes until chocolate hardens. Query: how long can you keep strawberries in the fridge",
"output": [
"When stored in a refrigerator, whole strawberries can last up to 7 days, while cut ones will last up to 3 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-5bac5575e3ea4bd0becf1d34265ffec0",
"input": "Of course, your first concern is likely the amount of time it will take - after all, you're trying to get ahead or change jobs now - not years from now. As it turns out, getting your master's degree might not take as long as you think! How Valuable is a Master’s Degree? A bachelor's degree was once the ultimate educational goal - one which, for many, was the pinnacle of success and proof of qualification for professional employment. Nowadays, things are different. Another master’s degree option that is offered by many schools is a joint bachelor’s-master’s degree program, where students coming to college with only a high school diploma can earn both degrees with five years of full-time study. A student that pursues this degree on a half-time basis (7-8 credits per semester) will take four years to complete the program. Part-time students could carry a lighter caseload, but keep in mind that most schools have rules regarding the maximum time (usually six years) allowed to complete a degree. Home CHOOSING A MASTER’S How Long Does It Take To Get An MBA? How Long Does It Take To Get An MBA? The Master’s in Business Administration (MBA) graduate degree is one of the most popular degrees that people choose to complete. A high percentage of graduate students are enrolled in some business field as the returns to the degree are quite high. It would probably take three or four years from the masters to get a PhD in EE. If the duration of the program is your sole concern, I'm not sure you should do it. In a PhD program you should be exactly where you want to be doing exactly what you want to do. For the ambitious students who want to get two degrees the Dual MBA is created for them. These students choose to do an MBA and get another degree in a different field such as: Law; Public Policy; Engineering; Computer Science; Other topics; The degree in addition to the MBA can be a undergraduate or graduate degree. Many countries in Europe usually offer Masters Degrees which you can complete for only one year, whereas for the same degree in the United States, you would need much longer, typically two years. Another factor that impacts how long does it take to get a Masters Degree is the country in which you choose to obtain your degree. Different educational systems have different durations and credit requirements, therefore in some places you can obtain a degree for half the time that you would need in another place. Different master's degree programs last for different amounts of time. There are two-year on-campus and online programs as well as accelerated programs, part-time, and dual degree programs that vary in length. The typical master's degree program takes two years of full-time study to complete. There are also part-time programs that take longer, as well as accelerated master's degree programs that take less time. In the instance of dual degree programs, the length of time to receive a master's degree depends on the additional degree program, and may take as few as four years or as many as ten. In some subjects, master's degrees are considered terminal degrees, and graduates receive the advanced training necessary to enter or advance in a chosen profession. Considering the fact that a professional with a Master’s degree earns about 20% more in their lifetime than other professionals with a lower level degree. If you are wondering how long it takes to earn your Master’s degree, read this guide and learn what you need to know. Resource: Top 20 Best Value Online MBA Programs Considering the Time it Takes To Earn a Bachelor’s Degree For the ambitious students who want to get two degrees the Dual MBA is created for them. 1 These students choose to do an MBA and get another degree in a different field such as: 2 Law. 3 Public Policy. 4 Engineering. 5 Computer Science. 6 Other topics. Query: how long does it take to get a master degree",
"output": [
"The typical master's degree program takes two years of full-time study to complete."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-837ddc33b15044c0b1e2913a92f781c5",
"input": "The following death certificates are issued to those legally entitled to receive them: Death - Long Certificate which contains all information, including cause of death. Death - Short Certificate contains all items except cause of death. A Death Statement contains the decedent's name, county and date of death. The informant on the death certificate must initiate the request for a correction. The informant may return a certificate issued in the last 12 months and notify us as to the specific change they would like to make. Regional offices – Issues death certificates for death certificates since 2005 and initiates corrections for those records. 2. Mail. Average processing time is 2-4 weeks. You will need to send: A completed application form; A $12 non-refundable standard searching fee; Add $3 for each additional copy. DHEC State Vital Records Office, Columbia – Issues death certificates and processes corrections for all years and counties. 1 Office Hours 8:30 a.m. - 4:00 p.m. 2 Telephone: (803) 898-3630. 3 Address: 2600 Bull St., Columbia, SC 29201. If the informant has not requested a death certificate in the past 12 months, this would be the first step they need to take. Again, the informant must indicate the correction they wish to make. Staff will review the certificate on file and advise as to the procedures. There are 4 Ways to Apply for a Death Certificate. 1. Walk-in. Average processing time is 30-45 minutes. You will need to provide: An application form. A $12 non-refundable standard searching fee. $3 for each additional copy needed. A valid government, school or employer issued photo ID. Death Certificates There are 4 Ways to Apply for a Death Certificate 1. Walk-in. Average processing time is 30-45 minutes. You will need to provide: An application form; A $12 non-refundable standard searching fee; $3 for each additional copy needed; A valid government, school or employer issued photo ID. Where to Go: Death - Long Certificate which contains all information, including cause of death; Death - Short Certificate contains all items except cause of death. However, it does contain manner of death A Death Statement contains the decedent's name, county and date of death. You will need to provide: 1 A $17 non-refundable standard searching fee. 2 A $9.50 additional charge to pay for the services of VitalChek. 3 Shipping fees should you choose to have your record sent to you by UPS rather than regular U.S. mail. 4 Only an immediate family member of deceased my order through Vital Check. You will need to provide: 1 An application form. 2 A $12 non-refundable standard searching fee. 3 $3 for each additional copy needed. 4 A valid government, school or employer issued photo ID. Query: how long to get a death certificate",
"output": [
"It takes 2 to 4 weeks to get a death certificate."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-22cd62fd1e6c4babac38cf9f37b3dee8",
"input": "Many medical professionals hear the question all the time, how long does a fever last? A fever really does not last more than 2-3 days, unless there is a major underlying cause. It is important to take the individual to the doctor if the fever is extremely high or lasting more than the normal amount of time. While the average baseline for a body temperature is 98.6 F, some variation is allowed for determining a person’s fever. These people include: 1 the very young. 2 people 65 or older. 3 people with chronic illnesses, such as asthma, heart disease, HIV, or diabetes. 4 pregnant women. 5 people with a body mass index (BMI) of 40 or higher. The flu vaccine is a specific and effective way to prevent the flu. It is available for children over 6 months old. Children under 9 years old need two doses of the vaccine the first year they get it. The flu can take many forms. Classically, the flu begins abruptly, with a fever in the 102 to 106 degree range, a flushed face, body aches, and marked lack of energy. Some people have other systemic symptoms such as dizziness or vomiting. The fever usually lasts for a day or two, but can last five days. Somewhere between day 2 and day 4 of the illness, the “whole body” symptoms begin to subside, and respiratory symptoms begin to increase. How long does a fever last? Pyrexia is the proper medical term for a fever. To be classified as a fever, one’s body temperature must be above the normal 98.6. Some people in the medical community do not believe that it is a true fever unless the body temperature rises above 101 degrees. If you get the flu, you should get rest and drink plenty of fluids. 1 Take pain relievers to lower your fever and relieve the aches, such as: 2 acetaminophen (Tylenol) 3 ibuprofen (Advil, Motrin) 4 naproxen (Aleve) Popular Posts. 1 How Long Does Mail Take. 2 How Long Does The Flu Last. 3 How Long Does Suboxone Stay in Your System. 4 How Long Does It Take To Get Mri Results. 5 How Long Does It Take To Digest A Meal. 6 How Long Does It Take To Become An Architect. 7 How Long Does It Take To Lower Blood Pressure. Some people are at increased risk for complications from influenza. 1 These people include: 2 the very young. 3 people 65 or older. 4 people with chronic illnesses, such as asthma, heart disease, HIV, or diabetes. 5 pregnant women. 6 people with a body mass index (BMI) of 40 or higher. While it is unclear when the fever begins what the body is really fighting, the real test is to ensure that it does not last more than 3 days. A fever that lasts 10-15 days is called a prolonged fever. While a fever is certainly not something to mess around with, there is now way to definitively state the answer to the question on most sufferers minds, how long does a fever last? Anything over 3 days needs medication attention to make sure that there is nothing more serious underlying. How long does it last? Inhaling droplets from coughs or sneezes is the most common way to catch the flu. Symptoms appear 1 to 7 days later (usually 2 to 3 days). Symptoms (except the cough) usually disappear within 4 to 7 days. Sometimes there is a second wave of fever at this time. The cough and tiredness usually lasts for weeks after the rest of the illness is over. Query: how long does the fever last with flu",
"output": [
"The fever usually lasts for a day or two, but can last five days with flu."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-51e655bfc9174fb287a96109de5af1db",
"input": "A cash purchase will usually be quicker. The time it takes will likely depend on the particular bank and perhaps the area...and whether there are any contingencies. I bought a bank-owned house for cash and closed within 3 weeks. There are many variables that can determine how long it takes to close on an FHA loan. Underwriting is one of the biggest variables. Once you’ve found a home and signed a contract with the seller, the rest of the lending process might take two or three weeks on the short end, or two to three months on the long end. There are many variables and several different people involved. I work with a lot of HUD homes and closings. HUD requires the home to be closed within 45 days. If you are paying cash you can close much faster. Are you closing with the HUD attorney? Fearnley, Calif, & Price? If so they should be able to clear title quickly because they already have all the information. Most federally related mortgage loans can close within 30 days. Special first-time home buyer programs, particularly those involving help with the buyer's down payment, might take 35 to 45 days to close. These special loans typically require approval from two underwriting processes. HUD, though, understands that even pre-approved winning bidders on its homes will need time to close. Additionally, HUD also needs time to write up and send contracts to the real estate brokers of winning home bidders. Due to the time needed by all involved parties, HUD generally allows winning home bidders with mortgages up to 45 days to close. HUD Preparation Time It may take HUD from two to five days to notify bidders on its homes that they've won their bids. Answer: Read our section on how to buy a HUD home. Then look at the listings of HUD homes available. If you find a home that interests you, you'll need to contact a HUD-approved real estate broker (most brokers are HUD-approved), who can submit a bid for you. Successful bids are posted right on the page for your state. For more information, you may also contact our FHA Resource Center by email at answers@hud.gov or by phone at (800) CALLFHA. if a home is a REO, how long does it usually take to close if you have a letter of guarantee funds estimate closing time on reo (0) | asked by: Terry Davenport | share | 54 months ago | Report December 30, 2010 08:15 AM. 1 This is a question that I am often asked. 2 For the purpose of this article, let’s talk about a HUD home that has just been listed, and that the purchaser is an owner occupant. 3 No bids are opened for the first 10 days that the property is listed. So if you make a bid on the first day of the listing period, you will have to wait at least 10 days for an acceptance. In some cases, it it taking an additional 2-5 days for the winning bidder to be notified. Once notified, the selling agent then has only 2 days to get the contract delivered to the HUD asset manager. www.hud.com is your single best resource for HUD homes nationally. HUD also advertises to the general public through over a dozen asset management and marketing (M&M) companies that are contracted by HUD to maintain and sell its properties. You may check the HUD Web site for the names of M&M Contractors who list the properties by posting them on their respective Web sites. Just about anyone can buy a house for sale by the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD). As long as you have the cash or can qualify for a mortgage loan, you can submit a bid through a HUD-approved real estate broker. HUD homes are first available only to home buyers who plan to live in the house. Query: how long does a hud home take to close",
"output": [
"HUD requires the home to be closed within 45 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c60228202813429bb4809efa1f09ed70",
"input": "Rock cycle. The rock cycle is a basic concept in geology that describes the time-consuming transitions through geologic time among the three main rock types: sedimentary, metamorphic, and igneous. As the adjacent diagram illustrates, each of the types of rocks is altered or destroyed when it is forced out of its equilibrium conditions. An igneous rock such as basalt may break down and dissolve when exposed to the atmosphere, or melt as it is subducted under a continent. Due to the driving forces of the rock cycle, plate tectonics and the water cycle, rocks do not remain in equilibrium and are forced to change as they encounter new environments. The rock cycle is an illustration that explains how the three rock types are related to each other, and how processes change from one type to another over time. This cyclical aspect makes rock change a geologic cycle and, on planets containing life, a biogeochemical cycle During the rock cycle process, sedimentary rocks can become metamorphic or igneous rocks as they are buried in the planet's crust with younger layers of rock above them. Eventually they can metamorphose under heat and pressure at great depth, or melt to form new magma. Uplifting of rock layers by earth forces can bring rocks near the surface again at any point in the cycle. Igneous and metamorphic rocks can weather to form sediments that later become sedimentary rocks. Igneous rocks can metamorphose when subjected again to heat and pressure. Metamorphic rocks can metamorphose in repeat episodes or melt into magma, which later cools to form igneous rocks. Basalt is a dark-colored, fine-grained, igneous rock composed mainly of plagioclase and pyroxene minerals. It most commonly forms as an extrusive rock, such as a lava flow, but can also form in small intrusive bodies, such as an igneous dike or a thin sill. It has a composition similar to gabbro. The difference between basalt and gabbro is that basalt is a fine-grained rock while gabbro is a coarse-grained rock. Basalt (pronounced /bəˈsɔːlt/, /ˈbæsɒlt/ or /ˈbæsɔːlt/) is a common extrusive igneous (volcanic) rock formed from the rapid cooling of basaltic lava exposed at or very near the surface of a planet or moon. Flood basalt describes the formation in a series of lava basalt flows. A: Basalt is primarily formed by the extrusion of lava flows onto the surface of the earth during a volcanic eruption. The intrusion of a narrow sill or igneous dike below the crust also results in the formation of basalt. Basalt is a type of igneous rock that is typically dark in coloration with a fine-grained texture. It is the most predominant rock type found in Earth's crust, and mainly consists of pyroxene and plagioclase minerals. Volcanoes that form basalt are commonly found near the ocean basins. IGNEOUS ROCKS (obsidian, granite, scoria, basalt) - all samples seem to be hard and not breakable. GRANITE: Granite is an igneous rock that cooled very slowly. We know this because the minerals in granite are very large. It takes a long time (hundreds of thousands of years) for rocks to grow to visible size. BASALT: Basalt cooled more quickly than granite. A type of igneous rock. Basalt is the most common rock type in the earth's crust and makes up most of the ocean floor. A process that turns sediment into sedimentary rock. Over time, sediment accumulates in oceans, lakes, and valleys, eventually building up in layers and weighing down the material underneath. Molten rock that flows beneath the earth's surface and is made up of gases, liquids, and crystals. When magma reaches the surface, it is called lava. Marble A type of metamorphic rock formed when limestone is pushed down into the earth and subjected to intense heat and pressure for a long period of time. Melting dating: The global tectonic rock cycle …that allow black lava, called basalt, to reach the surface. The portion that remains in a fissure below the surface usually forms a vertical black tubular body known as a dike (or dyke). Basalt Rocks Basalt is an extrusive igneous rock that is very dark in color. It is the most common type of rock in the Earth's crust and it makes up most of the ocean floor. It is made of many dark colored minerals such as pyroxene and olivine. Basalt also contains some light colored minerals such as feldspar and quartz, but the amounts are small. Query: how is basalt formed in rock cycle",
"output": [
"Basalt is primarily formed by the extrusion of lava flows onto the surface of the earth during a volcanic eruption."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9a096ef5c37b42de839e00de1950f12d",
"input": "Botox Deals: 50 to 90% off deals in Botox . Get daily deals and local insights. Botox or Juvederm Ultra Injections at Larson Medical Aesthetics (Up to 49%Off). Botox with Optional Microdermabrasion at Aura Laser Skin Care (Up to 56% Off). $168 for 20 Units of Botox Injections at The Gallery of Cosmetic Surgery ($199 Value). BOTOX® Cosmetic is one of the most extensively studied medical aesthetic treatments and is approved for cosmetic use in 78 countries.* BOTOX® Cosmetic has a record of experience that aesthetic specialists know and trust. How much does a Botox treatment cost? Is it $15 or $800, which are both prices that we found in a price survey of the New York area? The answer: both are right. Dermal Fillers VS Botox, Costs and Considerations – Singapore. Date: June 10th, 2014 | Author: Dr Tyng Tan | Category: Treatments. Even if nobody knows the number of candles you have been blowing on your cake, sometimes our real age shows through our skin. In 2004, Botox was approved for excess sweating (hyperhidrosis), and in 2010, Botox was approved for the treatment of migraine headaches. A common misconception is that Botox actually paralyzes the muscles in the face. Some skin care centers, for example at malls are cheaper, but you'll want to check first on the quality of service they provide (see shopping for Botox, below) It may save money to have a group of friends have a Botox party, which can cost 10-20% less, in large part because it can take less time. BOTOX ® Cosmetic is a prescription medicine that is injected into muscles and used to temporarily improve the look of moderate to severe forehead lines, crow’s feet lines, and frown lines between the eyebrows in adults. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION AND APPROVED USES BOTOX ® Cosmetic Factors that affect the cost of Botox. Below are the most important factors that affect the cost of a Botox treatment: Size of area that requires treatment: The more areas you want treated, the more expensive the treatment is going to be. Your cost not only includes the price of the product, but more importantly, the skill and expertise of the specialist or healthcare professional who is administering your treatment. BOTOX ® Cosmetic is a technique-sensitive treatment—look for someone who is licensed and trained and has experience treating patients with BOTOX ® Cosmetic. Be wary of discount products or “cheap” BOTOX ® Cosmetic —if it sounds too good to be true, it probably is. The average BOTOX® treatment price ranges from $350 to $500 for each area injected. BOTOX® injection cost can vary greatly according to geographic region and depending on the doctor who performs the procedure. For those on a budget, convenient BOTOX® financing plans can make treatment easily affordable. BOTOX® Cosmetic – Average Cost Query: how expensive is botox?",
"output": [
"The average botox treatment price ranges from $350 to $500 for each area injected."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1f0b5fd36eed428c89dc9a27e847d565",
"input": "How to Grow Grape Vines. Two Parts: Preparing for Planting Planting Your Grapevines Community Q&A. Grapes are certainly a multi-purpose fruit, being used for wine, baked goods, jams, and for eating fresh off the vine. With their ability to grow in many places around the world, they are a great addition to any garden. But for the most part, every wine harvest includes these basic vine-to-wine steps: 1 Pick the grapes. 2 Crush the grapes. 3 Ferment the grapes into wine. 4 Age the wine. 5 Bottle the wine. Pruning is one of the most important factors in grape production. Grapes develop only on new growth, which sprouts from 1-year-old wood. This is one reason why most vines don't produce grapes in their second year -- the whole plant is only 1 year old, so its main job is support instead of grapes. A: It normally takes between two to three weeks for grapes to fully ferment into wine after being crushed. The fermentation occurs in two stages, primary and secondary fermentation. In general, primary fermentation usually lasts about three to seven days. will prepare the site before you plant. Choosing a site The first step toward consistent production of high-quality grapes is to choose a sunny place to plant. While some ornamental grapevine species perform adequately in partial shade, full sunlight is required to get good production of table grapes. After they're frozen solid, pack grapes into freezer bags or containers. To remove air from bags, use a vacuum sealer or the straw method. Stick a straw into an edge of the bag opening, seal the bag right up to the straw, and suck the remaining air out of the bag. Seal the bag as you quickly withdraw the straw. To keep things simple, this stage mainly includes: 1 red and white wines: yeast is added to the vats so that fermentation can take place. 2 red wines: carbon dioxide is released during fermentation which causes the grape skins to rise to the surface. 3 red wines: the grapes are pressed after fermentation is complete. In late years, grapes. are often picked in late October. Consider the variance in harvest time for Morningside. Vineyard Cabernet Sauvignon for the last four years: Oct 4, Oct 11, Sept 30 and Sept 13. Grapes can be stored for up to six weeks in the cellar, but grapes can absorb the odors of other fruits and vegetables, so keep them separate. Use cardboard boxes or crates lined with clean, dry straw. Another kid-friendly idea is to thread red, green, and purple grapes before freezing to make a frozen treat on a string. You can also use frozen grapes to replace fresh grapes in recipes, including jam. You can puree grapes before freezing, and freeze the puree in ice cube trays. Pack the grape cubes in freezer bags. These cubes make a great addition for chilling drinks like juices, teas, or lemonade without watering them down. For best quality, eat frozen grapes—chunks or puree—within nine to 12 months. Query: how long until grapes",
"output": [
"Grapes can be stored for up to six weeks in the cellar."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1f9d736e2182465bbb5beba58ebebdcf",
"input": "The IRS issues more than 9 out of 10 refunds in less than 21 days. However, it’s possible your tax return may require additional review and take longer. Where’s My Refund? has the most up to date information available about your refund. The tool is updated no more than once a day so you don’t need to check more often. After refund is approved how long until its deposit to my account. I filed my taxed on febuary 1, 2013 and getting my refund direct deposite to my bank account when will i receive my refund? and it was approved? The irs has approved my refund and it says its scheduled to be deposited on the 7th. if its approved, why don`t they just deposit it now? How long after the irs receives my refund is my refund approved? I filed my taxes jan 21 thru e-file and direct deposit when should i expect my refund the wheres my refund says by feb 28th? Irs said my refund was approved now it change to being proccessed If you paper file, it will take three to four weeks for the IRS to process the return and acknowledge your refund. If you e-file, you will get a notice of arrival within 24 hours and confirmation of refund within 72 hours. Answers. 1 The return you filed will be processed normally and your refund will be issued. An amended return is a separate return correcting or adjusting amounts from the original return. Sending an amended return will not delay your original refund. With an amount of $312, it doesn't look like you're in school at least half time, so you'd be limited to the Lifetime Learning Credit. You'd qualify for a credit of 20% of the $312, or $62. Let’s start with the quickest way to get your refund. The Quickest Way to Get Your Refund It is probably common knowledge that you will get your tax refund quicker when you choose the direct deposit option. Of course, the complexity of your return also affects how long it takes to process your return. How long does it take to get a tax refund? The IRS has a goal of getting tax refunds to tax payers within 21 days. They reach this goal about 90% of the time. In fact, most people receive their refunds in about 10-14 days. In previous years, the IRS created a schedule for when they will send out federal tax refunds via direct deposit or by check. Where’s My Refund? has a tracker that displays progress through 3 stages: (1) Return Received, (2) Refund Approved and (3) Refund Sent. You will get personalized refund information based on the processing of your tax return. The tool will provide an actual refund date as soon as the IRS processes your tax return and approves your refund. Direct Deposit. Join the eight in 10 taxpayers who get their refunds faster by using e-file and direct deposit. It's the safest, fastest way to receive your refund and is also easy to use. Just select it as your refund method through your tax software and type in the account number and routing number. Or, tell your tax preparer you want direct deposit. How long after the IRS approves your refund do you have to wait to recieve it? I got a txt from H&R Block saying that the IRS has approved my refund and ill get another txt when my money is loaded onto my emerald card. Comments (1,412) Leave your comment. 1 Hi lisa my name is jessica. 2 I filed in feb it said accepted by the irs then they sent me a form to prove my identity sent in all the paperwork 8 weeks ago. 3 Hello lisa , I’m 32 married to my husband who is 71 and we have a son who just turned 2. 4 Oh, Lisa, I hope you can help me. Query: how long to get your refund after approved",
"output": [
"If you paper file, it will take three to four weeks and if you E-file, you will get a notice of arrival within 24 hours and confirmation of refund within 72 hours."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-089ac34973dc4e76ba13fb21a85ab359",
"input": "Each child costs taxpayers roughly $1,682 annually from the time the child is born through the age of 15, according to the National Campaign to Prevent Teen and Unplanned Pregnancy. Teens who were born to teen parents are more likely to drop out of high school and end up in jail than children born to older parents. may be affected by a multitude of social factors. These social factors does not include teen. pregnancy alone, but also community violence, gang membership involvement, alcohol and. substance abuse and a high incidence of illiteracy. Teenage pregnancy affects society in many ways, especially in the form of greater public expenses. Some examples of these expenses are foster care, social welfare programs and health... Star Gazing Teen Pregnancy 2013, the teen birth rate for girls in the age group of 10-14 was 0.4 per 1,000. girls in 2012 with no significant change between 2011-2012, and an overall decrease of 71. percent since 1991. There were 3,674 births to girls age 10-14 in 2012. Teenage pregnancy affects society in many ways, especially in the form of greater public expenses. Some examples of these expenses are foster care, social welfare programs and health... Teenage pregnancy affects society in many ways, especially in the form of greater public expenses. Some examples of these expenses are foster care, social welfare programs and health expenses. Teenage pregnancy affects the family of the teen and baby, but its effects on society are those that affect the public. Pregnant teenagers do not have a life built up to support a baby, so they often need the help of those around them. This help comes in the form of informal community support, such as babysitting or hand-me-down baby essentials. The Effect of Teenage Pregnancy on Society. Even though the teen pregnancy rate has been on the decline in recent years, more than 305,000 babies were born to teens in 2012 alone, according to the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. From financial factors to healthcare, children having children impacts society as a whole. Costs to Taxpayers Impact of Social and Cultural Factors on Teen Pregnancy Akella, D. Albany State University Jordan, M. Albany State University ABSTRACT United States has the highest level of teenage pregnancy amongst the industrialized nations. Further, the level of teenage pregnancy is highest amongst the minority population. Teen Pregnancy 2013, the teen birth rate for girls in the age group of 10-14 was 0.4 per 1,000 girls in 2012 with no significant change between 2011-2012, and an overall decrease of 71 percent since 1991. health issue that has an effect on all of us. A child having a baby as a teenager is more likely to. face critical social issues like poverty, poor education, risky behaviors that lead to poor health. issues, and child welfare. Teenage pregnancy affects society in many ways, especially in the form of greater public expenses. Some examples of these expenses are foster care, social welfare programs and health expenses. Continue Reading Query: how does teen pregnancy affect society",
"output": [
"Teenage pregnancy affects society in many ways, especially in the form of greater public expenses. Some examples of these expenses are foster care, social welfare programs and health."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f6552baa665c4fc1aeb49cc9501557d6",
"input": "A 4ml bottle costs $448.20. There are approximately 80 drops per bottle.You are supposed to apply Jublia to each nail once a day for 48 WEEKS. If I use 1 drop per nail daily for 48 WEEKS it will cost me $15,059.52 to cure my yellow nails. my 4 ML prescription for JUBLIA was for one big toe & slight nail problem on second toe using one to two drops per day. Began on 10-29-14 and ran out on 12-29-2014. I have only used one drop per day but sometimes more comes out of bottle. ?? At best this is only 60 drops. This is a long way from 200 doses. I have just ordered a new prescription. According to the instructions, I will need 4 drops per day. 1 drop each for the small toes and 2 drops for the large toe. I have found that the 4 ml bottle runs out of medicine after three weeks. I am getting about 80 drops out of each bottle, but the pharmacy says there should be 200 drops per bottle. I am not getting close to 200. There is no information provided with the prescription as to how many doses are in each bottle. Pharmacy advises that insurance will not cover more than one bottle per month. You must buy online. I purchased mine from Amazon. It cost me 26.99 + shipping & handling. Prices can very between $26-$60 per (200ml) bottle, shop around first! You can find it on Ebay as well, they even offer bundle deals. Here’s the link to where I will be purchasing my second bottle of Apetamin. THIS is what your bottle should look like. The product will not be filled to the top. So you’re probably asking, what is Apetamin? It’s a vitamin syrup that works to enhance your appetite. For me in particular this was key because I have a very weak appetite. I’m talking I could literally eat once a day, with one little bottle of something to drink to help wash it down. Totally unhealthy, and not helpful to gaining weight. In fact, this habit is what helped me lose weight. Taking just 10ml of the apetamin syrup 3x before meals enabled me to eat an entire plate and still have room for more. The weight gain wasted no time following the new habit. My weight prior to starting the apetamin was 128.5lbs, 5 days into taking it I weighed 134.3lbs. That’s 6lbs in 5 days!!! Unbelievable, I know. One (1) bottle of Apetamin lasts approximately one week. The sleepiness or drowsiness usually occurs the first few days of taking Apetamin and will decrease thereafter. The Manufacturer's recommended adult dosage of Apetamin syrup is 10-15mL three times a day, take 10 to 30 minutes before meals. Does Apetamin make you sleepy? Yes, Apetamin can cause sleepiness or drowsiness for the first few days. If you stop using it and start up again you will most likely be sleepy again the first few days. Besides that if you use it regularly it will not effect your sleep schedule. How long does one (1) bottle last? One (1) bottle of Apetamin lasts approximately 7-10 Days, we suggest ordering your next bottle when your current bottle is at it’s half way point. Do I need to refrigerate Apetamin? It is recommended that Apetamin be stored at a temperature to be protected from sunlight & UV rays. A cool dark cabinet or draw is fine but it can stay in room temperature after opening for up to 2 weeks (if your taking your Apetamin correctly it should only last for a week [7-10 days]) Will I lose weight if I ... You will use approx. 1 bottle per week if you have two big toes and 5 small toes infected. Less if all toes are affected. I wrote a complaint to the review board of my insurance company and they filled my prescription to meet the 1 bottle per week need. Fast Acting Apetamin’s fast acting formula will have you seeing results in as little as 1 week. How soon should I see results? Apetamin will increase your appetite in just 2 days. You will start gaining in one week. Can I take if I’m breastfeeding or pregnant? No, Apetamin can’t be taken if pregnant or breast feeding. Please consult with your physician regarding any medical questions. Does Apetamin syrup need to be refrigerated? No, please store in a dark, cool place. Preferably a cabinet. How long does one bottle last? If you’re taking the recommended dose Apetamin bottle should last roughly a week. Query: how long does one bottle of apetamin last for",
"output": [
"One bottle of Apetamin lasts approximately one week."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0a5d49e1a6dd4a348423a9ad17ffc22c",
"input": "So the answer to the question, “how long is medical school,” is 4 years. But medical school alone is not enough to practice medicine as a doctor. If you include residency and fellowship, you will need at least 7 years from the first day of medical school before you can practice medicine in the United States. If you are specializing, it will most likely take longer. The good news is that this is the final exam in the USMLE series, which is designed to assess whether a medical school graduate can apply medical knowledge and understanding of biomedical and clinical science essential for the unsupervised practice of medicine. The first two years of medical school cover the basic medical (preclinical) sciences while the last four years are focused on the clinical sciences and internship. For me, it began in college, taking rigorous pre-medical courses against a large yearly burden of tuition: $27,000 of debt yearly for four years. I was one of the fortunate ones. If courses completed in her master's program meet the prerequisite requirements for medical school, she may be able to go straight from practicing as an NP to medical school. In some cases, however, she may need to repeat a course or take an additional course or courses to qualify for medical school. The four years of medical school is divided into two. The first two years are for spending times in classrooms and laboratories, taking anatomy courses, microbiology courses, pathology courses, pharmacology, biology, physiology, and more. Four years of medical school This is the traditional path, but there are alternative paths to becoming a pediatrician. These numbers don't include an extra year or two to finish college or medical school if you want to spread out your studies or you have a gap year between them. At the end of medical school, you can receive your medical degree and apply for a medical license. Applying to Medical School with AMCAS®. The American Medical College Application Service® (AMCAS®) is the AAMC's centralized medical school application processing service. Most U.S. medical schools use AMCAS as the primary application method for their first-year entering classes. Medical School. Most medical schools are four-year programs, although a few offer combined undergraduate and medical school curriculums that last six or seven years. For surgeons, the training after medical school may last as long as 8 or 9 years, if additional training after residency is required. Training often starts with a general surgery residency, which is takes five years (the intern year and an additional four years of surgical residency. Query: how long in medical school",
"output": [
"Medical school is 4 years long."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-933a7f68186c4a34ad44d4713305776a",
"input": "A more pronounced tide, when high tides are very high and low tides are very low, is called a “spring tide.” These periods occur during the New Moon, when the Sun and Moon are lined up on the same side of the Earth, and the Full Moon, when the Moon and Sun are on opposite sides of the Earth. Together, the gravitational effects of the moon and the sun affect the Earth’s tides on a monthly basis. Click the image to see an animation. The moon is a major influence on the Earth’s tides, but the sun also generates considerable tidal forces. Solar tides are about half as large as lunar tides and are expressed as a variation of lunar tidal patterns, not as a separate set of tides. The Earth experiences two high tides per day because of the difference in the Moon's gravitational field at the Earth's surface and at its center. You could say that there is a high tide on the side nearest the Moon because the Moon pulls the water away from the Earth, and a high tide on the opposite side because the Moon pulls the Earth away from the water on the far side. The moon is the dominate tidal influence. The moon's tidal influence is about twice that of the sun. Remember, tides are due to a non-uniform gravitational field, squishing and squashing on a body in free motion within the gravitational field. The height of the tides is also affected by the position of the Moon in its orbit around the Earth. The Moon travels around the Earth once every 28 days. Depending on where it is on its journey, the difference between high and low tide may be more or less pronounced. Sun's Tidal Effect. Even though the Sun is 391 times as far away from the Earth as the Moon, its force on the Earth is about 175 times as large. Yet its tidal effect is smaller than that of the Moon because tides are caused by the difference in gravity field across the Earth. The Earth's diameter is such a small fraction of the Sun-Earth distance that the gravity field changes by only a factor of 1.00017 across the Earth. The elliptial orbits of the moon around the Earth and the Earth around the sun have substantial effects on the earth’s tides. Click the image for a larger view. Just as the angles of the sun, moon and Earth affect tidal heights over the course of a lunar month, so do their distances to one another. The actual force differential across the Earth is 0.00017 x 174.5 = 0.03 times the Moon's force, compared to 0.068 difference across the Earth for the Moon's force. The actual tidal influence then is then 44% of that of the Moon. The Moon is the dominant tidal influence because the fractional difference in its force across the Earth is greater than the fractional difference seen from the Sun. This difference in force follows the inverse square law. Tides are the natural rise and fall that occurs in major bodies of water, such as the ocean or large lakes. Tides are caused by the gravitational relationship between the Moon and the Earth. The Moon’s gravity pulls on the Earth, causing the water to swell in the direction of the Moon. The exact timing and number of high tides per day varies by location, and is affected by such factors as geography, the shape of the coastline, the salinity of the water, the time of year, and the weather, among other things. Query: how does the moon influence the tides",
"output": [
"The elliptial orbits of the moon around the Earth and the Earth around the sun have substantial effects on the earth’s tides."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a1332ba5996140159a51b3a12bcd5594",
"input": "It depends on the type of emergency contraception you need. Plan B One-Step® and similar generic versions are available in stores without a prescription to anyone, of any age. If you do not see it on the shelf, ask the pharmacist for help. how long do you have to take the plan B pill and will it work even you take it past the days that you should take it? and will it still be effective? ⌂Home Mail How long do you have to take the plan B pill? how long do you have to take the plan B pill and will it work even you take it past the days that you should take it? and will it still be effective? Follow 7 answers 7 plan B is the morning after pill...You take it the morning after and i think one day to after..48 hours. It's recommended that you take it as soon as possible since it's effectiveness declines as time goes on. It's best to take it within 48 hours, but it still offers some protection up until 72 hours. You have 72 hours to take Plan B. Remember that Plan B is not the abortion pill and will not terminate an already existing pregnancy. What type of regular birth control you can use right away depends on the type of emergency contraception you take. 1 If you take ella®, do not use hormonal birth control (the pill, patch, vaginal ring, or intrauterine device) for at least five days after you take ella. Using them together may cause ella® not to work. It depends on the type of emergency contraception you need. Plan B One-Step® and similar generic versions are available in stores without a prescription to anyone, of any age. Levonorgestrel tablets (two-pill generic Next Choice® and LNG tablets 0.75 mg) are available to people aged 17 and older without a prescription. If you are unable to take it right away, emergency contraception can still work to prevent pregnancy if taken up to three to five days after unprotected sex. How long after depends on which type of emergency contraception you use. Take Plan B One-Step® or a generic version as soon as possible within three days (or 72 hours) after unprotected sex. Best Answer: plan B is the morning after pill...You take it the morning after and i think one day to after..48 hours ... It's recommended that you take it as soon ... This includes Plan B One-Step® and ella®. Since you can buy Plan B One-Step® or the generic version in a store, without a prescription, call your insurance company to find out if your plan covers over-the-counter emergency contraception. You may need to get a prescription from your doctor if you want your insurance plan to pay for it. Best Answer: plan B is the morning after pill...You take it the morning after and i think one day to after..48 hours Source(s): Cheyenne's Mommy born6/20/09 · 9 years ago Query: how fast do you need to take plan b",
"output": [
"To apply plan B is depends on the type of emergency contraception you need."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-defdfdd3d92e46cc804575d349bbd0f3",
"input": "If you are under 25 years old when you obtain your first learner’s permit and then turn 25, the MVA will permit you to take a driving skills test if you have held the permit at for least 45 days (the 45 days may include the days you held the permit before your 25th birthday). Apply for provisional driving licence online. Apply for a provisional driving licence online.You require a valid UK passport no more than five years old and you won’t have to provide a photo. Online is quicker and cheaper than with a postal application. What is the procedure for obtaining a provisional license if I have a learner's permit through the MVA's Rookie Driver Program? Requirements before obtaining a provisional license: You must drive with the learner's permit conviction-free for a minimum of 9 months before applying for a provisional license. Your permit must not have been suspended or revoked. You may not have been granted probation before judgement (PBJ) for a moving violation. Your driver's license, or proof of your licensure; 1 Proof of your age If you need a class B, C or M license - you must be at least 16 years, 6 months. If you need a class A license - you must be at least 18 years, 0 months; Fees: 1 There is no additional fee for the provisional license if you are a new driver in the Rookie Driver program and have a valid learner's permit. 2 There is a fee for the provisional license if you have a license from another state or another country. You must hold the provisional license, conviction-free of a moving violation, for at least 18 months before you can apply for a full Maryland driver's license. If your learner's permit expires or you are not able to complete/pass the required skills tests before it expires, you will be required to reapply for a new permit, pass the Vision and Knowledge tests and pay the required fees. Penalty points on your provisional licence. You must not drive before you receive your provisional driving licence. Three penalty points on the driving licence and a maximum fine of £1000 are the penalties for breaking this law. If a driver has 6 or more points on their provisional licence then if they get 1 or more points after passing their test within 24 months their licence will be revoked. The provisional license you receive will expire 60 days after your 21st birthday. Or if you are 21 years of age or older, 8 years after the license is issued on the month and day of your birth. While you are driving with a provisional license and are less than 18 years of age, the following restrictions apply: You can apply for the provisional driving licence up to 3 months before your 16 th birthday. You can start driving a car when you are 17. At 16, you can begin to ride a moped or a light quad bike. Your driver's license or proof of your licensure; 1 Proof of your age If you need a class B, C or M license - you must be at least 16 years, 6 months. If you need a class A license - you must be at least 18 years, 0 months; 2 Proof of your identity and residency; Query: how long do you have your provisional license",
"output": [
"You must hold the provisional license, conviction-free of a moving violation, for at least 18 months before you can apply for a full Maryland driver's license."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-aab7d069111d4d95bb8eb7007bf88eec",
"input": "1 doctor agreed: Rash or pain: The physical manifestations of shingles , usually rash and small papules ( fluid filled blisters) last a few days to a week. The pain of shingles if not treated early and aggressively, can lead to a condition called post-herpetic neuralgia. This condition can be very difficult to treat. Shingles follows a pattern: 1 The first sign is often burning or tingling pain; sometimes, it includes numbness or itching on one side of the body. 2 Somewhere between 1 and 5 days after the tingling or burning feeling on the skin, a red rash will appear. 3 A few days later, the rash will turn into fluid-filled blisters. Risk Factors for Nerve Pain After Shingles. Researchers have long known that older people are more likely to get PHN, the nerve pain after shingles, but recent studies have found other factors that increase risks. In one study published in the journal Neurology, researchers -- including Dworkin -- looked at data from 965 people with shingles. If you don't find your answer, you can post your question to WebMD Experts and Contributors. Close I have shingles since the first sting under left arm Sept 25th thought I got a bug bite the next day there was no bite just terrible itching in about a week the rash started s … till not much pain just itching the second week pain near the rash it progressed all the way around my chest to mid back felt like a vise is holding me clamping down from front thru to back. unbearable at times my doc said it was shingles I already knew had it small patch on right shoulder when i was a teenager. The severity of shingle pain takes many by surprise. Find out what you can do for shingles pain relief, how to shorten the duration of an outbreak, and lessen the likelihood of developing postherpetic neuralgia. When shingles occurs on the head or scalp, symptoms can include headaches and weakness of one side of the face, which causes that side of the face to look droopy. The symptoms usually go away eventually, but it may take many months. In some cases the pain can last for weeks, months, or years, long after the rash heals. Pain can be debilitating, and it can be caused by all sorts of things. One cause that many people are not familiar with is a reactivation of chickenpox you may have had as a child. You don't have chickenpox again, but you have another condition called shingles, known as postherpetic neuralgia pain. every place I had shingles now I have the shooting pain and nothing stop it except Amitriptylin 25mg that make me sleepy even the next day. I avoid to take it since I've to work. Now it is three weeks my face is burning (only one side). I hope this does not stay with me for a long time. A pain researcher Andrew Rice from the Imperial College explained that, if your pain goes up to or beyond 8 weeks, you are among the very unfortunate shingles patients. Andrew explains that, there are several cases where shingles lead a long lasting pain commonly referred to as post-herpetic neuralgia, abbreviated as PHN. This is an unfortunate pain that prolongs the period of your healing and is caused by nerve damage due to shingles. Query: how long does shingles hurt",
"output": [
"Shingles hurts for 1 to 5 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-649f40b0ecf44b8cb4710fae5144b3c3",
"input": "Some historians differentiate between a first Great Migration (1916–1930), which saw about 1.6 million people move from mostly rural areas to northern industrial cities, and a Second Great Migration (1940–1970), which began after the Great Depression and brought at least 5 million people—including many townspeople with urban skills—to the north and to California and other western states. The Great Migration was the movement of 6 million African-Americans out of the rural Southern United States to the urban Northeast, Midwest, and West that occurred between 1916 and 1970.[1] Until 1910, more than 90 percent of the African-American population lived in the American South.[2] In 1900, only one-fifth of African-Americans living in the ... Great Migration (African American) The Great Migration was the movement of 6 million African-Americans out of the rural Southern United States to the urban Northeast, Midwest, and West that occurred between 1916 and 1970. Until 1910, more than 90 percent of the African-American population lived in the American South. In 1900, only one-fifth of African-Americans living in the South were living in urban areas. By the end of the Great Migration, 53 percent of the African-American population remained in the South, while 40 percent li CHAPTER 5: THE NEW GREAT MIGRATION A REVERSE MIGRATION. The last decades of the 20th century marked a new migration trend - by 1970 there were more African Americans heading to the South than leaving it. It was already in the late 1960s that the number of African Americans moving to the South eclipsed the number leaving. Aug 14, 2016. The migration that accompanied India’s independence and partition in 1947 was the largest movement of peoples in human history, but almost no one expected it to happen. During World War I there was a great migration north…, first panel of the Migration Series (1940-41), painting by Jacob Lawrence Demographic changes The Great Migration drained off much of the rural black population of the South, and for a time, froze or reduced African-American population growth in parts of the region. The Middle Passage. 1 The journey between Africa and the Americas, The Middle Passage, could take four to six weeks, but the average lasted between two and three months. Chained and crowded with no room to move, Africans were forced to make the journey under terrible conditions, naked and lying in filth. chapter 5: the new great migration a reverse migration The last decades of the 20th century marked a new migration trend - by 1970 there were more African Americans heading to the South than leaving it. CHAPTER 4: THE GREAT MIGRATION A MASS MOVEMENT NORTH. The Great Migration was one of the largest migrations ever of the African American population. Many scholars consider it as two waves, between 1916 and 1930, and from 1940 to 1970. The Great Migration saw a total of six million African Americans leave the South. the first wave: out of the rural south Work, both lack of it and opportunities, was a major reason for leaving the South. In the 360 years between 1500 and the end of the slave trade in the 1860s, at least 12 million Africans were forcibly taken to the Americas - then known as the New World to European settlers. This largest forced migration in human history relocated some 50 ethnic and linguistic groups. Query: how long did the great migration last",
"output": [
"The Great Migration was the movement of 6 million African-Americans out of the rural Southern United States to the urban Northeast, Midwest, and West that occurred between 1916 and 1970."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b5a5a6777f7d49ffac7c31b4dd20e0fa",
"input": "If :00.3 or less remain on the shot clock when this situation occurs, a shot clock violation is called. The game clock and shot clock must show :00.3 or more in order for a player to secure possession of the ball on a rebound or throw-in to attempt a field goal. NCAA games are comprised of two 20-minute halves. 1 In both the NBA and NCAA, an overtime period is five minutes. 2 An NBA three is taken from 23'9 (or 22 in the corners). 3 Once in the double-bonus, fouling to stop the clock is a riskier play. Basketball: The Clock and Timing. 1 High School - High school basketball games are made up of four 8-minute quarters or two 16-minute halves. 2 College - NCAA college basketball games consists of two 20 minute halves. This is the same for the WNBA and international games. 3 NBA - NBA games are made up of four 12-minute quarters. Sporting Charts explains Shot Clock The shot clock resets when the ball touches the rim. In the NBA, when a foul is called and there are fewer than 13 seconds on the shot clock, the shot clock resets to 14 seconds. The implementation of the shot clock in 1954 is arguably the most important rule change in the history of the NBA. Since professional basketball games were 48 minutes long, Biasone divided 2880 (the number of seconds in 48 minutes) by 120 (the total number of shots taken per game when each team attempted 60 shots) and arrived at an optimal figure of one shot every 24 seconds. The 24-second shot clock made an immediate impact. In 1954-55, its first season, NBA teams averaged 93.1 points, an increase of 13.6 points over the previous season. The Boston Celtics became the first team in NBA history to average more than 100 points per game for a season, and three years later, every team did it. “Pro basketball would not have survived without a clock,” said Biasone. In the NBA (since 1954), Women's National Basketball Association (since 2006), and FIBA play (since 2000; 30-second from 1956 to 2000), the shot clock counts down 24 seconds, thus often being called the 24-second clock. On April 22, 1954, facing a scoring drought of epic proportions, NBA owners voted to implement a 24-second shot clock. The decision changed the league and the game of basketball. Before that vote, the NBA had a problem: a low-scoring, time-killing breed of basketball was taking over the league. In Game 7, Syracuse's George King made one of two foul shots with 12 seconds left, then stole the ball to seal a 92-91 victory. BIASONE 'S INVENTION RESCUES THE LEAGUE Danny Biasone will always have a place in NBA history as the man who invented the shot clock. When the ball is inbound, the clock starts once a player touches the ball. In the NBA the clock stops after a made shot during the last two minutes of the game and overtime. For college it stops during the last minute of the game and overtime. Overtime If the game is tied after regulation time, there will be overtime. Overtime is 5 minutes long in most leagues. Additional overtimes will be added until one team ends up on top. The Shot Clock In order to speed up the game and to prevent teams from stalling, a shot clock was added. This is how long you have to shoot the ball. If the ball changes possession or hits the rim of the basket, the shot clock starts over. The length of the shot clock is different for different basketball leagues: NCAA College Men - 35 seconds Query: how long in seconds is the shot clock in an nba game.",
"output": [
"The shot clock in an NBA game is 24 seconds long."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-506f3d6d89724cb9afc8e39948a1d586",
"input": "Plasterer - History. 1 Plasterwork is one of the most ancient of handicrafts employed in connection with building operations, the earliest evidence showing that the dwellings of primitive man were erected in a simple fashion with sticks and plastered with mud. So if you have more than one spot that needs spackling. Do the first coat on all the spots at the same time and repeat the second and third coats for all the spots. Usually you can go around and hit all the spots in a room in a few minutes. Any professional plasterer would in no way use one coat plaster. The reasons being that you will never get the true fine finish that is required and will usually get the finish that you have received. Personally, I would always with no exceptions 2 coat any room, wall or even drywall repair. My working week is quite long, even by a plasterer’s standards. On a typical day, I will begin by putting down the dust sheets. I’ll ensure that all the surfaces which don’t need plastering are protected, and that the surfaces which do need plastering are prepped and ready. Plaster skimming is an internal finishing coat of plaster to provide a decorative finish to internal walls and ceilings, it is smooth to the touch and may be painted, wall papered or tiled. Finishing plaster can be used over many different types of backgrounds such as plasterboard , sand & cement , backing plasters or old existing plastered walls and ceilings (reskim). We can help with that too: 1 Send in details of your plastering job. 2 Get up to three quotes in return. 3 This service is free to use and you are under no obligation to accept. 4 The responses you get should be fast, within a day or two usually. 5 Thousands of people have used this service. A typically daily rate for a plasterer varies from £150 - £250 depending on the materials required and the location in the country. A plasterer's hourly rate (plus material costs) will be about £26 per hour (as of August 31, 2017) depending on where you are in the country. There are approximately 40,000 plasterers working in the UK, and demand is growing due to government housing development schemes. Plasterers sometimes work on their own when working on peoples’ homes. On larger-scale projects, however, they may work in teams, each covering different sections of a wall. The following is a list of what we consider to be the best plastering tips for the complete novice. Have fun and don't forget to try check out our complete plastering how to guide. Plastering Tip #1: Prepare your surface before beginning plastering. im a ceiling fixer of 20 odd yrs and keep getting ask to plaster. i only came on this site trying to get price to see what to charge to see if it is worth me doing as i do tape and joint as well so can use a trowel and had a go at doing it in my garage and made a better job than my mate did in my dining room which i used god now's how much joint cement on before painting.i work on a lot of sites. i often watch a lot of this going on cos im often waiting for them. some plasters are very fast ... Query: how long does it take for a plasterer to do one wall",
"output": [
"A typically daily rate for a plasterer varies from £150 - £250 depending on the materials required and the location in the country. A plasterer's hourly rate will be about £26 per hour depending on where you are in the country."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ddf83c9bda77407e8e10bc3b1a6a75c9",
"input": "Woodtrail Ct is vacant land in Whitehall, MI 49461. This vacant land is a 0.97 acre lot. This vacant land has been listed on Redfin since July 31, 2014 and is currently priced at $49,900. The price of Woodtrail Ct has decreased $5,100 during that time. The closest grocery store is White Duck Country Market. This Single-Family Home located at 103 Sunset Ln, Whitehall MI, 49461 is currently for sale and has been listed on Trulia for 192 days. This property is listed by Auction.com for $90,164. 103 Sunset Ln has 3 beds, 2 baths, and approximately 1,455 square feet. The property has a lot size of 0.41 acres and was built in 1988. 103 Sunset Ln is in Whitehall and in ZIP Code 49461. . . . Parcel Information for 103 Sunset Ln What's near 103 Sunset Ln with a lot size of 0.7000 Acre(s). V/L Sheltering Way has 0.0 baths. The property's zip code is 49461 which is in Whitehall, MI Homes for Sale in Whitehall, MI have a median listing price of $169,900 and a price per square foot of $84. There are 133 active homes for sale in Whitehall, Michigan, which spend an average of days on the market. Some of the hottest neighborhoods near Whitehall, MI are Nelson, Beachwood-Bluffton, Lakeside, Nims. You may also be interested in homes for sale in popular zip codes like 49461, 49441, or in neighboring cities, such as Muskegon, Montague, Twin Lake, North Muskegon, Spring Lake. Find homes for sale and real estate in Whitehall, MI at realtor.com®. Search and filter Whitehall homes by price, beds, baths and property type. Average % of sale price Median % of sale price; All listings in Whitehall: $467,678: 274 % above: $259,000: 107 % above: Lots and land listings in Whitehall: $395,957: 217 % above: $187,450: 50 % above 103 Sunset Ln, Whitehall, MI is a 1455 sq ft, 3 bed, 2 bath home listed on Trulia for $90,164 in Whitehall, Michigan. Whitehall, MI Land for Sale & Real Estate Land for Sale in Whitehall, MI have a median listing price of $169,900 and a price per square foot of $84. There are 103 active land for sale in Whitehall, Michigan, which spend an average of days on the market. Some of the hottest neighborhoods near Whitehall, MI are Nelson, Beachwood-Bluffton, Lakeside, Nims. You may also be interested in land for sale in popular zip codes like 49461, 49441, or in neighboring cities, such as Muskegon, Montague, Twin Lake, North Muskegon, Spring Lake. For Sale: Whitehall, MI 49461 ∙ $49,900 ∙ MLS# 14044495 ∙ Beautiful wooded lot located at the end of a cul-de-sac in Butterfield Woods. One of only a few lots left. This lot is almost an acre and f... (SW Michigan MLS) For Sale: Whitehall, MI 49461 ∙ $49,900 ∙ MLS# 14044495 ∙ Beautiful wooded lot located at the end of a cul-de-sac in Butterfield Woods. One of only a few lots left. Lots and Land for sale in Whitehall, MI for $125,000. The lot size is 0.7000 Acre(s). Query: average acre price in whitehall mi",
"output": [
"The average acre price in Whitehall, Michigan is $125,000 for 0.7000 Acre(s)."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-386a26dde49040ce9c039118919c4ac5",
"input": "Retail Bakery - Wedding Cake - Folsom's Bakery - Rock Falls, IL . The entire content on this website is owned by NMD Media and our licensors. Do not copy or print any of this content (images included) without our written consent. Website designed by NMD Media. A division of New Millenium Directories. People found Air Play Espresso and Bakery by searching for… Coffee Shops Sterling Open for Business: Aurelio's Bake Shop. Aurelio Gallardo, 40, of Sterling, creates leaves for the flowers on a cake at his new bakery at 406 Ave. G in Sterling. Gallardo, who has a graphic artist’s background, makes cakes for any occasion, and also does fruit tables and pastry tables for events, special baskets with pastries, cookies and Mexican sweet rolls, and arrangements. A: (815) 626-2253 is the phone number for Aurelio's Bake Shop in Sterling, IL. Q: How many people work at Aurelio's Bake Shop in Sterling, IL? A: Aurelio's Bake Shop employs approximately 4 people at this location. Last Minute Hotels in Sterling; By Hotel Type Sterling Business Hotels; Sterling Family Hotels; Sterling Green Hotels; Best Value Hotels in Sterling; By Hotel Class 5-star Hotels in Sterling; 3-star Hotels in Sterling; Popular Amenities Sterling Hotels with Pools; Pet Friendly Hotels in Sterling; Popular Sterling Categories Sterling Hotels with Jacuzzi panaderia sterling il, aurelios bake shop sterling il, aurelio bakery sterling il, sterling il bakery, aurelios bake shop Best bakery in town. Beautiful cakes.Good doughnuts and muffins as well. Nice place to have coffee with a treat. Outstanding service from the owner and excellent doughnuts...there is so much pride in the shop and care for the customers, you really feel special when placing a counter order. 4 11/21/2015. Very plesant little shop. Stopped in for a snack and coffee last week. Lots of good things to choose from, I went with the banana nut muffin as suggested by the lady at the register and was not... Enter for a Chance to Win Four (4) Tickets and a Zamboni* Ride During Intermission at the Chicago Steel Hockey Game! Courtesy of Aurelio’s Pizza Must Enter for A Chance to Win by February 2nd at noon *Must be 5 years or older to ride the Zamboni February 3rd at 7:05pm VS. Game Night... Read mor.... welcome to Aurelio's of Fishers Your Fishers Pizza Place. WE'RE OPEN TODAY! 11:30am to 10pm Query: aurelio's bakery sterling phone number",
"output": [
"The phone number for Aurelio's Bake Shop in Sterling is 815- 626-2253."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c2a706b4d4a945ee8e7a0708883674a0",
"input": "Related Terms. The process of finding and hiring the best-qualified candidate (from within or outside of an organization) for a job opening, in a timely and cost effective manner. Theory In Recruitment And Selection Recruitment and selection- Theory vs. Practice The recruitment and selection process of Cargill PLC (Retail Sector) when compared with the theory party of HRM we do find quit a few difference in them. (2001) suggests that there are at least two. unique systems of HR practices — autocratic and bureaucratic — that are mechanistic in nature. Below, we outline these two systems of HR practices and develop specific outlines of the. recruitment and selection requirements that would be associated with each. theories based on the data collected, a process referred to as inductive analysis, as opposed to traditional methodology techniques of basing data on previously existing theories (Patton, 2002). The methodology of grounded theory, which primarily uses inductive analysis, is qualitative, meaning it is an open approach to research (Bowen, 2006). Recruitment (hiring) is a core function of human resource management. It is the first step of appointment. Recruitment refers to the overall process of attracting, shortlisting, selecting and appointing suitable candidates for jobs (either permanent or temporary) within an organization. Understanding the methodology of grounded theory can assist researchers in expanding. the knowledge and application of the human resource management practices of recruitment and. retention beyond the bounds of traditional theories and methodologies. Recruitment is the process of finding and hiring the most qualified internal or external candidates for a job. Recruitment includes a four-tiered process. Organizations today often use creative recruiting to find applicants, including attending social events and job fairs as well as looking online and within social media networks. Definition of Recruitment & Selection by Pallab Dutta; Updated September 26, 2017 Recruitment and selection refers to the chain and sequence of activities pertaining to recruitment and selection of employable candidates and job seekers for an organization. Every enterprise, business, start-up and entrepreneurial firm has some well-defined employment and recruitment policies and hiring procedures. ... The first objective is to introduce the theory related to recruitment and re-tention. In the retention theory part, the author also presents some motiva-tion theories, as they are closedly related to the retention strategy. These theories will be used as the theoretical background for the whole thesis. The second objective is to study about the current recruitment and reten- tion strategy on Aiya. In order to realize company objectives, it is essential to recruit people with requisite skills, qualification and experience. While doing so we need to keep present and future requirements of company in mind. Successful recruitment methods include a thorough analysis of the job and the labour market conditions. Query: a theorists definition of recruitment",
"output": [
"Recruitment is a core function of human resource management."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b51b1e1babe34f35bc654c4a41a4ea16",
"input": "km = how many kilometers from Cardiff miles = how many miles from Cardiff nm = how many nautical miles from Cardiff. All numbers are air distances – as the crow flies/great circle distance. Using Oregon (US) Distance Calculator and Driving Directions Enter the Distance From city, village, town, airport or place name from Oregon (US) in the Distance From (first) text box. Enter the Distance To city, village, town, airport or place name from Oregon (US) in the Distance To (second) text box. There are 266.22 miles from Pendleton to Newport in southwest direction and 340 miles (547.18 kilometers) by car, following the I-84 and US-30 route. Pendleton and Newport are 6 hours 52 mins far apart, if you drive non-stop. This is the fastest route from Pendleton, OR to Newport, OR. The halfway point is Cook, WA. Pendleton, OR and Newport, OR are in the same time zone (Pacific Daylight Time). Current time in both locations is 2:36 pm. Locations farthest away from Portland. 1 Île de la Possession, Crozet Islands, French Southern Territories, 12,164 mi. 2 Port-aux-Francais, French Southern Territories, 11,779 mi. 3 Marion Island (Prince Edward Islands), South Africa, 11,504 mi. 4 Amsterdam Island, French Southern Territories, 11,268 mi. 5 Mawson, Antarctica, 10,889 mi. The starting point's Pendleton elevation is 325.838501 m (1069.02 feet) from sea level. Destination point Newport Beach elevation is 193.315903 m (634.24 feet) relative to sea level. The Graphic below shows the elevation map of the route between these cities. The median on I-5 between Wheeler Ridge and Tracy is wide enough to accommodate widening the West Side Freeway to six or eight lanes, should the need ever arise. I-5W and the San Francisco Bay Area Interstate 5's more direct Los Angeles-to-Sacramento route bypasses San Francisco, San Jose, Oakland, and the rest of the San Francisco Bay Area. Like the driving directions from Newport to South U.S. 101 to Pendleton? Need more details on the distances between these three locations? See the chart which displays detailed distance from Newport to South U.S. 101 to Pendleton. Or maybe you'd like to see a more detailed driving directions map? One is available which provides satellite imagery on the road map from Newport to South U.S. 101 to Pendleton. Distance, Gas Consumption and Emission Notes Distance from Newport Beach, CA to Camp Pendleton, CA is 54Miles or 86 Km. You can get this distance about 55 mins. See distance to other cities from Portland – Oregon – USA measured in kilometers (km), miles and nautical miles and their local time. Distances are measured using a direct path, as the crow flies and the compass direction is shown as well. Yurt camping near Portland Midway between primitive camping and “glamping” stands the modern-day yurt, a circular tent with electricity, heating, skylights, windows and wooden floors. Read More ». Whale watching on the Oregon coast Up to 20,000 gray whales migrate along Oregon's coast every winter and spring. Query: how far is pendleton from newport",
"output": [
"There are 266.22 miles from Pendleton to Newport in southwest direction and 340 miles by car, following the I-84 and US-30 route."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-70156d82ba0443d3a92c17fb6ec87340",
"input": "An electrochemical cell consists of two half-cells. Each half-cell consists of an electrode and an electrolyte. The two half-cells may use the same electrolyte, or they may use different electrolytes. Atomic animation and description of what happens in an electrochemical Cu-Zn cell Atomic animation and description of what happens in an electrochemical Cu-Zn cell Skip navigation The electrochemical cells work through the electron flow because of the difference in the voltage of the half-cell reactions. The salt bridge completes the circuit through the flow of ions. The electrochemical cells work through the electron flow because of the difference in the voltage of the half-cell reactions. The salt bridge completes the circuit through the flow of ions. Since the direction is reversed of the voltaic cell, the E 0 cell for electrolytic cell is negative. Also, in order to force the electrons to flow in the opposite direction, the electromotive force that connects the two electrode-the battery must be larger than the magnitude of E 0 cell. Electrochemical Sensors T he oldest electrochemical sensors date back to the 1950s and were used for oxygen monitoring. More recently, as the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) began requiring the monitoring of toxic and combustible gases in confined space applications, new and better electrochemical sensors have been developed. An important consideration is that fuel cell oxygen sensors are used up over time. In the cell reaction above, when. all available surface area of the lead (Pb) anode has been converted to lead oxide (PbO), electrochemical activity. ceases, current output falls to zero, and the sensor must be rebuilt or replaced. Fuel cell sensors are designed to. last no more than one to two years. A look at the science behind batteries, including the parts of a battery and how these parts work together to produce an electric current that can be carried in your pocket. A look at the science behind batteries, including the parts of a battery and how these parts work together to produce an electric current that can be carried in your pocket. News Tech A spontaneous electrochemical reaction (change in Gibbs free energy less than zero) can be used to generate an electric current in electrochemical cells. This is the basis of all batteries and fuel cells. The batteries in a flashlight typically have a voltage of 1.5 volts. However, if a flashlight uses two batteries in a series, these batteries, or cells, have a combined voltage of 3 volts. Lead-acid batteries, like the ones used in most nonelectric cars, usually have a voltage of 2.0 volts. Lots of things have an electrochemical cell in them. That electrochemical cell is a battery. You cell phone has at least two of them. There is a small one that keeps alive m … emory if you remove the primary battery. A flashlight has a cell or cells in it. We could go on all day. Motor vehicles have a battery, which is a collection of electrochemical cells.. Query: how does an electrochemical cell work",
"output": [
"The electrochemical cells work through the electron flow because of the difference in the voltage of the half-cell reactions."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-28924065aafc4287923a03a9e9af9780",
"input": "A. Complete information about the LSAT and registration may be found at: The best way to register is online. There are deadlines for registration and since the most popular test centers (for example Toronto) fill up quickly, you should register as early as possible. You can take the test in December or February, but many schools will have filled some of their seats by the time your scores hit the admissions office. Read More: 4 LSAT Myths Holding You Back June vs. October LSAT LSAT—India is a test conducted to test an aspirant's reasoning and reading skills. LSAT—India is designed by the USA based Law School Admission Council (LSAC) and is conducted in India by Pearson VUE. On the basis of a student's score in LSAT—India 2016, he/she can secure admission in law programmes offered in more than 70 colleges in India. Test composition. The LSAT consists of five 35-minute multiple choice sections (one of which is an unscored experimental section) followed by an unscored writing sample section. Indicate “Test Center Complaint” in the subject line and include. 1 your name. 2 your address. 3 your LSAC account number. 4 last four digits of your Social Security or Social Insurance number. 5 test center name. 6 name of the building and/or room in which you were tested, if known. In fact, many, if not most, of the top law schools will average your scores and will require an explanation from you regarding your decision to take the LSAT more than once. If you search my past posts, you will find a post with quotes from the websites and law school applications of most of the T14 law schools stating their policies. The issue you need to consider if thinking of taking it in freshman year of college is this: if you blow it you are likely done as far as top law schools are concerned even if you score higher later; LSAT is the biggest factor in admissions to law school and a high GPA will not save a low LSAT. You should take the LSAT no later than the summer or fall of the year in which you intend to apply, a full year (or more) before you intend to begin law school. If you are still in college and plan to go to law school right after graduation, you... The Law School Admission Test (LSAT) is a 3-1/2 hour standardized test that applicants must take in order to apply to law school. It is offered four times a year, in or around February, June, late September or early October, and December. I'm taking the LSAT in decemeber and applying now for the fall of 2014. From what I can see, most schools will accept a score from within the last 5 years. Youll be good. There is a lot more risk involved in taking the LSAT a third time as you don’t have another chance to take it after that and many schools will look on a third LSAT score unfavorably if it’s not a significant improvement over your previous two scores. Query: how early can you take the lsat",
"output": [
"You should take the LSAT no later than the summer or fall of the year in which you intend to apply, a full year before you intend to begin law school."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b3001b9d5ed54b568c6a4bfceb691437",
"input": "How long should you boil pasta for? Most pasta should be boiled for approximately 10 minutes but sometimes it is different for the type of pasta you have. I recommend you check the label of the packaging to be … sure of how long you should cook the pasta for. Place your seasoned fish on the cedar plank and put the plank on a medium-hot grill. Cover the grill, or use a large metal bowl or aluminum foil to keep more of the smoke in. Remove fish when it just starts to become flaky, about 10-15 minutes. Consider serving the fish with plank grilled vegetables, but discard the planks when you’re done. I also recommend Canola or Peanut oil when cooking fish, because it has a much higher smoking point; the hotter oil cooks the fish better without the greasy taste. Here is the list of things you need to make the batter, 1 c. flour. 3/4 c. cornstarch. 2 tbsp. oil. 1 1/2 tsp. baking powder. 1 1/2 tsp. salt. 1 egg. The frozen cod should be boiled for at least 15 minutes, depending on the thickness of the cod piece. A thicker piece will require longer boiling to ensure it is cooked all th…e way through. The timer should start from the moment the water reaches a rolling boil, and not while it is simply simmering. Here is the list of things you need to make the batter, 1 1 c. flour. 2 3/4 c. cornstarch. 3 2 tbsp. oil. 4 1 1/2 tsp. baking powder. 5 1 1/2 tsp. salt. 6 1 egg. 7 3/4 c. water, or more if needed to make a thin batter. Make sure to soak the plank for a while in water, preferably overnight but at least for 45 minutes. A simple dash of salt and pepper is good enough fish preparation, since the wood plank will flavor the fish for you. Place a small amount of oil on the fish to keep it from sticking to the plank. Flip the fish and cook an additional 3-4 minutes. Remove from the grill and let rest 5 minutes. Just before plating add a few squeezes of lemon juice and serve. Pan-Fried Redfish. Prepare the fish by filleting and removing the scales and skin. How long should you boil frozen cod fish? The frozen cod should be boiled for at least 15 minutes, depending on the thickness of the cod piece. A thicker piece will require longer boiling to ensure it is cooked all th … e way through. Grilled Redfish. Fillet the fish leave the skin on, then make a few light relief cuts in the skin. Lightly brush oil on the skin side, turn over to the flesh side and season with salt, pepper, garlic and a touch of cayenne pepper. Toss the fillets on a medium-hot grill, skin side down, and cook for about 6 minutes or until the skin is crisp. Flip the fish and cook an additional 3-4 minutes. Remove from the grill and let rest 5 minutes. Just before plating add a few squeezes of lemon juice and serve. Pan-Fried Redfish My sister, Pat, usually boils the salt fish with cut limes. Many people boil it without limes, more than once, draining the water each time and adding fresh water to boil again, they repeat this process 2 to 3 times. Each time, the salt fish is boiled anywhere from 5 to 7 to 10 to 15 minutes. The length of time to boil depends on the thickness of the fish and the size of the piece of saltfish being boiled. What I do is soak the saltfish overnight in boiling water, drain it the next morning and shred it to bits or loosen it to make whatever dish I am preparing. Query: how long do i need to boil fish",
"output": [
"The frozen cod should be boiled for at least 15 minutes, depending on the thickness of the cod piece and the salt fish is boiled anywhere from 5 to 7 to 10 to 15 minutes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8d64589916d9416d9eae3f8c814b2e66",
"input": "Buy chicken before this date for storage in your home refrigerator. Always cook or freeze the chicken within two days of bringing it home, regardless of what the package date tells you. Never store raw chicken in the refrigerator at home for longer than two days. Once you've cleared up what belongs where, the next step is knowing how long the food will last. Storing food is a delicate matter -- in the fridge, food might get moist and moldy, and in the freezer it could lose all its moisture or get freezer burn. If you leave food in the fridge or freezer too long, it could not only lose its integrity but it may also become unsafe to eat. FoodSafety.gov has two useful charts listing how long certain foods will stay good in both the refrigerator and the freezer. The first chart lists all kinds of commonly refrigerated foods and the second is specifically for eggs and food made with eggs. Chrissy Metz, star of This is Us, appeared on Jimmy Kimmel Liv... 1 Chrissy Metz, star of This is Us, appeared on Jimmy Kimmel Live on Tuesday wearing a stylishly on-point outfit that people are dying to copy—and it’s possible to do so without breaking the bank. References. 1 Basics for handling food safely. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 2 Foodborne illness: What consumers need to know. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 3 Food safety counts! U.S. Department of Agriculture. 4 Dietary Guidelines for Americans, 2010. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. 5 Slow cookers and food safety. Keep your refrigerator below 40 degrees Fahrenheit, and store raw chicken in the coldest part of the fridge, which is usually the back of the bottom shelf or in the meat drawer. Make sure to decrease the storage time if you can't guarantee that the temperature will stay under 40 degrees F. (Also) I feel like I’m limited to what I can do with the chicken once its cooked. Thanks for your help, SS. Dear SS: According to Foodsafety.gov, whole, uncooked poultry (chicken or turkey) is safe in the refrigerator for 1-2 days and safe in the freezer for up to 12 months. Poultry pieces are safe in the refrigerator for 1-2 days and safe in the freezer for up to nine months. Cooked poultry is safe refrigerated for 3-4 days and in the freezer for 2-6 months. You can also freeze your cooked breaded chicken cutlets (Foodsafety.gov specifically lists nuggets and patties) for 1-3 months. How long can you keep chicken in the fridge? Raw chicken: You'll need to either cook or freeze it fast. According to recommendations from the U.S. Food and Drug Administration, raw chicken will only keep in the refrigerator for about 1-2 days. (Same goes for turkey and other poultry.) If you store it in the freezer in a sealed, freezer-safe container or vacuum-sealed package, it should stay safe to thaw and eat for up to 9 months, in pieces, or up to 12 months, for a whole chicken. Cooked chicken: You have a little more time, but not much. I have to say that I have kept chicken in the fridge for longer than 2 days and not died. Some even have best before dates 3-4 days in. The quality definitely suffers, and I'm sure there's some risk, but it's probably low. How long does raw chicken last after being frozen and thawed? Chicken that has been defrosted in the fridge can be kept for an additional 1 to 2 days in the refrigerator before cooking; chicken that was thawed in the microwave or in cold water should be cooked immediately. I didn't even realize it until the next day when I found the container with the fresh chicken and realized that there were two containers of it in the fridge because I'd forgotten to throw away the old chicken from the previous week. Query: how long is chicken good in the refrigerator",
"output": [
"According to Foodsafety.gov, whole, uncooked poultry (chicken or turkey) is safe in the refrigerator for 1-2 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-581166e520ab43b5ac318e6239706fb9",
"input": "Often missed at time of initial injury. 15% of people with mild TBI have symptoms that last one year or more. Defined as the result of the forceful motion of the head or impact causing a brief change in mental status (confusion, disorientation or loss of memory) or loss of consciousness for less than 30 minutes. Some symptoms last for just seconds; others may linger. Concussions are fairly common. Some estimates say a mild brain trauma is sustained every 21 seconds in the U.S. But it's important to recognize the signs of a concussion so you can take the proper steps to treat the injury. There are some common physical, mental, and emotional symptoms a person may display following a concussion. Mild TBI Symptoms A traumatic brain injury (TBI) can be classified as mild if loss of consciousness and/or confusion and disorientation is shorter than 30 minutes. While MRI and CAT scans are often normal, the individual has cognitive problems such as headache, difficulty thinking, memory problems, attention deficits, mood swings and frustration. Other Symptoms Associated with Mild TBI. 1 Nausea. 2 Loss of smell. 3 Sensitivity to light and sounds. 4 Mood changes. 5 Getting lost or confused. 6 Slowness in thinking. These injuries are commonly overlooked. Even though this type of TBI is called “mild”, the effect on the family and the injured person can be devastating. Other Names For Mild TBI. Concussion; Minor head trauma; Minor TBI; Minor brain injury; Minor head injury; Mild Traumatic Brain Injury is: Most prevalent TBI; Often missed at time of initial injury The most common and least serious type of traumatic brain injury is called a concussion. The word comes from the Latin concutere, which means to shake violently. According to the CDC, between 2001 and 2009, an estimated 173,285 people under age 19 were treated in hospital emergency rooms for concussions related to sports and recreation activities. Most prevalent TBI. 1 Often missed at time of initial injury. 2 15% of people with mild TBI have symptoms that last one year or more. 3 Defined as the result of the forceful motion of the head or impact causing a brief change in mental status (confusion, disorientation or loss of memory) or loss of consciousness for less than 30 minutes. Long-term impacts. 1 First, brain injury is a relatively new area of treatment and research. We have only begun to understand the long-term effects in patients one, five, and ten years after injury. In a grade 1 concussion, symptoms last for less than 15 minutes. There is no loss of consciousness. With a grade 2 concussion, there is no loss of consciousness but symptoms last longer than 15 minutes. Other Names For Mild TBI. Concussion; Minor head trauma; Minor TBI; Minor brain injury; Minor head injury; Mild Traumatic Brain Injury is: Most prevalent TBI; Often missed at time of initial injury; 15% of people with mild TBI have symptoms that last one year or more. Query: how long does mild tbi last",
"output": [
"People with mild TBI have symptoms that last one year or more."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4441cc854c534133a67e13b408dad34e",
"input": "Abdominal hernia symptoms and signs include pain and swelling in the abdomen or groin area. Read about hernia surgery, repair, recovery time, complications, and the different types of hernias. Drugs A-Z Pill Identifier Supplements Symptom Checker Diseases Dictionary Media Slideshows Images Quizzes Hernia Surgery Recovery Timeline Day 1-4 after hernia surgery: Following a hernia surgery, you should not plan to do any personal or work related activities. Basic functions can be performed, such as walking, eating, or visiting the store. Another type of hernia, called a ventral hernia, occurs in the midline of the abdomen, usually above the navel . Hernias can also occur within the navel (umbilical hernia). Hernia repair and the treatment of hernia complications require surgery. Lumps and swelling in the abdominal area should be examined by a doctor. What is an abdominal hernia? Week 4 after hernia surgery: Recovery is done at this point, but the healing process will still commence, based on your body. You will be able to return to all your activities, without any limitations. Umbilical hernia repair surgery is performed in two different ways: open hernia repair or laparoscopic hernia repair. Open hernia repair. During a conventional open hernia repair, the surgeon makes an incision near your belly button to access the hernia over the bulge site. Laparoscopic hernia repair Week 2 after hernia surgery: Now you should be able to return to work or school full time. Lifting thresholds will still be in place. Twenty pounds is the maximum amount of weight that can be lifted now. Umbilical hernia repair surgery is a procedure that fixes umbilical hernias. An umbilical hernia involves a bulge or pouch that forms in the abdomen. This type of bulge occurs when a section of the intestine or other abdominal cavity tissue pushes through a weak spot in the abdominal wall near the belly button. Symptoms of a hernia include pain or discomfort and a localized swelling somewhere on the surface of the abdomen or in the groin area. A hernia can also be painless and only appear as a bulging. The pain may be intermittent or constant and the swelling may decrease or be absent, depending on the amount of pressure in the abdomen. Each Hernia Repair Surgery Is Different. The average recovery time after having a hernia repair procedure performed is four weeks. Each patient is different, so this recovery time is not written in stone. The two common repair surgeries performed are open hernia repair and laparoscopic hernia repair. Query: how long is recovery from a hernia surgery",
"output": [
"The average recovery time after having a hernia repair procedure performed is four weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-37c73500484e42bb90cb48705be6f039",
"input": "Muffler: Muffler, device through which the exhaust gases from an internal-combustion engine are passed to attenuate (reduce) the airborne noise of the engine. To be efficient as a So that vehicle owners understand the importance of an exhaust system and the connected muffler, here is some basic information to explain the purpose of two main components, the Emissions Control System and the Catalytic Converter! The catalytic converter looks like a muffler and is located in the exhaust system in front of the muffler. Simply stated, hydrocarbons or carbon monoxide in the exhaust are converted to carbon dioxide and water as they pass over the catalyst. Heat is generated in the converter as it works to clean the exhaust. Muffler, also called silencer, device through which the exhaust gases from an internal-combustion engine are passed to attenuate (reduce) the airborne noise of the engine. To be efficient as a sound reducer, a muffler must decrease the velocity of the exhaust gases and either absorb sound waves or cancel them by interference with reflected waves coming from the same source. In the typical reactive design shown in the , the arrows indicate the flow of exhaust gas through a set of tubes and chambers inside the muffler. One important chamber is known as the Helmholtz resonator. This chamber is of a dimension carefully tuned to reflect and cancel sound waves of specified frequencies. Why is an Exhaust System and Muffler so important? If you need a new muffler or an inspection of your exhaust system, our Rum River mechanic will be happy to help you. 17 It is important to get the best-quality muffler to prevent engine exhaustion. Although there have been a lot of muffler choices available today, it is not that hard to spot the good ones. Just make sure that avoid imitation brands and only get those with OEM marks. More importantly, your car's exhaust system is never complete without a muffler to blow out these wastes out with. The muffler is basically a silencer or a device that reduces the noise of your car's exhaust system. Mufflers may have no place in some racecar drivers' vehicles, but for regular street-drivers like you, it's important that your vehicle sports a reliable muffler. Also called a 'silencer', it helps tone down your engine's exhaust sounds to more aurally-pleasing notes. In the typical reactive design shown in the illustration, the arrows indicate the flow of exhaust gas through a set of tubes and chambers inside the muffler. One important chamber is known as the Helmholtz resonator. This chamber is of a dimension carefully tuned to reflect and cancel sound waves of specified frequencies. Query: how important are muffler",
"output": [
"Mufflers are important to prevent engine exhaustion."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a5f4fde5766c456c85b9a8c5ae9f102d",
"input": "6 weeks or more since you mailed your return, or when Where's My Refund tells you to contact the IRS; Taxpayers who claim the Earned Income Tax Credit or the Additional Child Tax Credit may experience a refund hold. According to the Protecting Americans from Tax Hikes (PATH) Act, the IRS cannot issue these refunds before mid-February. Here’s what you need to know to predict how long you’ll need to wait for your refund. Tax refunds: an overview Filling out your annual tax return involves calculating how much you owe the government in taxes based on your earnings and which tax deductions and credits you are eligible to receive. That amount that you overpaid in taxes is your refund, and it could be a substantial sum. In 2016, for example, the average tax refund was $3,050. Use our calculator to determine how much income tax you owe. Tax refund options. When you submit your tax return you’ll be given a choice of how to receive any refund owed to you. Information about refunds associated with filing taxes. Status of a return is usually available within 24 hours after the IRS has received an e-filed return or 4 weeks after a paper return received by mail. Here’s what you need to know to predict how long you’ll need to wait for your refund. Tax refunds: an overview. Filling out your annual tax return involves calculating how much you owe the government in taxes based on your earnings and which tax deductions and credits you are eligible to receive. Should You Call the IRS? The IRS issues most refunds in less than 21 days, although some require additional time. You should only call if it has been: 21 days or more since you e-filed; 6 weeks or more since you mailed your return, or when Where's My Refund tells you to contact the IRS Taxpayers who claim the Earned Income Tax Credit or the Additional Child Tax Credit may experience a refund hold. When the IRS processes your tax return and approves your refund, you can see your actual personalized refund date. Even though the IRS issues most refunds in less than 21 days after we receive your tax return, it’s possible your tax return may require additional review and take longer. It typically takes the IRS up to 21 days to release a refund, but the exact timing depends on a few factors, and in some cases the process may take longer. The IRS claims that it OKs most tax refunds within 21 days, but it can take longer. It typically takes the IRS up to 21 days to release a refund, but the exact timing depends on a few factors, and in some cases the process may take longer. Some tax returns need extra review for accuracy, completeness, and to protect taxpayers from fraud and identity theft. Extra processing time may be necessary. 2. Check the status of your 2017 personal income tax refund. 1. Review our normal processing times. Some tax returns need extra review for accuracy, completeness, and to protect taxpayers from fraud and identity theft. Extra processing time may be necessary. 2. Check the status of your 2016 personal income tax refund. Query: how long does it take to have state tax refund",
"output": [
"It take 21 days to have state tax refund."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1fae7caa7af64213bc249413e7b1b257",
"input": "The Getty Center is the closest: http://tinyurl.com/ajy5d2 The Museum of Tolerance is also very close: http://tinyurl.com/dlwpf8 The Hammer Museum is in Westwood Vil … lage: http://tinyurl.com/bppbqg Also, the Fowler Museum is on the UCLA campus near Royce Hall. 1 Upload failed. 2 We are experiencing some problems, please try again. 3 You can only upload files of type PNG, JPG, or JPEG. 4 You can only upload files of type 3GP, 3GPP, MP4, MOV, AVI, MPG, MPEG, or RM. 5 You can only upload photos smaller than 5 MB. 6 You can only upload videos smaller than 600MB. Best Answer: About 23 miles. The nearest college to Burbank would be Occidental College in Eagle Rock. Pasadena City College or Cal tech are further East. 16 miles, north on the 405 and east on the 101. However, it could easily take 60-90 minutes during morning or evening rush. km = how many kilometers from Los Angeles miles = how many miles from Los Angeles nm = how many nautical miles from Los Angeles. All numbers are air distances – as the crow flies/great circle distance. I have to say I'm impressed by your thoroughness. Looks like Burbank is easier. Any idea how long it will take to drive there from UCLA if we leave about 6:30 or 7:00? Thank you so much for all your help. I truly appreciate it. Best Answer: About 40-60 minutes, depending on traffic. UCLA has vanpools from Burbank that you can look into. ... distance is about 20 miles, mostly freeway, about ... There are 10.97 miles from Burbank to Ucla in southwest direction and 20 miles (32.19 kilometers) by car, following the I-405 route. Burbank and Ucla are 27 minutes far apart, if you drive non-stop. This is the fastest route from Burbank, CA to Ucla, CA. The halfway point is Sherman Oaks, CA. Burbank, CA and Ucla, CA are in the same time zone (Pacific Daylight Time). Current time in both locations is 11:28 am. Distance, Gas Consumption and Emission Notes. Distance from Ucla, CA to Burbank, CA is 18Miles or 29 Km. You can get this distance about 31 mins. If you want to planning travel with plane for 12 Miles or 18 Km, You can get this distance about 31 mins . A car with an average MPG will needs 0.83 gallons of gas to get the route between these points. The estimated cost of gas to get between Ucla, CA and Burbank, CA is $1.88. During the route, an average car will release 16.26 pounds of CO 2 to the atmosphere. Your carbon footprint is 0.9 pounds of CO 2 per mile. Driving distance from Burbank, CA to Los Angeles, CA The total driving distance from Burbank, CA to Los Angeles, CA is 12 miles or 19 kilometers. Your trip begins in Burbank, California. It ends in Los Angeles, California. Local public transit network - local bus or rail line, route planning and riding tips at Metro.net. 1 Providers include the following services: 2 Culver City Bus. 3 Commuter Express. 4 MTA. 5 Santa Monica Big Blue Bus. 6 Santa Clarita Transit. Query: how far is burbank from ucla",
"output": [
"Distance from Ucla, CA to Burbank, CA is 18Miles or 29 Km."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a21a865bfdaf48008c13db4346a77bd7",
"input": "Choosing a cricket bat can be daunting. Many appear identical at first glance, but extended use will show big differences between each one's performance. An important first step is to weigh your budget against your basic needs, like... Each wicket is made of three wooden stumps topped by two bails. As illustrated above, the pitch is marked at each end with four white painted lines: a bowling crease, a popping crease and two return creases. The three stumps are aligned centrally on the bowling crease, which is eight feet eight inches long. How to Knock in a Cricket Bat Quickly. Running In as outlined above is a process of ensuring that the owner of a new cricket bat prepares it for use against a new and hard cricket ball. All bats must be run in to both ensure the maximum performance of your cricket bat and to ensure its maximum life span. How long do bats last. Discussion in 'Cricket Discussion' started by banjo6, Aug 22, 2005. History of the Cricket Bat. The cricket bat was originally shaped like a hockey stick (1624) as the batsman had to hit the ball out of the bowler’s hands. Then as cricket laws (1770) changed, the bat became straight. The bat is shaped like a paddle, with one side having a deep V (back) and the other side flat, called the blade. Cricket is a bat-and-ball game played between two teams of eleven players each on a cricket field, at the centre of which is a rectangular 22-yard-long pitch with a target at each end called the wicket. Each phase of play is called an innings, during which one team bats, attempting to score as many runs as possible, whilst their opponents bowl and field, attempting to minimise the number of runs scored. When each innings ends, the teams usually swap roles for the next innings. The teams each bat After the edges and face have been sanded down, the bat is polished by a bee's wax compound, which helps to keep moisture out and let linseed oil in. The handle is bound by string, and modern additions such as the rubber grip and maker's stickers are applied. Cricket bats are made from a fairly soft and fibrous material called willow or Salix Alba Caerulea. With cricket balls being delivered like missiles at up to 90mph against your cricket bat it is obviously advisable to prepare your blade so as to achieve optimal performance, resistance and longevity. It's for hitting cricket balls with. If you get it right, the cricket ball will travel two hundred yards in four seconds, and all you've done is give it a knock like knocking the top off a bottle of stout, and it makes a noise like a trout taking a fly. What we're trying to do is to write cricket bats, so that when we throw up an idea and give it a little knock, it might... travel. Sizes of bats. Law 6 of the Laws of Cricket, as the rules of the game are known, state that the length of the bat may be no more than 38 in (965 mm) and the width no more than 4.25 in (108 mm). Bats typically weigh from 2 lb 7 oz to 3 lb (1.2 to 1.4 kg) though there is no standard. Query: how long is a cricket bat",
"output": [
"The length of the bat may be no more than 38 in (965 mm)."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-988d14ecaa544246a7fbaea5a7812cac",
"input": "Examples include: 1 Cracked or broken headlights or tail lights. 2 Dark window tints. 3 Other illegal modifications (like certain modified exhausts) 4 Inability to provide proof of insurance (when you are, in fact, insured) If you fight the traffic ticket in court and win, the ticket will not go on your driving record and will not affect your insurance rate. If you lose the case, you will have the ticket on your record. It may be worth while to look into fighting the ticket or pleading guilty with an explanation, in which case you may see a reduction in fine. In conclusion: Speeding tickets may affect the cost of your car insurance. Insurers may check driving records, and they may consider drivers with speeding tickets a greater insurance risk. That can increase premiums for drivers even if they haven't made a claim. So even if the violation appears on your driving record, it won't impact your total points. For example, Ohio doesn't add a point to your driving record after you're convicted of speeding less than 5 mph above the posted limit. Even if a violation adds zero points, it can still be included in your driving record. Some common examples of minor moving violations: 1 Seat belt violations. 2 Improper turns. 3 Disobeying traffic lights and signals. 4 Speeding tickets (when the speed was not significantly higher than the posted limit) 5 Illegal U-turns. Tickets normally can stay on a Virginia driving record from three years to 11 years, however if you are convicted of a serious violation it will remain on your MVR permanently. So the length of time that a conviction stays on your VA driving record depends on the severity of the violation. Posted on March 25, 2012January 27, 2012 by. A traffic violation will undoubtedly negatively affect your driving record, but it doesn’t mean that you will be blacklisted by insurance companies for your entire life just for a speeding ticket you received when you were sixteen. Thus, a speeding ticket for going 10 miles over the speed limit will affect a 17-year-old much more than it will an established driver with a clean record who’s 60. Note that traffic violation tickets will typically stay on your record for three years from the date that you’re convicted, and not from the date that you received the ticket. Major Tickets. Major tickets are those that include high-speed driving tickets, such as 50 miles or more over the limit, or driving without insurance. One major ticket can cause a significant increase in your insurance premium, usually for the next two to five years. How to Get a Copy of Your Driving Record. 1 Check for online access. Once you find the appropriate agency responsible for drivers licenses and driving records, visit the agency website and determine if you can request a copy of your driving record online. Some DMV or DOL agencies offer this capability to licensed drivers. If you drive violation-free and without accidents for a certain number of years, your state may deduct points from your driving record. Check with your DMV to find out whether this option exists. Waiting it out. Query: how long do tickets and accidents affect your driving record",
"output": [
"Tickets normally can stay on a Virginia driving record from three years to 11 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c8ca4dba7e9243afb1f115b5b91d79d4",
"input": "The application process for an eTA became available as of August 1, 2015. On March 15, 2016, this entry requirement will become mandatory and travelers will need an eTA before they can board a flight to Canada. To make sure that you can board your flight to Canada, you will need to travel with the passport you used to apply for your ETA as the ETA is electronically linked to it. If in doubt, you can always check the status of your ETA on Canada.ca/eTA. To find out more, including who needs an ETA and who doesn´t, visit Canada.ca/eTA. See you in Canada! Your Sri Lanka ETA visa will allow you to enter Sri Lanka not later than 3months time from the date of grant. Sri Lanka ETA visa is valid for three months only. T echnical difficulties have hampered applications for new electronic permits that are required for British visitors to Canada. From March 15, visa-exempt travellers, including British visitors, will need to secure an Electronic Travel Authorisation (eTA) to fly to, or transit through, the country. All non-citizens require a Visa or electronic Travel Authorization to enter Canada. Apply Online New entry requirements for Canada: Starting March 15, 2016, all travellers who fly to or transit through Canada need an Electronic Travel Authorization (eTA). 1. Submit Application Online Citizens from countries other than the United States (U.S.) who do not need a visa to enter Canada will need to obtain an eTA before flying to Canada. Travellers do not need an eTA when entering Canada by land or sea. How do I apply for an eTA for travel to Canada? Applying for an eTA is a simple online process that takes just a few minutes. You need your passport, a credit card (Visa, MasterCard) and an email address. Apply for an eTA before you book your flight to Canada. Most applicants get approved within minutes. However, some applications can take several days to process so don’t wait until the last minute. Canada eTA Electronic Travel Authorization (eTA), to Canada Our agency allows to obtain your Canada ETA, application to travel to Canada less than 72 hours before. The form corresponding to the admission procedure must be completed online before traveling to Canada. In addition to an FBI clearance for Canadian immigration, Americans who have lived in another country for more than six months when older than 18 years of age may also need a criminal record check from that country. Citizens of the following countries require an eTA to get into Canada by air: Andorra, Anguilla, Australia, Austria, Bahamas, Barbados, Belgium, Bermuda, Brunei, Chile, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Israel, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, ... Find out how to apply and why you need a passport and not an eTA for travel to or through Canada. Check your eTA status Get online updates on pending applications, as well as information on the status of your current eTA. Query: how long does it take to obtain an eta for canada",
"output": [
"Canada ETA, application to travel to Canada less than 72 hours before."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-17ade148a3c64d18a64facb52f2c32df",
"input": "I freeze cooked pork, it's ok defrosted for sandwiches, but I tend to use it for making a pie with. I cook some peppers and put it the defrosted pork and some stock. Then put a dish with a pastry topping and cook Hello I cooked some pork yest and was goint to use it up for meals today and tomorrow, but we are now going out for dinner. I know it will be ok for tomorrow but will it still be ok for tea on wednesday? (Have got loads of it!!!) Thanks xx Pork roast that has been defrosted in the fridge can be kept for an additional 3 to 5 days in the refrigerator before cooking; pork roast that was thawed in the microwave or in cold water should be cooked immediately. How long does pork roast last in the fridge once it is cooked? Cooked pork roast will usually stay good for 3 to 5 days in the fridge and 3 months in the freezer. How to tell if pork roast is bad? The best way is to smell and look at the pork roast: signs of bad pork roast are a sour smell, dull color and slimy texture; discard any pork roast with an off smell or appearance. When it comes to appliances that keep our foods safe, the refrigerator may be the most important because it slows down the growth of bacteria that cause food poisoning. At temperatures between 40 and 140 °F, bacteria grows most rapidly. A refrigerator set to 40 °F or below will protect most foods – but not forever. Storage period in refrigerator (40 degrees F) Storage period in freezer (0 degrees F) Fresh Meat: Ground beef: 1-2 days: 3-4 months: Beef steaks and roasts: 3-5 days: 6-12 months: Pork chops: 3-5 days: 4-6 months: Ground pork: 1-2 days: 3-4 months: Pork roasts: 3-5 days: 4-6 months: Cured Meats: Lunch meat: 3-5 days: 1-2 months: Sausage: 1-2 days: 1-2 months: Gravy: 1-2 days: 2-3 months: Fish Not sure if it's time to toss last week's dinner? Check this guide to find out how long your foods will last. How long does a raw pork roast last after the sell-by date? After pork roast is purchased, it may be refrigerated for 3 to 5 days - the sell-by date on the package may expire during that storage period, but the pork roast will remain safe to use after the sell by date if it has been properly stored. Kenmore Elite 33 cu. ft. French Door Bottom-Freezer Refrigerator 04672093000; How to Prepare Your Home for an Emergency; How to Butterfly Chicken Breasts; Smart Swaps for Fall's Unhealthiest Foods ; How Much Food Do I Need? Tips. 1 How long does a raw pork roast last in the fridge or freezer? 2 How long does a raw pork roast last after the sell-by date? 3 Unopened pork roast may be kept in its original store packaging when refrigerating; to maximize the shelf life of pork roast, do not open the package until ready to use. Not sure if it's time to toss last week's dinner? Check this guide to find out how long your foods will last — then go clean out your fridge! Query: how long does pork roast last in the fridge cooked?",
"output": [
"Cooked pork roast will usually stay good for 3 to 5 days in the fridge and 3 months in the freezer."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-722f32deaecd47fb93f1316e1641f22b",
"input": "How Long Do Accidents Affect Insurance Rates? Reader Question: How Long Do Accidents and Tickets Affect What I Pay for Insurance? Sometimes I Hear Three Years, Other Times I Hear Seven Years. Which Is It? There’s a lot of misinformation about how long certain tickets or violations affect your insurance premiums and honestly, there’s no exact answer to that. That’s because this actually varies greatly from insurer to insurer and state to state, so always ask your insurer how long they’ll factor in tickets or violations. However, here are some general guidelines about how long these can affect your premiums regardless of insurer or where you live. The short answer is that the accident or ticket will stay on your record for three years, but the exact punishments you receive for your traffic violation depend on several factors, including: Your insurance company. How long you have been with your provider. Where you live. How old you are. Chargeable Accidents. If you are in an accident that is your fault, most insurance companies will surcharge your policy 25 percent or more for at least three years following the accident. Some carriers do have an accident forgiveness period for the first accident, but again, this is at the discretion of the insurance carrier. The rates vary from state to state, but if you have an accident that is your fault or even one for which the insurance company can take no recourse, such as a collision with a large animal, it will affect the premium you pay for auto insurance. One major ticket can cause a significant increase in your insurance premium, usually for the next two to five years. Major offenses can easily increase your insurance by 10-50% for the first ticket, and subsequent tickets will result in more significant increases. How Long Does an Accident Stay on Your Record? Posted on Nov 10, 2015 If you have just been in a car accident or ticketed for a traffic violation, you may have heard conflicting information regarding how long the accident or ticket will stay on your record and how it will affect your insurance premium. Let’s break down what types of accidents and traffic violations do and don’t affect your insurance premiums and for how long. First Minor Accident or Ticket Just because you get in a car accident or receive a ticket doesn’t automatically mean your record is tainted. Let’s break down what types of accidents and traffic violations do and don’t affect your insurance premiums and for how long. First Minor Accident or Ticket. Just because you get in a car accident or receive a ticket doesn’t automatically mean your record is tainted. When you have an accident it will stay on your insurance record for several years. If the accident was your fault the insurance company may surcharge your policy during that time, thus increasing your rates by 25 percent or more. The short answer is that the accident or ticket will stay on your record for three years, but the exact punishments you receive for your traffic violation depend on several factors, including: 1 Your insurance company. 2 How long you have been with your provider. 3 Where you live. 4 How old you are. 5 The severity of the accident or violation. Query: how long accident impact insurance",
"output": [
"Accident or ticket will stay on your record for three years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-50f83b51c86c44048b2dfec6af0c1a32",
"input": "Million Mile Secrets reader Joyce asks if it's worth transferring her American Express Membership Rewards points to Starwood Preferred Guest, and then to airline partners to get the 5,000 mile transfer bonus. 7. You will be presented a Thank You page with points balance and a confirmation number. Quote this confirmation number when you have any enquiries about your redemption. 8. Transfers take up to 5 working days for your Membership Rewards points to reach your partner account. Unfortunately, American Express holds no responsibility for flight or accommodation availability; this is at the sole discretion of the partners. Refunds and point returns are not accommodated after the transfer has been instructed. Back to top DO MEMBERSHIP REWARDS POINTS EXPIRE? No. Unlike other card rewards programmes where your points expire in as little as one year, your Membership Rewards points do not expire*. A fairly common question I get asked by email is how long it takes American Express to transfer Membership Rewards points to a specific airline or hotel partner. I thought it would be useful if I tried to compile a list of approximate transfer times. Step 3: Choose an Amex transfer partner. You’ll see a list of airline and hotel programs you can transfer to. Click on one of them to get to the transfer page. Amex airline transfer partners. Membership Rewards allows you to transfer points to the following programs: 1,000 Amex points = 1,000 partner points: AeroMexico Club Premier; Air Canada Aeroplan A minimum of 1000 MR points is required transfer to the Partner, and the transfer amount must be in increments of 100 MR points. Skip to Membership Rewards Points Skip to Delta SkyMiles® points . The minimum transfer amount is 1000 points. Points must be in increments of 100 points. Membership Rewards® Point Summary; Membership Rewards® Point Summary; CreditSecure; Bluebird Alternative to Banking; International Payments for Businesses; Personal Loans One of the best ways to redeem American Express Membership Rewards points is to transfer them to airline partners. You can often more value out of each point when you turn it into an airline mile. These can then be redeemed for first class travel or to take advantage of a sweet spot in a partner award chart. Transfer American Express Points to British Airways to Gain Access to Oneworld Awards. While American AAdvantage is not an AMEX Membership Rewards transfer partner, British Airways Executive Club is, so it would be possible to transfer AMEX points to British Airways Avios and book Oneworld awards. There’s also an increased 40,000 point sign-up bonus on The Platinum Card® from American Express and The Business Platinum® Card from American Express OPEN right now, both of which come with lots of great benefits. Membership Rewards Transfer Partners You can find the transfer program by visiting the Membership Rewards page, clicking on “Travel,” and finding the link to “Transfer Points.” Here are the current airline and hotel transfer partners, the rate of exchange with Membership Rewards, and roughly how long it takes for a transfer to go through. Do check the American Express website since promotions sometimes result in higher transfer rates for a limited time. Query: how long transfer american express point to partner",
"output": [
"It takes up to 5 working days to transfer American Express point to partner."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ae22fe5c631f457590a2add67cc88129",
"input": "This lands Chapman University in the #61 slot on our ranking of Best Colleges for the Money in California. Nationally, Great School with a High Price The quality of education you will receive at Chapman University places it among the best in the country. USC is a Significantly Larger School: (43,401 vs. 8,305 Total Students) USC is Significantly More Difficult to Get In: (17.7 percent vs. 47.6 percent Acceptance Rate) Chapman University Offers Slightly Cheaper Tuition: ($47,260 USD vs. $50,277 USD Tuition) Of these 2 colleges: 1 USC is a Significantly Larger School: (43,401 vs. 8,305 Total Students) 2 USC is Significantly More Difficult to Get In: (17.7 percent vs. 47.6 percent Acceptance Rate) 3 Chapman University Offers Slightly Cheaper Tuition: ($47,260 USD vs. $50,277 USD Tuition) Chapman University Provides Significantly Better Freshmen Financial Aid: (89% vs. 61% of Eligible Freshmen Receive Aid) USC Students Graduate More in 6 Years: (91% vs. 76% Graduation Rate) Chapman University Has Slightly Hotter Summer Weather: (72 degrees Fahrenheit vs. 68 degrees Fahrenheit) USC Has Slightly Colder Winter Weather: (56 degrees Fahrenheit vs. 58 degrees Fahrenheit) Continue exploring this page to learn more about these 2 schools. Within California, Chapman University is Considered a High Quality College at an Expensive Price. Chapman University's overall average net price combined with a high quality education, results in a lower value for the money when compared to other colleges and universities in California. Compare Colleges: Chapman University ($47,260 USD out-of-state, 47.6% acceptance rate) vs University of Southern California ($50,277 USD out-of-state, 17.7% acceptance rate). Medical Schools Business Schools All international students are automatically charged the Chapman University Health Insurance Plan. The cost of the plan is added to the students tuition and fees each semester. If the student has other valid insurance coverage, they may opt out by completing a Health Insurance Waiver . And the Grand Total Comes To: $199,763. On average, a bachelor's degree at Chapman University will cost you about $199,763. This is based on an average price (with and without aid) of $46,861 per year and an average of 4.3 years to graduate. On average, a bachelor's degree at Chapman University will cost you about $205,174. This is based on an average price (with and without aid) of $48,568 per year and an average of 4.2 years to graduate. Is Chapman Priced Well for its Value? Will you be over or underpaying for your education? Find the educational value of an education from Chapman below. On this Page You'll Find: State Ranking of Chapman University; Price vs. Value Comparison; Estimated Degree Cost; Breakdown of Financial Aid; Value Calculation Methodology Query: how expensive is chapman university",
"output": [
"On average, a bachelor's degree at Chapman University will cost you about $205,174."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-bd370b8ceb9547eba2659b4b6507d6c7",
"input": "The Texas drivers license renewal applicant may also be issued a new driver's license number. If it has been expired less than two years, then the driver can follow the steps above to get a drivers license renewal in Texas, either online, by mail or phone, or in person. Once the driver follows the steps above, the driver will have finished the renewal process. Complete application and fees. 1 An assumed name registration from the county where you plan to open your school. 2 Certificate of Occupancy/Fire Inspection from the city where the school will be located. 3 If registering as an LLC, you must submit certain Secretary of State documents. To renew your TX driver's license online, visit the Driver License Renewal and Change of Address website. You'll need to provide: Your TX driver license number. Renew Your Texas Drivers License. It’s time to renew your drivers license for the next 6 years. To do so, you have a few different options, but first you need to determine the status or validity of your current license. If you have a valid license, you may renew online, by mail, by phone, or in person. Texas Drivers License Renewal. Drivers have several ways to renew drivers licenses in Texas with the state Department of Public Safety. Residents can apply for a drivers license renewal online, by phone, in person and by mail. Every other renewal, all drivers are required to renew their drivers licenses in person at a DMV location to update their photo on file. In Alabama, for example, drivers enjoy a generous 60-day grace period after which the license expires, extending it for another 60 days, making it still legal for drivers to get behind the wheel. Hawaii offers a 90-day grace period but without driving privileges; the license immediately becomes invalid after the expiration date passes. To obtain a driver license or ID card, the individual: 1 Must apply in person as a new applicant at a driver license office, and. 2 Meet all of the requirements for a new ID card or driver license (including taking the knowledge and driving tests). Additional to steps above, drivers younger than 18 must meet these requirements: 1 You must show ONE of the following 2 options: A certificate for completion of Driver's Ed. 2 Complete and bring the Verification of Enrollment and Attendance (VOE) form. 3 Your parents must give you authorization. Does the FTA database have a record of all outstanding violations that I may have in Texas. No. The database only contains outstanding violations reported by a jurisdiction with a contract with the Department of Public Safety. Renew your driver license and/or identification (ID) card; Change the address on your driver license and/or ID card; Effective October 10, 2016, if you have a Driver License AND Identification Card, you must visit a Driver License Office to surrender one of the cards before you are eligible for online transactions. Read more about this change. Query: how long do i have to renew drivers license texas",
"output": [
"Drivers license of Texas can be renewed after expired less than two years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c6cd48e4b7884f1bb768b8412bda2621",
"input": "The laparoscopic approach is what has made surgery so safe and the Fobi pouch is done laparoscopically, the gastric bypass is done laparoscopically and the LAP-BAND® is done laparoscopically. So the pain is minimal. We do not expect you to have any serious problems after surgery. However, if you experience any of the symptoms below, you must contact your surgeon right away. Fever of 100.5˚F or above Up to 50% of patients will develop gallstones after gastric bypass surgery, and these are usually harmless. Sometimes, gallstones can cause nausea, vomiting, and abdominal pain. About 15% to 25% of people need surgery to remove their gallbladder after gastric bypass surgery. Wound infections can happen up to 3 weeks after surgery. Symptoms include redness and warmth, pain, or thick drainage (pus) from the surgical wound. After gastric bypass and other types of weight-loss surgery, you generally won't be allowed to eat for one to two days so that your stomach and digestive system can heal. Then, you'll follow a specific diet for about 12 weeks. The diet begins with liquids only, then progresses to ground-up or soft foods, and finally to regular foods. Indications/qualifications (Click here to calculate your body mass index - BMI) You must be at least 18 years of age. If you are over 64 years old, you must be referred by your doctor and be in good health, since surgery is higher risk in patients over 60 years old even with testing before surgery. Your body mass index (BMI) is greater than 40 kg/m2. How long do I have to stay in the hospital after bypass surgery? Typically, the hospital stay for a laparoscopic gastric bypass or gastric sleeve is one night, with discharge being by dinnertime the day after surgery. For laparoscopic adjustable gastric band surgery, patients are typically discharged within 4 to 6 hours after surgery. Everyone reacts to anesthesia a little differently, so if you are not feeling well, you may be kept an extra night for your comfort and safety. Do you use a drain tube during recovery? This Q & A is designed to give you answers to common questions people have about weight loss surgery. Recovery in the Hospital. Patients spend an average of two to five days in the hospital following bariatric surgery, or longer if complications develop. Patients who undergo laparoscopic bariatric surgery usually have a shorter hospital stay. When you return to your hospital room after surgery, you will be closely monitored by your nurses. Along with periodic monitoring of your vital signs — blood pressure, pulse, temperature and respiration — your nurses will encourage and help you to perform deep breathing, coughing, leg movement exercises and to get out of bed. How Long Does Gastric Bypass, Lap Band, and Gastric Sleeve Surgery Take? Lap band surgery usually takes only about 45 minutes. The roux-en-y procedure usually takes a little longer, ranging from ninety minutes to three hours in the operating room, mainly depending on the size of the patient. It’s normal to be nervous before your bariatric surgery hospital stay. But you will have chosen your team of doctors and hospital well and you have everything in place, so please try to relax. Your time in the hospital will: Range from less than 1 day (outpatient) to 4 days, depending on the procedure you choose Query: how long do you stay in the hospital after bariatric surgery",
"output": [
"Patients spend an average of two to five days in the hospital following bariatric surgery."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ee6e4d689a314c04b12ac1628b4f802a",
"input": "Re: How Long Does Japan Postal Services Take? 2015/12/7 05:24 I have just tracked the tracking number: RR376886521JP on the Royal Mail website and the latest tracking information is 05/12/15 17:52 ARRIVED IN THE UK HEATHROW WORLDWIDE DC so that means that I should receive it this week but it depends on how fast customs take to clear the packages How long does it take USPS to get a package from Pennsylvania to Arizona? A: Packages sent from Pennsylvania to Arizona via U.S. Postal Service Priority Mail may reach their destination in as little as two or three business days. Th... Full Answer > This Site Might Help You. RE: How long does ems take to deliver from china to UK? I ordered some goods from china and they are getting delivered to the UK via EMS. It was dispatched on Wednesday and it said it would arrive within 5-7 working days. I have tried to use the tracking but it is not working at the moment? When do you think it will arrive? Thank you How Long Will My EMS China Shipments Take. Track. Consumers will certainly take efficiency into consideration especially when deliver some important letters and documents. Actually, due to some realities such as distance, bad weather, and customs, the delivery periods may differentiate. How long does Express Mail (EMS) take to get through New York's International Sorting Center (ISC) ? How long does Express Mail EMS take to get through New York's International Sorting Center (ISC) ? The package is from China and is a pair of shoes. It is 3/13 and this is the message USPS has given me: Express Mail International® Processed Through Sort Facility March 13, 2013, 10:34... show more How long does Express Mail EMS take to get through New York's International Sorting Center (ISC) ? The package is from China and is a pair of shoes. It is 3/13 and this is the message USPS has given me: Express Mail International® Processed Through Sort Facility March 13, 2013, 10:34 am ISC NEW YORK NY(USPS) What is next from ISC? Notice for Use. The number of days listed in the table shows the average time required for EMS delivery to the designated destination country or area.The day when you submitted EMS to your local post office is not included.(e.g., “2” indicates that delivery will be on the day after next) Coursework and training to become an EMT-basic or first responder can generally be completed in as little as three weeks on an accelerated basis. For part-time students, these programs may take around 8-11 weeks to complete. Such programs teach students how to manage respiratory, cardiac and trauma emergencies, as well as assess patient conditions. So the watch might aswell not have been shipped yet. It happened to me that I got a tracking number that wasn't even correct and I only discovered it when the watch arrived (after 20 days or so) and the site was still saying wrong tracking number... January 26, 2014|By Lisa Zamosky. Cathy Chidester, director of the L.A. County Emergency Medical Services… (Cheryl A. Guerrero, Los…) Few of us expect to find ourselves riding in the back of an ambulance, yet in 2012 nearly 600,000 people in Los Angeles County were transported to hospital emergency rooms. And that's just in response to 911 calls. How long does it take to ship a package express EMS from China to Minnesota? I Actually Just got something from China to Arizona and It took express international like 2 days Edit Query: how long does it take ems to arrive",
"output": [
"EMS takes 5 to 7 working days from china to UK after getting delivered."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8cdd7336146d460dbb1bdb21b80128c8",
"input": "Basic. 1 If you had just $1,000 to invest, it would be difficult for you to assemble a varied basket of... 2 A mutual fund is an investment company that qualifies for special treatment under the tax law.... 3 There are five main indicators of investment risk that apply to the analysis of stocks, bonds... Shares being sold must be in good form in the account and cannot be sold before the original purchase has settled. The earliest any mutual fund position can be redeemed is on settlement plus one business day. Most mutual funds purchased at Scottrade settle on trade date plus one business day. Have at it. 1 Find potential leads in the Investing Ideas section. 2 Consult our analysis for professional insights. 3 Narrow your choices with our selection tools. 4 Use our Automatic Investing Plan to buy funds on your schedule—it’s an easy way to get the benefits of dollar cost averaging6. Dividends and Capital Gains paid in cash will be deposited into your Scottrade account. You must comply with the fund's investment minimums when placing your order. Buying power may not be used when purchasing a fund. Mutual funds may be margined after they have been owned for 30 days. However, the SEC website notes that a broker cannot deposit the money until it has been received from the brokerage firm of the stock buyer, and delays in the receipt of funds can occur. The SEC makes a point that securities laws don't mandate a hard deadline when the money must be available to you. Get up to $600 plus 60 days of commission-free stocks and options trades for deposits of $10k or more.1 How it works. 1 Get up to $600 plus 60 days of commission-free stocks and options trades for deposits of $10k or more.1 How it works. It can take up to 48 hours for the mutual fund company to confirm your transaction. Your Scottrade confirmation statement will appear online 24 hours after the fund company has confirmed the trade. This may be several days after the trade. We let you choose from thousands of mutual funds. And to help make the choice easier, we offer tools that let you quickly find the funds that may help meet your goals. Choose from more than 9,000 mutual funds—many with no loads and no-transaction fees2. Top five searched mutual funds. Disclaimer. Data delayed by 15 minutes. Top five lists are not a recommendation by E*TRADE Securities or its affiliates to buy, sell or hold any security, financial product or instrument, nor is it an endorsement of any specific security, company, fund family, product, or service. The Securities and Exchange Commission has specific rules concerning how long it takes for the sale of stock to become official and the funds made available. The current rules call for a three-day settlement, which means it will take at least three days from the time you sell stock until the money is available. Stock Settlement Stock trade settlement covers the length of time a stock seller has to deliver the stock to the buyer's brokerage firm and the length of time the buyer can take to pay for the shares. The current rule is referred to as T+3 settlement. Query: how long does it take to buy mutual funds",
"output": [
"It takes up to 48 hours for buy mutual funds."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-076ac1c33a8046f08d277b912554fa55",
"input": "The contagious period — the time during which a sick person can give the illness to others — is slightly different for each virus. 1 Norovirus. With norovirus — the most common cause of viral gastroenteritis in adults and children — you're contagious from the moment you begin to feel ill. 2 Rotavirus. Flu symptoms include: 1 Fever. 2 Chills. 3 Runny nose. 4 Headache. 5 Muscle aches. 6 Warm, flushed skin and watery eyes. 7 Weakness or fatigue. 8 Sore throat. The viruses that cause the stomach flu (gastroenteritis) are very contagious. The viruses that cause the stomach flu (gastroenteritis) are very contagious. Skip to main navigation Symptoms of rotavirus — the leading cause of viral gastroenteritis in infants and young children — usually appear one to three days after exposure. But you're contagious even before you develop symptoms, and up to two weeks after you've recovered. How long am I contagious if I have the stomach flu? Answers from James M. Steckelberg, M.D. You can be contagious from a few days up to two weeks or more, depending on which virus is causing your stomach flu (gastroenteritis). A number of viruses can cause gastroenteritis, including noroviruses and rotaviruses. The contagious period — the time during which a sick person can give the illness to others — is slightly different for each virus.The viruses that cause gastroenteritis are spread through close contact with infected people, such as by sharing food or eating utensils, and ... Trending in Health. 1 1 Newborn left in gym bag outside Atlanta medical facility. 2 2 Texas hospital forced to evacuate patients due to lack of water. 3 3 Ovarian cancer symptoms and warning signs. 4 4 Indiana man in a coma with confirmed case of West Nile virus. 5 5 Mom delivers baby inside amniotic sac en route to hospital. Q: When is someone who has the flu contagious? Some people who are infected with the influenza virus can actually transmit the illness before they begin to feel any symptoms. Most of the time, you will become contagious about 24 to 72 hours after contracting the influenza virus and remain that way for up to five days after the onset of symptoms. But children or people with compromised immune systems can be contagious to those around them for up to two weeks. Flu symptoms include: Fever; Chills; Runny nose; Headache; Muscle aches; Warm, flushed skin and watery eyes; Weakness or fatigue; Sore throat; The symptoms of the common cold can be similar to those of the flu, so it's important to get a firm diagnosis from your doctor. According to the CDC, more than 20,000 Americans die from the flu each year, so make sure you get your flu shot – especially if you are pregnant or living with a compromised immune system. Symptoms usually appear within one to two days of exposure. Although you typically feel better after a day or two, you're contagious for up to three days after you've recovered. Some people may be contagious for up to two weeks after recovery. Check out these best-sellers and special offers on books and newsletters from Mayo Clinic. 1 The Last Diet You'll Ever Need. 2 4 Simple Steps to a Joy-Filled Life. 3 Pain Management Strategies from Mayo Clinic. 4 Stop Osteoporosis in its Tracks. 5 Protect and Preserve Your Vision. Query: how long is the flu or cold contagious",
"output": [
"The flu or cold is contagious up to two weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-45ee1bb937334202ad2bb5b7e87c67d5",
"input": "The average SAT score composite at Morehouse College is a 1457 on the old 2400 SAT scale. On the new 1600 SAT, this corresponds to an average SAT score of 1060. This score makes Morehouse College Competitive for SAT test scores. The 25th percentile New SAT score is 950, and the 75th percentile New SAT score is 1170. Admissions Requirements Below you'll find information on requirements for applying to Morehouse School of Medicine Doctoral of Medicine program. The section includes a list of required coursework, evaluation of foreign studies, the Medical College Admissions Test (MCAT), letters of recommendation, and applying as an early decision applicant. The 75th percentile of ACT scores submitted to Morehouse College has stayed relatively constant overall from 2010-2015, hovering around 23. The 25th percentile of ACT scores submitted to Morehouse College has dropped overall from 2010-2015, declining from 19 in 2010 to 18 in 2015. Morehouse College Admissions Statistics. There are three critical numbers when considering your admissions chances: ACT scores, GPA, and acceptance rate. All these combine to tell you what you scores are required to get into Morehouse College. Average ACT: 21. The average ACT score composite at Morehouse College is a 21. The 25th percentile ACT score is 18, and the 75th percentile ACT score is 23. In other words, a 18 places you below average, while a 23 will move you up to above average. There's no absolute ACT requirement at Morehouse College, but they really want to see at least a 18 to have a chance at being considered. Comprehensive information on admission at Morehouse College, including admission requirements and deadlines, early and regular admission rates, GPAs and test scores of recently admitted freshmen, and more. Morehouse College has an admissions yield of 34.4%, which is about average compared to the average for similarly selective schools (36.8%). Further, this is a lower rate than the average yield for Georgia (44.8%). This means that 598 students enrolled out of the 1,738 students admitted in 2015. Explore key Morehouse College information including application requirements, popular majors, tuition, SAT scores, AP credit policies, and more. College Search helps you research colleges and universities, find schools that match your preferences, and add schools to a personal watch list. Admissions How to Apply . Common Application. Prospective students may apply online to Morehouse College exclusively using the Common Application. For more information regarding this application process and to complete the online Common Application, visit the website. Summer Session Application Morehouse College Financial Aid (2014 - 15) 1 Percentage of Students Receiving Aid: 94%. 2 Percentage of Students Receiving Types of Aid Grants: 84%. Loans: 73%. 3 Average Amount of Aid Grants: $19,021. Loans: $7,625. Morehouse College Atlanta, GA Morehouse, founded in 1867, is a private, liberal arts, historically black, men's college. Its 61-acre campus is located in downtown Atlanta. Web Site www.morehouse.edu/ Institution Type Private Coeducational No, men only Undergraduate Students 2,108 Women Not reported Men 2,108 (100.0%) Query: average act score for admission to morehouse",
"output": [
"The average ACT score composite at Morehouse College is a 21."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-14fd68e39a9a44db904bdbf775a92b27",
"input": "Method for Steaming Asparagus Rinse and prepare the asparagus as usual, depending on how hungry you and your guests are determines how many spears you need to cook. – I work on the basis of about six to eight spears per person. Steam for 5-6 minutes, depending on the thickness of the stalks, or until they feel tender when tested with a skewer. Serve the asparagus on hot plates with some Hollandaise Sauce or melted butter poured over the tips, or warm or cold with a good vinaigrette. Simple Steamed Asparagus Steamed asparagus, or any asparagus for that matter, is my favorite part of the Spring season. There’s a lot of different ways you can cook them but I always prefer to eat the first slender green asparagus spears in the simplest form possible, and for me, that’s steamed. We show you how to steam asparagus. For more recipe inspiration head over to http://www.videojug.com Subscribe! http://www.youtube.com/subscription_center?ad... We show you how to steam asparagus. For more recipe inspiration head over to http://www.videojug.com Subscribe! http://www.youtube.com/subscription_c... Check Out Our Channel Page: http://www.youtube.com/user/videojugf... Like Us On Facebook! https://www.facebook.com/videojug Follow Us On Twitter! http://www.twitter.com/videojug Steaming Asparagus. Steaming asparagus is simplicity itself and is one of the healthiest and tastiest ways to eat asparagus. As the name suggests steaming vegetables, including asparagus, involves sitting the vegetables in steam rather than in water. The steam cooks the vegetables without allowing as much of the goodness to leach out into the water. Cook, increasing heat to medium-high to maintain a simmer if necessary, until tender when pierced with the tip of a knife, 8-30 minutes, depending on thickness of asparagus. Lift bundles from simmering water with kitchen tongs and drain on paper towels. Fish steamers for either the hob or the microwave are usually a good shape for steaming asparagus as they tend to be oval or rectangular and long enough to accommodate the long spears. We have a fish steamer for the microwave and this is our everyday preferred method of steaming asparagus. 1. Lay the asparagus in a double layer in a wide pan and sprinkle with sea salt. If your pan looks too crowded, steam the asparagus in 2 batches. Pour in just enough water cover the bottom of the pan, but not submerge the bottom layer of asparagus. Bring the water to a boil, cover the pan and turn the heat down to a low simmer. 2. Check the asparagus for doneness after about 3 minutes. Their size will determine how long they need to cook. They should be bright green and bendy, not a dull olive color and soggy. They can overcook in a nano-second – this is where a careful eye comes in! 3. Season with a little salt to taste and put the lid on the plan and bring the water to the boil. Turn the heat down to simmer and steam as above for approximately 5 minutes, do remember to to turn the heat down, because it is surprising how little energy you need to steam vegetables when the lid of the saucepan is on. Turn the heat down a little, reduce your fuel bills and save the planet! We show you how to steam asparagus. For more recipe inspiration head over to http://www.videojug.com Subscribe! http://www.youtube.com/subscription_center?ad... Skip navigation Query: how long do i steam asparagus",
"output": [
"Steam asparagus for 5 to 6 minutes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ea75aa78e86d498e81546828897b18e1",
"input": "If there are any general principles that may be inferred for health planners wishing to conduct iron interventions in malaria-endemic areas, they are the following: 1) beware populations with potentially compromised immunity (especially to malaria), for example, HIV carriers, primigravidae and young infants; 2) beware high dose supplementation; 3) beware supplementation during the peak malaria transmission season; 4) beware known AS and SS genotypes; 4) beware interpreting low population ... Iron deficiency is associated with reversible abnormalities of immune function, but it is difficult to demonstrate the severity and relevance of these in observational studies. Iron treatment has been associated with acute exacerbations of infection, in particular, malaria. Iron and the immune system. Ward RJ(1), Crichton RR, Taylor DL, Della Corte L, Srai SK, Dexter DT. Author information: (1)Biologie du Comportement, Universite Catholique de Louvain, 1348, Louvain-la-Neuve, Belgium. roberta.ward@uclouvain.be In vitro studies of iron deficiency and functional immunity. Two component systems of active immunity—humoral and cell-mediated immunity—have been studied extensively, mainly in vitro, in relation to iron deficiency in both humans and animals. Iron is a mineral that plays an important role in immune function. A diet containing too little iron can contribute to anemia and weaken the immune system (1, 2, 3, 4). That's why it's important to optimize your intake of iron-rich foods, such as meat, poultry, fish, shellfish, legumes, nuts, seeds, cruciferous vegetables and dried fruit. In addition, lymphocytes play an important role in adaptive immunity. Thirdly, a variety of effector molecules, e.g. toll-like receptors, NF-κB, hypoxia factor-1, haem oxygenase, will orchestrate the inflammatory response by mobilising a variety of cytokines, neurotrophic factors, chemokines, and reactive oxygen and nitrogen species. Iron and immunity are closely linked: firstly by the fact that many of the genes/proteins involved in iron homoeostasis play a vital role in controlling iron fluxes such that bacteria are prevented from utilising iron for growth; secondly, cells of the innate immune system, monocytes, macrophages, microglia and lymphocytes, are able to combat bacterial insults by carefully controlling their iron fluxes, which are mediated by hepcidin and ferroportin. To summarize in vitro evidence, iron deficiency depresses certain aspects of cell-mediated immunity, including lymphocyte, neutrophil and macrophage function; humoral immunity is unaffected and the significance of hypoferremia (as opposed to normal transferrin saturation) on growth of microorganisms is uncertain. Little evidence exists for systematic major humoral deficiencies in iron-deficient humans, and although specific defects in cell-mediated immunity have been well described and reviewed, even in latent iron deficiency, note that such minor functional changes cannot be compared with the devastating effects of the well-defined immunodeficiency syndromes (Dhur et al. 1989, Farthing 1989, Hershko 1993, Oppenheimer and Hendrickse 1983, Scrimshaw and San Giovanni 1997). Combining iron-rich foods with a source of vitamin C can help boost your absorption even further. That said, it's important to remember that overly high blood iron levels can be harmful and may actually suppress the immune system (5, 6, 7) Therefore, it's best to use iron supplements only if you have an iron deficiency, or on the advice of a doctor. Query: how does iron boost immunity",
"output": [
"Firstly by the fact that many of the genes/proteins involved in iron homoeostasis play a vital role in controlling iron fluxes such that bacteria are prevented from utilising iron for growth; secondly, cells of the innate immune system, monocytes, macrophages, microglia and lymphocytes, are able to combat bacterial insults by carefully controlling their iron fluxes, which are mediated by hepcidin and ferroportin."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-afd0deb2fdbf4a41a08376b8cfa9c623",
"input": "How to Upload a Video to YouTube. Three Methods: From Your Computer From Mobile Uploading DVDs Community Q&A. Want to be able to share your videos with friends, family, and perfect strangers? Uploading videos to YouTube is a quick process from either your mobile device or from your computer. How to Add Legal Music to YouTube Videos. Before we take a look at how to add a soundtrack to your video, we need to open the video that needs to be edited: Log in to your YouTube account from a computer. Open the Video Manager page to see the list of all your videos. Click the Edit button next to the video you want to add music to. That is why some of your MP4 files can upload to YouTube, while other MP4 videos can't. Reason 1 The MP4 file is too long or large to upload to YouTube. By default, you can upload videos that are 15 minutes long. To upload longer videos, you may follow these guide. How to Successfully Upload MP4 to YouTube? In order to successfully upload any MP4 to YouTube, we had better compress and convert MP4 to YouTube more compatible MP4 format. Make Preparation: Run MP4 to YouTube Converter This takes a significant amount of processing power which is why it can take a while for it to take place. 4k video can take a crazy long time to upload. Also if you are a brand-new YouTuber or you are not verified, you’re not going to get priority processing from YouTube itself. 1 Upload failed. 2 We are experiencing some problems, please try again. 3 You can only upload files of type PNG, JPG, or JPEG. 4 You can only upload files of type 3GP, 3GPP, MP4, MOV, AVI, MPG, MPEG, or RM. 5 You can only upload photos smaller than 5 MB. 6 You can only upload videos smaller than 600MB. Why can't Upload MP4 to YouTube Reason 1 MP4 is a container format which is commonly used to store video and audio. The audio and video can be encoded in different ways but it still is an .mp4 file. A rightsholder has 30 days to review a Content ID dispute, and 30 days to respond to an appeal of a rejected dispute. Instead of filing an immediate copyright takedown in response to a Content ID appeal, rightsholders can take advantage of a YouTube feature that allows them to schedule takedowns of videos. Your upload speed is related to your download speed. Uploads usually run at 10% of your download speed. Of course, the larger the file the longer it takes. For me, I have a good fast system running 3.2Ghz CPU, 2Gig Ram and have high speed adsl2+ internet. A 5 min video takes about 2 min at most to upload onto Youtube. A long time ago, YouTube had a strict maximum limit of 10 minutes for a video hosted on the site. You would often see series videos or long videos broken up and labeled sequentially, cut off a 9:59 every video just to make sure they pack as much content into the limit as possible. By default, you can upload videos that are up to 15 minutes long. Once you've verified your account, you can upload videos that are longer than 15 minutes long. The maximum file size you can upload to YouTube is 128GB. Query: how long can a youtube video be to upload",
"output": [
"By default, you can upload videos that are 15 minutes long."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0d36848a268244388fa731ecfffb9113",
"input": "The IRS states that returns can take up to 21 days to be approved from the date the return is accepted. At this point it's just a waiting game. Now it doesn't mean your return can't be approved earlier but there's no way to know as the process is not very transparent. If, and only if, it isn't approved by February 21st, then call the IRS. echang426 Filing a return through the mail is, of course, the slower of the two processes. For those who mail their federal return, the IRS will remit a tax refund within six weeks after they have been received the completed return. If you file electronically, you should receive your tax refund within three weeks. By eliminating mistakes, consumers can ensure that their refund is received in as timely a fashion as possible. 1 The most common mistakes, which can cause delays in receiving a refund, are listed below: 2 Social security number missing or incorrect. 3 Incorrect tax result, given reported income and filing status, was entered. The system provides personalized daily updates for taxpayers 24 hours after a return is e-filed or four weeks after the IRS has received a paper return. It tracks each refund’s progress through three stages: Return Received; Refund Approved; Refund Sent My ny state tax says my taxes are done being processed and i will recieve correspondence in 10 days about my refund does that mean i did not get approved Reply admin says: Hello, I submitted my refund via TurboTax on 01/28/13 at approximately 6 PM CST. It was accepted the next day by the IRS. Currently, Where's my refund says that the tax return was received and is processing. My question is, how long (many days) does it take for the status to go from Received/Accepted... show more Hello, I submitted my refund via TurboTax on 01/28/13 at approximately 6 PM CST. It was accepted the next day by the IRS. Currently, Where's my refund says that the tax return was received and is processing. My question is, how long (many days) does it take for the status to go from Received/Accepted... I submitted my refund via TurboTax on 01/28/13 at approximately 6 PM CST. Refunds take up to 30 days to be direct deposited and up to 60 days to be mailed. Mississippi: Check your refund status on the Mississippi Taxpayer Access Point Refund Search page. Their 24 hour refund number is 601-923-7801. E-filed refunds are issued within 14 business days while paper filed may take 8-10 weeks. After my taxes are approved how long does it take to get my refund. I filed my taxes on feb 13th and they were accepted on feb 15th, still not approved and no refund as of yet or no expected refund date? Irs website said refund was approved and sent and should be in bank on the 4th. i went through turbotax. will my refund be there on the 4th? Depending the on the filing you have done if e-filing and direct deposit IRS will receive it within 24 hours and the processing will take less than 21 days. You can check you refund status on the link above. For products purchased online: Depending on your bank, it may take 3 - 5 business days after a refund has been processed for it to post to your account. For products purchased from a retail store: 3 - 4 weeks after iolo receives the returned product. Note: For a detailed overview of iolo's terms and conditions for retail store returns, click here. iolo Knowledge Base Order/Sales Questions Query: how long after a refund is received does it get approved",
"output": [
"The IRS will remit a tax refund within six weeks after they have been received the completed return."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a537abc0e8904f95b55e632e8f34c6ed",
"input": "If your foreclosure occurred on one of these loans (FHA, VA or USDA), you might face an automatic three-year wait before being eligible for another. Much will depend on whether the default winds up reported to a database that tracks default on federal debt. Getting a VA loan after a foreclosure is possible. Despite their $0 down payment benefit, VA loans have been the most foreclosure-resistant mortgage product for most of the last eight years. Still, some veterans and military members do default on their hard-earned VA home loans. But military borrowers still have a shot at becoming homeowners after a VA home loan foreclosure. Understanding credit and VA loan entitlement are key parts of bouncing back. After Defaulting on a VA Loan. The reality is it’s possible to get another VA loan after experiencing a foreclosure, a short sale or a deed-in-lieu of foreclosure. You’ll typically need to wait two years in order to pursue a new mortgage. Some lenders, including Veterans United, don’t have a waiting period following a short sale in most cases Banks' policies vary, and your lender may require a waiting period of more than two years before financing your new VA loan. If you financed your foreclosed home using a VA loan, you must also repay any losses the government sustained during the foreclosure process before the VA will back your new mortgage. Lenders may have their own in-house requirements on top of that. With a Chapter 7 bankruptcy, the seasoning clock begins when the action is discharged. From that point, you’re typically looking at a four-year wait for conventional loans and a two-year wait for either FHA or VA financing. (The FHA’s short-term “Back to Work” program offers qualified borrowers the possibility of even swifter movement after both bankruptcy and foreclosure.) Chapter 13 bankruptcies can be a little different. Additional Concerns. Foreclosure is one of the most damaging entries that can appear on your credit report. As a result, you have no guarantee that your credit will recover enough to borrow again after two years. Lender requirements vary, but you must have a credit score of 620 to 680 before you qualify for a VA loan. Your credit must also reflect no late payments over the last 12 months. If you still have credit problems, your waiting period continues until you clear up your credit history enough to meet the VA's requirements. Your credit score is shot and it can be impossible to get credit. Some homeowners, no doubt, believe that the credit score hit is worth getting out from a deeply underwater mortgage. They may owe, say, $500,000 when their house value is only valued at $350,000. And, they figure, there's no way it will ever be worth what they owe so it's better to get out from underneath the burden. A: There is no wait to buy a property per se, as you can always pay with cash. However, if you need financing, the answer is it depends. If you walked away from your last home it could take as long as seven years for you to again be eligible for a new mortgage from Fannie Mae or Freddie Mac, but recent changes after the housing market meltdown may shorten that time considerably. Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac guidelines A foreclosure can knock anywhere from 85 to 160 points from your credit score. VA lenders will also typically require a two-year seasoning period following a foreclosure. Homeowners who lose an FHA loan to foreclosure may need to wait three years before securing a VA home loan. Many veterans are under the impression that having a VA loan foreclosed on means they’ve automatically lost access to their benefits. If you have gone through a foreclosure, you can get a new FHA mortgage loan after waiting three years. After a Chapter 7 bankruptcy, the waiting period is generally two years. If you file for Chapter 13 bankruptcy, you might be able to get a new FHA mortgage before you complete the plan. In order for a VA borrower to have full entitlement restored after foreclosure, he or she must repay the loss (the guarantied amount) suffered by the VA as a result of the foreclosure before being considered for another VA mortgage. Query: how long do i have to wait after a foreclosure to buy a house va",
"output": [
"VA lenders will also typically require a two-year seasoning period following a foreclosure."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-930e8ad0eeef4280a3003275b21ce6bc",
"input": "Based on a 26th-century artificially intelligent character in the Halo video game series, Cortana will debut as part of Windows Phone 8.1, the next big update for Microsoft’s mobile operating system. With all of that work ahead, it makes sense that the Cortana team will want to have a regular update schedule, and much like the Xbox Music app, it looks to be bi-monthly. In an interview over at Engadget with the Cortana team, updates to the Cortana system will evidently happen twice a month with the possibility for off-cycle updates “for things that are timely, urgent or especially badass. Ask Cortana anything: Snarky answers to 59 burning questions If nothing else, Windows 10's Cortana digital assistant proves she’s more fun than Siri and Google Now put together. Cortana has learned three languages in the latest Windows 10 update, which is available today for Insider members in the program's Fast ring. Cortana now suppor... Cortana has learned three languages in the latest Windows 10 update, which is available today for Insider members in the program's Fast ring. Cortana now supports Spanish (Mexico), Portuguese (Brazil) and French (Canada) languages, each with its own specialized flair. Cortana to be updated at least twice a month. Jun 5, 2014 · Hot! Microsoft's virtual assistant, Cortana, is on what might be the company's fastest update cycle. In a recent deep dive into the platform, Microsoft said that they will update Cortana twice a month and during special occasions, it could be updated more frequently than that. Ultimate List of Funny Cortana Replies Cortana might have been in works for a couple of years too long, but she has her sense of humor intact. Ever since Microsoft released the developer preview of Windows Phone 8.1, we’ve been stressing her out with our stupid questions, in a hope that Cortana slips up sometime. But according to Larry Heck, a researcher who contributed to the artificial intelligence underpinning Cortana, first impressions will quickly become outdated. Teach me: Microsoft says that its virtual assistant app, Cortana, will quickly get smarter thanks to analysis of data generated as people interact with it. That’s because Microsoft has designed Cortana to get significantly smarter as people use it. Heck claims that Microsoft’s commitment to that approach will allow its virtual assistant, currently described as a beta product, to come closer than competitors like Siri or Google Now to delivering the experience of interacting with a real person. You can't turn off Cortana in the Windows 10 Anniversary Update...but you can lessen her awareness. When John and Cortana crashed on Requiem, she initially tried to hide it from him, Cortana was becoming rampant as it has been eight years since she came into existence. She believed, however, that it may have been possible for Doctor Halsey to repair her due to the way she was created. Cortana plays a vital role to the long-term success of Windows Phone. The fledgling mobile operating system by Microsoft still lags far behind Google's Android and Apple's iOS software. Query: how long have cortana being updated?",
"output": [
"Cortana to be updated at least twice a month."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3aa1bd37f95d46b29485ca6748b2cb81",
"input": "I have read over and over that you can only file chapter 7 every 8 years, but I would like to know are there any exceptions to that rule. My family and I have tried hard to remain stable after being apart of Hurricane Katrina 2 years ago, but the cost of living in an expensive city and not receiving rental... The downside to this option is that if you received a Chapter 13 discharge, you must wait six years to file for Chapter 7 relief. However, the six years begins from the date you filed your first Chapter 13 petition. This chapter of the Bankruptcy Code generally provides for reorganization, usually involving a corporation or partnership. A chapter 11 debtor usually proposes a plan of reorganization to keep its business alive and pay creditors over time. People in business or individuals can also seek relief in chapter 11. You can file for bankruptcy twice or even three times, even if you have received a discharge. The key is that you will often have to wait a certain period after you have filed and have received a discharge, to file for bankruptcy again and get a full discharge. The debtor cannot file a Chapter 13 unless: (1) the debtor received a discharge under Chapter 7, 11 or 12 more than four years ago; or (2) the debtor received a discharge under Chapter 13 more than two years ago. To learn more about living a debt-free life, or to determine how you can file for bankruptcy, contact a local bankruptcy lawyer today. Tap to Call - (877) 250-8242 Find a Bankruptcy Lawyer Both judges and trustees have heard far worse stories than yours. You cannot file for Chapter 7 bankruptcy if you previously went through bankruptcy proceedings under Chapter 7 or Chapter 13 within the last six years. If you have already received a discharge in a Chapter 7 bankruptcy, you must wait eight years from the date you filed the previous case before you can file another Chapter 7 and receive a discharge. Chapter 13 to Chapter 13. By Steve Rhode. WRAL Reader Question. I have about $9600 in credit card debt that cost me $260 (minimum payment) Between my mortgage ($905) student loans ($605) Car and Ins ($360) and other expenses (utilities and tithes - I tithe 10% of my gross income $426 month). I'm over my income $500. How Often You Can File And Receive A Discharge of Debts (Time Between Bankruptcy Filings) Here is the definitive quick-reference guide to answer the question: Case to be filed–Chapter 7: You can receive a discharge of your dischargeable² debts unless: Query: how far apart can you file between bankruptcy",
"output": [
"If you have already received a discharge in a Chapter 7 bankruptcy, you must wait eight years from the date you filed the previous case before you can file another."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-51e1742aae2e40bdb35690288532c690",
"input": "I harvested my candy onions the 10th of Sept. 90% were softball size and bigger. Majority were over a pound, and many close to 2 lbs. cured them, and hung them in 5 lb. onion bags in the pump house at 42 degrees. It's now the 12th of Feb. I had a few sprout, but the rest are still solid. How to Grow Onions From Seed. Onions take a while to develop from seed. Sowing inside in January or February under growing lights then transplanting to the garden in early spring is the only way that I can grow onions from seed and have them mature in my zone 5 garden. ADAPTATION: Mini onions are smaller and earlier to bulb the further north they are grown. Suited to 40° and higher latitudes for pearl and cipollini onions for small to medium onions at lower latitudes. AVG. DIRECT SEEDING RATE: 5M/50', 1 oz./80', 13 oz./1,000', 34 lb./acre at 96 seeds/ft. in 4 wide bands, in rows 12 apart. SIZED SEEDS: All seeds are unsized. SEED SPECS: SEEDS/LB.: 113,700-134,300 (avg. 123,300). PACKET: 1,000 seeds. Plant onions sets (small bulblets) 3 to 4 months before the time you want to harvest mature bulbs; plant sets 3 to 4 weeks before you want to harvest green onions. Onion seeds are best started indoors: start seeds 4 to 6 weeks before the average last frost date in spring, and transplant them into the garden as soon as the soil can be worked. Lancastrian is a football shaped onion, that is crisp, sweet, 95 days to maturity. Copra is an early onion, with a medium size bulb, dark yellow skins, 104 days to maturity. Ailsa Craig Exhibition is a hugh, round, white, mild onion with yellow skins, 110 days to maturity. First edition is a medium size onion, yellow skins, 105 days to maturity. Short-day varieties of onions such as the Texas Supersweet that are grown in the South take 80 to 95 days to mature from seed. Long-day varieties such as Spanish onions that are grown in the North take 105 to 120 days to mature. For areas with shorter growing seasons, onion seeds can been sown indoors and transplanted at eight weeks. It is my first year trying onions, and have started both scallions and yellow onions from seed, indoors. They are in small plastic seed starting trays and growing under lights at about 75 degrees Farenheit. When starting seeds of other garden crops indoors under lights, the lights should be left on for 18-24 hours per day, but having them on that long for onion seedlings can affect the bulb set. Instead, leave them on for only about 12 hours per day. Plant onion seeds in clean nursery flats using sterile, seed-starting potting mix. The onion is a bulb-forming plant with long, tubular, deep, rich green leaves. They vary in size from the tiny green or spring onions to the large sweet Bermuda-type onion. Colors are white, yellow, and red. Bulb onions mature in response to changing amounts of daylight. The longer the plants grow before forming bulbs, the bigger and better those bulbs will be. In North America, days become shorter after the summer solstice (June 21st). Plants take around 100+ days to mature, so you'll need to better part of 4 months to get full grown onions, although the bulbs can be harvested before they are fully mature. For northern growers who are starting onion seeds inside: Query: how long for onion seeds to mature",
"output": [
"Onion seeds take eight weeks to mature."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c5f0fdece0ae482bbaacd8b0d04a15cf",
"input": "How long to fry chicken legs by: Naturally DubK My secret to crispy fried chicken legs....take a good pot or cast iron pot fill with vegetable oil half way I use a whole 42 oz bottle. Heat oil to the perfect temperature. Chicken wings or wingettes are deep-fried for 8 to 12 minutes, breasts and drumsticks for 12 to 15 minutes, and legs or thighs for 12 to 17 minutes. The U.S. Department of Agriculture states that all poultry should be cooked to a minimum internal temperature of 165 degrees Fahrenheit to avoid the risk of foodborne illness. Pour approximately 1/4 inch of oil in the skillet for unbreaded chicken legs, or 1/2 to 1 inch for breaded chicken legs. Give the oil at least 5 minutes to heat up before adding the chicken. If you have a candy thermometer, aim for an oil temperature of 350 degrees Fahrenheit. Allow the chicken to cook without touching it. After 5 minutes turn your chicken with tongs do not poke with a fork. Allow the chicken to cook on the other side for 5 more minutes then remove from oil and let rest for an additional 5 minutes. You are now ready to enjoy your Midwest Fried chicken with a southern twist. How To Cook Deep Fried Chicken by: Soul Food Chef Tina, deep fried chicken is juicy and delicious. There is really only a few secrets to cooking in a deep fryer. You must heat your cooking oil to the proper temperature and don't add to much meat and overcrowd your fryer. Start off by placing a few pieces of chicken into your hot cooking oil. Quick Answer. Chicken parts take anywhere from 8 to 17 minutes to cook properly in a deep fryer with a consistent cooking temperature of between 350 and 365 degrees Fahrenheit. Whole chickens are deep-fried for 4 to 5 minutes per pound at temperatures between 325 and 350 degrees Fahrenheit. Continue Reading Chicken parts take anywhere from 8 to 17 minutes to cook properly in a deep fryer with a consistent cooking temperature of between 350 and 365 degrees Fahrenheit. Whole chickens are deep-fried for 4... A: Chicken parts take anywhere from 8 to 17 minutes to cook properly in a deep fryer with a consistent cooking temperature of between 350 and 365 degrees Fahrenheit. Whole chickens are deep-fried for 4 to 5 minutes per pound at temperatures between 325 and 350 degrees Fahrenheit. If you are using frozen chicken legs, thaw them thoroughly before cooking, preferably in the refrigerator, which might take a day or two. Never cook chicken from a frozen state. If you have time, bring the chicken out of the refrigerator about 30 minutes before you begin cooking. How long to fry chicken legs. My secret to crispy fried chicken legs....take a good pot or cast iron pot fill with vegetable oil half way I use a whole 42 oz bottle. Heat oil to the perfect temperature. I do not have a thermometer I place the handle end of a wooden spoon right in the center of the oil after it has been heating for a couple of minutes. Query: how long fry chicken legs",
"output": [
"Chicken legs are fried for 12 to 15 minutes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1ddd100c80584f6a855d422781bda6f0",
"input": "20 blocks equals 1 mile, or rather 1/20 of a mile equals 1 block. However NYC blocks are not true units of measurements. …for instance blocks running west to east are 2 to three times longer than the blocks running south to north. For simplicity on average the South to North blocks are considered to be about 1 block long. How long is a mile wide tornado? It is unclear what you mean by how long a mile wide tornado produces damaging winds in a roughly circular diameter of one mile (1.6 km). Such large tornadoes tend to las … t longer than smaller ones, often more than half an hour. A mile by boat is the same length as a mile by car, foot or airplane: 5,280 feet. If you're asking how long it takes to go a mile by boat, that depends on the speed it is goin…g. Whoops - I think I misinterpreted your question, so I'm amending my answer. It’s easier to determine in Manhattan since all the blocks here are designed on a numbered grid. From Street to street, it’s 20 blocks to a mile. So from say, 40th and 3rd avenue to 60th and 3rd, it’s one single mile. Avenue blocks don’t follow that sort of conformity, are much longer, and so miles divided by avenues tends to be problematic, depending on through which part of town you’re walking or running. How long is a mile by boat? A mile by boat is the same length as a mile by car, foot or airplane: 5,280 feet. If you're asking how long it takes to go a mile by boat, that depends on the speed it is goin … On the Manhattan grid (i.e., generally above 4th St.), the rule of thumb is that 20 short blocks equal a mile. Short blocks are along avenues, going roughly north-south, from one (numbered) street to the next. A long block (along streets, between avenues, east-west) is about three short blocks. A mile is equivalent to: 8 furlongs. 1,760 yards. 5,280 feet. 63,360 inches. Going north and south, therefore crossing the numbered streets its 20 blocks to a mile. Going east and west is an entirely different matter, as the distance between the Avenues is much greater, and not regular. The widest part of Manhattan is 57th Street which is 3 miles from 12th Avenue to 1st Avenue. A mile is equivalent to: 8 furlongs 1,760 yards 5,280 feet 63,360 inches. One mile is equivalent to 1.60934 kilometres. In Manhattan, since everything is in a grid, twenty blocks is generally equivalent to a mile, going north to south or vice versa, or by the numbers (example being from 19th street to 39th street would be a mile). Query: how long is a mile in",
"output": [
"A mile is equivalent to 63,360 inches."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ccb81a86ef2844a3b930caa19ea7a9bf",
"input": "Here’s what you need to know to predict how long you’ll need to wait for your refund. Tax refunds: an overview. Filling out your annual tax return involves calculating how much you owe the government in taxes based on your earnings and which tax deductions and credits you are eligible to receive. Copyright © State of California You are leaving ftb.ca.gov We do not control the destination site and cannot accept any responsibility for its contents, links, or offers. Review the site's security and confidentiality statements before using the site. If you have any issues or technical problems, contact that site for assistance. Refund Processing Time. 1 E-filed tax returns with direct deposit – E-file with direct deposit is the fastest way to get your federal tax refund. 2 Mailed paper returns – Refund processing time is 6 to 8 weeks from the date the IRS receives your tax return. How long does it take to get the state of Massachusetts tax refund if you efile? It usually takes 3 to 6 days depending on the day and time you file. for instance, monday before 9am, youll get it between thursday and saturday after 3pm Some tax returns need extra review for accuracy, completeness, and to protect taxpayers from fraud and identity theft. Extra processing time may be necessary. 2. Check the status of your 2017 personal income tax refund. You can get an automatic 6-month extension (to October 15, 2018) of time to file your North Carolina tax return by filling out and mailing Form D-410. North Carolina does not accept federal extensions. If you cannot file your state tax return on time, North Carolina requires that you apply for an extension of time to file, whether or not you owe state tax. You do not have to attach the extension form to your NC state return. Quick Answer. Tax returns filed with the state by mail generally take about eight weeks to receive refunds, while returns sent in electronically take about three weeks. The refund disbursement time frame is different in each state, and other circumstances, such as volume of returns being processed, may hold up refunds. Refunds take up to 30 days to be direct deposited and up to 60 days to be mailed. Mississippi: Check your refund status on the Mississippi Taxpayer Access Point Refund Search page. Their 24 hour refund number is 601-923-7801. E-filed refunds are issued within 14 business days while paper filed may take 8-10 weeks. Are you wondering when you will get your state tax refund? Some states process refunds in days while others can take up to 16 weeks. Many tax filers know about the IRS “Where’s My Refund?” tool to learn the status of federal refunds. However, some don’t know where to check the status of a state refund. Query: how long does it take to get your state tax refund?",
"output": [
"It takes 3 to 6 days depending on the day and time you file to tex refunds."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-6f30895140d84477b5f8ae9dfab81023",
"input": "What Kind of Training Do Pediatric Heart Surgeons Have? Pediatric heart surgeons are medical doctors who have completed . At least 4 years of medical school ; A 5-year general surgical residency program ; A 2- or 3-year cardiothoracic (heart/chest) residency program that usually includes 6 months of training in pediatric heart surgery ; Two to 4 additional years of training in pediatric heart surgery ; Pediatric heart surgeons often spend the first 1 to 2 years after training serving on the ... Answer: Becoming a doctor or a surgeon is an honorable goal, but it is a long and challenging process, beginning with pursuing a bachelor's degree after high school. It is important to note that medicine, and especially surgery, is not a career you can enter quickly. As a pediatric surgeon, you are a trained general surgeon who specializes in performing surgeries on newborns, infants, children and teenagers. You talk with patients, consult other physicians and surgeons as needed, perform operations and monitor patient progress. Pediatric cardiovascular surgery. Pediatric cardiovascular surgery is surgery of the heart of children.The first operations to repair heart defects in children were performed by Clarence Crafoord in Sweden when he repaired coarctation of the aorta in a 12-year-old boy. Even by surgical standards, pediatric cardiothoracic surgeons undergo a lengthy period of training. It starts with four years of undergraduate education, followed by four years in medical or osteopathic college. After graduation, the aspiring surgeon serves in a general surgical residency for at least five years. After this comes a second residency of two to three years in cardiothoracic surgery, with at least six months in pediatric surgery. Finally, qualifying in pediatric cardiothoracic surgery requires another one to two years in a specialized fellowship. There are exceptions, OB/GYNs, for example, take a slightly different path to practice and extremely specialized surgeons, such as a pediatric heart transplant surgeon may train for as long as 10 or more years after medical school. When a Physician is Considered Fully Trained How long does it take to become a Pediatric doctor? It will take four years for the bachelor's degree with completion of all prerequisite coursework and four years of medical school. There will also be an additional three or mo … re years to complete the internship and residency requirements. Rotate through the major subspecialties in several different hospitals to get good exposure to orthopedic surgery. Fellowship (optional). (1 year) A one-year fellowship in a sub-specialty is an option for orthopedic surgeons to focus on sports medicine, pediatric orthopedics, or other specialties. Education & Training Pediatric Cardiothoracic Surgery is dedicated to educate and train future academic, clinical, and research leaders in pediatric cardiothoracic surgery. We are proud to have produced numerous nationally renowned Pediatric Cardiothoracic Surgeons and researchers to futher the continued excellence in patient care and research in our field. View All. Becoming an orthopedic surgeon takes a little time, but orthopedic surgery is a terrific medical specialty, and the education and training is rewarding. Difficulty: Hard. Time Required: 14 years. Here's How: Undergraduate Education. Query: how long does it take to be a pediatric cardiovascular surgeon",
"output": [
"It takes 4 years of medical school to be a pediatric cardiovascular surgeon."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-69aebfa60edd479b8cfb929c78343a3f",
"input": "Year 3.5: Refinish Tub By Myself Even though patching is a viable option, I decide to refinish the entire tub. I use a do-it-yourself kit to refinish the bathtub by myself over a weekend. Before and after surface restoration by Miracle Method. Professional bathtub resurfacing, countertop resufacing and bathroom tile and tub refinishing by Miracle Method is a proven restoration process that can add fifteen to twenty years of life to a bathtub. Before and after surface restoration by Miracle Method. Thanks, Laurie! We used a special tile refinishing kit from Lowe’s. {There’s only one kind that they carry.} We found it in the tub and tile section. =) So I decided not to have them do my tub, even though it is a bit uneven looking after 50-100 years of use. They offer a bunch of colors, and one of them matched my tub and vanity pretty well (Miracle Method Kohler White), so it was an easy choice. Some niggles. While they did an excellent job masking everything, there were some cases of overspray. This paint? goo? gunk?…whatever it is … is very interesting. It is self-leveling, so if you put on thin coats as directed it self-levels as it dries. It’s kind of like liquid rubber until it dries…and then it is like tile! ha! A miracle method, for sure! {It’s actually an epoxy.} Here’s our ugly green tile before…. My bathtub has been refinished before. This is not a problem. At least 20% of the bathtubs that I do are from other companies failed work or from companies that have gone out of business. Heiden Bathtub Refinishing will completely remove the old finish and start the refinishing process as if the tub had never been refinished before. What's New - The coating that scored the highest in overall performance November 2016. I have completed a 6 year evaluation of Zirlon Glaze and I feel that this coating has the potential for changing the tub and tile refinishing industry for several reasons. ★ Reviews On Miracle Method Tub Refinishing ★ Risk At 40 And Pregnant Miracle Method Reviews Reviews On Miracle Method Tub Refinishing Pregnancy After Miscarriage Risk At 40 And Pregnant By another trimester, the hormone changes will be stable along with the pregnant woman has adjusted herself just of the changes that her body heading to be through. ugly bathroom cultured marble sink shower bathtub mirrors- all of the cultured marble can be transformed to a beautiful stone look in 48 hrs by Miracle Method- and notice the stains on that tub- refinishing is the answer. It’s like a miracle method….this wonderful tile refinishing kit that can be found HERE. It like magic! Since we purchased our cottage…the dark, forest green tile in the master bath has been the bane of the bathroom’s existence! Plan A is to rip it out and put a claw foot tub in this neat little ‘cubby’ in the master bath. Query: how long to wait after tub refinishing miracle method",
"output": [
"A tub refinishing by Miracle Method is a proven restoration process that can add fifteen to twenty years of life to a bathtub."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-85fa91f249c54805ba0d089ce999eb53",
"input": "Working up the vomiting dog is a diagnostic challenge for veterinarians for several reasons, including: 1. The physical exam of a vomiting dog is often totally normal, especially if Fido feels icky because he licked something yucky in the back yard but is otherwise fine. 2. Sometimes an abrupt change in diet can cause vomiting. As long as your dog is acting normally and nothing else appears to be wrong with him, you can treat his vomiting by withholding his food for six to 12 hours if he is a small dog or puppy and for 12 to 24 hours for all other dogs. You should offer him small amounts of water during this time to avoid dehydration. Always have the number of your regular veterinarian, the ASPCA poison control and the number of your local 24-hour emergency clinic available. As a dog owner you know your dog best – if you suspect something is wrong do not hesitate to call. This one act can sometimes mean the difference between life and death. Should your dog be vomiting or have abdominal tenderness or swelling, call the vet. An odd cough at any time could be a sign of something serious such as collapsed trachea, heart problems, infection, etc. If you have a large dog and notice his abdomen is bigger than normal, bring him to a vet immediately. They will do an x-ray and if it is bloat, they will do surgery in which they unravel the stomach, check the organs for any necrosis, and attach the stomach to the dog's side to prevent it from twisting. If your dog continues to vomit, even after you have withheld food and water, seek immediate veterinary care. Also, if your dog exhibits other signs of illness along with the vomiting, such as diarrhea, fever, lethargy or depression, due not attempt to treat him at home. Chronic diarrhea means: 1 Diarrhea, with one or more of these symptoms: Watery stools. 2 The diarrhea could be continual. 3 The diarrhea can also be off and on, with some good days followed by some bad days. 4 Your dog might act sick during the worst bouts of diarrhea, while other dogs might act normal the whole time. Consider frequency, duration and character of vomiting, age and overall health of the dog. Other factors include appetite, attitude and other signs of illness, like diarrhea. Further things to consider would be whether the dog might have eaten som... An occasional, isolated bout of vomiting may not be of concern. However, frequent or chronic vomiting can be a sign of a more serious condition, such as colitis, intestinal obstruction or parvovirus. If your dog’s vomiting is not an isolated incident, please bring him to the vet right away for a complete examination and diagnostic testing. Don't induce more vomiting in an already vomiting animal, because you can incite a worse vomition response. If your pet has lost consciousness and/or if she's very weak or has trouble standing. Do not induce vomiting in this situation because aspiration pneumonia, which can result when an animal inhales vomit into its lungs, can become a secondary problem. Query: how long should you wait when dog is vomiting",
"output": [
"As long as your dog is acting normally and nothing else appears to be wrong with him, you can treat his vomiting by withholding his food for six to 12 hours if he is a small dog or puppy and for 12 to 24 hours for all other dogs."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-558f2fcbdfe4489eb1409475a9e3c8c1",
"input": "Like bread, potato chips may get stale past their expiration date, but they are still perfectly safe to eat. If they are in an open bag, they'll be alright for a few weeks, but if the bag is sealed, it can still be good months later ... as if you'd have an uneaten bag of chips laying around for that long. Say goodbye to days of throwing out your half-eaten tub of yogurt, because this is another dairy product you can eat after its package labels it expired. Open yogurt will spoil sooner than unopened yogurt, but sealed yogurt will usually last one to two weeks past the sell-by date. DRIED GOODS (including pasta, flour and rice) 1 How long they really last: Pasta and white rice last 8 to 10 years; white flour lasts 1 year from purchase date. Whole grains (brown rice and whole-wheat pasta and flour) keep in the pantry one to two months after the best-by date or a year in the freezer. DRIED GOODS (including pasta, flour and rice) 1 How long they really last: Pasta and white rice last 8 to 10 years; white flour lasts 1 year from purchase date. 2 Safety tip: Fresh, refrigerated pasta lasts a mere two to three days past the sell-by date. MEAT. 1 How long it really lasts: In the fridge, three to five days after purchase for whole cuts of meat, one to two days for ground meat or chicken; in the freezer, about six months for whole meat, four months for ground, nine months for poultry. 2 Safety tip: Cook meat thoroughly to kill bacteria. How long it really lasts: In the fridge, three to five days after purchase for whole cuts of meat, one to two days for ground meat or chicken; in the freezer, about six months for whole meat, four months for ground, nine months for poultry. Safety tip: Cook meat thoroughly to kill bacteria. Say goodbye to days of throwing out your half-eaten tub of yogurt, because this is another dairy product you can eat after its package labels it expired.. Open yogurt will spoil sooner than unopened yogurt, but sealed yogurt will usually last one to two weeks past the sell-by date. As long as it is stored in a cool, dry place, dried pasta can last years after its expiration date. Fresh pasta, on the other hand, does contain water, and spoils more easily, but it can still be good past its date as well (about two to three weeks, usually, as long as it doesn't have a spoiled odor to it). 4. Bread How to tell if it's still okay to eat expired eggs, dried goods, milk and meat. Plus: Video: How to Get the Most Out of Ground Beef » If you trash your grub as soon as the expiration date hits, you're not alone. If it smells bad, looks rotten, or otherwise doesn't seem right, then don't eat it. Never consume something you're unsure of. But don't waste food, either. There are plenty of things that are safe long after their sell-by dates. Maybe you aren't the type to eat around the mold, but here are 10 things you can safely eat past their expiration dates. 1. Query: how long you have to eat something after it expires",
"output": [
"A sealed yogurt will usually last one to two weeks past the sell-by date and fresh pasta does contain water, and spoils more easily, but it can still be good past its date as well about two to three weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4b458c7f486c436184b48d4d20fe15b3",
"input": "The Ultimate Guide to TSA Pre-Check. Updated 4 months ago. Book Your Lounge Now. In response to the attacks on September 11, 2001, the US government created the Transportation Security Administration (TSA) to develop policies to help secure nationwide transportation systems, including airports, highways, railroads, buses, and mass transit systems. If you do get approved for TSA Pre-Check, you can choose to receive your Known Traveler Number (KTN) either through the mail or online. When booking flights from airports that support Pre-Check, be sure to do so with an airline that TSA Pre-Check covers, and be sure to enter in your KTN. Your TSA Pre-Check eligibility is valid for 5 years, after which you will have to re-apply. Implementing a key component of the TSA’s intelligence-driven, risk-based approach to security, TSA PreCheck enhances aviation security by placing more focus on pre-screening individuals who volunteer to participate to expedite the travel experience. No, not all airports have a TSA PreCheck lane, and those that do might not have TSA PreCheck at every checkpoint. Learn more about participating Southwest Airlines airports or for more information on checkpoint locations and hours of operation, visit tsa.gov. After verifying whether or not your departure airport has an open TSA PreCheck lane at your security checkpoint, look for signs with the TSA PreCheck logo at the entrance to the checkpoint lanes. While it was initially provided at only 4 airports, the TSA Pre-Check program is now available in over 160 US airports. 1 While it was formerly available only for domestic flights within the United States, TSA Pre-Check has expanded its reach to include certain international flights departing from US airports. Eligibility for TSA Pre-Check. If you are a US citizen and active elite member of any of the partner airlines' Frequent Flyer Programs, you may be invited to opt-in for TSA Pre-Check. If you choose to do so, you will only be eligible to go through TSA Pre-Check when you are flying on that FFP's airline. In order to be eligible for TSA Pre-Check for all airlines that allow for the service, you must have a Known Traveler Number (KTN). Not sure where you're posting from but there's far fewer interview sites for Global Entry than for TSA Pre-check. Do a little looking around on the Global Entry site to see where your closest interview will take place. Took about 8 business days to get the letter with my Pre-check number. I looked up the TSA precheck office that was nearest me, made an appointment through the TSA site. (Find locations here) Since approximately 2000 people apply to TSA Pre-Check on a daily basis, it may be advisable to make an appointment to avoid long waiting times. In order to determine your eligibility for Pre-Check, the TSA uses your fingerprints to check against law enforcement, immigration, and intelligence databases. TSA pre check must be renewed every 5 years. I have a credit card that pays for TSA precheck, so my cost was zero. But I would have paid because it is a game changer. While domestically I have been automatically put in TSA pre-check when traveling solo, and that was nice, I don't see the advantage for everyone. Query: how long does it take to get your ktn number after it is showing eligibility determined",
"output": [
"It takes 5 years to get your KTN number after it is showing eligibility determined."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1f8ff6750e944dd69957e5601f7b8d01",
"input": "Published April 21, 2014 |. We all know how the story goes. You get a flat, put on your spare and drive off. Sometimes, people even forget that the spare tire is there instead of the real tire. Unfortunately, using a spare tire for too long can cause your car damage and put you in a risky situation. It is suggested to drive as little as possible on a spare tire. This of course doesn't apply if it is a full size spare tire, but a donut? its there to get you to the shop, … not drive around town for weeks. Book a service. 1 600+ car repair, maintenance & diagnostic services at your doorstep. 2 Use our easy diagnostic tool. We’ll guide you to the correct service or repair. 3 Track services, save quotes, get maintenance reminders & more. If you have owned the car long enough to have replaced the original tires, then the spare tire may be a different brand or type of tire, if you didn't buy 5 tires when you replaced the original set. Do realize, though, that tires don't last forever, even if they are in the trunk. Remember that a spare tire (other than a full size matching spare tire) is a temporary solution that should be used only to get you to a service station safely Spare Tire Storage & Use When choosing a spare tire, keep your vehicle's storage space in mind. You can usually store them in the trunk, the cabin, or on the outside of the vehicle. See our list of spare tire types above to get an idea on the amount of space required for each. Chances are, if you need to use your spare tire, you'll need to know how to change the flat. The mini spare had never been used, had no cracks and held air (60 psi). For the little such a tire is used, and the fact that it is not exposed to direct sunlight, it's safe to use as long as it hold air. But observe the 60/60. rule; no more than 60 mph and no further than 60 miles. Tags: are run flat tires better than spare tires?, flat tires, how far can I drive on a spare tire, how good are spare tires, I don't have a spare tire, is a spare tire good to go long distance on, Run Flat Tires, spare tires, what is a donut, what is a space saver, what is a spare tire, what to do with a spare tire How long can a spare tire be used? A donut specifically details the guidelines of its usage on the sidewall or rim of the spare tire. The general rule of thumb is a donut can only be used for 70 miles in distance at a top speed of 50 miles per hour. This is because there is very little tread on the tire, and it is more susceptible to road damage than a regular tire. Instead of asking “How long do spare tires last?,” you might be wondering if you even have a spare tire. A 2015 AAA study found that 30 million vehicles sold in the past 10 years did not have spare tires. How long do spare tires last? Most full-size spare tires are designed to last anywhere from seven to 10 years, according to John Paul. That said, drivers should never use a tire with visible damage, such as cracks in the sidewall, punctures, impact bulges or irregular tread wear – all of which are dangerous to drive on. Query: how long does temporary spare tire last",
"output": [
"Most full-size spare tires are designed to last anywhere from seven to 10 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-084e86e5294148f7ad161e9f11ab2bf5",
"input": "Chlorophyll: the pigment that gives plants their green color and allows them to absorb sunlight... more. Chloroplast: a part of a cell found in plants that converts light energy into energy plants can use (sugar). Other living organisms such as algae also have cells that contain chloroplasts. The Story of Chlorophyll and Chloroplasts Round, green chloroplasts fill the middle of a plant cell. Image by Kristian Peters. The Story of Chlorophyll and Chloroplasts Round, green chloroplasts fill the middle of a plant cell. The story of chlorophyll and chloroplasts. 1 Round, green chloroplasts fill the middle of a plant cell. Image by Kristian Peters. 2 This model of a chloroplast shows the stacked thylakoids. The space inside a thylakoid is called a lumen. 3 Plants that lose their leaves in the winter start breaking down chlorophyll in fall. Chlorophyll, a green pigment found in chloroplasts, is an important part of the light-dependent reactions. Chlorophyll soaks up the energy from sunlight. It is also the reason why plants are green. You may remember that colors are different wavelengths of light. Chlorophyll captures red and blue wavelengths of light and reflects the green wavelengths. show/hide words to know. 1 Chlorophyll: the pigment that gives plants their green color and allows them to absorb sunlight... 2 Chloroplast: a part of a cell found in plants that converts light energy into energy plants can use (sugar). Chlorophyll is a green pigment present in plants which facilitate the absorption of light from the sun. It has the ability to convert this light energy into a usable form which is utilized for various processes such as photosynthesis by virtue of which the green plants prepare their own food. Nutritional Value of Chlorophyll. It is a pigment found in plants, which is packed with a range of powerful nutrients. It is a good source of vitamins such as vitamin A, vitamin C, vitamin E, vitamin K and beta-carotene. Chloroplasts take the energy from the sunlight and use it to make plant food. The food can be used immediately to give cells energy or it can be stored as sugar or starch. If stored, it can be used later when the plant needs to do work, like grow a new branch or make a flower. Chloroplasts Up Close Inside chloroplasts are special stacks of pancake-shaped structures called thylakoids (Greek thylakos = sack or pouch). show/hide words to know. 1 Chlorophyll: the pigment that gives plants their green color and allows them to absorb sunlight... more. 2 Chloroplast: a part of a cell found in plants that converts light energy into energy plants can use (sugar). Other living organisms such as algae also have cells that contain chloroplasts. Chlorophyll works at molecular and cellular levels and has the ability to regenerate our body. Chlorophyll is rich in live enzymes which helps in cleansing of blood and enhances the ability of the blood to carry more oxygen. Query: how does chlorophyll work",
"output": [
"chlorophyll gives plants their green color and allows them to absorb sunlight."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-2f89de88a8dc43f1941116a13e5bc27d",
"input": "How To Save Undamaged Food Packages Exposed to Flood Water. 1 Remove the labels, if they are the removable kind, since they can harbor dirt and bacteria. 2 Brush or wipe away any dirt or silt. 3 Thoroughly wash the cans or retort pouches with soap and water, using hot water if it is available. Follow these steps to keep your WATER SAFE during and after flood conditions. 1 Only use water from a safe source for drinking and washing or preparing food. 2 Use bottled water that has not been exposed to flood waters, if it is available. 3 If you don’t have bottled water, you should boil or disinfect water to make it safe. In the refrigerator, highly perishable food will usually be keep safely cold for about 4 hours, depending on the kitchen temperature. If the power will be out longer, place dry or block ice in the refrigerator to keep it as cold as possible. After Power Outage. NEVER taste a food to determine its safety. That will keep the cold in better. A chest freezer will keep cold in better than an upright. When you open an upright, it loses cold air due to gravity. (heat rises, cold descends). A chest keeps most of that cold air in it. And if you open a freezer a lot when the power is out, it will thaw faster. I would guess about 2 days is safe, but as long as the food is frozen, I would continue to trust it. When it starts getting a little soft, then you better either plan to eat a lot, or throw it out, or get a generator. This helps the food stay cold longer. Have coolers on hand to keep refrigerated food cold if the power will be out for more than 4 hours. Purchase or make ice cubes in advance, and freeze gel packs ahead of time. Store all of these in the freezer for future use in the refrigerator or in coolers. It might last about a day or two, depending on how long before the power went off it was last opened, as well as how long you keep it closed after. It depends on the kind of food. If is rice almost 24 hours, if is milk no more than 6 hours, cheese 2 days. How i said before it depends in the kind of food and most important of all how many times do you open and close the refrigerator all that I said before is if you keep the refrigerator close. When the Power Goes Out . . . Here are basic tips for keeping food safe: Keep the refrigerator and freezer doors closed as much as possible to maintain the cold temperature. The refrigerator will keep food cold for about 4 hours if it is unopened. Typically three days, if you don't open it at all. However, in the middle of winter if your power goes out and the ambient temp in the house is below 32 degrees F, the food will last and last, as I found out when our house caught fire in December 2004. Refrigerated food should be safe as long as the power was out for no more than 4 hours and the refrigerator door was kept shut. Discard any perishable food (such as meat, poultry, fish, eggs, or leftovers) that has been at temperatures above 40° F for 2 hours or more (or 1 hour if temperatures are above 90º F). Prepare Yourself Before Power Emergencies. 1 Make sure you have appliance thermometers in your refrigerator and freezer. 2 Freeze containers of water for ice to help keep food cold in the freezer, refrigerator, or coolers in case the power goes out. If your normal water supply is contaminated or unavailable, the melting ice will also supply drinking water. Freeze refrigerated items such as leftovers, milk, and fresh meat and poultry that you may not need immediately. Query: how long will food stay frozen when my power goes.out",
"output": [
"The refrigerator will keep food cold for about 4 hours if it is unopened."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-85112175cde34a8889bdc13f6fcc9bca",
"input": "The results are consistent with other research suggesting that the human brain continues to grow and mature right up to the point when we become adults and even beyond. In another study, researchers found that humans don't really develop the ability to handle multiple pieces of information at once until about the ages of 16 or 17. The brain of an 18-year-old college freshman is still far from resembling the brain of someone in their mid-twenties, said Craig Bennett, a graduate student who was involved in the new research. A group of 17 older students, ranging in age from 25 to 35, served as a control group for comparison. The results showed that the freshmen students' brains underwent significant changes and were very different from that of the older adults. The changes were localized to the cingulate, caudate and insula regions of the brain. Brains of Young Adults Not Fully Mature. 1 Why Teens are Lousy at Chores. 2 Study: Your Brain Works Like the Internet. 3 Children Beat Adults in Memory Contest. 4 Mental Exercise Nearly Halves Risk of Dementia. 5 Higher Education Fuels Stronger Belief in Ghosts. Neuroscientists are confirming what car rental places already figured out — the brain doesn't fully mature until age 25. Up until this age, the prefrontal cortex — the part of the brain that helps curb impulsive behavior — is not yet fully developed. Some scientists say this could illuminate a potential factor behind a recent spate of acts of mass violence, almost all of which have been perpetrated by men between the ages of 20 and 30. At what age is your brain fully developed? Brain Development. Humans are not born with fully developed brains. As we age, our brains are constantly adapting and growing based on our experiences by generating new neural pathways and synapses. However, there is an age at which most people's brains are fully developed. Answer and Explanation: Until the age around 25 your brain is not fully developed. The exact age varies person to person, but it's around 25 The study will be detailed in an upcoming print issue of the journal Human Brain Mapping. 1 Why Teens are Lousy at Chores. 2 Study: Your Brain Works Like the Internet. 3 Children Beat Adults in Memory Contest. 4 Mental Exercise Nearly Halves Risk of Dementia. 5 Higher Education Fuels Stronger Belief in Ghosts. Brains of Young Adults Not Fully Mature. At an age when Americans are first considered adults, their brains are still maturing, a new study suggests. Researchers at Dartmouth College scanned the brains of nineteen 18-year-old students who had moved more than 100 miles to attend school. The age your brain matures at everything — it isn't even fully developed until age 25 Neuroscientists are confirming what car rental places already knew — the brain doesn't fully mature until age 25. Logo for Business Insider over a transparent background. Query: at what age is your brain fully developed",
"output": [
"Your brain is fully developed around 25 years of age."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-013f804762024596b9418ea3f24794cb",
"input": "Salary is a paymen which is paid by employer to the employee for what he was employed for after every month. Wage is a payment which is paid by employer to the employee for what he was employed on regular or weekly or daily basis depending on the hours worked by the employee. Those hours are multiplied by the fix rate and paid to the employee. Topics: Economics and Personal Finances, Socioeconomic Class. 1 Richard Fry is a senior researcher focusing on economics and education at Pew Research Center. 2 Rakesh Kochhar is an associate director of research at Pew Research Center. There is no federal minimum wage for a Class B driver, other than minimum-wage standards that apply to all jobs. However, depending on geographic location and experience as a professional driver, Class B drivers can generally expect to earn more than minimum wage. Average Wages The median annual wage for heavy and tractor-trailer truck drivers was $38,200 in 2012, according to the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics. If, under the employment agreement, a salary sufficient to meet the minimum wage requirement in every workweek is paid as straight time for whatever number of hours are worked in a workweek, the regular rate is obtained by dividing the salary by the number of hours worked each week. In no case may the regular rate be less than the minimum wage required by the FLSA. If a salary is paid on other than a weekly basis, the weekly pay must be determined in order to compute the regular rate and overtime pay. If the salary is for a half month, it must be multiplied by 24 and the product divided by 52 weeks to get the weekly equivalent. A wage is monetary compensation (or remuneration, personnel expenses, labor) paid by an employer to an employee in exchange for work done. Payment may be calculated as a fixed amount for each task completed (a task wage or piece rate), or at an hourly or daily rate (wage labour), or based on an easily measured quantity of work done. Wages are part of the expenses that are involved in running a business. Most Emailed Comparisons. 1 Difference Between Vitamin D and Vitamin D3 - 118 emails. 2 Difference Between Goals and Objectives - 102 emails. 3 Difference Between LCD and LED Televisions - 89 emails. 4 Difference Between Islam and Muslim - 87 emails. 5 Difference Between Objective and Subjective - 66 emails. Key Differences Between Salary and Wages. Following are the major differences between salary and wages: Salary is the fixed amount of compensation which is paid for the performance of an employee. Wage is the variable amount of compensation which is paid on the basis of hours spent in finishing a certain amount of work. Because the paycheck needs to be computed based on the actual hours worked, the employee earning wages will likely receive her or his paycheck five days after the work period. Salary is best associated with employee compensation quoted on an annual basis. For example, the manager of the assembly plan might earn a salary of $120,000 per year. If the salaried manager is paid semi-monthly (perhaps on the 15th and last day of each month), her or his paycheck will show gross salary of $5,000 for the half-month. roll tax base is wages earned by individuals working in the United States. 1 The wage bases for those taxes are not the same. Some wage income that is subject to payroll taxes is exempt from income tax. Some wage income that is subject to income tax is exempt from payroll taxes. Moreover, Social Security and Medicare payroll taxes each cover different categories of work-ers. Hence, not only are tax bases different in an y given year, but they may also grow at differ- Query: how does a wage differ from a salary? in class terms?",
"output": [
"Salary is the fixed amount of compensation which is paid for the performance of an employee. Wage is the variable amount of compensation which is paid on the basis of hours spent in finishing a certain amount of work."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-587df43b03564272b80c56937c7abf48",
"input": "Cook. 15 m; Ready In. 20 m; Preheat oven to 350 degrees F (175 degrees C). Line a baking sheet with aluminum foil. Arrange bacon on baking sheet in a single layer with the edges touching or slightly overlapping. Bake in preheated oven to desired degree of doneness, 10 to 15 minutes. Remove bacon from the baking sheet with tongs or a fork, and drain on a paper towel-lined plate. How To Cook Bacon on the Stovetop What You Need. Ingredients Bacon Equipment A frying pan Tongs Brown paper bag or paper towels on a plate Glass or metal container for the drippings Bulb baster (optional) Instructions. 1. Start with a cold pan. Bacon should be started in a cold pan, so before you turn on the heat, lay out your strips on the pan. Cook the remaining bacon in batches. If you have more bacon to cook, you can simply drain the excess grease and add more bacon as you remove pieces. If the pan has developed a browned crust on the bottom, let the pan cool down and wipe it clean before continuing. Step 1, Take your bacon out of the fridge to warm up. When cold bacon hits a hot pan it doesn't have time to naturally heat up, allowing the grease to leave the meat and cook the bacon. Take your strips out of the fridge for 5-6 minutes before you start cooking.Step 2, Lay the bacon on a cool frying pan or griddle. Lay the bacon out on the pan so it is flat and none of the edges overlap. Heavy bottom pans, like cast iron, are best, but any pan will work. Don't try and cook only 1 ... 1 Preheat oven to 350 degrees F (175 degrees C). Line a baking sheet with aluminum foil. 2 Bake in preheated oven to desired degree of doneness, 10 to 15 minutes. Remove bacon from the baking sheet with tongs or a fork, and drain on a paper towel-lined plate. You might also like Most restaurants cook bacon in an oven, as it is easier to clean up, leaves the stove top open, and, most importantly, allows you to cook a lot of bacon very quickly. It only takes 10-12 minutes, and you can easily make a whole pound at once. Bacon for the Family or a Crowd - Directions. 1 Preheat oven to 350 degrees F (175 degrees C). 2 Bake in preheated oven to desired degree of doneness, 10 to 15 minutes. Nothing beats the smell of bacon in the morning. There is a variety of ways to cook bacon depending on your recipe, preferences, or health needs, but they all taste great. Cooking bacon doesn't need to be difficult, and even making your own from pork belly is easy for the home chef. Step 1, Preheat oven to 350 degrees F (175 degrees C). Line a baking sheet with aluminum foil. Arrange bacon on baking sheet in a single layer with the edges touching or slightly overlapping. Step 2, Bake in preheated oven to desired degree of doneness, 10 to 15 minutes. Remove bacon from the baking sheet with tongs or a fork, and drain on a paper towel-lined plate. Bacon for the Family or a Crowd - Directions. 1 Preheat oven to 350 degrees F (175 degrees C). Line a baking sheet with aluminum foil. 2 Bake in preheated oven to desired degree of doneness, 10 to 15 minutes. Remove bacon from the baking sheet with tongs or a fork, and drain on a paper towel-lined plate. Query: how long bake bacon?",
"output": [
"Bake bacon for 10 to 15 minutes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-caab854c99f144b5a96c56e6dc7198fa",
"input": "How long will I be sick with Mono? If you have a fever it will usually go away within 10 days. If you have an enlarged liver or spleen, it will usually become normal in 4-6 weeks. Other Mono symptoms go away after 2-4 weeks (the length of time varies for each person), but you may continue to feel very tired for 3-6 months, or even longer. What is the treatment for Mono? Unfortunately there isn’t a medicine or pill that can get rid of Mono, but there are things you can to do feel better ... Health related question in topics Conditions Illness.We found some answers as below for this question How long is someone with mono contagious,you can compare them. Someone can be infected and contagious for 4-7 weeks before they even start to show symptoms of mono. How long is someone with mono contagious. Health related question in topics Conditions Illness .We found some answers as below for this question How long is someone with mono contagious,you can compare them. Someone can be infected and contagious for 4-7 weeks before they even start to show symptoms of mono. ChaCha on! [ Source: http://www.chacha.com/question/how-long-is-someone-with-mono-contagious ] EBV is a very common virus that many people are exposed to when they’re young. The greatest number of people get Mono when they are between 15 and 17 years old. Some people with EBV might not have symptoms, but may still carry the virus and infect other people, causing them to develop Mono. How does someone get Mono? This test can stay positive for a year after mono so if your HCP is not sure about whether you have mono, he/she may order a blood test that can show whether you have antibodies against EBV (Epstein Barr Virus) which case mono. How long will I be sick with Mono? If you have a fever it will usually go away within 10 days. If you have an enlarged liver or spleen, it will usually become normal in 4-6 weeks. Other Mono symptoms go away after 2-4 weeks (the length of time varies for each person ... Children should stay away from a child diagnosed with mono only for the time that the child is feeling ill. Generally, when children have fever and feel fatigued, they should not play with other children. People also view. 1 Why would blood be in urine. 2 How long is someone with mono contagious. 3 What Is the best way to get rid of hick ups. 4 What is the best way to stop hic-ups. 5 Can constipation cause nausea. 6 How do i unclog my nose. 7 When will my acne go away. 8 What are tension headaches and how long do they last. 9 What are the symtoms of ADD. http://www.askmehelpdesk.com/medical-conditions-diseases/how-long-am-contagious-mono-399819.html. Funny that it is called the kissing disease, and as you know it isnt pleasant to have, if you had all the symptoms, one of them being the heaviest sorest headlache of your life. From the time they become infected with it but mono goes into an incubation period of 4 to 7 weeks when you first get it. So when you first get it, you won't know. some people can carry the virus without having any symptoms of mono, so they... Answers for How long is someone with mono contagious:Someone can be infected and contagious for 4-7 weeks before they even start to show symptoms of mono. ChaCha on! Health Questions Query: how long do i stay away from people when i have mono",
"output": [
"Someone can be infected and contagious for 4 to 7 weeks, so you should stay away from people for 4 to 7 weeks when you have Mono."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1fe271c2777a4c36a9ea3509b9d61ba8",
"input": "Uranus’ rings weren’t discovered until 1977, because they are made out of material that is extremely dark. Half way through Uranus’ orbit (every 42 years), the angle between Uranus and Earth lines up in such a way so as to allow us to see Uranus’ rings edge-on from Earth. Figure 1: This infrared image of the dark side of the rings was taken by the Keck Observatory in 2007. Uranus rotates once every 17 hours 14 minutes and 24 seconds = 62 064 seconds = one Uranus day. One year on Earth is 365.25 days = 31 557 600 seconds. One Earth Year/(One Uran … us day)=508.5 It takes 508.5 Uranus days for the Earth to go around the Sun once. Since a year on Uranus, one rotation around the Sun, is 84.3 Earth years the Uranus year has (84.3*508.5) 42 866 Uranus days! Earth years for uranus to complete its orbit this is one 'year'. 718 the length of our day, or 17 hrs 13 mins 55. Voyager 2 is a space probe launched by nasa on august 20, 1977, to study the outer planets. Because of this, mercury's day from sunrise to sunset is 176 earth days long. How long is one day in uranus planet answers. Venus' day is the equivalent of 243 earth days, while it's year 225 days 23 jan 2016 since it takes 58. During parts of its orbit one or other the poles directly face sun which means planet gets uranus—that is almost twenty times as long it takes sunlight to reach earth!. An orbit by Uranus takes 30,800 Earth days (84.3 Earth years, each having 365.25 Earth days). However, a day on Uranus is only 17.24 hours long, so a Uranus year consists of 42,877 Uranian days. *Conflicting figures will result from application of non-Julian years for Earth, or the synodic period of Uranus's orbit, which is 369.66 Earth days. The name Uranus was finally agreed on by everybody in the mid 1800’s. How long are its years and days? Since Uranus is so far away from the Sun, it takes it a very long to to go around the Sun once. A year on Uranus, the amount of time it takes for this trip, is 84 Earth years. A day on Uranus, which is the amount of time it takes for the plant to spin around, or rotate once, is shorter than one day on Earth. The blue-green planet spins around once in a little over seventeen hours. A day on 16 mar 2015 titania, an airless moon of uranus, is cold and its 84 years long. Interestingly the length of a day on mercury is 58 days and 15 hours in earth time. System, one would expect that a day on jupiter last long time. A planet's day is the time it takes the planet to rotate or spin once on its axis. Uranus rotates faster than Earth so a day on Uranus is shorter than a day on Earth. A day on Uranus is 17.24 Earth hours while a day on Earth is 23.934 hours. However, Uranus spins backwards compared to Earth and most of the other planets. Remember that Uranus’ ‘year’ is 84 years long - imagine having 42 years of your life spent in sunlight, and the other half in the dark! The sideways tilt of Uranus also creates interesting weather and cloud patterns that astronomers are interested in studying. While earth takes 365 days to make one circuit, the closest planet, mercury, only venus and uranus both rotate clockwise, all other planets day on mercury is same as 59 earth, year an 23 hours 56 minutes long it. Query: how long is a year on uranus in days",
"output": [
"Uranus ‘year’ is 84 years long."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-488befe4f2e546e3a129272b89492728",
"input": "Pinochet arrested in London. General Augusto Pinochet, the former Chilean dictator who presided over a 17-year reign of terror and ordered foreign assassinations, was arrested at a London hospital on Friday night by police acting on a request from Spain. Former Chilean Dictator Augusto Pinochet Dies Dec. 10, 2006 General Augusto Pinochet, who ruled Chile as a dictator for 17 years, is dead. He led the military coup that overthrew Chile's elected socialist president, Salvador Allende, in 1973. He was ruthless in eliminating his political opponents in Chile, and ultimately was held responsible for the torture and deaths of thousands of people. Augusto Pinochet Ugarte (born November 25, 1915) joined the Chilean army in 1935. He rose through the ranks and was appointed Commander in Chief by President Salvador Allende in 1973. A month later, Pinochet led the military coup that overthrew Allende. After 25 years in power, he was put under arrest, but died in 2006, before he could be tried for alleged human rights violations. Profile Augusto Pinochet: Villain to Some, Hero to Others General Augusto Pinochet, who ruled Chile as a dictator for 17 years, is dead. He led the military coup that overthrew Chile's elected socialist president, Salvador Allende, in 1973. He was ruthless in eliminating his political opponents in Chile, and ultimately was held responsible for the torture and deaths of thousands of people. Augusto Pinochet. Augusto Pinochet, the son of a customs official, was born in Chile on 26th November 1915. Educated by conservative Marist priests he was twice rejected by Chile's military college. He was eventually accepted and he graduated in 1937 as an infantry officer. Chilean dictator Augusto Pinochet overthrew the Allende government in 1973 and stayed in power until 1998. He was never tried for alleged human rights abuses. Pinochet must now give account for more than 3,000 deaths, exiles and tortures in the 17 years of his dictatorship. Pinochet's arrest is the culmination of a week of high-level police and diplomatic activity between London and Madrid. Saturday 17 October 1998 20.29 EDT First published on Saturday 17 October 1998 20.29 EDT. General Augusto Pinochet, the former Chilean dictator who presided over a 17-year reign of terror and ordered foreign assassinations, was arrested at a London hospital on Friday night by police acting on a request from Spain. The arrest caused tension between UK and Chile, and civil unrest in Chile between Pinochet supporters and opponents. At the beginning of 2000, Pinochet remained under house arrest in the UK, pending the outcome of legal procedures, but the UK government returned him to Chile on the grounds of ill health. Augusto Pinochet Augusto Pinochet, the son of a customs official, was born in Chile on 26th November 1915. Educated by conservative Marist priests he was twice rejected by Chile's military college. Query: how long was augusto pinochet a dictator",
"output": [
"Augusto Pinochet ruled Chile as a dictator for 17 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-2630c88929574258b058597a56d0efe4",
"input": "Any activity can count as cardio/aerobic exercise as long as it meets the 3 requirements above (frequency of 3-5 days a week, moderate intensity, and lasts at least 20 minutes per session). It’s important to not confuse “activity” with “exercise.” Not everything you do that’s activity is the same thing. Adults should get at least 150 minutes of moderate-intensity exercise per week. 1 Exercise recommendations can be met through 30-60 minutes of moderate-intensity exercise (five days per week) or 20-60 minutes of vigorous-intensity exercise (three days per week). Use each of the methods periodically to add variety to your workouts. 1 Continuous training is the most common method of aerobic exercise. It involves sustaining one exercise intensity for several minutes 20-60 minutes (or more for long-distance training) at a time. Performing the recommended 150 minutes per week of cardio exercises, 30-60 minutes of low to moderate intensity exercise per day for 5 days or 20-30 minutes of vigorous-intensity exercise 3 times per week is enough to reap the benefits and provide you with noticeable results. Check with your doctor before starting an exercise program. 1 Get more about exercise safety tips for beginners. 2 Choose an activity you enjoy. You are more likely to stick with it. 3 Always warm up for at least 5-10 minutes before starting your activity. 4 Start slowly and listen to your body. Go at a pace that feels good to you. Each week you can increase speed or duration, but do not increase it by more than 5-10% each week. As your fitness level increases gradually, increase the number of sessions per week and the intensity or length of the sessions until you are performing 3-5 sessions of 60 minutes a week at a moderate to high intensity. Continuous training is the most common method of aerobic exercise. 1 It involves sustaining one exercise intensity for several minutes 20-60 minutes (or more for long-distance training) at a time. 2 Interval training involves alternating between higher and lower intensity intervals throughout one workout. Frequency: Number of aerobic exercise sessions per week. Aim for a minimum of 3 days per week with no more than 2 days off between sessions. Gradually work your way up to 5 or 6 days per week. Frequency is especially important when it comes to weight loss since more cardio sessions will help you burn more calories. Give yourself at least 1 to 2 days off from aerobic exercise each week. Intensity: How hard you should exercise during each session Aerobic exercise should take place at a “moderate” intensity level (not too easy, not too hard). Here are some additional benefits of aerobic exercise: 1 Reduce belly fat. 2 Promotes brain growth. 3 Prevents stress. 4 Promotes focus. 5 Interrupts anxiety. 6 Regulates depression. How Much Aerobic Exercise Should You Do? When considering the guidelines for aerobic exercise, keep the FITT principles in mind (Frequency, Intensity, Time and Type). Frequency: Number of aerobic exercise sessions per week Aim for a minimum of 3 days per week with no more than 2 days off between sessions. Query: how long should you perform aerobic exercise to obtain cardio benefit",
"output": [
"Adults should get at least 150 minutes of moderate-intensity exercise per week."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ee52fcd563d740b8b3d5030951d008ac",
"input": "How long does stomach ulcer take to heal? The good news, stomach ulcer is treatable. Even new treatments are more effective to make the ulcer heal more quickly. But how long does it take to heal? The answer can vary from case to case, which is usually dependent on several factors. The main ones are the cause and severity of the ulcer. What kind of treatment you take can also have an effect! December 12, 2016/. … Continued …. You don’t take the medications as well as directed. For example, you may stop taking your antibiotics early. Your bacterial infection is resistant to your antibiotics. You continue regularly using painkillers that cause increased risk of ulcers. Poor lifestyles such as smoking and abusing alcohol may also have an effect. If there is another infection (other than H-pylori infection). If you have other medical conditions such as Zollinger-Ellison syndrome (it can cause extreme overproduction of acid in the stomach), Crohn’s disease (it can lead to ulcer-like sores), or stomach cancer. i have more ulcers on my mouth, even in my tongue, i even have that also before the ulcers in my throat, but the worst thing in me now is that last june i started put braces , my ulcers does not heal until now, anybody can help me what to do? last month after i checked with my ENT, after a week it was healed, but then it is only for one wk , since june until now my ulcers come and go> any advice ? The fourth thing is genetics – some families are more disposed to ulcers than others and there isn't a lot you can do about that. Finally, stress is controversial, in that it isn't clear how much of a factor it is. Certainly sudden severe stress, like a car accident can cause an ulcer quickly but on the longer time scale the picture isn't so clear. Re: How long does it take for ulcers to heal? Your description of your problem pretty much sums up exactly what I have been experiencing. I am a 22 year old college student, and these symptoms have been increasing steadily for the past year. Ulcers caused by a medication should begin healing shortly after you stop taking the drug. Anti-acid medicine may be used for two to six weeks to help healing and relieve pain. Ulcers caused by H. pylori can heal after the bacteria are killed. Typically, you will take antibiotics along with acid-suppressing medicine for two weeks. Then you may take acid-suppressing medication for another four to eight weeks. Gastric ulcers tend to heal more slowly than duodenal ulcers. Uncomplicated gastric ulcers take up to two or three months to heal completely. Duodenal ulcers take about six weeks to heal. An ulcer can temporarily heal without antibiotics. But it is common for an ulcer to recur or for another ulcer to form nearby, if the bacteria are not killed. In fact, peptic ulcer is pretty common in elderly people who usually need to take certain pain killers on a regular basis. The major steps of the treatment plan The core of the treatment is determined based on the trigger factor of the disease. Ulcer Facts. 1 Most ulcers are caused by an infection, not spicy food, acid or stress. 2 The most common ulcer symptom is burning pain in the stomach. 3 Your doctor can test you for H. pylori infection. 4 Antibiotics are the new cure for ulcers. 5 Eliminating H. pylori infections with antibiotics means that your ulcer can be cured for good. : Peptic ulcer disease is fairly common and with treatment it tends to stay at bay for long period of time. NSAID group is notoriously famous in casing gastritis and other similar peptic problems. Taking medicines for 4 weeks usually gives the stomach ulcers time to heal and be able to withstand the usual acid attack in the stomach. Twenty-five million Americans suffer from ulcers. An ulcer is a sore or hole in the lining of the stomach or duodenum (the first part of the small intestine). People of any age can get an ulcer and women are affected just as often as men. What causes ulcers? Helicobacter pylori (H. pylori) is a bacterium that lives on the lining of the stomach. Query: how long does it take a peptic ulcer to heal",
"output": [
"It takes 4 weeks for a peptic ulcer to heal."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-241713efa12b4e40a6df630a5eb1bb6b",
"input": "Tina Turner still haunted by marriage to Ike Tina Turner still haunted by marriage to Ike HER ex-husband Ike Turner died more than five years ago but rock and roll legend Tina Turner remains haunted by their dysfunctional marriage. They eventually married, in Tijuana in 1962, though Ike was still married to another woman at the time. At various times both Ike and Tina have described their marriage as less than ideal. Even though they were not yet married, they first recorded as Ike and Tina Turner in 1960 after a singer failed to appear for a session. Tina stood in for the missing singer, and the song, A Fool in Love, became a hit in 1960 (#27 pop, #2 R&B). And the newlyweds will cement their union this weekend at a Buddhist ceremony this weekend in Zurich, which Turner has called home for the past 15 years. Newlyweds: Tina Turner, 73, is said to have wed her 57-year-old German toyboy Erwin Bach in Switzerland. Turner and Bach met back in 1985 at a record label party in London and have been together ever since. The couple moved to Switzerland in 1994 for Bach's business. In January of this year, the Proud Mary singer began applying for Swiss citizenship. Tina Turner and her longtime boyfriend Erwin Bach have finally gotten married! The 73-year-old singer and her 57-year-old German-born record executive beau tied the knot in a quiet civil ceremony at Lake Zurick in Küsnacht, Northern Switzerland a few days ago, municipal official Hannes Friess confirms to E! News. Ike Turner and his wife Tina were first known for their late-1960s and early-1970s recordings and their soul revue. Prior to that, however, Ike was well established as a seminal figure in the early years of rock & roll as both a performer and talent scout. The Simply The Best singer, 73, has revealed that Ike, whose abuse of her was documented in 1993 film What’s Love Got To Do With It starring Angela Bassett, changed her name from Anna Mae Bullock to Tina Turner so he could always own her. Tina Turner. Despite the ever-present “ghost of Ike”, Tina has gone from strength to strength in both her professional and personal life. Last month she married her partner of 25 years, 57-year-old record executive Erwin Bach, in a star-studded wedding ceremony in Switzerland. When asked what keeps her going she says: “Endurance. Turner was famously married to her performing partner Ike Turner for 14 years before the two got into a violent fight in July of 1976 and divorced shortly afterwards. Wonder if Turner and Bach will play any of her classic hits during the bash (perhaps a little Simply the Best or some Private Dancer?). Mazel tov, you two! Tina Turner Marries Boyfriend of 27 Years Erwin Bach in Switzerland. Query: how long was tina turner married to ike",
"output": [
"Tina Turner was married to Ike Turner for 14 years long."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-22811f5f953e4aa29b106177fc40b009",
"input": "Blanching: Blanching is the quick-coddle method used for food safety when preparing a recipe that calls for raw eggs that won’t be cooked in a later step (Caesar dressing, homemade mayonnaise, etc.) or to heat up a previously cooked soft- or hard-boiled egg. Raw eggs that have been removed from their shells should be refrigerated in a tightly covered container. Refrigerated whole egg yolks should be covered with water to prevent them from drying out; drain before using. The following chart shows how long hard-boiled eggs and raw eggs last when stored in the refrigerator. Well, for one thing do you know how long the eggs have been previously hard boiled by the vendor? Once eggs are cooked, they should be used within one (1) week. It doesn’t matter if they are peeled or not. If is preferable not to peel them until you are ready to eat or use in your recipe. 7 Comments Latest Feb 10, 2015 by FinalOpinion. 1 a. aretasf1 Apr 10, 2009 I've always heard if you coat the shells (after cooling) with butter or oil, they will last 2-3 weeks refridgerated. 2 s. schwaigen Apr 20, 2009 Thank god, I can show this to my husband. 3 s. When stored in a freezer 0 degrees Fahrenheit or colder, they will stay good for about a year. Freezing raw whole eggs in their shells is not recommended, nor is it recommended that hard-boiled eggs — either in a shell or peeled — be frozen. Want to know how to peel a hard-boiled egg without damaging the whites? Check this out. Peeled hard boiled eggs can be stored in the refrigerator in a bowl of cold water to cover for about 1 week (change the water daily) – or in a sealed container without water (cover the eggs with damp paper towels) for the same length of time. Hard-boiled eggs can be stored in the shell in the refrigerator and last up to four days. The whites of hard-boiled eggs get rubbery when frozen, but you can freeze the yolks for later if you’d like. Eggs that have been cooked outside of the shell -- such as scrambled or fried -- don’t keep as long as hard-boiled eggs. To maximize their storage life, cool the cooked eggs quickly by placing in shallow containers, and refrigerate within two hours. They will keep for three to four days at most. Hard-boiled eggs are handy to have on hand for a snack, a salad topping or to use in recipes. They will last about one week (seven days) in the refrigerator, either peeled or unpeeled. Hard-boiled eggs are ideally kept in their shell until ready to use. Soft-cooked (boiled) eggs – 5 minutes. The perfect soft boiled egg has firmly set whites, but a soft runny yolk. Serve in an egg cup by placing the egg in the cup with the small end down. Slice off large the end of egg with knife, egg scissors or egg topper and eat from the shell with a spoon. Query: how long are peeled hard boiled eggs good for",
"output": [
"Peeled hard boiled eggs can be stored in the refrigerator in a bowl of cold water to cover for about 1 week."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a9db40f69db745af8c8cadcd8dd62e86",
"input": "Dry-type earwax. Cerumen is produced in the outer third of the cartilaginous portion of the ear canal. It is a mixture of viscous secretions from sebaceous glands and less-viscous ones from modified apocrine sweat glands. Earwax, also known as cerumen, is a gray, orange, or yellowish waxy substance secreted in the ear canal of humans and other mammals. It protects the skin of the human ear canal, assists in cleaning and lubrication, and also provides some protection against bacteria, fungi, insects, and water. Earwax consists of shed skin cells, hair, and the secretions of the ceruminous and sebaceous glands of the outside ear canal. Major components of earwax are long chain fatty acids, both saturated and unsatu Ear Wax (Definition) Ear wax in the ear canal is a mixture of secretions from oil and sweat glands in the canal's skin. Shedded skin cells are also a major ingredient of ear wax. There are two genetically determined types of ear wax: the wet type and the dry type. 1 doctor agreed: Skin and wax gland: Cerumen or ear wax is a product of sloughed off dead skin and the compound produced by your cerumen glands in your outer ear canal. The consistency can range from moist to dry and flaky. It depends on the relative oil content of the cerumen gland product and amount ...Read more. Ear wax: Have never heard of an ear wax test. Wax is just made up of dead skin and oils secreted from glands. Not much you could learn from it by having it tested so I would say not real. ...Read more Ear wax (cerumen) is a natural part of our body. It prevents microscopic objects (lint, dust, viruses, etc.) from entering the ear canal. There are safe ways to remove excessive ear wax at home. Q-tips, twisted napkins, bobby pins, or other items should never be used to remove ear wax as this can lead to infection. Earwax (ear wax) is a natural substance produced by glands in the skin of the outer ear canal. The wax acts as a helpful coating for the ear canal so removal of it is not necessary. However, in cases of blockage or excessive buildup, it may be necessary to try to remove the impacted or excessive wax. Softeners. 1 Any of a number of types of oil. 2 Urea hydrogen peroxide (6.5%) and glycerine. 3 A solution of sodium bicarbonate in water, or sodium bicarbonate B.P.C. (sodium bicarbonate and glycerine) 4 Cerumol (peanut oil, turpentine and dichlorobenzene) 5 Cerumenex (triethanolamine, polypeptides and oleate-condensate) Ear wax is helpful to coat the skin of the ear canal where it acts as a temporary water repellent. The absence of ear wax may result in dry, itchy ears, and even infection. Ear wax is formed in the outer third of the ear canal. The lubrication provided by cerumen prevents desiccation of the skin within the ear canal. The lubricative properties arise from the high lipid content of the sebum produced by the sebaceous glands. In wet-type cerumen at least, these lipids include cholesterol, squalene, and many long-chain fatty acids and alcohols. Query: how is ear wax produced",
"output": [
"Cerumen or ear wax is a product of sloughed off dead skin and the compound produced by your cerumen glands in your outer ear canal."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a09796540f8f4c08b7febb19258797fd",
"input": "After the Head and Neck MRI. 1 Most patients can go home right after the scan and resume their usual activities. 2 Sedated patients may be monitored for a short period until the effects of the sedative have worn off. The time that the procedure of the CT examination lasts and the time that the results are reconstructed in the radiologists computer. Expected time: between 5 and 30 minutes. More specifically, the scan time, the time you are actually in the machine as it acquires images, depends on a number of factors. What is a cervical spine CT scan? A cervical spine CT scan is a medical procedure that uses specialized X-ray equipment and computer imaging to create a visual model of your cervical spine. The cervical spine is the portion of the spine that runs through the neck. Because of this, the test is also called a neck CT scan. Purpose of the Head and Neck MRI. To detect inflammation, tumors and other masses, and other abnormalities in the head and neck region, including the mouth, tongue, salivary glands, throat (pharynx), sinuses, nasal cavities, vocal cords (larynx), and ear. Preparing for the Test. 1 For children under 18 years - Do not eat 4 hours before the test is scheduled. You/your child may drink clear fluids only. It is important that you drink enough clear liquids (like water) to be well hydrated prior to the test. 2 For adults –There is no food restriction for this scan. Can I take my medicine before a CT scan? Yes, please take medicines before the CT scan, with the exception of diabetic medicines. Consult your physician before the test for instructions. How long will it take to do a CT scan? Expect the exam to last no longer than an hour, depending on the preparation needed and whether it includes the use of a contrast medium. The scan itself may take less than a minute on the newest machines. Most scans take just a few minutes to complete. Holding still during the scan results in the best CT pictures. For the first few scans, the table will move quickly through the scanner. These first scans check the correct starting position. The table will move more slowly for the rest of the scans. If you are having contrast, it will be given to you through your IV. A CT neck scan can take up to 15 minutes. All images will be checked for quality before you leave. More scans will be taken, if needed. What will I feel during the scan? CT scanning is painless, but you may feel some discomfort from staying still on the scan table. If contrast is used: You may notice a warm, flushed feeling during the injection. You may also notice a metallic taste in your mouth. Risks. 1 There is always a slight chance of cancer from excessive exposure to radiation. 2 The effective radiation dose for this procedure varies. 3 Women should always inform their physician and x-ray or CT technologist if there is any possibility that they are pregnant. CT scanning of the head is typically used to detect: bleeding, brain injury and skull fractures in patients with head injuries. bleeding caused by a ruptured or leaking aneurysm in a patient with a sudden severe headache. Parathyroid 4D-CT Scan Share this Four-dimensional parathyroid CT (4D-CT) is a specialized imaging study that was first introduced in 2006 for the purpose of identifying abnormal parathyroid glands in the planning of parathyroid surgery. Query: how long does a neck ct scan take",
"output": [
"A CT neck scan can take up to 15 minutes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8becad1820704fc9a748c31430bad80d",
"input": "Locations around this longitude. 1 Edmonton, Alberta, Canada. 2 Yellowknife, Northwest Territories, Canada. 3 Red Deer, Alberta, Canada. 4 St. Albert, Alberta, Canada. 5 Strathcona County, Alberta, Canada. Distance from Toronto, Canada to Calgary, Canada. The total distance from Toronto, Canada to Calgary, Canada is 1,688 miles. This is equivalent to 2 716 kilometers or 1,467 nautical miles. Your trip begins in Toronto, Canada. It ends in Calgary, Canada. Your flight direction from Toronto, Canada to Calgary, Canada is Northwest (-60 degrees from North). The distance calculator helps you figure out how far it is to fly from Toronto, Canada to Calgary, Canada. It does this by computing the straight line flying distance (as the crow flies). Distance from Toronto, Canada to Calgary, Canada The total distance from Toronto, Canada to Calgary, Canada is 1,688 miles. This is equivalent to 2 716 kilometers or 1,467 nautical miles. Your trip begins in Toronto, Canada. Driving distance from Toronto, Canada to Calgary, Canada The total driving distance from Toronto, Canada to Calgary, Canada is 2,125 miles or 3 420 kilometers. Your trip begins in Toronto, Canada. How far is it to drive from Toronto, Canada to Calgary, Canada? View a map with the driving distance between Toronto, Canada and Calgary, Canada to calculate your road trip mileage. Locations farthest away from Calgary. Port-aux-Francais, French Southern Territories, 12,213 mi. Île de la Possession, Crozet Islands, French Southern Territories, 11,715 mi. Amsterdam Island, French Southern Territories, 11,355 mi. Mawson, Antarctica, 11,279 mi. Driving distance from Toronto, Canada to Calgary, Canada. The total driving distance from Toronto, Canada to Calgary, Canada is 2,125 miles or 3 420 kilometers. Your trip begins in Toronto, Canada. It ends in Calgary, Canada. If you are planning a road trip, you might also want to calculate the total driving time from Toronto, Canada to Calgary, Canada so you can see when you'll arrive at your destination. Locations farthest away from Calgary. 1 Port-aux-Francais, French Southern Territories, 12,213 mi. 2 Île de la Possession, Crozet Islands, French Southern Territories, 11,715 mi. 3 Amsterdam Island, French Southern Territories, 11,355 mi. 4 Mawson, Antarctica, 11,279 mi. 5 Davis, Antarctica, 11,151 mi. Distance between two cities in Canada. Best, easiest and shortest route, milage between Canada cities. About - Privacy - Contact This site powered by Distance Between Cities which is the most used distance calculator tool in the World. You can find answers of your questions like how many miles, how far is it? about Canadian cities. Query: how far is calgary canada toronto canada.",
"output": [
"The Toronto, Canada is 1,688 miles far from Calgary, Canada."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a6ae3d63263648b3b4b5d25d951eca84",
"input": "Some tax returns take longer to process than others for many reasons, including when a return: Includes errors. Is incomplete. Is affected by identity theft or fraud. Includes a claim filed before Feb. 15 for an Earned Income Tax Credit or an Additional Child Tax Credit. Where’s My Refund? shows “Refund Sent” – If the status in Where’s My Refund? shows “Refund Sent”, the IRS has sent your tax refund to your financial institution for direct deposit. It can take 1 to 5 days for your financial institution to deposit funds into your account. I recently mailed my tax returns to the IRS for the 2008 tax year. How long until I receive my refund? How long from the date a tax refund check is mailed until you actually receive it? All taxpayers can check the status of their refund money via the Internet or by calling a toll-free hotline. Taxpayers must wait at least 72 hours after an electronic tax filing before they can check their refund status. Individuals who have filed via mail will need to wait at least 3 weeks after making in the form. The refund information system is automated. Best Answer: mine was mailed on a fri and i received it on tues ... I had an identical element take place. I e-filed with rapid-tax on 01/sixteen/2009. My first ... TDI withholding is not claimed on the Rhode Island personal income tax form. Contact the Massachusetts Department of Revenue for guidance on whether you. can claim Rhode Island TDI withholding on the Massachusetts income tax return. The fastest way to get your refund is to e-file your return and request your refund via direct deposit. The Department of Taxation and Finance declares that these taxpayers can receive their refund in as little as 14 days. Most, however, will have to wait somewhere between 14 and 30 days. Note also that it is hardly uncommon for refunds to take even longer than that. My refund was mailed friday how long does it take to get it. My tax refund was mailed om march 19 when should receive it via mailu? Trying to check on an application status i mailed to reach out wireless phone service on aug.28th, 2012? Refund Process. 1 Start checking status 24 – 48 hours after e-file – Once you have e-filed your tax return, you can check status using IRS Where’s My Refund? You will not be able to start checking the status of your tax refund for 4 weeks if you mail a paper tax return. Return Received Notice within 24 – 48 hours after e-file – The IRS Where’s My Refund tool will show “Return Received” status once they begin processing your tax return. You will not see a refund date until the IRS finishes processing your tax return and approves your tax refund. 28 Responses to “How Long Does It Take for the New York State E-File to Process?”. 1 I have tried many times to contact NYS about my return. 2 Ive been waiting over 90 days 3 . I mailed my paper return on 2/11 and have yet to receive my refund. 4 Useful data. Query: how long should it take to receive tax refund once mailed",
"output": [
"It takes 3 weeks to receive tax refund once mailed."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9728567d1f2744b483dbe13620fdff84",
"input": "There are three key ways that PCOS affects the body. These are the most common signs and symptoms to look out for ... There are three key ways that PCOS affects the body. Symptoms of PCOS. 1 Irregular menstrual periods (i.e. periods that last a long time, or occur infrequently) 2 Excessive facial or body hair (called “hirsutism”) 3 Acne. 4 Male-pattern baldness. 5 Obesity and/or unexplained weight gain. 6 Infrequent or absent menstruation in adolescents. How does PCOS affect the body? PCOS affects a woman’s body in these three key ways: Excess androgen production: High levels of androgen hormones cause excess facial hair or abnormal hair growth on the body, as well as acne and androgenic alopecia (male-pattern baldness). PCOS can cause irregular menses and amenorrhea, and because the endometrium may grow thicker and thicker without shedding, there is an increased risk of endometrial cancer. The birth control pill can help with this by causing endometrial shedding every month, or medicines can be used to cause a withdrawal bleed every 3 months. Polycystic Ovary Syndrome (PCOS) – PCOS is quite common and is known to make one’s periods irregular. The cysts that form on the ovaries can cause excess secretion of androgen (male hormones) that can interfere with a woman’s regular cycle. PCOS can also increase the insulin levels in women as it hinders proper utilization of it. Definition: from Cardiovascular Risk in Women With PCOS. > Polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS), or Stein-Leventhal syndrome, is a common endocrine disorder defined by two of the three following features: i) oligoovulation or anovulation, ii) clinica... Women who have ovarian cysts without PCOS often have much larger cysts, due to things like other hormonal imbalances (not PCOS) and/or endometriosis (lining tissue from the uterus is present in the abdominal organs) and they do not display the metabolic issues of women with PCOS. PCOS is a common problem in which a woman's hormones go out of balance i.e more androgens are secreted. This may lead to extra facial and body hair, acne, irregular menses and stoppage of ovulation. Insulin resistance may lead to increased chances of getting diabetes. Following problems may arise. Acne. Weight gain and trouble losing weight. Most women with PCOS have insulin resistance and the drug metformin has benefits. Weight loss, exercise, and low-carbohydrate diet tend to be beneficial. It's a good idea to find a doctor who will help you manage insulin resistance / metabolic syndrome. Women who want to get pregnant may need fertility treatments. PCOS disrupts the balance of both follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH), the hormone that causes the follicle and egg to develop and luteinizing hormone (LH), the hormone that causes the follicle to release the egg. The result is that a small cyst is formed in the ovary, which disrupts the woman’s hormonal balance. Query: how does pcos affect the body",
"output": [
"PCOS affects a woman’s body in these three key ways: Excess androgen production: High levels of androgen hormones cause excess facial hair or abnormal hair growth on the body, as well as acne and androgenic alopecia."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-956f28e3a8944c4a86e1125c8a89d20a",
"input": "The palette is so restricted—muted blue sky and white clouds; the beige of the French beach and the murky gray of the English Channel; the drab brown uniforms and green helmets over the pale-faced soldiers with their somehow perfect haircuts—that it seems parts of the spectrum have been blocked out. Dover – Dunkerque ferry. Dunkerque is the lesser-known destination from Dover, and it’s frequently the cheapest way to get across the Channel, as the Calais crossing is in higher demand. Dunkerque is about a 40-minute drive from Calais, but don’t forget that the crossing also takes around 30 minutes longer. Dunkirk Manages to Make War Boring. Christopher Nolan's latest offering is high on patriotic schmaltz and low on meaningful commentary. July 25, 2017. It’s easy to forget as you’re watching Christopher Nolan’s Dunkirk, that the film is in full color. Yes. Fact-checking the Dunkirk movie revealed that one of the three evacuation routes across the English Channel was so heavily mined that it could not be used at night. Despite Britain utilizing 36 minesweeping ships (one such vessel is pointed out in the film), mines still sunk or damaged a number of boats. Either way, you'll travel on a roll-on, roll-off ferry, with cabins available for an additional cost. There’s also the option of a shorter service, which is operated with a fast catamaran. This has fewer facilities and less space on board than a normal ferry, but it’ll get you there in three hours and 45 minutes. On a side note, the closest point across the English channel is 20.7 miles and is just south of Dunkirk at Cap Gris Nez, a cape near Calais in the French département of Pas-de-Calais. From there, one can see the White Cliffs of Dover across the English Channel's Strait of Dover. Were mines really a concern for the evacuating vessels? Yes. Mark Rylance's character, Mr. Dawson, overhears and reassuringly tells Collins, I know where you've been.. 1 Tom Hardy's character's experience in the Dunkirk movie most closely resembles that of New Zealand Spitfire pilot Alan Christopher Deere. The best ways to drive to France for a last-minute holiday or booze cruise. 1 Dover – Calais ferries. 2 Folkestone – Calais train (Eurotunnel) 3 Dover – Dunkerque ferry. 4 Newhaven – Dieppe ferry. 5 Portsmouth – Le Havre ferries. 6 Portsmouth – Caen ferry. 7 Portsmouth – Cherbourg ferries. 8 Portsmouth – St Malo ferry. 9 Poole – Cherbourg ferry. The evacuation, code-named Operation Dynamo, took place on the beaches around Dunkirk, France from May 27 to June 4, 1940. How far away is Dunkirk, France from Great Britain? Located at the northern tip of France near the border with Belgium, Dunkirk sits on the English Channel at one of the waterway's narrowest points. This allowed British rescue vessels, including private boats and yachts, to reach France in less time. Most of the evacuation boats departed from Dover, England. Query: how far is it across the english channel at dunkirk?",
"output": [
"It is 20.7 miles far across the English channel at Dunkirk."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-33d7d80680764b5e80ed9cd37f16ea5f",
"input": "The verb marinate means to steep food in a marinade. A marinade is a savory acidic sauce in which a food is soaked to enrich its flavor or to tenderize it. The acid in marinades causes meat and poultry tissue to break down. This has a tenderizing effect. The breaking down of the tissue also causes meat and poultry to hold more liquid, making it juicier. Mix Worcestershire sauce, olive oil and bold seasonings like minced garlic, basil or an Italian seasoning in a bowl. Add a few dashes of red wine vinegar, if you like. You will need about ½ cup of marinade for every pound of meat, but make extra marinade in another bowl if you wish to brush the steak with the mixture while it cooks. Poke the steak with a fork about 20 times per side. Liberally salt both sides of the steak to create a crust. Then coat both sides of the steak with marinade. Wrap well in plastic wrap and refrigerate for at least an hour, or up to 24 hours. To cook the steak: Heat the oven to 450° F (230° C, gas mark 8). Heat the vegetable oil in a 12 ovenproof skillet until the oil smokes. Wipe the marinade and salt off of the steak, and if you like, season with the black pepper. Put the steak into the hot skillet (stand back a bit in case the oil splatters). Sear the steak until browned, 3-4 minutes. Take the flank steak out of the marinade, pat it dry with paper towels and put it on a broiler pan. Place the pan on the oven rack you placed close to the heat source. Turn the flank steak only one time during cooking, at the halfway point. Perfect Oven Cooked Steak in Minutes Learning how to make steak in the oven isn't any harder than learning how to slap it on the grill or in a frying pan. Pay attention to the heat, timing and what kind of steak you're working with and there’s no reason you can’t cook up a perfect steak in the oven when grilling season is over. How to Select Steak They cut down on cleanup and allow you to evenly distribute the marinade. But you can marinate in plastic, stainless steel or glass containers too. DO cover containers containing marinating meats; DON’T use marinade from raw meat or fish as a sauce unless it’s boiled first for several minutes. It contains bacteria from the raw meat. DON’T reuse leftover marinade for other food. DON’T marinate in aluminum containers or foil, because a chemical reaction could spoil the food. Wash steaks, pat dry with towel. ... desired time. Preheat oven to 350 degrees. Put oven... you put steaks in. Cut onion into large ... 7 minutes or desired time. Trim off fat, cut meat into thin strips, place them in oblong pan or dish. Combine ... 8 hours. Remove marinated meat and lay strips across ... strips into cold oven. Set temperature in oven... 10 to 12 hours. 18 Comments Latest Jun 15, 2015 by kat0409. 1 s. smtucker Jul 7, 2012 I don't think swordfish needs marinating. 2 Dirtywextraolives Jul 7, 2012 I do marinate my fresh swordfish steaks in an herb & garlic infused olive oil, that has cooled to room temp, before I pour it... I do marinate my fresh swordfish steaks in an herb & garlic infused olive oil, that has cooled to room temp, before I pour it over the steaks. The meat sits in this tangy marinade overnight in the fridge, and ... Marinated Flank Steak with Horseradish Sauce Recipe at ... Find the recipe for Marinated Flank Steak with Horseradish Sauce and other beef recipes at Epicurious.com Query: how long took steaks in oven with marinade",
"output": [
"To cook the steak: Heat the oven to 450° F or 230° C, gas mark 8. Heat the vegetable oil in a 12 ovenproof skillet until the oil smokes. Wipe the marinade and salt off of the steak, and if you like, season with the black pepper. Put the steak into the hot skillet. Sear the steak until browned, 3 to 4 minutes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-6d285583b5ab4c35add14b300333c02a",
"input": "But if you properly care for your clothes, they'll last longer, and that'll save you even more money in the long run. In fact, taking care of your clothes can give them a life of 15 years or longer, compared to about three years if they're worn often and not maintained, says Grant Harris, owner of Image Granted, an image consultancy company in Washington, D.C. A t-shirt that is worn rarely or only once every month or two can certainly be dried in a drier and still last a long time. A shirt in a smaller rotation of clothes, worn once a week and dried in a machine may only last a few months. A shirt that is worn more rarely will last for years or even longer. Being a smart shopper is only the start when it comes to clothing. If you properly care for your clothes, they'll last longer, and that'll save you even more money in the long run. Learn how to carefully wash, store, and refresh your wardrobe. But even if you do want to wear the same shirt every day, the t-shirt will still give you a few blissful months of comfort. The more often you wear and wash a t-shirt, the more likely it is to wear out. The number of times that the shirt is dried in a clothes dryer also has a lot to do with how long it will last. Any shirt will last longer if it is laid flat to dry or hung up to drip dry rather than being put into a clothes washer. A shirt worn for only an hour or two may not need to be washed and dried at all. If the shirt can go without being washed every time it’s worn, it may last even longer. 7 comments: 1 ElleCMay 14, 2012 at 9:31 PM. Great post. 2 BundanaMay 15, 2012 at 5:56 AM. I get annoyed when clothes start fraying and the short cuts are so obvious. 3 sewduckyMay 16, 2012 at 3:30 AM. Well, it's a yes/no thing. 4 Justine of SewCountryChickMay 16, 2012 at 5:21 PM. Extending the life of your clothes doesn't have to mean hours of work, but it does require a bit of effort and planning. Here are some clothing care tips and ways to make your clothes last longer, which will in turn keep your wardrobe budget more manageable. It's basic advice, but it makes sense to rotate your shoes, suits, and other apparel so they're not in constant use or getting prematurely worn out, Harris says. 6 Easy Ways to Make Your Clothes Last Longer With proper care, your clothes can last up to 15 years or longer, compared to about three years if they're worn often and not maintained Published August 10, 2016 Extending the life of your clothes doesn't have to mean hours of work, but it does require a bit of effort and planning. Here are some clothing care tips and ways to make your clothes last longer, which will in turn keep your wardrobe budget more manageable. Give Your Clothing a Rest Jeans normally have a life span of about 18 months with me, though I have one pair of DKNY brand that are still going strong after 4 years. Ideally, I wish jeans would last for 3 to 4 years, but I don't know how to deal with the worn between the legs dilemma. Taking good care of a t-shirt will mean that it will last just about as long as you want it to. It is by no means unusual for a t-shirt to last for decades. If you’ve ever seen anyone wear a vintage t-shirt with a year on it, you have seen how long it is possible to keep a t-shirt. Query: how long does clothing last",
"output": [
"Clothing lasts up to 15 years or longer compared to about three years if they're worn often and not maintained."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b721b37abac1402184b5692678b13754",
"input": "In South Carolina State, 106 schools offer undergraduate program. The average undergraduate tuition fees of South Carolina colleges in 2017 is $7,973 for South Carolina residents and $16,229 for students from other States. The tuition & fees rose 104.15% from last year. Tuition is the price colleges charge for classes. Students also pay other fees related to enrolling in and attending a college. The cost of tuition and fees varies by college. There is a wide range of prices, as the table below shows. But you should know that half of all full-time undergraduate students at public and private nonprofit four-year colleges attend institutions that charge tuition and fees of $11,814 or less. NEW YORK (CNNMoney.com) -- The average cost of a four-year private college jumped to $30,367 this school year, the first time the average has broken the $30,000 mark. As they have for the past 11 years, average college costs rose faster than inflation, according the latest report from the College Board, a non-profit association of 4,500 schools, colleges and universities. Individuals age 18 and older who plan to claim residence must meet specific criteria, including: 1 You must physically reside in South Carolina for at least one year prior to declaring residence. 2 You must prove intent to make South Carolina your home. 3 You should be able to prove your financial independence. The School of Humanities and Social Sciences is the largest of the College’s six schools. It encompasses nine departments (communication, English, history, philosophy, political science, psychology, sociology, anthropology and religious studies) as well as a popular program in urban studies. See the qualifications and admissions decisions of real students who applied to University of South Carolina. CLASS OF 2022 Profile of Students on COLLEGEdata Interested in This College Tuition costs of colleges and universities. 1 2017, Integrated Postsecondary Education Data System (IPEDS): IPEDS is a system of surveys designed to collect data from all primary providers of postsecondary education. 2017, National Postsecondary Student Aid Study (NPSAS) examines the characteristics of students in postsecondary education, with special focus on how they finance their education. 2017, Postsecondary Institutions and Cost of Attendance in 2016-17; Degrees and Other Awards Conferred: 2015-16; and 12-Month Enrollment: 2015-16: First Look (Preliminary Data) higher education formally posts the earned credit to a student’s transcript for the. collegiate experience, and the high school posts the earned credit to a student’s. transcript for the secondary experience. Dual enrollment courses have been a feature in South Carolina high schools. for at least a decade. Tuition costs of colleges and universities. Question: What are the trends in the cost of college education? Response: For the 2014–15 academic year, average annual current dollar prices for undergraduate tuition, fees, room, and board were estimated to be $16,188 at public institutions, $41,970 at private nonprofit institutions, and $23,372 at private for-profit institutions. Pay Your Way has advice to help you pay for college and get more financial aid. Use the EFC and Net Price calculators to estimate your financial aid and college costs. Use the Compare Awards tool to see which college offers the best deal. Go Query: average cost of college education in south carolina",
"output": [
"The average undergraduate tuition fees of South Carolina colleges is $7,973 for South Carolina residents and $16,229 for students from other States."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-992de4c7942c4519bcd0a00ff8d55e06",
"input": "The anagen phase is known as the growth phase. It begins in the papilla and can last from two to six years. The span at which the hair remains in this stage of growth is determined by genetics. The longer the hair stays in the anagen phase, the longer it will grow. During this phase, the cells in the papilla divide to produce new hair fibers, and the follicle buries itself into the dermal layer of the skin to nourish the strand. Originally Answered: How long do your eyebrows take to grow back if you shave them off? For a post-pubescent or young adult, it takes about 65 days for eyebrows to regrow following plucking. For a mature adult, it will take about 56 days for eyebrow hair to regrow and about 73 days for a person at retirement age. Some people have difficulty growing their hair beyond a certain length because they have a short active phase of growth. On the other hand, people with very long hair have a long active phase of growth. The hair on the arms, legs, eyelashes, and eyebrows have a very short active growth phase of about 30 to 45 days, explaining why they are so much shorter than scalp hair. Catagen How long does it take to grow long hair? wikiHow Contributor Typically, hair grows 1/2 an inch (1.5cm) in a month and if you take good care of your hair and don't cut it for a year, your hair will grow about 6 inches (15cm) in a year. Thanks! Yes No It takes approximately six to eight weeks to grow enough hair for a fade or basic man's haircut after you shave your head. If you wish to grow your hair out longer, it will take an additional month for each 1/2 inch of growth. Hair growth after a FUE transplant follow the general growth after hair transplantation. The hair will stay and even grow on the grafts initially, but it falls and hair follicles enter their resting phase. That usually takes about 2 months. After 2-3 months patients can see gradual growth of the hair. This stage make take up to 6 months. 4. Keep your scalp healthy. Think of your hair like a tree: If the soil and roots aren't taken care of, the tree can't grow tall and solid. Hair growth starts with a healthy scalp, explains celebrity hairstylist and WEN founder Chaz Dean. one month after: real hair starts to grow at its normal rate two months after: an inch of hair How long it takes to grow back a full head of hair (and pubic hair, lashes, and brows if you lost them too) varies from person to person. how long will it take more ;(.. i need my hair to grow 1-2 inches more… will it be that long in 1 week if I keep doing this everynight before bed.. Reply Bianca (May 2012) The growth of human hair occurs everywhere on the body except for the soles of the feet, the lips, palms of the hands, some external genital areas, the navel, scar tissue, and, apart from eyelashes, the eyelids. Query: how long it takes for small hairs to grow",
"output": [
"It takes approximately six to eight weeks to grow enough hair for a fade or basic man's haircut after you shave your head."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-187502ee316042dcb6ddb71957fed724",
"input": "One thing that stringed, wind, and percussion instruments have in common in regard to the sounds they produce is that. a. the frequency is always a direct result of adjusting the length of the instrument. b. the instruments are struck by tools to produce vibrations and sounds. c. the sound originates from a vibration. d. all of the instruments can be easily adjusted to produce a tone with a certain definite pitch. or unpleasant, the resulting sound is called harmony timbre * dissonance consonance 3. A group of notes played in succession with a perceivable Read this research paper and over 1,500,000 others like it now. The term for a sound that has one definite frequency is * tone rhythm tempo harmony 2. When notes sounded together tend to be grating or unpleasant, the resulting sound is called harmony timbre * dissonance consonance 3. A group of notes played in succession with a perceivable shape * is called a melody produces harmony There are two types of pitch: definite pitch, which is created by regular sound wave oscillations, and indefinite pitch, created by irregular sound waves. Definite pitches are called tones and are measured in terms of their frequency, which is a scientific calculation of the number of cycles per second. View Test Prep - Quiz 3.docx from HUM ABCDEFG at Coastline Community College. 1. The term for a sound that has one definite frequency is x tone rhythm tempo harmony 2. When notes sounded together tend to be grating or unpleasant, the resulting sound is called harmony timbre x dissonance consonance 3. A group of notes played in succession with a perceivable shape x is called a melody produces harmony produces consonance produces dissonance 4. (If you don't see the sound clips, please try a different browser.) 1 The top wave represents a typical sound wave vibrating at a certain amplitude (its height) and frequency (how many peaks and troughs there are in a certain amount of time). A sound that has a definite pitch is called a tone. A tone can be characterized based on loudness or intensity, timbre or quality, pitch, and duration. A sound that has a definite pitch is called a tone. A tone can be characterized based on loudness or intensity, timbre or quality, pitch, and duration. Artwork: Robert Boyle's famous experiment with an alarm clock. 1 Put a ringing alarm clock inside a large glass case with a valve on top. Close the valve so no air can get in. 2 You can easily hear the clock ringing because the sound travels through the air in the case and the glass, before continuing to your ears. 2016-07-08T14:41:02-04:00. D. The sound originates from a vibration. With winds, it is the vibration of air, strings, the vibration of the string, and percussion, the vibration of various things depending on the instrument. Also, all sounds are produced by vibrations. Good quality piezoelectric or condenser microphones have usually flat frequency response characteristics from 2 Hz to an upper limit which depends on their size. This limit is about 2 kHz Query: a sound that has one definite frequency is",
"output": [
"The term for a sound that has one definite frequency is x tone rhythm tempo harmony."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d3e2b9c76f334607986f06f43d0fc6c9",
"input": "The average human pregnancy is 40 weeks long. However, a pregnancy is considered term between 37 weeks and 41 weeks 6 days. Babies born on or before 36 weeks 6 days are consider preterm or premature. Babies born between 37 weeks and 38 weeks 6 days are considered early term. Babies born between 39 weeks and 40 weeks 6 days are considered full term. 12 Weeks Pregnant Baby: All parts of your baby are developing, from tooth buds to toenails. Your baby will keep developing and getting larger and stronger for the rest of your pregnancy. On average, pregnancies lasted 38 weeks from the day of conception to the day the baby was born, or about 40 to 41 weeks from the day of the women's last menstrual period. (The latter measure is more commonly used to determine a woman's due date.) Your doctor will ask for your medical history which includes: 1 Medical problems. 2 The date of your last menstrual period. 3 Birth control methods. 4 History of abortions and/or miscarriages. 5 Hospitalizations. 6 Medications you are taking and medication allergies. 7 Your family’s medical history. 12 Weeks Pregnant. Baby: All parts of your baby are developing, from tooth buds to toenails. Your baby will keep developing and getting larger and stronger for the rest of your pregnancy. By the end of this week, the chance of miscarriage drops considerably. Mom-to-be: You'll feel more energetic for the next few weeks. Pregnancy can be broken down into days, weeks, months and trimesters. Day 1 marks the beginning of week 1 of pregnancy, month 1 of pregnancy, and the start of the first trimester. A baby is conceived during week 3 of pregnancy. Day 15 marks the beginning of the week 3. The average pregnancy is 280 days long. Another way to talk about the days and weeks of pregnancy is to combine the two units of measurement. Week 1 of pregnancy begins on 0 weeks 1 day and ends on 1 week 0 days of pregnancy. Week 2 of pregnancy encompasses the time between 1 week 1 day and 2 weeks 0 days of pregnancy. Tip of the Week: Eat plenty of foods that contain calcium, such as cheeses, sardines, and broccoli. Your baby needs it, and so do you. 10 Weeks Pregnant. Baby: Your baby is still small but looks and acts like a baby. Arms and legs are longer and can bend at the elbows and knees. But even after excluding babies who were born preterm, the length of pregnancy ranged from about 35 to 40 weeks from the day of conception to the day of birth (or about 38 to 43 weeks from the day of a woman's last menstrual period.) [See Are Firstborns More Likely to Be Late?] How long a healthy pregnancy lasts can vary by as much as five weeks, even when doctors precisely determined the date of conception, a new study suggests. Although the length of a healthy pregnancy is known to be variable, some of this variation was thought to be due to errors in determining the age of the baby, the researchers said. Tip of the Week: Start shopping for maternity bras. You'll need one pretty soon. You can go ahead and get nursing bras if you're planning to breastfeed. 11 Weeks Pregnant. Baby: It's another big growth week. When your doctor uses a Doppler stethoscope now, she can hear the rapid swooshing noises of the heartbeat. Your baby's genitals are developing, but the sex can't be determined yet by ultrasound. Mom-to-be: Pregnancy hormones show their good and bad Query: how long in weeks for pregnancy",
"output": [
"The average human pregnancy is 40 weeks long. However, a pregnancy is considered term between 37 weeks and 41 weeks 6 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ffbb461507614630bb4c087afa46667a",
"input": "The company was founded in 1997 in San Diego, California; it is now headquartered in Watertown, Massachusetts and has grown to include operational sites in Belfast, Maine; San Francisco, California; Atlanta, Georgia; Austin, Texas; Princeton, New Jersey; and Chennai, Bangalore, and Pune, India. Contacting With Athenanet. 1 Athenanet is a well organized health care services in United States and it has devised a prominent customer care support in order to provide the timely boost to the residents of USA. Athenanet has devised a radiant customer service and its representatives can be contacted on the below mentioned numbers. 800-981-5084, 617-402-1631 is the Contact Phone Number of Athenanet. (See More Contact Numbers Below).We have briefly described Athenanet with all contact information. Get more customer service numbers of Athenanet. Post issue for any problem with Athenanet. if you find Athenanet customer service number wrong, then please tell us in comments of Athenanet. Athenanet Customer Service Phone Number. Phone Number of Athenanet is 800-981-5084, 617-402-1631 . Athenahealth provides cloud based medical care services in the United States. The company was started in 1997 by Jonathan Bush and Todd Park. Its headquarter is located in Watertown, Massachusetts, United States. Athenanet Customer Service Number Delineated Here With Complaints and Reviews. 1 Mr. Marilu Portillo CallsJun 23, 2016. 2 Mr. Dr. Hishita Parikh CallsJun 11, 2016. 3 Ms. Patricia Leverenz CallsMay 24, 2016. 4 Ms. Frustrated Athena User CallsFeb 01, 2016. 5 Ms. Renee Klein CallsJan 23, 2016. 6 Mr. Salman Malik CallsFeb 24, 2015. 7 Mr. Nandgopal CallsJan 27, 2015. Athenanet has devised a radiant customer service and its representatives can be contacted on the below mentioned numbers. Customer Support: 800.981.5084 General Inquiry: 617-402-1631 Fax: 617.402.1099 Locations Of Athenanet Athenanet is providing various medical services that are enlisted below. 1 Electronic Health Records. 2 Revenue Cycle Management. 3 Medical Billing. 4 Patient Engagement. 5 Care Coordination. 6 Population Health Management. 7 Epocrates. About athenahealth. Our Company; Events; Careers; Investors; Newsroom; Locations; athenaGives; Marketplace; More Disruption Please; Strategic Alliances Inquiry Contact Number: 605-583-1400 Different Services Offered by Athenanet Athenanet is a global medical service that geared towards providing medical services that are needed by different individuals in the United States. Support Please find additional support documentation and the necessary administrative forms below. Query: athenanet contact number",
"output": [
"The phone number of Athenanet is 800-981-5084, 617-402-1631."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c99bef7cb3af4311987d9118316f2de1",
"input": "They may be called in for emergencies and/or to function as the free trauma team. From 11p-7a, we have another 2 RNs and 2 STs on call. Same as with the 3p-11p on call. Staff are required to sign up for 1 8-hour block of call per week. On weekends (every third), it's a combination of 3 shifts of call and work. Long Nursing Shifts Linked to Job Dissatisfaction Greater burnout could lead to mistakes, poor care, researchers caution Please note: This article was published more than one year ago. While shifts vary according to a healthcare facility or hospital, the typical night shift is between the hours of 11:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. Some nurses may start a shift as early as 8:00 p.m. At the end of a night shift, nurses return home where they usually rest and rejuvenate in the early hours of the day. Unfortunately, sleeping throughout the day is sometimes difficult to achieve. In the near term, Dr. Caruso says, shifts between 11 p.m. and 7 a.m. can: 1 Result in sleep deprivation and sleepiness. 2 Cause insomnia. 3 Negatively impact clear thinking and instigate memory problems. 4 Affect physical coordination and slow normal reaction time. 5 Depress your immune system response. Despite literature saying the majority of nurses like 12-hour shifts, their research found they were more likely to leave their job than those who worked shorter shifts. Nurses underestimate the impact of working long shifts because the idea of working 3 days a week instead of 5 seems appealing, Stimpfel and colleagues wrote. Researchers found a relationship between shift length and patient satisfaction. When nurses worked shorter shifts, patients were more satisfied. The 12-hour shift: friend or foe? 30 January, 2015 Working 12-hour shifts can benefit staff and healthcare organisations but the risks and potential adverse outcomes must be carefully considered and mitigated against. Subscribe for full online access and get... Additional tips on how to survive the drive home after working the night shift include: 1 Carpool with another nurse when possible, and hold a conversation with the driver. 2 When applicable, choose public transportation. 3 Do not stop for drinks with co-workers as a way to unwind. Hospital nurses often work shifts of 12 hours or longer, either by choice or because of pressure from their managers. But what effect do such long hours have on job satisfaction, and equally important, on the quality of patient care? At the hospital I work at, we do either 8 or 12 hour shifts. Sometimes we come in for 4 hours, and end up staying for longer. It varies among hospitals. The longest I have worked was 18 hours, and that was very unsafe because by hour 15 I was exhausted and more liable to make a mistake. Each state has its rules about nursing hours and requirements. 84.1% of ICU nurses work 12+ hour shifts. 74.3% of black nurses worked 12+ hour shifts, compared to 64.2% of white nurses. 78.4% of male nurses worked 12+ hr shifts, compared to 69.4% of female nurses. 71.4% of nurses with a bachelor's education or higher worked 12+ hour shifts. Query: how long are nursing shifts",
"output": [
"Nursing shifts are 12 hours long."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-df7f97425ad648158d99f17d2e1e4b1b",
"input": "Many people don’t know the difference between cardiac arrest and a heart attack or fainting spell. A person in cardiac arrest doesn’t breathe, doesn’t have a pulse, and can’t respond to you. Someone having a heart attack usually is conscious and breathing, has a pulse, and can answer your questions. Respond. Here’s what you should do if you witness someone go into cardiac arrest: Call 911 right away, or have someone else do it. What happens in cardiac arrest. 1 Once the usual blood circulation stops, oxygen delivery to all vital organs is also stopped. 2 The pulse that is usually seen in the carotid artery in the neck as well in the wrists and ankles is lacking. 3 Cardiac arrest may lead to sudden cardiac death or SCD. If you survive a cardiac arrest, your doctor may start you on one or more treatments to reduce the risk of another attack. Medication can lower high blood pressure and cholesterol. Surgery can repair damaged blood vessels or heart valves. A previous cardiac arrest or heart attack; A family history of cardiac arrest or heart disease What to Do. With quick action, you can survive sudden cardiac arrest. CPR needs to begin immediately, and treatment with an automated external defibrillator within a few minutes. The pre-participation athletic physical examination is a useful tool to screen children andadolescents for their risk of sudden cardiac arrest. Commotio cordis is a situation in which the heart stops when the chest is hit by an object. Some are in-person courses; others are online. Many local departments of public health also provide CPR training, including “friends and family” classes for people close to someone at risk of cardiac arrest. The investment of time and effort to learn CPR is small. The potential payoff — saving a life — is huge. How common is Sudden Cardiac Arrest? Sudden Cardiac Arrest is a leading cause of death in the U.S. It affects more than 356,000 adults (356,461 EMS-assessed individuals) outside hospitals each year. Does Sudden Cardiac Arrest mostly affect the elderly? No. While the average Sudden Cardiac Arrest victim is 60-years-old, SCA affects people of all ages—even children and teens. For People Who Have No Known Risk Factors for Sudden Cardiac Arrest CHD seems to be the cause of most SCAs in adults. CHD also is a major risk factor for angina (chest pain or discomfort) and heart attack, and it contributes to other heart problems. Some people choose to avoid aggressive measures at the end of life. A do not resuscitate order (DNR) in the form of an advance health care directive makes it clear that in the event of cardiac arrest, the person does not wish to receive cardiopulmonary resuscitation. Cardiac arrest involves the cessation of the heart muscle pumping blood through the body. If the body doesn't pump blood through the body, the other organs are deprived of oxygen including the brain resulting in irreversible brain injury. Learn what happens during cardiac arrest, treatment and diagnosis. Query: how does cardiac arrest impact a person",
"output": [
"A person in cardiac arrest doesn’t breathe, doesn’t have a pulse, and can’t respond to someone."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-cb82883320ed4b88b420e5cada4ce830",
"input": "How long does it take for someone to get sick when exposed to the flu virus ? -- What you're asking is how long is the incubation period. From two to five days depending on the specific flu virus. is usually takes 4 days from getting the virus to getting symptoms. usually when you are symptomless for 48 hours you are considered clear from most ilnesses. I always heard any exposure to a sickness takes about 24-48 hours to get. While how well the flu vaccine works can vary, there are many reasons to get a flu vaccine each year. Flu vaccination can keep you from getting sick with flu. Flu vaccination can reduce the risk of flu-associated hospitalization, including among children and older adults. Many people use the term stomach flu to describe illnesses with nausea, vomiting or diarrhea. These symptoms can be caused by many different viruses, bacteria or even parasites. While vomiting, diarrhea, and being nauseous or sick to your stomach can sometimes be related to the flu – more commonly in children than adults – these problems are rarely the main symptoms of influenza. The flu is a respiratory disease and not a stomach or intestinal disease. If you're still feeling well within 5-7 days of exposure, most likely it's not a flu virus your friend has. See the link below for further information. The flu shot does not protect against: 1 The common cold. 2 Pneumonia (although it may protect you from pneumonia as a complication of the flu) 3 Bronchitis. 4 Stomach flu. It takes approximately 24-48 hours for initial symptoms to appear after exposure to the influenza virus. If you suspect you have the flu, seek medical treatment quickly. Tamiflu, if taken within the first 48 hours of symptoms occurring, can reduce the time it takes to heal and can reduce symptoms. The opinions expressed here are solely those of the User. Sudden onset of the symptoms may be felt 24 to 48 hours after being contaminated with the virus. People who have been exposed to the stomach flu virus should take special precautions to try to avoid becoming ill, however there is no surefire way to prevent infection. Flu symptoms usually begin one to four days after a person has been exposed to the flu virus. Is the stomach flu really the flu? Many people use the term stomach flu to describe illnesses with nausea, vomiting or diarrhea. The state of your immune system is what determines whether or not you will get sick when exposed to a flu virus Half of people exposed to the flu virus will get sick while the other half won't Everyone's immune system responds to the flu virus in a complex way. However, some responses will prevent you from getting sick, while others will result in flu symptoms Despite the fact that it's so common—there are at least 20 million stomach-flu cases in the U.S each year—many people don't know much about it. For one, it's not really the flu! Here are 13 things you need to know about viral gastroenteritis (its true medical name), starting with the fact that it's caused by viruses that attack the stomach and intestines. The incubation period could be very short: within twenty-four hours of being exposed to the virus, you could start experiencing symptoms. Trinity Heal The incubation period could be very short: within twenty-four hours of being exposed to the virus, you could start experiencing symptoms. Query: how long to get sick after being exposed to flu",
"output": [
"Flu symptoms usually begin one to four days after a person has been exposed to the flu virus."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9f350694751c427fa0d361c6027cb86b",
"input": "Itasca State Park. Established in 1891, Itasca is Minnesota's oldest state park. Today, the park totals more than 32,000 acres and includes more than 100 lakes. Walk across the mighty Mississippi as it starts its winding journey 2,552 miles to the Gulf of Mexico. Stand under towering pines at Preacher's Grove. Travelers can spend a day exploring a short portion of the byway, or a week traveling through several states – or many weeks traveling the entire length of the river. It would take a lifetime to truly experience all that the Great River Road has to offer. Start your Great River Road journey today. Find current road conditions along the Great River Road. Learn more. 6 things you might not know about the Great River Road; Four things to love about the Great River Road; Travel along the Great River Road with author Gayle Harper; Celebrate Drive the Great River Road Month in September Back in the day, when I was in high school, I wanted to take a paddle boat down the Mississippi River. But, more recently, we kinda thought that maybe it would be best to take a canoe. This winter, my brothers really wanted to go, and that pushed us to make it happen this summer. There are seven National Park Service sites along the Mississippi River. The Mississippi National River and Recreation Area is the National Park Service site dedicated to protecting and interpreting the Mississippi River itself. The mile marks go upriver so mile zero is at the lower end of the upper Mississippi River at Cairo, IL. In all there are 29 locks to pass through on the upper Mississippi River. The Mississippi River may be the most musical river in the entire world! Drum songs, folk songs, blues and jazz were all created and recreated along its banks. In Life on the Mississippi, he wrote of having seen monstrous-sized catfish six feet long, weighing 250 pounds.. Even today, traditions and myths survive among river people of giant fishes and other river creatures of fabulous size. The lower Mississippi is very different from the upper river. The upper river has many islands, back channels, and back water areas. Crossing are often 5 miles wide. In contrast, the lower Mississippi runs in a single narrow deep channel at a relatively fast rate of flow. The Mississippi is one of the world’s great rivers. It spans 3,860 miles (6,210 km) of length as measured using its northernmost west fork, the Missouri River, which starts in the Rocky Mountains in Montana, joining the Mississippi proper in the state of Missouri. My folks at age 22 canoed down the Mississippi in 1940 in my dad’s homemade yellow canoe. People in the river towns took them in at night and fed them. They went all the way down to St. Louis. I believe they started in northern Illinois somewhere. Query: how long does the mississippi river go",
"output": [
"The Mississippi river goes upto 3,860 miles."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-630066f045304546900356699ebde89b",
"input": "Calcium is a chemical element. Its symbol on the periodic table is Ca. Its atomic number is 20. It has 20 protons and 20 electrons. The most common isotopes are Ca-40 and Ca-44. Its mass number is about 40.08. Calcium is very important in the human body, for making bones and for other purposes. As you state in the question, glucose enters the beta-cell and is metabolized creating an INCREASE in the ATP content of the cell. This increased ATP binds to ATP-sensitive potassium channels and CLOSES them. Inactivation and closure is an intrinsic property of that type of calcium channel, and the channels do not REACTIVATE until the cell returns to being polarized once again. This inactivation is what limits the amount of calcium flux INTO the cell, which as mentioned in the other answer can be toxic to the cell. Calcium is not found as a metal in the ground; it is too reactive. Calcium carbonate, also known as calcite, is the most common calcium mineral. Calcium in cells. It is important to know how cells work. Many cells have calcium channels on their surface. These are openings where calcium ions can enter the cell. The cell is told to act and it opens the channels. Once in the cell calcium ions activates many proteins to do specific things. When the cell reaches a threshold potential (that is, when it becomes depolarized to a certain point), it will cause opening of a type of voltage sensitive calcium channels. At this point, calcium channels open and allow calcium to flow down its concentration gradient and INTO the beta-cells. This calcium entry is required for the release of insulin vesicles through a mechanism that is outside the scope of this question, but unrelated to the calcium channels opening and closing. Remember, these channels are typically OPEN and allow potassium to normally flow OUT of the cell (because that would be potassium flowing DOWN its concentration gradient... potassium concentration is higher inside the cell than outside the cell). Note: This is the opposite for calcium, which would flow INTO the cell and down its concentration gradient (calcium outside the cell is higher than calcium inside the cell). At the same time the ATP-sensitive channels are acting, there are Na/K ATPase pumps at work to move sodium OUT of the cell and potassium INTO to the cell (against the concentration gradients of both those ions). How does excitation-contraction coupling in a cardiac muscle cell differ from that in a skeletal and smooth muscle fiber. Cardiac--depolarization due to influx of calcium ions through voltage gated channels (L type calcium channels which are modified versions of the DHP receptors in skeletal muscle). Cardiac--instead of being open directly by voltage as in skeletal muscle, cardiac are opened by binding of trigger calcium in cytosol. Mechanism by which individual muscle cells of the heart function as if they were a single unit, all undergoing synchronous electrical and mechanical activity. Cardiac muscles are joined by gap junctions that permit the conduction of action potential from cell to cell. This means that potassium can't leave the cell anymore, which depolarises the membrane and causes voltage-gated calcium channels to open and release calcium into the cell to trigger insulin release. I don't understand why this happens, because both potassium and calcium being positively charged. When it is in a chunk, it starts reacting slowly because calcium hydroxide makes a coating that does not dissolve on the calcium. If a little acid is added to calcium hydroxide, it dissolves it, making the calcium react very fast. It burns when powdered to make a reddish flame. This makes calcium oxide. Query: how does calcium enter the cell",
"output": [
"Many cells have calcium channels on their surface. These are openings where calcium ions can enter the cell. The cell is told to act and it opens the channels."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-dd7472f973834a77aeb53afbb458de0b",
"input": "One hundred years from now, a day will be about 2 milliseconds longer than today. Two milliseconds is 1/500th of a second, or how long it takes a car going 55 mph to travel only 2 inches--in other words, much less than the blink of an eye. Quick Answer. The Earth completes a rotation around the sun, known as an orbit, in 365.24 days. Earth is located an average of 92.96 million miles from the sun, varying between the closest distance of 91.40 million miles and the furthest distance of 94.51 million miles. Discussion Questions These questions can be used for group discussion or for written answers in the students’ learning logs. 1. How many days does it take for the Earth to make one revolution of the Sun? Answer: The Earth takes 365 ¼ days to revolve around the Sun. This is known as one Earth year. Each planet takes a different amount of time to rotate around the Sun. 2. How many times will the Earth rotate as it goes around the sun once? Answer: The Earth rotates 365 ¼ times as it revolves around the Sun. This is also the number of days in one Earth year. 3. If it takes 365 ¼ days for the Earth to go around the Sun, but each year only has 365 days, what happens to the ¼ day? Answer: Leap Year occurs every 4 years. This is because each 4 times around the Sun, there is a total of one extra day. (¼ + ¼ + ¼ + ¼ = 1) This day is added on February 29th every fourth year, making that year 366 days long. 4. How many times does the Moon orbit the Earth in one Earth year? Answer: About 12, or 12.3 times. This is why we have about twelve full moons each year. 5. Does the Moon give off its own light? How do you know? Answer: No, in this model, the Moon is represented by a Styrofoam ball and does not give off light. 6. Each planet in the solar system has its own unique rotation rate. Tiny Mercury, sizzling closest to the Sun, takes 59 Earth days to turn around just once. Venus, the second planet, rotates once every 243 Earth days. What's more, Venus rotates backwards from the direction of its orbit around the Sun, as do Uranus and tiny dwarf planet Pluto. Uranus even lies down on the job, rolling around with its axis of rotation pointed nearly toward the Sun. Why do Earth and the other planets rotate at all? Scientists estimate that a day in the life of early Earth was only about 6 hours long. The Moon formed much closer to Earth than it is today. As Earth rotates, the Moon's gravity causes the oceans to seem to rise and fall. (The Sun also does this, but not as much.) There is a little bit of friction between the tides and the turning Earth, causing the rotation to slow down just a little. As Earth slows, it lets the Moon creep away. Earth's rotation, he added, is also affected by the tidal pull of the moon. Because of the moon, the spin of the Earth is slowing down at a rate of about 1 millisecond per year. The Earth spun around at a faster clip in the past, enough so that during the time of the dinosaurs a day was about 22 hours long. In addition to slowing the Earth's rotation, the moon's tidal pull is causing the moon to slowly recede from the Earth, at a rate of about 1 millimeter per year. The Earth completes a rotation around the sun, known as an orbit, in 365.24 days. Earth is located an average of 92.96 million miles from the sun, varying between the closest distance of 91.40... The Earth completes a rotation around the sun, known as an orbit, in 365.24 days. The total circumference of Earth's orbit is a little over 584 million miles. Although an Earth day is equal to 24 hours, the planet actually completes a rotation around its axis, which is known as a sidereal orbit period, once every 23 hours, 56 minutes and 4.09 seconds. Discussion Questions. These questions can be used for group discussion or for written answers in. the students’ learning logs. 1. How many days does it take for the Earth to make one revolution of. How long does it take for the Earth to spin once? A: Earth makes a complete rotation every 24 hours. The Earth spins at 1,036 miles per hour at the equator while remaining near stationary at the poles. Full Answer > Query: how long does the earth spin around",
"output": [
"Earth makes a complete rotation every 24 hours."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-48d44a215fd54186bfb0d558e5dfc574",
"input": "In blood and saliva tests, as far as how long does weed stay in your system, expect traces of these substances to be present for up to 24 hours. As mentioned above the standard hair test will check for a 90-day history of substance use. How to Get Pot Out of Your System. If you have a pre-employment drug test coming up or your company is known to conduct random testing, you may find yourself trying to clean up your system and make it test-ready. Of course, the only way to... THC detectable in Urine. 1 Single use or first time: generally 3–4 days, possibly up to 10 days. 2 Frequent use: 10-15 days. 3 Regular (daily) use: 15-30 days. 4 Heavy use: 45-77 days. Urine testing is the most common method for detecting marijuana / cannabis consumption. It can be detected up to 5 days after consumption in infrequent users while it can be detected up to 15 days after consumption in heavy users or those with a high percentage of body fat. On a Urine Drug Test, THC will appear as a positive within 2-5 hours of use. How long it will still show on a urine drug test is estimated based on frequency of use, but does not take into account the weight and body fat of the marijuana user: One Time User may show positive for 1-6 days On a Saliva Drug Test, THC will test positive within one hour of use, but you may have marijuana in your system for about 12 hours after last use. How long does drugs stay in your hair? On a Hair Drug Test, THC will show up about 7 days after use and most hair drug tests will test for a 90 day period. However, THC does not always bind to the hair follicle which makes it not always considered an accurate testing method for marijuana use. How to Get Pot Out of Your System Three Parts: Understanding THC and Drug Tests Getting Clean Dispelling Drug Test Myths Community Q&A If you have a pre-employment drug test coming up or your company is known to conduct random testing, you may find yourself trying to clean up your system and make it test-ready. Of course, the only way to have a pot-free system is not to smoke or ingest marijuana in the first place. If your urine comes off as too dilute, and you get a second chance to take the test, schedule it as far out as possible. This will give you time to either reach the end of your detectable period or to try the dilution method again, making adjustments so that you don’t over-dilute. When the concentration of marijuana in urine exceeds 50 ng/mL, most THC drug tests yield a positive result. Blood testing. In blood samples, cannabis can be detected for about 12 to 24 hours after consumption, with regards to infrequent users. The drug can be found in blood samples of frequent users for up to 7 days. Blood tests are not so common but are usually done in investigations of accidents and injuries. How long does weed stay in your system? The total amount of time that weed stays in your system depends on the conditions of the user and how frequently they smoke marijuana. As you continue to consume cannabis, the THC accumulates in the body. The more cannabis you consume, the longer it will take for the THC to clear out of your system. Query: how long does it take for marijuana to get out your system",
"output": [
"Marijuana in your system for about 12 hours after last use."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-988768095f184b748232c5cf54509318",
"input": "The Qin dynasty was brief in duration (221-206 BCE) but very important in Chinese history. It followed the Zhou dynasty (1046-256 BCE) and... The Qin dynasty was brief in duration (221-206 BCE) but very important in Chinese history. It followed the Zhou dynasty (1046-256 BCE) and it ended when Liu Bang became the king of Han in 206 BCE (the formal beginning of the Han dynasty). Despite its brevity, the Qin dynasty left important marks on Chinese culture. The imperial era was 221 BC – 1912 AD, from China's unification under Qin rule till the end of the Qing Dynasty, the Republic of China era from 1912, and the modern China era from 1949. Timeline of Chinese History The short-lived Qin Dynasty was the first to unite China as a country under an emperor instead of a ruling clan. A bureaucratic government was introduced, and was continued by the less-extreme Han Dynasty. The Qin Dynasty (221–206 BC) was the first and shortest imperial dynasty in China, famous for great building projects like the Great Wall and the Terracotta Army. Liu Bang, a peasant leader, overthrew the unpopular Qin regime and established the Han Dynasty. Written By: Shang dynasty, Wade-Giles romanization Shang, the first recorded Chinese dynasty for which there is both documentary and archaeological evidence. The Shang dynasty was the reputed successor to the quasi-legendary first dynasty, the Xia (c. 2070–c. 1600 bce). Bronze gu from Anyang, Henan province, China, Shang dynasty (c. 1600–1046 bce); in the William Rockhill Nelson Gallery and Mary Atkins Museum of Fine Arts, Kansas City, Mo. China is one of the world's four ancient civilizations, and the written history of China dates back to the Shang Dynasty (c. 1600–1046 BC), over 3,000 years ago. Pre-1600 BC China is charted mainly by legend and pre-historic evidence. The ancient China era was c. 1600–221 BC. Assorted References. 1 major treatment (in China: The first historical dynasty: the Shang) 2 archaeological discoveries (in Li Chi) (in archaeology: Developments in the 20th century and beyond) 3 Chinese architecture (in Chinese architecture: Neolithic and Shang dynasty (c. 1600–1046 bce)) From Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia Jump to: navigation, search 漢朝 The Han Dynasty ← 206 BC – 220 → → → Han Dynasty in 87 BC Capital Chang'an (202 BC–9 AD) Luoyang (25 AD–190 AD) Language(s) Chinese Religion Taoism, Confucianism Government Monarchy History - Establishment 206 BC - Battle of Gaixia; Han rule of China begins 202 BC - Interruption of ... The Han Dynasty was ruled by the prominent family known as the Liu (劉) clan. The reign of the Han Dynasty, lasting over 400 years, is commonly considered within China to be one of the greatest periods in the history of China. To this day, the ethnic majority of China still refer to themselves as People of the Han.. Hope that helps. 1 The dates given for the founding of the Shang dynasty vary from about 1760 to 1520 bce, and the dates for the dynasty’s fall also vary, from 1122 to 1030 bce. The period of the dynasty’s rule has traditionally been dated 1766–1122 bce. The latter part of the Shang dynasty, from the reign of the Pangeng emperor onward (i.e., c. 1300 bce), has also been called the Yin dynasty. Query: how long ago was the qin dynasty",
"output": [
"The Qin Dynasty is from 221 BC to 206 BC."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-737cf174756842a9a0b935288ab90edf",
"input": "California Code of Regulation, section 2032.3(b) states that the following information shall be included: (1)Name and address of client and animal. (2)Age, sex, breed, species and color of animal. (3)History or pertinent information as it pertains to each animal´s medial status. According to the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, the median annual salary for veterinarians in May 2015 was $88,490. To become a vet, a doctorate degree in veterinary medicine is required and you must pass the North American Veterinary Licensing Exam to earn licensure. There may be additional licensure requirements specific to each state. Sometimes it's difficult to know when it's appropriate to take your pet to the vet. John Wood Photography/Getty Images | Thomas Northcut/Thinkstock | iStockphoto/Thinkstock (2) | GK Hart/Vikki Hart/Getty Images (2) Sometimes it's obvious when your cat needs medical attention. Veterinarians must have a Doctor of Veterinary Medicine degree from an accredited veterinary college, as well as a state license. Pay. The median annual wage for veterinarians was $88,770 in May 2016. Job Outlook. Employment of veterinarians is projected to grow 19 percent from 2016 to 2026, much faster than the average for all occupations. Increases in consumers’ pet-related expenditures are expected to drive employment in the veterinary services industry, which employs most veterinarians. Veterinary medicine has advanced considerably. Veterinary technicians often have to work long hours, nights, and an erratic or overwhelming schedule. Some animal clinics operate 24 hours a day, and they need people to be staffed during all hours of the night. She was employed as a veterinary technician for 2.5 years before attending veterinary school at Texas A&M College of Veterinary Medicine. Following graduation with her Doctor of Veterinary Medicine in 2004, Dr. Bryant practiced high quality, small animal veterinary medicine for several years as an associate before opening her own practice, Plum Creek Veterinary Hospital, in 2010. Dog vomiting and dog diarrhea. Vomiting and diarrhea are common problems in dogs and while they can be signs of a serious dog health issues the majority of cases are simple gastric upset that typically resolves within 24 hours. In general, professional and volunteer experiences are best completed while earning the bachelor’s degree. Waiting until after graduation could extend the amount of time it takes to become a veterinarian. Veterinary Doctorate. Professional veterinary programs are usually 4 years long. They are typically bisected into dual 2-year segments, focusing on classroom instruction and clinical practice, in that order. Veterinary school is extremely competitive. Because animals can get sick at anytime, vets often work long hours. Those in group practices may take turns working weekends or evenings and dealing with emergencies. Many vets like their work because they can be with animals every day. Prospective veterinarians must complete a doctor of veterinary medicine degree. Typically, a doctorate in veterinary medicine takes four years to complete. Of these four years, three are spent on classroom training where students take courses in animal anatomy and physiology. They also take courses on disease diagnosis, prevention and treatment. Veterinary programs may also include management and career development courses. Query: how long to be the vet",
"output": [
"A doctorate in veterinary medicine takes four years to complete."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1fb4b3d0772e46b2acbb433e3f6cbbdb",
"input": "Creatine Alpha-Ketoglutarate – Creatine alpha-ketoglutarate is creatine attached to alpha-ketoglutarate. Like with arginine alpha-ketoglutarate, the popular nitric oxide booster, this form of creatine is supposed to be better absorbed by the body than monohydrate. Most studies use a high-dose loading strategy, which can rapidly elevate your muscle creatine content. Although this is not necessary, it will help you reap the benefits of creatine after just a few days . To load with creatine, take four 5-gram servings throughout the day for about 5-7 days. After that, take 3-5 grams per day to maintain your muscle creatine stores . The key point to take away from this article is that creatine supplementation can certainly enhance performance output, especially anaerobically, and it does this through a variety of mechanisms (one of which appears to be by enhancing recovery during intermittent, high-intensity exercise). Creatine works. Weight lifters know this, professors know this, the marketers who sell the stuff know this. But nobody should put anything in their body without weighing the benefits and risks first. That goes for everything from beer to marshmallows to the amazing amino acid called creatine. It’s not anything scary. Some research shows that taking 20 grams of creatine daily for 5 days followed by 5 grams daily for 5 days does not improve muscle strength. But other research shows that taking 20 grams daily for 4-10 days does improve strength. Research on creatine in the elderly is also conflicting. Over the last couple of decades, creatine has become a supplement staple for guys looking to build strength and lean muscle mass. At the very least, you've probably seen guys around the gym taking creatine in the form of powder, capsules, or as part of a pre-made shake. “[But] the best effect in healthy humans is seen when creatine is combined with resistance exercise training.” Creatine causes gastrointestinal upset. True—but it’s rare. Tarnopolsky says his studies show 5 to 7 percent of people experience either stomach aches, diarrhea, or both. Creatine will help you run a faster 5K. Myth. The Iranian researchers concluded that since myostatin levels were lower in the subjects taking creatine, one way that creatine may work to increase muscle size and strength is by reducing myostatin levels, which reduces the limitation that this protein places on muscle growth. In children with the certain creatine deficiency syndromes, oral creatine supplements might improve some symptoms. Heart failure. There isn't enough evidence to recommend use of oral creatine as a heart failure treatment. Taking creatine while taking Tagamet may increase the risk of kidney damage. Drugs that affect the kidneys. Using creatine along with any medication that affects the kidneys may raise the risk of kidney damage. Probenecid. Taking creatine while taking probenecid, a drug used to treat gout, may increase the risk of kidney damage. Query: how does creatine help with strength",
"output": [
"One way that creatine may work to increase muscle size and strength is by reducing myostatin levels, which reduces the limitation that this protein places on muscle growth."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7a9b5f02a8254616aac7567daa84dd7a",
"input": "You can find this page online at: https://www.sciencebuddies.org/science-fair-projects/science-fair/writing-conclusions You may print and distribute up to 200 copies of this document annually, at no charge, for personal and classroom educational use. Step 1, Go over your assignment. Verify that you’ve accomplished all the parts of your assignment so that you can properly address them in the conclusion. Take a few moments to make a list of what you’re supposed to demonstrate or learn in the experiment.Step 2, Revisit your introduction. To make sure your conclusion is consistent with the rest of your report, revisit your lab report’s introduction.[1] This is a good tactic to help you brainstorm exactly what you’d like to ... Instructions on Writing a Conclusion for a Science Fair Project. 1 Beginning with the conclusion of a science project, you have to enclose the results of your experiment in one or two sentences. 2 Give a brief review of your hypothesis that you have created in the beginning of your experiment. Your conclusions will summarize whether or not your science fair project results support or contradict your original hypothesis. If you are doing an Engineering or Computer Science programming project, then you should state whether or not you met your design criteria. While writing the conclusion of a science project, important points to keep in mind include: Instructions on Writing a Conclusion for a Science Fair Project. Beginning with the conclusion of a science project, you have to enclose the results of your experiment in one or two sentences. This does not mean that the sentences have to involve the statistical data but it should have to demonstrate and compare various control groups. Your conclusions summarize how your results support or contradict your original hypothesis: Summarize your science fair project results in a few sentences and use this summary to support your conclusion. Include key facts from your background research to help explain your results as needed. State whether your results support or contradict your hypothesis. The conclusion for a science fair project is the most important part as it sums up what you have found from your experiment. In this portion, you also make further comments regarding your outcomes and discoveries. Your conclusion for a science project might be one to three or four paragraphs long. Instructions on Writing a Conclusion for a Science Fair Project Beginning with the conclusion of a science project, you have to enclose the results of your experiment in one or two sentences. This does not mean that the sentences have to involve the statistical data but it should have to demonstrate and compare various control groups. Researching a Science Fair Project. Getting engaged into research is a long time commitment. Especially for science fair projects, you create a hypothesis and do an experiment. You do the experiment second time to compare the findings for your outcomes. Start mapping out the different elements of your conclusion by using the RERUN method. The RERUN method can be a useful structure overall for a short lab report, but it is especially useful for providing a conclusion to your report that reviews the experiment’s important components., RERUN stands for: Restate: Restate the lab experiment. Query: how long should a science fair conclusion be?",
"output": [
"Beginning with the conclusion of a science project, you have to enclose the results of your experiment in one or two sentences."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f515b717138b4718840325d08e28bab7",
"input": "Studies of cells in lab dishes and test tubes have shown that sunlight and simulated sunlight (for example, from xenon or xenon-mercury arc lamps) can cause DNA damage (mutations). Studies in animals Exposure of mice, rats, and some other lab animals to sunlight and artificial sources of UV rays has been shown to lead to skin cancers. Basal and squamous cell skin cancer: Many observational studies have found that basal and squamous cell skin cancers are linked to certain behaviors that put people in the sun, as well as a number of markers of sun exposure, such as: 1 Spending time in the sun for recreation (including going to the beach) Melanoma: Observational studies have also found links between certain behaviors and markers of sun exposure and melanoma of the skin, including: 1 Activities that lead to “intermittent sun exposure,” like sunbathing, water sports, and taking vacations in sunny places. 2 Previous sunburns. Additional Reading. 1 Black HS, deGruijl FR, Forbes PD et al. Photocarcinogenesis: an overview. 2 Freeman SE, Hacham H, Gange RW et al. Wavelength dependence of pyrimidine dimer formation in DNA of human skin irradiated in situ with ultraviolet light. 3 Lindahl T, Wood RD. Quality control by DNA repair. No type of UV radiation has been shown to be safe – cancers have developed after exposure to UVA (alone), UVB (alone), and UVC (alone). What expert agencies say. Several national and international agencies study different substances in the environment to determine if they can cause cancer. However, this is not always the case. The signature mutation caused by ultraviolet light is a CC to TT mutation, caused when a CC dimer is mispaired with two adenine bases during replication. Because of these mutations, the connection between ultraviolet damage to DNA and cancer is quite clear. Whenever we walk in the sun, ultraviolet light (UV) attacks our DNA, making chemical changes that corrupt our genetic information. Fortunately, the most dangerous UV light never reaches us at all: the ozone in the upper atmosphere absorbs (at least for now) the energetic UVC wavelengths. The longer UV wavelengths, however, do pass through the atmosphere and fall on us. Yes. In fact, most skin cancers are a direct result of exposure to the UV rays in sunlight. Both basal cell and squamous cell cancers (the most common types of skin cancer) tend to be found on sun-exposed parts of the body, and their occurrence is typically related to lifetime sun exposure. Studies of cells in lab dishes and test tubes have shown that sunlight and simulated sunlight (for example, from xenon or xenon-mercury arc lamps) can cause DNA damage (mutations). Studies in animals. Exposure of mice, rats, and some other lab animals to sunlight and artificial sources of UV rays has been shown to lead to skin cancers. Ultraviolet light is absorbed by a double bond in pyrimidine bases (such as thymine and cytosine in DNA), opening the bond and allowing it to react with neighboring molecules. If it is next to a second pyrimidine base, the UV-modified base forms direct covalent bonds with it. Query: how does uv light cause mutations?",
"output": [
"The signature mutation caused by ultraviolet light is a CC to TT mutation, caused when a CC dimer is mispaired with two adenine bases during replication."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-22c3f77809ee4b698f201c59c96a232d",
"input": "+4.4%. Source: This article is about the demographic features of the population of Austria, including population density, ethnicity, education level, health of the populace, economic status, religious affiliations and other aspects of the population. Austria · historical and predicted populations (both sexes) for the period 1950-2100 (millions) De facto population in Austria as of 1 July of the year indicated. Source United Nations Population Division . In 2015, Austria has an estimated population of 8,557,000.. 8,595,934. Austria's current population is estimated at 8.557 million, up from its last official census. The last Austrian census was preliminary resultsconducted in 2011, showing a population of 8.421 million, up 5% over the last ten years. Austria's current population is estimated at 8.75 million, up from its last official census. The last Austrian census was preliminary resultsconducted in 2011, showing a population of 8.421 million, up 5% over the last ten years. The capital and largest city in Austria is Vienna, with a population of more than 1.7 million. and a metro population of 2.42 million. Vienna is very densely populated with more than 4,000 people per square kilometer (10,366/square mile). Austria · Population. On this page you can find past, current and future population statistics for Austria (from 1950-2100), population map, demographics, live population counter etc. . Question: What is the population of Austria? Answer: Current population of Austria is: 8 610 128* [1], area 83858 km², population density 102.68 p/km². Capital of Austria is Vienna. Austria · Population 1950-2100. Austria · historical and predicted populations (both sexes) for the period 1950-2100 (millions) De facto population in Austria as of 1 July of the year indicated. Source United Nations Population Division [1]. Navigation: Population / Countries / Austria Austria · Population On this page you can find past, current and future population statistics for Austria (from 1950-2100), population map, demographics, live population counter etc. . Question: What is the population of Austria? Answer: Current population of Austria is: 8 598 903*[1], area 83858 km², population density 102.54 p/km². According to the Austrian Statistical Bureau, 814,800 foreigners legally lived in Austria in mid-2006, representing 9.8% of the total population, one of the highest rates in Europe. Of these foreign residents, 305,100 came from the former Yugoslavia and 110,800 from Turkey. Across the entire country, the majority of the population increase recorded between 2001 and 2011 is as a result of immigration into Austria - the number of people living in Austria but born elsewhere increased by 35% over the past decade. Demographics of Austria. This article is about the demographic features of the population of Austria, including population density, ethnicity, education level, health of the populace, economic status, religious affiliations and other aspects of the population. Query: austrian population",
"output": [
"The population of Austria is 8.75 million."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e460f0cc8ef044ebb52ccf498b7592fe",
"input": "All this—and more—means Availity is the place for a career with purpose and a life with balance. At Availity, it’s work and life working together. Read more Glassdoor gives you an inside look at what it's like to work at Availity, including salaries, reviews, office photos, and more. This is the Availity company profile. All content is posted anonymously by employees working at Availity. Availity offers both a multi-payer portal and an EDI clearinghouse. The multi-payer portal that BCBSGa is recommending optimizes the flow of information between health Why does Humana want health care providers to use the Availity Web Portal? Humana tries to streamline health care processes wherever possible. Humana has selected Availity as its preferred provider portal because it helps health care providers access secure information and submit transactions online. By using the multipayer Availity Web Portal, health care providers can access information and transactions from Humana and other payers on one website. To upload a batch of claims on the portal: 1 Create a claim file using your current billing software. 2 Log into http://www.availity.com/ . 3 Click EDI File Management/Send and Receive EDI Files. 4 Click the Send Files mailbox. 5 Browse your computer for the batch claim file and click on it. A: Availity is a health information network that offers a multi-payer portal which gives. physicians, hospitals and other health care providers access to multiple payers’. information through a single website and a single log in and password (sign-on). Q: What is Humana’s relationship with Availity? A: Availity was formed in Jacksonville, Florida, as a joint venture between Florida Blue (formerly Blue Cross and Blue Shield of Florida) and Humana in an effort to improve efficiency and reduce administrative complexity in the health care industry, with the ultimate goal of improving health care outcomes. Availity. BlueCross partnered with Availity to enhance our online tools and to offer our providers a wider range of web-based products and services. contact Availity Client Services (1.800.282.4548). 00050. ANTHEM CO. 3. x . x. This payer€accepts EDI batch claims via€the Availity portal only.€To do so, log in to the Availity portal (www.availity.com), and then click EDI File Management | Send and Receive EDI Files. After selecting your organization, click SendFiles. For further assistance, click Help at the top of the portal page or Availity is making healthcare better Availity is an industry-leading, HITRUST-certified health care information technology company that serves an extensive network of health plans, providers, and technology partners nationwide through a suite of dynamic products built on a powerful, intelligent platform. Query: availity what is it",
"output": [
"Availity is a health information network that offers a multi-payer portal which gives physicians, hospitals and other health care providers access to multiple payers’."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7a3f80917f9044388052019baaa2278e",
"input": "Classical Antiquity in Greece was preceded by the Greek Dark Ages (c. 1200 – c. 800 BC), archaeologically characterised by the protogeometric and geometric styles of designs on pottery. Following the Dark Ages was the Archaic Period, beginning around the 8th century BC. Earliest evidence of burials found in Franchthi Cave in the Argolid, Greece. 7250 BCE. Evidence of food producing economy, simple hut construction, and seafaring in mainland Greece and the Aegean. These conflicts, called the Crusades, began in 1095 and ended in 1291. The Dark Ages have often been described as a backwards time in human history. The Dark Ages came to a close around 1500 AD, as the Italian Renaissance and the Age of Discovery dawned. × The Dark Ages. The Dark Ages were a time in history when the population was declining and there was little literature or other arts. It gave way to a more enlightened time. This is a timeline of those years. The Iliad and the Odyssey. During the Greek Dark Age, poets called bards traveled to different poli. The bards told stories in the form of long poems called epics. People would often pay to hear the bards describe stories of the distant past. The bards would sing many of the epic poems while accompanied by a stringed instrument called a lyre. The last period of Ancient Egypt is known as the New Kingdom. This is the period of Tutankhamun, Akhenaten, and Ramses II. The New Kingdom lasted from 1570-1070 BC. The New Kingdom as a result of a diminishing of central power, the rise of the High Priests of Amun, and a series of droughts. That brings us to the so-called “Dark Age of Greece”—surely unique in the annals of history (or pseudo-history). Not only was it supposedly a time of great material poverty, but of a virtually complete depopulation of Greece and the Mediterranean islands for at least four hundred years. Writing disappeared. The Dark Ages is a categorization commonly used to describe the period between the fall of the Roman Empire and the beginning of the Italian Renaissance and the Age of Exploration. Roughly speaking, the Dark Ages corresponds to the Middle Ages, or from 500 to 1500 AD. The Long Dark The Greek Dark Age Proto-geometric and Geometric Art The Rise of the Hoplite This preview has intentionally blurred sections. Sign up to view the full version. Later, the term expanded to refer more generally to the supposed lack of cultural advancement in Europe from the fall of the Roman Empire to the dawn of the Renaissance, a period officially known as the Early Middle Ages (500-1000 A.D.). Query: how long was the greek dark age",
"output": [
"The Greek Dark Age was between c. 1200 and c. 800 BC."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7b29d243dd704dba8dc053f053b69b8e",
"input": "••• Rafting on the Truckee River Near Tahoe City. Vlad Butsky/Flickr/CC BY 2.0 The Truckee River begins near Carson Pass, Nevada and flows into Lake Tahoe, where water is released through a dam at Tahoe City, California. Truckee River Rafting: Easy Floats Most people who raft California's Truckee River take the scenic float from Tahoe City to River Ranch. These tips will help you make the most of your day. The water is deeper and cooler below Prosser Creek (at the first I-80 river overpass east of Truckee), and from there to the Boca Outlet, the fishing is better than the upper sections. The Boca exit and the second I-80 river overpass east of Truckee provide easy access. © 2017 Truckee Chamber of Commerce. 10065 Donner Pass Road, Truckee CA 96161. All Rights Reserved. | Terms and Conditions | Privacy Policy | Contact Us of consistent regulation be used in the analysis. For the mainstem Truckee River stations, all the annual peak discharges for 1970-97 were used in the analysis because this period is the time span when all current upstream Truckee River Basin reservoirs were completed and in operation. For Jul 26, 2011, 8:08 AM. The water temp is that of the Truckee River, this time of year usually fairly nice, but the snow melt took a long time so a bit cold still. There was snow in May and June so that is still a factor for the temp. Best source for water temps is the fishing reports for the Truckee River. It's several miles long, partially shaded; right along the beautiful, flowing Truckee River. Along the trail one can enjoy the lively sceneries; watching all those happy people (and their pets) rafting down the river in a variety of water-crafts, not to mention the views of those charming houses and small, narrow bridges along the river banks. Fly Fishing On The Truckee River In. California (Nevada) The 120 mile long Truckee River flows from Lake Tahoe. in California, through a section of the High Sierra. Nevada, to terminate in Pyramid Lake. Strategies for fly. fishing the Truckee River in California and Nevada, varies depending on the section of the river you're. fishing. But the situation is as serious as anything seen since 1994, the last time drought caused Lake Tahoe to dip below its natural rim so early in the year and the last time Reno's primary water supplier was forced to tap reserve supplies stored in the Truckee River's upstream reservoirs. The Truckee River is a river in the U.S. states of California and Nevada. The river flows northeasterly and is 121 miles (195 km) long.[2][6] The Truckee is the sole outlet of Lake Tahoe and drains part of the high Sierra Nevada, emptying into Pyramid Lake in the Great Basin. One Truckee River · February 5 at 3:13pm · Did you know the picturesque Herman's Pond at Rancho San Rafael Regional Park is part of the Truckee River watershed? Query: how long is the truckee river",
"output": [
"The truckee river is 121 miles long."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-855aa5fc994d49cc911504cf0a739a20",
"input": "How to store apple juice. Storing of the apple juice depends heavily on the type of juice you have. If it’s sold unrefrigerated, it can be stored in the pantry, as the preservatives that are in it protect the juice from going bad in such a temperature. If the apple juice is sold refrigerated, you should also keep it in the fridge. If you won’t, within a few days the quality of the juice will drop significantly and you’ll probably have to discard it. How to read the best-by date on Ocean Spray Cranberry Juice: The best-by date is located on the the neck of the bottle and reads: 13MAY12 - the first 2 digits are the Day, the month spelled out, then the last 2 digits are the year 2012. Juice and Cider: Make Sure They're Safe. When fall arrives, many of us look forward to enjoying fresh apple cider and juices. While most people think of juices as healthy foods, since they provide many essential nutrients, certain types of juice could pose a health risk to your family. Shelf life of apple juice. Let’s start with unopened containers, cans and bottle of apple juice. If it’s a traditional apple juice sold unrefrigerated, it can be kept in the pantry for at least a year. Keeping it in the pantry for a couple more months shouldn’t be an issue though. Interesting facts about Fruit Juice: 1 Tip: juice box containers freeze well and when put into a lunch box are usually thawed by lunchtime (but don't use a paper bag or the moisture from defrosting will destroy the bag). As you surely know, apple juice does go bad. When it comes to storing it, in 99% cases storing it the same way it was stored where you’ve bought it is the way to go. It’s quite easy to spot a bad apple juice – if it doesn’t smell fresh/normal, chances are it’s bad and should be discarded. Juices which are all fruit will spoil sooner than juices with added sugar and preservatives as the natural sugars in the fruit will begin to ferment over time. Just beware of added sugar in your juice. So, how long does juice last? When properly stored, the shelf life of fruit juice past its best by date is approximately ... Fresh Squeezed Citrus Juice lasts for: 2-3 Days--Treetop Apple Juice lasts for: 7-10 Days--Welch's Grape Juice lasts for: 7-10 Days--Orange Juice lasts for: 5-7 Days--Grapefruit Juice lasts for: 5-7 Days--Mango Juice lasts for: 5-7 Days--Guava Juice lasts for: 5-7 Days--Ocean Spray Cranberry Juice lasts for: 2-3 Weeks--Fruit Juice Concentrate lasts for: 5-10 Days: 6-9 Months Opened apple juice should be kept in the fridge and consumed within a few days after opening. After a week or so (sooner if it was sold refrigerated) the juice will start to quickly lose its quality and actually go bad. Fruit Juice. How Long Does Fruit Juice Last? How long does juice last? Juice can last from weeks to months beyond the date printed on the label since the shelf life of fruit juice depends on a variety of factors such as the type of juice, the best by date, how the juice was stored, the packaging and the actual content of the juice package. Query: how long is fresh apple juice good for",
"output": [
"Treetop Apple Juice lasts for 7 to 10 Days"
]
},
{
"id": "task870-089857755adf402abfb599c3cbb5b988",
"input": "The South Beach Diet has three phases: 1 Phase 1. This two-week phase is designed to eliminate cravings for foods high in sugar and refined starches to jump-start weight loss. 2 Phase 2. This is a long-term weight-loss phase. 3 Phase 3. This is a maintenance phase meant to be a healthy way to eat for life. Order NOW and you'll receive: 1 4-week plan including fully prepared, delicious meals delivered to your door! 2 7 BRAND-NEW South Beach Complete™ shakes FREE! Packed with protein to reduce hunger, plus probiotics, antioxidants and NO ADDED SUGAR. 3 FREE FedEx Shipping! South Beach Diet Review. Overview. The South Beach Diet came into diet scene in 2003 with the book The South Beach Diet: The Delicious, Doctor-Designed, Foolproof Plan for Fast and Healthy Weight Loss by cardiologist Arthur Agatston. Fortunately, the South Beach Diet website offers beneficial tools to help you stay on track. You can log your daily meals and snacks to keep a close eye on your nutrition intake. The food tracker includes helpful eating guides that show you what you should be eating each day (e.g., four cups of vegetables, one serving of legumes and so forth). The South Beach Diet's program differs from other low-carb diets in that it restricts saturated fats and high-sugar carbs. The first two-week phase of the diet focuses on maintaining your blood sugar levels and eliminating cravings for sweets and bad carbs. Such foods include bread, rice, fruit and baked goods. Here’s what life looks like on the South Beach Diet®. You’ll start on Phase 1. During this one-week Body Reboot, you’ll enjoy great-tasting South Beach Diet® meals and snacks high in lean protein and healthy fats, plus your own fresh veggies. Phase 3 – You’ve Got This! During the third phase you will be transitioning off of their meal delivery service, and start down the road to making healthy choices on your own. Of course, you can still follow the South Beach Diet principles so you can maintain your healthy weight. South Beach Diet Kitchen for tips and techniques to prepare healthy foods; Daily Email on your personal menu, important tips, news and encouragement; Cost of Product. The online South Beach diet program costs $ 5.00 a week - A little more than $ 20.00 per month. As is evident, the cost of the membership is quite reasonable and provides a large amount of value for the money. The South Beach delivery food, like the diet itself, it set up in phases. The first phase promises to eliminate cravings the second is to reach your goal weight and the third is to maintain. I tried phase one only, and, despite a few cheats, managed to lose almost five pounds in two weeks. South Beach Diet Phase 1 – Body Reboot. During the first phase of the plan, you will be sent foods that are designed to help you lose the most amount of weight possible during your first 2 weeks on the diet. Query: how expensive is south beach diet",
"output": [
"The online South Beach diet program costs $5.00 a week and a little more than $20.00 per month."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-de58dbe2bd8a4e6bb2fdf4e85f770c3d",
"input": "Remove the Breasts and loosly cover the baking dish with Foil. Let the Breasts rest 10-15 min. The foil will keep it hot and the chicken breasts will continue to cook until the internal temp reaches 165 degrees. This is the safe temp to cook chicken. Do not cook in the oven to 165. By the time you eat it, well, you might as well take off your shoe and eat it. Using the internal temp method is better and safer. The oven temp, whether 250 or 375 doesn't matter as long as the internal temp reaches a high of 165 degrees. This method works with any kind of meat. Egg, chicken, ham, tuna & macaroni salads. 3 to 5 days. Does not freeze well. Hot dogs. opened package. 1 week. 1 to 2 months. unopened package. 2 weeks. 1 to 2 months. Luncheon meat. opened package or deli sliced. 3 to 5 days. 1 to 2 months. unopened package. 2 weeks. 1 to 2 months. Bacon & Sausage. Bacon. 7 days. 1 month. Sausage, raw — from chicken, turkey, pork, beef. 1 to 2 days Since chicken takes longer to defrost in the fridge (you can thank the colder temperatures for that), Sharp says you'll have to plan your meals ahead of time. She explains that a pound of chicken takes about five hours to defrost in the fridge, and will be good to eat for two or three days. Transfer your chicken from the freezer to the fridge before you leave for work in the morning and it'll be ready to cook by the time you get home. Store your thawed chicken in the refrigerator. Chicken that has been thawed can be safely stored in the fridge for 1-2 days. Once a chicken has been thawed it should not be refrozen. Store your thawed chicken in the coldest part of your refrigerator. This will keep your chicken bacteria-free for a longer amount of time. Quick Answer. Defrosted chicken can stay in the refrigerator for one to two days at 40 degrees Fahrenheit or below. Frozen whole chicken can stay in the freezer for up to one year, and frozen pieces are safe for up to nine months. how long is it safe to keep a defrosted chicken in the fridge before using it? asked by @thefoodsection over 7 years ago Are you channeling your best self with this comment? sasserwazr | Dec 11, 2008. I often buy those big trays of boneless, skinless, chicken breasts from Sam's Club and stick them right in the freezer. Then on a Sunday night I defrost them in the sink. When they are sufficiently defrosted I put them into the fridge for use throughout the week. Often I will marinate the chicken for a couple days. My question is: Is this all safe? Here's how you can determine if thawed, previously frozen chicken is still safe to eat: When freezing, marking the freezing date on masking tape and stick it on the package When thawing, mark the thawing date similarly To determine if it's still good: subtract the freezing date from the original expiration date, and see if it's been that many days ... Defrosted chicken.. how long can it be left in fridge? I took out a pack of chicken a few hours ago to defrost for tea tonight. Due to unforeseen circumstances it aren't going to eat it and have a meal out planned tomorrow. .. will it keep til Sun or Mon? Does it smell funky, get slimy? There are a number of factors at play that no date will tell you. Was the meat contaminated with salmonella previous to packing? If yes, then zero days is the answer. Was it frozen, thawed, refrozen? It'll have bad texture, would add more unthawed time to it, wouldn't last as long. Vacuum sealed in a brine? Query: how long does defrosted chicken",
"output": [
"Defrosted chicken can stay in the refrigerator for one to two days at 40 degrees Fahrenheit or below."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1d61e08d868043a6a8dade7b10c47887",
"input": "If you agree with all the terms of the divorce as listed in the petition, you do not need to respond. If you want to challenge the terms listed in the petition, you must file a written answer —called a “response” — with the court within 30 days after you were handed the papers. The court can allow you to file a divorce without paying any fee at all, or allow you to file by paying only part of the filing fee. If you hire an attorney, you will also have to pay the attorney. You will need to check with the attorney about that attorney's fees. How long does it take to get a divorce? Once a divorce is filed, you have to wait 60 days before the court can finalize the divorce. The court can issue temporary orders as soon as the divorce is filed, but the actual divorce and final orders cannot be done until 60 days have passed since the date the divorce was filed. In addition, the divorce must be filed in a county in which one of you live. It is possible for you to obtain a legal separation in Oregon prior to obtaining six months residency and then convert that to a divorce once you have lived in Oregon for at least six months. What do I need to do to start a divorce? If you or your spouse have lived in Oregon for six months or longer, you need to do three things to start your divorce: You must file several documents, including a petition for dissolution of marriage, with the circuit court clerk’s office at the local county courthouse. Court timelines can affect how long it takes to get the final divorce judgment and many courts require divorce cases to be resolved within one year of filing the petition. Can I take back my former name? Do the husband and wife both have to live in Indiana to get a divorce here? Either you or your spouse must be a resident of Indiana for six months before you file for divorce, and be a resident of the county in which you are filing for three months before you can file for divorce. How much does it cost to get a divorce? Mission Statement. 1 Indiana Legal Services uses the law to fight poverty, empower clients, and improve access to justice. 2 Please consider donating to Indiana Legal Services. We are a not-for-profit corporation, and your donations are tax deductible to the extent allowable by law. A divorce judgment will decide: 1 The date your marriage ends; 2 Who gets custody of your children and when you and the other parent see them; 3 Who pays child support and how much; 4 Who will pay health insurance and medical bills for the children; 5 Who should pay past debts; How long does it take to get a divorce? The length of time it will take you to get a divorce depends mostly on the complexity of your case. If you are filing for temporary orders, such as custody and child support, or if you and your spouse dispute the issues in the divorce, you may need to have court hearings. Details: You must wait 6 months +1 day after the date your spouse was served with divorce papers to finalize your divorce. Colorado. 90-120 days. Details: You must wait 90 days from the date the divorce was filed or the date your spouse was served, whichever comes later, to finalize your divorce. Query: how long does it take to get a divorce after you file paperwork and pay",
"output": [
"It takes 60 days to get a divorce after you file paperwork and pay."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f8d69f2e7f154e9fb8d4f951ce0d275a",
"input": "River Otters are mammals that are relatives of the stoats, weasels, mink, badgers and wolverines. These groups of mammals are known as Mustelids. The Mustelids all have one thing in common, they all have scent glands that they use to mark off their territory. In the wild they live less than 10 years; in captivity they live 10 - 15 years. Range/Habitat: River otters are found along rivers, streams, and lakes and also in estuaries, coastal bogs, and large marine waterways such as Puget Sound and the Strait of Juan de Fuca. Description The River Otter is built for swimming - they have a streamlined body, short legs with webbed feet, dense fur that keeps otters warm, a tapered tail, small ears, and nostrils that can close underwater. They can grow to be more than a meter long, from head to tail, and weight up to 14 kg. River Otter. 1 River otters can hold their breath for up to 8 minutes while under water. 2 River otters spend two-thirds of the time on land. 3 Otters always wash themselves after every meal. 4 The otter is the largest member of the weasel family. 5 River otters can dive to a depth of 60 feet. 6 Baby otters are called pups. Basic Facts About North American River Otters The North American River Otter is the only river otter found north of Mexico. Its luscious pelt, which is waterproof and allows the river otter to regulate its temperature, was also a staple of the French fur trade in the 1700-1800s, has drawn hunters for hundreds of years. The color of its fur ranges from grey and white to brown and black. Diet Male sea otters live for 10 to 15 years, Female live from 15 to 20 years. The population is unknown because the river otter is one of the hardest mammals to census, but is estimated to be over 100,000 based on harvest reports. Range. River otters can be found in streams, lakes, reservoirs, wetlands and along marine coasts in all states and territories of the United States and Canada. River otters are being reintroduced in the Rocky Mountain region to counter the population decrease in the 1800s. Behavior. River otters live in all types of habitats. 10 to 15 years for a male. 15 to 20 usually for a female good percentage can live to about 20, and one has lived all the way up to 28 in an aquarium. they have easily wearable teeth which can probably be the cause of the shorter lifespan. 10 to 15 years for a male. Basic Facts About North American River Otters. The North American River Otter is the only river otter found north of Mexico. Its luscious pelt, which is waterproof and allows the river otter to regulate its temperature, was also a staple of the French fur trade in the 1700-1800s, has drawn hunters for hundreds of years. The color of its fur ranges from grey and white to brown and black. Females give birth to 1 to 6 young per litter, with an average of 2 to 3. Otters are born with fur, but are otherwise helpless. Females give birth, nurse, and care for their young in a den near the water. The young are weaned at about 3 months old and begin to leave their mother at 6 months old. Adult females care for their juvenile offspring, who disperse by the time the otters give birth again. Sexual maturity is reached at 2 to 3 years of age. Did you know? River otters can hold their breath for up to 8 minutes while under water. River otters spend two-thirds of the time on land. Otters always wash themselves after every meal. The otter is the largest member of the weasel family. River otters can dive to a depth of 60 feet. Baby otters are called pups. Female Sea Otters live up to 15-20 years. Male Sea Otters live up to 10-15 years. Query: how long did otters live",
"output": [
"Otters live less than 10 years in the wild and in captivity they live for 10 to 15 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8b5d01422538438d9784b47a3d31cb70",
"input": "Ingredients. 1 2 lbs beef stew meat. 2 1 (10.75 oz) can condensed cream of mushroom soup. 3 1 (.88 oz) packet brown gravy mix - some packets range to 1 oz, and that's still ok to use. 4 1 cup beef broth. 5 1 small onion, diced ( about ⅓ cup) 6 1-2 cloves of garlic minced. IF the temperature is the problem, you might want to check on getting a new pot. Not cooking it long enough...sometimes I cook mine all day or 8 hours. In the end it will come out tender but it does take time. You can always cook it on high with the crock pot...could be done in as little as 5 or 6 hours. Cover the slow cooker with the lid and set the temperature to low or high, depending on when you want to serve the meat cubes. It takes about three to four hours to cook meat cubes on high, and six to seven hours to cook them on low. Take the beef cubes from the slow cooker when they finish cooking and serve immediately. There's no need to rest the meat when you cook it in a slow cooker. If you made a stew, taste it when it finishes cooking, and adjust the seasonings as needed before serving. I don't understand why Corrine doesn't just post her own recipe for beef stew. The point is to review the given recipe, not list a million changes to it. This stew is perfect AS WRITTEN. Add the cubed potatoes and corn to the slow cooker and then sprinkle with gravy mix; pour water over all and mix to combine. Cover and cook on LOW for 7 to 9 hours. Taste and adjust seasonings. You Might Also Like. Beef Stew With Sweet Potatoes; Beth's Busy Day Beef Stew; Apple Cider Beef Stew; Beef Curry Stew Preparation. 1 Mix vegetables, water and Beef Stew Seasoning Mix in slow cooker. 2 Coat beef with flour. Stir into ingredients in slow cooker. 3 Cook 8 hours on LOW or 5 hours on HIGH until beef is tender. Ingredients: 1 tablespoon vegetable oil, 1 small onion, diced, 2 pounds cubed beef stew meat, 5 carrots, peeled and diced, 8 medium baking potatoes, peeled and cubed, 2 cubes beef bouillon, 2 cups water, 2 teaspoons cornstarch, 2 teaspoons salt, or to taste, Note: All cook times are approximate. Appropriate cook time varies according to specific meat characteristics for fat content and connective tissue as well as other ingredients added to dish, including liquid, size of meat cubes, type of vegetable, size of vegetable dice, how high slow cooker is filled, etc. * Pork butt, pork shoulder. No. When cooking beef stew, the beef gets tough first and then the longer it cooks, it gets softer. I would say you have about a good 2-3 hours to go. Don't turn the crock pot on high though, it will change the temp of the beef and may stay tough. Beef that's been simmered for 5 hours tastes distinctly drier in your mouth than beef that's been simmered for only 3 hours. Yet, when I weighed each cube of beef after cooking, every single one of them ended up at between 11 and 12 grams (for a moisture loss of around 40 to 45%), regardless of how long it had cooked. Longer cooking time does not equate to more moisture loss. Query: how long should cubed stew meat cook in the crockpot on low?",
"output": [
"It takes six to seven hours to cook cubed stew meat in the crockpot on low heat."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-561daef16d2c4e1d81518b5526b24bda",
"input": "Monarch flight is float-like in comparison, with its characteristic flap, flap, glide pattern. Timing Viceroys do not migrate. They overwinter as 1st or 2nd instar larvae, rolled up in a leaf of their host plant (willow or poplar). In the spring, the larvae need about 15 days to complete the life cycle and become a butterfly. They must develop through the remaining instars (approximately 5 days) and the chrysalis stage (at least 10 days). 30 years. There is a long and growing list of abundant species that are undergoing precipitous declines, including many species of mollusks, pollinators, amphibians, bats, songbirds and fishes. Faulty assumptions about the resiliency of once-common species can lead to lack of timely intervention, The viceroy is a North American butterfly that ranges through most of the contiguous United States as well as parts of Canada and Mexico. The westernmost portion of its range extends from the Northwest Territories along the eastern edges of the Cascade Range and Sierra Nevada mountains, southwards into central Mexico. Its easternmost range extends along the Atlantic and Gulf coasts of North America from Nova Scotia into Texas. It was long been thought to be a Batesian mimic of the monarch butter How can you tell a monarch from a Viceroy? The Viceroy butterfly is smaller than the monarch butterfly, on average, but some monarchs are smaller than some Viceroys are, so size is not a good way to tell them apart. Viceroys have a black line across the hindwing vein. What is the wingspan of Hewitson's Glassy Legionnaire butterfly? A wingspan of 2.4 inches ( 6 centimeters ) characerizes Hewitson's Glassy Legionnaire ( Acraea admatha ) butterfly. Specifically, the butterfly is a colorful, noticeable in … habitant of such countries as Cameroon in sub-Saharan Africa. Although larvae eat only milkweed, adult monarchs feed on the nectar of many plants including: 1 Apocynum cannabinum – Indian hemp. 2 Asclepias sp. – milkweeds. 3 Aster sp. – asters. 4 Cirsium sp. – thistles. 5 Daucus carota – wild carrot. 6 Dipsacus sylvestris – teasel. 7 Echinacea sp. – coneflowers. 8 Erigeron canadensis – horseweed. Butterfly Gardens ; Identify Butterflies ; Identify Caterpillars ; Facts & Info ; Butterfly Stories ; Where To Buy Plants ; Shop for Gifts & Supplies While the viceroy looks very similar to the monarch butterfly, the viceroy can be distinguished by having a black line across its wings that the monarch does not have. The viceroy was voted Kentucky's state insect in 1990. The viceroy was featured on Kentucky's nature license plate in 2002. The Latin word Limenitis means marshes in reference to where this butterfly is often found. Viceroy Butterfly Life Cycle. The monarch (Danaus plexippus) is a brushfooted butterfly of the Danainae subfamily. It is perhaps the most well-known of all North American butterflies. Since the 19th century, it is also found in New Zealand, and has been known in Australia since 1871. [1] [2] In Australia it is also known as the wanderer butterfly. [3] In Europe it is resident in the Canary Islands and Madeira, and is found as a migrant in Russia, Azores, Sweden and Spain. Its wings feature an easily recognizable orange and black pattern, with a wingspan of 8.5–12.5 cm (3.34 in–4.92in). (The viceroy butterfly has a similar size, color, and pattern, but can be distinguished by an extra black stripe across the hindwing.) Limenitis Archippus are distributed in 6 known subspecies. 1 Based on the surroundings and locations, the subspecies show slight differences in their color and appearances. The subspecies are: Limenitis A. Archippus: It is also known as the Eastern Viceroy. It is the dominate subspecies found in North America and Canada. Query: how long is the wingspan viceroy butterfly",
"output": [
"The wingspan of viceroy butterfly is 8.5 centimeter to 12.5 centimeter."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-fbd4f971d79848408ea94ce418c5a5e8",
"input": "Hey, here’s a question: does the Moon orbit the Sun? Of course not, it’s a silly question. Of course the Moon orbits the Earth. How long does the Earth take to travel around the Sun? Obviously, the answer is one year or 365.25 days. It is not so simple though as there are a number of definitions of a year. For example, Tropical year, which is from equinox to equinox, that is from the time the Sun crosses the celestial equator from south to north to the next time 365.24219 days Because the orbital velocity of the Moon around Earth (1 km/s) is small compared to the orbital velocity of Earth about the Sun (30 km/s), this never happens. There are no rearward loops in the Moon's solar orbit. Best Answer: Like all planets in our solar system, the Earth is in an elliptical orbit around our Sun. In Earth's case, its orbit is nearly circular, so that the difference between Earth's farthest point from the Sun and its closest point is very small. Earth's orbit defines a two-dimensional plane which we call the ecliptic. It takes roughly 365 days for the Earth to go around the Sun once. This means that the Earth is rushing through space around the Sun at a rate of about 67,000 miles per hour! The time it takes for the Earth to go around the Sun one full time is what we call a year. The combined effect of the Earth's orbital motion and the tilt of its rotation axis result in the seasons. With an average orbital speed of 9.69 km/s, it takes Saturn 29.457 Earth years (or 10,759 Earth days) to complete a single revolution around the Sun. In other words, a year on Saturn lasts about as long as 29.5 years here on Earth. However, Saturn also takes just over 10 and a half hours (10 hours 33 minutes) to rotate once on its axis. This means that a single year on Saturn lasts about 24,491 Saturnian solar days. How long does the moon take to orbit around the sun once? The Earth's Moon orbits around Earth once in a Month and the Earth orbits around the Sun once in a year, so the Moon orbits around the Sun once in a year too. Edit Share to: So in 90 seconds, for example, we all move some 12,500 miles (20,000 km) in orbit around the galaxy’s center. Our Milky Way galaxy is a big place. Even at this blazing speed, it takes the sun approximately 225-250 million years to complete one journey around the galaxy’s center. One year. That is actually the basis and definition of a year; the time for Earth to complete one orbit around the Sun. However the length of a year was known long before we knew that Earth orbits the Sun and not the other way around. That is because as Earth orbits the Sun, the Sun can be seen moving against the background of stars in Earth's sky, and the time it takes the apparent Sun to go once around the starry sky is the same as the time for Earth to go around the Sun. 2016-01-12T23:41:03-05:00. 1 The obvious answer to this question would be a year or 365 days, but the Universe is much more complicated than that. 2 Earth's orbit of 584 million miles around the sun is made in 365.256 days at a speed of 67000 mph. Every planet in the Solar System takes a certain amount of time to complete a single orbit around the Sun. Here on Earth, this period lasts 365.25 days – a period that we refer to as a year. When it comes to the other planets, we use this measurement to characterize their orbital periods. Query: how long dose it take for the earth to orbit around the sun?",
"output": [
"It takes 365.25 days for the earth to orbit around the sun."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3617f156e4224d36b9f57103d8bbb64d",
"input": "Note that to access your tax account information you need to be prepared have to provide the following information to properly identify yourself or your business: 1 Social insurance number (SIN) for individuals or business number for corporations. 2 Individual or business name. 3 Individual or business address. 4 Date of birth (individuals) There are several ways to check on the status of your return/refund with the CRA. You can check it online in one of three ways depending on whether your return is individual or corporate (T2) : My Account - usable for individual tax returns (which includes sole proprietorships). How Your Return/Refund Can Be Delayed. 1 errors on your return. Misreporting income or expenses can delay your return and put you at risk of an audit by the CRA. 2 your return has been selected for review. The CRA may select your return for a review for several reasons, including: your return was randomly chosen. You can check it online in one of three ways depending on whether your return is individual or corporate (T2) : 1 My Account - usable for individual tax returns (which includes sole proprietorships). 2 From a mobile device using the MyCRA application (for individual tax returns). Answers to common questions on the time period it takes to get a Federal or State tax refund check. Learn where and how to find the status on a refund. By eliminating mistakes, consumers can ensure that their refund is received in as timely a fashion as possible. 1 The most common mistakes, which can cause delays in receiving a refund, are listed below: 2 Social security number missing or incorrect. 3 Incorrect tax result, given reported income and filing status, was entered. How you file your taxes, via either U.S. mail or electronic filing, dictates how long it normally takes to receive a refund. Filing a return through the mail is, of course, the slower of the two processes. For those who mail their federal return, the IRS will remit a tax refund within six weeks after they have been received the completed return. If you file electronically, you should receive your tax refund within three weeks. The IRS allows two options for receiving a federal tax refund: paper check sent via the mail, or an electronic funds transfer (also called a direct deposit). The direct deposit method, not surprisingly, is always the quicker option. For those who mail their federal return, the IRS will remit a tax refund within six weeks after they have been received the completed return. If you file electronically, you should receive your tax refund within three weeks. The IRS allows two options for receiving a federal tax refund: paper check sent via the mail, or an electronic funds transfer (also called a direct deposit). The IRS asks that you wait 3 days after filing electronically, or 3 weeks after mailing a return before checking for a status update. For those who file an amended return, however, the period to receive a refund check will take 8-12 weeks. The most common mistakes, which can cause delays in receiving a refund, are listed below: 1 Social security number missing or incorrect. 2 Incorrect tax result, given reported income and filing status, was entered. Query: how long does it take to get the tax refund from federal taxes",
"output": [
"It takes 8-12 weeks to get the tax refund from federal taxes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-afeb4bda6fe540fe963451dc2e4ee1aa",
"input": "Page count is not a good way to measure length. A 20-page plan with dense text and no graphics is much longer than a 35-page plan broken up into readable bullet points, useful illustrations of locations or products, and business charts to illustrate important projections. Measure a plan by readability and summarization. A good business... If the Appendix is long, a divider should be used to separate it from the body of the plan, or a separate Appendix document should be prepared. These techniques ensure that the investor is not handed a thick business plan, which will make them queasy before even opening it up. How Long Should Your Business Plan Be? Depending on what you're using it for, a useful business plan can be any length, from a scrawl on the back of an envelope to, in the case of an especially detailed plan describing a complex enterprise, more than 100 pages. A typical business plan runs 15 to 20 pages, but there's room for wide variation from that norm. If you’ve reviewed what a business plan is, and why you need one to start and grow your business, then it’s time to dig into the process of actually writing a business plan. In this step-by-step guide, I’ll take you through every stage of writing a business plan that will actually help you achieve your goals. Main points should show up in a business plan as quickly as they do in a business pitch or presentation. Unfortunately, many people still use page count as measurement. And in that context, some of the more practical, internal-use-only business plans can be only 5 or 10 pages long. Corporate business plans for large companies can run into hundreds of pages. The first is the assumption that making a business continuity plan is enough, that it doesn’t have to be tested. The second is a shortage of staff available to run the tests. However if at least the necessity to test is recognised, even if resources are scarce, you can still make some amends. Ideally, your business plan should be 15-25 pages long and it should include an executive summary of between 2-4 pages, depending on the complexity of the business and the purpose of the plan, which answers the two questions asked by every experienced investor:: Here goes the quick guidelines to keep the business plan simple: 1 Avoid long complicated sentences. 2 Avoid buzzwords, jargon and acronyms; you know that KISS stands for “keep it simple, stupid,” but don’t assume anybody else does. 3 Avoid verbose text. 4 Keep the text style same throughout the business plan. For the business plan document we use to back up an effort to attract outside investors, or in an MBA contest setting, or to back up a commercial loan application, 10-15 pages of easy-to-read text plus as many charts and tables as you want. The more charts and tables, the better; don't count those charts and tables as part of the 10-15 pages. It seems, back in the day, the longer your business plan was, the more promising it was going to be, said Dany Levy, founder of DailyCandy.com, in a recent New York Times interview. And now it's, the shorter your business plan is, the more succinct and to the point it is, the better. Query: how long should business plans be",
"output": [
"A typical business plan should be 15 to 20 pages long."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ff8cb6a1899f435090f73b8b1249818b",
"input": "Answer 1 of 9: I've read various websites and most are pretty vague when it comes to March weather in Tokyo, so I'm looking for first-hand experience. For anyone who has traveled in Tokyo during the first half of March (or has lived there, etc), what's... Weather data for Japan in march: Weather data for Japan in march is derived from an average of the weather forecast since 2009 in Japan. There is a margin of error and these forecasts are to be considered as general information only. The weather in Japan can vary slightly from year to year, but these predictions should limit surprises. The hourly average wind direction in Okinawa throughout March is predominantly from the north, with a peak proportion of 50% on March 1. March is the 4th coldest month of the year across Japan. The start of March is wintery but by the end of the month Spring peaks out. In much of the country, cherry blossoms begin to bloom. December Weather In Japan December is the pleasant side of winter with relatively mild temperatures and many seasonal attractions across Japan. Our forecast updates every 3 hours and enable you to check the weather forecast for the next 14 days in Tokyo. The current temperatures in Tokyo are around and the weather right now defined as , for detailed information including humidity, wind, chance for rain and more go to the Tokyo current weather page. If you are about to travel to Tokyo Japan in a specific month we recommend to check that page and see the average weather in that month, for example Tokyo in February. In that way you will be able to prepare better to your trip. March; April; May; June; July; August; September; October; November; December; January; February © 2018 AccuWeather, Inc. All Rights Reserved. AccuWeather.com is a registered trademark of AccuWeather, Inc. Terms of usage under which this service is provided Privacy Statement | Ad Choices Guide to Tokyo weather in March. The average maximum daytime temperature in Tokyo in March is a cool 13°C (55°F). The average night-time temperature is usually a cold 4°C (39°F). There are usually 6 hours of bright sunshine each day, which represents 46% of the 12 hours of daylight. You'll still need plenty of layers for China in March. 1 North: it will feel a lot warmer during the day but the average is still below-freezing at night. Bring a heavy base layer, fleece and a wind-proof or down jacket. 2 Central: the weather's warming up but it still feels chilly during the day because of the damp. Query: how is the weather in japan in march",
"output": [
"The average maximum daytime temperature in Tokyo in March is a cool 13°C."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-53bdd24a38484426a5e0b471bcfe216b",
"input": "To get an exact idea on how long does it take for eyebrows to grow back, there are several things on which the growing back of your hairs depends like your age, metabolism, ethnicity, etc. So let me start with phases. This fact how long does it take for eyebrows to grow back also depends on the way of your taking off the hairs. So results can vary according to the methods you used to get the hairs off. Here are two major techniques all of you use like shaving and plucking. This can really help as it hides the stubble and prevents you from tipping the extra hair off, as that will take more time to grow back and then thicker eyebrows can be made. more mo To know how long does it take for eyebrows to grow back, proper diet always encourages your hair to grow fast and in a healthy way. It doesn’t only apply on your eyebrows but also your head. To get shiny and strong hair, always follow a healthy diet that makes sure that you are consuming all required nutrients and proteins. So to know about how long does it take for eyebrows to grow back, consider these factors and take a look at the Anagen phase to identify the growth rate. Your eyebrows that are in the growing situation indicate the Anagen phase, and when the growth stops, then this phase gets completed. For example, in mature adults, eyebrows take 56 to 73 days to grow back and in pre-teenage child, it takes 58 to 65 days to grow back. So no matter, how thin or thick you thread your eye brows, you will be able to get its full length back within a maximum of 2 months. How to Make Eyebrows Grow Faster. On how long does it take for eyebrows to grow back, it’s time to understand how you can grow them faster by improving the growth rate of your hairs or eyebrows. So try out these natural things here that promote a great hair growth. 1). Do Not Pluck Them Ever Eyebrows take a long time to grow back fully after they've been overplucked. For some people, it might only take six weeks, but others may have to wait a full year before their eyebrows regain their former shape. The best thing you can do for your brows is to be patient. How long does it take for eyebrows to grow back? How to make eyebrows grow back? Hair growth cycle of eyebrows is significantly shorter than the hair growth cycle of head hair. Generally head hair takes 5 to 6 months to re-grow but in the case of eyebrows, it is only a matter of a month. Growing at the rate of 0.16mm each day, it grows 3 times faster than head hair. How long does it take for eyebrow hair to grow? Though 56 days is the minimum standard duration for eyebrows to grow, there are things you could do to boost its regrowth rate. How To Make Eyebrows Grow Back Fast? Query: how long does it take eyebrows to grow back",
"output": [
"It takes 56 days eyebrows to grow back."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3f3e790e97064ed88e55ad6be40a415a",
"input": "In terms of energy allocation, our brains require 25% of the body's total stored energy (which is a lot if you think about it), with the rest going to fuel our muscle tissues and red blood cells. We can go for about six hours in this glucose-burning mode, which is why we tend to get a bit cranky if we have to go without food for longer than that. The point is that not all of your cells die quickly without oxygen. In surgeries they cut off blood supplies for up to hours and tissues don't die. Your brain is really what needs the oxygen. It has a huge metabolic requirement, and it needs a constant supply of oxygen for cellular respiration. In essence, your body is buying you some valuable time to give you a fair chance of finding some food. 0-6 hours after eating. Soon after eating, our bodies start to break down glycogen (molecules that store energy) to produce glucose (an important carbohydrate that fuels cells). [–]Helassaid 93 points94 points95 points 5 years ago (16 children) Most cells in the body can respire anaerobically and do a decent job of surviving the ensuing onslaught of organic acid byproducts... except brain cells, which are wholly dependent on oxygen because of their high rate of metabolism. It depends on the tissue type and on the circumstances. Brain cells start to die after 5 minutes, while heart cells die after 2 hours without oxygen. You can slow down the process by cooling down the body. – inf3rno Oct 27 '15 at 2:50 1 So, in summary: although I could find no solid evidence on how long a limb can live without its blood supply, it appears to be about 2-4 hours (some sources say 5-8); however, I would like to add that your case appears to be a severe case of an asleep limb, you were/are likely in no danger. When a limb falls asleep, it is getting the nerve pinched off for a time as well as loosing some blood flow. However, this is not a complete loss and so your arm is able to survive because it is still receiving enough oxygen and other nutrients to sustain its existence (as well as having toxins and CO2 pumped away from it). The human body can go without oxygen for about five to ten minutes, and about three to eight days without water. But remarkably, people have been known to live upwards of 70 days without food. How is this possible? The crucian carp can live in anoxic water for months at temperatures close to freezing. Similarly the turtle, Trachemys scripta, can withstand anoxia for 48 h at 20 °C and at least 3 months at 3 °C. Most of the book is in fact devoted to a detailed look at the adaptions that allow these species to survive without oxygen for a long time. I've heard it said various times that the body's tissues will begin to necrotize after being cut off from the blood supply for only a few minutes, but that can't be true. Query: how long can a body cell live without oxygen",
"output": [
"Brain cells start to die after 5 minutes, while heart cells die after 2 hours without oxygen."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a455c496e2f0428d98fb7de14054892d",
"input": "• auxiliary equipment (noun) The noun AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT has 1 sense: 1. electronic equipment not in direct communication (or under the control of) the central processing unit Auxiliary hydraulic system. An auxiliary hydraulic system delivers pressurized hydraulic fluid from a hydraulic pump to operate auxiliary equipment or attachments. The addition of an auxiliary hydraulic system to heavy construction equipment increases the versatility of the vehicle by allowing it to perform additional functions with different attachments. 2 Answers 2. Ancillary carries with it the idea of support for main goals: providing necessary support to the primary activities or operation of an organization, institution, industry, or system : the development of ancillary services to support its products. Auxiliary has connotations of supplementary or extra help: providing supplementary or additional help and support : an auxiliary nurse | auxiliary airport staff. @psmears, @Billare: All this means is that the line is getting blurred, and the two words are starting to be used interchangeably. It is worth noting that ancillary comes from the Latin ancilla (maidservant) while auxiliary comes from auxilium (help). The uses of auxiliary all seem to point to a not part of the main thing, but extra connotation. A cadmium standard cell, which may conveniently be of the unsaturated type, is connected to the binding posts marked auxiliary standard cell, and the auxiliary standard cell dial is set to the known value of this cell. Auxiliary hydraulic systems usually include external fluid fittings to facilitate connecting and disconnecting the hydraulic fluid supply lines of the attachments to the vehicles' hydraulic pump. They also usually include valves configured to control the supply of hydraulic fluid through the fittings. Leading Companies in the MARPOL Marine Auxiliary System Market 8. The MARPOL Marine Auxiliary Systems Market 2013-2023 Now thread one end of the auxiliary hose into the adapter. Auxiliary Systems 9-4 GDC 62, as it relates to the prevention of criticality GDC 63, “Monitoring Fuel and Waste Storage,” as it relates to monitoring systems provided to detect conditions that could result in the loss of decay heat removal capabilities, to detect excessive radiation levels, and to initiate appropriate safety actions auxiliary - furnishing added support; an ancillary pump; an adjuvant discipline to forms of mysticism; The mind and emotions are auxiliary to each other adjunct, adjuvant, ancillary, appurtenant, accessory Define auxiliary. auxiliary synonyms, auxiliary pronunciation, auxiliary translation, English dictionary definition of auxiliary. adj. 1. Giving assistance or support; helping. 2. Acting as a subsidiary; supplementary: the main library and its auxiliary branches. 3. Held in or used as... Query: auxiliary systems definition",
"output": [
"Auxiliary Systems relates to monitoring systems provided to detect conditions that could result in the loss of decay heat removal capabilities, to detect excessive radiation levels, and to initiate appropriate safety actions."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-97380e5f26f042ee9ba77de29aec285c",
"input": "If you owe no tax and you did not request a federal extension, you can get an automatic 6-month state extension online with the state or by calling 410-260-7829 from Central Maryland, or 800-260-3664 from everywhere else. Below, we'll look at some of the most populous states to give you a sense of how long it typically takes to get a refund there. 1 In California, the Franchise Tax Board advises taxpayers that it typically takes between seven and 12 business days to get a refund if you file electronically. For those who file paper returns, you'll typically have to wait two to three months from the date you mail your return in order to receive your refund. To check on the status of your refund, you can go to this California tax website and click on the Check Refund button. Here’s what you need to know to predict how long you’ll need to wait for your refund. Tax refunds: an overview Filling out your annual tax return involves calculating how much you owe the government in taxes based on your earnings and which tax deductions and credits you are eligible to receive. Comments (1,412) Leave your comment. 1 Hi lisa my name is jessica. 2 I filed in feb it said accepted by the irs then they sent me a form to prove my identity sent in all the paperwork 8 weeks ago. 3 Hello lisa , I’m 32 married to my husband who is 71 and we have a son who just turned 2. 4 Oh, Lisa, I hope you can help me. How JustAnswer Works: 1 Ask an Expert Experts are full of valuable knowledge and are ready to help with any question. 2 Get a Professional Answer Via email, text message, or notification as you wait on our site. 3 100% Satisfaction Guarantee Rate the answer you receive. Massachusetts is differnt all the time, I used to get them in about 2 days, last year it took about 2 1/2 weeks and this year it took about 3 days, so there ir really no way of knowing. mailed it 1/4/17. All I can tell you is that I pay MA taxes even though Im stationed at Fort Benning, GA. That amount that you overpaid in taxes is your refund, and it could be a substantial sum. In 2016, for example, the average tax refund was $3,050. Use our calculator to determine how much income tax you owe. Tax refund options. When you submit your tax return you’ll be given a choice of how to receive any refund owed to you. A: Tax returns filed with the state by mail generally take about eight weeks to receive refunds, while returns sent in electronically take about three weeks. The refund disbursement time frame is different in each state, and other circumstances, such as volume of returns being processed, may hold up refunds. E-filed returns typically get refunds back to you within three weeks if you use direct deposit, with paper returns typically taking about six weeks. The New York Department of Taxation and Finance says that you can expect paper checks to take an additional week if you don't use direct deposit. How long will it take for my status to change from return received to refund approved? Sometimes a few days, but it could take longer. Does Where’s My Refund? always display my refund status showing the different stages of return received, refund approved and refund sent? No, not always. Query: how long does it take to get my state taxes back",
"output": [
"Tax returns filed with the state by mail generally take about eight weeks to receive refunds, while returns sent in electronically take about three weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-58bae2431b6e4ab0a96a09f406b22251",
"input": "Our focus is to produce consistent offspring (health, temperament, conformation and fleece coat) meeting the Australian Labradoodle Breed Standard. First Generation Labradoodle (50% lab 50% poodle). Due to shedding and allergy issues we have NO plans to breed First Generation again in the immediate future. F1B, Second Generation Labradoodle (First Generation Labradoodle bred to a Poodle, 25% lab 75% poodle) Due to shedding and allergy issues we have NO plans to breed Second Generation at this time. NOTE: this price includes a $350 non refundable wait list fee to be placed on our wait list, receive wait list only monthly updates and announcements. Labradoodle puppy All of our puppies are Multigeneration Australian Labradoodles. The cost of a companion puppy is $2,800.00 regardless of color, gender, or size. Please contact us for pricing on breeding quality puppies. Once we have an approximate birth date make sure you schedule time on your calendar to bring home your new Rosewood Labradoodle puppy. Puppies required to stay longer than normal pick up times will receive a boarding charge of $20.00 per day. Our labradoodle price is: Australian Labradoodle ---- $3000 All colors and all size of Australian labradoodle. An Australian Labradoodle is a 3 breed mixed breed dog. They are a combination of Poodle, Cocker Spaniel (American or English) and Labrador. Frequently Asked Questions . Q: Are your dogs from Australia? A: Our Australian Labradoodle breeding stock is made up of top quality, multi-generational labradoodles imported from the Australian research and breeding centers, Tegan Park and Rutland Manor, as well as Australian Labradoodles purchased from other USA breeders. A: Our Australian Labradoodle breeding stock is made up of top quality, multi-generational labradoodles imported from the Australian research and breeding centers, Tegan Park and Rutland Manor. We are also infusing some earlier generation breeding stock for fresh bloodlines and to offer the hybrid vigor that the labradoodle is known for! LINKS and FAQ. Labradoodle Price. Only approved families can adopt our Australian Labradoodle puppies. We are taking deposits on a first come first serve basis to fill our wait list. Note, we rarely have puppies available once born; they are placed with families on our wait list prior to birth. We have been breeding since 2001. Labradoodle puppies for sale and dogs for adoption. Find the perfect Labradoodle puppy for sale at PuppyFind.com. All of our puppies are Multigeneration Australian Labradoodles. The cost of a companion puppy is $2,700.00 regardless of color, gender, or size. Please contact us for pricing on breeding quality puppies. Our breeding dogs are healthy, happy members of our family and live in our home or with a guardian family. Your puppy will be born and raised in our home with loving care. To get the puppies off to a good beginning we apply the Early Neurological Stimulation process. We have no outside kennels and know the importance of socializing your puppy with the usual household noises and commotion. Query: australian labradoodle cost",
"output": [
"The cost of Australian Labradoodle is $3000."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-26080308dd1144f798a6cbf8b3948e58",
"input": "Fluoride supplements were developed in the 1950s based on the incorrect and outdated notions that (a) fluoride’s benefit to teeth comes from being swallowed during childhood, and that (b) children in unfluoridated communities have a deficiency of fluoride intake. For example, the use of a series of four or more topical applications should be considered for a patient with a severe caries problem. Likewise, a reduced topical application time of 30 seconds as opposed to four minutes may be adequate to maintain a patient with little or no current caries activity. Check with your child's doctor for any other special instructions. 1 Your child can eat and drink right after the fluoride varnish is applied. But only give your child soft foods and cold or warm (not hot) foods or liquids. 2 Do not brush or floss teeth for at least 4 to 6 hours. Fluoride varnish is a highly concentrated form of fluoride which is applied to the tooth's surface, by a dentist, dental hygienist or other health care professional, as a type of topical fluoride therapy.[1] It is not a permanent varnish but due to its adherent nature it is able to stay in contact with the tooth surface for several hours. When is Fluoride Varnish not used? Fluoride varnish is not used if there are noticeable sores in the mouth or on the gums. It is also not used if there is an allergy to one of the ingredients in the varnish or to pine nuts. If you have any questions, talk to your doctor or dentist. The first use of adjusted fluoride in water for caries control began in 1945 and 1946 in the United States and Canada, when the fluoride concentration was adjusted in the drinking water supplying four communities (2--5). Water fluoridation reduces cavities in children, while efficacy in adults is less clear. A Cochrane review estimates a reduction in cavities when water fluoridation was used by children who had no access to other sources of fluoride to be 35% in baby teeth and 26% in permanent teeth. The evidence quality was poor. The CDC recommends that in communities where natural fluoride levels are high, parents should give kids water from other sources. The ADA also recognizes that infants need less fluoride than older kids and adults. Some infants may be getting too much fluoride in the water used to reconstitute infant formula. Fluoride supplements can be prescribed for children ages 6 months to 16 years who are at high risk for tooth decay and whose primary drinking water has a low fluoride concentration. 2, 21 Tablets and lozenges are manufactured with 1.0, 0.5, or 0.25 mg fluoride. 2, 3 Most supplements contain sodium fluoride as the active ingredient. 2 To maximize the topical effect of fluoride, tablets and lozenges are intended to be chewed or sucked for 1–2 minutes before being swallowed; 2, 3, 5 for ... A 1992 census found that, for U.S. public water supply systems reporting the type of compound used, 63% of the population received water fluoridated with fluorosilicic acid, 28% with sodium fluorosilicate, and 9% with sodium fluoride. Query: at what age should fluoride be used",
"output": [
"Fluoride supplements should be prescribed for children ages 6 months to 16 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-44936b0945404a5591f70245de94c819",
"input": "They can stay in urine 3 to 6 weeks, hair up to 90 days, and blood 2-3 days depending on multiple factors. Several factors play a role in how long benzodiazepines stay in your system. They can stay in urine 3 to 6 weeks, hair up to 90 days, and blood 2-3 days depending on multiple factors. Several factors play a role in how long benzodiazepines stay in your system. The most influential factors to consider when coming off benzos are: Age: The older a person is the slower their metabolism will be and the slower their organs will work. This will play a huge role in how quickly they can eliminate toxins from the body. How long does valium stay in your system - How long does valium stay in your system? 550 Hours (23days) Valium (Diazepam) has half life of 48 hours. Terminal elimination half life of active metabolite N-desmethyldiazepam is approx. 100 hours Valium and it's metabolite will be in your system for 550 hours which is approx. 23 days. Peak levels and drug half-life of benzodiazepines depend on several factors such as the specific drug that has been prescribed or ingested, dosage amount, time between doses, and method of administration. 1 In general, benzos can be divided into these three categories: 1 Ultra short acting benzos – The half-life of ultra short acting benzodiazepines is 5 hours or less. 2 Short acting and intermediate benzos – This class of benzodiazepines have a half-life that ranges from 5-24 hours. WebMD experts and contributors provide answers to: HOW LONG DOES VALIUM STAY IN YOUR URINE Valium can stay in your system and be detected in urine for up to 5-7 days after therapeutic use. Chronic use (over one year) of Valium, however, can be detected much longer. The detection window for Valium in urine screens is up to 4-6 weeks. More here on the detection window and drug testing for Valium. Benzodiazepines can stay in your system for up to 10 days. Some tests can detect long-acting benzos for up to ten days in someone's blood, urine or saliva. Hair tests can show evidence of benzos for up to 90 days. Certain factors that affect detection time are body mass, duration of use, and drug properties. Other factors that can affect how long Valium stays in a person's body have to do with the specific prescription—the larger the dose and more frequently you take it, for example, likely means it will be detectable for longer. Why You Might Be Tested For Valium Take an example, Valium has a long half-life, but its effects go away within a short time. The reason, it stays in the blood but not in the brain for a long time. But this does not take away the fact that you may get positive urine or blood result even days after your last dose. Want To Know More? Talk to the experts to know more about how long does Valium stay in your system? How long does valium stay in your system that will show up in a urine test? Posted 30 May 2012 • 7 answers I was told by a pharmacist that valium and temazepam stay in the system for urine testing 4-5 days, please advise. Query: how long does valium stay urine",
"output": [
"Valium can stay in your system and be detected in urine for up to 5-7 days after therapeutic use."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0ec6c320efbf4d6ea9f025811547b27b",
"input": "One possible drawback to positioning a pool table in an open loft space instead of, say, a basement, is noise. Some may find the cracking of balls and merriment disturbing in a shared open-plan space. Others see it as setting the tone for fun and relaxation, especially in a vacation home. What You Need To Move A Pool Table By Yourself Moving a pool table across country by yourself is rarely a viable option simply because long distances are, in most cases, not suited to self-moving. However, if you plan to move your pool table across town or locally to another close-by city within the same state, then you will definitely be interested in knowing how to move a pool table by yourself. There are two basic grades of cloth for a pool table. The pool table ‘felt’ is not felt at all, but rather a woven fabric. Some cloths are available with a wool / nylon blend, with speed cloths normally developed in this way. These cloths would tyopically comprise of about 80% wool and 20% nylon content. A pool table is one of the hardest things you can move. It’s heavy, bulky, wide, and surprisingly delicate. The DIY approach can be dangerous to you and to the pool table. A lot of people make the mistake of trying to treat it like a dresser or sofa by calling a bunch of friends to help, and then twisting it every which way to fit through the door. If you ask an owner of a one piece slate furniture style pool table, they will likely give you a different reason. When they purchased the table (around 35 years ago), they were told that a one piece slate was far superior. A one piece slate has no seams to affect the playing field. Step 1, Acquire four wooden dollies. These wooden wheeled wonders make moving heavy objects a cinch. You'll want to wrap the edges of your dollies in carpet or fabric. This will prevent the legs of the pool table from being scratched.[1][2]Step 2, Position your equipment. Distribute your dollies around each corner of your pool table to prepare each for being slid under its legs. Clear the area around the pool table so that there are no objects that might get caught in the wheels ... Q. Do your pool tables have warranties? A. Most our tables have LIFETIME Warranties! Q. What kind of maintenance does a pool table require? A. Very little. Keep it clean and covered when not in use. It is comparable to a piece of fine furniture. Q. Are there different grades of cloth? A. Yes. We currently offer three different grades of cloth. The profile of the rail cushion, which is the cushion's angle in relation to the bed of the table, varies between table types. The standard on American pool tables is the K-66 profile, which as defined by the BCA has a base of 13⁄16 inches and a nose height of 1 inch. Table hardware including brass rise and fall lifting system - 8 kilograms Cushions, table frame, bed cloth and pockets - 83 kilograms One piece slate bed playing surface - 90 kilograms Total weight of 7 foot x 4 foot English Pool Dining Table = 262 kilograms The width of the room at 168 inches minus twice the cue length, 116 inches equals 52 inches allowed for the width of the pool table. Your space can fit a pool table 84 inches long and 52 inches wide. Standard pool table sizes are 7 foot, 8 foot, 8 1/2 foot and 9 foot long. Your space would best fit a 7 foot table. Always use the ACTUAL PLAYING SURFACE dimensions to represent the pool table in your room, not 4' by 8' rectangles! Here is a chart of standard table sizes and Ideal Suggested Room Dimensions. Query: how heavy is a pool tables",
"output": [
"Total weight of 7 foot x 4 foot English Pool Dining Table is 262 kilograms."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-2ed10ce4f79f4597b35eb5e5d0765520",
"input": "Thin pork chops will only need 4 – 5 more minutes to reach and internal temperature of 140 degrees; while thicker chops may take as long as 20 minutes The best way to tell when the pork chop is cooked through is to use a meat thermometer How to Bake Pork Chops In the Oven. 1 I like to brine all my pork chops, which you can start a day ahead. 2 Pre-heat your oven to 450 degrees. 3 Take the pork chops out of the fridge (brine) about an hour before you are ready to cook them, and let them come up to room temp. 4 Season them with salt and pepper. The Keys to Perfectly Baked Pork Chops. The temperature and how long you cook the pork chops are the two most important factors. I like to go high on the first one...400 - 450 degrees. The lenght of time will vary a bit based on the thickness of the chop. Thin pork chops will only need about 8 minutes in the oven using my method below. Now here's the real key for how to bake pork chops: a quick skillet sear. In an extra-large skillet heat 1 tablespoon oil over medium-high heat. Add 2 bone-in chops or up to 4 boneless pork chops. Cook about 6 minutes or until the surfaces are perfectly browned. Flip the chops as needed for an even sear. How to Bake Pork Chops In the Oven. I like to brine all my pork chops, which you can start a day ahead. Brining adds great flavor & moisture to the chops; Pre-heat your oven to 450 degrees; Take the pork chops out of the fridge (brine) about an hour before you are ready to cook them, and let them come up to room temp; Season them with salt and pepper The Keys to Perfectly Baked Pork Chops. The temperature and how long you cook the pork chops are the two most important factors. I like to go high on the first one...400 - 450 degrees. The lenght of time will vary a bit based on the thickness of the chop. Thin, or boneless pork chops will How to Bake Pork Chops In the Oven. 1 I like to brine all my pork chops, which you can start a day ahead. Brining adds great flavor & moisture to the chops. 2 Pre-heat your oven to 450 degrees. 3 Take the pork chops out of the fridge (brine) about an hour before you are ready to cook them, and let them come up to room temp. In this recipe, pork loin chops are breaded and baked for scrumptious fried flavor without the added fat and calories. Dip pork chops in a mixture of milk and egg, then coat with corn bread stuffing mix. Bake at 425°F for 20 minutes or until the chops reach an internal temperature of 145°F. Oven-Baked Pork Chops Recipe. Here's the detailed recipe for our oven-baked pork chops: 4 bone-in pork loin chops, cut 1-1/4 inches thick (about 3 pounds total), or 4 boneless pork loin chops, cut 1-1/4 inches thick (about 2-1/2 pounds total) 1/4 teaspoon salt; 1/4 teaspoon black pepper; 1 tablespoon olive oil; 1. Preheat oven to 350°F. Trim fat from chops. The most common issue is how long to cook the pork chops. Thin pork chops will only need 4 – 5 more minutes to reach and internal temperature of 140 degrees; while thicker chops may take as long as 20 minutes; The best way to tell when the pork chop is cooked through is to use a meat thermometer Query: how long do i bake boneless pork chops",
"output": [
"It takes 6 minutes to bake boneless pork chops."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-aadb81279c1c40dbb24ea6664296dc1d",
"input": "rent a car to Safety Harbor, FL Halfway between Tarpon Springs, FL and Tampa, FL The best city between Tarpon Springs, FL and Tampa, FL to meet is Safety Harbor, Florida which is about 2 miles from the exact midpoint. The town that marks the exact halfway point is actually Bayview, Florida. Safety Harbor is located at (28.0047, -82.6953). The harbor or bay of the same name on which it is located is the nearly-landlocked far northwestern extension of Tampa Bay, and the city is located on the west side of that bay. Distance from Safety Harbor, FL to Spring Hill, FL is 55Miles or 89 Km. You can get this distance about 1 hour 4 mins. If you want to planning travel with plane for 36 Miles or 57 Km, You can get this distance about 34 mins . A car with an average MPG will needs 2.55 gallons of gas to get the route between these points. The estimated cost of gas to get between Safety Harbor, FL and Spring Hill, FL is $5.79. During the route, an average car will release 49.96 pounds of CO 2 to the atmosphere. Your carbon footprint is 0.91 pounds of CO 2 per mile. U.S. Route 19 in Florida runs 264 miles along Florida's west coast from an interchange with U.S. Route 41 in Memphis, Florida, south of Tampa, and continues to the Georgia border north of Monticello, Florida. As is the case with all Florida roads with federal designations, the entirety of US 19 has a hidden Florida Department of Transportation designation: State Road 55 from the US route's southern terminus at US 41 south of Terra Ceia to the junction with US 221 / SR 55 north in Perry. State Ro Clearwater Beach. From there south it's ALL good. But, to see a sunset is just 15 minutes away! There is a tiny beach called Pine Island complete with sand, the gulf, a nice little food area, public restaurants and showers...but frankly, the water is awful for swimming and I wouldn't advise it. There are 35.32 miles from Spring Hill to Safety Harbor in southwest direction and 46 miles (74.03 kilometers) by car, following the CR 611 route. Spring Hill and Safety Harbor are 1 hour 9 mins far apart, if you drive non-stop. This is the fastest route from Spring Hill, FL to Safety Harbor, FL. The halfway point is Odessa, FL. Spring Hill, FL and Safety Harbor, FL are in the same time zone (Eastern Daylight Time). Current time in both locations is 10:59 pm. A car with an MPG of will need 2.12 gallons of gas to cover the route between Safety Harbor, FL and Spring Hill, FL. The estimated cost of gas to go from Safety Harbor to Spring Hill is $5.44. During the route, an average car will release 41.63 pounds of CO 2 to the atmosphere. Your carbon footprint is 0.91 pounds of CO 2 per mile. SpringHill Suites San Diego Downtown/Bayfront elevates the travel routine. Enjoy our hotel's central downtown location, complimentary hot breakfast and free Wi-Fi. Skip Main Navigation A straight line distance (or as the crow flies) reflects the shortest distance between the two points across the earth's surface. NEW: Use our gas price tool to find cheap gas prices in your area! Related Travel Articles Enjoy a contemporary suite hotel near Phoenix Convention Center, SpringHill Suites Phoenix Downtown, featuring free Wi-Fi, breakfast and an outdoor pool. Skip Main Navigation expand Menu Query: how far is safety harbor from spring hill",
"output": [
"Distance from Safety Harbor, FL to Spring Hill, FL is 55Miles or 89 Km."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a04d24645ae8442b9f093a8d8a9e49f3",
"input": "Using this tape is one among many steps which are designed to ensure safety when it comes to handling sterile materials. If a package of materials does not have autoclave tape, it is assumed to be non-sterile, which means that it needs to be processed in the autoclave before it can be used. When materials are packaged for the autoclave, the tape is added last, and most people include a notation of the date on the tape. The tape is designed to adhere in spite of the high heat and steam in the autoclave. With the use of autoclave tape, people can determine whether or not packages of material have passed through the autoclave, and they can also see how recently supplies were sterilized, by referring to the date noted on the tape. Autoclave tape is a specialized tape product which is used on packages of materials placed in an autoclave. The tape has chemical strips sensitive to high heat and pressure which change color when they are exposed to sufficiently high heat and pressure, indicating that a package of materials has been in an autoclave. The following are basic instructions for autoclave use but do not replace the manufacturer's operating instructions and hands-on training. Before using any autoclave for the first time, read and thoroughly understand the owner's manual because many makes and models have unique characteristics. Place the items to be autoclaved in the chamber. Check the drain screen to make sure that it is not plugged or obstructed. For bench top units that do not have inline steam, check and fill the reservoir with deionized water to the fill line (see manufacturer's instructions). Close and seal the autoclave door. On the autoclave keypad, or dials, select: The following are basic instructions for autoclave use but do not replace the manufacturer's operating instructions and hands-on training. Before using any autoclave for the first time, read and thoroughly understand the owner's manual because many makes and models have unique characteristics. 1 Place the items to be autoclaved in the chamber. 2 Check the drain screen to make sure that it is not plugged or obstructed. Steam/Autoclave. Steam sterilization is the oldest and most common process used in medical and related applications. Its proven effectiveness is further enhanced by being both reliable and economical. In this process, the item to be sterilized is placed in a chamber, e.g. an Autoclave. The item is exposed to a combination of heat and saturated steam (water vapor) for an established period of time. This process kills the micro-organisms present, sterilizing the item. Generating Steam and Steam Quality. Steam is the autoclave’s sterilization agent. In our Sterilization Methods series, we explained the physics of steam and why it’s ideal for destroying microorganisms such as bacteria and spores. Part 1 of this post will explain how steam is generated for autoclaving purposes. Autoclave tape. Autoclave tape is an adhesive tape used in autoclaving (heating under high pressure with steam to sterilise) to indicate whether a specific temperature has been reached. Autoclave tape works by changing color after exposure to temperatures commonly used in sterilization processes, typically 121°C in a steam autoclave. Small strips of the tape are applied to the items before they are placed into the autoclave. The tape is similar to masking tape but slightly more adhesive, to allow it to adhere under the hot, moist conditions of the autoclave. One such tape has diagonal markings containing an ink which changes colour (usually beige to black) upon heating. It is important to note that the presence of autoclave tape that has changed color on an item does not ensure that the product is sterile, as the tape ... SEE the new blog series about Autoclave Sterilization Basics which discusses topics about autoclave sterilizers and sterilization. 1 Steam generators and steam supply. 2 The pre and post vacuum phase of the sterilization cycle. 3 The autoclave jacket. 4 The cooling process. 5 The autoclave control systems. Allow items to cool in the autoclave for at least 10 minutes before fully opening the door. Check the autoclave tape for a color change, and the print-out from the recorder to see if the time and temperature were attained. If not, the load should be re-autoclaved in another autoclave. Any bag displaying the biohazard symbol must be over bagged with an opaque trash bag and sealed prior to disposal in the regular waste stream. Steam/Autoclave Steam sterilization is the oldest and most common process used in medical and related applications. Its proven effectiveness is further enhanced by being both reliable and economical. Query: how does autoclave tape work",
"output": [
"Autoclave tape has chemical strips sensitive to high heat and pressure which change color when they are exposed to sufficiently high heat and pressure, indicating that a package of materials has been in an autoclave."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d39315e81c054dc1b74eed0f87bb7f93",
"input": "summary: O2 could form a linear complex with the Fe atom, but then it would start to look more like a mineral Fe=O...O bond - a linear bond would be like a transition state to an iron oxide (rust). An Fe-O-O bent bond preserves more of the electronic character of the O2 molecule and promotes strong but reversible binding to Hemoglobin. The oxygen molecule forms a partial covalent bond with the iron in the heme (the ringlike molecule in the picture below ). The lone pair of electrons of the oxygen atom which forms the bond to the iron has a 120 degree angle with respect to the oxygen molecule itself. In chemistry we say it is sp2 hybridized. The heme iron serves as a source or sink of electrons during electron transfer or redox chemistry. In peroxidase reactions, the porphyrin molecule also serves as an electron source. In the transportation or detection of diatomic gases, the gas binds to the heme iron. During the detection of diatomic gases, the binding of the gas ligand to the heme iron induces conformational changes in the surrounding protein. Heme or haem is a coordination complex consisting of an iron ion coordinated to a porphyrin acting as a tetradentate ligand, and to one or two axial ligands. The definition is loose, and many depictions omit the axial ligands. The iron atom of heme is directly bonded to one of the histidines called the proximal histidine of the globin protein at the fifth coordination position. The oxygen binding site is present on the other side of the heme plane, at the sixth coordination position. Assuming that the deprotonated forms of HA and HZ bind selectively to the heme iron, the pH dependence of K D,app can be expressed by the following equation : K D, app =K D ·(1+[H +]/K a), where K D is a pH-independent dissociation constant and K a is the acid dissociation constant. Your question says “how is the heme molecule attached to globin protein”. Let’s first get the idea of what heme is. Heme is a non-protein group, which is the active site for haemoglobin, as well as myoglobin. Heme is held to the peptide portion (globin) of the protein by a combination of forces: 1 The coordination of iron by histidine nitrogen of the protein, 2 Hydrogen bonding, and. 3 Van der Waals forces between hydrophobic parts of the two molecules. Heme - Function. 1 Hemoproteins have diverse biological functions including the transportation of diatomic gases, chemical catalysis, diatomic gas detection, and electron transfer. The following genes are part of the chemical pathway for making heme: 1 ALAD: aminolevulinic acid, δ-, dehydratase (deficiency causes ala-dehydratase deficiency porphyria) 2 ALAS1: aminolevulinate, δ-, synthase 1. 3 ALAS2: aminolevulinate, δ-, synthase 2 (deficiency causes sideroblastic/hypochromic anemia) A2A: Quickly speaking, the heme group contains the famous iron ion that is in hemoglobin, that binds to and carries oxygen. The iron atom has a very strong covalent bond with the globular protein on the proximal histidine of the protein (the F8 histidine residue), on histidine's imidazole ring. Even with this strong covalent bond, the iron still has the ability to bind with oxygen via a dipolar or coordinate covalent bond. That is the electrostatic bond that hemoglobin is involved in, not the one that binds heme to the globin proteins in the first place. So the iron atom is not only involved in keeping the heme group attached to the globin proteins, but it is the functional oxygen-carrying component of the hemoglobin molecule. Query: how does iron bind to heme",
"output": [
"The iron atom has a very strong covalent bond with the globular protein on the proximal histidine of the protein, on histidine's imidazole ring. Even with this strong covalent bond, the iron still has the ability to bind with oxygen via a dipolar or coordinate covalent bond. That is the electrostatic bond that hemoglobin is involved in, not the one that binds heme to the globin proteins in the first place. So the iron atom is not only involved in keeping the heme group attached to the globin proteins, but it is the functional oxygen-carrying component of the hemoglobin molecule."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3c5f310e30fd40609f23e8461aaf7824",
"input": "So you might as well redefine your question as How many Ships does the US navy have? IF you want to know the real answer to how many Aircraft Carriers?... you cannot redefine the question to mean something else. We have 10 Carriers. The Japanese Navy had 25 carriers of all types; 1 was laid up damaged, another beached and capsized, 20 were lost to enemy action. The French Navy, as noted above, had 1 carrier, converted to an aircraft transport in 1944. This count is for commissioned naval vessels designated as aircraft carriers only. Nimitz class aircraft carrier design. The more recent Nimitz Class carriers (CVN72-CVN76) have a displacement of 102,000t when fully loaded. They have a length of 317m and beam of 40.8m. The carrier reaches a maximum speed of over 30kt, and accommodates a complement of 3,184 personnel (with 203 officers); 2,800 aircrew (with 366 officers); and 70 flag (with 25 officers). Aircraft Rep. Paul Ryan (R-WI) on Wednesday defended his budget’s call to increase military spending by complaining that the U.S. has only 10 aircraft carriers and that the U.S. Army is smaller than it was in 1945 and the U.S. Navy is smaller than it was during World War I. List of aircraft carriers in service. This is a list of aircraft carriers which are currently in service, reserve, under construction, or being rebuilt. An aircraft carrier is a warship with a full-length flight deck, hangar and facilities for arming, deploying, and recovering aircraft. The list only refers to the status of the ship, not availability or condition of an air wing. This includes helicopter carriers and amphibious assault ships, which are vessels whose primary purpose is to carry, arm, deploy, and recover aircraft. Statistically, one can take the numbers of carriers in action per month during the period and come up with a composite carrier’s profile of operating numbers: Flights: 2755; action sorties 1043; combat losses: 61; combat operational losses: 26; non-combat related losses: 28; for a total of 115 aircraft lost in a 12 month period. In the United States Navy, these consist of ships commissioned with hull classification symbols CV (aircraft carrier), CVA (attack aircraft carrier), CVB (large aircraft carrier), CVL (light aircraft carrier), CVN (aircraft carrier (nuclear propulsion)) and CVAN (attack aircraft carrier (nuclear propulsion)). There are 11 aircraft carriers currently in service in the U.S. fleet USS Enterprise (CVN-65): 85,600 ton unique nuclear-powered supercarrier, commissioned 25 November 1961. Navy EEO; Inclusion And Diversity; Navy Standard Integrated Personnel System (NSIPS) My Navy Portal; Board of Corrections for Naval Records (BCNR) Shift Colors-Navy Retiree Newsletter; Civilian Federal Careers But the U.S. has failed to plan for replenishment of America’s depleted Sixth Fleet. This absence of sufficient seapower sets the stage for trouble reaching far beyond the region, raising the larger question of how the U.S. is planning future naval forces. Aircraft carriers are an instructive example. In the 2007 Defense Authorization bill, Congress wrote into law that we must not go below eleven. Since December 2012, this has been lowered to ten so that USS Enterprise could be retired before USS Ford’s 2016 commissioning. Query: how many aircraft carriers usa have",
"output": [
"The United States has currently 11 aircraft carriers in service."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b1a63912d7cb418ba3b56964c41e9742",
"input": "How Long Does It Take To Become A Medical Coder? (answered) This is an exacting work and will require you to at least have an associate’s degree and a credential in coding. You don't have to be a student for Certified Coder Academy to help you with current medical coding job information. This might be true when ICD-10 goes into effect but we really can't be sure when that's going to happen. You can become a medical coder through different avenues. Certificate programs are offered at technical colleges and medical trade schools, and generally take anywhere from one to two years to complete. Associate degree programs are offered at community colleges and typically take about two years to complete. Medical coding specialists rely on their knowledge of anatomy, medical terminology, health conditions, and medications to assign diagnostic and procedural codes for each patient encounter. They must review a patient’s medical record and will, at times, talk to the patient’s healthcare provider or research payor policies to uncover missing information. Expand your medical billing and coding education with the MB&CC E-book. Download FREE e-book; Find the program for you. Search our directory of all medical billing and coding schools. Compare Programs; How Long Does It Take to Complete Training to Become a Medical Biller or Coder? The length of time it takes for your training depends on a number of factors, including if you are going to do online classes or actual classroom learning, whether or not you are looking for a certification or a degree, and if you want physician-based coding or facility-based coding. How to Become a Medical Coder Three Methods: Training to Become A Medical Coder Finding Employment as a Medical Coder Becoming a Certified Medical Coder Community Q&A Medical coders or medical coding specialists go through detailed information about patient injuries, diseases and procedures from medical records and documents provided by doctors and other healthcare providers. There are many physician's offices and clinics across the country who require their medical billing staff to be CMBP (Certified Medical Billing Professional) Certified through MBC. 1 If you have been searching for a legitimate Medical Billing Course and Certification, chances are good you have run across the scams. Certified Professional Coder (CPC) Exam: Frequently Asked Questions. … As long as your Career Step program access is still current, … I have one year of experience in ER I want to be certified in medical coding so which one is best for me CPC or CIC. Medical coders help to complete, review, and process medical claims to help physician practices and hospitals get reimbursed from insurance companies for services and facilities provided to patients. Each medical procedure and patient encounter has a number, or CPT code, associated with it which corresponds to another code for a diagnosis (an ICD code). 1 This helps insurance companies account for and track the money they reimburse to physicians and practices, to help prevent fraudulent medical claims or errors in payment. Insurance and outsourcing companies also hire medical billing and coding specialists, as do government services such as Medicare and Medicaid. In most instances, employment is full-time, in an office environment, during normal business hours; however, 24-hour medical facilities may offer or have requirements for evening and weekend hours. Query: how long does it take to become medical coder",
"output": [
"It takes one to two years to become medical coder."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-de49f292e7c64fba8cbfb51dd574b147",
"input": "Periodization is the process or study of categorizing the past into discrete, quantified named blocks of time[1] in order to facilitate the study and analysis of history. This results in descriptive abstractions that provide convenient terms for periods of time with relatively stable characteristics. The dominant usage of the word Renaissance refers to the cultural changes that occurred in Italy that culminated in the High Renaissance around 1500-1530. This concept applies dominantly to the visual arts, and the work of Michelangelo, Raphael, and Leonardo da Vinci. Trying New Things: Renaissance Periodization Diet Templates. There is no denying that Renaissance Periodization has had some incredible success with athletes and weekend warrior types of all flavors. I’m seeing more weightlifters and powerlifters with abs, and I’ve stopped seeing so many people #cleaneating and #waroncarb flag flying. If you’re a professional athlete or a professional of any sort that has a schedule that more amenable to your own whims (work from home, flexible start, stop, and break times) then you probably will have far less trouble doing the RP style templates. It’s not hard to make all the food, it’s not hard to take it with you. Here are the reasons why: (disclaimer: I’m not being paid to talk it up or anything; these are my true opinions unsolicited) 1 The auto template is extremely easy to follow. 2 It stresses a healthy balance of all macronutrients, teaching the user / dieter how to utilize them to maximize results and performance. Renaissance Periodization – in depth look and preliminary review. 1 The auto template is extremely easy to follow. Simple, to the point, no guess work (unless you want to get creative, which is totally doable but complicates things in that you need to count your macros and do some math). Trying New Things: Renaissance Periodization Diet Templates Tue, Apr 5, 2016 There is no denying that Renaissance Periodization has had some incredible success with athletes and weekend warrior types of all flavors. The Second Stage: may be called slave society, considered to be the beginning of class society where private property appears. 1 Class: here, the idea of class appears. 2 Statism: the state develops during this stage as a tool for the slave-owners to use and control the slaves. Periodization is the process or study of categorizing the past into discrete, quantified named blocks of time in order to facilitate the study and analysis of history. This results in descriptive abstractions that provide convenient terms for periods of time with relatively stable characteristics. However, determining the precise beginning and ending to any period is often arbitrary. It has changed over time in history. To the extent that history is continuous and ungeneralizable, all systems Trying New Things: Renaissance Periodization Diet Templates Tue, Apr 5, 2016. There is no denying that Renaissance Periodization has had some incredible success with athletes and weekend warrior types of all flavors. I’m seeing more weightlifters and powerlifters with abs, and I’ve stopped seeing so many people #cleaneating and #waroncarb flag flying. Query: how does renaissance periodization work",
"output": [
"The dominant usage of the word Renaissance refers to the cultural changes that occurred in Italy that culminated in the High Renaissance around 1500-1530."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-928c4d16d4f04b3087c8b05cf0c62622",
"input": "How long do I have to hold a stock to receive a dividend? I saw this about my stock. The quarterly dividend will be payable on August 3, 2009 to stockholders of record at the close of business on July 6, 2009. If I decide to buy more shares on July 6th and sell July 7th, am I still going to receive the dividends? Or do I have to hold it till Aug 3? Thanks. If you are in a tax bracket above 15%, then your long-term capital gains are taxed at a rate that is lower than your ordinary rate. If, however, you sell an investment that you have held for a year or less, the gains are taxed at your regular rate. Best Answer: You only need to hold a stock for one day to earn the dividend. But in your example you would not get the dividend. You need to buy before the ex-div date to get the dividend. If you buy before ex-div date and sell on or after the ex-div date, you get the dividend. An investor should hold a short sell position for as long as the investment is profitable and as long as the investor can reasonably expect the profits to increase. However, there are a number of additional factors that can influence a short seller's decision on when to close out his investment. Short sellers must have an awareness of the increased risk level involved in selling short as opposed to buying long. An investor buying a stock can only sustain a maximum loss of 100% of his or her investment, but a short seller, while having a maximum potential profit of 100%, faces virtually unlimited risk given that a stock price can theoretically rise to infinitely higher prices. The aim is to hold onto the short until the price of the stock drops, enabling the investor to buy back the borrowed amount of shares at a lower price and realize a profit from the short sell transaction, but interest charges must be figured into net profit. Best Answer: You only need to hold a stock for one day to earn the dividend. But in your example you would not get the dividend. You need to buy before the ex-div date to get the dividend. If you buy before ex-div date and sell on or after the ex-div date, you get the dividend. There are four dates related to dividends. So, if you sell a stock, you will need to pay taxes on the gains. The good news is, that you don’t have to pay taxes on this type of income until you sell and lock in the gains. As you make the decision about whether or not to sell a stock, it can help to consider whether or not your gains are considered long term or short-term. Long-Term Gains versus Short-Term Gains. The amount of time you hold an investment matters when figuring what you owe in terms of taxes. If you hold something for a year or less, it is considered a short-term investment. On the other hand, if you hold a stock for more than a year (one year plus one day), it is considered long-term. Understanding this is vital as you consider taxes, since short-term capital gains are taxed as regular income, and long-term capital gains have their own tax rates. The company pays because of having the money/investment for a time period. If you sell on July 7th you will have nothing to do with that stock and no payment will be made. These stocks are all on the brokers records which your on the brokers record, but not the company. So the money will go to the broker. Query: how long do i need to hold a stock to make money from dividends",
"output": [
"You only need to hold a stock for one day to earn the dividend."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3e96a3e61fdb44629be4dec6240d2374",
"input": "Here are some ideas on how to file your taxes this current year: 1 File your tax for free online in IRS website if your earnings are below $54,000. 2 You can use IRS e-file when your earnings are above $54,000. 3 Send the printout of forms from IRS website to their office. 4 Get the services of a professional tax consultant and file a tax form. How long do I have to file an amended return? As a rule, you must file your 1040X within three years from the date you filed your return, or two years from the date you paid the tax, whichever is later. How long does it take to get an amended return processed? Normally, amended returns will be processed in 8 to 12 weeks. For more information on amending a return, check out the IRS website at www.irs.gov and download Form 1040-X and its instructions. You can also call the IRS at 1-800-TAX-FORM (1-800-829-3676). Tweet; Google+; Like After filing your tax return, you realize there was a mistake, but you haven’t received any type of notice from the IRS yet. If the due date for filing has passed, you can submit an amended tax return to correct most mistakes. Be aware that you can’t e-file an amended return — it has to be on paper. If you realize you made a mistake but the due date for filing hasn’t passed, do not file an amended return. You should use Form 1040X, Amended U.S. Individual Income Tax Return, to amend your filed Form 1040, 1040A or 1040EZ. Remember to check the box for the year of the return you're amending on the 1040X. You'll also have to mail in your amended return - they can't be e-filed. Where’s My Amended Return? will give you the status of your amended tax return. You can start checking on its status three weeks after you’ve mailed it. It can take up to three weeks before your amended return shows up in our system . Keep in mind it could take up to 16 weeks from the date of receipt for the IRS to process your return and issue your refund via paper check or direct deposit. Processing Components . There are three phases to the procedure IRS uses to process Amended Tax Returns: Phase 1- Received. This status confirms the IRS has received your Form 1040X or Amended Tax Return. Phase 2- Adjusted. This status confirms the IRS has applied the updated information from your Form 1040X to your account. Phase 3- Completed. That's another reason to file ASAP. 8-12 weeks, and if IRS gets too busy then it could take 16 weeks. Amended Tax Refunds are mailed to your home address. Call IRS at 1-800-829-1040 6 weeks after filiing the amended tax return to find out the status. Since amended tax returns are only allowed to be mailed to the IRS, not E-filed, this is why it takes so long to receive the refunds. Q: How much time do I have to file an amended return? A: An amended return must be filed within three years from the date of the original return or within two years from the date taxes were paid, whichever is later. Q: How long will it take the IRS to process my amended return? A: According to the IRS, it generally takes up to 16 weeks to process an amended return. Q: Where can I find more information? Before you get started, read this to make sure you actually need to amend. 1 Sign in to your TurboTax account, if you're not already signed in. 2 In the 2016 Tax Year section, click Amend (change) return. Note: If you see an orange Take me to my return button, you can't amend because you haven't filed yet. Just click or tap that button to open your return and make your changes. In the pop-up, click Amend using TurboTax Online; Click Continue on the We'll help you change (amend) your return screen. Follow the on-screen directions to amend your return. Here are five guidelines: 1 Keep it conversational. 2 Be clear and state the answer right up front. 3 Be concise. 4 Be a good listener. 5 Be encouraging and positive. Query: how long does it take for refund from amended taxes",
"output": [
"It takes 16 weeks for refund from Amended Taxes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-04bd8f2518524f92841af23cd146c3cd",
"input": "Cover tightly with foil and bake for two hours, uncover and add potatoes and carrots and bake another hour. This is how I did it. HOWEVER-Prudy said she often puts the potatoes and carrots right in from the beginning, reduces the heat to 300 and bakes the whole thing for 3 hours, covered tightly with foil. Step 6. Place the roasting pan in the 300 F oven. Roast a covered pan of root vegetables for at least 1 hour. An uncovered pan of squash or zucchini can be checked after 20 minutes to see if the vegetables are thoroughly cooked. Insert a fork or small knife into the vegetable; if you can easily break through to the middle, it is done cooking. The Best Roast Pork Loin With Potatoes And Carrots Recipes on Yummly | Maple Mustard Glazed Pork Roast, Pork Loin With Mole De Olla, Harvest Pork Roast With Vegetables AllRecipes. 1 ground black pepper, salt, molasses, garlic, beef broth, salt and 10 more. 2 vegetable bouillon, olive oil, spring onions, plain flour, parsley and 7 more. 3 freshly ground pepper, bread crumbs, olive oil, kosher salt, herbes de provence and 7 more. 4 black pepper, minced garlic, water, onion soup mix, loin pork roast and 1 more. Roasted Potatoes & Carrots with Rosemary. 1 2 pounds of potatoes washed and dried. 2 3 carrots peeled. 3 3 sprigs of rosemary minced. 4 2½ tablespoons of olive oil plus more to drizzle at the end. 5 Himalayan pink salt or sea salt. 6 Fresh ground pepper. Place oven rack towards the top; Heat oven to 350F; Cut potatoes in halves or quarters, or smaller depending on potato size; Cut carrots in medium to thin rounds; Place potatoes and carrots in baking sheet; Toss with olive oil and rosemary; Toss with salt and pepper; Roast for 25 minutes; Toss with a spoon; Roast another 15 minutes or until done Oven Baked Pot Roast with Potatoes and Carrots. 1 tablespoon cooking oil 1/2 cup flour 1 (3 lb.) pot roast (chuck, rump, etc.) 2 cloves garlic, minced 1 onion, finely chopped 2 (14 ounce) cans beef broth (I used 3 1/2 cups made from bouillon) 1 8 ounce can V8 or tomato sauce 1 heaping tablespoon brown sugar 2 teaspoon Worcestershire sauce Preheat oven to 425F. Cut the carrots to match the length of the potatoes. Halve the potatoes lengthwise. Toss carrots and potatoes in a bowl with olive oil and season with salt and pepper. Spread the mixture evenly on a baking sheet and roast for 30 to 40 minutes, until potatoes are fork tender and lightly charred. Remove from oven and squeeze fresh lemon juice over the warm vegetables. 1 Preheat an oven to 350 degrees F (175 degrees C). 2 Place the whole carrots into a baking dish, and drizzle with olive oil. 3 Bake in the preheated oven until just tender, or cooked to your desired degree of doneness, 40 minutes to 1 hour. Roast a combination of carrots and potatoes for a simple holiday side dish. The high heat concentrates the sweetness of the carrots and makes the potatoes crisp on the outside and creamy on the inside. A flourish of brightly flavored fresh dill lifts the finished dish. Query: how long to oven roast potatoes and carrots",
"output": [
"It takes 30 to 40 minutes to oven roast potatoes and carrots in oven."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-de5e380485d74537a943800c2eeebde9",
"input": "You can leave for longer flights at the end of the business day or plan overnight flights so your team is able to sleep on the flight and arrive ready to go. Business capabilities on private jets also allow you to conduct business during the flight if you’d rather take advantage of the time spent in transit to take care of last-minute preparations, conduct research, or teleconference with the home office. Best Answer: Officially, the world's fastest jet-powered aircraft remains the SR-71 Blackbird. Although the official record is about Mach 3.3 (or 3.3 times the speed of sound), many believe the aircraft could actually fly much faster. However, it seems unlikely that the SR-71 could go much faster than about Mach 3.5, with a very slim chance of Mach 4, due to propulsion and structural limitations. Quick Answer. It is not uncommon for many types of modern fighter jets to sustain speeds of one to two times the speed of sound. However, there are a number of jets that are capable of travelling much faster. The world's fastest jet is the X-15, which regularly reached Mach 6.72. Continue Reading Another area of concern for sustained high-speed flight is engine operation. Jet engines create thrust by increasing the temperature of the air they ingest, and as the aircraft speeds up, friction and compression heat this air before it reaches the engines. Duralumin, the traditional aircraft material, starts to lose strength and go into plastic deformation at relatively low temperatures, and is unsuitable for continuous use at speeds above Mach 2.2 to 2.4. Private jets are so much faster that charter flights can cut hours off of your total travel time between the expedited boarding process and flying faster once taking to the air.â The standard 747 travels at approximately 600 mph, which is considerably slower than the Gulfstream G650 which peaks at 704 mph. Mach 1 is approximately equal to 663 mph. Airlines planes go mostly at the speed of mach 0.7. Military planes can go up to the speed of mach 5. According to the Guinness Book of records the fastest speed of an airplane recorded is 2193 miles per hour or 4520 miles per hour according to the World Book of Encyclopedia. Number 10: Sukhoi Su-27 Flanker. 1 Its top speed of 2.35 mach brings it to the very edge of USSR craftmanship with a twin engine and the first fly-by-wire control system on a Russian jet ever. It was built for air superiority to counter the new American 3.5 gen fighters such as the F-15 Eagle. how fast does a f-16 jet go, someone said 8oo knots but how many miles per hour is that? about military f-16 jets how fast do they go per hour Source(s): fast 16 jet 8oo knots miles hour that: https://shortly.im/pMALg most military air combat jet aircraft can go over mach 1.0, passenger aircraft fly at around mach 0.80. Query: how fast do jets go?",
"output": [
"The standard Jet 747 travels at approximately 600 mph."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-179007e06f6b45279c9df96083c33ae0",
"input": "I lose my hair to much and i went to hospital and the do for me blood test for vitamin d and i take tablet for vitamin d but still I am loosing hair? Dr. Derrick Lonsdale Dr. Lonsdale Vitamin D: Is not specific for hair loss. This test measures the level of Vitamin B6, or Pyridoxine, in the blood. It is recommended that the patient avoid alcohol and vitamins for 24 hours before testing. This Vitamin B6 Test is a blood test. An 8-12 hour fast is recommended before testing. It typically takes 4 business days or less. B6 Blood Test - More Information. The vitamin B6 test, also known as a B6 lab test and a pyridoxine test, measures the B6 blood level. Vitamin B6, also known as pyridoxine, is an important B vitamin. Sometimes referred to as PLP, B6 is involved with making hemoglobin and histamine in addition to having a number of roles in metabolic processes in the body. Our Vitamin B6 Test price includes the following: 1 A doctor's lab order. 2 24 / 7 order processing. 3 Access to 1000+ Quest labs. 4 All lab test fees. 5 Secure, PDF results. 6 Responsive customer service. This particular B6 blood test uses an LC/MS/MS methodology to measure B6 (pyridoxal) blood levels. To get a vitamin B6 lab test near you, simply order online and get your blood drawn at your selected Quest Diagnostics lab. Once your vitamin B6 lab report is ready, you will be able to download them electronically. Can i take vitamins before a fasting blood test - A blood test showed that I'm B12 deficient. Serum B12 level of 186 pg/ml, should I take vitamin B12 supplements? B12. this low will likely cause dementia, spinal cord degeneration and peripheral neuropathy. Keep your level above 550 for the rest of your life. B12: this low will likely cause dementia, spinal cord degeneration and peripheral neuropathy. Keep your level above 550 for the rest of your life. Recovery takes about a year in a young person. I suggest you take liquid sublingual weekly for 3 months then bi weekly thereafter. Its important to check a level after you cut back to twice a month. Our Vitamin B6 Test price includes the following: A doctor's lab order. 24 / 7 order processing. Access to 1000+ Quest labs. All lab test fees. Secure, PDF results. Responsive customer service. A doctor's lab order. Hi, I am having pain near lower knee of right and left leg. I had blood test and result is : Vitamin D3- 9.3 Vitamin B12-474.6 Calcium-9.6 I have been advices to take arachitol 6l & Hosit500 injections twice a week for four weeks. Get a vitamin B6 test at a lab near you. The B6 blood test measures levels of B6 (pyridoxine) in the blood - Accesa Labs Query: how long do i fast for a vitamin blood test",
"output": [
"An 8 to 12 hour fast is recommended before Vitamin B6 testing."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8c24aed0d3264ba898b96884d95c22b6",
"input": "Proteins are separated by charge in agarose because the pores of the gel are too large to sieve proteins. Gel electrophoresis can also be used for separation of nanoparticles. Gel electrophoresis uses a gel as an anticonvective medium and/or sieving medium during electrophoresis, the movement of a charged particle in an electrical field. What are the components of a gel electrophoresis chamber? What kinds of macromolecules can you look at with gel electrophoresis? Do you need to use different techniques for the different kinds of macromolecules? How do you visualize the macromolecules in the gel? What are real-life examples of what gel electrophoresis is used for? Bibliography Once these are separated, a photo is taken of the gel, providing a picture of the separated molecular parts. This process is called electrophoresis and helps us to better understand and identify the molecular components of living things. Forensics In the world of forensics, gel electrophoresis is used to obtain a DNA fingerprint of a criminal. This means that scientists can accurately tell whether two pieces of DNA, one found at a crime scene and one belonging to a suspect, are matches. Gel electrophoresis is a method for separation and analysis of macromolecules and their fragments, based on their size and charge. It is used in clinical chemistry to separate proteins by charge and/or size and in biochemistry and molecular biology to separate a mixed population of DNA and RNA fragments by length, to estimate the size of DNA and RNA fragments or to separate proteins by charge. Nucleic acid molecules are separated by applying an electric field to move the negatively charged molec · Gel Electrophoresis and SDS-PAGE Gel Electrophoresis which includes Protein Gel Electrophoresis Current Uses of Gel Electrophoresis -Gel electrophoresis is a technique used for the separation of deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA), ribonucleic acid (RNA), or protein molecules by using an electric field and a gel matrix. DNA Gel electrophoresis is usually used in order for investigations. DNA profiling is the process of determining an individual's DNA characteristics, called a DNA profile, that is very likely to be different in unrelated individuals, thereby being as unique to individuals as are fingerprints. DNA profiling with the aim of identifying not an individual but a species is called DNA barcoding. DNA profiling is most commonly used as a forensic technique in criminal investigations to identify an unidentified person or whose identity needs to be confirmed, or to place a person at a crime scene or to eliminate a person from consideration. Electrophoresis is used in DNA for fingerprints for forensics, paternity testing, checking PCR reactions, disease detection and to look for evolutionary relationships among organisms. A solution of negatively charged DNA molecules are pulled through gel using an electric field. Thanks to TV shows like CSI, many people are familiar with the use of gel to separate macromolecules like DNA. However, gel electrophoresis91112 can also be used to separate out proteins. Different proteins have different sizes, mainly due to the number of building blocks in their structure. Gel Electrophoresis is used to separate DNA fragments by their sizes and charges. It makes it possible to identify the differences and similarities between different plants and animals. Although there are some different types of Gel Electrophoresis such as Capillary and Agarose, this is how the general technology works: Quick Answer. Electrophoresis, also called gel electrophoresis, is used to separate the macromolecules of DNA, RNA and proteins. DNA and RNA are separated according to their size and length, while proteins are separated according to their charges. Query: how is gel electrophoresis used in the field of forensics",
"output": [
"In the world of forensics, gel electrophoresis is used to obtain a DNA fingerprint of a criminal."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1fdaa7e8fb2c41c1af07f03542f6b0ba",
"input": "Hydrogen ion (H 3 O +) as a flattened pyramid . Hydrogen ions. Hydrogen ions are molecular ions with the formula H 3 O + (H 2 O) n, formed by the addition of a proton to one or more water molecules. The ionic product, K w. pH Hydroxide ions Grotthuss mechanism . The structure and dynamics of the hydrogen ion in water have been reviewed . how do hydronium ions form. when a hydrogen ion, H+, separates from the acid and bonds with a water molecule, H2O, to form H3O+. What are some properties of acids. sour taste, corrosive, most of them are poisonous, reacts with metals to form hydrogen gas, conduct electric current. Hydronium is what you get when you put water and hydrogen ions together, forming H 3 O +. Hydronium is the simplest form of oxonium, which is any ion that contains the trivalent oxygen cation. Hydronium is also known as hydroxonium. As with many species in chemistry, the nomenclature isn't the same everywhere. Where would you find hydronium? Hydronium is found in interstellar clouds and in the tails of comets. A hydronium ion is formed when a positively charged hydrogen ion bonds with a molecule of water through a coordinate covalent bond. In this coordinate covalent bond, the oxygen from the water... A hydronium ion is formed when a positively charged hydrogen ion bonds with a molecule of water through a coordinate covalent bond. An acid does not itself contain hydronium, which is formed when an acid reacts with water. If you meant how to reduce the hydronium in an acidic water solution, you would simply add a base. For i... so, they will form H3O+ that is less stable from H2O and more stable than H+... H3O+ stays between the H2O and H+ its the best act they can do to achieve stabilization... hopes thats help... When a protic acid is added to water, it releases a hydrogen ion (H+) (also called aproton because a hydrogen atom missing one electron is nothing but a proton!). However, H+ …will not stay a free ion, and instead immediately combines with a nearby water molecule (H2O) to form the hydronium ion, H3O+. Assorted References. 1 major reference (in acid–base reaction: Hydrogen and hydroxide ions) (in acid–base reaction: Dissociation constants in aqueous solution) 2 occurrence in soil (in soil: Mineral content) 3 particle accelerators (in particle accelerator: Generating particles) 4 pH measurement (in chemical analysis: pH determinations) A hydronium ion is written as H3O+. It is formed when something else donate a proton, or H+, to a water molecule. The H+ will easily bond to one of the two lone pairs of electrons around the water ... The resulting hydronium ions are few and short-lived. pH is a measure of the relative activity of hydronium and hydroxide ions in aqueous solutions. In acidic solutions, hydronium is the more active, its excess proton being readily available for reaction with basic species. The hydronium ion is very acidic: at 25 °C, its pK a is 0. It is the most acidic species that can exist in water (assuming sufficient water for dissolution): any stronger acid will ionize and protonate a water molecule to form hydronium. Query: how does the hydronium ion form",
"output": [
"A hydronium ion is formed when a positively charged hydrogen ion bonds with a molecule of water through a coordinate covalent bond."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0242773ff40343c0b8e68d21846fd141",
"input": "I recently spent the day with a Chevy Bolt. It may not be as cool as a Tesla, but it still deserves your consideration. New Car Review 2018 Kia Sportage: New Car Review. The 2018 Kia Sportage compact SUV has the kind of style and features commonly found on luxury SUVs costing thousands more. How to Sell Your Car Privately Three Parts: Preparing to Sell Your Car Increasing the Value of Your Vehicle Selling Your Car Community Q&A Selling your car on your own can be a nerve wracking experience. lt;p>The new-car delivery process at a dealership can be agonizingly slow, since it often includes arranging financing, registering the car and signing sales contracts. New-car buyers on average spent half a work day (4.3 hours) in dealerships in 2011, according to the most recent J.D. Power and Associates U.S. Sales Satisfaction Index. Some of that time can be chalked up to the complexity of new cars and the time it takes a salesperson to explain the audio, entertainment and navigation systems in your new vehicle. Title > Frequently Asked Questions. 1 Transfer ownership to the buyer on the reverse side of the title by filling in buyer's name, buyer's address, and current odometer reading. 2 Obtain signatures of seller and buyer. 3 Give the title to the buyer. They will likely ask you if you are using the car you want to sell as a trade-in for a new car. You may be offered more money on paper if you are using the car as a trade-in than if you want to sell it for cash. Most dealers will work with you whether you are looking to use your car as a trade-in for a new vehicle or not, though. Floor plan financing is a type of short-term loan that is paid off in 30 to 90 days, the time it normally takes to sell a car. A typical new car costs a dealer about $5 to $10 in interest per day. So if a car sits on the lot for 30 days, the dealer will be charged $150 - $300 in interest payments. This is why dealers want to sell cars as quickly as possible - to reduce their financing costs and increase profits. I did much better sitting my car on the side of a busy road with shoe polish on the window and a low price. Autotrader is in the business of selling ads. Unless your car is priced below wholesale, chances are not great you will sell it within 2 weeks. Possible, but not great. Take it by multiple car dealers that sell cars like yours and get offers. Then price your car at a little above that. Selling a car online is a different beast than selling it through the newspaper classifieds. Most classified sales are local, allowing the buyer to personally eyeball the vehicle, test drive it and even take it to a mechanic for an inspection. Many by-owner, online used-car sales are long-distance transactions that are finalized without the buyer seeing or test driving the car. You may sell your car at any CarMax location - with the same written offer for seven days. If your appraisal was completed more than seven days ago, we'll re-appraise your car. We know there are things about car shopping that seem mysterious. And we're here to give you some insight into what's going on. Between the two of us, we have nearly 20 years of experience in buying and selling cars. Matt worked in car dealerships for 12 years as a salesman, sales manager and Internet sales manager. Ron buys and sells cars for Edmunds' long-term fleet of test cars and has written dozens of articles about all aspects of car shopping. Query: how long does it take to sell a car",
"output": [
"It takes 30 to 90 days to sell a car."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-befa9a79d599468aa9acaebdca0bd3ea",
"input": "The impact of lung cancer extends beyond the individual to their family, effects are both emotional and financial. The family is important in providing support and caring for the patient and it is important to provide support in terms of home help, respite care, counselling on a continuing basis. Lung cancer can affect breathing by interfering with the normal function of the lung by one of three processes. The first is when a tumor blocks off an airway and essentially takes that piece of lung out of commission.. Studies document that spouses are as distressed as cancer patients and that spousal and patient distress are correlated. Three major areas of caregiver concern are: fear of cancer and its spread, helping patients deal with the emotional ramifications of the disease, and managing the disruptions caused by cancer. From 20% to 30% of partners suffer from psychological impairment and mood disturbance as a result of the spouse's cancer. Below are facts and statistics on lung cancer, looking at trends in mortality, prevalence, gender and racial differences, survival rate and burden (i.e., impact of disease). To understand how lung cancer starts, different types, how it affects your body and other lung cancer basics, visit our Learn About Lung Cancer section. Lung cancer is the most common cancer all around the world. According to the American Lung Association, there were 1.8 million new cases in 2012, as well as 1.6 million deaths from lung cancer. The most common type is non-small cell lung cancer (NSCLC), accounting for 80 to 85 percent of all cases, according to the Lung Cancer Alliance. Small-cell lung cancer (SCLC) represents about 15 to 20 percent of lung cancers. At the time of diagnosis, two out of three people with SCLC are already in the extensive stage. Anyone can get lung cancer, but smoking or exposure to secondhand smoke is linked to about 90 percent of lung cancer cases. Other cause-and-effect relationships have been noted in workers between 1 –. benzene and leukemia; 2 asbestos and lung cancer; and. 3 vinyl chloride and liver cancer. The Roy Castle Lung Cancer Foundation is the UK's only lung cancer charity. It can provide information on lung cancer and its treatment, and has free factsheets and leaflets on topics such as breathlessness. It also runs a number of local support groups. Phone the Foundation’s free helpline on 0333 323 7200 or visit the Roy Castle Lung Cancer Foundation website. They can also help people with lung cancer to control their pain and symptoms, although they don't provide hands-on nursing care. There are almost 4,000 Macmillan nurses, most of them employed by the NHS. They work in hospitals or visit patients' homes, with some Macmillan nurses working in hospices. The American Cancer Society recommends the following 1 –. Avoid using tobacco products, such as cigarettes, snuff and chewing tobacco. 2 Choose most of the foods you eat from plant sources. 3 Limit your intake of high-fat foods, particularly from animal sources. 4 Be physically active and achieve and maintain a healthy weight. Smoking-Attributable Lung Cancer. 1 Smoking, a main cause of small cell and non-small cell lung cancer, contributes to 80 percent and 90 percent of lung cancer deaths in women and men, respectively. Men who smoke are 23 times more likely to develop lung cancer. Query: how does lung cancer affect an individual",
"output": [
"Lung cancer can affect breathing by interfering with the normal function of the lung by one of three processes. The first is when a tumor blocks off an airway and essentially takes that piece of lung out of commission. The impact of lung cancer extends beyond the individual to their family, effects are both emotional and financial."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-46c1565971d0427cb16ecc24d40e7e8c",
"input": "How do you measure a fluorescent light bulb? It's important to get it right or you might not find what you're looking for. It's easy and works on all fluores... Linear fluorescent light bulbs are measured in two ways length and diameter. The length is measured from the end the pins. The most common sizes in length for T12's and T8's are 12, 15, 18, 24, 36 and 48 inches long. Howerver, T5 light bulbs are metric and standard sizes are not the same as T12 and T8. Some of their common sizes are around 22, 34 and 46 inches. The second measurement is the diameter of the light bulb. Fluorescent tube light bulbs are measured in 1/8 of inch increments. So a T12 light bulb is 12 x 1/8 of an inch, which equals 1 1/2 inches in diameter (T8 equals an inch and T5 equals 5/8 of an inch) length of the wire, and A x is its cross-sectional area. 1. Measure the length of the filament in the bulb: L = _____ m (The resistance of the other wires in the bulb is small enough to be ignored. Use an overhead projector to magnify and measure the filament w/o breaking the bulb.) 2. Now set the multimeter to Ohm measurement and measure the resistance of the cold Physics For Scientists And Engineers (3rd Edition) View more editions Solutions for Chapter 23 Problem 69P. Problem 69P: A lightbulb is 3.0 m from a wall. What are the focal length ... 3449 step-by-step solutions. Also referred to as Maximum Overall Length (MOL). For light bulbs, it measures the length of a light bulb, from the top of the bulb to the bottom of the base or pins and is typically expressed in inches. For light fixtures and ballasts, it applies to the total horizontal length of the item. showed that light containing only wavelengths greater than 530 nm does not suppress melatonin in bright-light conditions.[35] The Question: It would seem there are a few bulbs on the market that possibly meet my requirement yet to be sure I need to measure the colour of the light in a room when using these bulbs. I would like it bright enough to read if possible but also dark enough and with no blue light so we get the benefits of cutting out artificial light. The measure of electrical energy from which electricity billing is determined. For example, a 100-Watt bulb operated for 1000 hours would consume 100 kilowatt hours (100 Watts x 1000 hours = 100 kWh). At a billing rate of $0.10/kWh, this bulb would cost $10.00 (100 kWh x $0.10/kWh) to operate over 1000 hours. There are 3 important factors when choosing a fluorescent tube: 1 The diameter. 2 The length. 3 The colour rendering (see our Colour Temperature and Colour Rendering Index Guide) Sample LED Light Bulb Shape Designations: 1 A Standard household incandescent light bulb shape. 2 B Bulged bulb shape. 3 BT Bulged or Blown Tubular bulb shape. 4 BR Short reflector style light bulb. 5 C Candle or Conical bulb shape. 6 CP Crystalline Pear bulb shape. 7 E Ellipsoidal bulb shape. 8 ER Extended reflector light bulb shape. Bathroom Vanity Lighting. Measure the length of the bathroom mirror (or mirrors). That number will be your limit for the length of vanity bar lights. Many people choose vanities that are about 75 percent the length of the mirror and then mount them centrally. Query: how is the length of af a light bulb measured?",
"output": [
"The length of a light bulb, from the top of the bulb to the bottom of the base or pins and is typically expressed in inches."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-cd1edcf3b554414f818cc00df714ba2b",
"input": "The Birds have handlebars but no seat, like a hot-rod version of the Razor or Micro scooters beloved by toddlers. They go at speeds of up to 15mph — faster than many cars can move in Los Angeles’ congested streets. American coot. The American coot (Fulica americana), also known as a mud hen, is a bird of the family Rallidae. Though commonly mistaken to be ducks, American coots belong to a distinct order. Unlike the webbed feet of ducks, coots have broad, lobed scales on their lower legs and toes that fold back with each step in order to facilitate walking on dry land. If you're looking for Bird Scooter coupon codes, check out this Freebie promo code for Zipcar. Like Bird Scooter, Zipcar is a ride sharing brand, and they are currently running a Freebie promo code which you might like. A Parked Bird Electric Scooter - a couple days after launch, before they put the Bird logo on them But this scooter was alone And while standing there waiting for my gf to pick me up, I got more and more curious because no one was standing by it and no one seemed to have been watching it. How fast does a 49cc scooter go? A: The top speeds of most 49cc scooters are between 35 and 50 mph on flat, dry pavement. Higher speeds are achieved by derestricting the scooter. Regardless... Full Answer > Bird has posted photos and videos to its Instagram account of people without helmets using its scooters on roads.) On a percentage basis, we actually think Bird is one of the safest ways to get around town, he said. We focused on the bestselling products customers like you want most in categories like Baby, Clothing, Electronics and Health & Beauty. Marketplace items (products not sold by Walmart.com), and items with freight charges are not eligible for ShippingPass. A 150cc scooter will likely top out around 50 to 60 mph, whereas something a lot heavier, such as a 150cc Go Kart will have a much slower top-end... A 150cc scooter will likely top out around 50 to 60 mph, whereas something a lot heavier, such as a 150cc Go Kart will have a much slower top-end... With $15 million in its pocket, the team is hoping to bring its scooters to dozens more American cities throughout 2018 — just don't call them scooters. The CEO prefers the term Birds for the vehicles. We don't really like the word scooter, he said. To him, a scooter sounds too much like a children's toy. Bird scooters flying around town With autonomous vehicles it’s not about the journey, it’s about the destination Pitch your transit ideas to Metro’s Office of Extraordinary Innovation 9 MIN, 54 SEC Query: how fast is a bird scooter",
"output": [
"Birds scooters go at speeds of up to 15 mph."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-72a8b82a04574d478368cc49aa9ef9b5",
"input": "The following information is required: 1 Renewal notice. Note: If your renewal notice has incorrect information, you will need a completed and signed Form MV-1 Title/Tag Application. 2 When applying in-person, you must show your valid Georgia driver’s license or ID card. 3 Proof of Georgia liability insurance (if applicable). The Iowa DOT will mail you a vehicle registration renewal notice before your current registration expires. It will include: Your vehicle information. Your online renewal PIN, if applicable. Payment instructions. You can renew your vehicle registration up to 1 month before and after your expiration date without having to pay a late fee. After that, you will be charged a monthly late fee of 5% of your registration renewal fee or $5 (whichever is higher) until you renew. Marylanders register their cars and most other vehicles for 2 years at a time. Fees differ, so check the renewal form to see what your registration renewal costs. Please note: Those with insurance violations or other MVA problems will need to visit an MVA full-service location. Helpful Tips and Notes. 1 Registration surcharges increased from $13.50 to $17.00 as part of Transportation Infrastructure Investment Act of 2013. 2 Renew now. 3 If renewing your registration only, you will receive one license plate sticker. If receiving new license plates, you will receive both a month and a year sticker. Trailers not for rent or lease do not require insurance.To avoid a substantial uninsured motorist penalty fee, return your registration card and plates to the MVA on or before the day the required insurance is terminated. To renew car registration online in Texas, a driver will have to provide a license plate number, the last four digits of a vehicle identification number (VIN), as well as information about the type of vehicle and the car insurance policy. RENEW REGISTRATION ONLINE, BY PHONE, BY MAIL, OR IN PERSON. You must renew your vehicle registration annually. A courtesy renewal reminder is mailed within 30 days prior to your expiration month. Please be sure your address is up to date to ensure you receive your notice. Online registration is available in some counties. 1 Your renewal notice will have information about online registration if your county participates. To renew online: 2 You must live in a participating county. 3 You will need your Renewal Identification Number (RIN) located on your renewal notice or look up the RIN online. Even in states that don’t assess late fees, driving with an expired registration puts you at risk of being ticketed by law enforcement - all the more reason it's vitally important to understand your state’s rules about car registration and registration renewal. Your vehicle is eligible for online renewal approximately 35 days before expiration. You cannot renew online if your registration is suspended, canceled or if you have unpaid parking tickets or bad debt with the DMV. This web site uses industry-standard SSL encryption to protect your privacy online. See your certificate of registration, renewal notice or License Plate Codes for the correct prefix. Now you can use an electronic check to pay your fees and have the money come directly from your checking or savings account. Query: how long without renewing your plates do you have to re register the car",
"output": [
"You can renew your vehicle registration up to 1 month before and after your expiration date without having to pay a late fee."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-636af97fa83c4bc6937d6cddcf8734e6",
"input": "Highland Falls, NY Other Information. Located in ORANGE County, New York; Highland Falls, NY is also known as: HIGHLAND FLS, NY View a map with the driving distance between LGA and Wappingers Falls, NY to calculate your road trip mileage. driving distance flying time cost places The driving distance from LaGuardia Airport to Wappingers Falls, New York is: 81 miles / 130 km. Cost of driving from Elkton, MD to Wappingers Falls, NY Depending on the fuel efficiency level of your car, driving from Elkton to Wappingers Falls will cost you between and . An average car would make the trip for . tutors in Wappingers Falls, NY Find a tutor near you today. Search for tutors in Wappingers Falls, NY offering private lessons in math, science, English, and more. Detailed satellite Map of Highland Falls , New York showing roads, railway, airports, hotels, tourist attractions, educational institutions and other local areas. Detailed satellite Map of Highland Falls , New York showing roads, railway, airports, hotels, tourist attractions, educational institutions and other local areas. Maps of World Current, Credible, Consistent Driving distance from Wappingers Falls, NY to New York, NY. The total driving distance from Wappingers Falls, NY to New York, NY is 77 miles or 124 kilometers. Your trip begins in Wappingers Falls, New York. It ends in New York, New York. - Distance Calculator This service calculates the straight-line distance between two locations by using latitudes and longitudes. For US locations, follow these query format examples: Wappingers Falls, NY or Wappingers Falls, New York or enter a US Zip Code. For distances to cities around the world, enter a ICAO location code from the selector below. Poughkeepsie, NY Other Information. 1 Located in DUTCHESS County, New York. 2 Poughkeepsie, NY is also known as: 3 ARLINGTON, NY. 4 VASSAR COLLEGE, NY. Driving distance from Wappingers Falls, NY to New York, NY The total driving distance from Wappingers Falls, NY to New York, NY is 77 miles or 124 kilometers. Your trip begins in Wappingers Falls, New York. 32 mins. Distance from Highland Falls, NY to Wappingers Falls, NY is 24Miles or 39 Km. You can get this distance about 42 mins. If you want to planning travel with plane for 16 Miles or 26 Km, You can get this distance about 32 mins . Query: how is the distance between wappingers falls and highland falls",
"output": [
"The distance from Highland Falls to Wappingers Falls is 24 Miles or 39 Km."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-eebca4c934f24cb682fe376ac864126c",
"input": "CDL Training & Truck Driving Schools The CDL training offered at truck driving schools can help you get a career that offers freedom, flexibility, and the potential to earn a good salary. As a commercial driver in the trucking industry, you may never have to sit behind a desk. A: Yes, they are free to you as long as you drive for the sponsoring company for a few months. The cost is covered by a big trucking company. They need new drivers and you need a new driving career, so it's a win-win situation. Here is a list of most not-company-sponsored truck driving schools. Most people who want to become commercial drivers choose to get their training at local truck driving schools. But another option exists—one that allows you to get paid while you learn. Through company-sponsored CDL training, you can learn how to drive commercial vehicles at no cost to you. Below is a basic breakdown of the difference between the three levels. 1 A CDL-A allows you to operate a commercial vehicle with a trailer where the trailer weighs more than 10,000 lbs. and the combined weight of the vehicle and trailer exceeds 26,001 lbs. when fully loaded. Note that most truck drivers are paid by the mile, and regulations only allow for 70 hours of driving within an eight-day period. There are also additional regulations for how those 70 hours are used (such as requirements for rest breaks, etc).**. Q: Is there any difference between truck driving school and CDL training? A: Yes, there is a big difference. In school, you pretty much learn some very basic maneuvers and get your commercial driver’s license Class A (or CDL Class A). In training, you go out on the road with a driver trainer (or mentor) and learn all the ins and outs of the trucking business. Q: How long is truck driving school and how long is CDL training? A: Most of these truck driving schools are three weeks. Driver training is about four to eight weeks. Q: What are the minimum requirements to get into a company-sponsored driving school? How Long Is Truck Driving School? Programs vary significantly in length. At some schools, CDL training takes only three to five weeks. But at others, it can take eight to ten weeks or as long as 20 to 24 weeks. How long a program lasts is often determined by the depth and breadth of the in-classroom curriculum as well as the amount of on-the-road training. Instructors do not need certification to start working as a truck driving instructor. Most schools require new instructors to have a valid commercial driver's license and two to three years of truck driving experience. After you gain enough teaching experience and pass enough tests to meet certification requirements, you pay a $50 fee to become certified. This fee applies to all certification levels. From one CDL truck driving school to another, training programs can vary quite a bit. Some of the differences that you might encounter include: What is included with your tuition—Some CDL driving schools offer inclusive tuition, meaning that most of the expenses related to becoming a licensed truck driver are covered. The field portion of your truck driver training can familiarize you with the following: 1 Pre- and post-trip inspections. 2 Trip planning and mapping. 3 In-cab instruments and controls. 4 Safe driving practices. 5 Backing up. 6 Shifting. 7 And much more. Query: how long between truck driving school and certification?",
"output": [
"Three weeks"
]
},
{
"id": "task870-adafab9d61924da6b542fd0ce9ffdfe7",
"input": "Best Answer: Generally, the bigger the dog-the shorter the life. Most labs live between 10 and 15 years. But each dog can vary. But, getting an older dog is great ... Report Abuse. 1 Chat or rant, adult content, spam, insulting other members,show more. 2 Harm to minors, violence or threats, harassment or privacy invasion, impersonation or misrepresentation, fraud or phishing, show more. 3 Chat or rant, adult content, spam, insulting other members,show more. A black lab has a life expectancy of 10 to 12 years. Factors that may influence a black lab's life span include common diseases and ailments and the animal's general health. Black labs are part of a larger group of dogs called Labrador Retrievers, which are originally from Newfoundland. These dogs are popular and make good dogs for active families. An average lifespan for the black lab is 10 to 12 years. Some factors play a large role in determining how long the animal lives, including common diseases and issues among black labs. How long do yellow labs live? A: Yellow Labrador retrievers can live anywhere from 10 to 14 years. There are many factors that go into determining how long a dog might live. Full Answer > Generally, the bigger the dog-the shorter the life. Most labs live between 10 and 15 years. But each dog can vary. But, getting an older dog is great! They are calmer and usually housebroken. Just remember to begin geriatric vet checkups at 8. About 13 years. Well from my experiences Labradors have a history of getting arthritis in their hips. Ours was a Labrador-Pit-bull-Mix and she lived to be 13 years old. Real good dogs though, very family oriented and very attached. How long do dogs live? A: According to PetMD, the average life span of a mixed breed dog under 90 pounds is 11 years, while larger dogs live for about eight years. For purebred dogs... Full Answer > How long do yellow labs live? A: Yellow Labrador retrievers can live anywhere from 10 to 14 years. There are many factors that go into determining how long a dog might live. Full Answer > A: All Labrador Retrievers, including the black variety, originated in Newfoundland, Canada, an island in the province of Newfoundland and Labrador. The breed... Full Answer > How long do Labradors live? Me and my family want to get a dog and we found this really cute Chocolate Labrador, but he is six years old. Soooo, thats why we are wondering if anyone knows like how old they can live to be so we don't get too attached and then have like the dog roll over and die. HELP! Query: how long do labradors live for",
"output": [
"A labrador lives between 10 and 15 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9cf38181f2d94d87999fe7c4909358cd",
"input": "Please read these. 1 All posts must be cooking related. 2 Include plain text recipes for any food that you post, either in the post or in a comment. 3 No memes allowed. 4 No blog spamming. 5 Be kind and conduct productive discussion. up vote 12 down vote. Yes, and I find it taste better. When I make lasagna I will not fully cook the pasta. Instead, I keep a pot of boiling water and I dip the pasta into it to soften while I'm assembling the dish; the pasta is in the water for less than one minute. If it is a commercially frozen lasagna, it should be kept in the freezer until it is taken out to be cooked. Once it has been cooked, the leftover lasagna can be kept safely in the refrigerator for up to two days in a covered container. Learn more about Food Spoilage Sources: When you make lasagna and freeze it for later, you'll have a homemade, healthy meal on hand whenever you need it. You can freeze lasagna baked or unbaked, but you'll need to thaw it overnight before cooking it to serve. See Step 1 to learn how to freeze lasagna so that it stays fresh-tasting. Homemade lasagna isn't exactly fast food. It takes some time to assemble the dish and even longer to bake it. Plan on at least 45 minutes to one hour for a refrigerated lasagna. Once the lasagna is in the oven, you can leave it untended as it cooks. Wait 10 minutes before you slice it to allow the cheese to set. How long do cooked vegetables keep? A: Vegetables that have been cooked can be safely stored in the refrigerator for 3 to 7 days. Leftovers should be placed in covered containers with a bit of a... Full Answer > The acidity of the tomato sauce helps lasagna keep fresh for a longer time than say, macaroni salad. However, it should be refrigerated no more than two or three hours after …it has been served (counting that it will sit for 15 to 30 minutes after coming out of the oven). How long does lasagna last? Prepared lasagna will last for up to one week in the refrigerator, if stored properly. Lasagna, although there are many variations, is most often made with tomato sauce, ground beef, lasagna noodles or pasta and ricotta cheese. The shelf life of lasagna depends on a variety of factors, such as possibly a best by date, the preparation method and how the lasagna was stored. Because of its relative low cost when attempting to feed a crowd, lasagna is one of the most popular pot luck dishes around and the most common leftover since it makes so much for an average family. How long does cooked lasagna last in the fridge or freezer? The precise answer to that question depends to a large extent on storage conditions - refrigerate lasagna within two hours of cooking. To maximize the shelf life of cooked lasagna for safety and quality, refrigerate the lasagna in airtight containers. How long do cooked lasagna noodles last in the fridge? . ? ? ? Bookmarkemilydavidson thu 08 nov 07 17 43 57. Just throw the frozen pasta into boiling water and let it cook. It will need to cook a little long than unfrozen pasta. Cooked Pasta. Cooked pasta can be stored unsauced in an airtight container and refrigerated for 4 or 5 days. The sauce should be refrigerated separate from the pasta and can be stored for 6 or 7 days. This prevents the pasta from soaking up too much flavor and oil from the sauce, which causes the taste of the pasta to be drowned out. Query: how long can you refrigerate homemade cooked lasagna",
"output": [
"You can refrigerate homemade cooked lasagna for up to two days in a covered container."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-aa3d2bd6b86041d3815c45a98e385700",
"input": "i have been to see the Dr. a few times and am always pleased with the service I receive. Pros: Does procedures other dentist refer away, friendly staff, up-to-date services, fair prices, and convenient location.. Cons: Strange hours and days limited, long wait period in office, small rooms, and... more For over 50 years Carroll & Company has been MATCHING THE RIGHT DENTIST WITH THE RIGHT PRACTICE office visit 80 Digital X-rays: XDR Sensors and Owandy IMAX Touch We started using the sensor 12 months ago when we started our office and we have been using the Owandy IMAX Touch for six months. We use them every day. The diagnostic quality is much better than your typical film X-ray and it is just so much faster. Credentials - How long has the lawyer been in practice? Has the lawyer worked on other cases similar to yours? Cost - How are the lawyer's fees structured - hourly or flat fee? Can the lawyer estimate the cost of your case? City - Is the lawyer's office conveniently located? Somerset, KY Carroll Gibson Dentist. YP - The Real Yellow PagesSM - helps you find the right local businesses to meet your specific needs. Search results are sorted by a combination of factors to give you a set of choices in response to your search criteria. katherine carroll, dmd, inc. × Thanks - Your review has been submitted! Please note that if we find that this review has violated our terms or is simply deemed unacceptable, we will remove it without notice. COLUMBUS FAMILY DENTAL CARE - AARON CARROLL, DDS & KATHERINE CARROLL,'s specialty is listed as General Dentistry Practice. The practice business address for this provider is in the wonderful city of COLUMBUS, in the state of OH. This healthcare provider is listed as practicing at this street address: 3314 NOE BIXBY RD SUITE A. Sam Carroll, DMD, Yuma, Arizona. 673 likes · 250 were here. Welcome to the office of Sam Carroll, DMD, the home of your first choice for a dentist in... Omgoodness, these group of ladies and gent, Kellie, Natalie, Shantel, and Sam Carroll, DMD, are the most kindest, sweetest, caring , funny profession als I've ever had the honor of being a patient for..., and look forward to going back for a long time !! Dr. Katherine Carroll, MD is a neurology specialist in Chicago, IL and has been practicing for 16 years. She graduated from Creighton University School Of Medicine in 2002 and specializes in neurology. Query: how long has katherine carroll, dmd been in practice",
"output": [
"Dr. Katherine Carroll, MD has been practicing for 16 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a81189788e894049a872723ca9c907a3",
"input": "How long should I keep tax returns? In most cases, you should plan on keeping tax returns along with any supporting documents for a period of at least three years following the date you filed or the due date of your tax return, whichever is later. How to keep your records. There are no rules on how you must keep records. You can keep them on paper, digitally or as part of a software program (like book-keeping software). HMRC can charge you a penalty if your records aren’t accurate, complete and readable. Lost or destroyed records. Try to get copies of as much as you can, eg ask banks for copies of statements, suppliers for duplicate invoice etc. If you may have under-reported income by 25 percent or more, then you'll need to keep tax returns and all related information for six years. When there is substantial activity from a closely held business, or the cost basis records for property or securities sold are unclear, under-reporting income is a real possibility. Still, you'd be surprised at how much you can safely discard. Here is what you should keep and how long you should keep it. Three Years. Keep your federal and state income tax returns and related receipts and statements for at least three years. Keep a 2005 tax return that includes reporting of irregular items until April 2012. So if the IRS hasn't raised any issues about your 2004 tax return by now, then it should be safe to shred and discard it. Seven Years. Keep any tax return and documentation that includes a claim for deducting worthless securities for seven years. There you have it. Check back in a few days and I'll share a few more tips on what to keep indefinitely and how to keep your records organized and safe. In some cases, you may need to hang onto your records longer than three years. For instance, you should plan on keeping tax forms for retirement accounts such as IRAs until seven years after the account is completely wiped out. If you file a claim for a loss of worthless securities or bad debt deduction, you must keep records for seven years. What tax records should I keep? You should keep every tax return and supporting forms. This includes W-2s, 1099s, expense tracking, mileage logs if you itemize and other documents. So why is keeping tax returns for three years important? Keeping tax returns for the three-year time period is tied to the IRS statute of limitations. As a result, you will need to keep your 2008 tax return and related papers until April 2012. It's generally safe to shred and discard it after that (unless a situation described below applies to you). See IRS Publication 552, Recordkeeping for Individuals, for more information. Six Years. You need to keep records if you have to send HM Revenue and Customs (HMRC) a Self Assessment tax return. You’ll need your records to fill in your tax return correctly. If HMRC checks your tax return, they may ask for the documents. You must also keep records for business income and outgoings if you’re self-employed. Moneywatch Spotlight. 1 6 things to avoid buying over Labor Day. 2 10 homes that will make you want to dance. 3 The 7 U.S. cities where your money will go the farthest. 4 The top 10 jobs for Americans without college degrees. 5 These are the 5 best and worst U.S. states to grow old. Query: how long do you need to keep tax records in the us",
"output": [
"you shoul dkeeping tax records for three year."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a1f7d888f78d4019a069cf3f4344acdc",
"input": "Density is defined as mass per unit volume; mathematically, we would write: or mass m density d Volume V = = For any pure substance or homogenous mixture, density is an intensive quantity, which means that its value is the same no matter how much of the substance is present. Density expresses the proportional relationship between mass and volume of the substance. If the density of a particular substance is given in grams per milliliter, it indicates the number of grams present in 1 milliliter of that substance. To calculate the density (usually represented by the Greek letter ρ) of an object, take the mass (m) and divide by the volume (v): ρ = m / v. The SI unit of density is kilogram per cubic meter (kg/m3). It is also frequently represented in the cgs unit of grams per cubic centimeter (g/cm3). A concept related to density is the specific gravity (or, even more appropriate, relative density) of a material, which is the ratio of the material's density to the density of water. An object with a specific gravity less than 1 will float in water, while a specific gravity greater than 1 means it will sink. As a result, temperature and pressure can greatly affect the volume of a substance, especially gases. As with mass, increasing and decreasing the amount of material also increases and decreases the volume of the substance. Density. Density is calculated by dividing the mass by the volume (density = mass/volume). For example, 10 grams of freshwater has a volume of 10 milliliters. This results in a density of one gram per milliliter (10 g ÷ 10 mL = 1 g/mL). Unlike mass and volume, increasing the amount of material measured does not increase or decrease density. density, of a substance is its mass per unit volume. The symbol most often used for density is ρ (the lower case Greek letterrho), although the Latin letter D can also be used. Mathematically, density is defined as mass divided by volume: where ρ is the density, m is the mass, and V is the volume. The density, or more precisely, the volumetric mass density, of a substance is its mass per unit volume. The symbol most often used for density is ρ (the lower case Greek letter rho), although the Latin letter D can also be used. Mathematically, density is defined as mass divided by volume:[1] Density is a measure of mass per unit of volume. Density is a measure of mass per volume. The average density of an object equals its total mass divided by its total volume. An object made from a comparatively dense material (such as iron) will have less volume than an object of equal mass made from some less dense substance (such as water). Perhaps the highest density known is reached in neutron star matter. #Density# = #Mass/Volume# To solve the equation for Mass, rearrange the equation by multiplying both sides times Volume in order to isolate Mass, then plug in your known values (Density and Volume). Then solve for Mass. #Mass# = #Density x Volume# Example. The density of copper is #8.933 g/cm^3#. Density equals mass divided by volume: d = m/v So the density will vary depending on how the mass and the volume vary. If you know two of the values, you can plug them into the equation and use algebra to solve for the missing value. Specific gravity is a comparison of the density of a given material to the density of water. Water has a density of 1 gram per cubic centimeter (at 4 degrees C). That makes the math really easy. 1.93 g/cc compared to 1 g/cc equals a specific gravity of 1.93 for the clay in the brick. Note that specific gravity has no units associated with it. It's a number only. We've used mass and volume to find density, and then compared the density of our stuff to that of water to find its specific gravity. Piece of cake. Query: how is density and volume related",
"output": [
"Density is a measure of mass per unit of volume."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-751c1de81b5a45d6a948c8899b1ba7cd",
"input": "Remove the baking sheets from the oven. Let the strawberries cool at room temperature for 20 minutes. After the cooling off period, break one of the pieces of fruit in half. There should be no visible moisture along the surface of the break. :( I followed this to a T, and 6 hours later it was still mushy. I finally had to go to bed and take it from the oven. What do you think I could have done wrong? I measured the strawberries, used fresh lemon juice, sugar….. oven at 170. I have never noticed my oven temp being low with other recipes. So disappointed. However, as long as you don't position the cut sides of the fruit down on the sheet, they won't stick. Dry the Strawberries. Place the sheets of strawberries in the oven and dry them at 200 F for 3 hours. If your oven is hotter in some spots than others, turn the baking sheets around occasionally so that the strawberries dry evenly. Cool the Dried Fruit. You won't be completely sure if the strawberry pieces are fully dehydrated until they have cooled. Prepare the Strawberries. 1 Wash the strawberries. 2 Slice off the hulls—the green parts at the stem end of the fruit. 3 Cut small strawberries in half and larger ones into quarters. 4 Arrange the strawberry pieces on baking sheets cut sides up. Make sure that none of the strawberry pieces are touching. 200 F for 3 hours Dry the Strawberries. Place the sheets of strawberries in the oven and dry them at 200 F for 3 hours. If your oven is hotter in some spots than others, turn the baking sheets around occasionally so that the strawberries dry evenly. By Rachel // August 12, 2013 // 146 comments // Share. Easy homemade strawberry fruit leather, requiring only a few simple ingredients and an oven! Tastes just like your favorite fruit roll-up, only better. This past weekend was tax free weekend in MA and since I had been wanting to go to Ikea for a while, I made a date with my mom to go shopping. Hulling strawberries? What does that mean, just take off the greens? Rachel — February 26th, 2015 @ 6:31 pm . The amount of sweetener may need to be adjusted if you substitute with an alternative. As for hulling strawberries, it means to remove the leaves and the core of the strawberry. # Ultimately it took 7 hours in the oven, and I probably could’ve left it just a smidge longer because there were some undried spots. Rachel — July 12th, 2014 @ 8:09 am . If the mixture is too thick or the oven temperature is not accurate, that can play a huge role in how long it will take to dry out completely. I hope you enjoyed it! :) # It's okay to fully fill the jars at this point: the two-thirds full was just for the conditioning phase when you needed to be able to shake the pieces around. 1 Drying & Dehydrating. How to Make Dried Apples Using the Oven Method. 2 Drying & Dehydrating. How to Dehydrate Cherries in Your Oven. 3 Drying & Dehydrating. Dry the Strawberries Place the sheets of strawberries in the oven and dry them at 200 F for 3 hours. If your oven is hotter in some spots than others, turn the baking sheets around occasionally so that the strawberries dry evenly. Cool the Dried Fruit. You won't be completely sure if the strawberry pieces are fully dehydrated until they have cooled. You know how cookies crisp up after you take them out of the oven? Query: how long does it take to dry out strawberries in the oven ???",
"output": [
"It takes 3 hours to dry out strawberries in the oven."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d6c29fca2db74195bc8f08261717b819",
"input": "Use the FREE efile.com tax calculator and estimate your tax refund. Download and complete prior year tax return forms. Remember that you must use the tax form for the Tax Year for which you are filing a tax return. Unfortunately, you can only do this by mailing in a paper tax return, since the IRS does not accept previous year tax returns electronically. For more see: IRS Will Delay Tax Refunds if You Claim These Tax Credits. How long can the IRS delay your refund? See How Long Can the IRS Delay Your Tax Refund? Share your results: How Long Did it Take to Get Your Tax Refund? IRS Tax Refund Status You can track the status of your tax refund with the IRS tool Where’s My Refund? or the IRS Refund Tracker Tax App. Unclaimed Refunds: Still Waiting for a Refund Check from the IRS? Is there a tax refund waiting for you? Are you aware that you have three years to file a tax return and claim your refund (and you won't face a late-filing penalty for doing this)? Not only will the IRS send your money earlier via direct deposit, but you’ll cut down on the mailing time too. IRS Tax Refund Schedule. How long does it take to get your tax refund back? The IRS eliminated the refund schedules that were used in prior years for both direct deposit and mailed refunds. The guideline the IRS is using in 2017 for filing your 2016 tax return is: How long can the IRS delay your refund? See How Long Can the IRS Delay Your Tax Refund? Share your results: How Long Did it Take to Get Your Tax Refund? IRS Tax Refund Status. You can track the status of your tax refund with the IRS tool Where’s My Refund? or the IRS Refund Tracker Tax App. If your refund check was returned to the IRS, you might be able to change your address online via the IRS website. Call 1-800-829-1040 to verify your mailing address or your bank account. If you can't update your mailing address online, download and mail Form 8822 to the address listed on the tax form. How Long Do I Have to Claim My Refund? Generally, you have three years from the original tax return deadline to file the return and claim your refund. After three years, the refund will go to the government (specifically the U.S. Treasury). Please refer to the table below for deadlines to claim tax refunds (or pay taxes owed) for a specific Tax Year. To determine the stage of processing for a tax refund, people can visit the Internal Revenue Service's Where’s My Refund online tool or the IRS2Go mobile app. These tools reveal the receipt of the tax return, whether or not the refund is approved and the date the tax refund is expected to be issued. It also provides the expected refund amount and advises if there are any delays in processing. These tools are updated every 24 hours following the receipt of the tax return. Learn more about Income Tax Quick Answer. In 2014, the first date the IRS began processing and issuing refund checks was January 31st. Most refunds are issued within 21 calendar days from the date that the IRS acknowledges acceptance of the tax return. A: In 2014, the first date the IRS began processing and issuing refund checks was January 31st. Most refunds are issued within 21 calendar days from the date that the IRS acknowledges acceptance of the tax return. Query: how long does it take for the irs to send tax refund",
"output": [
"It takes 21 days for IRS to send tax refund."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4966866f46cb4c9c9934f6f7722c3d21",
"input": "My recipe for thin-cut pork chops, grilled quickly on only one side. 1 Prep Time: 20 minutes. 2 Cook Time: 4 minutes. 3 Total Time: 24 minutes. 4 Yield: 4-6 servings. 5 Category: Grilling. 6 Cuisine: American. After one minute, open the grill and flip the chops. Close the lid for one minute. Then turn down the heat to medium (or move the chops to the cooler side of your charcoal grill). Rotate the chops to get your cross hatch marks, and let them cook for about 3 minutes with the lid down. Step 1, Flatten your boneless pork chops. This will help them to cook all the way through while you are frying them, without burning the outsides. Place each chop between two sheets of wax paper. With a meat mallet or a rolling pin, pound the chop until it flattens and thins out. The ideal thickness is between ½ inch (1.2 cm) and ¼ inch (0.6 cm).Step 2, Beat an egg in a dish or a bowl and add 2 tbs. (30 ml) of milk or water.Step 3, Place each pork chop in the liquid, coating each side. Bake pork chops at 300 degrees F for 20 to 30 minutes while checking them frequently. Cover them with aluminum foil to keep moisture in. When buying pork chops, look for those that are pink and have no odor. Avoid those that are gray, white or have a soggy texture or liquid in the tray. These pork chops were probably not processed correctly. Ingredients. 1 7 pieces Or 8 Pieces Breakfast Chops (very Thin Bone-in Pork Chops) 2 1 cup All-purpose Flour. 3 1 teaspoon Seasoned Salt. 4 1 teaspoon Black Pepper. 5 Cayenne Pepper To Taste. 6 1/2 cup Canola Oil. 7 1 Tablespoon Butter. 8 Extra Salt And Pepper, To Taste. 42 comments about “How to Grill Perfect Pork Chops”. 1 Top Pinned Recipes 2015 | Williams-Sonoma Taste. 2 Looks great. Looking forward to trying. 3 I have been dying to grill pork chops on the grill. When I saw your recipe I couldn’t believe my eyes! 4 Grilled Pork Chops – On Aisle 6. 5 Trying it now, don’t have kosher so using only 1 TBS of table salt. Remove chops from store packaging, pat dry with paper towels. Cut (3) 1/2 slits near the outer edge of each chop. Season each chop with salt, both sides, rubbing salt into meat. Pork chops between 1/4-inch and 1/2-inch thick are referred to as thin cut pork chops. If you add a few extra ingredients to the baking pan, the whole dinner can cook in the oven... Pork chops between 1/4-inch and 1/2-inch thick are referred to as thin cut pork chops. How long do you bake thin cut bone in pork chops? You can bake thin cut bone in pork chops by first preheating the oven to 400 degrees. Then place the chops on a foil lined baking pan and cook for about 8 to 10 minutes de … pending on actual thickness. Brine the pork chops (optional): If you have time, brining the pork for even a brief period adds flavor and ensures juiciness in the finished chop. Bring 1 cup of the water to a boil, add the salt and optional flavorings, and stir to dissolve the salt. Query: how long do you cook thin pork chops",
"output": [
"You should cook thin pork chops for about 8 to 10 minutes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ef12dcf3399c45a2a4740dc477ee9079",
"input": "Add another 30 to 60 minutes for an international departure leaving at a peak time. It's better to arrive at the gate early and catch up on your reading, than to arrive on time and miss your flight (most carriers secure the plane doors five minutes before departure time!). Airport Information Confirm from the list below when you need to arrive at the airport and learn more about the products and services available there. All suggested airport arrival times are approximate, and can fluctuate based on weather, holidays, and busy travel periods. Dulles recommends arriving at the airport 2 1/2 to 3 hours before departure time for an international flight. I tend to leave myself 2 1/2 hours if my airline has allowed me to check in on-line, because then I only have to queue in the shorter, faster line to check my luggage and get my passport vetted. Cathay Pacific Announces Nonstop Service from Dulles International to Hong Kong To Launch Flights with Airbus A350-1000 on September 16, 2018 Content replaced with JS Before you head to the airport though, check your flight time. Check your flight status at IAD to determine if there are any changes in your itinerary. Once you’ve confirmed your IAD flight status, many airlines recommend you arrive at the airport at least two hours early for domestic flights and three hours prior to international flights. Washington D.C. Airport Parking & Transportation Information At the departure airport. When you arrive at the departure airport, you can check in for your flight in the following ways: Visit a self-service kiosk, where you can print your boarding pass and check baggage. See a United representative at the United check-in counter. Dulles can be a little confusing. Especially if you have to park your car, you want to give yourself extra time for that. My theory is always better to be safe than sorry. You don't want to miss your flight. If you get there early, then get something to eat, find your gate, and bring along a good book or magazine to help pass the time. For international flights, we encourage you to be at the gate no later than 30 minutes before your scheduled departure. If you are departing from the following airports, please be advised that you are required to be at the gate at a specific time before departure, as additional security or documentation checks may be required: All air travelers must arrive at the airport well in advance of their international flights. They'll need time to check baggage and might need to check in for the flight. In addition, all passengers must pass through the Transportation Security Administration screening checkpoint before receiving access to the airport's secure boarding area. When you arrive at the departure airport, you can check in for your flight in the following ways: Visit a self-service kiosk, where you can print your boarding pass and check baggage See a United representative at the United check-in counter Query: how early should i arrive for an international flight at iad",
"output": [
"You should arrive three hours prior to international flights at IAD."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f0f1f6e3853b4f74a0c0b5c646fa8d88",
"input": "So last yea in about October I took plan b because my boyfriend and I had unprotected sex. Got my period the following week and thought everything was okay then my period didn’t come for 3 months then it came back for 3 months and now I haven’t gotten it ever since its going to be three months. Quick Answer. Pregnant women can't have periods, but spotting around the time a period is due is not uncommon. Implantation bleeding occurs 10 to 14 days after conception, which is usually around the time a woman would expect to have her period. Plan B delivers a high amount of progesterone into your body, which essentially tricks your body to believe that you're pregnant and periods should be delayed. Although it usually should take a few days or weeks to have your period again, in some cases it can take months to regain your natural menstrual cycle. 2. Heavier Period With Plan B, the periods should be delayed. The periods should come within 7 days of the expected date. If the periods are delayed by more than 7 days, then please ask your girlfriend to consult her doctor and get serum HCG done. I hope it helps. A: Pregnant women can't have periods, but spotting around the time a period is due is not uncommon. Implantation bleeding occurs 10 to 14 days after conception, which is usually around the time a woman would expect to have her period. Continue Reading i took plan b july 10th, had my period a week early the 18th-22 or 23rd. My period usually comes between the 30th and the 4th it is now the 4th of September and no period. Should my period be returning to its normal cycle? Because if so then im fine but if its on the new cycle im like 2 weeks late. | Please take it as soon as possible because the sooner you take it, the better it works. plan B® can help prevent pregnancy if taken within 72 hours, and preferably within 12 hours, after a contraceptive accident or unprotected sex. It has been more than 72 hours since you had unprotected sex or a contraceptive accident. If your period is delayed more than a week, or if you have any other cause for concern, contact your healthcare professional. More than occasional use (more than once within a menstrual cycle or more than once a month) may impact your menstrual cycle. You may also experience a few days of spotting after taking plan B ®, which is normal. Im desperate. I had unprotected sex with bf 3 days before I was supposed to get my period. I was thinking the best option was to take the pill not to risk it. But my period is late now. I took the pill aroubd 12 hrs later. I was not near ovulation bc my period was supposed to arrive. Now im really nervouss 😭 how long can my period last to come? plan B® is not recommended if: 1 You have a confirmed or suspected pregnancy. 2 You are allergic to it, or to any of the components of its formulation. 3 You have abnormal vaginal bleeding. Query: how long does a plan b usually delay your period",
"output": [
"Usually, Plan B delays your period for 7 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3f92c7b0851a4da4b335c24964b1d070",
"input": "To answer the “How long does alcohol stay in your system” question, a normal, healthy liver can process roughly one drink per hour, so typically one drink will stay in your system for one hour. That means that if you finish a drink at 6:00, you will generally be in the clear by 7:00. Test results are generally available within 48 – 72 hours after your specimen is collected. DESCRIPTION: The EtG Urine Alcohol Test will detect ingestion of Ethyl Alcohol within the past 80 hours. EtG is a metabolite of Ethyl Alcohol, and can be detected for longer periods of time after ingestion than simply testing for Ethyl Alcohol. This test is not an under the influence test. The specimen will be screened, and if necessary will be tested by GC/MS. WHY DO I NEED AN ETHYL GLUCORONIDE URINE ALCOHOL TEST? Alcohol can be detected in urine, blood, saliva, sweat, breath, and even your hair follicles. So if you have one glass of wine (5 fluid ounces), your liver will be able to metabolize it in about one hour. But it you have two shots of vodka one after the other, it will take two hours to get sober again. How long does alcohol stay in your blood? The reality is that alcohol sticks around much longer than many people expect, and just a little bit left in your bloodstream is enough to trigger a positive in an alcohol test. So before you have a drink, understand how alcohol long alcohol stays in your system. It might save your life. How long does alcohol stay in your urine? About 80 hours. How long does alcohol stay in your blood? The average liver can process one drink per hour. How long does alcohol stay in your hair follicles? Approximately three months. How Long Does It Take to Sober Up? The BAC chart indicates how much alcohol it takes for a person to reach a given level. The ethanol test. While 92-98% of alcohol is metabolized in the liver, the remaining 2-8% leave the body through urine, sweat, and breath. Ethanol is beverage alcohol that can be detected in urine up to one or two hours after the alcohol has left the body. Ethanol urine tests. When it comes to ethanol urine tests, there’s going to be a bit of a lag as the body filters the alcohol from the blood into the bladder. It can take up to 2 hours for alcohol to show up in your urine. But once it’s there, a single ounce of pure alcohol is detectable for about 1.5 hours. The scale looks like this: 1 At .04, most people begin to feel relaxed. . 2 08 is the legal intoxication level in most states. 3 At .12, most people feel the need to vomit. 4 At .30, many people lose consciousness. 5 By .40, most people lose consciousness. 6 A BAC of .45 is usually fatal. WHAT IS AN ETG URINE ALCOHOL TEST? The EtG (Ethyl Glucoronide) Urine Alcohol Test checks for the presence of the Ethyl (drinking) Alcohol metabolite, Ethyl Glucuronide. The detection period is generally up to 80 hours after ingestion. WHAT IS THE PRICE OF AN ETG URINE ALCOHOL TEST? $69.00 This fact often prompts the “How long does alcohol stay in your system?” and “How long does alcohol stay in your blood?” questions. The answers to these questions depend on the form of alcohol testing, the type of alcohol consumed, and the rate of metabolism. Query: how long can a urine test test for alcohol",
"output": [
"A urine test can test for alcohol for 80 hours."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-81868bff44014ba78860a8c32aa2702f",
"input": "The patina itself is actually protecting the metal, preventing corrosion, which is why bronze is often associated with marine equipment. Now… patina happens naturally as moisture and air come in contact with a watch case. So, as long as the watch is not in a vacuum chamber, it should patina over time. But, this can take a while. How long is hard to say, days, weeks, months… it likely depends a lot on the specific climate you are in, proximity to salt water, exposure to acid rain (really) etc. Bronze (Cu0 + Sn0) can be oxidized, by the use of specific oxidizers. For example Nitric acid will form Cu2+ ions and Sn4+ ions. YES, Bronze (Cu0 + Sn0) can be oxidized, by the use of specific oxidizers. For example Nitric acid will form Cu2+ ions and Sn4+ ions. Oxidation is a process in which a chemical substance changes because of the addition of oxygen. Oxidation describes the loss of electrons by a molecule, atom or … ion. Eco-friendly and traditional methods to oxidize or patina brass and copper for jewelry or other uses. Bronze - Applications. 1 Various kinds of bronze are used in many different industrial applications. 2 Phosphor bronze is used for ships' propellers, musical instruments, and electrical contacts. Bronze and brass turn green due chemical reactions between the copper in those alloys and the atmosphere. The green is most often copper carbonate. This coloring is called a Patina or Verdigris and can be used intentionally (see the Statue of Li... Bronze - Technical information. 1 There are many different bronze alloys, but typically modern bronze is 88% copper and 12% tin. [14] 2 In the Bronze Age, two forms of bronze were commonly used: classic bronze, about 10% tin, was used in casting; and mild bronze, about 6% tin, was hammered from ingots to make sheets. Bladed weapons were mostly cast from classic bronze, while helmets and armor were hammered from mild bronze. Originally Answered: Why do bronze and brass turn green? The green layer you see is called tarnish and forms when brass is exposed to the carbon and sulfur dioxides in the air. It's basically a thin layer of corrosion that forms and it can only be eliminated with a thorough cleaning which requires you to remove some of the surface and patina of the piece. But it might be logical for it to be gold-plated, as it has to do with the sun. If one were to take something of bronze and coat it with a thin layer of gold somehow (maybe just by hammering thin strips of gold around it; I don't suppose any other techniques were around in the bronze age), would that stop the bronze corroding? Patina (/ ˈ p æ t ɪ n ə / or / p ə ˈ t iː n ə /) is a thin layer that variously forms on the surface of copper, bronze and similar metals (tarnish produced by oxidation or other chemical processes), or certain stones, and wooden furniture (sheen produced by age, wear, and polishing), or any similar acquired change of a surface through age and exposure. Query: how does bronze oxidize",
"output": [
"Bronze can be oxidized, by the use of specific oxidizers."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d8fe468297d34e7c8892481996b76e03",
"input": "Here’s what you need to know to predict how long you’ll need to wait for your refund. Tax refunds: an overview. Filling out your annual tax return involves calculating how much you owe the government in taxes based on your earnings and which tax deductions and credits you are eligible to receive. Refund Process. 1 Start checking status 24 – 48 hours after e-file – Once you have e-filed your tax return, you can check status using IRS Where’s My Refund? You will not be able to start checking the status of your tax refund for 4 weeks if you mail a paper tax return. Return Received Notice within 24 – 48 hours after e-file – The IRS Where’s My Refund tool will show “Return Received” status once they begin processing your tax return. Where's My Refund? - Check Your North Carolina State Tax Refund Status. If you efile a North Carolina state tax return, your refund may be processed in as little as a week. It may take 8 weeks to process your refund if you filed your NC return on paper. The state pays interest on any refunds which are not received within 45 days of the date the return was accepted, or April 15, whichever is later. If you opted for a paper check to be sent in the mail it could take as long as 6 to 8 weeks. The other possibility is that the state is almost bankrupt and has suspended income tax refunds, in which case you might wait forever. Check with the state and see if refunds have been put on hold. Michigan State Tax refunds that do not need additional processing time should be refunded in 2 weeks for electronically filed returns. It should take up to 6 weeks for a p…aper filed return once it is received. Similar efforts to delay refunds until at least late February last year saved the state from paying about $5 million in fraudulent refunds, Beard said in the statement. This year, state tax agencies are partnering with the IRS and tax preparation companies to share information about suspicious tax returns in an effort to be better about catching tax fraud as it happens. Arizona state tax refund – Arizona e-filers can expect their refunds in 15 days and paper filers in 12 weeks. If you’re curious about the status of your refund, head over to the Department of Revenue’s online tool. For returns filed prior to March 1, 2016, the SCDOR expects to issue refunds within two to three weeks of March 1, 2016. For returns filed on or after March 1, 2016, refunds are expected to be issued within two to three weeks of the date a return is received.. Delayed refunds are just one of the tools the Department of Revenue is using to fight tax refund fraud. In order to view status information, you will be prompted to enter the first social security number listed on your tax return along with the exact amount of your refund shown on line 34 of Form D-400, Individual Income Tax Return. You can also call our toll-free refund inquiry line at 1-877-252-4052, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. District of Columbia tax refund – Residents of the nation’s capital can go online to check the status of their not-quite-a-state refund. Georgia state tax refund – Georgia tax refunds typically take 6 days for e-filers and 8-12 weeks for paper filers. You can check the status of your Georgia state tax refund here. Hawaii state refund – The Aloha State’s a little slower than others, as refunds are issued within 8 weeks of filing. Query: how long is it taking to get nc tax refunds this year",
"output": [
"It may take 8 weeks to process your refund if you filed your NC return on paper."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-fd2be72828d74378a828bd266f8b7503",
"input": "Know when you need to transfer ownership After you buy or get a vehicle as a gift, you have 15 days to transfer the ownership into your name. If you don't transfer within 15 days you'll have to pay penalties: $50 on the 16th day, $2 per day after the 16th day, up to $125. If you buy from a WA state dealer, they will take care of the transfer. If you buy from an out-of-state dealer, you may need to take care of the transfer. Find out more about buying from a WA dealer. To transfer ownership. 1 the owner can use the transferable registration and a bill of sale. 2 make sure the registration document is marked transferable on the front. 3 the seller whose name appears on the transferable registration must sign the back. If you have a title, transfer ownership to the buyer on the reverse side. Provide a bill of sale (Report of Sale or Transfer of a Non-Titled Motor Vehicle (TDMV 22A) and a properly filled out Verification of Vehicle Identification (TDMV 19A ). Transfers Frequently Asked Questions Registered dogs. Acquired dog from owner; Acquired dog from third party; Acquired dog from deceased; Dog not yet registered. Acquired from litter owner; Acquired from third party; Obtaining blank transfers; Fee schedule; I lost my dog's registration application that the litter owner gave me. How do I obtain another one? Ownership changes happen for a variety of reasons, including: 1 A member decides to leave the company. 2 The existing members want to bring in a new member. 3 A member dies, becomes disabled or divorces. 4 You decide sell the entire business. If your operating agreement does not include a buy-sell agreement, you should check your state statutes for guidance on how to transfer membership interests. You may be able to negotiate a buy-sell agreement or a written agreement to transfer ownership. In some states, you may have to dissolve the company if your operating agreement does not provide for ownership transfers. Since these actions can have long-term consequences for your business, it’s wise to consult with a lawyer. There are some state differences regarding transfer of after-acquired title. Montana, Idaho, and Alaska allow transfer of after-acquired title using a Quitclaim Deed. In most states, a Quitclaim deed only transfers the interest owned by the seller at the time they executed the deed. Usually, any interest in the property acquired after the signing of the Quitclaim Deed does not pass to the buyer. The transfer should take place within 30 days of transfer of ownership. You should contact the vehicle owner and ensure that the transfer has been completed. All remaining underlying warranties should also be transferred to the new owner. Included are tips from AOPA experts on avoiding legal entanglements and making the whole sales process run smoothly. All of this information used as a checklist is the secret to a successful sale. The checklist includes logical sections such as the bill of sale, the moment of fund transfer, aircraft transfer, registration, and general information. These sections each include the necessary steps for that section in checklist format. Changing Vehicle Ownership - Getting a Car Title Transferred with the DMV. 1 Selling or buying a car. 2 Transfer to family. 3 Inheriting a vehicle. 4 Paying off a loan. 5 Gifting or donating a vehicle. 6 Making name corrections. Query: how long do i have to transfer ownership",
"output": [
"when you need to transfer ownership after you buy or get a vehicle as a gift, you have 15 days to transfer the ownership to your name."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-95f9155c63ab466e8774e85ffd12452f",
"input": "There is very little research on just how long the body of a brain-dead person can be maintained. The discussion of brain death dates back to the 1950s in France with six patients who were kept alive for between two and 26 days without blood flow to the brain. This generated the idea that perhaps there's a second way to die, because these patients will eventually die, Greene-Chandos said. ANSWER: For Each Minute Your Brain Does Not Receive Oxygen, Your Chances Of Living Gets Reduced So A persons brain can live for about 7 Minutes without oxygen Edit Share to: Originally Answered: How long can a person live without a heartbeat? The heartbeat is the sound the heart valves' closing makes as the heart contracts and pushes oxygenated blood out to the aorta to supply oxygen to the body and deoxygenated blood to the pulmonary artery into the lungs to pick up more oxygen. The brain can survive for 4 minutes without oxygen, then brain cells start dying. So if there is no heartbeat, the heart is not contracting, the blood is not circulating through the body, and there is no oxygen supply. Other tissues and organs can live longer without oxygen. For example an arm or leg can survive up to 6 hours. That is why if there is a deep cut or wound, a tourniquet can be applied to stop the flow of blood to a limb for several hours if needed. He has been in a coma for 2 days and is on a life support machine. The only sign of any brain activity so far is that he is taking some independent breaths. How long can someone go without oxygen before there is brain damage ? If someone has been without oxygen for 15 minutes is there any hope that they can wake from a coma without any brain damage. A: Lack of oxygen in the brain will cause permanent brain damage in as little as four minutes. Another four to six minutes without the brain receiving blood will result in increased brain damage, coma and then death. hi my mum fell down the stairs and was pronouncd dead but was brought back by paramedics, she is now on critical care unit, she was without oxygen to the brain for around 10 mins, have been told today she has swollen brain, but still has not come round after drugs to induce the coma thursday, am just hoping and praying she comes round. How long can a brain last without oxygen - How long can the brain go without oxygen before damage occurs? About 4 hours. From multiple studies with stroke, permanent brain damage occurs after three hours of interruption of blood supply. So are there any alternatives to life without air? Well, yes. You can try bending the rules a little by breathing a liquid instead. Not pure liquid oxygen: at -200C, it would turn you into a human popsicle from the inside out and shatter your lungs the moment you tried to breathe. Instead, fluids that are rich in dissolved oxygen. How long can a person go without oxygen before he or she is brain dead? A: A person can only go 3 to 4 minutes without oxygen before they areconsidered brain dead. After 5-6 minutes more without oxygen, a person dies. Full Answer > Depending on circumstances, brains can live for various lengths of time w o oxygen 27 mar 2016in general, the brain withstand up to three six minutes without go half an hour and still survive in situations like this. 13 jun 2016 indeed, your brain can be injured even when nothing comes into contact with your head. 11 jan 2016 how does the brain get the oxygen it needs to surv Query: how long can you live without oxygen to brain",
"output": [
"A persons brain can live for about 7 Minutes without oxygen."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b3352f4cd1f64af999b7d76b99b6316c",
"input": "There are real reasons why the IRS can keep your money and you should know every one of them. slide 1 of 5. The tax filing season can be filled with stress and anticipation. For some people, that tax refund helps to pay bills or plan once a year family vacations. IRS processing for injured spouse…its on the IRS website and i called and confirmed…i file jan 23 and accepted the 24th…its now 4/4/12 and wheres my refund just updated my date to be mailed out on 4/6. Does anyone know how long does it take for the state tax refund to come, if you mailed in your tax return. Unpaid Back Taxes. Some taxpayers file their federal taxes and never pay the amount owed to the government. When the taxpayer files and is due a tax refund, the IRS will keep all or a portion of that tax refund to cover the previous year's taxes. If the taxes owed are less than the refund for the current year, the taxpayer will receive a reduced refund. slide 5 of 5. Any Unpaid Federal or Government Debt The student loan repayment program, child support program and unpaid back taxes are the three top reasons the IRS will keep a taxpayers refund check. However, this list is not all inclusive. Any unpaid Federal or governmental debt accrued before the tax refund may be paid off with the tax refund without prior notice to the taxpayer. When the check is supposed to be in the mail and a letter of refund seizure from the IRS is the only thing to show up, the time has come to look back and find out what government debt was left unpaid. slide 2 of 5. The Student Loan Repayment Program The Federal student loan program is directly linked to the IRS. If, at any time, the student loans you borrowed for college fall into default, the IRS has every legal right to take your income tax refunds until the time when all monies owed are paid in full. IRS TAX TIP 2001-48. REFUNDS -- HOW LONG SHOULD THEY TAKE? WASHINGTON – Are you expecting a tax refund from the IRS this year? If you file a complete and accurate paper tax return, your refund should be issued. in about six to eight weeks from the date IRS receives your return. If you file. your return electronically, your refund should be issued in less than three weeks, even faster when you choose direct deposit. Comments. 1 On June 4, I called irs again, and was told I should expect refund in another week no later than the 13th, that everything was ok and approved, they were just finalizing. On June 16 I called as there was no dd. 2 Mirmz77 I have had the same issue. I called them and they told me i have to answer some security questions. By. According to the IRS, they will issue “most refunds in less than 21 days”. The IRS is not going to release a tax refund table like they have in the past. However, as a rough guide, we are presenting our estimate and the 2013 table for reference. return, fill in the direct deposit information in the Refund section of the tax form. Direct deposit is also available if you e-file your return. If it has been at least four weeks since you filed your return, you can check on the status of your refund by calling the IRS TeleTax System at 1-800-829-4477. When you call you will need to provide the first Social Security number shown on the return, your filing status, and the amount of the refund. If the IRS has processed your return, the system will tell you the date your refund will be sent. IRS TAX TIP 2001-48 REFUNDS -- HOW LONG SHOULD THEY TAKE? WASHINGTON – Are you expecting a tax refund from the IRS this year? If you file a complete and accurate paper tax return, your refund should be issued in about six to eight weeks from the date IRS receives your return. If you file your return electronically, your refund should be issued in less than three weeks, may have made math errors that require extra time for the IRS to correct. For more information on how long it may take the IRS to process your. federal tax refund, visit the Taxpayer Help and Education section of the IRS Web. site at: http://www.irs.gov/plain/tax_edu/teletax/tc150.html. Query: how long can irs take back a refund",
"output": [
"It takes six to eight weeks IRS take back a refund."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-57ae4d2cc59c4d9391e5dde72228b210",
"input": "This material has been used ever since ancient times and has formed all over the world. Thanks to these stones, building materials of great quality can be formed, and they are mainly used as they are lightweight yet strong. Other buildings made out of oolitic limestone are The British Museum and St. Paul’s Cathedral. Oolitic limestone was used to build the Pentagon as well as other buildings around the world, such as Buckingham Palace and the Empire State Building. Scientists have discovered that oolitic limestone is actually a material which was made out of microbes that existed 200 million years ago, at the time of the Jurassic era when dinosaurs were still present on the Earth. OOLITIC LIMESTONE. Oolitic limestone is a carbonate rock made up mostly of ooliths (or ooids) which are sand-sized carbonate particles that have concentric rings of CaCO 3. These rings are formed around grains of sand or shell fragments that were rolled around on the shallow sea floor, gathering layer after layer of limestone. How did oolitic limestone form? Previously, scientists thought that the ooids formed from grains rolled on the seafloor and then accumulated layers of sediment. “Oolitic limestone is a carbonate rock made up mostly of ooliths (or ooids) which are sand-sized carbonate particles that have concentric rings of CaCO3. These rings are formed around grains of sand or shell fragments that were rolled around on the shallow sea floor, gathering layer after layer of limestone,” University College London gave an explanation on its website. Limestone is by definition a rock that contains at least 50% calcium carbonate in the form of calcite by weight. All limestones contain at least a few percent other materials. These can be small particles of quartz, feldspar, clay minerals, pyrite, siderite, and other minerals. Limestone is a sedimentary rock composed primarily of calcium carbonate (CaCO 3) in the form of the mineral calcite. It most commonly forms in clear, warm, shallow marine waters. It is usually an organic sedimentary rock that forms from the accumulation of shell, coral, algal, and fecal debris. Limestone is a sedimentary rock comprising at least 80% calcium carbonate (CaCO3). Limestones can be deposited in both marine and fresh water environments, the former being more common, and can take many forms such as those described below. Chalk is a pure, soft, well-jointed limestone composed primarily of the calcareous remains of micro-organisms called coccoliths and foraminifera. Pure white chalk contains more than 90% CaCO3 and is usually found in thick beds. In Britain it stretches from Yorkshire down to the famous cliffs of Dover. oolitic limestone Oolitic limestone is a carbonate rock made up mostly of ooliths (or ooids) which are sand-sized carbonate particles that have concentric rings of CaCO 3. These rings are formed around grains of sand or shell fragments that were rolled around on the shallow sea floor, gathering layer after layer of limestone. Portland limestone is an example of an oolitic limestone. This limestone formed in a shallow sea, rather like the modern Bahamas, near the end of the Jurassic period (~135 million years ago). The rock has an even structure rather like cod roe and it can therefore be cut or sculpted in any direction. Oolitic Limestone: A limestone composed mainly of calcium carbonate oolites, small spheres formed by the concentric precipitation of calcium carbonate on a sand grain or shell fragment. Travertine: A limestone that forms by evaporative precipitation, often in a cave, to produce formations such as stalactites, stalagmites, and flowstone. Query: how is oolitic limestone formed",
"output": [
"Oolitic limestone is actually a material which was made out of microbes that existed 200 million years ago."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-dbba0d70f1e54f48bc3817b0965d308b",
"input": "Quick Answer. A cube has six faces, 12 edges and eight vertices. Each face of a cube is an identical square, and every edge has an identical length, which is equal to the length of the sides of the faces. Continue Reading. A cube has 6 faces (all square faces), 8 vertices and 12 edges. A cube has 6 faces, 8 vertices, and 12 edges. A cube is a solid with 4 faces on the sides, one on the top and bottom, so 6 all together. 12 edges, 6 faces, 8 vertices. edges=12 vertices=8 faces=6. 8 vertices,12 edges,and 6 faces. The cube have:. -- six (6) faces. A cube is a three dimensional shape that features all right angles and a height, width and depth that are all equal. 1 A cube has 6 square faces. 2 A cube has 8 points (vertices). 3 A cube has 12 edges. 4 Things that are shaped like a cube are often referred to as ‘cubic’. A cube has: 8 vertices (or corners)6 faces,12 edges Cube means a 3 dimensional figure. Its faces are in square shape. Cube has 6 square faces, attached by one edge of a …square with another edge of another square . Two types of cubes are there one is solid cube and other is hollow cube. Let's say, we have n-dimensional cube (I assume, that length of edge is 1, but it can be some a, where a∈R [1]). Here, corner of this cube looks like this: (x1,x2,…,xn). For every xi there are 2 possibilities: xi=0 or xi=1 (xi=a in general). So, this cube has 2n corners. How many corners does it have, how many edges? PRESENTER Well, corners we could describe, I suppose, as being the pointy bits on the shape. It's where two lines meet. Vertices, Edges and Faces. A vertex is a corner. An edge is a line segment that joins two vertices. A face is an individual surface. Let us look more closely at each of those: Vertices . A vertex (plural: vertices) is a point where two or more lines meet. It is a Corner. This tetrahedron has 4 vertices. A cube with side length 1 unit, called a “unit cube,” is said to have “one cubic unit” of volume, and can be used to measure volume. b. A solid figure which can be packed without gaps or overlaps using n unit cubes is said to. have a volume of n cubic units. 5.MD.4 Measure volumes by counting unit cubes, using cubic cm, cubic in., cubic ft., and improvised. units. A Cube has: Edges are not corners it is the vertices which are corners. So there are 12 edges, 6 faces and 8 vertices (corners) 12 edges (Corners) 6 faces. 8 vertices. Vertices, Edges and Faces. A vertex is a corner. An edge is a line segment that joins two vertices. A face is an individual surface. Let us look more closely at each of those: A vertex (plural: vertices) is a point where two or more lines meet. It is a Corner. This tetrahedron has 4 vertices. Query: how made corners does a cube have",
"output": [
"A cube has 12 edges."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-67a560415650493d9d900098c2f64dea",
"input": "Totally depends. I've had wisdom teeth out twice (the first time he wanted to do all of them instead of just the side that was impacted, but like an idiot I told him I didn't believe in preventive surgery). I was back at work the next day, albeit a bit groggy and uncomfortable. For instance, Dr. Sue recommends that you wait at least 24 hours after wisdom teeth removal to allow full recovery before you do any type of exercise. The gum area and sockets where the teeth were extracted may bleed for many hours after a surgery, and it is important to allow full recovery. What exercise is best? #4 Impacted wisdom teeth #4 If you took out impacted wisdom teeth, you would definitely need more time to recover as your gum would have suffered from more bruises and cuts. #5 Jaw adjustment #5 After a few days have passed, move your jaw around. If you feel slight discomfort or pain around the wisdom teeth area, you should wait until the discomfort goes away. Don't brush your teeth, rinse your mouth, spit or use mouthwash during the first 24 hours after surgery. Typically you'll be told to resume brushing your teeth after the first 24 hours. Be particularly gentle near the surgical wound when brushing and gently rinse your mouth with warm salt water every two hours and after meals for a week. You may have an impacted tooth trapped in the jawbone or a tooth that is poorly positioned and damaging neighboring teeth. It is especially common to have these types of problems with growing wisdom teeth. Oral surgery is also necessary for the placement of dental implants and for a few types of gum treatments. After surgery, it is normal for the area to be tender for the first few days but, in most cases, over-the-counter pain relief is enough to ease any discomfort. It's usually recommended that you take a day or two off work after having a wisdom tooth removed. You can drive immediately after the procedure if local anaesthetic was used, but you should avoid driving for at least 24 hours if a sedative was used, or 48 hours if the procedure was carried out under general anaesthetic. Returning to normal Wisdom Teeth Removal Recovery Tips to Heal Quickly An ice pack is just one of the things you'll need to heal after getting a wisdom tooth removed. (@liveostockimages) How to Recover after Wisdom Teeth Surgery Three Parts: Foods to Eat and Avoid Making Preparations Before Your Surgery Taking Care of Yourself After Surgery Community Q&A Most people between the ages of 17 and 24 begin to grow wisdom teeth. Five Things that are Considered Normal after Wisdom Teeth Removal Surgery Traces of blood in the saliva Small traces of blood and blood clots in the saliva are normal for up to 2-3 days post the wisdom teeth removal in Sydney. It takes to recover after wisdom teeth removal generally three to four days, although it can be as long as two weeks. However, pain should be lessening by the second day. But it varies from person to person, and also depends on how easy or difficult the tooth removal procedure was. Query: how long are you out of work after wisdom teeth surgery",
"output": [
"You are out of work for three to four days or as long as two weeks after wisdom teeth surgery."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-97cc2468a66d4c8499df26c7df8062d1",
"input": "After a long walk or an intense workout, your muscles have expended their available energy stores and need carbohydrates and protein to help them replenish and rebuild. Even if you are walking only to burn off calories, if you have put in a long session of endurance walking of two hours or more you should have a recovery drink or snack. Medical experts have found that if you walk just 100 steps after you eat your dinner – or any other meal – and you’ll notice a huge improvement in your overall wellbeing. Walking and Digestion. If you feel stuffed after you eat a meal, then get to walking. Digestion is the process of breaking down the food that you have consumed. It is put into action as soon as you finish eating and it can be revved up by walking. How long after eating should I wait to do my mile walk? Q: How long after eating should I wait to do my mile walk? Today I waited 30 minutes, did my mile, took my sugar after, and was high at 197. Waiting 30-60 minutes after eating before taking a walk works well for most people with diabetes. Posted 08 May 2009 - 12:45 PM. A potty walk or a stroll, even if long, doesn't count as strenuous exercise. You can take your dog for a potty walk or gentle stroll before/after eating. A power walk counts as strenuous exercise. You can take your dog for strenuous exercise 2 hours after eating. My rule for feeding after exercise is to wait until the dog is recovered -- no longer panting, etc. Really strenuous exercise like a hard run, the 2-hour rule is a good one. Your body needs the energy to properly digest food. So to get the most out of the nutrients you consume and your workout, eat before exercising or 30 mins after fruit, two hours after veggies, three hours after grains four hours after meats and poultry. In the second phase, 30 days after the first phase, participants were told to take a 10-minute walk no later than five minutes after each meal. During both phases, blood sugar was monitored. Walking after meals lowered blood sugar levels more effectively among the participants, the study found. A slow five minute walk will not hurt her. But, definitely NO overexertion, no running, no jogging, no jumping... nothing more than a short/calm walk after eating, unless you wait for at least 2-3 hours after she feeds, before doing so. As a rule, don't feed for an hour after coming in from exercise (and that includes a long car journey, to allow the system to settle down), and leave it 2 hours after feeding before exercising. A study published today in Diabetes Care found that three short walks each day after meals were as effective at reducing blood sugar over 24 hours as a single 45-minute walk at the same moderate pace. Even better, taking an evening constitutional was found to be much more effective at lowering blood sugar following supper. Factors to Consider When Eating Before a Walk. The timing and size of your meals before a walking workout makes a difference. If you’re consuming a large meal, wait for about three to four hours before walking. If you consume a small meal, wait between two and three hours before you set off. However, after a small snack, you should be able to go walking within less than an hour. Keep in mind that these ranges are general and can vary from person to person. Your best option is to try various time periods to see which one works best for you. Possible Effects of Eating Before a Walk The researchers observed that the evening post-meal walk was the most effective in lowering blood sugar levels for a full 24 hours. The typical exaggerated rise in blood sugar after supper—which often lasts well into the night and early morning—was curbed significantly as soon as the participants started to walk on the treadmill, the study authors said. Query: how long after eating to walk",
"output": [
"Wait for about three to four hours before walking if you’re consuming a large meal, two and three hours if you consume a small meal and less than an hour after a small snack."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-58aabe215ddc44639489f07db0bf8b67",
"input": "How long does a judgment stay on your credit report and does the time limit start from the day it is filed or from the day it's paid off? A judgment will remain on a credit report for the full 10 years. The judgment clock will run for a lot longer than the credit-reporting clock. Here’s what I mean: In general, judgments remain enforceable for 10 years (in some states, such as my creditor-friendly state of Rhode Island, it’s 20 years) from the date entered or filed with the courts. Mostly, consumers who ask this question are concerned about how negative information like bankruptcies, judgments, and late payments affects their credit history and score. Luckily, there are set time frames for how long negative information remains on a credit report. In general, negative information more than seven years old from the date of last activity (ten years for bankruptcies) must be removed from your file. We’ve already covered how long collection accounts stay on your credit report and we’ll get to judgments in a minute. How Long Does a Tax Lien Stay On Your Credit Reports? If you fail to pay your taxes, the government could file a tax lien, which shows current and future creditors that the government has a right to your property until you have paid or otherwise gotten rid of the lien. Even though you paid the judgment, the judgment will be listed on your credit report for 7 years after the filing of the judgment. The credit report should include the $0 balance. Part 2 In CA a judgment can remain on your credit report as long as enforceable. Enforceable for 10 tears. Can be renewed indefinitely. Can remain of credit report forever. Experian appears to be the only credit reporting agency that publicizes its policy to not report vacated judgments on its consumer credit reports. Having your judgment set aside or vacated is the only way to possibly have it removed from your credit reports sooner than the “seven years from date filed” date. Judgments will stay on your credit report in the public records section for up to 10 years. The information provided herein is general information only and not legal advice. The information provided herein does not create an attorney client relationship and is not a substitute for having a consultation with an attorney. If the statute of limitations on judgments is longer than 7 years in your state, then that time frame is how long the judgment can remain on your credit report. There are some exceptions to the rules above: New York Residents. A paid judgment can remain on your credit report for no longer than 5 years. So, 7 years from the date of entry, or longer, if your state has legislation which allows it report longer. Here is input from others: A judgment remains on a consumer's credit report for 7 years from the date of entry, or until the governing statute of limitations has expired, whichever is longer. This time period applies to each legal action. Under certain circumstances and certain state's laws, judgments can be renewed. Query: how long does judgment stay on credit report",
"output": [
"The judgment stays for 7 years on credit report."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-6a561a6e4f524aec947264edbc7fd3d8",
"input": "Here’s how your body reacts to fear. Courtesy of Oprah’s “O” Magazine. The moment you recognize a threat, your amygdala -an almond-shaped structure in your brain - directs a cascade of changes in your body so you can respond appropriately. Basically, it tells your body “Something scary’s happening! With a fever, the hypothalamus has reset the body's internal thermostat. Hyperthermia is a symptom that sets in when the body isn't able to maintain temperature properly -- it literally overheats. Hyperthermia can be serious. If the body's temperature rises too high, your organs can suffer damage. Generally, hyperthermia isn't a disease. It's a side effect of another problem, just like itching is a side effect of an allergic reaction to poison ivy. Once the bacteria that causes typhoid fever is consumed, it travels from the digestive system into the blood. As the bacteria travel through the body, Once the bacteria that causes typhoid fever is consumed, it travels from the digestive system into the blood. As the bacteria travel through the body, symptoms like high fever, headache, and overall fatigue can develop. The digestive system is also affected by the bacteria, which leads to stomach pain, diarrhea or constipation, and weight loss. The hypothalamus works with other parts of the body's temperature-regulating system, such as the skin, sweat glands and blood vessels — the vents, condensers and heat ducts of your body's heating and cooling system. The middle layer of the skin, or dermis, stores most of the body's water. The life-threatening disease typhoid fever results from the ongoing battle between the bacterial pathogen Salmonella and the immune cells of the body. A research group has now uncovered how the typhoid pathogen repeatedly manages to evade the host’s immune system. How Does Illness Cause Fever? Bacteria and viruses themselves, as well as toxins (poisonous waste products) produced by some bacteria, cause fever. In some cases, they work directly on the brain to raise the thermostat. 1 Correct! The clearing and settlement of rainforests has exposed woodcutters, farmers, and ecotourists to new vector-borne diseases. 2 Sorry, that’s incorrect. The clearing and settlement of tropical rainforests has exposed woodcutters, farmers, and ecotourists to new vector-borne diseases. A radiation dose as low as 0.35 Gy could feel a bit like you have the flu—expect nausea and vomiting, headaches, fatigue, and fever. If the body is exposed to a higher dose, somewhere between 1-4 Gy, blood cells begin to die. Fever, also known as pyrexia and febrile response,[6] is defined as having a temperature above the normal range due to an increase in the body's temperature set-point.[4][5] There is not a single agreed-upon upper limit for normal temperature with sources using values between 37.5 and 38.3 °C (99.5 and 100.9 °F).[6][7] The increase in set-point ... It's very important to understand that a fever is a normal response of the body to foreign invaders like bacteria and viruses. The body recognizes a foreign invader and the brain acts to increase body temperature to make things unsuitable for the foreign invader. Most bacteria can only tolerate a certain temperature range and once outside of it, do not survive. Query: how does your body react with a fever",
"output": [
"It's very important to understand that a fever is a normal response of the body to foreign invaders like bacteria and viruses. The body recognizes a foreign invader and the brain acts to increase body temperature to make things unsuitable for the foreign invade"
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f416f5e832c343b18f8aed3c7d7fd372",
"input": "it makes tour hair darker and dull if you over use it, all my clients who use it more than once a week end up with a gross blonde as it contains color and it builds up Jan 09, 2013 Selen S. The more I use it the more purple gets deposited in my hair (that's what I want) so it made my hair violet/silver. As soon as I use a regular shampoo all the purple comes out. Log in or join now to add a comment. Toning with Purple Shampoo. 1 FINALLY, a question! It was sent by a facebook friend: 2 First I would like to say that I am a big fan of toning shampoos/conditioners! Its a great way to keep your hair color refreshed between your color appointments. The best way to avoid this, can be controlled by the amount you put in. When using the purple shampoo, I always tell clients to cocktail the purple with your regular shampoo, 50/50, and leave it on for 1-3 minutes and rinse, (and condition as normal Now, if you have left this toner on to long and your your rockin ' the Easter egg hair color (lol JK), it will come out in time, but there is a trick to getting it out faster. One way would be do buy a clarifying shampoo, which will help strip all product, oils and cuticle stains from the hair. When using the purple shampoo, I always tell clients to cocktail the purple with your regular shampoo, 50/50, and leave it on for 1-3 minutes and rinse, (and condition as normal). This was you can determine if you need more purple. If you need more purple, then try 2/3 purple and 1/3 regular, and so on. Same with the amount of time its left on. However I would not put that shampoo and leave it on more then about 4-5 minutes. The more yellow (warm, goldish) blond, the longer you'll probably leave it on. – If you have certain areas of your hair that are yellow, just add the purple shampoo to those areas. If you have streaks of yellow mixed in with the white, neutral or ashy ones, beware… the non-yellow ones will pick up the pigment as well and you can have more obvious golden tones against super ashy ones… -___- Blech. It's best to use it once a week OR if you're noticing brassy hair. So it can work properly, it needs to have a chance to actually penetrate the hair. If its rinsed out right away, it doesn't have a chance to fully work. I use mine once a week or else it can leave a grayish/purple tinge to my hair. When I apply it, I let it sit in my hair for about 2 minutes then rinse. My hair Stylist told me if you rinse it out right away it's kind of pointless. Jan 09, 2013. Now, if you have left this toner on to long and your your rockin' the Easter egg hair color (lol JK), it will come out in time, but there is a trick to getting it out faster. One way would be do buy a clarifying shampoo, which will help strip all product, oils and cuticle stains from the hair. Query: how long should you leave purple shampoo in your hair",
"output": [
"You should leave purple shampoo for 1-3 minute in your hair."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-6102075a4fdc485bb21bd820377184f2",
"input": "The Universe Today readers are always asking great questions. ”How long is a day on Jupiter?”, is one of them. A day on Jupiter, also known as the sidereal rotation period, lasts 9.92496 hours. Jupiter is the fastest rotating body in our Solar System. Determining the length of a day on Jupiter was very difficult, because, unlike the terrestrial planets, it does not have surface features that scientists could use to determine its rotational speed. How long is a day on other planets by Colm Byrne on January 3, 2013 When we think of a day on Earth we measure it in a period of 24 hours, actually it takes 23 hours and 56 minutes and 4 seconds to rotate on it’s axis. So, if we measure a day on each planet compared to Earth it kind of makes it easier. The Jovian day is 9.925 Earth hours in length The Jovian year is 11.862 Earth years in length Earth overtakes Jupiter every 398.9 days as it orbits the Sun, a duration called the synodic period. As it does so, Jupiter appears to undergo retrograde motion with respect to the background stars. NASA’s Ask an Astronomer also has an answer for the question, “how long is a day on Jupiter?” And a cool video of Jupiter’s rotation. We’ve also recorded an entire show just on Jupiter for Astronomy Cast. Listen to it here, Episode 56: Jupiter, and Episode 57: Jupiter’s Moons. Best Answer: A Jupiter day is 0.41354 as long as our day or about 10 hours. The year is 4332.71 earth days long or about 12 earth years. A month is determined by the revolution of our moon around the earth. Jupiter has many moons so it does not have months like we do. The Universe Today readers are always asking great questions. ”How long is a day on Jupiter?”, is one of them. A day on Jupiter, also known as the sidereal rotation period, lasts 9.92496 hours. Jupiter is the fastest rotating body in our Solar System. Determining the length of a day on Jupiter was very difficult, […] How Long Is A Day On Saturn? Date: May 3, 2006 Source: Particle Physics & Astronomy Research Council Summary: Measuring the rotation period of a rocky planet like the Earth is easy, but similar measurements for planets made of gas, such as Saturn, pose problems. Researchers from JPL, Imperial College London and UCLA present new results in this week's Nature (4th May 2006) that may solve the mystery. Using the magnetometer instrument on Cassini, they have found a clear period in the magnetic field of the planet that they believe indicates a day of 10 hours and 47 minutes. How long is a day on other planets. by Colm Byrne on January 3, 2013. When we think of a day on Earth we measure it in a period of 24 hours, actually it takes 23 hours and 56 minutes and 4 seconds to rotate on it’s axis. So, if we measure a day on each planet compared to Earth it kind of makes it easier. Some of the planets rotate and spin slow and some rotate and spin fast so you can see a big difference as they orbit the Sun in our solar system. Mercury – 58 days and 15 hours. Venus – 243 Earth days. Earth – 23 hours and 56 minutes This is a whole 8 minutes slower than NASA Voyager results from the early 1980s, and slower than previous estimates from another Cassini instrument. The magnetometer results provide the best estimate of the Saturn day to date, because it can see deep inside Saturn. Planets rotate around their spin axes as they orbit about the Sun. Rocky planets like the Earth and Mars have rotation periods that remain quite constant and are easy to measure because we can see the surfaces rotate. Mercury – 58 days and 15 hours. Venus – 243 Earth days. Earth – 23 hours and 56 minutes. Mars – 24 hours 39 minutes and 35 seconds. Jupiter – 9.9 Earth hours. Saturn – 10 hours 39 minutes and 24 seconds. Uranus – 17 hours 14 minutes and 24 seconds. Neptune – 16 hours 6 minutes and 36 seconds. Pluto – 6.39 Earth days Query: how long is a day on jupiter in earth days",
"output": [
"Jupiter is 9.9 Earth hours."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-981d4849f25c4615b9595aee6b46bc29",
"input": "Whether it’s a late car payment, credit card payment, or mortgage payment, a recent late payment can cause as much as a 90-110 point drop on your FICO score. As time goes on, the late payment will affect your credit score less and less until it drops off. However, potential creditors can still see that history as long as it’s listed on your report. Late payments appear on your credit report as either being 30, 60, 90, or 120-plus days late. Each of these degrees of delinquency affects your credit score differently. The later you are, the more damage it does to your credit score. Being unreliable with payments is a red flag to financial institutions, and several things can occur when you pay late. 1 You’ll usually be charged a late fee. 2 Your interest rates may rise. 3 It may end up on your credit report. 4 It might decrease your credit score. Q: If I choose to stop paying a revolving line of credit, how long will the unpaid debt remain on my credit report? A: Most accounts will stay on your credit report for seven years. However, you should make sure that you settle the account properly with your creditor. Stopping payment on your account may have a negative effect on your credit score. Written by Equifax Experts on July 17, 2012. How long does a late payment stay on my credit report? Questions like this and others related to the consequences of negative information on your credit report are some of the most frequently asked questions on the blog and on Equifax.com. Here are the answers to some of these questions, and in the coming weeks we’ll answer more of them for you. · just now. 1 If you've been a good customer, a lender might agree to simply erase that one late payment from your credit history. You usually have to make the request in writing, and your chances for a goodwill adjustment improve the better your record with the company (and the better your credit in general). You may have to pay a late fee if you’re a couple days late, but the late payment won’t go on your credit reports and stay there for seven years, as a more serious slip-up would. The three major credit bureaus – Experian, TransUnion and Equifax – allow creditors to report payments that are 30, 60 or 90 days late. After all, negative information like late payments can stay on your credit reports for up to seven years, so the first sign of a late payment on your credit reports signals years of impending credit doom, right? Actually, that isn’t always the case. How Are Late Payments Affecting Your Score? Comments (256) 1 Hi Ryan, I have a Macy’s card with went 30-days past and it was reported. 2 Wells fARGO WILL NEVER HELP YOU IN ANY WAY! Reply. Wells Fargo is the worst bank right behind Chase. 3 After applying for a FASFA I was denied at the very last step because of a student loan I hadn’t paid on for quite sometime. You may have to pay a late fee if you’re a couple days late, but the late payment won’t go on your credit reports and stay there for seven years, as a more serious slip-up would. The 30-Day Time Frame Some credit card issuers can, however, increase your rate on other credit products you have with that company. 1 Your Credit Score and 6 Other Reasons to Pay Your Credit Card On Time. 2 8 Little Ways to Remember to Make Your Credit Card Payment. 3 What to Do If You Can't Make Your Minimum Payments. Query: how long before a late payment drops",
"output": [
"A late payment drops either being 30, 60, 90, or 120-plus days late."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1a6c9fa0bde746b591489a56a4175504",
"input": "Absolute Abstinence (Alcoholics Anonymous) AA: Area of Action: AA: Achievement Age: AA: Avian Adventures (bird products) AA: Acronym Abuse: AA: Anatomical Adaptation: AA: Ancient Adena (Lineage 2 game) AA: Achieved Availability: AA: Acquisition Agent: AA: Arrival Angle: AA: Automated Auction: AA: Allah Akhbar (Arabic: God is Great) AA: Audit Agent: AA: Aptitude Area: AA Students who have completed an AA-T or AS-T and are admitted to a CSU major that has been deemed similar are guaranteed admission at junior standing, and the opportunity to complete a baccalaureate degree with 60 additional semester (or 90 quarter) units. Some of the kik users could be legit, but for the most part these are snitches or informants looking to expose people or set them up. Most of the Craigslist profiles where the poster indicates that he or she is real are also snitches/informants. If you meet someone in person, and they say I`m a real motherf`er.. Run as fast as you can, and if you`re with someone that has a bunch of real contacts listed on their phone, such as dude 4 real etc. Please Explain Genotype AA - Health - Nairaland. Nairaland Forum / Nairaland / General / Health / Please Explain Genotype AA (103122 Views) Help! His Genotype Is AA And His Wife's Genotype Is AS But Their Daughter is SS / Those With Blood Group 0+ And Genotype AA Show Yourself Here / Please Explain What Genotype AC Is (0) The genotype AA represents a homozygous dominant genotype. The capital letter A represents the dominant allele, while the lowercase letter a would represent the recessive … allele. If both dominant alleles are present in a genotype (homozygous dominant) then the phenotype is A phenotype. that. It is a fellowship in Alcoholics Anonymous. There you will find release from care, boredom and worry. Your imagination will be fired. Life will mean something at last. The most satisfactory years of your existence lie ahead. Thus we find the fellowship, and so will you. “How is that to come about?” you ask. “Where am I to find these people?” Definition of AA in the Definitions.net dictionary. Meaning of AA. What does AA mean? Information and translations of AA in the most comprehensive dictionary definitions resource on the web. When considering a 12-step program you may wonder, what does it mean to make amends? Read on to find out. Alcoholics Anonymous Call our helpline 800-839-1686 for safe, pain free treatment. Frequently Asked Questions What is an AA-T and AS-T Degree? AA-T and AS-T are acronyms for Associate in Arts and Associate in Science degrees that are designed specifically for transfer to the California State University System. AA stands for Associates in Arts degree. Associate degrees fall into three main areas. $ Associates of Arts (AA) $ Associates of Science (AS) $ Associates of Applied Science (AAS) Each of the above degrees is designed to be completed after two years of study. Query: aa what it means",
"output": [
"AA stands for Associates in Arts degree."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d30b05e0e6f0415f8007478c469dafad",
"input": "This may give you better muscle control in your bladder or bowel. Surgery. In rare cases, you may need surgery to repair damage to muscles or nerves. Your healthcare provider will work with you to create a treatment plan. From there, urine travels out of the kidneys through the ureters to be stored in the bladder (a muscular sac in the lower abdomen). The bladder expands as it fills and can hold about 2 cups (half a liter) of urine at any given time (the average adult produces about 6 cups, or 1½ liters, of pee per day). The Heart and Kidney Connection. Your heart and kidneys are two important organs in your body. They work together to keep you healthy. When one is affected, the other is too. In other words, your heart can affect the health of your kidneys, and your kidneys can affect the health of your heart. Your heart and kidneys are two important organs in your body. They work together to keep you healthy. What Kidneys Do. Although the two kidneys work together on many vital functions, people can live a normal, healthy life with just one kidney. In fact, some people are born with just one of these bean-shaped organs. If one kidney is removed, the remaining one will enlarge within a few months to take over the role of filtering blood on its own. Urine is a fluid that contains: You produce between two and three pints of urine a day. The actual amount depends on how much you eat, drink and sweat, and whether you're taking medication such as diuretics (water tablets). Urine drains from your kidneys to your bladder through tubes called ureters. Your bladder. Your bladder is the hollow muscular organ that stores your urine. It's a bit like a floppy balloon – as your bladder fills, it expands to store the urine. On average, your bladder can hold 400 to 600ml of urine for up to about five hours. The muscle in your bladder wall is called the detrusor muscle. The detrusor muscle relaxes to allow your bladder to fill. When you go to the toilet, it contracts to squeeze out urine. Surprisingly when you remove the gall bladder, when multiple stones are there, digestion is not affecetd. Probably gall bladder was already functionless and so patient is used to it. Microscopic structure of Liver is fascinating. It is beyond the imagination, the three dimentional structure of liver. So you have a portal triad, contening branch of hepatic artery, portal vein and bile duct. In the center of 6 portal triads you have a central vein. There are valves that prevent urine from flowing back towards the kidneys. Urinary Bladder The urinary bladder is a sac-like hollow organ used for the storage of urine. The urinary bladder is located along the body’s midline at the inferior end of the pelvis. As the waste is added, the bladder fills with urine. Once it is full, the bladder empties all of the wastes. On its own, the digestive system’s main purpose is to digest food and provide nutrients for the body. The urinary system is responsible for removing liquid waste that the body does not need. A prolapse is the protrusion of a pelvic organ into the vagina: 1 the bladder can prolapse causing a bulge in the front wall of the vagina. 2 the bowel can prolapse causing a bulge in the back wall of the vagina. 3 the womb can prolapse into the vagina from above and can sometimes be visible at the entrance to the vagina. Your kidneys are powerful chemical factories and have the following jobs: 1 Clean your blood of waste products and extra water. 2 Help control blood pressure. 3 Keep bones healthy and strong. 4 Help make red blood cells. 5 Keep the balance of minerals in your blood (like sodium, phosphorous, and potassium) Query: how do the kidneys and bladder work together",
"output": [
"Urine travels out of the kidneys through the ureters to be stored in the bladder."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-5381abe1a67b46dd85b7c49b94aaea3a",
"input": "Antimony is a chemical element with symbol Sb (from Latin: stibium) and atomic number 51. A lustrous gray metalloid, it is found in nature mainly as the sulfide mineral stibnite (Sb2S3). Antimony compounds have been known since ancient times and were powdered for use as medicine and cosmetics, often known by the Arabic name, kohl. The 8-hour time-weighted average (TWA) is set at 0.5 mg/m3 by the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists and by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) as a legal permissible exposure limit (PEL) in the workplace. element has 6 valence electrons, shows properties of metals and nonmetals, and has 52 protons in the nucleus. Antimony - Applications. 1 About 60% of antimony is consumed in flame retardants, and 20% is used in alloys for batteries, plain bearings, and solders. [47] 2 Antimony is mainly used in the trioxide for flame-proofing compounds, always in combination with halogenated flame retardants except in halogen-containing polymers. Unit 3 Study Guide: Electron Configuration & The Periodic Table 1. For each of the following elements, state whether the element is radioactive, synthetic or both. Berkelium - Radium - Radon - Francium - 2. For each of the following substances, state whether it is an element or compound. brass (Cu + Zn) - methane (CH4) - carbon (C) - water (H2O) - Electrons always fill orbitals in the same order. Each s orbital holds 2 electrons, each set. of p orbitals holds 6 electrons, each set of d orbitals holds 10 electrons, and each set of f. orbitals holds 14 electrons. The order in which orbitals are filled, from first to last, is: 1s 2s 2p 3s 3p 4s 3d 4p 5s 4d 5p 6s 4f 5d 6p 7s 5f 6d 7p. Aluminum has 13 electrons. 31. Antimony is like a nonmetal in that it is a brittle, crystalline solid, has poor electrical and heat conductivity, and has a low boiling point. However, it is also like a metal because of its shiny silver appearance and ability to form alloys. Into which group should antimony be placed? 32. A lustrous gray metalloid, it is found in nature mainly as the sulfide mineral stibnite (Sb2S3). Antimony compounds have been known since ancient times and were powdered for use as medicine and cosmetics, often known by the Arabic name, kohl.[4] Metallic antimony was also known, but it was erroneously identified as lead upon its discovery. 15. Hydrogen is a nonmetal yet it is positioned in group 1 on the periodic table because: Antimony - Precautions. 1 The effects of antimony and its compounds on human and environmental health differ widely. 2 For oral absorption, ICRP (1994) recommended values of 10% for tartar emetic and 1% for all other antimony compounds. 3 Antimony is mainly excreted from the human body via urine. Query: how is antimony like a nonmetal",
"output": [
"Antimony is like a nonmetal in that it is a brittle, crystalline solid, has poor electrical and heat conductivity, and has a low boiling point."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e6f412b727c543549547edd6b67a2db8",
"input": "protect the brain from stroke and ischemic insults…In addition, Astaxanthin showed neuroprotective effects at relatively high doses by preventing the ischemia-induced impairment of spatial memory in mice. Benefits of taking the natural pigment astaxanthin: New light shed on neurogenesis, molecular basis for promotion of spatial memory capacity. ScienceDaily. ScienceDaily, 22 February 2016. . suggest that Astaxanthin can attenuate the development of hypertension and may help to protect the brain from stroke and ischemic insults…In addition, Astaxanthin showed neuroprotective effects at relatively high doses by preventing the ischemia-induced Astaxanthin is a carotenoid and potent antioxidant that helps reduce damage from sun exposure, improves skin health, reduces inflammation and more. Astaxanthin is a carotenoid and potent antioxidant that helps reduce damage from sun exposure, improves skin health, reduces inflammation and more. Skip to primary navigation Skip to content Of particular importance is the natural red pigment astaxanthin (ASX) abundant in both salmon and in crustaceans such as shrimp and crab. ASX has a powerful antioxidant effect, and is capable of penetrating the blood-brain barrier, entering the brain, where it acts directly on nerve cells. ASX is also known to have a neuroprotective effect. *550 times stronger than vitamin E. *800 times more powerful than CoQ10. *6000 times more potent than vitamin C Astaxanthin was even found to be more than 500 times more powerful than catechins found in green tea! Here is a quick summary of astaxanthin benefits for your health. Astaxanthin Benefits and Uses. Improves Brain Health; Protects Your Heart; Keeps Skin Glowing; Eases Inflammation; Enhances Your Workout; Boosts Male Fertility; Supports Healthy Vision; 1. Improves Brain Health. As you get older, the risk of developing neurodegenerative disorders like Alzheimer’s or Parkinson’s disease continues to increase. Filed Under: Astaxanthin Benefits Information Tagged With: antioxidant, astaxanthin, astaxanthin benefits, brain, brain function, mind Leave a Reply Cancel reply Your email address will not be published. 3 Major Health Benefits of Astaxanthin Astaxanthin is a unique carotenoid anti-oxidant that gives seafood its pink color. This phytonutrient is produced naturally in specific algae that pass on its free radical scavenging effects to the sea animals that eat them. Astaxanthin is known to powerfully enhance brain function, eye health, immunity and joint function among other things. The greatest natural source for astaxanthin is in the unique microalgae Haematococcus pluvialis. This microalgae reproduces extraordinarily quickly, doubling in volume every week. But astaxanthin's performance doesn't end with your eyes—studies are suggesting it may have equally astounding benefits for your brain! Your Brain on Astaxanthin Less research has been done about the effects of astaxanthin on your brain than the extensive work related to your eyes. However, what has been done shows great promise. Most of the research to date has been performed on rats. Query: astaxanthin brain benefits",
"output": [
"Astaxanthin brain benefits are penetrating the blood-brain barrier, entering the brain, where it acts directly on nerve cells."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-eeb24e4aca35441d8f2e0bde3257f673",
"input": "Growth Habit: The pineapple plant is a herbaceous perennial, 2-1/2 to 5 ft. high with a spread of 3 to 4 ft. It is essentially a short, stout stem with a rosette of waxy, straplike leaves. Foliage: The long-pointed leaves are 20 - 72 in. in length, usually needle tipped and generally bearing sharp, upcurved spines on the margins. PINEAPPLE Ananas comosus Bromeliaceae Common Names: Pineapple, Ananas, Nanas, Pina. Related Species: Pina de Playon (Ananas bracteatus). Distant affinity: Pingwing (Aechmea magdalenae), Pinguin (Bromelia pinguin), Pinuela (Karatas plumier). Origin: The pineapple is native to Misc.: Fruiting can be forced when the plant is mature by using acetylene gas or a spray of calcium carbide solution (30 gms to 1 gal. water), which produces acetylene. Or calcium carbide (10 -12 grains) can be deposited in the crown of the plant to be dissolved by rain. I've had pineapple for about 2 years, started from a market pineapple. I take it in for winter, out for summer. Blew me away when it started to produce actual fruit. I don't know how long it takes to mature and would like some input. Attached a current photo. All my friends are jealous because they've tried and failed to produce fruit. How long does it usually take for a pineapple to be ready to pick after it forms? I have 2 and one is about 4-5 months old and only about 6-7 inches tall, not counting the crown(very firm still) and 4-5 inches in diameter. The other is also 4-5 months old but only 4-5 inches tall and 4-5 inches in diameter. Very slow-growing plants, pineapples can take between 1 1/2 to 2 1/2 years to fully mature. Once a pineapple matures, only then will it blossom and set fruit. Pineapples are warm-weather plants, hardy in U.S. Department of Agriculture plant hardiness zones 10 through 11; they are intolerant of cool weather. I agree, do support your pineapple because the one I grew here fruited in the spring after 1 yr in a pot and keeping overwinter in the unheated garage. It grew to about a little over softball size and then grew a really huge green top on it. In size the fruits are up to 12 in. long and weigh 1 to 10 pounds or more. CULTURE Location: Pineapples should be planted where the temperature remains warmest, such as the south side of a home, or in a sunny portion of the garden. Soil: The best soil for The pineapple reached England in 1660 and began to be grown in greenhouses for its fruit around 1720. Adaptation: The pineapples is a tropical or near-tropical plant, but will usually tolerate brief exposures to 28° F. Prolonged cold above freezing retards growth, delays maturity and causes the fruit to be more acid. How Long to Get Fruit. Growing a pineapple plant from the top of a mature fruit can take upwards of 2 1/2 years before the plant is mature enough to blossom. If growing from suckers, it can take 1 1/2 years, and from slips, roughly one year to maturity. Query: how long for pineapple to mature",
"output": [
"Pineapples can take between 1 1/2 and 2 1/2 years to fully mature."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e5ef770acbc34abfa0320e02125bc267",
"input": "An FDA panel recommended “pain relief” be removed from the label of Tylenol for babies and toddlers due to lack of evidence that it relieves pain at this age. Jump to Navigation Tylenol No Longer Deemed a Pain Reliever for Babies & Toddlers Tylenol Dosing Should Be Based on Weight. Most dosage charts that parents see list a dose based on age, or suggest that parents ask a doctor for the dose. And dosage concentrations have varied in various formulations. If baby seems fussy and uncomfortable after she’s gotten her shots, though, you can go ahead and give her Infant Tylenol, Swanson says. Are Babies Ever Too Young for Infant Tylenol? As long as you talk to your doctor first to get the okay and the correct Infant Tylenol dosage, there’s actually no age that’s considered too young—in fact, Infant Tylenol is sometimes even given to preemies. All rights reserved. This site is published by Johnson & Johnson Consumer Inc., McNeil Consumer Healthcare Division., which is solely responsible for its contents. This website is intended for visitors from the United States. If you are outside of the US, click here to contact us. The third-party trademarks used herein are trademarks of their respective owners. Freedom from Want illustration © SEPS licensed by Curtis Licensing, Indianapolis, IN. The FDA panel has recommended that all liquid acetaminophen come in the same concentration, that all packages contain dosing information for children down to 6 months of age, and that the dose be based on the child’s weight. Never give your child more than 5 doses in 24 hours and ask your family doctor or pediatrician which product is right for your child. Child's Age Weight (lbs & kg) Check out these best-sellers and special offers on books and newsletters from Mayo Clinic. 1 The Last Diet You'll Ever Need. 2 4 Simple Steps to a Joy-Filled Life. 3 Pain Management Strategies from Mayo Clinic. 4 Stop Osteoporosis in its Tracks. 5 Protect and Preserve Your Vision. It is normally given to adults, but if your child suffers from intense pain or fever, you may think of giving Tylenol to him. In this case, it is important to know the infant Tylenol dosage. You should be careful while giving the drug to your child, as anoverdose may cause the child to become sick. Give your child acetaminophen (Tylenol, others). If your child is age 6 months or older, ibuprofen (Advil, Motrin, others) is OK, too. Read the label carefully for proper dosage. Don't give aspirin to an infant or toddler. IBUPROFEN DOSAGE. Click here for dosing chart. Although the package might not give a dosage for under two years, it can be safely used down to two months of age (it used to only be approved down to 6 months, but in 2001, it was proven to be safe and effective down to two months of age). Some packages will use an age range to figure dose, but it is more effective to dose by weight. Query: at what age can you give an infant tylenol",
"output": [
"At 6 months of age, you can give tylenol to infant."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-22a4b7caab174f8a838fbea102680d73",
"input": "How to Harvest Butternut Squash When picking butternut squash, carefully cut the fruit from the vine with a sharp knife. Make sure about 2 inches of stem is still attached to the squash. Planting flowers near the squash plants encourages bee to pollinate the plants. Harvest Once blossoms appear and pollination takes place, zucchini will grow quickly in the warm weather and may be ready to pick in as few as four days or up to a week. Harvest zucchini when it is about 2 inches in diameter and about 6 to 8 inches long. Don't allow the squash to get too big or overripe, or it will be tough and seedy. For more delicate texture, zucchini can be harvested when it is even smaller. The blossoms can also be used in gourmet dishes. Zucchini should be ready to pick about two months after it is planted. Once you've started harvesting, continuing to pick the squash encourages the plant to produce more. Cutting the zucchini off with a knife prevents damage to the plant. Zucchini can be stored for up to two weeks. Spaghetti Squash. 1 Light: Full sun. 2 Fruit size: 9 to 10 inches long. 3 Matures: 90 to 100 days. 4 Plant spacing: 48 to 60 inches apart. 5 Plant Size: Long vine. Fruit size: 9 to 10 inches long; Matures: 90 to 100 days; Plant spacing: 48 to 60 inches apart; Plant Size: Long vine; Heirloom. Surprise: This winter squash looks like spaghetti on the inside! Scoop out the lengths of mild, slightly sweet flesh and use it like spaghetti for low-cal dishes. The outside of the spaghetti squash begins white and changes to pale yellow when mature. Each plant yields an average of 4-5 fruits. After harvesting, the fruits will store for several weeks. 4 Comments on How and When to Pick Summer Squash. 1 My squash plants always get a fungus of some kink. 2 Hi, Tee. 3 I am trying my hand at summer squash this year.I found your site very informative.thank you for the help.this is my 2nd year of growing my own garden,it is so relaxing and I know where and how my vegetables were grown. 4 Hi my name is Sarah. Once cured, the fruit should be stored in a cool dry place (40-50 F./4-10 C.) such as a basement or garage. Don’t let them freeze. Properly stored, your butternut squash harvest should last from three to six months. Rated 5 out of 5 by Elisa Gonzales from I have 17 squash growing on one plant. This does take up a great deal of space and have almost covered my garden area, but the taste and abundance of squash is tremendous. Now that you know when to harvest butternut squash and how to harvest butternut squash, you need to know how to store them. After you finish picking butternut squash, it needs to be cured. All that means is that you have to let the squash sit at room temperature for a week or two to fully harden the skin. Spaghetti Squash is rated 4.8 out of 5 by 5. Rated 5 out of 5 by from I have 17 squash growing on one plant. This does take up a great deal of space and have almost covered my garden area, but the taste and abundance of squash is tremendous. Rated 5 out of 5 by from I planted two plants and 23 fruits have set on them. When to Harvest Butternut Squash It’s time for picking butternut squash when the rind is hard and they have turned a deep, solid tan. It’s best to leave the majority of your crop on the vine until late September or October to ensure the thick skins necessary for winter storage, but make sure you have your butternut squash harvest in before the first frost. How to Harvest Butternut Squash. When picking butternut squash, carefully cut the fruit from the vine with a sharp knife. Make sure about 2 inches of stem is still attached to the squash. Short stems or no stems at all invite bacteria in through the temporary soft spot where the stem once was. Query: how long does squash take to harvest",
"output": [
"Properly stored, your butternut squash harvest should last from three to six months."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-836449d14e56472dbebc60011cb2038e",
"input": "Confinement to home: Medicare covers home care only if and for as long as the patient is confined to home.. This means that the patient is unable to leave home without difficulty and with the assistance of another person or a medical device such as a wheelchair. However, it doesn't necessarily mean bedridden. • The program you choose to receive hospice care through has been approved by Medicare. How Long Does Medicare Pay For Hospice Care? Hospice costs are covered by Medicare as long as it is verified by your doctor that you are terminally ill and likely have less than six months to live. Regardless of how long you live, you can remain in hospice care for the duration of the time that your doctor declares that you are, in fact, terminally ill. Initially you will be granted 90 days of hospice care. If necessary, you will be granted another 90 days upon recertification by your doctor. After that, you will need to be recertified by your doctor as a terminally ill patient every 60 days. Not all home health care is covered by Medicare. It will not pay for the following services: Occupational therapy: Occupational therapy is not covered if it’s the only service needed. If home health care is medically necessary, though, you can receive occupational therapy as part of the home health care at no cost. This type of insurance policy can help pay for many types of long-term care, including both skilled and non-skilled care. Long-term care insurance can vary widely. Some policies may cover only nursing home care, while others may include coverage for a range of services, like adult day care, assisted living, medical equipment, and informal home care. If you have long-term care insurance, check your policy or call the insurance company to find out if the care you need is covered. Intermittent home health care is covered for a limited period of time, but as the disease progresses, it’s likely that the individual will need more care and supervision than Medicare will cover—remember, Medicare doesn’t cover long-term or full-time home health care. How long does Medicare pay for home health care? Medicare covers only intermittent home health care, which means that the care must be for either less than seven days per week or less than eight hours each day over a period of 21 days. Full-time, round-the-clock care is not covered by Medicare. 2 Medicare Part A pays 100% of the cost of your covered home health care, and there is no limit on the number of visits to your home for which Medicare will pay. Medicare will also pay for the initial evaluation by a home care agency, if prescribed by your physician, to determine whether you are a good candidate for home care. (Note that Medicare Part A only pas for home health care that follows a prior three-day hospital stay. Otherwise Medicare Part B (medical insurance) pays for home health services.) Medicare will pay for 100% of the following services related to home health care: part-time skilled nursing care—usually two to three visits per week in a plan certified by a physician; physical therapy; speech therapy, and/or; occupational therapy. If you are receiving home health care for one of the above ... Medicare generally doesn't cover long-term care stays in a nursing home. Even if Medicare doesn’t cover your nursing home care, you’ll still need Medicare for hospital care, doctor services, and medical supplies while you’re in the nursing home. Find out what nursing home care Medicare does cover, and how Medicare prescription drug coverage (Part D) works if you live in a nursing home or other institution. There are several other ways you can pay for nursing home care: Most, but not all, nursing homes accept Medicaid payment. Even if you pay out-of-pocket or with long-term care insurance, you may eventually spend down your assets while you’re at the nursing home, so it’s good to know if the nursing home you chose will accept Medicaid. Medicaid programs vary from state to state. Medicare Part A pays 100% of the cost of your covered home health care, and there is no limit on the number of visits to your home for which Medicare will pay. Medicare will also pay for the initial evaluation by a home care agency, if prescribed by your physician, to determine whether you are a good candidate for home care. (Note that Medicare Part A only pas for home health care that follows a prior three-day hospital stay. Otherwise Medicare Part B (medical insurance) pays for home health ... Query: how long will medicare pay for in home care",
"output": [
"Medicare Part A only pass for home health care that follows a prior three days hospital stay."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c05f4fba6fb147f5a82da5837b130184",
"input": "Best Answer: i am a middle school student the quarter is 8min it all last between 1 and 1.5 hours. and the coach WILL GET WILD AT YOU IF YOU DO SOMETHING WRONG i almost got kicked out cuz i missed a buzzer 3pointer that took us to over time and we won the game if we lost he would of kicked me out becare full. GOOD LUCK THOUGH. Top 10 Offenses & Plays For Middle School Coaches. 5 Out Motion Offense - Cutters - Motion offense that was used by State Champs (and it can be taught in ONE day)! It can be used as a delay offense, primary offense, and can be used at any level. And how long is each quarter? Any other rules/tips you can tell me? It's my first year of basketball, and I'm really lost because everyone else on the team knows all these rules - they've been playing forever! I play center or a forward. High School. According to the National Federation of State High School Associations, all high school basketball games must last at least 32 minutes. This game time is divided into four equal quarters lasting eight minutes each. Top 10 Offenses & Plays For Middle School Coaches. 1 5 Out Motion Offense - Cutters - Motion offense that was used by State Champs (and it can be taught in ONE day)! It can be used as a delay offense, primary offense, and can be used at any level. 2 Michigan - Man Offense - This offense is continuous and has a very simple motion. Each half lasts 20 minutes, making the total time 40 minutes for a regulation game. There is a 15-minute halftime period. National Basketball Association. Like high school, the NBA uses quarters, but the quarters are longer, 12 minutes each, allowing for an overall game time of 48 minutes, the longest of the three levels of basketball. Like college basketball, the halftime period lasts 15 minutes in the NBA. Overtime Top 10 Offenses & Plays For Middle School Coaches. 1 5 Out Motion Offense - Cutters - Motion offense that was used by State Champs (and it can be taught in ONE day)! 2 Michigan - Man Offense - This offense is continuous and has a very simple motion. 3 Yo Yo - Zone Offense - This is a very simple zone offense that can be used at any level. Best Answer: i am a middle school student the quarter is 8min it all last between 1 and 1.5 hours. and the coach WILL GET WILD AT YOU IF YOU DO SOMETHING WRONG i ... Answers. 1 At least five(5) minutes per quarter. It should be at least a bit over that, probably 6-8 minutes long. One tip would be to stay calm during the game, try not to get too excited. Be ready to watch little kids play, a lot of missed baskets and tons of open shots. Make sure communication with your teammates is working well, try to tell them what you plan on doing and make a game plan. Making the world better, one answer at a time. Middle School basketball games are usually around 8 min. a quarter. So it would probably be 32 minutes a game. Middle School basketball games are usually around 8 min. a quarter. So it would probably be 32 minutes a game. Query: how long is a middle school basketball game",
"output": [
"Middle School basketball games are usually around 32 minutes a game."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3458b60e9d194ca7afb90dd5bdce6418",
"input": "The Longitudinal Study of Australian Children found that 12-13 years olds were spending up to 30 per cent of their waking day using screens, considerably more than the healthy guidelines. 1 media_cameraNicholas, 13, and Daniel, 9, spend up to five hours a day playing computer games, their mother says. The amount of time children spend glued to a screen has risen dramatically in the last 20 years, a new report suggests. Children aged five to 16 spend an average of six and a half hours a day in front of a screen compared with around three hours in 1995, according to market research firm Childwise. Teenaged boys spend the longest, with an average of eight hours. Eight-year-old girls spend the least - three-and-a-half hours, according to the study. WEDNESDAY, March 12 (HealthDay News) -- A new survey reports that teenagers spend far too many hours a week in front of TVs and computers, and those in poor neighborhoods have even more screen time.. Girls who lived in the poorest neighborhoods were five times more likely to spend the most time in front of screens than those in the richest neighborhoods. The girls in poor neighborhoods might be more vulnerable to perceptions that their neighborhoods are not safe, Barnett suggested. Half of the boys and a quarter of the girls reported spending an average of more than 42 hours a week in front of electronic screens. TV was the most common form of screen use, accounting for 85 percent of the time. It finds that teenaged girls now spend an average of seven-and-a-half- hours watching screens, compared with 3.5 hours of TV viewing in 1995. Younger children fare slightly better - in 1995, five to 10-year-olds averaged around two-and-a-half-hours of TV. Fast-forward to 2014 and screen time has risen to four-and-a-half hours. More on this story. 1 Sony's Morpheus virtual reality helmet set for 2016 launch. 2 How we are becoming nation of digital makers. 3 Many 'children taking risks online'. 4 Computer time is modern parents' bribe and threat. The Longitudinal Study of Australian Children found that 12-13 years olds were spending up to 30 per cent of their waking day using screens, considerably more than the healthy guidelines. media_cameraNicholas, 13, and Daniel, 9, spend up to five hours a day playing computer games, their mother says. If you or anyone you know needs help: 1 Lifeline on 13 11 14. 2 Kids Helpline on 1800 551 800. 3 MensLine Australia on 1300 789 978. 4 Suicide Call Back Service on 1300 659 467. 5 Beyond Blue on 1300 22 46 36. 6 Headspace on 1800 650 890. Most Australian children spend too much time glued to screens, research reveals. THE majority of Australian children are spending too much time glued to screens research by the Australian Institute of Family Studies has revealed. The decade long study tracked 4000 preschoolers through to their early teen years and found 64 per cent of the group exceeded the daily limit of screen time recommended by the Australian Government. Query: how long do australians spend in front of screens",
"output": [
"The Longitudinal Study of Australian Children found that 12-13 years olds were spending up to 30 per cent of their waking day using screens."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e9f2e7327a3f416f9f3ef568827f43d3",
"input": "Mumps is a contagious viral infection spread by bodily fluids that causes uncomfortable symptoms like swelling of the salivary glands, fever, body aches, and fatigue. In some cases, people who contract mumps have no symptoms. Rarely, people will develop serious complications with mumps, including inflammation of the brain and spinal cord. The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention report less than 1000 cases annually, thanks to widespread vaccination. In rare cases, mumps can cause hearing loss, usually permanent, in one or both ears. Miscarriage. Although it isn't proved, contracting mumps while you're pregnant, especially early on, may lead to miscarriage. Prevention. In general, you're considered immune to mumps if you've previously had the infection or if you've been immunized against mumps. The mumps vaccine is usually given as a combined measles-mumps-rubella (MMR) inoculation, which contains the safest and most effective form of each vaccine. Mumps is a virus that can lead to swelling and pain in the salivary glands, along with fever, loss of appetite, and fatigue. With the help of the mumps vaccine, it's preventable. Mumps causes swelling in the parotid glands on either side of the neck. The cheeks can become quite swollen. Fatigue, weakness and fever can occur. Mumps can make eating painful. Mumps may cause dangerous complications, including encephalitis, meningitis, pancreatitis, inflammation of the testicles or ovaries, and hearing loss. What is mumps? Mumps is an illness caused by a virus. It usually happens in childhood. Mumps are easily spread by airborne droplets from the upper respiratory tract. The disease usually takes 2 to 3 weeks to appear. Since the introduction of the mumps vaccine, cases of mumps in the U.S. are uncommon. What are the symptoms of mumps? Many children have no or very mild symptoms. The following are the most common symptoms of mumps that may be seen in both adults and children: In rare cases, mumps will attack other groups of salivary glands instead of the parotids. If this happens, swelling may be noticed under the tongue, under the jaw, or all the way down to the front of the chest. Mumps can lead to inflammation and swelling of the brain and other organs, although this is not common. Mumps outbreaks still occur in the United States, and mumps is still common in many parts of the world, so getting a vaccination to prevent mumps remains important. Symptoms Mumps If you think that your child has mumps, call your doctor, who can confirm the diagnosis and work with you to monitor your child and watch for complications. The doctor can also notify the health authorities who keep track of childhood immunization programs and mumps outbreaks. Because mumps is caused by a virus, it cannot be treated with antibiotics. The measles, mumps, and rubella (MMR) is a childhood combination vaccine against mumps, measles, and rubella. The MMR provides immunity for most people. People who have had the mumps are immune for life. About Mumps. Mumps is a disease caused by a virus that usually spreads through saliva (spit). It can infect many parts of the body, especially the parotid salivary glands. These glands, which make saliva for the mouth, are found toward the back of each cheek, in the area between the ear and jaw. Query: how does mumps attacks",
"output": [
"Mumps attack by spreading of bodily fluids and they are easily spread by airborne droplets from the upper respiratory tract."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1a96a12a2c2d416b93877ecb3e93f34a",
"input": "Using identifiable-sized particulate monitoring, my personal range is 12-48 hours with a median of around 18 hours but I agree with Robert Pakter that it's highly variable between individuals: http://gut.bmj.com/content/39/2/... From your lips to your hips in just 3 hours: From digesting a cupcake to healing after surgery or even having an orgasm, how long it takes your body to work By Chloe Lambert for the Daily Mail and Roger Dobson for The Mail on Sunday Studies have shown that the entire process takes about an average of 50 hours for healthy people, but can vary between 24 and 72, based on a number of factors. After chewing food and swallowing it, it passes through the stomach and small intestine over a period of 4 to 7 hours. The time passing through the large intestine is much longer, averaging about 40 hours. For men the average time to digest food is shorter overall than it is for women. Having a digestive condition that affects transit time (the time it takes for food to pass through the digestive system) can shorten or extend the time. How long does it take for the food to go to through the esophagus and into the stomach? 20 minutes In all reality, it only takes food about 7 seconds to travel down the esophagus and into the stomach. This is a very interesting question. There are several factors that determine how long it takes for food to pass through your digestive system. To start, the type of food matters. Some foods are more complex, requiring our body to work harder and to take more time to break them down and digest them. The transit through the stomach and small intestine is usually normal and it takes around 3 hours to hit the colon. Under special circumstances it could be faster but the main one is your colon is either empty or close to it usually from really severe watery diarrhea. It can't skip ahead of what is already in there. Takes 8 hours to digest on average and the length of time to go through your intestines. Why dont you eat a tin of sweetcorn, start a stopwatch and find out exactly how fast your metabolism works. Then let us know on Yahoo Answers and maybe we all could do the same and exchange results. How long does it take for food to pass through the digestive system - How long does it take for food to pass through the digestive system? In a normal person. Without any prior surgeries or GI diseases, about 60 90 minutes from the mouth thru the small intestine to reach the colon and then another 24-36 hours thru the colon or large intestine to the anus. according to Dr. Oz on the Oprah show: 'It depends on what you're eating, Dr. Oz says. A steak dinner can take you two, maybe three days to get out of your intestine. What that means is the way you digest it is basically to rot it in your intestines. On the other hand, if you eat vegetables and fruits, they're out of your system in less than 12 hours.'. The amount of time it takes for food to pass through your intestines depends on the type of food you have eaten, among other things. In general, it can take 24 to 44 hours from the time you eat food to the time it leaves your body as waste. The amount of food you eat and whether it is solid or liquid will affect how long it takes to pass from the stomach to the small intestine and from there to your colon. Query: how long does it take food to go through the body",
"output": [
"It takes 4 to 7 hours food to go through the body."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-14d904dfd74a439295170efc745a401f",
"input": "One of the most common questions I get when talking to people about to embark on chemotherapy is, “How long did it take for your hair to grow back after chemotherapy?”. I had the same question when I was going through chemo. This will get rid of the most brittle, dry hair. You may even like to get the ends trimmed once a month or every other month until your hair returns to its normal texture. In 6 to 12 months most of your chemo curls will be gone and you'll be free to try new styles with your short hair. Enjoy your new hair. This was different for me, I am much older and established in an awesome loving relationship. With experience, knowledge, and age comes great wisdom. If you would like to have a visual guide of hair growth progress post chemotherapy see my post, How Long Will it Take My Hair to Grow Back After Chemotherapy?. Leave a Reply Cancel reply Your email address will not be published. Find out how and when your hair grows back after chemotherapy for breast cancer. Find the steps you may want to take after your breast cancer treatment, when your hair begins to grow back. You can also donate any old wigs that you no longer need. The extent of hair loss depends on the type of chemo, as well as the dose, but you can generally expect to regrow an inch of hair about two months after you stop treatment, followed by a full head of hair within six months to a year. The answer depends on the treatment: chemotherapy, whole brain radiation, or tamoxifen. If you had chemotherapy, here's a typical timetable: two to three weeks after chemotherapy ends: soft fuzz. one month after: real hair starts to grow at its normal rate. two months after: an inch of hair. After chemo, the hair may start cycling differently.” Radical color changes—brown hair turning red, for instance—don’t seem to happen, doctors say. But straight hair may go curly, or curly hair straight. White hair may go dark again, or dark hair go white. Hair may grow back thicker. In rare cases, it may not grow back at all. Sometimes, the hair reverts to its original color and texture after a year or two. Sometimes, it doesn’t. And often, as a recent New York Times article chronicled, patients choose to change their hair color after chemo. Patients who undergo chemotherapy often lose a great deal of, if not all of, their hair during the process. Most patients will eventually get their hair to grow back, but there are a few things they can do to speed up the process and ensure that they get a strong head of hair. While each patient will experience a different rate of hair growth after chemotherapy, they can find help to get things underway in a healthy manner and pave the road for the new hair growth. Generally hair loss sets in 2 to 3 weeks after the first course of chemotherapy. Some people lose their hair gradually, while others immediately start to lose hair in large quantities. By their second course of chemotherapy, most people are already wearing a wig, scarf or hat. Share this: Posted in Side Effects and tagged Cancer and Hair Loss, hair growth after chemotherapy, hair growth post bep chemotherapy, how fast does your hair grow back after chemotherapy on June 3, 2013. I’m at one month post chemo…so much fuzz, but it’s very light colored and doesn’t cover much. Query: how long after chemotherapy will hair grow back",
"output": [
"It takes about two months to regrow an inch of hair after you stop treatment of chemotherapy."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-78d6b144eaa54a67a3901f044cc9c094",
"input": "That would be alot of work, only replace what you need to. Unless it is your sewer line then i would replace it all to the main. I agree with answer # 1. IN ADDITION: Back in the day, cast iron joints were sealed together with hot lead. Depending on the position of the cast iron pipe and the size of it. Either one can cut the cast iron piping and clamp PVC to it or you can melt the old lead out of the cast iron joints and place PVC piping inside and then recork (reseal) it with prattley putty to prevent it from leaking. the flow of water: slow drainage is often the first indication of a problem, and homeowners may find themselves calling the plumber every six months to clear out the pipe. The average lifespan of cast iron drain/sewer pipe is 50 to 65 years. It is easily recognized by the thickened female “hub” at each pipe segment connection. Rust eventually eats through cast iron, primarily from the inside out, as shown in the photo below. Because corrosion is accelerated by moisture, pipe with light effluent flow and installed in a dry environment can survive 20 to 30 years longer. So keep cast iron piping or cast it out? Older cast iron waste pipes should be judged on a case-by-case basis. First hire an experienced home inspector to collect information about the drain waste system’s performance. Ask your home inspector to do a visual inspection of the pipes if possible. If your inspector is any Trenchless Pipe Lining LLC matches that warranty with a 50-year labor warranty since the liner has turned into rock inside the pipe and cannot move, shrink, or be displaced in any way. Interestingly, the hardened pipe liner actually DOES flex a little which allows it to accommodate ground settlement without cracking, unlike clay or cast iron sewer pipes. Re: Cast Iron Drain Pipe - Life Expectancy. I simply put cast-iron and galvanized piping will rust from the inside to the outside and eventually will need updating. If mineral deposits are noted as reported as a leak. Also be aware I have found vent pipes totally rusted out behind the wall. A good quality cast iron pipe, installed under ideal conditions, has a life expectancy of 75 – 100 years, and possibly even more. Cast iron does rust but when it does the rust actually forms a barrier layer over the remainder of the pipe which helps protect it from further rusting. Since most cast iron pipes were thick walled to begin with even with some rusting inside they can handle the lower pressures of waste water disposal quite well and last a long time. Cast iron also provides many other benefits in home waste systems that still makes it a good choice for homes. For all of its good points cast iron does have some problems related to it. One of the problems had to do with the varying quality of the pipe that was manufactured in earlier years. Standards for cast iron pipe have been around since the 1800’s but like anything else they are voluntary standards. Cast Iron and galvanized drain pipe may appear to be in fairly good condition from the outside. When I had some cast iron drain pipe replaced, we found sever... Cast Iron and galvanized drain pipe may appear to be in fairly good condition from the outside. When I had some cast iron drain pipe replaced, we found several potential problems that would have surfaced in the near future. The estimated life expectancy for cast iron drain pipe is 60 years. I couldn't find any good estimates for the life span of galvanized pipe, however, my 2 inch pipe from the kitchen drain was almost rusted closed. What kind of paint for a cast iron drain pipe? If you want to prime it first, latex is fine or oil base by itself. You can probably get by with latex directly on the pipe, but there may be oils or dirt on it that will blee … d through. Query: how long does cast iron drain pipe last",
"output": [
"The average lifespan of cast iron drain pipe is 50 to 65 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-00cdeb45df054dd49f3684a4f6aea1bb",
"input": "Scary stuff -- but how do these sites get away with it? Along with offering your personal information to anyone who wants to pay the price, much of the information that’s being disseminated isn’t always correct. FoxNews.com put Spokeo.com to the test, and while it returned some scarily detailed results, accuracy often left much to be desired. You can remove your Spokeo listing from public searches for free. Please note that removing your Spokeo listing from public searches does not remove your information from the third-party data sources. Your information will still be shown on other people search sites, and you will need to contact those third-party sites one-by-one, The FTC alleged that Spokeo operated as a consumer reporting agency and violated the FCRA by failing to make sure that the information it sold would be used only for legally permissible purposes; failing to ensure the information was accurate; and failing to tell users of its consumer reports about their obligation under the FCRA, including the requirement to notify consumers if the user took an adverse action against the consumer based on information contained in the consumer report. As of August 2010, the company operates 301 retail stores in ten countries, and an online store where hardware and software products are sold. Apple ignited the personal computer revolution in the 1970s with the Apple II and reinvented the personal computer in the 1980s with the Macintosh. Today, Apple continues to lead the industry in innovation with its award-winning computers and. Spokeo was founded in 2006 by a group of people who graduated from Stanford University—Mike Daly, Harrison Tang, Ray Chen, and Eric Liang. The original idea came from Tang, who found it difficult to keep up with all the different posts his friends made across various social networks. Spokeo is a people search service that organizes information about people into simple and comprehensive online profiles that are accessible to consumers, businesses and non-profits. Spokeo enables you to search for anyone by name, phone number, address, email, or username. This information can help you to reconnect with lost friends and family members, learn about celebrities and other famous people and discover an online footprint. How does Spokeo collect data from 99+ websites? Do they use API for all the 99+ sites? Do they scrape it from all the sites or both? Spokeo is always collecting new public records and information about you, and inevitably your name will pop back up on their website at some point. Sound like too much work? Check out our DeleteMe service, which removes personal information from Spokeo along with 17 other people search sites, and we’ll do it all for you! If you want to remove your information from the White Pages, it is possible, but it may not be easy. This guide will lay out what you need to understand about the companies controlling them, and how to get your information out of the White Pages. Tang said Spokeo does not provide people’s credit scores, bank or financial information, Social Security numbers or drivers license numbers. “That is not public information,” Tang said. “There are people talking about it. Query: how does spokeo get its information",
"output": [
"Spokeo is always collecting new public records and information about you, and inevitably your name will pop back up on their website at some point."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-64d61acc34e048b8a646c78f44e4f8f3",
"input": "Kit Contains: 14 Patches, Committed Quitters Program enrollment form, user's guide, CD and child resistant disposal tray. 21 mg of nicotine delivered over 24 hours. If you smoke more than 10 cigarettes per day, start with Step 1; 10 or less cigarettes per day: Start with Step 2. NicoDerm CQ is a three step program. Wearing patch 6 months may help smokers quit. Those who wore the nicotine patch longer were less likely to smoke, but after a year, there was no significant difference between the control and experimental group. Start with Step 1 (21 mg), wearing one 21 mg patch daily for 4 weeks before moving on to Step 2. Next, wear Step 2 (14 mg) for an additional 2 weeks before moving on to Step 3. Finish by wearing Step 3 (7 mg) for 2 weeks. First thing each morning, apply one fresh patch to clean, dry, hairless skin of the arm, chest, or hip. Apply to a new part of your body each day. After 2 to 3 days, you may apply to a previous spot if there’s no sign of irritation. Before going to sleep, remove the patch and dispose of it safely. How to Use the Habitrol® Patch. 1 Great! 2 By placing a nicotine patch on your skin, you are NOT inhaling the harmful tars, toxins and chemicals found in cigarettes. 3 If you smoke more than 10 cigarettes per day, begin with Step 1. 4 If you smoke less than 10 cigarettes per day, begin with Step 2. you may wear the patch for 16 or 24 hours. if you crave cigarettes when you wake up, wear the patch for 24 hours. if you have vivid dreams or other sleep disturbances, you may remove the patch at bedtime and apply a new one in the morning In its 2008 guidelines, the U.S. Public Health Service called for more research into the effectiveness of longer-term nicotine replacement therapy. Lerman and her colleagues are now conducting another study in which quitting smokers will wear the patch for an entire year. Health.com: 97 Reasons to quit smoking Stop use and ask a doctor if. 1 skin redness caused by the patch does not go away after four days, or if your skin swells, or you get a rash. 2 irregular heartbeat or palpitations occur. 3 you get symptoms of nicotine overdose, such as nausea, vomiting, dizziness, weakness and rapid heartbeat. Currently, the Food and Drug Administration recommends that people use nicotine-replacement therapies like the patch or nicotine chewing gum for no longer than 12 weeks. After 24 hours, remove the patch you have been wearing. If you remove and apply the patch at about the same time each day, it will help you to remember when to put on a new patch. Choose a different place on your skin to apply the next patch and repeat steps 1 through 5. Do not reapply a patch to a previously used skin site for at least 1 week. Do not leave the patch on for more than 24 hours, because it may irritate your skin and loses strength after 24 hours. Do not wear more than one patch at the same time, and do not cut a patch in half or into smaller pieces to wear. Query: how long to wear step one of nicotine patch",
"output": [
"Wearing one 21 mg nicotine patch daily for 4 weeks in step 1."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-28e5a58d7f17411880e57761014c15bb",
"input": "Bull Markets Since 1871: Duration and Magnitude April 17, 2013 by Tobias Carlisle Butler|Philbrick|Gordillo and Associates have an interesting post called What the Bull Giveth, the Bear Taketh Away on the duration and magnitude of all bull and bear market periods in U.S. stocks since 1871. Social Surge - What's Trending. 1 Six Flags brings down Confederate flags. 2 Carl Bernstein: This is the Trump story reporters need to cover. 3 The best spot on Earth to watch the eclipse is in the sky. These are long periods of time in which stocks make little progress. Then there are cyclical bears, which can come in the middle of a long secular bear or even a secular bull. The chart below shows the three secular bears over the last ninety years. As you can see, the defining characteristic for secular bears is that stocks make no progress for long periods of time. The average bears market last 18 months and has an average of a 30% decline. The average bear market lasts about one year and two months, (The average bull market lasts about three years and seven months.) At least till obama is history. While the nominal Dow begins at 39 points in our chart, adjusting for inflation brings its real value up to 1,426 points. One thing to notice is just how long most secular market cycles are. The average length of all modern secular cycles is 194 months, and the median length is 200 months. That's a little less than 17 years -- about the amount of time needed for a new generation of investors to mature and enter the market. Historical precedent says that the current bull market can’t last forever, but what might cause it to fall? photograph by bryan r. smith / afp / getty Thursday marks eight years since the low point of the last bear market on Wall Street. On March 9, 2009, the Dow Jones Industrial Average closed at 6,547.05. Since then, it has more than tripled. If you’d invested twenty thousand dollars in the Dow index eight years ago, it would now be worth about sixty-four thousand dollars. Secular bull gains totaled 2075% for an average of 415%. Secular bear losses totaled -329% for an average of -65%. Secular bull years total 80 versus 52 for the bears, a 60:40 ratio. This last bullet probably comes as a surprise to many people. The finance industry and media have conditioned us to view every dip as a buying opportunity. The Almanac says that the shortest bull market in the past 100 years lasted just 61 days during the summer of 1932 yet still saw the Dow bounce 94%! Those are of course the extremes, but the average bull market of the past century has lasted 755 days and delivered an 85% gain. The current bull run is now four years old and up about 120%, making it significantly above average by both measures. How do bull markets start and end? Bear markets begin at the end of one bull market and end at the start of the next bull market, the Stock Trader Almanac states, implying that a cycle change occurs any time the market retreats 20% or more. How long does a bull market last? It depends on which time period you're looking at, Holeman says, but the average bull market lasts somewhere between five to nine years. We're currently in the middle of the second-longest bull market ever. It's been nearly nine years since the prior bear market ended in March 2009. Ultimately, they can range, says Holeman. They can be as long as 13 or 14 [years], and as short as two or three. Was the March 2009 low the end of a secular bear market and the beginning of a secular bull? At this point, almost nine years later, the S&P 500 has set a series of inflation-adjusted record highs based on monthly averages of daily closes. Query: how long does the average bull market last",
"output": [
"The average bull market lasts between five to nine years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8938201fb89a4ba8bc0f1d06679aea1c",
"input": "They escaped in the darkness by swimming across the Alabama River near the mouth of Valley Creek (where the present day Battle of Selma Reenactment is held.) The Union troops looted the city that night and burned many businesses and private residences. How far is Selma from Tuscaloosa? The KGB Agent answer: The distance fom Tuscaloosa, AL to Selma, AL is 80.1 miles if you take Route AL-14 E or a total of 1 hour 37 mins of driving. There are 63.93 miles from Selma to Tuscaloosa in northwest direction and 78 miles (125.53 kilometers) by car, following the SR 219 route. Selma and Tuscaloosa are 1 hour 56 mins far apart, if you drive non-stop. This is the fastest route from Selma, AL to Tuscaloosa, AL. The halfway point is Centreville, AL. Selma, AL and Tuscaloosa, AL are in the same time zone (Central Daylight Time). Current time in both locations is 12:07 pm. Hence you might also want to know the Travel Time from Birmingham al to Selma al. This will help you estimate how much time you will spend travelling for the distance from Birmingham al to Selma al. Want to better plan this Birmingham al Selma al distance? Get to know how to Travel from Birmingham al to Selma al. This page is designed to give you a good indication of how far it is from Selma to Tuscaloosa from two perspectives, road and straight line. Calculated distances from Selma to Tuscaloosa are a guide measure only displaying the shortest distance as the crow flies, calculated via longitudinal and latitudinal points for two distinct locations on our earth. A car with an MPG of will need 3.57 gallons of gas to cover the route between Tuscaloosa, AL and Selma, AL. The estimated cost of gas to go from Tuscaloosa to Selma is $9.31. During the route, an average car will release 69.85 pounds of CO 2 to the atmosphere. Your carbon footprint is 0.91 pounds of CO 2 per mile. Answers.com ® WikiAnswers ® Categories Travel & Places Countries, States, and Cities United States of America Alabama How far is Tuscaloosa Alabama from Selma Alabama? Distance, Gas Consumption and Emission Notes. Distance from Tuscaloosa, AL to Selma, AL is 77Miles or 124 Km. You can get this distance about 1 hour 28 mins. If you want to planning travel with plane for 64 Miles or 103 Km, You can get this distance about 38 mins . A car with an average MPG will needs 3.56 gallons of gas to get the route between these points. Distance Between Cities. Route Map from Tuscaloosa, AL to Selma, AL. Optimal route map between Tuscaloosa, AL and Selma, AL. This route will be about 77 Miles. The driving route information(distance, estimated time, directions), flight route, traffic information and print the map features are placed on the top right corner of the map. The bus ride for No. 3 Georgia was about 75 minutes from its campus in Athens to the capital city. No. 4 Alabama spent less time than that in the air, flying from Tuscaloosa to what has become something of a home away from home for the Crimson Tide. Query: how far away is tuscaloosa, alabama from selma, alabama?",
"output": [
"The distance from Tuscaloosa, Alabama to Selma, Alabama is 80.1 miles."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-6f298d0bc3fd4a089819c99f130997b5",
"input": "Distance from Pensacola FL - to Eglin Afb FL We have calculated the distance in miles and kilometers between Pensacola and Eglin Afb and have shown fuel costs and where available Google maps and driving directions from Pensacola to Eglin Afb. Spartan sounds like you are at the new jsf complex North of Eglin. It is a good 10-15 min drive off of hwy 85 to get back there. Your best bet is probably Niceville. In a recent car journey from 757-761 Boxwood Drive, Pensacola, FL 32503, USA to Eglin Boulevard, Eglin AFB, FL 32542, USA these are the road travel timings for the drive The Drive Took 1 hour 10 The drive was 110 km in distance We're in the area east of Niceville (Niceville zip code, unincorporated part of the county) called Bluewater Bay that's about a 10 minute drive from the Crystal Beach area of Destin across the Mid-Bay Bridge and shorter to that for a state park and Eglin Rec. Area park on the north side of Choctaw Bay. Weapons system evaluation performance exercise @ Utah TTR to evaluate deployment of precision-guided munitions… https://t.co/HDbcRjwLuQ. We've gone mobile! The Eglin Air Force Base App is currently available for free ... You can live in Fort Walton, Navarre, Niceville, even Crestview and be within 30 miles of everything. Destin to Eglin isn't bad until summer time, then the tourists hit Okaloosa Island and accidents happen regularly that shut down one or both lanes across the Island. Do you have kids? Just you and the wife? What kind of activities do you enjoy? GATE CLOSURE NOTIFICATION: The 96th Security Forces Squadron will close the Eglin Hospital gate Feb. 15. to make fa… https://t.co/bG5IO9yVhy GATE CLOSURE NOTIFICATION: The 96th Security Forces Squadron will close the Egl... Distance, Gas Consumption and Emission Notes. Distance from Navarre, FL to Eglin AFB, FL is 26 Miles or 42 Km. You can get this distance about 43 mins. If you want to planning travel with plane for 22 Miles or 35 Km, You can get this distance about 32 mins. A car with an average MPG will needs 1.20 Gallons gallons of gas to get the route between these points. Distance, Gas Consumption and Emission Notes. Distance from Navarre, FL to Eglin AFB, FL is 25Miles or 41 Km. You can get this distance about 43 mins. If you want to planning travel with plane for 22 Miles or 35 Km, You can get this distance about 32 mins . A car with an average MPG will needs 1.16 gallons of gas to get the route between these points. The estimated cost of gas to get between Navarre, FL and Eglin AFB, FL is $2.63. During the route, an average car will release 22.73 pounds of CO 2 to the atmosphere. Your carbon footprint is 0.91 pounds of CO 2 per mile. If you scroll down the page, you'll see useful estimates for fuel consumption for your road trip to Eglin Afb and we added weather for your target destination of Eglin Afb too. Distance in miles from Pensacola United States to Eglin Afb United States. The distance as the crow flies in a straight line is is 41 miles or 65.97 Kilometers Query: how far is navarre fl from eglin afb",
"output": [
"The distance from Navarre, Florida to Eglin AFB, FLorida is 26 Miles or 42 Kilometer."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e2039588bc9646dfb0d1e3a49d9f8923",
"input": "Positioning your head so it's blood pressure is slightly reduced can help to minimize the amount of swelling that occurs. 1 The general idea is to keep your head above your heart.. 2 As opposed to lying down, sit (or recline) up right. 3 When lying down, elevate your head using 2 or 3 pillows. If you experience numbness and swelling on cheek after a molar extraction when will thickness and swelling go away and will it be before the next visit the dentist? The numbness and thickness after a molar extraction usually goes away after a few hours but could last a day or two. Usually by the next dental visit the numbness, thickness a … nd swelling should be gone if not inform your dentist. exists and is an alternate of . Two or three days minimum on up to five to seven days, providing no complications develop. The local trauma tears tissues and such, and that's all part of the process. The damage caused elicits the collection of fluids between disrupted tissue spaces - where it usually isn't present to any degree. Do’s: 1 It is normal for the area to be tender for the first few days, and in most cases simple over-the-counter pain relief is enough to ease any discomfort. 2 Go home, take it easy for the rest of the day, and don’t exercise for at least 12 to 24 hours. 3 If you still feel numb 6 hours later, call your dentist or oral surgeon! Wisdom tooth extraction: how long will it take the swelling to go down and i can talk normal again? 2 doctors responded How long does it take for mouth abscess swelling to go down? After 24 hours, ice does not help swelling. Step 2 Apply a hot compress to the sides of the face 36 hours after your surgery to reduce jaw stiffness and swelling. Ahhh!!!!! Wisdom teeth removal. I am pretty sure it must be painful to a great extent but there are some tips I can share for faster relief. (Self experienced) As you have asked about swelling, You can use ice packs in regular interval for reducing the swelling (May be 45 mins - 1 hour) . Yes swelling occurs after tooth extraction. Bite the gauze for 45 min after extraction. Apply cold packs on the wound area for a day. Rinse with Luke warm water. Hope this helps Hello, sorry to here you had so much pain with this. I just went Monday July 15th, 2013 had all my teeth pulled 28 actually.. No I did not have dentures put in yet. Will go back for that part after soreness in one spot goes away. I had one area on lower left of my face that swelled the size of a golf ball and bruised pretty bad. Bleeding after a tooth extraction is normal and slight bleeding may be noticed for up to 24 hours after surgery. Use the gauze that was provided to you, and bite down with firm pressure for one hour. You should remove the gauze gently. It may be necessary to take a sip of water to moisten the gauze if it feels stuck to the tissue. Query: how long after teeth pulled does swelling go down",
"output": [
"After teeth pulled swelling goes down in few hours to two days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c23f986bdd8841a2883fa57020be2309",
"input": "Features of C# absent in Java. 1 C# includes more primitive types and the functionality to catch arithmetic exceptions. 2 Includes a large number of notational conveniences over Java, many of which, such as operator overloading and user-defined casts, are already familiar to the large community of C++ programmers. C# namespaces are more similar to those in C++. Unlike Java, the namespace does not specify the location of the source file. (Actually, it's not strictly necessary for a Java source file location to mirror its package directory structure). C# includes delegates, whereas Java does not. Why does C# code folding differ from C++ (self.csharp) submitted 2 years ago by SalizarMarxx This has bothered me for some time but why is the C# cold folding different than say the C++ editor. I miss being able to fold on IF/switch/while... jump to content Where C# is just different from C++. value types and reference types exist (struct is value-type, class is reference-type) value types live on the stack, reference types on the heap; references can point to null (must not be valid) code is packaged in assemblies in C#; no automatic conversion from int to bool in C#; main-function is called Main in C# C#. 1 Rapid client application development. 2 High performance Server development (StackOverflow for example) that benefits from the .NET framework. 3 Applications that require the benefits of the .NET framework in the language it was designed for. Things that i like about C and miss in C++. 1 Polymorphic algorithms by using function pointers. In C, when you are running complex algorithms - some times you can use set of function pointers. 2 Simple threads. When you create threads were pthreads - it is quite simple and manageable. When it comes to comparing C# to C++, it’s important to remember that each is a language useful in its own regard, and each has strengths over the other. When it comes to comparing C# to C++, it’s important to remember that each is a language useful in its own regard, and each has strengths over the other. The difference between C#/Java and C is too big, but the differences between C#/Java and C++ are easier to pick and the most important, other than said updates to the language, are the adoption of a pure OOP approach to programming. Of course, people will complain about C# and Java, saying that it is slower than C++, particularly when using arrays. The speed tradeoff is well worth it, and in reality, is fairly minor anyway. Let C# and Java take the wheel, and ease off the gas pedal just a bit. This code has pretty much the same effect in terms of where the objects are stored as does the above C++ code - the difference is that Myclass is syntactically treated as a reference rather then a pointer. The big difference between C++ and C# is that C# doesn't allow you to Query: how does c++ and c# differ",
"output": [
"C# is just different from C++ in: 1 Value types and reference types exist, 2 Value types live on the stack, reference types on the heap, 3 References can point to null code is packaged in assemblies in C#, 4 No automatic conversion from int to bool in C#; main-function is called Main in C#."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-46de41e4646747a68bbf188904f07c3e",
"input": "-Happy Shopping from The NGC Team. 1 2 Passenger: Fits up to 90 L x 48. 2 4 Passenger: Fits up to 106 L x 48. 3 Weight of 2 Passenger Cover: 11 lbs. 4 Weight of 4 Passenger Cover: 12 lbs. 5 Warranty: 5 Years. A Club Car golf cart generally weighs between 500 and 600 pounds (or 225 to 275 kg). The weight is calculated when the golf cart is dry and does not take the additional weight of the batteries into account. A: A Club Car golf cart generally weighs between 500 and 600 pounds (or 225 to 275 kg). The weight is calculated when the golf cart is dry and does not take the additional weight of the batteries into account. We tried the Goldline cover on several different Golf Carts and found the material feels nice and strong like the manufacturer claims. The fit is very good and it’s easy to get the cover on. It’s also convenient to have zippers around the cover that allow easy access in and out of the cart without ever having to take the cover off. GOLDLINE GOLF CART COVERS - Heavy Duty Boat Cover Material / This is the strongest cover made! 1 Goldline golf cart covers are designed to satisfy even the most discriminating customers because they are simply the best storage covers on the market today. Quick Answer. A Club Car golf cart generally weighs between 500 and 600 pounds (or 225 to 275 kg). The weight is calculated when the golf cart is dry and does not take the additional weight of the batteries into account. A Club Car golf cart generally weighs between 500 and 600 pounds (or 225 to 275 kg). The weight is calculated when the golf cart is dry and does not take the additional weight of the batteries into... A Club Car golf cart generally weighs between 500 and 600 pounds (or 225 to 275 kg). The actual weight of a Club Car golf cart depends on the model and also on he engine type. A gas engine that uses a 4.6 L tank weighs more than the electric model, typically about 100 lbs. more. A top of the line gas model weighs in at 606 lbs., while the electric version of the same model weighs approximately 495 lbs. GOLDLINE Golf Cart Covers Feature: 1 Strong and flexible Tru-Weave fabric for high performance and long-lasting life. 2 Zipper panel with anti-scratch sleeves to allow easy access that prevents scratching your finish. 3 Everest Glove extended zipper pulls provide ease of use, especially on cold days. GOLDLINE GOLF CART COVERS - Heavy Duty Boat Cover Material / This is the strongest cover made! Goldline golf cart covers are designed to satisfy even the most discriminating customers because they are simply the best storage covers on the market today. Precision design and expert tailoring with the finest materials make this a high end golf cart cover that is as durable as it is beautiful. You are sure to find the perfect cover for your cart with a wide range of rich color options to choose from. Query: how heavy is a golf cart",
"output": [
"A Club Car golf cart generally weighs between 500 and 600 pounds or 225 to 275 kg."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-464367b0d1354e8a9a92a48623138d2c",
"input": "Learn if you should buy theme park tickets in advance for Walt Disney World Resort in Florida. You may book your dining reservations up to 180 days in advance, and I highly recommend that you do so if you want to dine at any particular restaurants. There are a few that actually book up 180 days in advance and people flood the phone lines to book. Cinderella's Royal table is a Prime example. Share the Magic: 1 Click to share on Facebook (Opens in new window) 2 Click to share on Twitter (Opens in new window) 3 Click to share on Pinterest (Opens in new window) 4 Click to share on Google+ (Opens in new window) 5 Click to share on Tumblr (Opens in new window) 6 Click to share on Reddit (Opens in new window) Important Dates to Remember When Booking Your Walt Disney World Vacation Package. 1 With a Walt Disney World vacation on your horizon, keeping track of important booking windows, reservations and customization deadlines may at times feel like a full-time job. On the other hand those going in Fall of 2017 will be able to jump in early and book their holiday a generous 16 months in advance. Those hoping to book airfare as part of their Walt Disney World package should also take note that flights aren’t bookable through Disney until 330 days in advance. Guests do have the option of booking their hotel and tickets and adding on flights at the 330 day mark. For assistance with your Walt Disney World visit, please call (407) 939-5277. 7:00 AM to 11:00 PM Eastern Time. Guests under 18 years of age must have parent or guardian permission to call. How far in advance should I book a Disney Cruise Line vacation? Advance booking is the best way to get a great price and your choice of available staterooms. A. Yes. While you can purchase theme park tickets once you arrive at Walt Disney World Resort, we do recommend that you buy tickets in advance. To make your vacation planning as easy as possible, we suggest one of our Magic Your Way vacation packages, which include both your Disney Resort hotel stay and theme park admission. You can also customize these flexible packages to include airfare, transportation options and a Disney dining plan. Question: How far in advance can I book my trip to Disney World? Answer: Is there a Walt Disney World Holiday in your slightly distant future? Are you waiting eagerly to book your holiday for 2017 onward? If you’re a forward planner like me, its good to know how soon in advance you can actually start planning your trip to the Mouse. Here are the ins and outs of making advance reservations at Disney World. When it comes to Walt Disney World resort rooms they can be purchased up to 499 days in advance. This is good news for those who plan on staying on property but who don’t want to commit to booking a whole package. Walt Disney World vacation packages are also available 499 days in advance technically. The only catch is that Disney doesn’t always release them within that window for instance, packages for 2017 are due to go on sale June 21, 2016. If you have little kids and want them to go to the character breakfasts and stuff then I would say 6 months is a good amount of time. Also where you want to stay is another factor. If you want to stay on Disney property then I would book a room around 6 months in advance to make sure you get exactly what you want. Query: how long in advance should you book disney world",
"output": [
"You should book disney world 16 months in advance."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-5f7d5c836b0d471e9a635add233c699c",
"input": "Testing for the presence of proteins - Biuret test . Show students the available foods for testing. Ask them which ones they expect to contain protein. Demonstrate to students how to perform the test. Put a food item containing protein into a test tubes (i.e. milk or tofu). If it is not a liquid, add some water and mash it well. Also set up a control, a test tube containing a liquid that does not contain protein (i.e. water). Add about 2ml of Biuret reagent to the test tube. 1. If the food to be tested is liquid, go to 2. If the food to be tested is solid, make an extract. Grind crush or chop a small amount and put into a test tube to a depth of about 2cm. Add a similar amount of distilled water and stir with a glass rod. Allow to stand for a few minutes. 2. Draw up some of the clear liquid into a pipette and then First, prepare test solution by grinding vitamin C reagent tablet into a powder using a mortar and pestle or back of a spoon. Pour powder into dropper bottle and add 30ml (1 oz.) of distilled water. If testing more than one liquid, label each test tube with a marker. Fill each with 50 drops of blue vitamin C indicator solution. Nutrient solutions to be tested (made from foods you wish to test for sugar, starch, protein, fat, and vitamin C content). Food Test 1: Sugar test-Benedict's solution Benedict's solution is used to test for simple sugars, such as glucose. Put different food solutions in each cup, e.g. corn starch in water, flour in water, milk, and water. Using the dropper, add a drop or two of the iodine solution to each cup. Place a slice of a potato on a paper towel atop a paper plate and add a drop of the iodine solution to the potato slice. Note the color change. Place foods in separate test tubes. ‐ if the food is liquid, pour enough to just cover the bottom of the glass. ‐ If the food is solid (e.g., banana, apple, potato chips), crush a small amount and add. enough water to cover the bottom of the tube. Iodine test for starch the most followed method to analyze the presence of starch in the given food material. When iodine solution is mixed with starch it turns from brown to dark blue. As this happens with very small amounts of starch, iodine test is a sensitive one. Testing for starch. Glucose is sweet and dissolves in water while starch is not sweet and does not dissolve well in water. A further test to distinguish starch from glucose is to shine a beam of light through ‘solutions’ of each. This is also called the Tyndall Beam Effect. Dispersal only happens in starch as the large starch molecules are big enough to affect the light. This is a physical test. A chemical test for starch is to add iodine solution (red) and see if it turns blue/black in colour. It is possible to distinguish starch from other carbohydrates using this iodine solution test. For example, if iodine is added to an peeled potato then it will turn black. You could demonstrate the effect of iodine solution on starch by adding a few drops of solution to a starch powder or starch suspension in a boiling tube. You can then discuss the fact that this colour change might be hard to see in a dark green leaf until the chlorophyll is removed. The iodine turned from a red/yellow colour to a blue-black colour. The iodine turned from a red/yellow colour in certain places to a blue-black colour, where starch is stored. The iodine turned from a red/yellow colour to a blue-black colour. Query: how do you test for starch in a food",
"output": [
"Put different food solutions in each cup, e.g. corn starch in water, flour in water, milk, and water. Using the dropper, add a drop or two of the iodine solution to each cup. Place a slice of a potato on a paper towel atop a paper plate and add a drop of the iodine solution to the potato slice. Note the color change."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-954652a8c83e461586969353609e67e9",
"input": "According to the USDA: Storage Conditions: Lettuce should be quickly cooled and maintained as close to 0 °C (32 °F) as possible with 98 to 100% RH. Head types are better adapted to prolong storage than are the other types, but none keep longer than 4 weeks, and about half that time at 5 °C (41 °F). Squeeze the air out and close the bag. 5. The lettuce can now be stored in the fridge & should stay fresh at least a couple of weeks. You can take out what you need whenever you want to make a salad or sandwich & then just reseal the bag. Read more: http://pinchmysalt.com/a-recipe-for-keeping-lettuce-fresh-and-crisp/ [...] How long does lettuce last? Use our food expiration tables, tips and FAQs to get the maximum shelf life of your lettuce. I wash all my greens (except iceberg lettuce) when I get them home. I separate the leaves and let them sit in a sinkful of cool water for 5 minutes or so. Then I rinse them well and drain well. I wrap them in a clean kitchen towel or paper towels and put into a plastic bag, closing the bag good. Then I store it in the vegetable drawer in the fridge. It usually lasts a good week. For iceberg lettuce I ususally try to wash it at least a couple of hours before I use it by removing the core and letting cool water run into the head. Let it drain for a few minutes, then wrap it in paper towels and put in a plastic bag, then into the fridge to crisp for a couple of hours. It gets really nice and crispy. The Problem: Sad, Wilted Lettuce. Turns out that wilted lettuce is a common problem — especially when buying tender greens like mesclun and spring mix. No one wants to have to pick through gross leaves or toss out a bag just a few days after purchase. Our readers chimed in on their favorite ways to keep lettuce fresh in this post. Read the post: How Do I Keep Salad Greens Fresh? We Tested Three Methods. After looking at all the advice, I decided to buy a large bag of mesclun to test out three different methods that supposedly keep lettuce fresh. It is a lot cheaper to buy a couple heads of lettuce than the pre-washed stuff, but the pre-washed is more conveinent and lasts longer than just a head of lettuce. Oh yeah, I am talking about iceberg lettuce. My ideal time would be to prepare it on a sunday night and have it last through friday. Dan The Produce Man from Dan's Fresh Produce in Alameda, CA tells us how we can keep lettuce fresh for 3 to 4 weeks in the refrigerator. Dan The Produce Man from Dan's Fresh Produce in Alameda, CA tells us how we can keep lettuce fresh for 3 to 4 weeks in the refrigerator. Category Entertainment Washing lettuce may win as my most hated kitchen task. But if I wash the lettuce right when I get home (I use a spinner, but you can also just spread it out on the counter), place it in one layer on a kitchen towel, and then roll it up into a kitchen towel-lettuce spiral (see above), each leaf stays unimaginably crisp and fresh in the vegetable drawer for up to a week. Put your lettuce into a nice big bowl, and drape a paper towel or two over the top so moisture doesn't settle on the leaves while your salad sits in the fridge. Cover the whole thing with a really tight seal of plastic wrap, and store. A little salt and pepper or seasoning can punch up the flavor—as long as you add it before serving! Usually sellers hold the lettuce at room temperature during the hours of sale (to show to buyers) and place them in the refrigerator in the night. But attention. The supermarkets assemble the heads under plastic films (as said), which retain moisture, and daily keep them anyway in departments fresh. Query: how long does romaine lettuce keep in the refrigerator",
"output": [
"You can keep romaine lettuce fresh for 3 to 4 weeks in the refrigerator."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-38750aa899f848dbaed90aa5233fe700",
"input": "Full FMCSA Regulation 396.11 Compliance. The RAIR DVIR management and auditing service addresses requirements of FMCSA regulation 396.11: Driver vehicle inspection report(s). It helps ensure your full compliance with regard to required reports, report content, corrective action, and the retention period for reports. A medical certificate is issued by a medical professional stating that you are physically qualified to operate a commercial motor vehicle. The medical certificate is normally good for two years but may be issued for a shorter period of time if certain medical conditions exist. As of May 21, 2014, the medical examiner must be part of the National Registry of Certified Medical Examiners . The carrier needs to keep the DVIR's for 90 days. My guess is after the audit, they have someone telling them they need to do this. Did they get a fine because of it? Question 24: How would the DVIR requirements apply to a driver who works two or more shifts in a single calendar day? Guidance: Section 396.11(a) requires every driver to prepare a DVIR at the completion of each day’s work on each vehicle operated. The original DVIR must be kept for three months from the date it was prepared. Drivers are no longer required to carry DVIRs in the vehicle. Back to Vehicle Inspections & Maintenance Main Page Shop Forms & Labels View Training Encompass Fleet Management System Order Manual Store These Documents Forever. 1 These documents should be stored forever: 2 Academic Records - Diplomas, transcripts and any portfolio work that may be used in the future when applying for a job. 3 Adoption Papers. 4 Baptismal Certificates. 5 Birth Certificates. 6 Death Certificates - May be needed for tax purposes. 7 Driver's Licenses. Only official editions of the Federal Register provide legal notice to the public and judicial notice to the courts under 44 U.S.C. 1503 & 1507. Learn more here. Public Inspection As a basis for its decision, the U.S. Department of Transportation noted that approximately 95% of all DVIR’s completed list “No Defects” and that this change would save the industry an estimated $1.7 billion annually without compromising safety. o Standard DVIR Inspection book will be using is JJ Keller / Product Code: 015-B or 115-B, 2 part carbon or carbonless. Which can be obtained by going to EMAIL or the books are available through the Storeroom. o Completed DVIR Books (Yellow Copy) must be kept, until completed, in the vehicle or at the local district. Once the inspection book is completed and all the original (white / top Maintenance records for a company’s vehicles must be kept for at least 12 months. If a company leases or sells a vehicle, those records must be kept for whichever occurs first: a) the remaining time left of the 12 months, or b) 6 months from when the vehicle leaves the company’s control. Query: how long to keep dvir",
"output": [
"The original DVIR must be kept for three months from the date it was prepared."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7646f8adb2f74843a8d79269f1c345fc",
"input": "Types of Poetry Examples Learning about the different types of poetry is often easier when you review examples of the different types. Each example gives you the opportunity to see the differences between the style and tone of each type. Examples Of Chronemics. social sciences and humanities. Many ethnomusicological works are created not necessarily by 'ethnomusicologists' proper, but instead by anthropologists examining music as an aspect of a culture. A well-known example of such work is Colin Turnbull's study of the Mbuti pygmies. Chronemics is the study of how time affects communication. It is used to understand the use of time in differing cultures, its effect on technology and time... Chronemics is the study of how time affects communication. It is used to understand the use of time in differing cultures, its effect on technology and time management. Chronemics is a focus of anthropological studies in terms of how time affects different cultures. Many Western cultures have developed a monochronic view of time, meaning that they focus on sequential completion of tasks and are highly conscious of time. Examples Of Chronemics social sciences and humanities. Many ethnomusicological works are created not necessarily by 'ethnomusicologists' proper, but instead by anthropologists examining music as an aspect of a culture. How do you say lughaidh in English correctly, listen audio pronunciation of lughaidh, we are contributing audio voices, sentences, synonyms, meanings for lughaidh. How do you say lughaidh in English correctly, listen audio pronunciation of lughaidh, we are contributing audio voices, sentences, synonyms, meanings for lughaidh. Share it on Facebook Twitter Google + Chronemics is the study of how time affects communication. It is used to understand the use of time in differing cultures, its effect on technology and time... Star Gazing Examples Of Chronemics Essays and Research Papers. 1 Examples Of Chronemics social sciences and humanities. 2 example the Laws of Supply and Demand The simulation in the text is about a small city by the name of Atlantis. 3 Example 2: Allowing free trade between countries can be beneficial, but it also imposes costs. Do you believe you should built rapport with students? If yes how? Yes, by being good example to them. 7. How do you handle a student who seems gifted, but is a discipline problem? I know a lot of students who are seems gifted but w/ discipline problem, and it is easy to deal with because all I have to do is to recognized the student... How do you pronounce lughaidh in English? Pronunciation of lughaidh in English, a free online verbalizing English dictionary. We are to pronounce lughaidh by audio dictionary. Examples Of Chronemics Essays and Research Papers. Examples Of Chronemics social sciences and humanities. Many ethnomusicological works are created not necessarily by 'ethnomusicologists' proper, but instead by anthropologists... examining music as an aspect of a culture. A well-known example of such work is Colin Turnbull's study of the Mbuti pygmies. Query: how do you say chronemics",
"output": [
"Chronemics is the study of how time affects communication. It is used to understand the use of time in differing cultures, its effect on technology and time management."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8dddc9c46fe2491e85f9faf7bf26a536",
"input": "How many years do you have left until retirement? The more years you have until retirement, the less you will have to save each month to reach your goal. No matter your age, for every 10 years you delay starting to save for retirement, you need to save 3 times as much each month to catch up. How long will you live in retirement? Based on current estimates, a 65 year old man can expect to live approximately 18 years in retirement, and a 65 year old woman can expect to live about 20 years, but many people live longer. Planning to live well into your 90s can help you avoid outliving your income. The worksheet takes into account some factors that impact your retirement savings. Here are your basic choices: 1 Do nothing. 2 Roll your assets over into a plan offered by a new employer, if you have one. 3 Cash out your account and use the money to pay for the transition from your job to whatever is next for you. 4 Roll the account into an IRA. However, you must withdraw your entire balance (or begin receiving monthly payments from the TSP or from the TSP annuity vendor) by April 1 of the year following the year you turn 70½ (or following the year you separate, if you are already over age 70½ when you leave Federal service). When you retire from federal service or you separate from government for any other reason, loans from your TSP program come due. The loan has to be paid back within 90 days of your separation. If you don't pay it back, the TSP will treat the money that isn't repaid as a distribution and you will have to pay taxes on it. For years you have been contributing to the Thrift Savings Plan (TSP), building your retirement savings. After you leave federal service, have you considered what you should do with your TSP savings? You could choose one or any combination of these options: Leave your money in TSP. Withdraw all or some of your TSP funds. Purchase an annuity. There is one withdrawal option available with TSP that is not available with an IRA. If you leave federal service after you turn 55, but before you are 59 ½, you can withdraw money without the 10% early withdrawal penalty you would incur with an IRA. If you left federal service before you turned 55, or you transfer your TSP account to an IRA, there is a 10% penalty for most funds withdrawn prior to age 59 ½. There are number of issues to consider when deciding what to do with your TSP when you retire. Downsides of TSP Participation. 1 Less Take Home Pay. The fact is, contributing to the TSP will decrease your take-home pay. However, when you factor in agency contributions and tax benefits, the downside may not be as extreme as you think. 2 Limited Fund Choices. Contributing as much as you can to TSP retirement coverage is simply a smart financial move. Invest money in yourself and your future instead of giving the government an interest free loan in order to get back a large refund check annually after taxes. In addition, you are double-taxed on the interest – you repay the loan with after-tax dollars, and the funds are taxed again when you withdraw. However, if you want to borrow from a TSP to pay off bills, there a few things you will have to remember. Determine Eligibility To apply for a loan from your TSP account, you must be an active employee of the federal government or a uniformed military member and you must be in pay status. As a retiree, you have three options for Basic coverage: 1 75% Reduction: Monthly cost before age 65 = $.325 per $1,000 of Basic Insurance Amount (BIA); after age 65 = $0. 2 50% Reduction: Monthly cost before age 65 = $.925 per $1,000 of BIA; after age 65 = $.60 per $1,000. Query: how long after you retire do you have to pay off your tsp loan",
"output": [
"The loan has to be paid back within 90 days of your separation."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4b445bbeb42a4eff893a6b55dc0a4d03",
"input": "causes mass destruction. A submarine or offshore volcanic eruption can produce high magnitude lifts on seafloors, which pushes large water columns upwards to generate tsunami. Submarine volcanoes can be detected by the presence of high rock content and steam above water surface. Maps / Tsunami / How Do Volcanic Eruptions Generate Tsunamis How Do Volcanic Eruptions Generate Tsunamis Primarily a tsunami is generated when any natural or artificial force disturbs large volume of water particularly or largely in vertical direction through sea floor. These submarine volcanoes form high slope pillars over their craters as compared to their on surface counterparts, which is due to the rapid cooling effect of water and buoyancy. The process of tsunami generation in such cases can be understood through the concept of phreatomagmatic eruption. Such an eruption is an explosive interaction between water and magma, which produces fine grained tephra with the emission of magmatic gases and steam. Volcanoes and tsunami generation. Volcanic eruptions can also produce tsunamis. The rules are similar to the rules for earthquakes. In order for a volcano to produce a tsunami you need: 1. A volcano near the coast. 2. An eruption that sends a large enough volume of material into the water to displace a significant volume of water. If a large eruption sends a great volume of material into the water, it creates the vertical disturbance necessary to make a tsunami. Volcanic eruptions could generate tsunami by more than one method, but only volcanoes sitting in water or beside larger body of water. 1 Tremors. 2 Landslide. 3 Explosion of the caldera. Tsunamis are generated by abrupt massive movements (changes) in the sea floor. An eruption of a volcano in or adjacent to the sea may be accompanied by earthquakes, and an earthquake may move the sea floor sufficiently to generate a tsunami. A second possible way for a volcano to create a tsunami might be due to a landslide from the side of a volcano. Such a mass movement of material into the sea would also displace water, and could generate a tsunami. Additionally, sometimes volcanoes explode violently, and that mass movement of material could also create a tsunami. One example is a tsunami expected to be caused by a future eruption of a volcano on La Palma in the Canary Islands. The last eruption caused deep faults in the West side of the volcano slope, which is expected to slide into the Atlantic ocean in a future eruption and generate a mega tsunami. Print. If we are going to attempt to assess the risk of a tsunami at some particular place on the planet, we must first understand how to make a tsunami. Earthquakes and volcanoes generate the great majority of tsunamis, and the theory of plate tectonics explains the cause of earthquakes and volcanoes. So, we'll start with the world's briefest review of plate tectonics. Plate tectonics is the Grand Unifying Theory of geosciences, but it's actually not that old. How Do Volcanic Eruptions Generate Tsunamis. Primarily a tsunami is generated when any natural or artificial force disturbs large volume of water particularly or largely in vertical direction through sea floor. These water waves have very high frequency and very small wavelengths in onshore areas, which. There are three distinct types of plate boundaries, shown illustrated by the drawing below both as separate block diagrams as well as situated within their appropriate geologic environment. 1 At transform boundaries, two plates slide past each other. 2 At divergent boundaries, plates move away from each other. Query: how does a volcano create a tsunami",
"output": [
"An eruption of a volcano in or adjacent to the sea may be accompanied by earthquakes, and an earthquake may move the sea floor sufficiently to generate a tsunami."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-64df17b5c56a4360959b166e5857c143",
"input": "While this method of bidding can be a good academic exercise, it can consume a great deal of time (new paperwork must be executed for each subsequent offer) and it can be disappointing if another buyer's bid is accepted before you find the lowest net return to HUD. The U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development is the FHA's parent agency and it offers many homes for bid purchase. HUD homes range in condition from very poor to excellent, and all come with clean titles free of past liens. HUD also uses a specific process to determine the final bid price it will accept on one of its homes. HUD Home Pricing When HUD takes a home into its inventory it has a HUD-approved real estate appraiser go through it. HUD expects higher offers for newer listings, although bids on new listings can be lower than the list price. If you find a home you want to bid on that has been listed for 90 days or longer, HUD might accept less than 85 percent of the listed price. We suggest that you submit a reasonable, but low offer first â say 65% of asking price. If there are no other bidders, HUD will counter with a number they will accept. The counter offer HUD sends out is the NET amount they will accept, so you have to add the Determining the Minimum Acceptable Bid for a HUD Home. by Mike on November 2, 2007. In order to buy a HUD home, your offer has to meet two criteria. First, your offered price has to beat your competition. Second, your offer must meet the super-secret HUD minimum acceptable bid. If the home has been listed for three months or more, you will have more bargaining power. The low-ball offer is a safer strategy in this scenario. If the listing is new on the market, HUD will generally accept 85 - 88 percent of the list price as net proceeds to HUD. This means if you offer an amount that allows them to net more than 85 percent of the listing price, there's a good chance they'll accept your offer. See the 88 percent strategy below. At that time, when a property first hit the HUD list, the minimum bid was 87% of list price. However, the minimum bid dropped to 80% after 60 days. Which brings us to the second point–the minimum bid is a function of time on the market. When the housing market hit the skids, the HUD minimum bid calculation changed. By the time that Rob and I bought The Loft (click here for the name explanation), the How can I buy a HUD home? Answer: Read our section on how to buy a HUD home. Then look at the listings of HUD homes available. If you find a home that interests you, you'll need to contact a HUD-approved real estate broker (most brokers are HUD-approved), who can submit a bid for you. Successful bids are posted right on the page for your state. For more information, you may also contact our FHA Resource Center by email at answers@hud.gov or by phone at (800) CALLFHA. For insured homes: 1 15 day owner occupant, government agencies, and non-profit only bid period. The first ten days of this bid period HUD collects all the bids and subsequently reviews them on the next business day. Thereafter for the next five days, HUD reviews any bids received the following day. HUD allows your agent to put up to 5% commission you have to agree to that. So if the listing price is $100,000 HUD will allow basically $83,000 net to them. Ok you have $3,000 agent commission and probably and figure 1% for closing fees to be safe. If you ask for HUD to pay any of your closing cost that come out of the net. Query: how low of a bid will hud accept?",
"output": [
"If you find a home you want to bid on that has been listed for 90 days or longer, HUD might accept less than 85 percent of the listed price."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-16e85a607eef4b67add66af89969d8e5",
"input": "Adjustment of Status – I-140 Based – FAQ. Adjustment of Status – I-140 Based – Frequently Asked Questions: How long does it take for the Work Permit to be issued after we file the petition with USCIS? The Work Permit is usually issued 90 days after the petition is filed with USCIS. What is Advance Parole? A non-Malaysian worker must not be in Singapore at the time of work permit application. If this is the first time you are applying for a Work Permit, you need to declare your business activity. You should also refer to the requirements for Work Permit. The duration of the Work Permit is usually 2 years, but it may be shorter depending on: This action affects approximately 2,100 3-year DACA work permits mistakenly issued after the court order. It also affects approximately 500 3-year DACA work permits that were issued before the court order, returned to USCIS as undeliverable and then re-mailed to updated addresses after the court order. USCIS issues US Work Permits (Employment Authorization Documents or EADs) in the following categories: 1 EAD: This document proves you are allowed to work in the United States. 2 Renewal EAD: You should apply for a renewal Employment Authorization Document / US Work Permit six months before your original EAD expires. The school shall retain a copy of the work permit application (CDE Form B1-1) and the work permit (CDE Form B1-4) until the end of the fourth year after the work permit was issued. Those files may be retained on a computer disk(s) and, if requested, can be printed for examination (EC Section 41020; 5 CCR Section 16026). Note that not everyone who has a right to work in the United States needs to apply for a work permit. For example, most people admitted to the U.S. on temporary work visas for specific employers, such as H-1B visas, need not (and should not) apply for an EAD. They can go straight to Social Security and get a card. Who Can Apply for a Work Permit If you are still eligible for employment authorization but your EAD will be expiring or has expired, you should file for a renewal EAD by submitting a new Form I-765 and filing fee (if required), unless a fee waiver is requested and approved. Generally, you should not file for a renewal EAD more than 180 days before your original EAD expires. Once USCIS receives your 3-year work permit, we will issue you a Confirmation of Compliance notice: 1 Canceling the Notice of Intent to Terminate and. 2 Confirming your 2-year deferred action and employment authorization. U.S. citizens may sponsor for permanent residence in the United States the following relatives: 1 Spouses, and unmarried children under the age of 21; 2 Parents (once the U.S. citizen is at least 21 years old); 3 Unmarried children over the age of 21 (called sons and daughters); 4 Married sons and daughters; Just to give you an example of times, I just had a similar case approved this week in San Diego, at the Chula Vista field office, that I submitted the first week of November. So it took just under 3 months for the permanent residency to be approved, and they received the employment authorization a couple weeks prior. I have another case that I submitted the first week of January in Santa Ana, CA, that just received an interview for the first week of March. Query: how long does a ins work permit is issued for?",
"output": [
"The Work Permit is usually issued 90 days after the petition is filed with USCIS."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-cc4c1ff7f5134d349652705a054d2532",
"input": "Most employers will hold personal data such as CVs, interview notes etc.. You’d ideally want to hold this information for maybe 6 months as unsuccessful applicants have 3 months (can be extended to 6 months) in which to bring a discrimination claim against your business should they wish – and you need to use this data to defend any potential claim. Period of Limitations that apply to income tax returns. 1 Keep records for 3 years if situations (4), (5), and (6) below do not apply to you. 2 Keep records for 3 years from the date you filed your original return or 2 years from the date you paid the tax, whichever is later, if you file a claim for credit or refund after you file your return. Keep records for 7 years if you file a claim for a loss from worthless securities or bad debt deduction. Keep records for 6 years if you do not report income that you should report, and it is more than 25% of the gross income shown on your return. Keep records indefinitely if you do not file a return. Keep records indefinitely if you file a fraudulent return. Keep employment tax records for at least 4 years after the date that the tax becomes due or is paid, whichever is later. The following questions should be applied to each record as you decide whether to keep a document or throw it away. You’ll need to consider both your legal and business requirements when deciding how long to keep data. If your employee data is being stored off site in a third party system you might want to download an archive of that employees file which you can store on site, rather than maintaining and paying for it for 6 years. For employers who wish to adopt a voluntary record destruction program, some general guidelines are as follows: 1 Records relating to employee benefits and benefit determinations - keep for at least six years beyond final payment under the particular benefit program. As you can see, there is no steadfast rule on how long to keep data for and so you should try to keep to the spirit of the Data Protection Act 1998 which says that you must not keep data any longer than is necessary for a specific purpose. The ADEA requires the retention of the same records for one year for employers with twenty or more employees. Title VII and the ADA require that basic employee demographic data, pay rates, and weekly compensation records be retained for at least one year. Family and Medical Leave Act (FMLA): The length of time you should keep a document depends on the action, expense, or event which the document records. Generally, you must keep your records that support an item of income, deduction or credit shown on your tax return until the period of limitations for that tax return runs out. The How Long Must Employers Retain Employee Records? Last month's bulletin addressed the need to retain various employee records. Since we received a couple e-mails asking how long these records must be kept, we thought that would be a good topic for this month's bulletins. Naturally, there is no single answer. The length of time you must keep the records depends on the type of records involved. Fair Labor Standards Act (FLSA): Under the FLSA, the record-keeping requirements are either two years or three years depending on the type of record involved: Only HR staff and few individuals should have access to these files. Keep for at least three years after the employee leaves the organization. Workers compensation is generally kept on file for the life of the employee or former employee. I-9 forms - Keep I-9 forms separate and in a locked file area. If you want to keep CVs on file for future opportunities you’ll need to notify the applicant of why and how long you plan to keep it for and let them know that they can object to the information being held. Data such as their personal records, performance appraisals, employment contract etc… should be held on to for 6 years after they have left. Query: how far back should i keep an employee file?",
"output": [
"Keep employment tax records for at least 4 years after the date that the tax."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-76b831993d194164b3f476e7df6b5aa0",
"input": "Use the applicator brush attached to the bottle cap to apply ciclopirox topical solution evenly to all affected nails. Also apply the solution to the underside of the nail and the skin beneath it if you can reach these areas. Wipe off the bottle cap and neck and replace the cap tightly on the bottle. The following symptoms are uncommon, but if you experience any of them, call your doctor immediately: 1 irritation, itching, burning, blistering, swelling, or oozing at the place where you applied ciclopirox. 2 pain at the affected nail(s) or surrounding area. 3 discoloration or change in shape of nail(s) 4 ingrown nail(s) How does this medication work? What will it do for me? Ciclopirox belongs to the group of medications known as antifungals. It works by preventing certain types of fungus from growing and reproducing. The cream and lotion form of this medication are used to treat certain types of fungal infections of the skin. It is usually applied once a day. To help you remember to use ciclopirox, apply it around the same time every day, usually at bedtime. Follow the directions on your prescription label carefully, and ask your doctor or pharmacist to explain any part you do not understand. Use ciclopirox exactly as directed. Do not use more or less of it or use it more often than prescribed by your doctor. Ciclopirox is used to improve the condition of nails, but may not completely cure nail fungus. It may take 6 months or longer before you notice that your nails are getting better. Continue to use ciclopirox daily as directed. Do not stop using ciclopirox without talking to your doctor. Ciclopirox topical solution will work best if you trim your nails regularly during your treatment. You should remove all loose nail or nail material using a nail clipper or nail file before you begin treatment and every week during your treatment. Your doctor will show you how to do this. Depending on your specific circumstances, your doctor may want you to: 1 stop taking one of the medications, 2 change one of the medications to another, 3 change how you are taking one or both of the medications, or. 4 leave everything as is. Apo-Ciclopirox: Ciclopirox belongs to the group of medications known as antifungals. It works by preventing certain types of fungus from growing and reproducing. The cream and lotion form of this medication are used to treat certain types of fungal infections of the skin. Ciclopirox (Penlac is the brand name) is a topical nail polish used for the treatment of mild to moderate nail fungus. It just doesn’t work very well resulting in cure only 7% of the time. Medicated chest rub (Vicks VapoRub) has some data looking at its effectiveness. Do not use nail polish or other nail cosmetic products on nails treated with ciclopirox topical solution. Do not take a bath, shower, or swim for at least 8 hours after applying ciclopirox topical solution. Ciclopirox topical solution may catch fire. Do not use this medication near heat or an open flame, such as a cigarette. Do not use this medication in the eyes or in the vagina. Store the cream or lotion at room temperature and keep it out of the reach of children. Shampoo: Ciclopirox shampoo is generally used 2 or 3 times a week, or as often as recommended by your doctor. Wet hair and apply enough shampoo to work up an abundant lather. Massage the scalp with your fingertips for 2 to 3 minutes, then rinse the hair well. Repeat lathering and rinsing. To use ciclopirox topical solution, follow these steps: 1 Be sure that you have trimmed your nails properly before your first treatment. 2 Use the applicator brush attached to the bottle cap to apply ciclopirox topical solution evenly to all affected nails. more information... Query: how does ciclopirox work",
"output": [
"Ciclopirox belongs to the group of medications known as antifungals. It works by preventing certain types of fungus from growing and reproducing. The cream and lotion form of this medication are used to treat certain types of fungal infections of the skin."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-06c84b18ba0048bcb70aa28b29b1d4de",
"input": "These tenets have political as well as operational significance. SOF is a very mature force. The average age in a SEAL platoon is 28; for a Special Forces A-team, 32. It takes three years or more to train a new man for duty, and many more years before he becomes an impact player in that unit. It is a business in which talent and experience count. Established by President John F. Kennedy in 1962, the Navy SEALs are a nimble, elite maritime military force suited for all aspects of unconventional warfare. In this role, you will provide immediate military options amidst crises around the world. Your duties as a SEAL may include and are not limited to: · just now. Your fine as far as age goes but you do not get 75k, you get 40k upon graduation from SQT, that is about a year plus after you start BUD/S. The average age used to be in the early 20's, not so much anymore, mid to late 20's is the average age now, alot of kids are doing it after college (as enlisted guys). Also, the SEALs are going to High Schools, Colleges, X-Games, Wrestling Tournaments, etc..to do direct recruiting for the teams due to the huge push by SOCOM to get more SEALs. From all my friends who had become SEAL's when I was in, most didn't get into the training program right out of Boot Camp, but instead were accepted into the program after two of three years of active duty. Having been stationed with the seals for several years, the average age seemed to be about 21/22 years. And no, I was not a SEAL. You might be lucky and a current member might respond with a more accurate answer, but in the meantime, I hope this helps. Say the SEALs: Gaps exist in minority representation in both officer and enlisted ranks for Special Warfare operators. Diverse officers represent only ten percent of the officer pool (for example, African Americans represent less than 2% of SEAL officers). Diverse enlisted SEALs account for less than twenty percent of the total SEAL enlisted population. SEAL Teams. NSW has eight Navy SEAL Teams. The odd-numbered Teams (1, 3, 5 and 7) work for Group ONE in Coronado, CA, and 2, 4, 8, and 10 for Group TWO in Little Creek, VA. A SEAL Team is commanded by a Navy Commander (O-5) and is composed of a HQS element and eight operational 16-man SEAL Platoons. Though Navy SEALs are usually more experienced service members, the typical graduate of SEAL qualification training is 19 to 23 years old, said Lt. Cmdr. Fred Kuebler of U.S. Special Operations Command in Tampa, Fla. NSWG-3 is based in Coronado, CA. It commands SEAL Delivery Vehicle Team 1 (SDVT-1) in Pearl Harbor, Hawaii, and SEAL Delivery Vehicle Team 2 (SDVT-2) in Little Creek, VA. This Major Command has worldwide NSW undersea mobility responsibility. Naval Special Warfare Group FOUR. NSWG-4 is based in Little Creek, VA. There appeared to be a lot of guys in their early/mid/Later 20's making it much later in the training (post hell week). Is that an accurate representation of the average BUD/s prospect? I know the official Navy site says 18-28, and 29-30 with age... show more I watched the documentary on the Discovery Channel about BUD/s. There appeared to be a lot of guys in their early/mid/Later 20's making it much later in the training (post hell week). Is that an accurate representation of the average BUD/s prospect? I know the official Navy site says 18-28, and 29-30 with age waivers. Each SEAL Team is commanded by a Navy Commander (O-5), and has a number of operational SEAL platoons and a headquarters element. A SEAL Team has a Staff Headquarters element and three 40-man Troops. Query: average age of seal team member",
"output": [
"The average age of Seal team member is 21 or 22 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ad61d44e14b14c22ad921e27a48707b9",
"input": "Quick Guide Symptoms of Mono: Infectious Mononucleosis Treatment What tests do health care professionals use to diagnose infectious mono? The diagnosis of mono is suspected by the doctor based on the above symptoms and signs. Mononucleosis, or mono, has a wide range of symptoms, which can make it hard to diagnose. You’ll need to see your doctor to find out if you have it. Your doctor will give you a complete physical exam. You may get a throat culture to rule out strep throat, which has symptoms that are similar to mono. Your doctor may also take a sample of blood to check for abnormal white blood cells. You may also get a heterophile antibody test. It checks your blood for special antibodies that your body makes to fight off a viral infection. Your physician will start by taking a complete medical history, and will then perform a physical exam to see if there are any signs of infection. If mono is suspected, the doctor will order a blood test, known as a heterophil or monospot test, to confirm the diagnosis. Are blood tests always definitive? The monospot test is not perfect. Infectious mononucleosis is a contagious illness sometimes called mono. Learn about its symptoms, transmission, diagnosis, prevention, and treatment. Skip directly to search Skip directly to A to Z list Skip directly to navigation Skip directly to page options Skip directly to site content If you have heterophile antibodies in your blood, then your monospot test is positive.. A positive monospot test accompanied by the symptoms of mono results in a diagnosis of infectious mononucleosis. However, monospot tests can be false-positive, about 10-15% of the time, particularly in early stages of the illness. Serological tests take longer time than the heterophile antibody test, but are more accurate. Physical examination The presence of an enlarged spleen, and swollen posterior cervical, axillary, and inguinal lymph nodes are the most useful to suspect a diagnosis of infectious mononucleosis. Serious complications are uncommon, occurring in less than 5% of cases: 1 CNS complications include meningitis, encephalitis, hemiplegia, Guillain–Barré syndrome, and transverse myelitis. Prior infectious mononucleiosis has been linked to the development of multiple sclerosis (MS). If the mono test is persistently negative, a test specific for EBV antibodies may be used to help confirm or rule out the presence of an EBV infection. A strep test may also be ordered along with a mono test to determine whether a person's sore throat is due to strep throat (group A streptococcal infection) instead of or in addition to mononucleosis. Best Answer: Mono tests include: Monospot test (heterophil test). This quick screening test detects a recent mono infection. A sample of blood is placed on a microscope slide and mixed with other substances. If mono is present, the blood clumps (agglutinates). Monospot testing can usually detect antibodies 2 to 9 weeks after a person is infected. It generally is not used to diagnose mono that started more than 6 months earlier. EBV antibody test. For this test, a sample of blood is mixed with a substance that attaches to antibodies against EBV. Infectious mononucleosis (mono) is a contagious illness typically caused by the Epstein-Barr virus . This infectious disease can be spread by saliva, and the incubation period for mono is four to eight weeks. Query: how is mono tested for",
"output": [
"You may get a throat culture to rule out strep throat, which has symptoms that are similar to mono. Your doctor may also take a sample of blood to check for abnormal white blood cells. You may also get a heterophile antibody test. It checks your blood for special antibodies that your body makes to fight off a viral infection."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ea1d990e98e34fa7b4b3591da38f5155",
"input": "How Long is a Passport Good? U.S, passport validity times are dependent on age as well as any limitations that were placed on the passport at the time it was issued. Adult Passport. Passports without limitations that are issued to U.S. citizens 16 years and older are valid for 10 years. Child Passport Minor passports that are issued to U.S. citizens who are 15 years of age and younger are valid for five years. Limited Passport. A limited passport is a US passport valid for less than the full 10 years for an adult passport or the full five years for a passport issued to a minor. Adult Passport. Passports without limitations that are issued to U.S. citizens 16 years and older are valid for 10 years. Child Passport. Minor passports that are issued to U.S. citizens who are 15 years of age and younger are valid for five years. Limited Passport A limited passport is a US passport valid for less than the full 10 years for an adult passport or the full five years for a passport issued to a minor. From Within the United States. 1 If you need to get a passport in two weeks or less, you will need an expedited process. 2 If you will be traveling in three weeks or more, you can follow the regular application process and apply in person at a passport acceptance facility. From Within the United States. If you need to get a passport in two weeks or less, you will need an expedited process. To find out where you need to go and what additional fees you’ll pay, follow the steps to get a passport quickly. Apply for a NEW passport in person. For any of the following: It’s your first passport. Your last passport was damaged or lost. Your last passport was issued more than 15 years ago. Your name has changed and you have no supporting legal documents. It’s for a child under age 16. How to Renew Your Passport. 1 If you need to get a passport quickly--in two weeks or less--you will need to have your passport renewal expedited and pay additional fees. Call the National Passport Information Center to make an appointment at a Regional Passport Agency. From Outside the United States Contact the U.S. Embassy or consulate near you for information and forms to request a passport from outside the U.S. Items You Need to Apply for a U.S. Passport How to Renew Your Passport. 1 If you need to get a passport quickly--in two weeks or less--you will need to have your passport renewal expedited and pay additional fees. 2 If you will be traveling in three weeks or more, you can submit an application by mail. Check the expiration date because certain countries require passports to remain valid for up to 6 months after travel. Also, some airlines do not allow you to board if you don't meet this requirement. From Within the United States If you need to get a passport in two weeks or less, you will need an expedited process. To find out where you need to go and what additional fees you’ll pay, follow the steps to get a passport quickly. Query: how long is us passport valid for?",
"output": [
"A limited passport is a US passport valid for less than the full 10 years for an adult passport or the full five years for a passport issued to a minor."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ae35ad6c2fbe4fb09e08e3c2dd92bfc0",
"input": "The introduction of larger turbine aircraft that can. operate at much higher altitudes than was previously “normally” used in parachuting over the. last few years has made “high altitude” or parachute descents over 13000ft AMSL become a. normal activity in New Zealand. increasing number of parachute jumps are in this area. The difference and effects of altitude between 13000ft and 20000ft AMSL is significant and. the question is raised as to where in this range is the risk significantly increased. last few years has made “high altitude” or parachute descents over 13000ft AMSL become a normal activity in New Zealand. There are two pieces of legislation that primarily cover this activity, these being; For those not using an AAD maybe your S&TA will agree to waive the requirement, but is 500′ that much of a difference? Phillip Bell Says: September 5, 2013 at 8:37 pm | Reply. Nothing here to address pull altitude for AFF Instructors. I have to assume USPA will increase pull altitude for AFFIs to 2,500 feet. I’d like the freedom to go a bit lower to save my student if it ever comes to that. Queue all the armchair quarterbacks to tell me what a crappy AFFI I am for ever needing to go that low, in 3 .. 2 .. 1 .. 25 Responses to “USPA Raises Minimum Deployment Altitude”. 1 Zach Says: So for the sake of the makers of an optional piece of equipment….. 2 Ron Says: So the USPA *knows* there is an issue with rigs and reserves and instead of fixing the problem, caves to pressure from the manufacturer. 3 Julius Says: 25 Responses to “USPA Raises Minimum Deployment Altitude” Zach Says: August 3, 2013 at 6:26 pm | Reply. So for the sake of the makers of an optional piece of equipment….. Who don’t have the guts to say “our product activates at 1000 feet, when using our product we recommend pulling above 2500.” uspa makes a rule for all of the members. High Altitude Parachute Descents Page 6 of 26 New Zealand Parachute Industry Association Ltd © Discussion Document High Altitude Tandems become severely impaired usually within minutes or even seconds, depending on the altitude. However it should be noted that individual tolerances vary markedly. The length of time an USPA Raises Minimum Deployment Altitude by Ed Scott One of the actions arising from last week’s meeting of the USPA Board will raise the minimum deployment altitude for C- and D-license holders in the Basic Safety Requirements from the current 2,000 feet to 2,500 feet. The board had discussed this idea at previous meetings, and it has now come to the conclusion that the change will save lives. The altitude - the effects of altitude on the human body and parachute equipment. ............ 5. Altitude and hypoxia. .................................................................................................... 5. The opening of the parachute- the effects on the equipment at altitude and the human body. 25 Responses to “USPA Raises Minimum Deployment Altitude”. Zach Says: So for the sake of the makers of an optional piece of equipment….. Who don’t have the guts to say “our product activates at 1000 feet, when using our product we recommend pulling above 2500.” uspa makes a rule for all of the members. Query: at what altitude should you pull your parachute",
"output": [
"You should pull your parachute altitude between 13000ft and 20000ft."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-846bf0a5704b4b13b067fb559e7631e6",
"input": "Dog Digestion Time The standard for dog digestion time varies between different breeds and even between individual animals. Similarly, the time that it will take for your dog to digest his food also depends upon what type of food he eats. Generally speaking, raw food and canned food will move through his system faster than dry food; it typically takes between 4 and 6 hours for a dog to process a meal's worth of canned food. On the other hand, it may take as many as 8 to 10 hours for the same dog to process dry food completely. Still, by monitoring your own pet's tendencies in terms of digestion based on the food that he eats, you can develop a sense for how long it takes him to do so. Additional Differences There are a number of important other differences between human and canine digestion that pet owners should keep in mind. Easy to Swallow. A dog's mouth works differently from a human's. For starters, he has 42 teeth and nearly 2,000 taste buds, while a person typically has 32 teeth and as many as 10,000 taste buds. Whatever remains after the dog's small intestine has done its job, is then processed in a few hours by the large intestine, and moved through the colon. In all, the entire process, from the time a dog bites into his food to the time waste is produced, can take about 10 hours to a couple of days. There are a number of other factors that may contribute to a difference in the average time that it takes your dog to digest his meal. 1 These include the following, among many others: 2 Exercise level. 3 Overall health level. 4 Weight. 5 Amount of water consumed. 6 Preexisting diseases and conditions. It is for this reason primarily that pet owners must vigilantly brush their dog's teeth. Do this about once per week in order to maintain your pet's oral health. Ask a vet for additional information about how to best deal with the digestion differences between you and your dog. A dog's mouth works differently from a human's. For starters, he has 42 teeth and nearly 2,000 taste buds, while a person typically has 32 teeth and as many as 10,000... A dog's mouth works differently from a human's. These include the following, among many others: 1 Exercise level. 2 Overall health level. 3 Weight. 4 Amount of water consumed. 5 Preexisting diseases and conditions. The dog's pancreas will begin producing enzymes that will help in breaking down the food; the stomach wall also has glands that produce necessary acids. Since what goes into a dog's stomach can be anything from grass, meat, kibble or bone, the acids must be particularly powerful (in comparison, the acid in a dog's digestion is about three times stronger than in a human's). A dog's stomach will work on breaking down food for roughly eight hours before passing it into the small intestine. End of the Line The broken-down food will remain in the small intestine for up to about two days, depending on the meal. End of the Line. The broken-down food will remain in the small intestine for up to about two days, depending on the meal. Simple food, such as corn, will pass in a matter of a few hours, but bone or more complex material takes quite a bit longer. Query: how long once a dog eats that it is digested and removed",
"output": [
"It typically takes between 4 and 6 hours for a dog to process a meal and 8 to 10 hours for dry food."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a54af2ca457f4f6faa1aa89ea10c6b4f",
"input": "How do induction cooktops work? With induction technology, heat is generated in the pan itself, not in the heating element. Induction cooktops are powered by electricity, but the “element” that rests beneath the ceramic or glass surface functions like a powerful magnet, which generates a magnetic field. Advantages of induction cooktops. Photo: Gas burners are easy to control, but waste energy by heating the surrounding air and the cooktop as well as the food in the pan. Since they're naked flames, they're more likely to cause a fire than any electric method of cooking. By changing mechanical energy into electrical energy, the generator relied upon the basic principle of electromagnetic induction, that of passing an electrical conductor through a magnetic field. As previously explained, when one side of a coil passes through the magnetic field, first in one direction and then in the other direction, an alternating current (magnetic flux) is the end result. We'll also lift the lid on what you should know before buying, installing or working with induction cooktops. Before we get to that, let's take a look at the benefits of induction cooktops and the surprisingly simple physics of electromagnetic induction. Photo: Ordinary electric charging: all the components of the transformer are contained inside the charger. How induction chargers work. So far so good—but what happens with something like an electric toothbrush, which has no power lead to plug into the wall? This induction charging process can be used to charge a pair of pop cans. It is a simple enough experiment to be repeated at home. Two pop cans are mounted on Styrofoam cups using scotch tape. Induction and Electromagnetism Understanding electromagnetic induction. Motors, transformers, audio speakers, radio transmission and generators work using the wild and complex phenomena of electromagnetism. Understanding the behavior of electromagnetism is a large subject of study. What is electrical induction? Electrical induction is also called magnetic induction. It is the ‘voltage’ produced in a conductor due to its reaction with a magnetic field. Health and safety: Pacemakers But the main issue is with which cookware you can use with them. Because of the way they work, many types of pans just don't heat up with induction cooktops. If you have copper bottom, glass or aluminum pans, they don't get hot when you put them on an induction cooktop. How they work METAL OR PLASTIC. First, induction heating works directly only with conductive materials, normally metals. Plastics and other non-conductive materials can often be heated indirectly by first heating a conductive metal susceptor which transfers heat to the non-conductive material. Query: how does electrical induction work",
"output": [
"Electrical induction is the voltage produced in a conductor due to its reaction with a magnetic field."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-24d63af474b74f5fbfaf8ea738e0d2d3",
"input": "We are thrilled to be recognized as a Best Place to Work on Glassdoor’s 2017 list. Thank you to our exceptional team who make SpaceX an incredible place to work! —30+ days ago Glassdoor has millions of jobs plus salary information, company reviews, and interview questions from people on the inside making it easy to find a job that’s right for you. Williams has interned with SpaceX, and the students say one of the best things about the contest is their frequent conversations with SpaceX engineers to make sure their designs are on the right track. Last January, all the competitors met for the design phase of the competition, and the number of finalists was winnowed to 30. Instead, the SpaceX engineers encouraged students to focus on making the pod as simple as possible, without worrying about the motor. A modified Tesla S will provide the power for the first round of trials. The average age of a SpaceX engineer is 26, Marcoe said, which was also the average age of NASA’s mission-control workers at the time of the first lunar landing. “The unique thing about our club is we’re very self-driven and self-motivated,” he said. SpaceX Benefits. 1 Health Insurance. Health Insurance(52 comments) “This company provided me with great health benefits throughout my work. I was provided with medical insurance, dental insurance, and eye insurance.”. 2 Vacation & Paid Time Off. Vacation & Paid Time Off(27 comments) “I got a lot of vacation. “SpaceX swag shirts cost $22 for the public but employees get them for $7, sweaters cost $40 employees pay $14 tats a 50-60% off sweet” See All See All Explore SpaceX Salaries See SpaceX Hourly Pay, SpaceX Bonuses, or check out salaries for SpaceX Internship or SpaceX Contractor. SpaceX Salaries by Location. Hawthorne, CA; Los Angeles, CA; McGregor, TX; Seattle, WA; Check out the latest SpaceX Jobs & Careers Yes. Almost all of them do, as a matter of fact. Source If you look at the line for “miscellaneous engineers” you’ll see about 75% of them have an IQ less than 120. Most scales tend to put the upper limits of average around 115–120, so that’s a st... A team of University of Washington engineering students is competing in an international challenge to design a hyperloop pod — part of an effort to develop the dream of a ground-based transportation system that would go more than 700 miles an hour. A free inside look at SpaceX salary trends. 1,226 salaries for 515 jobs at SpaceX. Salaries posted anonymously by SpaceX employees. Query: average age of spacex engineer",
"output": [
"The average age of a SpaceX engineer is 26."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-6de9f29f19254f97a63daa5f8889b921",
"input": "Halley's Comet as photographed May 8, 1910, by Dr. G.W. Ritchey using the 60-inch (1.5-meter) telescope at Mount Wilson Observatory, Calif., during the comet's last appearance. The head of the comet and the beginning of its long tail are shown. Short, straight streaks are background stars. Discovered by Alan Hale and Thomas Bopp in 1995, the Hale-Bopp comet came within 1.315 AU of Earth in 1997. One AU is 150 million kilometers (93 million miles). Scientists have computed its orbital period so you can find out when Hale-Bopp will return. Unlike a long-period comet, the next perihelion passage of a numbered periodic comet can be predicted with a high degree of accuracy. Periodic comets sometimes bear the same name repeatedly (e.g. the nine Shoemaker–Levy comets or the twenty-four NEAT comets); the IAU system distinguishes between them either through the number prefix or by the full designation (e. g. 181P and 192P are both Comet Shoemaker–Levy). Halley’s comet belonged to the Neptune group and today falls into the short period comet category. In the early twentieth century these were called “Periodic comets.” At the time, what we now call long period comets were thought to be from beyond the solar system. Short-period Comets A comet with an orbital period of less than 200 years is known as a short-period comet or a ‘periodic comet’. These are now divided into Jupiter-family comets with periods less than 20 years and orbits that do not extend much beyond Jupiter, and Halley-type comets with periods of 20–200 years and highly inclined orbits. low orbital inclinations mostly prograde large eccentricities most from Kuiper Belt eventually destroyed by collisions/sublimating into oblivion orbital period less than 100 years Jupiter-family comets and long-period comets appear to follow very different fading laws. The JFCs are active over a lifetime of about 10,000 years or ~1,000 orbits whereas long-period comets fade much faster. Only 10% of the long-period comets survive more than 50 passages to small perihelion and only 1% of them survive more than 2,000 passages. Eventually most of the volatile material contained in a comet nucleus evaporates, and the comet becomes a small, dark, inert lump of rock or rubble that can resemble an asteroid. Because no planets have retrograde orbits, we must ask why so many long-period comets are retrograde, while few short-period comets are. Intermediate-Period Comets. Only 104 comets have orbital periods between 100 and 700 years. So, we have two completely different populations of comets—short-period and long-period—plus a few in between. The short-period comets are thought to originate in the Kuiper Belt, an area outside Neptune's orbit (from about 30 to 50 AU) that has many icy comet-like objects. The long-period comets tend to have orbits that are randomly oriented, and not necessarily anywhere near the ecliptic. A short period comet is conventionally defined as a comet having an orbital period of less than 200 years. What is the maximum possible aphelion distance for a short period comet with a perihelion of 0.5 AU? Where does this place the comet relative to the outer planets? (3) Query: how long is the orbital period of a short period comet",
"output": [
"A short period comet is having an orbital period of less than 200 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9baaa90a5b79419798b0a235d9eae194",
"input": "Step 1, Boil boneless, skinless chicken breasts for 15 to 20 minutes. [1] Thick chicken breasts will need about 20 minutes, while thinner, flatter pieces and smaller chicken breast halves will only need about 15 minutes.Step 2, Boil bone-in chicken breasts for 30 minutes. The skin and bone adds thickness to the chicken breasts, essentially doubling the amount of time they need to cook.Step 3, Cook skinless, boneless chicken tenderloins for 10 minutes or less. These strips of ... This is more of a method than a recipe, but this is how I always make wings now. I find boiling them first helps get rid of more of the fat, and they get crispier in the oven. Add enough cooking liquid to cover the chicken. If desired, add any other ingredients for flavoring the liquid and chicken. Bring to boiling on medium-high heat; reduce the heat. Cover the pan and simmer until the chicken is no longer pink (170 degrees F). Bone-in, skin-on chicken breasts: cook about 30 minutes A: Boiling chilled chicken legs will take 40 to 50 minutes when simmered over a low flame. After the water is brought to a boil, it should then be turned down to a simmer. The chicken can be cooked from frozen on the stove or in the oven; however, cooking times are usually 50 percent longer for frozen chicken. Continue Reading Visit our site http://howtoboilchicken.net for more information on How Long Do You Boil Chicken.The most vital facet when taking into consideration How To Bo... We've been hard at work on the new YouTube, and it's better than ever. Place the chicken in a large stockpot and cover it with 1 or 2 inches of water or chicken stock. Step 2 Bring the water to a rolling boil and skim the froth that collects on the surface for about 5 minutes. Find out how to cook a whole chicken here. Knowing how long to roast a chicken is key -- here are the calculated exact cooking times by weight. 2-1/2 to 3 pounds: Roast at 375 degrees F for 1 to 1-1/4 hours 3 to 3-1/2 pounds: Roast at 375 degrees F for 1-1/4 to 1-1/2 hours First of all, if you need to boil chicken thighs, then take the time to season the boiling water 1st get some water in a very pan on high heat, once it boils add some salt, some shredded onions, herbs like rosemary or bay leaves and a few peppercorns enable it to boil for 10 minutes then cut back the warmth in order that it's at a simmer which implies that it's not rolling at a boil, however rather merely detonating a bubble each currently then on the surface - this mild heating are ... Chicken breast with bone and skin intact should poach in boiling liquid for about 30 minutes. Pieces of boneless and skinless breast that is cut into 2-inch pieces needs a cooking period of about 10 minutes. The boiling liquid used in poaching chicken can be water, chicken broth or any number of other liquids. How to Boil Chicken Breasts. Three Parts: Preparing The Chicken Boiling Chicken Breasts In Water Using Flavored Liquid Community Q&A. Boiling chicken breast is an easy way to add healthy protein to your meals. The key is to let the chicken breast boil for long enough that it cooks all the way through and isn't pink on the inside. In a Hurry? If your chicken breast is frozen, defrost it in a bowl of cold water or in the microwave before boiling. Query: how long you boil chicken",
"output": [
"You can boil chicken for 30 minutes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-56b1a314b15447b98f1028585582a2e8",
"input": "How long does it take to get a passport? Whether you apply in Australia or overseas, you should allow approximately three weeks to get a new passport. If you need to travel urgently, you may be able to use our priority service for an additional fee. Travelers aged 16 and over with an undamaged passport issued in the past 15 years may apply for passport renewal by mail. If there is a name change, it is necessary to submit legal proof of the name change with the application. Passport renewals by mail typically take four to six weeks to process. Expedited Service The answers to these questions must match exactly the information we hold on your passport records. If you believe you are eligible to renew but are unable to access or complete the renewal form online, call 131 232 or, if you are overseas, contact the nearest Australian diplomatic mission or consulate. Do I need six months validity left on my passport before I can travel from and then re enter Australia? You passport is valid from the date it is issued until the date it expires. You can use it throughout this period, subject to meeting the visa and immigration requirements of the countries you wish to visit or transit. If you need your passport quickly, you may apply for expedited service. This service requires payment of an additional fee. Overnight delivery is available at a separate cost. Expedited service generally takes two to three weeks when overnight delivery is used in both directions. If you report the details to us, we will cancel the passport to ensure it cannot be misused by another person. Take the passport and the original death certificate to an Australia Post passport agency. If you wish to retain the passport as a memento, we will return it to you after it has been cancelled. This could be a family member or a friend. The Australian Passport Information Service (APIS) can also arrange an interpreter for your interview through the Translating and Interpreting Service (TIS) National at no cost to you. Please notify APIS that you will need an interpreter, giving as much notice as possible. new passport using that name and submit a notarized / certified copy of your marriage. certificate. Married applicants using maiden or double-barrel names must provide a letter requesting the. new passport to be in the applicant's maiden name or double-barrel name. Passport Renewals. Travelers aged 16 and over with an undamaged passport issued in the past 15 years may apply for passport renewal by mail. If your name has changed, you must submit legal proof of the name change with your application. Passport renewals by mail typically take four to six weeks to process. Expedited Service If looking to get the passport quickly, make sure to apply for expedited service. Besides a passport application, it is necessary to present a certified birth certificate with a raised seal that lists parents’ names, along with a government-issued ID. If the ID was issued in a different state than the acceptance facility, it is necessary to present a secondary ID as well. Query: how long does it take for a new passport to be issued",
"output": [
"Whether you apply in Australia or overseas, you should allow approximately three weeks to get a new passport."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-cffbe2fed8c54c34b80fc3c101d56566",
"input": "Both the primary care physician and the specialist should ask one another how long is this process projected to take, who will manage the patient throughout the process, what paper work is needed, urgency of the situation, how often each professional will communicate with one another about the patient’s status or any other question necessary to ensure the patient is in good hands and that the process is kept as efficient as possible. If you do not have a prescription, we can schedule an evaluation to determine your need for physical therapy treatment and contact your physician to request a prescription if needed. Our staff can help you determine your insurance carrier’s requirements. For more information regarding physical therapy treatment without a physician’s referral, CLICK HERE. How long does each appointment last? Most appointments last approximately one hour. How do I schedule an appointment? In general (when an exceptions process is in effect), Medicare will continue to cover its share above the $1,980 therapy cap limits if these apply: 1 Your therapist or therapy provider provides documentation to show that your services were medically reasonable and necessary. Here are a few more tips to help ensure you get paid: 1 Get a real or electronic signature and date—not a stamp. 2 Recertify the plan of care within 90 days. 3 Include the certifying provider’s name and NPI on the claim. Medicare has four parts: Part A is hospital insurance (inpatient). Part B is supplementary medical insurance. Part C is a private health plan (often called a Medicare Advantage Plan) that Medicare has approved. Part D is a prescription drug plan. To treat patients without a referral a physical therapist must have at least three years of practical experience or the equivalent. The regulations define this experience as 4,320 hours, or 30 hours per week for 48 weeks per year. We’ll also give you a Model. Policy, on p. 3, that you can adapt for use in your practice or facility. Plus, we’ll. give you a Model Letter (see p. 4) that you can adapt and send to referring physi-. cians when you have to cancel a patient’s test because of a stale order. • Other services for which applicable laws do not allow a referral requirement • Any non-physician services, including but not limited to: • Outpatient lab, x-ray, or diagnostics • Physical therapy, rehabilitation services not including manipulative treatment and vision therapy (i.e., physician services) In most cases you have to get a referral to see a specialist in HMO Plans. Certain services, like yearly screening mammograms, don't require a referral. Preferred Provider Organization (PPO) Plans prior to making the referral to get a good history, do some tests and discuss options. Physical therapy is always a good option, at least for an evaluation, to see if the PT can give you any additional treatment options. Remind your provider that PT is a non-invasive, conservative approach and that it does not limit other future options like medication or surgery. For this reason, Physical Therapy is often a good first step. If Query: how long is a referral to pt good for",
"output": [
"A referral to physical therapist is good for three years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-243b057fd6d84c9ab47f3a4797c3fe7c",
"input": "Certain volunteer organizations offer student loan forgiveness in exchange for a certain amount of your time. If you volunteer for AmeriCorps, Peace Corps, or Volunteers in Service to America (VISTA) you can have up to 70 percent of your student loans forgiven. Circumstances for Student Loan Discharge: 1 Permanent disability or death. 2 Victim of identity theft. 3 Unauthorized signature of the loan by the school without your knowledge. 4 False certification of student eligibility. 5. Wait 25 Years or (20 Years for New Loans) If you have a federal loan and you're on an income-based repayment (IBR) plan, you can have the balance of your student loan forgiven after 25 years, or 10 years if you work in public service. Qualifying repayment plans for loan forgiveness. 1 Income-Based Repayment Plan (IBR) 2 Income-Contingent Repayment Plan (ICR) 3 Pay As You Earn Repayment Plan (PAYE) 4 Revised Pay As You Earn Repayment Plan (REPAYE) In certain situations, you can eliminate some or all of your student loans through a student loan forgiveness program. Depending on your degree and your current occupation, you may qualify for one of many student loan forgiveness programs. If you're wondering whether you can have your student loans forgiven through your job, ask someone in your human resources department. Here are 5 ways to get your student loans forgiven: The Income-Contingent, or Income-Based Repayment Plans qualify you for loan forgiveness after 25 years of on-time payments. Forgiveness based on 20 or 25 years of on-time payments is only available to Federal Student loans. Private student loans do not qualify. Student Loan Discharge. There's one additional way to achieve student loan forgiveness which is called discharge. It is generally awarded by a judge and can apply to both Federal and private student loans. Other states have additional student loan forgiveness programs that allow you to have student loans forgiven in additional situations. 1 You can always contact your loan board of education for information about having your student loans forgiven. You can have up to 100% of your Perkins Loans cancelled or broken down over five years. 1 15% per year for the first and second year. 2 20% for the third and fourth years. 3 30% for the fifth year. Drawbacks of Student Loan Forgiveness. In certain situations, you're required to report forgiven loans as taxable income. This may increase your tax liability that year and could result in a tax bill when you file in April. Not all student loan forgiveness programs require you to pay taxes on the forgiven debt. You can apply for IBR by contacting the lender servicing your loan. Loans taken out after July 22, 2014 on the IBR plan will be forgiven after 20 years instead of 25 years. President Obama recently announced plans to speed up that date to 2012. Visit the Federal Student Aid website and IBR Info for more information. Query: how long till student loans are forgiven",
"output": [
"Student loans are forgiven in 20 or 25 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c9c02e4ff3fa45919800f55fe6723b76",
"input": "Fun Facts about the Nile River. 1 The Ancient Egyptians called the rich black soil from the floods the Gift of the Nile. 2 Today, the Aswan Dam keeps the Nile from flooding modern cities. 3 The Ancient Egyptians called the Nile the Aur, which means black and comes from the black soil. The Nile river is important to the Ancient Egyptians because itkept them alive & developed their knowledge. They depended onit for food, water, transportation and much more. T … hey even thoughtof it as a kind of god. It flooded once every year, creatingfertile soil for growing crops. Geography and the Nile River. 1 Wheat - Wheat was the main staple food of the Egyptians. They used it to make bread. They also sold a lot of their wheat throughout the Middle East helping the Egyptians to become rich. 2 Flax - Flax was used to make linen cloth for clothing. This was the main type of cloth used by the Egyptians. History >> Ancient Egypt. The Nile River played an important role in shaping the lives and society of Ancient Egypt. The Nile provided the Ancient Egyptians with food, transportation, building materials, and more. The ancient Egyptians considered the Nile River to be the source of life as as it provided water for drinking, bathing, washing and irrigating. The Nile River was also the main way for transporting goods and people as roads could not be built on flooded land or sandy desert, hence becoming ancient Egypt's great highway. Geography and the Nile River. 1 The Ancient Egyptians called the rich black soil from the floods the Gift of the Nile. 2 Today, the Aswan Dam keeps the Nile from flooding modern cities. 3 The Ancient Egyptians called the Nile the Aur, which means black and comes from the black soil. the nile river was important to ancient egyptions because it allowed the ancient egyptions to have systems of transportation, sanitation, and irrigation. the nile river helped … the ancient egyptions stay functional. I love cake ^^ I love cake too. c: The Nile River flows north through Egypt and into the Mediterranean Sea. Ancient Egypt was divided into two regions, Upper Egypt and Lower Egypt. This looks a bit confusing on a map because Upper Egypt is to the south and Lower Egypt is to the north. This is because the names come from the flow of the Nile River. Fertile Land. The most important thing the Nile provided to the Ancient Egyptians was fertile land. Most of Egypt is desert, but along the Nile River the soil is rich and good for growing crops. The three most important crops were wheat, flax, and papyrus. Wheat - Wheat was the main staple food of the Egyptians. They used it to make bread. Fun Facts about the Nile River. The Ancient Egyptians called the rich black soil from the floods the Gift of the Nile. Today, the Aswan Dam keeps the Nile from flooding modern cities. The Ancient Egyptians called the Nile the Aur, which means black and comes from the black soil. Query: how is the nile river important to ancient egypt?",
"output": [
"The Nile river is important to the Ancient Egyptians because it kept them alive and developed their knowledge."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-71583f3a39264532b012d3c952caec3f",
"input": "CT Scan Frequently Asked Questions What is a CT scan? A CT scan — also called Computerized Tomography or just CT—is an X-ray technique that produces images of your body that visualize internal structures in cross section rather than the overlapping images typically produced by conventional X-ray exams. CT scans use an X-ray unit that rotates around your body and a powerful computer. The result with CT scans is a set of cross-sectional images, like slices, of the inside of your body. Should I do anything special to prepare for a CT scan? How you prepare for a CT scan depends on which part of your body is being scanned. You may be asked to remove your clothing and wear a hospital gown. You’ll need to remove any metal objects, such as jewelry, that might interfere with image results. Q&A: About Your CT Scan What is a CT scan? CT, which stands for Computed Tomography (sometimes referred to as a “CAT” scan), is a fast, painless diagnostic tool doctors can use to see inside the body. Physicians use the information they get from a CT scan to rule out or confirm the presence of certain abnormalities or diseases. A CT scan has many uses, but is particularly well-suited to quickly examine people who may have internal injuries from car accidents or other types of trauma. A CT scan can be used to visualize nearly all parts of the body and is used to diagnose disease or injury as well as to plan medical, surgical or radiation treatment. CT of the head is an X-ray-based procedure in which images (pictures) are taken of the entire brain. CT scans of the head/brain can provide more detailed information about brain tissue and brain structures than standard X-rays of the head. Therefore, this can provide more information related to injuries and brain disease. You might have an injection of contrast medium (a type of dye) through a small thin tube (cannula) in your arm. 1 This can: 2 make you feel hot and flushed for a minute or two. 3 give you a metallic taste in your mouth. 4 make you feel like you’re passing urine but you aren’t – this feeling is common and passes quickly. How long does it take? A CT scan can take anywhere from 10 to 30 minutes, depending on what part of the body is being scanned. It also depends on how much of your body the doctors want to look at and whether contrast dye is used. It often takes more time to get you into position and give the contrast dye than to take the pictures. For some types of CT scan, a 'contrast agent' is used to make certain parts of the patient more visible to x-rays. The contrast agent is in the form of a liquid that is injected into the patient prior to scanning. This liquid has iodine in it, and shows up well in CT scans. At our hospital, it'd be very unusual for a CT scan to take more than an hour or two to be read, most are done within 30 minutes. From there, the question is how long does it take for the report to get to the ordering doctor? What will I feel during the scan? CT scanning causes no pain, just as a routine X-ray is painless. If intravenous contrast is used, you may feel warm and flush and get a metallic taste in your mouth. These sensations normally disappear after a few minutes. How long will the scan take? The time required will depend upon the type of scan. If oral contrast is required, about 45 to 60 minutes is needed for the contrast to move through your digestive tract. Actual scan times vary from a few seconds to several minutes. If no oral contrast is required, the examination will take about 15 to 30 minutes, including the time for intravenous preparation and interview. In some cases additional scanning is required as scans are tailored to suit individual diagnostic needs. I do think a lot of hospitals are concerned with customer satisfaction so I think elevating your displeasure with the scan results policy may go a long way. Most hospitals have surveys or complaint forms and if neither of those apply a letter to the Hospital administration may be order. Query: how long does it take for a ct scan?",
"output": [
"A CT scan can take anywhere from 10 to 30 minutes, depending on what part of the body is being scanned."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8317e08f7d294685b6af07bf5448efe3",
"input": "How many advil can I take in one day - How many Advil (ibuprofen) can you take in one day? 6 TO 8 A DAY. It depends on what you are taking advll for. Advil® Allergy & Congestion Relief treats your multi-symptom sinus and allergy needs with just one tablet by combining the power of Advil® and a proven decongestant to reduce swelling due to nasal inflammation, plus an effective antihistamine to relieve sinus pressure, nasal swelling, congestion, sneezing, runny nose and your other allergy symptoms ... DIRECTIONS FOR USE. Adults and children from 12 to 65 years: Take 1 or 2 caplets every 4 to 6 hours as needed. Do not exceed 6 caplets in 24 hours, unless directed by a doctor. Do not use longer than 3 days for fever or 5 days for pain relief or cold symptoms. Temporarily relieves these symptoms associated with hay fever or other upper respiratory allergies and the common cold: 1 runny nose. 2 itchy, watery eyes. 3 itching of the nose or throat. 4 sneezing. 5 nasal congestion. 6 sinus pressure. 7 headache. 8 minor body aches & pains. 9 fever. Take on all your tough allergy symptoms with Advil ® Allergy & Congestion Relief. Locate Product Get Coupon The makers of Advil ® do not produce store brand ibuprofen pain medicine. Advil® Allergy & Congestion Relief treats your toughest allergy symptoms—including nasal congestion. Most allergy medicines don’t do that. The ibuprofen in Advil® combined with an antihistamine and a decongestant helps relieve upper respiratory symptoms associated with allergies. Advil ® Allergy & Congestion Relief treats your toughest allergy symptoms—including nasal congestion. Most allergy medicines don’t do that. The ibuprofen in Advil ® combined with an antihistamine and a decongestant helps relieve upper respiratory symptoms associated with allergies. 12 years of age and older: 1 1 tablet every 4 hours while symptoms persist. 2 Do not use more than 6 tablets in 24 hours unless directed by a doctor. Advil ® Allergy & Congestion Relief treats your multi-symptom sinus and allergy needs with just one tablet by combining the power of Advil ® and a proven decongestant to reduce swelling due to nasal inflammation, plus an effective antihistamine to relieve sinus pressure, nasal swelling, congestion, sneezing, runny nose and your other allergy symptoms. How many advil can i take in one day - How many Advil (ibuprofen) can you take in one day? 6 TO 8 A DAY. It depends on what you are taking advll for. Query: how many advil sinus congestion and pain can i take in one day",
"output": [
"You can take 6 TO 8 advil sinus congestion and pain in one day."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-6cfce8ff5d8345d5809ec19773e078c5",
"input": "8 Tricks for Putting Off a Haircut. You can delay a trip to the salon for up to six months with the right products and stylists' tricks. 1. Use the right shampoo and conditioner. Dry, brittle ends look like they're begging for a haircut; so a moisturizing shampoo and conditioner can buy you extra weeks—maybe even months—between trims. The latest from Living Proof, a line developed by MIT scientists, contains a special molecule called PolyFluoroEster that smoothes, hydrates and strengthens each strand. It depends on how hard you on it. If it goes through a lot of heat and is always being styled, I'd say every 5-6 weeks. But just enough cut off to get rid of the dead ends. Or it will be worthless to grow your hair out resulting in long split ends. If you do almost nothing to your hair, I'd say every 2 months. Make sure that you get almost all your split ends off when you get it trimmed, or they will just keep growing longer or breaking off. Either way, it isn't good. If you color or highlight your long hair, it is even more likely to be damaged. Regular haircuts help keep your hair strong and healthy. Long hair should be trimmed at least every eight to 12 weeks. If you notice more breakage or split ends, it could be cut as frequently as every six to eight weeks. Be specific with your hairstylist when you're getting your haircut. Best Answer: You should really have a trim every 6-8 weeks to egt rid of split ends. =] ... How Long Between Haircuts ... Depends. If you want long hair, don't cut ... Their unprocessed hair is basically the healthiest it will ever be. If your hair has never been colored and you haven't yet exposed it to the rigors of frequent hot-tool usage (and you're in your early 20s), you can go up to three months between trims without any risk of looking frayed, says hairstylist Nathaniel Hawkins. “When I give a haircut, of course it’s going to look good — you just got it cut,” said Garrett Pike, a head barber at the Brooklyn-based chain Persons of Interest. “But I try to get the most out of every cut.”. Fresh, clean, and ready to face the world, a new chop’s got a kind of empowering quality—it’s as if anything you do in the next 24 to 48 hours will be made infinitely more awesome by the precision of your mane. Stylists want you to use a hydrating hair mask once a week. This is especially true if you're planning an extreme shift, such as from black to blonde. Apply the mask to towel-dried hair three inches down from the roots, then work through to the ends and leave it on for 20 minutes. Voila. With long, blunt-cut hair, trimming the ends of the hair is a simple matter of following the established line and removing the damaged ends. Yet with long-layered hairstyles, there is an alternative that works especially well. Brush out the hair to remove any tangles and section the hair in to workable divisions. But if you color your hair a different shade, you need to be vigilant about the upkeep. Piecuch says anywhere between four and eight weeks is the standard time for a new hair coloring appointment, but that timeframe can vary greatly based on individual factors. Query: how long should you go between hair trim",
"output": [
"Long hair should be trimmed at least every eight to 12 weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-55f0191f285d4b56a145cc6100b9af69",
"input": "My active German Shepherd is making me a quick study on foot injuries. My dog split his nail, and unfortunately as it grew out, it continued to split. The vet had to remove the top hard cover of the nail exposing the quick. We kept it bandaged up, but allowed it to air out daily. It took about five or six days for the quick to grow a new hard cover. So it depends on the way it is broken. Right now, by dog has another broken nail, but it is a pretty clean break, and he isn't limping. Best of luck to you and your dog. Hope it all goes well. To remedy this, you'll need to ask your vet or groomer to trim those nails as close to the quick as possible, but a bit at a time, regardless of how long the nails are. This will cause the quick to gradually recede. One of my bitches moaned and cried and screamed for the first 12 hours at home, the next day she was down a rabbit hole! Just make sure the wound doesn't look inflamed and is clean, and of course your dog doesnt worry it. A few days will probably be all you need to take off. Hope she's fine with it all. Generally, dogs start feeling better within 48 hours. Total recovery takes some time, as the nail needs to re-grow so to completely cover the vulnerable quick. Generally, this takes 2 weeks according to Dr. Fiona. As your dog recovers, try to avoid walking him on rocks, sand, snow, or mud for about two weeks. Most average cats and dogs take fourteen days for their incisions to heal. Side note: that’s about how long it takes for people to heal, too. One tip is to look at the nail where the cut is, if it is white you can cut 2mm; and if you see a black little circle in the middle you stop because next is the quick (it worked for me and my little huge nails). Author. Happy to hear this article on how to make a dog's nail recede was helpful to you. I use the fine 120 grit band. I dont use the stone. I use the instructional from one of the links here but obviously am still learning. Ive been doing them for a few months and this is the first time I hit the quick. Lesson learned, I wont be going so close anymore. How long do you think until she can start running on it again? Dogs who have experienced hot spots in the past may be more prone to developing them again. To reduce the risk of your dog developing hot spots repeatedly, make sure he stays on effective flea control, provide adequate exercise and play to reduce stress and boredom, and groom him regularly. If not, copy these instructions onto a recipe card and add it to your first aid kit for easy reference. 1 Before you start clipping the hair, cover the wound with K-Y. 2 Clip (or cut and shave) all the hair for one inch (2.5 centimetres) all around the wound. If your dog has long hair, shorten any hair that you think might cover or get stuck in the wound. Once the hair is clipped, use a gauze pad or two to wipe the jelly and the loose hair out of the wound. You know Scruffy is overdue for a pedicure when you hear his “click-clack” sound on your kitchen floor. When you fail to trim your dog's nails as frequently as needed, the quick grows along with ... Query: how long does it take for a dog's quick to heal",
"output": [
"Generally, dogs start feeling better within 48 hours, total recovery takes some time, as the nail needs to re-grow so to completely cover the vulnerable quick and this takes 2 weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3d90e4146b5c4c3a9749b37f3d3c419b",
"input": "In the fact that they are the means of reproduction of whatever plant spit them out. Seeds are alike because they spread and produce a new plant. They also all have stored food in the seed. And have a outer layer on the outside of the seed. Hip hop music uses a variety of slang terms that have changed as hip hop itself has evolved and changed. Much of its lexicon is drawn from African American Vernacular English. Hip hop slang makes use of alternative pronunciations, mostly drawn from AAVE; ordinary words given new meanings; new coinages and portmanteau words; and vernacular phrases. The slang used in a hip hop record can often date it to a certain era and/or school of hip hop. As the hip hop culture has expanded worldwide, non-Americans and even non-English speakers have increasingly borrowed from and contributed to the slang of hip hop, often modifying the meanings of words to their own uses. The fruit and seeds are alike in storage of food material. In the seed the food is stored for the embryo and in the fruit for the agency (the animal or bird) responsible f…or the dispersal of seeds. Language Construction. 1 List of languages. 2 Language regulators. 3 Language families. 4 Linguistics. 5 Philosophy of language. 6 Useful phrases to use. 7 Slang and colloquialisms. Dictionary of Hip Hop Slang and colloquialisms. Learn the meaning of slang and informal expressions currently in use. No Homo: (1) punctuation-like phrase, that follows a statement or sentence which could have ambiguous social meaning due to the influx of homo-thugs and bisexual behavior. (2)not to be interpreted in a homosexual way. A-Alikes: (1) a twin or someone with a physical resemblence. (2) a relative. Primarily used in New York City. Aiight: (1) safe or unharmed. 2)yes or very well 3)satisfactory 4)without fail Derived from “all right”, Aiight carries many of the same meanings. Also can mean mediocre. Often used in exclamatory fashion to show agreement. Who is A-Alikes? From the A-Alikes' Myspace (http://www.myspace.com/aalikes): Ness and K linked in Tallahassee in the late nineties, and it was there that they connected with their People Ar … my/R.B.G. comrades stic.man and M1 of dead prez and Tahir and Abu of Hedrush. 4-1-1: is the telephone directory number used in the US. 411 is used as a slang term meaning information. 4-9-3-11/Get the 4-9-3-11: a number code which when translated to the corresponding alphabetical order spells out the word dick. Query: a-alikes meaning",
"output": [
"A-Alikes is a twin or someone with a physical resemblence."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-76230a3b48fa4f1dae519a2d0b13f4e2",
"input": "The list of signs and symptoms mentioned in various sources for Asteatotic eczema includes the 5 symptoms listed below: Fissured skin lesions. Sore skin lesions. Itchy skin lesions. Red skin lesions. Fine cracks in skin. Asteatotic dermatitis. Eczema>Atopic dermatitis/Eczema. (Atopic=allergy associated) (derm=skin, titis=inflammation) Key points. *is a common, chronic, pruritic (itching), inflammatory disease of the skin that flares and regresses. Asteatotic Eczema. Asteatotic eczema is a common skin condition seen on the elderly people. It is described as cracks on the skin surface and it was first identified by Dr. Brocq, French dermatologist. Extreme dryness is believed to cause this eczema and the rate of asteatotic eczema is high during winter season. Symptoms : The skin becomes totally dry forming several cracks on the upper surface. The skin becomes totally dry due to loss of natural oil and shows cracks. First described by Brocq in 1907, using the term eczema craquelé, asteatotic dermatitis is characterized by pruritic, dry, cracked, and polygonally fissured skin with irregular scaling. It most commonly occurs on the shins of elderly patients, but it may occur on the hands and the trunk. Asteatotic eczema is a term often applied to describe patients who have thin, dried, cracked-appearing skin, usually especially bad on the lower legs. Significant involvement of the palms and soles of the feet is not usual and may suggest a different condition such as fungal infection, scabies infestation, or allergic contact dermatitis. Signs And Symptoms Of Asteatotic Eczema Asteatotic eczema predominantly is seen on the lower leg, especially on the sheen area of the leg. However, this skin condition sometimes also occurs on other areas of the skin such as thighs, back, upper arm etc. Each type of eczema has specific characteristics and patterns of symptoms: 1 Atopic eczema (atopic dermatitis) — Atopic dermatitis appears as irritated, red, dry, crusted patches on the skin. If the skin becomes infected, it may develop a wet (weeping) look. Learn in-depth information on Asteatotic Eczema, its causes, symptoms, diagnosis, complications, treatment, prevention, and prognosis. Learn in-depth information on Asteatotic Eczema, its causes, symptoms, diagnosis, complications, treatment, prevention, and prognosis. Asteatotic eczema — This type usually occurs on the lower legs. It causes itching or stinging pain in areas of dry, cracked, reddened skin. There may or may not be tiny bumps. Asteatotic Eczema (Eczema Craquelé) 1 Print. 2 PDF. 3 Email. 4 Bookmark You must be signed in to bookmark pages. 5 Notes You must be signed into your pro account to make notes. 6 Listen Listen. 7 Translate Translate. Query: asteatotic eczema symptoms",
"output": [
"Symptoms of asteatotic eczema, fissured skin, sore skin, Itchy skin, Fine cracks in skin, thin, dried, cracked-appearing skin, usually especially bad on the lower legs."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7fd697d31c2344f1ab77e85486ad04cf",
"input": "While you can freeze just about any type of cheese, the firmer varieties — such as cheddar, gouda and Swiss — tend to come through the freezing process with the least damage to texture and flavor. For best results, keep cheese frozen for no more than 6 months. When freezing cheese, cut it into portions no larger than 1/2 pound each, and wrap tightly in airtight wrapping or place inside a heavy-duty freezer bag. You can also grate cheese before freezing and place it in a freezer bag. Be sure to thaw the frozen cheese in your refrigerator, and plan to use it within two or three days. Refrigerated Food and Power Outages: When to Save and When to Throw Out. Adapted from Keeping Food Safe During an Emergency (USDA). Is food in the refrigerator safe during a power outage? It should be safe as long as power is out no more than 4 hours. Keep the door closed as much as possible. Discard any perishable food (such as meat, poultry, fish, eggs, and leftovers) that have been above 40 °F for over 2 hours. Never taste food to determine its safety! You can’t rely on appearance or odor to determine whether food is safe. If it’s been opened, limit it to one week in the fridge, or one month in the freezer as long as it’s tightly covered. How do I know if yogurt has gone bad? The best way is to use your nose and your eyes. Others who ate the same yogurt but didn't see the expiration date enjoyed the food without claims of spoilage. Ultimately, it all depends on the type of food. Read on to find out specifics. Yes - to further extend the shelf life of yogurt, freeze it in a covered airtight container or heavy-duty freezer bag. How long does yogurt last in the freezer? Properly stored, it will maintain best quality for 1 to 2 months, but will remain safe beyond that time. The freezer time shown is for best quality only - yogurt that has been kept constantly frozen at 0° F will keep safe indefinitely. How long does yogurt last after being frozen and thawed? Yogurt that has been defrosted in the fridge can be kept for an additional 3 to 4 days in the refrigerator before using; yogurt that was thawed in the microwave or in cold water should be used immediately. Here's a guide to how long the following condiments will last once opened: ketchup, one month in pantry, six to eight months in fridge; mayonnaise, two months in fridge; jellies and jams, one year in fridge; mustard, six to eight months in fridge; peanut butter, two to three months in fridge; pickles, one to two months in fridge; sour cream, two weeks in fridge; salad dressing, three months in fridge; butter, three months in fridge (can be stored in the freezer for up to a year). In general, we don't recommend that you add yogurt directly to a boiling or extremely hot mixture. Instead, stir a few tablespoons of the hot food into the yogurt, warming it gradually. Then stir the warmed yogurt into your dish near the end of the cooking process, so the yogurt won't be heated for a long time. If the temperature is above 120° F, as it is in baking, it's unlikely that the live active cultures will survive. Can You Freeze Cheese Successfully? Question: My local grocery store is currently running a special on cheddar cheese. Is it a good idea to stock up and freeze it? Opened yogurt will typically stay at peak quality for 5 to 7 days after opening, but will generally remain safe to consume for at least 1 to 2 weeks after the sell by date on the package, provided it has been properly stored- discard entire package if any sign of mold appears. Yogurt made with frozen starter vs. yogurt made with fresh starter. I tried it several times and absolutely could not tell the difference between yogurt made using my own 3-day-old homemade yogurt as starter and that made with my homemade yogurt stored in the freezer for 3 months. Query: how long does yogurt last in freezer",
"output": [
"Yogurt lasts in a freezer for 1 to 2 months."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-2716ad79e1bd4fb29fc1671e4b8c6a92",
"input": "How long does a typical upper respiratory infection last? Once a cat is exposed to an infectious agent, it will go through an incubation period of 2-10 days before developing symptoms. If the infection is uncomplicated, it will typically last for 7-21 days, depending on the particular disease agent with 7 to 10 days being average duration of illness. During this entire time, the cat will potentially be infectious to other cats. – bordetella. -these account for generally less than 10% of feline upper respiratory infections. -these can be responsive to antibiotics, such as doxycycline, however, doxycycline can not be safely used in young, growing animals (such as kittens), complicating the treatment even further. More crappy news: Most cats with an uncomplicated upper respiratory infection can be treated symptomatically at home.. Cats with nasal or airway congestion may benefit from increased environmental humidification, such as being taken into a steamy bathroom for 10-15 minutes several times per day. If your cat or dog's upper respiratory infection lasts for a long time, or if a high fever develops, a stay in the hospital might be necessary to get symptoms under control, and to treat or prevent secondary infections. More on Respiratory Issues in Pets. How to Treat Asthma in Cats and Dogs Causes of Allergies in Pets With FVR and FCV, the cat may develop ulcers in the mouth. Other, less specific symptoms of an upper respiratory infection include anorexia, lethargy, fever, enlarged lymph nodes and blepharospasm (squinting). In severe cases, the cat may have difficulty breathing. Most cases of URI in cats last seven to ten days. How does a cat get an upper respiratory infection? Dilute bleach solution will destroy both viruses but calicivirus will withstand washing with bleach-free laundry detergents. 1 Several of these diseases can cause a carrier state in cats that have apparently recovered from an infection, and female cats that are carriers can pass the infection on to their newborn kittens. URI Sections. In general, the treatment of an upper respiratory infection is mostly aimed at alleviating the discomfort of your pet's symptoms. Take your pet to the veterinarian if symptoms persist for 2 or 3 days, just to be sure it is indeed an upper respiratory infection, and not something else. Once you know what you're dealing with, an upper respiratory infection should run its course over a couple of days or several weeks at most. Here are some of the helpful ways that you can diminish the impact of your pet’s symptoms from an upper respiratory infection: 1 Discharge from the Eyes Watery or mucous-like secretion from your pet’s eyes can be gently removed by wiping with a warm, damp rag. Vets may also prescribe an ointment to ease this symptom. A cat that has an acute upper respiratory infection will be infective to other cats during the incubation period and for up to 3 weeks after developing symptoms. A cat that is a carrier of an upper respiratory virus may always be infective to other cats (see question How long does a typical upper respiratory infection last?). Cats that are unvaccinated, are young, or have chronic underlying problems are more susceptible, and may develop a serious illness. – generally the time of exposure to illness is 2-7 days, so in crowded situations, many cats can get sick very quickly. – active illness generally lasts 7-10 days regardless of treatment. – upper respiratory infections can result in secondary pneumonia, which can be life threatening. Well this sucks. Query: how long does upper respiratory last in cat",
"output": [
"Upper respiratory last in cat 2 to 10 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a2c3e8249fe445ddbf70e43c4e4cdd0c",
"input": "How Long Will It Take? Apartment Search Timeline. Last fall we estimated how much you’ll need to save up before you can move out. (Rule of thumb: If you save an amount equal to about 8-10% of your annual salary, you’ll be in good shape.) So by now you’ve been saving for 4-5 months, and you’re ready to make your move. Although these tips aren’t necessarily screening tips, the idea is to save you valuable time. 1 Consider the curb appeal of the property. 2 Fix any problems in the apartment beforehand. 3 Have selling points ready to discuss. 4 Turn the lights on in each room when you’re showing the apartment or house. the money you pay for the app/background check are non refundable...the fee that you pay/paid to 'hold' a place is. Just make sure you have that in writing and alway get a receipt. He said the application fee is $22.00 and that I would give one month rent to hold the place. I was just trying to see is it possible to pay that application fee get approved and then proceed with the rest after that. Validate items on their application: The credit report should have a few lines for prior residences as well, which you can bump up against what the applicant listed on their application. Check for any bankruptcies, payments sent to collections, evictions, and other public records and see if an explanation was provided on the application. For more, check out our guide chapter on how to analyze a tenant’s credit report. Almost all rentals, whether you are looking for an apartment, town home, duplex or even single family home, will require you to verify that you make enough money to afford rent. Most will call or ask for a letter from your employer to verify: If, however, you’ve had a job for five or more years, the 12 months you’ll be at this apartment will likely be a financially stable time. Checkbook. Finally, bring your checkbook when applying for apartments. You may have to pay an application fee or a fee to take the unit off the market until you sign the lease. That way, no one else can swoop in and take your dream apartment while you’re waiting for the OK. Have all these items on hand when you tour a place in case you want to fill out an apartment application on the spot. Happy hunting! Pin this post: A lease is a legally binding contract, laying out the rules agreed upon between the landlord or property owner and you, the tenant. It can be from one to many pages, but in general, a lease defines exactly how long you'll be renting the apartment (six months, one year, two years and so on) and exactly how much money you'll pay in rent each month (and on what day). The applicant hereby applies to rent/lease Apar tment #_____at_____ ____ _____for $_____ per month , and upon owner’s approval agrees to enter into a Rental Agreement and/or Lease and pay all rent and security deposits required before occupancy. An application fee of $_____ is hereby submitted fo r the cost of processing this application, to obtain credit history and other background information . I have been renting for many years and it has always been always instant approval. This Greystar apartment I applied (through realpage.com) told me they would have the result on the first weekday (Monday). After several calls they told me they still did not have the results. How can a background check take this long for an apartment lease? Even employment background check does not take days. Plus I do not remember giving consent on realpage.com for a background check. Unless they are sending out investigators (hard to believe for this kind of background check) there is not reason for it to take more than a day. Deposits range from $200 to $500 & submitted with application / $25.00 admin fee each over two adults PAID BY: CHECK # & MONEY ORDER(S) If after approval, applicant fails to sign the rental agreement, pay the security deposit and begin paying rent, the Application Deposit will be forfeited to the landlord. COMMENTS: Query: how long to verify a application to lease a apartment",
"output": [
"It will take six months, one year, two years to verify a application to lease a apartment."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3d9fecb161034f1f98701a58f9c952fe",
"input": "Distance from St. Louis to ... Graph showing distances and directions to other locations. Click arrows to see the route on a map. Learn more about the distance graph. Distance from Topeka, KS to St. Louis, MO is 311Miles or 500 Km. You can get this distance about 4 hours 38 mins. If you want to planning travel with plane for 298 Miles or 479 Km, You can get this distance about 1 hours 8 mins . A car with an average MPG will needs 14.4 gallons of gas to get the route between these points. The estimated cost of gas to get between Topeka, KS and St. Louis, MO is $32.69. During the route, an average car will release 282.12 pounds of CO 2 to the atmosphere. Joplin, MO Kansas City, KS Kansas City, MO Lawrence, KS Lawton, OK Lee's Summit, MO Lincoln, NE Little Rock, AR Midwest City, OK Norman, OK North Little Rock, AR Oklahoma City, OK Olathe, KS Omaha, NE Overland Park, KS Peoria, IL Sioux City, IA Sioux Falls, SD Springfield, IL Springfield, MO St. Charles, MO St. Joseph, MO St. Louis, MO St. Peters, MO Topeka, KS Tulsa, OK Waterloo, IA Wichita, KS: 31 Distance from St. Louis, Missouri to Topeka, Kansas The distance from St. Louis, Missouri to Topeka, Kansas is 294.6 miles by the driving route. The straight line distance (geographical distance) between St. Louis and Topeka is 294.6 miles (airline route). The distances via different routes and the durations needed to travel from St. Louis to Topeka are summarized in Table 1. The estimated fuel cost of driving from St. Louis to Topeka is summarized in Table 2. Driving directions from Topeka (Kansas) to St Louis (Missouri) Calculate the Driving Distance Between Topeka (Kansas) and St Louis (Missouri) - If you need to reverse this and get a map and driving directions from St Louis to Topeka click on the link. Click here to Show directions for the from Topeka to St Louis and the distance by road between the two. Driving distance from Topeka, KS to Saint Louis, MO. The total driving distance from Topeka, KS to Saint Louis, MO is 311 miles or 501 kilometers. Your trip begins in Topeka, Kansas. It ends in Saint Louis, Missouri. Driving distance from Topeka, KS to Saint Louis, MO The total driving distance from Topeka, KS to Saint Louis, MO is 311 miles or 501 kilometers. Your trip begins in Topeka, Kansas. Your journey from St. Louis, MO to Topeka, KS by car will take: Distance conversions between St. Louis, MO and Topeka, KS. This table shows distance in kilometers, miles and nautical miles between St. Louis, MO and Topeka, KS: You can use our travel planner to plan your Travel from Topeka to St. Louis. Check how to Travel from Topeka to St. Louis, MO. Do you want to know only the flight distance between Topeka to St. Louis? You can check our flight distance calculator to find Flight distance between Topeka and St. Louis, MO before travelling. Once you decide to take the travel by road and you are not aware of the route then you can get your Topeka to St. Louis, MO Route planned. The distance between Topeka and St Louis in a straight line is 287 miles or 461.78 Kilometers Driving Directions & Drive Times from Topeka to St Louis can be found further down the page. Driving distances, maps and journey times are currently provided by Google mapping systems. Query: how far is topeka kansas from st. louis missouri?",
"output": [
"The distance from Topeka, Kansas to St. Louis, Missouri is 311 miles or 500 Km."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-bee486e9909148c5bd6edb5d921cb112",
"input": "Activities that indicate the incision should be protected include: 1 Rising from a seated position. 2 Sneezing. 3 Coughing. 4 Bearing down during a bowel movement. 5 Vomiting. Inguinal hernia repair surgery recovery from california specialists. Generally these things do not heal on their own but bruce could better answer that. Hernia surgical mesh implants fda. After one month, all the swelling was gone, i had my innie back and completely healed. Injecting a special long acting steroid into the scar can help reduce inflammation and is often jan 17, 2012 umbilical hernia recovery day 1 procedure first that i didn't take any medications for 36 hours before surgery. A: It takes between 1 and 2 weeks to recover from a laparoscopic inguinal hernia repair, the most common type of surgical hernia repair. The less common open inguinal hernia repair takes around 3 weeks to recover from. Side Effects, Complications and Revision Surgery. Transvaginal mesh operations usually result in minor pain or discomfort for a few days after the operation. Bleeding may occur for a few hours after surgery, but most women leave the hospital on the same day as the procedure. Surgical mesh is a loosely woven sheet which is used as either a permanent or temporary support for organs and other tissues during surgery. Surgical mesh is created from both inorganic and biological materials and is used in a variety of surgeries. Though hernia repair surgery is the most common application, it can also be used for reconstructive work, such as in pelvic organ prolapse. Permanent meshes remain in the body, whereas temporary ones dissolve over time. For example, TIGR Matrix test I had surgery on 7/07/17 to repair an incisional hernia. I'm back to exercising and normal routine but my stomach looks like I'm 4 months pregnant.... Hello,Patients are typically healed within 6 weeks of surgery and residual swelling in the abdomen resolves between 4-6 months post op. I recommend... Make sure your surgeon knows all the prescription and over-the-counter medications you take, including natural or nutritional supplements. You may also be given a prescription for pain medication to take after surgery, in case you need it. Fill it before your surgery, so you don’t have to think about it after. The Day of Surgery From 2005 to 2010, the FDA received more than 4,000 reports of adverse events caused by the implants. The FDA has stated that complications from mesh were not rare, and studies indicated that mesh complications occurred in up to 20 percent of patients. However, not all complications require revision surgery. If you’re considering this procedure, you probably wonder how much time it will take to heal and complete the surgery. The amount of time that it takes to complete a dental implant procedure often depends upon your specific situation. Upper vs. Lower Jaw. Bone anywhere in your body will usually take a few weeks to heal, and the same is true of your jawbone. The upper jaw is comprised of softer bone, meaning dental implants in this area typically take longer to heal. The lower jaw bone is typically much more dense, making it possible to heal from dental implant surgery faster. Dental Implant Techniques Once the skin stretching is completed, you'll most likely have more surgery to replace the tissue expander with a permanent implant. Surgery is usually scheduled about 4 to 6 weeks after the last amount of liquid has been added to the expander. Surgery to insert the permanent implant takes about an hour. If radiation therapy is part of your treatment plan, most surgeons prefer that the radiation happen while you still have the tissue expander. Query: how long does it take for surgical mesh implants to heal",
"output": [
"It takes between 1 and 2 weeks to recover from a laparoscopic inguinal hernia repair, the most common type of surgical hernia repair."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1d7fb0d460d84a28b0abba12de3f77a5",
"input": "Are there any adults who should not get the tetanus vaccine? You should not get a Tdap vaccine if you have had a severe allergic reaction after a previous Tdap vaccine. You also should not get a Tdap vaccine if you have a history of coma or seizures within a week following a previous Tdap vaccine. PCV13 is recommended as a series of four doses, one dose at each of these ages: 1 2 months. 2 4 months. 3 6 months. 4 12 through 15 months. Talk to your health care provider if you plan to get ZOSTAVAX at the same time as the flu vaccine. Talk to your health care provider if you plan to get ZOSTAVAX at the same time as PNEUMOVAX® 23. because it may be better to get these vaccines at least 4 weeks apart. PCV13: Pneumococcal conjugate vaccine for all infants and children, and adults 19 years and older at increased risk for disease (Spanish) (PDF - 290KB) PPSV23: Pneumococcal polysaccharide vaccine for all adults 65 years or older and those 2 years of age or older at increased risk for disease (Spanish) (PDF - 297KB) Vaccines should be separated by at least 28 days preferably, but some experts suggest that 14 days* or longer is acceptable. If given 1-13 days apart, repeat the vaccine administered second at least 14 days* (preferably 28 days) from the invalid (second) dose. Wait to get the Tdap vaccine if you have a moderate to severe acute illness. What are the tetanus vaccine ingredients? The vaccines are made up of tetanus, diphtheria, and pertussis toxins that have been made nontoxic but they still have the ability to create an immune response. These vaccines do not contain live bacteria. Are there any dangers or side effects associated with the tetanus vaccine? It's important to know that, in general, the risk of problems from getting tetanus is much greater than from getting a tetanus vaccine. You cannot get tetanus from the tetanus shot. One dose of PCV13 is recommended for children 6 through 18 years old and adults 19 through 64 years old with the following medical conditions that put them at increased risk for pneumococcal disease: 1 Cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) leaks (leak in fluid around the brain and spine) ZOSTAVAX is a vaccine that is used for adults 50 years of age or older to prevent shingles (also known. as zoster). ZOSTAVAX contains a weakened chickenpox virus (varicella-zoster virus). ZOSTAVAX works by helping your immune system protect you from getting shingles. One dose of PPSV23 is recommended for: 1 All adults 65 years or older. 2 Anyone 2 through 64 years old who has a long-term health problem such as: Heart disease. 3 Anyone 2 through 64 years old who has a disease or condition that lowers the body’s resistance to infection, such as: Hodgkin’s disease. There are currently two types of pneumococcal vaccines: pneumococcal conjugate vaccine (PCV13) and pneumococcal polysaccharide vaccine (PPSV23). There are more than 90 types of pneumococcal bacteria. PCV13 protects against 13 types and PPSV23 protects against 23 types. Query: how long to separate live vaccines",
"output": [
"Vaccines should be separated by at least 28 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8140d6457a2148e5ba67ae9777702932",
"input": "We offer a wide range of clinical trials of new treatments for all stages of bladder cancer. The clinical trials conducted at DF/BWCC have had a profound impact on the type of care administered worldwide. For some patients with advanced bladder cancer, taking part in a clinical trial is the best treatment option. If you need surgery, radiation, or chemotherapy, you will see experts in each area who deal specifically with bladder cancer. Bladder cancer patients from all across the nation seek treatment at Dana-Farber/Brigham and Women's Cancer Center. With stage II bladder cancer (muscle-invasive and localized), surgery is generally the first line of treatment. Radiation is also considered if the tumor has not spread or you cannot have surgery. Chemotherapy may be suggested in some cases. In addition to how deeply the cancer penetrates in the bladder wall, the grade of the bladder cancer provides important information and can help guide treatment. The tumor grade is based on the degree of abnormality observed in a microscopic evaluation of the tumor. Treatment for stage IV (metastatic) bladder cancer will generally consist of chemotherapy, clinical trials, or a combination the two. Surgery may be performed to remove the affected lymph nodes or relieve late-stage symptoms of the disease. Often, after transurethral resection, additional treatment is given (for example, intravesical therapy) to help treat the bladder cancer, depending on the grade and stage of the bladder cancer. Radical cystectomy: In this operation, the entire bladder is removed, as well as its surrounding lymph nodes and other structures adjacent to the bladder that may contain cancer. If a bladder cancer cell metastasizes -- that is, spreads to the lungs through the bloodstream it is still called, and is treated as metastatic bladder cancer, not as lung cancer. Cells which transform in a less dangerous fashion may still multiply and form masses or tumors. Read about bladder cancer symptoms, signs, diagnosis, treatment, stages, survival risk, prognosis, and prevention. The staging of bladder cancer is determined by how far the cancer has penetrated the bladder wall. Learn more about the symptoms of bladder cancer and how it is prevented. Stages T a, T 1, and CIS bladder cancer can be treated with intravesical chemotherapy, which means the placement of treatments directly into the bladder. After removal of the tumor, one or more liquid drugs are introduced into the bladder via a thin, plastic tube called a catheter. If you are diagnosed with stage III bladder cancer (muscle-invasive and advanced), surgery and chemotherapy are the primary forms of treatment. Chemotherapy may be suggested before or after surgery, and radiation therapy is used on occasion. Query: how is bladder cancer treated",
"output": [
"With stage II bladder cancer (muscle-invasive and localized), surgery is generally the first line of treatment. Radiation is also considered if the tumor has not spread or you cannot have surgery. If you are diagnosed with stage III bladder cancer, surgery and chemotherapy are the primary forms of treatment. Chemotherapy may be suggested before or after surgery, and radiation therapy is used on occasion. Chemotherapy may be suggested in some cases.Treatment for stage IV bladder cancer will generally consist of chemotherapy, clinical trials, or a combination the two. Surgery may be performed to remove the affected lymph nodes or relieve late-stage symptoms of the disease."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7225e6b916b74f0d9215f11288f8549a",
"input": "Marital status for the tax year. Number of dependents claimed on your return during the tax year. Info about child care expenses paid during the year. Amount of wages earned during the year and amounts withheld (including frequency of pay – best to have a recent pay stub handy) Claiming two allowances will get you close to your tax liability but may result in tax due when filing your taxes. You’re single and work more than one job. Claim one allowance at each job or two allowances at one job and zero at the other. You’re married. Claiming three allowances You are married with one child. Claiming additional allowances . File as head of household if you are eligible. You are able to claim additional allowances. You had at least $2,000 of child or dependent care expenses that you plan on claiming credit. You’re eligible to claim the Child Tax Credit. Most importantly, the number of allowances you claim on a W-4 determines the following; 1 how much tax will be taken from your income (aka the withholding amount) 2 the size of your tax refund. If any of the following happens to you, consider an update: 1 You receive a large refund and expect the same for the next tax year; 2 You owe a significant amount to IRS and expect the same for the next tax year; 3 You get married or divorced; 4 You have a baby, adopt a child or lose a child; 5 Your child or children go away to college or move away from home; Claiming two allowances. 1 You are single. Claiming two allowances will get you close to your tax liability but may result in tax due when filing your taxes. 2 You’re single and work more than one job. Claim one allowance at each job or two allowances at one job and zero at the other. 3 You’re married. The allowances you claim while filling out a W-4 if you are single will differ from the allowances you claim if you are married or have kids. Claiming zero allowances The maximum amount of tax is withheld. Your form W-2 reports withholding (as well as wages and benefits) for the tax year. The amount withheld is calculated using information which you provide on a form W-4 (downloads as a pdf). The point of the form W-4 is to figure out how many allowances to claim for purposes of your federal income tax withholding. The general rule is that the more allowances you claim, the less withholding you’ll have taken out of your paycheck. If you claim zero, you’ll have the maximum amount taken out. Claiming three allowances You are married with one child. Claiming additional allowances . File as head of household if you are eligible. You are able to claim additional allowances. You had at least $2,000 of child or dependent care expenses that you plan on claiming credit; You’re eligible to claim the Child Tax Credit; Can I fill out a new W-4 form? Claiming additional allowances. 1 File as head of household if you are eligible. You are able to claim additional allowances. 2 You had at least $2,000 of child or dependent care expenses that you plan on claiming credit. 3 You’re eligible to claim the Child Tax Credit. You’ll need to have the following info handy: 1 Marital status for the tax year. 2 Number of dependents claimed on your return during the tax year. 3 Info about child care expenses paid during the year. 4 Amount of wages earned during the year and amounts withheld (including frequency of pay – best to have a recent pay stub handy) Query: how many allowances do i claim on taxes married with one child",
"output": [
"Claiming three allowances You are married with one child."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-5d01f000e6b4410cbfb23c2ffd10fc8d",
"input": "The largest predators in Lake Superior are lake trout. To eat the specimen I’m holding, a laker would have to weigh 25 pounds or more. Plenty of lakers in Superior exceed 25 pounds, but few would be fast enough to make a steady diet of onchorynchys mykiss. Just how fast is a steelhead? Fastest organism. The fastest land animal is the cheetah, which has a recorded speed of 109.4–120.7 km/h (68.0–75.0 mph). The peregrine falcon is the fastest bird and the fastest member of the animal kingdom with a diving speed of 389 km/h (242 mph). The fastest animal in the sea is the black marlin, which has a recorded speed of 129 km/h (80 mph). Killer whales can swim as fast as 100 kph (30 mph), but they usually cruise at much slower speeds. A Killer Whale can usually go 35 miles per hour. Their usual cruising speed is about 5-10 MPH. Although many people don't see this behavior this usually occurs when they start to attack. The Traxxas XO-1 is an all-wheel-drive electric radio-controlled car, with a claimed top speed of over 100 mph. The Traxxas XO-1 is an all-wheel-drive electric radio-controlled car, with a claimed top speed of over 100 mph. A man between the ages of 17 and 24 should be running at a minimum. pace of 7.73 mph and a maximum pace of 9.24 mph, men aged 22 to. 26 should be running at a minimum of 7.34 mph and a maximum of. 9.24 mph, while men aged 27 to 31 should be at a minimum of 7.1 mph. An estimated 4.7–5.3-meter (15–17 ft) female orca immobilized an estimated 3–4-meter (9.8–13.1 ft) great white shark. The orca held the shark upside down to induce tonic immobility and kept the shark still for fifteen minutes, causing it to suffocate. For example, cheetahs can attain short bursts of speed well over 100 km/h (62 mph), the American quarter horse has topped 88 km/h (55 mph), greyhounds can reach 70 km/h (43 mph), and the Mongolian wild ass has been measured at 64 km/h (40 mph). Even the domestic cat may reach 48 km/h (30 mph). Killer Whale (Orcinus orca) - 34.5 miles per hour - 55 Kilometers per hour An orca's powerful tail can propel it through the water at speeds of up to an amazing 35 miles per h…our! A killer whale can swim from 20 to 50 M.P.H. Blue whales can reach speeds of 50 kilometres per hour (31 mph) over short bursts, usually when interacting with other whales, but 20 kilometres per hour (12 mph) is a more typical traveling speed. When feeding, they slow down to 5 kilometres per hour (3.1 mph). The Dall's Porpoise — a chunky, hyperactive speed demon of the North Pacific — is believed to be even faster (speeds up to 34.5 mph have been reported), but since it does not fare well in captivity, it has not been trained or its speed measured. Most large sharks are cold-blooded and cruise at a leisurely 1.5 mph. Query: how fast is a orca in mph",
"output": [
"Orca is 34.5 miles per hour fast."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-bd2cfe58b0e6472d88df293151483b0d",
"input": "Total bilirubin is now often measured by the 2,5-dichlorophenyldiazonium (DPD) method, and direct bilirubin is often measured by the method of Jendrassik and Grof. Blood levels. The bilirubin level found in the body reflects the balance between production and excretion. Blood test results should always be interpreted using the reference range provided by the laboratory that performed the test, but typical [0.3 to 1.9 mg/dL]s for adults and [340 µmol/L] for new borns: Jaundice occurs as a result of excess bilirubin in. the blood. It is a hallmark of liver disease but. not always present in liver disease. Jaundice. occurs when the liver fails to adequately. secrete bilirubin from the blood into the bile. Bilirubin: Bilirubin,, a brownish yellow pigment of bile, secreted by the liver in vertebrates, which gives to solid waste products (feces) their characteristic colour. It is produced in bone marrow cells and in the liver as the end product of red-blood-cell (hemoglobin) breakdown. Normally the body produces a total of about 260 mg of bilirubin per day. Almost 99 per cent of this is excreted in the feces; the remaining 1 per cent is excreted in the urine as urobilinogen. Bilirubin is a pigment in bile created during the breakdown of haemoglobin, which is then excreted from the body in bile. It is bilirubin which gives people the characte…ristic yellow colour in jaundice (whether that be caused by liver failure, obstruction or an increased breakdown of haemoglobin). the liver. To be transported in blood, bilirubin must be solubilized. By the very nature of being reversible, noncovalent binding to albumin the Unconjugated bilirubin bound to albumin is transported to the liver, where it is taken up by hepatocytes through carrier-mediated membrane transport and solubilised. Bilirubin metabolism: Applied physiology Xia Wang, Jayanta Roy Chowdhury , Namita Roy Chowdhury Albert Einstein College of Medicine, New York, USA KEYWORDS Bilirubin; Bilirubin glucuro-nides; UGT1A1; ABCC2 Summary Bilirubin is the breakdown product of the haem moiety of haemoglobin and other haemoproteins. Because of internal hydrogen bonding, bilirubin is water-insoluble and requires enzyme-mediated glucuronidation in the liver for biliary excretion. In normal circumstances, plasma bilirubin is mostly unconjugated and is tightly bound to circulating albumin. Urine bilirubin may also be clinically significant. Bilirubin is not normally detectable in the urine of healthy people. If the blood level of conjugated bilirubin becomes elevated, e.g. due to liver disease, excess conjugated bilirubin is excreted in the urine, indicating a pathological process. Unconjugated bilirubin is not water-soluble and so is not excreted in the urine. Biliary Excretion of Waste Products: Elimination of Bilirubin The liver is well known to metabolize and excrete into bile many compounds and toxins, thus eliminating them (usually) from the body. Examples can be found among both endogenous molecules (steroid hormones, calcium) and exogenous compounds (many antibiotics and metabolities of drugs). Bilirubin is conjugated with glucuronic acid in the liver and excreted in the bile, giving the stools their characteristic colour. When it cannot escape freely into the bowel it accumulates in the blood, staining the skin to cause JAUNDICE. Query: how is bilirubin excreted from the body",
"output": [
"Bilirubin is a brownish yellow pigment of bile, secreted by the liver in vertebrates, which gives to solid waste products their characteristic colour. It is produced in bone marrow cells and in the liver as the end product of red-blood-cell (hemoglobin) breakdown."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-81e78f5ccf39477eaffc2475f6217c4b",
"input": "School Bus Driver Cited for Leaving Scene of Crash. Franceille Fleurine of Massachusetts reportedly strikes two trees, smashing the back window of the bus, and then continues to drive her route. Video February 14, 2018 VIDEO: 2 Superintendents Get on Board for Love the Bus. Here’s a high-profile plug for the Love the Bus campaign. Dr. Interstate Passenger Carrying Driver’s Guide to Hours of Service What Are the Hours-of-Service Regulations? As the driver of a bus, motorcoach, or other passenger-carrying vehicle, you have a lot of responsibility as you drive down the road. The biggest concern is safety. That brings us to the main reason for the hours-of-service regulations — to keep fatigued drivers off the public roadways. These regulations put limits in place for when and how long you may drive, with the idea that these limits will help make sure that you stay awake and alert while driving. Driver Certificate of Professional Competence (CPC), also known as a Driver Qualification Card (DQC) For some jobs you’ll also need a digital tachograph card. You'll usually apply to bus or coach companies and train on the job. Before you start training, most employers will expect you to: be at least 18 (21 if you want to drive a bus or coach abroad) have held a full driving licence for at least 12 months. Goods vehicles: rules on drivers’ hours and tachographs Passenger vehicles: rules on drivers’ hours and tachographs Emergency exemption and temporary relaxation of drivers’ hours and working time rules My partner is a bus driver, his company says he can drive 7 hours before he is entitle to a break. showing them the regulation Alternatively, within any period of 8.5 hours in the working day, total breaks amounting to at least 45 minutes are taken so that the driver does not drive for more than 7 hours and 45 minutes. Bus drivers had a higher rate of work-related injuries and illnesses in 2016 than the national average. Most injuries to bus drivers are due to vehicle accidents. How to Become a Bus Driver. Bus drivers must have a commercial driver’s license (CDL). This can sometimes be earned during on-the-job training. According to the FMCSA, For every ten hours driving, the drivers need to take 8 consecutive hours off. If your company does operate vehicles every day of the week (Like Greyhound), your employer may assign you to the 70-hour/8-day schedule. This means that you are not allowed to drive after you’ve been on duty 70 hours in any 8 consecutive days. Once you reach the 70-hour limit, you will not be able to drive again until you have dropped below 70 hours for an 8-consecutive-day period. Heavy vehicle work time requirements in New Zealand are: 1 A break of at least 30 minutes every 5.5 hours of work time. 2 Maximum cumulative work time of 13 hours (plus 2x 30-minute breaks) in one cumulative work day before a 10-hour break is required, giving a total of 24 hours. It is such a grey area where for how long you can drive a bus or a coach until you need to take a break. If you are driving a bus under the GB Domestic rules (PSV375) your driving hours are ruled by the Transport Act 1968 (Part VI as amended) here is what is says. 96 Permitted driving time and periods of duty. Drivers may drive 10 hours in a twenty-four hour period according to Federal and State regulations. How many hours is a bus driver allowed in a 24-hour period?State and Federal regulations require a driver have at least eight hours off before they can drive again or go back on duty. We recommend you allow 10 hours rest time for your driver. Query: how long can a bus driver drive",
"output": [
"A bus driver can drive for 10 hours."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-22e5adf327de4222a5b24f8b6a4bdad9",
"input": "What could happen if my baby is premature? Preterm birth can cause serious health problems or even be fatal for a baby, particularly if it happens very early. In general, the more mature a baby is at birth, the better his chances of surviving and being healthy. Some preterm babies may have problems breathing. Prematurity also puts a baby at a greater risk for brain hemorrhage. The nervous system, gastrointestinal tract, and other organs may be affected too. Sometimes your baby needs to be born early because one of you has a medical problem. The most common medical reasons for inducing labor early include: Your baby isn’t growing. 36 weeks is NOT full-term. 9 months is 39.8 weeks, not 36 weeks. You should under NO circumstances induce a pregnancy early without a REAL MEDICAL reason. A baby's brain at 36 weeks has 2/3 less mass than a baby at 40 weeks. After the first trimester Ultrasounds can be inaccurate. Measurements, especially of weight can be off as much as 2-3 lbs. Almost all Western nations have banned elective inductions and C-sections. If there is no medical reason to induce DON'T do it. Once the baby is born care includes keeping the baby warm through skin to skin contact, supporting breastfeeding, treating infections, and supporting breathing. Preterm birth is the most common cause of death among infants worldwide. Wang and colleagues examined the records of infants born at the hospital over a three-year period and randomly selected 95 full-term infants, born at 37 weeks or more, and 90 near-term infants, born at 35 or 36 weeks.. However, going into premature labour can be linked with: 1 Having a very full and stretched womb (uterus). 2 Cervical weakness, or a short cervical length. 3 A history of spontaneous premature birth. 4 A bacterial infection in the bag containing the waters or in the amniotic fluid itself. 5 Your waters breaking early. 6 Heavy bleeding. Air travel is appropriate for most infants. Before you fly with your baby, however, consider: Your baby's age. Your baby's doctor might discourage unnecessary air travel shortly after birth. Newborns have developing immune systems and air travel might increase their risk of catching an infectious disease. If you choose to travel with an infant, frequently wash your hands or use hand sanitizer and avoid contact with obviously ill travelers. Had he been born at 34 weeks he probably would not have needed any help because 2 weeks in utero is much better and allows for much greater development than 2 weeks out. If you made it to 34 weeks you are probably in the clear (although that's not a guarentee either since a baby could be born at 40 weeks with problems). Most babies who make it to 36 weeks are perfectly fine and go home with mom. Babies born in a hospital with a level III NICU have a decent chance at survival at 24 weeks, but my OB feels more comfortable saying 26-28 weeks and birth weight is a factor. My friend delivered her twin boys at 24w4d. Baby A was 1lb7oz and Baby B was 1lb9oz. Baby B passed away after 10 days due to a brain bleed. Baby A spent 125 days in the NICU and came home healthy with no long-term complications that they have identified. Truthfully, long-term effects may no be known for a while. It is best for a baby to be born after 37 weeks but, many babies are ok that are born sooner. It just depends on the situation and why the baby comes early. Source(s): Query: how early can a baby be born safely",
"output": [
"A baby can be born safely after 37 weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-2f06e3cc9d0c40eb9398cf0ae0870e62",
"input": "ORTHOVISC is a non–avian sourced viscosupplementation with lasting efficacy for up to 6 months. ORTHOVISC is derived from bacterial cells. ORTHOVISC is given as an injection into your knee joint (administered by a health professional) once a week for 3-4 consecutive weeks. After 3-4 injections, studies have shown pain relief that lasts for up to 6 months. 1 Although individual results vary, some people feel relief after the first injection. Okay, long enough post, lol. If one of the mods/auth want to modify the name of this topic, I'd prefer to remove the reference to Synvisc and just let this thread talk about the arthritis. It might bring more comment to the discussion. alt= height=20 /> I'm 54 and been getting synvisc 1 shots once a yr. for the past 5 yrs. with very good results. It was like a miracle to me because it would last for 8 months to a yr. before pain in my right knee would return. I just had a synvisc one injection last week and was surprised because I developed severe pain and hardly can function with knee. Last week received orthovisc and to my surprise doctor administered all three in one shot saying studies have shown no difference in 3 different sessions or all at once (I wasn't going to argue she went to med school not me) so I did it an unfortunately 10 days later I don't feel any better at all it's as if I never went. Synvisc is the only ... Stars: 86 Updated: December 15th,2017 86: December 15th,2017: Synvisc perisynovitis. Synvisc (hylan G-F 20) is a high molecular weight hyaluronan which is manufactured from chicken combs. It is currently one of the options used in the tr... Stars: 29 Updated: December 15th,2017 Debbie's Story. Debbie is a longtime nanny and caregiver. After trying almost everything for her knee pain, Debbie didn’t know where to turn. She and her doctor decided to try ORTHOVISC® High Molecular Weight Hyaluronan for her knee OA. Find out how Debbie was able to get to her passion for helping others. Now he is suggesting Synvisc injections. This is injected once a week for three weeks and is supposed to provide up to 6 months of knee pain relief. I was wondering if anyone has had this treatment and if there are any side effects from it? And does it really work and last as long as they claim????? Thanks, Kikko Yes, Synvisc-One can be repeated safely. In a medical study involving 160 patients, 77 received a second injection of Synvisc-One. When your osteoarthritis knee pain returns, talk to your doctor to see if Synvisc-One is right for you. Bone-on-Bone Arthritis - Synvisc injections. Well, I couldn't be content just with back and neck pain, I had to get my knee into the picture, lol. Just got home from seeing an orthopedic knee specialist who did an xray and showed me the bone-on-bone arthritis in my right knee. Synvisc side effects . I suffered an adverse reaction yesterday to my 3rd injection of Synvisc. My knee was swollen, warm to the touch but NOT any redness. It was painful to walk and would not bend. It is better today and my doctor said that it would eventually subside,... ... Conditions and Diseases - Arthritis Query: how long does synvisc last",
"output": [
"Synvisc lasts for 8 months to a year."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f17b9f97431a4b7397a30555787cb65d",
"input": "Multicellular organisms need organ systems to carry out functions such as: 1 Communication between cells, eg the nervous system and circulatory system. 2 Supplying the cells with nutrients, eg the digestive system. 3 Controlling exchanges with the environment, eg the respiratory system and excretory system. Organisms can consist of one cell to many cells: Simple organisms may be unicellular (consist of one cell) Complex organisms are multicellular(consist of many cells) There are advantages to being multicellular rather than unicellular. These include allowing: The organism to be larger A: Multicellular organisms enjoy several distinct benefits, including a larger size and greater complexity than unicellular organisms. Multicellular organisms include many types of plants and animals while the class of unicellular organisms forms primarily from microorganisms, amoeba and bacteria. The organism to be larger; Cell differentiation (having different types of cells with different functions) The organisms to be more complex; Complexity - Higher tier. Multicellular organisms need specialised organ systems, whereas all the life processes in a unicellular organism take place in that one cell. 1 Multicellular organisms need organ systems to carry out functions such as: 2 Communication between cells, eg the nervous system and circulatory system. Multicellular organisms enjoy several distinct benefits, including a larger size and greater complexity than unicellular organisms. Multicellular organisms include many types of plants and animals... Multicellular organisms enjoy several distinct benefits, including a larger size and greater complexity than unicellular organisms. There are advantages to being multicellular rather than unicellular. 1 These include allowing: 2 The organism to be larger. 3 Cell differentiation (having different types of cells with different functions) 4 The organisms to be more complex. Written By: Multicellular organism, an organism composed of many cells, which are to varying degrees integrated and independent. The development of multicellular organisms is accompanied by cellular specialization and division of labour; cells become efficient in one process and are dependent upon other cells for the necessities of life. The nematode Ascaris lumbricoides is a multicellular organism. Javier Palaus Soler/Ostman Agency Specialization in single-celled organisms exists at the subcellular level; i.e., the basic functions that are divided among the cells, tissues, and organs of the multicellular organism are collected within one cell. Multicellular organisms, as the name implies, have many types of cells, while unicellular organisms contain just one cell each. Both kinds of organisms reproduce through meiosis or mitosis. Multicellular organisms generally form the higher tiers in the web of life. Simple organisms may be unicellular (consist of one cell) Complex organisms are multicellular(consist of many cells) There are advantages to being multicellular rather than unicellular. These include allowing: The organism to be larger; Cell differentiation (having different types of cells with different functions) The organisms to be more complex Simple organisms may be unicellular, consisting of just one cell, while more complex organisms are multicellular. There are two types of cell division. Mitosis is used for growth and repair and produces diploid cells identical to each other and the parent cell. Query: how does a multicellular organism benefit",
"output": [
"Multicellular organisms enjoy several distinct benefits, including a larger size and greater complexity than unicellular organisms. Multicellular organisms include many types of plants and animals while the class of unicellular organisms forms primarily from microorganisms, amoeba and bacteria."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-00260960cac24977b867d81ba1fce4a2",
"input": "Star Wars: The Last Jedi. Disney Star Wars: The Last Jedi will be the longest film in Star Wars history, director Rian Johnson announced. The Last Jedi will clock in at 150 minutes, including credits. It opens December 15. 30 years after the defeat of Darth Vader and the Empire, Rey, a scavenger from the planet Jakku, finds a BB-8 droid that knows the whereabouts of the long lost Luke Skywalker. Rey, as well as a rogue stormtrooper and two smugglers, are thrown into the middle of a battle between the Resistance and the daunting legions of the First Order. True All-Time Movie Box Office Champ? Top 25 classic climactic quotes ... Upcoming Sequels to '70s, '80s and '90s films; The Box Office 2015; Ethical dilemma: Would you knowingly spoil a movie for others? Title: Star Wars: The Force Awakens (2015) 8 /10. Want to share IMDb's rating on your own site? Use the HTML below. Today in Movie Culture: The Original Opening of 'Star Wars: The Force Awakens,' the Making of a 'Mission: Impossible - Fallout' Stunt and More 7 hours ago | Movies.com Pacific Rim 2 Book Prepares Fans for the Ultimate Uprising Star Wars (later retitled Star Wars: Episode IV – A New Hope) is a 1977 American epic space opera film written and directed by George Lucas. It is the first film in the original Star Wars trilogy, the first Star Wars movie in general, and the beginning of the Star Wars franchise. Three years into the Clone Wars, the Jedi rescue Palpatine from Count Dooku. As Obi-Wan pursues a new threat, Anakin acts as a double agent between the Jedi Council and Palpatine and is lured into a sinister plan to rule the galaxy. Star Wars: The Force Awakens Star Wars: Episode VII - The Force Awakens (original title) PG-13 | 2h 16min | Action, Adventure, Fantasy | 18 December 2015 (USA) At 150 minutes, its runtime surpasses the previous longest film in the franchise, George Lucas' 2002 prequel Star Wars: Episode II - Attack of the Clones, which clocked in at 142 minutes. The last two films in the franchise, Star Wars: The Force Awakens and Rogue One, were 135 and 133 minutes long, respectively. The upcoming movie Star Wars: The Last Jedi will be the longest film in the history of the Star Wars franchise, the film's director Rian Johnson said on Friday. In a press conference, Johnson announced that movie's runtime will be two hours and thirty minutes (including credits), according to The Playlist. Query: how long in the star wars movie",
"output": [
"The Last Jedi will be the longest film in Star Wars history at 150 minutes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9e8f8f16a0fa4540a556cb0c285eda0f",
"input": "Two known chemotherapy agents effectively target breast cancer stem cells Date: May 2, 2016 Source: Medical College of Georgia at Augusta University Summary: Two existing chemotherapy drugs appear to be a powerful pair in targeting errant stem cells that are making breast cancer and enabling its spread and recurrence, scientists report. Share: Chemotherapy targets cancer cells through similar biological processes. For instance, early chemotherapy drugs attacked folate, which is a key component of cellular division. Since cancer cells divide more than normal cells, they are more greatly harmed by this drug. Newer chemotherapy agents target specific mutations in certain cancer cells, making their effects very specific to only the tumor. To your last point, radiation and chemo both can induce future cancers. Radiation therapy targets cancer cells in two ways. First, we shape the beam of radiation such that it conforms as closely as possible to the shape of the tumor. We also treat from multiple different angles, with all beams converging on the tumor. Best Answer: The short answer is that they don't differentiate between cell types. This is why there are side effects. There are a variety of different mechanisms that the chemo meds employ, down-regulating certain proteins from being made, binding certain receptors to trigger cell death, etc. You hit it when you said the chemo meds mostly target rapidly dividing cells (or highly metabolically active cells.) And we're able to be relatively tissue specific too, so different drugs have affinities for different tissues. (That's why chemo for lung cancer and chemo for prostate cancer, for example, are very different protocols.) And the more we learn about how cancer cells work in the body, the more we're able to develop new tools to address them. How Cancer Stem Cells Thrive When Oxygen Is Scarce. 1 Mar. 28, 2016 — Working with human breast cancer cells and mice, scientists say new experiments explain how certain cancer stem cells thrive in low oxygen conditions. Proliferation of such cells, which tend to ... Two known chemotherapy agents effectively target breast cancer stem cells. https://www.sciencedaily.com/releases/2016/05/160502131417.htm. Two existing chemotherapy drugs appear to be a powerful pair in targeting errant stem cells that are making breast cancer and enabling its spread and recurrence, scientists report. Your source for the latest research news Most current chemotherapy does not kill the stem cells, which are the cells of origin, only the tumor mass, said Dr. Muthusamy Thangaraju, biochemist in the Department of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology at the Medical College of Georgia and Georgia Cancer Center at Augusta University. Features. 1 Book List. 2 Mods' Choice: Outstanding posts recognized by the mod team. 3 Weekly Features: Archives of AskAnything Wednesday, FAQ Fridays, and more! 4 FAQ: In-depth answers to many popular questions. 5 New and gilded posts. / 6 r/AskScienceDiscussion: For open-ended and hypothetical questions. Their work was done in mouse models of breast cancer, and findings held up in a human breast cancer cell line. The studies also provided more evidence -- at least in their animal models -- of why the stem cells are an important target. Normally, stem cells make progenitor cells, which make specific cells that comprise the breast. In this sense, the tumor is targeted geometrically - the radiation is aimed at the tumor, and not normal tissue. Secondly, cancer cells are more sensitive to radiation damage. Since they move through the cell cycle so rapidly, they are more likely to be in a specific, radiosensitive phase of cellular activity. Query: how does chemotherapy target cancer cells",
"output": [
"Chemotherapy targets cancer cells through similar biological processes. For instance, early chemotherapy drugs attacked folate, which is a key component of cellular division. Since cancer cells divide more than normal cells, they are more greatly harmed by this drug."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4fabe784bd184f34a32f023147c77b3e",
"input": "The colony of Buenos Aires was founded in 1536. Temporarily abandoned, it was re-founded in 1580 by the governor, Juan de Garay. The governate of Rio de la Plata was established after the new viceroyalty of Peru took territory away from New Spain. Itinerary: Arrival, Buenos Aires, Rio de la Plata River, At Sea, Puerto Madryn, At Sea, Magellan Strait, Punta Arenas, Passage Cape Hoorn, Beagle Canal, Darwin Canal, Ushuaia, Scenic cruising through chilenean fjords, Castro, Puerto Montt, At Sea, Valparaiso, Coquimbo, At Sea, Iquique, At Sea, Callao About 11 miles wide at its upper end, the width of the delta grows to roughly 40 miles at the river mouth, where the separated branches of the Paraná flow into the Río de la Plata, about 200 miles from Diamante. To those who regard the Río de la Plata as a river, it is the widest in the world, with a total area of about 13,500 square miles. Plata definition, Rí·o de la [ree-aw th e lah] /ˈri ɔ ðɛ lɑ/ (Show IPA) an estuary on the SE coast of South America between Argentina and Uruguay, formed by the Uruguay and Paraná rivers, about 185 miles (290 km) long. See more. Plata definition, Rí·o de la [ree-aw th e lah] /ˈri ɔ ðɛ lɑ/ (Show IPA) an estuary on the SE coast of South America between Argentina and Uruguay, formed by the Uruguay and Paraná rivers, about 185 miles (290 km) long. Also, La Plata. Also called Plata River; British, River Plate. Full-Day Tour (8 hours):Make your way to central Buenos Aires, where you’ll meet your guide and board a boat for a river cruise to Tigre. Learn about the history of the delta as you glide along the Costanera Navigation Canal past Buenos Aires’ shoreline landmarks. “The House is located in a batch of 21,60 meters long, with a significant slope of 8,50 meters from the +/-0,00 to its highest point in the gully of San Isidro. This gully is testimony of the original coast and the won surface into the Río de la Plata river throughout our short history, reason for which it seemed to us important to alter it as little as possible. The Río de la Plata — rendered River Plate in British English and the Commonwealth and La Plata River in other English-speaking countries — is the estuary formed by the confluence of the Uruguay and the Paraná rivers. It empties into the Atlantic Ocean, forming a funnel-shaped indentation on the southeastern coastline of South America. Depending on the geographer, the Río de la Plata may be considered a river, an estuary, a gulf or a marginal sea. For those who consider it a river ... La Plata River. Written By: La Plata River, Spanish Río De La Plata, river in east-central Puerto Rico, rising on the western slope of Mount Santa (2,963 feet [903 metres]), a peak of the Sierra de Cayey. Part of the stream is impounded by Lake Carite; the reservoir’s outlet diverts waters for a series of hydroelectric stations on the Guamaní River in the coastal Guayama area to the south. Query: how long is the rio de la plata river",
"output": [
"The rio de la plata river, about 185 miles or 290 km long."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9906b43395ec4cccbf0ec9ab3c9964e4",
"input": "As soon as shingles are detected, medication takes place and how long does shingles last will depend on the extent of which it has occurred. Usually it lasts no more than 3 weeks time. If left untreated, the person may also become blind or paralyzed, althouh this is rare and only occurs in extreme cases. Popular Posts. 1 How Long Does Mail Take. 2 How Long Does The Flu Last. 3 How Long Does Suboxone Stay in Your System. 4 How Long Does It Take To Get Mri Results. 5 How Long Does It Take To Digest A Meal. 6 How Long Does It Take To Become An Architect. 7 How Long Does It Take To Lower Blood Pressure. There are a few things that can extend, or reduce the life expectancy of your new roof. These include steepness, orientation to the sun, the color of the shingle, good ventilation, and so on, but shingles will, generally, last exactly how long they are rated for. The trick is knowing the real rating so if you’re buying a “standard dimensional shingle” – you are buying a 30-year shingle. 5-7 Days: Usually the shingles rash (and pain) may last 5-7 days but could be longer. Even with mild pain it is recommended to be treated with anti-virals to prevent long term problems such as post-herpetic neuralgia (long term nerve pain). ... A shingle roof generally lasts twenty to fifty years. This covers a number of types of material including composition shingle, asphalt shingle, dimensional shingle, 3-tab shingle and more. Shingles come in four major varieties: 20, 30, 40 and 50-year. These are, as you can see, categorized by their life-expectancy. How long do shingles symptoms last - How long do the symptoms of shingles last for you? 1-2 weeks. The rash that occurs with shingles usually lasts about 7-10 days before all the lesions dry up and begin to fall off. Lifelong scarring occasionally results. The pain associated with the rash usually lasts about 2 weeks but can persist for much longer (sometimes lifelong) in 10-15% of patients. Once you move, the warranty is null and void to the new owner. Nothing in the 30-year shingles has changed so they will not last a lifetime, you can take that to the bank. They will last 30 years at best. The 20-year shingles are the old school shingles you saw on your Grandma’s house back in the 50s. They are called 3-tab shingles because they have 3 tabs for each shingle. You can see that a new roof tends to last longer, if you are able and willing to invest in a longer-lasting roof. My customer in Los Feliz actually decided to get a 50-year shingle. He loves his home, and hopes to live his lifetime there. Nothing in the 30-year shingles has changed so they will not last a lifetime, you can take that to the bank. They will last 30 years at best. 30-Year Shingle on a New Roof in Los Feliz How long does shingles last? Shingles is a disease similar to herpes. How long does shingles last will be around 4 weeks from the start to the treatment or healing of the rash. In this kind of disease, there are rashes on the skin in the form of a belt. It is very painful caused by the same zoster virus that is the cause for chickenpox. Query: how long does shingles usually last",
"output": [
"Usually shingles lasts no more than 3 weeks time."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-72631b01288942c6951c188b25dfd9c0",
"input": "If you see a likely candidate, click on VIEW FREE DETAILS and you will get the address as well as some names of people associated with the person you are searching. Thanks! Yes No Some oddities of the Royal Mail include: 1 A preference for the return address to be on the back of the envelope. 2 A Locality line that only some addresses have (between the street address and town/city.) 3 The full stops you are requested not to use in an address are periods. Postal Address Lookup with Google Maps With the Google Maps Lookup tool, you can quickly determine the approximate postal address of any location on the world map. Just drag the red marker anywhere on the Google Map and the address details (including the latitude & longitude) of that place will display in the pop-up window. If you want to replace your current email address with another one, simply add a new address and remove your How do I edit the billing address linked to my card? Here's how you can change the billing address for your debit or credit card: Click Wallet at the top of the page. Click the card to update. Click Update card. The format of the PBSA address is constructed using the street address of the Post Office where the P.O. Box is physically located. As an example, for ZIP Code 38027 the The purpose of this document is to provide information on how to determine if a Street-. Style address actually represents a Post Office Box address, designated as a P.O. Box™ Street Address (PBSA). This document also describes how different mailing. Rural addresses that do not contain a civic address may require Additional Address Information. The additional address information should appear above the second-last line (rural route identifier and station information); see Figure 8. The use of street address meaning just the line with number and street name is (valid) jargon usage within a technical industry, but it's not so commonly understood that way by the general public. Address (geography) An address is a collection of information, presented in a mostly fixed format, used to give the location of a building, apartment, or other structure or a plot of land, generally using political boundaries and street names as references, along with other identifiers such as house or apartment numbers. Some addresses also contain special codes, such as a postal code, to make identification easier and aid in the routing of mail. In these cases, the street name will usually follow the house name. Such an address might read: Smith Cottage, Frog Lane, Barchester, Barsetshire, BZ9 9BA or Dunroamin, Emo, Co. Laois, Ireland (fictional examples). Query: how do you do street addresses",
"output": [
"The use of street address meaning just the line with number and street name is jargon usage within a technical industry, but it's not so commonly understood that way by the general public."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-718513e664c549f5a48447de2425f317",
"input": "Consists of a single layer of cells found on the upper surface of the leaf. It is covered by a thick waxy cuticle. The main function of the upper epidermis is water conservation. Although most of the cells of the lower epidermis resemble those of the upper epidermis, each stoma is flanked by two sausage-shaped cells called guard cells. These differ from the other cells of the lower epidermis not only in their shape but also in having chloroplasts. A cross section through the blade of a typical dicot leaf reveals 4 distinct tissue layers. 1 Upper epidermis.This is a single layer of cells containing few or no chloroplasts. The cells are quite transparent and permit most of the light that strikes them to pass through to the underlying cells. Upper epidermis.This is a single layer of cells containing few or no chloroplasts. 1 The cells are quite transparent and permit most of the light that strikes them to pass through to the underlying cells. The upper surface is covered with a waxy, waterproof cuticle, which serves to reduce water loss from the leaf. A cross section through the blade of a typical dicot leaf reveals 4 distinct tissue layers. 1 Upper epidermis.This is a single layer of cells containing few or no chloroplasts. 2 Palisade layer.This consists of one or more layers of cylindrical cells oriented with their long axis perpendicular to the plane of the leaf. What is the function of the epidermis and cuticle layers in a leaf? What is the function of the main vein of a leaf? What is the upper leaf epidermis in an image? The outermost part of the epidermis is composed of stratified layers of flattened cells, that overlies a basal layer (stratum basale) composed of columnar cells arranged perpendicularly. The rows of cells develop from the stem cells in the basal layer. ENaCs are found to be expressed in all layers of the epidermis. 1.The outermost layer of the leaf is the epidermis. It consists of the upper and lower epidermis, which are present on either side of the leaf. Botanists call the upper side the adaxial surface (or adaxis) and the lower side the abaxial surface (or abaxis). The epidermis aids in the regulation of gas exchange. The epidermis is NOT photosynthetic, with the exception of the two guard cells that surround each stoma. The upper epidermis typically has only about half the density of stomata that occur on the lower epidermis, so while transpiration does occur across the upper epidermis, not as much occurs as across the lower. The epidermis is the outer layer of the three layers that make up the skin, the inner layers being the dermis and hypodermis. The epidermis layer provides a barrier to infection from environmental pathogens and regulates the amount of water released from the body into the atmosphere through transepidermal water loss. The outermost part of the epidermis is composed of stratified layers of flattened cells, that overlies a basal layer composed of columnar cells arranged perpendicularly. The rows of Query: how does the epidermis function",
"output": [
"The upper epidermis typically has only about half the density of stomata that occur on the lower epidermis, so while transpiration does occur across the upper epidermis, not as much occurs as across the lower like this the epidermis function."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1809d06af26247d1b0b3e3db7b1ba6ab",
"input": "How to Make It. 1 Pour the Campari and vermouth into an old-fashioned glass filled with ice cubes. 2 Top with soda. 3 Garnish with a lemon twist or orange slice. Is there a taste difference between Americano and Long Black? (self.Coffee) submitted 3 years ago by tkyorahat In a 12 oz Starbucks Caffe Americano there is 15 calories, 2 grams of carbs and 1... What is in a cafe americano from starbucks Caffè Americano: Rich, full-bodied Starbucks espresso combined with hot water for... how many calories are in the cafe americano from starbucks 15 calories are in the grande Cafe Americano from Starbucks. ! The Americano Begins with Espresso. The only way to prepare true espresso is with a specialized machine that delivers a concentrated shot of rich coffee with an unmistakably bold taste and a distinctive crema (layer of foam) on top. Because of its intense flavor, many people take their espresso mixed with water, which is how you make an Americano. Taste & Drinks Apr. 13 Wet vs. Dry Cappuccino What’s the difference? Taste & Drinks Taste & Drinks Taste & Drinks Apr. 8 Cappuccino vs. Latte Comparing two favorites Taste & Drinks Taste & Drinks Taste & Drinks Mar. 1 Difference between a Latte & a Latte Macchiato? How to make an Americano coffee: Make a shot of Espresso coffee and pour it into 180 ml/6 oz. cup. Add boiling water into the cup of Espresso until the coffee reaches the top of the cup. To achieve a Double Americano, use a double-shot of Espresso. The place I work at (Wellington) we do a double 20 ml shot extracted over 180 ml of water. Our long black is a double shot ran to 110 ml. The long blacks do have a certain bitterness but the blend we use is a dark chocolate, cocoa, rasberish taste which is pretty great. For me a long black us drunk much faster so the bitterness doesnt dominate as it cools. What is an Americano Coffee? An Americano coffee is a shot of Espresso coffee infused with hot water. The ratio of water to Espresso is 1:1 (equal amounts). An Americano coffee is as intensive as drip coffee, but has a different flavour. Another coffee similar to the Americano is the ‘Long Black’ prepared by adding Espresso into hot water (instead of adding hot water into Espresso), which infracts (breaks up) the crema. How to make an Americano coffee: 1 Make a shot of Espresso coffee and pour it into 180 ml/6 oz. cup. 2 Add boiling water into the cup of Espresso until the coffee reaches the top of the cup. What does Cafe Americano from Starbucks taste like? ChaCha Answer: While the americano is similar in strength and taste to American-s... Americano's often taste burnt as people pour boiling water over the espresso. Long Blacks should taste richer and more flavoursome as the espresso is poured carefully on top of the hot water leaving a little crema and not getting burnt in the process. Query: how does americano taste",
"output": [
"Americano's often taste burnt as people pour boiling water over the espresso."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-48c1f41468d342dfaca756ecd04ab4a1",
"input": "I have mine expedited and got them back in days. Of course to get them renewed it is not much time. It depends on if there is a problem with the paperwork. My daughters FH had just moved and we had his expedited and did not get it. It was taken care of pretty quick but it was a pain to worry about it. 4-6 weeks is normal. And if you're out of driving distance of a passport agency, don't lose hope -- call the National Passport Information Center. Reps are on-hand to help you out, even if you've missed the deadline for submitting an expedited passport application. GET YOUR PASSPORT FAST. When you are in a hurry, you need RushMyPassport.com. We're the #1 most trusted U.S. Passport Service. We save you time and a trip to the passport office. Our network of registered couriers nationwide are able to get your expedited passport in as little as 24 hours. Starting at $129.00 + Government fees You need a new passport, and you need it FAST. In their panic, travelers often turn to last-minute passport expediting companies, which (often shadily) claim that with your travel documents and some extra cash, their company can get you a passport in 24, 12 or even six hours. Re: How long does it really take to get an expedited passport? Apr 6, 2015, 1:39 PM I got my passport in 3 weeks w/o the expedited service and it wasn't a renewal. $60.00 - Expedited application processing at the State Department; $15.45 - Overnight return delivery to you from the State Department; Ship your application to the State Department by Priority Mail Express. Cost varies by location. Get a Passport in a Hurry Priority Mail Express Follow Your Application Progress If you are in a rush and need your passport quickly, you can renew your passport or get a new passport in as little as one business day in one of two ways. You can use an expediting service for an extra fee OR go to a regional Passport Agency When applying for a passport during the busy travel season. Getting your passport process either expedite or routine would usually take longer as the volume of passport application increases and the wait time for the passport would also increase as well. How long does it take to get a passport? If you are looking to renew a passport or maybe a child, the processing time with the post offices is usually 4-6 weeks. If you are looking to have the process expedited with the post offices then the waiting time is usually 2-3 weeks. Regular and Rush Passport Processing Times. When talking about how long it takes to get a passport in the US, there are two major times that you need to concern yourself with. Be sure to include the $60 expedite fee in addition to the normal application fee. See Passport Fees for more information. Clearly mark EXPEDITE on the outside of the envelope. The expedite fee does not include overnight delivery. For optional faster shipping of your application, see Overnight Delivery Service below. If you need your passport in 2-3 weeks, you can pay an additional $60 for expedited service and mail it with Priority Mail Express. Check your renewal eligibility in Step 2. Prepare your application as listed in Step 3: Prepare Your Application Package. Query: how long to get a expedited passport",
"output": [
"It take 2 to 3 weeks to get a expedited passport."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9fd5086f314d4e80959c5d700202140a",
"input": "Definition of Leadership Essay ...In its simplest terms, leadership is the process of influencing the behavior of another person while fully respecting the freedom of that person (Encarta). Two aspects of this definition are important. The role of the leader is not to know everything, but to coordinate the actions of people who do. That is why he is a leader – centering his attention on the bigger picture, he cannot perceive every tiny detail; people who deal with various smaller areas of knowledge are too concentrated on them to see the bigger picture. The Impact of Leadership on Business. This essay will discuss the impact of leadership on businesses. Leadership concepts can be categorised into three main theories. Transactional leadership which is mainly applied... If so, you may want to feature leaders in the medical field in your essay. If you’re applying to a religious institution, it would be a good idea to include at least one follower of that religion as an example of a good leader. Similarly, if you’re writing an essay for a service academy, you will want to feature military leaders in your essay. 3 Consider any themes covered in the essay question. ADVERTISEMENTS: Essay on Leadership: Meaning, Nature and Importance of Leadership! “Leadership is the quality of behavior of individuals whereby they guide people or their activities in organising efforts” — Chester I. Barnard “Leadership is the ability of a superior to induce subordinates to work with confidence and I zeal” — Koontz and ‘Donnell ADVERTISEMENTS: “Leadership […] Leadership Definition Essay How I Define Leadership Henry Ford used to say that a leader is not supposed to know everything, but should have at his disposal people that do. The same goes, in my opinion, for every kind of leadership. Definition of Leadership Research Paper ...Leadership is acquiring and developing a set of skills that provides the ability to empower, motivate, and guide others towards a common vision. Perspectives on leadership. Perspectives on leadership Importance of leadership The quality of leadership is one of the most important factors in determining the success and survival of groups and organization.... One reason to start focusing on your leadership skills today is that leadership is learned over years, not months. 1 The best way to become a senior leader is by studying competencies and having the discipline to make them become habits and tools in your life. Leadership Definition. There are several ways to define leadership. A process that influences other people to achieve an objective and guides the company or community in a way to make it more coherent and cohesive is called leadership. We can also define leadership as a process of leading people in the right direction in order to achieve goals. Query: how do you define leadership essay",
"output": [
"Leadership essay is define by the process of influencing the behavior of another person while fully respecting the freedom of that person."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-32a45530ff264a969b8c1f3d241a0be6",
"input": "Directions: 1 Make the dough: Heat milk to about 95°F (35°C)-- use microwave or stovetop. Pour the warm milk into the bowl of a stand electric mixer fitted with the dough hook attachment (OR you can use a handheld mixer OR no mixer, but a stand mixer is ideal). With a whisk, manually whisk in the sugar and yeast. Or if they're already sliced into rolls--thaw and let rise in a dish until puffy, then bake. **Letting the dough rise in the fridge for 2+ days will likely cause it to overproof, which will result in deflated or otherwise unhappy rolls in the end.**. Reply. Roll the dough out to about 1/4 inch thick, into the shape of a rectangle measuring 12 by 18 inches. Smear your softened butter all over the dough. Then sprinkle sugar and cinnamon over the butter, taking care to go to the edges. Starting with a long edge of the rectangle, roll the dough up. Using a sharp serrated knife or dental floss, cut the rolled up dough in half. Cut each half in half again. Deflate the dough and turn it out onto a lightly floured surface and roll into a 10x 14 inch rectangle. Lightly brush the far edge with water. In a small bowl combine the cinnamon and 3/4 cup brown sugar and sprinkle over the rectangles. Then sprinkle the raisins and chopped nuts over the dough. Roll up the dough into a log and seal the seam. Cut the dough into 12 equal pieces; place the pieces in a greased 9x13 inch baking pan, or 12 inch deep dish pizza pan. Cover with plastic wrap and place in the refrigerator to rise overnight. The next morning, preheat oven to 375 degrees F (190 degrees C). Take the rolls out of the refrigerator and let stand at room temperature for 30 minutes. Bake the rolls for 25 to 30 minutes or until golden. Meanwhile, combine the corn syrup with the vanilla in a small bowl. Whisk in the powdered sugar and enough cream to make a thick glaze; set aside. Step 3. Place the sealed package or bag in the refrigerator for a maximum of 2 hours. After two hours, the dough will start to lose its leavening power and deteriorate. Bake the unbaked rolls within the 2-hour time period. You can also refrigerate and freeze dough before shaping it into rolls. The dough must be punched down immediately after removing it from the refrigerator or after thawing. Refrigerated dough that hasn't been kneaded or shaped will keep for up to three days in the refrigerator. The dough must be punched down about once every hour for the first three hours in the fridge and again once every 24 hours of refrigeration. Refrigerate or freeze no-yeast rolls in the same way as you would with yeast rolls. The main difference is no-yeast rolls don't require punching or rising before baking. If you try this, you should generally be prepared to de-gas and shape the dough after the long rise, doing your final rise right before baking. (Otherwise, an overproofed dough could collapse during baking.) If you're just adding an extra hour or something to the rise time, this is unlikely to cause problems. (Anytime is cinnamon roll time.) The dough is made the night before. Allow it to rise, roll it up tightly, slice into rolls, cover tightly, and pop in the refrigerator. The next morning, remove the rolls from the cold air and let rise for 1-2 hours before baking. Your family and guests will wake up to warm, fluffy, fresh, ooey gooey cinnamon rolls. And BONUS! The smell of cinnamon rolls baking. Sift sugar into bowl. Stir in vanilla and enough half and half to make a medium-thick glaze. Use immediately. Glaze can be applied to hot rolls; it will melt and add a translucent sheen to the rolls. Or apply to warm rolls for a glazed appearance. For 6 giant rolls. Preparation time: 5 minutes. Make ahead tip: Baked rolls can be frozen up to 2 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator and warm up before enjoying. You can also freeze the unbaked rolls and here's how: let the rolls rise overnight through step 4, then the next morning do step 5. Then, bake the rolls for only about 10 minutes at 375°F (191°C). Cool completely, then cover tightly and freeze. Query: how long can you refrigerate fresh cinnamon roll dough",
"output": [
"You refrigerate fresh cinnamon roll dough for overnight."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b135fe05aa1d4740859f9b29031614be",
"input": "Depends on the state. In Virginia, for example, they would because Virginia started using birth certificates in 1863. In North Carolina, no because NC did not begin using birth certificates until 1913. You would have to check with the Dept. of Vital Statistics of the specific state. A registered birth certificate that is requested by a qualified walk in applicant can be purchased and received the same day. Note: Newborn birth certificates are typically registered within two-three weeks after birth. Call (702) 759-1010 to check the status of a newborn’s birth certificate before coming in. Birth certificates are available at the main facility at 280 S Decatur Blvd. Visit the Birth Certificates webpage for more details. Ordering by Mail. What happens if I order a birth certificate by mail, and the certificate is not yet registered? Newborn birth certificates are typically registered within two-three weeks after birth. Call (702) 759-1010 to check the status of a newborn’s birth certificate before placing your order. The state or territory issued birth certificate is a secure A4 paper document, generally listing: Full name at birth, sex at birth, parents and occupation, older siblings, addresses, date and place of birth, name of the registrar, date of registration, date of issue of certificate, a registration number, with the signature of the registrar and seal of the registry printed and or embossed. Does an ex-spouse have access to the previous spouse's birth or death certificate? An ex-spouse can only obtain birth or death records if the records are being obtained on behalf of a minor child that was the product of the marriage. I've always ordered my birth certificates from the hospital before I leave. Included in the mile high stack of papers they give you. I always got it within 6 weeks or less. It usually got to me before the hospital pictures of the baby. See if that form is included in the other papers the hospital gives, that may speed things up. Good luck. Some states allow adopted people unrestricted access to their own original birth certificates, while in others the certificate is available only if the biological parents have given their permission or a petition has been granted by the court of jurisdiction. Hospitals generally require the following information to add a father to the child's birth certificate: 1 Acknowledgment of Paternity (AOP) form signed by both the father and mother. 2 The signing of the AOP must also be witnessed and signed by two uninterested parties. The couple must decide what last name the child will have. Unmarried couples aren't required to give their child a specific surname upon birth. The child may carry the mother's surname, father's surname or a hyphenated surname. The name the couple chooses then appears on the newborn's birth certificate. Both documents serve as legal proof of the president's birth in Hawaii, but as the president himself said, there is a segment of people for which, no matter what we put out, this issue will not be put to rest.. For the rest, hopefully, this is over. You can use a short-form birth certificate for most purposes, including obtaining a driver's license or passport. But there are particular times when the long form is required, such as for foreign adoptions or applications for dual citizenship, says Tobin. Query: how long have they been giving out birth certificates",
"output": [
"Birth certificates have been given within two to three weeks after birth."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-484457a46ca9438ea86a45ccd781dc20",
"input": "You don't need to renew during the term of your military service if you're: 1 A member of the armed forces or National Guard on active duty. 2 A reservist called to duty for 180 days or more. 3 The spouse or dependent of an active member of the military. When to Renew Your FL Driver's License. Before your license expires, the Florida Department of Highway Safety and Motor Vehicles (DHSMV) will mail you a renewal notice telling you that it's time to renew. The DHSMV allows you to renew your valid FL driver's license up to 18 months before the expiration date. If your specific needs require an in-person visit, most, if not all, driver license services can be handled at your local DMV office. Varying DMV offices sometimes supply different types of services so you will need to check before your visit to make sure the DMV closest to you provides the service you require. Florida Licenses and ID. In the state of Florida, the Department of Driver Services (DMV) handles all your licensing and ID needs. Whether you need to apply for a new license, renew or replace an existing one, or change the address or name on your license, the DMV will help you. To get you jump-started on these procedures, invest in our Florida License Easy Guide, which contains helpful forms and links that will make your DMV experience a breeze. You will need to make an appointment at any Florida DMV office. This will save you time instead of spending hours in line. If successful your license will be delivered immediately. You may always stay up to date with the latest renewal laws and regulations by visiting the official Florida dmv renewal site. Whether you're applying to renew a Florida drivers license online, in person or by mail, you will be required to provide the following documents: 1 One primary Proof of Identification. 2 Two Proofs of Residency. 3 One Proof of Social Security Number. Home | Español | Driver License | Vehicle Tags & Titles | Florida Highway Patrol | Contact Us | Forms | Office Locations. I have never had a driver license anywhere before. I have had a driver license from another state or country. I am in the military and have a Florida driver license or ID card. To submit a name change to the Social Security Administration: 1 Contact your local Social Security office. 2 Provide proof of your identity, legal presence and name change. Additional proof may be requested. Renewing Your Florida DMV Drivers License In the state of Florida, Class E (non-commercial) driver licenses are valid for 8 years. You are allowed to renew your license up to 18 months before it expires, and you will pay a renewal fee of $48. How Do I Renew My License? If you hold a Florida driver license that was issued in 2002 or later, you can renew in one of three ways: In person at your local driver license office; Online; By mail When renewing your FL DMV license, you will need to present documents that prove your identity, Social Security Number and state residence, such as: 1 Your current driver's license. 2 Your Social Security card. 3 A utility bill that is in your name. Query: how long before i can renew my florida drivers license",
"output": [
"The Florida Department of Highway Safety and Motor Vehicles allows you to renew your valid FL driver's license up to 18 months before the expiration date."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-04cc10a0151b4ea28379e4f2815a7d68",
"input": "Lance Corporal is the 3rd rank in the United States Marine Corps , ranking above Private First Class and directly below Corporal. A lance corporal is a Junior Enlisted at DoD paygrade E-3, with a starting monthly pay of $1,886. Marines generally receive a promotion to Lance Corporal after one or more years of service. Once the rank of Lance Corporal has been achieved, they may qualify for promotion to Corporal by receiving a qualifying score on a composite skills and leadership assessment. The paper reported that 92 percent of lance corporals who had spent a year at their current rate didn't have the composite, or cutting, score they needed to be promoted. -- Hope Hodge Seck can be reached at hope.seck@milit ary.com. The paper reported that 92 percent of lance corporals who had spent a year at their current rate didn't have the composite, or cutting, score they needed to be promoted.-- Hope Hodge Seck can be reached at hope.seck@milit ary.com. Follow her on Twitter at @HopeSeck. Show Full Article At minimum you still have to meet time-in-service and time-in-grade requirements. To make E-4 requires at least 12 months in the service and 8 months as an E-3. To make sergeant (E-5) requires at least 24 months in the service and 12 months as an E4-. Promotion to E-2 and E-3 generally comes more or less automatically so long as you do a competent job and stay out of trouble. To make E-2 you must have been in the service for at least 6 months. To make E-3 you must have been in the service for at least 9 months and in the E-2 grade for at least 8 months. Promotions to these ranks aren't competitive, meaning your promotion doesn't come at somebody else's expense. A Lance Corporal is most often promoted from Private First Class (PFC), although promotion from lower paygrades may occur with sufficient display of leadership and experience. If the Marine entered the Navy as an E-2, then they are all but guaranteed to promote to E-3 after nine months. While this will result in longer promotion waits for many lance corporals, it could have a benefit for corporals looking to make sergeant: Previously, they needed to have reached the 12-month mark at the start of the quarter in which they want to be promoted. Marine Corps sergeants have a pay grade of E-5, with the E standing for enlisted. To make sergeant you must climb through the lower ranks: Private (E-1), private first class (E-2), lance corporal (E-3) and corporal (E-4). A new change to Marine Corps policy will require some Marines to wait longer before they are eligible for promotion. The new guidelines stipulate that, as of April 1, Marine lance corporals and corporals must spend 12 months in their current rank before they can be looked at for promotion to corporal or sergeant. The current rules require just eight months' time-in-grade for lance corporals, though corporals must already serve 12 months in their rank before promotion to sergeant. Query: how long do you have to be a lance corporal for promotion",
"output": [
"After one or more years of service you have to be a lance corporal for promotion."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ce6ba3856a4146a398a51fb92dfb1eeb",
"input": "If you do not have the instructions, bite on gauze or a piece of clean cloth to control bleeding. If pressure does not stop the bleeding, try biting down on a moistened tea bag for 10 to 15 minutes. Avoid spitting, using any form of tobacco, and using straws, which can make bleeding worse. If moderate to severe bleeding has not slowed or stopped, continue direct pressure while getting help. Do all you can to keep the wound clean and avoid further injury to the area. Bleeding after wisdom tooth being remove, for hours, uses the tea bags but still gets bit bleeding? Dr. Daniel Quon Dr. Quon Try this: Dampen the tea bags in hot tap water, and squeeze most of the water out from the tea bag. Place the hot moist tea bag directly over the extraction site(s). If you are biting on the tea bag with your teeth, you are likely not getting the benefit of direct pressure over the extraction site. Try to avoid ...Read more. These first aid procedures should be performed regardless of you using natural remedies to stop bleeding. If it is a smallish cut or scrape, you can maybe avoid it. In any case, use your best judgement. Natural Remedies To Stop Bleeding Home remedies for bleeding vary from using everyday household things like ice and tea bags to specific herbs with healing properties. Here are what we consider the most trustworthy (without side effects) home remedies to stop bleeding. Try this: Dampen the tea bags in hot tap water, and squeeze most of the water out from the tea bag. Place the hot moist tea bag directly over the extraction site (s). If you are biting on the tea bag with your teeth, you are likely not getting the benefit of direct pressure over the extraction site. Natural Remedies To Stop Bleeding. Home remedies for bleeding vary from using everyday household things like ice and tea bags to specific herbs with healing properties. Here are what we consider the most trustworthy (without side effects) home remedies to stop bleeding. 1. Ice. Icing is the most commonly known natural remedy to stop bleeding. Before you try to stop the bleeding: Wash your hands well with soap and water, if available. Put on medical gloves, if available, before applying pressure to the wound. Before you try to stop the bleeding : Wash your hands well with soap and water,if available. Put on medical gloves,if available,before applying pressure to the wound. If gloves are not available,use many layers of fabric,plastic bags,or whatever you have ... Tea bag to stop bleeding - Can I use a chamomile tea bag to help stop the bleeding from a tooth extraction if that's all I have? Regular tea is bette. Its the Tannin in the tea that helps control bleeding. I don't think chamomile tea has much if any tannin Perhaps turmeric if: Topical tea tree oil can not possibly cause bleeding but turmeric is a natural blood thinner. However, even large doses of turmeric are not known to cause bleeding unless combined with other medicines or herbs that thin the blood or unless one has a hereditary tendency towards increased bleeding. Tea bags work like charm to stop bleeding. It doesn’t matter what kind of tea it is, it can be regular or green or whatever flavor is lying around your house. Just take a tea bag, moisten it with water (don’t drench it) and press it on top of the wound. Hold for a minimum of 10 minutes. This should stop the bleeding. Query: how does tea bags help stop bleeding",
"output": [
"Take a tea bag, moisten it with water, don’t drench it and press it on top of the wound. Hold for a minimum of 10 minutes. This should stop the bleeding."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-2eae3d95625a4157a8f654484a3519b6",
"input": "provides for benefits under the AutoNation, Inc . policies and Plans . If You Transfer From One AutoNation . Location to Another AutoNation Location . If you transfer from one AutoNation location to . another, your eligibility status transfers with you to your new location . If you were enrolled in benefits at your previous AutoNation, Inc. also provides group life insurance, short-term disability insurance for accidents or illness, and long-term disability insurance. To help ensure a reliable source of income later in life, many employees rely on employer-provided retirement plans. AutoNation, Inc. offers defined contribution pension plans. As a graduate of Georgia State University, you have access to exclusive benefits when purchasing or leasing a vehicle with AutoNation. AutoNation employees receive health, life, and disability insurance. This information about the Health Insurance benefit at AutoNation is the result of research by Glassdoor editorial staff, and was not provided directly by a representative of AutoNation. The description here may not reflect the current AutoNation Health Insurance benefit. AutoNation will use the savings from tax reform to invest in its future and its employees, through enhancing its benefits programs, including launching an innovative cancer program to assist employees and family members who were recently diagnosed with cancer, and investing in progressive training programs that will allow its associates to better serve its customers and drive their career advancement. AutoNation is a big corporation, probably the biggest in the business in United States. They offer some benefits and the pay plan is not as aggressive as others in the industry Was this review helpful? AutoNation benefits and perks, including insurance benefits, retirement benefits, and vacation policy. Reported anonymously by AutoNation employees. Best Jobs in America NEW! Other car buying sites send your contact information to multiple dealerships. With AutoNation, you are buying direct. No middle man, no headache. As an American Express® Card Member, you have access to exclusive benefits when purchasing or leasing a vehicle with AutoNation. Receive a $200 gasoline gift card after spending $1000 or more on your American Express Card towards the purchase or lease of a new or pre-owned vehicle at AutoNation by 4/30/18. its not a very good job. I had no sales training and on my first day I was told to get out there and sell cars. And if I hadn't sold a car by the end of the day I should stay until I do. And that's what it was like every single day. Reconciliation Analyst (Former Employee) – Irving, TX – August 12, 2017. AutoNation is not a place to work if you want fulfillment, its just a job. It's a massive company with plenty of mind-numbing work to give you if you'd like it. The pay will never be great, but the job security is pretty good. Query: autonation benefits autonation",
"output": [
"Benefits of autonation are it provides group life insurance, short-term disability insurance for accidents or illness, and long-term disability insurance."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ff14a91e904944039f29312cba2a2ebe",
"input": "Unfortunately, air conditioners don’t live as long as people, and in the brutal conditions of Phoenix, Arizona, air conditioners can have remarkably short lives without proper care and maintenance. The average lifespan of an air conditioner is anywhere from 8 to 15 years, but it’s hard to say exactly how long any given air conditioner unit will last. The Biggest Factors in Air Conditioner Lifespans Certain factors can influence how long your air conditioner survives, including the size of the air conditioner unit, your duct design, the amount of use and how much maintenance your unit receives. This allows you to control the flow of cooled air into each room of your home, keeping you more comfortable, and allowing your air conditioner to work more efficiently. Your central air conditioner is designed to last anywhere from 15 to 20 years. While there’s a good chance it may last far longer, especially if you’re meticulous about maintenance, there are still some very compelling reasons to replace it. Air Conditioner Use. Like anything else with moving parts, the more you use your air conditioner, the faster it’s going to break down. No matter how good the unit, the more it runs, the sooner it will need to be replaced. Heat pumps -- If you have an electric heat pump heating system, plan on replacing the exterior unit after about 16 years. Thermostats -- Expect your home's thermostat(s) to last about 35 years. Electric radiant heaters -- The most common of this type of room conditioner might be baseboard heaters. The impact of these items can be minor by themselves, but when several parts of the equation are out of whack, your air conditioner may have a very short life. How the different factors can affect your unit: Air Conditioner Size. The size of your air conditioner affects how efficiently it works, as well as how frequently it switches on and off. The Lifespan of a Central Air Conditioner. Per the United States Department of Energy, the average lifespan of a central air conditioner is about 15 to 20 years. Some units may continue operating well beyond the 20-year mark, and others may need to be replaced before the 15 years has passed. How Long Does a Central Air Conditioner Last? Posted on February 8, 2017 by Glen Feurst Whether you’re buying a home with central air already installed or you’re thinking about replacing your elderly HVAC unit, it’s important to understand that a central air conditioner isn’t designed to last forever. Twenty years ago, the brand-new central air conditioner units that were available had an average SEER rating of about 12. Today, new systems have an average SEER rating that ranges from 16 to 18, which is far more efficient. The Biggest Factors in Air Conditioner Lifespans. Certain factors can influence how long your air conditioner survives, including the size of the air conditioner unit, your duct design, the amount of use and how much maintenance your unit receives. Ducting -- The NAHB estimates that the ductwork in your home should last about 10 years. A report done by InterNACHI might be more accurate on this HVAC component: their study indicates that ducts should function properly for 60 to 100 years. Query: how long does a central air conditioner last",
"output": [
"A central air conditioner lasts 15 to 20 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ff5985b8a33c41af9df116e74e918802",
"input": "Essential amino acids. There are nine amino acids that your body can’t make. They are called essential amino acids, meaning you must have them to live. They are found in foods like milk, eggs and meat and also a wide variety of plants. This is part of why you can’t survive on a diet of just corn chips for very long. Essential amino acids were actually discovered in an experiment testing something very similar to a corn chip diet. Scientists fed rats a diet that had only corn protein in it and observed the results. 21 is all it takes. The human body uses just 21 amino acids to make all the proteins it needs to function and grow. Because amino acids can be arranged in many different combinations, it's possible for your body to make thousands of different kinds of proteins from just the same 21 amino acids. Just like a Lego house is made of bricks, proteins are made up of lots of tiny building blocks. These building blocks are called amino acids. To build a protein, first the amino acids are connected into long chains. These chains of amino acid building blocks can then fold into all types of shapes. Some chains fold into spirals. Amino acids are organic compounds containing amine and carboxyl functional groups, along with a side chain specific to each amino acid. The key elements of an amino acid are carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, and nitrogen, although other elements are found in the side chains of certain amino acids. About 500 naturally occurring amino acids are known and can be classified in many ways. They can be classified according to the core structural functional groups' locations as alpha-, beta-, gamma- or delta- a In addition, cysteine, taurine, tyrosine, and arginine are considered semiessential amino-acids in children (though taurine is not technically an amino acid), because the metabolic pathways that synthesize these amino acids are not fully developed. show/hide words to know. 1 Amino acid: molecules that contain carbon, oxygen, hydrogen, and nitrogen. 2 Enantiomer: one of a pair of molecules that are mirror images of each other, but not identical... 3 Essential: required, or necessary. In 1902, Emil Fischer and Franz Hofmeister independently proposed that proteins are formed from many amino acids, whereby bonds are formed between the amino group of one amino acid with the carboxyl group of another, resulting in a linear structure that Fischer termed peptide. General structure Protein Parts. 1 Proteins are not the same as Lego building blocks, but proteins do have special shapes that can be used to build parts of the body. Johnson Righeira Lego portrait via Wikimedia. 2 21 Amino Acids (Source: Wikimedia) Click on the image to see a a larger version. show/hide words to know. 1 Amino acid: molecules that contain carbon, oxygen, hydrogen, and nitrogen. These are the building blocks of protein... 2 Enantiomer: one of a pair of molecules that are mirror images of each other, but not identical... more. 3 Essential: required, or necessary. Amino acid. Amino acids are organic compounds containing amine (-NH2) and carboxyl (-COOH) functional groups, along with a side chain (R group) specific to each amino acid. The key elements of an amino acid are carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, and nitrogen, although other elements are found in the side chains of certain amino acids. About 500 amino acids are known (though only 20 appear in the genetic code) and can be classified in many ways. Query: how many amino acids are considered by scientists to be essential?",
"output": [
"There are nine amino acids that considered by scientists to be essential."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-64ce9f9d9fba4da7b604b7e423919167",
"input": "Some induce sleep, some (like the anesthesia gases) maintain sleep, some relax muscles, some relieve pain, etc. Each is metabolized at a different rate. In general, you can expect them to vanish within 6-8 hours, but it will take longer if the kidneys or liver don't work well. Don't drive within 24 hours of having anesthesia. Question unclear: I don't completely understand your question. Usual guidelines before general anesthesia: clear liquids up to 2 hours before, and light solid food (such as toast) up to 6 hours before. No food after midnight in the case of an early morning procedure. General Anesthesia (Definition) 1 General anesthesia is a medically induced coma and loss of protective reflexes resulting from the administration of one or more general anesthetic agents. It is a treatment that renders you unconscious during medical procedures, so you don't feel or remember anything that happens. The medications used in general anesthesia are completely out of body in few hrs, but some times will have body pains for few days is due to the electrolytes fluids moved in and out of nerve and muscle cells . That will take couple of days for resetting the body system. I had a tonsillectomy done June 30 the procedure was 1 hour long and gave me general anesthesia, how long does it take to take it out of my system? Dr. Stuart Winkler Dr. Winkler 5 doctors agreed: How long after general anesthesia can i breastfeed? How long does general anesthesia affect body? How long before suboxone is out of your system? How long before nicotine is out of your system? How long until alcohol is out of your system? How long to get prednisone out of your system? How long do anesthesia be in your system? How long with anesthesia stay in my body after my hysterectomy? In general, all modern anesthetic agents should be out of your system within 24–48 hours of your hysterectomy. The exact time will vary based on which medications were used for you and in what dosages. Though traces of anesthesia medications may be found in your blood a few days after your hysterectomy, they should not have any noticeable effect. 1 doctor agreed: Depends: It depends on what agents are used for the general anesthesia. The best resource is to ask the anesthesiologist who is sedating you. If you received propofol then it is recommended that you pump and dump for 48 hrs after the sedation. Inhaled anesthetics should be out of the system fairly ...Read more. Depends: Depends on your body mass, the type of anesthesia used, the length of the procedure, and how your body metabolizes the anesthetic agent. Usually mostly worn off in 30 minutes to 2-3 hours, but may have some residual effects for 24hrs or longer. No, take your med: Qvar is being prescribed to help control the inflammation in your bronchi so you will be less susceptible to wheezing when challenged. Surgery and anesthesia are challenges. Therefore, you really need to stay on your medication regularly so you will have the easiest time when you are recovering. Query: how long does it take anesthesia to come out of your body",
"output": [
"It takes 6 to 8 hours anesthesia to come out of your body."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7351aaab10124564bd1071740358cc91",
"input": "Lahars move rapidly down valleys like rivers of concrete. If you are on the floor of a valley that leads from a volcano and become aware of an oncoming lahar, seek high ground. Lahar is an Indonesian term that describes a hot or cold mixture of water and rock fragments that flows down the slopes of a volcano and typically enters a river valley. Of the five Cascade volcanoes, Mt. Rainier is the most significant threat. Lahars from Mt. Rainier have buried the. Kent Valley, but there is no evidence a lahar has reached Seattle in the past 10,000 years. mudflows, lahars are slurries of water and at least 60% sediment by volume. Lahars look and behave much like flowing concrete. They can travel at speeds of a few tens of miles per hour along gently sloping distal valleys. Higher speeds of more than 60 miles per hour are possible on steep slopes near Mt. Rainier. Additional information about lahars. 1 Seasonal debris flows – small lahars. 2 Landslide-derived lahars at Mount Rainier. 3 Lahar hazards at Mount St. Helens. 4 Preparing for lahar hazards. 5 Monitoring for lahars in the U.S. Lahars move rapidly down valleys like rivers of concrete. 1 Lahars can occur with or without a volcanic eruption. 2 Lahars and excess sediment cause serious economic and environmental damage to river valleys and flood plains. 3 Seasonal debris flows commonly occur on glacier-clad volcanoes. Voluminous lahars commonly grow to more than 10 times their initial size as they move downslope. In steep areas lahar speeds can exceed 200 km/hr (120 mi/hr), but as they move farther away from a volcano and decelerates in lowland areas, they eventually begins to deposit some of the load and decrease in size. Lahars generally occur on or near stratovolcanoes, such as those of the Aleutian volcanic arc in Alaska and the Cascade Range in the Western U.S. A moving lahar looks like a roiling slurry of wet concrete, and as it rushes downstream, the size, speed, and amount of material carried can constantly change. Voluminous lahars commonly grow to more than 10 times their initial size as they move downslope. In steep areas, lahars can exceed speeds of 200 km/hr (120 mi/hr), but as they move farther away from a volcano and decelerate in lowland areas, they eventually begin to deposit some of the load and decrease in size. Lahars can occur with or without a volcanic eruption. lahars are possible, a lahar would likely be preceded by volcanic and seismic activity. Although there are multiple ways in which a lahar can be generated, most of the largest ones are a mix of eruptive material, unstable rock water from of a volcano.” Lahars contain high concentrations of rock debris and can travel tens of meters per second. Most, but not all, are preceded by volcanic and seismic activity. Of the five Cascade volcanoes, Mt. Rainier is the most significant threat. Lahars from Mt. Rainier have buried the Query: how fast can lahars move",
"output": [
"Lahars move rapidly down valleys like rivers of concrete."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-352a7bc4cec641dfa224d73da4391012",
"input": "A muscle strain (or pulled muscle) is an overstretched or torn muscle. Back strain is the most common cause of back pain, especially lower back pain. Muscle strain is often caused by overuse of a muscle or overloading a muscle. When a muscle is stressed beyond its limits, injury occurs. However, you risk a pull if you don’t warm up properly before you exercise and stretch a muscle past its limit, train longer than what your body can handle, or if you push a past muscle injury too far before the muscle has had adequate time to heal. You will know a muscle is pulled typically within 24 to 48 hours of the injury, as the area will become stiff, sore, you may experience loss of movement and muscle spasms, and bruising or swelling will often develop around the injured muscle. If you suffer a pulled muscle, here are ten ways to help speed the healing and soothe the pain and inflammation… 1. Ice. Icing a muscle strain as quickly as possible will do its part to reduce swelling and soothe pain. Ice applications can be administered in ice pack form or you can wrap ice cubes in a towel and cover the area frequently throughout the day for no more than 15-minutes each time. A grade-three injury is the most severe and also the least common type of strain injury. It refers to a complete tearing of a muscle or tendon, and it often occurs where the muscle is attached to the tendon above or below the joint. This kind of strain is accompanied by weakness, which means a person can no longer use that muscle. Cast immobilization and surgery are sometimes necessary. Due to the injury’s severity, recovery generally takes three to six months or longer. Back muscle strain is a common cause of lower back pain. Muscle strain can be caused by overuse of a muscle or overloading a muscle. A strain is a muscle or tendon injury; a sprain is a ligament injury. Relief from pain and inflammation from pulled back muscles / ligaments can be obtained by applying ice to the injury (wrap ice in cloth - do not apply ice directly to skin) for 15 to 20 minutes every 4 hours for two or three days. The cold helps reduce pain and inflammation and is also a distraction from the back pain. For a mild muscle strain, it takes around three to six weeks to recover with basic home care, according to an article by Healthline. Severe strains may take months to properly heal.... For a mild muscle strain, it takes around three to six weeks to recover with basic home care, according to an article by Healthline. Severe strains may take months to properly heal. Most people with a strained muscle usually experience full recovery with proper treatment, explains Pietrangelo. 10 Ways to Help Heal Pulled Muscles. A muscle pull (or strain) occurs when you twist, pull, or tear your muscle or tendon, the strong elastic cord that connects your muscle to the bone. As we age we are more susceptible to muscle pulls. The recovery time of muscle pull depends on the grade of muscle strain as described below: 1 Healing Time for Grade I Muscle Strain: This is minor condition, where only a small percentage of muscles are affected. This type of pulled muscle normalizes within a few weeks. Like back strain, back sprains may trigger back muscle spasms. Healing time depends on the severity of the sprain. Most back sprains heal in six to eight weeks but it can take several months for complete recovery from a severe back sprain. Ligaments take longer to heal than muscles. In most of the cases, how long will the muscle pull last depends on the location of the muscle and it also depends on the impact and severity of the injury. Under normal circumstances, symptoms of mild back muscle pull show improvement in about one to two weeks and show complete recovery in about 4 to 6 weeks. Moderate to mild pulled muscle in legs take about 8 to 10 weeks to heal completely. Symptoms of severe pulled muscle (usually grade III strain) persist until the tear in the muscle is surgically repaired. In some cases, the symptoms may persist even after the repair is done. Query: how long can it take to heal a pulled back muscle",
"output": [
"It takes about 4 to 6 weeks for a mild pulled back muscle to heal completely."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c3fa5347d4a84c01825a329f8a94ef8b",
"input": "Australian Stumpy Tail Cattle Dog is a bobtailed, medium sized breed of dog. Origin: Australia. Life span: 10-13 years. Hypoallergenic: No. Review how much Australian Cattle Dog/Blue Heeler puppies for sale sell for below. The current median price for all Australian Cattle Dog Blue Heelers sold is $450.00. This is the price you can expect to budget for an Australian Cattle Dog/Blue Heeler with papers but without breeding rights nor show quality. The Australian Stumpy Tail Cattle Dog is deemed to be the oldest breed of Australian working dog. Likewise, the breed is believed to be the first purebreed developed in Australia. The Stumpy Tail was the result of mating a Dingo with a Smithfield. The Australian Stumpy Tail Cattle Dog is the first pure breed dog developed in Australia. The outstanding working qualities as an all rounder make the dog a most prized companion and friend of the Australian farmers and graziers. Though similar to them, the Stumpy Tail Cattle Dogs are not Australian Cattle Dogs with docked tails, but are cousins to that breed, and a breed in their own right. In Australia, their country of origin, “Stumpies” are much sought after for their working ability. Both red and blue Stumpy Tails are extremely faithful, and tireless workers. The Australian Cattle Dog is a related breed (with a long tail) that is similar in appearance to the Stumpy, but the Australian Cattle is proportionally heavier and less leggy. The “Stumpy” possesses a natural aptitude in the working and controlling of cattle, and a loyal, courageous and devoted disposition. You should budget anywhere from $1,600 upwards to $5,000 or even more for an Australian Cattle Dog/Blue Heeler with top breed lines and a superior pedigree. The average cost for all Australian Cattle Dog Blue Heelers sold is $500. View Prices of Puppies Australian Stumpy Tail Cattle Dog Picture. Breed Information. Popularity. #. Name. Australian Stumpy Tail Cattle Dog. Other names. Stumpy Tail Cattle Dog, Stumpy, Stumpy Tail, Heeler. Origin. The cost to buy an Australian Cattle Dog/Blue Heeler varies greatly and depends on many factors such as the breeders' location, reputation, litter size, lineage of the puppy, breed popularity (supply and demand), training, socialization efforts, breed lines and much more. The Australian Stumpy Tail Cattle Dog is a medium sized dog that originated in Australia. This dog is also known as Stumpy Tail, Stumpy and Heeler. Originally breed to herd cattle in the mid 1800s, the dog is considered to be a fairly rare today as they are seldom kept as pets. The Australian Stumpy Tail Cattle Dog however is well established in Australia where the dog is utilized to keep livestock in line. Query: australian stumpy heelers",
"output": [
"The Australian Stumpy Tail Cattle Dog is a medium sized dog that originated in Australia."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-5202dfc06c224a319ffd2fe8ffd1c5a9",
"input": "A complete identification number looks similar to the following: IDR000123456. Who Needs an EPA Identification Number? If you generate more than 220 pounds (100 kilograms) of hazardous waste or 2.2 pounds (1 kilogram) of acutely hazardous waste in any calendar month, you need an EPA identification number. An EPA establishment number is a unique, site specific registration number assigned to an establishment that intends to produce a pesticide, a device or an active ingredient used to produce a pesticide. It contains: For example, 99999-NY-002 indicates that this is the second establishment for EPA FIFRA company number 99999 in New York. What is an EPA Identification Number? An EPA hazardous waste generator identification number is a unique number that is assigned to facilities that generate specified amounts of hazardous waste or engage in other hazardous waste activities. It is used by states and EPA to track hazardous waste. The number is 12 characters long. In This Chapter. 1 What is an EPA company number. 2 How to obtain an EPA company number. 3 How to obtain an EPA establishment number. 4 Definition of an establishment. 5 Definition of produce. 6 Registering pesticide-producing and device-producing establishments. 7 Information requirements. 8 Reporting requirements. What is an EPA Company Number. A “company number” is a unique identifier assigned to a company that wishes to register a pesticide (e.g., herbicide, rodenticide, or antimicrobial) with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). These companies are commonly called registrants. Your business may have been previously assigned an EPA identification number. If so, the number may still be valid or it may need to be updated before using. To find out if you already have a valid number or if it needs to be updated, contact DEQ's Hazardous Waste Management Program at (208) 373-0502. What is an EPA Company Number A “company number” is a unique identifier assigned to a company that wishes to register a pesticide (e.g., herbicide, rodenticide, or antimicrobial) with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). These companies are commonly called registrants. A company number is also necessary for a company that plans to “produce” pesticides or devices. (Note: A sale, merger or spin-off of an EPA Company Number to another entity usually involves a Company Number Transfer [rather then just a Company Name Change]. See Chapter 16 regarding transfers. Report changes related to pesticide-producing establishments. Top of Page Applications for the registration of an establishment require the following information: 1 name and address of the company; 2 EPA company number; 3 type of ownership (individual, partnership, cooperative association, corporation, or any organized group of people whether incorporated or not); 4 name(s) of new producing establishment(s); Pesticide Registration Manual: Chapter 14 - How to Obtain an EPA Company or Establishment Number or Change Address or Contact Information. 1 What is an EPA company number. 2 How to obtain an EPA company number. 3 How to obtain an EPA establishment number. 4 Definition of an establishment. 5 Definition of produce. Query: assign epa company number",
"output": [
"A “company number” is a unique identifier assigned to a company that wishes to register a pesticide."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7d04b340e94740ff8035b81dadf56a24",
"input": "Learn if being on the Pill for years can make it harder to get pregnant once you go off it. Giving up birth control, what to expect at a preconception doctor visit, screening for genetic disorders, when to stop drinking... Everything you need to know about the Pill as a postpartum contraceptive choice. But what about when you go off of it? Whether you're ditching birth control to get pregnant or just because you don't need it right now, you're probably curious about any changes that may come with going pill-free. Learn how to keep your vagina happy and healthy: If you don’t get your period for some time after stopping the pill chances are that you are either pregnant (do a pregnancy test!) or you did not ovulate. Even without getting your period first there might be a chance you are pregnant. With the implant, you can get pregnant as soon as it is removed. It may take 3 to 18 months after your last shot to get pregnant. The progestin-only pill, also called the mini-pill, does not seem to delay fertility. Most women will get pregnant within 6 months after stopping the mini-pill. Intrauterine devices (IUDs). If you experience severe acne, it’s best to see a dermatologist right before you make the switch to see if they can help. You Can Get Pregnant ASAP Obviously, if you go off birth control it’s easier for you to get pregnant unless you use a backup form of protection. If you were using the birth control pill, the ring, or the IUD, your ability to get pregnant bounces back right away, says Dweck. What to Do If You Become Pregnant While Taking Birth Control. The good news is that studies show taking birth control into early pregnancy will not hurt the baby. Some small studies have shown there may be a possibility of early delivery, low birth weight or congenital urinary tract issues, but these are very rare. The one complication of getting pregnant while on birth control is a possible tubal pregnancy. The way your body reacts really depends on why you started taking the pill in the first place, Dweck says. Women get on the pill for many beneficial reasons, such as more regular cycles, lighter periods, fewer cramps, improved symptoms of PMS (and the more severe version, PMDD), and clearer skin. More than 12 million U.S. women use the combined oral contraceptive pill, more commonly referred to as the pill. The pill is 99 percent effective in preventing pregnancy. Even so, between 2 and 8 percent of women become pregnant each year while using it. The pill is 99 percent effective in preventing pregnancy. Now, you have decided to stop all forms of birth control and get pregnant! But, how soon can you get pregnant after stopping birth control? Source: https://justinhealth.com. Understanding how birth control pills works is important. Most contraceptive pills contain two different hormones, estrogen, and progestogen. The purpose of taking birth control is so you stop ovulating every month. The birth control pills stop an egg being released from your ovaries every 28 days. There are birth control pill regimens designed to prevent bleeding for three months at a time or for as long as a year. But it's possible to prevent your period with continuous use of any birth control pill. This means skipping the placebo pills and starting right away on a new pack. Continuous use of your birth control pills works best if you're taking a monophasic pill — with the same hormone dose in the three weeks of active pills. Query: how fast can you get pregnant off of birth control pill",
"output": [
"Most women will get pregnant within 6 months after stopping the mini-pill."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-02955872962d4603b64031df91554d50",
"input": "It's a question that has plagued scientists for years, but new testing has revealed information that may help explain the Neanderthals' demise. It appears that we — or at least our ancestors — were at least partially responsible for their extinction. About 45,000 years ago, Neanderthal numbers were dwindling. They are often depicted as dim-witted evolutionary losers, but Neanderthals were not driven to extinction by their lack of brains, a new study suggests. Instead, it is more likely that they disappeared 40,000 years ago because of interbreeding and assimilation with our early modern human ancestors, scientists believe. A major conference in London this week will reveal the results of five years' research on why Homo sapiens emerged triumphant in the survival battle of the humans. A major conference in London this week will reveal the results of five years' research on why Homo sapiens emerged triumphant in the survival battle of the humans. New research has revealed that Neanderthals died out within a few thousand years of the appearance of Homo sapiens. Photograph: BBC T he puzzle is one of the greatest surrounding our species. On a planet that bristled with different types of human being, including Neanderthals and the Hobbit-like folk of Flores, only one is left today: Homo sapiens. Sign in or register to rate this publication. The terrestrial civilization has been established with only one human species, but it could have been otherwise. Until about 40,000 years ago, a blink in geologic time, at least one close relative was sharing this planet with us. They were Neanderthals, native Eurasians that today are recovering from their reputation as brutes thanks to scientific findings that have rediscovered them as a species similar to ours in many respects. Neanderthals were a separate species from modern humans, and became extinct (because of climate change or interaction with modern humans) and were replaced by modern humans moving into their habitat between 45,000 and 40,000 years ago. What is Excalibur and what did it signify? a hang-ax from a rock - used as an offering to the dead - put into the pit when and where were the first neanderthal found? What did they name the first fossil? 1829 - discovered in Belgium - Engis 2 In what ways did our ideas about Homo neandertalensis change as the 20th century proceeds thought as deformed humans / possible link between apes and humans actually much more similar to humans When Lived: About 400,000 - 40,000 years ago. Neanderthals (the ‘th’ pronounced as ‘t’) are our closest extinct human relative. Some defining features of their skulls include the large middle part of the face, angled cheek bones, and a huge nose for humidifying and warming cold, dry air. Their bodies were shorter and stockier than ours, another adaptation to living in cold environments. In particular, researchers have focused on the Neanderthals, a species very close in physique and brain size to modern humans. They once dominated Europe, but disappeared after modern humans emerged from our African homeland around 60,000 years ago. Recent studies also show that a few Neanderthals began mating with ancestors of modern humans long before the large out of Africa migration of the present day non-Africans, as early as 100,000 years ago. Neanderthals (Homo neanderthalensis) were widespread across Europe and Western Asia for a long time, starting about 400,000 years ago. But things began to change when […] Query: how long ago did neanderthals go extinct",
"output": [
"Neanderthals were moving between 45,000 and 40,000 years ago."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f1abc2bba88c45d9838da5162389be05",
"input": "Trains from Rome to Florence Trains from Amsterdam to Paris Trains from Vienna to Salzburg Trains from Paris to London Trains from London to Manchester Trains from Barcelona to Madrid Trains from Paris to Amsterdam Trains from Venice to Rome Trains from Edinburgh to London Trains from Florence to Rome Trains from Amsterdam to Brussels Private and Regional Rail Roads. 1 Travel free of charge on board local trains (S-Bahn trains) that connects all major German cities. 2 10% discount on the Garmisch Partenkirchen - Grainau - Zugspitzplatt mountain railway route, and discount on some cable cars in the summit area. Driving distance from Dusseldorf, Germany to Berlin, Germany. The total driving distance from Dusseldorf, Germany to Berlin, Germany is 347 miles or 558 kilometers. Your trip begins in Dusseldorf, Germany. It ends in Berlin, Germany. How long does it take to travel from Düsseldorf to Berlin by train? The average journey time between Düsseldorf and Berlin is 4 hours and 24 minutes and the fastest journey time is 4 hours and 14 minutes. On an average weekday, there are 19 trains per day travelling from Düsseldorf to Berlin. The Berlin Central Train Station, considered the biggest train station in Europe, opened March 28, 2006. This state-of-the-art station has countless conveniences for travelers including a suspension system for its platforms, greatly reducing vibration and noise. Answer 1 of 2: I have try to search train service from Dusseldorf to Paris, on 4 Nov, but could not find direct one. I can only find train from Dusseldorf to Cologne and to Paris. Can somebody help? Isn't there any direct service? Free access to lounges If you have a 1st class ticket, you can enjoy a free drink at the NS International Lounge in Amsterdam, Schiphol Airport and Rotterdam. Seat reservation It is not mandatory to reserve a seat with ICE International. We do, however, advise you to do so. Overview The average travel time between Berlin and Düsseldorf is 4h36 minutes. The quickest route is 4h14 minutes. The first train leaving Berlin is at 00:43, the last at 23:44. There is an average of 22 trains a day between Berlin and Düsseldorf, leaving approximately every 1h02 minutes. This Site Might Help You. RE: How go from Dusseldorf to Berlin? How go from Dusseldorf to Berlin? Hi, is there a cheap way to get from Dusseldorf to Berlin in one day and preferably non-stop? I know Lufthansa and Germanwings. Lufthansa has a ticket for 140 euro one way:( I guess the train service costs the same. Take the train from Stuttgart Hbf to München Hbf ICE / ... $45 - $107. Bus • 9 h 30 min. Take the bus from Düsseldorf to Munich, Munich central bus station 027 / ... $40 - $70. Drive • 5 h 40 min. Drive from Düsseldorf to Munich 382 miles; $80 - $120. Fly from Dusseldorf • 3 h 7 min. Fly from Dusseldorf (DUS) to Munich (MUC) DUS - MUC; $55 - $171 Query: how long train between dusseldorf and berlin",
"output": [
"The average journey time by train between Dusseldorf and Berlin is 4 hours and 24 minutes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-fe3c9418f33b42b793c068fa0388a468",
"input": "BBC © 2014 The BBC is not responsible for the content of external sites. Read more. This page is best viewed in an up-to-date web browser with style sheets (CSS) enabled. While you will be able to view the content of this page in your current browser, you will not be able to get the full visual experience. Please consider upgrading your browser software or enabling style sheets (CSS) if you are able to do so. Frequency, wavelength, cycles, period all refer to the pitch of the sound and where they sit on the frequency spectrum. 1 Short wavelength = high frequency = faster cycles = higher pitch. 2 Long wavelength = low frequency = slower cycles = lower pitch. Sounds are heard by the ear as either being loud or soft. The loudness of a sound in measured in decibels. Decibels refer to the energy produced by that sound. A human can hear sounds ranging from 0.1 decibels, which is very soft, to sound which measure 120 decibels. Younger people can often hear lower volumes better than older people. The perception of loudness is related to sound pressure level (SPL), frequency content and duration of a sound. [citation needed] The relationship between SPL and loudness of a single tone can be approximated by Stevens's power law in which SPL has an exponent of 0.67. It is sometimes stated that loudness is a subjective measure, often confused with physical measures of sound strength such as sound pressure, sound pressure level (in decibels), sound intensity or sound power. It is the length in space of a sound. The period of a sound wave is the time taken for one wavelength to pass a certain point before a new wave begins. A longer wave period represents a lower pitch sound. The third part of a sound wave is the amplitude. The amplitude of a sound wave represents the loudness of the sound. Look at the following pairs and decide which item has greater amplitude: 1 yell or whisper. 2 siren or cat meow. 3 mosquito buzz or car alarm. 4 fireworks or violin. has to do with the differences among sounds that have the same pitch and loudness The ear can respond to a remarkable range of sound amplitude. (Amplitude corresponds to the quality known as loudness.) The ratio between the threshold of pain and the threshold of sensation is on the order of 130 dB, or ten trillion to one. The judgment of relative sounds is more or less logarithmic, such that a tenfold increase in sound power is described as twice as loud. When the air particles begin vibrating the air inside your ear, you hear a sound. This chain reaction continues until the particles run out of energy. This is what you call a “sound wave.” Volume is the intensity of a sound wave. It is directly related to amplitude, which is the height of a sound wave. Query: how do we hear the loudness of a sound",
"output": [
"The loudness of a sound in measured in decibels."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b51f2548846f4d348952b330f9a1cad9",
"input": "If you are a permanent resident whose 10-year green card has expired or will expire within the next 6 months, you may begin the renewal process by: 1 Online E-Filing Form I-90, Application to Replace Permanent Resident Card. 2 Filing a paper Form I-90, Application to Replace Permanent Resident Card by mail. The amount of time to renew a green card ranges from four months to a little more than seven months, depending on the service center. There are four main services centers, with Vermont having the... The amount of time to renew a green card ranges from four months to a little more than seven months, depending on the service center. how long does it take to get your green card renewed? what is the quickest way to get your green card renewed, I think you have to do it on line or are there other options maybe quicker does anyone know...? would a lawyer do it quicker but charge alot or is it all done on line has anyone renewed theirs that could tell me how long it took them please and what do... Update: well mine expires in 3 months have i left it too late to apply. I am here in the usa. Update 2: well mine expires in 3 months have i left it too late to apply. I am here in the usa. I applied for a reentry permit and was waiting to hear back before I applied for my green card renewal. There is a possibility that you will have to begin the process again if you let your green card expire. This will include paying all applicable fees. The process is different for conditional residents that have a 2-year card. You must get the conditions removed within 90 days of your card's expiration date. That process, too, can be done online. What Happens After Filing I-90, Application to Replace Permanent Resident Card Knowing that your green card has expired (or worse yet it was lost/stolen) can be an unsettling feeling. You’re probably anxious to know what happens after filing Form I-90, Application to Replace Permanent Resident Card, and how long it will take to receive your new green card. Although the steps that take place are fairly consistent, the time frame can vary based on the USCIS case load, the USCIS office where you filed, and your ability to properly file an accurately prepared Form I-90 without errors or omissions. As an applicant for green card renewal/replacement, you’re probably anxious to know what happens after filing I-90 and how long it will take. At a minimum, you should allow 3 months for processing, if not longer. You can monitor the status of your case, whether card renewal or replacement, by going to: https://egov.uscis.gov/cris/Dashboard.do I would caution you not to hold USCIS to the processing time they list. My experience has been that they usually take longer. You should not file Form I-90 for a green card renewal earlier than six months before the expiration date; USCIS may reject your application and mail it back to you. Use the Green Card Renewal Calculator to determine when to file your application and get a helpful email reminder. Some older green cards do not have an For asylum applications filed on or after April 1, 1997, the Immigration and Nationality Act (INA) states that the initial interview should take place within 45 days after the date the application is filed. Warning: in_array() expects parameter 2 to be array, string given in /hermes/bosnaweb28a/b247/dot.rhanus/public_html/wp-content/plugins/allmywebneeds-amwn-theme-companion-2cee86dad03d/lib/class.Hooks.php on line 121. Query: how long does it take to have your green card renewed",
"output": [
"It takes from four months to a little more than seven months to have your green card renewed."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e78541cf6115492e9995c089ba147d93",
"input": "The final diet mimicking the ketogenic diet, called the very low carbohydrate diet (VLCARB), consisted of 4% carbohydrates, 61% fats (20% saturated fat), and 35% protein. All subjects eat one of these equal-calorie diets for 8 weeks followed by a 4 week period in which they consumed the same diet. A “high fat, low carb” ketogenic diet has been shown to be more efficacious for weight loss than a low-fat diet and improved other serum markers such as a greater decrease in triglycerides and an greater increase in HDL cholesterol. If you are on a ketogenic or very low carb (VLC) diet (e.g. with 50-100gr carb/day and/or eating ketone producing MCT oils such as coconut oil), you may have a dilemma of having high Blood Glucose (BG) despite eating LC: If you are keto adapted, that is, your body is using ketones and even though you have sufficient insulin (say >5 microU/ml) your body tries to keep your BG higher than necessary, e.g. above 100-110 mg/dl. But the ketogenic (keto) diet, high in fat and low in carbs, can potentially change the way your body stores and uses energy, easing diabetes symptoms. With the keto diet, your body converts fat, instead of sugar, into energy. The diet was created in 1924 as a treatment for epilepsy, but the effects of this eating pattern are also being studied for type 2 diabetes. The ketogenic diet may improve blood glucose (sugar) levels while also reducing the need for insulin. If you are on a ketogenic or very low carb (VLC) diet (e.g. with 50-100gr carb/day and/or eating ketone producing MCT oils such as coconut oil), you may have a dilemma of having high Blood Glucose (BG) despite eating LC: If you are keto adapted, that is, your body is using ketones and even though you have sufficient insulin (say >5 microU/ml) your ... Many people ask: “Why is my fasting blood glucose higher on low carb?” Dozens of ketogenic and paleo forums have discussions on the issue. Some of the information flames fears, using unsubstantiated claims, that a low-carb diet could trigger diabetes rather than reverse it. Ketosis keeps your glucose at a stable steady rate all day via gluconeogenesis. In totally keto-adapted people, their glucose levels can be steadily low (4.5 mMol/L) compared to other people, (5.5 mMol/L) but the body always maintains a safe level so you don't go into a coma. As I've tried to explain (and Ravenrose also explained), the higher fasting number when on a ketogenic diet is a version of the 'dawn phenomenon' that many diabetics experience as the liver tries to keep our blood sugar levels from going too LOW during sleep. Do you know of any data showing high fasting blood sugar in ketogenic dieters? The only published data I am familiar with has shown ~10% lower fasting blood sugar in ketogenic dieters compared to normal dieters. well, as someone else said I'm not an endocrinologist so take this under. that heading.A blood glucose of 90 might be a little high in ketosis but maybe not. Blood glucose doesn't get as low as most people think and the body is really good at keeping blood glucose in the normal range (except for diabetics). Yeah, I might expect it to be a little bit lower if you were Query: how low can your blood glucose be on keto diet",
"output": [
"In totally keto-adapted people, their glucose levels can be steadily low to 4.5 mMol by L."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0937a91f7e81452488ec1624f7583562",
"input": "2018 Engineering Salary Statistics Engineers Get Top Pay. What is an engineering degree worth? Year after year, engineering tops the list of majors with the highest average starting salary. The bottom line: it is well worth the time and effort it takes to become an engineer. So how much do engineers make? The average Civil Engineer salary in the United States is approximately $75,567 per year. Salary information comes from 21,001 data points collected directly from employees, users, and past and present job advertisements on Indeed in the past 12 months. Salary; Olsson Associates Civil Engineer : Phoenix, US Area: $72,894: Michael Baker International Civil Engineer : Phoenix, US Area: $80,273: US Air Force Civil Engineer : Phoenix, US Area: $67,102: Kennedy Jenks Civil Engineer : Phoenix, US Area: $91,830: Kinetic Systems (Massachusetts) Civil Engineer : Phoenix, US Area: $105,509: Damon S. Williams Associates Civil Engineer Industry profile for this occupation: Top. Industries with the highest published employment and wages for this occupation are provided. For a list of all industries with employment in this occupation, see the Create Customized Tables function. Industries with the highest levels of employment in this occupation: Civil Engineer Salaries in the United States. Salary estimated from 21,001 employees, users, and past and present job advertisements on Indeed in the past 12 months. Last updated: September 1, 2017. Civil engineering technicians help civil engineers to plan, design, and build highways, bridges, utilities, and other infrastructure projects. They also help to plan, design, and build commercial, industrial, residential, and land development projects. Average Civil Engineer Hourly Wage in the United States. Civil Engineers earn a median hourly wage of $39.53. Hourly wages typically start from $25.43 and go up to $62.43. Source: U.S. Department of Labor Bureau of Labor Statistics. Average Civil Engineer Hourly Wage in the United States Civil Engineers earn a median hourly wage of $40.16. Hourly wages typically start from $25.71 and go up to $63.89. Our team of Certified Compensation Professionals has analyzed survey data collected from thousands of HR departments at companies of all sizes and industries to present this range of annual salaries for people with the job title Civil Engineer I in the United States. An entry level civil engineer (1-3 years of experience) earns an average salary of $62,458. On the other end, a senior level civil engineer (8+ years of experience) earns an average salary of $109,865. Query: average civil engineering salary in us",
"output": [
"The average Civil Engineer salary in the United States is approximately $75,567 per year."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-78d27fd4cb464fef99fefe7317f56419",
"input": "Most people stay in the hospital for three to seven days after knee replacement surgery. At home, you will probably need help for several weeks with daily activities such as getting dressed and taking a shower. Most people can stop using their walker or crutches after two to three weeks. You will need physical therapy several times a week for at least a few weeks. You will also need to do knee exercises at home for three to six months. Most people are fully recovered from their knee replacement surgery in three to six months. Doctors give unbiased, helpful information on indications, contra-indications, benefits, and complications: Dr. Surdyka on how long does a total knee replacement take to heal: You can typically put full weght on it immediately postop. How long is the recovery from knee replacement? How long does it take to recover enough to return to normal activity after knee replacement? . How long does a total knee replacement surgery take? How long does it take a total knee replacement to heal? Dr. John Michalski, Jefferson Medical College of Thomas Jefferson University Answered Oct. 10, 2012 33 years experience in Orthopedic Surgery How long would it take before my knee feels better after total knee replacement surgery? Dr. John Dearborn Dr. Dearborn 3 months: It takes about 6 weeks to feel better than you did before surgery when walking and 3 months to return to all normal activities. Total knee replacement: a surgical procedure in which damaged parts of the knee joint are replaced with artificial parts. They cap the end of the thigh bone , under surface of the knee cap and the top surface of the chin bone.... How long does it take before a total knee replacement feels normal again? How long does it take to get back mobility after a full right knee replacement? Please tell me how long it takes for full mobility after a full right knee replacement? How long does it take to recover from a knee replacement? How long does it normally take to recover and go back to work from a duble knee replacement? Please tell me how long it takes for to get in and out of bed by yourself after a knee replacement? You can typically put full weght on it immediately postop. The rehab however continues for several months, and continuing with home exercise program to re-train the sort tissues and muscles. Tisuue is made of collagen which takes 6 weeks to heal, then 6 weeks or so to recalibrate to the realignment. Knee replacement surgery is a major procedure. The nerves at the joint line, among other things, are replaced. It takes time to recover from the procedure itself and get used to the new -- “normal” -- feeling after the joint surface is replaced. Day of Surgery. The day of knee replacement surgery is mostly a day to recover from your procedure. But it is not just about rest. Depending on the time of day of your surgery, you may be asked to sit in a chair or on the side of the bed. Patients will begin simple activities including ankle pumps, leg lifts, and heel slides. Query: how long does it take to recover from total knee replacement",
"output": [
"It takes about 6 weeks to feel better and 3 months to return to all normal activities after having knee replacement surgery."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7871a1901524494ab4bcbc4d98965314",
"input": "The peel begins by cleansing the skin thoroughly to remove all oil and debris. (no make-up should be worn to the office). The peeling agent is then applied evenly to the skin surface with Q-tips or with sterile gauze. This is then rapidly neutralized after several minutes with another solution. Dermatologists use chemical peels to do just this. A chemical peel can diminish many signs of aging on the face as well as the hands, neck, and chest. Chemical peels also treat some skin conditions. Dermatologists use chemical peels to treat some types of acne and conditions that discolor the skin. Whether you receive a chemical peel to diminish signs of aging or treat a skin condition, you can see: Fewer lines and wrinkles. More even skin color. Brighter complexion. Smoother skin. Some chemical peels require downtime. Uses: Dermatologists use chemical peels to treat: Acne (some types). Age spots. Your skin type, your skin care before and after the peel, the doctor's level of experience, and your lifestyle after treatment can also affect the results. Some types of skin problems respond better to a chemical peel than others. Some people don't peel at all, even 3-4 days after they get the TCA peel. This probably means that the peel wasn't strong enough for your skin. If this is the case, you can get another TCA peel done on day 5. This actually happened to me when I got an 8% TCA peel. How long does it take? AHA and TCA peels for the full face generally take 10 to 15 minutes. Full-face Phenol peels may take between one and two hours. Phenol peels for small portions of the face, such as the upper lip, may take only 10 to 15 minutes. Go to TOP. Where will the procedure be performed? The chemical peel is a procedure where a chemical solution is applied to the skin that makes the top layers of skin “blister” and peel away, revealing newer skin underneath. A chemical peel usually involves approximately 5 to 7 days for recovery time. The results may last for at least a year or more and with continued sun protection far longer. The results last depending upon how deeply the skin was treated. Continue to use 50-SPF sunscreen after each cleansing treatment. The face will be bright red for 7 to 10 days following a peel. You can usually apply makeup again from 7 days to 2 weeks after a peel to camouflage the redness. Avoid the sun for at least 2 months following a chemical peel. Take ibuprofen to dull any pain that might occur after a chemical peel. How long it takes a chemical peel to heal depends on the type of chemical peel. More Info: Chemical peels are categorized into three subgroups, which is used depends on the severity of the skin issue. The stronger the chemical used in the procedure, the deeper the peel, and subsequently the longer the healing time. Glycolic Acid Peel After a Medium-depth Chemical Peel treatment, you can expect mild swelling, redness, crusting/scabbing, cracking, flaking, and peeling. Often skin may also turn a darker shade and become stiff before it begins the peeling process. The downtime before your skin is restored can be anywhere from 5 to 10 days depending on how quickly your skin heals. How you take care of your skin after you finish peeling is as important as how you take care of your skin during the TCA peel. Two weeks after you finish completely peeling, you can resume any AHAs, BHAs, or retinoid treatment products. Query: how long does it take your face to peel after a chemical peel",
"output": [
"The downtime before your skin is restored can be anywhere from 5 to 10 days depending on how quickly your skin heals."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-681c7e788b1d4e16a408b1729c721044",
"input": "When you are being sold aged meat, be sure to ask whether it's been dry-aged or wet-aged. If they don't know the answer or are unwilling to share, it's best to assume the worst. The other drawback to wet-aging: It can't be carried out for as long as dry-aging. It seems counterintuitive, considering that a wet-aged hunk of meat is largely protected by the outside environment. But if even a smidge of harmful anaerobic bacteria makes its way into that bag, the meat will rot inside its cover, giving no indication that it's done so until you open it up. 31 Comments Latest May 24, 2012 by Tom34. 1 1POINT21GW May 21, 2012 You can keep it for up to 45 - 60 days past the sell by date (depending on the temperature it's kept at - store it in the bottom... 2 a. 3 a. 4 TraderJoe May 21, 2012 I wet age for two weeks minimum in cryo as a standard SOP fopr every steak house I have run. Since wet aged beef is more economical than dry aged beef, you're more likely to find it in restaurants and grocery stores. You can easily wet age cuts of beef at home if you own a vacuum-sealer. While it may lack the depth of flavor you'll find in dry-aged beef, this process tenderizes the meat without reducing its weight. Enzymes break down muscle tissue as the beef ages, resulting in a tender cut of meat. Things You'll Need Now, you can’t just grab any brisket out of the meat cooler and plan on aging it because you have no idea how long it’s been packaged. Meat is only good for so many days fresh – and then it will spoil. The only way to know when meat was packaged is to see the actual date it was packaged. From this date you can determine your window for wet aging. The kill/package date is printed on every case… and that’s the only way to know. So you have 2 options: You can buy it by the case – which saves you a little money anyway. It means that if you try to wet-age a vacuum sealed package of meat in the back of your fridge, you are taking a gamble. You may end up with good, more tender wet aged beef, or you may end up with off-tasting spoiled beef that gives you a tummy ache (unless you overcook it, after which it will be dry and off-tasting). So, Should I Age Beef at Home? This Post Has 4 Comments. 1 Tell us, if this practice of aging is only used or needed in beef. Great explanation for everyone to use for their personal choice. 2 Jenn-thx for the great explanation. Just had this same convo when I dropped our heifer off this week. You did a much better job of explaining the why’s! (East)Norwich. NY, customer who purchased Dry Aged Prime Strip Steaks. All too often you will read a menu or an ad or a review saying “ the beef is aged 21 days” or “our beef is wet aged for 30 days” or even, “ their beef is dry aged up to 6 weeks”. And the impression in some cases is that it is all the same thing. Two: Unwrap the beef, rinse it well, and pat it dry with paper towels. Do not trim. Wrap the roast loosely in a triple layer of cheesecloth and set it on a rack over a rimmed baking sheet or other tray. Three: Refrigerate for three to seven days; the longer the beef ages, the tastier it gets. Beef aging - References. ^ 1 DeGeer, S. L.; Hunt, M. C.; Bratcher, C. L.; Crozier-Dodson, B. A.; Johnson, D. E.; Stika, J. F. (2009). ^ 2 Semley, John (18 August 2017). 3 Ahnström, M. L.; Seyfert, M.; Hunt, M. C.; Johnson, D. E. (2006). 4 DeGeer, S. L.; Hunt, M. C.; Bratcher, C. L.; Crozier-Dodson, B. A.; Johnson, D. E.; Stika, J. F. (2009). Quality dry aging makes the beef you buy not only more tender, but concentrates flavor and produces meat that is superb in taste and texture. Dry Aging occurs when beef is processed and stored in a 30 - 35 degree cooler. During this time, enzymes in the meat work to break down the fibers and tenderize the beef. Most beef is aged a minimum of 72 hours; however, it's better if the beef is aged longer. Maximum tenderness occurs at 10 - 11 days of aging, but superior flavor occurs when the beef is aged longer. The longer you dry age beef, the more you increase the density of the beef (due to water loss) which concentrates the flavor. Dry Aged Beef, The Darkened Outer Layers Are Cut Away During the dry aging process, mold and bacteria forms on the outermost layers of the beef which must be cut off and thrown away. Query: how long can you wet aged beef",
"output": [
"You can wet aged beef for 30 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7dc1f2d3b12c414c9ee9a37f45737f68",
"input": "Manager Self-Service is the use of software and the corporate network to automate paper-based human resource processes that require a manager's approval, record-keeping, or input, and processes that support the manager's job. The process of analyzing the tasks necessary for the production of a product or service, prior to allocating and assigning these tasks to a particular job category or person. HR ch. 4 26 terms 3. Briefly describe the task environment and its four primary sectors. ANSWER: The task environment is the portion of the external environment that directly influences the organization's operations and performance. The task environment is made up of customers, competitors, suppliers, and the labor market. These sectors typically conduct day-to-day transactions with the organization. Level: 2 Page: 88-89 Statement (I) pertains to the mega environment of a firm and hence is not true. Statement (IV) is not true as a firm may not be able to directly influence its mega environment, but it can certainly influenceits task environment. Upvote (2) Downvote Reply (0) Report. Increasing the # of tasks a worker performs, with all of the tasks at the same level of responsibility. Different than Job Enrichment since it is not increasing the level of responsibility. Good for victims of job burnout. Factors external to the organizations have been primarily the focus of management as a discipline. Answer: False Level: 2 Page: 82 Type: F. 3. The two layers of an organization's external environment are the general environment and the task environment. Answer: True Level: 1 Page: 82 Type: F. 4. The outer layer, the general environment, is widely dispersed and affects organizations directly. Answer: False Level: 1 Page: 83 Type: F. 5. Two important sectors of the economic dimension of a firm's general environment are customers and competitors. Answer: False Level: 2 Page: 83 Type: F. 6. Current employees, management, and especially corporate culture are part of an organization's internal environment. As few as one, like a President, or as many as say, 75, which might be the case with machine operators in a large firm. One is the minimum but the maximum has no practical limit. The job exists, NOT as the job should exist. Most often that duty is assigned to industrial engineers, methods analysts, or others. Briefly describe the task environment and its four primary sectors answer: The task environment is the portion of the external environment that directly influences the organization's operations and performance. The task environment is made up of customers, competitors, suppliers, and the labor market. III. As it depends largely on the products and services offered by the firm and its business location, it may vary from firm to firm. IV. While a firm may not be able to directly influence its task environment, it can certainly influence its mega environment. A process of determining the specific tasks to be performed, the methods used in performing these tasks, and how the job relates to other work in an organization. Query: how is a firm's task environment different quizlet",
"output": [
"The task environment is the portion of the external environment that directly influences the organization's operations and performance. The task environment is made up of customers, competitors, suppliers, and the labor market. These sectors typically conduct day-to-day transactions with the organization."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-caa57d12bad14168af07f40ce48119b3",
"input": "How To Determine the Proper Instrument Size Violin and Viola With the student’s left arm fully extended and palm up, place a measuring device under the chin to simulate a violin - note the measurement at the center of the palm. Violin Certificates: Some of the best violins come with certificates which tell you who made your violin, these are sold with the violin by the shop that originally brokered the deal. Sometimes when I talk to clients they become a bit confused and think I am talking about the label inside the violin. I am not. Viola sizes refer to the actual length of the instrument's body, in inches. The largest common size is 16.5. Adults generally play a 15.5 to 16.5 viola. Violas are larger than violins, and are measured to be a little bit over-sized for the player. Violins come in 8 main sizes. The size corresponds to the length of the body of the violin (not including the neck and scroll). The smallest common size is 1/16 (just 9 inches or 23 cm), and the sizes work their way up through 1/10, 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 7/8 and finally 4/4 or full size (about 14 inches or 36 cm). How to determine the scale length or string length of a Violin, Viola, Fiddle, Cello or upright Bass. 1 PLEASE READ ALL INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING. THESE INSTRUCTIONS APPLY TO VIOLIN, VIOLA, FIDDLE, CELLO AND UPRIGHT BASS. Step 1, Distinguish by the frame size. Is it big or small? The violin generally has a smaller frame than the viola.Step 2, Observe and weigh the bow. The bow is the long wooden stick that is used to play an instrument. If the end which you hold the bow (the frog) is a straight 90 degree angle it is a violin bow, whereas the viola bow is a 90 degree angle with a curved corner. Moreover, the viola usually has a heavier bow.Step 3, Listen to the pitch. Is it lower or higher? The ... How to Measure the Body Size of a Violin, Fiddle, Viola, Cello or Upright Bass Learn how to accurately determine the body size of your Violin, Fiddle, Viola, Cello or upright Bass. Knowing the correct size of your instrument is helpful for determining the scale or string length of the instrument. The best violin is the one that is best maintained. 1 You’ll want to make sure your violin and any accessories are properly stored in a case when not being used, that they are kept in mild temperatures and moderate humidity, and that they are kept clean. Violins come in nine sizes. Adults—generally from age 11 and older—will use a standard, full-sized violin. For children, there are also 3/4, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/10, 1/16 and 1/32 violins. The full-sized violin is also referred to as a 4/4 size. There are two ways to measure a young player for a violin. With the student’s left arm fully extended away from his or her body, measure from the base of the neck to either the wrist or the center of the palm. Thomastik - Infeld Red and Blue Thomastik's first new violin strings in over 20 years, these two strings were introduced together. The Infeld Blue is more brilliant in sound. They are designed so that you can mix and match them on your violin to get the balance you need. The tension is the same for either set. I found the Blue set to have a brilliant sound like the Dominant but with more character. Query: how do you tell what size a violin is?",
"output": [
"The size of violin is the largest common size is 16.5, adults generally play a 15.5 to 16.5 viola."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-6568a00af93c456881bb46b31d261551",
"input": "“There is absolutely nothing athletic about racing.”. And when you get one of these guys fired up enough, he'll pull out the big gun. It's the one ace in the hole that the NASCAR haters love to pull out: “It's not a sport, and drivers aren't athletes.”. These words are like a verbal mushroom cloud to racing fans. NASCAR Nextel cup race cars are very heavy and have about 750 horsepower. Other specifications include: Busch series race cars are similar to the Nextel cup cars. They have less horsepower due to the carburetor. They also have a shorter wheelbase and spoiler. “It's not the same as a football player or a basketball player or a baseball player, but there is a very huge physical aspect to it that people don't see.”. I got a small taste of what it's like to be on a race track in a real NASCAR car. For the few minutes I was in there, I can say there was a physical toll. NASCAR Jackets Every racing fan knows that a NASCAR jacket is a must-have for race day. Shop the latest official NASCAR men's jackets, jackets for women, and kids' jackets from NASCAR.COM SUPERSTORE. We offer jackets from Chase Authentics, JH Designs, and more featuring your favorite NASCAR drivers like Dale Earnhardt Jr., Tony Stewart, Jimmie Johnson, Jeff Gordon, Austin Dillon, and more. A quandary that is just as divisive as any political platform or race. But this isn't an issue of red and blue states or Republicans and Democrats; rather, it's about NASCAR. Since the American racing series peaked in popularity around the early 2000s, two camps seem to have sprung up. NASCAR Jackets. Every racing fan knows that a NASCAR jacket is a must-have for race day. Shop the latest official NASCAR men's jackets, jackets for women, and kids' jackets from NASCAR.COM SUPERSTORE. We offer jackets from Chase Authentics, JH Designs, and more featuring your favorite NASCAR drivers like Dale Earnhardt Jr., Tony Stewart, Jimmie Johnson, Jeff Gordon, Austin Dillon, and more. Back to the main NASCAR page. Nextel Cup Race Cars. NASCAR Nextel Cup race cars are loosely based around production sedans from Dodge, Chevrolet, Ford, and Toyota. By rule, the race cars are required to have three stock parts from the manufacturer including the roof, the hood, and the trunk lid. The body of the car must meet specific templates provided by NASCAR. These templates are adjusted to try and keep any manufacturer car make from getting an advantage or disadvantage over the other cars. NASCAR Nextel cup race cars are very heavy and have about 750 horsepower. Other specifications include: Fuel - 110 octane All about NASCAR race cars including horsepower, weight, Busch, Nextel Cup, and Crafstman Truck Series cars. Parents and Teachers: Support Ducksters by following us on or . All of the cars in the major NASCAR racing series are precision machines that are designed with care and lots of $'s. Many of the engine parts and body are hand constructed and formed for specific needs on specific racetracks. This car specialization and the price involved is one reason that many race teams are formed. Query: how heavy is a nascar",
"output": [
"NASCAR Nextel cup race cars are very heavy and have about 750 horsepower."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1f57cf43f12d465294ba4f84dcbd5614",
"input": "On the contrary, sometimes a woman may believe she is having implantation bleeding, when in fact it is simply a period`s first day or just early menses. The best way to find out the real cause of spotting is to know how long implantation bleeding may last and to compare it with the period`s duration. What is Implantation Bleeding? Implantation bleeding is a common process, during which the embryo attaches to the lining inside the woman’s uterus. Often, this bleeding happens between the 6th and 12th days after the embryo has formed, or somewhere between the 2nd and 7th days before period. Learn how long a normal period should last and when to call your doctor. Across the board, our answer is probably Too Long.. But here's a quick guide to how long a typical period lasts and what factors can change the length of your period. You period can last for over 7 days if you are using an hormonal birth control pill. And it can also be shorter and lighter. HOW LONG DOES A PERIOD LAST FOR A 12 YEAR OLD. As a 12 year old or a teenager, a period length between 2 to 7 days is normal and nothing to worry about. Inform your doctor of any sudden menstrual cycle changes. HOW LONG SHOULD A PERIOD LAST BEFORE GOING TO THE DOCTOR. If your period is over 7 or 8 days, you may want to see a doctor to get checked. The Average Length of a Period. A woman's menstrual cycle lasts all month, but her period is the specific time period that happens when the uterus starts to shed its old lining. The start of the period is marked by a sudden drop in female sex hormones, and then a woman starts to bleed. How Long Does A Period normally last. Normally a period will last for 3-5 days. But when a girl first starts her period, her menstruation will be irregular. It can be as short as 2 days or as long as 7 days which is fine as well. After a year your period will become regular. Let us dive in to understand the period cycle a bit more. Shall we? how long should a period last before going to the doctor If your period is over 7 or 8 days, you may want to see a doctor to get checked. Also if your period constantly last for only 1-2 days, it is recommended you speak to your doctor. The woman who keeps close watch on her menstrual cycle is more likely to distinguish implantation bleeding from pre-period symptoms, especially if she has a spotty day several days before her normal period begins. The length of time during which you may “see” it will depend on how much blood was released in the process of egg attachment and how long it takes for your body to get rid of it. In most cases women pass all of it within a couple of hours, though, in some extreme cases bleeding may last even two days. how long does a period last for a 12 year old As a 12 year old or a teenager, a period length between 2 to 7 days is normal and nothing to worry about. Inform your doctor of any sudden menstrual cycle changes. Once you are certain that you are experiencing implantation bleeding instead of your period, if you notice that it is lasting too long or you have pain and an increase in bloody discharge, you need to contact your doctor. You may be having a miscarriage or an ectopic pregnancy. Query: how long is a period last",
"output": [
"Normally a period will last for 3 to 5 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3498d0d2ecc547b486bdf1fabf30ccda",
"input": "How to get legal copies of professional photographs: 1 Contact the photographer/copyright owner. 2 Check both the front and back of a print for a copyright notice. 3 Use the Photographer Registry Web site to locate a photographer/copyright owner at www.PhotographerRegistry.com, so you can obtain reproductions or permission. When it comes to photographs, copyright law has a long-standing deference to permit a photographer control over the first time an image is made public. In this discussion, we’ll assume that you’re not hacking computer systems or digging through rubbish bins looking for non-public images. The exclusive rights of the copyright owner are not unlimited. The copyright law establishes some limitations on these rights. One of the most important limitations on the exclusive rights is the doctrine of Fair Use. The Fair Use doctrine allows limited copying of copyrighted works for educational and research purposes. Those factors are: 1 the purpose and character of one's use. 2 the nature of the copyrighted work. 3 what amount and proportion of the whole work was taken, and. 4 the effect of the use upon the potential market for or value of the copyrighted work. Before 1989, United States law required the use of a copyright notice, consisting of the copyright symbol (©, the letter C inside a circle), the abbreviation Copr., or the word Copyright, followed by the year of the first publication of the work and the name of the copyright holder. If the work was published between 1923 and 1963 and it was renewed, the copyright lasts 95 years from the date of first publication. If the work was published between 1964 and 1977, the copyright lasts for 95 years from the date of publication. How long does the copyright last on a picture? The minimum term of protection is the life of the creator plus 50 years; the US and some other countries have extended this to life plus 70 years. Edit In addition, copyright, in most cases, does not prohibit one from acts such as modifying, defacing, or destroying his or her own legitimately obtained copy of a copyrighted work, so long as duplication is not involved. Best Answer: In general it is the life of the photographer plus 70 years. As to finding the photographer - if you know the name etc then search locally on that. made a good attempt to find the photographer then the lab should allow copies. Explain the situation to them. For works made for hire, and for anonymous and pseudonymous works (unless the author's identity is revealed in Copyright Office records), the duration of copyright will be 95 years from publication or 120 years from creation, whichever is shorter. Works Originally Created on or after January 1st, 1978. Query: how long are copyrights for photos good for?",
"output": [
"Copyrights for photos lasts for the life of the creator plus 50 years and the US and some other countries have extended this to life plus 70 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e737b3eec903409fb6e7392938d74cb5",
"input": "During the prodomal phase of rabies, which lasts between two to three days, your dog may appear anxious, nervous, standoffish and feverish. She may lick her bite wound repeatedly. Paralytic Phase. Some pets enter a paralytic stage roughly two to four days after rabies symptoms first appear. The duration of immunity for rabies vaccine, canine distemper vaccine, canine parvovirus vaccine, feline panleukopenia vaccine, feline rhinotracheitis, feline calicivirus, have all been shown to last a minimum of 7 years by serology (measuring blood antibody levels) for rabies and challenge studies for all the rest. 4. Don’t vaccinate against rabies within three weeks of other vaccinations or medication for parasites. Multiple vaccines given at once greatly increase the chance of reactions. Multiple vaccines are especially risky for small dogs. 5. Make sure your dog gets the correct vaccine Ask for a rabies vaccination exemption. If your dog has documented health problems, ask your vet to apply for a rabies vaccination extension or exemption. Many localities permit them even if state law doesn’t specifically allow them. If your vet won’t apply for an exemption, go elsewhere. A person who is exposed and has never been vaccinated against rabies should get 4 doses of rabies vaccine - one dose right away, and additional doses on the 3rd, 7th, and 14th days. They should also get another shot called Rabies Immune Globulin at the same time as the first dose. A person who has been previously vaccinated should get 2 doses of rabies vaccine - one right away and another on the 3rd day. Rabies Immune Globulin is not needed. Top of Page How long does a full course of the anti-rabies vaccine provide immunity for? Would it provide immunity for a year? What's the duration of immunity of Rabies vaccine in dogs? (1) A dog or cat vaccinated when under 1 year of age shall be revaccinated no later than 1 year later. (2) A dog or cat vaccinated when over 1 year of age with a vaccine producing immunity lasting 3 years shall be revaccinated no later than 3 years later and at least every 3 years thereafter. (3) A dog or cat vaccinated with a vaccine producing immunity lasting less than 3 years shall be revaccinated no later than 1 year later. Truth be told, rabies vaccines are considered very safe. Nonetheless, the reality is uncomfortable: more pets actually die of the consequences of being vaccinated than come down with the virus. Having said that, you might wonder how it’s possible for me, or any veterinarian, to defend the use of this vaccine. Rabies shots are good for at least 5 years; however, most cities have by-laws that the dog should be given a shot more frequently, some insist on every year. 828.30 Rabies vaccination of dogs, cats, and ferrets.--. (1) All dogs, cats, and ferrets 4 months of age or older must be vaccinated by a licensed veterinarian against rabies with a vaccine that is licensed by the United States Department of Agriculture for use in those species. Query: how long are rabies shots good for dogs",
"output": [
"Rabies shots are good for at least 5 years for dogs."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-556ab303050f4eb2ba24cc39087249be",
"input": "ALSO SEE: Tesla Semi Debuts With 500 Miles of Range, 80,000 lb Towing Capacity Drives Briskly Equipped with four independent electric motors and driving the four rear wheels, the Tesla Semi fully loaded will be able to reach 60 mph from a standing start in 20 seconds. ALSO SEE: Tesla Semi Debuts With 500 Miles of Range, 80,000 lb Towing Capacity. Drives Briskly. Equipped with four independent electric motors and driving the four rear wheels, the Tesla Semi fully loaded will be able to reach 60 mph from a standing start in 20 seconds. Without a trailer attached? That number sheds to 5 seconds. In a Steve Jobs-ian “one more thing” kind of move, CEO Elon Musk made a semi-surprise announcement: Tesla will bring back a new version of its first vehicle, the Tesla Roadster. It will be, of course, the world’s fastest car, Musk says, with a 0-60 time of less than 2 seconds. As with the Model 3, fans of the Tesla Semi can place a deposit – $5,000 down – against a purchase price that Tesla didn’t announce and a delivery date said to be in 2019. There are about 4 million big Class 8 tractors on the market now, with a quarter-million new tractors sold each year. 98 percent are diesel and most of the rest run on compressed natural gas. In a side-by-side comparison of how fast it takes a diesel truck to move 0-60, he showed how quickly the Tesla semi can hit it: 5 seconds. The interior offers one of the most striking features, up front. There’s center-mounted seating, like a McLaren F1. There are just so many interesting details to explore with the Tesla Semi, so we decided to highlight the five major ones that are most likely to get the people talking. Get the Flash Player to see this player. ALSO SEE: Tesla Semi Debuts With 500 Miles of Range, 80,000 lb Towing Capacity. Drives Briskly On a single charge, the Semi should be able to cover 500 miles of highway driving. It can also do this while towing at its maximum capacity of 80,000 lbs. A network of innovative solar powered Tesla charging stations will be installed worldwide to provide fast 30 minute charging for typical truck routes. In addition, up to 400 miles can be achieved after that 30 minute charge. A carbon fiber cab. A centrally-mounted driving position, like in a McLaren F1. A 500-mile range. Zero to 60 mph in five seconds. Semi-autonomous convoy capability. This is the Tesla Semi. Maybe Tesla will find some economies of scale, but the weight of the Tesla Semi is going to include at least five tons of lithium-ion batteries. In comparison, a 6 mpg diesel tractor-trailer would use about 600 pounds of fuel on a 500-mile trip. The Tesla Semi is also quick. Musk ran off these superlatives: The Tesla Semi will accelerate from 0-60 mph in five seconds, by itself, with no trailer. With the trailer and a full 80,000 pound load, it’s 20 seconds to hit 60 mph versus almost a minute for a diesel truck. Query: how fast is the tesla semi",
"output": [
"The Tesla Semi fully loaded will be able to reach 60 mph from a standing start in 20 seconds."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8e442ff28c9d42b0b536d472b3bd27d8",
"input": "Ilex x attenuata‘East Palatka’ Figure 1. Middle-aged ‘East Palatka’ Holly. ‘East Palatka’ Holly1 Edward F. Gilman and Dennis G. Watson2 INTRODUCTION Discovered in 1927 growing near East Palatka, Florida, this Holly is one of a group of hybrids between Ilex cassine x Ilex opaca (Fig. 1). The broad, dull green, rounded leaves have one spine at the tip and few, if any, along the blade edge. The 30 to 45-foot-tall trees take on a moderately tight, pyramidal shape. A female Holly plant, East Palatka Holly is heavily laden with bright red berries in fall and winter, Holly, East Palatka. The East Palatka Holly is an excellent urban tree with fleshy red berries that attract wildlife. East Palatka Hollies are popular in landscapes because of their uniformity and excellent performance under harsh urban conditions. Growth habit: A pyramid-shaped evergreen tree growing to 30 feet tall and 15 feet wide. The leaves are bright green, oval and up to 3 inches long with a pointed tip. Feedings: Apply a general garden fertilizer to new trees in March and June for the first three years after planting. Fringe tree, beautiful white blooms, great alternative to the Crape Myrtle, does well in the south. Fringe Tree, oh how I want one in my front yard. Although if I had the skill a weeping cherry would be most desirable, but this tree stays smaller and it's native! Small trees can pack a big punch into your landscape. Holly, East Palatka The East Palatka Holly is an excellent urban tree with fleshy red berries that attract wildlife. East Palatka Hollies are popular in landscapes because of their uniformity and excellent performance under harsh urban conditions. Discovered in 1927 growing near East Palatka, Florida, this Holly is one of a group of hybrids between Ilex cassine x Ilex opaca . The broad, dull green, rounded leaves have one spine at the tip and few, if any, along the blade edge. The 30 to 45-foot-tall trees take on a moderately tight, pyramidal shape. A female Holly plant, East Palatka Holly is heavily laden with bright red berries in fall and winter, especially toward the top of the tree. A row of East Palatka Hollies will look quite uniform, adding to the popularity of the tree among landscape architects and designers. East Palatka holly grows 35 to 40 feet tall, according to the University of Florida, and is a hybrid of Ilex cassine -- the Dahoon holly -- and Ilex opaca, American holly. Both trees grow 1 to 3 feet per season. Both holly species take well to pruning and adapt well to life in containers or as bonsai. Ilex x attenuata‘East Palatka’. Figure 1. Middle-aged ‘East Palatka’ Holly. ‘East Palatka’ Holly1. Edward F. Gilman and Dennis G. Watson2. INTRODUCTION. Discovered in 1927 growing near East Palatka, Florida, this Holly is one of a group of hybrids. between Ilex cassine x Ilex opaca (Fig. Training the tree into a single-trunked tree will increase its durability and resistance to storm-damage, although many nurseries offer multi-trunked specimens. The tree grows well even in small tree pits carved out of downtown sidewalks. East Palatka Holly grows quickly in full sun or partial shade on moist, acid soils. Growth is poor and foliage chlorotic on alkaline soil. Another hybrid, `Savannah', is a fast-growing female plant which also produces abundant red berries. The foliage is light green and variably-spined. Read Why Our Customers Bought... The Holly shrub, botanically known as Ilex, has a long connection with Christmas. Some of the first Christians decorated their homes with ‘Boughs of Holly’. Today, hollies are widely used as ornamental plants and have been developed for gardens. Hollies range in size from less than 1 foot, to plants over 70 feet tall. Query: how fast does a east palatka holly tree grow in shade",
"output": [
"East Palatka Holly grows quickly in full sun or partial shade on moist, acid soils."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0d675cf7aacc4af39b68891ca98b41e1",
"input": "In animals they only use cellular respiration. In both. In plants they use photosynthesis during the day and at night they use cellular respiration because there is no sun to produce the energy needed with photosynthesis. In animals they only use cellular respiration. Cellular respiration is the conversion process that is initiated in the cytoplasm and finishes in the mitochondria, with the end product being carbon dioxide molecules. The cellular system is like a furnace burning energy, and the byproduct of that combustion is carbon dioxide. Cellular Respiration in Plants By Robert Korpella; Updated April 25, 2017 Cells in both plants and animals use cellular respiration as a means of converting stored energy into a chemical that individual cells consume. Adenosine triphosphate (ATP) is a chemical food that all cells use. Plants first create a simple sugar through photosynthesis. Individual cells then break down that sugar through cellular respiration. Plants and animals breathe, but animals, including humans, require plants to convert the energy of the sun into oxygen. Animal life receives oxygen molecules, and—after a process called internal respiration and cellular respiration takes place inside the animal or human body—exudes carbon dioxide molecules. Does cellular respiration occur in plants and animals? Cellular respiration occurs in both plants and animals. The general equation for this is; glucose + oxygen --> Carbon dioxide + Water When oxygen is not available anaerobic r … espiration takes place, which is different for both plants and animals. Plants and animals are the two primary systems in the biosphere's cycle of life, with plants exhaling oxygen through photosynthesis and animals inhaling oxygen through the lungs and exhaling carbon dioxide as a byproduct. Plants require carbon dioxide to live and flourish with their end-product again becoming oxygen. Cellular respiration occurs in both plants and animals. The general equation for this is; glucose + oxygen --> Carbon dioxide + Water When oxygen is not available anaerobic r…espiration takes place, which is different for both plants and animals. External Respiration. External respiration is the process wherein animal life receives air from the environment and in a gaseous exchange returns the air to the environment in another form. This gaseous exchange takes place in all life forms, from insects to fish to human beings to plants, including algae and fungus. The first steps in cellular respiration reactions are called glycosis, and they take place in the absence of oxygen. This process occurs in the cell’s cytoplasm, which is a gel material contained inside the plant’s individual cells. The plant uses glucose as the energy source to carry on all its metabolic functions. It is at the cellular level that everything changes. Overall Chemical Reactions. Chemically, photosynthesis and cellular respiration are total opposites, even though both must occur for plant survival. Query: how is cellular respiration used in plants and animals",
"output": [
"Cellular respiration used in plants and animals as a means of converting stored energy into a chemical that individual cells consume."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-5a5f67e5f2d84fe0996e0e1eef59529e",
"input": "Foreign Nationals Driving in the United States. People who drive in the U.S. must have a valid driver's license. Some states require an International Driving Permit (IDP) from foreign nationals, in addition to a valid license from your own country. Contact the motor vehicle department of each state you will drive in for its requirements. IPDs can be issued to anyone over 18 who has had a valid drivers license for six months or longer, and they typically remain valid for one year or the expiration of your existing state driving license—it's important to investigate an IPD before your trip and make sure you know the requirements. To drive a car or motorcycle in New York State, you must. be at least 16 years old 1 and. have a valid New York State driver license or learner permit, or. a valid driver license or permit issued by another state or country. How to apply for a driver license if you are over 18. If you are a visitor in California over 18 and have a valid driver license from your home state or country, you may drive in this state without getting a California driver license as long as your home state license remains valid. If you become a California resident, you must get a California driver license within 10 days. A foreign drivers license is valid in most states for at least 3 months with a valid visa. I would call or email the Texas DMV for state specific rules. 3.5k Views · Answer requested by Updated February 06, 2017. Canadian travelers who plan to drive when they are outside North America can get an International Driving Permit (IDP) before they leave Canada. The IDP is used in conjunction with your provincial driver's license. Planning to rent a car and venturing out into the world on your own? Plan to obtain an International Driving Permit before you go. Why Carry an IDP? Your IDP is a valid form of identification in 150 countries worldwide and contains your name, photo and driver information. It translates your identification information into 10 languages — so it speaks the language even if you don't. Most countries highly recommend an International Driving Permit. Another country cannot issue an IDP to be used in conjunction with a US driver’s license. An IDP accompaning a US driver’s license can only be issued in the USA. The International Driving Permit (IDP), often (and incorrectly) referred to as International Driving License, is a document that, along with your valid home driver's license, allows you to legally drive a motor vehicle while abroad. Valid temporary driver’s license from the LTO 2. Official Receipt of payment. If you’ve brought the renewed local license with you abroad, your representative must present a photocopy at any AAP office for the renewal, accompanied by the original LTO certification and the OR. In what countries is the Philippine International Driving Permit honored? The Philippine International Driving Permit is honored in almost all countries that are signatories to the 1949 and 1968 United Nations Convention on Road Traffic. The contracting states are listed at the back of the PIDP license. The Texas Department of Public Safety is the administering body for driver’s licenses in Texas. I believe citizens of other states in the U.S.A. have 90 days to get a new license. I couldn’t find any information about foreign licenses, but I suspect they honor them temporarily, just as Canada honors U.S. licenses. Query: how long is an international driver license valid for",
"output": [
"A foreign drivers license is valid in most states for at least 3 months with a valid visa."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-36a352c406e3450fac8d04399789969b",
"input": "5 Of The World’s Biggest Crocodile Ever Recorded. 1 5. Gustave (17 feet) 2 4. Puento Noire Crocodile (17.8 feet) 3 3. Cassius (17.11 feet) 4 2. Brutus (18.4 feet) 5 1. Lolong (20.25 feet) Gustave (crocodile) Gustave is a large male Nile crocodile from Burundi. He is notorious for being a man-eater, and is rumored to have killed as many as 300 people from the banks of the Ruzizi River and the northern shores of Lake Tanganyika. “This remarkable creature named Lolong (in honor of a veteran Filipino crocodile hunter) is believed to be the largest crocodile ever held in prolonged captivity. Lolong was certified by the Guinness Book of World Records at 6.17 meters (20.25 feet). Since a 100-year-old crocodile should be nearly toothless (according to the documentary), he was estimated to be probably no older than 60, and likely, still growing. Gustave is also known for the three bullet scars on his body. Get ready for some nightmares. The world's largest crocodile is a monster of a reptile. Named Cassius, this nearly 18-foot-long (5.48 meters) Australian saltwater crocodile (Crocodylus porosus) was crowned the world's largest captive croc by Guinness World Records on Jan. 1, 2011. The animal lives at Marineland Melanesia on Green Island, off the coast of Cairns in Queensland. The largest crocodile in the world was a stunning best more than 20 feet long, the biggest known. And that's no croc! Related: Courageous Fisherman Killed 20-Foot-Long Crocodile That Ate His Pregnant Wife. Crocodiles are quite fascinating animals but poorly understand creatures. Since man ruled the world, 17 out of the 23 species of crocodilians are now endangered. Since Gustave has not been captured, his exact length and weight is unknown, but in 2002 it was stated that he could be easily more than 18 feet (5.5 m) long, and weigh more than 2,000 pounds (900 kg). Some estimates have put Gustave at 25 feet (7.5 m) or more in length. The documentary film also stated that since crocodiles can go several months without eating, Gustave could afford to select his prey carefully. In parts of Asia and Australia saltwater crocodiles (Crocodylus porosus) of 6 metres (20 ft) long are occasionally reported. In eastern India the Guinness Book of World Records has confirmed the existence of a 7-meter individual. 5 Of The World’s Biggest Crocodile Ever Recorded. Crocodiles are the world’s largest and perhaps most exciting reptiles. These beast are prehistoric creatures that conquered the earth over 240 million years ago. Though crocs are the largest reptile in the world they are victims of “big fish” stories and over-exaggeration. But how big are they actually? Here are 5 of the world’s biggest crocodile ever recorded. Query: how long is the biggest crocodile in the world",
"output": [
"The biggest crocodile in the world is 20.25 feet long."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d6b9845b99a643c7abcf1abe48967154",
"input": "From Shannon Airport bus to Eyre Square, Galway Bus Station. 1 h 50 min 17€. From Shannon Airport (SNN) taxi to Galway. 57 min 124€. From Shannon Airport (SNN) drive to Galway. 57 min 11€. From Shannon Airport towncar to Galway. 57 min 207€. Driving to the Airport. 1 Travelling from Dublin: Take the M7 south to Limerick, then the N18 to the Airport. 2 Travelling from Cork: Take the N20/M20 north towards Limerick, then the N18 to the Airport. 3 Travelling from Kerry: Take the N21/M20 north to Limerick, then the N18 to the Airport. Buses to/from Shannon Airport. 1 Bus Eireann – Services to Ennis, Galway, and Limerick. Onward services to the rest of the country are provided from these three locations. 2 Citylink – Services to Galway City. 1 Explore Trips from Shannon Airport (SNN) Shannon Airport SNN to Ballyvaghan Shannon Airport SNN to Rosslare Harbour Shannon Airport SNN to Armagh Shannon Airport SNN to Normandy Surrey England Shannon Airport SNN to Claregalway Shannon Airport SNN to Jungfraujoch Shannon Airport SNN to Generator Hostel Dublin Shannon Airport SNN to Malvern Shannon ... Shannon Airport. Shannon Airport (SNN) is located in southwest Ireland, about 15 miles north of Limerick, and 15 miles south of Ennis. It offers flights to Ireland, the UK, continental Europe and the USA. Buses to/from Shannon Airport. Bus Eireann – Services to Ennis, Galway, and Limerick. Onward services to the rest of the country are provided from these three locations. Citylink – Services to Galway City; Rail to/from Shannon Airport. Unfortunately, there are no direct rail services to Shannon Airport. What companies run services between Shannon Airport (SNN), Ireland and Galway, Ireland? Bus Eireann operates a bus from Shannon Airport (SNN) to Galway hourly. Tickets cost $22 and the journey takes 1 h 50 min. Shannon Airport Shannon Airport (SNN) is located in southwest Ireland, about 15 miles north of Limerick, and 15 miles south of Ennis. It offers flights to Ireland, the UK, continental Europe and the USA. How far is it from Shannon Airport (SNN) to Galway? The distance between Shannon Airport (SNN) and Galway is 65 km. The road distance is 84 km. What is the cheapest way to get from Shannon Airport (SNN) to Galway? The cheapest way to get from Shannon Airport (SNN) to Galway is to drive which costs 11€ and takes 54 mins. What is the fastest way to get from Shannon Airport (SNN) to Galway? Travelling from Dublin: Take the M7 south to Limerick, then the N18 to the Airport. Travelling from Cork: Take the N20/M20 north towards Limerick, then the N18 to the Airport. Travelling from Kerry: Take the N21/M20 north to Limerick, then the N18 to the Airport. Travelling from Galway and Ennis: Take the N18/M18 south to the Airport. Travelling from Limerick: Take the N18 north to the Airport. Shannon Airport (SNN) to Galway. 1 Bus $21. Shannon Airport 1 h 50 min - every 2 hours. 2 Taxi $120 - $150. Shannon Airport (SNN) 57 min - 52.5 miles. 3 Drive $11 - $17. Shannon Airport (SNN) 57 min - 52.5 miles. 4 Towncar $210 - $290. Shannon Airport 57 min - on demand. Query: how far is galway shannon airport",
"output": [
"The distance between Shannon Airport and Galway is 65 km."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f05750c3d01c4da29fa1ab345b19cd5b",
"input": "However, the Earth has been hit by many other large asteroids in the past and have barely registered as life destroyers. In order for an Asteroid to wipe out all life on Earth, it would need to be 60 miles wide according to scientists. Cold Extermination: One of Greatest Mass Extinctions Was Due to an Ice Age and Not to Earth's Warming. 1 Mar. 6, 2017 — The Earth has known several mass extinctions over the course of its history. 2 Aug. 24, 2016 — Extreme global warming 252 million years ago caused a severe mass extinction of life on Earth. Observations about human extinction. Milankovitch cycles describe the way that the earth moves and how the climatic changes vary depending on where the earth is in space. The orbital shape of the earth causes changes every 100,000 years. The axial tilt of the earth wobbles and alters the climate every 41 thousand years. A notable example is Mir, which hosted several long-duration missions of a year or more — including the longest single spaceflight duration of any human to date, 437 days, by Valeri Polyakov in 1994-95. The International Space Station launched its first piece Nov. 20, 1998 and has been continuously occupied by humans since Oct. 31, 2000. If you define “human” as our own species, H. sapiens, then about 180,000 to 200,000 years ago. If you define “human” as the entire genus Homo, then about 2.0 - 2.5 million years ago. If you define “human” as the entire hominid line from the divergence with the Chimpanzee line, then about 6.0–7.0 million years ago. The Universe is 13.7B years old. The Earth has not existed since the moment the Universe was created and is about 4.5B years old and is made out the debris of two previous generation of stars. Life on Earth started shortly after the temperatures cooled down, about 3.7B years ago. Up until 600M years ago, life was predominantly single-celled organisms. From 600M years until now, the variety of life that we see evolved. Humans started to separate from the rest of the great apes about 7M years ago and we became modern humans 200k years ago. Even though evolution is taking place all around us, for many species the process operates so slowly that it is not observable except over thousands or hundreds of thousands of years -- much too long to witness in a human lifetime. Humans will NOT survive another 1,000 years on Earth, says Stephen Hawking: Physicist warns we must 'escape beyond our fragile planet'. Humans will not survive another 1,000 years on 'fragile' Earth, according to Professor Stephen Hawking. The renowned theoretical physicist believes that life on Earth is at an ever-increasing risk of being wiped out by a disaster, such as the increasing threat of artificial intelligence. Most of Earth's life as a habitable planet is over, according to researchers' calculations, which predict that in as little as 1.75 billion years, the planet's orbit will enter a hot zone that will scorch away its oceans. The report, which will be unveiled in Geneva, warns that the wasteful lifestyles of the rich nations are mainly responsible for the exploitation and depletion of natural wealth. Human consumption has doubled over the last 30 years and continues to accelerate by 1.5 per cent a year. Now WWF wants world leaders to use its findings to agree on specific actions to curb the population's impact on the planet. Query: how long will human life on earth last",
"output": [
"Humans will not survive another 1,000 years on 'fragile' Earth, according to Professor Stephen Hawking."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a9a0ac45f0b647db94d6904bb5cc3261",
"input": "Nasal Decongestant is a cough & cold medication. Uses: Nasal Decongestant is approved for Allergy, Nasal Congestion, Common Cold, Cough, Congestion, Flu, Runny Nose and Sneezing and is mostly mentioned together with these indications. Hi, not saying you have this but I have Eustachian tube dysfunction Which I am told goes hand in hand with colds, it can cause ear ringing. My doctor told me to try nasal... Comment Helpful? He, after examining me, told that I have a Eustachian Tube Dysfunction (that is, my eustachian tubes are blocked) due to the flu. He told me that blocked eustachian tubes can increase T. He... Comment Helpful? On EarPopper’s Studies page, they reference 5 different clinical studies showing that the device can help reduce symptoms related to Eustachian Tube Dysfunction, although there’s no way to know how Eustachi’s performance will compare to EarPopper, or if it will provide you the same level of relief. What Are Eustachian Tubes? According to WebMD, “The Eustachian tubes connect the middle ears to the back of the throat. The tubes help the ears drain fluid. They also keep air pressure in the ears at the right level. When you swallow or yawn, the tubes open briefly to let air in to make the pressure in the middle ears equal to the pressure outside of the ears. Sometimes fluid or negative pressure gets stuck in the middle ear. The pressure outside the ear gets too high. This causes ear pain and sometimes trouble hearing,” resulting in something known as Eustachian Tube Dysfunction. Eustachian tube dysfunction happens when the tube between the middle ear and the back of the nose (the Eustachian tube) doesn't work properly. This means that the pressure in your ear can't go back to normal. The result is muffled hearing and a popping or crackling noise in one or both ears. But it is important to note that these other symptoms happen alongside muffled hearing. Eustachian tube dysfunction does not cause dizziness or tinnitus alone. One or both ears may be affected. Symptoms can last from a few hours to several weeks or more. It depends on the cause. Eustachi is an “As Seen on TV” device that uses forced air to help condition your Eustachian tube system, and to relieve middle ear pressure and discomfort. Eustachi is an “As Seen on TV” device that uses forced air to help condition your Eustachian tube system, and to relieve middle ear pressure and discomfort. January 11, 2015 | patient.co.uk. The project aimed ...Eustachian tube dysfunction is a poorly defined condition. ...Consensus on diagnostic criteria for Eustachian tube dysfunction is required to inform inclusion criteria of future trials.. Also, try doing the following: take a breath in. Then breathe out gently with your mouth closed and pinching your nose (the Valsalva manoeuvre). In this way you are gently pushing air into the Eustachian tube. If you do this you may feel your ears go 'pop' as air is forced into the middle ear. This sometimes eases the problem. Query: how does the eustachian tube work",
"output": [
"The Eustachian tubes connect the middle ears to the back of the throat. The tubes help the ears drain fluid. They also keep air pressure in the ears at the right level. When you swallow or yawn, the tubes open briefly to let air in to make the pressure in the middle ears equal to the pressure outside of the ears."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a8addefc06fe4a87a807687317f31d4f",
"input": "The energy imbalance will continue to grow, and surface temperatures will continue to rise. 1 References. 2 Cahalan, R. (n.d.) Solar and Earth Radiation. 3 Hansen, J., Nazarenko, L., Ruedy, R., Sato, M., Willis, J., Del Genio, A., Koch, D., Lacis, A., Lo, K., Menon, S., Novakov, T., Perlwitz, J., Russell, G., Schmidt, G.A., and Tausnev, N. (2005). In addition to the induced changes in water vapor content there are three other (direct) sources of anthropogenic water vapor: 1 1. Evaporation and transpiration losses from farming and the watering of lawns and landscapes. 2 2. Evaporation losses from canals and artificial lakes including the reservoirs behind dams. The absorption of most of the outgoing thermal radiation by water vapor creates most of Earth's natural greenhouse effect - an effect that is now being increased by human pollution. Without the atmospheric water vapor Earth's surface would be, on average, about 31°C (55°F) colder than it is now and the differences in temperature between high and low altitudes and between the poles and equator would be smaller. Climate change intensifies this cycle because as air temperatures increase, more water evaporates into the air. Warmer air can hold more water vapor, which can lead to more intense rainstorms, causing major problems like extreme flooding in coastal communities around the world. <> Water vapour is the most abundant greenhouse gas in the atmosphere, yet other greenhouse gases (such as carbon dioxide and methane) are often portrayed as the main drivers of climate change. If we did not have water vapor and the trace gases the earth would be much colder because the oxygen, nitrogen, and argon would not prevent the loss of infrared to space. http://en.wikiped...of_Earth Water vapor is the primary greenhouse gas in the atmosphere but it is limited in altitude (due to condensation) and variable (due to the ability to condense with drops in temperature or changes in pressure). Water vapor is another greenhouse gas that keeps heat from the sun trapped in the Earth’s atmosphere and helps maintain a temperature at which life can flourish on our planet. However, deforestation also affects the amount of this in the air. Air is a mixture of gases, which includes nitrogen, oxygen, carbon dioxide and water vapor (water in its gas form). Humidity refers to the amount of water vapor in air. All air contains at least some water vapor, but the amount of water vapor changes a lot from place to place and from time to time. Studies have shown that deforestation has contributed to the amount of water vapor in the air and, over just a few years, the amount of water vapor present has increased by four percent. Besides increasing the temperature of the Earth’s surface and atmosphere, this also has knock-on effects for weather patterns. Water Cycle Water Vapor is the most abundant greenhouse gas in the atmosphere […] However, changes in its conentration is also considered to be a result of climate feedbacks related to the warming of the atmosphere rather than a direct result of industrialization. Query: how does water vapor affect climate",
"output": [
"Water vapor is another greenhouse gas that keeps heat from the sun trapped in the Earth’s atmosphere and helps maintain a temperature at which life can flourish on our planet. However, deforestation also affects the amount of this in the air."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8945d3ca1471407a8873062930be96cb",
"input": "How does pressure and temperature affect the solubility of a solid in a liquid? Both temperature and pressure tend to increase solubility of solids. (increasing temp causes a decrease in solubility for gases.) How does temperature of solvent or solution affect the solubility of gases and dissolved solids? The higher the temperature of a solvent the easier a solute will siolve into the substance. For example, water and sugar. Pressure is directly proportional to solubility; an increase in pressure also increases solubility. Conversely, a decrease in pressure also reduces solubility. In an equilibrium state, solubility pertains to the quantitative measurement of the maximum amount of solute that can be dissolved in a particular amount of solvent. The solubility of solids in water increases as the temperature goes up and decreases as the temperature goes down. That means as the water gets hotter, you can dissolve mo…re sugar, salt, etc. in it. The cooler water gets, the less you an dissolve in it. How does temperature affect the solubility of solids in liquid? The warmer a liquid is, right up to its boiling point, the better solids dissolve. Put another way, you can generally dissolve more of a solid in a warm/hot liquid than in a c … ool/cold liquid. The solubility of a material is its concentration in a solution that cannot further dissolve an additional amount of solute.Several factors affect solubility, including solute and solvent interactions, common -ion effect, pressure and temperature. Pressure does not significantly influence the solubility of solids and liquids. How does temperature affect the rate of dissolving? A: Whether the solute is a solid or gas, its solubility in water is dependent on temperature such that an increase in temperature can make solids more soluble... Full Answer > Filed Under: Several factors affect solubility, including solute and solvent interactions, common -ion effect, pressure and temperature. Pressure does not significantly influence the solubility of solids and liquids. Instead, its effects only become significant on the solubility of gaseous substances. The relationship between pressure and solubility can be summarized by combining Le Chatelier's principle and Henry's Law. The solubility of solids in water increases as the temperature goes up and decreases as the temperature goes down. That means as the water gets hotter, you can dissolve mo … re sugar, salt, etc. in it. Temperature is directly proportional to the solubility of solids. An increase in temperature will make solids dissolve faster in a solvent. as tempressure decrease and pressure increase the solubility of gases in water increase. Increasing the temperature the solubility of solids is increasing. The temperature doesn't determine whether a compound is soluble or not. For that you need to look at… a list of solubility rules. Temperature however, speeds up the time it takes to dissolve already soluble compounds. Query: how does temperature affect the solubility of solids",
"output": [
"The solubility of solids in water increases as the temperature goes up and decreases as the temperature goes down."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-685c278c7c0d4e948f87eb97c6715791",
"input": "In the United States, under current patent law, the term of patent, provided that maintenance fees are paid on time, is 20 years from the filing date of the earliest U.S. or international application to which priority is claimed (excluding provisional applications). For applications filed before June 8, 1995 and for patents that were still in force on June 8, 1995, the patent term is either 17 years from the issue date or 20 years from the filing date of the earliest U.S. or international (PCT) application to which priority is claimed (excluding provisional applications), the longer term applying. It's the first step before a patent application! First, you learn how patentable your invention may be. If it's not very patentable, don't waste time and money on a patent app. Second, it may help you increase your patentability. By seeing what is similar, you can improve your invention around other existing invention and increase patentability. Calculation: 1 Type A delay= Date of issuance of office Action -(Date of receipt of applicant response + 4 Months/14 Months) 2 Type B delay=Date of issue of Patent/Date of filing of first RCE - (Date of filing of application + 3 years) 3 Total PTA =Type A+Type B + Type C - Applicant Delay -overlapping delays. Design patents have a shorter term than utility patents. Design patents filed on or after May 13, 2015 have a term of 15 years from issuance. Design patents filed prior to May 13, 2015 have a term of 14 years from issuance. In the United States, under current patent law, the term of patent, provided that maintenance fees are paid on time, are: 1 For applications filed on or after June 8, 1995, the patent term is 20 years from the filing date of the earliest U.S. or international (PCT) application to which priority is claimed (excluding provisional applications). P2. 1 Patent Pending Status for 12 Months. 2 Professional Technical Descriptions. See Description Samples. 3 Professional Patent Drawings. See Drawing Samples. 4 Phone call with an engineer to discuss details. The original patent term under the 1790 Patent Act was decided individually for each patent, but not exceeding fourteen years. The 1836 Patent Act (5 Stat. 117, 119, 5) provided (in addition to the fourteen-year term) an extension for the term of seven years from and after the expiration of the first term in certain circumstances. Get PROFESSIONAL. 1 Patent Pending Status for 12 Months. 2 Professional Technical Descriptions. See Description Samples. 3 Professional Patent Drawings. See Drawing Samples. 4 Phone call with an engineer to discuss details. Get PROFESSIONAL. 1 Patent Pending Status for 12 Months. 2 Professional Technical Descriptions. 3 Professional Patent Drawings. 4 Phone call with an engineer to discuss details. Query: how long is us patent good for",
"output": [
"In the United States, patent is good for 20 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-dc775ea849af45fa858176a46d9a4858",
"input": "The Compelling Case for Teller CapTure executive summary Teller Capture is the process of capturing checks and related items on a scanner at the teller window in the branch of a Financial Institution (FI). Any errors encountered during capture are corrected by the teller and the data is then sent electronically to Introducing HORIZON Teller Capture •Add-on component to HORIZON Teller –Uses capture devices to scan checks and tickets at the teller line –Integrates scanned item amounts with HORIZON Teller balancing –Creates virtual tickets to fully balance transactions •Streamlined transaction processing and delivery to Item Processing Teller Capture for Improving the Branch Experience. Statistics show that bank networks in the U.S. are shrinking, with 2,267 branches closing in 2012 alone, according to SNL Financial. The closures can primarily be attributed to technology advancements including mobile and online banking, as well as the increasing use of image-enabled ATMs. One of the Largest Financial Institution Chooses UniLink for Front Counter Teller Capture Implementation One of Fiservs largest customers choose to partner with UniLink for Front Counter Teller Capture.... A teller line that can help members complete transactions quickly is very important to us...Since Numerica installed Epson's TM‑S9000, we have been able to serve our members quickly, so that they can get back to doing the things that are important to them, whether that's work or play. System downtime is a serious consideration for any member-facing technology as most teller capture solutions are dependent on core processor uptime. Select a teller capture solution that can operate independently of the core in order to minimize service disruptions and to maintain member service levels. Feature 5: Portability Benefits. 1 Quick and Convenient Processing. 2 Reduction of losses from returned checks due to faster return timeframes. 3 Check availability will increase over paper deposits. 4 Eliminate back-office scanning and check preparation. 5 Extensive research capabilities and error detection. Pros: 1 Back-office savings from teller capture are greater since all of the work is balanced by the teller rather than in the back office. One large east coast bank with more than 200 branches says it saves 20 minutes per day per teller with teller capture, as well as 15 minutes per day per branch at close-out time. A community bank in Arkansas recently teamed with UniLink for a front counter (teller) capture hardw... more information. 30-Branch Fiserv User in Louisiana Upgrades to Front Counter Capture with UniLink. A 30-branch bank in Louisiana recently converted to front counter capture with UniLink.... Teller Image Capture Teller capture is the process of capturing checks and related items on a scanner at the teller window in the branch of a Financial Institution (FI). Any errors encountered during capture are corrected by the teller and the data is then sent electronically to a teller system and other upstream processing systems of the FI. Query: how does teller capture work",
"output": [
"Teller capture is the process of capturing checks and related items on a scanner at the teller window in the branch of a Financial Institution (FI). Any errors encountered during capture are corrected by the teller and the data is then sent electronically to a teller system and other upstream processing systems of the FI."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d965fde967f24a06945a505216f9f439",
"input": "More accurate dating at Neanderthal sites in recent years has generally pushed back the 30,000-year date for Neanderthal extinction, says paleontologist Katerina Harvati of Germany's University of Tuebingen, making the new study results look more reasonable. Shanidar Cave, which dates to sixty to eighty thousand years ago, is a Neanderthal site in modern-day Iraq. The excavations of this site are important when considering the question of whether Neanderthals buried their dead12. Skhul Cave, in Israel, is a site that was inhabited by AMH during the Middle Pleistocene6. The result is that mtDNA is passed on only along the maternal line. This means that all of the mtDNA in the cells of a person's body are copies of his or her mother's mtDNA, and all of the mother's mtDNA is a copy of her mother's, and so on. No matter how far back you go, mtDNA is always inherited only from the mother. If you went back six generations in your own family tree, you'd see that your nuclear DNA is inherited from 32 men and 32 women. Your mtDNA, on the other hand, would have come from only one of those 32 women. Moreover, the researchers determined that the common ancestor to Neanderthals and modern Homo sapiens lived as long as 500,000 years ago, well before the most recent common mtDNA ancestor of modern humans. This suggests (though it does not prove) that Neanderthals went extinct without contributing to the gene pool of any modern humans. Final note The Neanderthal genes that turn up in people today are from this older era, after the two species were in contact but well before Neanderthal extinction. The intermingling seen in the new study took place after that early interbreeding era, Higham says. Although we know far more about Neanderthals than we did when they were first discovered (or even fifty years ago),just as many questions remain. As the body of research on the subject of Neanderthals grows, however, the picture will only get clearer. Shanidar Cave, which dates to sixty to eighty thousand years ago, is a Neanderthal site in modern-day Iraq. The excavations of this site are important when considering the question of whether Neanderthals buried their dead 12. New fossil dates show our ancient cousins disappeared 40,000 years ago. View Images A Neanderthal jawbone from Spain was among those dated for a new study that pushes back the date for the Neanderthals' demise. Photograph by Thomas Higham, University of Oxford PUBLISHED August 20, 2014 This, in fact, has been done, with mtDNA from the bones of Neanderthals. Comparing mtDNA of these Neanderthals to mtDNA of living people from various continents, researchers have found that the Neanderthals' mtDNA is not more closely related to that of people from any one continent over another. Here is a series of short summaries of some of the more important Neanderthal sites, some of which have already been discussed in this section. 1 Atapuerca is a large site in Spain with several different areas. The Sima de los Huesos is notable for containing the well-preserved skeletons of various ages. Query: how far back do neanderthals date",
"output": [
"Neanderthals and modern Homo sapiens lived as long as 500,000 years ago."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-83ab363e60b24834bab137b556779dc6",
"input": "Voice Training Exercise | Easy steps to improve the sound of your voice - Duration: 9:11. Voiceover Masterclass 301,862 views How The Singing Voice Works - How Phonation Works - Duration: 1:44. Robert Lunte 14,781 views Part of a longer interview with Dr. Shekim on voice disorders. Lana Shekim, Ph.D., program director for the NIH/NIDCD Voice and Speech Program, uses a diagram to explain how the human voice is produced. Where Does Your Voice Come From? Phonation and Glottal States - Duration: 8:55. The Ling Space 7,456 views The Larynx. The voice box (or larynx) rests in the neck and is made of four basic components: the skeleton, “intrinsic muscles” (which move the vocal cords, among other things), “extrinsic muscles” (which adjust the position of the larynx in the neck), and mucosa. What Does YOUR VOICE Sound Like To Others? - Duration: 4:01. Chris Beatty 6,029,371 views How Voice Is Produced Lana Shekim, Ph.D., program director for the NIH/NIDCD Voice and Speech Program, uses a diagram to explain how the human voice is produced. Part of a longer interview with Dr. Shekim on voice disorders. This page last reviewed on April 20, 2015. T he voice box (or larynx) rests in the neck and is made of four basic components: the skeleton, “intrinsic muscles” (which move the vocal cords, among other things), “extrinsic muscles” (which adjust the position of the larynx in the neck), and mucosa. Find Your Chest Voice - Sing in a Natural Chest Singing Voice - Felicia Ricci - Duration: 9:34. Felicia Ricci 495,711 views Sound is actually produced by the pressure changes created when small jets of air pass through moving vocal cords. This is why it can be helpful to think of breath control as the steam engine that makes the machinery of singing function.) A vocal fold. The picture above is a microscopic illustration of the vocal cords. Query: how is your voice produced",
"output": [
"A voice or a sound is actually produced by the pressure changes created when small jets of air pass through moving vocal cords."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-481921a7c4f842aca0b9ba6ee844b958",
"input": "Function. The Na + /Ca 2+ exchanger does not bind very tightly to Ca 2+ (has a low affinity), but it can transport the ions rapidly (has a high capacity), transporting up to five thousand Ca 2+ ions per second. Active transport requires chemical energy because it is the movement of biochemicals from areas of lower concentration to areas of higher concentration. Passive transport moves biochemicals from areas of high concentration to areas of low concentration; so it does not require energy. What functions do carrier proteins perform in active transport? Carrier proteins allow molecule to bind to them; they change their shape to transport material across the cell membrane. The sodium-potassium pump is integral in maintaining the acid-base balance as well as in healthy kidney function. Energy is derived from pumping sodium outside the cell, where it becomes concentrated, wanting to push its way back in. This energy is used to remove acid from the body. The sodium-potassium pump also functions to maintain the electrical charge within the cell. This is particularly important to muscle and nerve cells. During nerve transmission and muscle contraction, potassium exits the cell and sodium enters, resulting in a change in electrical charge that causes a nerve impulse or muscle contraction. A: The sodium-potassium pump is an essential cellular membrane protein that functions by pumping out three sodium ions and taking in two potassium ions. This mechanism preserves the electrochemical gradient formed from the varying concentrations of sodium and potassium ions within the cell and its exterior. Continue Reading When an enzyme in the pump, called sodium-potassium-ATPase, splits the phosphate from the ADP, the energy released powers the transport action of the pump. Passive transport: membrane channels. The sodium-potassium pump sets the membrane potential of the neuron by keeping the concentrations of Na + and K + at constant Sodium-potassium pump is pivotal to body's function. The story of the sodium-potassium pump has strong ties to Denmark. In 1997, the Danish scientist Jens Chr. Skou received the Nobel Prize in Chemistry for his discovery, and over the years, research on the pump has remained a strong focus area at Aarhus University. Listed below are several cellular and pharmaceutical conditions in which this happens. 1 The internal [Na+] is higher than usual (like it is when digitalis glycoside medications block the Na+/K+ -ATPase pump.) 2 The Sarcoplasmic Reticulum release of Ca2+ is inhibited. 3 Other Ca2+ influx channels are inhibited. The sodium-potassium pump uses active transport to move molecules from a high concentration to a low concentration. The sodium-potassium pump moves sodium ions out of and potassium ions into the cell. This pump is powered by ATP. For each ATP that is broken down, 3 sodium ions move out and 2 potassium ions move in. In more detail: Sodium ions bind to the pump and a phosphate group from ATP attaches to the pump, causing it to change its shape. In this new shape, the pump releases the three sodium ions and now binds two potassium ions. Once the potassium ions are bound to the pump, the phosphate group detaches. The sodium-potassium pump is a P-type ATPase sharing similarities with other P-type ATPases, notably the calcium-ATPase in the sarcoplasmic reticulum and the hydrogen-potassium ATPase in gastric cells (2). Quick Answer. The sodium-potassium pump is an essential cellular membrane protein that functions by pumping out three sodium ions and taking in two potassium ions. This mechanism preserves the electrochemical gradient formed from the varying concentrations of sodium and potassium ions within the cell and its exterior. Query: how does the sodium potassium pump function",
"output": [
"The sodium potassium pump functions by pumping out three sodium ions and taking in two potassium ions."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-14e13e9d7efa4c6399ba97254f78a944",
"input": "On the basis of the above-mentioned reasons, a pregnancy test can show a false positive result. The hormone HCG is the reason of everything. Its level goes down slowly, consequently, the remnants of the hormone are still present in the body sometimes for months after miscarriage. Other Causes of Two Strips After Miscarriage. Woman adheres to a diet. Pregnancy after miscarriage: What you need to know. Pregnancy after miscarriage can be stressful and confusing. When is the best time to get pregnant? What are the odds of miscarrying again? Get the facts about pregnancy after miscarriage. By Mayo Clinic Staff 120 comments. 1 I had an abortion two weeks ago. I don’t have any symptoms of pregnancy. 2 Thanks a lot, because yesterday I went again for the ultra sound of which they said the scan shows no pregnancy and the doctor put in the fingers inside my vagina, she said the cervix is closed I have no blood so she doesn’t see any pregnancy. In some cases, the hCG levels can return to the normal level within just a few days after a miscarriage. In some other cases, the hCG levels may take a few weeks to return to the normal level after a miscarriage. Here are a few things that will help you understand the changes better: Not true all the time. I had a miscarriage, and 2 weeks later ovulated and became pregnant. I read that your HCG levels have to go back down to 0 for you to even ovulate. The doctors thought I was pregnant due to remnants too, but had my blood taken and at 3 weeks pregnant, they were over 250. positive pregnancy tests after miscarriage. I think I know the answers to this really but I need a bit of hand-holding. Last week I was 6 weeks pregnant but then had a lot of bleeding and pain. GP said miscarriage, and that I should do another pregnancy test this week to confirm. I asked him what to do if it was positive, and he said 'well I really think it will be negative'. Well, it was a strong positive. If you have stopped bleeding chances are your hcg level is returning to normal. If you had normal periods before, you could probably expect to ovulate 2 - 3 weeks after the miscarriage, and a period about 5 weeks after. Good luck! The bleeding slowed and then came back heavy again. After bleeding for two weeks straight, it lightened. Now I think it is finally over. I took another P.T. tonight to see if the HCG was finally out. It was faintly positive...so i will have to wait a bit longer. How the miscarriage occurred, such as spontaneous miscarriage or medical procedure, can also affect how fast hCG levels decrease. In general, hCG levels return to normal by 4 to 6 weeks after a miscarriage, but they may occur sooner during the very early stages of pregnancy. Placental Causes of High hCG After a miscarriage, hCG levels can sometimes remain elevated. It depends: How long for hcg to go down depends on how high it was and whether the miscarriage is complete or not. Pregnancy test is not a good way to know, since it can remain positive for many weeks after a miscarriage. ...Read more Query: how long is hcg positive after miscarriage",
"output": [
"It takes 4 to 6 weeks for HCG levels return to normal after miscarriage."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3bba459bcf914f73804ecc832d51e2b6",
"input": "Storing natural peanut butter in the fridge means a rock-hard product, but many natural peanut butters instruct us to refrigerate on the label. What’s the deal? Here’s the short answer: no, you don’t have to refrigerate. Natural peanut butter keeps just fine in a cool, dark place like the pantry for at least a month ― which is more than enough time for many peanut butter lovers to consume it. But if you don’t eat this nutty spread that quickly, the fridge will keep it fresher longer. If you do refrigerate your natural peanut butter, be sure to stir it before doing so ― once it’s cold, it can be hard to stir the oil back into the peanut butter. But once that’s done, a jar will easily keep in the fridge for six months. Do not purchase bulging cans, says USDA. But what about our favorite foods—peanut butter, peanuts and peanut products? Peanut butter’s shelf life may depend on the way you store it. Follow the guide above and remember to store peanuts in airtight containers. An open jar of peanut butter stays fresh up to three months in the pantry. After that, it’s recommended to store the peanut butter in the fridge (where it can maintain its quality for another 3-4 months). If you don’t refrigerate, oil separation can occur. Here’s a run-down. Refrigerated peanut butter won’t spread that easily, but it prevents oil separation and helps retain the flavor. Image used under Creative Commons from Bobbi Bowers If you’re making peanut butter yourself and you’re not using any stabilizers or hydrogenated fat, your peanut butter should last a few months, possibly half a year. Because you’re not using any stabilizers, it’s quite natural that oil will separate – that’s not harmful to the sandwich spread, you can just stir contents of the jar and you’re ready to use it. Peanut Butter, unopened 6-9 months Refrigeration not needed. Peanut Butter, opened 2-3 months Lasts 6 -9 months in refrigerator. Peanuts: Bagged, in the shell or out 1-2 months Lasts 4-6 months in refrigerator. Peanuts: in cans or jars, unopened 2 years. Peanut Flour, unopened 1 year. The all natural peanut butter does not have sugar or hydrogenated oil in it. Therefore the fat will come to the top and you have to stir it. If you refrigerate it, it will stay mixed longer and you don’t have to stir it. I’ve been doing this for about 50 years now. The answer probably depends on how long it takes you to consume the peanut butter once you have opened it. In our household we never refrigerate our peanut butter. (It is most often from Trader Joe's, with the only ingredient listed being dry roasted peanuts.) An open jar of peanut butter in our household typically gets consumed within 6 weeks' time, and we have never had any problems with the peanut butter going bad. Yes, if you don't refrigerate your peanut butter, it will go rancid more quickly than if you had refrigerated it. But it will likely take a number of weeks or possibly a couple of months before that occurs. I suspect that peanut butter made with raw peanuts rather than roasted ones spoils more quickly. Refrigerated peanut butter won’t spread that easily, but it prevents oil separation and helps retain the flavor. Image used under Creative Commons from Bobbi Bowers. If you’re making peanut butter yourself and you’re not using any stabilizers or hydrogenated fat, your peanut butter should last a few months, possibly half a year. If you’re a peanut butter fan, you’d definitely benefit from knowing how long does peanut butter last, how to tell if it is bad and similar issues. How long does peanut butter last? As long as your peanut butter jar is still unopened, it can be stored for at least one and a half years, or more, provided you store it in appropriate conditions. What are the appropriate conditions to store peanut butter? Query: how long does peanut butter stay good refrigerated",
"output": [
"Peanut Butter, unopened 6-9 months Refrigeration."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-03383ca0bff242fbba6e9798b2580d87",
"input": "Remove the pork chops from the bag and throw away the bag. Grill over direct medium heat for about eight to 10 minutes. Turn the meat at least once halfway through the cooking. Remove the pork chops once the temperature reaches at least 150 degree and let the meat rest for three to five minutes before serving. Ingredients: 1 4 center cut. 2 bone-in pork chops. 3 ¼ cup kosher salt. 4 4 cups water. 5 Salt and pepper to taste. 6 Glaze or marinade (optional) Pork chops do not come in a standard size. It is the thickness, not the weight, that makes the difference when grilling. For a half-inch-thick pork chop, it will take about five to seven minutes on direct high heat. High heat is around 450 degrees Fahrenheit on the grill. A three-quarters-inch thick pork chop will take around six to eight minutes on high heat. A 1-inch pork chop will cook in about eight to 10 minutes on direct medium heat. Medium heat on a grill is between 350 and 450 degrees. For a pork chop that is 1¼ to 1½ inches thick, sear each side for a total of six minutes on high heat, then finish grilling over medium heat for another four to six minutes. For sugar-based glazes, apply it about 10 minutes prior to removing the pork chops from the grill to prevent the glaze from burning onto the chops. Apply the glaze to one side of the chops, close the lid for five minutes to let it bake on, then open the lid, turn the chops, and repeat the process. 7. Check for doneness. Using a digital meat thermometer, insert the tip into the thickest part of the pork chop, but not touching the bone. For grilling pork chops, you want to set up a two-zone, medium-hot fire. Fire up a full chimney of Kingsford ® Charcoal, or light a pile of about 100 briquets. With its higher top temperature and consistent burn, Kingsford Professional is perfect for chops. How do you cook pork chops on a griddle, and for how long should I cook them? How long should a pork chop cook in the oven? How long do pork chops take to bake in the oven at 400 degrees? To avoid drying the chops while grilling, either marinate or brine them (use a basic brine solution of 1/4 cup salt to four cups of water; lay the pork chops in a single layer in a shallow dish and pour the brine over the top) for two hours in the refrigerator. Sear the chops using high heat. Place the pork chops on the hottest part of the grate, directly above the coals. Sear all the chops for about three minutes per side, turning only once, until they develop a brown crust. If the grill flares up, temporarily move the chops away from the coals until the flames die down. You’ll never grill another chewy, dry pork chop if you follow this simple seven-step method using Kingsford® Charcoal. 1 1. Fire up the grill. 2 2. Prep the pork chops. 3 3. Sear the chops using high heat. 4 4. Move and cover. 5 5. Add a bit of smoke flavor. 6 6. Apply marinade or glaze (optional). 7 7. Check for doneness. Depends on how thick they are. A 2 to 2 1/2 lb bone-in pork chop will take 8-10 minutes to pan fry over medium high heat...turning it every minute or so for even cooking and to get a nice golden brown. The internal temp should be 145 degrees F after resting for 5 minutes. Query: how long does it take cook pork chops",
"output": [
"A 1-inch pork chop will cook in about eight to 10 minutes on direct medium heat."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-cad99174e1a94cd3acbda0151b74423d",
"input": "How to Pronounce UK Place Names - Anglophenia Ep 23 - Duration: 4:28. Anglophenia 1,970,052 views how do you pronounce rose-root | how do you pronounce rose-tinged | how do you pronounce rose-tinted | how do you pronounce roseate | how do you pronounce roseau | how do you pronounce rosebay | how do you pronounce rosebay willowherb | how do you pronounce rosebud How to Pronounce Dupuytren's Contracture - Duration: 0:16. Emma Saying 55,087 views Roseate spoonbill is a relatively long word / phrase with multiple syllables. It could be especially difficult to pronounce and use given that it has at least one diphthong and consonant group. We are building a video-based pronunciation dictionary and usage API to help you learn how to pronounce and use roseate spoonbill, along with tens of thousands of other English words and phrases. Our service extends existing pronunciation dictionaries by adding visual and situational context. Learn how to say words in English correctly with Emma Saying free pronunciation tutorials. Over 140,000 words were already uploaded... Check them out! Visit ... How do you say Roseate in English? Pronunciation of Roseate. How To Pronounce is the largest audio directory which contains audio like names, words, places, medical terminology, animals names, etc., or any hard words in English, Portuguese, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Swedish and other languages using our pronunciation dictionary. You can browse all these data for free. How do you pronounce names like Rachidy in english? Most names exist in many different languages and can have different pronunciations depending on said language. We try to teach you the correct way on how to pronounce the name Rachidy in English. This means that you need to know the 26 letter English alphabet and how to phonetically say them. Once you know how a single letter should sound, pronouncing a full name becomes much easier. When saying a name it is important to find where the emphasis is located. Some letters might be silent while others can be very loud. Pronunciation of Roseate in English. Our web site serves multilingual pronunciation dictionaries. We are providing audio Pronunciation guide to learn how to pronounce English words correctly with multilingual talking dictionary, Here just enter your words then get digital mp3 audio in a few seconds. Our service is 100% free to use. Here I will teach you how to pronounce 'apathetic' with Zira.mp4 - Duration: 0:15. Pronounce words 1,680 views How to pronounce roseate spoonbill in English Español: Pronunciación de roseate spoonbill en Inglés con vídeo · Italiano: Pronuncia di roseate spoonbill in inglese con video Português: Pronúncia de roseate spoonbill em inglês com vídeo · Français: Prononciation de roseate spoonbill en anglais avec la vidéo Query: how do you pronounce roseate",
"output": [
"Roseate pronounced as a rose-root."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c6a8d618a58a40c7b7eb3c5cfadba6fd",
"input": "Dominating the skyline of Tehran’s western suburbs, Milad Tower is 435m high, including 120m of antenna, making it, in 2017, the world’s sixth-tallest free-stan… Milad Tower is a telecommunications tower in Tehran, Tehran, Iran. View a detailed profile of the structure 131169 including further data and descriptions in the Emporis database. ok We use cookies on our website to allow you the best possible service. The Milad Tower was the 4th tallest free-standing telecommunication tower in the world when it was completed. The tower features a revolving restaurant at 276 metres (905 feet) along with multiple observation decks. The tower comprises a lobby, concrete shaft, 12-storey telecommunications, dining and observation structure, and a metal mast. The building features an Islamic Revolution museum. Milad Tower. Milad Tower (Persian: برج میلاد Borj e Milād), also known as the Tehran Tower (برج تهران Borj e Tehrān), is a multi-purpose tower in Tehran, Iran. It is the sixth-tallest tower and the 24th-tallest freestanding structure in the world. Milad Tower, with its height of 435 m (1,427 ft), is the tallest in Iran, the sixth tallest telecommunication tower in the world. Milad Tower consists of five main parts: foundation, transition (lobby) structure, shaft, head structure and antenna mast. The lobby structure consists of six floors. Milad Tower (Persian: Borj-e Milād), also known as Tehran Tower (Persian: Borj-e Tehrān), is a multi-purpose Iranian concrete tower built in 2007 in between the Shahrak-e Gharb and Gisha districts of Tehran. It stands at 435 m (1,427 ft) from base to the tip of the antenna. Milad Tower is the sixth tallest tower in the world after the Tokyo Skytree, Canton Tower in Guangzhou, CN Tower in Toronto, Ostankino Tower in Moscow, the Oriental Pearl Tower in Shanghai. It is also the 17th tallest freestanding structure in the world. Milad Tower is a part of The Tehran International Trade and Convention Centre. The project includes the Milad telecommunication tower offering restaurants at the top with panoramic views of Tehran, a five-star hotel, a convention centre, a world trade centre, and an IT park. At the base of the tower is the separate Tehran Milad Tower International Convention Centre, where concerts are occasionally held. In 2012, Zaha Hadid won the design competition for the second phase of the site, a plan which would involve a couple more lower-rise towers. So far, though, construction is yet to commence. Tehran Attractions. Milad Tower. Dominating the skyline of Tehran’s western suburbs, Milad Tower is 435m high, including 120m of antenna, making it, in 2017, the world’s sixth-tallest free-standing tower. Milad Tower (Persian: برج میلاد Borj e Milād), also known as the Tehran Tower (برج تهران Borj e Tehrān),[3] is a multi-purpose tower in Tehran, Iran. Query: how is milad tower",
"output": [
"Milad Tower is 435 meters tall."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8a70be42895d481c8a3df92adffb5aaa",
"input": "Answers.com ® WikiAnswers ® Categories History, Politics & Society History History of Europe How long did the Visigoths rule Spain? What would you like to do? Flag In the 6th Century the Franks drove the Visigoths out of France and the Byzantines siezed control of the southern coastal strip of Spain. The Visigoths moved their capital first to Barcelona and finally to Toledo where they became more powerful and during the reign of King Leovigild, were able to conquer the Suevi. In 587 A.D. King Leovigild's son Reccared converted from Arianism to Catholicism, as did the other Visigoth Nobles, thus creating religious unity between the ruling Visigoths, the church and the Hispano- Roman population. Spain Becomes Part of the Visigoth Empire. During the 4th Century A.D. the Iberian Peninsula was invaded by Germanic tribes ( Suevi, Vandals and Alans ).The Roman Empire was in decline and by the start of the 5th Century they had lost all but Tarraconensis ( Tarragona). This time the gates were opened by slaves and the Visigoths went in a looted the city, damaging buildings and ransacking the tombs of previous Emperors. Rome had not been sacked in 800 years but the Visigoths managed to sack the city before continuing their rampage to further south in Italy. This Visigoth victory came at a huge price with the Visigoths losing 17,000 casualties and losses out of their 39,000 men while the Romans had 15,000 casualties and losses out of 18,000 men. The domination of the Visigoths over modern day Spanish territory i estimated to be between 14 and 256 years. On the 24th august in the year 410, as the Roman Empire waned in strength the Visigoths attacked Rome. This move can be seen as one of the last of a long line of manoeuvres that signalled the end of the behemoth Roman Empire. They were married in 1469. Each ruled their own kingdom(s) and co-ruled their spouse' kingdom…. Both were deceased by 1516. Spain did not come into being until their Grandson Carlos I of Spain, also known as Charles V of the Holy Roman Empire, inherited the 3 kingdoms in 1516. Isabela I and Ferdinand II never ruled Spain. In order to try and regain control of Hispania the Romans made a pact with the Visigoths who in 415 A.D. drove the Alans and Vandals out of the central part of the peninsula. By the latter part of the 5th Century, having achieved independence from the Romans, the Visigoth kingdom of Tolosa ( with its capital in Toulouse) controlled the southwest of France and most of the Iberian Peninsula. From 395 the Visigoths were under the rule of Alaric I and by the turn of the year 408 the Visigoths moved westward and invaded Italy, this accumulated in the siege of Rome starting in the same year. Visigoths Sack of Rome. In 408 the first siege of Rome started as the Visigoths besieged the city. This first siege was a resounding victory to the Visigoths as disease and starvation swept through the city, this victory did not come in taking the city however. How long did Muslims rule continue in Spain? The Muslim armies began their conquest of the Iberian Peninsula in 711 AD. They were finally conquered in 1492 AD when they lost Grenada. So, they ruled Spain for around 781 y…ears or around 8 centuries. Query: how long did the visigoths rule rome",
"output": [
"On the 24th august in the year 410, as the Roman Empire waned in strength the Visigoths attacked Rome."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3fa7505d83a74eba9c20c2c4011113d7",
"input": "Diamonds can form at depths as shallow as 150 kilometers beneath the continental crust, while beneath oceans they need depths of at least 200 kilometers, as shown by the diamond boundary on the cross-section. Diamonds are formed as an allotrope of the element carbon, at depths greater than 90 miles. The pressure and heat at this depth is critical to the formation of the diamonds th … at are mined at the surface today. At crustal pressures, the stable form of carbon is the allotrope graphite. Diamonds are formed as an allotrope of the element carbon, at depths greater than 90 miles. The pressure and heat at this depth was critical to the formation of the diamonds that are mined at the surface today. At crustal pressures, the stable form of carbon is the allotrope graphite. How Diamonds Are Formed. If you’re out there looking for the best diamond for your money, then please contact us and let us know your budget and what you’re looking for. We’ll sift through thousands of diamonds online and send you suggested stones to choose from that fit your needs the best. Last Updated: September 5, 2017 Diamonds are formed as an allotrope of the element carbon, at depths greater than 90 miles. The pressure and heat at this depth is critical to the formation of the diamonds th…at are mined at the surface today. At crustal pressures, the stable form of carbon is the allotrope graphite. Diamonds can form in most of Earth's interior but not near its surface, where graphite is the stable form of carbon. Indeed, diamonds only survive at Earth's surface because great heat is required to break down the diamond structure. Diamond is not formed from metamorphosed coal, and most diamonds discovered on the surface in mining operations are at least one billion years old; some may be two or three times that age. Diamond can also be formed from the pressures of high speed impacts of meteors with the Earth, but these are more of scientific interest, having no economic usefulness due to their small size and dispersion. How Diamonds Are Formed If you’re out there looking for the best diamond for your money, then please contact us and let us know your budget and what you’re looking for. We’ll sift through thousands of diamonds online and send you suggested stones to choose from that fit your needs the best. Experiments and the high density of diamonds tell us that they crystallize at very high pressures. In nature this means that diamonds are created by geologic processes at great depth within Earth, generally more than 150 kilometers down, in a region beneath the crust known as the mantle. Other processes, explored later in this exhibition, bring diamonds to where people can find them. How are diamonds formed and where are they mined? Diamonds form about 100 miles (161 km) below the Earth's surface, in the molten rock of the Earth's mantle, which provides the right amounts of pressure and heat to transform … carbon into diamond. Query: how does a diamond formed",
"output": [
"Diamonds are formed as an allotrope of the element carbon, at depths greater than 90 miles. The pressure and heat at this depth is critical to the formation of the diamonds that are mined at the surface today."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-89de7d210532414fa61e9effdf0b1040",
"input": "Water Based/Latex Paint ~ Dry Time 1-2 hours – Cure Time 21-30 days. Oil Based Paint ~ Dry Time 6-8 hours – Cure Time 3-7 days. Chalk Brand Paints ~ Dry Time 30-60 minutes – Cure time 30 days. Homemade Chalky Paint ~ Dry Time 30-60 minutes – Cure Time 21-30 days. Milk Paint ~ Dry Time 30 minutes – Cure time 30 days. A: Painting with an airless will usually get more paint on the surface than with a brush. If applied properly - keeping the gun 12 away from the surface at a 90° angle and applying the recommended mil thickness of paint - airless spraying is the most efficient way to paint most large exterior surfaces. A: If you need to paint outside with latex paint when temperatures are moving up and down like a yo-yo, I suggest you use one of the latex like Duration, Resilience, or SuperPaint. These products can be applied and will cure at lower temperatures, as low as 35° F. Traditional latex-based paints need temperatures above 60° F to cure properly. Warmer temperatures are needed to allow the latex particles to coalesce, or melt together. The curing time of paint is dependent on a variety of factors, such as: climate, number of coats, type of paint, etc. The greatest determinant is which type of paint you use. Most paints will include the on the label how many hours it takes that paint to dry to the touch. Depending on the ventilation, oil-based paint takes about twelve hours to dry to the touch. Latex paint will feel dry in as few as three hours. However, the full curing time takes much longer. Oil-based Paints. As oil-based paint cures, the thinner evaporates and the oils seep into the pores of the surface leaving behind the binder and the pigment. If you're painting big surfaces, cut in with a brush and roll the rest of the panel. For most siding areas, if you can't spray and backbrush, stick with a brush. Most siding areas are not wide enough to use a roller, so a good 4 brush that holds a lot of paint will work much better. Paint Dry and Paint Cure… Two Totally Different Things & A Lesson In Patience. 1 January 4, 2014 By Denise 192 Comments. 2 Filed Under: Blog, Painting Furniture Tagged With: chalk paint to dry, furniture paint to dry, how long for paint to cure, how long for paint to dry, latex to dry, milk paint to dry, oil paint to dry, paint cure, paint dry. The temperature may not be high enough to allow the paint to flow and cure properly. Or, if you store the oil paint outside or in your truck, it is exposed to colder temperatures during the night that cause it to thicken, just like the motor oil in your truck. Q: How late into fall can I paint house exteriors with latex paint and give customers long-lasting results? A: Fall can be a tricky time to paint outside. A common mistake is to paint when daytime temperatures rise above 50° F and nighttime temperatures drop below 35° F. Some people say it's okay to paint all day, even if the temperature is above the minimum recommendation for only an hour or so. A: Ideally, the temperature should be in the suggested range and above the dew point for at least 48 hours after application. Paint will cure to the touch and minor handling in 24 hrs or less. A hard, total cure may take 30-60 days depending on conditions. Query: how long does paint take to cure.",
"output": [
"Paint takes 30 to 60 days to cure."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e61bef99276846dfb30223cbfc3d1287",
"input": "Example of the closed system: If you are registered with the Democratic Party, you may vote for Democratic candidates, nonpartisan candidates and local or state measures. You cannot vote for a candidate from any other party in the Primary Election. Example of the open system: The Republican Party can announce they are going to open their Primary Election so people who are not registered with any party can vote for Republican candidates in addition to, the nonpartisan candidates and local or state measures. You can also check for your voter record online. Please note that an information card or other correspondence confirming your voter registration status does not qualify as photo identification. For information on qualified identification for voting in person, or how to obtain a Voter Photo Identification card, please visit: elections.virginia.gov/voterID or call toll free at (800) 552-9745 or TTY: 711 The registration deadline to vote in the next election is 21 days prior to election day. You are not eligible to register to vote if: You are serving a sentence or on parole or probation, as a result of a conviction of an indictable offense under state or federal law. 1 Note: If you are no longer serving a sentence, or no longer on parole or probation..., you CAN vote in NJ by completing a new voter registration form (linked above). You only lose your right to vote while on parole, probation or serving a sentence due to a conviction for an indictable offense under any federal or state laws. • How can I cancel voter registration of a close relative? Absentee Services This directs voters who want to vote by absentee ballot to services based on their situation. Click the link that describes your situation • Uniformed service or overseas citizen voter You can vote in U.S. elections if you: Are a U.S. citizen; Meet your state’s residency requirements. You can be homeless and still meet these requirements. Are 18 years old on or before Election Day. In some states, you can register to vote before you turn 18 if you will be 18 by Election Day. Are registered to vote by your state’s voter registration deadline. North Dakota does not require voter registration. Conditional Voter Registration. In elections conducted by your county elections official, you can “conditionally” register and vote at your county elections office after the 15-day voter registration deadline. For more information please go to Conditional Voter Registration. You should update your registration if you move, change your name or mailing address, or want to select or change a political party. Absentee Voting ︿ Students attending an out-of-state college or voters traveling during an election can still receive a ballot. 18 by next General Election (note: you can vote at age 17 in a primary, if you'll be 18 by the next General Election) Maryland. You may register to vote if you are at least 16 years old but cannot vote unless you will be at least 18 years old by the next general election. Massachusetts. Be at least 18 years of age on or before the next election. Permanent Early Voting: If you have a permanent physical disability, you may request to be placed on the Permanent Early Voter List (PEVL). You will be mailed a ballot for each election that you are eligible for and can vote from the comfort and convenience of your own home. Register to be a permanent early voter online Register to be a permanent early voter by mail (PDF) If you were registered to vote before you were convicted, you must complete a new voter registration form (linked above) once you have served your time. If you are a pre-trial detainee or on bail pending appeal, you do not lose your right to vote. If you have any questions, please contact your county commissioner of registration. Additional Voter Registration Information and Forms Query: how early can you register to vote",
"output": [
"You can register to your vote 21 days prior to election day."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-61ca83c451dd4a8984714e84eabbb772",
"input": "Moscow at 157 m/ 514 ft has a warm summer continental climate with no dry season (Dfb). Average temperature in Moscow is 5°C/ 49.5°F Rainfall 689.2mm/ 27.1in across 119 days. See graphs, tables, comparisons, more. Most / Least Educated Cities in ID. The average temperature of Moscow is 47.99°F, which is higher than the Idaho average temperature of 46.32°F and is much lower than the national average temperature of 54.45°F. Topics: Heating Cost Index Cooling Cost Index Historical Temperature Historical Precipitation Historical Snow Historical Humidity Historical Wind Speed Historical Weather SNOTEL SWE, Snow Depth, and Precipitation Rates of Change Last 4 Days (Idaho Data Collection Office Area) 1 North Idaho SNOTEL Sites: 2 Central Idaho SNOTEL Sites: 3 Southern Idaho and Bear River SNOTEL Sites: 4 Eastern Idaho & Western Wyoming (Upper Snake Basins)SNOTEL Sites: 5 Wyoming (Green River) SNOTEL Sites: Climatology for Lewiston ID Lat=46.2N Lon=117.0W Elevation=1420 feet. Number of years available from 1961 to 1990: 16 Maximum temperature 1961 to 1990: 109 F Minimum temperature 1961 to 1990: -16 F Mean Annual Precipitation: 12.1 inches Mean Annual Snowfall: 13.5 inches. Contact Us | Mobile | Bookmark Page. Moscow is one of the Host Cities for 2018 FIFA World Cup Russia. A lot of people will want to know what the weather will be like and the answers can be found here. What's the best time to go to Moscow in Russia? Here are some annual weather facts we collected from our historical climate data: During the months June, July and August you will experience pleasant weather with a nice average temperature. Rainfall/ Precipitation in Moscow, Russia Moscow attains an average of 689.2 mm (27.1 in) of rainfall per year, or 57.4 mm (2.3 in) per month. On average there are 119 days per year with more than 0.1 mm (0.004 in) of rainfall (precipitation) or 9.9 days with a quantity of rain, sleet, snow etc. per month. The driest weather is in March when an average of 34 mm (1.3 in) of rainfall (precipitation) occurs. Average Low: Average High: Record Low: Record High: Average Precipitation: Average Snow: January: 23° 36°-30° (1937) 58° (1971) 2.99 15.7 February: 27° 41°-26° (1996) 66° (1995) 2.52 7.4 March: 31° 49°-5° (1955) 73° (1999) 2.57 4.2 April: 35° 58° 11° (1936) 88° (1987) 2.52 1.3 May: 41° 66° 19° (1954) 94° (1928) 2.62 0 June: 45° 73° 28° (1973) 100° (1924) 1.87 0 July: 48° 83° Moscow has a humid continental climate with warm, sometimes hot, somewhat humid summers and long, cold winters. Typical high temperatures in the warm months of June, July and August are around 23 °C, but during heat waves, which can occur anytime from May to September, daytime temperature highs often top 30 °C for sometimes one or two weeks. In the winter, temperatures normally drop to approximately −10 °C, though there can be periods of warmth with temperatures rising above 0 °C ... Rainfall/ Precipitation in Moscow, Russia. 1 Vologda, Russia - 411.2 kms (255.5 miles) NNE. 2 Kostroma, Russia - 286 kms (177.7 miles) NE. 3 Gor'Kij, Russia - 387.7 kms (240.9 miles) E. 4 Elat'Ma, Russia - 279.8 kms (173.9 miles) ESE. 5 Pavelec, Russia - 250.8 kms (155.9 miles) SSE. 6 Tambov, Russia - 414.5 kms (257.5 miles) SE. Moscow weather averages and climate Moscow, Idaho. The monthly temperature, precipitation and hours of sunshine. A climate graph showing the rainfall data, temperatures and normals. Average weather Moscow, ID. Query: average annual rainfall moscow idaho",
"output": [
"Russia Moscow attains an average of 689.2 mm (27.1 in) of rainfall per year, or 57.4 mm (2.3 in) per month."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-5cdd48c7fc0a47648a1669d7f9dcf00d",
"input": "I had done everything the dentist suggested; brush twice (sometimes three times) daily, floss daily, change toothpaste, rinse with hydrogen peroxide before brushing, rinse with a medicinal mouth wash after brushing, and finally, professional cleanings every three months. Nerves are what sense the world around you and pass that information along to your brain. Learn about nerves and see how the nervous system works. Using Imaging to Look at Changes in the Brain – A Conversation with Dr. Nancy C. Andreasen (NY Times) “I haven’t published this yet. But I have spoken about it in public lectures. The big finding is that people with schizophrenia are losing brain tissue at a more rapid rate than healthy people of comparable age. Some are losing as much as 1 percent per year. That’s an awful lot over an 18-year period. And then we’re trying to figure out why. Another thing we’ve discovered is that the more drugs you’ve been given, the more brain tissue you lose.” Suicide Risk Studied in Drugs for Physical Ills (AP via Yahoo) Your Mouth Is Connected to Your Heart and Your Brain and the Rest of You… Posted on Monday, September 29th, 2008 Some articles that ran while we were on our blog holiday that we want to be sure you didn’t miss: Recent studies have raised concern that the condition of gums and teeth may have a direct impact on the development of Alzheimer's disease. These studies are of interest to me because I have been under treatment for the past two years for gingivitis, or inflammatory gum disease. Cranial nerves connect your sense organs (eyes, ears, nose, mouth) to your brain; Central nerves connect areas within the brain and spinal cord; Peripheral nerves connect the spinal cord with your limbs; Autonomic nerves connect the brain and spinal cord with your organs (heart, stomach, intestines, blood vessels, etc.) The central nervous system consists of the brain and spinal cord, including cranial and central nerves. In another study, New York University dental researchers studied people from 50-70 years of age, and were able to link inflamed gums to a greatly increased risk of cognitive impairment. It seems that the pathogens connected with inflamed gums can generate inflammation in the brain cells, resulting in Alzheimer's disease. There are numerous thoughts on the causes of dementia, but staying on top of dental problems is one of the easiest ways to lower your chances of developing this devastating diagnosis. Cranial nerves connect your sense organs (eyes, ears, nose, mouth) to your brain Central nerves connect areas within the brain and spinal cord Peripheral nerves connect the spinal cord with your limbs Autonomic nerves connect the brain and spinal cord with your organs (heart, stomach, intestines, blood vessels, etc.) The central nervous system consists of the brain and spinal cord, including cranial and central nerves. Some studies even say that oral hygiene is linked to brain health. Maintaining good dental health is important for you and your loved one. Some studies even say that oral hygiene is linked to brain health. Of course not, but it eliminates one possible cause for the disease. One study showed that bi-products of the bacterium p. gingivitis were found in brain samples of four out of ten Alzheimer's patients, but not in any of the brains of ten people without dementia. Query: how is the mouth connected to the brain",
"output": [
"The mouth is connected to the brain through cranial nerves."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-21b5cd0f357b47b28f2c2f310522e728",
"input": "Lesson Overview. The purpose of the lessons in this unit is to help Ohio students in grades 5-7 learn the characteristics of the literary text MOOD and SETTING indicators that they must master for their respective Ohio achievement tests. Definition of Mood. As a literary device, mood is the emotional feeling or atmosphere that a work of literature produces in a reader. All works of literature produce some sort of emotional and psychological effect in the audience; though every reader may respond differently to the same work of literature there is often a similar type of mood produced. Some of the best examples of this are below. 1 Frozen as a horror film: 2 Mary Poppins as a horror film: Video Player. 3 Dumb and Dumber was turned into a horror film, Lurk and Lurker: Video Player. 4 The Shining was transformed from horror film into a feel-good romantic comedy: Video Player. Whatever tone, mood, and style you decide on for your stories, realize that those elements contribute to the story’s feel. _____ Recognize that even if you don’t purposely create tone and mood, they are still created for your stories and scenes. They may be muddled and the cause of weak responses to your fiction, but they’re there, in the story. Make a point to purposely work tone and mood to the story’s advantage by your style choices. Mood is the emotions that you (the reader) feel while you are reading. Some literature makes you feel sad, others joyful, still others, angry. The main purpose for some poems is to set a mood. Writers use many devices to create mood, including images, dialogue, setting, and plot. Often a writer creates a mood at the beginning of the story and continues it to the end. However, sometimes the mood changes because of the plot or changes in characters. Summary: Mood Literary Definition. Define mood in literature: The definition of mood in literature is the overall feeling and author creates for his audience. Mood is the atmosphere the text creates. In a way, it’s all of the “unsaid” elements that create a feeling the text provides for the audience. Mood is essential to engage readers. Let us see how writers use the afore-mentioned elements in their literary works to create a particular mood. Creating Mood through Setting Setting is the physical location in a piece of literature that provides background in which the events of the narrative take place. A particular setting not only provides support to the contents of the story, but also sets the mood of the readers. Let us analyze a few examples of mood developed using a setting: Mood (literature) In literature, mood is the atmosphere of the narrative. Mood is created by means of setting (locale and surroundings in which the narrative takes place), attitude (of the narrator and of the characters in the narrative), and descriptions. Though atmosphere and setting are connected, they may be considered separately to a degree. Atmosphere is the aura of mood that surrounds the story. For example, during the Great Depression, the mood in the USA was somber. People lost their jobs, went hungry and experienced a wide range of emotions. Words such as frightened, panicked and depressed are commonly used to describe people's moods during this time. Moods in Literature In literature, mood is the feeling created in the reader. This feeling is the result of both the tone and atmosphere of the story. The author's attitude or approach to a character or situation is the tone of a story. The tone sets the mood of the story. Atmosphere is the feeling created by mood and tone. The atmosphere takes the reader to where the story is happening and lets them experience it much like the characters. Some common moods found in literature include: Style, tone, and mood combine to make your stories your own, something no one else could create. And if you changed the tone or mood of multiple scenes or of a story as a whole, you’d create a new story quite unlike the original. Query: how is mood created in literature",
"output": [
"Mood in literature is the overall feeling and author creates for his audience. Mood is the atmosphere the text creates. In a way, it’s all of the “unsaid” elements that create a feeling the text provides for the audience."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a37dc0a45ae54c61a2a8797ef5d2ea82",
"input": "Do not allow your baby to crawl, walk around, or go to bed with the bottle. Doing so turns the bottle into a comfort item, may hinder two-handed development, and can lead to dental cavities. Offer the cup first, then the bottle. And it ends when the child no longer breastfeeds or takes a bottle. This process may last several weeks, a few months, or more than a year. Your baby may begin eating solid foods at about 6 months of age. At this point, you may want to offer cup-feeding to supplement breast- or bottle-feedings. How long does engorgement last? Fortunately, engorgement passes pretty quickly for most women. You can expect it to ease up in 24 to 48 hours if you're nursing well or pumping at least every two to three hours. If not treated, engorgement can take up to ten days to start to go away. Once the engorgement passes, your breasts will be softer, although still full of milk. If you're not nursing, it will probably get worse before it gets better. Here are some things you can do to reduce your chances of becoming engorged: 1 Breastfeed within two hours after birth if possible. (Your labor and delivery team should be able to help you with this.) 2 Nurse frequently – between eight and 12 times a day after the first 24 hours. The pain and discomfort from breast engorgement improve as your breasts stop making milk. You will likely feel better in 1 to 5 days. Home treatment, such as applying cold packs to the breasts, may relieve some of your symptoms. Don't worry -- the kind of fullness you feel in the beginning doesn't last, and your body is still making plenty of milk even if it doesn't feel that way. 7 Means of Relief It should only last for the first week or so, but engorgement can be painful for some women. Weaning is a gradual process. It starts when you begin giving solid food to your baby and ends when the child no longer breast - feeds or takes a bottle. This process may last a few months or more than a year.A rough outline of this process is as follows: Your baby begins eating solid foods at 4 to 6 months of age. Here are some things you can do to reduce your chances of becoming engorged: 1 Breastfeed within two hours after birth if possible. 2 Nurse frequently – between eight and 12 times a day after the first 24 hours. 3 Let your baby finish nursing on one breast before switching to other. Here's how you can make breastfeeding more comfortable and ease engorgement: 1 Just before nursing, place a warm compress on your breasts for a few minutes to get the milk flowing. 2 Nurse frequently, with no more than two to three hours between feedings. 3 While your baby is nursing, gently massage the breast he's on. Engorged breasts take place, because of the pressure of expanding cells, due to the new breast milk contained inside of them. Engorgement happens when the milk producing cells, are uncomfortably full. Engorgement is sometimes apparent in the areola and/or the breast; in one breast or in both breasts. (you may have just one engorged, sore swollen breast) Dealing with engorgement on top of having a new baby to care for, day and night, may be discouraging to a mother. The good news is, there are ways to treat breast engorgement. How Long does Engorgement Last? Nursing engorgement is temporary and usually only lasts three days, or until the mother's body has adapted to the needs of her baby. Breastfeeding and engorgement can also happen as a result of missed feeds or incorrect latching, which results in milk being left behind in the breast. Query: how long does engorgement last",
"output": [
"Fortunately, engorgement passes pretty quickly for most women. You can expect it to ease up in 24 to 48 hours if you're nursing well or pumping at least every two to three hours. If not treated, engorgement can take up to ten days to start to go away."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ba97c96cf6c34ceea9f5d80e838842cc",
"input": "20 potatoes, spaced out in the oven, should not take extra time to cook. Be sure not to put them too close to the walls of the oven. Halfway through cooking time you should rotate the baking sheet. I LOVE baked potatoes, but rarely have the patience to wait 45-60 minutes for one to bake in the oven. Kathy Maister said: Just in case you missed it, I now have a video on How to Cook Potatoes in a Microwave! Step 1, Scrub the potato, and prick several time with the tines of a fork. Place on a plate. Step 2, Cook on full power in the microwave for 5 minutes. Turn over, and continue to cook for 5 more minutes. When the potato is soft, remove from the microwave, and cut in half lengthwise. Season with salt and pepper, and mash up the inside a little using a fork. Top the open sides with butter and 2 tablespoons of cheese. Return to the microwave, and cook for about 1 minute to melt the cheese. Step ... Skills & know how. 1 As well as helping you decide what to cook we can also help you to cook it. 2 We’re all about good recipes, and about quality home cooking that everyone can enjoy. 3 All our recipes are tested thoroughly by us to make sure they’re suitable for your kitchen at home. The filling station. 1 Barney Desmazery (senior food editor) and Chelsie Collins (cookery assistant): Butter>cheese>beans. 2 Miriam Nice (home economist): Butter>beans>cheese. 3 Cassie Best (food editor): Cheese>beans>cheese (“although preferably just double cheese as I don’t like beans!”) Foil-wrapped baked potatoes take 20 to 40 minutes to bake. The larger the potatoes, the longer they take to cook. Cooking many potatoes together also increases cooking time. Although baking potatoes in foil takes longer than baking them without foil, starting them in a preheated oven helps to minimize the cooking time. Global Post recommends setting the oven to 425 degrees Fahrenheit. Baked potatoes in convection ovens, 45 minutes at 375°. Baked potatoes on the grill, whole, 45 minutes. Baked potatoes on the grill, sliced, 5-10 minutes. Baked potatoes in the microwave, 2-4 minutes per side, depending on the size of the potato and the strength of the microwave. How to Bake a Potato in the Microwave A baked potato is a cheap and tasty treat that will brighten up just about any meal. Though normally prepared in an oven, you can also bake a potato using a microwave, creating the same great dish in a fraction of the time. Continue baking for 20 more minutes, turning the potatoes over once more (so you’ll bake them for about 10 minutes per side) until the potatoes are totally soft if you squeeze them with a pot holder and the skins are nice and crispy. Conventional Oven Baked Potatoes: Wrap the potato in foil, poke it with a fork 5 times for venting, and bake it in the oven for 45 minutes at 400°. Grilling Baked Potatoes: Wrap the potato in foil, poke it with a fork 5 times, and place it on the grill for 45 minutes. Query: how long to bake potatoes take",
"output": [
"It takes 45 to 60 minutes to bake potatoes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3e11632d53454353919f09c2b9e11a63",
"input": "That's because you can get better financing on a car that holds its value, or lease it at a lower rate, or finance a high-residual-value lease or car loan at a cheaper rate, or just get more value out of it as a trade-in when you decide to get rid of it. Real world leases examined with tutorials on how monthly payments are calculated, Excel spreadsheets, how to lease, lookup residual values, dealer cost, dealer invoice, car prices 10. Divide the depreciation amount by number of months in your lease. This will be your base payment. $6,890/36 = $191.39: 12. Add the adjusted capitalized cost and the residual value. Take the sum and multiply it by money factor. This is your monthly rent charge. ($20,000 + $13,110) x 0.00125 = $41.39: 13. Add the rent charge to your base payment to get your pretax lease payment $191.39 + $41.39 = $232.78: 14. This car will have a residual value of 57 percent and a money factor of 0.00125. We will have a $1,700 down payment and the car will have a $500 rebate. Assume we've negotiated a sale price of $21,000 (before the rebate was applied) and will have $1,200 in various fees. For this example, we will not have a trade-in. By definition, a lease refers to the contractual agreement or contract itself, while rent is the periodic payment for the use of an asset. Residual Value. Residual value, sometimes called salvage value, is an estimate of how much an asset will be worth at the end of its lease. As an example, a car worth $20,000 being leased for 3 years can have a residual value of $10,000 when the lease ends. For most assets, the longer the lease period, the lower the residual value. Residual value is also often used to refer to the value of an asset after depreciation. For more information or to do calculations involving depreciation, use the Depreciation Calculator. Calculating Lease Payment. Bimmer America gives you the most efficient and accurate BMW lease calculator formula on the web. We take into account MSPR, Sale Price, Net Capitalized Cost, Residual Value, BMW Incentives, Depreciation, Money Factor, Terms, Finance Charge, and offers through BMW financial. We also provide a convenient auto lease calculator (payment calculator), and CULA program policies, forms and documents. Can't find the residual you are looking for? If you do not find your residual here, it means that CULA does not have it yet. The car lease residual value is the dollar amount that you can purchase the vehicle for at the end of the lease. When a lease ends, you can either return the vehicle to the dealership or you can purchase it for a set amount. This amount is referred to as the residual value. The whole reason you got that zero-down (or low-money-down) rate and sweet monthly payment plan was because of the car's high residual value, which in theory would allow the dealer to get that dough back out of the car by selling it through his CPO program after your lease ended. The depreciation fee portion of your payment simply pays the leasing company for the loss in value of its car, spread over the lease term (number of months), based on the miles you intend to drive and the time you intend to keep the car. You pay off an equal portion of the total expected depreciation each month. Query: how is the residual value calculated on a lease?",
"output": [
"The car lease residual value is the dollar amount that you can purchase the vehicle for at the end of the lease. When a lease ends, you can either return the vehicle to the dealership or you can purchase it for a set amount. This amount is referred to as the residual value."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-809c3cdc970c4707b50d1017c2170056",
"input": "Find out how and where to submit your passport application. (You may even be eligible to mail it in!) Where to Apply. Check My Application Status Please note that it takes 7-10 business days for your passport to be tracked online. However, once you are back in the United States, you do have the option of converting it to a regular passport with the appropriate documents. The new passport card is valid for the same length of time as regular passport-10 years for adults and teens aged 16 or older, and 5 years for kids aged 15 and under. How long your passport will remain valid depends on what type of passport you’ve received. Child passports issued to children ages 16 and under are only valid for 5 years after the date they were printed. You need a passport book if you are flying to another country. If the expiration date on your passport is approaching, it’s a good idea to check the travel requirements of the country you are visiting before you leave. Even though a passport is still technically valid until the expiration date, many countries require that you have at least 6 months left or they won’t let you in. Nobody can give you a crystal ball answer, but Lexus has been more reliable (especially the ES models). HOWEVER... make sure you take it to a reliable mechanic (not your buddy who knows cars, but an actual ASE-certified mechanic) and spend $50-100 to have them look over the car thoroughly. Don't skip this step. For 24/7 automated passport information, application status questions, or to make an appointment at a passport agency, please call: Hours, excluding all Federal Holidays: Enroll in STEP. Enrolling in this free service will allow us to better assist you in case of an emergency while you are abroad. The Department of State recommends renewing your passport at least 9 months before it expires. At the bare minimum, you should allow at least 2 months for your passport renewal to be processed with regular processing. If you need your passport renewed in a hurry, your best bet is to use a private passport expediting company. A good expediting company will give you instructions on filling out the paperwork, so your application goes through the first time. You can only upload files of type 3GP, 3GPP, MP4, MOV, AVI, MPG, MPEG, or RM. You can only upload photos smaller than 5 MB. You can only upload videos smaller than 600MB. You can only upload a photo (png, jpg, jpeg) or a video (3gp, 3gpp, mp4, mov, avi, mpg, mpeg, rm). You can only upload a photo or a video. Video should be smaller than 600mb/5 minutes If these are your ONLY two choices, then the Lexus wins by a mile. Nobody can give you a crystal ball answer, but Lexus has been more reliable (especially the ES models). HOWEVER... make sure you take it to a reliable mechanic (not your buddy who knows... show more In my country you just go to the voting booth and vote for who you want. Best answer: Why do people register what political party they are in the USA? In my country you just go to the voting booth and vote for who you want. Query: how long are you ask passports good",
"output": [
"The new passport card is valid for the same length of time as regular passport-10 years for adults and teens aged 16 or older, and 5 years for kids aged 15 and under."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8cd1448bc57b4f49839bc97c15c4057a",
"input": "3-5 days: The Tamiflu (oseltamivir) will shorten the course of the flu, but it must be taken soon after the onset of symptoms. You were just the at the border line for that. Cont with the Tamiflu (oseltamivir) for the course. Keep pushing fluids as much as possible. How long after being exposed to the flu will symptoms start to appear? Dr. Ralph Morgan Lewis Dr. Lewis See below: Incubation period for influenza a & b averages 2 days (range 1-4 days). Avian flu (h5n1) incubation depends upon whether exposed to infected bird (less than 7 days) or to infected human (generally 3-5 days). People often confuse cold symptoms with those of the flu. However, cold symptoms are usually milder and don't last as long as flu symptoms. You can spread the flu to others before your symptoms start and for another 3 to 4 days after your symptoms appear. Symptoms of the Flu: An Overview It's easy to confuse a common cold with flu symptoms. How long after exposure to flu do symptoms appear - Does HIV symptoms occur a week after exposure? I'm NT sure of his status but probably he's clean. But am I having normal flu or a symptome? Been aweek Unlikely. It takes weeks for symptoms to develop with HIV and thus you likely have a cold. Common flu symptoms start quickly and can include: 1 Fever. 2 Chills. 3 Dry cough. 4 Sore throat. 5 Runny or stuffy nose. 6 Headache. 7 Muscle aches. 8 Extreme fatigue. Flu symptoms appear anywhere from 1 to 4 days after a person has been exposed to the virus. The main symptoms of flu are: Someone with the flu may have a high fever — for example, that person's temperature may be around 104°F (40°C). People with the flu often feel achy and extra tired. Symptoms of the Flu: An Overview. It's easy to confuse a common cold with flu symptoms. However, cold symptoms are usually milder and don't last as long as the flu symptoms. If you become infected with the flu virus, you will usually feel flu symptoms 1 to 4 days later. It is important to note that you can spread the flu to others before your flu symptoms start and for another 3 to 4 days after your flu symptoms appear. (Click Flu Virus for more information about the flu.) 10 days or never: Avian flu (h5n1) will run its course in birds in about ten days - if the bird survives (and most do) they will not be shedding virus after approx 10 and are then no longer a risk. Many doctors on here agree that Acute HIV symptoms occur soon after exposure to HIV and include flu-like symptoms. The question is - how soon? Within 24 hours? Cold symptoms: Symptoms cold symptoms usually start about 2 or 3 days after you came in contact with the virus, although it could take up to a week. Symptoms mostly affect the nose. ... Read more Query: how long before flu symptoms appear?",
"output": [
"Flu symptoms appear before 1 to 4 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-6eef5431a6dc4195ac387ececb59c46e",
"input": "Whether you're having a partial or complete tummy tuck, the area that's operated on will be stitched and bandaged. It's very important to follow all your surgeon's instructions on how to care for the bandage in the days following surgery. I don't mean to sound crass or rude but why don't you try it the old fashion way (that's my suggestion). You could save yourself money and see results in 3 to 6 months if you stick to a plan. What makes you think a tummy tuck is the answer ... I know 2 nurses who had tummy tucks and 1 year later; well you guessed it. The discipline has got to come anyway to insure success. TYVIN, I wish there was an alternative, but my issue is loose skin from the stretching of pregnancies, not really fat. Take at LEAST 2 weeks off from work- 4 is ideal, but 2 weeks is mandatory. You won’t be able to do basic tasks during this time without at least some help, so plan on it ahead of time Find someone to care for you. How long you are off work depends on your occupation. If you do clerical work (i.e. stockbroker, teacher, or programmer), you can return to work when you feel up to it. This usually takes about two to three days. Re: How long were you out of work? by SuzieQ219 » Sat Feb 05, 2011 8:10 am Good Morning - I went back at 2.5 weeks for 1/2 days the 1st week (this past week), and now next week at 3.5 weeks I will go back full time. An abdominoplasty, or tummy tuck, is a procedure to remove loose or excess skin resulting from pregnancy, weight gain and poor elasticity of the skin. The procedure includes removing most of the fat and skin between your navel and public area, tightening the connective tissue in the abdominal area and repositioning your belly button. All tummy tucks come see me for follow-up at 6 days post-op and many are driving themselves and are ready to return to work. The normal range of days to take off work is 6-10 days depending on how much skin removal was performed and the amount of muscle repair. All tummy tucks should be at their normal routine by 2 weeks or so. A tummy tuck procedure involves making an incision just above the pubic hair line, removing the excess skin and fat, and tightening the abdominal muscle. The recovery time for a tummy tuck varies for each individual, but generally takes at least 6-8 weeks. In for Tummy Tuck general you need to be ambulatory from day one. By the second week you will be comfortable, and by the end of the third week you can be active. Most patients can go back to work by the second week with no heavy activity. Back in the gym in 4-6 weeks. Liposuction recovery depend on the volume and number of areas. But count on two weeks. The Tummy Tuck is a complete system and you will only get results if you use all three parts of the system. You can just use the belt by itself for an instant slimming effect, but it will not produce any fat burning results on its own. Query: how long are you off work with a tummy tuck",
"output": [
"You are off work with a tummy tuck about two to three days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8e2b4c0ff2564506a43b6260b82c842a",
"input": "How Food Dehydrators Work for Drying Tomatoes. A food dehydrator is a device used to dry foods. There are three kinds of food dehydrators: solar-powered, home-food dehydrators, and commercial dehydrators. Home and commercial dehydrators are both electrical. All three kinds operate on the same principle: they remove water from food. How Does Food Dehydrator Work? A food dehydrator is one kind of kitchen gadget used for drying foods. Dehydration is a way of food upkeep, where moisture is usually taken off the food. A food dehydrator is one kind of kitchen gadget used for drying foods. Dehydration is a way of food upkeep, where moisture is usually taken off the food. Recipes In a food dehydrator, the combination of heat, as well as the movement of air, is used to dry foods. A regular food dehydrator comprises of shelves which have open segments that allow circulation of heat and air along with a hygienic manner of handling and shielding the food. Modern methods use electricity to power an appliance that resembles a small crockpot. Dehydrators will include several trays where food can be stored and dried at the same time. The separation ensures that none of the flavors mix during the process. Removable and stackable trays as well as shelving may be present. Circular drying racks may even rotate to allow for proper dehydration at all times. Dehydrators operate by using of a heating element, fan, air vents, and food trays. The heating element, fan and vents work together to circulate air and remove moisture. Heating the food allows for moisture to be released from the food and into the dehydrator. If there is excess water in your system check out our vacuum dehydrator. It works with any system and on all oils from mineral base to synthetic to exotic, ranging up to ISOVG1000 oils. Best of all, it's guaranteed to remove the unwanted water in your system to your target of <100ppm and further if needed. Dehydration of food is a process that removes its liquid content. One method of food dehydration is vacuum freeze-drying, which is used to dehydrate foods that have been... Sun Powered Dehydrators. The advantage to buying or making a solar dehydrator is the savings on electricity. You use sun power to dry the food. The problem with solar dehydrators is nature is unpredictable. If there's no sun, you won't be able to use the food dryer. Also, sun dryers rely on sunlight for heat to pull water. Don’t work well with high-fat foods: Because dehydrators simply remove moisture, you can’t dry high-fat food like avocado and have the results be shelf-stable. If you’re making jerky, blot the fat that comes to the surface. Electric food dehydrator with mango and papaya slices being dried. Industrial indirect solar fruit and vegetable dryer A food dehydrator uses a heat source and air flow to reduce the water content of foods. Query: how does a food dehydrator work",
"output": [
"In a food dehydrator, the combination of heat, as well as the movement of air, is used to dry foods."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-2d3f70b9e4a6429991d660fe54f3a293",
"input": "How frequently a kratom user ingests the drug may also affect how long it stays in his/her system, as well as its detectability on a drug test. A single-dose user of kratom may ingest just 5 grams, whereas a frequent multi-dose user may ingest 4 grams three times per day (t.i.d.). After quitting, how long does Kratom stay in the system? If you have recently stopped taking the drug and are hoping that it clears from the system soon, then you should read the above information carefully. Did you notice that any of the metabolite of the drug was found in your body days after the stoppage of the drug. How long does Kratom stay in your system after using it? 29 November 2017 Kratom’s main active alkaloid that is responsible for most of its effects is called Mitragynine. 1 Upload failed. 2 We are experiencing some problems, please try again. 3 You can only upload files of type PNG, JPG, or JPEG. 4 You can only upload files of type 3GP, 3GPP, MP4, MOV, AVI, MPG, MPEG, or RM. 5 You can only upload photos smaller than 5 MB. 6 You can only upload videos smaller than 600MB. On the other side, the slowest half-life recorded is 39.31 hours, which indicates that it may take 9 days to completely clear Kratom from an individual’s system. The people participating in this study used Kratom daily for more than a year and so we may assume that those who use Kratom less frequently or at lower doses would be close to the faster end of Kratom’s elimination half-life. Thank you so much for taking your time and knowledge to support my concerns. Not only did you answer my questions, you even took it a step further with replying with more pertinent information I needed to know. How does kratom stay in your system? - Answered by a verified Drug Testing Expert They are bluffing about randomly testing for it. But if he gets a random false positive for opiates, which happens more than you think, and he denies doing opiates then they will probably send it off for kratom. But kratom won't stay in your system longer than 30 hours tops, it has a short half life of around 3 hours. But if his drug court is anything like mine (I mean my friends) then they will arrest him just for doing kratom, because it's a prohibited substance on that program. The fastest elimination of the kratom alkaloids is 7 hours which means that is going to be there in the system for 1.64 days. In contrast, the slowest elimination half life was found to be 39.91 which means that the drug is cleared form the system in 9 days. For this reason, it is necessary to consider variables such as: specific kratom source, the individual using kratom, dosage ingested, frequency of usage, and co-administered drugs – when contemplating how long Kratom is likely to remain in your system. Kratom alkaloid content Query: how long does kratom remain in your system",
"output": [
"Kratom remains in your system for 1.64 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-5d3b9a9cb5d94e839e01fafa05c0c706",
"input": "What are the consequences of floods? Floods impact on both individuals and communities, and have social, economic, and environmental consequences. The consequences of floods, both negative and positive, vary greatly depending on the location and extent of flooding, and the vulnerability and value of the natural and constructed environments they affect. In Australia floods are the most expensive natural disasters. In Australia, floods are the most expensive type of natural disaster with direct costs estimated over the period 1967-2005 averaging at $377 million per year (calculated in 2008 Australian dollars). Reply to ASK-AN-EARTH-SCIENTIST Subject: Environmental Effects of Floods I'm doing a report on the effects of flooding on the environment. Can you help me? What can people do to help ease flooding? I live in an area where flooding hardly occurs; What could I do to help people that live in those areas? You asked about the effects of flooding on the environment. This is a pretty broad question, but I'll try to provide some answers to what I think you are asking about. First, floods are part of the natural cycle of things. The benefits of natural floods almost certainly outweigh the negative aspects. References and further reading. 1 Apan, A, Keogh, DU, King, D, Thomas, M, Mushtaq, S & Baddiley, P 2010, The 2008 floods in Queensland: a case study of vulnerability, resilience and adaptive capacity. Report for the National Climate Change Adaptation Research Facility, Gold Coast. There are positive and negative impacts of floods on the Ecosystem. The sudden appearance of a large quantity of flood water can benefit plant life. The under ground stored water can be replenished by the floodwater, while soil above ground can soak up the water. As a result, the plants receive water. Insurance of the structure and its contents against flooding can reduce the impacts of floods on individuals or companies. Floods have significant consequences for the environment In many natural systems, floods play an important role in maintaining key ecosystem functions and biodiversity. The problems start when flooding occurs in areas of large-scale human development of the landscape. In areas largely inhabited by people, there are both positive and negative environmental effects of flooding. Floods can distribute large amounts of water and suspended river sediment over vast areas. Skip links and keyboard navigation. 1 Skip to content. 2 Skip to navigation. 3 Skip to footer. 4 Use tab and cursor keys to move around the page (more information) Floods have large social consequences for communities and individuals. As most people are well aware, the immediate impacts of flooding include loss of human life, damage to property, destruction of crops, loss of livestock, and deterioration of health conditions owing to waterborne diseases. Floods also have a downside. Ecosystems depend on a careful balance of factors, and the sudden impact of a flood can quickly disrupt this. While floods affect mainly dry land, water-based habitats are at risk from the runoff of the flood. The run-off contains sediment and products such as pesticides and fertilizers, and will carry these into the ecosystem. Query: how does floods affect the ecosystem",
"output": [
"Impact of floods on the ecosystem includes replenishing of the underground stored water, loss of human life, destruction of crops, deterioration of health conditions owing to waterborne diseases, and soaking of water by soil above ground."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-31b879cc1de146ef892c26381ef6a366",
"input": "Here are 10 things you might not know about Abraham Lincoln and Nevada. 1. 'The Nevada Lincoln' An oil painting of Abraham Lincoln hangs above the Nevada Assembly speaker's rostrum, a relic of the state's history for the past 100 years. In 1915, legislators allocated $1,300 for the painting and frame to commemorate the state's 50th anniversary. President Abraham Lincoln won the civil war. He appointed many generals to complete this task. His goal was to preserve the union, though during the civil war, it became a bat … tle over slavery. From cars to bars, Lincoln well-remembered in Nevada. In February of 2007, former Speakers of the Assembly gathered beneath the oil painting of Abraham Lincoln to fete the state's first female Speaker, Barbara Buckley in the Assembly Chambers. There are many reasons that Abraham Lincoln should be remembered. He was a president that believed in equality for the people. He also taught others to stand up for what t…hey believed was right. Abraham Lincoln is important because he led the nation through its worst failure in its history, the US Civil War. From cars to bars, Lincoln well-remembered in Nevada. Abraham Lincoln ushered Nevada into statehood and the Silver State has honored the 16th President in myriad ways since. The Accomplishments of President Abraham Lincoln The oil painting of Lincoln is by artist and sculptor Richard R. Miller. Abraham Lincoln is remembered for his vital role as the leader in preserving the Union during the Civil War and beginning the process (Emancipation Proclamation) that led to the end of slavery in the United States. Confidence votes 20. Abraham Lincoln was remembered for freeing slaves who were the black americans in USA. There are many reasons that Abraham Lincoln should be remembered. He was a president that believed in equality for the people. He also taught others to stand up for what t … hey believed was right. Abraham Lincoln is important because he led the nation through its worst failure in its history, the US Civil War. Also, He used to be just a boy from Illinois and he became the 16th president. He went through being the president during the civil war and that's not easy. It's hard to think of a president who had a bigger impact on Nevada, Michael Green, a history professor at UNLV, said about the president who was shot by assassin John Wilkes Booth 150 years ago today. Abraham Lincoln was a well respected U.S. president who is remembered for many things. The top three things would be his ending of slavery, his excellent leadership skills, an … d his wonderful personality. Query: how is abraham lincoln remembered as",
"output": [
"Abraham Lincoln is remembered for his vital role as the leader in preserving the Union during the Civil War and beginning the process that led to the end of slavery in the United States."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8a97cf6485954716b3d57919f461480a",
"input": "Q: Approximately how long does the ACLS Course take to complete? A: Approximate course completion times are listed below. Times are based on a recommended ratio of 6 students to 1 instructor to 1 manikin or station (NOTE: the CPR and AED and Management of Respiratory Arrest stations require 1 instructor and 2 manikins for 6 students per station). Q: What materials must a student have to take the ACLS classroom course? A: To take the ACLS Course, each student must have access to his/her own ACLS Provider Manual before, during and after class. A: The AHA’s ACLS Course has been updated to reflect new science in the 2010 American Heart. Association Guidelines for Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation and Emergency Cardiovascular Care (2010. AHA Guidelines for CPR & ECC ). HeartCode ACLS. 1 Updated science and education reflecting the 2015 AHA Guidelines Update for CPR and ECC. 2 Enhanced learning experience through eSimulations, life-like animations, and realistic scenarios. 3 Advanced, evidence-based resuscitation education and skills critical to the Chain of Survival. Blended Learning (online portion, followed by hands-on session) The online portion can be completed in 6 ½ to 7 hours, depending on the student’s level of experience. The hands-on session for HeartCode ACLS will take approximately 5 hours without breaks. Course Completion Card AHA ACLS Provider Course Completion Card; valid for two years. A: Before taking ACLS, students should have a mastery of BLS skills. They should also be able to recognize. various heart rhythms, be familiar with different types of airway management tools and their use and. have knowledge of the drugs commonly used to treat cardiovascular irregularities. Q: Does successful completion of the ACLS Course result in an AHA course completion card? A: Yes. Students who successfully complete the requirements of the ACLS course will receive an AHA ACLS After successfully completing the HeartCode ACLS Course, including the online portion, followed by the hands-on skills session, students should be able to. 1 Apply the BLS, Primary, and Secondary Assessments sequence for a systematic evaluation of adult patients. A: The 2011 course includes key changes in advanced cardiovascular life support, reflecting the 2010 AHA Guidelines for CPR & ECC . Other key changes include: A: Before taking ACLS, students should have a mastery of BLS skills. have knowledge of the drugs commonly used to treat cardiovascular irregularities. (www.heart.org/eccstudent). access code, which is included on page ii of each ACLS Provider Manual and ACLS Instructor Manual. Query: how long does it take to do acls online",
"output": [
"The hands-on session for HeartCode ACLS will take approximately 5 hours without breaks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7aea86431cde4cd7a6c8d64887aed769",
"input": "Lives in Columbia SC (Southeastern Columbia) Related to William H Bowman IV, William H Bowman III, William I Bowman I, Susie P Bowman, Ethel Tobias Bowman III Show all locations and family Driving distance from CAE to Bowman, SC The total driving distance from CAE to Bowman, SC is 53 miles or 85 kilometers. Your trip begins at Columbia Metropolitan Airport in Columbia, South Carolina. It ends in Bowman, South Carolina. If you are planning a road trip, you might also want to calculate the total driving time from CAE to Bowman, SC so you can see when you'll arrive at your destination. Lives in Columbia SC (Northwest Columbia) Used to live in Irmo SC, Columbia SC Related to Sheral W Bowman Jr., Loraine P Bowman, Lakeisha D Bowman, Bernardana V Bowman, Phillip William Bowman How far is it to drive from Columbia Metropolitan Airport to Bowman, South Carolina? View a map with the driving distance between CAE and Bowman, SC to calculate your road trip mileage. Distance from Columbia, SC to Bowman, SC 61 Miles or 98 Km. How many hours? 1 hour 1 min 36 mins. Distance from Columbia, SC to Bowman, SC is 61 Miles or 98 Km. You can get this distance about 1 hour 0 mins. If you want to planning travel with plane for 50 Miles or 80 Km, You can get this distance about 36 mins. View phone, address history, email, public records for the 27 people named William Bowman in Columbia, SC. Whitepages is the most trusted directory. Driving distance from CAE to Bowman, SC. The total driving distance from CAE to Bowman, SC is 53 miles or 85 kilometers. Your trip begins at Columbia Metropolitan Airport in Columbia, South Carolina. It ends in Bowman, South Carolina. Distance, Gas Consumption and Emission Notes. Distance from Columbia, SC to Bowman, SC is 61 Miles or 98 Km. You can get this distance about 1 hour 0 mins. If you want to planning travel with plane for 50 Miles or 80 Km, You can get this distance about 36 mins. Distance from Columbia, SC to Bowman, SC is 61Miles or 98 Km. You can get this distance about 1 hour 1 min. If you want to planning travel with plane for 50 Miles or 80 Km, You can get this distance about 36 mins . A car with an average MPG will needs 2.82 gallons of gas to get the route between these points. The estimated cost of gas to get between Columbia, SC and Bowman, SC is $6.4. During the route, an average car will release 55.25 pounds of CO 2 to the atmosphere. Your carbon footprint is 0.91 pounds of CO 2 per mile. Query: how far is bowman sc from columbia sc",
"output": [
"The distance between Columbia, South Carolina and Bowman, South Carolina is 61 miles or 98 kms."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8547d6ba2f084b79938bcc84e6061a8f",
"input": "Gestation Calculator. Date when calf is due is from a given date of service based upon 283 days of pregnancy. Enter month and day and indicate whether it is the service date or the due date. Select a Month and Day. Cows with poorer fertility (or have a tougher time getting bred again after giving birth) may have a longer gestation period than those with good fertility (or those that have settled during the first part of the breeding season after a 45 to 60 day rest period).Usually small cows have a shorter gestation period than big cows, but not always. Researchers Say Incubation Period for Mad Cow Disease May Be Longer Than Thought From the WebMD Archives June 23, 2006 -- Symptoms of mad cow disease (bovine spongiform encephalopathy, BSE) may emerge more than 50 years after infection in humans, according to a new study. Researchers say the findings show that the size of a potential mad cow disease epidemic may be much bigger than previously thought. Gestation Calculator Date when calf is due is from a given date of service based upon 283 days of pregnancy. Enter month and day and indicate whether it is the service date or the due date. A: According to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, the average gestation period for cows is nine months. Pregnancy in cows lasts 280 days, on average; however, cows can give birth up to 290 days after conception, according to Merck Animal Health. Continue Reading Gestation Calculator: Date when calf is due is from a given date of service based upon 283 days of pregnancy. Enter month and day and indicate whether it is the service date or the due date. Generally, the average gestation period for a cow depends on the cow's breed. Manzano Angus Ranches explains that different breeds give birth at different times. For example, Jersey cows give birth at around 279 days after conception while Brahman cows tend to give birth closer to 292 days after conception. Angus cows have a gestation period of around 281 days. Learn more about Animal Reproduction Gestation Table; Frame Scoring; Calculating Adjusted Weights; EVENTS CALENDAR; CONTACT On average, the gestation period or length-of-pregnancy of a cow is 285 days long. This is similar to the pregnancy period of a woman, which is closer to around 9 months or ~2 … 60 days. However, actual gestation period of a cow can range from 270 days to 295 days, depending primarily on breed[s], age, body condition and nutritional health. On average, the gestation period or length-of-pregnancy of a cow is 285 days long. This is similar to the pregnancy period of a woman, which is closer to around 9 months or ~260 days. However, actual gestation period of a cow can range from 270 days to 295 days, depending primarily on breed[s], age, body condition and nutritional health. Length of gestation is primarily an inherited trait, but has nothing to do with the rate of maturity of a certain breed or an individual animal. Query: how long is the gestation period for cows",
"output": [
"On average, the gestation period of a cow is 285 days long."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-5776228130564661be76f61c40546ac0",
"input": "There are two types of vaccine that protect against polio: inactivated poliovirus vaccine (IPV) and oral poliovirus vaccine (OPV). IPV is given as an injection in the leg or arm, depending on the patient's age. Polio vaccine may be given at the same time as other vaccines. Most people should get polio vaccine when they are children. Children get 4 doses of IPV at these ages: 2 months, 4 months, 6-18 months, and a booster dose at 4-6 years. OPV has not been used in the United States since 2000 but is still used in many parts of the world. 1 What Everyone Should Know Basic information for people interested in the vaccine... (https://www.cdc.gov/vaccines/vpd/polio/public/index.html) These antibodies protect you from illness should you become infected with the polio virus. The vaccine is safe to be given if you are pregnant or breast-feeding. Before 2004, the polio vaccine was given as drops into the mouth. It is now always given as an injection. If you have previously started a course of polio immunisation with oral vaccine you can finish off the course with polio injections. You do not need to start again. Polio immunisation timetable The polio vaccine is used to help prevent these diseases in children and adults. This vaccine works by exposing you to a small dose of the virus, which causes the body to develop immunity to the disease. Polio mainly affects children under 5 years of age. Polio is very infectious. The infection usually spreads from person to person through contact with the stools (faeces) of an infected person. MMR is a two-shot series of vaccines usually given during childhood. A child should receive the first shot when he is between 12-15 months, and the second when he's between 4-6 years of age. If you're not sure if you have had the diseases or the vaccines (prior to 1971 it was given in three separate shots), you can get the MMR vaccine as an adult. Talk to your doctor about it if: You were born after 1956. (If you were born during or before 1956, you are presumed to be immune, because many children had the diseases then.) In 2000, the U.S. switched to the inactivated polio vaccine (IPV). Using an inactive (dead) form of the virus that cannot cause polio, the IPV is given as a shot in the arm or leg. Who Needs the Polio Vaccine. Most people should get the polio vaccine when they are children. Children should be vaccinated with four doses of IPV at the following ages: Meningococcal vaccine is also recommended for children aged 2 months through 18 years who travel to or reside in areas where N. meningitidis is hyperendemic or epidemic; for these children, providers should take care to use a meningococcal vaccine that is licensed for the child’s age group and contains all 4 serotypes (A, C, Y, W-135). The first polio vaccine was the inactivated polio vaccine. It was developed by Jonas Salk and came into use in 1955. The oral polio vaccine was developed by Albert Sabin and came into commercial use in 1961. It would only take one person infected with polio coming from another country to bring the disease back here if we were not protected by vaccination. If the effort to eliminate the disease from the world is successful, some day we won't need polio vaccine. Until then, we need to keep getting our children vaccinated. Polio vaccine Like any medicine, there’s a very small chance that the polio vaccine could cause a serious reaction. Keep in mind that getting the polio vaccine is much safer than getting polio. Learn more about vaccine side effects. Query: at what age do you take the polio vaccination",
"output": [
"Children get 4 doses of IPV at these age of 2 months, 4 months, 6-18 months, and a booster dose at 4-6 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8e15c47f484a4ab8b3e9fd7aab6f1f41",
"input": "The Channel Tunnel, commonly referred to the The Chunnel or the Euro Tunnel, features two tubes for rail traffic, one for each direction. A smaller tube is reserved for service and escape functions. The tubes are used by Eurostar for transporting passengers only and by Le Shuttle for those bringing their vehicles. The tunnel is 31 miles long, with 23 of those miles beneath the surface of the water, traveling at an average depth of 150 feet below the seabed. Eurostar The Eurostar passenger train is not only the quickest journey across the Chunnel, but it also has faster access and loading times. Watch in High Definition! On our recent trip to Europe, we rode the Chunnel between London, England and Paris, France. The Chunnel Service is operated by Eur... Watch in High Definition! On our recent trip to Europe, we rode the Chunnel between London, England and Paris, France. The Chunnel Service is operated by Eurostar and runs from St. Pancras International Station in London, under the English Channel, to Gare du Nord in Paris. On the English side of the channel, the train departs from Folkestone in the county of Kent. It arrives into the city of Coquelles, near Calais, on the French side. The tunnel is 31 miles long, with 23 of those miles beneath the surface of the water, traveling at an average depth of 150 feet below the seabed. Eurostar. The Eurostar passenger train is not only the quickest journey across the Chunnel, but it also has faster access and loading times. The actual traveling time in the tunnel itself is just 20 minutes. It is recommended to arrive an hour ahead of time to be sure you get a seat and to get through the boarding process. For example, Eurostar service from London to Paris runs every 30 minutes during peak hours and takes an average of two hours and 20 minutes. Eurostar also crosses the Chunnel for excursions to other places in Europe, including Brussels, the French Alps during ski season and to Disneyland Paris daily in the summer. More Articles. 1 Train Travel in the U.K. 2 How to Get From London, England, to Paris, France, by Train. 3 Rail Travel to Inverness, Scotland. 4 How to Go to Ireland From London by Train. 5 How to Get From London, England to Lourdes, France. 6 Rail Travel: Kiev, Ukraine to Odessa. The Eurostar goes from Paris to London in less than 2 1/2 hours. There is an allotted number of discount fare tickets for each departure date and time. The longer you wait, the higher the fare. To get the lowest fare ($52.50 US), book ASAP (up to 120 days in advance) at www.eurostar.com. Print your own tickets. Images related to Channel Tunnel. 1 Probably more people than Sandling railway station platform has ever seen; on the left passengers disembark from the 'Tunnel Explorer' excursion, and on the right 319008 arrives with one of the trips back from the Channel Tunnel. Home > build. How the Channel Tunnel was Built. The Channel Tunnel is one of the biggest engineering projects ever undertaken in the UK. Taking more than five years to complete, with more than 13,000 workers from England and France collaborating to realise the vision, the tunnel has been named one of the seven wonders of the modern world. Remember that the total time spent in the Chunnel is only a portion of your journey if you are traveling as a walk-on passenger on the Eurostar train. Depending on your final destination, you will be on board the Eurostar for varying amounts of time. Query: how long is the chunnel?",
"output": [
"The Chunnel tunnel is 31 miles long."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7d0e629ffe1c49ff8fa2881d1625026a",
"input": "As a transfer student, I didnt know what to expect from a school this small. After two years Im really understanding the benefits of the size of Woodbury. I have gotten some amazing personal attention from the professors in my last two years and they really put the effort into your education. The Master of Science (MSArch) in Landscape + Urbanism is a three semester studio-based program for individuals holding a professional degree in architecture or landscape architecture. The urbanism track equips architects with the skills to lead, craft policy, and design the built environment. Beginning with the fall semester of 2013, the Woodbury University - San Diego master's program will offer both a 3-year program for those without a prior degree in architecture and a 2-year program for those who have a pre-professional degree in the architecture field. Students will have courses each semester that expose them to the design and visualization process while also giving them technical education in building techniques and architectural history. What other costs are there for this program? This fee is required of all students who park on campus at the following rates: Auto Permits: $35.00 Motorcycle Permits: $17.50 Carpool Permits: $30.00 For further program cost information click here. For undergraduate students, Woodbury University coordinates a comprehensive financial-aid program consisting of scholarships, grants, loans and part-time employment through funding from state and federal programs, its own resources, and outside/private donors. Transfer students from NAAB-accredited architecture programs, in addition to meeting the minimum requirements as set by Auburn University, will be evaluated by the Academic Review Committee (ARC) for placement. The ARC will determine the level of placement in the Professional Architecture Design Studio sequence or in the Pre-Architecture Program. As one student observed, I really wanted to integrate work into my architectural education. I knew that combining the experience of both would make me stronger and it has. Catherine Herbst, architecture chair for Woodbury University’s San Diego campus, agrees that learning is more effective when education and practice are integrated. program is rigorous and competitive. Portfolio review is required for admission to the professional B.F.A. program. CSULB’s Interior Design program is approved by the National Association of Schools of Art & Design *The B.F.A. in Interior Design is impacted at CSULB. See CSULB admission website for more details regarding course selection criteria. **IDE courses are part of the Industrial Design Engineering program at Mt. SAC. Interior Design students should wait and take the equivalent courses (CSULB DESN 151 and DESN 255) at CSULB. Student should meet with a Mt. SAC counselor for more details. Transfer Major Sheet School of Architecture Los Angeles & San Diego Woodbury School of Architecture is distinguished by its multiple locations at the heart of the Southern California creative industries: Los Angeles, Hollywood and San Diego. Students who got into Woodbury: The school is relatively easy to get in because of its small size. Many students get in but end up not graduating because they were probably never meant to go to college anyways. Being an easier school to get in sometimes attracts a lower quality student that is more prone to drop out. Query: how long is the architecture program for woodbury transfer students",
"output": [
"It takes 2-year for architecture program in Woodbury transfer students."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4f8305885e9648798116a9da11d3f023",
"input": "Stair Tread (Run) Length: 10 Inches Minimum Translated: This means that the horizontal distance from the edge of the stair to the back part where it stops (called the riser) should be at least 10 inches long. The following stair measurements are important: 1 The rise height or rise of each step is measured from the top of one tread to the next. It is not the physical height of the riser; the latter excludes the thickness of the tread. A person using the stairs would move this distance vertically for each step taken. Stair Tread (Run) Length: 10 Inches Minimum. 1 Translated: This means that the horizontal distance from the edge of the stair to the back part where it stops (called the riser) should be at least 10 inches long. 2 Reason: To allow a majority of your foot to have enough room to rest on the stair. Here’s how to assemble it: 1 1. Use a drill or jigsaw to wallow out a hole in each triangle. 2 2. Lay everything out on your stairs (center piece and two triangles) and dry-fit your tool. 3 4. Nail the spacers to the ends of the triangles. The Stairtek 48 in. x 11-1/2 in. Prefinished The Stairtek 48 in. x 11-1/2 in. Prefinished Gunstock Red Oak Retread is ideal for resurfacing and upgrading your stairs. It offers a warm semi-gloss natural wood finish and is recommended for interior use. The larger width of lumber that is used also provides fewer pieces. These are combined and manufactured into a single stair tread instead of the individual pieces of flooring. Again, the fewer joints both in width and length, makes the treads stronger and more durable. Finally, the nosing itself is not an added piece as in the case of flooring but part of the tread itself. The Stairtek 42 in. x 11-1/2 in. Gunstock The Stairtek 42 in. x 11-1/2 in. Gunstock Red Oak Tread stands up to foot traffic and is designed to last. It offers a warm semi-gloss natural wood finish and is recommended for interior use. How to make your own stair tread gauge. First, you’ll need to assemble/create a few parts: Here are the parts: 2 wing nuts, 4 washers, and 2 bolts. 2 triangle shapes. I made mine from scrap wood. The side of the triangle that faces the wall is the same depth as the stair tread. 1 center section. The same is true for length, because the flooring will be fitted end to end, length is not an important factor so shorter pieces are perfectly acceptable for flooring. When used on stair treads, narrow and short flooring create a number of issues. First, there are many visible joints. We carry the most unique and up-to-date stair tread selection, with one-of-a-kind options such as animal print stair treads and modern stair treads to go with your unconventional style. We also have classic solid-colored, braided, Oriental and bullnose stair treads to suit your more traditional décor. Query: how large is a stair tread",
"output": [
"The length of Stair Tread is 10 Inches Minimum."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-01ed2cdcc10d419aa19c6880aff29b30",
"input": "Walkie Talkie 10 Codes These short, two way radio (or walkie talkie) codes are designed to make radio communications fast and easy. Try them on your Motorola two way radios today! That's more or less how digital radio works! 1 The transmitter sends program signals broken into fragments and coded in numbers (digits). 2 The transmitter sends each fragment many times to increase the chances of it getting through. It's simple. Radio waves travel unbelievably fast—at the speed of light (300,000 km or 186,000 miles per second). Analog radio. Ocean waves carry energy by making the water move up and down. In much the same way, radio waves carry energy as an invisible, up-and-down movement of electricity and magnetism. The electromagnetic energy, which is a mixture of electricity and magnetism, travels past you in waves like those on the surface of the ocean. These are called radio waves. Like ocean waves, radio waves have a certain speed, length, and frequency. The speed is simply how fast the wave travels between two places. The wavelength is the distance between one crest (wave peak) and the next, while the frequency is the number of waves that arrive each second. Click the image to see a slightly bigger photo. 1 External, telescopic FM antenna: The one on this radio extends to about 30 cm (1 ft), which is plenty long enough to catch a good range of FM broadcasts. 2 Battery compartment: This radio is either battery or AC powered. Walkie Talkie 10 Codes. These short, two way radio (or walkie talkie) codes are designed to make radio communications fast and easy. Try them on your Motorola two way radios today! 10-1 = Receiving poorly. 10-2 = Receiving well. 10-3 = Stop transmitting. 10-4 = Message received. 10-5 = Relay message to ___. General and technical. 1 Keith's Radio Station: Broadcast, Satellite and Internet by John Allen Hendricks and Bruce Mims. 2 Build Your Own Transistor Radios: A Hobbyist's Guide to High-Performance and Low-Powered Radio Circuits Paperback by Ronald Quan. 3 How Radio Signals Work by Jim Sinclair. Although radio broadcasting is not quite as popular as it once was, the basic idea of wireless communication remains hugely important: in the last few years, radio has become the heart of new technologies such as wireless Internet, cellphones (mobile phones), and RFID (radio frequency identification) chips. 10-19 = Nothing for you, return to base 10-20 = My location is _____ 10-21 = Call by telephone 10-22 = Report in person to 10-23 = Stand by 10-24 = Completed last assignment 10-25 = Can you contact _____ 10-26 = Disregard last information 10-27 = I am moving to channel ____ 10-28 = Identify your station 10-29 = Time is up for contact 10-30 = Does not conform to FCC rules 10-32 = I will give you a radio check 10-33 = Emergency Traffic 10-34 = Trouble at this station 10-35 = Confidential ... Radio waves travel unbelievably fast—at the speed of light (300,000 km or 186,000 miles per second). Analog radio Ocean waves carry energy by making the water move up and down. Query: how fast is radio communication",
"output": [
"Radio waves travel unbelievably fast— at the speed of 300,000 km or 186,000 miles per second."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0ef2790e5d6946269e3d0855e6c0509e",
"input": "It only takes hours for both latex and oil-based paints to dry, but it can take days or even weeks for paint to completely cure. As paint dries, water and solvents evaporate, leaving the pigment and other compounds to bind together and harden. When paint dries, the carrier (typically water in latex paints, a solvent in oil based paints) evaporates, allowing the paint to form a film. As the carrier evaporates, other chemicals that act as stabilizers evaporate as well. The stabilizers prevent the paint curing in the can. Tips and Hints. 1 If you’re unsure if your paint is cured, find an out of the way place and press your fingernail into the paint. 2 Make sure you give your paint the right conditions to dry and cure. 3 If the temperature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit, it’s too cold for paint to dry or cure properly. 4 Quicken dry time by running box fans on fresh paint. Step 1. Allow the enamel paint to cure for a full 24 hours on the glass before applying any heat. If you prefer to slow-cure your enamel on the glassware, it can take up to 21 days. Step 2 This does not mean they are cured. Cure time is when the acrylic film is fully stable, close to its maximum durability, water resistant and less vulnerable to attack by mild solvents. This usually takes at least three days for thin applications and may take much longer (up to two weeks or more) for thick applications. Hi guys, how long does it take Urethane based single stage to cure fully. typically in the 55 to 65 degree window. Also would it be considered cured if I put some thinner on a rag and wipe. the paint lightly in a small spot and the Paint did not dissolve on contact. Any help is appreciated. Thanks. A: If you need to paint outside with latex paint when temperatures are moving up and down like a yo-yo, I suggest you use one of the latex like Duration, Resilience, or SuperPaint. These products can be applied and will cure at lower temperatures, as low as 35° F. Traditional latex-based paints need temperatures above 60° F to cure properly. The curing time of paint is dependent on a variety of factors, such as: climate, number of coats, type of paint, etc. The greatest determinant is which type of paint you use. Most paints will include the on the label how many hours it takes that paint to dry to the touch. Depending on the ventilation, oil-based paint takes about twelve hours to dry to the touch. Latex paint will feel dry in as few as three hours. However, the full curing time takes much longer. Oil-based Paints. As oil-based paint cures, the thinner evaporates and the oils seep into the pores of the surface leaving behind the binder and the pigment. How long does it take for paint to cure? How long do I need to wait before my walls are finally finished? Depending on color choice, atmospheric conditions, and other variables, latex paint may take up to 30 days for a full cure. Fresh latex paint should be allowed to cure for at least 14 days before attempting to wipe or wash the walls. It can be sensitive to water or chemicals during the curing process. Also note that lower sheens, such as flat or eggshell, will be more susceptible to moisture and chemicals even after fully cured. Hi guys, how long does it take Urethane based single stage to cure fully typically in the 55 to 65 degree window. Also would it be considered cured if I put some thinner on a rag and wipe the paint lightly in a small spot and the Paint did not dissolve on contact Any help is appreciated. Thanks. X Query: how long does it take for paint to cure",
"output": [
"Latex paint may take up to 30 days for a full cure."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-5cc297a734fe4483b674eea95d0b37e3",
"input": "Vinyl doesn’t last very long. A well cared for vinyl wrap can last for up to 7 years. (We’ve seen some last longer, but these were mostly show cars that didn’t see much time outside.) We usually give a lifespan of 5-7 years for our color change films (3M, Avery, etc…) and 5 years for our digitally printed wraps. Along with boats; jet skis, sea-doo’s, and even yachts can be wrapped. With help from the Custom-Car-Wraps team, wrapping your vehicle to meet your every need has just got easier! Design Your Own Boat Wrap. It all starts with creating a quick mock-up layout of the design that you would like for your vehicle via the Custom-Car-Wraps website designer. As for the cost. I bet you could wrap your boat 3 times, to equal the cost of regel coating. Anyways, feel free to give me a call and we can see if this is something you will want to persue. Thanks Corey Fenske Sticky Graphics 916-952-3324 Oh, Camo does look really cool on the water. I've always wanted to do someones boat with tules. We’ve been printing and shipping wrap kits all over the world for the last 8 years and in the last 8 years we’ve never had a boat wrap that didn’t fit. Every single wrap project we take on is a custom one off project. We have to get photos, then create a guide of what we need to measure. Boat Wrap & Vehicle Wrap Kits designed, printed and shipped by Wake Graphics. Wake Graphics is a vinyl wraps and graphics company that specializes in every aspect of the wrap process from design, to print, to ship and even the wrap installation. So, How Long Will My Boat Wrap Last? The industry does not offer any warranty coverage for marine wrap installations, only durability ratings. If preventative measures are taken and the proper methodology is used, it is reasonable to expect a wrap to last on average 3-5 years. Check with your wrap provider to see what coverage they offer against failure. We currently have a 12 month/100 hour satisfaction guarantee. You worked hard for your boat now let your boat work for you! Custom Graphics and Signs understands the importance of marketing your brand and works closely with you from concept to installation to develop the most effective boat wraps and marine graphics designed to fit your business,your budget and your style. How long does a decal boat wrap last? We use the highest grade 3M films in the production of our boat wraps. Although 3M rates the lifespan of their vinyl films with laminate for a seven years, we recommend removing a vinyl boat wrap within 5 years to help with difficult removal scenarios. I'm sure you are not as rough on your boat as a touring pro, so every thing will last a lot longer. The warenty is only going to cover man. defects, or shop errors. The other nice thing about wraps are, if you hit it and rip part of it, you can always reprint a small section and patch it. Laminating and removing boat vinyl Once you've applied the vinyl-if you've avoided air-egress vinyl and applied it properly-it should last at least through one boating season. Some boat wraps may last longer. Like anything, it depends on the wear and tear on the boat. You can potentially extend the life of the wrap by laminating it. Query: how long do boat wraps graphics last",
"output": [
"A boat wraps last for 3 to 5 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ec8700963f724e10bfd21c198cfb5c6a",
"input": "ecological design by sim van der ryn reviews, - Sim Van der Ryn and Stuart Cowan present a vision of how the living world and the human world can be rejoined by taking ecology as the basis for design. Sim van der Ryn was a pioneer in this “green design” movement, and when he was appointed California State Architect by newly elected Governor Jerry Brown in 1975, an opportunity to take these ideas to a larger scale presented itself. The most misunderstood notion in sustainable design today is the idea that it’s a new thing. It’s not. Sustainability is very old school and grounded in common sense. Things were pretty much sustainable until our great, great, great grandparents starting making and selling each other so much stuff. A contraction of permanent agriculture, it is an approach to developing ecological human habitats and food production systems focused not on the separate elements of climate, plants, animals, soils, and water use, but on their relationships and how they are placed in the landscape. Sim Van der Ryn and Peter Calthorpe (1986) Sustainable communities : a new design synthesis for cities, suburbs, and towns, Sierra Club Books. ISBN 0-87156-629-X. Paolo Soleri (1973) Arcology : the city in the image of man, MIT Press. ISBN 0-262-19060-5. Ecological Design. January 1, 1996. by Sim Van der Ryn and Stuart Cowan. Island Press, Washington, D.C., 1996. 200 pages; hardcover $40.00; paperback $19.95. Coauthors Van der Ryn and Cowan define ecological design as design that “minimizes environmentally destructive impacts by integrating itself with living processes.” Ecology, they argue, should be the basis of design; it is nature’s own design strategies we find when we seek to minimize environmental impacts. Ecological Design by Sim Van der Ryn - free download in PDF and CHM, DOC, FB3 eBook formats now! bookmark_border PDF ecological-design-sim-van-der-ryn.pdf file_download bookmark_border DOC ecological-design-sim-van-der-ryn.doc file_download Integrated Ecological Design. Ecological design is defined by Sim Van der Ryn and Stuart Cowan as “any form of design that minimizes environmentally destructive impacts by integrating itself with living processes” (Van der Ryn, Cowan S, 1996). Ecological design is an integrative ecologically responsible design discipline. Summary: Principles of Ecological Design gives insight, inspiration, and guidance for a radical redesign of our way of life. It illuminates a way to disengage from corporate consumer culture, and create a more fulfilling lifestyle. These principles are fundamental to any green building or ecological living initiative. More than any other feature, it is the interaction of the user with the design that enables ecological design to be so much more efficient. For example, recycling requires more thought and action from people than if they put any solid they don’t want in the trash, and any liquid they’re done with down the drain. Query: how does sim van der ryn define sustainable (ecological) design?",
"output": [
"Ecological design is defined by Sim Van der Ryn and Stuart Cowan as “any form of design that minimizes environmentally destructive impacts by integrating itself with living processes”. Ecological design is an integrative ecologically responsible design discipline."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f6531a56fb214172b9c549a3d4612429",
"input": "After leaving the governorship, Roosevelt served as the vice president of the United States. President McKinley was assassinated on September 14, 1901, and Roosevelt, who was the vice president at the time, succeeded to the presidency. In 1904 he was elected to a term of his own. After leaving the White House, Roosevelt ran unsuccessfully for reelection on the 1912 and 1916 Progressive Party ticket. The 26th President of the United States was Theodore Roosevelt from September 14, 1901 to March 4, 1909. Assuming the Presidency at the depth of the Great Depression as our 32nd President (1933-1945), Franklin D. Roosevelt helped the American people regain faith in themselves. Assuming the Presidency at the depth of the Great Depression, Franklin D. Roosevelt helped the American people regain faith in themselves. The experience in Dakota had left an indelible mark on Roosevelt's heart, though he would not return often or for long periods after 1887. Roosevelt declared the Badlands as the place where the romance of my life began, and they became as much a beloved part of his past as it was a stepping stone for his future. Indeed, Roosevelt's progressive platform encompassed nearly every progressive ideal later enshrined in the New Deal of Franklin D. Roosevelt, the Fair Deal of Harry S. Truman, the New Frontier of John F. Kennedy, and the Great Society of Lyndon B. Johnson. In 1897, the newly elected Republican President, William McKinley, appointed Roosevelt assistant secretary of the Navy. Roosevelt had long believed in the importance of the Navy and the role it played in national defense. Franklin D. Roosevelt. Franklin Delano Roosevelt (/ˈroʊzəvəlt/, his own pronunciation, or /ˈroʊzəvɛlt/; January 30, 1882 – April 12, 1945), commonly known as FDR, was an American statesman and political leader who served as the 32nd President of the United States from 1933 until his death in 1945. Quick Answer. Teddy Roosevelt served almost two terms as president. He became president after William McKinley was assassinated on Sept. 14, 1901, six months into his term as president. At the time of the assassination, Roosevelt was only 42 years old, making him the youngest person to ever be president. Because the assassination occurred so early in McKinley's term, Roosevelt served almost an entire first term. Theodore Roosevelt, age 7. He was called Teedie by his parents and siblings. NPS. Childhood. 1858. October 27 - Born at 28 East 20th Street, New York, NY to Theodore Sr. and Martha (Mittie) Bulloch Roosevelt. He was the second child of four (sister Anna Bamie born 1855) 1860-61. Brother Elliot (1860) and sister Corinne (1861) born; 1870 Extremists Start New Revolt in Berlin; Call on Masses to Destroy the Government. Oyster Bay, L.I., Jan. 6. -- Theodore Roosevelt, former President of the United States, died this morning between 4 and 4:15 o'clock while asleep in his bed at his home on Sagamore Hill, in this place. His physicians said that the immediate cause of death was a clot of blood which detached itself from a vein and entered the lungs. Query: how long was theodore roosevelt president",
"output": [
"Theodore Roosevelt was president from September 14, 1901 to March 4, 1909."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-2751caa9bb5a4ebfa86f5ba2bf1680bc",
"input": "Dental coverage only has to be offered to children and teens under 18. If your son is unemployed and you don't get deductions for him, you may want to have him file his own taxes so he can take advantage of assistance programs including cost assistance on the Marketplace and Medicaid if your state expanded. If dental is part of the group health plan then everyone on the plan should be offered the option, if dental is a stand-alone that is added to the plan to adhere to the law, then that coverage can be dropped when the child ages out of the requirement for pediatric dental and vision. He is covered under my husband’s insurance yet, but only major medical. He had Dental also from my husband’s insurance, but they dropped him at the age of 23. They claim they can do this. Is this legal under the Obamacare? They did not inform us that he was being dropped. I just read on line that as part of the Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act signed in to law March 23, 2010, young adults up to age 26 are eligible for coverage under their parent/guardian’s health care plans – including dental, regardless of marital status, dependent status, student status, or residency. Under-26 coverage ends on a child’s 26th birthday. When a child loses coverage on their 26th birthday, they qualify for a Special Enrollment Period. This lets them enroll in a health plan outside Open Enrollment. Learn more about how someone can get covered when they turn 26 years old. Young Adult Coverage. Under current law, if your plan covers children, you can now add or keep your children on your health insurance policy until they turn 26 years old. Children can join or remain on a parent's plan even if they are: Married. Preventive Care Young Adult Coverage Under current law, if your plan covers children, you can now add or keep your children on your health insurance policy until they turn 26 years old. Share your ObamaCare story and let everyone know how the Affordable Care Act has affected you or Read ObamaCare stories our readers have shared. ObamaCare Q&A Have an ObamaCare question, or a question about healthcare or health insurance? This started in May of 2015 with my oldest, and again this year with my middle child. My oldest is going on for a Nursing degree and took little menial courses to stay full time so she could remain under our coverage, however the one who just graduated this past week, has a degree, has loans to pay off, no solid full time job with benefits, but was kicked off of our Tricare insurance coverage. Children can join or remain on a parent's plan even if they are: 1 Married. 2 Not living with their parents. 3 Attending school. 4 Not financially dependent on their parents. 5 Eligible to enroll in their employer’s plan. Query: how long can i cover my child under the affordable care act",
"output": [
"Affordable Care Act signed in to law March 23, 2010, young adults up to age 26 are eligible for coverage under their parent/guardian’s health care plans."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-2fdbbb5f198f411e8b96bd4a32f76f31",
"input": "How long does it take in the state of Florida for a background check to come back from Walmart? Does Accenture hire people with a DUI on their record? Should I tell HR now about the record or wait till I get an offer? Waiting for a background checks requires a blend of “I want it now” and “I want it done right.” That’s because they all take time, whether it’s a few minutes to verify someone’s identity to weeks or longer for a detailed portfolio on a senior-level candidate. How long does a background check take? Is there a way I can see where I am in the background check process? The Background Check Process; Will a misdemeanor or felony show up on a background check? How Do I Log in to Applicant Center? VIEW ALL Candidate Background Check FAQ From our mobile-friendly Applicant Center to videos, we've got tools to help you get hired. Why is my Walmart background check taking so long? While checking out the criminal conviction records section of the report you will see if the person had been involved with the 5-0, has any sort of police warrants, investigate crime plus public arrest details, was the individual ever stopped for a dui, misdemeanors, and various documents. But skipping an accurate background check and ‘going with your gut’ increases the possibility of future unpleasant surprises and even possible damage your organization. So how long does background checks take? On average, what comes up on a pre-employment background check takes two to four days, but can move faster or slower for various reasons: Technical delays, including difficulty finding records, computer problems, or documents with typos, spelling errors, or incomplete info. Review delays. Why is my Walmart background check taking so long? This is the first site to see backgroundtool.com ahead of doing to much research. This Thorough Background / People Research Report is going to show a ton of data. With information coming from 50 states you'll have access to essentially the most comprehensive people repositories on the net. What does a background check consist of? How can I prepare for my Background Check? Will a misdemeanor or felony show up on a background check? What’s in Education and Professional License verifications? How To Prepare for a Background Check VIEW ALL March 1, 2017 By admin. Waiting for a background checks requires a blend of “I want it now” and “I want it done right.”. That’s because they all take time, whether it’s a few minutes to verify someone’s identity to weeks or longer for a detailed portfolio on a senior-level candidate. Generally expect twice as long as the domestic versions – 4-6 days instead of 2-3. Companies wondering how long should a background check take should make sure all submitted information is accurate and complete, and be honest and cooperative with anyone assisting in gathering this info. Query: how long does it take for background check at a",
"output": [
"It takes 4 to 6 days for background check."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-6b273abcf47b4da48cbb0dcf4e5a280e",
"input": "A gallium scan is a nuclear medicine test that uses a special camera to take pictures of specific tissues in the body after a radioactive tracer (radionuclide or radioisotope) makes them visible. Skip to main content A nuclear stress test may be performed in combination with an exercise stress test, in which you walk on a treadmill. If you aren't able to exercise, you'll receive a drug through an IV that mimics exercise by increasing blood flow to your heart. A nuclear stress test can take two or more hours, depending on the radioactive material and imaging tests used. Before a nuclear stress test First, your doctor will ask you some questions about your medical history and how often and strenuously you exercise. The VQ scan does not hurt. You will feel a prick when the liquid is injected. How long will the test take? A VQ scan will take about 1 hour to complete. A VQ scan is a nuclear medicine exam performed to evaluate the airflow and blood flow in the lungs. The airflow is evaluated by breathing in an oxygen mixture containing a radioactive tracer that a special camera can detect. Cardiac Nuclear Medicine. 1 Cardiac nuclear medicine imaging evaluates the heart for coronary artery disease and cardiomyopathy. 2 Tell your doctor if there’s a possibility you are pregnant or if you are breastfeeding and discuss any recent illnesses, medical conditions, allergies and medications you’re taking. Nuclear Medicine 400 lbs. 440 lbs. Ultrasound 500 lbs. Ultrasound Stretcher 500 lbs. Outpatient/Lab Center X-ray 460 lbs. Dexa scan 350 lbs. Dexa table 300 lbs. If you have any questions about your exam please call the Imaging Department Watauga Medical Center: (828) 262-4153 Watauga Medical Outpatient Imaging/Lab Center: (828) 266-2498 • On the day of your exam please arrive 15 minutes prior to your exam time to register at outpatient registration. • To have an imaging exam done there must be a physicians order. • According to the patient preps for certain exams, lab results should be available prior to the exam. Table Weight Limits for each facility Cannon Memorial Hospital Scheduling / General information. • All Imaging exams must be scheduled with the scheduling. department with exception to some diagnostic radiology exams. • To schedule an appointment please contact our scheduling. department at 828-268-9037 between the hours of. 8:00am-5:00pm. Test Overview. A gallium scan is a nuclear medicine test that can check for problem areas in certain tissues in your body. A radioactive tracer (tracer) called gallium citrate is injected into a vein in your arm. It moves through your bloodstream and into certain tissues. Current and accurate information for patients about cardiac nuclear medicine. Learn what you might experience, how to prepare for the exam, benefits, risks and much more. Toggle navigation Is Nuclear Medicine Safe? The amount of radiation is comparable to a diagnostic x-ray. It is important to consider the potential benefits to the Nuclear Medicine exam related to the risk of a small dose of radiation. Query: how long does a vq nuclear medicine exam take",
"output": [
"A VQ nuclear medicine exam takes 1 hour to complete."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-94d930dbd84643dbb2437591357e97ba",
"input": "How long do I have to wait for my USPS tracking to update before you will file a claim? USPS does not consider a package lost or stolen until fifteen (15) days have passed since the last tracking update (excluding Sundays and federal holidays). In the unlikely event your tracking does not update by the fifteenth day, we will be allowed to initiate the claims process. Prior to that, all we can do is notify USPS of the situation. Please contact us if your tracking does not update for fifteen (15) days, so our Claims Department can act accordingly. Last Updated: 1 year ago in After Ordering There’s always a question as to who makes the claim: 1 Damaged or lost contents: Either the seller or the buyer can file the claim. 2 Complete loss: When a package has not turned up within 30 days, the seller files the claim. You can file your claim online direct on the USPS site. If you want to make your claim at the Post Office, you must get a copy of PS Form 1000, Domestic Claim or Registered Mail Inquiry. Go to the post office or download it. Fill out the form with all the details required and bring your backup information. To make a damage claim, you must produce evidence of insurance. Making a claim with the post office for your lost eBay items: Oh man, talk about a hassle. But making a claim with any carrier isn’t a bowl of cherries on any day. Before making a claim with the USPS, check to make sure your package was covered by postal insurance. If you use private insurance instead, you make a claim with your insurance carrier, not the post office. Damaged or lost contents: Either the seller or the buyer can file the claim. Complete loss: When a package has not turned up within 30 days, the seller files the claim. You can file your claim online direct on the USPS site. The following list shows some of the documents accepted by the post office for damage claims (however, they may ask for more thorough proof): 1 Sales receipt or descriptive invoice. 2 Copy of your canceled check or money order receipt. 3 Picture and description of a similar item from a catalog if your receipt isn’t available. n ONLY if the original claim was filed online, you may submit the appeal via online claims: 1 n Sign in to your online claims account at , go to the Claims History page, and then click on the article number for the specific claim you wish to appeal. Once you are on the Claim Status page, click Submit an Appeal. If all goes well and your claim is deemed legit, you should get your payment within 30 days. If you don’t hear from the post office within 45 days, you have to submit a duplicate claim using the original claim number. Note to self (and to you): Always make a copy of any form you give to the government. Making a claim with the post office for your lost eBay items: Oh man, talk about a hassle. But making a claim with any carrier isn’t a bowl of cherries on any day. Before making a claim with the USPS, check to make sure your package was covered by postal insurance. If you use private […] A. A claim with USPS is a request by a postal customer for an indemnity payment that resulted from the loss, rifling, or damage to mailed items. The mailed items must have included postal insurance. A. Either the mailer or addressee may file a domestic claim. For domestic indemnity claims (Insured, Registered, Collect on Delivery (COD), and Express Mail®), either the mailer or addressee may file. However, if the item has Merchandise Return Service, only the permit holder may file. On the retail systems (POS, IRT, etc.), AIC 539, Indemnity Claims Paid at Window, will be removed. Customers will have the option to file all domestic insurance claims, including domestic Express Mail® claims online, mail them directly to St. Louis, or submit their completed claim forms at a Post Office™. Query: how long do i have to file a claim with usps",
"output": [
"A claim with USPS is filed within 30 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-66a85e00346b442bb08e479734c165c0",
"input": "That is it can be manifested by failure to be aware of a number of specific deficits, including motor (hemiplegia), sensory (hemianaesthesia, hemianopia), spatial (unilateral neglect), memory (dementia), and language (receptive aphasia) due to impairment of anatomo-functionally discrete monitoring systems. It was first named by the neurologist Joseph Babinski in 1914.[1] Anosognosia results from physiological damage to brain structures, typically to the parietal lobe or a diffuse lesion on the fronto-temporal-parietal area in the right hemisphere,[2][3][4] and is thus a neurological disorder. Anosognosia is relatively common following different causes of brain injury, such as stroke and traumatic brain injury; for example, anosognosia for hemiparesis, (weakness of one side of the body) with onset of acute stroke is estimated at between 10% and 18%. While this distinguishes the condition from denial, which is a psychological defense mechanism, attempts have been made at a unified explanation.[5] Anosognosia is sometimes accompanied by asomatognosia, a form of neglect in which patients deny ownership of their limbs. Asomatognosia. Asomatognosia, is characterized by a loss of knowledge or recognition of half of the body or a limb, possibly due to paralysis or unilateral neglect. Asomatognosic patients may, for example, mistake their arm for the doctor’s arm, however, can be shown their limb and this error is temporarily corrected. Looking for asomatognosia? Find out information about asomatognosia. Lacking awareness of paralysis because the brain is damaged Explanation of asomatognosia Mirror asomatognosia in right lesions stroke victims. Body dysmorphic disorder in people with intellectual disability: a bio-psycho-social approach Asomatognosia literally means, 'lack of recognition of the body. One of the interesting aspects of asomatognosia is that, despite the fragmentation of the self, these patients strive to maintain an integrated self and make sense of their experience. Soul migrations: traumatic and spiritual Anosognosia (/ æ ˌ n ɒ s ɒ ɡ ˈ n oʊ z i ə /, / æ ˌ n ɒ s ɒ ɡ ˈ n oʊ ʒ ə /; from Ancient Greek ἀ- a-, without, νόσος nosos, disease and γνῶσις gnōsis, knowledge) is a deficit of self-awareness, a condition in which a person with some disability seems unaware of its existence. Anosognosia is a deficit of self-awareness, a condition in which a person with some disability seems unaware of its existence. It was first named by the neurologist Joseph Babinski in 1914. Anosognosia results from physiological damage to brain structures, typically to the parietal lobe or a diffuse lesion on the fronto-temporal-parietal area in the right hemisphere, and is thus a neurological disorder. While this distinguishes the condition from denial, which is a psychological defense mechanis Video shows what asomatognosia means. a deficiency in the awareness of parts on one's own body.. Asomatognosia Meaning. How to pronounce, definition audio di... Video shows what asomatognosia means. a deficiency in the awareness of parts on one's own body.. Asomatognosia Meaning. How to pronounce, definition audio dictionary. Query: asomatognosia definition",
"output": [
"Asomatognosia, is characterized by a loss of knowledge or recognition of half of the body or a limb, possibly due to paralysis or unilateral neglect."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c3c6520381544780b1dece00019b1cff",
"input": "The easiest way to roll over a pension plan is to execute a trustee to custodian transfer. If you are married, company pension plans generally require a notarized signature of your spouse, who will be giving up his/her right to an annuity interest, in order for you to move the money into your IRA. When planning for a rollover, there are several other rules to keep in mind. For example, if you are age 55 or older when the separation from service occurs, you may take your company pension as a lump sum distribution without paying the 10% early withdrawal excise tax. You will be taxed on the distribution as ordinary income. What is a pension? Do I have to do anything to manage my pension? What if I leave my company before I retire? How does vesting work? When can I access my pension money? Can I take out a loan from my pension plan? Should I take a lump-sum payout or monthly payments? What are the advantages of taking a lump sum? Should I invest my lump-sum payout in an annuity? What's the difference between a single-life annuity and a joint-and-survivor annuity? Will I pay tax on my pension payouts? How should my pension affect my retirement planning? While you can opt to tap your 401k at any time you can’t collect your pension until you’ve reached the predetermined retirement age. Nope. While you can opt to tap your 401(k) at any time (though you’ll pay a huge penalty to do so before age 59.5), you… Not until you reach retirement age. Typically that's 65, though many pension plans allow you to start collecting early retirement benefits as early as age 55. If you decide to start receiving benefits before you reach full retirement age, the size of your monthly payout will be less than it would have been if you'd waited. Ask the folks who run your plan to create a simple table showing you how your payments will vary depending on when you start. However, pension plans are required to withhold 20% of the proceeds if the check is made payable to you. This means in order to roll 100% of your pension distribution into an IRA, you will need to come up with the tax withholding out of your own pocket. Otherwise you will owe taxes on the money you didn’t rollover and possibly a tax penalty if you are under age 55. Nope. While you can opt to tap your 401(k) at any time (though you’ll pay a huge penalty to do so before age 59.5), you can’t collect your pension until you’ve reached the retirement age determined by your pension plan. Typically full retirement age 65, though many plans allow an early retirement that could start as soon as age 55. If you decide to start receiving benefits before you reach full retirement age, the size of your monthly payout will be less than it would have been if you ... Rick’s Insights. 1 Company retirement plans are required to withhold 20% of distributions made directly to a person for income taxes. 2 Distributions from a company plan are not subject to the 10% early withdrawal penalty if you are age 55 and separated from service. Follow the Rules When Rolling Over Your Pension to an IRA Posted on April 24, 2013 by Rick Rodgers Many companies are closing out their pension plans, giving workers the opportunity to roll them over to an IRA or another plan. Each plan's rules vary (check yours to be sure), but you may be able take money out of your retirement account penalty-free before age 59 ½ if you use it for expenses after the onset of a sudden disability, or for unreimbursed medical expenses that are more than 7.5% of your adjusted gross income (10% if you’re under age 65). Query: at what age can i pull my pension",
"output": [
"You can pull your pension at the age of fifty nine and half. However if you are age 55 or older when the separation from service occurs, you may take your company pension as a lump sum distribution without paying the 10% early withdrawal excise tax. You will be taxed on the distribution as ordinary income."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-686c32847b504d8ca7f0c6b03130f534",
"input": "The total time can have many different interpretations but usually it is interpreted as: 1 The time from entering the hospital, getting registered to the radiology department, receiving the CT exam and finally hearing from the doctor/radiologist the diagnosis based on the results. 1 Assuming that you are already inside the CT scanner ready to get scanned. CT scan without contrast (head, sinus, orbits, abdomen, pelvis, cervical, thoracic, lumbar and dental scans) take approximately 15 minutes. CT studies with contrast of the chest, pelvis, head or neck take approximately 30 minutes. The scans are reported by a radiologist after the technician finishes the scan. The time taken to read and report the scan depends upon many factors like contrast used and comparison with a previously done CT Scan. Usually the report is available within 24 hours. Visit What is CT scan. Detailed note on CT scan Tests - ChooseDoctor At our hospital, it'd be very unusual for a CT scan to take more than an hour or two to be read, most are done within 30 minutes. From there, the question is how long does it take for the report to get to the ordering doctor? If the CT is sent to offsite radiology interpretation, it might take 2, no longer than 3 days to get the report to your physician. This is what you would expect in most areas of the country. 12.3k Views · View Upvoters Whereas, aortic contrast studies may take up to 45 minutes. Most cardiac CT studies will take 60 minutes. Assuming that you are not inside the CT scanner, prior to the actual scan, patient registration and meeting with the technologist takes approximately 30 minutes. The time that the procedure of the CT examination lasts and the time that the results are reconstructed in the radiologists computer. Expected time: between 5 and 30 minutes. More specifically, the scan time, the time you are actually in the machine as it acquires images, depends on a number of factors. If it was ordered as a routine versus ordering it as a stat, a routine CT results could be available within 1 to 2 days from the time of the scan was taken to a stat CT being reported within hours of the actual scan . The latest research from I-ELCAP shows that patients diagnosed with lung cancer as a result of annual CT screening have an overall cure rate of 80%, regardless of stage and type of treatment. When cancers are found at the earliest stage (85% of the patients) and are immediately removed with surgery, the research shows a cure rate of 92%. A chest x-ray shows only two views of your chest (front and side), while a CT scan shows cross-sectional images all through your chest-from the very top of your lungs through the lung bases. Thus, tiny abnormalities (that could be early stage lung cancer) can be found which would never have been seen on a chest x-ray. Query: how long does it take to report on a ct scan to your doctor?",
"output": [
"Usually it takes 24 hours to report on a ct scan."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7aa632d3d9b341e0a3a21c0c16890cd9",
"input": "The expiration date is a guideline, and most products are good for a short while after expiration if they have been properly stored; but you should not depend in it. If its just a few days then it is probably still okay. Try tasting it and if it tastes strange then discard it. up vote -1 down vote favorite. Apple juice unrefrigerated, canned, and unopened lasts 1-1.5 years in the pantry but only .75-1 year in the freezer according to stilltasty.com. Blackberry juice lasts as long as apple juice does in pantry and freezer if it is unrefrigerated, canned, and unopened. Cranberry juice cocktail lasts in the pantry for six to nine months. The juice will last for the same amount of time in the refrigerator. Ocean Spray cranberry juice stays fresh in the pantry for two... Cranberry juice cocktail lasts in the pantry for six to nine months. The juice will last for the same amount of time in the refrigerator. Ocean Spray cranberry juice stays fresh in the pantry for two to three weeks. If the juice develops a sour smell, it is no longer safe to drink. We do not recommend freezing cranberry sauce, as after thawing, it may become too watery. How long can I store your juices and cocktails if they haven't been opened? Unopened products under normal storage conditions should remain acceptable from six to 12 months from the time they are manufactured. I can't seem to find an expiration date of this cranberry juice that has been sitting in the back of my parents fridge for at least 5-6 months. It's unopened, so I think it's safe. It's Ocean Spray Cran-Apple for the record. Prob going to drink it anyways but I still wonder how long it's good for. What are the small particles found at the bottom of Lakewood Organic Pure Concord Grape Juice? What does Best By mean? Occasionally some bottles of Lakewood juice will leave a stain on the inside of the bottle. Why does this happen? Do Lakewood products contain any of the Eight Major Food Allergens? Juice, bottled (apple or cranberry) Unopened: 8 months from production date Opened: 7 to 10 days. Ketchup. Unopened: 1 year (After this time, color or flavor may be affected, but product is still generally safe to consume.) Opened or used: 4 to 6 months (After this time, color or flavor may be affected, but product is still generally safe to consume.) Cranberry juice cocktail lasts in the pantry for six to nine months. The juice will last for the same amount of time in the refrigerator. Ocean Spray cranberry juice stays fresh in the pantry for two... Cranberry juice cocktail lasts in the pantry for six to nine months. The juice will last for the same amount of time in the refrigerator. Ocean Spray cranberry juice stays fresh in the pantry for two to three weeks. Keep Learning. How long does unopened cranberry juice last? The precise answer to the question depends to a large extent on storage conditions - store unopened cans or bottles of cranberry juice in a cool, dark area. To extend the shelf life of unopened cranberry juice, keep unopened cranberry juice away from direct sources of heat or light. O shelf stable beverages juices, soda, water and other drinks designed to be stored oct 14, 2013 how long do things in your fridge stay good after their expiration even beer will last safely the printed date aug 11, 2017 technically, e liquid does have an expiry but it doesn't go bad per se. Ok to drink orange juice past the expiration date? Query: how long will unopened bottled cranberry juice last after expiration",
"output": [
"Juice, bottled (apple or cranberry) Unopened 8 months from production date."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0b2c6bfd6260455482b03d01f487c9b1",
"input": "How long does a misdemeanor reckless driving in California stay on your dmv records? Low Need How long does a reckless driving charge stay on your California dmv driving record and what is likely to happen if found guilty Long Beach, CA | 2 attorney answers How long does a DRY reckless driving conviction with a violation date of January 2011 stay on your DMV driving record? DUI DUI defense DUI as a criminal offense DUI and DMV hearings DUI charges DUI and driver's license penalties DUI and driving records DUI and criminal records Criminal defense Criminal charges Misdemeanor crime Crimes against society Defenses for criminal charges Criminal court Criminal record Tickets for reckless driving Speeding tickets Driving ... How long does a misdemeanor reckless driving in California stay on your dmv records? Los Angeles, CA | 3 attorney answers How long does a reckless driving charge stay on your California dmv driving record and what is likely to happen if found guilty Following are some examples of how long convictions of violations that drivers are ticketed for will stay on a person's driving record. In California: Most traffic offense convictions will remain on your record for three years from the violation date and count as 1 point. A Reckless Driving Conviction can be either a Non Alcohol Related or Dry Reckless which would stay on your driving record as two points for 3 years, or it could be an Alcohol Releated or Wet reckless, in which case the points will stay on your record for 3 years, but the offense will stay on your record as a chargable prior alcohol conviction for 10 years (and that length of time could be changed to a longer time without your consent by a change in law, as has happened several times in ... In Florida, points placed on your Florida driver's license due to traffic violations stay on your record and are counted against you for three years for insurance purposes. Points can continue to accumulate on your record beyond those three years though so the state can keep track and impose penalties if necessary. In general, the California DMV assesses points for traffic related offenses. Periodically, those points drop off your DMV driving record. If you get too many points in a period of time, the DMV can take action against your driving privilege and try to suspend your license. If you get a... Reckless driving: 4 points. Collision resulting from a moving violation: 4 points. Passing a stopped school bus: 4 points. How long points remain on your driving record depends on the severity of the violation. In most cases, you can expect infractions to remain on your record from 3 to 5 years. However, more serious infractions could last 10 years or longer. You can order a copy of your Florida driving record to find out how many points you currently have, and whether you are in danger of suspension. FL Traffic School Requirements For some traffic violations, you may be required to take a state-approved driver improvement course. A Reckless Driving Conviction can be either a Non Alcohol Related or Dry Reckless which would stay on your driving record as two points for 3 years, or it could be an Alcohol Releated or Wet reckless, in which case the points will stay on your record for 3 years, but the offense will stay on your record as a chargable prior alcohol conviction ... Tickets normally can stay on a Virginia driving record from three years to 11 years, however if you are convicted of a serious violation it will remain on your MVR permanently. So the length of time that a conviction stays on your VA driving record depends on the severity of the violation. Query: how long does a reckless driving stay on your record in florida",
"output": [
"In Florida, a reckless driving stays on your record for 3 to 5 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e6139a3543f344469034e44eac62d2cc",
"input": "I'm new to paypal and thought being as a friend can send funds to me from his paypal account instantly, that I'd be able to withdraw those funds from my paypal account and put into my bank account just as quickly. Solved! Go to Solution. PayPal should add the option to immediately transfer funds from your checking account into your PayPal account for a small fee, just for those of us who don't want to wait 3-5 business days in order to make online purchases. Re: Why does it take 3-4 business days to withdraw funds from paypal to my bank account? Hi ComeOnMan, and welcome to the forums! ladybugsakuya04 and Trina8 are correct. I had money from my bank account transfered to paypal around 6 days ago. I understand it takes 3-4 buisness days but now the clearing date has been pushed back to JAN 5 2012 originally from DEC. 21 and I requested this withdrawl on DEC.17. Re: Why does it take 3-4 business days to withdraw funds from paypal to my bank account? This is asking for a slightly ifferent explnetion. When I request a transfer of money from my bank to PayPal and PayPal tells my bank this my bank puts those funds on hold. Re: Why does it take 3-4 business days to withdraw funds from paypal to my bank account? Can PayPal show that it takes 3-4 days for payments TO eBay to clear? You are potentially getting a 1-4 day float while transferring to my bank but if the company that owns yougets paid instantly and this happens millions of times that's quite the racket. Here’s how to withdraw money from How long does it take to transfer money from a U.S. bank account to my PayPal account? It usually takes 3 to 5 business days to transfer money from a U.S. bank account to your PayPal account. Re: Why does it take 3-4 business days to withdraw funds from paypal to my bank account? Trina, I'm sure most people will agree that a one day turnaround for funds is a manageable time frame. 3-4 business days can mean eight days when you throw a weekend into the mix and if you requested your funds after 5pm EST that first day. That is a long time. How long will it take to withdraw money from my PayPal account to my bank account? Please allow 3 - 5 business days for your bank to process the transfer and for the money to appear in your bank account. If there's a problem with your withdrawal, it may take up to a week for your bank to notify us. Here’s how to withdraw money from your PayPal account: Click Transfer to your bank under your PayPal balance. Re: Why does it take 3-4 business days to withdraw funds from paypal to my bank account? No, nothing anyone has said here explains why it should 3 - 4 days to process a funds transfer from my PayPal account to my personal bank account. Query: how long to withdraw from paypal",
"output": [
"It takes 3 to 5 business days to withdraw from paypal."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-bd6f0a7cc0c34a698a66867b326a9311",
"input": "Depends: Norovirus is the most common viral cause of stomach flu or gastroenteritis. Exposure can result in illness within 24 hours. Other causes of gastroenteritis like bacteria can take several days. Handwashing and food safety can help prevent spread of illnesses like these. How long would the normal stomach flu take to develop in your system and start showing symptoms.? Dr. Gary Gottlieb Dr. Gottlieb 6--10 days: The incubation period for most common gastrointestinal viral illnesses is 6-10 days. If you've been exposed you may not show symptoms for up to 7 days. Most people typically get symptoms within 3 to 5 days following exposure. The same holds true for the season…al flu or colds. For one, it's not really the flu! Here are 13 things you need to know about viral gastroenteritis (its true medical name), starting with the fact that it's caused by viruses that attack the stomach and intestines. Report Abuse. 1 Chat or rant, adult content, spam, insulting other members,show more. 2 Harm to minors, violence or threats, harassment or privacy invasion, impersonation or misrepresentation, fraud or phishing, show more. 3 Chat or rant, adult content, spam, insulting other members,show more. Viral gastroenteritis is a viral infection of the GI tract. It can be picked up from contact with surfaces and foods that are carrying the virus. Symptoms include upset stomach, nausea, vomiting, diarrhea, and abdominal cramps. Sometimes fever and chills occur....Read more How long does it take to show symptoms after being exposed to a stomach virus? My son had a stomach virus almost 48 hours ago; no one else in the home has shown symptoms since then; how much longer until we're in the clear? Thanks. You may also wonder how long it takes to get sick after you have been exposed and how long you are contagious when you have it. Flu Incubation Period. The typical flu incubation period—the time between exposure and the start of symptoms—is between 24 hours and four days, with the average being two days. This means that if you are exposed to the influenza virus and become infected, you will start to experience flu symptoms anywhere between 24 hours and four days after the exposure. The stomach flu can’t be cured by medications, and antibiotics won’t help when a virus is the culprit. You can take over-the-counter medication to treat the symptoms but do so sparingly. For fever or aches, ibuprofen can help, as long as it doesn’t cause you to have more of an upset stomach. Answer Wiki. For influenza in particular, as Quora User says, a typical incubation period would be 1-4 days. That's a reasonable range for many other viruses, too, especially respiratory viruses. Gastrointestinal viruses probably average a little shorter incubation time. Query: how long to show symptoms after exposure of stomach bug",
"output": [
"It takes 6 to 10 days to show symptoms after exposure of stomach bug."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-bf7b8cf5766b4c5098dc058878efb6f1",
"input": "How long do microbes like bacteria and viruses live on surfaces in the home at normal room temperatures? Art Dekenipp Alvin, Texas. The answer is probably not what you want to hear: Microbes can live on household surfaces for hundreds of years. The good news, however, is that most don't. Some well-known viruses, like HIV, live only a few seconds. Microbes, of course, are everywhere. Each square centimeter of skin alone harbors about 100,000 bacteria. How long do microbes like bacteria and viruses live on surfaces in the home at normal room temperatures?Art Dekenipp Alvin, Texas The answer is probably not what you want to hear: Microbes can live on household surfaces for hundreds of years. The good news, however, is that most don't. Some well-known viruses, like HIV, live only a few seconds. Germs can stay alive in air for up to 48 hours after leaving an infected person or animal. Some germs can live up to a week on surfaces they infect. It is best to keep hands washed, and surfaces sterile to kill germs. Germs can stay alive in air for up to 48 hours after leaving an infected person or animal. Flu viruses can also survive as droplets in the air for several hours; low temperatures increase their survival in the air. Parainfluenza virus, which causes croup in children, can survive for up to 10 hours on hard surfaces and up to four hours on soft surfaces. Stomach bugs. There are many germs that can cause a stomach bug. Generally, MRSA bacteria survive for longer on hard surfaces than on soft surfaces. Herpes. Herpes viruses from cold sores around the mouth can survive for two hours on the skin. If you have a cold sore, try not to touch it. If you do touch it, for example to apply cold sore cream, wash your hands immediately afterwards. How long germs can live outside the body depends on the type of bacteria or virus and what kind of surface they are on. Find out more about cold and flu viruses, MRSA and germs that cause stomach bugs. How long do microbes like bacteria and viruses live on surfaces in the home at normal room temperatures? The answer is probably not what you want to hear. posted Aug 22nd, 2002 at 12:43pm Flu viruses capable of being transferred to hands and causing an infection can survive on hard surfaces for 24 hours. Infectious flu viruses can survive on tissues for only 15 minutes. Like cold viruses, infectious flu viruses survive for much shorter periods on the hands. Germs can stay alive in air for up to 48 hours after leaving aninfected person or animal. Some germs can live up to a week onsurfaces they infect. Norovirus and C. difficile, however, can survive for much longer. In one study, C. difficile was shown to survive for five months. Norovirus can survive for days or weeks on hard surfaces. When someone with norovirus vomits, the virus is distributed in small droplets in the air. Query: how long do germs live in the air",
"output": [
"Germs can stay alive in air for up to 48 hours after leaving an infected person or animal."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-55331ea84f6c44458738439537e9e319",
"input": "Intellicast.com: The Authority in Expert Weather Shiraz, Iran weather conditions and forecast. Today's Shiraz, Iran weather report: current observations, hourly forecast, 10-day forecast calendar and chart. Intellicast.com The Authority in Expert Weather Weather Emails Alerts Hurricanes Help Weather. Today's Forecast; Hourly Forecast; 10 Day Forecast; Monthly Forecast; National Forecast; Get Notifications; Maps. Weather in Motion® Radar Maps; Classic Weather Maps; Regional Satellite; Driving Difficulty Map; Traffic and Radar NEW! Severe. Severe Alerts; Hurricane Central; Tornado Central; Local Severe Storm Risk; Winter Storm Central; Safety and Preparedness The Shiraz, Iran weather is going to be partly cloudy. Shiraz, Iran visibility is going to be around 20 km i.e. 12 miles and an atmospheric pressure of 31 In. The daytime temperature is going to reach 55 °f and the temperature is going to dip to 38 °f at night. Be prepared with the most accurate 10-day forecast for Shiraz, Iran with highs, lows, chance of precipitation from The Weather Channel and Weather.com Be prepared with the most accurate 10-day forecast for Shiraz, Iran with highs, lows, chance of precipitation from The Weather Channel and Weather.com Scan for updated forecast Connection restored! BBC Weather in association with MeteoGroup. All times are IRST (Asia/Tehran, GMT +0330) unless otherwise stated. Shiraz weather by month. Check Shiraz weather for a particular month by selecting from the list below. Monthly weather guides include figures for temperature, rainfall, sunshine hours and sea temperature plus daily sunrise & sunset times. Weather in Iran - Check out the latest Weather Forecast, channels & reports for IR on Weather Underground. The 7 day weather forecast summary for Shiraz: For Shiraz in the coming week the average daytime maximum temperature will be around 35°C, with a high for the week of 36°C expected on the afternoon of Friday 25th. The mean minimum temperature will be 23°C, dipping to its lowest on the morning of Monday 28th at 19°C. Extended weather forecast for Shiraz. Check the latest weather data for next week in Shiraz including temperature, rainfall, humidity, wind speed, etc. Today: Sunny intervals, with a maximum temperature of 73° and a minimum temperature of 46°. Location: Shiraz. Current Time: Feb 14, 2018 at 6:21:20 am. Latest Report: Feb 14, 2018 at 3:30 am. Visibility: 4 mi. Pressure: 29.83 Hg (24.88 Hg at 1540m altitude) Humidity: 24%. Dew Point: 25 °F Query: how is the weather in shiraz",
"output": [
"The Shiraz, Iran daytime temperature is going to reach 55 degrees Fahrenheit and the temperature is going to dip to 38 degrees Fahrenheit at night."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e4915002a76a488b8f8e2dbab8659a0e",
"input": "Hiring a patent lawyer is a good idea if you plan to go all the way and file a non-provisional patent application. However, professional legal advice isn't necessary at this early stage. You can do the research and fill out the application yourself. Get PROFESSIONAL. 1 Patent Pending Status for 12 Months. 2 Professional Technical Descriptions. See Description Samples. 3 Professional Patent Drawings. See Drawing Samples. 4 Phone call with an engineer to discuss details. A provisional application for patent lasts 12 months from its filing date. The USPTO will not grant extensions for any reason. The inventor(s) must file a Non-Provisional Patent Application within that period to take advantage of the Provisional Application for Patent's filing date. How long a patent lasts depends on when the application was filed with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office. Patents Filed Through June 17, 1995. For U.S. patents filed through June 17, 1995, the patent lasts for 17 years from the date the patent is issued, provided that the fees necessary to keep the patent in force (maintenance fees) are paid. Patents Filed After June 17, 1995 For patent applications filed after June 17, 1995, the patent last 20 years from the date of filing. If a non-provisional application is not expected to be filed within one year, and the patent is not otherwise barred by law, another provisional application may also be filed at any time and start another one-year period (but this does not work in all cases). You asked how to write a good provisional patent application so I will assume you know the drawbacks as well as the positives of a provisional patent application compared to a non-provisional. So it is best to think of the provisional patent application as a lower cost way of starting your journey toward receiving a patent, but it is incorrect to think of the provisional patent application as a cheap way to start the patent process. If you have filed more than 4 non-provisional patent apps in the past, or have an annual income of greater than $177,117, you may be classified as small entity or large entity which requires $140 or $280 govt fee If you have filed a Provisional Application for Patent relating to the same invention, and your Non-Provisional Utility Patent Application is filed within 12 months of your Provisional Application, your filing date will be the filing date of your Provisional Application. A patent is a governmental grant of a short-term monopoly to inventors. U.S. patent laws enable a patent holder to prevent others from making, using or selling the patented invention for a specific time period. How long a patent remains valid depends on the type of patent and other factors. A patent is a governmental grant of a short-term monopoly to inventors. U.S. patent laws enable a patent holder to prevent others from making, using or selling the patented invention for a specific time period. Query: how long is a provisional patent good for",
"output": [
"A provisional application for patent lasts 12 months from its filing date."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-63303eee52de47018f14dab5969dd687",
"input": "How long should I keep tax returns? In most cases, you should plan on keeping tax returns along with any supporting documents for a period of at least three years following the date you filed or the due date of your tax return, whichever is later. If, for example, you find that you failed to claim a credit on an old return that would've given you a refund, you can amend that return using Form 1040X within three years of its original filing date, or within two years of the date you paid taxes for that return -- whichever is later. Holding on to your old tax records can also work out in your favor. Just as the IRS gets three years to re-examine old tax returns, so, too, can individual tax filers claim refunds up to three years after the fact. How Long Should I Keep My Tax Returns? Don't be too quick to toss out your old tax returns. You should hang onto those forms for a minimum of three years -- sometimes more. That said, the IRS will advise you to keep your old tax returns and records even longer in the following situations: You failed to report income for a given year, and that amount exceeds 25% of the gross income shown on your return. You filed a fraudulent return. You didn't file a return for a given tax year. That said, the IRS will advise you to keep your old tax returns and records even longer in the following situations: 1 You failed to report income for a given year, and that amount exceeds 25% of the gross income shown on your return. 2 You filed a fraudulent return. 3 You didn't file a return for a given tax year. Tax returns sent on or before the deadline. You should keep your records for at least 22 months after the end of the tax year the tax return is for. If you send your 2015 to 2016 tax return online by 31 January 2017, keep your records until at least the end of January 2018. It's natural to want to clear out your filing cabinets and free up more space, but when it comes to tax returns, you shouldn't be too quick to toss out old information. The IRS gets three years from each year's tax filing deadline to audit and reassess old returns. Editor’s Note: If your tax return is still buried under a pile of papers next to your computer, it’s probably time to do a little organizing. To help get you set we asked Anna Sandall of the Tax Institute the best practices involved in keeping tax records including how long you should hold onto those past returns. So for example, if you filed your 2015 tax return on February 1, 2016, you should have kept the return and supporting documents until at least April 15, 2017. What tax records should I keep? You should keep every tax return and supporting forms. This includes W-2s, 1099s, expense tracking, mileage logs if you itemize and other documents. So why is keeping tax returns for three years important? Keeping tax returns for the three-year time period is tied to the IRS statute of limitations. Query: how long do i keep my tax return?",
"output": [
"In most cases, you should plan on keeping tax returns along with any supporting documents for a period of at least three years following the date you filed or the due date of your tax return."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-23ad3052469a49558507c37f2ae2d868",
"input": "Phosphoric acid: Phosphoric acid, (H3PO4), the most important oxygen acid of phosphorus, used to make phosphate salts for fertilizers. It is also used in dental cements, in the preparation of Cola drinks contain a lot of phosphate - so much, in fact, that they can cause too much phosphate in the blood. People use phosphate salts for medicine. Be careful not to confuse phosphate salts with substances such as organophosphates, or with tribasic sodium phosphates and tribasic potassium phosphates, which are very poisonous. This acid is too strong to be used on plants and must be combined with other chemicals to raise the pH of the solution and decrease the potential for plant injury. One means of reducing the acidity of phosphonic acid is to neutralize it with an alkali salt; typically potassium hydroxide (KOH). Assorted References. 1 major reference (in oxyacid: Orthophosphoric acid and phosphate salts) 2 chemical industry (in chemical industry: Phosphorus) 3 nomenclature of acids (in chemical compound: Acids) 4 organosulfur compounds (in organosulfur compound: Preparation) 5 oxyacids (in oxyacid) Phosphonate compounds also occur naturally in some lower life forms, including protozoa, mollusks, coelenterates, and oomycete fungi (6). For this article, we use the term phosphonate to describe only those products made up of the salts and esters of phosphorous acid (HPO(OH) 2 ). Phosphorous acid is a solid substance that can be purchased through chemical supply companies. When mixed with water, it forms a strong acid called phosphonic acid. Among the important phosphate salts are: sodium dihydrogen phosphate (NaH 2 PO 4), used for control of hydrogen ion concentration (acidity) of solutions; disodium hydrogen phosphate (Na 2 HPO 4), used in water treatment as a precipitant for highly charged metal cations; trisodium phosphate (Na 3 PO 4), used in soaps and detergents; calcium dihydrogen phosphate or calcium superphosphate (Ca[H 2 PO 4] 2), a major fertilizer ingredient; calcium monohydrogen phosphate (CaHPO 4), used as a ... Phosphate salts are also used for improving exercise performance, as an antacid for gastroesophageal reflux disease , and as a laxative for emptying the bowels before surgery. Phosphate salts and calcium are applied to sensitive teeth to reduce pain. Rectally, phosphate salts are used as a laxative to clean the bowels before surgery or intestinal tests. Healthcare providers sometimes give potassium phosphate intravenously (by IV) for treating low phosphate and high calcium levels in the blood, and for preventing low phosphate in patients who are being tube-fed. Phosphoric acid, also called orthophosphoric acid, (H 3 PO 4), the most important oxygen acid of phosphorus, used to make phosphate salts for fertilizers. It is also used in dental cements, in the preparation of albumin derivatives, and in the sugar and textile industries. It serves as an acidic, fruitlike flavouring in food products. 1 Pure phosphoric acid is a crystalline solid (melting point 42.35° C, or 108.2° F); in less concentrated form it is a colourless syrupy liquid. 2 Phosphoric acid forms three classes of salts corresponding to replacement of one, two, or three hydrogen atoms. Written By: Phosphoric acid, also called orthophosphoric acid, (H3PO4), the most important oxygen acid of phosphorus, used to make phosphate salts for fertilizers. It is also used in dental cements, in the preparation of albumin derivatives, and in the sugar and textile industries. It serves as an acidic, fruitlike flavouring in food products. 1 Pure phosphoric acid is a crystalline solid (melting point 42.35° C, or 108.2° F); in less concentrated form it is a colourless syrupy liquid. The crude acid is prepared from phosphate rock, while acid of higher purity is made from white phosphorus. Query: how is phosphate salts used",
"output": [
"Phosphate salts are also used for improving exercise performance, as an antacid for gastroesophageal reflux disease , and as a laxative for emptying the bowels before surgery. Phosphate salts are used as a laxative to clean the bowels before surgery or intestinal tests."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1f44d8cd7f0846389fd8a54f3008ee37",
"input": "An example of titration using phenolphthalein is the titration of vinegar, which is technically acetic acid. When titrating acetic acid, a titrating solution containing a base—normally sodium hydroxide—is added to the titrand's solution, which contains phenolphthalein (the indicator) and acetic acid (the acidic titrand). And so we can do our calculation here. So we can take 0.000844, and we can divide that by 0.0200, and we get for our answer here 0.0422 molar. All right, so the concentration of HCl is equal to 0.0422 molar, and we are finally done, right? Just a tiny amount of an impurity in a drug could cause a great deal of harm to a patient. Samples of chemicals that are synthesised must be checked for purity. This is often done by carrying out a titration. A titration is used to measure the volume of one solution that exactly reacts with another solution. Steps of titration. A titration is carried out using a number of steps: If the sample is a solid, it is weighed using an accurate balance, and then dissolved to make up a known volume of solution (usually 100cm3). A pipette is used to measure accurately a volume of this solution - for example, 10cm3. The Titration Experiment Titration is a general class of experiment where a known property of one solution is used to infer an unknown property of another solution. In acid-base chemistry, we often use titration to determine the pH of a certain solution. A setup for the titration of an acid with a base is shown in : Figure %: A titration setup 1 At the equivalence point of a titration, an exactly equivalent amount of titrant has been added to the sample. The experimental point at which the completion of the reaction is marked by some signal is called the end point. In Lab Manual CPAP Titration •Optimal CPAP titration –Reduces RDI < 5/hour for at least 15 minutes –Minimum SaO 2 >90% –Supine REM sleep not continuously interrupted by arousals or awakenings –All at the selected “optimal pressure” The endpoint mode represents the classical titration procedure: the titrant is added until the end of the. reaction is observed, e.g., by a colour change of an indicator. With an automatic titrator, the sample is titrated until a predefined measurement value is reached, e.g. pH = 8.2 or E = 100 mV. Blank Titration. A blank titration is carried out by titrating a fixed and known concentration of titrant into a solvent with zero analyte. The only difference from the regular titration is the absence of analyte. Scout Titration. 1 Use a pipet to deliver a known amount of the analyte to the appropriate container (usually an Erlenmeyer flask) which has been cleaned and rinsed with distilled water. Members of the sleep team will calibrate the CPAP during a CPAP titration study. The testing process involves the fitting of a CPAP mask and air pressure. Find a Sleep Center Query: how is titration done?",
"output": [
"A titration is carried out using a number of steps: If the sample is a solid, it is weighed using an accurate balance, and then dissolved to make up a known volume of solution. A pipette is used to measure accurately a volume of this solution - for example, 10cm3."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ee84b028b0bc42b39017d3b03e89e17f",
"input": "Nursing doctoral degree programs, such as the Doctor of Nursing Practice, Doctor of Philosophy in Nursing, and Doctor of Nursing Science, often take between three and five years to complete, though this depends on the program and whether a student is enrolled full- or part-time. The three major educational paths to registered nursing are a bachelor's degree, an associate degree, and a diploma from an approved nursing program. Nurses most commonly enter the occupation by completing an associate degree or bachelor's degree program. However, the full educational course leading to a doctorate in nursing can take eight years or more. The most popular nursing school programs are a 2-year associate's degree in nursing and a 4-year Bachelor of Science in Nursing. Certified nursing assistant programs typically take 18 weeks, or one semester, to complete. Schools that usually offer these programs include community or vocational colleges and adult education programs. With the bachelor of science in nursing (BSN) coming to be considered the standard in the nursing profession, many nurses want to learn more about RN to BSN programs. These accelerated programs offer already practicing RNs the opportunity to earn their bachelor’s degree while continuing to work. One advantage of these programs is that they typically do not take as long to complete as a traditional BSN degree. Why a BSN? Nurses have always been important, but their role has increased in importance as health care and health care delivery has expanded. How Long Does It Take To Become a Nurse Anesthetist (CRNA)? How Long Does It Take To Become a Nurse Practitioner? How Long Does It Take To Become a Nutritionist? How Long Does It Take To Become A Pharmacist? How Long Does It Take To Become a Physician Assistant? How Long Does It Take To Become a Social Worker? (ANSWERED) How Long Does It Take To Become a Vet Tech? How Long Does It Take To Become An LPN? How Long Does It Take To Become an OB/GYN? How Long Does It Take To Become an Ultrasound Technician? How Long Does It Take To Get a Medical Degree? How Long Does It Take To Get a Nursing Degree? Your first stepping stone toward a rewarding nursing career is completing the education and becoming registered. Ill answer the age old question about how long it takes to get a registered nursing degree. Time to Complete Different Nursing Degrees. You can actually get started with a career in nursing fairly easily: with just a high school diploma and approximately one year of training at a vocational school or community college, you can become a licensed practical nurse (LPN). The good news is an RN-BSN program can be completed while you continue working as a nurse, which means you’ll advance your career without having to take time off. If you envision yourself working in health care for the long term, earning a BSN can be a strategic move. Timeline and Time Commitment. 1 In order to become a nurse practitioner, a nurse must have at least a master’s degree – These programs typically take two to three years to complete as a full-time student. 21,087 Views 15 Comments. 1 Ok, so I'm an 18 year old guy and I am being forced to go to a community college because my step-dad filed my fasfa too late. Query: how long does a nursing degree take?",
"output": [
"A nursing degree takes 4 year."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f1814d3cec1e45938ff47be9727a10cc",
"input": "Best Answer: PT is a great profession. There is a high demand for PT. You can do a lot of different things and treat different types of people based on you interested. It takes 6-7 years to earn a DPT. Prior to starting PT, you will take bio, chem, physics, anatomy, physiology, psychology, maybe calculus or statistics. The decision shouldn't be based on how much reimbursement is offered by your insurance company. 1 List. 2 List. 3 Up Next. 4 Up Next. 5 Up Next. How long will physical therapy take is a common question asked by many patients. Although the question itself is a simple one, the answer is much more difficult. Remember, each and every person is different, and many factors may play into determining your overall prognosis and length of physical therapy. Preparing for the Admissions Process. 1 Research PT programs to determine the ones that may best meet your educational needs. 2 Determine if you are first required to have a bachelor's degree by filtering the CAPTE directory (use key code A4). 3 Complete course prerequisites for your designated programs. Whether you’re in high school or college, or a non-traditional student looking to change careers, here’s a straightforward overview of the steps needed to become a physical therapist. 1 Undergraduate Bachelor’s degree from a 4-year academic institution (preferably in a movement science-related major, but any major is fine). It depends on how quickly you can earn a degree and find a job. Here's what you need to do: Complete a degree in athletic training at an accredited college. You will need to earn at least a bachelors degree to be considered for an athletic trainer position with a professional organization. Study nutrition, psychology, therapeutic exercise, human anatomy and physiology, and gain clinical experience for 2 years under an approved instructor. Of course before you can be admitted into a DPT program you need to complete an undergraduate degree. In fact, you can have any major in college and as long as you finish the right prereqs for PT school, you can apply through PTCAS. PTCAS is the central application system for physical therapy schools. Answer One should have atleast 4 years of education for them to become a physical therapist. All states requrie Physical therapist to pass a l … icensure exam before they can practice any type of therapy. If you enjoy helping people recover from injuries and regain control of their life again, you'll enjoy being a physical therapist. The path to becoming a physical therapist isn't easy, though. You'll have to go through seven or even 10 years of schooling before you can start practicing. So be prepared in advance to ... How Long Does It Take To Become a Physical Therapist? Traditional DPT Program. Let’s say you decide to complete your undergraduate first and then apply to a DPT program. If you apply to PT programs in your senior year, you can start the DPT program as soon as you graduate. Traditional DPT programs can range from 30-36 months. So in addition to the 4 years you spend completing an undergraduate degree, you’ll also spend about 3 years at a DPT program, totaling 7 years of college education to become a physical therapist. Query: how long do you have to go to college for pt",
"output": [
"One should have atleast 4 years of education for them to become a physical therapist."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-187752cf3490412e98908e6464b3a7a0",
"input": "If you carry UMBI, most states require your limits for this coverage to be the same or lower than your bodily injury liability limits. In all states that offer uninsured motorist bodily injury, you must have bodily injury liability coverage as part of your car insurance policy to purchase UMBI coverage on your policy. Definition of Bodily Injury. The word bodily injury appears in most commercial auto, general liability and commercial umbrella policies. Many of these policies contain the same definition of this term as the standard ISO Commercial General Liability (CGL) policy. The CGL states that bodily injury means: Many commercial liability policies use the word bodily injury. This article will explain what the term means. The word bodily injury appears in most commercial auto, general liability and commercial umbrella policies. Many of these policies contain the same definition of this term as the standard ISO Commercial General Liability (CGL) policy. Definition of bodily injury coverage: An insurance policy that pays for injuries caused to other individuals in the event of a motor vehicle accident.... Definition of bodily injury coverage: An insurance policy that pays for injuries caused to other individuals in the event of a motor vehicle accident.... Uninsured motorist bodily injury coverage varies according to the terms of your policy and state laws but in general it pays, up to the limit of your policy, for: Medical expenses; Funeral expenses; Loss of income; Pain and suffering [Let CarInsurance.com help you find affordable auto insurance now.] bodily injury, sickness or disease sustained by a person, including death resulting from any of these at any time. Note that bodily injury includes illness and disease as well as physical injury. It also includes death, if death results from bodily injury, sickness or disease. Death that results from unexplained causes may not qualify as bodily injury. Mental Injuries. Some general liability policies contain a broader definition of bodily injury than the one found in the ISO CGL. Recommended limits for uninsured motorist bodily injury coverage The insurance industry recommends bodily injury liability coverage of $100,000 per person and $300,000 per accident (referred to as 100/300), if you can afford these higher limits. Definition of Bodily Injury The word bodily injury appears in most commercial auto, general liability and commercial umbrella policies. Many of these policies contain the same definition of this term as the standard ISO Commercial General Liability (CGL) policy. Uninsured motorist bodily injury coverage varies according to the terms of your policy and state laws but in general it pays, up to the limit of your policy, for: Medical expenses Funeral expenses Use this term in a sentence. “ 1 We wanted full coverage including the bodily injury coverage for our automobile insurance policy as we wanted to reduce our risk. “ 2 After a tremendously devastating car accident James was very excited to find out that his car insurance policy had adequate bodily injury coverage. Definition. An insurance policy that pays for injuries caused to other individuals in the event of a motor vehicle accident. Described by the notation a/b where a is the dollar amount in thousands of coverage per person, and b is the dollar amount in thousands of coverage per accident. Generally, insurance companies will only the allow purchase of UM/UIM coverage up to the insured's current bodily injury limit. Query: auto insurance bodily injury coverage definition",
"output": [
"An insurance policy that pays for injuries caused to other individuals in the event of a motor vehicle accident."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b7e4726e8f59466ea41efcbf1c591627",
"input": "96,495 reviews and opinions. 1 Roatan, Honduras. 2 Hotels (41) 23,630 Reviews. 3 Vacation Rentals (339) 1,160 Reviews. 4 Flights. 5 Things to Do (72) 39,617 Reviews. 6 Restaurants (169) 24,090 Reviews. 7 Forum 7,316 Posts. Flight Information. Roatan island has an international airport in Coxen Hole with jet service which has thousands of passengers arrive and depart each week. Direct flights to Roatan are available from Miami (MIA), Houston (IAH), New Orleans (MSY), and other cities in the Americas. Mahogany Bay, Isla Roatán Cruise to Mahogany Bay and you’ll feel like you won the island lottery. With silky-sand beaches and diamond-clear seas, the island of Roatan is one of the Caribbean’s hidden gems. This Caribbean island is the most developed of the Bay Islands of Honduras, so travel to Roatan is easy. There is a daily passenger ferry service on the Galaxy Wave, from La Ceiba to Roatan. Useful Information Roatan benefits from the close proximity of this barrier reef to shore, protecting the island and keeping the lagoons between the shore and reef amazingly calm. A large majority of the reef is a protected marine area, with fishing and boating regulations in place to preserve and protect this environment. A carnival of colorful characters and cavalcade of delicious tastes await visitors to the beach on Roatan Island in Honduras. A carnival of colorful characters and cavalcade of delicious tastes await visitors to the beach on Roatan Island in Honduras. Roatan is 32 miles long and varies in width from 1 to 3 miles across. The highest point of Roatan is approximately 900 feet above sea level. The Island has varying topography from white, sandy beaches, iron shoreline, mangroves, tropical hilltops, lush valleys to reef surrounded waters. About Coxen Hole, Roatan, Bay Islands, Honduras Located approximately 35 miles north of Honduras in the Caribbean, Roatan is the largest of the Bay Islands group. Plenty of great snorkeling and diving is found at the coral reefs off Roatan's coast. What people said about this port: The Zip Line experience was incredible. The Other Side of Roatan – East End. May 22, 2013 Attractions, Bay Islands, Honduras Tourism, Resorts, Roatán, Roatan Travel Reviews, Travel Tips, Vacation. On my last trip to Roatan, I strolled down West Bay beach among many glistening bodies catching the sun and waves. How about smooth, powder-white sand beaches and crystal blue water, all wrapped up with moderate, year-round weather at an affordable price? The beautiful island of Roatan Honduras, can offer expats all of the above and the best part is, you don’t have to be dreaming to make it a reality. Timothy Wildy The largest of the Bay Islands, Roatan can be found just off the northern coast of mainland Honduras, encompassed by the clear, warm waters of the Caribbean. Query: how long is roatan island",
"output": [
"Roatan island is 32 miles long."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-351039f6670e462984d34af4f7436ea0",
"input": "A formal claim for refund may be in the form of an amended return or a letter. Informal A taxpayer may file a claim even though they have not paid the full amount of tax, penalties, and interest. Claim your refund online if your P800 tax calculation letter says you can get it that way. You may be able to get a tax refund (rebate) if you: are employed and had too much tax taken from your pay Turbo Tax and H&R Block have free tax refund calculators available for taxpayers, and you do not need to commit to using their service to e-file your taxes. To use the calculator, you will need your marital and filing status and some basic information about your income. You must submit your application within three years from the date your tax was due to the Tax Department, or two years from the date you paid the tax, whichever is later. Where to send a refund application Hot Topics: 1 Money Smart Week. 2 Student Loans. 3 Affordable Care Act. 4 Health Insurance FAQs. 5 Military Money: Military Families Learning Network. 6 Small Steps to Health and Wealth. If you believe you have paid more tax than you owe, you must file a timely claim for refund, otherwise the BOE is unable to issue a refund. 1 Whichever of the following dates occurs last is your deadline to file a timely claim for refund: 2 Three years from the due date of the return on which you paid too much tax. Payment of use tax to the Department of Motor Vehicles is deemed to be the filing of a return. Six months from the date you overpaid tax. Six months from the date a determination (billing) became final. If it has been at least 90 days since you submitted your completed application along with all required documentation and you have not received your check, or you received your check and lost it, you can contact us at (518) 591-3100 weekdays 8:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M., or for sales tax refunds on motor fuel at (518) 591-3077 weekdays 8:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. What eFilers are Saying. 1 Thank you for providing efile. This is the best way to file taxes, ever!!!. 2 It's fast and easy to use. I've used e-file since 2005 and I never have a problem using this web site to file my federal and state taxes.. Pay the tax requested by the DMV and file a claim for refund for any overpaid district tax and submit it to the BOE. To file a claim for refund on overpaid use tax to the DMV, please follow these steps: 1 Verify the correct tax rate for the address where your vehicle is registered. 2 Compare this rate to the rate you were charged at the time of registration with DMV. Once you filed your taxes and the IRS accepts the filing, your refund (by check or direct deposit) should be on its way within 21 days if you file electronically, or up to six weeks if you file a paper return by mail. Query: how long do i have to claim my tax refund",
"output": [
"You have to claim your tax refund for three years from the due date."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0657107c37144ec097b17d01c72dccc6",
"input": "Here’s the Cooking Light version of my favorite salmon preparation: Combine 3 tablespoons white miso paste, 2 tablespoons sugar, 2 tablespoons sake, 2 tablespoons olive oil, and 1 teaspoon lemon juice. Brush this mixture over 4 (6-ounce) frozen salmon fillets. Broil fillets until the tops are charred, about 12 minutes. Cover pan with foil, and broil an additional 15 minutes or until desired degree of doneness. Carefully thawed frozen salmon can be nearly indistinguishable from fresh-caught, but careful thawing takes time. So what happens if you cook salmon fillets straight from the freezer? I tried it out, rubbing a frozen fillet with my miso marinade and placing it under the broiler. I plan to bake (roast) simple salmon fillets (evoo & salt & pepper) in a 375 oven while cooking another dish needing that temp. About how... A: Not in the least. The best lesson my high school physics teacher ever taught me was that it’s OK to be lazy. Well, not quite. What he said was, “If you can get the same results the fast and easy way as with the hard and laborious way, do it the easy way.”. Case in point: cooking salmon. Share “The Best Salmon You've Ever Had Is Slow-Baked in Just 22 Minutes” on Facebook; Share “The Best Salmon You've Ever Had Is Slow-Baked in Just 22 Minutes” on Twitter; Share “The Best Salmon You've Ever Had Is Slow-Baked in Just 22 Minutes” on Pinterest What's more, if you cook the salmon in single-serving portions (instead of one large piece) and choose the optimal oven temperature, slow-baking can actually be pretty fast. Q: I buy my salmon prefrozen—should I be ashamed? A: Not in the least. The best lesson my high school physics teacher ever taught me was that it’s OK to be lazy. Well, not quite. What he said was, “If you can get the same results the fast and easy way as with the hard and laborious way, do it the easy way.” Case in point: cooking salmon. One of my favorite quick dinners is salmon fillets coated in a sweet miso and sake and cooked under the broiler until charred on the outside and medium-rare in the center. It takes about half an hour, start to finish. Get dinner on the table in just 20 minutes with a recipe for Oven-Baked Salmon from Food Network, and serve it with a Toasted Almond Parsley Salad. Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F. Season salmon with salt and pepper. Place salmon, skin side down, on a non-stick baking sheet or in a non-stick pan with an oven-proof handle. Bake until salmon is cooked through, about 12 to 15 minutes. Serve with the Toasted Almond Parsley Salad and squash, if desired. Toasted Almond Parsley Salad: Share “The Best Salmon You've Ever Had Is Slow-Baked in Just 22 Minutes” on Twitter; Share “The Best Salmon You've Ever Had Is Slow-Baked in Just 22 Minutes” on Pinterest; Share “The Best Salmon You've Ever Had Is Slow-Baked in Just 22 Minutes” on Google+; Email “The Best Salmon You've Ever Had Is Slow-Baked in Just 22 Minutes” Query: how long do you salmon in oven",
"output": [
"20 minutes with a recipe for Oven-Baked Salmon from Food Network, and serve it with a Toasted Almond Parsley Salad."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e2d2e2ff88754b2ebe2a61b25a2e6f12",
"input": "The moon orbits the earth in a little under 28 earth days. It travels at almost 2,290 miles per hour. Coincidentally, the moon's rotation period is also a little under 28 days, meaning the same face points toward the earth during its entire orbit. When the moon is between the Earth and the sun, during the new moon phase, the back side of the moon is bathed in daylight. The orbit and the rotation aren't perfectly matched, however. The moon travels around the Earth in an elliptical orbit, a slightly stretched-out circle. When the moon is closest to Earth, its rotation is slower than its journey through space, allowing observers to see an additional 8 degrees on the eastern side. Why does the Earth and the moon remain in orbit? Inertia and gravity combine to keep Earth in orbit around the sun and the moon in orbit around the Earth. (pg 524) v. the different shapes of the moon you see from the earth are called How long does it take for the Earth to rotate on its own axis ? The time it takes the Earth to rotate once is called a day (24 hours). The actual rotation time is a little less, about 23 hours and 56 minutes. If you ignore the earth's orbit around the sun, the moon takes 27.32 days to go 360 degrees around us. In other words, the time it takes to cover 360 degrees of the celestial sphere. But since we orbit the sun, the moon has to travel farther than 360 degrees to reach the same point, with respect to the earth and sun. (It's about an extra 28 degrees). Since we notice phases much more than what stars we see the moon against, the phase cycle of 29.5 days is the one most commonly used. v. an object that orbits the sun, is large enough to have become rounded by its own gravity and has cleared the area of its orbit. planet. v. bright streak of light produced when a small object burns up entering the Earth's atmosphere. Seconds) to go all the way around earth moon's orbital period is time it takes for moon complete one orbit does, in fact, rotate, and because of this every spot on sees albeit that lunar days nights are each 14. 34g cm3, the period is 118 minutes. If you ignore the earth's orbit around the sun, the moon takes 27.32 days to go 360 degrees around us. In other words, the time it takes to cover 360 degrees of the celestial sphere. But since we orbit the sun, the moon has to travel farther than 360 degrees to reach the same point, with respect to the earth and sun. (It's about an extra 28 degrees). Since we notice phases much more than what stars we see the moon against, the phase cycle of 29.5 days is the one most commonly used. The Moon orbits Earth in the prograde direction and completes one revolution relative to the stars in approximately 27.323 days (a sidereal month). Earth and the Moon orbit about their barycentre (common center of mass), which lies about 4,600 km (2,900 mi) from Earth's center (about 3/4 of the radius of Earth). If I use this gravity model, I can calculate the force per unit mass for an object in the location of the moon due to both the Sun and Earth. 1 Gravitational force per mass due to the Sun = 0.00589 N/kg. 2 Gravitational force per mass due to the Earth = 0.00270 N/kg. Query: how long does it take moon to orbit earth",
"output": [
"Moon takes 28 days to orbit the Earth."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-796d651e69e24791ab5a86503d068fad",
"input": "But replacing the cloudy cataract with a conventional artificial lens will at least improve their vision to some degree. Q: Can cataracts be prevented? A: Good question. There are many places in the world where cataract surgery isn’t available. As a result, an estimated 20 million people worldwide are totally blind from cataracts. So if you could delay the onset of this aging change, you might prevent severe vision loss in a significant number of people. The First Few Weeks After Surgery. 1 You can bath or shower, but avoid getting water in or near your eye. 2 Typically, you will have a follow-up visit with your cataract surgeon the day after surgery. 3 Have someone drive you to your follow-up visit. 4 Wear dark, ultraviolet (UV) protective sunglasses when outdoors. Occasionally, cataract surgery fails to improve vision because of underlying eye damage from other conditions, such as glaucoma or macular degeneration. If possible, it may be beneficial to evaluate and treat other eye problems before making the decision to have cataract surgery. Seek medical advice as soon as possible if you experience: 1 a throbbing or severe pain in or around your eye. 2 a severe frontal headache with or without nausea and vomiting. 3 a sudden deterioration or loss of vision. 4 increasing redness in your eye. A review of a number of studies found 95% of people with a monofocal lens and about 70% of people with a multifocal lens needed glasses after having cataract surgery. Another type of artificial lens called an accommodating lens is designed to act in a similar way to a natural lens. If you have cataracts in both eyes, your doctor usually schedules the second surgery after the first eye has healed. Results. Cataract surgery successfully restores vision in the majority of people who have the procedure. People who've had cataract surgery may develop a secondary cataract. You may have a pad and plastic shield over your eye when you leave hospital, which can usually be removed the day after surgery. Feeling should start to return to your eye within a few hours of surgery, but it may take a few days for your vision to fully return. It's normal to have: grittiness ; watering; blurred vision; double vision; red or bloodshot eye; These side effects usually improve within a few days but it can take 4 to 6 weeks to recover fully. If you need new glasses, you won't be able to order them until your eye has completely healed – usually after 6 weeks. Cataract surgery has a high success rate in improving your eyesight and should allow you to return to your normal activities, like driving. When to seek help. Contact your eye surgery department as soon as possible if you experience: increased pain and/or redness; increased stickiness; decreased vision; Dos and don'ts. For the first few weeks after surgery: Do: use your eye drops as instructed ; take it easy for the first 2 to 3 days; use your eye shield at night for at least a week ; take painkillers if you need to A , Ophthalmology, answered. Vision usually improves rapidly (within a few days) following cataract surgery. For some, vision may be excellent within hours. For others, it may take several days or even a few weeks to return to normal. This longer interval does not necessarily indicate any complication or failure of the surgery. Immediately After Cataract Surgery. 1 At the conclusion of your cataract surgery, a lightweight protective shield will be placed over your eye, held in place with surgical tape. This shield will decrease the risk of injury from inadvertently rubbing or accidentally bumping your eye. Activity Suggestions. Returning to the activities that you engage in every day will help your eyes and brain adjust to life after cataract surgery. But you will likely find your vision so improved that you are motivated to resume activities or hobbies that you haven't been able to do for a long time. And you may even find that you'd like to take up a few new ones. Depending on how long it has been since your surgery, and whether you need or have had surgery in one or both eyes, you may still be adjusting to the change. Query: how long does it take for vision to improve after cataract surgery",
"output": [
"Vision usually improves within a few days following cataract surgery."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4b7d0dd692864fb1b546339704474989",
"input": "Do you want to get your tax refund fast after filing this year? See these tips on how to speed up your money and check the status of your tax return. Advertiser Disclosure: The credit card offers that appear on this site are from credit card companies from which MoneyCrashers.com receives compensation. A: Tax returns filed with the state by mail generally take about eight weeks to receive refunds, while returns sent in electronically take about three weeks. The refund disbursement time frame is different in each state, and other circumstances, such as volume of returns being processed, may hold up refunds. Maryland state tax refund – Maryland paper filers can expect their refund in 30 days, and e-filers in less time than that. Marylanders can check the status of their refunds here. Massachusetts state refund – An e-filed return should get you a refund in less than a week, a paper return in less than 3 weeks. If you lodged with a registered tax agent, they can amend your tax return. See also: Amendment requests 2017 – how to amend your tax return. Once you’ve lodged your tax return, we will issue you a notice of assessment. This tells you whether you're entitled to a refund or that you have a tax debt to pay. If you think you made a mistake on your tax return, you can lodge an amended return online. Though time limit is huge with ITD to process each tax return but practically they do not take so much time , generally speaking earlier Income tax department were taking genearlly 6 to 12 months time but for F.Y 2014–15 they took only 1 to 2 month time to process and issue refund so it depends upon various factors year to year like Learn how long it takes to get your tax refund after you've filed your Canadian income tax, how to check refund status, and how returns can be delayed. How long does a tax refund take? Typically, it takes HMRC 8-10 weeks to process an average tax refund claim. What forms do I need? You'll need to sign a 64-8 Authorising Your Agent Form Missing 64-8 forms are the most common reason for delays in getting your money. What is the slowest way to get your tax refund? The longest amount of time your refund will take is if you paper file your return. If that’s the case, you can tack on an additional 4 weeks to all of the times given above. That’s how long it takes the Tax Department to process paper returns. With refund season well underway and the average direct deposit tax refund being over $3,000 last tax season, we are hearing the common tax season question: “Where’s My Refund?” We know that you work hard for your money and often a tax refund may be the biggest check you get all year, so we’re here to let you know what happens after you hit the e-file button and how to check the status of your tax refund. How long will it take for me to receive my refund? Timely filed, error-free tax returns take approximately 2 to 3 weeks for processing and issuance of a refund check. Is there a phone number that I can call to check on my refund? As long as your tax return has been processed, you may call (202) 727-4TAX to find out the status of your refund. You may check your refund status online at the Electronic Taxpayer Service Center. MyTax.DC.gov Query: how long does an income tax return take",
"output": [
"An income tax return takes 6 to 12 months time."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e1d4ce233d9442338bd236551a0a5d74",
"input": "How do you spell grey/gray and what's the difference? i know I sound stupid, BUT how do you spell grey/gray and what's the difference?... asked under Guy's Behavior i know I sound stupid, BUT how do you spell grey/gray and what's the difference? Once we can pull patterns out of the behavior surveys, we can select dogs that all tend to show a behavior of interest and compare their DNA to dogs that don’t. And this is all done with DNA extracted from saliva. The dog owners are each sent a kit to collect a small amount of saliva from their pup to send back to us. In American English, the word 'behavior' is used, and is spelled: b − e − h − a − v − i − o − r In British English, the word 'behaviour' is used, and is spelled: b − e − h − a − v − i − o − u − r Retrieved from http://answers.wikia.com/wiki/How_do_you_spell_behavior?oldid=5723732 In American English, the word 'behavior' is used, and is spelled: B − E − H − A − V − I − O − R. In British English, the word 'behaviour' is used, and is spelled: B − E − H − A − V − I − O − U − R. Lol I wander that every time I write the word grey to an answer on this site. And sometimes I end up changing it so many times until I decide which one looks right. 0 The more dogs we can enroll, the better we’ll be able to pinpoint differences in DNA that matter for behavior. Jesse McClure, PhD, is a former military working dog handler and pet trainer turned academic researcher with training in applied behavior, neuroscience, and behavioral genetics. Behavior or behaviour is the range of actions and mannerisms made by individuals, organisms, systems, or artificial entities in conjunction with themselves or their environment, which includes the other systems or organisms around as well as the physical environment. It is the response of the system or organism to various stimuli or inputs, whether internal or external, conscious or subconscious, overt or covert, and voluntary or involuntary. Taking a behavior informatics perspective, a behavior consists of behavior actor, operation, interactions, and their properties. A behavior can be represented as a behavior vector. Certainly, some people may know their dog’s behavior better than others, and some answers provided will be far from perfect. But that’s okay. We’re not reading anything into individual answers—instead we’re looking for consistent patterns among large numbers of dogs (8,485 dogs are currently enrolled). Behavior (American English) or behaviour (Commonwealth English) is the range of actions and mannerisms made by individuals, organisms, systems, or artificial entities in conjunction with themselves or their environment, which includes the other systems or organisms around as well as the (inanimate) physical environment. In American English, the word 'behavior' is used, and is spelled: B − E − H − A − V − I − O − R In British English, the word 'behaviour' is used, and is spelled: B − E − H − A − V − I − O − U − R Query: how do you spell behavior",
"output": [
"Behavior is spelled as B, E, H, A, V, I, O , R."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-262f197b5aaa4dd588b4a58215d17fb5",
"input": "Fish contains omega-3 fatty acids (also known as the good cholesterol) which are proven to lower the risk of heart disease and help with numerous other health problems. So, how long does fish last? When properly stored, the shelf life of fish past its sell by date is approximately ... Of course, fish lasts for a shorter period of time if it is not stored properly. But remember that fish, like a lot of other proteins, usually has a sell by date and not a use by date or expiration date. Catfish that has been defrosted in the fridge can be kept for an additional 1 to 2 days in the refrigerator before cooking; catfish that was thawed in the microwave or in cold water should be cooked immediately. How long does catfish last in the fridge once it is cooked? Cooked catfish will usually stay good for 3 to 4 days in the fridge and 4 months in the freezer. How to tell if raw catfish is bad? The best way is to smell and look at the catfish: signs of bad catfish are a sour smell, dull color and slimy texture; discard any catfish with an off smell or appearance. This is a great method. Fresh catfish, 3 days at the longest. we dont refrigerate catfish, but as long as you can cook it as soon as possible much better..maybe you can refrigerate it for about a week..thanks. Health dept. says 3 days, but will last at least 5 if kept to temp. Check out this link: http://extension.missouri.edu/explore/mi... How long is fried catfish good without refrigeration? Left fried catfish in a container for a couple of hours, is it still ok to eat Thaw in the refrigerator or defrost in the microwave oven. If thawing in the refrigerator, allow one to two hours per pound of seafood. http://www.uaex.edu/Other_Areas/publications/PDF/fsfcs100.pdf & Another quote from the link below; ... If food is allowed to remain at room temperature for two hours or longer, bacteria can multiply and cause food poisoning. Bacteria grow rapidly at temperatures between 40 °F and 140 °F; catfish should be discarded if left out for more than 2 hours at room temperature. To further extend the shelf life of raw catfish, freeze; when freezing, place catfish in the freezer before the number of days shown for refrigerator storage has elapsed. 13 Comments Latest Jun 27, 2016 by ferret. 1 Karl S. Jan 27, 2005 Depends on how fresh it was when you got it and how cold it has been kept in your fridge. 2 A Fish Called Wanda Jan 27, 2005 I agree with everything Karl S. said. 3 Lee Jan 28, 2005 Personally, I only buy fish on the day that I am going to cook it. (Also) I feel like I’m limited to what I can do with the chicken once its cooked. Thanks for your help, SS. Dear SS: According to Foodsafety.gov, whole, uncooked poultry (chicken or turkey) is safe in the refrigerator for 1 A. how long can you keep fried catfish in refrigeraor and still be good to eat ... a. How long is fried catfish good without refrigeration?~Left fried catfish in ... In the food service industry, we are taught that is is safe to save food for 3 days in the ... Anything fried I keep for 3 days. But I always reheat everything before eating them again ... Query: how long can fried catfish stay good to eat in the refrigerator?",
"output": [
"Cooked catfish will usually stay good for 3 to 4 days in the fridge and 4 months in the freezer."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ec76b2c2769c4546b8115da07e2c89c2",
"input": "If you are eligible to apply online for your first passport, you can choose to renew your children’s passports at the same time. This means you can submit and pay for the applications as a family group. To renew your children’s passports you must be their parent or legal guardian. Your must have been at least 16 years old when your last passport was issued. The passport renewal process isn’t used for minor passports. Children who are still under 16 will have to apply for another minor passport, which will be valid for 5 years. If you turned 16 since your last passport was issued, you can apply for your first adult passport. RushMyPassport.com is a private service that charges an additional fee to expedite your passport in 1-12 days. Customer Testimonials. I needed the efficient and speedy service of a passport processing agency, and I found just that with Expedited Travel.. Step 1: Apply Early. 1 Adult passports are valid for 10 years and may be renewed by mail. 2 Minors' passports may not be renewed by mail. 3 Many countries require that passports be valid for at least 6 months after you enter their country. Renew your passport in plenty of time for those trips or pay for expedited service. Renew a Passport by Mail Step 1: Apply Early. If you are renewing your passport using Passport Renewal Application Form DS-82, Post Offices do not need to review or process your application. You can mail your renewal application directly to the State Department yourself. Adult passports are valid for 10 years and may be renewed by mail. Minors' passports may not be renewed by mail. Many countries require that passports be valid for at least 6 months after you enter their country. Renew your passport in plenty of time for those trips or pay for expedited service. Step 2: Check Your Renewal Eligibility Passport Application Form [click here for pdf ] signed by applicant, or in case of minor below 18 years old, signed by the parent or legal guardian. Do Not Bring Passport Pictures. Passport Pictures are to be Taken by the Consulate. Passports Valid for a Year or Less From Issuance Date May be Renewed. 43 Responses to “How to Renew Your Passport” Ahuva Shweiki. Need to renew my Israeli passport Please call Thanks. March 11th, 2015 at 11:50 am ; Alison Kroulek. Hi Ahuva, Unfortunately we are only able to help US citizens renew their US passports. Please contact the nearest Israeli consulate or embassy to renew your passport. March 21st, 2015 at 3:50 pm Renew a Passport from Outside the United States. U.S. citizens residing abroad (except those living in Canada) should renew their passports at the nearest U.S. Embassy or U.S. Consulate. Please visit their specific website for specific instructions. U.S. citizens residing in Canada may submit Form DS-82 to the address listed on the form. You should allow approximately three weeks to receive a new passport. You can help minimise processing time by ensuring you provide everything we need when you lodge your application. If you need your passport in a hurry, you can use our priority processing service for an extra fee. Read our Passport Renewal FAQs » RushMyPassport™ can expedite your expired or expiring passport online in as little as 24 hours. To get started with our expedited process and to receive your passport renewal in time for your trip, review the required documents on our Passport Renewal Checklist » Ready to Renew Your Passport? Your departure date must be later than: 02/22/2018 Query: how long to renew expired passport",
"output": [
"RushMyPassport™ can renew your expired or expiring passport online in as little as 24 hours."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b425550a80ef4908a1a2f22587bbb367",
"input": "Thailand Weather and Climate in July Information about the weather for Thailand in July: >> Current temperature and weather forecast for Thailand >> Climate table and weather in July for Thailand >> Current water temperature for Thailand 14-Day weather forecast for Thailand Weather in Bangkok Bangkok,Thailand W... Thailand Weather and Climate in May Information about the weather for Thailand in May: >> Current temperature and weather forecast for Thailand >> Climate table and weather in May for Thailand >> Current water temperature for Thailand 14-Day weather forecast for Thailand Weather in Bangkok Bangkok,Thailand Wea... Guide to Pattaya weather in September The average maximum daytime temperature in Pattaya in September is a hot 31°C (88°F) with very high heat & humidity. The average night-time temperature is usually a warm 25°C (77°F). Key weather averages for Pattaya in September. 1 31. 31°C max day temperature. 2 5. 5 hours of sunshine per day. 3 17. 17 days with some rainfall. 4 25. 25°C min night temperature. 5 12. 12 hours of daylight per day. 6 VH. Very High heat & humidity. 7 259. 259 mm of monthly rainfall. 8 11. 11+ (Extreme) UV index. 9 29. 29°C sea temperature. Weather in Pattaya in September 2017. Expect 31°C daytime maximum temperatures in the shade with on average 5 hours of sunshine per day in Pattaya in September. Check more long-term weather averages for Pattaya in September before you book your next holiday to Thailand in 2017. Thailand Weather and Climate in October Information about the weather for Thailand in October: >> Current temperature and weather forecast for Thailand >> Climate table and weather in October for Thailand >> Current water temperature for Thailand 14-Day weather forecast for Thailand Weather in Bangkok Bangkok,Thailan... Popular Thailand destinations. 1 Bangkok. 2 Chiang Mai. 3 Hua Hin. 4 Khao Lak. 5 Koh Samui. 6 Krabi. 7 Pattaya. 8 Phuket. Key weather averages for Pattaya in September. 1 31. 31°C max day temperature. 2 5. 5 hours of sunshine per day. 3 17. 17 days with some rainfall. 4 25. 25°C min night temperature. 5 12. 12 hours of daylight per day. 6 VH. 7 259. 259 mm of monthly rainfall. 8 11. 11+ (Extreme) UV index. 9 29. 29°C sea temperature. Thailand Weather and Climate in January Information about the weather for Thailand in January: >> Current temperature and weather forecast for Thailand >> Climate table and weather in January for Thailand >> Current water temperature for Thailand 14-Day weather forecast for Thailand Weather in Bangkok Bangkok,Thailan... Thailand Weather and Climate in June Information about the weather for Thailand in June: >> Current temperature and weather forecast for Thailand >> Climate table and weather in June for Thailand >> Current water temperature for Thailand 14-Day weather forecast for Thailand Weather in Bangkok Bangkok,Thailand W... Query: how is the weather in thailand in september",
"output": [
"Expect 31°C daytime maximum temperatures in the shade with on average 5 hours of sunshine per day in Pattaya, Thailand in September."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-fe7ff39636ec4a88bd366c794a3a6101",
"input": "10 to 14 years old may not sound particularly old, especially for a fit and healthy dog, but there are a couple of factors that will automatically limit a Lab’s lifespan to some extent. The general rule of thumb is that smaller dogs live longer than their larger counterparts. In 2014, the UK breed survey reported an average lifespan for the Labrador Retriever of 12 years and 3 months, with some living up to 19 years of age. Labrador pups generally are not brought to the home before they are 8 weeks old. It is a healthy breed with relatively few major problems. The best age to bring your Labrador puppy home is at 8 weeks old. We would suggest 7 weeks as the absolute minimum age and no reputable breeder would normally allow you to bring your new puppy home any earlier. Today’s Labrador Retriever is as good-natured and hard working as his ancestors, and he’s America’s most popular breed. These days the Lab works as a retriever for hunters, assistance dog to the handicapped, show competitor, and search and rescue dog, among other canine jobs. Giving you the best ways to keep your aging Labrador Retriever fit, comfortable and happy. If you are looking for information on how long Labradors live for, read our in-depth article on Labrador Life Span here. Is My Labrador Old? It may surprise you as it did me, to find out that the pet food companies classify a dog as young as seven years as ‘senior’. Labrador Retrievers as a breed have a life expectancy of around ten to twelve years. So it is a little sad to think that when they reach age seven, they are already considered to be entering the winter of their lives. Years of breeding between these immigrant dogs created, among others, the St Johns dog breed – a direct ascendant of the modern day Labrador Retriever. The first written record of ‘Labrador’ in reference to the breed was in 1887 in a letter penned by the British Earl of Malmesbury, although it’s thought they were associated with the term long before this. Labrador Retriever (12.6 years) – Stetson is a 5 year old black Labrador Retriever Golden Retriever (12.0 years) – Apache is a 1 year old Golden Retriever Cairn Terrier (13.2) – Ralphie is my parents 7 year old Cairn Terrier Mix Now we have a one year old Yorkie who had a rough few months with a liver shunt problem, but with surgery, she is completely well. We hope she lives well beyond her 12.8 year life expectancy! @Irene, WOW! 17 and 18 years old! I hope my guys live that long too and are in good health their entire lives. Labrador Retriever - a purebred, large dog from United States and Canada with a typical lifespan of 12 years, height of 24 inches, and weight of 73 pounds. The #1 AKC breed. See data on personality, health, cost of ownership, and more. Many people will tell you that the average life expectancy of a Labrador is ten to twelve years. But some Labradors live a good deal longer than twelve, and some unfortunately don’t make it to ten. So what controls how long your Labrador will live? Query: how long do labrador retrievers live in dog years",
"output": [
"The average lifespan for the Labrador Retriever is 12 years to 19 years of age."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e60fc79447cb4af2b512b13ed260eb1a",
"input": "This Day in History: 10/03/1995 - O.J. Simpson Aquitted On this day in 1995, at the end of a sensational trial, former football star O.J. Simpson is acquitted of the brutal 1994 double murder of his estranged wife, Nicole Brown Simpson, and her friend, Ronald Goldman. O. J. Simpson robbery case; Court: Nevada District Court: Full case name: State of Nevada v. Orenthal James Simpson, et al. Decided: October 3, 2008; 9 years ago () Verdict: Guilty on all 12 counts: Case history; Subsequent action(s) O.J. Simpson was sentenced to 33 years in prison with eligibility for parole in 9 years. He would be released from prison on October 1, 2017. Now he has been released as of December 12, 2017. On October 3, 1995 The Trial of the Century ended with the acquittal of former football star O.J. Simpson for double-murder - Where are all the key figures now? At the end of a sensational trial, former football star O.J. Simpson is acquitted of the brutal 1994 double murder of his estranged wife, Nicole Brown Simpson, and her friend, Ronald Goldman. Meet The 12 People Who Found Him Not Guilty. By Tom Downey July 21, 2017. This article was originally republished on 4/5/2016 before the season finale of The People Vs. O.J. Simpson: American Crime Story, which focuses on the jury and their verdict in the O.J. Simpson trial. LAS VEGAS – O.J. Simpson faces at least four more years in prison after a judge rejected his bid for a new trial in his Las Vegas armed robbery and kidnapping conviction. All grounds in the petition lack merit and, consequently, are denied, Clark County District Judge Linda Marie Bell said in her ruling Tuesday. Woods said in her interview that even after seeing the show, she would still make the same decision and vote not guilty for Simpson's verdict. Since the show ended, these are the seven things Woods said The People v. O.J. Simpson got wrong about the trial: Jury Outings To Ross Department Store O. J. Simpson murder case. The O. J. Simpson murder case (officially titled People of the State of California v. Orenthal James Simpson) was a criminal trial held at the Los Angeles County Superior Court in which former National Football League (NFL) player, broadcaster, and actor Orenthal James O. J. Simpson was tried on two counts of murder for the June 12, 1994, deaths of his ex-wife Nicole Brown Simpson and Mezzaluna restaurant waiter Ronald Goldman. Quick Answer. The O.J. Simpson trial lasted more than eight months. Opening statements for the murder trial were given on Jan. 24, 1995, and a verdict was reached on Oct. 3, 1995. O.J. Simpson was tried on two counts of murder in Los Angeles County for the 1994 deaths of his ex-wife Nicole Brown and Ronald Goldman. O.J. Simpson was a former professional football player and actor, and the trial has been said to be the most publicized criminal trial in history. Both Clarence Stewart and O. J. Simpson were charged with: 1 Count 1: Conspiracy to commit a crime. 2 Count 2: Conspiracy to commit kidnapping. 3 Count 3: Conspiracy to commit robbery. 4 Count 4: Burglary while in possession of a deadly weapon. 5 Count 5: 1st degree kidnapping with use of a deadly weapon (for Bruce Fromong) Query: how long was oj simpson's trial",
"output": [
"O.J. Simpson was tried on two counts of murder."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-499b477b1e6140b89e5bcb8bccacb830",
"input": "“The easiest way to avoid it is to keep your lint filter and dryer exhaust vents clean on a regular basis,” Lorraine Carli of the National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) told Patch. Here are some tips from the NFPA on how to prevent dryer fires. 1 Have your dryer installed and serviced by a professional. Installing a dryer is not a good DIY project. 2 Clean the lint out of the lint trap before each load. At least once a year, and more often if you notice your clothes are taking longer than usual to dry, clean the lint out of your vent pipes or have a dryer lint removal service do it. Some fire chiefs who have put out many dryer-related home fires recommend cleaning your vent pipes every few months, according to www.dryerbox.com. “The easiest way to avoid it is to keep your lint filter and dryer exhaust vents clean on a regular basis,” Lorraine Carli of the National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) told Patch. Here are some tips from the NFPA on how to prevent dryer fires. Have your dryer installed and serviced by a professional. Installing a dryer is not a good DIY project. In March 2015, three families in Colorado Springs had to flee their homes after a fire spread through two floors of an apartment building, according to a local television report. Fire investigators pinpointed the cause: a build-up of clothes dryer lint. The dryer lint is the fuel a fire needs. The appliance itself is the heat source a fuel needs to produce a fire. Oxygen is present naturally. What is needed at this point to cause a fire is the chemical chain reaction between the oxygen, the heat source and the fuel when it reaches its ignition temperature. If the blocked dryer vent does not allow the heat to escape and the small surface area of the lint reaches its ignition temperature; a fire can occur.. On our to-do list this weekend, is to once again clean out our dryer’s lint trap and vent, from the appliance to the outside of the house. How to Prevent Dryer Fires. It is very common for a clothes dryer to build up lint inside and eventually catch fire. Most of the time the lint burns itself out inside the machine leaving a burning smell and damage to the appliance. There... How to Prevent Dryer Fires It is very common for a clothes dryer to build up lint inside and eventually catch fire. Most of the time the lint burns itself out inside the machine leaving a burning smell and damage to the appliance. There are times however, when the... In the event that your dryer does have a lint fire, don't give it more fuel to destroy your home. Make sure there are no articles of clothing, boxes, cleaning supplies, or anything else behind or around the dryer. You should also keep things off the top of the dryer. Clothes dryer don’t's. 1 Don’t use a clothes dryer without a lint filter or with a lint filter that is loose, damaged or clogged. 2 Don’t overload the dryer. 3 Don’t use a wire screen or cloth to cover the wall damper. They can collect lint and clog the dryer vent. 4 Don’t dry anything containing foam, rubber or plastic. The cause? A build-up of lint behind the unvented dryer. And a month earlier, occupants just managed to escape their apartment during a raging fire in Bethesda, Maryland. The fire, which caused an estimated $1 million in damage, was caused by clothes dryer exhaust vents that were “100 percent clogged with lint,” according to fire investigators. Query: how does lint filter cause fire",
"output": [
"lint filter causes a fire by the chemical chain reaction between the oxygen, the heat source and the fuel when it reaches its ignition temperature."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d3284aa95cc74820a1b3f24bcc43c181",
"input": "Lifespan. Due to predation and hunting, squirrels' lifespans can vary drastically. The pests experience high mortality rates in their first year of life but are capable of living up to 15 years in the wild. The average squirrel lifespan is between five and six years. Since the pests are prolific breeders, homeowners dealing with squirrel infestations see populations rise dramatically. The total length of the squirrel ranges from 380 to 525 millimeters (mm). The tail length ranges from 150-250 mm. You can tell eastern grey squirrels apart from fox squirrels by their white tipped fur and white or grayish belly. Eastern grey squirrels often have a lot of red in their fur. Like other squirrels, it has large eyes set on the sides of its head that allow it to see all around with little movement of its head. It can see above and below, an adaptation well suited for life in the trees where danger can come from the ground, through the air, or along a nearby limb. Between 1930 and 1945 it underwent a huge expansion in range; it is now common throughout central and southern England, Wales and the central lowlands of Scotland (3), and is still increasing in terms of range and numbers (6). The grey squirrel has also been introduced to South Africa, Australia (3) and Italy (4). General description: Gray squirrels may have white or brownish bellies and, in winter, white ear tufts. Black and albino squirrels are variations of the gray squirrel. Length: Eight to 10 inches, with a tail roughly the same length. Weight: 1.5 pounds. Color: Mostly gray with a white to rusty-colored underside and rust-colored ears. Asker's rating. 1 Lifespan Of A Squirrel. Source(s): https://shrinks.im/a73un. 2 Squirrel Lifespan. Source(s): https://shrink.im/a8iw9. 3 Smaller rodents live less than the bigger ones, so the natural life span of squirrels varies from 4 to 7 years. They can live longer if they are well taken care of and live a calmed life. Since then they have been repeatedly released in parks, campuses, estates, and residential areas. They are now the most common tree squirrels in urban areas. The upper parts of the Eastern gray squirrel are gray with a reddish wash in summer; its underparts are whitish. It’s about 20 inches long, half of which is its prominent, bushy tail. Average Life Span in the Wild. The average life span of grey squirrels is extremely brief -- generally only between 11 and 12 months, according to the Smithsonian National Museum of Natural History. Despite this brevity in life expectancy, some free roaming grey squirrels have actually surpassed 10 years in age. In Captivity A single female grey squirrel that resided in a captive environment greatly outlived the typical life span of her species, making it to over 20 years old, reports the University of Michigan's Animal Diversity Web. Gray squirrels can be seen out in the winter months as long as the temperatures are not too cold (not below 30 degrees F) and as long as it is not raining or snowing. Food forages are calculated risks in which the use of energy (fat) reserves must yield a profit or the squirrel's vital fat insulation layer will be steadily lost and the individual will be unable to survive the winter. The grey squirrel was introduced to Great Britain in the mid-19th century. There is now an estimated population of 2 million making them much more common than the native red squirrel. 1 Overview. 2 Daily Life. 3 Winter. 4 Breeding. 5 Grey Squirrels and humans. 6 Credits. Query: how long is the lifespan of a common grey squirrel",
"output": [
"The average life span of grey squirrels is between 11 and 12 months."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-77979f4d8adc4ee3b7582b2f974ec6fa",
"input": "The initial term of office is six years for appellate judges and four years for superior court judges. Judges are subsequently reelected to additional terms. HAWAII: All judges are chosen through a merit selection process involving a nominating commission. The initial term of office is 10 years. A judicial selection commission reappoints judges to additional 10-year terms. IDAHO: All judges are selected by nonpartisan elections. The initial term of office is six years for appellate judges and four years for district court judges. In recent history, we have witnessed justices retaining their seats for longer durations. Over the history of the Supreme Court, the average length of service is 16 years, but since 1970, the average tenure has increased to 26 years. Justice Scalia has been on the court for more than 27 years. The longest serving justice of all time was William O. Douglas at more than 36 years. The initial term of office for the supreme court is ten years, while district court judges are elected to six-year terms. Judges are reelected to additional terms. OHIO: All judges are selected in partisan elections for six-year terms. It is clear that with a court divided over many controversial issues, a swing of one vote could have significant and long-standing consequences. Justice Ginsburg has served for 21 years. On multiple occasions, she has voiced her desire to continue to serve and she has even mentioned that she wishes to remain on the bench for as long as a justice she looks to with great admiration, Louis Brandeis. NEW YORK: Appellate court judges are chosen through a merit selection involving a nominating commission. Judges on the Court of Appeals serve 14 years, while judges in the Appellate Division of the Supreme Court serve five-year terms. Supreme Court and county court judges are elected in partisan elections. Term limits for Supreme Court justices have been suggested, however such restrictions would require a constitutional amendment. In today’s highly polarized political environment, coupled with fewer Supreme Court vacancies, each opportunity to place a new justice on the bench will likely become even more acrimonious. Posted by Olivia on March 22, 2014 in In The News - Comments Off on How long do Supreme Court justices typically serve? Justice Ginsburg (center) stands with Justice Sotomayor (left) and Justice Kagan (right). CALIFORNIA: The governor appoints nominees to the supreme court and courts of appeals to 12-year terms. These judges are subject to retention elections for additional 12-year terms. Superior court judges are elected in nonpartisan elections for six-year terms and may be reelected to additional six-year terms. More from In The News. 1 Ethics 101: No longer a required course for POTUS. 2 Trump election alters future of the Supreme Court. 3 Supreme Court hears first design patent case in more than a century. 4 Louis Brandeis’ record for longest delay between nomination and confirmation to fall. FLORIDA: Judges for the supreme court and district courts of appeal are chosen through a merit selection involving a nominating commission. The initial term of office is one years. Judges are subject to retention elections for six-year terms. Query: how long is a supreme court serve term",
"output": [
"The governor appoints nominees to the supreme court and courts of appeals to 12-year terms."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ff3a15958f9543cbaac3a690635d23e8",
"input": "Avoiding close contact with infected people, and coupling bed rest with home remedies and over-the-counter medicines should help get rid of the flu within two weeks. Considerations. Recovery should be spontaneous. Call a doctor if flu symptoms don't improve within two weeks, if they get worse or if an underlying condition gets worse. Misconceptions Antibiotics don't help treat the flu, as commonly believed, but some antiviral drugs can reduce symptoms when administered within 24 hours of the onset of symptoms. Some people are at increased risk for complications from influenza. 1 These people include: 2 the very young. 3 people 65 or older. 4 people with chronic illnesses, such as asthma, heart disease, HIV, or diabetes. 5 pregnant women. 6 people with a body mass index (BMI) of 40 or higher. These people include: 1 the very young. 2 people 65 or older. 3 people with chronic illnesses, such as asthma, heart disease, HIV, or diabetes. 4 pregnant women. 5 people with a body mass index (BMI) of 40 or higher. The typical flu incubation period is between 24 hours and four days, with the average being two days. This means that if you are exposed to the influenza virus and become infected, you will start to experience flu symptoms anywhere between 24 hours and four days after the exposure. How long does the flu last? For most healthy people, the flu is an uncomfortable but short-term illness that resolves itself as the immune system fights it off. Symptoms usually appear from one to four days after exposure to the virus, and they last five to seven days. For people who've had a flu shot, the symptoms may last a shorter amount of time, or be less severe. For other people, the symptoms may last longer. Even when symptoms resolve, you may continue to feel fatigued. The flu, or influenza virus infection, is a highly contagious airborne disease. It can be lethal, especially in weak individuals. In the U.S. alone, seasonal influenza accounts for approximately 36,000 deaths every year. A , Administration, answered. The first symptoms of influenza (flu) virus B, including fever, chills, headache, and body aches, often begin to go away after about 2 or 3 days. In some cases, these symptoms will last 5 days or longer. The respiratory symptoms of influenza virus B, such as coughing, throat irritation, and congestion may last for days or weeks. Avoiding close contact with infected people, and coupling bed rest with home remedies and over-the-counter medicines should help get rid of the flu within two weeks. Considerations Recovery should be spontaneous. Call a doctor if flu symptoms don't improve within two weeks, if they get worse or if an underlying condition gets worse. Misconceptions. Antibiotics don't help treat the flu, as commonly believed, but some antiviral drugs can reduce symptoms when administered within 24 hours of the onset of symptoms. The first symptoms of influenza (flu) virus B, including fever, chills, headache, and body aches, often begin to go away after about 2 or 3 days. In s The first symptoms of influenza (flu) virus B, including fever, chills, headache, and body aches, often begin to go away after about 2 or 3 days. If you get the flu, you should get rest and drink plenty of fluids. 1 Take pain relievers to lower your fever and relieve the aches, such as: 2 acetaminophen (Tylenol) 3 ibuprofen (Advil, Motrin) 4 naproxen (Aleve) Query: how long it takes to get over influenza",
"output": [
"The first symptoms of influenza often begin to go away after about 2 or 3 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-da24577906204c4eadd65ff05c9a1b67",
"input": "Well the show was to small. Returned them Jan 1st, just called (Jan 15th), they have the return but takes 21 days to check them in and send out the new pair. 21 business days to ship out a return? Last pair I will ever buy from Nike. Over priced shoes with zero customer service EXPLORE NIKE, INC. Learn about our company profile, community impact, sustainable motivation, and more. I both pair of Nikes for myself and my daughter. To me Nike have always been the best brand regarding sneakers running's sneakers and because It is the best quality ever. I look at my Nike which I both a few weeks ago, there is glue and the sneaker is pulling apart already and I only had... Duties and Responsibilities of a Customer Service Job. Deal with the customers via emails, over the phone, or face to face Listen to the customer queries patiently and solve it. If the problem doesn't seem to solve, then forward the problem to the superiors. Respond to the problems of the customer promptly Faulty Trainers - Ignoring Me! Awful Customer Service. I've always bought Nike Trainers but the latest pair after Two days of wearing them had a manufacturing fault. A chunk of the heel wasn't glued together properly and fell off whilst running causing me to fall and injure myself. Nike didn;t respond after sending a lengthy email and proof of this. See what's happening with Nike Golf at Nike.com. Home of the most innovative golf products and the best athletes. Connect with us online Click for a different version of this web site containing similar content optimized for screen readers Nike customer service and support experts have the answers to all of your order and product questions. Connect with one via chat or phone. Click for a different version of this web site containing similar content optimized for screen readers Nike Sportswear; Soccer; Skateboarding; Tennis; Football; Baseball; Kids; NFL; Nike Air; Nike VaporMax; Flyknit; Nike Free; Lunarlon; Nike Zoom; NikeGrip; Nike FlyEase; Nike Grind; NBA; NBA Jerseys; Nike Air Max Customer Service Manager salaries at NIKE can range from $47,347-$58,191. This estimate is based upon 2 NIKE Customer Service Manager salary report(s) provided by employees or estimated based upon statistical methods. See all Customer Service Manager salaries to learn how this stacks up in the market. Website: Nike Website Nike Customer Service Hours. Mon. 4:00am - 11:00pm; Tue. 4:00am - 11:00pm; Wed. 4:00am - 11:00pm; Thu. 4:00am - 11:00pm; Fri. 4:00am - 11:00pm; Sat. 4:00am - 11:00pm; Sun. 4:00am - 11:00pm; Review/Comment; Update Listing Query: how is nike customer service description",
"output": [
"Nike customer service and support experts have the answers to all of your order and product questions. Connect with one via chat or phone."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d56ea101e8684192a66b786b3c286aea",
"input": "Naturally Occurring. Just as every woman's body is unique, each woman's menopause experience will be highly personal. In fact, some women experience no physical symptoms at all, except the end of their menstrual periods. Menopause can occur as early as your 30s and, rarely, as late as your 60s. However, there is no correlation between the time of a woman's first period and her age at menopause. Facts to Know. 1 After age 55, more than half of all deaths in women are caused by heart disease. 2 There is a direct relationship between osteoporosis—a disease in which bones lose calcium and become brittle and more likely to fracture—and the lack of estrogen after menopause. Other changes and signs of menopause include: 1 Hot flashes (sudden warm feeling, sometimes with blushing) 2 Night sweats (hot flashes that occur at night, often disrupting sleep) 3 Fatigue (probably from disrupted sleep patterns) 4 Mood swings. 5 Vaginal dryness. 6 Fluctuations in sexual desire or response. 7 Difficulty sleeping. It typically starts in women's 40s, but they can notice changes in their mid- to late 30s. Menstrual periods may get heavier or clottier, and crampy. Irregular periods are another early sign. Bone loss. With estrogen loss, women can have low bone mass and an increased risk of osteoporosis. The most rapid bone loss is the first five to seven years post-menopause, Mendoza says. She likes to order DEXA scans to gauge bone strength early, when women are about 50, insurance permitting. Keeping a sense of humor and talking openly about menopause without shame or embarrassment can help women embrace this new phase, Puryear wrote in a recent blog. 'Foggy' thinking During perimenopause, some women feel they're thinking less clearly, Mendoza says, and it's harder for them to come up with names and numbers. There are ways to be comfortable through menopause, with treatment and lifestyle changes, says Rebecca Mendoza, a certified nurse practitioner at the Menopause Center of Minnesota. It isn't a time to be miserable -- women do well.. Menopause can be disruptive, though. Libido can take a hit from menopause for many reasons, Mendoza says. It's not always hormonal -- long-simmering relationship problems can erupt during this time of change. In her pratice, Puryear says, I tend to talk to women a lot about sex, because [they] get underrepresented in terms of treatment for and help with their sexual needs. Hormone fluctuations in menopause can lead to mood changes similar to premenstrual symptoms, says Dr. Lucy Puryear, medical director of The Women's Place -- Center for Reproductive Psychiatry at Texas Children's Pavilion for Women. These visits should include: 1 An annual breast examination by a health care professional. 2 A mammogram every one to two years. 3 An annual gynecologic exam. 4 A Pap test every three years or a Pap test combined with an HPV (human papillomavirus) test every five years. Query: how late can menopause hit with women",
"output": [
"Menopause can occur as late as your 60s with women."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d198a62ab5c7495e994190dcefb20322",
"input": "Approximately 3 weeks. Females lay eggs 5 to 7 days after emerging from the chrysalis. The eggs hatch after three days. Caterpillars emerge from the eggs and eat for 10 to 12 days before forming chrysalides. Adult butterflies emerge from the chrysalides in 7 to 10 days. In this post, I’m going to explain some of the most unknown facts about how long do butterflies live in captivity and in the wild. A butterfly is a flying insect that belongs to the Lepidoptera order along with the moths and butterflies. The Brimstone butterfly (Gonepterix rhamni) has the longest lifetime of the adult butterflies: 9-10 months. Some Case Moth caterpillars (Psychidae) build a case around themselves that they always carry with them. Q. How does a monarch butterfly know how to fly right away when it hatches out of its chrysalis? A. Instinct. Unlike humans, insects don't have to learn much. They are genetically programmed to do things like fly, find food, and migrate (in the case of monarchs). In some ways, this sounds like a great thing. Monarchs (Danaus plexippus) and Swallowtails may live about a month in the summer, but the Monarchs that migrate to Mexico or to the California coast may live up to six months. Some long-lived tropical butterflies live up to six months as adults. The long-life champion is a tiny yucca moth that feeds on Banana Yucca (Yucca baccata). Dr. In fact, four individual butterflies constitute the four generations that go through the said four phases in the span of one year, and then they start the process afresh starting with the first stage and first generation. 1 What Do Praying Mantis Eat | Praying Mantis Diet. 2 Peacock Butterfly Facts | Anatomy, Diet, Habitat, Behavior. 3 Pond Snail Facts | Anatomy, Diet, Habitat, Behavior. 4 Black Swallowtail Butterfly Facts | Anatomy, Diet, Habitat, Behavior. 5 Karner Blue Butterfly Facts | Anatomy, Diet, Habitat, Reproduction. Also fall-hatched monarch butterflies migrate south in fall and northward in spring. Adults of these species may survive for 8-9 months or longer. Total Life Span Although larvae eat only milkweed, adult monarchs feed on the nectar of many plants including: 1 Apocynum cannabinum – Indian hemp. 2 Asclepias sp. – milkweeds. 3 Aster sp. – asters. 4 Cirsium sp. – thistles. 5 Daucus carota – wild carrot. 6 Dipsacus sylvestris – teasel. 7 Echinacea sp. – coneflowers. 8 Erigeron canadensis – horseweed. The chrysalis is simply the word for the butterfly during the pupa stage. The outside of the chrysalis is the exoskeleton, or skin, of the pupa. When it becomes time for the larva (caterpillar) to become a chrysalis, the caterpillar spins a silk button from which it hangs. Query: how long does butterflies live",
"output": [
"The adult butterflies live 9-10 months."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-746294d39a474381958e1326cd4a2a99",
"input": "A net energy meter keeps track of the all the power your solar system produces. Any solar energy that you do not use simultaneous with production will go back into the electrical grid through the meter. At night or on cloudy days, when your system is not producing more than your building needs, you will consume electricity from the grid as normal. Touted as a promising alternative energy source for decades, solar panels crown rooftops and roadside signs, and help keep spacecraft powered. But how do solar panels work? Simply put, a solar panel works by allowing photons, or particles of light, to knock electrons free from atoms, generating a flow of electricity. Solar panels actually comprise many, smaller units called photovoltaic cells. (Photovoltaic simply means they convert sunlight into electricity.) Many cells linked together make up a solar panel. Each photovoltaic cell is basically a sandwich made up of two slices of semi-conducting material, usually silicon — the same stuff used in microelectronics. To work, photovoltaic cells need to establish an electric field. In addition, the nation’s solar capacity by the end of 2016 is projected to be double what it was at the beginning of 2015, while costs continue to decline and panel efficiencies increase. The question many people have is: How exactly do those panels work? The diagram above illustrates the operation of a basic photovoltaic cell, also called a solar cell. Solar cells are made of the same kinds of semiconductor materials, such as silicon, used in the microelectronics industry. For solar cells, a thin semiconductor wafer is specially treated to form an electric field, positive on one side and negative on the other. When light energy strikes the solar cell, electrons are knocked loose from the atoms in the semiconductor material. What's the biggest difference between how a plant captures light energy and how we do it with solar cells? We wish we could do what plants do because plants absorb the light, and [they use] that electron to change a chemical bond inside the plant to actually make fuel. Could you do artificial photosynthesis and emulate a plant? We would love to be able to make a solar cell that instead of making electricity makes fuel. That would be a very big advance. Solar panel conversion efficiency, typically in the 20% range, is reduced by dust, grime, pollen, and other particulates that accumulate on the solar panel. Solar photovoltaic (PV) panels are based on a high-tech but remarkably simple technology that converts sunlight directly to electricity < PREVIOUS: The Solar Resource | NEXT: Rooftop Solar Panels > It's an idea that has been around for well over a century. Sun Activation. 1 Photons bombard and penetrate the cell. 2 They activate electrons, knocking them loose in both silicon layers. 3 Some electrons in the bottom layer sling-shot to the top of the cell. 4 These electrons flow into metal contacts as electricity, moving into a circuit throughout a 60-cell module. How Solar Panels Work How a PV cell makes electricity Under the sun, a photovoltaic cell acts as a photosensitive diode that instantaneously converts light – but not heat – into electricity. Basic Steps in Solar Energy Generation and Transmission. 1 Sunlight hits the solar panels, and creates an electric field. 2 The electricity generated flows to the edge of the panel, and into a conductive wire. 3 The conductive wire brings the electricity to the inverter, where it is transformed from DC electricity to AC, which is used to power buildings. Query: how does solar panel work",
"output": [
"A solar panel works by allowing photons, or particles of light, to knock electrons free from atoms, generating a flow of electricity."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-46e41c57297b42d1a1893fe823dc6893",
"input": "Not true all the time. I had a miscarriage, and 2 weeks later ovulated and became pregnant. I read that your HCG levels have to go back down to 0 for you to even ovulate. The doctors thought I was pregnant due to remnants too, but had my blood taken and at 3 weeks pregnant, they were over 250. I am also having twins! PLEASE NOTE: If you are not yet pregnant click here to check out one of our other pregnancy communities. Last Reply: How long dose a positive pregnancy test show after giving birth However, since hCG levels are near their peak at about 10 to 12 weeks LMP, hCG levels may still be high enough 2 weeks following an abortion that pregnancy tests—both blood-based and urine—will still be positive. Sensitive pregnancy tests, including commonly-used office or home use urine test kits are likely to be positive between 16 to 60 days. If you have been given an hCG injection (Profasi, Pregnyl) to trigger ovulation or to lengthen the luteal phase of your cycle, trace hCG amounts can remain in your system as long as 10-14 (sometimes even more) days after your last injection. Head over to this page: https://messageboards.webmd.com/family-pregnancy/f/pregnancy/ 2. Choose the tag from the drop-down menu that clicks most with you (and add it to any posts you create so others can easily find and sort through posts) The human chorionic gonadotropin (hCG) test is done to check for the hormone hCG in blood or urine. Some hCG tests measure the exact amount. Some just check to see if the hormone is present. If you continue to have a positive blood pregnancy test, there is a possibility that you are: Pregnant again; Experiencing an incomplete miscarriage; Experiencing a molar pregnancy (very rare) Pregnant Again. If you have been sexually active and have a positive pregnancy test soon after a miscarriage, it's also possible that you might be pregnant again. Human chorionic gonadotropin (hCG) is a hormone produced by the placenta of a pregnant woman. Early in pregnancy, the level of hCG increases in the blood and is eliminated in the urine. A pregnancy test detects hCG in the blood or urine and confirms or rules out pregnancy. During the early weeks of pregnancy, hCG is important in maintaining function of the corpus luteum. As you can see, after an abortion the hCG levels remain up for as long as 60 days. Following an abortion a positive pregnancy test may occur for as long as 60 days post abortion when the termination procedure was successful. The following two paragraphs come from the 19the edition of Contraceptive Technology. I took misoprostol two days later. About 1 week later my hcg was 1000. 1.5 weeks later is was 600. 2.5 weeks later it was 130. 2 weeks later it was 73. 3 weeks later it was 14. 1.5 weeks later it was finally back to zero. That is 11 weeks of testing ladies. 3 or 4 days after I tested at 0 I got my first AF after my miscarriage. Query: how long is hcg positive after pregnancy",
"output": [
"HCG is positive as long as 60 days after pregnancy."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3a9685abd4d14358bbd95f2337ccbe03",
"input": "Alternatively, cooks can manually tenderize steaks by opting for a mechanical tool such as the marinade turbocharger, which pokes holes into meat fibers using numerous sharp needles. Pounding the meat with a kitchen mallet, or heavy skillet pan is another way to mechanically soften steak. Place the meat in a shallow dish, cover and place it in the refrigerator for at least 12 hours or overnight. You may also use baking soda to tenderize meat. Coat the steak with baking soda and put in the refrigerator, covered, for five to six hours. Wash the baking soda off completely before cooking the meat. Cooks can tenderize steak naturally by marinating the meat in natural acids or enzymes, which softens meat fibers. Yogurt is a dairy-based acidic food that also makes a great alternative meat tenderizer. Bromelain is the active natural enzyme contained in pineapple, and papaya contains an enzyme known as papain. Methods for tenderizing steak include using natural acidic liquids such as lemon juice and vinegar, pounding the meat with a mechanical tool, and scoring meat with a sharp knife. Meat can also be tenderized chemically by using marinades containing fruit enzymes. I do cook flank steak quite often, and usually marinate it for an hour or so in red wine, garlic, olive oil and whichever herbs I have on hand. I've never found the meat to be tough, and do like the flavour. Join the conversation! re: MMRuth mschow Jul 14, 2009 I think my BIL just used a generic brand meat tenderizer. Bromelain is the active natural enzyme contained in pineapple, and papaya contains an enzyme known as papain.Alternatively, cooks can manually tenderize steaks by opting for a mechanical tool such as the marinade turbocharger, which pokes holes into meat fibers using numerous sharp needles. How do you cook a tender steak in the broiler? A: Cook a tender steak in the broiler by choosing a tender cut of meat or marinating a less-tender cut of meat before cooking. Preheat the broiler before cook... Full Answer > I've never bought it before. However, a few weeks ago, I had some of the most tender and delicious London broil that my BIL made: he claims his secret was the meat tenderizer. He had purchased two London broils. One of them he marinated in Ken's Italian dressing to which he added meat tenderizer. The other piece he added no tenderizer to, but a teriyaki type marinade. We all agreed that the piece with the tenderizer added was far more tender and flavorful. The other piece was much chewier; both pieces were bought at the same store, same day. A: The three main most common ways to tenderize a steak are pounding, marinating the meat and slow cooking. There are also several commercially available meat... Full Answer > However I assure you there is not a CUT of beef known as London Broil recognized by the North American Meat Processors Association. ---If you read the fine print on the label you may see that the piece of meat is from the Top Round, Flank, Shoulder, etc. Again London Broil is a method of cooking...Not a cut of beef. Here is just one link out of a plethora of links on the subject! http://bbq.about.com/od/steaks/a/aa10... Query: how long before cooking do you apply meat tenderizer",
"output": [
"It takes 12 hours or overnight before cooking do you apply meat tenderizer."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8e4c26d3225a4e9a93c5fb4be68e99c5",
"input": "Where available, we'll return driving distance estimates and journey drive times for the distance between the two locations and a Google map with directions from Staten Island United States to New York City United States. The closest town to the halfway point is Win Bay, OR, situated 9.82 miles from New York, NY and 9.23 miles from Staten Island, NY. It would take 15 minutes to go from New York to Win Bay and 16 minutes to go from Staten Island to Win Bay. A car with an MPG of will need 1.78 gallons of gas to cover the route between New Rochelle, NY and Staten Island, NY. The estimated cost of gas to go from New Rochelle to Staten Island is $4.48. During the route, an average car will release 34.86 pounds of CO 2 to the atmosphere. Your carbon footprint is 0.91 pounds of CO 2 per mile. Halfway Point Between New York, NY and Staten Island, NY. If you want to meet halfway between New York, NY and Staten Island, NY or just make a stop in the middle of your trip, the exact coordinates of the halfway point of this route are 40.609771 and -74.03557, or 40º 36' 35.1756 N, 74º 2' 8.052 W. There are 11.92 miles from New York to Staten Island in southwest direction and 17 miles (27.36 kilometers) by car, following the I-278 route. New York and Staten Island are 29 minutes far apart, if you drive non-stop. This is the fastest route from New York, NY to Staten Island, NY. The halfway point is Win Bay, OR. Drive Distance from Staten Island United States to New York City United States Distance from Staten Island United States to New York City United States Calculate the distance between two locations, get towns within a radius or get the driving directions and road travel times for your journey from Staten Island United States using our journey planning tools. A car with an MPG of will need 0.79 gallons of gas to cover the route between New York, NY and Staten Island, NY. The estimated cost of gas to go from New York to Staten Island is $1.98. During the route, an average car will release 15.48 pounds of CO 2 to the atmosphere. How far is it between Staten Island and New York City. Staten Island is located in United States with (40.5623,-74.1399) coordinates and New York City is located in United States with (40.7143,-74.006) coordinates. The calculated flying distance from Staten Island to New York City is equal to 13 miles which is equal to 20 km. If you want to go by car, the driving distance between Staten Island and New York City is 28.76 km. If you ride your car with an average speed of 112 kilometers/hour (70 miles/h), travel time will be 00 hours 15 minutes. Please check the avg. speed travel time table on the right for various options. Distance, Gas Consumption and Emission Notes. Distance from Staten Island, NY to New York, NY is 17Miles or 28 Km. You can get this distance about 35 mins. If you want to planning travel with plane for 12 Miles or 20 Km, You can get this distance about 31 mins . This location is 19.22 miles away from New Rochelle, NY and Staten Island, NY and it would take approximately 28 minutes to reach the halfway point from both locations. Closest City or Town to Halfway Point. The closest city to the halfway point is West New York, NJ, situated 18.29 miles from New Rochelle, NY and 20.71 miles from Staten Island, NY. It would take 28 minutes to go from New Rochelle to West New York and 31 minutes to go from Staten Island to West New York. Major City Closest to Halfway Point. The major city closest to the halfway point between New Rochelle, NY and Staten Island, NY is Jersey City, NJ, situated 24.27 miles from New Rochelle, NY and 14.45 miles from Staten Island, NY. It would take 35 minutes to go from New Rochelle to and 22 minutes to go from Staten Island to Jersey City. Query: how far is the distance between staten island and nyu",
"output": [
"The flying distance from Staten Island to New York City is equal to 13 miles which is equal to 20 km and the driving distance between Staten Island and New York City is 28.76 km."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-5c6794f1c1204d649387da0737f5f058",
"input": "I believe Modern Art began just as the Impressionists were winding down. While this is an acceptable classification, strong arguments can be (and have been) made that Modern Art began at a variety of different dates. Depending on which survey course a person takes, Modern Art is said to have begun with either: 1 Romanticism, in the early 1800s, 2 Realism, in the 1830s, 3 Daguerre's announcement, in 1839, that he had invented a method for making a direct positive image, 4 The writer Baudelaire who, in 1846, called upon artists to be of their time, Vector Art – Roses Illustration in Art Nouveau style. Art Nouveau has seen somewhat of a revival in the last twenty years with the rise of postmodernism design. Artists all over the world use elements of this modern art style as inspiration. Such elements include sinuous lines, floral elements, nature features and the characteristic colors. The history of modern art is also the history of the progressive loss of art's audience. Art has increasingly become the concern of the artist and the bafflement of the public.. Art is a line around your thoughts.. There is no such thing as good painting about nothing.. In the previous posts I started writing about the influence of art history on modern design and I began with the Gothic Style from the Medieval Period, which was followed by the post about the Baroque Style from the Western Art. Today’s post is about another great and influential style, this time from the Modern Art Period: Art Nouveau. If you want to read more about the Modern Art, click here. When and where did the Art Nouveau style appear? Summary: 1 Ancient and modern art refers to two distinct art periods that reflect a particular period of history and human lifestyle. Both art periods have their own characteristics and means of expressing human lifestyle in that period. 2 The period of Ancient art ranges from the Paleolithic period to the Middle Ages. Video art exemplifies this, for the viewer watches the work as it is actually being made; they watch as the process unfolds. Video installation pieces combine video with sound, music, and/or other interactive components. In Nicole Cohen's Please Be Seated, viewers are asked to be active participants. For two decades, French painters and other artists studied the way light changes as you create a landscape or another scene. In Cezanne’s A Modern Olympia (1873-1874), the observer sees another example of how Modern Art abandoned Realism and Naturalism in sketchy borders between forms. Modern Art Timelines give you information about the artists, movements and styles of Modernism from around 1870 to 1975. They help you to understand a century of modern art from Impressionism to Minimalism. They also list the major artists and illustrate a key work from each movement. Definition of Modern Art. Modern art is the creative world's response to the rationalist practices and perspectives of the new lives and ideas provided by the technological advances of the industrial age that caused contemporary society to manifest itself in new ways compared to the past. Here is a short overview of important modern art movements from Impressionism to Op Art. The images on this page are from Wikimedia Commons repository under the GNU Free Documentation License. Impressionism. The history of modern art started with Impressionism. It all began in Paris as a reaction to a very formal and rigid style of painting - done inside studios and set by traditional institutions like the Academie des Beaux-Arts in Paris. Query: how does modern art differ, if at all, from other periods of art",
"output": [
"Ancient and modern art refers to two distinct art periods that reflect a particular period of history and human lifestyle. Both art periods have their own characteristics and means of expressing human lifestyle in that period."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-47b7302ff8b74c6396b9349c1d7046d5",
"input": "for children 10 years and older, and adults (including seniors) is 60 - 100 beats per minute; for well-trained athletes is 40 - 60 beats per minute. Hittin’ the Target. Now you’re ready to determine your target training heart rate. As you exercise, periodically: Take your pulse on the inside of your wrist, on the thumb side. For most of us, between 60 and 100 beats per minute (bpm) is normal. 1 The rate can be affected by factors like stress, anxiety, hormones, medication, and how physically active you are. An athlete or more active person may have a resting heart rate as low as 40 beats per minute. Now that’s chill! When it comes to resting heart rate, lower is better. 150 beats per minute Important Note: A few high blood pressure medications lower the maximum heart rate and thus the target zone rate. If you're taking such medicine, call your physician to find out if you need to use a lower target heart rate. Use the tips of your first two fingers (not your thumb) to press lightly over the blood vessels on your wrist. Count your pulse for 10 seconds and multiply by 6 to find your beats per minute. You want to stay between 50 percent to 85 percent of your maximum heart rate. This range is your target heart rate. Know Your Numbers. This table shows estimated target heart rates for different ages. Your maximum heart rate is about 220 minus your age. Count your pulse for 30 seconds and multiply by 2 to find your beats per minute. Important Note: Some drugs and medications affect heart rate, meaning you may have a lower maximum heart rate and target zone. Before you learn how to calculate and monitor your target training heart rate, you have to know your resting heart rate. Your resting heart rate is the number of times your heart beats per minute while it’s at rest. You can check it in the morning after you’ve had a good night’s sleep and before you get out of bed. According to the National Institute of Health, the average resting heart rate: 1 for children 10 years and older, and adults (including seniors) is 60 - 100 beats per minute. 2 for well-trained athletes is 40 - 60 beats per minute. Your resting heart rate is the number of times your heart beats per minute when you’re at rest. A good time to check it is in the morning after you’ve had a good night’s sleep, before you get out of bed or grab that first cup of java! The easiest way to do this is to use a generic formula meant for the average person. For men, your maximum heart rate can be estimated by subtracting your age in years from 220. For example, a 20-year-old man would have a maximum heart rate of 200 beats per minute. For women, a newer standard is to take 88 percent of your age and subtract it from 206. Beats Per Minute in Exercise. The speed of your heart rate depends on the intensity of exercise that you wish to work at. The American Heart Association recommends exercising somewhere between 50 to 85 percent of your maximum. Beginners should start at the low end of this range and work up as fitness levels improve. There are three general ways to classify heart rate, 1) normal, 2) fast and 3) slow. A resting heart rate is normal between 60-100 beats per minute. A resting heart rate is fast (i.e. tachycardic) at greater than 100 beats per minute. A resting heart rate is slow (i.e. bradycardic) at less than 60 beats per minute. Beats Per Minute in Exercise The speed of your heart rate depends on the intensity of exercise that you wish to work at. The American Heart Association recommends exercising somewhere between 50 to 85 percent of your maximum. Query: average beats per minute/while exercising",
"output": [
"For men, your maximum heart beats are 220 per minute and for women 206 while exercising."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-79b36265250c489e9dd8bf7039117e5b",
"input": "Key Facts. 1 Pneumonia is an infection in your lungs. 2 It may be a complication of the flu. 3 Most healthy people recover from pneumonia in 1 to 3 weeks, but it can be life-threatening. 4 One form of bacterial pneumonia can be prevented by getting vaccinated and practicing good health habits. RSV is another virus that causes infections of the lungs and respiratory tract. RSV is so common that most children have been infected by the age of two. For the majority of those affected, RSV causes only mild cold-like symptoms but it is also the most common cause of bronchiolitis and pneumonia among infants and children under the age of one. Commonly implicated agents include rhinoviruses, coronaviruses, influenza virus, respiratory syncytial virus (RSV), adenovirus, and parainfluenza. Herpes simplex virus rarely causes pneumonia, except in groups such as: newborns, persons with cancer, transplant recipients, and people with significant burns. Respiratory syncytial virus has an incubation period of 3 to 5 days before symptoms begin to appear. The illness begins with a 2- to 3-day prodromal phase with symptoms that resemble those of other viral URT infections: nasal congestion, rhinorrhea, and cough. In adults and children older than three, RSV usually causes mild cold-like signs and symptoms such as: 1 Congested or runny nose. 2 Dry cough. 3 Low grade fever. 4 Sore throat. 5 Mild headache. 6 A general feeling of unease and discomfort (malaise) Pneumonia is a general term for lung infections that can be caused by a variety of germs (viruses, bacteria, fungi, and parasites). Most cases, though, are caused by viruses, including adenoviruses, rhinovirus, influenza virus (flu), respiratory syncytial virus (RSV), human metapneumovirus, and parainfluenza virus (which causes croup). Respiratory syncytial virus (RSV) is a major cause of respiratory illness in young children. Learn how to recognize the signs and symptoms of this contagious infection. Pneumonia is a respiratory infection that affects the lungs. Learn about the symptoms of the condition and how is it contracted. Pneumonia is a respiratory infection that affects the lungs. Infection with respiratory syncytial virus (RSV) gives most children and adults only a mild cold but can be very serious in babies. Learn more. Infection with respiratory syncytial virus (RSV) gives most children and adults only a mild cold but can be very serious in babies. Respiratory syncytial virus is the leading cause of bronchiolitis and pneumonia in infants and young children. Several factors contribute to the development of severe RSV illness. Query: how is pneumonia different from rsv?",
"output": [
"Pneumonia is an infection in lungs where as RSV is another virus that causes infections of the lungs and respiratory tract."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1cbc54120dc94319b564928963094ed0",
"input": "Product: You recharge this electronic hand warmer via USB. (Expect it to take about 65 minutes to fully power up.) Unlike classic hand warmers designed to nest in the palm of a glove, the GreenHeat looks like a medium-size candy bar that you grip in your hands. Hand warmers are small packets which are held in the hand and produce heat on demand to warm cold hands. They are commonly used in outdoor activities. Other types of warmers are available to provide soothing heat for muscular or joint aches. Depending on the type and the source of heat, hand warmers can last from 30 minutes up to 24 hours. The hand warmer was created by Japanese inventor Niichi Matoba. Matoba received a patent for applying the principle of an oxidation reaction that produces hea Hi all - I carry both the Grabber Hand and Foot Warmers in my pack, as emergency gear. Thankfully, I don't use them too much, so I was wondering if they expire. I noticed at the bottom that they have a Validity Date, which I couldn't read, even with a magnifying glass. I sent an email to Grabber Performance, who makes the Warmers products. They promptly replied, indicating that the expiration date is in 4 years from manufacture and the Validity Date (if you can read it) is the same thing as the Expiration Date. Warmers operate on a chemical reaction with air similar to rusting. The warmer ingredients are iron, water, cellulose, vermiculite, activated carbon and salt. The heating process takes place in this fashion: The iron in the pouch, when exposed to oxygen, oxidizes and therefore produces heat (aka, Air Activated). A pair of air-activated disposable hand warmers, US quarter for scale. Hand warmers are small (mostly disposable) packets which are held in the hand and produce heat on demand to warm cold hands. They are commonly used in outdoor activities. Other types of warmers are available to provide soothing heat for muscular or joint aches. Depending on the type and the source of heat, hand warmers can last from 30 minutes (recrystallisation) up to 24 hours (platinum catalyst). The hand warmer was created by Japanese inventor Niichi Matoba. Types of Hand Warmers. When it comes to hand warmers, there are two types of chemical reactions used to generate heat: supersaturated solution and air-activated. These chemical reactions work to produce an exothermic release of heat, but do so through very different methods. Types of Hand Warmers When it comes to hand warmers, there are two types of chemical reactions used to generate heat: supersaturated solution and air-activated. These chemical reactions work to produce an exothermic release of heat, but do so through very different methods. These types of warmers are best implemented when placed in tight spaces, such as in a glove, shoe or pocket. HotSnapZ Reusable Hand warmers & Heat Pads. 1 Easily Reactivated in Boiling Water The heat reverses the chemistry inside and stores the heat for later use. 2 Fast Instant Heat in a Snap Instant Robust heat reaches internal temperature of 120-130F. Self-regulating. The second type of hand warmers use a chemical reaction called a supersaturated solution. These generally contain metal discs in the middle of them. In order to activate heat, the metal disc must be snapped. Hot Hands warmers work like any other chemical warmer... through an oxidation process (rusting). Different ingredients within the warmer have different purposes. What creates a quality warmer? The quality of those ingredients. Query: how does hot hands hand warmers work",
"output": [
"Warmers operate on a chemical reaction with air similar to rusting. The warmer ingredients are iron, water, cellulose, vermiculite, activated carbon and salt. The heating process takes place in this fashion: The iron in the pouch, when exposed to oxygen, oxidizes and therefore produces heat."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b2dc5d74650446b0b176757b86739682",
"input": "A few days after your scores are released, the ACT begins sending your official score reports to the colleges and universities that you’ve selected. Learn exactly when you will get your ACT scores back. The flexibility and variation in ACT score release dates makes it hard to predict exactly when you get your scores back. But, it’s still safe to say you can expect them within 2-4 weeks after test day – usually. Once all your scores are ready, ACT, Inc., will release your official Student Score Report, High School Score Report, and College Score Report. Again, most students testing in the U.S. will get their multiple-choice scores on a Wednesday or Friday two weeks after they test, while a small number will have to wait one or a few weeks longer until theirs are ready. How long does it take to get my scores back? Your scores will be available online for early viewing about 2 weeks after the test date. Paper score reports usually arrive 4-7 weeks after test date at your high school counselor’s office. If you took the Writing Test, your score report will not be mailed until your Writing score has been added to your record. You can view your scores here once they have been uploaded. The maximum score for each of the four tests is 36. The composite score is the average of the four scores. Students who took the ACT Plus Writing test will receive two additional scores: a Writing score (0-12) and an English/Writing composite score (1-36). A good score is one that will get you into the college of your choice, so the answer depends on where you want to go to college. Even before you get your ACT scores back, it’s smart to start preparing for your next round of testing. Since it usually takes a minimum of 3 weeks to get your scores back, that’s a lot of valuable study time to waste. So, don’t relax for too long after taking the ACT. Get back to your books as soon as possible. Better college and scholarship options await you! Study with us to get higher ACT scores! We’d love to help you get a higher ACT score so that you can win acceptance to the college of your dreams. This guide will go over when you can expect to see your ACT scores by each upcoming test date, as well as the differences in score release dates for students who took the ACT with Writing. How Long Do You Have to Wait for Your ACT Scores? How long does it take to get ACT scores back? Not too long! ACT score release dates actually vary for students over a range of weeks. Most students, though, will get their multiple-choice scores just two weeks after taking the exam. While the time you spend waiting for your ACT scores might feel like a long two weeks, it's actually a pretty fast turnaround considering how many tests ACT, Inc., has to receive, score, and compare. Plus, all the essays are read and graded by actual people! © 2017 The College Board | PSAT/NMSQT is a registered trademark of the College Board and National Merit Scholarship Corporation. © 2017 The College Board. PSAT/NMSQT is a registered trademark of the College Board and National Merit Scholarship Corporation. After you take the ACT, when do your ACT scores come out? How long before you learn what your ACT score is? Find out how many days or weeks it takes to get your score report. Query: how long does it take to get your act scores?",
"output": [
"minimum of 3 weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-dfd730c1ceca4760a652bbf50fcfbf5d",
"input": "Authoritarianism is a form of government in which the people have no participation. The characteristics of authoritarianism include absolute obedience to authority by the people and ill-defined and often changing executive power. Monarchy is a form of government in which a single family rules from generation to generation. The power, or sovereignty, is personified in a single individual. There are two main types of monarchy that differ based on the level of power held by the individual or family currently in power. Another form of government is a democracy. Democracy is defined as a form of government in which power belongs to the people. There are two forms of democracy. One is direct democracy, in which all eligible citizens have direct participation in the a) Political participation can be defined as those actions of private citizens by which they seek to influence or to support government and politics. - Participation in electoral processes involves much more than just voting. (2) Citizens engage in two kinds of activities that influence the selection of government personnel and policies. - 1 Low-initiative acts, such as voting, do not require much effort by the individual. - 2 High-initiative acts require active participation by individuals to obtain benefits for a group. A democratic government contrasts to forms of government where power is either held by one, as in a monarchy, or where power is held by a small number of individuals, as in an oligarchy or aristocracy. Direct democracy is a form of democracy in which people vote on policy initiatives directly. (2) Citizens engage in two kinds of activities that influence the selection of government personnel and policies. - Low-initiative acts, such as voting, do not require much effort by the individual. - High-initiative acts require active participation by individuals to obtain benefits for a group. Authoritarianism is a form of government in which the people have zero participation. The citizens in these societies must adhere to the rules of the leader with absolute obedience. The power often changes and is ill-defined. Finally, totalitarianism is a form of government in which the leaders have unlimited and total control over people's lives. Political Participation. 1 a) Political participation can be defined as those actions of private citizens by which they seek to influence or to support government and politics. - 2 Participation in electoral processes involves much more than just voting. Government is the means by which state policy is enforced, as well as the mechanism for determining the policy of the state. A form of government, or form of state governance, refers to the set of political institutions by which a government of a state is organized (synonyms include “regime type” and “system of government”). Query: how do some form of government differ from citizen participation particularly authoritarian and democratic",
"output": [
"Authoritarianism is a form of government in which citizens have zero participation while direct democracy is a type of government in which all eligible citizens have direct participation."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-5e81e1c673ee4c3c83a8d8de770db21b",
"input": "It takes approximately 1 h 30 min to get from Fort Lauderdale to Miami Beach, including transfers. Is there a direct bus between Fort Lauderdale and Miami Beach? No, there is no direct bus from Fort Lauderdale to Miami Beach. Re: How Far from Ft. Lauderdale Airport to Miami Beach 29 Mar 2005, 9:51 AM I went last year, and I always fly into Ft Lauderale, and drive to South Beach..it took us about 25-30 minutes to get there. How far is Ft. Lauderdale airport to Miami airport? Roughly, miles and driving time.? Thinking of flying into Ft. Lauderdale for a cruise out of Miami because flights are cheaper. SuperShuttle at Fort Lauderdale-Hollywood International Airport (FLL) While SuperShuttle used to provide service to Fort Lauderdale airport, this was recently discontinued. Read More Re: Drive from Miami airport to Fort Lauderdale airport Feb 11, 2013, 11:11 AM Thanks, Im not sure yet of the time...But just 2 of us with 1 bag each and no time limit Locations around this longitude. 1 Toronto, Ontario, Canada. 2 Miami, Florida, USA. 3 Panama, Panama. 4 Columbia, South Carolina, USA. 5 Guayaquil, Ecuador. If you are more south, so any place from Midtown all the way to South Beach/Coral Gables should take you about an hour, including traffic. If you are living around North Miami, it should take you about 30 minutes. Lastly, if you are more north, Aventura area, it should only take you about 15 to 20 minutes. IMO, it might be faster and easier to use the Tri Rail RR System. It connects Miami Dade ( with meto rail connections) to Palm Beach County (planned to reach Martin) with lots of stops along the way-right throuh Broward. Amtrack does not offer as many trains or stops. The cheapest way to get from Miami Airport (MIA) to Fort Lauderdale Airport (FLL) costs only $3, and the quickest way takes just 30 mins. Find the travel option that best suits you. The cheapest way to get from Miami Airport (MIA) to Fort Lauderdale Airport (FLL) costs only $3, and the quickest way takes just 30 mins. There are 25.15 miles from Miami to Fort Lauderdale in north direction and 29.11 miles (46.85 kilometers) by car, following the I-95 route. Miami and Fort Lauderdale are 31 minutes far apart, if you drive non-stop. This is the fastest route from Miami, FL to Fort Lauderdale, FL. The halfway point is Aventura, FL. Query: how far is miami to fort lauderdale",
"output": [
"There are 25.15 miles from Miami to Fort Lauderdale."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e580032f00194194ac45d443b134229e",
"input": "Click on a circle in the chart to view Asparagus birth and death records An unusually short lifespan might indicate that your ancestors lived in harsh conditions. A short lifespan might also indicate health problems that were once prevalent in your family. The SSDI is a searchable database of more than 70 million names. asparagus definition, meaning, what is asparagus: a plant with pale green, juicy stems that are cooked and eaten as a vegetable: . Learn more. Find out where people with the family name Asparagus lived before coming to the United States. Using Ancestry, you can search through passenger arrival records, naturalization records, border crossings, emigration records, passport applications, and even convict transportation records. Click on a circle in the chart to view Asparagus birth and death records. An unusually short lifespan might indicate that your ancestors lived in harsh conditions. A short lifespan might also indicate health problems that were once prevalent in your family. The SSDI is a searchable database of more than 70 million names. You can find birthdates, death dates, addresses and more. Slice thin, fresh raw asparagus and add to a salad, or serve whole spears alongside your favorite dip. Matches well with bread crumbs, butter, cheese sauce, chervil, crab, cream, eggs, garlic, hollandaise sauce, horseradish, lemon, mayonnaise, morels, mushrooms, mustard, nutmeg, olive oil, onion, orange, Parmesan cheese, parsley, pepper, rosemary, shallots, soy, vinaigrette The classical Latin form of the word is attested in English from mid-16c., but was limited at first to herbalists and botanists; the common form from 17c.-19c. was the folk-etymologized variant sparrowgrass, during which time asparagus had an air of stiffness and pedantry [John Walker, Critical Pronouncing Dictionary, 1791]. asparagus (n.) plant cultivated for its edible shoots, late 14c., aspergy; late Old English sparage, from Latin asparagus (in Medieval Latin often sparagus), from Greek asparagos / aspharagos, which is of uncertain origin; perhaps with euphonic a-+ PIE root *sp(h)er(e)g-to spring up, but Beekes suggests it is rather a substrate word, based in part on the p/ph variation. Until 1900, rail encourages the production and export of tomatoes, peas, beans, onions, asparagus and cauliflower plus artichokes and melons in a few areas. From Wikipedia Asparagus (from the Persian word asparag, meaning a sprout), are slim green spears, often tinged with a bit of purple at the tip. Europeans are more familiar with white asparagus which is grown completely underground to prevent it from becoming green. There is also a purple variety called Viola. Asparagus plants usually live 8 to 10 years, and the size of the asparagus spear is relative to the age of the plant; in other words, the thicker the vegetable, the older the plant. View all Asparagus ancestors in the SSDI Asparagus Family Occupations Census records can tell you a lot of little known facts about your Asparagus ancestors, such as occupation. Occupation can tell you about your ancestors social and economic status. Query: asparagus meaning",
"output": [
"Asparagus is a plant with pale green, juicy stems that are cooked and eaten as a vegetable."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-922339d2a0c14dbaab3d03aa963eaf2c",
"input": "Why Powerblanket® Ground Thawing Blankets? High watt density thaws frozen ground fast; Quickly remove frost prior to concrete pour; Melt snow and ice from roofs, walkways, and construction areas; Easily installed and removed; Can be used to cure epoxy and resins . Download the ground thawing blanket spec sheet and see all the details of this product! Don’t just take our word for it. Here’s what one of our customers has to say: “Your blankets are absolutely excellent. Thanks to Powerblanket®, we were able to quickly thaw the ground and complete our job. In fact, we estimate a savings of 10 hours per site equaling a savings of $5,000 already. Calculating this to our thousands of sites, the savings is huge! This wikiHow will teach you all three ways to defrost ground beef. In a Hurry? To quickly defrost ground beef, microwave the beef in a microwave-safe glass dish at 50% power. Step 1, Determine how early to pull the beef out of the freezer. Typically, 2 lbs (900 g) of bulk ground beef takes a full 24 hours to thaw. Significantly larger quantities of ground beef, like 3 or 4 lb (1350 or 1800 g) bulk packages, may take 48 hours or longer to defrost completely. As a general rule of thumb, add an extra day of defrosting time for every 2 lbs (900 g) of bulk ground beef. Ground ...Step 2, Place the ground beef in a plastic bag or dish. It is possible that the beef may ... - After freezing many, many flat 1/2 lb portions of ground beef this way, I have found the store brand zip sandwich bags (not even freezer bags) work absolutely fine. No difference at all in quality, and far cheaper. Plan to microwave for 3 minutes per 1 pound (0.45 kg). If the ground beef is too thick to defrost, you can speed up the process by cutting it in half. Once defrosted, cook the ground beef within 2 hours to be safe. For suggestions on how to defrost ground beef in the refrigerator or with water, read on! Three ways to defrost ground beef. Defrost in the refrigerator. Place the zip-top bag with the frozen ground beef on a plate and move to the bottom shelf of the refrigerator. The high watt density in Powerblanket® Ground Thawing Heated Blankets helps tackle the difficulty of thawing ground in harsh climates. This line of Powerblanket® flat blankets have a higher watt density and hotter temperature than our concrete curing heated blankets. The higher temperatures are ideal for ground thawing applications and curing epoxy or resins. You can defrost ground beef in any number of ways; a bag of flat frozen ground beef will thaw in the refrigerator in under two hours or in the microwave in less than five minutes. But my favorite way to defrost is to transfer the bag from the freezer to a large bowl in the sink. Latest Posts. 1 Industrial Internet of Things Industrial Internet of Things In the world of growing technologies, the phrase “Internet of Things” has garnered quite the buzz. Put simply, the Internet of Things, or “IoT”, is the use of the internet to connect objects and enable them to send and receive data. Do not attempt to defrost ground beef at room temperature. The ground beef will sit out at temperatures between 40 degrees Fahrenheit (4 degrees Celsius) and 140 degrees Fahrenheit (60 degrees Celsius) for too long, and this temperature range is ideal for the growth of bacteria. Query: how long ground thaw freezing",
"output": [
"A bag of flat frozen ground beef will thaw in the refrigerator in under two hours or in the microwave in less than five minutes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8d119548b998475eab59e412429ea255",
"input": "How long should you leave your teabag in? 25 seconds EXACTLY: Expert arrives at formula for perfect cuppa after drinking 400 brews in 48 hours. 1 Professional food and drink taster believes 25 seconds is perfect brew time. 2 Martin Isark, 59, drank 400 cups of tea in 48 hours to come to the conclusion. Tea brewing time has long been a hot topic, and in 2011 a team of academics devised a mathematical formula claiming to prove the perfect cuppa is best drunk exactly six minutes after being made. The optimum brew time, they found, was two minutes. The effect can be subtle for a slightly aged look or deep and dark for a truly ancient looking document, all depending on how long you soak the paper and how many teabags you use. Steep two or three tea bags in a cup of hot water for five to 10 minutes. Use inexpensive tea bags as long as the bag is sturdy and not easily torn. Remove the tea bags from the water and allow them to cool completely before handling them. Brush the front and back of the paper evenly with a tea bag. Place the paper on a flat surface covered with newspapers. Allow the paper to dry thoroughly and inspect it for any imperfections. If the paper is too light, brush it again until you ... Steep your tea bag in hot water for at least three minutes to allow the tea to release its full potential. Before you put the tea bag in the cup, give it a gentle shake. This will loosen any compacted tea, allowing the water to flow freely through the tea leaves. Once the tea bag is in the water, there's no need to move it around. Tea bags should be left in your hot water for three to five minutes. If you like a stronger cup of tea, soak two tea bags at the same time, or soak one after the other for three to five minutes each. Using pyramid tea bags can provide a stronger flavor as well, as they offer a better circulation of water around the tea. How long should you leave your teabag in? 25 seconds EXACTLY: Expert arrives at formula for perfect cuppa after drinking 400 brews in 48 hours. Professional food and drink taster believes 25 seconds is perfect brew time; Martin Isark, 59, drank 400 cups of tea in 48 hours to come to the conclusion ‘Any less, and there’s not enough flavour, any longer, and there’s too much tannin, giving your tea a horrible stewed taste,’ said Mr Isark, who tested bags from Tetley, Typhoo, PG Tips, Twinings and Yorkshire – which together account for 81 per cent of the British tea market. Bottom Line. Tea bags should be left in your hot water for three to five minutes. If you like a stronger cup of tea, soak two tea bags at the same time, or soak one after the other for three to five minutes each. Using pyramid tea bags can provide a stronger flavor as well, as they offer a better circulation of water around the tea. It's a debate that’s been brewing almost as long as there’s been tea: just how long should you leave the bag to stew? Now at last one expert has what he says is the definitive answer – and it is a result that goes against everything the manufacturers say. How long should you leave your teabag in? 25 seconds EXACTLY: Expert arrives at formula for perfect cuppa after drinking 400 brews in 48 hours Professional food and drink taster believes 25 seconds is perfect brew time Query: how long do you soak a tea bag",
"output": [
"Soak a tea bag for five to 10 minutes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-291172a7e2904bd380a387fb0ca611ea",
"input": "How long does it take for Diflucan to work? Read More I know it's only been one day, but I haven't noticed any marked improvement so I am wondering if it is safe to use hydrocortizone cream to help alleviate the external irritation. I am now on day 2 since I used it and the leaking form the medicine has stopped but the discharge is still there. How long does it normally take for the symptoms to clear up? I wasn't itchy or burning to begin with, my only symptom was the discharge. Regarding the duration fluconazole will stay in the system, the research reported that fluconazole does not stay in the body as long as itraconazole. A 200 mg dose of itraconazole taken twice in a single day was found in the body 4 days after treatment. How long does it take to feel the effects of Diflucan? Should I get my refill and take it? This feeling is driving me crazy. I just want it to go away. Took 150 mg of diflucan yesterday morning...still no relief...how long does it take to work?!? Read More consult your doctor she or he will prescribe a fungal medication to take orally, probably Diflucan, good luck and let me know how things go! take care. Concerning men, using oral Diflucan for a yeast infection on the tip of the penis can bring about a cure in about 8 days. Some side effects may occur due to taking diflucan, however. So how long does Diflucan stay in your system? Diflucan has a half life close to 25 hours. This means 25 hours after you take this drug, there will be half as much in your system. And, 50 hours later, there will be one quarter of the Diflucan left in your system. After seven days have passed since taking a 150 mg oral dose, there will only be trace amounts of Diflucan left in your body. Diflucan has a high absorption rate; and over 90% of the drug will enter your body. The burning went away, but I am still feeling very itchy. How long does it take for Diflucan to work? Read More. I know it's only been one day, but I haven't noticed any marked improvement so I am wondering if it is safe to use hydrocortizone cream to help alleviate the external irritation. I own a small business, and even though I have a great staff, there are some things that only I can do ( or some clients that only deal with me) - so, I am back at work, but, by 2 I am exhausted ...it is from sitting up for so long. Idk how long it's gonna take for it to work but I just hope it works fast bc idk if yeast infections make you smell werid bc I take a shower every night and I still smell werid at school even when I put a bunch of scented lotion and some body mist. diflucan. 1 The burning went away, but I am still feeling very itchy. 2 I know it's only been one day, but I haven't noticed any marked improvement so I am wondering if it is safe to use hydrocortizone cream to help alleviate the external irritation. Query: how long does diflucan work",
"output": [
"25 hours after you take drug, there will be half as much in your system. And, 50 hours later, there will be one quarter of the Diflucan left in your system. After seven days have passed since taking a 150 mg oral dose, there will only be trace amounts of Diflucan left in your body."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0cbed544f7a34b00b96c91fc337209de",
"input": "Lou Anna Simon will stay as president of Michigan State University despite increasing pressure for her to be fired. The school's board of trustees made the decision following a four-hour closed door meeting Friday. MSU board: Lou Anna Simon to stay as president, is 'right leader' for MSU There has been a tidal wave of calls for Simon to be fired for handling of the Larry Nassar matter. Post to Facebook 2005–. Lou Anna Simon has a long history at Michigan State University, spanning over three decades. She started at MSU in 1970 as a graduate student, earning her doctorate in 1974. She then became a member of the MSU faculty and assistant director of the Office of Institutional Research. Simon has served as the provost and vice president for academic affairs since 1993. MSU board: Lou Anna Simon to stay as president, is 'right leader' for MSU. There has been a tidal wave of calls for Simon to be fired for handling of the Larry Nassar matter. Michigan State University President Lou Anna Simon will step down as leader of MSU, the school announced late Wednesday. As tragedies are politicized, blame is inevitable, she said in statement. As president, it is only natural that I am the focus of this anger. MSU's Lou Anna Simon arrives to court a day late and empathy short The board statement came as victims were standing in a front of a judge telling their stories. Simon said Friday she's going to continue to serve. President Simon has served with distinction as MSU’s President for 13 years and has been a constant presence at the university for more than 40 years. She literally has devoted her entire professional life to this institution, and more than anyone else has helped make MSU a national and international leader in higher education. Lou Anna Simon has a long history at Michigan State University, spanning over three decades. She started at MSU in 1970 as a graduate student, earning her doctorate in 1974. She then became a member of the MSU faculty and assistant director of the Office of Institutional Research. Simon has served as the provost and vice president for academic affairs since 1993. Lou Anna K. Simon (b. 1947) President Michigan State University 2005– Lou Anna Simon has a long history at Michigan State University, spanning over three decades. She started at MSU in 1970 as a graduate student, earning her doctorate in 1974. She then became a member of the MSU faculty and assistant director of the Office of Institutional Research. MSU President Lou Anna Simon speaks to members of the press, victims, and their families Wednesday afternoon, Jan. 17, 2018, in Circuit Judge Rosemarie Aquilina's courtroom in Eaton County, Mich. (Photo: Matthew Dae Smith/Lansing State) Query: how long has lou anna simon been president of msu",
"output": [
"President Simon has served with distinction as MSU’s President for 13 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7e5c417d0e524161837b37eea8a0c0b8",
"input": "The answer is, it all depends on the person digging, and the nature of the hole to be dug. In other words, no one good answer. In my dojo, it can vary a great deal. I am Ni-Kyu, and I have just under 4 years training in. I train three times a week, 2 1/2 hours a go, plus assisting with the kids' classes twice a week. Reference Websites and Forums. 1 Taekwondo Wiki. 2 Blue Cottage Taekwondo (ITF-style) 3 Kukkiwon. 4 Taekwondo Hall of Fame. 5 Taekwondo forum on MartialTalk. 6 Korean Martial Arts on KarateForum. 7 TaekwondoForums.com. Originally Answered: How long does it take to become a black belt in karate? There are a number of ways to answer this but the most correct answer is probably: it doesn't matter. The martial arts are more about the journey than the signposts you achieve along the way. It takes an average of 4-5 years to gain a black belt in karate. Some times longer depending on your age, your natural abilities, body type, coordination levels, fitness levels, the type of sports you have done before, how much you train, how much you listen to your instructor and so on. I remember my black belt grading was the toughest thing I had to go through and prepare for. I had to perform all 11 patterns and black belt pattern. I had to do the basic sets for all belt colours. All of the one step sparring. I had to demonstrate all kicks, and did 10 rounds of 2 minute pad sparring. The Kyokushin Black-belt grading is one of the toughest challenges a karateka can face and takes between five and six hours. It starts off with basics, then focuses on combination work, hand and leg techniques, kata, self-defence (kyojitsu) techniques, stamina and then the gruelling task of completing 40 one-and-a-half-minute rounds of full-contact fighting. How long does it take to get a black belt – in various martial arts? According to a longitudinal study (conducted from 1998 to 2014), the average time taken to get a first-degree black belt is ten years. Of course, this duration differs among martial arts. The shortest recorded training time is four years, while the longest to get a first-degree black belt is twenty-seven years. In Kyokushin it takes an average of five solid years to attain Black-belt level, for someone who does two-hour training sessions three-to-four times a week — but they must also take part in other activities such as seminars and tournaments, for example. Then again, to qualify for a black belt with him, you also have to qualify as a certified instructor of karate. 2 years is way too soon to earn a shodan rank. 4 or 5 years is fast, and average is something like 8-10 years to reach the skill level of shodan. Less isn't more when it comes to time training. Maybe I am asking to much and maybe 5 years to become a black belt is too much FOR THE AVERAGE student, but what I am very true is that 3 years is too little time. Again there could be a very nice student or a gifthed one that with alot of hard work and dedication could be a BB in 3 years and maybe a little less. Query: how long does it take to get a black belt in karate?",
"output": [
"It takes an average of 4-5 years to gain a black belt in karate."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-248edca3a77b4540b4fa5b2391f8589f",
"input": "A doctorate in nursing degree takes, on average, four to six years to complete. You will spend a great deal of time focusing on an area of research that you choose. For students who have the time and resources, there is the chance to finish your program sooner. The College of Nursing and Health Innovation offers students of all backgrounds the opportunity to advance their careers through a variety of degree plans offered on campus and online. MSN/PhD: This degree combines a master’s and doctorate in an accelerated program. BSN-PhD: Focus is on BSN-holders with plans to become researchers or teachers of nursing. It’s important to point out that the DNP is a practice doctorate. You’ll use research to influence your practice in a clinical setting, while a PhD is a research doctorate, where you’ll conduct independent research and report on your findings. Prospective students searching for how long does it take to get a phd found the following related articles and links useful. Video: How Long Does it Take to Get a PhD? A Ph.D., or Doctor of Philosophy, is among the highest of degree levels and takes 5-6 years to earn. I just want to know how many years will it take me to finish the doctoral philosophy degree in nursing? I have a 3.9 GPA and am working very hard to keep it, if not improve it. I'm a first year pre-nursing student so it'll take me 3 years to become an RN instead of two. Thanks for your help! For example, the University of Akron requires 36 semester-hour credits to earn a Ph.D. in Polymer Science, whereas DePaul University mandates 60 quarter-hour credits for a Ph.D. in Computer and Information Sciences. Full-time Ph.D. candidates typically take advanced courses during their first 2-3 years of study. The number of course credits required to get a Ph.D. may vary widely, depending on the university's semester or quarter schedule and the doctoral program. http://www.allnursingschools.com/nursing... I looked into finding how long it will take to get a Doctor of Philosophy in nursing and none of the programs websites gave the amount of time. I'll assume it's the same as the regular PhD nursing program and say it's about 3 to 4 years of full time work. Source(s): http://www.allnursingschools.com/nursing... I looked into finding how long it will take to get a Doctor of Philosophy in nursing and none of the programs websites gave the amount of time. I'll assume it's the same as the regular PhD nursing program and say it's about 3 to 4 years of full time work. Blessings Earning a Ph.D., also known as a Doctor of Philosophy, regardless of the subject of study, requires a set of tasks that typically take 5-6 years to complete. Students must first take advanced courses in their field for a few years and complete a set of comprehensive exams. Query: how long to become phd in nursing",
"output": [
"Phd in nursing takes four to six years to complete."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-efb416e0b7d44ce0981f2248bd67913a",
"input": "I was not 2 miles from the police dept, but took them about 30 minutes to show up. Ill do you one better. I lived so close to the jail house that I could hit the building with a rock, and it took them 30 minutes to get an officer at my residence to file a report. types of crime, average Americans could not look at the Columbine shooting and dismiss it as some-thing that could never happen in their community. Because the Columbine incident was something new, it prompted new thinking by police depart-ments about how they should respond. More than a decade later, this process of developing new police policies, practices, and training for “active shooter” events is continuing. Introduction “Columbine was a wake-up call.” —Montgomery County, MD Police Chief Thomas Manger Data from 2012 shows the average response time is 9.1 minutes. That's the longest response time since 2003, and the wait time has been increasing every year. Dallas. Violent crime is on the rise, as is the response time. As of Augut 2015, average response time sits at more than 8 minutes. The results were not good. The suspects were able to get their first shot off at the officer in an average of just 0.38 seconds. The highly trained officers lagged behind with an average time to first shot of 0.39 seconds. If you believe 0.01 seconds to be an insignificant measurement, look at it this way: the study showed the inexperienced suspects shot first or exactly tied the highly trained and experienced officers 60% of the time. Not good. Because when crime comes looking for you, you don't want to be vulnerable while the minutes tick away for the average police response time to a 911 call. Learn to protect yourself today! Angie M. Tarighi is the CEO & Founder of Women's Self-Defense Institute and has been teaching women's self-defense programs for over 20 years. The average response time for Priority 1 calls, which represent a life-threatening situation requiring an immediate response, such as a bank robbery or sexual assault in progress, was about 10 minutes and 40 seconds in 2011. Response times for Priority 1 calls have jumped by two minutes since then. Factors that make response time slower: 1 Living in a remote area (response times may be > 30 minutes) 2 Your city requires an alarm permit. In some localities, not having a valid alarm permit means that the police won’t ever respond to your alarm. 3 The alarm is unverified. I must point out that police response is much faster for a personal emergency situation in progress, such as a panic button activation or a cell phone call being made by a homeowner directly to 9-1-1 during a break-in. These type of incidents experience a much faster average police response time. A review of police response to the massacre at Sandy Hook Elementary School finds that officers responded to the scene rapidly ... and followed ...policy. A review of police response to the massacre at Sandy Hook Elementary School finds that officers responded to the scene rapidly ... and followed ...policy. And the amount of time it takes to respond to 911 calls has been growing for several years, said Sheldon S. Leffler, the chairman of the City Council's public safety committee, who released his own study of police response times yesterday. He compared this year's figure with 1993, when it took an average of 7.9 minutes to respond to a 911 call. Query: how long does it take for the average police to respond",
"output": [
"It takes an average of 7.9 minutes to police to respond."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-41667fc9507a493fa91aebe8779a891f",
"input": "Galactose is more commonly found in the disaccharide, lactose or milk sugar. It is found as the monosaccharide in peas. Galactose is classified as a monosaccharide, an aldose, a hexose, and is a reducing sugar. How is alpha glucose different from beta glucose? In alpha glucose the hydroxyl group at carbon one is below the plane of the ring. In beta glucose the hydroxyl group at carbon one is above the plane of the ring. What is the structure of alpha glucose? Glucose is also known as D-glucose, dextrose, or grape sugar is found in plants and it is a byproduct of photosynthesis and fuels for cellular respiration. Glucose is used as energy by living organisms. Galactose is a monosaccharide sugar that is less sweet compared to glucose. It is a C-4 epimer of glucose. Epimers are diastereomers that differ in configuration of only one stereogenic center. Diastereomers are a class of stereoisomers. What type of bond is formed between two sugars in a disaccharide? Show transcribed image text Part A Review Figure 5.2. How do the structures of glucose and galactose differ? Glucose Galactose OH HO OH OH Ho Ho Glucose is an aldose; galactose is a ketose Glucose has more hydrogen and fewer oxygen atoms than galactose. Glucose is a hexose; galactose is a pentose The spatial arrangement of the hydroxyl group on the fourth carbon is different. 100% (1 rating) Glucose is also called blood sugar, as it circulates in the blood, and relies on the enzymes glucokinase or hexokinase to initiate metabolism. Your body processes most carbohydrates you eat into glucose, either to be used immediately for energy or to be stored in muscle cells or the liver as glycogen for later use. Galactose (galacto-+ -ose, milk sugar), sometimes abbreviated Gal, is a monosaccharide sugar that is about as sweet as glucose, and about 30% as sweet as sucrose. It is a C-4 epimer of glucose. How does glucose differ from galactose? In glucose the hydroxyl group at carbon four is below the plane of the ring. In galactose the hydroxyl group at carbon four is above the plane of the ring. Galactose is nearly identical to glucose in structure except for one hydroxyl group on carbon atom number four of the six-sided sugar. Since it differs in only one position about all six asymmetric centers in the linear form of the sugar, galactose is known as an epimer of glucose. they both have their -OH on carbon 4 in different places. up on galactose and down on glucose how is sucrolose made from sucrose by replacing some of the hydroxyl grps iwth chlorine Glucose and galactose are diastereoisomers. The structures of glucose and galactose are Diastereoisomers are Optical isomers of each other. Not mirror images of each other. Not superimposable on each other. Glucose and galactose differ in the configuration at C-4, they are non-superimposable, and they are not mirror images of each other.. They are therefore diastereoisomers. socratic Query: how do the structures of glucose and galactose differ?",
"output": [
"Glucose is an aldose; galactose is a ketose Glucose has more hydrogen and fewer oxygen atoms than galactose. Glucose is a hexose; galactose is a pentose."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-019117fcf29848bab302f4460ef5a55b",
"input": "The most common symptoms of acute bronchitis include: ●A persistent cough; this may last 10 to 20 days. ●Some people cough up mucus, which may be clear, yellow, or green in color (in this case, coughing is a good response to help clear the bronchi of the mucus) Fever is not common in people with acute bronchitis. Bronchitis can be acute or chronic: Acute bronchitis typically lasts less than 10 days, but the coughing can continue for several weeks. Chronic bronchitis, on the other hand, can last for several weeks and usually comes back. This condition is more common in people with asthma or emphysema. Acute bronchitis caused by an infection usually develops after you already have a cold or the flu. Symptoms of a cold or the flu include sore throat, fatigue (tiredness), fever, body aches, stuffy or runny nose, vomiting, and diarrhea. The main symptom of acute bronchitis is a persistent cough, which may last 10 to 20 Chronic bronchitis keeps coming back and can last a long time, especially in people who smoke. Chronic bronchitis means that you have a cough with mucus most days of the month for 3 months of the year and for at least 2 years in a row.This topic focuses on acute bronchitis. Both children and adults can get acute bronchitis.Most healthy people who get acute bronchitis get better without any problems. How to Get Rid of Bronchitis. Bronchitis is an inflammation of the bronchi. Bronchi are the main passageways in your lungs. Inflammation is caused by by virus, bacteria, allergies, or autoimmune diseases. Bronchitis is characterized by... Acute bronchitis, which is a short-term inflammation of the surface lining of the bronchial airways, is most commonly caused by an infection that causes acute bronchitis to be contagious. The infection typically lasts for seven to 10 days, but you may continue coughing for many weeks after the initial symptoms have passed. Acute bronchitis, also known as a chest cold, is short-term inflammation of the bronchi (large and medium-sized airways) of the lungs. The most common symptom is a cough. Other symptoms include coughing up mucus, wheezing, shortness of breath, fever, and chest discomfort. The infection may last from a few to ten days. Depending on the symptoms and cause of the bronchitis, treatment options include: 1 Antibiotics may be ordered to treat acute bronchitis that appears to be caused by a bacterial infection or for people who have other lung diseases that put them at a greater risk of lung infections. Things your health care provider may recommend include: 1 Rest. 2 Drinking plenty of fluids. 3 A humidifier or steam treatments (such as breathing in the steamy air in a bathroom for 10 - 15 minutes) to help moisturize your airways and relieve swelling. There are several types of bronchitis: 1 Acute bronchitis can last for up to 90 days. 2 Chronic bronchitis can last for months or sometimes years. If chronic bronchitis decreases the amount of air flowing to the lungs, it is considered to be a sign of chronic obstructive pulmonary disease. Query: how long can you have acute bronchitis",
"output": [
"Acute bronchitis typically lasts less than 10 days, but the coughing can continue for several weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1de0ae6f02d642738c890a8d7878279a",
"input": "Want to freeze your eggs to make them last longer? Read the ‘How to Store Eggs Long Term’ section below. How to Store Eggs Long Term. If your girls are laying at full speed and you just can’t keep up eating the eggs (lucky you!) then you can freeze their eggs. After patiently waiting for the arrival of her first eggs, she was finally rewarded with a clutch of half a dozen or so waiting for her in one of the nesting boxes, but was concerned by how long it had been since she last checked the box. The eggs may have been sitting there several days before she discovered them. Were they still edible? Q: How long can eggs be left outside once they've been laid before being refrigerated? a: You will want to gather eggs every day, and refrigerate them as soon as they've been gathered. This keeps them freshest. However, in the good old days, of course, eggs were not refrigerated right away. That's surprising to many people! After all, milk that is not refrigerated will go bad, and it will do so pretty immediately... but not eggs. In fact, when a hen is laying eggs to hatch, it can take her about two weeks to gather a clutch large enough to incubate. You're going to get arguments on both sides on this, and most of those people are going to say that their way is best. People say that the eggs bought from stores are more susceptible to salmonella because the bloom is washed off... but those eggs are also weeks old, before they even hit the supermarkets. You have people who wash theirs immediately because they come out of the same hole that the chickens poop with. “The racks in the fridge door are the worst place to store eggs. The constant shaking thins the whites and the flavours of other foods can penetrate the shell.. Warm eggers stand their ground on the basis that supermarkets in continental Europe store their eggs at room temperature and not the fridge. Do Eggs Need To Be Refrigerated Or Can You Store Them At Room Temperature? Sep 16, 2013 12:06 PM By Lizette Borreli @lizcelineb l.borreli@medicaldaily.com The age-old debate of whether eggs need to be refrigerated or stored at room temperature has been cracked by British scientists. StaraBlazkova, CC BY-SA 3.0 Share First, the extra-safe rules from the people who cover all the bases: Raw eggs should be refrigerated at 40 degrees Fahrenheit or lower when you’re not using them, says Elisa Maloberti, a spokesperson for the American Egg Board. “ should not be left at room temperature for more than two hours, including the time used to prepare and serve them. How long will chicken eggs stay fresh without refrigerator? Eggs that you buy from the store will not stay fresh for long without refrigeration. Eggs that come right from the chicken can kept at room temperature for weeks. Store bo … ught eggs should be refrigerated within a few hours of buying them just to be safe. “[Eggs] should not be left at room temperature for more than two hours, including the time used to prepare and serve them. Allow no more than 30 minutes to one hour when it’s 85 degrees Fahrenheit or hotter [out].”. “The main safety concern with shell eggs is Salmonella enteritidis [SE] bacteria inside the egg,” says Hilary Shallo Thesmar, PhD, director of the Egg Safety Center in Washington DC. So yes, Americans have to keep their eggs in the fridge—at least until the FDA changes its policies. “Eggs shouldn’t be left at room temperature for more than two hours,” says Marianne Gravely, technical information specialist at the USDA’s Food Safety and Inspection Service. “There is no way to know if a shell egg is pathogen-free. Food poisoning bacteria don’t affect the taste, smell, or appearance of a food. Query: how long before fresh laid eggs need to be refrigerated",
"output": [
"You will want to gather eggs every day, and refrigerate them as soon as they've been gathered. This keeps them freshest."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9b4aba6a5d6b482497715551e7e9e2d8",
"input": "HACCP Food Handler & Manager Safety FAQs Food Safety Training Course FAQs. Find answers to your questions about our Food Safety training courses, including enrollment questions and technical requirements. If you have a question not listed on our FAQ page, do not hesitate to search further via the Knowledge Base. Course Related skills meet specific, measurable food safety HACCP management competencies. Only candidates who are successful in passing the written examination, meet all criteria for certification, and remain in good standing will be awarded and remain certified. National Registry’s certification program has been developed for an individual who are professionals that have the ability to develop, implement, and maintain a risk-based food safety system by applying HACCP principles to ensure a safe food supply. Only candidates who are successful in passing the paper and pencil or computer based test (CBT) examination, meet all criteria for certification, and remain in good standing will be awarded and remain certified. Certification is awarded for a period of five years. Most food suppliers have implemented some form of an overall food safety program and have experience preparing for regulatory, quality, and/or food safety/hygiene audits. Transitioning to an SQF System is much easier for suppliers who have already implemented ISO or HACCP, and even more so if they have implemented both. After becoming informed about SQF Program requirements, you should evaluate consultancy options if needed* and designate an employee to serve as your SQF Practitioner, essentially your internal expert on the SQF System. HACCP online training FAQs, haccp training details, HACCP training plans, HACCP training requirements, HACCP training pricing and validity HACCP Online Training is a training tool for food processors covering all industry standards of food safety. The American Food Safety School Certified HACCP Manager Training is a one-day course comprised of: After completing this course, you will be able to: To become HACCP-certified, the candidate must pass HACCP Manager Certification Examination. The HACCP exam is 80 multiple-choice questions, closed book. Candidates are allowed two hours to complete the examination. A passing score is 75% or higher. Candidates who successfully pass the examination will get a nationally-recognized Certified HACCP Manager certificate. The certificate is valid for up to five years. Course Fee NSF and HACCP. NSF has been providing HACCP services for more than 10 years, with several related achievements, including: NSF is a longstanding and credible HACCP training provider, recognized by the International HACCP Alliance and The Seafood HACCP Alliance. However, if you are already familiar with food safety and HACCP and would like to focus or upgrade on specific areas, then Stage Training is another option. Users have the flexibility to train in any Stage or combinations of Stages. If you are registered in Stage Training you can change to Certificate Training at any time. TOP Apply the 12 steps of Codex in order to create a HACCP Plan; Compile a HACCP Manual; Manage food safety deviations and program failures; Establish a validation component to a HACCP program; Upon successful completion of this course you will receive 1.3 IACET continuing education units. Q4: Does a HACCP training certification expire? Is there any requirement that establishment employees participate in continuing education? Q5: What are the HACCP record retention requirements for ready-to-eat products? Q1: Should the frequency for the direct observation verification of monitoring activities be listed in the HACCP plan? A1: Yes. 9 CFR 417.2 (c)(7) requires the HACCP plan to list the verification procedures and the frequency with which those procedures are performed. Direct observation of the monitoring activities is one of the verification procedures listed in 9 CFR 417.4(a)(2). HACCP Online is a must-have learning experience for the entire HACCP team to increase the level of team participation and input. Ensure all HACCP team members are on the same page and have received the same exceptional level of education. Query: how long is haccp certification valid",
"output": [
"HACCP certification is valid for up to five years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-888598b5154446cdb02f0bc94711d43c",
"input": "This complete lunar cycle (New Moon to New Moon) is also called a lunation. During this time the moon will completely circle the earth. That's the scientific definition, but you can take any phase; for instance a so-called full moon cycle would be from Full Moon to Full Moon. The calendar used earlier will appear, but on the right-hand side students can “Go to Lunar Cycle” where they can see images of a full lunar cycle and images of the main phases. You can choose to either have students use the esheet at the two-week point or wait until students have completed a full calendar. Hence the term golden number, still found in our almanacs, which denotes the year of the lunar cycle. Letters on Astronomy Denison Olmsted Thus, fourteen was the golden number for 1837, being the fourteenth year of the lunar cycle. Synodic months are 29 or 30 days in length, making a lunar year of 12 months about 11 days shorter than a solar year. Some lunar calendars do not use intercalation, such as most Islamic calendars. For those that do, such as the Hebrew calendar, the most common form of intercalation is to add an additional month every second or third year. A full lunar cycle lasts almost a month (about 29.5 days), and during that time the moon goes from new to crescent to first quarter to gibbous to full to gibbous to third quarter to crescent and back to new. However, a full moon, a new moon, ... To help students recognize that the moon looks a little different every day, but looks the same again about every four weeks, have them use the Moon Phases student esheet to go to the Lunar Cycle Calendar website. The New Moon is highest in the sky to an earthbound observer at (noon, sunset, midnight, sunrise). The Full Moon is highest in the sky to an earthbound observer at (noon, sunset, midnight, sunrise). Throughout the Lunar Cycle, the Moon will appear further (eastward, westward) in the sky at the same time each day. Therefore, to an earthbound observer, the time of day when the Moon is highest in the sky becomes progressively (earlier, later). However, misconceptions regarding the Moon's apparent change in shape still abound. Some believe that clouds or some other object cover up the Moon, blocking our view of part of it. This may happen, but it is not the mechanism behind the lunar cycle. Others believe that the shadow of Earth or some other object falls on the Moon's surface, causing the phases of the Moon. While the Moon does occasionally cross Earth's shadow, resulting in a lunar eclipse, shadows cast by Earth are not what cause lunar phases. Therefore, although mean Earth orbital eccentricity has a well-known effect on the short-term periodic variation of the length of the lunar cycle (find the word eccentricity on this page), it doesn't plausibly account for its long-term secular variation. In purely lunar calendars like the Islamic calendar, the lack of intercalation causes the lunar months to cycle through all the seasons of the Gregorian year over the course of a 33 lunar-year cycle. Query: how long is lunar cycle",
"output": [
"A full lunar cycle lasts almost a month about 29.5 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ab0d7dd1aedf452eaa685dd1dcb5f3d7",
"input": "Concrete should be allowed to cure from anywhere between three and nine days, depending upon the temperature and moisture levels, according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association. Lower temperatures and higher moisture levels result in a longer curing time. Seven to 28 days According to Concrete Network, concrete should be allowed to cure for at least seven days before it's built on. However, waiting longer will greatly reduce the risk of the concrete cracking. Concrete continues to cure up to 28 days after it is poured, at which point it reaches maximum strength. Bottom Line When a contractor or engineer is in charge of a project, follow the professional's advice, since the result of curing is his responsibility, according to Builder Bill. 4.How long does it take for concrete to dry enough to walk on? Wind, humidity, and sunlight are all factors in how long it takes for concrete to cure, walking, normally about 1 to 2 days. 5. How long does it take for concrete to cure enough to drive on? Again, wind, humidity, and sunlight are all factors but the standard is about 5 to 7 days. 6. Should I put cure or water on the concrete? Yes, after the initial 12 hours applying cure of water for 5 days every morning and night is recommended. 7. Do I need to use base rock for my subgrade? This is the required spacing from ground as per ASTM and ACI code requirements which governs US requirements for concrete placement. Third the required cure time for concrete is a minimum 7 days to apply load to the foundation walls as well as foundation (footings) unless using a high early strength concrete. Final cure date is 28 days from placement date, which is considered the adequate duration of curing by the American Concrete Institute. Been here over 20 years and still no problems. It will likely take four weeks for the concrete to reach it's full compressive strength. (Nominally, this is about 4000 psi on average) Some might tell you it's ok to begin framing immediately, but it is best to wait. with out all the b.s. Arrange enough help to place and finish concrete. Start with a minimum of 2 people for a 1 cubic yard pour. Add one person for each additional cubic yard of concrete. If you are using wheelbarrows to move the concrete form the truck to the forms, add an additional person. Sand is considered a fine aggregate, while any stones are coarse aggregates. Bull Float – a tool comprising a large, flat, rectangular piece of wood, aluminum, or magnesium usually 8 inches wide and 48 inches long and a handle 4 to 16 feet in length used to smooth unformed surfaces or freshly placed concrete. Cubic Yard – Unit of measure for ready mix concrete. 1 The discharge chutes can reach apprx. 20’ straight back or 15’ to the side. 2 Determine what type of control joints will be used to control cracking; hand tooled or saw cut. 3 TIPS: Concrete used for residential applications should be at least 4 inches thick Control joints should be placed no more than 10 feet apart. Letters From Our Customers. 1 Thank you Rebecca & Ryan for the exceptional job you do managing the office and meeting customer needs. 2 The new chain link fence is wonderful! 3 Wanted to let you know what a great job your crew did on our new black chainlink fence. 4 Thank you for a wonderful job on our fence. Best Answer: the footer should be poured with 4000 psi concrete with fiber reinforcment and 3 runs of rebar and your walls should always be poured 4000 psi with fiber and a 2 feet on center rebar mat and for a smoother wall when the forms are pulled try a smaller rock like 3/8 to 1/2 inch aggregate but to answer your question a good crew can be done in a week, our crew on average forms and pours one and gets another ready to be poured after the weekend, but i've seen some crews ... Query: how long does it take for concrete foundations to cure",
"output": [
"It takes for concrete to cure, walking, normally about 1 to 2 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e9eba61edde742cfbe5ffc9f32d6c1c7",
"input": "Cooked meat, and especially cooked spiced meat (i.e. sausage) will last a good deal longer. But much depends on the handling. I can get more than a week from a cooked sausage but I'm old and have kitchen hygiene pretty well down. A: The U.S. Department of Agriculture recommends that all raw ground meat be stored in the refrigerator for one to two days at most. The temperature recommended for storing ground meat is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. The danger zone for meat and other perishable foods is considered to be between 40 F and 140 F. Continue Reading Question via Twitter: @Daniel_Simmons: @TestKitchen how long can I store meat in the refrigerator before it spoils? Answered by: Christie Morrison, Associa... We've been hard at work on the new YouTube, and it's better than ever. Butter is good to keep in the front of the fridge, to keep it warmer so it's easy to cut. Butter, bottled water, and other unopened drinks are items that are less susceptible to temperature problems. leftovers: last 3 - 4 days Lunch meat spoils quickly. If your lunch meat smells or looks bad, it is best to throw it away, regardless of how long it has been in the refrigerator. How Long Can You Keep Lunch Meat In The Refrigerator Fresh Cut Lunch Meats Fresh cut lunch meat from the deli counter at your grocery store lasts about 3 to 5 days in the refrigerator. Packaged Lunch Meat Vacuum sealed packaged lunch meat lasts until the expiration date on the package as long as it is unopened. If poultry can be in the refrigerator one day, how do you thaw out a turkey when the label says to leave it in the refrigerator 2-3 days? a. Once the turkey is fully thawed, it is like a fresh turkey and it can be refrigerated 1-2 additional days. Kenmore Elite 33 cu. ft. French Door Bottom-Freezer Refrigerator 04672093000; How to Prepare Your Home for an Emergency; How to Butterfly Chicken Breasts; Smart Swaps for Fall's Unhealthiest Foods ; How Much Food Do I Need? Sep 30, 2015 @ 4:16am. it does seem a bit too short, but for the time poor kibble is the go. This means cook the prime with a fire carried on your hunting mount, then once cooked keep hunting, once you have a few head back to base and put in preserving bin with oil and log out. Have a farm indoors, make kibble on your next login. When it comes to appliances that keep our foods safe, the refrigerator may be the most important because it slows down the growth of bacteria that cause food poisoning. At temperatures between 40 and 140 °F, bacteria grows most rapidly. A refrigerator set to 40 °F or below will protect most foods – but not forever. Query: how long does meat last in refrigerator ark",
"output": [
"Meats Fresh cut lunch meat from the deli counter at your grocery store lasts about 3 to 5 days in the refrigerator."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-21c45543901c4070b90fbe39c14880ec",
"input": "How long does pnuemonia bacteria live outside the body? My 84 yr. old Mom with heart disease and history of seizures, was in an enclosed vehicle sitting in the exact seat where someone who had bacterial pnuemonia was brought to the hospital and admitted 12 hrs. before. Scientists say that toys can harbor cold germs for weeks or even months. Prior research has already concluded that two common bacteria that cause colds, ear infections, and strep throat don't often live for long outside the human body, but a new study finds that they can linger a lot longer than previously thought. Exposure to any bacteria does not necessarily imply that you wil get a disease from it. There are not specific bacteria that only cause pneumonia, so exposure to someone with pneumonia, does not mean the exposed person will get pneumonia. Bacteria and viruses are more prevalent in closed spaces, and can last for a while on surfaces, but we are ALL exposed to these types of germs every day....every hour...when we are around people; even people that appear well. Exposure to any bacteria does not necessarily imply that you wil get a disease from it. There are not specific bacteria that only cause pneumonia, so... My WebMD Sign In, Sign Up This is the first paper to directly investigate that these bacteria can survive well on various surfaces, including hands, and potentially spread between individuals. The researchers found that in a daycare center, four out of five stuffed toys tested positive for S. pneumonaie and several surfaces, such as cribs, tested positive for S. pyogenes, even after being cleaned. Anyone at any age can get walking pneumonia. Walking pneumonia from mycoplasma is most common, though, in older children and adults younger than 40. People who live and work in crowded places, such as schools, homeless shelters, and prisons have a higher risk of contracting the disease. That's because walking pneumonia is contagious. It's spread when someone comes in contact with droplets from the nose and throat of someone who has it. That commonly happens when the person with walking pneumonia sneezes or coughs. Cases of walking pneumonia are most common in the late summer and fall. But infections can occur with no particular pattern throughout the year. Researchers also think it takes prolonged close contact with an infected person for someone else to develop walking pneumonia; still, there are widespread outbreaks every four to eight years. When those outbreaks occur, walking pneumonia can account for as many as one out of every two cases of pneumonia. What are the symptoms of walking pneumonia? Symptoms generally appear 15 to 25 days after exposure to the mycoplasma and develop slowly over a period of two to four days. Almost all children are infected at least once by age two. they were extremely premature or if they have heart or lung problems. monthly injection of an antibody to RSV at the beginning of and continuing throughout the RSV season. addition, they should avoid exposure to tobacco smoke. There is a certain level of immunity that occurs after someone has a case of walking pneumonia. It isn't permanent, though, and it's unclear how long it lasts. So you could at some point develop walking pneumonia again. When it does recur, it may be milder. Well-scrubbed hands. University of Buffalo researchers in New York published a study December 27 in the journal Infection and Immunity that found that Streptococcus pneumoniae and Streptococcus pyogenes can live on surfaces such as toys, books and cribs for weeks or even months. Query: how long does pneumonia live on surfaces",
"output": [
"Pneumonia lives for weeks or even months on surfaces"
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e46b9862162c48ffa98c61ad559896c3",
"input": "Polyglandular Autoimmune Syndrome: 1 Polyglandular Autoimmune Syndrome: Introduction. 2 Symptoms. 3 Causes. 4 Treatments. 5 Misdiagnosis. 6 Full Contents list. polyglandular autoimmune syndrome; PGA syndrome type 1; autoimmune polyendocrinopathy type 1; autoimmune-polyendocrine-candidiasis-ectodermal dystrophy syndrome; Disorder Subdivisions. None; General Discussion. APS-1 is a rare and complex inherited disorder of immune-cell dysfunction with multiple autoimmunities. It presents as a constellation of symptoms and side-effects with potentially life-threatening endocrine gland and gastro-intestinal Schmidt Syndrome. DEFINITION. Schmidt syndrome refers to the combination of autoimmune adrenal insufficiency (Addison’s disease) with autoimmune hypothyroidism and/or type 1 diabetes mellitus (T1DM), and is part of a larger syndrome known as autoimmune polyendocrine syndrome type II or polyglandular autoimmune syndrome type II (PAS II). Autoimmune polyendocrine syndrome type 1 (APS-1), also known as autoimmune polyendocrinopathy-candidiasis–ectodermal dystrophy/dysplasia (APECED), autoimmune polyglandular syndrome type 1, Whitaker syndrome, or candidiasis-hypoparathyroidism–Addison's disease syndrome, is a subtype of autoimmune polyendocrine syndrome (autoimmune polyglandular syndrome) in which multiple endocrine glands dysfunction as a result of autoimmunity. MedlinePlus (7 links) 1 Encyclopedia: Addison's Disease. 2 Encyclopedia: Autoimmune Disorders. 3 Encyclopedia: Cutaneous Candidiasis. 4 Encyclopedia: Hypoparathyroidism. 5 Health Topic: Addison Disease. 6 Health Topic: Autoimmune Diseases. 7 Health Topic: Endocrine Diseases. Summary Summary. Autoimmune polyglandular syndrome type 1 is an inherited autoimmune condition that affects many of the body's organs. Symptoms often begin in childhood or adolescence and may include mucocutaneous candidiasis, hypoparathyroidism, and Addison disease. Affected individuals typically have at least two of these features, and many have all three. Autoimmune polyglandular syndrome type 2 is an autoimmune disorder that affects many hormone-producing glands. This condition is characterized by the presence of Addison's disease along with autoimmune thyroid disease and/or type 1 diabetes. Affected individuals may also have problems with other endocrine glands. Autoimmune polyendocrine syndrome is caused by defects in the autoimmune regulator (AIRE) gene. This gene plays a critical role in the body’s ability to distinguish between its own proteins and cells and those of bacteria and viruses. As a result, the body attacks its own healthy tissue. Myasthenia gravis: Sometimes this disorder can be associated with autoimmune polyendocrine syndrome type II. Myasthenia gravis is a chronic neuromuscular disease characterized by weakness and abnormally rapid fatigue of the voluntary muscles, with improvement following rest. Treatments for Polyglandular Autoimmune Syndrome. 1 Treatment depends on which endocrine gland is affected: 2 Pancreatic dysfunction will require insulin. 3 Adrenal dysfunction will require cortisol. 4 Thyroid hormone dysfunction will require thyroid hormone replacement. 5 more treatments...». Query: autoimmune polyendocrine syndrome symptoms",
"output": [
"Autoimmune polyendocrine syndrome is a rare and complex inherited disorder of immune-cell dysfunction with multiple autoimmunities."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d93941857ad3471696ce4266b861df8e",
"input": "Read the following selection by Edgar Snow (1905-1972), an American journalist who traveled to meet Mao Zedong (1893-1976) in his northern China stronghold at Yenan, and Mao's poem on the Long March and note how: This is the myth and to some extent the reality, of the Chinese Red Army's Long March of 1934 and 1935. The Long March was an epic retreat by the three Red Armies of China that took place in 1934 and 1935, during the Chinese Civil War. It was a key moment in the civil war, and also in the development of communism in China. Long March: Long March, (1934–35), the 6,000-mile (10,000-km) historic trek of the Chinese communists, which resulted in the relocation of the communist revolutionary base from southeastern to northwestern China and in the emergence of Mao Zedong as the undisputed party leader. Fighting Nationalist forces The Long March (October 1934 – October 1936) was a military retreat undertaken by the Red Army of the Communist Party of China, the forerunner of the People's Liberation Army, to evade the pursuit of the Kuomintang (KMT or Chinese Nationalist Party) army. The Long March. The traumatic but ultimately victorious march of Mao Zedong and the Chinese Communists ended on October 22nd, 1935. One of history’s great journeys began in October 1934 and ended a year later after covering a distance variously estimated at between 3,000 and 8,000 miles across China. Figures for the numbers involved vary hugely, but fewer than one in ten of those who started the trek apparently reached the end of it. The Long March made the survival of the imperilled Chinese Communist Party possible, gave Mao Zedong a secure grasp on its leadership and ultimately led to the creation of the People’s Republic of China. Viewed. 1 1 Tillerson warns of US military strike on North Korea. 2 2 Occupy leaders arrested and charged a day after Lam win. 3 3 HSBC axes 120 IT jobs in Hong Kong. 4 4 Australia-based academic fears long forced stay in China. 5 5 Laptops containing 3.7 million Hong Kong voters’ data stolen. The Long March: The True History of Communist China's Founding Myth. $12.11 Free Shipping for Prime Members. FREE Shipping on orders over $25—or get FREE Two-Day Shipping with Amazon Prime Only 3 left in stock (more on the way). Ships from and sold by Amazon.com. The Long March, one of the best known events of the Chinese Revolution, describes the forced relation of the Red Army from Jiangxi in southern China to Shaanxi in the north. 2. This march began with Jiang Jieshi’s fifth and most successful Encirclement Campaign, which was launched against Jiangxi in the autumn of 1933. The Long March 1 was quickly replaced by the Long March 2 family of launchers. Entry into commercial launch market After the U.S. Space Shuttle Challenger was destroyed in 1986, a growing commercial backlog gave China the chance to enter the international launch market. This is the story of the Long March of the Communist Party leadership and the Red Army from South China to Northwest China. The source is mainly Harrison Salisbury's book The Long March. Salisbury's book is a very good book that well conveys the drama of the Long March and its three struggles: 1 1. the Red Army with the Nationalist Army of Chiang Kai-shek. 2 2. the Red Army with the elements and terrain of western China. 3 3. the factions within the Red Army with each other. Query: how long was the long march in china",
"output": [
"The Long March was 6,000 mile or 10,000 km long in China."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0f793733ee584dae8fb7d1e4a94139c4",
"input": "Regular body temperature is 98.4°F. (°C x 1.8) + 32 = °F 36.9°C x 1.8 = 66.4 66.4 + 32 = 98.4°F (°F - 32) ÷ 1.8 = °C 98.4°F - 32 = 66.4 66.4 ÷ 1.8 = 36.9°C. The best type of thermometer — or the best place to insert the thermometer, in some cases — depends on your child's age. 1 Birth to 3 months. Use a regular digital thermometer to take a rectal temperature. 2 3 months to 4 years. According to the American Academy of Family Physicians, a fever is indicated when body temperature rises about one degree or more over the normal temperature of 37.0 degrees Celsius (98.6 degrees Fahrenheit). About This Image: Body temperature thermometer Adults: A fever is generally agreed to be present if: 1 Temperature in the mouth (oral) is at or over 37.7°C (99.9°F) 2 Temperature in the anus (rectum/rectal) is at or over 37.5 - 38.3°C (99.5 - 100.9°F) 3 Temperature under the arm (axillary) or in the ear (otic) is at or over 37.2°C (99.0°F) In fact, a serious infection, especially in infants, might cause no fever or even a low body temperature (below 97°F or 36.1°C). Because fevers can rise and fall, a child might have chills as the body's temperature begins to rise. The child may sweat to release extra heat as the temperature starts to drop. In general, contact your child's doctor if: 1 Your child is younger than age 3 months and has a rectal temperature of 100.4 F (38 C) or higher. 2 Your child is age 3 to 6 months and has a temperature up to 102 F (38.9 C) and seems unusually irritable, lethargic or uncomfortable, or has a temperature higher than 102 F (38.9 C). Your child is age 6 to 24 months and has a temperature higher than 102 F (38.9 C) that lasts longer than one day but shows no other signs. If your child has other signs, such as a cold, cough or diarrhea, you might call your child's doctor sooner based on their severity. Normal Body Temperature is Highly Variable Keep in mind, this number, whether it’s 98.6 or 98.2 degrees F, is just an average. The human body has a wide range that is considered normal and each individual may have their own normal range. Therefore, a degree on the Fahrenheit scale is 1 ⁄ 180 of the interval between the freezing point and the boiling point. On the Celsius scale, the freezing and boiling points of water are 100 degrees apart. A temperature interval of 1 °F is equal to an interval of 5 ⁄ 9 degrees Celsius. The normal core body temperature of a healthy, resting adult human being is stated to be at 98.6 degrees fahrenheit or 37.0 degrees celsius. Though the body temperature measured on an individual can vary, a healthy human body can maintain a fairly consistent body temperature that is around the mark of 37.0 degrees celsius. The Fahrenheit scale is a temperature scale based on one proposed in 1724 by Amsterdam-based physicist Daniel Gabriel Fahrenheit (1686–1736), after whom the scale is named. It uses the degree Fahrenheit (symbol: °F) as the unit. Several accounts of how he originally defined his scale exist. Body temperature in different units. 37 °C is a value that one encounters probably more often than any other temperature reading. If you are used to the Celsius scale, you recognize it immediately. Indeed, a normal body temperature of a healthy person is in the vicinity of 37 degrees Celsius, which makes this value so special and important. For the Fahrenheit folks, you may know it as 98.6 °F (as you can easily verify using our online converter). It is important to realize however that the 37 Celsius (or 98.6 Fahrenheit) value is essentially an averaged benchmark. What is normal depends on various factors, both objective and subjective. At least some of those factors should be taken into account when reaching conclusions about whether one's body temperature is normal. Query: how long is the regular body temperature in fahrenheit",
"output": [
"The regular body temperature is 98.4°F."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1a43e7b3d82c4e9687e8a456cc96f8bb",
"input": "MILTEX EZ-Zyme All Purpose Enzyme Cleaner, 3/4 oz. (22 ml) packets (dispenser box of 32). Contents of 1-box makes 32 gallons of solution. Neutral pH multi-enzyme liquid concentrate ideal for instrument presoak, ultrasonic cleaning, laundry presoak, and evacuation system cleaner. Ideal for cleaning hard to remove proteinaceous (mucous & tissue) and lipid (fatty) materials from the surfaces of surgical/dental instruments, linen, water submersible equipment, or where mechanical scrubbing is impractical. a basin containing sterile water to soak. D. Saline must not be used, since the chloride ions can cause pitting and deterioration of the finish on the surface of the instruments. Standard of Practice II The cleaning of instruments should continue at the point of use post-procedure, B) Disinfecting (the protection for medical personnel from accidental contamination during cleaning) To avoid blood and other proteins from sticking to instruments surfaces, an enzymatic cleaner bath (soaking) should be used on all instruments. After soaking for a minimum of 10 minutes, rinse all instruments in running tap water. STEP 1: CLEANING. The first and most important step in instrument reprocessing is cleaning, as studies [Alfa, 1998] have shown that a dirty instrument cannot be effectively sterilized. This is because the soil shields bacteria and viruses from the sterilizing agent. Another study, testing the efficacy of presoaking compared to an ultrasonic on the cleanliness of endodontic files, found that presoaking did not provide any benefit over the use of an ultrasonic alone. 6 Whether personnel presoak instruments or place them directly into the ultrasonic cleaner, immersing the instruments before blood and other debris have the opportunity to dry improves the efficacy of the cleaning procedure. Ruhof Endozime. Endozime® is a foaming dual enzymatic cleaner that removes blood, protein, mucous, vomit and fecal matter. This formulation of Protease and Amylase enzymes with buffers and surfactants is perfect for all flexible and rigid scopes and instruments. Proteases are the most important type of. enzyme to look for when choosing an enzymatic detergent for medical use because. there is a high content of protein in most body fluids (including blood, tissue and. mucous) which cannot be easily removed with regular detergents/surfactants and water. Enzymatic Surgical Instrument Detergent and Presoak Available in dual- and single-enzyme formulas, Medline Enzymatic Detergent & Presoak is recommended for automatic washers, ultrasonic machines or manual cleaning when instruments have not been pre-cleaned. Surgical Instrument Soak. Immersing soiled instruments in sklar soak™ for two minutes. substantially reduces the risk of exposure to many infectious. organisms including H1N1, HIV-1, HSV, VRE, Rotaviruses, Hepatitis B&C, as well as TB, MRSA, and A-Baumannii. Chemical disinfection can be used when instruments will be damaged by heat. Some chemicals that may be considered include glutaraldehyde 2% for 20 minutes, hydrogen peroxide 6%–7.5% for 20–30 minutes, peracetic acid 0.2–0.35% for 5 minutes and ortho-phthalaldehyde (OPA) for 5–12 minutes. Query: how long can instruments soak in an enzymatic cleaner",
"output": [
"Instruments soak in an enzymatic cleaner for a minimum of 10 minutes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9a0fc2c5d5314981a7a49123cb10b4c5",
"input": "The time it would take to reach its surface also depends on how fast we travel. If we travel at the speed of light, it would take us less than an hour – 48 minutes to be precise. That would be enough time to resist any hunger pangs and save us from giving in to expensive plane food. A rocket ship would take roughly 2.2 years, provided it goes at top speed all the way. And if you take a cab, traveling at 65 miles per hour, it would take you roughly 850 years! The staggering fare is another issue! The Fuel Instead of taking the direct path to Jupiter, it made two gravitational assisting flybys of Earth and one of Venus to pick up speed, finally arriving at Jupiter on December 8, 1995. That’s a total of 2,242 days. So why did Galileo take so much longer to get to Jupiter? It’s because you need to be going slow enough that when you reach Jupiter, you can actually enter orbit around the planet, and not just speed on past. And now, after this long period of Jupiterlessness, we’re about to have another spacecraft arrive at the massive planet and go into orbit. NASA Eyes Mission to Jupiter Moon Europa. Complex and beautiful patterns adorn the icy surface of Jupiter's moon Europa, as seen in this color image intended to approximate how the satellite might appear to the human eye. The data used to create this view were acquired by NASA's Galileo spacecraft in 1995 and 1998. The Voyager Spacecraft, the most sophisticared space missions yet attempted by humans, took years to get to Jupiter & Saturn. As of 1999 May, Voyager 1 was nearly 6 billion miles from earth; it takes over 20 hours to send a signal and receive a reply. cost to drive from Jupiter, FL to West Palm Beach, FL; reverse driving time from West Palm Beach, FL to Jupiter, FL; halfway between Jupiter, FL and West Palm Beach, FL; places to stop from Jupiter, FL to West Palm Beach, FL; hotels near West Palm Beach, FL; flight duration from Jupiter, FL to West Palm Beach, FL Answer 1: Since the Earth and Jupiter are both revolving around the sun, the distance between them is always changing. The average distance between the Earth and Jupiter is 483 million miles. If you could travel at the speed of light, it would only take you 43 minutes to get to Jupiter. Since people cant travel at the speed of light, you would probably have to take a rocket ship to Jupiter instead- which would take you about 2.2 years if it was going at top speed the whole way. There have been several probes sent from Earth to Jupiter as of 2014, and it took them between three and five years to get to Jupiter. A few of the missions sent to Jupiter include Cassini, Voyager I and II, Ulysses, and Pioneer 11. It would take 850 years traveling 65 miles per hour to reach Jupiter from Earth. Learn more about Planets So, how long does it take to get to Jupiter? Around 600 days if you want to just do a flyby and aren’t planning to stick around, or about 2,000 days if you want to actually get into orbit. Podcast (audio): Download (Duration: 5:45 — 2.4MB) Subscribe: Apple Podcasts | Android | RSS. Podcast (video): Download (Duration: 5:47 — 96.0MB) Well, it's not easy to get to. Space is kind of infinite and it takes a long time to get to places. Check out these transit times to each of our planets, according to the Planetary Science Institute. Voyager 1 took only 546 days, arriving on March 5, 1979, and Voyager 2 took 688 days. So, if you’re going to do a flyby, you’ll need about 550-650 days to make the journey. But if you actually want to slow down and go into orbit around Jupiter, you’ll need to take a much slower journey. Query: how long would it take to get to jupiter",
"output": [
"It would take 850 years traveling 65 miles per hour to reach Jupiter from Earth."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-58594231ce3e4d0bb3c340edf6dfed30",
"input": "Under this demonstration, your ambulance company may send a request for prior authorization to Medicare before your fourth round trip in a 30-day period. They'll do this so you and the company will know earlier in the process if Medicare is likely to cover your services. Medicare may pay for emergency ambulance transportation in an airplane or helicopter if your health condition requires immediate and rapid ambulance transportation that ground transportation can’t provide, and one of these applies: 1 Your pickup location can't be easily reached by ground transportation. How much does an ambulance ride cost? On average, an ambulance company will charge anywhere from $350 to as much as $2,000 for a trip without insurance. We explored multiple cities throughout the United States and included the prices we had found inside the table below. Even with health insurance, an ambulance ride may not be covered 100 percent. On average, an ambulance company will charge anywhere from $350 to as much as $2,000 for a trip without insurance. Even with health insurance, an ambulance ride may not be covered 100 percent. According to this LaTimes.com article, a patient was billed more than $1,538 for her ambulance ride. Ambulance services. How often is it covered? Medicare Part B (Medical Insurance) covers ambulance services to or from a hospital, critical access hospital (CAH), or skilled nursing facility (SNF). Medicare covers and helps pay for ambulance services only when other transportation could endanger your health, like if you have a health condition that requires this type of transportation. Medicare will only cover ambulance services to the nearest appropriate medical facility that’s able to give you the care you need. EMS agencies typically replace their ambulances — which already cost about $150,000 unequipped — every five to seven years. Outfitting one can tack on $100,000 more, said Tom Izydore, director of Plum Emergency Medical Services, which is looking to buy an ambulance in the next 18 months. You may now be affected by a Medicare demonstration program if: 1 You get scheduled, non-emergency ambulance transportation for 3 or more round trips in a 10-day period or at least once a week for 3 weeks or more. 2 You get this transportation from an ambulance company based in one of these states: New Jersey. If the ambulance has to standby at the hospital and/or a location, it can cost up to $200 per hour. Tips to know: Why is an ambulance ride so expensive? Regardless of how many 911 calls are made in a day, an ambulance service still has to be available for 24 hours per day, staffing crew members and maintaining the vehicles available. The cost of an ambulance ride can depend on the company, the miles being driven, the reason you had to ride in one and if insurance is involved. A basic ambulance ride to a hospital, for example, can cost a lot less than a paramedic unit. To find out how much your specific test, item, or service will cost, talk to your doctor or other health care provider. 1 The specific amount you’ll owe may depend on several things, like: 2 Other insurance you may have. 3 How much your doctor charges. 4 Whether your doctor accepts assignment. 5 The type of facility. Query: average ambulance cost",
"output": [
"On average, an ambulance company will charge anywhere from $350 to as much as $2,000."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-438d807e70e24fb1a9b8aca0fe159cb2",
"input": "The difference between civil rights and civil liberties is fairly well defined and distinct based on how each term is used. Civil rights are rights granted and protected by a government for its people with regard to ensuring fairness and preventing discrimination with regard to a particular attribute of its people, such as gender or age. noun, Usually, civil liberties. 1. the freedom of a citizen to exercise customary rights, as of speech or assembly, without unwarranted or arbitrary interference by the government. Definition of civil liberty for English Language Learners. : the right of people to do or say things that are not illegal without being stopped or interrupted by the government. Definition of civil liberty. : freedom from arbitrary governmental interference (as with the right of free speech) specifically by denial of governmental power and in the U.S. especially as guaranteed by the Bill of Rights —usually used in plural. On the other hand, civil liberties are basic rights typically granted to all people in a country by the constitution or other founding document of that country and are extended to all citizens without further specificity, such as freedom of speech or religion in the US. Legal Definition of civil liberty. : freedom from arbitrary interference in one's pursuits (as in expressing thoughts, practicing a religion, or pursuing a living) by individuals or especially by the government and especially as constitutionally guaranteed —usually used in plural — see also civil right. Freedom of religion is an example of a civil liberty. In the US, many civil liberties are guaranteed by the Bill of Rights. A civil rights issue may include the denial of educational opportunities to certain people based on ethnicity. Civil rights vs. civil liberties really became a distinction with the civil rights movements. Up until the civil rights movement we had “Separate but equal” schools in which black children had to go to schools with only black children. They are often used together when discussing a particularly complicated issue. Civil rights and civil liberties are both legal issues and can both require the efforts of courts, legislators, and attorneys to define and protect these freedoms. In general, they can be more easily distinguished by considering that civil rights are usually fought for by various groups within a populace, while civil liberties pertain to the actual rights people are fighting to secure. civil liberty. 1 the freedom of a citizen to exercise customary rights, as of speech or assembly, without unwarranted or arbitrary interference by the government. 2 such a right as guaranteed by the laws of a country, as in the U.S. by the Bill of Rights. Query: how does the term civil liberties differ from the term civil rights?",
"output": [
"Civil rights are rights granted and protected by a government for its people with regard to ensuring fairness and preventing discrimination with regard to a particular attribute of its people, such as gender or age. Where as civil liberty is the right of people to do or say things that are not illegal without being stopped or interrupted by the government."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e1cee86920b14c83b0fb5447af19f53c",
"input": "Release the mice into tall grasses at least one mile from your house or they will find their way back (no kidding) and the second time around they’ll be wary of your trap and harder to catch. Release them early in the morning so they’ll have a chance to get the lay of the land and build a nest before nightfall. Made from FSC certified wood the Victor Mouse Traps are very sturdy and long lasting. The snap wire part of the Victor Mouse Trap is so strong that it could even break your finger. Mice are naturally curious so if you place a piece of bait on top of the plastic triggering which is more sensitive than metals ones it will trap your rodent right away. How far away should you take a mouse from your house to stop it returning? How far to release a mouse? Where is a safe place to release mice in the winter time after catching them in humane mouse traps? Release mice outside house find way back in. I am have mice in house, going away overnight and need to leave food out for my cat. is there somewhere i could put it so mice wont get it? is it harm; How to block a hole in my boiler to stop mice getting in? Catch and release mice will they come back. When i chew the back of my head hurts? We found a mouse in our house last night and I plan on getting a live tap later today. Orkin is coming next weekend to get a more thorough inspection and plan going but in the meantime I want to catch what I can and release them outside. Would the field behind my house be far enough away? It is about 100 yards behind the house. If I catch a mouse in my house, how far away do I need to take it to keep it from coming back? With me and my mom we just caught a mouse and its winter in Maine. We had absolutely no idea what to do with it. We thought we could keep it for a night and let it go at the dump the next day, but it would be dead by morning because of shock and its tail was injured and bleeding. Stack bricks or books along one side so that the rodent can climb up and jump into the basket—once inside, the animal won’t be able to climb back out. Captured mice and rats can be kept calm by placing a towel over the trap. Release them within 100 yards of where they were trapped. (Rodents can also be humanely euthanized by a veterinarian or at a local animal shelter.) In order to keep the mouse from returning, you should take it about 2 to 3 miles from your house. Try to find a location away from human habitation that provides some shelter like a pile of wood, branches or rocks, or at least some low ground cover. This will shelter the mouse from predators until it can build a proper nest. Q: How far away should I take a live-trapped squirrel so that it doesn't return to my home? A: If you plan to relocate a squirrel, it is recommended that you take it at least 3 miles away, preferably on the other side of a body of water or a major highway.* Query: how far away to release mice from house",
"output": [
"You should release a mouse about 2 to 3 miles from your house."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-808fa187a4814f75a8f53b7ec169599f",
"input": "Most cats recover rapidly. Some cats will eat the same day as surgery. Most will be eating normally within two days. Older animals may be a bit sore or lethargic for a few days. Most cats are back to normal within three days. What is spay surgery? The technical term for spay surgery is ovariohysterectomy (OHE) OHE involves removal of the ovaries, fallopian tubes and uterus; When should I have my cat spayed? Before her first heat; Typically between 4 and 6 months of age; Do some veterinarians spay sooner than 6 months of age? Yes this is called early-age spay or pediatric spay How long will she recover? and how does the process go? meaning as in what do i have to do while she is recovering? will they sedate her or what? this is my first time and i want to know everything about... show more How long does a cat recover from being spayed? My cat is a year and 9 months. She's a pretty strong cat. How long will she recover? and how does the process go? meaning as in what do i have to do while she is recovering? will they sedate her or what? this is my first time and i want to know everything about... show more How long does a cat recover from being spayed? My cat is a year and 9 months. Do some veterinarians spay sooner than 6 months of age? Yes this is called early-age spay or pediatric spay; Done at 6 to 8 weeks of age; Performed more frequently at animal shelters before adoption; Helps prevent pet overpopulation; What happens during spay surgery? Surgery takes place in a sterile environment, such as an operating room Kitten Spay Surgery, Start to Finish. Everything you wanted to know about spaying your cat and more. You've got to spay your female cat so see what it's all about. Via Mariamichelle/Pixabay. You’ve made an appointment to have your female kitten spayed, but you wonder what she’ll go through on the day of surgery. Recovery after being spayed? How long does a cat recover from being spayed? My cat is a year and 9 months. She's a pretty strong cat. How long will she recover? and how does the process go? meaning as in what do i have to do while she is recovering? will they sedate her or what? this is my first time and i want to know... Kitten Spay Surgery, Start to Finish Everything you wanted to know about spaying your cat and more. You've got to spay your female cat so see what it's all about. Recovery from being spayed is usually around 10 days. My kitten was back to her usual self in three days but it took 10 days for the incision to heal enough for the stitches to come out. Yes this is called early-age spay or pediatric spay; Done at 6 to 8 weeks of age; Performed more frequently at animal shelters before adoption; Helps prevent pet overpopulation; What happens during spay surgery? Surgery takes place in a sterile environment, such as an operating room; Your cat receives general anesthesia A spayed cat can be on her feet minutes after surgery, and home the same day or the next day, depending on her age, size, and health. Recovery takes from five to fourteen days. to She may need to return to have sutures removed after a few days. Query: how long is recovery from spaying a cat",
"output": [
"Recovery from spaying a cat is usually around 10 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4c15bf2d29ad4312812f37de5c49f743",
"input": "Doctors usually follow up a new diagnosis of atrial fibrillation with additional tests to look for an underlying cause or trigger. These tests may include blood tests, an echocardiogram (an ultrasound of the heart), and/or a chest X-ray. Dr. Leslie Kernisan is the author of a popular blog and podcast at BetterHealthWhileAging.net. She is also a clinical instructor in the University of California, San Francisco, Division of Geriatrics. Atrial fibrillation, also sometimes called A-fib, is usually diagnosed with an electrocardiogram (ECG). An ECG is a noninvasive diagnostic procedure that uses electrodes taped to the skin on the chest to measure the electrical activity within the heart. This information creates a tracing, which can be printed on paper or viewed on a monitor. Occasionally atrial fibrillation is noticed incidentally on an ECG or other heart test. More commonly, doctors order an ECG because a person is having symptoms that could be caused by atrial fibrillation, such as palpitations, a racing heartbeat, dizziness, or shortness of breath. Transtelephonic monitor: When you develop symptoms of atrial fibrillation, a strip of your current heart rhythm can be transmitted to your doctor’s office over the telephone, using a monitor with two bracelets or by placing the monitor against your chest wall. How is atrial fibrillation diagnosed? The most commonly used tests to diagnose atrial fibrillation include: Electrocardiogram (ECG or EKG): The ECG draws a picture on graph paper of the electrical impulses traveling through the heart muscle. An EKG provides an electrical “snapshot” of the heart. For people who have symptoms that come and go, a special monitor may need to be used to capture the arrhythmia. Holter monitor: A small external recorder is worn over a short period of time, usually one to three days. Diagnosing AFib: EKG Your doctor will diagnose atrial fibrillation on an electrocardiogram (EKG). This heart tracing shows a distinct pattern in the electricity of the heart that your doctor can diagnose. If your AFib comes and goes you may need to wear a continuous heart monitor (Holter monitor) to diagnose the abnormal rhythm. Some of the tests used for making an atrial fibrillation diagnosis include: 1 Electrocardiogram (EKG) 2 Holter monitor. 3 Event monitor. 4 Echocardiogram. 5 Blood tests, including thyroid tests. 6 Electrophysiology study (EPS). Atrial fibrillation (AFib) is the most common type of abnormal heart rhythm. Atrial fibrillation or AF can lead to serious heart complications like stroke. Learn about diagnosing and treating AFib. Atrial fibrillation is a risk factor for stroke. About 15 percent of all people who have strokes have AFib. Because of the irregular and chaotic flow of blood through the heart, small blood clots can form in the heart chambers when you have atrial fibrillation. These clots can travel through the bloodstream to the brain, causing a stroke. As part of the medical history, the healthcare provider will ask a number of questions, including questions about: 1 Current symptoms. 2 Medical conditions. 3 Current medications. 4 Family history of medical conditions. 5 Social history, including alcohol use and smoking. Query: how is afib diagnosed ekg",
"output": [
"Your doctor will diagnose atrial fibrillation on an electrocardiogram (EKG). This heart tracing shows a distinct pattern in the electricity of the heart that your doctor can diagnose."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-38b1bebf6a8f47cf9bb027ad64c1331e",
"input": "Challenge: Now that you have an understanding of surface tension. Can you explain why it is harder to move an object thrugh the surface of water than it is to move the same object when completely submersed in the water. Surface Tension Surface tension is the skin-like surface of a liquid due to the cohesive forces between the liquid molecules. The diagram below shows an imagined magnified view of the surface of water, the molecules of liquid at the surface do not have other like- molecules above them. This is why there is surface tension and takes a certain amount of energy to break these intermolecular bonds. Same goes for other liquids, even hydrophobic liquids such as oil. There are forces between the liquid such as Van der Waals forces that are responsible for the intermolecular forces found within the liquid. Surface Tension. Surface tension is the skin-like surface of a liquid due to the cohesive forces between the liquid molecules. The diagram below shows an imagined magnified view of the surface of water, the molecules of liquid at the surface do not have other like- molecules above them. 1 Surface tension is the energy, or work, required to increase the surface area of a liquid due to intermolecular forces. Since these intermolecular forces vary depending on the nature of the liquid (e.g. water vs. gasoline) or solutes in the liquid (e.g. surfactants like detergent), each solution exhibits differing surface tension properties. What is Cohesion and How does it Relate to Surface Tension. 1 The spheres of water form due to surface tension. This photo is courtesy of jhongdezon.com. 2 While not meant to be an exact replica, the elliptical shapes represent water molecules. Notice the forces between the molecules represented by the red arrows. Surface tension is the energy, or work, required to increase the surface area of a liquid due to intermolecular forces. Since these intermolecular forces vary depending on the nature of the liquid (e.… You've seen examples of surface tension in action: water striders walking on water, soap bubbles, or perhaps water creeping up inside a thin tube. What, exactly, is surface tension? Surface tension is defined as the amount of energy required to increase the surface area of a liquid by a unit amount. So the units can be expressed in joules per square meter (J/m2). You can also think of it as a force per unit length, pulling on an object (Mellendorf, 2002). It will then take a certain amount of energy to break these forces, and the surface tension. Water is one liquid known to have a very high surface tension value and is difficult to overcome. Figure \\(\\PageIndex{2}\\) : (a) A paper clip can “float” on water because of surface Surface tension causes the surface of a liquid to pull together forming the smallest surface area possible.When a liquid is in a container, such as water in a glass, the liquid is also attracted to the molecules making up the container. Thus, while cohesion tends to pull water molecules into a. Query: how does the surface tension",
"output": [
"Surface Tension Surface tension is the skin-like surface of a liquid due to the cohesive forces between the liquid molecules."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ae6efd5dcd8d4d27bc6bcf32e2d6f82f",
"input": "Latest Review For: Cheddars - San Antonio, TX Chedders on 410 loop San Antonio Very bad hygiene , food particles on silver wear dirty glass could not drink out of it . McDonald's, Burger King, Pizza Hut, and other fast food joints are also traditionally open, along with Starbucks and Dunkin Donuts which also give a warm welcome to customers on Christmas Day. If you want to enjoy the tasty food at Cheddars, it will be important to figure out when the restaurant is open. Our guide to the opening and closing hours for Cheddars will give you all the details on what time does Cheddars open or close. Some Cheddars may close as early as 10:30 or stay open as late as midnight. Cheddars Holiday Hours All Cheddar’s restaurants are closed on New Year’s Day, Thanksgiving, and Christmas Day. MAIN Home Life Holidays Christmas What's Open Christmas Day It can be a bit of an anti-climax when Christmas finally rolls around, leaving many families to wonder - so, what's open today? In big metropolitan areas, you can usually rely on major department stores in some locations to open on Christmas day - especially for those post-Christmas gift exchanges. Many retail stores will open late on Christmas Eve, but some of the biggest like Walmart, Macy's, Target, and IKEA, close their doors at midnight and only reopen on December 26. If you're not sure where to go in your area, simply find contact details, store circulars and store opening hours on the Web ahead of time. Cheddars Hours – Additional Details Cheddars Hours by Location. All Cheddars locations open at 11, but the closing time can vary a little depending on how much nightlife is in that specific area. Some Cheddars may close as early as 10:30 or stay open as late as midnight. Cheddars Holiday Hours. All Cheddar’s restaurants are closed on New Year’s Day, Thanksgiving, and Christmas Day. On other holidays like Christmas Eve, the restaurant may operate with reduced hours. Cheddars Lunch Hours Cheddars Locations & Hours near San Francisco. All Stores > Cheddars Locations & Hours Meanwhile, if you have nothing else to do in the afternoon also check nationwide movie listings in your neighborhood for epic films that traditionally premiere on Christmas Day. This year, the highly anticipated next installment in the Star Wars saga, Star Wars: The Last Jedi, opens on December 15, 2017 nationwide. Many retail stores will open late on Christmas Eve, but some of the biggest like Walmart, Macy's, Target, and IKEA, close their doors at midnight and only reopen on December 26. If you're not sure where to go in your area, simply find contact details, store circulars and store opening hours. on the Web ahead of time. Cheddars hours and Cheddars locations along with phone number and map with driving directions. ForLocations, The World's Best For Store Locations and Hours Login Query: how late is cheddars open",
"output": [
"Cheddars open as late as midnight."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b5612d24df924cbebf313fd3aab739a8",
"input": "Having maxed out credit cards, but on-time payments my credit score prior to filing for Ch 7 was 530, post discharge it was 632 and now six months later is 692! There is life after Bankruptcy! GWNorris3rd's response was: Bankruptcy will ruin your credit for some time to come. A Chapter 7 bankruptcy can remain on your credit report for up to 10 years. Although a bankruptcy stays on your record for years, the time to complete the bankruptcy process under Chapter 7, from filing to relief from debt, takes only about 3-6 months. If you decide against Chapter 7 when it may be the right decision for you, your missed debt payments, defaults, repossessions, and lawsuits will also hurt your credit, and may be more complicated to explain to a future lender than bankruptcy. The impact to your credit score is largely based on where your credit stands now and what information is on your credit report.. In 2010, FICO released information about how bankruptcy and other credit mistakes affect your credit score. Using a mock scenario with two different credit profiles, FICO showed a bankruptcy could cost up to 240 points for someone with a 780 credit score and 150 points for someone with a 680 credit score. And, while a bankruptcy can severely damage your credit score, that doesn’t mean that bankruptcy has to be the end of a good credit rating forever. How Long Does Bankruptcy Stay On The Record. There are two types of bankruptcy – Chapter 13 bankruptcy and Chapter 7 Bankruptcy: Plus, as long as your report is filled with nothing but A+ grades, you should have a decent credit score within a few years, and even a good score by the time the bankruptcy drops off your report. 4. Keep Your Oldest Accounts Active Chapter 13 Bankruptcy. The bankruptcy itself and the debts associated with the bankruptcy will be displayed differently on your credit report. A completed Chapter 13 bankruptcy will stay on your report for up to seven years, and discharged debts will also stay on the report up to seven years after they are discharged. How Long Does Chapter 7 Bankruptcy Last? In most cases, it takes approximately three to four months to complete a Chapter 7 bankruptcy and obtain a discharge. However, if you have a complex case or creditors object to your discharge, it can take longer. This means that you can complete your case quickly and begin rebuilding your credit right away. How Long Does Chapter 7 Bankruptcy Remain on Your Credit Report? A Chapter 7 bankruptcy will usually stay on your credit report for ten years. But in general, this does not prohibit you from obtaining new credit and moving on with your life. In fact, most debtors start receiving new credit card offers shortly after they receive their discharge. To do this we’ll need to set the record straight on some of the most commonly held misconceptions about how bankruptcy impacts credit scores. Myth #1: Having no negative information on your credit report prior to bankruptcy leads to a higher post-bankruptcy credit score than if your report contained derogatory information prior to the filing. Myth #3: You will have a low credit score for as long as the bankruptcy information remains on your credit report. Fact #3: While it’s true that you should not expect a high score following bankruptcy, if you manage your credit optimally in its aftermath you can be looking at a 700 score or higher after only about 4-5 years. You cannot file for Chapter 7 bankruptcy if you previously went through bankruptcy proceedings under Chapter 7 or Chapter 13 within the last six years. If you obtained a Chapter 13 discharge in good faith after paying at least 70% of your unsecured debts, the six-year bar does not apply. Query: how long bankruptcy affect credit",
"output": [
"A Chapter 7 bankruptcy can remain on your credit report for up to 10 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-949747bc9f1f4dbca8025af46c6caa43",
"input": "What is the distance between Nashville AND Bowling Green? The distance between Nashville and Bowling Green in a straight line is 55 miles or 88.5 Kilometers Driving Directions & Drive Times from Nashville to Bowling Green can be found further down the page. Distance conversions between Bowling Green, KY and Nashville, TN This table shows distance in kilometers, miles and nautical miles between Bowling Green, KY and Nashville, TN: Distance type — Weather forecast for your trip to Nashville, TN. — Check return route - From Nashville, TN to Bowling Green, KY. Your journey from Bowling Green, KY to Nashville, TN by car will take: This table shows distance in kilometers, miles and nautical miles between Bowling Green, KY and Nashville, TN: Second, mileage and distance will be presented in two ways: straight/flight (directly from city Bowling Green, KY to Nashville, TN) or driving distance (if you go by car or other land transportation). What is the distance between Nashville AND Bowling Green? The distance between Nashville and Bowling Green in a straight line is 55 miles or 88.5 Kilometers . Driving Directions & Drive Times from Nashville to Bowling Green can be found further down the page. Distance between Bowling Green, KY and Nashville, TN, mileage and gas calculator So you have been searching for distance between Bowling Green, KY and Nashville, TN? Here are the results. Mileages from Bowling Green, KY to Nashville, TN is pointed out in the table below. On the map you can see with your own eyes how your trip is going to pass and what routes you will have to take. Approximate time of driving from Bowling Green, KY to Nashville, TN will also appear in the mentioned table. Your journey from Bowling Green, KY to Nashville, TN by car will take: Distance conversions between Bowling Green, KY and Nashville, TN. This table shows distance in kilometers, miles and nautical miles between Bowling Green, KY and Nashville, TN: The distance between Nashville and Bowling Green in a straight line is 55 miles or 88.5 Kilometers. Driving Directions & Drive Times from Nashville to Bowling Green can be found further down the page. Driving distances, maps and journey times are currently provided by Google mapping systems. Driving directions from Nashville (Tennessee) to Bowling Green (Kentucky) Calculate the Driving Distance Between Nashville (Tennessee) and Bowling Green (Kentucky) - If you need to reverse this and get a map and driving directions from Bowling Green to Nashville click on the link. Click here to Show directions for the from Nashville to Bowling Check cities near Nashville, TN. 1 Distance between Bowling Green, KY and Memphis, TN. 2 Distance between Bowling Green, KY and Knoxville, TN. 3 Distance between Bowling Green, KY and Chattanooga, TN. 4 Distance between Bowling Green, KY and Clarksville, TN. 5 Distance between Bowling Green, KY and Murfreesboro, TN. Query: how far between bowling green ky and nashville tn",
"output": [
"The distance between Nashville and Bowling Green in a straight line is 55 miles or 88.5 Kilometers."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8369ebe944474e5d80757a43d9d631c5",
"input": "Tax returns sent after the deadline. You should keep your records for at least 15 months after you sent the tax return. Here are some of the standard limitation periods on tax-related documents, according to the IRS: 1 If you owe additional taxes, keep records for 3 years. 2 If you do not report income that should have been reported, and it exceeds 25% of the gross income on your return, keep records for 6 years. If you file a claim for credit or refund after filing your return, keep records for 3 years from the filing of the original return. If you file a claim for a loss due to bad debt deduction or worthless securities, keep records for 7 years. Keep all employment records for at least 4 years after the tax is due or paid. They help in preparing future tax returns and making computations if you file an amended return. Period of Limitations that apply to income tax returns Keep records for 3 years if situations (4), (5), and (6) below do not apply to you. Keep records for 3 years from the date you filed your original return or 2 years from the date you paid the tax, whichever is later, if you file a claim for credit or refund after you file your return. Keep records for 7 years if you file a claim for a loss from worthless securities or bad debt deduction. Keep records for 6 years if you do not report income that you should report, and it is more than 25% of the gross income shown on your return. Note: Keep copies of your filed tax returns. They help in preparing future tax returns and making computations if you file an amended return. Period of Limitations that apply to income tax returns. Keep records for 3 years if situations (4), (5), and (6) below do not apply to you. Tax returns sent on or before the deadline. You should keep your records for at least 22 months after the end of the tax year the tax return is for. If you send your 2015 to 2016 tax return online by 31 January 2017, keep your records until at least the end of January 2018. Period of Limitations that apply to income tax returns. 1 Keep records for 3 years if situations (4), (5), and (6) below do not apply to you. 2 Keep records for 3 years from the date you filed your original return or 2 years from the date you paid the tax, whichever is later, if you file a claim for credit or refund after you file your return. Keep records for 7 years if you file a claim for a loss from worthless securities or bad debt deduction. Keep records for 6 years if you do not report income that you should report, and it is more than 25% of the gross income shown on your return. Keep records indefinitely if you do ... HM Revenue and Customs (HMRC) may check your records to make sure you’re paying the right amount of tax. Tax returns sent on or before the deadline You should keep your records for at least 22 months after the end of the tax year the tax return is for. Example If you send your 2015 to 2016 tax return online by 31 January 2017, keep your records until at least the end of January 2018. Tax returns sent on or before the deadline. You should keep your records for at least 22 months after the end of the tax year the tax return is for. Example. If you send your 2015 to 2016 tax return online by 31 January 2017, keep your records until at least the end of January 2018. Tax returns sent after the deadline You should keep your records for at least 15 months after you sent the tax return. If you owe additional taxes, keep records for 3 years. If you do not report income that should have been reported, and it exceeds 25% of the gross income on your return, keep records for 6 years. If you file a fraudulent return, keep records indefinitely. If you do not file a return, keep records indefinitely. Query: how long to you have to keep tax returns",
"output": [
"You should keep your records for at least 15 months after you sent the tax return."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-14c471bd01da40e4b264865ed81c7b2e",
"input": "For a safe and speedy cataract surgery recovery, follow these tips: 1 Don't drive on the first day. 2 Don't do any heavy lifting or strenuous activity for a few weeks. 3 Immediately after the procedure, avoid bending over, to prevent putting extra pressure on your eye. 4 If at all possible, don't sneeze or vomit right after surgery. Weight Training, Bodybuilding. Diet and Nutrition. Any one of them or all together, these comprise an engaging diversion, a healthy sport, a rewarding challenge, a robust lifestyle that lifts you up and keeps you up. You’re where you belong and you’re right on time. What To Expect Two to Three Months After Your Cataract Surgery. Most likely you will be seeing and feeling quite well. For the most part your eyes and brain have reestablished a new visual pattern. If there is a need for a mild eyeglass prescription your eye doctor will have been able to prescribe it for you. Cataract surgery is a routine procedure typically lasting between 15 and 30 minutes. According to CataractSurgery.com, general guidelines for healthy individuals suggest that regular exercise is permissible one week after surgery. Within 24 to 48 hours you should be able to do light walking. Restrictions After Surgery. 1 Avoid lifting anything over 20 lbs. for two weeks (Children, groceries etc.). 2 Avoid lowering your head below the level of your heart (ie. Bend at your knees and not your waist). 3 Avoid water sports or swimming for two weeks. 4 You can have a shower but do not get the operated eye wet. Avoid getting water or soap into the operated eye. You can wash your hair by tilting your head backward like at the hairdresser’s. The cost for these investments can be discussed during your eye examination. How soon may I return to work? Many people are able to return to work within 2-3 days, depending on their occupation. Consult with your ophthalmologist about how soon you may return to work after cataract surgery. What are my restrictions after cataract surgery? Following cataract surgery, you will be given the following restrictions: To protect your eye from accidental injury, you will be asked to wear a shield over the operated eye at night and for naps for the first week. Avoid lifting more than 20 pounds for the first few days. Additionally, avoid excessive straining and vigorous exercise such as running or weight lifting for the first week. Avoid bending over with your head lower than your heart for the first 2 days. If you don't get a multifocal IOL, you might consider wearing a bifocal contact lens after your cataract surgery. If you live long enough, you will get a cataract 100 percent of the time. If you are young and have a vitrectomy, you will get a cataract sooner. Your risk of developing a cataract is based on your early-age vitrectomy surgery. A Few Weeks after Surgery A few weeks after the surgery, the patient is checked for eyeglasses and given a final prescription. Artificial lenses last for a lifetime, and with newer types of lenses, it is very rare to experience a lens-associated complication. What To Expect The First Month After Your Cataract Surgery A month or so after your Cataract Surgery your eye will have most likely completely healed. If you have had a Monofocal Lens Implant to correct only your distance vision, you should be comfortable with how things look far away. Hi, I was wondering why you can't bend over or lift objects after cataract surgery. Is the problem related to increased pressure when you bend over or just heart rate and increased blood flow? Just w... Query: how long after cataract surgery can lift weights",
"output": [
"According to CataractSurgery.com, general guidelines for healthy individuals suggest that regular exercise is permissible one week after surgery."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b7bba8f6a8dd4c00a4062668e4960ca3",
"input": "How Long Can Dilaudid (Hydromorphone) Stays in Your System Dilaudid (hydromorphone) is screened for in urine drug screens. If you have been prescribed Dilaudid but need to take a urine drug test for employment or other purposes, tell the testing lab that you are taking this prescription so they will be able to interpret the test appropriately. Some of the symptoms of a Dilaudid overdose include: 1 Difficulty breathing. 2 Slowed or stopped breathing. 3 Excessive sleepiness. 4 Dizziness. 5 Fainting. 6 Limp or weak muscles. 7 Narrowing or widening of the pupils. 8 Cold, clammy skin. 9 Slow or stopped heartbeat. 10 Blue color of skin, fingernails, lips. 11 Loss of consciousness or coma. It also depends on your weight and height, and, like I mentioned before, how fast your metabolism is. So, all and all, it can take anywhere from 5 to 11 days from your last Dilaudud dose for it to completely leave your system. Other factors that can affect how long hydromorphone can be detected is the length of time someone has been taking the medication, how frequently, and the strength of the dosage. The following is an estimated range of times, or detection windows, during which hydromorphone can be detected by various testing methods: OHS Health & Safety Services. How long do drugs stay in your system?. National Institue on Drug Abuse. Hydromorphone. Drugs, Herbs and Supplements August 2014 Knowing how long Dilaudid remains in your system may be helpful in avoiding an overdose of the medication by taking too much, too soon. Other brand names for Dilaudid include Hydrostat and Palladone. How Long Dilaudid Affects Your System. When hydromorphone is taken orally, it reaches its peak effect in 30 minutes to an hour. 1 The elimination half-life of oral hydromorphone is about 4 hours. 2 Removing it from your system can cause a severe reaction. 3 The drug is still being eliminated through the urine over the course of 2 to 3 days. How long does dilaudid stay in your system?... Hello, Depending on how long were you taking Dilaudid and in which dosage, it can take up to 11 days for it to get out of your system. Or in case you're asking because you need to have drug test for opiates... View All. How long hydromorphone is detectable in the body depends on several variables, including which kind drug test is being used. Hydromorphone - also known as Dilaudid, Hydrostat, Palladone, Dillies, hospital heroin, hydro - can be detected for a shorter time with some tests, but can be visible for up to three months in other tests. How long hydromorphone is detectable in the body depends on several variables, including which kind drug test is being used. Hydromorphone — also known as Dilaudid, Hydrostat, Palladone, Dillies, hospital heroin, hydro — can be detected for a shorter time with some tests, but can be visible for up to three months in other tests. Depending on how long were you taking Dilaudid and in which dosage, it can take up to 11 days for it to get out of your system. Or in case you're asking because you need to have drug test for opiates, you also need to take into account that you still might test positive for opioids if you were taking Dilaudid for a longer period of time and even in normal dosages if your metabolism is slow. Query: how long is dilaudid in your system",
"output": [
"Depending on how long were you taking Dilaudid and in which dosage, it can stay up to 11 days in your system."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f6ee309da7874794b56cd147865c0637",
"input": "The cold sore virus is reactivated in only about a third of adults, and usually by every day factors such as ultraviolet light or cold and flu. Can I get a cold sore from having sex? Cross-infection of HSV-1 (cold sore virus) and HSV-2 (genital herpes virus) may occur during oral sex. You should avoid having oral sex whilst you have a cold sore. You should also avoid kissing anyone when you are suffering from a cold sore as it is one of the more common ways of spreading the cold sore virus. Quick Answer. Cold sores last for as few as 2.5 days if treated with Abreva when the cold sores first appear, according to the Abreva website. The site reports the median healing time for cold sores treated with Abreva as 4.1 days and recommends discontinuing use of the product after 10 days. Cold sores will usually heal within two weeks without treatment. However, there are established cold sore treatments available to help decrease healing time, reduce pain, and in specific cases, suppress the recurrence of the virus. My cold sores used to be MASSIVE and last for weeks, but now they only last a couple days and do not even look like cold sores after I’ve “worked” on them. I used to be so self-conscious when I got a cold sore, now they hardly affect my mood and are more of a slight annoyance for a couple days. How Long Do Cold Sores Last? Herpes-induced cold sores, also known as fever blisters, often break out on the lips or in the mouth. According to the NHS, untreated cold sores take approximately seven to ten days to heal. Medical specialists at the University of Maryland Medical Center believe that they last between two and three weeks, with some sores in people with weakened immune system lasting as long as six weeks. Comments. 1 Hello I just came across this forum. I was recently diagnosed with HSV-2 this past December. 2 Drinking lowers your immune system. I would cut back to once a week. 3 Hello, I am 24 years old, I have had this disease for 10 years now. How long do cold sores last? From the time of the first tingle, a cold sore will take between 7 and 10 days to completely heal - sometimes up to 14 days. Each cold sore goes through several stages before it disappears. In the vast majority of cases, the sore will heal without scarring. How Long Do Herpes Outbreaks Last. Herpes is a sexually transmitted infection. It has two known types: herpes simplex virus type 1 (HSV-1) and herpes simplex virus type 2 (HSV-2). Genital herpes outbreaks are normally caused by the type 2 virus while the type 1 virus typically manifests itself as cold sores around the mouth and lips. However, HSV-1 can also manifest in the form of genital herpes if there are oral to genital contact. Cycle And Duration Of A Herpes Outbreak (Primary And Recurrent) If you thought the last four days were uncomfortable — this is the most painful stage of the cold sore lifecycle. A shallow ulcer develops and the area is red and inflamed. Duration: Days 4 – 5 If you use an antiviral cream as soon as symptoms start then the cold sore may not last as long as usual and may be less severe. There is debate as to how well the cream works. Aciclovir has to be applied five times per day for five days. Query: how long cold sores last",
"output": [
"A cold sore will take between 7 and 10 days to completely heal - sometimes up to 14 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-222a93a96ded428cb4d8092a269ca8b3",
"input": "At least, that’s the conclusion I draw from looking at the history of corrections of the S&P 500 Index based on daily data going back to December 30, 1949. Now that major indexes have officially entered correction territory, investors are wondering how long corrections tend to last. Let’s start with the worst-case scenario of a bear market. If a bear market is a move of 20% or more from peak-to-trough and a correction is a move of 10% to just under 20%, then the average bear market is a drop of 31.6% (median of 30.3%). I don’t think this is the start of a bear, though. As long as the future trend remains optimistic, the buying will resume. That leads to an even stronger bull market rally. In other words, a stock market correction can help the stock market catch its breath and hit even higher peaks. Most recessions occur with stock market declines of 30 percent or more. All stock market corrections are different, but some follow patterns. The current pattern looks more like 2011 than 1998, with some significant economic differences. All stock market corrections are different, but some follow patterns. How long do corrections last? Corrections generally last two months or less. They usually end when the price of a stock or a bond 'bottoms out'—for example, some will point to a stock reaching a 52-week low—and investors start buying again. How is a correction different from a bear market or capitulation? The stock market typically has a correction several times a year. For example, between 1983 and 2011, more than half of all quarters had a correction. That averages out to 2.27 per year. A stock market crash is when the 10 percent price drop occurs in just one day. Crashes can lead to a bear market. That's when the market falls another 10 percent, for a total decline of 20 percent or more. A stock market crash can cause a recession. The stock market usually makes up the losses in three months or so. If you sell during the correction, you will probably not buy in time to make up your losses. Corrections are inevitable. Is a correction good for the market? Many investors and analysts look at corrections as a necessary 'evil' to cool off an overheated stock or bond market. This is to prevent a huge sell-off or 'bubble burst,' as what happened with Internet stocks in 2000-2001. Definition: A stock market correction is when the market falls 10 percent from its 52-week high. Wise investors welcome it. A pullback allows the market to consolidate before going toward higher highs. Each of the bull markets in the last 40 years has had a correction. It's a natural part of the market cycle. Corrections can occur in any asset class. A correction is a decline or downward movement of a stock, or a bond, or a commodity or market index. The amount of the decline is at least 10 percent and a true correction exceeds that amount. In short, corrections are price declines that stop an upward trend. Query: how long do stock market corrections last",
"output": [
"Stock market connections last for 2 months or less."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-951fa8c867224b14b3c2e3e51093ee92",
"input": "exists and is an alternate of . Phone receiver the mouth piece has a microphone.. The main function of a micro phone is to convert sound into electic signals... These electric signal as encoded and transfered as a anolog signals and then to digital as 0s and 1s..... transfered to the other end...... Although sound is commonly associated in air, sound will readily travel through many materials that are solid, liquid and gas. 1 Solids are made up of particles (atoms) that do not move about because they are closely packed (touching each other) and held together by strong intermolecular forces. Your eardrum vibrates from sound waves to allow you to sense them. We might be able to detect it through vibration of solids, the ripple in liquid but you can only detect it in air by hearing it. In spite of this, humans cannot hear all sounds that travel through the air. The crowded or loose grains cause the electric current to become stronger or weaker. The current copies the pattern of the sound waves and travels over a telephone wire to the receiver of another telephone. For more modern phones that have a telephone answering service, the sound wave is captured on a recording device which allows for the operator of the phone to playback at a later time. Sound travels in mechanical waves. A mechanical wave is a disturbance that moves and transports energy from one place to another through a medium. In sound, the disturbance is a vibrating object. And the medium can be any series of interconnected and interactive particles. This means that sound can travel through gases, liquids and solids. Sound (in air) is made when air molecules vibrate and move (away from the vibrating source) in a pattern called waves, or sound waves. Sound is a mechanical, longitudinal wave (that moves in all directions) and travels in waves of compressions and rarefactions (expansion) as it successively passes through a medium. The diaphragm presses against these carbon grains. Low voltage electric current travels through the grains. This current comes from batteries at the telephone company. The pressure on the carbon grains varies as sound waves make the diaphragm vibrate. A loud sound causes the sound waves to push hard on the diaphragm. It is a wave which is created by vibrating objects and propagated through a medium (solid, liquid or gas) from one location to another. A vibrating source can be sound coming from a drum, speaker of a radio, the mouth of a person (vocal chord), a car engine, a plane above the sky and so on. The speed of a sound wave depends upon the medium through which it travels. In general, sound travels faster through solids than through liquids or gases. Also, the denser the medium, the slower sound will travel through it. The same sound will travel at a different speed on a cold day than it would on a warm day. 1 How the Telephone Works. When a person speaks into a telephone, the sound waves created by his voice enter the mouthpiece. An electric current carries the sound to the telephone of the person he is talking to. A telephone has two main parts: (1) the transmitter and (2) the receiver. Query: how does sound travel through a telephone?",
"output": [
"The crowded or loose grains cause the electric current to become stronger or weaker. The current copies the pattern of the sound waves and travels over a telephone wire to the receiver of another telephone. For more modern phones that have a telephone answering service, the sound wave is captured on a recording device which allows for the operator of the phone to playback at a later time."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-24f7a90b41814c12a148f7ee4c264edf",
"input": "Influenza (Definition) Influenza is a viral respiratory infection that causes cough, fever, chills, sore throat, muscle aches and headache. While most healthy people suffer few complications from the flu, it can be deadly for pregnant women, babies and children, the elderly and those with weak immune systems. Nature sometimes mutates a flu strain to such a degree that a major part of the world population has never had a similar flu and it may reek havoc, as it did near the end of WWI. Since you get the flu every year, you likely have some partial immunity to new strains and don't get it as bad as some ...Read more The state of your immune system is what determines whether or not you will get sick when exposed to a flu virus Half of people exposed to the flu virus will get sick while the other half won't Everyone's immune system responds to the flu virus in a complex way. The rhinovirus' (common cold) incubation period is between 12-72 hours. Most people show symptoms closer to the 72 hour mark, but it depends on your immune system and the virus you contract. Influenza's incubation period is 1-4 days with 2 days being the most common for showing symptoms. There are many viruses that cause cold and flu symptoms that are not the common cold or influenza. If you were exposed to one of those it may take up to 7 days before symptoms appear. How many people get sick or die from the flu every year? Flu seasons vary in severity depending on a number of factors including the characteristics of circulating viruses, the timing of the season, how well the vaccine is protecting against influenza infection, and how many people got vaccinated. how soon after exposure to the flu virus do symptoms appear? I went to work wed. feeling great my boss was very ill with flu symptoms. We share computers and phones. 7 hours into the job I started feeling tired and weak. About Cold and Flu. Don't let cold and flu season get you down! Dr. Oz and other Sharecare experts offer tips to prevent colds and flu, including why you need an annual flu shot, plus how to recover when you do come down with a cold or flu. See All Health Topics A-Z Check out these best-sellers and special offers on books and newsletters from Mayo Clinic. The Mayo Clinic Diet Online Reduce the impact of stress on your health Answer: So if you're around somebody who has the flu, and the next day you feel pretty good, you're not out of the woods yet. You can actually develop symptoms up to four to five days after being exposed to somebody who has the flu. Next: For How Long Am I Contagious After Being Infected By The Flu? Play Where do Flu Shots Come In? If a healthy immune system is capable of keeping you flu-free year after year, is it necessary for you to get a flu shot? The choice is yours, but keep these four important factors in mind: All vaccines are immune suppressive -- that is, they suppress your immune system, which may not return to normal for weeks to months. Query: how long to get flu when exposed",
"output": [
"It takes up to four to five days after being exposed to somebody who has the flu."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-94756b818b3e4003858a78ec93258615",
"input": "In time, as the brain adjusts to the lack of Valium, those signs and signals abate and a feeling of normalcy returns. It’s important to note that withdrawal is a normal, natural, healthy part of recovery. People who go through it might feel ill and uncomfortable, but those feelings do pass. Frequently Asked Questions - Xanax Drug Test / Valium Drug Test Q: What are benzodiazepines? A: Benzodiazepines are a very large family of prescription drugs that include Valium, Xanax, Librium, Ativan, Halcion, Diazepam, and Klonopin. 1 Valium is a federal controlled substance (C-IV) because it can be abused or lead to dependence. Keep Valium in a safe place to prevent misuse and abuse. 2 It is not known if Valium is safe and effective in children under 6 months of age. 3 It is not known if Valium is safe and effective for use longer than 4 months. Common Valium side effects may include: 1 drowsiness; 2 tired feeling; 3 muscle weakness; or. 4 loss of coordination. Valium belongs to a class of drugs called benzodiazepines, which work by increasing the effects of GABA, a neurotransmitter that moderates the activity of nerve signals in the brain. The Food and Drug Administration (FDA) approved diazepam in 1963 under the brand name Valium for the Roche drug company. If you have any questions on how to use Valium for opiate withdrawal symptoms, feel free to post them in the comment box below. Most results conclude smoking tobacco does in fact hinder the effects of Diazepam (I have read the science behind why, but it doesn't seem relevant to my interest). I do not smoke cigarettes, never have, and never will. I do vape quite often so this is a very important subject to me as I do take Valium. It's been a struggle finding the exact answer the to titled question (for me). I sincerely apologize if I have overlooked a post which exactly answers this concern. TL;DR - Does vaping nicotine decrease the effects of Diazepam's anxiety relief. Does Zoloft (sertraline) have a similar effect on the body as valium, but Zoloft (sertraline) takes longer to work? Dr. Michael Roman Dr. Roman No: Two different drugs. They include: 1 Liver function. 2 Age. 3 Body mass/Body fat. 4 Genetics. 5 Length of usage. 6 Dosage and frequency. 7 Other drugs in the system. Taking care of your body may also help you to soothe your mind. 1 Try: 2 Taking a walk. 3 Sitting in a cool bath. 4 Performing gentle stretches. 5 Eating a few bites of comfort food. 6 Breathing deeply. Query: how does valium specifically for",
"output": [
"Valium belongs to a class of drugs called benzodiazepines, which work by increasing the effects of GABA, a neurotransmitter that moderates the activity of nerve signals in the brain."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9c186178703e4f5395aeb97345627d6b",
"input": "Of Presidents, Senators, and Members of Congress (Amendments 12, 17, 20, 22, 25, & 27) The Twelfth Amendment (Proposed December 9, 1803; Adopted June 15, 1804) changed the way the President and the Vice President were elected. Additional Amendments of the Constitution. Download a PDF of the Additional Amendments. The Constitution contains within itself the process for changing it. The amendment process is described in Article 5. Amendments can be proposed in Congress when 2/3 rd of both Houses agree. There are 27 Amendments to the US Constitution. There has been only one 'change' in the Amendments, and that involves the 18th and 21st Amendments. The Amendments in History. 1 The Bill of Rights (Amendments 1-10) 2 Sovereign Immunity of States (Amendment 11) 3 Of Presidents, Senators, and Members of Congress (Amendments 12, 17, 20, 22, 25, & 27) 4 Civil War Reconstruction (Amendments 13, 14, & 15) 5 Income Tax (Amendment 16) 6 The Short Reign of Prohibition (Amendments 18 & 21) The last two amendments address the liberties of citizens and the rights of states. The Ninth Amendment states that the Constitution and the Bill of Rights do not define all of the fundamental rights people have. Such rights exist whether or not they are defined. The Tenth Amendment makes a similar claim concerning the rights of the states. After the first enumeration, required by the first article of the Constitution, there shall be one Representative for every thirty thousand, until the number shall amount to one hundred; to which number one Representative shall be added for every subsequent increase of forty thousand, until the Representatives shall amount to two hundred, to which number one Representative shall be added for every subsequent increase of sixty thousand persons. Proposed following the often bitter 1787–88 battle over ratification of the U.S. Constitution, and crafted to address the objections raised by Anti-Federalists, the Bill of Rights amendments add to the Constitution specific guarantees of personal freedoms and rights, clear limitations on the government's power in judicial and other proceedings, and explicit declarations that all powers not specifically delegated to Congress by the Constitution are reserved for the states or the people. The Bill of Rights (Amendments 1-10) Proposed September 25, 1789; Adopted December 15, 1791 It's almost impossible to imagine the United States (U.S.) Constitution without having a Bill of Rights, but when it was first being drafted, a majority of the Founding Fathers didn't think it was necessary. Criminal Amendments in the Bill of Rights by Scott Grabel The Bill of Rights is a crucial component of the United States Constitution that was designed to ensure the basic rights of the country's citizens. Originally, it consisted of ten amendments. Later, an additional seventeen amendments were added to the Constitution. Certain parts of these additional amendments and the Bill of Rights have had a major impact on the criminal justice system. These amendments include the fourth, fifth, sixth, eighth, and the fourteenth amendments. The Sixth Amendment establishes a number of rights of the defendant in a criminal trial: 1 to a speedy and public trial. 2 to trial by an impartial jury. 3 to be informed of criminal charges. 4 to confront witnesses. 5 to compel witnesses to appear in court. 6 to assistance of counsel. Query: how many amendments are there all together, including the ones in the bill of rights?",
"output": [
"There are ten amendments including the ones in the Bill of Rights."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8e14c18cc4324f3891c9e142e2a78d61",
"input": "BUTRANS exposes users to risks of addiction, abuse, and misuse, which can lead to overdose and death. Assess patient’s risk before prescribing, and monitor for these behaviors and conditions. (5.1, 10) Serious, life-threatening or fatal respiratory depression may occur. BUTRANS 5, 10, and 20 mcg/hour provide dose-proportional total buprenorphine exposures (AUC) following 7-day applications. BUTRANS single 7-day application and steady-state pharmacokinetic parameters are summarized in Table 7. Plasma buprenorphine concentrations after titration showed no further change over the 60-day period studied. BUTRANS is a rectangular or square, beige-colored system consisting of a protective liner and functional layers. 1 BUTRANS is available in five strengths: 2 BUTRANS 5 mcg/hour Transdermal System (dimensions: 45 mm by 45 mm) 3 BUTRANS 7.5 mcg/hour Transdermal System (dimensions: 58 mm by 45 mm) 2.6 Administration of BUTRANS. 1 Instruct patients to apply immediately after removal from the individually sealed pouch. Instruct patients not to use BUTRANS if the pouch seal is broken or the patch is cut, damaged, or changed in any way. See the Instructions for Use for step-by-step instructions for applying BUTRANS. Hi, it takes 3 days for the buprenorphine to build up in your system, so it is then that you should feel the mot pain relief. I'm like you, been on this for about a week and my pain levels are inconsistent. I'm okay in the morning but my pain is greater in afternoon/evenings despite being on the patch for 6 days now. Get emergency help right away if you take too much BUTRANS (overdose). 1 When you first start taking BUTRANS, when your dose is changed, or if you take too much (overdose), serious or life-threatening breathing problems that can lead to death may occur. If the level of pain increases after dose stabilization, attempt to identify the source of increased pain before increasing the BUTRANS dose. Because steady-state plasma concentrations are achieved within 72 hours, BUTRANS dosage may be adjusted every 3 days. Dose adjustments may be made in 5 mcg/hour, 7.5 mcg/hour, or 10 mcg/hour increments by using no more than two patches of the 5 mcg/hour, or 7.5 mcg/hour, or 10 mcg/hour system(s). The minimum BUTRANS titration interval is 72 hours, based on the pharmacokinetic profile and time to reach steady state levels [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. The maximum BUTRANS dose is 20 mcg/hour. Do not exceed a dose of one 20 mcg/hour BUTRANS system due to the risk of QTc interval prolongation. The QTc evaluation was performed during the third day of BUTRANS 10 mcg/hour and the fourth day of 2 x BUTRANS 20 mcg/hour when the plasma levels of buprenorphine were at steady state for the corresponding doses [see Warnings and Precautions ]. There was no clinically meaningful effect on mean QTc with a BUTRANS dose of 10 mcg/hour. No notable relationship was observed between estimated creatinine clearance rates and steady-state buprenorphine concentrations among patients during BUTRANS therapy. 13 nonclinical toxicology 13.1 Carcinogenesis, Mutagenesis, Impairment of Fertility Query: how long to steady state for butrans",
"output": [
"A steady-state plasma concentrations are achieved within 72 hours."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e7e5932b0d2c4364a18e12663f9c585e",
"input": "CTD sucks anyway. If you order multiple items and they ship out of different warehouses, you basically pay double shipping. And their prices aren’t cheaper than dirt. Midway USA and Brownells are always much cheaper. I think Brownells has 10 packs of pmags for $99.99 right now. We make every attempt to ship your order the same day when it is placed by 4 pm CST, Monday - Friday. The cutoff for same day shipping on Express orders is 12pm CST, Monday - Friday. Express orders received after 12pm CST will ship the next day. Some specific products may take longer to ship which will be indicated in your cart. We only ship orders to addresses within the U.S. Get 25% Off Plus enjoy Free Shipping with Cheaper Than Dirt coupon codes 2017 or promo code at Promo-code-land.com. Cheaper Than Dirt is the name of America’s largest online sporting goods retailer. Offer huge selection of discount guns, ammunition, parts, and other survival and hunting gear. Wanted to order a pair of sling swivels. The prices was OK (not dirt cheap) but the shipping was almost $10.00 -- more than the item. Got the same item at Midway for close to the same price but the shipping was only $4.00. They just aren't the cheapest and then they rip you off on the shipping -- Done with them. I am thinking of buying a used dirtbike from the east coast (I live on west coast), and I was wondering, how much do you think it would cost to ship a CRF150f and how long would it take? Thanks, Chris How long does FedEx ground delivery take? A: Within the continental United States, FedEx Ground delivery takes anywhere from 1 to 5 business days, while delivery to Alaska, Hawaii, Canada and Puerto R... Full Answer > Cheaper Than Dirt Free Shipping Policy All orders do incur a shipping charge based on weight and shipping location. In compliance with federal laws, some merchandise must be shipped to a licensed dealer first. By far the worst online gun store in 1 …. By far the worst online gun store in the US. 2 Nothing more than a bunch of opportunists. 3 I emailed these people three times within a three week period, trying to resolve an order. 4 They never seem to have anything in stock. 5 I have bought from here alot! Cheaper Than Dirt! will Resume Online Firearm Sales Pending Policy Changes. Cheaper Than Dirt! recently announced that it was temporarily suspending online sales of firearms pending a review of its order processing and procedures. Well-known for its ability to process and ship orders within 24 hours, online sales have skyrocketed to a point where it may take up to 72 hours for firearms and other items to ship. What do you think about Cheaper Than Dirt? Share your shopping experience and hear what 7 customers have said about Cheaper Than Dirt. | www.cheaperthandirt.com Do you agree with Cheaper Than Dirt's TrustScore? Voice your opinion today and hear what 7 customers have already said. Query: how long does cheaper than dirt take to ship",
"output": [
"Cheaper than dirt takes 24 hours and online sales have skyrocketed to a point where it may take up to 72 hours for firearms and other items to ship."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-cb28d16e7bce424ab8b21874a315c1b6",
"input": "Cook the first side of the meat for approximately 3 minutes. It should look golden brown. Step 4. Turn over the patties using a spatula, and cook them for an additional 4 minutes. Step 5. Check each patty’s internal temperature with an instant-read thermometer. The level of doneness in a hamburger is based on the appearance of its center. The center of a medium-well done hamburger is warm to the touch and has little to no pink meat. It will not be as thoroughly grayish-brown as a well-done burger, but the pink at the center should only be a slight tinge as opposed to the pink center of a medium burger. Method: 1 Add the salt and pepper onto the meat and massage the seasoning in. 2 Split the beef into 4 quarter-pound patties and flatten between the palms of your hands. 3 Meanwhile, heat a pan over medium heat and add the diced onion to sweat. 4 Cook for 4 minutes on both sides for rare, or until the liquid coming out starts running clear. Form each hamburger patty with your hands to the desired width and about 3/4-inch thick. Season both sides of the patty with salt and pepper, to taste. Step 2. Heat the oil in a skillet over medium-high to high heat. When the oil begins to shimmer, place one or more burger patties inside the pan. 31 Responses to How To Pan Fry Hamburgers. 1 i love your love of burgers. 2 yep – I would eat those onions!! LOVE the ketchup swirl 3 ! we pan fry our burgers since our backyard isn’t set up to BBQ just yet. I slivered my onions instead of dicing, and used 1/3 pound patties of 93/7 ground beef, cooking about six minutes on a side for a perfect medium rare. The skillet I used had just cooked a pound of bacon, and I just poured off the fat before putting the onions in. Although the appearance of the center tells cooks how done a hamburger is, it can be difficult to tell from the appearance of the exterior. The most reliable way to test how done a hamburger is is to use a meat thermometer. The interior temperature of a medium-well done hamburger should be around 150 to 155 degrees Fahrenheit. Cooking a medium-well done hamburger on a grill should take about four and a half minutes per side. Cooking times can vary depending on the heat of the grill. Food Safety Meanwhile, heat a pan over medium heat and add the diced onion to sweat. When the pan has come to temperature, add the burgers on top of the bed of onions. Cook for 4 minutes on both sides for rare, or until the liquid coming out starts running clear. For medium well, add about 2 minutes on both sides. Note that how many you can cook at a time depends on how large your pan is. I wouldn’t cook more than two at once as crowding will slow down the cooking. Like any meat, let the burgers sit for 5 minutes off of heat for them to retain their juices. Serve with any condiments you could desire. You can cook a delicious hamburger on your stove. Hamburgers made on the stove can taste just as good as, if not better than, hamburgers cooked on a grill. When frying up a burger that is anything less than well-done, your main concern is safety. Bacteria occurs naturally in meat products. Buy the freshest possible ground beef and store it below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. Use ground beef within two days of purchase and cook it to a minimum internal temperature of 160 degrees Fahrenheit. Video of the Day 31 Responses to How To Pan Fry Hamburgers. 1 i love your love of burgers. 2 yep – I would eat those onions!! 3 we pan fry our burgers since our backyard isn’t set up to BBQ just yet. 4 hahah love the ketchup bit. 5 I love pan-fried burgers; it’s how I almost always make them when I don’t want to use the grill. 6 I just really want to eat ketchup. Query: how long to cook burgers medium well",
"output": [
"It takes about four and a half minutes per side to cook burgers medium well."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-dfa582ba201c4bd8bfc0a517c97c2fcd",
"input": "A budget can be of 3 types: 1 Balanced Budget: When government receipts are equal to the government expenditure, it is called a balanced budget. 2 Deficit Budget: When government expenditure exceeds government receipts, the budget is said to be deficit. A deficit can be of 3 types, Revenue, Fiscal and Primary deficit. How long the nation could sustain such growth in federal debt is impossible to predict with any confidence. At some point, investors would begin to doubt the government’s willingness or ability to pay its debt obligations, which would require the government to pay much higher interest costs to borrow money. By Brian Schilling. In 2009 as part of the Health Information Technology for Economic and Clinical Health (HITECH) Act, the federal government set aside $27 billion for an incentive program that encourages hospitals and providers to adopt electronic health records systems (EHR). Government budget: Government budget, forecast by a government of its expenditures and revenues for a specific period of time. In national finance, the period covered by a budget is usually a year, known as a financial or fiscal year, which may or may not correspond with the calendar year. The word budget is derived slightly outpaced by state government (47.6 percent) and well above the federal contribution (8.5 percent). When it comes to processing the various sources, districts usually keep their state and local funds separate from federal funds. In this Budget, the government will take action to: 1 make additional savings equivalent to 0.5% of total government spending, to ensure the nation lives within its means. 2 back business with a major overhaul of corporation tax reliefs, a lower corporation tax rate and a big reduction in small business rates. 1 A reserve policy, which establishes the desired level of reserves to maintain. A policy on reserves implies the need for forecasting tools to see if reserve levels will remain within desired parameters given future spending and revenues. 1997 United States federal budget – $1.6 trillion (submitted 1996 by President Clinton) 1996 United States federal budget – $1.6 trillion (submitted 1995 by President Clinton) The budget year runs from October 1 to September 30 the following year and is submitted by the President to Congress prior to October for the following year. Budget 2016 announces that the government will cut corporation tax further, so the rate will fall to 17% in 2020. This measure will benefit over a million companies, large and small. 120 It will ensure the UK has the lowest tax rate in the G20, as set out in Chart 1.11 below. Subsequent projections appear in The 2014 Long-Term Budget Outlook. Summary Between 2009 and 2012, the federal government recorded the largest budget deficits relative to the size of the economy since 1946, causing federal debt to soar. Federal debt held by the public is now about 73 percent of the economy’s annual output, or gross domestic product (GDP). Query: how long is the government budgeted for",
"output": [
"Government budget, forecast by a government of its expenditures and revenues for a specific period of time, in national finance, the period covered by a budget is usually a year, known as a financial or fiscal year, which may or may not correspond with the calendar year."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b9a9c1cdcf44467eae66c5e0864185cc",
"input": "Learning to play guitar is a process, and there is no finish. line. How long does it take to play guitar, is a question. students often ask their teacher. How long it takes to play the. guitar depends on what your definition of guitar playing. How long does it take to learn guitar with the help of YouTube? How long does it take to learn to play guitar decently? How long does it take to learn Guitar perfectly for a quick learner? Learning the basics is possible within a week’s time. Ongoing practice may bring in better results in almost 6 months. Of course training to be skilled in the instrument may take a longer time involving months or perhaps years. How long does it take to learn guitar also lies on your knowledge of rhythm and tuning. 1. Guitar owners - to qualify you need only to have enough funds to purchase the instrument, for these people the guitar is simply a toy, like a computer game, or fashion accessory. How long does it take you to play the guitar if you're in this category? About 5-10 minutes max. The important thing here is to be seen to be playing the guitar! 2. Guitar players - players in this category are often very dedicated and speed many hours practicing their instrument. Mostly self taught, they learn almost exclusively from guitar tab, and their friends. How long does it take to play guitar in this category?... these players understand it's a lifetime journey. 3. It is based on your capacity to play the instrument in sink with the notes. Adding on is your inner talent or love for music and an ability to play well. How long does it take to learn the guitar and play songs on it is possible within one or two months. Can start to teach others; guitar skills are quite serviceable. Professional: 10000: 55.6 years: 27.8 years: 13.9 years: 6.9 years: Can teach almost any player, and can perform comfortably in at least one style. Most would describe this as mastery. Master: 20000: 111.1 years: 55.6 years: 27.8 years: 13.9 years: World-class musician, guitar deity, or frightening demon. Let's get started by looking at some of the most common questions I get asked about learning the guitar. The guitar is an easy instrument to play badly, but with practice anyone can learn to play well. In this lesson I just want to clear up a few things so that you know what to expect of this course, and of yourself. Simply put, find one guitar-related thing a day that you didn’t know already and learn it. And play it. It can be a riff, a lick, a chord, a scale, an exercise, a song, a melody, an altered tuning, a strum pattern, the part of a song you know all of the cool riffs of but never bothered to learn the “boring” connecting transition sections of, whatever. Perhaps a reasonable answer to ‘How long does it take to learn guitar?’ would be about eighteen months to two years. After a year or two, you’ll know more about where you want to go with the guitar. You’ll be able to play confidently, without making mistakes. Yeah…but really… how long does it take to learn the guitar?? Ok. I’ve seen some other websites give timeframes (like: “if you practice regularly, in 1-2 months you can play most chords”; or “in 1 year you can play most songs”). I think that’s crazy. What does “most songs” mean? Or “most chords”? Query: how long does improvement take learning guitar",
"output": [
"In guitar learning, ongoing practice may bring in better results in almost 6 months"
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b382e661689e416a916a349679337c3d",
"input": "Look at the grains in the rock - their shapes and relationship to one another. if the grains are rounded or angular - go to 3 if the rock is made up interlocking crystalline grains - go to 6 Guidelines for Describing an Artwork When you describe an artwork, list only things that you can see. Report only facts. Don’t worry about what the work mean, or whether you like it or not. The guidelines below can be used to describe works with or without recognizable shapes. You may not use all of the items listed in the guidelines for a particular work. Transparent (you can see through it) Translucent (light comes through it) Crystalline (has crystals in it) Magnetic (a paper clip is attracted to it) Color descriptors How would you describe a sedimentary rock? Sedimentary rock is one of the three main rock groups (along with igneous and metamorphic rocks) and is formed in three main ways-by the deposition of the weathered remains of … other rocks (known as clastic sedimentary rocks); by the deposition of the results of biogenic activity; and by precipitation from solution. Describe how these three rock units sit relative to each other. Points to Consider. Imagine that you are a civil engineer. How could you use a topographic map to build a road, bridge, or tunnel through an area like the one shown in Figure above? Would you want your road to go up and down or remain as flat as possible? Such material, called detritus, consists of fragments of rocks and minerals. When the energy of the transporting current is not strong enough to carry these particles, the particles drop out in the process of sedimentation. This type of sedimentary deposition is referred to as clastic sedimentation. Limestones formed from this type of sediment are biological sedimentary rocks. Their biological origin is often revealed in the rock by the presence of fossils. Some limestones can form by direct precipitation of calcium carbonate from marine or fresh water. Limestones formed this way are chemical sedimentary rocks. A rock layer would need to have spaces between grains or cracks or hollow spaces to hold water. 2 Record the volume of water pumped and the time it took to pump it. Calculate the flow rates. 3 What differences do you see in the material of each rock layer? Describe particle size, particle shape, and the general shape and number of pore spaces in each rock. Sandstone has sand-sized particles that are relatively round with many pore spaces and good connection between the pore spaces. Shale has smaller, flatter particles than sandstone. Flowing water slows down when it reaches flatter land or flows into a body of still water. What do you think happens then? The water starts dropping the particles it was carrying. As the water slows, it drops the largest particles first. The smallest particles settle out last. Erosion and Deposition by Surface Water ALERT: NOTE THAT THE WORD 'CRYSTALLINE' HAS TWO DIFFERENT MEANINGS, DEPENDING UPON THE CONTEXT IN WHICH THE WORD IS USED: 1 In a mineralogical context, 'crystalline' means that the atoms within a substance are arranged in a regular, geometric fashion. All minerals are crystalline. Query: how do you describe shape of rock",
"output": [
"In the rock, their shapes and relationship to one another."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-2dc3b227eb6140c9a85a37e2087ed455",
"input": "Martian New Year. On May 5, 2017, Mars passes solar longitude 0 as the Sun crosses the equator on Mars. This is the vernal equinox, and was chosen by planetary scientists as the start of a new year (A Mars year is 687 Earth days). This is year 34 on Mars. (That works today, but eventually we will have more than 24 hours to get this job and others done. A lot more. In a few billion years, a day will last about a month!) Saturn is a giant ball of gas, however. There is no firm surface anywhere in sight. Making things more confusing, Saturn has some of the solar system's fasted winds, up to 1,000 mph. Earth takes 24 hours to complete a day, but Saturn takes 10 hours and 32 minutes. A year on Earth is, obviously, 1 year, while a year on Saturn lasts 30 years. Due to Saturn's tilt and Earth's changing orbital position, Saturn's rings tilt in and out of view over time. Saturn's rings tilt out of view when they are edge-on as viewed from Earth. This is called Saturn's ring plane crossing. Saturn's rings are edge-on to the Sun two times during Saturn's 29.42-year orbit. So if Mars and Earth are side-by-side every 780 days, let's figure out how long it takes for Mars to go around exactly once. We know that in 780 days, the Earth has revolved around the sun twice in 730 days, with 50 days left over. In those 50 days, the earth goes around the sun 50/365 of an orbit. Since Mars and Earth are neck-and-neck in 780 days, Mars must have been lapped in its race with the Earth. They are at the same place on the track (50/365 along it), so Mars must have run 1 (50/365) laps in 780 days. Padalka logged his own 365th day in orbit back in 2004 on what was just his second mission. Now set to fly on his fifth long-duration flight, he will become the new worldwide record holder for the most cumulative time in space when he completes his current mission, topping 900 days. [One-Year Space Station Mission: Full Coverage] How Long Is A Day On Saturn? Date: May 3, 2006 Source: Particle Physics & Astronomy Research Council Summary: Measuring the rotation period of a rocky planet like the Earth is easy, but similar measurements for planets made of gas, such as Saturn, pose problems. Researchers from JPL, Imperial College London and UCLA present new results in this week's Nature (4th May 2006) that may solve the mystery. A: One year on Neptune is equal to around 165 Earth years or 60,190 Earth days, which is the amount of time it takes the planet to complete its orbit around the sun. Days on Neptune last about 16 hours, which is 8 hours less than Earth. 1. Mercury: One year on planet Mercury takes just 87.97 earth days. This means that if you are 15 years old on Earth you would be 62 years old in Mercury years. 2. Venus: It takes 224.7 earth days for Venus to travel once around the sun. If you are 15 years old on Earth, this would make you 24 years old in Venus years. 3. Earth: One year on planet Earth, or one orbit around the sun, takes 365.26 days. 4. The length of one sidereal Earth year is 3.39% the length of one sidereal Saturn year. In other words, the length of one sidereal Saturn year is 29.5. Query: how long is one year one year on saturn in earth years",
"output": [
"One year on Saturn in earth years is 30 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8b1fdb0132b64af8a2bd53c59268d797",
"input": "step is to regain normal movement. The long-term goal of repairing a broken ankle is to decrease the chance of ankle arthritis in the future. You are then allowed to wean out of the cast or boot. You can return to normal activities once the bones are fully healed. Some patients may need physical therapy for their ankle to regain full movement and strength. While everyone is different, it can take up to a year after surgery for some patients to regain full ankle function. Grade 1 Ankle Sprain. This is the mildest degree of sprain, where there is minimal damage to the ligaments. The ankle is stable and should recover in seven to 10 days. The symptoms of a Grade 1 sprain tend to be limited to pain and swelling. Most athletes can walk without crutches but are unable to jog, jump or change direction. Treated by rest, ice and elevation, athletes should be able to return from a Grade 1 sprain relatively quickly. 1 Dr. Katz enumerates four signs that indicate you are ready to come back from an ankle injury: 2 The swelling goes down. 3 You are able to put weight on the injured ankle. 4 You have full range of motion in the ankle. Ankle sprains take an average of 6 weeks to heal but can take can up to 4 months, depending on the severity. An ankle brace, air stirrup, hiking boots, or other form of ankle support should be worn during this time to protect the ligaments. After the ankle is healed, wearing an ankle brace or taping the ankle may help prevent reinjury. Even after your ankle feels better, continue with muscle-strengthening exercises and balance and control exercises several times a week to keep your ankles strong. The timing and type of rehab exercises may vary according to your doctor's or physical therapist's preferences. Dr. Katz enumerates four signs that indicate you are ready to come back from an ankle injury: 1 The swelling goes down. 2 You are able to put weight on the injured ankle. 3 You have full range of motion in the ankle. Strengthening exercises to strengthen the muscles so they help support your ankle. Talk to your doctor or physical therapist about the timing of strengthening exercises for the ankle. In general, you can start these exercises after you are able to stand without increased pain or swelling, as long as you do not feel pain while you do them. Immediately after surgery, your ankle will be immobilized for a few weeks. Once the wounds are healed, you will be fitted for either a cast or a boot. Many surgeons use a removable boot. The boot protects the ankle as it heals but can be removed to allow washing, wound checks, and icing. Surgical treatment of ankle fractures allows patients to regain ankle function while the bones and joint heal. Immediately after surgery, your ankle will be immobilized for a few weeks. Once the wounds are healed, you will be fitted for either a cast or a boot. Many surgeons use a removable boot. The boot protects the ankle as it heals but can be removed to allow washing, wound checks and icing. Query: how long will it take my ankle to regain",
"output": [
"Ankle sprains take an average of 6 weeks to heal but can take can up to 4 months, depending on the severity."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ccf25327eb5a40758e36ed5664208c5e",
"input": "If both of you have Iowa income, you may pay less tax if you file status 3 or 4. 1 Married Filing Separately on a Combined Return - Check filing status 3 if you are married and want to file separately on one return. 2 Married Filing Separate Returns - Check filing status 4 if you and your spouse file separate returns. If both of you have Iowa income, you may pay less tax if you file status 3 or 4. 1 Married Filing Separately on a Combined Return - Check filing status 3 if you are married and want to file separately on one return. If you receive a refund, it will be made payable to both you and your spouse. I was wondering how long it would/should take for me to receive my federal income tax refund check. I signed and mailed all the information on February 6th (Friday). If you request a direct deposit of your refund, you generally receive it in 1 to 2 weeks. Checks take about 3 to 4 weeks to arrive if you e-file your return. I filed on Jan. 16th and got my refund direct deposited on Jan. 26th. In less than two weeks, taxpayers will be able to file their tax returns. But many taxpayers will have to wait longer to cash out their tax refunds thanks to new efforts from the IRS and state tax authorities to catch tax fraud. Illinois announced this week that it will delay tax refunds to have more time to verify tax returns. State tax refunds won’t be issued until after March 1, the state’s department of revenue announced on Monday. This schedule is sent with the Iowa 1040 income tax long form and with a copy of the income tax return you filed with the other state. A copy of your federal income tax return should also be sent with these forms. This form is available on our individual income tax forms page. Back to Top. 23. Although, there is no written rule from the IRS, the refund is usually processed quickly as long as there are no issues with the return. When to File Federal income tax returns can be filed beginning in mid-January of the proceeding year up to April 15th. It is used to calculate a tax credit. This schedule is sent with the Iowa 1040 income tax long form and a copy of your federal income tax return This form is available on our individual income tax forms page. Back to Top. 22. What is the Schedule IA 130 - Out-of-State Credit Computation? An apparent spike in suspicious returns during the last filing season led to a series of new efforts from the IRS, state tax authorities and the tax preparation industry to cut down on refund theft during the upcoming filing season, which starts on Jan. 19. To take this exclusion you or your spouse must meet one of the following conditions: 1 You must be 55 years of age or older on December 31, or. 2 disabled, or. 3 a surviving spouse or a survivor having an insurable interest in an individual who would have qualified for the exclusion during the year. A federal income tax refund is the amount that an individual receives because they overpaid their taxes. The standard processing delay for refunds is between 2 weeks to 1 month. Although, there is no written rule from the IRS, the refund is usually processed quickly as long as there are no issues with the return. When to File. Federal income tax returns can be filed beginning in mid-January of the proceeding year up to April 15th. Query: how long is it taking to get federal income tax refund",
"output": [
"It takes between 2 weeks to 1 month to get federal income tax refund."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-813b2b669107476ca825ca134bc10f51",
"input": "The number of days a cat is in heat varies. If the queen is not bred, the heat phase may last as little as 2 days or as long as 19 days. In the early spring, some females do not completely come out of heat, and instead the signs of heat just wax and wane. Not spayed female cat stopped going into heat by: MirandaFoxtrot Other than my *indoor only female cat*, not spayed, that stopped going into heat about 2 years ago, I have three other *indoor only* cats. I have her male kitten that is now 3 yrs old, he is neutered. Best Answer: For a house cat - six months is the standard time to have them spayed. For a cat that lives outdoors they may go into heat sooner - as soon as four to five months old. Your cat may very well be in heat. You have a couple of different options. Most vets charge a substantional amount extra to spay a female in heat. Tips About Spaying. Unless she is a qualified pedigreed breeder, your female cat should be spayed. It will not only cease the uncomfortable heat cycles but prevent certain serious medical problems. Your veterinarian may be able to give your female cat hormones to stop the oestrus if spaying is not immediately possible. Female cats as young as four months can go into oestrus. Cat Reproductive Health. Your Guide to Mating and Conception in Cats. Cat FAQs. How to Tell If a Cat Is Male or Female. Cat Health & Wellness. At what age does a cat go into heat? Cats will generally start going into heat roughly around six months of age. It can vary, of course, and it also depends on whether the cat hits that age during the breeding season. After six months old, they will start doing it if they are not spayed roughly from March to October. In some kittens, the cycles start as young as four or five months old. Quick Answer. WebMD states that female cats go into heat several times during the year unless they are being bred. The heat cycle is influenced by the seasons, and is activated when there are 12 hours of daylight. Other factors include the temperature of the environment and the presence of other cats. Best Answer: Your kitten can be in heat from the age of 4 months. If your cat hasnt mated, she will go into heat as soon as every two to three weeks, several times each year, until she either mates or is spayed. If you cant get your cat spayed then your vet may be able to give her pills (hormones) to stop her cycle. You can spay as early as 8 weeks of age, but check with your veterinarian. If a cat is already in heat, some vets may wait until the cycle is over before performing the spay. Remember: Cats do not need to have a litter of kittens before they are spayed. Reproducing does not make them more affectionate, alter personalities or solve any problems. It does add to pet overpopulation. Read more about cats and reproduction on Catster.com: 1 The 5 Stages of Cat Pregnancy. 2 4 Signs of a Cat in Heat. 3 MORE of What to Expect When You’re Expecting (to Give Birth to a Cat) This means that while feral cats have a breeding season, with kittens born in the spring and early autumn, your house cat can go into heat at any time, and will probably do so every three to four weeks. Query: at what age does a cat start to go in heat",
"output": [
"Cats will generally start going into heat roughly around six months of age."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ae93755034944e6590f7931517b77950",
"input": "The parts that are used pharmaceutically are the dried fruit which yields carrot seed oil upon steam distillation and the orange carrot root which yields root oil by solvent extraction. 2, 3. Chemistry. Carrot seed oil is made up of α-pinene (up to 13%), β-pinene, carotol (up to 18%), daucol, limonene, β-bisabolene, β-elemene, cis-β-bergamotene, γ-decalactone, β-farnesene, geraniol, geranyl acetate (up to 10%), caryophyllene, caryophyllene oxide, methyl eugenol, nerolidol, eugenol ... This plant is also called Queen Anne’s lace, Bishop’s lace,or bird’s nest. This oil will be labeled as an essential oil. Cold-Pressed Carrot Seed Oil. Is cold pressed from carrot seeds (the orange carrots that you eat), not wild carrot seeds. Sometimes this oil is labeled (or called) carrot seed oil which can be confusing. This oil is sometimes labeled as a carrier oil. Since carrot seed oil contains carotene and vitamin A, it is also very good for healthy skin, hair, gums and teeth and is also associated with good eyesight. Extraction. The oil is extracted by steam distillation from the dried seeds, but the whole of the plant can yield an essential oil. Chemical composition Carrot seed essential oil blended with carrier oils can act as a non ... CARROT SEED OIL 100 % Natural Cold Pressed Carrier Oil. 0.33 Fl.oz.- 10 ml. Skin, Body, Hair and Lip Care. One of the best oils to rejuvenate and regenerate skin tissues.” by Botanical Beauty Tater Tot Facial Cleanser and Face Scrub SET - Made with Carrot Powder, Carrot Seed Extract and Apricot Seeds - Clean Face Carrot Seed Essential Oil Is Best For: 1 creating your own skin care blends (you must dilute this oil) 2 mature skin – it hydrates and prevents wrinkles. 3 dermatitis and psoriasis. 4 cellulite. 5 slowing down hair loss. 6 detoxifying the skin. 7 skin infections and wounds. NEW SMOOTH-as-SILK Body Butter Wild Cherry Blossom with Avocado Butter, Baobab Oil, Rosehip Seed Oil, Carrot Seed Extract Carrot seed oil exhibits both smooth-muscle relaxant and vasodilatory action in isolated animal organ studies. It depresses cardiac activity in both frog and dog hearts. 2. An ethanol extract (10 to 100 mg/kg dose) produced a dose-dependent decrease in systolic and diastolic blood pressure in anesthetized normotensive rats. In aromatherapy, carrot seed essential oil is useful for a range of skin issues, from preventing UV damage, to curing psoriasis and eczema, to even reversing wrinkles. The carrot seed essential oil offered by Miracle Botanicals is Co2 Extracted because this low temperature and very clean extraction method yields an oil that retains more antioxidants, Vitamin A and natural chemical profile. In this way Miracle Botanicals carrot seed essential oil ensures the highest therapeutic value for your skin. Health Benefits of Carrot Seed Essential Oil. Let’s explore more of the impressive health benefits of this essential oil below. Antioxidant Properties. Carrot seed essential oil can help you retain your youth even as your friends start balding and showing wrinkles on their faces. Query: how is carrot seed oil extracted",
"output": [
"Carrot seed oil is extracted by steam distillation from the dried seeds."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c178d09e6bc74783baa400491436279d",
"input": "Lenoir-Rhyne University ACT Requirements. Just like for the SAT, Lenoir-Rhyne University likely doesn't have a hard ACT cutoff, but if you score too low, your application will get tossed in the trash. Average ACT: 21. The average ACT score at Lenoir-Rhyne University is 21. This score makes Lenoir-Rhyne University Moderately Competitive for ACT scores. The 25th percentile ACT score is 18, and the 75th percentile ACT score is 23. At Lenoir-Rhyne University, 61% of students submitted their SAT scores for college application and the average admitted student's SAT score was around 1485, which is slightly lower than the average score at other private (not-for-profit) institutions. The Lenoir-Rhyne University High School Scholars Academy (HSSA) is a one-year program designed for high school students who seek an alternative opportunity for a full-time on-campus experience. Students will enroll in English IV Honors plus three college courses in the fall, and AP English plus three more college courses in the spring. Admissions Tracker Results for the college class of 2021 only include new SAT scores. Your scores are not displaying because your Admissions Profile appears to contain old SAT scores. If you added your SAT scores before the Profile form was revised to allow entry of new SAT scores, you will need to update your scores in your Profile. Lenoir-Rhyne University Features Featured College Teaser - Featured College Description Default Campaign Video Embed Code (visit youtube.com, choose Share, then Embed, copy script Tutorial) - Default Campaign Video Width - Default Campaign Video Height - Facebook Link - Twitter Username LRUAdmissions Enable Regional Events - Next Connect Link Url - Here's a summary of why we're so much more effective than other prep programs: 1 PrepScholar customizes your prep to your strengths and weaknesses. 2 We guide you through your program step-by-step so that you're never confused about what you should be studying. 3 Our team is made of national SAT/ACT experts. The Following Items Must Be Submitted: 1 A completed, accurate application for undergraduate admission and a $35 non-refundable application fee. 2 Official proof of high school diploma or equivalent*. 3 Official high school transcript*. 4 SAT/ACT score report. 5 Satisfactory completion of required coursework. ACT (25-75th Percentile) Composite: 18-23 English: 16-23 Math: 18-24 % Submitting ACT: 42% The Following Items Must Be Submitted: 1 A completed, accurate HSSA application. 2 Official high school transcript. 3 Official SAT/ACT score report (if score is not included on official transcript). 4 Official college transcript(s) if any college work has been attempted, even if course(s) are listed on high school transcript. Most Popular Employer Name for Lenoir-Rhyne University Alumni Median Salary Charts. Transportation Insight COMMSCOPE, Inc. City of Belmont Lenoir-Rhyne College Query: average act score for lenoir rhyne",
"output": [
"The average ACT score at Lenoir-Rhyne University is 21."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0225357a025e483caf32feb67e69df43",
"input": "December Weather. With December ushering in the first days of Australia’s summer, the weather within all areas is quite warm. Being the start of summer, the temperature’s range spans from the mid to high 20°sC (70°sF) in most major cities. For more information, see the weather forecast and our average climate infomation (by month in graphs) below. * Data from nearest weather station: Brisbane, Australia (71.8 KM). Average minimum and maximum temperature over the year. The monthly mean minimum and maximum daily temperature. The major Australian public holiday is, of course, Anzac Day on April 25. And if Easter takes place in April, Easter Monday is a public holiday as well. April, too, is the month of the actual birthday of Elizabeth II, Queen of Australia, and the anniversary of Captain James Cook’s landing at Sydney’s Botany Day to eventually claim Australia for England. Best Answer: The weather in Australia will be mainly hot and dry in the southern regions. In the northern tropics it will be very hot and humid. Throughout most of ... Be 'SunSmart' by using these three simple steps when you go outdoors: 1 Stay in the shade whenever possible. 2 Wear a shirt, hat and sunglasses. 3 Use SPF 30+ sunscreen. Reapply every 2 hours. Expect 28°C daytime maximum temperatures in the shade with on average 11 hours of sunshine per day in Western Australia in December. Check more long-term weather averages for Western Australia in December before you book your next holiday to Western Australia in 2017. Sydney is a sunny city in general, but December sees a good amount of sunshine. The city usually experiences an average of 9 hours of sunshine per day throughout the month and there's an 18% chance of a sunny day. With summer arriving in the Southern Hemisphere and a multitude of Christmas, Boxing Day, and New Year's Eve events to discover, December is a great month to visit Australia on your family vacation, especially since schoolchildren in the United States celebrate their winter break this time of year. Average minimum and maximum temperature over the year. 1 The monthly mean minimum and maximum daily temperature. 2 This is the monthly total of sunhours. 3 The monthly mean water temperature. 4 This is the mean monthly precipitation, including rain, snow, hail etc. 5 This is the number of days each month with rain, snow, hail etc. Melbourne is known for having four seasons in one day, therefore it's entirely possible to arrive in June and get a lovely 22C day. The wettest months are usually October to December, but the rain is fairly well spread out across all 12 months. Pack for all weather if you're visiting Melbourne. Uluru (Ayers Rock), NT Mean daily temperatures: Query: how is the weather in australia in december",
"output": [
"December ushering in the first days of Australia’s summer, the weather within all areas is quite warm."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e96ebf59673c4c2a8d1a92af7f8684a4",
"input": "In general, most have full breast development by 18-21 years of age. Also, weight gain/loss, pregnancy/lactation, and medications that contain hormones (ie. oral contraceptives) can play a role in development and final breast size. Everyone is a little different in their breast development. At about what age does a person's torso stop growing in height? Dr. James Ferguson Dr. Ferguson Variable by gender: Most quit between 15-18 or after the long bone growth centers close with bone maturity. Girls actually stop growing earlier than boys because they start puberty at an earlier age. The age at which men stop growing is usually between 17-20. At the end of puberty, both men and women stop growing. The chart below gives a better understanding of girls’ growth pattern and the age at which women stop growing. You’ll notice that by the age of 15, girls have grown to almost their full adult height and growth happens only gradually until the age of 20. Girls experience growth spurts at the start of puberty and many parents may wonder when do girls stop growing. The rate of growth up until a girl reaches puberty at the age of 8 to 13 happens very gradually. When do men typically stop growing in height - When do men typically stop growing in height? 16-20 years. Most men finish their height growth by age 20 years. Rarely, there may be growth after that, & often growth is over before then. A: On average, girls reach their final adult height and stop growing by age 14 or 15, though this figure skews either younger or older depending on when puberty begins. Most girls experience a growth spurt between ages 10 to14, and a female's rate of growth peaks around two years after puberty begins, which is usually around age 12. Continue Reading Quick Answer. On average, girls reach their final adult height and stop growing by age 14 or 15, though this figure skews either younger or older depending on when puberty begins. Most girls experience a growth spurt between ages 10 to14, and a female's rate of growth peaks around two years after puberty begins, which is usually around age 12. Growth is finished at an early age but changes continue throughout your life. Weight loss/gain, genetics, pregnancy, and age can all affect your breasts over a lifetime. February 16th, 2015. On average, girls reach their final adult height and stop growing by age 14 or 15, though this figure skews either younger or older depending on when puberty begins. Most girls experience a growth... Most girls begin menstruating only after their height growth rate has peaked, generally getting their first period around age 12.5. Once menstruation begins, girls usually grow 1 or 2 more inches, and reach their adult height by 14 or 15. Query: at what age does the average female stop growing",
"output": [
"On average, females stop growing by age 14 or 15, depending on when puberty begins."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e31db507da314c01b293c1ea7289ae4b",
"input": "FHA loans are mortgages insured by the Federal Housing Administration, the largest mortgage insurers in the world. The FHA was established in 1934 after The Great Depression and its continuing mission is to create more homeowners in the US. FHA requires both upfront and annual mortgage insurance for all borrowers, regardless of the amount of down payment. 2018 MIP Rates for FHA Loans Over 15 Years If you take out a typical 30-year mortgage or anything greater than 15 years, your annual mortgage insurance premium will be as follows: For example: 1 If the FHA loan amount is $100,000 (base loan amount) 2 The mortgage insurance premium would be $1,750 ($100,000 x 1.75%) 3 The mortgage amount including MIP would be $101,750 ($100,000 + $1,750) The complete MIP schedule for FHA loans sized $625,000 or less, as of August 31, 2017 is as follows 1 : 15-year loan terms with loan-to-value over 90% : 0.70 percent annual MIP. 2 15-year loan terms with loan-to-value under 90% : 0.45 percent annual MIP. 3 30-year loan terms with loan-to-value over 95% : 0.85 percent annual MIP. Purchase and non-streamline refinance loans have Upfront MIP amounts of 1.75% of proposed loan amount and is added to the mortgage balance at closing. Purchase Loans, Continue Reading get rates How to Calculate the MIP for an FHA Loan. An FHA mortgage is a government-insured loan that requires the homeowner to pay a premium for the cost of insuring the loan. An FHA loan has an up-front premium payable when the loan is originated, and an annual premium included in each monthly mortgage payment. In August 2010 the U.S. Congress passed a law that significantly changed the way FHA mortgage insurance premiums would be calculated, effective October 2010. FHA mortgage insurance consists of a financed upfront fee of 1.75% of your loan amount. A monthly premium is calculated based on loan term and down payment. FHA Upfront Mortgage Insurance Premium Rates. The Upfront Mortgage Insurance Premium (UFMIP) is a fee that’s charged to the borrowers up front for all FHA purchase loans, cash-out refinances and rate-term refinances that aren’t streamline loans. Purchase and non-streamline refinance loans have Upfront MIP amounts of 1.75% of proposed loan amount and is added to the mortgage balance at closing. 1 Purchase Loans, Cash-Out Refinance or Rate-Term Refinance UFMIP Rate of 1.75%. 2 FHA Streamline Refinance Original FHA loan endorsed before 6-1-2009 – UFMIP Rate of 0.01%. Home / Program Offices / Housing / Comp / Premiums / Upfront Mortgage Insurance Premium Single Family Upfront Mortgage Insurance Premium (MIP) Upfront mortgage insurance premium (MIP) is required for most of the FHA's Single Family mortgage insurance programs. Lenders must remit upfront MIP within 10 calendar days of the mortgage closing or disbursement date, whichever is later. This page provides links to information on the collection and processing of upfront MIP payments for all case (loan) types except a Home Equity Conversion Mortgage (HECM) or Title I manufactured housing loan. Introduction For loans with FHA case numbers assigned on or after June 3, 2013, FHA will collect the annual MIP, which is the time at which you will pay for FHA Mortgage Insurance Premiums on your FHA loan. They are as follows: Query: how is fha upfront mip calculated",
"output": [
"The Upfront Mortgage Insurance Premium (UFMIP) is a fee that’s charged to the borrowers up front for all FHA purchase loans, cash-out refinances and rate-term refinances that aren’t streamline loans. Purchase and non-streamline refinance loans have Upfront MIP amounts of 1.75% of proposed loan amount and is added to the mortgage balance at closing."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-343c8e94db8a425e8a6e780d06812365",
"input": "Electromyography, or EMG, is a test that measures the electrical activity of muscles. Learn more about this test, nerve conduction, and neuromuscular disorders. Topics A-Z Slideshows Images Quizzes Medications Medical Dictionary The doctor will look at and listen to the electrical signals that travel from the needle to the EMG machine. The doctor then reads these signals. How long will these tests take? The tests usually take 40 to 90 minutes. You can do any of your normal activities, like eating, driving, and exercising, before the tests. You also can do your normal activities after the tests. There are no lasting side effects from the tests. Tell the EMG doctor if you are taking aspirin, blood thinners (like Coumadin®), have a pacemaker, or have hemophilia. Take a bath or shower to remove oil from your skin. Do not use body lotion on the day of the test. If you have Myasthenia Gravis, ask your EMG doctor if you should take any medications before the test. No, an EMG is an entirely different test. Ultrasound is a form of imaging, using sound waves and is performed by the Radiology department. Can I drive afterwards? You will be able to drive after your test or do anything else that you would normally do. Can my spouse/child/relative come in to the exam room with me? www.emglaboratory.com EMG (Electromyography) Test Video is a medical educational video explaining the EMG test in details. EMG Laboratory is a state-of-the-art facility that specializes in sophisticated electrodiagnostic testing of the nerves and muscles. Electromyography (EMG) and nerve conduction tests are performed in order to evaluate the condition of nerves and muscles. www.emglaboratory.com EMG (Electromyography) Test Video is a medical educational video explaining the EMG test in details. EMG Laboratory is a state-of-the-a... The EMG Lab is on the 7th floor of University Hospital. When you arrive for your appointment, after checking in at Patient Registration on the main floor, go to the 7th floor Outpatient Department. The receptionist will notify the EMG Lab that you have arrived. An EMG test is a detailed investigation of the health of your peripheral nervous system (basically, this means all of the nerves outside your brain and spinal cord). There are 2 parts to the test, nerve conduction testing, and an optional needle exam (see below). In the nerve conduction studies (NCS), various nerves, usually in the arm or leg, will be stimulated with a small, harmless electrical pulse. The response from your nerve is recorded by an EMG machine. What medical training do doctors who do EMGs have? Doctors who do EMGs go to 4 years of medical school; and then have 3 or 4 more years training in a residency program. Most work as neurologists or physical medicine and rehabilitation doctors. Medical training helps the doctor decide which tests to perform based on your problems. The person who administers the test will explain the procedure. Often muscle activity is monitored through a speaker during the test, which may make a popping or soft roaring noise. The EMG technician will be looking at an oscilloscope, which looks like a small TV set during the procedure. Testing may take 30 to 60 minutes. After the EMG Procedure If the patient is having this test in a doctor's office, he or she will be sent home following the procedure without any restriction of activities. Query: how long do emg's take",
"output": [
"The EMG takes 30 to 60 minutes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ea672f89d4b44b82aff181a2a14c7044",
"input": "To get your income tax refund the fastest way possible, e-file your return and choose a direct deposit to your bank account. What refund options does TaxAct offer? You can have the IRS deposit your refund into up to three different bank accounts. A split refund is a great idea if you want to put some of your money into savings. The IRS will confirm the account number is valid before they deposit your refund. If the number you enter is not valid, you may receive a paper check in the mail, instead of an electronic deposit. The paper check will take longer for you to receive than a direct deposit. Worse yet, if the account number you enter is valid but belongs to someone else, that person could receive your tax refund. Instead of having your refund deposited directly to your bank account, you can choose one of these options: Free e-file with direct deposit to an exisiting account or to an American Express Serve Prepaid Debit Account for fast and easy access to your refund. Use all or part of your refund to purchase U.S. Savings Bonds in increments of $50. The fastest way to get your refund is to e-file your return and request your refund via direct deposit. The Department of Taxation and Finance declares that these taxpayers can receive their refund in as little as 14 days. Most, however, will have to wait somewhere between 14 and 30 days. Note also that it is hardly uncommon for refunds to take even longer than that. If your account is closed, the direct deposit will return to the State. A paper refund check will be sent using the address and other information we have for you on file. In such a situation, a manual refund check will take about six to eight weeks to be proc-essed and mailed. Q: I was due for a refund by direct deposit but I did not receive it. What do I do now? First, thoroughly examine your bank statement. With so many transactions, it’s easy to overlook a deposit. one account number reported on the federal return, the direct deposit of your Rhode Island refund will be sent to the account first listed on your federal return. Please check your bank account number, routing number, and bank statement carefully -- it could save you considerable time and effort. number (or numbers). The post office will not forward the refund check to a new address. Service will return the refund check to the Rhode Island General Treasurer’s Office. check has been returned by sending us a photocopy of your refund check. to your new address, or 2.) pick up the check at the General Treasurer’s Office. Treasurer’s Office, not from the Division of Taxation. The longest amount of time your refund will take is if you paper file your return. If that’s the case, you can tack on an additional 4 weeks to all of the times given above. That’s how long it takes the Tax Department to process paper returns. Guide to Tax Refunds Rhode Island Department of Revenue Message from the Tax Administrator: If you pay more taxes than you’re required to, you’re due a refund. We try to process refunds as promptly as possible. But processing can take time, especially during the busy filing season. We expect to process more than 600,000 personal When you receive the affidavit, follow the instructions on the form and re-. turn it to the Rhode Island General Treasurer’s Office, 50 Service Ave., Warwick R.I. 02886. Do not mail the affidavit to the Rhode Island Division of Taxation. the bank account since I filed the return. What happens to my direct deposit? If your account is closed, the direct deposit will return to the State. A paper refund check will be sent using the address and other information we have for you on file. In such a situation, a manual refund check will take about six to eight weeks to be proc- Query: how long does it take to receive tax refund direct deposit",
"output": [
"It takes six to eight weeks to receive tax refund direct deposit."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-dbd8dfd42ccb422f95d172149a213f7c",
"input": "From W. Lake, turn right onto Shermer Rd. Travel north on Shermer, then turn right onto Old Willow Rd. Our facility is on the Northwest side of the street across from the Fire Training Station. Please call the main number 224-326-2061 for further directions. We look forward to seeing you soon! Athletico Center. 1900 Old Willow Rd. Northbrook, IL 60062 ATHLETICO PHYSICAL THERAPY LBN ATHLETICO LTD Physical Therapist (1) Physical therapists are health care professionals who evaluate and treat people with health problems resulting from injury or disease. Athletico Physical Therapy is a well known Physical Therapy Clinic of Plainfield, Indiana. It is situated at 1070 W Main St, Suite 185, Plainfield and it's contact number is 317-268-9000. The authorized person of Athletico Physical Therapy is Geri Cook who is Vice President Of Billing Operation of the clinic and his contact number is 630-575-1940. The telephone number associated with the location address of the provider being identified. Provider Business Practice Location Address Fax Number 773-327-0050 The fax number associated with the location address of the provider being identified. 1 review of Athletico Physical Therapy Found out I needed a hip replacement in Jan. Was prescribed physical therapy to strengthen the muscles and relieve the pain until the surgery. I went and saw Josh at Athletico because it was close to my… Our services include physical and occupational/hand therapy, workers' compensation, women's health therapy, concussion management and athletic training. For more information, or to schedule a free injury screening, please visit www.athletico.com and follow us on Twitter at @athletico. Athletico Corporate Office & Headquarters 625 Enterprise Drive Oak Brook IL 60523 Athletico corporate phone number: (847) 215-0022 Average Rating and Total Reviews ZION, Ill., May 30, 2017 /PRNewswire/ -- Athletico Physical Therapy has opened a new location in Zion on Tuesday, May 30 th at 2723 Sheridan Rd., Suite D, Zion, IL 60099. Athletico is looking forward to continuing its quality of care throughout the Northern Suburbs of Chicago. ATHLETICO PHYSICAL THERAPY Other name by which the organization provider is or has been known. Provider Other Organization Name Type Code 3 Code identifying the type of other name. * This phone number available for 3 min is not the recipient's number but a number from a service which will put you through to that person. This service is produced by Kompass. Why this number ? Query: athletico physical therapy main telephone number",
"output": [
"Athletico Physical Therapy main telephone number is 317-268-9000."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c2c6652a815c4a65adba2b1d4a052077",
"input": "The most popular kind of drug test is the urine test, which can detect marijuana for days or weeks after use. As shown in the following graph, detection times for chronic users typically range from one to three weeks but can extend much longer. In this study by Ellis [04], chronic users were tested at 20 ng/ml and 100 ng/ml, but not at the normal standard of 50 ng/ml. Hair tests are more likely to detect regular than occasional marijuana use. One study found that 85% of daily users tested positive for marijuana, versus 52% of occasional smokers (1-5 times per week). Ingested cannabis was less likely to be detected than smoked marijuana . Advil) will not test positive for marijuana on modern drug screens, but numerous OTC cold remedies may trigger false positive results for amphetamines, primarily on the EMIT test. Consequently, employees subject to random testing should insist that all positive test results be substantiated by follow-up testing, . Hello Rosario…Marijuana can be detected in saliva drug tests up to 24 hours after your last joint. Since you smoked 15 hours before your saliva drug test, your chance to pass a test is 50 50. Usually, a saliva drug test is performed in order to detect the presence of prohibited substances in saliva. In general, occasional consumers (as in, once or twice per week) should have little trouble passing an EMIT test – which typically uses a 50 ng/ml cut-off for the THC-COOH metabolite – as long as they have had one or two days of abstinence prior to taking the test. Lasix (ferosemide) is one of many stronger diuretics available by prescription. While non-prescription use of Lasix can potentially be hazardous to health if taken over long lengths of time, its use has been popular for more than two decades by those subject to random workplace drug tests on short notice. M – metabolite Blood tests, unlike urinalysis, detect the presence illicit drugs, not inactive drug metabolites. In general, THC only remains detectable in the blood of cannabis consumers for a few hours (though low, residual levels may be detected in chronic smokers for up to 12-24+ hours if more sensitive technology is used). Detection Time for Marijuana in Urine: Urine tests detect non-psychoactive marijuana metabolites for days to weeks after use, long after impairment has passed. Detection Time for Marijuana in Blood : Blood tests can detect presence of active THC; high levels indicate recent use, low levels may persist for hours or days. Hair tests are more likely to detect regular than occasional marijuana use. One study found that 85% of daily users tested positive for marijuana, versus 52% of occasional smokers (1-5 times per week). Ingested cannabis was less likely to be detected than smoked marijuana [01]. Query: how long can marijuana residue be detected",
"output": [
"The residual levels in cannabis consumers may be detected in chronic smokers for up to 12-24+ hours if more sensitive technology is used."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-86c9b7127c8e44c99a775d39a05c5a35",
"input": "If your renewal is received after the expiration date, or the license expires before an acceptable renewal is received at CSLB, the following will occur: 1 The renewal will be considered delinquent; 2 You will be required to pay the delinquent renewal fee; 3 There will be a break in licensing time; Renewing Your License After Expiration. If your renewal is received after the expiration date, or the license expires before an acceptable renewal is received at CSLB, the following will occur: The renewal will be considered delinquent; You will be required to pay the delinquent renewal fee; There will be a break in licensing time; While California is strict on expiring licenses, you technically have 59 days after your license expires to renew online. Here’s the clarification. Briefly, most people can renew online if there license is expiring within 60 days. And you can renew online - if you’re eligible - as long as your license hasn’t expired 60 or more days ago. You can find out if you’re eligible to renew online, or if you need to go in person with this California drivers license renewal guide from YoGov. To be eligible for online, by phone and by mail renewals, you must: • Have a driver license that expires within 60 days. • Be less than 70 years old. • Not have a suspended license or driving probation. • Not have failed to appear in court within the past 2 years. • Not made your last 2 renewals by mail. The Registrar will consider your petition only under the following circumstances: 1 The CSLB must receive a written petition within 90 days of the expiration date. 2 You must be able to show that the delay was due to circumstances beyond your control. You must apply for a renewal of your driver's license at least 60 days before it expires because the DMV will take 60 days to mail you the new license. You cannot drive a vehicle if your driver's license has expired. Drivers can renew a Hawaiian drivers license within this 90-day time frame without the penalty of late fees, or what the Hawaii DMV terms “reactivation fees.” Yet, Louisiana drivers have only a 10-day grace period in which to renew an expired license before a $15 delinquent fee kicks in. If your petition is granted, you are still required to pay the delinquent renewal fee. This requirement cannot be waived. Time Limit for Renewing a License. You may renew an expired license any time within five years after its expiration. If the license has been expired for more than five years, you will be required to reapply by completing an Application for Original License. Back to Start >> There is NO grace period in California for an expired California driver’s license. Nor is there ever likely to be one. California is very strict on these matters, and on matters of identification in general. It is highly encouraged that you renew your license 1 to 60 days prior to its expiration. What is the grace period for an expired California driver's license? None, Zilch, Nada.. If the police that pulled you over wants to give you a grace then take it. But if a license or a registration is expired, it is EXPIRED. You are expected to be able to figure that out, and get it renewed BEFORE it expires. Query: how long can license be expired before renewal in california",
"output": [
"In California, you have 59 days after your license expires to renew online."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d35a0b9454eb4cdc988aba8e6fcf2060",
"input": "Get in touch with AAA Not located in CT, MA, NH, NJ, NY, RI? If you are not from one of these areas, please click here to be redirected to the site that serves your area. Free AAA Basic Membership. Save on your AAA membership renewals, data plans, accessories and more. Learn More MEMBER AGREES THAT AAA AND DEVELOPMENT SUPPLIED DATA 'S LIABILITY, IF ANY, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO MEMBER'S USE OF THE INFORMATION SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF MEMBER'S ANNUAL AAA AND DEVELOPMENT SUPPLIED DATA MEMBERSHIP FEE. AAA's 800-922-8228 Claims Department Number This AAA phone number is ranked #2 out of 3 because 92,718 AAA customers tried our tools and information and gave us feedback after they called. The reason customers call 800-922-8228 is to reach the AAA Claims Department department for problems like Cancel or change insurance, Booking issue, Car services, Complaint, Something is not working. Department Contact; AAA Insurance Sales: 866-298-1232 Mon – Fri: 7:30am – 6:30pm Sat: 9am – 7pm Sun: 10am – 2pm: AAA Insurance Customer Service: 800-207-3618 Mon – Sat: 6am – 7pm: AAA Insurance Claims: 800-207-3618 Available 24/7: MetLife, Progressive, and Other Policy Holders: 866-779-1500 Mon – Fri: 8am – 5pm: AAA Commercial Insurance: 866-454-1005 Mon – Fri: 8:30am – 4pm: AAA Life Insurance: 888-770-5043 Mon – Fri: 8am – 5pm: Mexico Auto Insurance: 866-314-8442 Our Territory: AAA Northeast proudly serves members in Rhode Island, the following counties in Connecticut: New Haven, Fairfield and Litchfield, and in Massachusetts: Barnstable, Berkshire, Bristol, Dukes, Essex, Middlesex, Nantucket, Norfolk, Plymouth, Suffolk and Worcester, New Hampshire: Salem, and in New Jersey: Essex, Morris and Union, and in New York: Long Island, in the five boroughs of New York City, and in Westchester, Rockland, Sullivan, Ulster, Dutchess, Orange, Putnam, Chenango ... The #2 phone number for AAA Claims Department with tips to quickly reach and to call a live AAA support rep. If you're going to to call an agent at 800-922-8228 be sure to read here for the best way to do it with alternatives and shortcuts. Products and services may vary depending upon your geographic location. Restrictions apply. AAA membership is subject to terms and conditions. See the membership terms for further details. Find the AAA phone number you need for AAA Insurance, Roadside Assistance, Membership, Travel, Financial and more. Contact AAA Now! Our center is staffed by licensed agents to assist you with policy changes or questions. Please have your policy number and your AAA Mmbership number available when you call. Query: aaa claims department phone number",
"output": [
"The phone number for AAA claims department is 800 922 8228."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-97b7e8f0f08e4d65b53da698b7d49178",
"input": "The length of time that cold or flu germs can survive outside the body on an environmental surface, such as a doorknob, varies greatly. But the suspected range is from a few s … econds to 48 hours - depending on the specific virus and the type of surface. Flu viruses tend to live longer on surfaces than cold viruses do. How long do microbes like bacteria and viruses live on surfaces in the home at normal room temperatures? Art Dekenipp Alvin, Texas. The answer is probably not what you want to hear: Microbes can live on household surfaces for hundreds of years. The good news, however, is that most don't. Some well-known viruses, like HIV, live only a few seconds. Microbes, of course, are everywhere. Each square centimeter of skin alone harbors about 100,000 bacteria. And a single sneeze can spray droplets infested with bacteria and viruses as far as 3 feet. It can last up to 2 weeks. The length of time that cold or flu germs can survive outside the body on an environmental surface, such as a doorknob, varies greatly. But the susp…ected range is from a few seconds to 48 hours - depending on the specific virus and the type of surface. Other factors, such as the amount of virus deposited on a surface and the temperature and humidity of the environment, also determine how long cold and flu viruses stay active outside the body. It's possible to catch the flu or a cold after handling an object an infected person sneezed or coughed on a few moments ago. How long can germs stay alive on a piece of paper?I am trying very hard not to get sick this year. When a student hands me a piece of paper, I try not to touch it. Am I being silly? Can I get sick from the paper? How long after an ill child touches the paper can I get sick from it? It depends on the type of germs or bacteria on the paper. Viruses cannot live for a full minute outside of the body because they need a living host. Once they fall out onto surfaces in that 3 to 6 foot distance, they can live on the surfaces for around 48 hours. See the related question below for more information on how long flu viruses live on surfaces. The flu is nothing like some of the nasty gastrointestinal viruses, like the bane of all cruise ship vacationers, norovirus. “Some of those viruses can survive on an object for months and withstand cleaning with bleach,” Hay tells WebMD. “Influenza isn’t like that.” There have been studies of how long significant amounts of flu germs can survive on surfaces. Estimates range from a few minutes up to 24 hours, depending on the type of surface. (It lives longest on hard surfaces.) First of all, flu is caused by a virus, not bacteria. Second, any type of soap will do. “Time and thoroughness are what matters when it comes to washing your hands,” says Schaffner. The length of time that cold or flu germs can survive outside the body on an environmental surface, such as a doorknob, varies greatly. But the suspected range is from a few s … econds to 48 hours - depending on the specific virus and the type of surface. Flu viruses tend to live longer on surfaces than cold viruses do. Researchers have found that the microscopic infected droplets emitted in a cough or sneeze float around the air in large enough concentrations to spread disease. Breathing in airborne specks of virus found in a typical office, doctor’s surgery, plane or train could infect a person after just one hour. The discovery gives a ring of truth to the old advice that you should never visit a doctor’s waiting room unless you want to get sick. Query: how long does airborne flu germs stay alive",
"output": [
"Airborne flu germs stay alive for around 48 hours."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c009f18d80534f63867bee9465c08614",
"input": "In some cases, old nails do not completely fall off, and they act as a protective barrier to the nail bed until the new nail begins to grow. Throughout the growth process, it is important to keep the nail bed dry and clean to prevent infection until the nail grows back or the nail bed has hardened. If a toenail has completely fallen off, it can take up to 18 months for it to grow back. A toenail can take longer to grow back if the nail bed has permanent damage. In some cases, old nails do not completely fall off, and they act as a protective... How to build an acrylic nail on a toe that is missing a nail. - Duration: 7:13. sewcrafty1 163,019 views The location of the falling off nail will also determine how fast it will regrow. This explains why a detached toe nail grows slower than some detached nails in other locations. Why the formerly detached toenail grow in a weird shape? Some people found out that the formerly-detached nail may grow in a weird shape. In fact, this is not a thing to be cautious for. A regrow nail, especially with a big nail bed such as the one with toenail can grow in an unusual shape because the nail bed was ... How to build a gel nail on a toe that is missing a nail - Duration: 8:09. LCN Australia 246,030 views Will falling off toenail grow back? Most falling off toenail will indeed grow bask after fungal infection or severe injuries. However, this might take a long time. With the toe, an injured nail will grow back in around 6 month to a year period after detached. However, this might be various among people, depending on some factors. The nail grow from the matrix, which lies beneath the nails. Some people are more susceptible to this fungal infection, because: 1 They have diabetes or psoriasis. 2 They have a weakened immune system genetically or caused by certain other diseases. 3 They constantly bite the nails. 4 They have severe smoking habit. 5 They live with the climate where fungus can easily spread. 6 Traumatic injuries. 10 Answers. If a toenail has completely fallen off, it can take up to 18 months for it to grow back. A toenail can take longer to grow back if the nail bed has permanent damage. In some cases, old nails do not completely fall off, and they act as a protective barrier to the nail bed until the new nail begins to grow. A: If a toenail has completely fallen off, it can take up to 18 months for it to grow back. A toenail can take longer to grow back if the nail bed has permanent damage. Continue Reading If a toenail has completely fallen off, it can take up to 18 months for it to grow back. A toenail can take longer to grow back if the nail bed has permanent... If a toenail has completely fallen off, it can take up to 18 months for it to grow back. Query: how long does it take for a toenail to grow back",
"output": [
"If a toenail has completely fallen off, it can take up to 18 months for it to grow back."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-9ba7eafbdb08442885a9629b64731525",
"input": "How long does fatigue associated with the flu last - How long can fatigue last with the flu? Days to weeks. Fatigue aftrer influenza can last days to weeks. It depends on your general health, how il you were, and if you had any complcations such as sinus infection, or pneumonia. Some have a mild illness and may have minimal fatigue. Influenza (the flu) Fever Rare Usual, sudden onset 39º-40ºC (102.2-104ºF), lasts up to 3 to 4 days Headache Rare Usual, can be severe Aches and pains Sometimes mild Usual, often severe Fatigue and weakness Sometimes mild Usual, may last 2-3 weeks or more Extreme fatigue Unusual However, even after getting better, you can still feel tired, weak, and generally gloomy for several weeks. How Can You Treat the Flu? Although there is no outright cure for the flu, your doctor can prescribe an antiviral medication that can reduce the severity and longevity of symptoms. Some people are at increased risk for complications from influenza. 1 These people include: 2 the very young. 3 people 65 or older. 4 people with chronic illnesses, such as asthma, heart disease, HIV, or diabetes. 5 pregnant women. 6 people with a body mass index (BMI) of 40 or higher. Symptoms can begin about 1 to 4 days, or an average of 2 days, after a person is first exposed to the influenza virus. Fever and other symptoms can usually last up to 7 to 10 days, but the cough and weakness may last 1 to 2 weeks longer. What is the home treatment? If you get sick with influenza, home treatment can help ease symptoms. The QuickVue Influenza A+B Test is an accurate rapid flu test, that assists the doctor in making an accurate diagnosis. 1 How Long Do Flu Symptoms Last? According to the CDC, the flu typically lasts anywhere from a few days up to 2 weeks after it has been contracted. The length of the flu may be longer than 14 days for those in high risk categories for the illness. This may include: children under five, pregnant women, people over 50 years of age, and those living in assisted care or nursing homes. Advertisement. 1 Thanks for the replies. Yup had a couple of blood tests and nothing showed up. 2 Hi grumm - like you I had a full range of blood tests, and nothing has shown up. But apparently that is quite common with post-viral fatigue. 3 I was once diagnosed with PVF. A bout of the flu typically lasts one to two weeks, with severe symptoms subsiding in two to three days. However, weakness, fatigue, dry cough, and a reduced ability to exercise can linger for three to seven days. How Long Is the Flu Contagious? Although Vicks products cannot cure the flu, they can help you feel better. If you’re suffering from a sore throat, runny nose, minor aches and pains, headache, fever, or cough, try NyQuil and DayQuil to get some much-needed flu symptom relief both day and night. The earliest symptom of the flu is extreme tiredness and fatigue. It should be noted that everyone is different. You may not experience all of these symptoms, and some people may have the flu virus in their system but exhibit no symptoms. Query: how long can the tiredness from the flu last",
"output": [
"Influenza Fever lasts up to 3 to 4 days and severe Aches and pains may last 2-3 weeks or more."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-fbaaa8a39747431d8be235bb4464f2d8",
"input": "How long is THC detectable in urine? If you are a chronic marijuana user, THC can be detected in your system using a urine test for up to 12 weeks depending on the quantity as well as frequency of use. Note that if you just used marijuana once and stopped, the odds of passing a test within the first week are decent but you can still test positive for up to 30 days. The second is your level of hydration. The more fluids you ask your body to process, and the more urine you thus produce, the quicker THC metabolites will leave your body. Summing Up: How Long Does THC Stay In Your Urine? Drug urine tests for weed have all kinds of shortcomings and inadequacies. Setting aside for a moment the totally legitimate criticisms of workplace drug screenings, and debates about the efficacy and accuracy of the tests and the generally humiliating, privacy-invading feel of the whole operation, let’s drill down into one simple question: how long does THC stay in your urine? Overview: It’s… Complicated So how long does weed stay in your system? When it comes to saliva and blood, where active THC resides, weed stays in the body for a week, tops. But with urine, weed stays in your system much longer. So again, how long does weed stay in your system? It depends what the system deals with, THC or its waste metabolite, THC-COOH. If the system deals with active, or delta-9 THC, weed doesn’t stay around for very long. But if the system deals with eliminating inactive THC-COOH, weed sticks around for a longer time. Overview: How Long Does Weed Stay In Your System? Whether you’re new to cannabis and curious about how long the effects last and how long weed stays in your system, or facing a drug screening of some kind, knowing the specific ways weed interacts with your body and where signs of your using it show up is valuable information. THC has been found to be immediately detectable, with blood levels of THC reaching a peak at around 9.0 minutes into smoking. In the referenced study, it took between 3 to 12 hours for THC to drop below detection limits for the low-dose group and from 6 to 27 hours for the high-dose group of the study. However, the subjects of this study were not regular marijuana smokers, which explains why THC levels fell so quickly. If you are trying to pass a marijuana drug test of any sort, it is important that you understand how long it can remain detectable in your body. As five of these metabolites, with THC-COOH being the primary one, are targeted by a multi-billion dollar drug testing industry that specializes in trying to make a buck off of invading your privacy at every corner. This is type of test is used to detect current usage of drugs such as marijuana. It also helps to investigate car/work accidents. After a single use of marijuana, the blood test can produce positive results for 6-24 hours. However, for regular users, a blood test can produce positive results for up to 7 days or more. How long does THC stay in your urine after you eat edibles compared with smoking or vaping weed? Considering how different an edibles high can feel next to a high from smoking weed, one might expect the THC levels in urine to vary. In truth, they do. Edibles will make THC stay in your urine a bit longer, from several hours to an extra day. Query: how long does marijuana stay in urine?",
"output": [
"Marijuana stays up to 12 weeks in urine."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-76cb61b0567c40919078835e2793e0c2",
"input": "Injuries to the Lisfranc joint most commonly occur in automobile. accident victims, military personnel, runners, horseback riders, football players and participants of other contact sports, or. something as simple as missing a step on a staircase. stretching of the ligament), patients experience instability of the joint in the middle of the foot. • Fractures. A break in a bone in the Lisfranc joint can be either an avulsion fracture (a small. piece of bone is pulled off) or a break through the bone or bones of the midfoot. • Dislocations. The bones of the Lisfranc joint may be forced from their normal positions. Types of Lisfranc Injuries There are three types of Lisfranc injuries, which sometimes occur together: • Sprains. The Lisfranc ligament and other ligaments on the bottom of the midfoot are stronger than those on the top of the midfoot. Therefore, when they are weakened through a sprain (a Lisfranc Injuries The Lisfranc Joint The Lisfranc joint is the point at which the metatarsal bones (long bones that lead up to the toes) and the tarsal bones (bones in the arch) connect. The Lisfranc ligament is a tough band of tissue that joins two of these bones. This is important for maintaining proper alignment and strength of the joint. How Do Lisfranc Injuries Occur? Injuries to the Lisfranc joint most commonly occur in automobile accident victims, military personnel, runners, horseback riders, football players and participants of other contact sports, or something as simple as missing a step on a staircase. Lisfranc injuries occur as a result of direct or indirect forces to the Lisfranc Injury: Easy to Miss, Hard to Get Over. 2/12/2013. LAS VEGAS, NV - February 12, 2013 - Elite athletes like NFL quarterback Matt Schaub and wide receiver Santonio Holmes had productive seasons ended by the little-known and often overlooked Lisfranc injury, a serious foot injury that few have heard of and no one wants. LISFRANC INJURIES. The Lisfranc Joint. The Lisfranc joint is the point at. which the metatarsal bones. (long bones that lead up to the toes) and the tarsal bones (bones in the. arch) connect.The Lisfranc ligament. is a tough band of tissue that joins. two of these bones. It is important. for maintaining proper alignment. and strength of this joint. Lisfranc joint complex injury can occur as a result of direct or indirect trauma.3,11 Direct trauma occurs when an external force strikes the foot. With indirect trauma, force is transmitted to the stationary foot so that the weight of the body becomes a deforming force by torque, rotation or compression.2,5,7. The Lisfranc joint is the point at which the metatarsal bones (long bones that lead up to the toes) and the tarsal bones (bones in the arch) connect.The Lisfranc ligament is a tough band of tissue that joins two of these bones. It is important for maintaining proper alignment and strength of this joint. How do Lisfranc Injuries Occur? Lisfranc injuries occur as a result of direct or indirect forces to the foot.A direct force often involves something heavy falling on the foot. Indirect force commonly involves twisting the foot.This can happen, for example,when the foot catches on a stirrup while falling from a horse. Types of Lisfranc Injuries There are three types of Lisfranc injuries,which sometimes occur together: • Sprains.The Lisfranc ligament,as well as other ligaments on the bottom of the midfoot,are stronger than the ligaments on the top of the midfoot.Therefore, when they are weakened through (in severe injuries) • Bruising or blistering on the arch—this is an important sign of a Lisfranc injury.Bruising may also occur on the top of the foot. • Abnormal widening of the foot. Diagnosis Lisfranc injuries are sometimes mistaken for ankle sprains, making the diagnostic process very important.To arrive at a diagnosis, the foot and ankle surgeon will ask how the injury occurred.The surgeon will examine the foot and Query: how does a lisfranc injury happen",
"output": [
"Injuries to the Lisfranc joint most commonly occur in automobile accident victims, military personnel, runners, horseback riders, football players and participants of other contact sports, or something as simple as missing a step on a staircase."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-002a3560198146d9b15b052f88eb98e0",
"input": "Actual searching. How long does actual searching for an apartment take? If it’s your very first time looking at apartments, we recommend going on at least two outings, where you look at least 2-3 apartments each time. Ideally, you should look at 8-10 apartments. This way, you’ll get a feel for what’s in your price range and what a deal looks like. How long does it take for the application to be approved? 23458773845260`7553602 years and 755665-`36 day whitch is another 6351-63-647-65-1359869-53167farts and poo days Edit It can take 24 to 48 hours to get approved for an apartment.Sometimes they are busy and it can take a lot longer. You’re ready to make your move. But how long will it be before you’re set up in your new place? Here’s an apartment search timeline of the steps you'll take. How long do it take to get your nycha apartment? it took me 7 months to get my apartment in new york city housing, and that with me applying and interview and waiting for my background and everything, so don lose faith Apartment Search Timeline Last fall we estimated how much you’ll need to save up before you can move out. (Rule of thumb: If you save an amount equal to about 8-10% of your annual salary, you’ll be in good shape.) So, adding up all the steps shows that you can probably have the keys in hand within a month after you start your search, and be pretty well settled within 2-3 months. 1 Twitter. 2 Facebook. 3 Google. 4 Pinterest. 5 Email. 6 Print. The length of time it takes for a mortgage loan to get approved is highly dependent on the mortgage lender you are working with. Many large commercial banks can approve a mort … gage in as little as 48 hrs. however. It can take 24 to 48 hours to get approved for an apartment. Sometimes they are busy and it can take a lot longer. It can take 24 to 48 hours to get approved for an apartment. Sometimes they are busy and it can take a lot longer. How Long Will It Take? Apartment Search Timeline. Last fall we estimated how much you’ll need to save up before you can move out. (Rule of thumb: If you save an amount equal to about 8-10% of your annual salary, you’ll be in good shape.) So by now you’ve been saving for 4-5 months, and you’re ready to make your move. Query: how long does it take for you to get approved for an apartment",
"output": [
"It takes 24 to 48 hours to get approved for an apartment."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-2c023d10e2444a44ba741bb973f7a89f",
"input": "At least 3 million Americans are receiving special tax reform bonuses Thanks to the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act, at least 270 companies have already announced wage and salary increases, bonuses, or 401(k) match increases, according to a list compiled by Americans for Tax Reform. However, many Americans are shouldering the negative impacts of the health insurance tax, and relief should not be assigned on a case by case basis. Across the country, the health insurance tax hits 11 million households that purchase health care through the individual insurance market. Full List of Obama Tax Hikes. 1. A 156 percent increase in the federal excise tax on tobacco: On February 4, 2009, just sixteen days into his Administration, Obama signed into law a 156 percent increase in the federal excise tax on tobacco, a hike of 61 cents per pack. The median income of smokers is just over $36,000 per year. Obamacare Employer Mandate Tax (takes effect Jan. 2014): If an employer does not offer health coverage, and at least one employee qualifies for a health tax credit, the employer must pay an additional non-deductible tax of $2000 for all full-time employees. FedEx (Memphis, Tennessee) – commits more than $3.2 billion in wage increases, bonuses, pension funding due to the recent tax cuts. Pay raises, bonus increases, pension plan increases, and at least $1.5 billion in capital expenditures: Thanks to what has been dubbed as the ‘Netflix tax’ – a tax on online streaming services – some Americans are now seeing an increase in their monthly Netflix bill. To date, this new tax is levied in Chicago, North Carolina, Pennsylvania, Washington, and Florida. Next year, it is estimated that this number could increase to nearly half of the counties in the country. The health insurance tax is set to go into effect at the end of the year, and will total $14.3 billion in higher taxes in 2018. Clearly, this will contribute to the lack of coverage options. At least 3 million Americans are receiving special tax reform bonuses . Thanks to the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act, at least 270 companies have already announced wage and salary increases, bonuses, or 401(k) match increases, according to a list compiled by Americans for Tax Reform. The list, found at www.atr.org/list is being continuously updated. At least 3 million Americans are receiving special tax reform bonuses. This number does not even include those receiving pay increases or increased 401(k) contributions from their employer due to tax reform. Recent examples include: Mountaire Corporation (Millsboro, Delaware) – $1,000 or $500 bonuses based on length of service and increased 401(k) matches. The Congressional Budget Office recently estimated that six million American families will be liable for the tax, and as Americans for Tax Reform has pointed out, 100 percent of Americans filing a tax return (140 million filers) will be forced to submit paperwork to the IRS showing they had “qualifying” health insurance for every month of the tax year. Obamacare Tax on Medical Device Manufacturers (Tax hike of $20 bil/takes effect Jan. 2013): Medical device manufacturers 409,000 people in 12,000 plants across the country. This law imposes a new 2.3 percent excise tax on total sales, even if the respective company does not earn a profit. Query: how many americans are receiving bonuses or pay increases because of the recent tax cut",
"output": [
"3 million Americans are receiving bonuses or pay increases because of the recent tax cut."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1fb291c62c1440feb275e390be7f88d0",
"input": "The typical flu incubation period is between 24 hours and four days, with the average being two days. This means that if you are exposed to the influenza virus and become infected, you will start to experience flu symptoms anywhere between 24 hours and four days after the exposure. Another factor that contributes to how the flu spreads is when exactly you may be contagious. You may also wonder how long it takes to get sick after you have been exposed and how long you are contagious when you have it. Flu Incubation Period. The typical flu incubation period—the time between exposure and the start of symptoms—is between 24 hours and four days, with the average being two days. This means that if you are exposed to the influenza virus and become infected, you will start to experience flu symptoms anywhere between 24 hours and four days after the exposure. You may also wonder how long it takes to get sick after you have been exposed and how long you are contagious when you have it. Flu Incubation Period The typical flu incubation period—the time between exposure and the start of symptoms—is between 24 hours and four days, with the average being two days. This means that if you are exposed to the influenza virus and become infected, you will start to experience flu symptoms anywhere between 24 hours and four days after the exposure. Viral Shedding. Influenza spreads mainly by respiratory droplets that contain copies of the virus that have replicated in your body. Viral shedding, which correlates with infectivity, occurs starting approximately 1 day before symptoms appear and can continue for up to 10 days after symptoms develop. The most active period of contagion falls between 1 and 4 days after the start of symptoms, according to a May 2010 article published in the Journal of Infectious Disease. The study also found that in a small number of cases, infection transmission occurred before symptoms appeared. If you are exposed to someone with the flu, avoid close contact with the person, and wash your hands frequently. 1 Vitamin C: Although Vitamin C is widely used and has many benefits, there is no scientific proof that it will help you avoid an illness such as the flu or a cold. Tamiflu Actions. Tamiflu acts by reducing the number of cells in your body that are affected by the influenza virus. It does this by binding to a coating, called neuraminidase, that's found on the surface of the virus. Neuraminidase allows the virus to penetrate healthy cells, where it can then produce more copies of the virus. After symptoms start, adults can spread the virus for five to 10 days. However, the amount of virus spread decreases significantly after three to five days. Adults are most contagious with the flu from 24 hours before symptoms start to three to five days afterward. Flu symptoms generally don't come on gradually. 1 More often, people describe the onset of flu as if they were hit by a truck.. You feel fine, and then suddenly, an hour later, you feel like you can hardly move. 2 We know that it is highly contagious and can be spread before you even have symptoms. Preventing the Flu After Exposure. 1 Vitamin C: Although Vitamin C is widely used and has many benefits, there is no scientific proof that it will help you avoid an illness such as the flu or a cold. 2 Humidifiers: Evidence suggests that viruses such as the cold and flu spread more easily in cold, dry air. Query: how long incubation period influenza b",
"output": [
"The typical flu incubation period is between 24 hours and four days, with the average being two days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-29a620633001400990cdf4fb90d958ef",
"input": "That's not right. It goes on for 2 days and 49 minutes. Thank you for your time and understanding. I coach Baseball and we typically go one and a half hours or six innings which ever is first. After one and a half hours the home team will be at bat last. ^^ Noo. That's not right. It goes on for 2 days and 49 minutes. The average baseball game last about 2½ to 3 hours. Most games are regular 9 inning games. It's not rare, but is still seldom to find a game that ends before the 9th inning. …It is somewhat common, however, to see a game last longer than 9 innings. Asker's rating. 1 Games go a bit quicker than they did a few years ago, but the average game still is roughly 3 hours long. 2 Like others have said, most games last about 2.5 to 3 hours. 3 The average is something like 2 hours, 47 minutes or something, but it largely depends on the game. I'm going to go with 3 hours because i have been to many games. Also I see that every three innings equals one hour, so 9 innings would tally up to three hours. Now there could be games that could be five hours with rain delays and extra innings. But if you’re expecting baseball to cycle back as America’s favorite game, you’ll need to wait. And wait. And wait. A baseball game this season takes, on average, 3 hours and 8 minutes to play, through games of last week. At that pace, Major League Baseball will set a record for longest average game time in its history. Games are 13 minutes longer than they were in 2010 and 28 minutes longer than they were 30 years ago. In an age when you can have a movie delivered to your TV immediately, streaming over the Internet, baseball seems, at times, out of step. The 2015 Major League Baseball season is less than a week old, but there are signs that changes designed to increase the pace of play in the league are having an effect. In the 35 nine-inning games played through last night, the average length of a MLB game has been 2 hours, 52 minutes, according to Michael Teevan, spokesperson for Major League Baseball. In the comparable period from 2014, there were 33 nine-inning games that averaged 3 hours, 1 minute – 9 minutes more than so far this year. For the entire 2014 season, the average length of games was just one minute more than the opening stretch at 3:02. The pace of the game has slowed dramatically over the years. In 1981, the average length of games was 2:33. There is nothing wrong with long games if there is enough baseball to fill the hours. But a lot of today's 3-hour games should be 2 hours and 40 minutes. And the postseason often does not have games, but epochs. Asker's rating. 1 Games go a bit quicker than they did a few years ago, but the average game still is roughly 3 hours long. It is hard to give a definite time on a game, because a lot of it is going to depend on how the game is played. 2 Like others have said, most games last about 2.5 to 3 hours. But time of the game depends on nature of what's going on in the game. If the ballgame is a low scoring pitchers duel going into the late innings, the game will go by pretty fast as the pitchings coaches are less likely to make trips to the mound every other inning. Games go a bit quicker than they did a few years ago, but the average game still is roughly 3 hours long. It is hard to give a definite time on a game, because a lot of it is going to depend on how the game is played. If the final score is 1-0 and there are only a few hits/walks in the game, than it will last closer to 2.5 hours. However, if the final score is 15-10 and there are multiple people on base every inning than a game could last 4 hours. In the 35 nine-inning games played through last night, the average length of a MLB game has been 2 hours, 52 minutes , according to Michael Teevan, spokesperson for Major League Baseball. Query: how long does a typical pre-season baseball game last",
"output": [
"A baseball game this season takes, on average, 3 hours and 8 minutes to play, through games of last week."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-fd56531d83cd4eac98b3d5bb70da309c",
"input": "The Compassionate Allowance program helps people with severe disabilities get approved for Social Security Disability benefits more quickly. If you have one of the disabilities listed under the Compassionate Allowance program, your initial application may be processed in as little as twenty days. How Long Does It Take to Get Disability Benefits? The “3 to 5 Months” Wait Time, and Why It’s Disappointing The Social Security Administration website claims that applicants typically wait three to five months to receive a decision—but how long realistically should you expect to wait? If you want you can improve your chances before you apply; Initial Application. The initial application typically takes between 3 and 6 months; You complete a disability application; Local Social Security office reviews ap for technical issues; Office contact you for SSI interview / PERC (sometimes) Application transferred to Disability Determinations with the local Social Security office, so a. representative can review your information. If you cannot do business with us online, you can complete the enclosed Medical and Job. Worksheet and have it ready for your appointment. Will my disability benefits be reduced if I get workers’ compensation or other public disability benefits? How can a representative help me with my Social Security claim? Can I qualify for Social Security disability benefits if I get veterans’ benefits? As part of the disability or blindness determination, Social Security also looks at any work you are doing. Generally, if you are working and earning more than $1,170 per month (effective January 2017) we will not find you disabled. We call this substantial gainful activity. We apply a higher SGA if you are blind. How long does it take for a disability claim to be approved ? Without a doubt, this is a question that nearly every applicant for social security disability or SSI disability benefits will, at some point ask. By contrast, Social Security Disability Insurance (SSDI) takes much longer to receive. You can expect it to take three to five months after your completed application before you get a letter of determination, and another month or more before your payment is deposited. The Qualification Lag Some benefits of processing claims electronically include: 1 Disability decisions are processed in a more timely manner. 2 More cost effective processing enables more than one individual in the determination process to simultaneously view and work a case. How Long Does It Take To Get Disability Benefits When You First File? Initally disability claims, or applications for disability, are usually decided in under 120 days; though, occasionally some claims can be approved in under 30 days if the disability examiner has quick access to the medical evidence. Query: how long does it take to apply for disability",
"output": [
"Initally disability claims, or applications for disability, are usually decided in under 120 days; though, occasionally some claims can be approved in under 30 days if the disability examiner has quick access to the medical evidence."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ab1f7171a2154e8d90b48651756619f8",
"input": "(plural cast fossils) A fossil formed when an animal, plant, or other organism dies, its flesh decays and bones deteriorate due to chemical reactions; minerals gradually enter into the cavity, resulting in a cast, also called a mold fossil, which is in the general form of the original organism. Link/Cite. Fossil - Types. 1 Index fossils (also known as guide fossils, indicator fossils or zone fossils) are fossils used to define and identify geologic periods (or faunal stages). They work on the premise that, although different sediments may look different depending on the conditions under which they were deposited, they may include the remains of the same species of fossil. The mold is the impression in the rock it left. This is like pouring chocolate into a mold. When the chocolate hardens, it pops out as a chocolate cast, ready to eat. Examples: Fossil shells are often casts, and shell impressions on rock are often molds. A fossilized footprint is a mold. Plant fossils and trilobites are often found as casts and molds. There are two main types of fossils: body and trace fossils. 1 Body fossils - Body fossils are fossils where some portion of the actual organism's body remains as part of the fossil. This might be a tooth or piece of bone. 3. What is a cast fossil? 4. What is a true form fossil? Motivation: Ask students if they know what the different types of fossils are. Can they describe different kinds of fossils? Show the following types of fossils, taken from http://enchantedlearning.com/subjects/dinosaurs/dinofossils/Fossiltypes.html and discuss each one. The first picture is a fossil in amber, the second one is a trace fossil, the third is a mold fossil, and the last one is a cast fossil. Procedure: Write on the bottom of each fossil their name and if it is a cast or mold. Have students form two lists to describe what they see in the two 'fossils', hair, shape, texture, size, color, etc. Have students write on paper which fossil gives them the most information, mold or cast (3-D) and why. Cast and mold are a type of fossilization where the physical characteristics of organisms are impressed onto rocks, especially coarse porous rocks such as sandstones. Fossils are remains of life from the past. The most common kinds of fossil preservation are molds and casts. The activity will give students the chance to make modern day molds and casts. Goal: To teach students two common fossil types; a mold and a cast. Best Answer: C. A mold fossil is filled with water that contains minerals that harden into a stone replica. A is how you make a trace fossil B is how you make a ... There are four primary types of fossils: mold fossils, cast fossils, trace fossils and true form fossils. Cast fossils are formed when the imprints created by fossils, called mold fossils, are filled in by minerals over time. Definition of Cast Fossils. A cast fossil is a type of fossil indicator. Query: how is a cast fossil formed?",
"output": [
"Cast fossils are formed when the imprints created by fossils, called mold fossils, are filled in by minerals over time."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-18db509a7499454b8b0d85d3c2deb4f0",
"input": "The $1.6 billion destination resort Atlantis Sanya to open on Hainan Island in China. Waterpark features waterslides from ProSlide Technology The $1.6 billion destination resort Atlantis Sanya to open on Hainan Island in China. Located at Haitang Bay, Atlantis, Sanya Hainan will encompass 540,000 square meters of unparalleled excitement and larger than life experiences embodied in China’s newest five-star luxury resort. Book Atlantis Hotel, Sanya on TripAdvisor: See traveler reviews, 11 candid photos, and great deals for Atlantis Hotel at TripAdvisor. Atlantis Sanya makes its debut appearance at the ILTM Asia 2017 exhibition, held in Shanghai on June 5 to 8. As an entertainment destination, Atlantis Sanya Hainan will open at Haitang Bay, encompassi... Atlantis Sanya, the flagship resort on beautiful Hainan Island, has opened its doors and welcomed its first guests. The much-anticipated opening of China’s first integrated entertainment resort is set to enhance Hainan’s incredible tourism proposition. Located at Haitang Bay, Atlantis, Sanya Hainan will encompass 540,000 square meters of unparalleled excitement and larger than life experiences embodied in China's newest five-star luxury resort. Located on the Haitang Bay National Coast, Atlantis Sanya is the first Atlantis resort in China, joining the flagship Atlantis, The Palm in Dubai as well as The Royal Atlantis Resort & Residences in Dubai and Atlantis, Ko Olina in Hawaii, both currently in development. Atlantis Sanya along the Haitang Bay National Coast, PRC. is funded by Fosun International Limited and managed by Kerzner International Holdings Limited. It will be the first Atlantis resort in China. On June 25 a fire broke out at the Atlantis Sanya construction site. Fortunately, no one was injured, the fire was quickly extinguished, and the fire caused minimal damage. Soon after the fire broke out a local news reporter was on the scene and filmed this video of the fire: http://v.qq.com/x/page/u0518wnv90s.html. According to some construction workers it was just garbage on site being burned but other construction workers say that the fire did cause damage such as burnt bathtubs. Atlantis Sanya has now opened the integrated entertainment destination resort, inviting guests in May 2018. With the full support of the resort’s owning company, Fosun International, Atlantis Sanya’s by invitation-only trade, media, and partner roadshow event in Beijing will introduce unique guest packages for their most luxurious and unique suites, memorable experiences and extraordinary amenities. Query: atlantis hainan",
"output": [
"The $1.6 billion destination resort Atlantis Sanya to open on Hainan Island in China."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b3bdbd32072e479aa6756195cf9f50f0",
"input": "Average cost to build the average hotel is about $22.2 million (325 square feet. Room: 13'x25', full bathroom. 115 rooms). Find here detailed information about build a hotel costs. Average cost to build the average hotel is about $22.2 million (325 square feet. Room: 13'x25', full bathroom. 115 rooms). Includes the option to view the costs of the 18 other countries presented, typical for their different construction requirements. View a typical hotel cost schedule The cost schedule shown is typical of the cost information we provide on the members site. We have conducted our own market research amongst overseas buyers in Spain that suggests that people are prepared to pay between 20% and 30% more for an energy efficient building. An energy efficient design needn’t cost any more and it could add substantially to the value of your investment. A definition and explanation of building costs or construction costs, how RICS is involved with building costs, and a list of building costs websites from a wide range of countries. Construction Cost per Square Foot 4-7 Story Apartment Building At the lowest end of the cost spectrum is the 4-7 story apartment building. Similar to the Hotels, taking advantage of the vertical construction, apartment buildings also are not required to have the variety of functions that are necessary in a hotel. Data source: Reed Construction Data – RSMeans/Charts: Reed Construction Data – CanaData. 1 Construction Cost per Square Foot of 2-3 Story Motel. 2 Construction Cost per Square Foot for 4-7 Story Hotel. 3 Construction Cost per Square Foot 4-7 Story Apartment Building. Anybody contemplating buying a property in Spain now needs to have therapy. Renting is the only sensible way to live here now. Trouble is nobody believes you. After 30 years here, and yes, I do speak Spanish, my advice is save yourself a lot of grief and think again. Spain Accommodation Cost. Accommodation in Spain would cost you around 20-50 euros if you’re staying in backpacker hostels. If hotels is your thing then be ready to pay more. I was visiting friends during my entire trip so I didn’t really spend anything for accommodation. Spain Party Cost. It’s not that expensive to go out in Spain. A glass of beer with tapas would cost you between 1.5 – 2.5 euros. Spanish people also love to have a botellon which is basically a group of people drinking outside in public, usually in parks. An extra few thousand euros spent on a purchase may represent better value for money than spending the money on building work. It’s often cheaper to buy a restored or partly restored property rather than a ruin in need of total restoration, unless you’re going to do most of the work yourself. Cost model: Hotels By Phil Churchman of Davis Langdon, an Aecom company 2013-04-18T06:00:00 Converting an existing building is often the best option for opening new hotels. Query: average cost of building a hotel in spain",
"output": [
"The average cost of building a hotel in Spain is 1.5 to 2.5 euros."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1000c8790f4e4c908dc036edc1c47e34",
"input": "Of course, questions of how long do hard boiled eggs last in the fridge and how long are boiled eggs good for depend upon proper storage. But remember, eggs, like a lot of other dairy products (actually eggs are technically classified as animal products… but, since they are purchased in the dairy section of stores we listed them under dairy), usually have a sell by date and not a use by date. Hard boiling eggs can make eggs transportable as a snack on the go or part of a packed lunch. Storing either raw or hard boiled eggs properly is important for food quality and safety concerns. Both raw and hard boiled eggs should be stored in the refrigerator. How long raw and hard boiled eggs last in the fridge Even though some refrigerators have built in egg shelves on the refrigerator door, eggs should be kept inside the refrigerator. Eggs should be kept at 40 degrees or lower, so if they are stored in the inside of the refrigerator they are more likely to stay at a constant temperature. Interesting Facts about Hard Boiled Egg Shelf Life: 1 The term hard boiled eggs is actually misleading because eggs should never be subjected to a hard rigorous boil, it should be a soft gentle boil. 2 Salmonella is killed by the heat of cooking (once the yolk and white are both firm). 3 Boiling removes the protective coating on the egg shell. Refrigerator Storage: Refrigerate eggs at 40°F or less. Store them in their original carton on an inside shelf and away from pungent foods. The temperature on an inside shelf remains more constant than one on the door, which is opened and closed frequently. After hard boiling eggs, they should be stored in the refrigerator as well. According to the American Egg Board, hard boiled shelled eggs can last up to one week if they have been kept in the refrigerator. If hard boiled eggs are peeled, eat them the same day as when they are peeled. Interesting Facts about Hard Boiled Egg Shelf Life: 1 The term hard boiled eggs is actually misleading because eggs should never be subjected to a hard rigorous boil, it should be a soft gentle boil. A more proper term for hard boiled eggs is hard cooked eggs, although that is less common. Raw eggs that have been removed from their shells should be refrigerated in a tightly covered container. Refrigerated whole egg yolks should be covered with water to prevent them from drying out; drain before using. The following chart shows how long hard-boiled eggs and raw eggs last when stored in the refrigerator. Defrost frozen eggs overnight in the refrigerator. Egg yolks thicken (or gel) when frozen. To hinder gel formation, beat in either 1/8 teaspoon salt or 1-1/2 teaspoons sugar or corn syrup per ¼ cup yolks (4 Large) before freezing. Indicate “with salt” (main dishes) or “with sugar” (desserts) on the label. The following chart shows how long hard-boiled eggs and raw eggs last when stored in the freezer. Eggs: Refrigerator (35°F to 40°F) Raw whole eggs (in shell) 4 to 5 weeks beyond the pack date or about 3 weeks after purchase: Raw whole eggs (slightly beaten) Up to 2 days: Raw egg whites: Up to 4 days: Raw egg yolks: Up to 2 days: Hard-boiled eggs (in shell) Up to 1 week: Hard-boiled eggs (peeled) Use the same day for best quality Freezer Storage: If you have more eggs than you can use within a few weeks, you can freeze them, out of their shells. How Long Do Hard Boiled Eggs Last? How long do hard boiled eggs last? Hard boiled eggs last about 7 days in the fridge, but can spoil quicker if not handled properly. Hard boiled eggs are fresh whole eggs that have been boiled for about 10 minutes. Chicken eggs are the most commonly used choice for hard boiling. Because of their relatively low-cost, high protein, versatility and portability hard boiled eggs are a popular protein choice. Query: how long to hard boiled eggs last in the fridge",
"output": [
"ard boiled eggs last about 7 days in the fridge."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-88fd2f38e4ca45aca77d792e5cdb7c48",
"input": "Various signs and symptoms to identify a dry socket are: 1 Excruciating pain 3-4 days after tooth extraction. 2 Exposed bones under gums. 3 An empty socket at the location of tooth extraction. 4 Partial or complete loss of blood clot. 5 Radiating pain from the socket to eye, ear, or neck on the same side from where, the tooth has been extracted. Pain that starts to get worse after two days is considered abnormal and you may want to see your dentist. This could be a sign of “dry socket”. Dry Socket. A dry socket occurs when the blood clot for healing becomes dislodged or doesn’t form. In that case, the bone and fine nerve endings are not protected and exposed to air, food, and liquids. Dry socket delays the healing process and can be very painful. If you suspect dry socket, see your dentist. For example, after evaluating the outcome of 400 wisdom tooth extractions, Sweet (1979) [page references] determined that: Patients who smoked 10 cigarettes a day experienced a more than fourfold rate of dry socket formation (12% vs 2.6%). The rate for patients who smoked 20 cigarettes daily was 20% higher. If the extracted tooth is shallow-rooted premolar, an incisor or a canine, and it has no major infection, an immediate implant placement can be performed. If the extracted tooth is a molar with a healthy supporting bone, an immediate-delayed implant placement procedure (about two weeks to three months) can be performed. If the extracted tooth has a bone loss from disease in the gum, then a delayed or late implant (three months or more after tooth extraction) can be conducted.Learn more about Dental. Here are some correlations: 1 Having a back tooth pulled (especially a molar) typically poses a greater risk than a front tooth. 2 The risk of dry socket formation is 10 times higher when a lower tooth is extracted, as opposed to an upper one. It can be painful for days while the body walls off and isolates the dead bone. The answer to your question is that there is always a risk of getting a dry socket if the blood clot is disturbed, and that risk continues with decreasing likelihood for the twenty one days while wound healing and closure occurs. If you are a regular tobacco user refrain from smoking for the next 3-4 days as smoking increases your chances of getting a dry socket as well as an infection. After your tooth has been extracted, healing will take some time. Within 3 to 14 days, your sutures should fall out or dissolve. For sutures that are non-resorbable, your doctor will schedule a follow-up appointment to remove the stitches for you. The first thing I did after I got 2 teeth extracted was to go to friends house and smoke weed. The effect anesthesia was fading and weed really helped. I also smoked the next day after getting 2 other teeth extracted. Nothing happened. I had no idea about this thing called dry socket and am happy I didn't get it. If I knew, I might not have smoked. Pain alone is not necessarily an indication that you have a dry socket. However, if you feel increased pain two days after the surgery in addition to other dry socket symptoms, your socket is probably dry. Usually, a dry socket heals itself after five days and the pain disappears. I haven't because I don't want the dry sockets. Have the chances of forming a dry socket decreased significantly enough to smoke after 48 hours of wisdom teeth extraction is my main question. age 18-24. Query: how long after getting a tooth extracted can you get a dry socket",
"output": [
"It takes 3 to 4 days after getting a tooth extracted can you get a dry socket."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0cbc173eef484da1b89d7ac89cc7fc7b",
"input": "While no one knows the answer for sure (not scientifically proven) below are some hypotheses: 1 for visibility, to makes it easy to locate and identify other individuals of the species. 2 for denoting sexual maturity, versus immature eagles, which lack the white head. 3 for indicating dominance, like top-dog. The bald eagle is a powerful flier, and soars on thermal convection currents. It reaches speeds of 56–70 km/h (35–43 mph) when gliding and flapping, and about 48 km/h (30 mph) while carrying fish. Its dive speed is between 120–160 km/h (75–99 mph), though it seldom dives vertically. Bald Eagle Behavior. 1 They typically build their nests high up in a tree, almost always with commanding views of their surroundings (all the better to avoid and see their enemies) 2 They typically build their nests near water (all the easier to spot and access food) The bald eagle is closely related to a species called the golden eagle. The bald eagle is physically different from the golden eagle. The bald eagle has a bigger head and a bigger beak, and its legs do not have feathers. A: Eagles do blink by closing the outer upper and lower lids like we do. The nictitating membrane is a clear membrane that is moved back and forth over the surface of the eye often times very rapidly. Field MarksHelp. 1 Zoom In. Bald EagleAdult Very large raptor with long, broad wings. 2 Zoom In. Bald EagleAdult Large, barrel-chested raptor. 3 Zoom In. Bald EagleAdult Very large and heavy-bodied raptor. 4 Zoom In. Bald EagleAdults feeding chick Adults with white heads and yellow eyes. 5 Zoom In. Bald Eagles In United States History. 1 In 1776, the eagle began to appear on coins in the United States. 2 On June 20th, 1782, the bald eagle appeared on the Great Seal of the U.S. and became the national bird. 3 In 1782, there were about 100,000 nesting eagles in North America. The bald eagle can live a long time in captivity if well cared for, but does not mate well, even under the best care. The national bird of the United States. The bald eagle is the national bird of the United States. It appears on most of its seals, including the Seal of the President of the United States. The skeleton of a bald eagle weighs 0.5 lbs (250 to 350 grams), which is only 5 to 6% of the total weight of the bird. The bones are extremely light, because they are hollow, and the feathers weigh twice as much as the bones (American Bald Eagle Information). The bald eagle’s average body temperature is 106 degrees Fahrenheit (41 degrees Celsius). Bald eagles have a massive wingspread of about 7 feet (2.13 meters), according to the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service. Their bodies are much smaller, though, at only 34 to 43 inches (86 to 109 centimeters). Normally, bald eagles weigh 6.5 to 14 pounds (3 to 6.5 kilograms). Query: how does a bald eagle get a its speed",
"output": [
"The bald eagle reaches speeds of 56–70 km/h when gliding and flapping, and about 48 km/h while carrying fish. Its dive speed is between 120–160 km/h, though it seldom dives vertically."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-113bc9630f024d6f9e78e37a527f59b3",
"input": "In designing the system, it will help to refer to the figure of the rock cycle shown below. In this figure, the boxes represent different kinds of rocks and the arrows represent processes that not only transport materials from one reservoir to another, they also transform the rocks, causing them to change their form. The rock cycle is the transformation of one type of rock to another through heat, pressure, weathering and erosion. First proposed by James Hutton in the late 18th century, the cycle is an ongoing... The rock cycle is the transformation of one type of rock to another through heat, pressure, weathering and erosion. Discover how igneous, metamorphic, and sedimentary rocks are created and how they can be recycled as part of the rock cycle in the earth's crust. Learn About Rock Cycle in the Earth's Crust Search the site GO Phosphorus is an essential element. It is a vital part of our energy supply and our DNA. Without it, we living organisms could not grow or function. The phosphorus cycle is a limited cycle that travels from rock to ground or water to producers to animals. Some of the phosphorus gets lost at the bottom of the ocean. Therefore, the phosphorus cycle is not a complete cycle. The Phosphorus Cycle - Definition Phosphorus is an essential element to all life. It is an important part of the ATP molecule that stores and gives every cell its energy. Your next lesson will play in 10 seconds. 1 0:09 Introduction. 2 0:37 Rock Cycle. 3 2:23 Igneous Rock. 4 4:00 Sedimentary Rock. 5 5:55 Metamorphic Rock. 6 7:12 Lesson Summary. The Rock Cycle We know that all three rock types can be turned into metamorphic rocks but all three types can also be changed through the rock cycle. All rocks can be weathered and eroded into sediments, which can then form sedimentary rock. rock cycle. noun. 1. another name for geological cycle. Contemporary definitions for rock cycle. noun. the process by which rocks are formed, altered, destroyed, and reformed by geological processes and which is recurrent, returning to a starting point. In a true cycle, all the phosphorus will continue to circulate through the cycle. However, in the actual phosphorus cycle, some of the phosphorus will get lost. The phosphorus that is returned to the ocean may sink to the bottom and become inaccessible and unusable. Rock Cycle Vocabulary. Lava: liquid rock at or above the Earth’s surface; Magma: liquid rock below the Earth’s surface; Erosion: the process of wearing away rocks; Sediment: particles of eroded rock or plant and animal debris; Learn More All about Rock Cycle. Here’s a great video for kids all about rock cycle: Query: how does the rock cycle works simple define",
"output": [
"The rock cycle is the transformation of one type of rock to another through heat, pressure, weathering and erosion."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ff81237e93084e3baaa65837ac216001",
"input": "You can count on AutoZone for competitive pricing in the categories you purchase the most, to help you maximize your profits. Pricing Program. Designed to help you increase your profits, by saving you more when you buy more. Category Program. For the jobs you do most; For the seasonal and everyday jobs; Bulk Discounts You can depend on AutoZone for high quality parts- the brands you want from the manufacturers you trust. Hard Parts, Shop Supplies, and Equipment You need to service your customers. Autozone Car Battery Prices and Installation Autozone battery prices vary based on the type of battery needed, the specific brand and the Autozone location. Currently the basic battery prices at Autozone are between $69.00 and $239.00. Autozone battery instillation is usually free especially during the warranty period (average warranties are between three months and three years), and free disposal is also offered. Autozone Car Battery Prices and Installation. Autozone battery prices vary based on the type of battery needed, the specific brand and the Autozone location. Currently the basic battery prices at Autozone are between $69.00 and $239.00. We are constantly developing innovative new products for our commercial customers like Duralast Gold Cmax Brake Pads and Duralast Professional Batteries. Industry-Leading Coverage With more than 750,000 product level SKUs in over 70 distinct categories. You can depend on AutoZone for high quality parts- the brands you want from the manufacturers you trust. Hard Parts, Shop Supplies, and Equipment. You need to service your customers. Private Label Products. Made by industry leading manufacturers. eBay determines this price through a machine learned model of the product's sale prices within the last 90 days. eBay determines trending price through a machine learned model of the product’s sale prices within the last 90 days. New refers to a brand-new, unused, unopened, undamaged item, and Used refers to an item that has been used previously. Autozone Car Batteries Autozone is a popular American store that is the second-largest retailer of automotive parts and accessories in the United States. The company was founded back in 1979. Autozone currently has more than 5000 locations across the US, Mexico, and Brazil. You can count on AutoZone for competitive pricing in the categories you purchase the most, to help you maximize your profits. Pricing Program Designed to help you increase your profits, by saving you more when you buy more. Save autozone battery charger to get e-mail alerts and updates on your eBay Feed. Query: autozone car battery price",
"output": [
"Currently the basic battery prices at Autozone are between $69.00 and $239.00."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-1b3c8df492704f049beada403680c0c3",
"input": "Closest Airport to Gaston, SC. The closest airport to Gaston is Columbia Metropolitan Airport (CAE). Distance from Columbia Metropolitan Airport to Gaston, SC is 13,7 kilometers (8,5 miles). Columbia Metropolitan Airport is located approximately 10,4 kilometers (6,5 miles) southwest of Columbia and about 11,8 kilometers (7,3 miles) southeast of Lexington. Get directions, maps, and traffic for Gaston, SC. Check flight prices and hotel availability for your visit. driving time from Newberry, SC to Columbia, SC; reverse drive distance from Columbia, SC to Newberry, SC; hotels near Columbia, SC; airports near Columbia, SC; airlines flying to Columbia, SC; time difference between Newberry, SC and Columbia, SC Gaston, South Carolina South Carolina Richland County Gaston Gaston is located in Lexington County just 20 minutes from downtown Columbia and the University of South Carolina. The town hosts the annual Collard Festival each year in November. Columbia, in neighboring Richland County, is the largest city near Gaston. Here are maps of the Columbia area and the Lexington area. General Information, Jobs. Weather – Current conditions – 10-day forecast; Job openings; Lexington County links. Recreation, Entertainment, Tourism. Arts, entertainment, dining – Columbia events Driving distance from Newberry, SC to Columbia, SC The total driving distance from Newberry, SC to Columbia, SC is 41 miles or 66 kilometers. Your trip begins in Newberry, South Carolina. It ends in Columbia, South Carolina. SCIWAY's directory of Gaston, South Carolina websites. Learn about Gaston history, attractions, jobs, schools and colleges, churches, businesses, government, and much more ... all from one well-organized page. A car with an MPG of will need 0.70 gallons of gas to cover the route between Columbia, SC and Gaston, SC. The estimated cost of gas to go from Columbia to Gaston is $1.84. During the route, an average car will release 13.78 pounds of CO 2 to the atmosphere. Your carbon footprint is 0.91 pounds of CO 2 per mile. Route map between Columbia and Gaston Show Map Report an error There are 13.24 miles from Columbia to Gaston in southwest direction and 15 miles (24.14 kilometers) by car, following the US-21 and US-176 and US-321 route. Columbia and Gaston are 20 minutes far apart, if you drive non-stop. This is the fastest route from Columbia, SC to Gaston, SC. Columbia, SC and Gaston, SC are in the same time zone (Eastern Daylight Time). Current time in both locations is 5:21 pm. Driving distance from Newberry, SC to Columbia, SC. The total driving distance from Newberry, SC to Columbia, SC is 41 miles or 66 kilometers. Your trip begins in Newberry, South Carolina. It ends in Columbia, South Carolina. If you are planning a road trip, you might also want to calculate the total driving time from Newberry, SC to Columbia, SC so you can see when you'll arrive at your destination. Gaston is a town in Lexington County, South Carolina, United States. The population was 1,645 at the 2010 census. It is part of the Columbia, South Carolina Metropolitan Statistical Area. Gaston is located at 33°48′57″N 81°6′3″W / 33.81583°N 81.10083°W / 33.81583; -81.10083 (33.815927, -81.100937). According to the United States Census Bureau, the town has a total area of 3.4 square miles (8.9 km²), all of it land. Query: how far is gaston from columbia",
"output": [
"There are 13.24 miles from Columbia to Gaston in southwest direction and 15 miles or 24.14 kilometers by car, following the US-21 and US-176 and US-321 route."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d791276322c0445c82c583e93a5425fd",
"input": "Check out the picture of 3mb on drew’s Wiki page. He looks like a different person. Theodore Teddy Long, former manager, general manager and creator of impromptu tag team matches. Camacho, former tag team partner of Hunico (who is now Sin Cara), last seen on NXT feuding with Adam Rose. Drew McIntyre is out to fulfil a prophecy against NXT Champion Bobby Roode at Takeover: Brooklyn III - Duration: 3 minutes, 39 seconds. The latest update on Drew McIntyre confirms that we won’t be seeing the former WWE NXT Champion for a long, long time. SmackDown: Teddy Long strips Drew McIntyre of the - Duration: 3 minutes, 50 seconds. Drew McIntyre, who was last seen as part of the cult-favorite 3MB and was at one point in the storyline Vince McMahon's Chosen One and former Intercontinental Champion. He was also troubled by some out-of-the-ring issues during his early days in the company. Jinder Mahal, another member of 3MB. Although Heath Slater has not been released (as of yet), 3MB is officially dead. Featured Videos. Drew McIntyre makes his WWE debut against Zack Ryder: SmackDown, October 12, 2007 In his WWE debut, Drew McIntyre battles a long-haired Zack Ryder on SmackDown. Drew McIntyre vs. Wesley Blake: WWE NXT, May 24, 2017 Two of NXT's roughest competitors go toe-to-toe as Drew McIntyre slugs it out with Wesley Blake. Drew McIntyre promises to take back our NXT from Bobby Roode: WWE NXT, July 26, 2017 - Duration: 2 minutes, 46 seconds. WWE releases Drew McIntyre, Teddy Long and 8 others tweet share Reddit Pocket Flipboard Email It used to be a tradition that there would be a big mass release of unused or unpopular WWE talent every year almost immediately following WrestleMania. NXT TakeOver: WarGames stole the show during Survivor Series weekend, and Drew McIntyre’s WWE NXT Championship match with Andrade “Cien” Almas contributed towards said show-stealing. Almas defeated McIntyre in somewhat-shocking fashion, and while the match served its purpose in crowning a new NXT Champion, the bigger story here was the biceps injury McIntyre suffered during the closing moments of the match. Query: how long is drew mcintyre out",
"output": [
"Drew McIntyre is out for 3 minutes, 39 seconds."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-f3258f91a9904d708daed8447841cf7f",
"input": "Alcohol Drug Test Products. 1 Booze Be Gone. 2 Booze Be Gone Value Pack. 3 Booze Be Gone and Keychain Tester Combo. 4 Keychain Alcohol Tester with Bright Red LED Flashlight. 5 AfterBuzz Hangover Relief. How long does OxyContin stay in the body? The oxycodone contained in OxyContin can be detected in urine for 1-3 days. Oxycodone is metabolized to oxymorphone, so these may both be present in the urine of oxycodone users. OxyContin and addiction How long will oxycodone stay in your urine - How long will oxycodone stay in your blood urine and placenta? Halflife. Any medication especially narcotics are eliminated from ones body depending on the drugs hale-life. It usually will take over 5 half-lifes to allow a medication to be fully eliminated from the body including urine. Oxycodone's half-life is 4.5 hours. Different types of tests call for different detection times. Oxycodone is detectable in blood tests for roughly 24 hours, in saliva tests for 1-4 days, urine tests 3-4 days and hair tests up to 90 days. This is backed up by findings done in a 2014 study by Ron R. Flegal for SAMSHA. Hydrocodone and other opiates will metabolize quite fast. It can be detected in the urine or blood for a day; even two days, depending on your... oxycodone, drug test Details: Drug Test - if I havent took any pills in over a month and a half and I take one oxycodone 10 325 and drank some liqour wit it how long will it stay in my system? Answer this Question Report Favorite Many people are unaware about these interesting facts related to oxycodone: 1 All the other narcotics should be stopped immediately when the patient is taken extended release oxycodone. 2 Oxycodone should not be taken on an empty stomach. 3 Do not crush or open the capsule of extended release oxycodone. How Long Does Oxycodone Stay in Your System? Quick Overview Oxycodone’s half-life, or the time that it takes for half of the drug to exit your body, can range from 3 ½ to 5 ½ hours. If you've been taking OxyContin, Roxicodone, Oxecta, Endone, OxyIR, or Oxynorm, you've been taking oxycodone. Should you be concerned about drug tests? Under what circumstances might you be tested for oxycodone/OxyContin? How long does oxycodone/OxyContin stay in your system? We'll try to answer all these questions and more as simply as possible. Oxycodone/OxyContin and Urine Tests. Many prescription opioids won't be detected on standard 5-panel urine tests. Assuming that you'll be specifically tested for Oxycodone/OxyContin, you can fail a urine test for 3-4 days after your last dose. This will be slightly shorter for a saliva test. It's not clear what the detection time would be for a standard opiates test. Query: how long oxy stay in urine",
"output": [
"Oxycodone is detectable in urine tests within 3 to 4 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-bed6e4e5d1dd498f928fdc351314da87",
"input": "Law School. If you’re able to enroll in law school as a full-time student, you can expect to complete the program in three years. Attending law school on a part-time basis is an option at many law schools, but it does mean you’ll be studying for four rather than three years. Some states, such as Colorado, don’t even require that you attend law school. How long does it take after submitting an application to get accepted at USA universities? How long does it take to get a law degree in the UK? Why does law school take so long to finish? Students wishing to become attorneys often ask the question, How long does it take to get a law degree? The answer to that question is varied depending on the path a law student chooses to take. The first step in the educational timeline starts when obtaining a bachelors degree. Soon after graduating from, law school, you’ll need to sit for the bar exam in your state, or in the state where you want to practice law. Studying for the bar exam will likely consume two to three months of your time and will take an additional few months to get the results. Most people who pursue a career as a lawyer generally take the traditional path of earning a bachelor’s degree followed by three years of law school. The amount of time this actually will take you depends on whether you attend school full-time and pass the bar exam on the first try. Next it depends on whether you're a Presumptive Admit, Presumptive Deny, or Discretionary Admit. Presumptive admits and denies can take 2 to 4 weeks after the application is ready for review, depending on the backlog. Once, in the third week of February about 15 years ago, I was visiting Duke Law School's admissions office. What does Yale Law School look for in applicants? How hard is it to get into Harvard Law School? How long does it take to become a lawyer, from once you start law school till you start practising? What score do you need to have to get accepted into law school? Why did it take this long for schools to make laws in schools? This portion of the process can take up to a year due to study time and available testing dates. A student would do well to begin this process while they are earning their undergraduate degree. The final phase of a law degree is law school. Law school programs are typically three years. Unlike a student's undergraduate degree, law school does not allow a student to choose their own pace. Law students are required by most law schools to complete the law program in three years. Under special circumstances, an extension may be permitted but that is not the norm. Taking all the above factors into account, the shortest path to law school is approximately six years. , J.D. 35 years in law school admissions. Published, quoted, wined and dined. It depends on how good your application is, whether you had an admissions consultant line things up, and whether the school needs money. Law school takes 3 years to earn your J.D. if you're going full time. Then, you have the option of completing the LLM program, which is an extra year to get specialized in a particular field of law. If going part time as a night student, it will take 4 years to earn a J.D.. Three years. Four years at least. Query: how long does law school take?",
"output": [
"A Law School takes three years to complete."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-777a10e9f600426c97c873c20d060a3b",
"input": "This topic will review the treatment of Wilson disease. The epidemiology, pathogenesis, clinical manifestations, and diagnosis of Wilson disease are discussed separately. (See Wilson disease: Epidemiology and pathogenesis and Wilson disease: Clinical manifestations, diagnosis, and natural history and Wilson disease: Diagnostic tests.) Serum concentration of copper and of non-ceruloplasmin-bound copper. Most individuals with Wilson disease have a subnormal serum copper concentration that is proportional to the serum ceruloplasmin concentration. Note: Serum copper is low in healthy newborns. But in people with Wilson's disease, copper isn't eliminated properly and instead accumulates, possibly to a life-threatening level. When diagnosed early, Wilson's disease is treatable, and many people with the disorder live normal lives. Wilson's disease care at Mayo Clinic Molecular genetic studies that use DNA from blood cells to search for patterns of differences or similarities, a procedure called haplotype analysis may establish whether a full sibling of an affected patient has Wilson disease, is a carrier of the Wilson disease gene, or is not a carrier. With Wilson disease, the copper builds up in your liver, and it releases the copper directly into your bloodstream. This can cause damage to your brain, kidneys, and eyes. Wilson disease is present at birth, but symptoms usually start between ages 5 and 35. It first attacks the liver, the central nervous system or both. The most characteristic sign is a rusty brown ring around the cornea of the eye. A physical exam and laboratory tests can diagnose it. Treatment is with drugs to remove the extra copper from your body. Wilson disease is caused by mutations in the ATP7B gene. This gene provides instructions for making a protein called copper-transporting ATPase 2, which plays a role in the transport of copper from the liver to other parts of the body. A person’s chances of having Wilson disease increase if a health care provider has diagnosed one or both parents with the condition. What are the signs and symptoms of Wilson disease? The signs and symptoms of Wilson disease vary, depending on what organs of the body are affected. Wilson disease is present at birth; however, the signs and symptoms of the disease do not appear until the copper builds up in the liver, the brain, or other organs. When people have signs and symptoms, they usually affect the liver, the central nervous system, or both. Points to Remember. 1 Wilson disease prevents the body from getting rid of extra copper. 2 Wilson disease first attacks the liver, the central nervous system, or both. 3 Anyone with unexplained liver disease or neurologic symptoms with evidence of liver disease should be screened for Wilson disease. WD, Wilson disease. Fromthe1DivisionofGastroenterology,HepatologyandNutrition,TheHospital for Sick Children, and Departments of Paediatrics, Medicine and Pharmacology, University of Toronto, Toronto, Ontario, Canada, and 2Department of Medicine. and Surgery, Division of Digestive Diseases, Section of Transplant and Immunol-. ogy, Yale University Medical Center, New Haven, CT. Copyright © 2008 by the American Association for the Study of Liver Diseases. Either the liver or the brain can be harmed first, with signs as early as 4 years, or as late as 70 years of age. 1 Symptoms of liver disease include: 2 Jaundice, which is when the skin or the white part of the eye turns yellow. 3 Fatigue. 4 Loss of appetite. 5 Swelling in the abdomen. 6 Easy bruising. Query: how is wilson's disease treated",
"output": [
"Wilson disease is treated with drugs to remove the extra copper from your body."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-fdfd0701390540d79073000f30c0a7aa",
"input": "These assays can yield results in approximately 1-8 hours depending upon the assay. Notably, the detection of influenza viral RNA by these assays does not necessarily indicate detection of viable infectious virus or on-going influenza viral replication. It is important to note that not all assays have been cleared by the FDA for diagnostic use. The signs and symptoms of influenza can vary by age, immune status, and presence of underlying medication conditions. Uncomplicated influenza can include any or all of these signs and symptoms: fever, muscle aches, headache, lack of energy, dry cough, sore throat, nasal congestion, and possibly runny nose. Dr. Robert Vanzant used the quick test for flu in January and February, but he never expected to bring it out again as we head into summer. This is not flu season, so if someone has the flu this time of year we have to consider swine flu, said Dr. Van Zant, a family practice physician. He demonstrated the flu quick test for us by sticking a cotton swab up both nostrils. Both sides and it's gonna tickle. I'm digging for china here, said Dr. Vanzant. After swabbing both nostrils, the swab sits in liquid for a minute, then the test strip goes in and results come back in 10 minutes. It's the same technology that's used for the home pregnancy test, said Dr. Vanzant. Our test is negative, but other tests are examples of what a positive test looks like. Among respiratory specimens for viral isolation or rapid detection of human influenza viruses, nasopharyngeal specimens typically have higher yield than nasal or throat swab specimens. As with any diagnostic test, results should be evaluated in the context of other clinical and epidemiologic information available to health care providers. Preferred respiratory samples for influenza testing include nasopharyngeal or nasal swab, and nasal wash or aspirate, depending on which kind of test is used . Rapid Influenza Testing. The diagnostic accuracy of influenza swabs is often overestimated by clinicians. The CDC notes that rapid influenza testing has a sensitivity ranging from approximately 50% to 70% — meaning that in up to half of influenza cases, the flu swab results will still be negative. Another study in Turkey showed that the sensitivity of rapid influenza testing for H1N1 ranged from 31.7% to 50%, again depending on the brand of test. During a respiratory illness outbreak in a closed setting (e.g., hospitals, long-term care facility, cruise ship, boarding school, summer camp) testing for influenza can be very helpful in determining if influenza is the cause of the outbreak. So how sensitive are they for “flu-like illness”? Rapid Influenza Testing The diagnostic accuracy of influenza swabs is often overestimated by clinicians. The CDC notes that rapid influenza testing has a sensitivity ranging from approximately 50% to 70% — meaning that in up to half of influenza cases, the flu swab results will still be negative. Preferred respiratory samples for influenza testing include nasopharyngeal or nasal swab, and nasal wash or aspirate, depending on which kind of test is used (see table(https://www.cdc.gov/flu/professionals/diagnosis/table-testing-methods.htm)). Samples should be collected within the first 3-4 days of illness. Laboratory Diagnostic Procedures. A number of tests can help in the diagnosis of influenza (see table(https://www.cdc.gov/flu/professionals/diagnosis/table-testing-methods.htm)). But, tests do not need to be done on all patients with suspected influenza. Rapid influenza diagnostic tests (RIDTs) provide results within approximately 15 minutes; viral culture provides results in 3-10 days. Most of the rapid influenza diagnostic tests that can be done in a physician’s office are approximately 50-70% sensitive for detecting influenza and approximately greater than 90% specific. Query: how long does a flu swab take for results",
"output": [
"A flu swab takes 10 minutes for results."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-78a43cb4b79c4e10a13ed9e91e5f5211",
"input": "aafes star card collections; military star card collections department; aafes debt collection phone number; united way lsp application; nobelist root crossword clue; domino dot crossword; aafes star card customer service; aafes collections website; msft price target; financiere sun life; finger cap crossword clue; aafes hr contact information; aafes check collections Luggage Collections *Valid February 16-22, 2018, at Army & Air Force Exchange facilities and shopmyexchange.com. Must be a single transaction. Limited to stock available. In 2008, a veteran of the U.S. Army who served for 21 years filed a class action to enjoin the AAFES from making federal claims after the 10 year statute of limitations had passed and sought refunds from an “illegal UC finance charge collections to correct delinquent balances” on his star card. The Exchange, as a U.S. Government instrumentality, is immune from state and local taxes unless the immunity is waived by an act of Congress. The U.S. Congress has waived this immunity with respect to motor fuel sold by the Exchange (Hayden Cartwright Act, 4 U.S.C. 104). « on: May 17, 2010 05:57:38 PM ». Hello and thank god I found this forum because I am about to go crazy with these people from NCO financial. OK in 2007 I seperated from the US Military ( honarble ) and had a debt to the military STAR card through AAFES. I was unable to work for several months after seperation and off course was unable to pay them as scheduled. I attempted to make payment arrangements but their payment plan was $200 more than my minimum monthly payment used to be. Out-of-service debt customers, former military members and civilian employees can check the status of their account. Use the Online Debt Payment Status Tool to check your account balance, payment information, how the last payment was received and current account status. about debt and claims The debt department is responsible for the collection, or settlement, of delinquent debts owed to the Department of Defense. The debt department collects from former military members, former Department of Defense civilian employees, and some other individuals. Similar Threads. 1 Debt Collectors: Collection of Old Credit Card Debt By coreys281 in forum Debts and Collections. 2 Debt Collectors: Is There a Statute of Limitations for Credit Card Debt Collection By nekrellim in forum Debts and Collections. The customer support phone number of AAFES Collections Department is 0800-82-16500 / 00531-11-4132 (Click phone number to call). The postal and official address, email address and phone number (helpline) of AAFES Collections Department Service Center and AAFES Collections Department customer service phone number is given below. The helpline of AAFES Collections Department customer service phone number may or may not be toll free. Re: Options for Paying Off AAFES Debt After Garnishment I don't think the SOL has stopped because I have several things in my name at my parents' residence in TN like car insurance & a secured credit card. Military Star Card Debt Collection My question involves collection proceedings in the State of: Ohio/Colorado. So, here's my story (since I've found a million like it). I signed up for it in Georgia in 2009. During my service, I always paid my dues and ensured I rarely, if ever, had a late payment. Query: aafes debt collection phone number",
"output": [
"The customer support phone number of Army and Air Force Exchange Service Collections Department is 0800-82-16500 / 00531-11-4132."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-35522612ab7a407eaebca3bd0be45c0a",
"input": "Protons have positive charges, and electrons have negative charges. When an atom has an equal number of the two particles, the atom has no net charge. If an atom loses an electron, it has one more proton than electron, giving it a net positive charge. An ion with a net positive charge is called a cation. If an atom gains an electron, then it has one more electron than proton, giving it a net negative charge. An ion with a net negative charge is called an anion. Learn more about Atoms & Molecules Calcium atom with electron arrangement K (2),L(8),M(8),N(2) loses two electrons from its outermost shell ( N shell) and forms positive ions called Calcium , #Ca^ (2+)# ion. Oxygen atom with electron arrangement K (2),L(6), gains two electrons from its outermost shell ( L shell) and forms negative ions called oxide , #O^ (2-)# ion. A: A nucleophilic attack is a chemical process by which an electron-rich atom or nucleus rapidly forms a new bond with an electron-poor atom or positive ion. ... Full Answer > Filed Under: Jun 29, 2014. An atom becomes an Ion (a) if it gains one or more electron(s) or (b) if it loses one or more electron(s). When it gains electrons it becomes negatively charged and is called an anion. When it loses electron(s) it becomes positively charged and is called a cation. An atom can become a positive ion, or a cation (cat-ion), when it gives away one or more electrons. An atom becomes a negative ion, or an anion (an-ion), when it gains one or …more electrons. Atoms that do this do not have completely filled valence shells, and are therefore reactive. A calcium atom becomes a calcium ion by losing two electrons. Electrons are negatively charged, so losing two electrons creates an ion with a charge of... A calcium atom becomes a calcium ion by losing two electrons. Electrons are negatively charged, so losing two electrons creates an ion with a charge of 2+. Continue Reading A: A bicarbonate ion is a negatively charged molecule consisting of one carbon, three oxygen and one hydrogen atom. A bicarbonate ion is an intermediate produ... Full Answer > An atom becomes an ion when it loses or gains an electron. An atom is electrically neutral. The protons and electrons are equal and balance each other. An ion is either positive or negative, depending on whether it gains or loses an electron. A calcium atom becomes a calcium ion by losing two electrons. Electrons are negatively charged, so losing two electrons creates an ion with a charge of 2+. According to the octet rule, atoms gain or lose electrons to fill their outer energy levels. This helps them achieve noble gas configuration. Calcium is atomic number 20 on the periodic table. Its nearest noble gas is argon, which has an atomic number of 18. To achieve argon's electron configuration, calcium needs to lose two electrons. When it does this, it becomes a positively charged ion. Although calcium is in the same period as the noble gas krypton, the calcium never attempts to attain krypton's electron configuration. This is because it takes less energy to lose two electrons than it would to gain six electrons and fill the outer energy level. Normally, an atom has the same number of positive particles (protons) and negative particles (electrons). 1 So the number of protons is identical to the number of electrons, and both are identical to the atomic number. 2 An ion with more electrons than protons carries a net negative charge and is called an anion. Query: how does an atom become an ion",
"output": [
"An atom becomes an ion, if it gains one or more electron or electrons or, if it loses one or more electron or electrons."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0cf1b7bde0b34bac84b937d8c56ada68",
"input": "1 National Football League total attendance at regular season games 2008 to 2016 (in millions)Total attendance National Football League regular season games 2008-2016. 2 NFL average total regular season home attendance per team from 2005 to 2016Total average home attendance per team in the National Football League 2005-2016. Season and playoff development. From 1920 to 1934, the NFL did not have a set number of games for teams to play, instead setting a minimum. The league mandated a 12-game regular season for each team beginning in 1935, later shortening this to 11 games in 1937 and 10 games in 1943, mainly due to World War II. The NFL was formed in 1920 as the American Professional Football Association (APFA) before renaming itself the National Football League for the 1922 season. The NFL agreed to merge with the American Football League (AFL) in 1966, and the first Super Bowl was held at the end of that season; the merger was completed in 1970. NFL regular season games accounted for 31 out of the top 32 most-watched programs in the fall season and an NFL game ranked as the most-watched television show in all 17 weeks of the regular season. At the local level, NFL games were the highest-ranked shows in NFL markets 92% of the time. Number of people who bought clothing with logos of National Football League (NFL) teams within the last 12 months in the United States from spring 2008 to spring 2016 (in millions)People who bought clothing with NFL team logos (last 12 months) in the U.S. 2016. According to the NFL Players Association the average career length is about 3.3 years. The NFL claims that the average career is about 6 years (for players who make a club's opening day roster in their rookie season). For the 2017 season, the NFL Network will broadcast 18 regular season games under its Thursday Night Football brand, 16 Thursday-evening contests (10 of which are simulcast on either NBC or CBS) as well as one of the NFL International Series games on a Sunday morning and one of the 2017 Christmas afternoon games. 1 Number of Super Bowls won by NFL team from 1967 to 2017*National Football League: Super Bowl wins by team 2017. 2 Number of Super Bowls hosted by city from 1967 to 2017National Football League Super Bowl host cities 1967-2017. On June 24, 1922, the APFA changed its name to the National Football League (NFL). In 1932, the season ended with the Chicago Bears (6–1–6) and the Portsmouth Spartans (6–1–4) tied for first in the league standings. 1 Player salaries in the National Football League 2015/16 season (in million U.S. dollars), by team*Player salaries in the NFL 2015/16 season, by team. 2 Players with the highest salaries* in the NFL in 2016 (in million U.S. dollars)Highest paid players in the National Football League 2016. Query: how long are nfl seasons",
"output": [
"NFL seasons take 17 weeks of the regular season."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b1eb2296f00e47798f64ef0555898c43",
"input": "Check out these other ways to be prepared for withdrawal: 1 Call 1-800-QUIT-NOW (1-800-784-8669) for information and tips on quitting smoking. 2 Chat with a quit smoking counselor at LiveHelp (livehelp.cancer.gov). 3 Use the QuitGuide app for tips and inspiration to help you be smokefree. The first effects of nicotine withdrawal will be felt within 6 hours of having your last cigarette. However the peak time for these nicotine withdrawal side effects will be the second and third day post-smoking cessation. From then on depending on the factors I mentioned earlier on, nicotine withdrawal will begin to diminish over a 2 – 3 week period. So in effect, you could say on average that nicotine withdrawal will last about 3 weeks. However, it could be shorter in some people and in heavy smokers who have smoked for 20 years or longer, the nicotine withdrawal could last for up to 2 months. So you now have a rough idea of how long nicotine withdrawal does last. Most people will fall in between those withdrawal timelines. Tobacco is a plant grown for its leaves, which are smoked, chewed, or sniffed. 1 Tobacco contains a chemical called nicotine. Nicotine is an addictive substance. 2 Millions of people in the United States have been able to quit smoking. Nicotine is a chemical compound that is present in tobacco. When tobacco is smoked, nicotine is absorbed through the wall lining of the small air sacs in the lungs. While by sniffing or chewing tobacco, it is absorbed through the mucous membranes of the nose or mouth. It can: 1 Decrease the appetite; fear of weight gain makes some people unwilling to stop smoking. 2 Boost mood, give people a sense of well-being, and possibly even relieve minor depression. 3 Increase activity in the intestines. 4 Create more saliva and phlegm. 5 Increase the heart rate by around 10 to 20 beats per minute. Symptoms of nicotine withdrawal appear within 2 to 3 hours after you last use tobacco. People who smoked the longest or smoked a greater number of cigarettes each day are more likely to have withdrawal symptoms. For those who are quitting, symptoms peak about 2 to 3 days later. Common symptoms include: Intense craving for nicotine; Anxiety; Depression Check out these other ways to be prepared for withdrawal: 1 Call 1-800-QUIT-NOW (1-800-784-8669) for information and tips on quitting smoking. 2 Chat with a quit smoking counselor at LiveHelp (livehelp.cancer.gov). Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 11:00 p.m. Eastern time. Also in Spanish. Following are the most common withdrawal symptoms of Nicotine: 1 Smoker feels anxieties. 2 Tingling in the hands and feet. 3 Sweating. 4 Intestinal disorders like cramps, nausea, headache. 5 Cold symptoms including sore throats, coughing, and other signs of colds and respiratory problem. Take this quiz to understand and measure your withdrawal symptoms while you quit. Here are some tips for the first few weeks after quitting: 1 Many people find it helpful to reduce or avoid drinking alcohol. 2 Switch to nonalcoholic drinks. 3 If you do drink, don’t choose the alcoholic beverages you usually have when smoking. 4 Don’t drink at home or by yourself. Query: how long nicotine withdrawal",
"output": [
"On an average, nicotine withdrawal will last about 3 weeks. However, it could last for up to 2 months in heavy smokers who have smoked for 20 years or longer."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-37e034227fdd4f02a62f9efe07e69fea",
"input": "the difference is that the hydrosphere is made up of all the water on earth.The most obvious form of water is its liquid state.The hydrosphere also includes water in its… vapor form in the atmosphere and its frozen,solid form in glaciers.The Water in Earth's oceans,sea,rivers,lakes,glaciers,and atmosphere is all part of the hydrosphere.And the ... Start studying Earth Science 4 parts. Learn vocabulary, terms, and more with flashcards, games, and other study tools. Water moves through the hydrosphere in a cycle. Water collects in clouds, then falls to Earth in the form of rain or snow. This water collects in rivers, lakes and oceans. Then it evaporates into the atmosphere to start the cycle all over again. the sphere of living organisms ,where lithospheren hydrosphere and atmosphere meet and interect is called the biosphere . all the water bodies on the earth surface namely ocea…ns, seas, lakes, rivers together with snow and ice are collectively called the hydrosphere. the sphere of living organisms ,where lithospheren hydrosphere and atmosphere meet and interect is called the biosphere . all the water bodies on the earth surface namely ocea … ns, seas, lakes, rivers together with snow and ice are collectively called the hydrosphere The hydrosphere is all the water biomes as one - there is also the atmosphere and the lithosphere. These mean air sphere and soil sphere respectively. These 3 (Hydro, Soil and … Create a free account to save it. includes all living things on Earth as well as the environments where they live. all of the water on earth in oceans, seas, rivers, underground, ice, as well as in the atmosphere. the area from the surface of the earth to the center of the earth including the crust, mantle, and core. The hydrosphere is all the water biomes as one - there is also the atmosphere and the lithosphere. These mean air sphere and soil sphere respectively. These 3 (Hydro, Soil and… Air) all together make the biosphere. What are the physical changes that move water molecules from the lakes oceans and glaciers of the hydrosphere into the atmosphere? all of the water on earth in oceans, seas, rivers, underground, ice, as well as in the atmosphere. Solid, liquid, and gas. Geosphere. the area from the surface of the earth to the center of the earth including the crust, mantle, and core. Query: how does water move between the hydrosphere and atmosphere?",
"output": [
"The water moves between the hydrosphere and atmosphere in a cycle, water collects in clouds, then falls to Earth in the form of rain or snow. This water collects in rivers, lakes and oceans. Then it evaporates into the atmosphere to start the cycle all over again."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-bdc4dd7f9edd458f964c763f3fed47ea",
"input": "Asurion Headquarters HQ Office Address and Contact Numbers: This is the physical, postal, payment and mailing office address of Asurion is listed below. Customers can contact to the company for any query to this address of Asurion. AnonymousMarch 18, 2013 at 11:18 AM. Asurion wireless is a scam. I paid for extra minutes. They never put them on my phone for the month and i've spent 5 days this week on the phone with their Philippine reps, that were no help at all. Hours I've spent and even emails. They do nothing but give you the run around. Asurion Corporate Office Headquarters HQ Asurion Corporation Address: 648 Grassmere Park Dr., Ste. 300 Nashville, TN 37211 USA Asurion Phone Numbers: Corporate Phone Number: +1-615-837-3000 Fax Number: 1-615-837-3001 Customer Service Numbers: Asurion Verizon: 1-888-881-2622 Asurion Sprint: 1-800-584-3666 Asurion AT&T: 1-888-562-8662 Sears Corporate Office; Facebook Corporate Office; AT&T Corporate Office; Kmart Corporation Corporate Office; Wal-Mart Corporate Office; JC Penney Corporate Office; Pizza Hut Corporate Office; J C Penney Corporation, Inc Corporate Office; Lowes Corporate Office; Subway Corporate Office; LA Fitness Corporate Office; Ashley Furniture Corporate Office AnonymousNovember 7, 2015 at 12:39 PM. i seem to be having problems with the communication aspect, told a label was sent no label, then i was to be contacted by a service within 3 days ,,, didn't happen , i am now awaiting a box and label to send in for repairs, 2nd time . Asurion Insurance Corporate Office & Asurion Insurance Headquarters reviews, corporate phone number and address. eCorporateOffices World's Best for Corporate Office Info Write A Review For Asurion Insurance Corporate Headquarters. Note: This is not to be used to contact Asurion Insurance Corporate Offices nor is this site affiliated with them in any way. The purpose of this site is supply you with their phone number and address as well as share your thoughts about Asurion Insurance. Your review will be posted and available for anyone to read so please keep that in mind when posting personal information. AT&T Corporate Office Headquarters HQ. AT&T's Corporate Office Headquarters HQ Official Address: 208 South Akard Street Dallas, TX 75202 Corporate Phone Number: 1-2... Popular CenturyLink Corporate Office Headquarters HQ He then gave me the model of the next comparable device. Then he contacted Asurion and gave them the info for the replacement device. AGAIN the Asurion rep Antoinette, gave me the wrong device info as my replacement and still had my contact information wrong even though I had given it twice and said they are updating it in their system. AT&T Corporate Office Headquarters HQ AT&T's Corporate Office Headquarters HQ Official Address: 208 South Akard Street Dallas, TX 75202 Corporate Phone Number: 1-2... Popular Query: asurion headquarters address",
"output": [
"The address of Asurion Corporate Office Headquarter is 648 Grassmere Park Dr., Ste. 300 Nashville, Tennessee 37211 United States of America."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-56c2e0bc0b074b8583f913ddbd31d605",
"input": "How Long Does It Take to Detox From Alcohol? It is important to keep in mind that detox is just the initial step on the long road of recovery. Detox marks the abrupt ending of alcohol intake and is necessary for the body to cleanse itself of all traces of alcohol. The detox process usually takes seven to 10 days. Rehab programs, however, usually last a minimum of 30 to 45 days. Some clients benefit from 60- or 90-day stays at residential or inpatient treatment centers. If you or somebody you love is struggling with alcohol abuse, we are here to help. 1 New NIAAA resource gives guidance on treatment options for alcohol problems. 2 Heilig M, Egli M, Crabbe JC, Becker HC. 3 Alcohol’s Effects on the Body. 4 Alcohol Withdrawal Symptoms + How Long Do They Last? 5 Spear SE. The length of stay is based on the following: 1 The specific addiction. 2 Addiction history. 3 Addiction severity. 4 The presence of other medical, mental or behavioral health conditions (co-occurring diagnosis) 5 The client’s physical, mental, emotional, social and spiritual needs. 3 The Short-Term Detox is the Most Popular, But Often the Least Successful. Short-term detox programs can include 24-hour juice fasting, chelation therapy (a toxicology treatment for removing heavy metals from the system), colon cleansing (commonly known as colonics), skin cleansing, and intravenous injections. Before starting at-home detox treatments, Beljanski recommends that those looking to seriously detox and improve their overall health and wellness receive a medical consultation for their detox needs first so they can truly discover the root of their symptoms and receive the best treatment regime. It is important to keep in mind that detox is just the initial step on the long road of recovery. Detox marks the abrupt ending of alcohol intake and is necessary for the body to cleanse itself of all traces of alcohol. The detox process usually takes seven to 10 days. Rehab programs, however, usually last a minimum of 30 to 45 days. 8 Your Body Is Already Designed to Naturally Detox Itself. The most important thing to keep in mind about healthy detoxing, says Mangieri, is that it's not necessary to go on a special diet to 'clean' your digestive track; that is the role of our organs.. These natural salts are also said to help cleanse your colon when added to water. While epsom salt baths can be a natural way to soothe the body and aid with muscle relaxation, there's no conclusive evidence that it actually helps you slim down or flush away toxins. The Long-Term Effects of Alcohol on the Body. Long-term addiction can take a heavy toll on the entire body. Alcohol can impact the heart and cause cardiomyopathy, arrhythmias (Irregular heart beat), stroke and high blood pressure. The liver takes the brunt with repercussions including fatty liver, alcoholic hepatitis, fibrosis and cirrhosis. If there are no co-occurring conditions or other drug use or treatment, alcohol withdrawal follows a characteristic course consisting of three relatively distinct phases.2 The phases are as follows: 1 Acute withdrawal: This period is dominated by tremors, autonomic nervous system hyperactivity and the risk for DTs and seizures. Query: how long can your body detox",
"output": [
"The detox process usually takes seven to 10 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3c376c853a72482fb209b9cfdbac0256",
"input": "If you meet the following conditions, you can become a Missouri Notary: Be at least 18-years old applying legal resident of the county for which you are applying How to Become a Notary Take Your Training: Create an account on the state website and complete your training. Purchase Your Supply Package: Each package includes the bond, stamp and journal you will need. As a new Notary, you need more than just a bonding agency. You need a partner that will support you with helpful how-to's, offer high-quality supplies, and provide service you can count on. We'll walk you step-by-step through the process, ensuring you have everything you need to make becoming a Notary easy and worry-free. Missouri Notary FAQs How long is my notary commission good for? Your notary commission will be valid for 4 years. The expiration date will be listed on your notary commission certificate. Do I need to buy a $10,000 surety bond? Yes, the $10,00 surety bond is required by the state of Missouri. You cannot take your Oath of Office or receive your Notary Certificate from your county clerk without it. Three Reasons Why the NNA Is Your #1 Choice when Becoming a Missouri Notary. 1 Fast, Easy, Worry-Free: Step-by-step checklist and unlimited toll-free access to our Missouri Notary experts take the worry out of commissioning and performing your duties. Become a Missouri Notary. 1 18 years of age. 2 Be a registered voter of the county within and for which the applicant is to be commissioned, or a permanent resident alien of the United States. 3 Legally reside in the county in which the applicant seeks to be commissioned; 4 Non-residents working in the state may be commissioned. Do I need a notary journal? Yes, the State of Missouri requires all notaries to keep a record of all their notary activities in a journal. How long will it take for me to get my certificate? It will take the Secretary of State's Office around 3-4 week to process and send your certificate. Do I need to take any training for become a Missouri Notary? Yes, and your notaries.com package includes the required training. Am I qualified to become a Missouri Notary? A Pennsylvania notary commission is good for 4 years. A Texas notary commission is good for 4 years. A Washington state notary commission is good for 4 years. But, some states have an unusually short term of office for notaries like Delaware which is only a 2 year term of office. If you meet the following conditions, you can become a Missouri Notary: Be at least 18-years old. applying legal resident of the county for which you are applying. Non-residents of Missouri may apply if employed in Missouri and planning to use the commission only for that place of business. No, before you can start your work as a notary you must take your Letter of Commission and your $10,000 surety bond to your local county clerk. There you will take the Oath of Office and submit a copy of your signature. Query: how long is a missouri notary term",
"output": [
"A Missouri notary term will be valid for 4 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-cfacfb4a911448a5a24ea1d84d3d393f",
"input": "At press time, the going rate for a regular score report with a test date between September 1, 2013 and the present, was $12.00 per test date per report. For scores after September 1, 2013, the price was $34.00 per test date, per report. A regular report will be delivered to your destination in approximately two weeks. Get the questions and the answers. Certain national test dates and centers give you the opportunity to order a copy of your questions, your answers, the answer key, and scoring instructions—plus the writing prompt, scoring formula, and scores assigned to the optional writing test. SAT Practice Test 5 This full-length, official SAT practice test was written by the same people who wrote the SAT. Download it to get started. PDF Document 7.59 MB. SAT Practice Test Answer Sheet Download and print this answer sheet to take the full-length practice test. It will look a little different from the one you’ll use when you take the official SAT, but the rules are the same: use a No. 2 pencil, completely fill in circles, and track your place so you won’t get tripped up if you skip a question. Hundreds of thousands of students take the ACT on each test date, so waiting to release scores until all tests are processed and essays graded would take quite a while. Good on ACT for expediting the process; however, because of this rolling release of scores, some students might receive score reports much later than others for a certain test date. Multiple Choice Scores for a certain test date start coming out about 10 days later. The ACT usually posts scores once per day at around midnight Central Time, so if you don’t see your scores one day, just log in and check again the next. However, if you are not one of those people, you are going to need your old college admission test scores to apply to college. If you took the ACT, then look no further. Here is the information you need for finding your old ACT scores. Steps to Find Your Old ACT Scores. Step #1: Remember which college admissions test you took. If it has been a while since you took your college admissions exam, you may not even recall if you took the ACT or SAT in high school. If you are in that boat, here is a hint: Your composite ACT score will be a two digit number between 0 and 36. Your SAT score will be a three or four digit score between 600 – 2400. In 2016, the test moved back to the former method of scoring and now offers composite test scores between 400 and 1600. Most scores are available for online viewing within 2 weeks after each national or international test date. Your scores are not reported any faster if you view them online. Score reports are normally released within 2 to 8 weeks from the testing date. Your writing scores will be posted online as soon as they are ready, normally about two weeks after your multiple-choice scores. Your scores are not officially reported until your writing scores have been added. Further data about total scores for many of the Texas tests is available in the Summary Statistics for Total Scores below. 1 2015-16 (PDF) 2 2014-15 (PDF) 3 2013-14 (PDF) 4 2012-13 (PDF) 5 2011-12 (PDF) 6 2010-11 (PDF) 7 2009-10 (PDF) Learn more about ACT scores. The ACT includes an optional essay, known as the writing test. If you take the writing test, you will receive a writing test subscore and a combined English/writing score. Visit www.ACT.org for detailed information about how your ACT writing test will be scored. How do I know if my score is good enough to get me into my dream school? Good question. Check out the ACT score ranges for the schools on your wishlist, and see how your scores compare. You can use our college search to find the ... Scores for the ACT are normally reported within 2–8 weeks after the test date. If you take the ACT with writing, scores will be reported only after all of your scores are available, including writing, normally within 5–8 weeks after the test date. Advantages to testing in your junior year: 1 You've probably completed the coursework corresponding to the test material. 2 You'll have your test scores and other information in time to help you plan your senior year. (For example, you may decide to take an additional class in an area in which your test score was low.) ACT scores are typically available within two weeks of the exam date. Scores on the optional ACT writing exam take longer than the multiple choice scores, often an additional two weeks. Also, requests for score reports to be sent to colleges typically are processed within one week of the request. ACT Score Release Dates Information Once you've taken the ACT, chances are you're eager to get your scores. The good news is that ACT gets scores to students faster than the SAT, and most applicants will receive scores for the multiple choice section of the exam about ten days after the test date. Query: how long does it take to get act test scores",
"output": [
"ACT scores are typically available within two weeks of the exam date."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ee97cd0f5d8641d9a9e3201f67eef2ca",
"input": "The easy answer is: the more you can include in your Memorandum of Understanding, the better. Try and hammer out crucial issues like price, liabilities, general scope and time frame, so the Memorandum of Understanding actually has true and concrete value. The more vague it is, the less it's worth. The Under2 MOU is a 2015 memorandum of understanding which sets climate change mitigation goals for jurisdictions with over 1 billion residents. See also. Gentlemen's agreement; Letter of comfort (contract law) Memorandum of conversation; References What is a 'Memorandum of Understanding - MOU' A memorandum of understanding (MOU) is a nonbinding agreement between two or more parties outlining the terms and details of an understanding, including each parties' requirements and responsibilities. An MOU is often the first stage in the formation of a formal contract. BREAKING DOWN 'Memorandum of Understanding - MOU' MOUs are not legally binding but are viewed as serious documents by the law. In the United States, an MOU is the same as a letter of intent, which is a nonbinding agreement stating a binding agreement will soon follow. Memorandum of understanding. A memorandum of understanding (MoU) is an agreement between two (bilateral) or more (multilateral) parties. It expresses a convergence of will between the parties, indicating an intended common line of action. Use a Memorandum of Understanding if: 1 You're a business owner about to partner with another business. 2 You own a small business and commonly partner with others. 3 Another business has asked to work with your business. The Under2 MOU is a 2015 memorandum of understanding which sets climate change mitigation goals for jurisdictions with over 1 billion residents. See also Gentlemen's agreement If you're using a Memorandum of Understanding, chances are you might need one of the following: 1 General Contract for Services. 2 Partnership Agreement. 3 Consulting Agreement. 4 Non-Disclosure Agreement. A memorandum of understanding (MoU) is an agreement between two or more (multilateral) parties. It expresses a convergence of will between the parties, indicating an intended common line of action. It is often used in cases where parties either do not imply a legal commitment or in situations where the parties cannot create a legally enforceable agreement. Introduction. 1 When you've found the right business partner but you still need to sort out the nitty-gritty for a formal contract, a Memorandum of Understanding helps you get the deal off the ground. 2 MoU, Memorandum of Understanding Form, MoU Agreement. 3 You probably need time to settle on all the details of your new business relationship. A memorandum of understanding is an agreement between two or more parties. It expresses a convergence of will between the parties, indicating an intended common line of action. It is often used in cases where parties either do not imply a legal commitment or in situations where the parties cannot create a legally enforceable agreement. It is a more formal alternative to a gentlemen's agreement. Whether a document constitutes a binding contract depends only on the presence or absence of well-defi Query: how important is a memorandum of understanding",
"output": [
"A memorandum of understanding is an agreement between two or more parties. It expresses a convergence of will between the parties, indicating an intended common line of action. It is often used in cases where parties either do not imply a legal commitment or in situations where the parties cannot create a legally enforceable agreement."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-59ed1b0f9ef540c59f5029df2924cf74",
"input": "The Flu Is Contagious. Most healthy adults may be able to infect other people beginning 1 day before symptoms develop and up to 5 to 7 days after becoming sick. Children may pass the virus for longer than 7 days. Symptoms start 1 to 4 days after the virus enters the body. That means that you may be able to pass on the flu to someone else before you know you are sick, as well as while you are sick. Some people can be infected with the flu virus but have no symptoms. During this time, those persons may still spread the virus to others. The lymph nodes can swell making turning the head painful. The eyes can be sensitive to light. There can be a dry annoying cough. The flu is also contagious the day before the first symptoms begin. The person remains contagious for 5 to 7 days, as long as the body is producing new mucus, and they are also contagious as long as they have a fever. The Flu Is Contagious Most healthy adults may be able to infect other people beginning 1 day before symptoms develop and up to 5 to 7 days after becoming sick. Children may pass the virus for longer than 7 days. But just because you don't exhibit these symptoms, it doesn't mean you don't have the flu, researchers say. And you could be just as contagious. In fact, their study found that roughly three-quarters of people with seasonal or pandemic flu show either no symptoms or mild ones that aren't usually linked to flu. People with flu can spread it to others up to about 6 feet away. Most experts think that flu viruses are spread mainly by droplets made when people with flu cough, sneeze or talk. These droplets can land in the mouths or noses of people who are nearby or possibly be inhaled into the lungs. Less often, a person might also get flu by touching a surface or object that has flu virus on it and then touching their own mouth or nose. Even If You Don't Have Symptoms, You May Still Have The Flu : Shots - Health News Roughly 1 in 5 unvaccinated people had the flu between 2006 and 2011, but only a quarter of them had symptoms, a study found. If you have already been exposed to the flu, but you don't have any symptoms, you can take Tamiflu for up to 6 weeks to help prevent you from getting sick. People often mistake the flu for the common cold, Hayward tells Shots. A lot of the time you may just have a runny nose, a bit of a cough, perhaps a sore throat, he says. But the classic flu symptoms of a sudden fever and muscle aches — the study shows that that very often doesn't happen. And it's often a much more mild illness. Influenza's incubation period is 1-4 days with 2 days being the most common for showing symptoms. There are many viruses that cause cold and flu symptoms that are not the common cold or influenza. If you were exposed to one of those it may take up to 7 days before symptoms appear. Discover how taking Tamiflu® (oseltamivir phosphate) within 48 hours of flu onset may help reduce the amount of time you are sick and help prevent the flu. Indications: Tamiflu is a prescription medicine used to treat the flu (influenza) in people 2 weeks of age and older who have had flu symptoms for no more than 2 days. Tamiflu can also reduce the chance of getting the flu in people 1 year and older. Tamiflu does not prevent bacterial infections that may happen with the flu. Query: how long can you have the flu",
"output": [
"The Flu Is Contagious Most healthy adults may be able to infect up to 5 to 7 days after becoming sick. Children may pass the virus for longer than 7 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-a17fa7d0a1f04a7e8d8b5a00ec2f5161",
"input": "Is it normal to bleed after C section? Bleeding after a cesarean section is completely normal. During pregnancy, the blood levels rise by about 60 percent to support and supply the growing fetus with nutrients. After delivery, it is expected that the body rids of this blood. Gynecologist: Lochia, the discharge after delivery, lasts shorter after a c/section than after a vaginal delivery, typically not much more than 3 weeks, and it will not turn green(ish). Menses after delivery will resume after about 6 - 8 weeks. Breastfeeding women instead of menses may experience irregular ...Read more. Stopped bleeding after C-section but started again. It is normal for bleeding to stop and begin again. After delivery, your body is trying to adjust back to its normal state. Several activities happen in the body and yes, expect on an off bleeding as long as it is in the bracket of 6 weeks, it is normal. It's uncommon to have a uterine infection after c-section remote from the procedure, check your temp but discharge and some bleeding not unus. ... Read more Dr. Elise Sadoun Dr. Sadoun After the procedure. After a C-section, most mothers and babies stay in the hospital for two to three days. To control pain as the anesthesia wears off, you might use a pump that allows you to adjust the dose of intravenous (IV) pain medication. Soon after your C-section, you'll be encouraged to get up and walk. 1 doctor agreed: 1 Yes: This can be normal but you also have to think about the possibility of infection if you are running a fever or are very tender over the lower abdomen ...Read more. 2 No: Some brownish discharge 3 weeks after c section is not uncommon. Smelly discharge after c section - Is it normal to have smelly discharge after c section? Yes. This can be normal but you also have to think about the possibility of infection if you are running a fever or are very tender over the lower abdomen Period starting.: A vaginal discharge with mucus and blood, 5 weeks after your c-section is most likely your period starting. Can't tell by your question, but if you are having this mucus + blood discharge from your incision, you should see your doctor asap or go to the er. ...Read more. How long does bleeding last after a C-section. The red blood after C-section is called lochia. Lochia is normal days after vaginal or C-section delivery. There will be heavy bleeding during the first days of delivery, but then you will start experiencing bright- red blood as days go by. After about 12 days, you may notice a small amount of yellow or pinkish discharge. Gynecologist: Lochia, the discharge after delivery, lasts shorter after a c/section than after a vaginal delivery, typically not much more than 3 weeks, and it will not turn green (ish). Menses after delivery will resume after about 6 - 8 weeks. Breastfeeding women instead of menses may experience irregular spotting, but not greenish. Query: how long discharge after c section",
"output": [
"The discharge after delivery, lasts shorter after a c/section than after a vaginal delivery, typically not much more than 3 weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-7390e5f6eea34e49a4bf5355ccfa5293",
"input": "dont listen to these people. its only 1 1/2 hours to the beach in SF. Palermo is about 2 1/2 hours from the beach. Sacramento is nice, but is far away from any other metropolitan area. Sacramento is about 2 hours from SanFrancisco(Closest coastal area to Sacramento.) Never heard of Palermo. 3 hours. 1. Re: Driving from San Francisco to Sacramento. Dec 16, 2010, 8:12 AM. From the San Francisco airport, I'm going to say it should take a little under 2.5 hours. It's a relatively easy drive, especially once you get to the east side of the Bay Bridge. From the airport, you'd head north on 101 to I-80 East, and then over the Bay Bridge. What is the distance from Sacramento California to Louisville Kentucky? The distance from Sacramento, California, to Louisville, Kentucky, is 1,924 air miles. That equals 3,096 kilometers or 1,672 nautical miles. Behind the beach are stunning sculpted sandstone cliffs making this a very […] See details . Pomponio State Beach. Pomponio State Beach protects about two miles of the California coast about 20 minutes south of Half Moon Bay. Much of the beach in Pomponio is difficult to access from […] See details . Santa Cruz Main Beach Photo: Shutterstock. The small, unincorporated Marin County community of Stinson Beach, about 100 miles from Sacramento, has a laid-back vibe in a lush coastal setting that has been luring city slickers since the 1906 earthquake prompted a few San Franciscans to set up shops here. Interstate 580 running between I-5 and I-80 was also once designated 5W; what is now I-5 (the stretch that runs through Sacramento) had been originally designated Interstate 5E. Los Angeles area. The Golden State Freeway was proposed by the California Highway Commission in 1953. Nice waves also make this crescent beach a hotspot for surfers and windsurfers. If you want to stay on the sand and play some volleyball, nets and balls are available at no charge from the main lifeguard tower. Drakes Beach. A bit north of Stinson Beach, Drakes Beach is one of the highlights of the Point Reyes National Seashore. See the best beaches near Sacramento. Here is a map and a list of our favorite beaches that are a day trip from the California Capitol. Capitola Beach is in a little bay surrounded by colorful houses. Travel time from Davis: 2hrs . directions. Santa Cruz. Its Beach in December (taken by aec) Main Beach- Abuts the beach boardwalk; this is where most tourists come. The beach is often crowded in summer and has poor water quality due the nearby river mouth. Its Beach is immediately north of Santa Cruz's Lighthouse - this small beach is less crowded than others in town, borders on Lighthouse Field State Park and is exceedingly dog friendly. Travel time from Davis: 2hrs . directions. Aptos Beaches on this map. 1 Muir Beach Muir Beach (the beach) is part of Golden Gate National Recreation Area and located in the small town of Muir Beach, California. 2 Stinson Beach Stinson Beach (the beach) is a large public beach within Golden Gate National Recreation Area located in the town of Stinson Beach, California. Query: how far is sacramento from the beach",
"output": [
"The small, unincorporated Marin County community of Stinson Beach, about 100 miles from Sacramento."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ec00a028708a4085bfe700888a4b0fe5",
"input": "The parent who claims the child as a dependent is eligible to claim the child tax credit. This is true even if the parent’s filing status is married filing separately. Income phase-out. As your modified adjusted gross income (AGI) increases, the child tax credit begins to phase out. The credit is reduced $50 for every $1,000 — or portion of $1,000 — that your modified AGI is more than: Child Tax Credit News & Opinion Articles. 1 Thu Mar 09, 2017 | thestreet.com. 2 Tue Mar 29, 2016 | turbotax.intuit.com. 3 Sun Mar 13, 2016 | examiner-enterprise.com. 4 Mon Mar 16, 2015 | efile.com. 5 Tue Mar 10, 2015 | marketwatch.com. 6 Thu Feb 26, 2015 | mainstreet.com. 7 Tue Feb 24, 2015 | patch.com. 8 Sat Feb 28, 2015 | tallahassee.com. − Dependency Exemption, Head of Household filing status, and Earned Income Tax. Credit (EITC) – the child must be under age 19 or a full-time student under age 24 on. December 31, 2016, or any age if permanently and totally disabled. The child can’t have provided over half of his or her own support during the year. You can’t carry forward any portion of the child tax credit to future years. You need to claim the nonrefundable credits in a certain order to get the most benefit. You might need to calculate other credits first to properly apply the child tax credit. Additional child tax credit. If your child tax credit is limited, you might be able to claim the additional child tax credit. To qualify, one of these must apply: It can put you in a different filing status so you pay a lower tax. You can get the child tax credit, and if you meet the rules, you can get the EITC. There are rules about whether you can claim a child for taxes. You must follow the rules. back to the state or the IRS or pay more taxes and other penalties. Thu Mar 09, 2017 | thestreet.com. The earned income tax credit is often overlooked by taxpayers who did not earn a significant salary the previous year,... Tue Mar 29, 2016 | turbotax.intuit.com. The Child Tax Credit can reduce your tax bill by as much as $1,000 per child, if you meet all seven requirements. Sun Mar 13, 2016 | examiner-enterprise.com. The Child Tax Credit is an important tax credit that may save you up to $1,000 for each eligible qualifying child. The child tax credit is worth up to $1,000 for each qualifying child. This credit can be both a nonrefundable and a refundable credit. The refundable portion of the child tax credit is called the additional child tax credit. To qualify for the child tax credit, both of these must apply: The qualifying child must be under age 17 at the end of the year. How the CTC Works Today. Taxpayers can claim a tax credit of up to $1,000 for each child under age 17. The credit is reduced by 5 percent of adjusted gross income over $75,000 for single parents ($110,000 for married couples). Six Things That Determine If You Are Eligible For The Child Tax Credit. Mar 25 2017. 0. 8.2k. 5. The Child Tax Credit is one of the most straight forward tax credits that are available for Americans of all tax brackets. The child tax credit (CTC) provides a credit of up to $1,000 per child under age 17. If the CTC exceeds taxes owed, families may receive some or all of the credit as a refund, known as the additional child tax credit (ACTC) or refundable CTC. How the CTC Works Today Taxpayers can claim a tax credit of up to $1,000 for each child under age 17. Query: how long can i get child tax credit",
"output": [
"You can get a child tax credit under the age of 17."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-6caf48b0e9a24a7f94051e64d550387d",
"input": "when you turn on hot tub for the first time, you should set the temperature. once you set it for the chosen temperature, give it a night to heat, then try it. if it is still cold talk to the salesman. Found mine at 70 one day after breaker trip. Temp outside was 40z. After 4 hours it was 91. Heating your hot tub. 1 Getting your hot tub to 37deg C. 2 Heating your spa with an electric heater. 3 Using a gas heater to heat your spa. 4 Pump friction as a heat source. 5 Solar energy. There are basically four different possible methods of achieving that. 1 An electrical heater. 2 A gas heater. 3 Using pump friction. 4 Solar heating. when we got our hot tub we were told the temp would rise 1&1/2 degrees every hour when we first filled it. it is a 250 gallon tub. If your tub is bigger / older it will take longer. We keep ours on our enclosed proch and leave it on all year. Answer Wiki. sThe amount of time it take for a hot tub to heat up depends on a number of things. How much water it holds, how large a heater it has, and how well it's insulated. The typical portable hot tub sold today, heating off 240v, will heat 4 to 6 degrees Fahrenheit per hour. 120v spas typically heat 1 degree per hour, and some of the hot tubs that heat by capturing the heat generated by the pump motor can take even longer. Most hot tubs, when first filled or refilled, take about 12-24 hours to heat up. In some cases, outdoor spas may take up to 2 days to heat up in the summer. If you’re hot tub is taking longer than this to heat up, there may be something wrong with the unit and you’ll want to have it checked out. You should ensure that you keep the cover on to keep the heat in. You should keep the hot tub on at all times to ensure all heat stays in the tub. The temperature of the water you put in will also play a part in how long it takes to heat up. If possible, fill yours from your hot water tap. If You need any more hot tub advice the please visit Hot Tubs - Soothing Garden In an average family spa the electric heater will raise the temperature by about 5 – 6 degrees an hour, so how long your spa will take to heat up from a re-fill obviously depends on the temperature of the water going in. Using a gas heater to heat your spa. Heating your hot tub. In this article we will look at some of the different ways that you might heat your hot tub. All Sundance spas are heated with an electric heater but there are other ways of doing it. Getting your hot tub to 37deg C. Most people feel that the ideal temperature for a hot tub or spa is somewhere between 37deg C and 39deg C – which is about the same as your body core temperature. How hard any heater will have to work to get the spa up to temperature will depend on the ambient air temperature and whether a good thermal cover is fitted. With the Standard 5.5KW heater the spa should heat at about 5 degrees per hour. Thus if you fill the spa with 54 degree water it should be up to its maximum temperature of 104 degrees in 10 hours. Portable Spas that plug into a 120 volt outlet will take twice as long to heat up and Custom Spas with Gas-Pack heaters will heat up twice as fast. Query: how long does it take water to heat up in hot tub",
"output": [
"Most hot tubs, when first filled or refilled, take about 12 to 24 hours to heat up."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-b7f07cb1050743a9be0223fe0a905c52",
"input": "Acoording to vedic astrology , Rashi for the name Aashvi is Mesh and Moon sign associated with the name Aashvi is Aries. The name Aashvi has Fire element. Mars is the Ruling Planet for the name Aashvi. The name Aashvi having moon sign as Aries is represented by The Ram and considered as Cardinal . Normally, people with the name Aashvi are energetic, courageous and determined. Popularity of the Name. The name Kashvi is ranked on the 65,599th position of the most used names. It means that this name is rarely used. We estimate that there are at least 1600 persons in the world having this name which is around 0.001% of the population. The name Kashvi has six characters. It means that it is relatively medium-length, compared to the other names in our database. We are thankful for all the contribution on meaning of girl name Aashvi. What does the name Aashvi mean in other origin if you know then please suggest. Further suggestion or detail on what is the meaning of name Aashvi. History of name and famous personality with Aashvi will help to update our database and other website users. Acoording to vedic astrology , Rashi for the name Aashvi is Mesh and Moon sign associated with the name Aashvi is Aries. The name Aashvi has Fire element. Mars is the Ruling Planet for the name Aashvi . The name Aashvi having moon sign as Aries is represented by The Ram and considered as Cardinal . Normally, people with the name Aashvi are energetic, courageous and determined. User Contributed Meanings for Aashvi [Report Abuse] The baby boy or baby girl name Aashvi comes from the Indian word which means, Unknown. Unknown word which means, holy essence. Unknown word which means, holy essence. Unknown word which means, Unique. Someone also suggested the name is an English word which means, holly essence. English word which means, Holy Spirit. Numerological Meaning (For Entertainment Purposes Only) People with this name tend to be very warm and nurturing. They are extremely reliable and are often found taking care of others. Meaning: Shining. Please feel free to read what others say about this name and to share your comments if you have more information. N.B. Sometimes it happens that another name has the same meaning. There is nothing surprising in this: both names have the same origin or the same numbers of numerology. Name Compatibility Test The highest recorded use of the first name Ashvi was in 2010 with a total of 5 babies. Weird things about the name Ashvi: Your name in reverse order is Ivhsa. A random rearrangement of the letters in your name (anagram) will give Iasvh. Fun Facts about the name Ashvi. How Popular is the name Ashvi? Ashvi is the 72,819 th most popular name of all time. How many people with the first name Ashvi have been born in the United States? From 1880 to 2016, the Social Security Administration has recorded 10 babies born with the first name Ashvi in the United States. Aashvi name religion, origin & details: Name Aashvi or (Aashvi) means Blessed and Victorious. This name comes under number 17, so Astrology can describe lot information about Aashvi. ... You have the capacity to make a person for you that means you are really capable to make understand anything very well. Aashvi is baby girl name mainly popular in Hindu religion and its main origin is Hindi. Aashvi name meanings is Blessed and victorious, Little mare. People search this name as Aashvi, Aashvik. Aashvi is written in Hindi as आश्वी . Other similar sounding names can be Aashif, Ashva, Eashav, Yashvi, Yashvy. What year were 5 or more babies first named Ashvi? The name was first given to 5 or more babies in the year 2010 when it was given as a first name to 5 new born babies. What year had the most people named Ashvi born? The highest recorded use of the first name Ashvi was in 2010 with a total of 5 babies. Weird things about the name Ashvi: Your name in reverse order is Ivhsa. A random rearrangement of the letters in your name (anagram) will give Hsaiv. Query: aashvi name meaning",
"output": [
"Name Aashvi means Blessed and Victorious."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-eda5c9459a7c4512a66ccb3ebe67ea98",
"input": "Cell machines have large tool magazines to carry enough tools to do all of the various operations on each of the different parts, large worktables or the ability to change worktables, and special provisions in the controller for data inputs from other CNC machines. Attached to the side of the machine is a magazine of different tools. A transfer arm, sometimes called the tool bar, removes a tool from the machine, places it into the magazine, selects a different tool from the magazine, and returns it to the machine through instructions in the program. The fourth category covers modern machine tools and processes for machining ultrahard metals not machinable by older methods. 1 Machine tools that form parts by removing metal chips from a workpiece include lathes, shapers and planers, drilling machines, milling machines, grinders, and power saws. Modern machine tools cut or form parts to tolerances of plus or minus one ten-thousandth of an inch (0.0025 millimetre). In special applications, precision lapping machines can produce parts that are within plus or minus two millionths of an inch (0.00005 millimetre). The motions that are used in machine tools are called axis, and are referred to as X (usually left to right), Y (usually front to back), and Z (up and down). The work-table may also be rotated in the horizontal or vertical plane, creating a fourth axis of motion. After the advent of the steam engine, material goods were produced by power-driven machines that could only be manufactured by machine tools. Machine tools (capable of producing dimensionally accurate parts in large quantities) and jigs and fixtures (for holding the work and guiding the tool) were the indispensable innovations that made mass production and interchangeable parts realities in the 19th century. Machine tool: Machine tool, any stationary power-driven machine that is used to shape or form parts made of metal or other materials. The shaping is accomplished in four general ways: (1) by cutting excess material in the form of chips from the part; (2) by shearing the material; (3) by squeezing metallic parts to the desired shape; and (4) by applying electricity, ultrasound, or corrosive chemicals to the material. Welding the base. 1 1 The base of the machine is either cast or welded together. It is then heat treated to remove casting or welding stresses and to normalize the metal for machining. 2 2 The ways are ground flat, bolted, and pinned to the base. The controller. 1 5 The computer, or controller, is an electronic assembly separate from the rest of the machine. It has a climate-controlled enclosure mounted on the side of the frame or in an operator's console. 2 6 The assembled machine is test run for accuracy. In particular, machine-driven tools became necessary to manufacture the parts for the machines that now made goods formerly produced by hand. Most common machine tools were designed by the middle of the 19th century. Query: how is made machine tools",
"output": [
"Machine tools that form parts by removing metal chips from a workpiece include lathes, shapers and planers, drilling machines, milling machines, grinders, and power saws."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-56af57633abb46d096bf9990ca1edca2",
"input": "Baked taquitos aren't quite as crisp as deep fried but still have a satisfying crunch. Spray the baking pan with nonstick cooking spray or brush the pan with a slick of cooking oil. Place the taquitos in a single layer in the pan, seam sides down. Leave some space between the taquitos. Lightly spray the taquitos with cooking spray or brush with cooking oil. Bake in a 400 F oven for 15 minutes. How to microwave taquitos. 1 Place three frozen taquitos on a microwave safe plate. 2 Set the microwave temperate on high (1,100 watts). 3 Ideal taquito cooking time is 1 minute, 15 seconds. 4 Let microwaved taquitos cool 1 minute before eating. Don't use an oil that has a distinctive flavor like olive oil. Heat 2 to 3 inches of oil to 375 degrees Fahrenheit in a deep pan. Add the taquitos gently into the oil using tongs to avoid splashing. The taquitos will cook in two to three minutes. Remove when the taquitos are golden-brown. Drain the taquitos on paper towels. The taquitos don't fry long enough -- only two to three minutes -- to cook the vegetables. Seal the Deal The trick is to not over-stuff the taquito with too much filling because it has tendency to spill out and into the oil in the deep fryer. A: Frozen taquitos cook for varying lengths of time based on the brand, the type of filling and the tortilla. El Monterey corn-tortilla taquitos with chicken take 12 minutes in a 400-degree oven, while the same brand's Southwest chicken taquitos take 15 minutes. Delimex brand beef taquitos take 11 minutes. Continue Reading Whole Foods 365-brand taquitos take 17 minutes at 350 degrees. Homemade tortillas that are slightly undercooked before freezing take about 8 minutes at 450 degrees to finish cooking and get crispy. Regardless of the filling or if the taquitos are a store-bought brand or homemade, taquitos should cook long enough in the oven to reach 165 degrees on the inside. Learn more about Cooking El Monterey corn-tortilla taquitos with chicken take 12 minutes in a 400-degree oven, while... Frozen taquitos cook for varying lengths of time based on the brand, the type of filling and the tortilla. How to cook taquitos in the oven. 1 Preheat oven to 400°F. 2 Spread frozen taquitos evenly 1 inch apart on baking sheet. 3 Ideal taquito cooking time is 12 minutes. 4 Let taquitos cool for 1 minute before eating. Here are frozen taquito cooking instructions and ideal taquito cooking time for frozen taquitos from El Monterey! How to microwave taquitos. Place three frozen taquitos on a microwave safe plate. Set the microwave temperate on high (1,100 watts). Ideal taquito cooking time is 1 minute, 15 seconds. Let microwaved taquitos cool 1 minute before eating. How to cook taquitos in the oven. Preheat oven to 400°F. Spread frozen taquitos evenly 1 inch apart on baking sheet. Ideal taquito cooking time is 12 minutes. Let taquitos cool for 1 minute before eating. Now you know how to cook frozen taquitos. Enjoy! FOR FOOD SAFETY AND QUALITY, INTERNAL PRODUCT TEMPERATURE MUST REACH 161°F. SINCE OVENS VARY, COOKING TIMES MAY REQUIRE ADJUSTING. 1. Place three frozen taquitos on a plate. 2. Microwave on High 1 minute 15 seconds to 1 minute 30 seconds*. 3. Let stand 1 minute. When preparing 6 taquitos, increase heating time to 2 to 2 1/2 minutes. *Microwave ovens vary. Heating time may require adjustment. Based on 1000 watt microwave oven. CAUTION: PRODUCT WILL BE HOT! Query: how long to cook frozen taquitos",
"output": [
"The frozen taquitos take 12 minutes to cook."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-655f245d464144d48396109f82b6f45d",
"input": "That’s why you will see me recommending three different time frames when it comes to the no contact rule, 1 The 21 Day Rule. 2 The 30 Day Rule. 3 The 45 Day Rule. The No Contact Rule = The premise behind NC (no contact) is that you basically cut off all communication with your ex for a certain amount of time with the intent of making them miss you while at the same time facilitating a recovery (more on that in a second.) There is nothing too out of the ordinary here. (To learn more about the “no contact rule” I highly recommend you check out The No Contact Rule Book) Now that you have a pretty good idea of how the no contact rule works I want to move on to the next step. Experts say it takes about 21 days to stick to a new habit, but I've found that heartbroken people need a little more time than that. So similar to Greg Behrendt, author of It's Called a Breakup Because It's Broken, I recommend following the No-Contact Rule for two whole months. Within those two months, here's what's probably going to happen: 1. Clarity. Going back and forth with an ex often causes stress and confusion. The no contact rule is always going to be more effective if you aren’t living with your ex. That’s just the way it is and anyone who tells you anything differently is lying straight to your face. BUT the no contact rule can still be effective if you live with the person so don’t go into a depression just yet. But experience has taught me that this isn’t always the best practice. For some situations 30 days may be too long and for others it may not be long enough. That’s why you will see me recommending three different time frames when it comes to the no contact rule, The 21 Day Rule. The 30 Day Rule. The 45 Day Rule. (To learn more about the “no contact rule” I highly recommend you check out The No Contact Rule Book) Do you remember above when I mentioned that if I give people too much leeway they will take advantage of it and look for any excuse to break the no contact rule. Situations That Make You Alter The No Contact Rule (To learn more about the “no contact rule” I highly recommend you check out The No Contact Rule Book) This is where things tend to get a bit more complicated. The 30 Day Rule. The 30 day no contact rule is what I like to call the basic no contact rule. In other words, it should be your ideal starting point. Take a look at the graphic I put together for you below, This graphic is meant to represent what I want every person who does the no contact rule to do. Instead, I thought that it would be best if I just listed out the most common alterations I see people having to make, 1 If Children Are Involved. 2 If You Work With Them. 3 If You Live With Them. 4 If You Go To School With Them. 5 If You Unexpectedly Run Into Them. 6 The Item Exchange. Query: how long for no contact rule",
"output": [
"No contact rule is for 20 days, 30 days, and 45 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8cd9b1a9624f4bdca092db8546c70144",
"input": "Eurostar Trains. The Eurostar train service takes just two hours and 15 minutes to Paris, so with an early start its possible, and many people do, take a day trip to Paris. The Eurostar trains start at London's St Pancras station and terminate in the centre of Paris at the Gare du Nord. More trip calculations. 1 flight time from London, United Kingdom to Paris, France. 2 direct flights from London, United Kingdom to Paris, France. 3 reverse flying distance from Paris, France to London, United Kingdom. 4 airlines that fly to Paris, France. 5 airports near Paris, France. 6 hotels near Paris, France. The calculation of flight time is based on the straight line flight distance from Paris, France to London, United Kingdom (as the crow flies), which is about 212 miles or 341 kilometers. Your trip begins in Paris, France. It ends in London, United Kingdom. Your flight direction from Paris, France to London, United Kingdom is Northwest (-30 degrees from North). The flight time calculator measures the average flight duration between points. It uses the great circle formula to compute the travel mileage. Fly from London to Paris on easyJet from $59, Vueling from $83, British Airways from $100... Search and find deals on flights to Paris. The flight distance between the nearest airports London (LCY) and Paris (ORY) is 218.10 mi (351.01 km). This corresponds to an approximate flight time of 0h 54min. The initial bearing on the course from London to Paris is 148.16° and the compass direction is SSE. Comparison and discussion on the best way to travel between London To Paris, Eurostar trains are fastest, bus and coaches are cheapest by far hotels airport+port nm = how many nautical miles from London All numbers are air distances – as the crow flies/great circle distance. UTC (GMT/Zulu)-time: Wednesday, February 21, 2018 at 11:07:44 UTC is Coordinated Universal Time, GMT is Greenwich Mean Time. Flight time from London to Paris is 1 hour 10 minutes. Non-Stop flight duration from LHR to ORY is 1 hour 10 minutes (Operated by Air Berlin) Flight time from Paris, France to airports near London, United Kingdom. 1 Paris, France to London, Canada. 2 Paris, France to London, United States. 3 Paris, United States to London, Canada. 4 Paris, United States to London, United States. Distance: 213.53 mi (343.64 km) 1 The shortest distance (air line) between London and Paris is 213.53 mi (343.64 km). 2 The flight distance between the nearest airports London (LCY) and Paris (ORY) is 218.10 mi (351.01 km). 3 The initial bearing on the course from London to Paris is 148.16° and the compass direction is SSE. Query: how far is london to paris by plane",
"output": [
"The flight distance between London and Paris is 218.10 miles or 351.01 kilometer."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e76995c01e954dd0879a976a59e7c88c",
"input": "how long animals are pregnant for here are some animals who are pregnant for years or months. An Indian elephant is pregnant for 624 days, a black rhino is pregnant for 504 days, a giraffe is pregnant for 425 day, a gray rhino is pregnant for 480 days, and a camel is pregnant for 400 days. Ryan, Tom. (n.d.). How Do Birds Conceive? Animals - mom.me. Retrieved from http://animals.mom.me/birds-conceive-9240.html Sunday, May 2, 2010. how long animals are pregnant for. here are some animals who are pregnant for years or months. An Indian elephant is pregnant for 624 days, a black rhino is pregnant for 504 days, a giraffe is pregnant for 425 day, a gray rhino is pregnant for 480 days, and a camel is pregnant for 400 days. Ryan, Tom. How Do Birds Conceive? accessed February 13, 2018. http://animals.mom.me/birds-conceive-9240.html Eggs: when and how they develop - Hancock Wildlife Foundation Egg Me. [...] 4 day journey down the oviduct that the yolk gets surrounded by … Excerpt from:â Eggs: when and how they develop - Hancock Wildlife Foundationtags: beta, fet, gets-surrounded, not-scheduled, now-starts, oviduct, preventing-further, [...] [read more] A sheep is pregnant for 150 days, a goat for 145 days, a pig is pregnant for 114 days, a lion 108, A scorpions are pregnant for 90-540 days, a cat is for 58-65 days, a dog is for 50-70 days, a bobcat is pregnant for 60 days, a golden eagle is for 44 days. Because most birds do not have penises, the sex act and consequent conception are slightly different than in a mammal. They release sperm from the cloaca, a small posterior opening. Females also have a cloaca, which they use to receive sperm. Copulation is non-penetrative, and lasts only a few seconds. Ryan, Tom. How Do Birds Conceive? Animals - mom.me, http://animals.mom.me/birds-conceive-9240.html. Accessed 13 February 2018. The time sperm remains viable in the oviduct or infundibulum is not precisely known and it is probably variable. However, in other species the viability of sperm drops off after about 10 to 15 days. Generally it is believed that the effective mating takes place about 4 to 10 days before an egg is laid. The egg journey down the oviduct is about 3 days. It is during the first day immediately following when the yolk erupts from the ovary and is swallowed up by the infundibulum that most fertilization takes place. Reproductive Organs. While birds have the same internal organs that allow creatures like humans to conceive, such as testes and ovaries, one organ is often conspicuously absent: the penis. In most species, males do not have penises, and their testes are housed deep inside the body rather than in a dangling scrotum. Query: how long are eagles pregnant for",
"output": [
"A golden eagle is pregnant for 44 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c3037403270749f980ed8e9cd574fcfd",
"input": "Here’s a basic breakdown of how long it might take to become a psychologist: Earn Your Bachelor’s Degree (Timeline: 4 to 5 Years) As noted earlier, you might want to begin by earning your undergraduate degree in psychology, but some people choose to pursue a degree in a related social science field. In many areas of psychology, it is a minimum requirement for someone to have completed a doctorate degree. This includes counseling psychologists and licensed clinical psychologists. In fields, such as health psychology and school psychology, the same degree is often required. Psy.D., Ph.D. or Ed.D? In order to become a licensed clinical psychologist, you need an undergraduate degree (4 to 5 years of college) plus a doctorate in psychology (4 to 7 years of graduate school). For this specialty area, most people will spend between 8 to 12 years in a higher education setting. This takes between four and five years to complete. Here, you will learn the basics and fundamental theories of psychology. This is followed by a two to three year master's degree option, which allows for wider career choices, including those for social workers, employment specialists and case managers. Following on from the bachelor's degree, you will need to complete a two to three year master's degree. This will introduce you to the field of psychology in a far more in-depth manner. You will also be able to choose a field of specialization, although not all schools offer this option. The length of time you will need to complete your degree depends on the type you have chosen. 1 As such: 2 Ph.D. programs generally take between five and seven years to finish. The curriculum will be made up of extensive coursework, but you will also have to complete a supervised residency or internship. If you do have a degree in a different field and want to become a psychologist, you may have to complete a number of prerequisites before you are accepted to a graduate program in psychology. Earn Your Master’s Degree (Timeline: 2 to 3 Years) They can do some research on psychology or teach, but this is rare. Instead, they tend to work in an applied setting where they provide direct services to people with mental health issues. The Ed.D. option, which is the Doctor of Education, is the final option. This is the best degree for those who want to work in some form of educational psychology. This degree is the least common out of the three, due to the fact that it is very specific. The time it would take to achieve a doctorate degree in psychology varies depending on your chosen pathway and your career goals. As such: 1 Ph.D. programs generally take between five and seven years to finish. The curriculum will be made up of extensive coursework, but you will also have to complete a supervised residency or internship. 2 Psy.D. programs take between four and six years to complete on average. With a Ph.D., however, you will have a greater understanding of psychology and research therein, as well as being able to conduct and apply research. Once you have graduated with a doctorate degree, you can expect to get to work in colleges, schools, government, health care systems, social services agencies, nonprofit organizations and market research firms. Query: how long to become a dr of psychology",
"output": [
"In order to become a licensed clinical psychologist, you need an undergraduate degree 4 to 5 years of college plus a doctorate in psychology 4 to 7 years of graduate school."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8e04b1f94cdc4dcc98d411d85354d354",
"input": "Upon satisfactory completion of training, students will be registered with the State of Georgia as a Certified Nurse Assistant, receive a CNA certificate and be qualified to assume entry level positions in a variety of health care settings. CNA Classes in Atlanta GA Please share/like/bookmark: The ever-increasing demand for CNAs in Atlanta Georgia is partly responsible for the rise in pay rate over the last five years. Nurse Aide Training Programs in Georgia. 1 CNA Courses in Richmond County. 2 CNA Classes in Laurens County. 3 Nursing Assistant Training Programs in Columbia County. 4 Nurse Aide Training Courses in Burke County. 5 CNA Programs in Candler County. 6 Nursing Assistant Training Classes in Tattnall County. 7 CNA Training Classes in Gwinnett County. Does It take A long Time To Transfer CNA license Out Of State … Does it take a long time to transfer CNA license out of state once applied for reciprocity? … I would contact the state department that certifies NA in Georgia to get that … Add a comment. Submit · just now. Report Abuse. Add your answer. Does it take a long time to transfer CNA … Renewing a CNA License. In order to remain a CNA, one must renew his or her certification every 2 years. The individual qualifies to do so under the circumstances that he or she has performed at least 8 hours of nursing work for pay within the 2 year period. The nurse aide’s certification number may be found on the front of the nurse aide’s certification letter. The Georgia Nurse Aide Program requires a minimum of 85 hours, which includes classroom, lab and clinical rotation, for all approved nurse aide training program courses in the State of Georgia. Pearson Vue has administered the Georgia Written/Oral and Skills examination since July 1, 2007. CNA Classes in Georgia: CNA Classes Augusta, GA; CNA Classes in Atlanta GA; CNA Classes Marietta, GA; CNA Classes Roswell, GA; CNA Classes Savannah, GA; Other Georgia cities: Please scroll down below or use CTRL+F (Command+F on Mac) to search this page. Certification Requirements . There are several nurse aide programs located across the state of Georgia. The Red Cross CNA Training Program prepares individuals with the information and the experience needed to become a Nurse Assistant who will provide quality care for residents in long-term care facilities, hospitals, home health care and hospice settings. The current cost of a six week long CNA class being held at a community college is approximately $1,000 and it includes tuition, books, supplies such as blood pressure cuff and uniforms, as well as the Georgia CNA exam fee. This sub-section will help you more efficiently navigate the certified nurse aide requirements in Georgia versus spending endless hours sorting through the rugulatory board website. Find what you need including CNA training program information, exam information, application materials and several additional resources to help you figure out how to become a CNA in Georgia. Query: how long is a cna program georgia",
"output": [
"The Georgia Certified Nurse Aide Program requires a minimum of 85 hours."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-096c08a3d7e5481aa82b7ae4fc31f4d3",
"input": "Platelets are the smallest of the three major types of blood cells. 1 Platelets are only about 20% of the diameter of red blood cells. The normal platelet count is 150,000-350,000 per microliter of blood, but since platelets are so small, they make up just a tiny fraction of the blood volume. This news release contains forward-looking statements, including statements related to the potential medical benefits of Soliris ® (eculizumab) for the treatment of generalized myasthenia gravis (gMG), and Alexion's future clinical, regulatory and commercial plans for Soliris for the treatment of myasthenia gravis. Seek emergency medical attention or call your doctor right away if you notice any of these symptoms of meningitis: 1 headache and fever with nausea or vomiting; 2 high fever (103 degrees or higher), body aches, flu symptoms; 3 confusion, increased sensitivity to light; or. 4 stiffness in your neck or back. During treatment with eculizumab and for at least 3 months after your last dose, make sure any doctor who treats you knows that you are using this medicine. Eculizumab can have long lasting effects on your body. variable regions. Eculizumab is composed of two 448 amino acid heavy chains and two 214 amino acid light chains and has a molecular weight of approximately 148 kDa. Eculizumab is produced in a murine myeloma (NS0 cell line) expression system and purified by affinity and ion exchange chromatography. The bulk drug substance manufacturing process also Soliris (eculizumab), produced by US pharma company Alexion, is used to treat patients with paroxysmal nocturnal haemoglobinuria (PNH) and atypical haemolytic uraemic syndrome (aHUS). Eculizumab is a monoclonal antibody. Eculizumab binds to proteins in the blood that can destroy red blood cells in people with genetic conditions that affect the natural defenses of red blood cells. Eculizumab is a monoclonal antibody. Eculizumab binds to proteins in the blood that can destroy red blood cells in people with genetic conditions that affect the natural defenses of red blood cells. Eculizumab is used to prevent the breakdown of red blood cells in people with paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinemia (PNH). You should not use this medication if you have bacterial meningitis or if you have not been vaccinated against meningitis. Tell your doctor if you have a fever or any type of infection. 1 Before starting eculizumab treatment, make sure you tell your doctor about any other medications you are taking (including prescription, over-the-counter, vitamins, herbal remedies, etc.). 2 While taking eculizumab, do not receive any kind of immunization or vaccination without your doctor’s approval. Patients received meningococcal vaccination prior to receipt of Soliris. In all studies, the dose of eculizumab was 600 mg every 7 ± 2 days for 4 weeks, followed by 900 mg 7 ± 2 days later, then 900 mg every 14 ± 2 days for the study duration. Soliris was administered as an intravenous infusion over 25 – 45 minutes. The metabolism of eculizumab is thought to occur via lysosomal enzymes that cleave the antibody to generate small peptides and amino acids. The volume of distribution of eculizumab in humans approximates that of plasma. Chemistry. Eculizumab is a recombinant humanized monoclonal antibody against the complement protein C5. It is an immunoglobulin G-kappa (IgGκ) consisting of human constant regions and murine complementarity-determining regions grafted onto human framework light and heavy chain variable regions. Query: how is eculizumab produced",
"output": [
"Eculizumab is produced in a murine myeloma, NS0 cell line expression system and purified by affinity and ion exchange chromatography."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4ff6d6c1651546de86fc05bda22b7797",
"input": "Physical description and related species. Squid are a diverse group of invertebrates (animals without backbones), and range in size from barely two and a half centimetres (Idiosepius sp.) to a total length approaching 18 metres (giant squid Architeuthis sp.). ''Absolutely sensational'' new pictures are rare proof that the world's largest toothed whales feed on elusive giant squid. And if researchers are right, the photos may also show a baby whale's hunting lessons. Octopuses & Squids. About AquaFacts: AquaFacts are a resource for students who are looking for information on the animals at the Aquarium or other Aquarium-related topics. Here, we’ve compiled some of the most frequently asked questions that we’ve received about octopuses. How the colossal squid feeds The colossal squid is a predator, and it hovers in the dark depths of the ocean looking for prey. We know that colossal squid eat toothfish — the squid on display was hauled up on a toothfish longline, still attached to the fish it had been eating. Toothfish caught on longlines often show signs of squid damage. Adult toothfish can grow up to two metres long, so the colossal squid is clearly a capable hunter, even in the dark. Effective predator Unfortunately, the giant squid Architeuthis has not been studied enough to make a comprehensive diet. From the few that have been dissected though, it was discovered that they would eat sperm whales that dive deep underwater. Squid are very adaptable though so they will find things to consume when they need to. They are going to consume any type of meat in the water, even if it is other squid when their normal sources have been depleted. This is a way for them to continue to evolve and to survive. The broadest list is: 1 Architeuthis dux, Atlantic giant squid. 2 Architeuthis hartingii. 3 Architeuthis japonica. 4 Architeuthis kirkii. 5 Architeuthis martensi, North Pacific giant squid. 6 Architeuthis physeteris. 7 Architeuthis sanctipauli, southern giant squid. 8 Architeuthis stockii. The adaptations of a squid are that its ability to chance color helps it hide and sneak up on its prey oops im thinking of a suidThere are many adadtations of a squid icluding its ability to give out light.Another great adaptation of a squid is that it has 2 tenicles to grasp its food and 2 or 3 to... Squids most commonly eat fish, crustaceans and other squids. Even the world's smallest squid is a predator, the southern pygmy squid (Idiosepius notoides). The females of this species grow to about 1 inch long, and males are about 3/4 inch. On the opposite end of the size spectrum is the giant squid (Architeuthis dux), the largest invertebrate in the world. One of the largest beaks ever recorded was on a 495-kilogram colossal squid. The beak had a lower rostral length of 42.5 millimeters. Many beaks have also been discovered in the stomachs of sperm whales, as the stomach juices dissolve the soft flesh of the squid, leaving the hard beaks behind. Query: how does a giant squid eat?",
"output": [
"The giant squid eat sperm whales that dive deep underwater."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-c787b284e22a490693c2d2f99961c1d5",
"input": "One of the most common drug tests is analyzed using urine. It is difficult to determine how long THC will be detectable in a users urine due to differing metabolism rates. On average, occasional marijuana users will test positive for 1-3 days after usage. On average, frequent marijuana users will test positive for up to 46 days after usage. Individuals who have been using marijuana regularly for many years can test positive up to 67 days after usage. How Long Does Marijuana Stay in Blood? Blood tests are another common drug test used to analyze drug usage. For single time users and occasional users, marijuana can be detected in a blood test 12-24 hours after usage. If hair on the head is not available, then body hair from other sites (such as the chest or underarm) may be used. As for how long marijuana or other drugs stay in hair, in theory, they may stay there for years, or even centuries after a person's death, according to a 2004 paper published in the journal Forensic Science International. Marijuana use can be detected through hair follicle testing for up to three months after use. Factors That Influence Drug Testing Different drug tests are more effective with particular drugs. How long does marijuana stay in a hair folicle test? How long does marijuana stay in your system once smoked? How do you determine how long weed will stay in your system when doing a drug test or a hair folicle test I am 5'4, weighing 335 lbs hoping that helps.. Help does marijuana stay in your hair follicles? Does marijuana stay in the root of the hair follicle for 6 months, or does it get pushed out by the new hair growing in? Urine testing is able to detect marijuana usage more effectively than a blood test beyond a week. If you suspect someone is abusing marijuana it may be best to use an alternative drug testing method, such as urine testing or hair follicle testing. How Long Does Marijuana Stay in Hair? Hair follicle testing is often considered one of the most accurate methods of drug testing. Of course, you could answer how long does weed stay in your system with the answer, not another second. All you have to do is shave off all of your hair. The Final Answer: How Long Does Weed Stay In Your System? The short-lived effects of weed don’t prevent evidence of marijuana consumption from lingering in your system. But hair testing can't show very recent drug use (in the last few days), and so for detection of recent drug use, employers would use urine testing, Quest said. In 2015, about 7 percent of the U.S. workforce tested positive for marijuana using hair drug testing, according to Quest data. For marijuana testing, samples are analyzed for a breakdown product of tetrahydrocannabinol (THC), called THC carboxylic acid. It's very hard to fool a drug hair test, Quest said. In brief: Depends on use. It depends on how often you use it. If you used it only once it can be detected by blood for 12-24 hours while it is detected in urine from 1-7 days. With regular use it can be detected in blood for 2-7 days and in urine anywhere from 1-100 days even if a heavy user. Age, height, weight, metabolism all are considered factors. But how does marijuana get into hair, and how long does it stay there? The New York Police Department officer — Sgt. Tracy Gittens — tested positive for marijuana on a random drug test in January, and has been on paid desk leave since then, according to the New York Post. So again, how long does weed stay in your system? It depends what the system deals with, THC or its waste metabolite, THC-COOH. If the system deals with active, or delta-9 THC, weed doesn’t stay around for very long. Query: how long do marijuana stay in hair?",
"output": [
"Marijuana stays for years in hair."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-be15c9613c244754a86e9ce3d401d30d",
"input": "So, to try and gain some perspective of the typical time period, have any of you had glandular fever and how long did it last for you? Six weeks is a very long time to have it. I was under the impression you had it for about a month then felt awful for another couple of weeks. Initial symptoms commonly include: 1 Loss of appetite. 2 Chills. 3 Mental and physical fatigue/weakness. 4 Aching muscles. 5 These symptoms are usually followed 2-3 days later by: 6 Fever. 7 Headache. 8 Sore, reddened throat with enlarged tonsils. 9 Swollen glands in the neck, armpits and/or groin. Some people become infected with EBV but do not develop symptoms. This is called a subclinical infection. How long do the symptoms last? The glandular fever symptoms usually resolve by themselves within two to three weeks of the initial infection. Initial three to five days will be the worst followed by improvement in a gradual course. The fever usually lasts for 10 to 14 days and declines in severity after the initial three to five days. Fatigue however may persist for up to three to six months. Normal activity may be resumed within one to two months of the infection. In young children the onset of the glandular fever is usually short term. Glandular fever is caused by the Epstein-Barr virus (EBV). The virus is found in the saliva of infected people and can be spread through: kissing (it is often referred to as the kissing disease) exposure to coughs and sneezes. sharing eating and drinking utensils, such as cups, glasses and unwashed forks and spoons. https://www.betterhealth.vic.gov.au/health/conditionsandtreatments/glandular-fever The information on this site should not be used as an alternative to professional care. If you have a particular problem, see a doctor or other health professional. The most common symptoms of glandular fever are: 1 a high temperature (fever) 2 a sore throat – usually more painful than any previous throat infection you may have had. 3 swollen glands (nodes) in your neck and possibly in other parts of your body, such as under your armpits. 4 fatigue (extreme tiredness) Infectious mononucleosis, commonly known as glandular fever, is a viral infection, which is caused by the Epstein-Barr virus. The disease is, among other things, characterised by a sore throat, swollen lymph nodes and extreme fatigue. Future prospects Glandular fever usually takes two to four weeks and resolves itself without complications. In about 3 per cent of all cases, it goes on longer. After having the disease, a person will have lifelong immunity to it, so will not catch it again. Take heart though because the majority of adults in this country have had it and have no long term ill-effects. well, let's put it this way: you can't get much fitter than Roger Federer, who is also only 26 years old. he had glandular fever earlier this year and only just now got back to full fitness. 29-11-2009 06:53. (Original post by jbavfc88) I was diagnosed with glandular fever last week, and I've had it for around 6 weeks now I think and I've been researching it online and most medical sources generally seem to say that it lasts for around 4 weeks. Query: how long does glandular fever last",
"output": [
"The glandular fever last for two to three weeks."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-dca16380df734a6da50a76949434db0e",
"input": "Child visit (newborn to 16 years) Common reasons for sick officevisits include ear infections, sinus infections, sore throats, viral infections, sprains, and fractures. $115–$160 Emergency Room Care Typical Cost Estimate Care for Illness and Injury in the Emergency Room (ER) (includes costs associated with physicians, facilities, and common tests) Adult emergency room visit Common reasons for ER visits include chest pain, fainting, headaches, injuries, respiratory problems, stomach pain, and urinary tract infections. The centers are staffed primarily by family care and emergency room physicians and can duplicate nearly all the services offered in the traditional doctor’s office or emergency room with two major exceptions: 1 They don’t keep medical histories like you expect at a primary care doctor’s office. The best place to learn about your expenses is through your health plan’s coverage documentation. (Summary of Benefits, Evidence of Coverage, and other plan information). You can also check your member ID card for important cost information, such as copayments for officevisits. and emergency care. When someone in your health plan visits the emergency room for non-emergency treatment, we all pay more. Print ad (1.51 mb - Acrobat PDF) Poster (1.5 mb - Acrobat PDF) This study shows that the average cost of a nonurgent visit to an emergency department is much lower than commonly believed, and the marginal cost of a nonurgent visit is about $25. For all 24,010 visits, the average cost was 55 percent of the average charge. Percent of adults with emergency department visits in the past 12 months according to selected characteristics Health, United States, 2016, table 74 [PDF – 9.8 MB] Percent of children with emergency department visits in the past 12 months by selected characteristics Health, United States, 2016, table 73 [PDF – 9.8 MB] Reasons for Emergency Room Use Among U.S. Adults Aged 18-64: National Health Interview Survey, 2013 and 2014 [PDF – 348 KB] Fees and Average Costs for ER Visits. ER medical professionals may charge additional fees for their care, which can add hundreds of dollars to the final bill. A study conducted in 2013 indicated that the average total ER visit cost $1,233. A new, NIH-funded study takes the idea even further: A team of four researchers looked at medical expenditure bills that represented more than 8,303 emergency room visits. They found, essentially, two things. First, huge variation in prices: Bills sent out for sprained ankles ranged from $4 to $24,110. Second, overall, really high prices: The average emergency room visit now costs 40 percent more than a month's rent. Researchers used data from the Medical Expenditures Panel Survey, which looks at how much American families spend on, well, medical expenditures. Doctor's Office Versus E.R. Visits; Is it really an emergency? What should you know before going to the E.R.? The national average E.R. visit costs $383, while the national average doctor’s office visit is approximately $60. Unnecessary E.R. visits can delay care for those with true emergencies, and cost billions of dollars. Pay for the cold relief, not for everything else. This form has five steps, and asks you to share some basic information about you and your emergency room visit. Before you get started, have the following information ready to ensure a smooth process: Query: average cost for a visit to the emergency room",
"output": [
"The average cost for a visit to the emergency room is $115 to $160."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e6981a89e41e41bf9552c18236074772",
"input": "Picking or tearing at the corners of the nails can also cause an ingrown toenail. Some people are born with nails that are curved and grow into the skin. Others have toenails that are too large for their toes. Stubbing your toe or other injuries can also lead to an ingrown toenail. There are several different things you can do to fix an ingrown toenail. The severity of your condition will dictate which one is best for you. If you catch the ingrown toenail early enough, you can redirect its growth away from the skin. I've had an ingrown hair in bikini area for 2 weeks it was bigger and sore nowi t's smaller but how long should it take to heal? Dr. Wayne Ingram Dr. Ingram 1 doctor agreed: If your ingrown nail does not heal or keeps coming back, your doctor may remove part of the nail: 1 Numbing medicine is first injected into the toe. 2 The doctor uses scissors to cut along the edge of the nail where the skin is growing over. 3 It takes 2 to 4 months for the nail to regrow. Re: Toe nail surgery - how long does recovery take? by Pivvay » Thu Feb 14, 2008 9:58 pm Nikman wrote:I have been taken off a stripe of my right foot's big toe nail this Monday. No infection, but I did not expect it to take this long to heal. I’m soaking in epsom salt twice a day, then triple antibiotic ointment and covering. Really miss wearing shoes. Wash the infected area with antibacterial soap twice a day using a clean cloth every time. Do not scrub. Use a fresh towel to pat dry the infected skin as well. Step 5. Stop shaving for at least three months if you experience chronic or frequent infections from ingrown hairs. According to the American Osteopathic College of Dermatology, you need to allow the hair to gain sufficient length and strength naturally to stop the hairs from curling into the skin and causing infection. I think your toe is probably fine by now.. I had the toenail removal surgery in October. The day after I had to take the bandage they put on my toe off and I had to soak it in warm water and then soak it three times a day the next couple of days... but since its been a week you have probably already done that. Healing Ingrown Toenail. I know that an injury towards the cuticle of the nail area takes about 9 months to grow all the way out on your big toe. As far as an ingrown nail, it has to be treated or partially removed before the healing starts. You will feel much better within a day or two, but still takes longer to heal correctly. Warm soaks in saltwater will help ease the pain and heal it faster. Tea Tree Oil is helpful too. It will act as a soothing antiseptic and keeps fungus under control. Antibiotic that you take by mouth or rub onto your skin to treat an ingrown hair infection There isn't any real treatment for ingrown hair other than to grow out your beard. Longer hairs aren't as sharp at the ends, so they won't be as likely to curl around and break through the skin. Query: how long does it take for an ingrown to heal",
"output": [
"It takes 9 months for an ingrown to heal."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-026ad07da0e548149d62798718333065",
"input": "You'll be required to carry private mortgage insurance if you don't have enough cash to make a 20% down payment on a home. It costs anywhere from 0.20% to 1.50% of the balance on your loan each year, based on your credit score, down payment and loan term. Keep the annual summaries until you retire or close the account. Bank records: Length of time to keep, and why: From one year to permanently. Go through your checks each year and keep those related to your taxes, business expenses, home improvements and mortgage payments. Shred those that have no long-term importance. Brokerage statements Once you've committed to paying PMI, you'll usually have to keep it for at least two years. If your home has appreciated enough to give you 25% equity after two to five years, you can cancel the coverage. After five years, you just need 20% equity to ditch it. One thing to keep in mind: If you have a second mortgage, such as a home equity loan or home equity line of credit, that reduces your equity. Say your home is worth $200,000, and you owe $140,000 on your first mortgage. That gives you 30% equity, or $60,000. FHA mortgage insurance depends on when you got your loan, and also your loan term. Before the rule was that you lost your MI when your LTV got down to 78% and you have had the mortgage for at least 5 years. Newer loans now have MI for the entire duration of the mortgage in many cases. Shred those that have no long-term importance. Brokerage statements: Length of time to keep, and why: Until you sell the securities. You need the purchase or sales slips from your brokerage or mutual fund to prove whether you have capital gains or losses at tax time. Bills: Length of time to keep, and why: From one year to permanently Why would you do a FHA loan again if you have that type of value. You could get a conventional 15 yr fixed rate for about a percent less and not have any mortgage insurance January 22 2015 You have the option to get a mortgage insurance for the length of your mortgage contract, or you can choose 10 years, 15 years, 20 years, 40 years, etc. You have the option to get a mortgage insurance for the length of your mortgage contract, or you can choose 10 years, 15 years, 20 years, 40 years, etc. You'll also have to keep paying the annual premiums for the life of the loan. Unlike private mortgage insurance on conforming loans, you can't drop FHA mortgage insurance when your equity reaches 20% or 25%. RATE SEARCH: Shop the lowest mortgage rates. Private mortgage insurance You can’t take everything with you, but you should safely store or electronically scan and save certain essential documents. The following are suggestions about how long you should keep personal finance and investment records on file: Query: how long do you have to keep mortgage insurance",
"output": [
"Keep mortgage insurance for at least 5 years."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-708c160419d04783b054c96c251fad11",
"input": "The EBV antibody test can also detect the type of antibodies (immunoglobulins) present in the blood. The type of antibody shows whether the infection is recent or old. The antibody IgM is only found during the active phase of mono. The antibody IgG can be found later, when you are starting to get better. 2 doctors agreed: It varies...: Lymphoma blood work is not a specific term. Some blood tests take a few hours (standard chemistries or blood counts) whereas others may take a day or more. If the blood was sent out to an outside lab, then shipping and reporting may take longer than the test itself. Can take a while: Mono is caused by 2 viruses (epstein-barr more often, cytomegalovirus-less common). Same presentation and clinical course. Usually about 2 weeks with fatigue, sore throat, swollen glands; either can cause liver inflammation (w/ or w/o enlargement), enlarged spleen. Can take up to 6 ...Read more. Most blood tests will take five to ten minutes to draw the blood unless you have difficult veins. How long the results take will depend on the test. In the UK the tests the Americans call a blood panel will be available the same day in a hospital and from GPS (physicians) the results will be available before the start of the next working day. There will also be no charge. My 8 yr old son had blood work done and everything came back fine except that on the CBC report it says: I'm wondering what that mono means. It's just slightly raised and the dr had said that all the bloodwork was fine, but I'm just curious as to what the mono is. Mononucleosis tests are blood tests to look for antibodies that indicate mononucleosis (mono), which is usually caused by the Epstein-Barr virus (EBV). The antibodies are made by the immune system to fight an infection. Monospot test. The results of a monospot test are usually ready within 1 hour. And how long do patients have to wait for the blood test result? How long does it take for the human body to replace a pint of donated blood? What can I do to live as long as possible? Blood tests that look for EBV antibodies and liver function tests can also help with a diagnosis of mono. A CBC (complete blood count) will show if your lymphocytes, a type of white blood cell, show certain changes that may be a sign of mono. How Is Mono Treated? There is no cure for mono. The virus eventually goes away, but it can take a few weeks. Antibiotics are NOT used to treat mono. That's because mono is caused by a virus, and antibiotics do not kill viruses. Once in a while, the doctor may prescribe drugs called steroids. This medicine is usually taken for about five days. It can help control swelling in the throat and tonsils. Your doctor or nurse will recommend the following steps to make you feel better: Get plenty of rest. Reasons you may not be able to have the test or why the results may not be helpful include: 1 Having an EBV antibody test within the first few weeks of becoming infected with EBV. 2 Other infection or disease, such as cytomegalovirus (CMV), leukemia or lymphoma, rubella, hepatitis, or lupus. 3 Having a weakened immune system. results: Hypercoagulation lab testing is extensive and can take up to a week or more for results. Sometimes the results are complicated, but the question is what is your risk for another clotting event and how long should you be treated. However, if you have a blood clot currently, the diagnosis and ...Read more. Query: how long does it take to get back mono testing for blood work",
"output": [
"It takes 2 weeks to get back mono testing for blood work."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8b2d38820a674ad7888dfb76408325ab",
"input": "Once the chicken is removed from the oven, bring the temperature to 425 degrees F, roast your asparagus at the same time you return the potatoes to the oven for flashing (the casserole can go in the oven then, too, since it is still internally warm). Toasted sandwiches go a bit cold while u are assembling them after toasting bread . I flash heat the prepared sandwich on the plate for 5 seconds in a salamander . Sandwiches warm up nicely. Yes any longer and it may go dry . Comment posted by Park kitchen Bring the brew to a boil, and then place your meat or what ever wrapped in foil, or even just on a plate into the make shift steamer. put the lid on and I typically let it boil for 5 more min, then turn the heat off. It may take 10 minutes to reheat from that point, experience will let you know. Browning ground beef is a way to remove the fat from the beef, before adding the beef to another dish, such as tacos. There are two basic ways to brown ground beef - over the stove and in the microwave. Use these steps to learn how to brown ground beef two different ways. Steps How to Brown Ground Beef. Browning ground beef is a way to remove the fat from the beef, before adding the beef to another dish, such as tacos. There are two basic ways to brown ground beef - over the stove and in the microwave. Use these... It is important to remember that 350 degrees F is a baking and cooking heat, not necessarily a temperature that is ideal for reheating. In order to get precooked food hot again by placing it in a 350 degree oven, the food would have to stay in that oven for 20 minutes or more. The problem with that time frame is that the food is not really reheating, but cooking once again. Microwave the leftover gravy on High until it is very hot. Set aside. Step 2. Carve the roast beef into thin slices, and then divide the slices into two servings. Step 3. Place one of the servings into the microwave and set it on Low. Heat the serving in 30-second intervals until it is warm, but not too hot. Repeat with the other serving. Step 4. Pour the hot gravy over the sliced roast beef and serve. The following shows how to reheat the roast beef on a stove using the leftover gravy. Step 1. Put the gravy on a pan and heat it on the stove. Step 2. While the gravy is cooking, carve the roast beef into thin slices. Step 3. Once the gravy is boiling hot, place the slices in the gravy until they are warmed through. You didn't say how long I can leave the casserole in the oven to reheat; i.e., scalloped potatoes. Comment posted by Izzy The flashing you recommend in this article is very; however, it presupposes that all the food is at room temperature or warmer before the flashing process begins. Step 1, Spray a frying pan with non-stick cooking spray. Set the stove on medium heat and begin breaking apart the meat with a spatula. Put your ground beef in a frying pan that is big enough to hold all of your beef with plenty of room for the beef to be moved around.Step 2, Add water to the pan of beef. A 1/4 cup (59 ml) of water per 1 lb. (.45 kg) of beef is standard. This will help with the browning process.Step 3, Continue to break apart the beef in the pan. Turn the chunks of beef as ... I have a beef tenderloin that was cooked to about med rare. Would like to keep it as close to that and get the inside hot. Would 475 degrees for 5-10 take care of this? Query: how long does beef go in the microwave to warm up",
"output": [
"It takes 30 seconds for beef to warm up in the microwave."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-8ec9666e19124eff87657a9bcc8bb5d4",
"input": "Valium Long-Term Effects. Heavy use of Valium over an extended period of time can have powerful effects on the brain and body. These effects can be permanent and, in some cases, life-threatening. The long-term effects of Valium include: Memory loss. Hallucinations. Difficulty breathing. Slowed pulse. Coma. Heart attack. The half-life of Valium is fairly long – it can take 20 hours or more for just half of the medication to be eliminated from your system. However, just because it’s not completely eliminated after 20 hours doesn’t mean it’s still effective. Valium Long-Term Effects Heavy use of Valium over an extended period of time can have powerful effects on the brain and body. These effects can be permanent and, in some cases, life-threatening. So you would actually have to account for the elimination of N-desmethyldiazepam. It takes 5.5 x elimination half lives (hours) for a medicine to be cleared from your system, therefore Valium or it's active metabolite will be in your system for 550 hours (5.5 x 100hrs) i.e. approximately 23 days. Both temazepam and oxazepam have a modest half-life of 8-9 hours. Due to the long half-life of diazepam it works for a significant period of time. Most of the effects last about 6-8 hours, after that time Valium and its active metabolites continue to exert very subtle and very mild effects that are often unnoticed. Valium affects the levels of gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA) in the brain, helping to slow down and stop abnormal brain activity. This results in a calming effect, and sometimes feelings of euphoria. It helps reduce anxiety, cause sleepiness, relax muscles, stop seizures, and more. Depends on the strength. A 10mg will kick in around 30 to 60 minutes after ingesting and last about 4-6 hrs. It stays in your system for over 100+ hours, although the effects …are gone after 6 hrs. It really took the edge off my fear (40 min in the machine) but there is not easy way to tell when it actually wears off. about 2 hours after i took it a had a nap which turned out to be a pretty deep 2 hour affair :-) when i got up i would say for sure there was nothing left of the Valium... How long a drug stays in your system depends mainly on it's elimination half life. For Valium (diazepam) the initial distribution phase is followed by a prolonged terminal elimination phase (half-life up to 48 hours). The terminal elimination half-life of the active metabolite N-desmethyldiazepam is, on average, 100 hours. Side Effects. When used properly, Valium does not produce the same effects as it does when abused/misused. Valium has side effects with proper use, but these are temporary and should go away after a few standard doses. The Dangers of Valium For 13 years, Valium was the most prescribed drug in America. Query: how long do effects of valium last in the body",
"output": [
"Most of the effects last about 6-8 hours, after that time Valium."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0cff9a6e1bcd4e2eb3cad02e1c0a8774",
"input": "On the screen for your hands-free system, tap the contact named Cortana in your contact list to start Cortana on your phone. The car dials the number that starts Cortana. Ask Cortana whatever you like. Cortana is currently available in English, Portuguese, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Chinese, and Japanese language editions, depending on the software platform and region in which it is used. Cortana mainly competes against assistants such as Apple Siri, Google Assistant, and Amazon Alexa Cortana: [Pulls up Web search for very funny pictures and quotes.] Google is the most staid of the three, by a long shot, and that's simply because Google hasn't chosen to anthropomorphize its search app. Tell Google Now it's awesome and it just creates a new Web search. 10. Cortana's own stuff Ask Cortana anything: Snarky answers to 59 burning questions If nothing else, Windows 10's Cortana digital assistant proves she’s more fun than Siri and Google Now put together. By Brad Chacos, Senior Editor, PCWorld Cortana's voice is available in Halo: Reach ' s Firefight mode. Once she is acquired after the level The Package, her casing will be added to the back of player one in The Pillar of Autumn. Trivia Edit. Cortana is usually voiced by Jen Taylor, who also voices Catherine Halsey. In Halo Legends, Shelley Calene-Black voices both Halsey and Cortana. Cortana is a fictional artificial intelligence character in the Halo video game series. Voiced by Jen Taylor, she appears in Halo: Combat Evolved and its sequels, Halo 2, Halo 3, Halo 4 and Halo 5: Guardians. She also briefly appears in the prequel Halo: Reach, as well as in several of the franchise's novels and comics. During gameplay, Cortana provides backstory and tactical information to the player, who assumes the role of Master Chief Petty Officer John-117. In the story, she is instrumental Cortana will be available to third party developers: unlike Siri, which is limited to Apple's own apps and a few Apple-anointed services, Cortana could potentially work with any of your apps. Microsoft demonstrated Cortana working in Skype, Hulu Plus and Facebook. That third-party support could be significant. Cortana’s features take shape in these concept drawings. “To me, Cortana’s been the greatest guide. She is a smart, independent woman — other than she needs you to move around. More like this. 1 Windows 10 review: It's familiar, it's powerful, but the Edge browser falls... 2 Ask Cortana anything: Snarky answers to 59 burning questions. 3 5 must-know Windows 10 tips and tricks. 4 Video. These are the first Windows Mixed Reality headsets. One of the things Cortana can do is to give you reminders. She can remind you to do things based on time, places, or even people. For example, type or say, Remind me to congratulate Tanya the next time she calls. The reminder will appear when you get a call from Tanya. Query: how is cortana ?",
"output": [
"Cortana is a fictional artificial intelligence character in the Halo video game series."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-777bab559df04025bcd6d7de460d6a68",
"input": "To do so: 1 Get a spray bottle and fill it with conditioner and distilled water (tap water if distilled isn’t available). 2 Mist hair lightly with conditioner mixture. 3 Finger detangle and place hair into 5×5 inch sections. 4 Spray a section, and with an extra wide tooth comb, gently from ends to root, comb ridding the section of all loose hair. Shampoo & Condition. After prepoo, proceed to shampooing. At this point, you want to use a clarifying shampoo, but one that doesn’t dry the hair out. (Shampoo secret: If you have a shampoo that clarifies to the point of drying out the hair, use it equal parts with another moisturizing shampoo or add a little conditioner to it. All you have is some old virgin hair you wore a few months ago or the hair that’s currently installed now. Ladies, we are discussing “How to Bring that Old Virgin Hair Back!” Yes it is possible to bring it back, but you are going to have to do some work. First you will need to wash and deep condition the hair. In Growing Long Natural Hair, Natural Hair Care, Natural Hair Styles, Protective Hairstyles, Weave/Extension On 05/26/15 While protective styling seems to be growing in popularity, and is a great way to minimize manipulation of strands and retain length, they can be damaging if not maintained properly. (Human hair is made of the same properties as out own hair, so it made sense to treat it the same way I would my natural hair--and don't laught, but I even use a reconstructor on my weave!) I'm going on a month with weave and I'm thinking should I incorporate deep conditioning (with heat) and even a MILD reconstructor into my regimen for the cornrowed hair underneath. I just hate going this long without one . A conflict of course is being able to rinse it out THOROUGHLY from the cornrows. How to Bring that Old Virgin Hair Back! 1 Don’t worry to much what the hair looks like when dry. Have your hair installed and then get to work! 2 Once your hair is installed, it will need to be blow dried with a paddle brush. Paddle brush blow dry for about 15 mins. Before you get a sew-in, make sure to deep condition the weave. Begin by washing it in warm water. Apply a deep conditioner to the weave from roots to ends. And then place the hair inside a plastic cap or bag. After 10-20 minutes, rinse off any excess conditioner and air dry. To deep condition sewn-in weave, you again want to wash the weave and braids with warm water. If there is product build-up on the braids, use a clarifying shampoo. Apply the deep conditioner and place a plastic cap over your head with all the weave inside. PrincessM, I have often wondered this myself. I wasn't even sure if you could do the same with braids or not. Currently I am also going on a month with a sewn-in weave and I didn't what deep conditioner I should use. How I deep condition my virgin hair part 2/2 - Duration: 4:52. Camille Rhone 21,283 views Love your avi BTW yes you should deep condition at least once a week. Will keep your own hair nice and soft otherwise it may get dry and brittle. Just massage very slowly in between the tracks. Do it when you are also deep conditioning your weave and then leave in for about 5-7 minutes (massage your scalp during this period its great for hair growth as it stimulates blood supply into your hair follicles) and then rinse it out very thoroughly. Query: how long to deep condition weave",
"output": [
"You should deep condition weave for 10 to 20 minutes."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-ee17f733e1c14e72be70cc7a1657f9f1",
"input": "Recently, the brand-name form of methylprednisolone, Medrol, was made available in a 4 mg tablet. A doctor's prescription is required. Be sure to follow your doctor's instructions carefully when taking this medicine. Methylprednisolone (Solu-Medrol) is a corticosteroid that relieves inflammation and improves problems caused by a decrease in adrenal gland function. Tell your doctor right away if you experience any of the following serious side effects: Signs of infection, which may include fever, chills, or sore throat. Bloody, black, or tarry stools. Vomit that looks like coffee grounds. Increased hunger, thirst, or urination. Mental or mood changes. Methylprednisolone is the generic form of the brand-name drug Solu-Medrol, a corticosteroid that relieves inflammation and improves problems caused by a decrease in adrenal gland function. The medicine is used to treat a variety of conditions, including: Multiple sclerosis. The Food and Drug Administration (FDA) approved methylprednisolone in 1957. Solu-Medrol is manufactured by Pharmacia and Upjohn Company, a division of Pfizer, Inc. Methylprednisolone Warnings. Before taking methylprednisolone, tell your doctor if you have or have had: A fungal infection or any other type of infection; Allergies to medicines or foods Talk to your doctor before receiving any vaccination while on methylprednisolone. Also, if you haven't had chickenpox, measles, or shingles, avoid contact with anyone who does. If you have diabetes, methylprednisolone may affect your blood sugar levels. 3. Your age and health – older age and poor health will generally increase the time the drug stays in your system. 4. Body mass – generally the bigger you are the longer a drug will remain in your system. Methylprednisolone has a medium half life range of 18 to 36 hours - meaning it takes the body 18 to 36 hours to clear 50% of the drug. All these factors along with the drugs half life determine how long it remains in your system. Sorry I could not be more specific. Solu-Medrol is manufactured by Pharmacia and Upjohn Company, a division of Pfizer, Inc. Methylprednisolone Warnings Before taking methylprednisolone, tell your doctor if you have or have had: A fungal infection or any other type of infection. Allergies to medicines or foods. A history of bleeding problems. Congestive heart failure or a recent heart attack. High blood pressure. 18 Oct 2016. Medrol Dosepak (methylprednisolone) has a medium half life range of 18 to 36 hours - meaning it takes the body 18 to 36 hours to clear 50% of the drug from your plasma. For a drug to be totally eliminated from your system it takes around 5.5 times the half life. As an estimate then, after taking a single dose of methylprednisolone it should be out of your system after 8 days. (5.5 x 36 hours = 198 hours or just over 8 days) Other factors to consider: 1. How much and how often you have taken the drug. 2. Your metabolic rate – a slower metabolism will increase the time a drug remains in your system. 3. Tell your doctor right away if you experience any of the following serious side effects: 1 Signs of infection, which may include fever, chills, or sore throat. 2 Bloody, black, or tarry stools. 3 Vomit that looks like coffee grounds. 4 Increased hunger, thirst, or urination. 5 Mental or mood changes. 6 Muscle pain, weakness, or wasting. Query: how long does methylprednisolone dosepak stay in system",
"output": [
"Methylprednisolone dosepak stay in system for 18 to 36 hours."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-6d8bd94c09a444b6abf6106f537eb8c5",
"input": "As little as 5% down, plus mortgage insurance, can secure you a conventional home loan, but you'll wait longer than 2 years in order to qualify, perhaps as long as 7 years. VA Loan requirements after a short sale are only 2 years, offer 100% financing, no required mortgage insurance and a FICO score of 550 or better. Qualifying for an FHA Loan After Foreclosure FHA loans are the most forgiving of foreclosures. To qualify for an FHA mortgage loan, you must wait at least three years after the foreclosure. The three-year clock starts ticking from the time that the foreclosure case has ended, usually from the date that your prior home was sold in the foreclosure proceeding. That leaves about 4 million families who lost their homes to foreclosure who may still have it listed on their credit reports. That's a lot of people who potentially may want to buy a home within seven years of foreclosure. To be approved for a home loan within seven years of a foreclosure, here are some loan options and things to do: Improve your credit score FICO credit scores range from 300 to 850 and most mortgage lenders require at least a 620 to 660 score. The Federal Housing Administration (FHA) is not a mortgage lender; the FHA does not make loans. Rather, it insures loans for banks that do. The FHA publishes a compendium of rules known as FHA mortgage guidelines and so long as a mortgage meets of the rules' minimum standards, the FHA will insure the loan-issuing bank against default. A better name for an FHA mortgage, then, might be FHA-insured mortgage; it's a more accurate reflection of the relationship between the FHA and mortgage lender nationwide. FHA mortgage insurance is available for any loan which meets the following two conditions 1 : The loan must be made by an approved FHA lender. 2 The loan must meet the minimum standards of the FHA Mortgage Guidelines. 1 What types of home loan can you get after bankruptcy? 1.1 FHA Loans; 1.2 VA Loans; 1.3 Conventional Loans; 2 How does bankruptcy affect your credit score? 3 Can you buy a house even after a foreclosure? 4 What if you had both a bankruptcy and a foreclosure? When you are ready to fill out an FHA loan application in the wake of a short sale, what do the FHA loan rules say about having such a transaction on your record? FHA loan rules for new loans following a short sale may seem complex--the rules that apply to you often depend on the status of your mortgage loan prior to the short sale. We have written about these rules in the past, but since the publication of the FHA Single Family Loan program handbook, HUD 4000.1, there have been many changes and updates to portions of FHA home loan policy. FHA has a list of short sale (also known as a “pre-foreclosure sale) rules and regulations in HUD 4000.1 for borrowers looking to become homeowners once more. At least two years must have elapsed since the discharge date of the borrower and / or spouse's Chapter 7 Bankruptcy, according to FHA guidelines. This is not to be confused with the bankruptcy filing date. A full explanation will be required with the loan application. Simply fill out the 4-step questionnaire and find out: 1 If you are eligible for a home loan, 2 If you can apply for a loan now or need to wait longer, and. 3 What type of home loan you are qualified for. Buying Another Home After Foreclosure. Depending on your previous loan amount and where in the country you’re buying, you may have enough VA loan entitlement left over to qualify for another loan. You’ll want to get a look at your Certificate of Eligibility to see how much you have left, if any. Prospective buyers can do this themselves or ask a lender for help. Along with any required waiting period, you’d also need to meet the standard credit, debt-and-income and related requirements ... Query: how long do you need to wait for fha loan after foreclosure",
"output": [
"You need to wait for three years fha loan after foreclosure."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4f2dd915a9404568a25c0cce39ab4f35",
"input": "Denver bus fare from Denver Airport Station Gate 6 to En ... Memphis bus fare from memphis airport to 6886 Reese Rd >> Memphis bus fare from airport to Bartlett >> Distance between lithonia, ga and Atlanta airport is 23 Mile. Travel time from lithonia, ga and Atlanta airport is 27 Minutes. What is Atlanta Taxi Fare from lithonia to Atlanta airport ? Click below to see a map from lithonia to Atlanta airport! Gas cost estimates for this Atlanta to Lithonia trip If you were travelling in a vehicle that averaged 35 MPG and were paying $3.54 per gallon for your gas then the cost for a trip based upon an estimated distance of 9.6 drive miles from Atlanta to Lithonia * in gas would be in the region of $0.97 USD. Driving time from ATL to Lithonia, GA. How long is the drive from ATL to Lithonia, GA? The total driving time is 25 minutes. Your trip begins at Hartsfield-Jackson Atlanta International Airport in Atlanta, Georgia. It ends in Lithonia, Georgia. If you're planning a road trip, you might be interested in seeing the total driving distance from ATL to Lithonia, GA. You can also calculate the cost to drive from ATL to Lithonia, GA based on current local gas prices and an estimate of your car's best gas mileage. Red Roof Atlanta East - Lithonia is in the eastern suburb of Lithonia, just 16 miles from downtown Atlanta. This hotel is loaded with amenities which include a business center, free WiFi, flat screen TV's with extended cable television including Cinemax, HBO, & Starz Super Pack and free local and long distance calls. Taxi fare, Auto fare and Cab Fare in Atlanta from lithonia to Atlanta airport Taxi fare, Auto fare and Cab Fare in Atlanta from lithonia to Atlanta airport Taxi Auto Fare The distance between Atlanta and Lithonia in a straight line is 8 miles or 12.87 Kilometers. Driving Directions & Drive Times from Atlanta to Lithonia can be found further down the page. Driving distances, maps and journey times are currently provided by Google mapping systems. What is the distance between Atlanta AND Lithonia? The distance between Atlanta and Lithonia in a straight line is 8 miles or 12.87 Kilometers . Driving Directions & Drive Times from Atlanta to Lithonia can be found further down the page. Driving directions from Atlanta (Georgia) to Lithonia (Georgia) Calculate the Driving Distance Between Atlanta (Georgia) and Lithonia (Georgia) - If you need to reverse this and get a map and driving directions from Lithonia to Atlanta click on the link. Travel thoughts for your from Atlanta to Lithonia. Driving By Car: If you were in a car and maintained an average speed of 60mph (96 kmh) over the course of your it would take you around 0 Query: how far is lithonia ga from the atlanta airport",
"output": [
"The distance between Lithonia, Georgia and Atlanta airport is 23 Mile."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-42de8e75d5814d9a93830718256da277",
"input": "International Day of the Dead events: Canada: Evergeen's 7th Annual Día de Muertos. November 5, 2017(10:00am - 3:00pm). Altars, Mexican market, crafts, live music & traditional dancing. 416.596.7670: Evergreen Brick Works 550 Bayview Avenue Toronto, Ontario: England: Mexican Day of the Dead Celebrations. October 29, 2017 (10:00am-5:00pm). History of Day of the Dead ~ Día de los Muertos Day of the Dead is an interesting holiday celebrated in central and southern Mexico during the chilly days of November 1 & 2. Even though this coincides with the Catholic holiday called All Soul's & All Saint’s Day, the indigenous people have combined this with their own ancient beliefs of honoring their deceased loved ones. How to Celebrate Día de los Muertos (Day of the Dead) Two Methods: Honoring Your Loved Ones Making Ofrendas (Offerings) Community Q&A. Día de los Muertos (Day of the Dead) is a holiday celebrated in Latin American countries and is especially popular in Mexico. Originally celebrated in the summer, it moved to Nov. 1 and 2 to coincide with All Saints Days and All Souls Day. Day of the Dead is still celebrated throughout Mexico and has even gone Hollywood: Daniel Craig's James Bond pursued a baddie through Mexico City during a massive Day of the Dead carnival in 2015's Spectre. The 2014 film The Book of Life features a Day of the Dead theme and animation filled with calacas (skeletons) and calaveras (skulls). Over the last several years, a growing number of people of Mexican and other Latin American descent have celebrated Day of the Dead throughout the U.S. The Mexican diaspora to the states during the 1990s through the early 2000s largely contributed to that, says Alberto Fierro, executive director at the Mexican Cultural Institute. Celebrating The Day of the Dead has a long history in Mexican Tradition. The Day of the dead is celebrated on November 2nd. Sometime one hears reference to “the days of the Dead” which refers to the Days of October 31 – November 2. October 31 is Halloween or All Hallows eve. November 1 is “el Dia de los innnocentes” or the day of the children and All Saints Day. November second is All Souls Day or the Day of the Dead. The Day of the Dead, a Mexican holiday marked by dancing skeletons, homemade altars and candied skulls, continues to grow on this side of the border. The observance honoring the deceased has its roots in pre-Hispanic indigenous cultures, says Raul de Molina, host of the Univision news-entertainment show, El Gordo y La Flaca. Chiles, Chocolate & Day of the Dead Festival! October 27 & 27, 2017 (9:00am - 4:00pm) See site for activities and entertainment. Why Mexicans celebrate the Day of the Dead. Mexico's peculiar relationship with death reveals a complex heritage born of a tumultuous past. Tuesday 2 November 2010 10.30 EDT First published on Tuesday 2 November 2010 10.30 EDT. Mexicans visit cemeteries, decorate the graves and spend time there, in the presence of their deceased friends and family members. 1 They also make elaborately decorated altars (called ofrendas) in their homes to welcome the spirits. Query: how is day of the dead celebrated",
"output": [
"The Day of the Dead is celebrated by Honoring Your Loved Ones Making Ofrendas."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-e39ee9a23f4e4daea8c3338aeed6dd43",
"input": "Alaska Is Big! 1 You could fit Texas into Alaska 2 times! One-fifth the size of the Lower 48, Alaska is bigger than Texas, California, and Montana combined! 2 Alaska is also far-flung: 3.1 times wider (east to west) and 1.9 times taller (north to south) than Texas. Confidence votes 236K. Texas has an area of 268,820 square miles or 696,241 square kilometers. (square miles) All United States: 3,537,438.44: 1: Alaska: 571,951.26: 2: Texas: 261,797.12: 3: California: 155,959.34: 4: Montana: 145,552.43: 5: New Mexico: 121,355.53: 6: Arizona: 113,634.57: 7: Nevada: 109,825.99: 8: Colorado: 103,717.53: 9: Wyoming: 97,100.40: 10: Oregon: 95,996.79: 11: Idaho: 82,747.21: 12: Utah: 82,143.65: 13: Kansas: 81,814.88: 14: Minnesota: 79,610.08: 15: Nebraska: 76,872.41: 16: South Dakota: 75,884.64: 17: North Dakota Texas is enormous, but it’s hard sometimes to put its size in perspective: just listing the distance from, say, El Paso to Beaumont (824 miles!), and noting how it compares to the distance from Dallas to Sioux Falls, SD (841 miles!) doesn’t quite do the trick —unless you’ve done both drives, it’s still kind of abstract. Square Miles: 1: Alaska: 663,267: 2: Texas: 268,581: 3: California: 163,696: 4: Montana: 147,042: 5: New Mexico: 121,589: 6: Arizona: 113,998: 7: Nevada: 110,561: 8: Colorado: 104,094: 9: Oregon: 98,381: 10: Wyoming: 97,814: 11: Michigan: 96,716: 12: Minnesota: 86,939: 13: Utah: 84,899: 14: Idaho: 83,570: 15: Kansas: 82,277: 16: Nebraska: 77,354: 17: South Dakota: 77,117: 18: Washington: 71,300: 19: North Dakota: 70,700: 20: Oklahoma: 69,898: 21: Missouri: 69,704: 22: Florida Area (Sq Miles) 1: Alaska: 571,951: 2: Texas: 261,797: 3: California: 155,959: 4: Montana: 145,552: 5: New Mexico: 121,356: 6: Arizona: 113,635: 7: Nevada: 109,826: 8: Colorado: 103,718: 9: Wyoming: 97,100: 10: Oregon: 95,997: 11: Idaho: 82,747: 12: Utah: 82,144: 13: Kansas: 81,815: 14: Minnesota: 79,610: 15: Nebraska: 76,872: 16: South Dakota: 75,885: 17: North Dakota: 68,976: 18: Missouri: 68,886: 19: Oklahoma: 68,667: 20: Washington: 66,544: 21: Georgia: 57,906: 22 It's about 500 miles shorter to drive from Green Bay, Wisconsin to New Orleans than it is to drive from one end of Texas to the other and back. It's about 500 miles shorter to drive from Green Bay, Wisconsin to New Orleans than it is to drive from one end of Texas to the other and back. Photo: Google Maps Image 17 of 17 Actually, it's not quite Rhode Island, which covers about 1,200 square miles. But the smallest state has only five counties, while Waggoner Ranch occupies parts of six. From there, Waggoner's stats get more impressive. That’s about 57% the size of California (423,970 square kilometers). From the southern tip of England to the northern end of Scotland would stretch from Los Angeles to the Oregon border. Comparing the sizes of the United Kingdom and California. Molly Hennessy-FiskeContact Reporter. For sale: the biggest American ranch ever put on the block -- larger than Los Angeles and New York City combined -- nearly 800 square miles of north Texas prairie, cattle pasture and, of course, oil fields. Price tag: $725 million, more than quadruple the biggest public sale of a U.S. ranch to date. Query: how large is the texas in square miles",
"output": [
"Texas has an area of 268,820 square miles."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-90e6ba0b0d20420ebf60972daf861e93",
"input": "The interest rate on a reverse mortgage may be higher than on a conventional forward mortgage. Interest compounds over the life of a reverse mortgage, which means that the mortgage can quickly balloon. Since no monthly payments are made by the borrower on a reverse mortgage, the interest that accrues is treated as a loan advance. If you have a lifetime mortgage and even if the total amount of the loan plus any interest exceeds the property's value your house cannot be repossessed as long as you have maintained it and complied with the mortgage agreement. The total amount, capital plus interest, is repaid when you die or move into long-term care. The average value of equity release loans in 2014 was £65,000, according to the industry body, the Equity Release Council. If you have a property worth £400,000 and want to free up £65,000, for example, the best rate on a lifetime mortgage is currently 5.05pc from a lender called New Life. Review the options available under Mortgage Release (your mortgage company will help you choose the best option for your situation) A mortgage release usually takes around 90 days to complete, but this could be shorter or longer depending upon your specific situation. Your next steps depend on which option you’ve qualified for. Mortgage loan. Finance. A mortgage loan, also referred to as simply a mortgage, is used either by purchasers of real property to raise funds to buy real estate; or alternatively by existing property owners to raise funds for any purpose, while putting a lien on the property being mortgaged. 1 The Saga Equity Release Advice Service provides you with access to a range of carefully selected plans and providers. Your adviser will recommend the product best suited to your individual needs and circumstances. 2 Equity release isn't right for everyone, so there's no obligation to continue with your enquiry any further than you're comfortable with. Equity release schemes enable you to take cash from the equity built up in your property. They are targeted at older homeowners who would struggle to take on a regular mortgage and probably have little or no income to make regular repayments. The minimum age is typically 55 on lifetime mortgages and 60 on reversion plans. No, unless you choose an interest only lifetime mortgage. Lifetime mortgage plans may suit you if you have a regular source of income and can therefore afford to pay interest on a monthly basis. The benefit of this is that the amount of the loan does not increase. It may be possible to pay all of the interest or a proportion dependent on what you can afford. Properties which are unlikely to be acceptable to equity release providers include: 1 Studio or basement flats. 2 Flats of maisonettes in a local authority or housing authority block of more than four storeys. 3 Retirement properties. 4 Static/mobile homes. 5 Houseboats. 6 Farms. 7 Hotels. 8 Guest houses/B&Bs. In some states, trust deeds or deeds of trust -- not mortgages -- are the predominant form of pledging property and also require a lien release. Filing a lien release is a key step in paying off your home. Query: how long to release mortgage interest",
"output": [
"A mortgage release usually takes around 90 days to complete, but this could be shorter or longer depending upon your specific situation.`"
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3b2d4ecae00d4da180a4ada0fd62a5c1",
"input": "Florida. 1 Fee charged, but it's lower for Florida residents who have completed a premarital prep course. 2 Waiting period: three days for Florida residents (waived if couple completes the above-mentioned course); no waiting period for non-residents. 3 Issued by county; apply at any county clerk's office. 4 License valid for 60 days. Each state has its own requirements, but the typical requirement is that you must get married within either 30 days or 60 days of getting the license. There is typically a 72-hour waiting period as well. A: Don't bother with getting the license until you've set the date. Most states have both a waiting period after you apply for the license (usually just a few days) as well as an expiration policy that dictates the length of time a license is valid. If you're renting, I'd go in a month to two months before. We went in November for our March 1 wedding because I wanted to get it done early and I knew money was an issue for a couple fellas, so they would have time to put the deposit down and then pay the balance on their rental. In Response to Re: How long does it take for the marriage certificate to come back? In NJ, you apply for the license, then you wait 3 days to pick it up. Then you turn it over to your officiant prior to the wedding ceremony so he can fill out the areas he's required to fill out ahead of time. All we have left of it is the pink copy (it was a triplicate form), but it's totally legal. Like Mrs JG2Be said, every state is different, so you have to check it out for yourself. While it may not be the romantic or glamorous part of planning a wedding, getting a marriage license is required in all 50 states. Each state has its own requirements that must be fulfilled before getting a marriage license; here is a summary of the most common requirements. Your union won't be official until you obtain your marriage license. Here's everything you need to know before you head to the marriage bureau. Yes you have to have your license on your wedding day. The witnesses and officiant sign - and it is an oath. At the very least your marriage could be invalidated, the officiant could get in trouble with his/her church. They could all get in trouble for perjury. Just get the license first. Five or six days before:__ Pick up your dress (if you haven't already), your veil (ditto), and the tuxes. Tux rentals tend to run just a week long, so make sure you have a plan to return that formalwear right after the wedding! __. Four or five days before:__ Get your marriage license. You do not have to be a previous or current resident of Tennessee to obtain a marriage license that will be valid statewide. Waiting Period After I submit my application how long do I have to wait before I receive my marriage license? There is no waiting period. You will receive your marriage license immediately after you submit your application. Query: how long do before wedding do you have to wait to get a license",
"output": [
"Each state has its own requirements, but the typical requirement is that you must get married within either 30 days or 60 days of getting the license. There is typically a 72-hour waiting period as well."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-0bbe1f2b085b4226b97eb4f1895e642a",
"input": "Luckily, we have the ability to understand our cats' development more easily when we have a general idea of their age in human years. How to Convert Your Cat's Age to Human Years. The method of cat age conversion below utilizes averages only. Some purebred cats, such as Maine Coons, mature much slower and don't reach full development for three or four years. Like humans, cats age in relation to genetics, diet, exercise, care at home, and veterinary care. Most people think that calculating the age of dogs and cats in “human years” is quite simple: multiply their age by seven. For example, a 4-year-old dog or cat would actually be 28 years old in human years. But when you really begin weighing out the arithmetic, this method doesn’t add up. Say a 1-year-old dog is the equivalent of a 7-year-old human -- get out of here! How many 7-year-old humans are sexually active and capable of reproducing? Dogs and cats are much more likely to have babies at 1 year old or even at 10 years old, than any person who is 7 or 70. Here's How: 1 Allow 15 human years for the first year of your cat's life. 2 Add nine years for the second year. 3 Add four human years each for successive years of his life. 4 When all else fails, refer to the accompanying chart. Calculate the age of your cat in human years. Nowadays cats tend to live longer - the average life-span of a 21st century cat is estimated at between 10-15 years. There are many contributing factors, including better diet, care and medical advances. Cats mature very early. Here's How: 1 Allow 15 human years for the first year of your cat's life. 2 Add nine years for the second year. A two-year old cat will approximate 24 human years. 3 Add four human years each for successive years of his life. 4 When all else fails, refer to the accompanying chart. Still, it's worth it to get an idea of how old your cat is in human years. Follow the four steps below: Allow 15 human years for the first year of your cat's life. Add nine years for the second year. A two-year-old cat will be approximately 24 human years. Add four human years for each successive years of his or her life. Still, it's worth it to get an idea of how old your cat is in human years. Follow the four steps below: Allow 15 human years for the first year of your cat's life. 1 Add nine years for the second year. A two-year old cat will approximate 24 human years. 2 Add four human years each for successive years of his life. 3 When all else fails, refer to the accompanying chart. Your cat is in its prime from three years to six years and develops into a mature cat from seven to 10 years old. When your cat reaches its senior age, from 11 to 14 years old, care begins to change more dramatically. Calculate the age of your cat in human years Nowadays cats tend to live longer - the average life-span of a 21 st century cat is estimated at between 10-15 years. There are many contributing factors, including better diet, care and medical advances. Now let’s take a glimpse at a simple formula for calculating feline age in human years. Assume that a 1-year-old cat is equal to a 15-year-old human and a 2-year-old cat is equal to a 24-year-old human. Then add four years for every year after that. (Example: A 4-year-old cat would be 32 in human years.) The following chart shows this formula of calculation: Cats generally live 12 to 15 years, although outdoor cats live an average of only 10 years or so. Query: how do you get your cats age in human years",
"output": [
"Still, it's worth it to get an idea of how old your cat is in human years. Follow the four steps below: Allow 15 human years for the first year of your cat's life. Add nine years for the second year. A two-year-old cat will be approximately 24 human years. Add four human years for each successive years of his or her life."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-d575177fda0045ccbd1e36c9a7447b27",
"input": "NIST publishes glossary of acronyms, abbreviations. 1 Abbreviations and acronyms generally appear in all capital letters, though there are exceptions — for example, meter (m) and decibels referenced to 1 milliwatt (dBm). Couldn't find the full form or full meaning of Network Security Administration? Maybe you were looking for one of these abbreviations: NETWARCOM - NETWC - NETWK - NETWOR - NETWORK - NETWORKS - NETX - NETY - NETZ - NEU FYI: NIST tries to bring order into the sometimes inconsistent and often confusing world of IT security acronyms and abbreviations. Definitions for Network security Here are all the possible meanings and translations of the word Network security. Freebase (5.00 / 2 votes) Rate this definition: Looking for the abbreviation of Network Security Administration? Find out what is the most common shorthand of Network Security Administration on Abbreviations.com! The Web's largest and most authoritative acronyms and abbreviations resource. Network security Network security consists of the provisions and policies adopted by a network administrator to prevent and monitor unauthorized access, misuse, modification, or denial of a computer network and network-accessible resources. NIST Interagency Report (“NISTIR”) 7581 , “System and Network Security Acronyms and Abbreviations,” runs the alphabetical gamut from A (address resource record type) to ZSK (zone signing key). “The capitalization, spelling and definitions of acronyms and abbreviations frequently vary among publications,” the report states. Freebase(0.00 / 0 votes)Rate this definition: Network security. Network security consists of the provisions and policies adopted by a network administrator to prevent and monitor unauthorized access, misuse, modification, or denial of a computer network and network-accessible resources. Network security involves the authorization of access to data in a network, which is controlled by the network administrator. We've got 1 shorthand for Network Security Administration » What is the abbreviation for Network Security Administration? Looking for the shorthand of Network Security Administration? This page is about the various possible meanings of the acronym, abbreviation, shorthand or slang term: Network Security Administration. Possible matching categories: Cyber & Security Sample Sentences & Example Usage. 1 Chen Zhimin: We will set up 'network security offices' inside important website and Internet firms, so that we can catch criminal behavior online at the earliest possible point. Query: abbr. network security",
"output": [
"“System and Network Security Acronyms and Abbreviations,” runs the alphabetical gamut from A."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4ee46d4094ac4841a253f0f42648cbd9",
"input": "This test will allow you to figure out if a drug from the opiate family has been recently used. The test will yield a positive result when concentrations of morphine exceed 2000 ng/mL. Morphine is excreted unmetabolized (aka unchanged), and is also the major metabolic product of codeine and heroin. Fentanyl is one of the strongest opiates available today. Fentanyl is 50 times more potent than heroin and over 100 times stronger than morphine. Due to this, it is typically prescribed to patients with an injury, who are experiencing severe pain, or after a patient has undergone surgery. Interpretation. 1 Opiates are the natural or synthetic drugs that have a morphine-like pharmacological action. 2 Heroin (diacetylmorphine) is a synthetic opiate made from morphine and is rarely detectable in body fluids. 3 Ingestion of bakery products containing poppy seeds can also cause morphine to be excreted in urine. If excessively large amounts are consumed, this can result in urine morphine concentrations up to 2000 ng/mL for a period of 6 to 12 hours after ingestion. Due to first-pass metabolism, no pharmacologic effect is experienced from poppy seed ingestion. Till date, it is used widely along with morphine to sedate a person and dull severe pain. Opium is also one of the most abused substances in the world today. What are Opiates? Opiates are a class of drugs which are derived from opium. The principle alkaloid of this class of drugs is morphine, which is also one the most widely used painkillers as well as most abused drug. Even in the times of ancient Sumerians, the chemical properties of opium and its effects on the brain were known and studied. A: Morphine generally is detectable in blood for up to 12 hours after use, in saliva for up to four days, in urine for up to three or four days and in hair follicles for up to 90 days, according to About Health. A variety of factors influence the detection time. Continue Reading synthetic, and synthetic, and notes that standard immunoassays can detect only natural opioids. The third table lists five common classes of drugs and information related to their detection in a urine drug test (i.e., primary metabolites, typical detection cut-off, potential sources of false positives, The most commonly used opiates are heroin, hydrocodone, morphine, and codeine. Heroin is a particularly fast-acting drug with a very short half-life. A saliva test will only be able to detect heroin for the first 5 hours after the last dose, and blood tests work for an average of 6 hours. Morphine is the most abundant opiate derived from the opium plant. With hundreds of brand names, morphine is an analgesic drug that acts directly on the central nervous system. It is a schedule II (or III, depending on formulation) narcotic often used before and after surgical procedures to alleviate severe pain. How long does morphine stay in ur body for urine test from the last time u use n can u cover up a urine test so even though it may be positive can u do something to make it negative. mw 7:11 pm April 28th, 2016 Hydromorphone, a schedule II narcotic, is used for the relief of moderate to severe, chronic pain due to surgery, cancer, trauma/injury and burns. It is approximately eight times more potent on a per milligram basis than morphine. Query: how long to detect morphine",
"output": [
"Morphine generally is detectable in blood for up to 12 hours after use, in saliva for up to four days, in urine for up to three or four days and in hair follicles for up to 90 days."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-04c8daafdc4244a1bc2ea25387da55d1",
"input": "The chemistry of calcium is that of a typical heavy alkaline earth metal. For example, calcium spontaneously reacts with water more quickly than magnesium and less quickly than strontium to produce calcium hydroxide and hydrogen gas. At 3%, calcium is the fifth most abundant element in the Earth's crust, and the third most abundant metal behind aluminium and iron. It is also the fourth most abundant element in the lunar highlands. Calcium is a chemical element with symbol Ca and atomic number 20. An alkaline earth metal, calcium is a reactive pale yellow metal that forms a dark oxide-nitride layer when exposed to air. Its physical and chemical properties are most similar to its heavier homologues strontium and barium. It is the fifth most abundant element in Earth's crust and the third most abundant metal, after iron and aluminium. The most common calcium compound on Earth is calcium carbonate, found in limestone and the Calcium has four basic functions in the soil which help to create better soil structure and healthy plants. Calcium is an alkaline metal of Group II A on the periodic chart and is the fifth most abundant element in the earth's crust while being widely distributed in nature. The electronic structure of the calcium cation makes it a unique element that is ideally suited to assist in plant growth. Calcium is the fifth most abundant element in the human body and the most abundant metal. Calcium ions play a vital role in the physiology and biochemistry of organisms and the cell as electrolytes. Calcium (Ca), chemical element, one of the alkaline-earth metals of Group 2 (IIa) of the periodic table. It is the most abundant metallic element in the human body and the fifth most abundant element in Earth’s crust. More recent papers have confirmed this observation, demonstrating that seawater Ca 2+ concentration is not constant, and that the ocean is never in a steady state with respect to calcium input and output. This has important climatological implications, as the marine calcium cycle is closely tied to the carbon cycle. Calcium is the fifth most abundant chemical element in Earth’s crust. It also makes up 2 percent of the human body. In the body calcium helps form bones and teeth and keeps them healthy. It is also present in the blood and in nerve cells. Scientists use symbols to stand for the chemical elements. by Jim Halbeisen. Calcium is an alkaline metal of Group II A on the periodic chart and is the fifth most abundant element in the earth's crust while being widely distributed in nature. The electronic structure of the calcium cation makes it a unique element that is ideally suited to assist in plant growth. Occurrence, properties, and uses. 1 Calcium does not occur naturally in the free state, but compounds of the element are widely distributed. One calcium compound, lime (calcium oxide, CaO) was extensively used by the ancients. Query: how important is calcium on earth",
"output": [
"An alkaline earth metal, calcium is a reactive pale yellow metal that forms a dark oxide-nitride layer when exposed to air."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-34829bdcb8be4386b2e9cb0eb8abb1e5",
"input": "Quick Answer. Lettuce is typically digested within 24 to 72 hours. Only bulkier foods, like nuts and celery, digest at somewhat slower rates in the stomach, but pass through the digestive system more easily after being digested by the stomach. How long does it take for the human body to digest food? A: It takes an average of 40 hours for the adult human body to digest food. Generally, it takes women longer to digest a meal than men. A woman takes about 47... Full Answer > Your body uses mechanical and chemical means to digest food and it varies depending on the individual according to Michael Picco, M.D With Mayo Clinic gastroenterologist. The digestion process takes between 24 and 72 hours, six to eight hours to pass through your stomach and small intestine. Then the food enters your large intestine (colon) for further digestion and absorption of water. Elimination of undigested food residue usually begins after 24 hours. Think of a highway, if the slowest cars are in front they'll hold up the faster cars behind them, causing a traffic jam. The same goes for your food. Eat those fastest to digest first and save the tougher to digest foods for the second half of your meal. Here are the time sequences for different food groups: Water & Juices: 20-30 minutes. DIGESTION TIME OF VARIOUS FOODS: (The time spent in the stomach before emptying). Water: when stomach is empty, leaves immediately and goes into intestines. Juices: Fruit vegetables, vegetable broth - 15 to 20 minutes. Semi-liquid: Blended salad, vegetables or fruits) - 20 to 30 min. Lettuce is typically digested within 24 to 72 hours. Only bulkier foods, like nuts and celery, digest at somewhat slower rates in the stomach, but pass through the digestive system more easily after... Lettuce is typically digested within 24 to 72 hours. Here are the time sequences for different food groups: 1 Water & Juices: 20-30 minutes. 2 Fruits, Smoothies, Soups: 30-45 minutes. 3 Vegetables: 30-45 minutes. 4 Beans, Grains, Starches: 2-3 hours. 5 Meat, Fish, Poultry: 3 or more hours. 6 Drink warm or hot liquids with your meal. A plate of pasta salad on a wooden table. Photo Credit: rez-art/iStock/Getty Images How long a particular food takes to digest depends primarily on its macronutrient makeup. Of the three macronutrients, carbohydrates digest the quickest, while fats are the slowest to digest. Pasta is primarily made up of carbohydrate with some protein and a trace amount of fat. Another component of judging the digestion speed of your pasta meal is what the pasta is made of. Other melons - Cantaloupe, Cranshaw, Honeydew, etc. - 30 min. Oranges, grapefruit, grapes - 30 min. Apples, pears, peaches, cherries, etc. - digest in 40 min. Vegetables: Raw tossed salad vegetables - tomato, lettuces, cucumber, celery, red or green pepper, other succulent vegetables - 30 to 40 min. digestion. The stomach digests all foods, even bulky ones like nuts and celery, in no more than three hours, Healthy bowels do not differentiate between types of food; they digest everything - steak, bacon, salads, fruits, dairy - together at the exact same rate once they pass into the intestines. Query: how long to digest salad",
"output": [
"Semi-liquid: Blended salad take 20 to 30 min to digest and Raw tossed salad vegetables will take 30 to 40 min."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-49e8621be509469a8e680210757704da",
"input": "Precipitation occurs when cloud droplets combine and grow large enough to fall to the earth the rate of evaporation as a drop falls to the earth also can affect its size. from: sadia aisa. 1 What is the arclength of ... Answer. 2 How do you express ... Answer. 3 The length of the shortest path in space between ... Answer. 4 Hi,can you explain and solve questions about flow ... Answer. 5 How do you graph f(x)=x−4−4x−16 using ... Answer. 6 Describe the process by which chlorofluorbons ... Answer. 7 What was Shakespeare's purpose for writing, The ... Just asked! See more. 1 How much energy is required to raise the 2 ... Is f(x)=3x3+3x2+5x+2x−2 increasing or 3 ... What is the factor that changes because of 4 ... Determine as suitable size for a tie rod (item ... Transcript: Transcript - Why does it rain? Frontal rain. Frontal rain occurs when two air masses meet. When a warm air mass meets a cold air mass, they don't mix as they have different densities (a bit like oil and water). Instead, the warm less dense air is pushed up over the cold dense air creating the 'front'. Convective rain, or showery precipitation, occurs from convective clouds (e.g., cumulonimbus or cumulus congestus). It falls as showers with rapidly changing intensity. Convective precipitation falls over a certain area for a relatively short time, as convective clouds have limited horizontal extent. Describe how does precipitation occur and what determines the type of precipitation that falls to Earth? Precipitation occurs due to the immense collection of water vapor in the form of clouds. When the water vapor in these clouds gets too heavy, it falls. Rainfall intensity is classified according to the rate of precipitation: 1 Light rain — when the precipitation rate is < 2.5 mm (0.098 in) per hour. 2 Moderate rain — when the precipitation rate is between 2.5 mm (0.098 in) - 7.6 mm (0.30 in) or 10 mm (0.39 in) per hour. Rain & Floods How does rain form? Water droplets form from warm air. As the warm air rises in the sky it cools. Water vapor (invisible water in the air) always exists in our air. Warm air holds quite a bit of water. For example, in the summer it is usually very humid. When enough of these droplets collect together, we see them as clouds. Most of the condensed water in clouds does not fall as precipitation because their fall speed is not large enough to overcome updrafts which support the clouds. For precipitation to happen, first tiny water droplets must condense on even tinier dust, salt, or smoke particles, which act as a nucleus. Precipitation - Measurement. 1 The standard way of measuring rainfall or snowfall is the standard rain gauge, which can be found in 100 mm (4 in) plastic and 200 mm (8 in) metal varieties. [74] 2 Other types of gauges include the popular wedge gauge (the cheapest rain gauge and most fragile), the tipping bucket rain gauge, and the weighing rain gauge. Query: how does precipitation occurs",
"output": [
"Precipitation occurs when cloud droplets combine and grow large enough to fall to the earth the rate of evaporation as a drop falls to the earth also can affect its size."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-3b2531e0762441809c137e60d1c65fc6",
"input": "Cut cabbage into four wedges. Place each wedge on a piece of doubled heavy-duty aluminum foil. Spread cut sides with butter. Mix spices together in a small container and sprinkle all of the mixture equally over each wedge. Wrap bacon around each wedge. Fold foil around cabbage, sealing each wedge tightly. Grill cabbage, covered, over medium heat for 40 minutes or until the cabbage is tender, turning twice. Submit a Correction How to Boil Cabbage. In a saucepan, bring a small amount of water to boiling. Add cabbage. Cook uncovered for 2 minutes. This allows some of the strong-smelling hydrogen sulfite gas that is emitted during cooking to dissipate. Cover the saucepan and continue to cook until crisp-tender (plan on 6 to 8 minutes for wedges and 3 to 5 minutes for chopped). “Don't be surprised if even your kids like this grilled treat. It's easy to cook this alongside steaks or burgers on the grill, as long as you start the cabbage wedges first.” How to Saute Cabbage. Chopped cabbage is recommended for this method. For 6 cups chopped cabbage, in a large skillet heat 2 to 3 tablespoons cooking oil over medium-high heat. Add the chopped cabbage. Reduce heat to medium. Cook and stir cabbage for 4 to 6 minutes or until cabbage is crisp-tender. How to Cook Cabbage in the Microwave Place cabbage in a microwave-safe bowl along with 2 tablespoons water. One medium head (2-1/2 pounds) of green cabbage yields 9 cups shredded raw and 7 cups cooked. The top portion of the cabbage head is more tender and shreds easier than the bottom. If it is practical, cut the head horizontal and use the top, raw in salads and slaw and use the bottom half in cooked recipes. Add two handfuls of cabbage stirring for about 30 seconds, continue adding cabbage and stirring at 30 second intervals until all of the cabbage is in the pot. Add water or chicken stock, cover immediately and continue cooking for 10 minutes. Dont be surprised if even your kids like this grilled treat. Its easy to cook this alongside steaks or burgers on the grill, as long as you start the cabbage wedges first. Heat pan over medium high heat for a few seconds until hot. Add oil to hot pan, immediately add onions and bell peppers and stir for about one minute. Add shredded dark green cabbage, stir for another 30 seconds. Add crushed red pepper and garlic, continue to cook and stir for 15 seconds. Recipes. 1 1 head green cabbage (about 2 1/2 lbs), shredded. 2 1 medium onion, chopped or 4 green onions chopped with green tops. 3 1 medium bell pepper, cut into 1/2 inch squares. 4 1 teaspoon crushed red pepper flakes (optional) 5 2 cloves garlic, chopped. 6 1/4 cup olive oil or peanut oil. 7 1 cup water or chicken stock. 8 salt and pepper to taste. Ultraversatile cabbage can be boiled, steamed, sauteed, or cooked in the microwave oven. It makes a nutritious side dish or meatless entree. Learn how to core and cut cabbage, plus four ways to cook it. Query: how long does it take to cook out the gas qualities of cabbage?",
"output": [
"It takes two minutes to cook out the gas qualities of cabbage."
]
},
{
"id": "task870-4fff298b7c4b486b8467afc6d76ccb66",
"input": "Super giant slalom, or super-G, is a racing discipline of alpine skiing. Along with the faster downhill, it is regarded as a speed event, in contrast to the technical events giant slalom and slalom. The vertical drop for a Super-G course must be between 350–650 m (1,150–2,130 ft) for men, 350–600 m (1,150–1,970 ft) for women, and 250–450 m (820–1,480 ft) for children. In the Olympic Winter Games, FIS World Ski Championships, and FIS World Cups, minimums are raised to 400 m (1,300 ft) for both men and women. The men's super-G race at the world championships was postponed to Thursday because of too much snow on the course. That means a powder day for Miller. For Ted Ligety and the rest of the American team, too. U.S. men's head coach Sasha Rearick thought about taking the squad over to nearby Vail, Colorado, for some training, but had a change of heart. And the next and the next — it's a long two weeks of racing. To make room on the docket for the super-G competition, a men's downhill training session scheduled for Thursday was scrubbed and the women's training run was moved to later in the afternoon. Just trying to make the best of a snowy situation. The men’s Super-G final will take place on Sunday morning, with American Bode Miller looking to break out of his slump and find a way on to the medal podium at the 2014 Winter Olympics in Sochi. The race will begin bright and early at 1 a.m. ET, with live coverage of the event will be available on NBC Olympics Live Extra. Richard Sawyer, right, looks over the finish line for the men's super-G race at the alpine skiing world championships, Wednesday, Feb. 4, 2015, in Beaver Creek, Colo. The was canceled because of too much snow. The men's Super-G final will take place on Sunday morning, with American Bode Miller looking to break out of his slump and find a way on to the medal podiu... Olympics Olympics Home Much like downhill, the other of the two speed events in alpine skiing, a super-G course consists of widely set gates that racers must pass through. The course is set so that skiers must turn more than in downhill, though the speeds are still much higher than in giant slalom (hence the name). Ligety is the defending in the super-G champion after winning in Austria two years ago. He won three gold medals at those championships. He's a big fan of this course, too. How can you tune in to Sunday’s men’s Super-G finals? Here is all of the information you will need to know: Date: Sunday, Feb. 16 Start Time: 1 a.m. ET TV Info: Full TV Schedule Live Stream: NBC Olympics Live Extra. Participants: Query: how long is the men's super g?",
"output": [
"The men's Super-G course must be between 350m to 650m that is 1,150ft to 2,130 ft long."
]
}
],
"Instance License": [
"Dedicated Terms and Conditions (https://microsoft.github.io/msmarco/)"
]
}